Brocade Communications Systems Access Point Ip250 Users Manual Network Advisor IP User Manual, 12.2.0

IP250 to the manual 972b4d51-a3f6-4a45-9b70-f76a6b5105b7

2015-02-02

: Brocade-Communications-Systems Brocade-Communications-Systems-Access-Point-Ip250-Users-Manual-485200 brocade-communications-systems-access-point-ip250-users-manual-485200 brocade-communications-systems pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 1753

DownloadBrocade-Communications-Systems Brocade-Communications-Systems-Access-Point-Ip250-Users-Manual- Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual, 12.2.0 Brocade-communications-systems-access-point-ip250-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
53-1003056-01
14 February 2014

Brocade Network Advisor
IP User Manual
Supporting Network Advisor 12.2.0

®

© 2014, Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Brocade, the B-wing symbol, Brocade Assurance, ADX, AnyIO, DCX, Fabric OS, FastIron, HyperEdge, ICX, MLX, MyBrocade, NetIron,
OpenScript, VCS, VDX, and Vyatta are registered trademarks, and The Effortless Network and the On-Demand Data Center are
trademarks of Brocade Communications Systems, Inc., in the United States and in other countries. Other brands and product
names mentioned may be trademarks of others.
Notice: This document is for informational purposes only and does not set forth any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning
any equipment, equipment feature, or service offered or to be offered by Brocade. Brocade reserves the right to make changes to
this document at any time, without notice, and assumes no responsibility for its use. This informational document describes
features that may not be currently available. Contact a Brocade sales office for information on feature and product availability.
Export of technical data contained in this document may require an export license from the United States government.
The authors and Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. assume no liability or responsibility to any person or entity with respect
to the accuracy of this document or any loss, cost, liability, or damages arising from the information contained herein or the
computer programs that accompany it.
The product described by this document may contain open source software covered by the GNU General Public License or other
open source license agreements. To find out which open source software is included in Brocade products, view the licensing
terms applicable to the open source software, and obtain a copy of the programming source code, please visit http://
www.brocade.com/support/oscd.

Brocade Communications Systems, Incorporated
Corporate and Latin American Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems, Inc.
130 Holger Way
San Jose, CA 95134
Tel: 1-408-333-8000
Fax: 1-408-333-8101
E-mail: info@brocade.com

Asia-Pacific Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems China HK, Ltd.
No. 1 Guanghua Road
Chao Yang District
Units 2718 and 2818
Beijing 100020, China
Tel: +8610 6588 8888
Fax: +8610 6588 9999
E-mail: china-info@brocade.com

European Headquarters
Brocade Communications Switzerland Sàrl
Centre Swissair
Tour B - 4ème étage
29, Route de l'Aéroport
Case Postale 105
CH-1215 Genève 15
Switzerland
Tel: +41 22 799 5640
Fax: +41 22 799 5641
E-mail: emea-info@brocade.com

Asia-Pacific Headquarters
Brocade Communications Systems Co., Ltd. (Shenzhen WFOE)
Citic Plaza
No. 233 Tian He Road North
Unit 1308 – 13th Floor
Guangzhou, China
Tel: +8620 3891 2000
Fax: +8620 3891 2111
E-mail: china-info@brocade.com

Document History
Title

Publication number

Summary of changes

Date

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002045-01

New document

November 2010

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002168-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 11.1.

May 2011

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002356-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 11.2.

September 2011

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002531-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 11.2.1.

March 2012

Title

Summary of changes

Date

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002569-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 11.3.0.

August 2012

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002695-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 12.0.0.

December 2012

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1002947-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 12.1.0.

August 2012

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual 53-1003056-01

Updated for Network
Advisor 12.2.0.

February 2014

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Publication number

iii

iv

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Contents

Contents
About This Document
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xliii
How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xliii
Supported hardware and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
What’s new in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . li
Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lii
Text formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lii
Notes, cautions, and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lii
Key terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .lii
Notice to the reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lii
Additional information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liii
Brocade resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liii
Other industry resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liii
Getting technical help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liv
Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liv

Chapter 1

Getting Started
User interface components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Management server and client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Logging into a server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Launching a remote client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Clearing previous versions of the remote client . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Launching the Configuration Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Viewing active sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disconnecting users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Viewing server properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Viewing port status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Server and client ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Accessibility features for the Management application . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Look and feel customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PostgreSQL database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting to the database using pgAdmin III . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting to the database using the ODBC client (Windows
systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

v

Connecting to the database using the ODBC client
(Linux systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Changing the database user password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Supported open source software products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Chapter 2

Patches
Installing a patch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Uninstalling a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 3

Discovery
IP discovery overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Discovery of IPv6 addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
VDX/VCS discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Network OS discovery IP address format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VCS in-band management interface discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Standalone discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
VCS fabric discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
VCS fabric rediscovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Seed switch failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
VCS fabric split and merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Network OS 2.0 device limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Logical chassis cluster mode discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Administratively removing a node from a logical chassis cluster42
How the Management application handles a cluster
mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
HyperEdge stack discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Configuring IP profile discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Configuring IP simple discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IP SNMP credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adding SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adding SNMPv3 credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Editing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Editing SNMPv3 credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Reordering SNMP credentials in the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting SNMP credentials from the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Default IP user credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Adding user credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Editing login prompt user credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Editing enable prompt user credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Editing enable super user credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Reordering user credentials in the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Deleting user credentials from the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IP Object identifier filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Including product types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Excluding product types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

vi

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Deleting product types from the list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Defining global setting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring event-based collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
IP discovery profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Configuring a discovery profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Duplicating a discovery profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring address ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Editing address ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Scheduling discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Suspending a discovery schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing a discovery schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Configuring advanced discovery profile preferences . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting a discovery profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Creating a discovery address file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Starting discovery manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Starting discovery automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Stopping discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Viewing discovery status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Viewing discovery reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
E-mailing discovery reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Exporting discovery reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Viewing the discovery log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Individual IP device discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Adding an IP device to discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Editing IP device discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Deleting IP devices from discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Host discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Discovering Hosts by Network address or host name . . . . . . . 93
Importing Hosts from a CSV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Importing Hosts from a Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Importing Hosts from a VM manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Editing Host adapter credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Removing a host from active discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Rediscovering a previously discovered fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Deleting a host adapter from discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Viewing the host discovery state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Troubleshooting host discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
VM Manager discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
VM Manager discovery requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Discovering a VM manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Editing a VM manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Excluding a host from VM manager discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Including a host in VM manager discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Removing a VM manager from active discovery . . . . . . . . . . .106
Rediscovering a previously discovered VM manager . . . . . . .106
Deleting a VM manager from discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Viewing the VM manager discovery state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Troubleshooting VM manager discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
IP Rediscovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

vii

Rediscovering IP devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rediscovering IP devices from the Product List. . . . . . . . . . . .109
Rediscovering a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Enabling password validation on rediscovery . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Chapter 4

Management Groups
Management groups overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Displaying Network Object view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Product group overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Static product groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Dynamic product groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Viewing product group properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Deleting a product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Port Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Creating a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Editing a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Duplicating a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Viewing port group properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Deleting a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Chapter 5

Application Configuration
Configurable preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Server Data backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
What is backed up? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Management server backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Configuring backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Enabling backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Disabling backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Viewing the backup status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Changing the backup interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Starting immediate backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Reviewing backup events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Server Data restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Restoring data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Restoring data to a new server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
SAN data collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Product communication protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Event storage settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Configuring event storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Storing historical events purged from repository. . . . . . . . . . .140
Flyover settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Configuring flyovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Turning flyovers on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Viewing flyovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Name settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Fixing duplicate names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Viewing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

viii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding a name to an existing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Adding a name to a new device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Applying a name to a detached WWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Removing a name from a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Editing names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Exporting names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Importing Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Searching for a device by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Searching for a device by WWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Miscellaneous security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Configuring the server name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Configuring login security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Configuring the login banner display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Disabling the login banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Syslog Registration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Registering a server as a Syslog recipient automatically . . . .151
Configuring the Syslog listing port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
SNMP Trap Registration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Registering a server as a SNMP trap recipient automatically 152
Configuring the SNMP trap listing port number . . . . . . . . . . .153
SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Configuring SNMP v1 and v2c credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Configuring SNMP v3 credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Client/Server IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
IP preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Memory allocation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Product communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Server port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Support mode settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
FIPS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

Chapter 6

User Account Management
Users overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Viewing configured users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
User accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Creating a new user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Editing a user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Copying a user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Copying and pasting user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account188
Removing roles and areas of responsibility from a
user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Disabling a user account. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Enabling a user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Deleting a user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

ix

Unlocking a user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Creating a new role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Editing a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Copying a role. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Deleting a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Adding privileges to a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Removing privileges from a role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Areas of responsibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Creating an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Editing an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Copying an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Deleting an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Assigning products to an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Removing products from an AOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Password policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Configuring a password policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Viewing password policy violators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Authentication Server Groups on the Management server . . . . . .201
Assigning roles and AORs to an AD group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Removing roles and AORs from an AD group . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Loading an AD group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Deleting an AD group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Creating an AD user account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Assigning an AD user to an AD group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Defining user accounts on the external LDAP server . . . . . . .204
User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Viewing your user profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Editing your user profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Changing your password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Viewing your password policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Resetting optional messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Configuring e-mail notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Configuring CLI credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Configuring the CLI credential policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

Chapter 7

Dashboard Management
Dashboard overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Dashboard toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Dashboard messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Dashboards expand navigation bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
General dashboard functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Accessing a dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Filtering the dashboards list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Creating a user-defined dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Deleting a user-defined dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting the dashboard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Customizing the dashboard widgets and monitors . . . . . . . . . 217
Exporting the dashboard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

x

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Printing the dashboard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Attaching and detaching the Dashboard tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Setting the network scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Creating a customized network scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Editing a user-defined network scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Deleting a user-defined network scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Setting the data display time frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Default dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Product Status and Traffic dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
IP Port Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Status widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Access Point Status widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Events widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Host Adapter Inventory widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
IP Inventory widget. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
IP Status widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Viewing additional IP product data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Status widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Fabric Watch widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Out of Range Violations widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Port Health Violations widget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Displaying monitors on the Performance Dashboard . . . . . . .238
Top Port Alignment Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
Top Port C3 Discards monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Top Port CRC Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Top Port Discards monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Top Port Encode Error Out monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Top Port Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Top Port Overflow Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Top Port Receive EOF monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Top Port Runtime Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Top Port Sync Losses monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Top Port Too Long Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Top Port Traffic monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Top Port Underflow Errors monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Top Port Utilization Percentage monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Top Product CPU Utilization monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Top Product Memory Utilization monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Top Product Response Time monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Top Product Temperature monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Top Products with Unused Ports monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Editing a preconfigured performance monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . .263
User-defined performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Monitor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Top or bottom product performance monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Top or bottom port performance monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xi

Distribution performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Time series performance monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Top sFlows performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Configuring a user-defined product performance monitor . . .270
Adding targets to a user-defined performance monitor . . . . .272
Configuring a user-defined port performance monitor . . . . . .273
Configuring a user-defined sFlow performance monitor. . . . .275
Viewing product distribution data details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Viewing port distribution data details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Configuring a monitor from a performance graph. . . . . . . . . .278

Chapter 8

View Management
IP tab overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
IP main toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Product List toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Host Product List toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Topology Map toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Host topology map toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
IP Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Topology Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Master Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Minimap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
Icon legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
IP product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Host product icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
IP group icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
IP port icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
IP product status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Event icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Customizing the main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Zooming in and out of the Connectivity Map . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Exporting the topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Customizing application tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Product List customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Adding a property label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Editing a property label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Deleting a property label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Searching for a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Restricting a search by node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Searching for an exact match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Clearing search results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Address Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Finding IP addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Finding MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
IP topology view manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Displaying topology views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

xii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network Objects view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Network Object view functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Filtering devices in the Network Objects Product List . . . . . . .308
Clearing the Network Objects Product List filter . . . . . . . . . . .308
IP Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
L2 Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Ethernet Fabrics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
VLAN Topology view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
STP/RSTP topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Host Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
IP topology map components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Topology map elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Viewing flyovers on the topology map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Topology map layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Selecting a topology map layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Creating a customized layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Creating customized topology links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Customizing the Topology Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Adding a background image to a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Deleting a background image from the library . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Exporting the topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Printing a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Port actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Enabling port actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Disabling port actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Displaying port properties for an attached device. . . . . . . . . .328
Accessing performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329

Chapter 9

MRP Topology
MRP Topology overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Viewing a MRP Topology map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Viewing a MRP ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Configuring the application to show a dashed line. . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Selecting a topology map layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Creating a customized layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Customizing the MRP Topology map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Refreshing MRP Topology data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Viewing MRP properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340

Chapter 10

Call Home
Call Home overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Viewing Call Home configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xiii

Showing a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Hiding a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Editing a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Editing the IBM Call Home center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Editing an e-mail Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Editing the EMC Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Editing the HP LAN Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Enabling a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Enabling supportSave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Testing the Call Home center connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Disabling a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Viewing Call Home status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Assigning a device to the Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Removing a device from a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Removing all devices and filters from a Call Home center. . . . . . .359
Defining an event filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Assigning an event filter to a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Assigning an event filter to a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Overwriting an assigned event filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Removing all event filter from a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Removing an event filter from a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Removing an event filter from the Call Home Event Filters list . . .363
Searching for an assigned event filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363

Chapter 11

Third-party tools
About third-party tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Starting third-party tools from the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Launching a Telnet session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Launching an Telnet session from the IP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Launching an Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Launching HCM Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Adding a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Entering the server IP address of a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Adding an option to the Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Changing an option on the Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Removing an option from the Tools menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Adding an option to a device’s shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Changing an option on a device’s shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Removing an option from a device’s shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . .373

xiv

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter 12

Server Management Console
Server Management Console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Launching the SMC on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Launching the SMC on Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Services tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Monitoring and managing Management application services 376
Refreshing the server status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Stopping all services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Stopping the CIMOM services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Starting all services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Restarting all services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Changing the database password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Ports tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Viewing server port numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
AAA Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Configuring Radius server authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Configuring LDAP server authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Configuring TACACS+ server authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Configuring Common Access Card authentication . . . . . . . . .387
Configuring switch authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Configuring Windows authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Configuring local database authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Displaying the client authentication audit trail . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Restore tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Restoring the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Technical Support Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Capturing technical support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
HCM Upgrade tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Upgrading HCM on the Management server . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
SMI Agent Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Launching the SMIA configuration tool on Windows . . . . . . . .395
Launching the SMIA configuration tool on Unix . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Launching a remote SMIA configuration tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Service Location Protocol (SLP) support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
Home tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Authentication tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
CIMOM tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Certificate Management tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Summary tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409

Chapter 13

Wireless Management
Wireless management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Wireless device discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Wireless devices on the dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Port groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xv

View management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Wireless device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Browser and system requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Launching the Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Launching a Telnet session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Configuration repository and backup management . . . . . . . . . . . .418
CLI configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Cluster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
VLAN management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Performance management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Policy Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Fault management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
AP Products report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422

Chapter 14

VCS Management
VCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
VCS mode types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Ethernet Fabrics view management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Logical chassis cluster operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Logical chassis cluster mode discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Administratively removing a node from a logical chassis cluster428
How the Management application handles a cluster
mode change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Serial firmware update and activation for Network OS devices. . .430
Support for Network OS VDX 2740 embedded switch . . . . . . . . . .431
Network OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
VCS product groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Static product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Dynamic product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Port profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
AMPP characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Life of a port profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
AMPP events and behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Port profile configuration using the management application435
Assigning MAC addresses to a port profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Managing offline MAC addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Comparing port profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Deploying port profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms. . . . . . . . .441
FRU monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
System thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Alert notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Resource monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

xvi

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SFP parameter monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Security monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Port statistics monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Interface error types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Ethernet fabric traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Tracing Ethernet fabric routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Exporting diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

Chapter 15

Host Management
Host management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Brocade adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Host Bus Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Converged Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Fabric Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
AnyIOTM technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
HCM software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
HCM features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Host adapter discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
VM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Adding a VM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Editing a VM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Deleting a VM Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
HCM and Management application support on ESXi systems. . . .457
ESXi CIM listener ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Adapter software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Driver repository. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Boot image repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Bulk port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Configuring host adapter ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Adapter port WWN virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Configuring FAWWNs on switch ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
FAWWNs on attached AG ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Role-based access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Host adapter management privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Host adapter administrator privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Host performance management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Host security authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Configuring security authentication using the Management application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
supportSave on adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Host fault management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Adapter events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Filtering event notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Syslog forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Backup support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xvii

Configuring backup to a hard drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Enabling backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Disabling backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

Chapter 16

Fibre Channel over Ethernet
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
FCoE overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
DCBX protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Enhanced Ethernet features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Enhanced Transmission Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Priority-based flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Ethernet jumbo frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
FCoE protocols supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Ethernet link layer protocols supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
FCoE protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
FCoE licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Saving running configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Copying switch configurations to selected switches . . . . . . . .484
DCB configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Switch policies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
DCB map and Traffic Class map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
LLDP profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
802.1x policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
DCB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Minimum DCB configuration for FCoE traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Adding a LAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Editing a DCB switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Editing a DCB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Editing a LAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Enabling a DCB port or LAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Deleting a LAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
QoS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Priority-based flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Creating a DCB map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Editing a DCB map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Deleting a DCB map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Assigning a DCB map to a port or link aggregation group . . .505
Creating a Traffic Class map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Editing a Traffic Class map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Deleting a Traffic Class map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Assigning a Traffic Class map to a port or link
aggregation group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
FCoE provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Changing the VLAN ID on the default FCoE map . . . . . . . . . . .508
Enabling or disabling the FCoE map on the port . . . . . . . . . . .509
VLAN classifier configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Adding a VLAN classifier rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

xviii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a VLAN classifier rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Deleting a VLAN classifier rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Creating a VLAN classifier group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Deleting a VLAN classifier group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
LLDP-DCBX configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Configuring LLDP for FCoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Adding an LLDP profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Editing an LLDP profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Deleting an LLDP profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Assigning an LLDP profile to a port or ports in a LAG . . . . . . . 517
802.1x authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Enabling 802.1x authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Disabling 802.1x authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Setting 802.1x parameters for a port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Switch, port, and LAG deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Deploying DCB product, port, and LAG configurations . . . . . .520
Source to target switch Fabric OS version compatibility for
deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Network OS switches in VCS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Supported VCS platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Viewing switches in VCS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Viewing ports in VCS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Viewing LAGs in VCS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
DCB performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Real-time performance graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Historical performance graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Historical performance report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
FCoE login groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Adding an FCoE login group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Editing an FCoE login group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Deleting one or more FCoE login groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Disabling the FCoE login management feature on a switch . .542
Enabling the FCoE login management feature on a switch . .543
Virtual FCoE port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Viewing virtual FCoE ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Clearing a stale entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544

Chapter 17

Telemetry
Telemetry overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Policy-based routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Viewing existing PBR policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Adding a new policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Adding rules to a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Adding policies from saved configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Editing a policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Editing a rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Deleting a policy or rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Deploying a PBR policy on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xix

Saving a PBR policy deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Scheduling a PBR policy deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
ACL Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Enabling or disabling ACL accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Resetting ACL counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Viewing ACL counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

Chapter 18

Security Management
Security overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Layer 2 access control list management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
IronWare Layer 2 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Fabric OS Layer 2 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Creating a Layer 2 ACL from a saved configuration. . . . . . . . . 576
Deleting a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the application. . . 576
Deleting a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the switch. . . . . . . 576
Network OS Layer 2 ACL configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Layer 3 access control list policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Creating a L3 ACL from a saved configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Creating an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Deleting a L3 ACL configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
Assigning a L3 ACL configuration to an interface . . . . . . . . . .594
Clearing L3 ACL assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Configuring the ACL configuration type and operations . . . . .597
Configuring hit statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Configuring L3 ACL advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602
Network group configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Service configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Service group configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Media Access Control (MAC) filter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Creating a MAC filter configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Creating a MAC filter from a saved configuration . . . . . . . . . .623
Editing a MAC filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Copying a MAC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Deleting a MAC filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Assigning MAC filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Clearing MAC filter assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Adding a MAC filter configuration to an interface . . . . . . . . . .628
Security configuration deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Deploying a security configuration on demand . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Saving a security configuration deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631

xx

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Scheduling a security configuration deployment. . . . . . . . . . .632

Chapter 19

Zoning
Zoning overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Online zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Offline zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Zoning naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Zone database size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Zoning configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Configuring zoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Creating a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Viewing zone properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
Adding members to a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Creating a member in a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Removing a member from a zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Renaming a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .644
Deleting a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Duplicating a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645
Customizing the zone member display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .646
Enabling or disabling the default zone for fabrics . . . . . . . . . .646
Creating a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Editing a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .647
Removing an object from a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .648
Exporting zone aliases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Renaming a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Deleting a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .649
Duplicating a zone alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Creating a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Viewing zone configuration properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Adding zones to a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Removing a zone from a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Activating a zone configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Deactivating a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Renaming a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Deleting a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Duplicating a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Creating an offline zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Deleting an offline zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Refreshing a zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Merging fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
Merging two zone databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Creating a common active zone configuration in two fabrics .659
Saving a zone database to a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Exporting an offline zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Importing an offline zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Rolling back changes to the offline zone database . . . . . . . .661
Zoning administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Comparing zone databases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
Managing zone configuration comparison alerts . . . . . . . . . .663
Setting change limits on zoning activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxi

Clearing the fabric zone database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
Removing all user names from a zone database . . . . . . . . . .665
Finding a member in one or more zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
Finding a zone member in the potential member list . . . . . . .666
Finding zones in a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
Finding a zone configuration member in the zones list . . . . .666
Listing zone members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Listing un-zoned members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Removing an offline device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Replacing zone members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Replacing an offline device by WWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Replacing an offline device by name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669

Chapter 20

Port Fencing
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
About port fencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Viewing port fencing configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
C3 Discard Frames threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Invalid CRCs threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Invalid words threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Link Reset threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
Protocol error threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
State Change threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Adding thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Adding a C3 Discard Frames threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .677
Adding an Invalid CRCs threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .679
Adding an Invalid Words threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
Adding a Link Reset threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
Adding a Protocol Error threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Adding a State Change threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684
Assigning thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Unblocking a port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Avoiding port fencing inheritance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Editing thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Editing a C3 Discard Frames threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Editing an Invalid CRCs threshold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Editing an Invalid Words threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
Editing a Link Reset threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Editing a Protocol Error threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689
Editing a State Change threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
Finding assigned thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Viewing thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691
Viewing all thresholds on a specific Fabric OS device. . . . . . .691
Removing thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Removing thresholds from individual objects . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
Removing thresholds from the thresholds table . . . . . . . . . . .693

Chapter 21

xxii

FICON Environments

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

FICON configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695
Configuring a switch for FICON operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Planning the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
Configuring the switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
Configuring FICON display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to
another device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .705
Copying an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration . . . . . . . . . . .706
Saving an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration to
another device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707
Activating an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .708
Deleting an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708
Changing the Allow/Prohibit Matrix display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Changing window arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Clearing port names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Cascaded FICON fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
Configuring a cascaded FICON fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Cascaded FICON fabric merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
Merging two cascaded FICON fabrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Resolving merge conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Port groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Creating a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
Viewing port groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Editing a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Deleting a port group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
Swapping blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720

Chapter 22

IP Element Manager
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Element Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Element Manager CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723
Accessing the IP Element Manager CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
Element Manager interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Accessing the Element Manager interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725
Switch properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
Element Manager toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
Displaying port properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729
Status indicator icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
Table capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733
Performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
Configure dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735
Configuring VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxiii

Resetting port counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735
Enable or Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736
Management Module switchover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736
Changing the standby Management Module to active . . . . .736
Switch Fabric Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737
Port mirroring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738
Configuring port mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .738
Adding a port to port mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Editing a port in port mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739
Deleting a port from port mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .740
sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
Configuring sFlow in Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .740
Web Management interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Accessing the Web Management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .741
Accessing the IP device front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742
Web Management interface troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742

Chapter 23

Configuration Repository and Backup
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Configuration repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Saving the configuration status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Viewing the configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Comparing product configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Restoring a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .750
Searching the configuration repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751
Exporting a configuration to a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .752
Configuration deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
Viewing configuration deviation status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
Change tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .753
Configuration snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .755
Comparing configuration snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756
Generating a configuration snapshot report . . . . . . . . . . . . . .758
Viewing the pre- and post-configuration snapshot . . . . . . . . .759
Saving a configuration snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760
Searching the configuration snaphots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Schedule backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762
Scheduling a configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .762
Disabling a backup schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764

Chapter 24

IP Configuration Wizard
Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765
Payloads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766
Creating a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .767
Duplicating a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

xxiv

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Modifying a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Deploying a payload configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Deleting a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Chapter 25

CLI Configuration Management
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777
CLI configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777
Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
Viewing existing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778
Product configuration templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779
Creating a new product configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779
Changing product credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784
Importing parameter values into a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785
Previewing CLI commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786
CLI command guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787
Copying a product configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787
Editing a product configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .788
Testing a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789
Valid and invalid responses from devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790
Editing the CLI responses properties file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790
Editing the Network OS CLI responses properties file. . . . . . .791
Editing the Motorola Controller CLI responses properties file 792
Configuration command response validation . . . . . . . . . . . . .792
Using a dash character in CLI Configuration manager . . . . . .793
Configuration error checking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793
Deleting a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .793
CLI configuration deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794
Deploying a configuration on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .794
Monitoring configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
Creating a monitoring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .795
Copying a monitoring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
Editing a monitoring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .801
CLI deployment reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
Viewing CLI deployment reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802
CLI configuration scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
Configuring a one-time deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
Configuring an hourly deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803
Configuring a daily deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804
Configuring a weekly deployment schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804
Configuring a monthly deployment schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . .804
Configuring a yearly deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805

Chapter 26

Image Repository for IP Products
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxv

Obtaining software files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807
Products supporting the image import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808
Boot image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808
Viewing the list of boot images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808
Manually importing boot images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .809
Deploying boot images to products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810
Deleting boot images from the Management application. . . .810
Software image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .811
Viewing the list of software images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .811
Manually importing software images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .811
Automatically retrieving software images from products . . . .812
Deploying software images to products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813
Deleting software images from the Management application813
Unified image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
Viewing the list of unified images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
Importing unified images into the Management application .815
Updating unified images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Deploying unified images to products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Deleting unified images from the Management application . 817
Serial firmware update and activation for NOS devices . . . . . . . . .818

Chapter 27

VLAN Management
VLAN Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
Default VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
Super-aggregated VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Private VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Remote Switched Port Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Transparent LAN Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821
Configuration requirements for VLAN Manager . . . . . . . . . . .821
Displaying a list of VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
VLAN management in a VCS environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
VLAN Manager tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
Displaying VLANs in the VLAN view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .823
Displaying VLANs by products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825
Port VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827
Adding or modifying port VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827
Adding or modifying dual mode ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .829
Assigning DCB ports to a VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830
Adding VLAN properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831
Modifying port VLAN properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833
Deleting port VLANs from products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833
Deploying VLAN configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834
Spanning Tree Protocol configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834
Configuring STP or RSTP on a port VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835
Deploying an STP configuration on a port VLAN . . . . . . . . . . .837
Configuring MSTP on a product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838
VLAN routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840
Managing IP addresses on an SVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840

xxvi

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter 28

MPLS Management
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .843
MPLS pre-configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .843
MPLS licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .844
MPLS overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845
Configuring LDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845
LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846
Viewing LSP Admin Group information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .847
Viewing LSP path information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .848
Viewing RSVP LSP information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .849
Viewing saved LSP configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .850
Adding an LSP admin group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .851
Editing an LSP admin group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .852
Duplicating an LSP admin group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .852
Deleting an LSP admin group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .853
Adding an LSP path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .853
Editing an LSP path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .854
Duplicating an LSP path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855
Deleting an LSP path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855
Configuring advanced RSVP LSP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .856
Editing an RSVP LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
Duplicating an RSVP LSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
Deleting an RSVP LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
Editing a saved LSP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864
Duplicating a saved LSP configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864
Deleting a saved LSP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865
Displaying LSP Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865
MPLS Virtual Leased Line (VLL) overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .867
VLL manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869
Viewing VLL instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869
Viewing Saved VLL configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872
Adding or editing a VLL instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .873
Configuring devices using the VLL Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Deploying target actions using the VLL Manager . . . . . . . . . . 876
Deploying VLL properties using the VLL Manager . . . . . . . . . .877
Scheduling deployment using the VLL Manager . . . . . . . . . . .878
Reviewing the VLL Manager summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .879
Reviewing the VLL Manager configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .879
Creating a new VLL instance using duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . .880
Editing a VLL instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .880
Deleting VLL instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .880
Filtering VLL traffic monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .881
Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .882
VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .884
Viewing VPLS instances and peer topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . .884
Viewing Saved VPLS configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887
Adding or editing a VPLS instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .888
Configuring devices using the VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .889

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxvii

Configuring endpoint settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .890
Deploying target actions using VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . . . .891
Deploying VPLS properties using VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . .892
Scheduling deployment using VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . .893
Reviewing the VPLS Manager summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .894
Creating a new VPLS instance from a duplicate . . . . . . . . . . .894
Editing a VPLS instance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .895
Deleting a VPLS instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .895
Filtering for VPLS traffic monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .896
VCID pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
Viewing, creating, and deleting VCID pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .898
Configuring a maintenance association. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .898
Editing a maintenance association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .901
Adding a MEP to a maintenance association. . . . . . . . . . . . . .904
Editing a MEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .906
Viewing the MEPs in a maintenance association . . . . . . . . . .908
Deleting a maintenance association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .909
Checking the connectivity status of remote MEPs . . . . . . . . .910
Sending a loopback message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
Sending a linktrace message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .912
Configuring frame delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .914

Chapter 29

VIP Servers
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
VIP Servers overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
VIP Server functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .917
Viewing the VIP Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Viewing VIP Server information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .919
Enabling or disabling servers or server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921
Enabling servers or server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921
Disabling servers or server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921
Server port statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .921
Deleting a row from the Server Port Statistics list . . . . . . . . .922

Chapter 30

Global Server Load Balancing
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .923
GSLB Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .923
Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .923
Viewing the GSLB Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .924
GSLB policy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .925
Creating a GSLB policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .925
GSLB site management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .931
Adding a site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .931
GSLB zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
Managing zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933

xxviii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding a zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
Adding a host to a zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .935
Editing the list of IP addresses and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .936
Controller configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .937
Creating a new GSLB controller configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .938
Deploying a controller configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .940
Scheduling a deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .941

Chapter 31

SSL Certificates for ServerIron Products
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .943
SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .943
SSL certificate configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .944
Accessing SSL certificates on the Certificate View tab . . . . .944
Accessing SSL certificates on the Product View tab . . . . . . . .946
Generating a certificate signing request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .947
Adding an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .950
Editing an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .951
Duplicating an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .952
Viewing SSL certificate details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .952
Importing certificates and keys from file locations. . . . . . . . . . . . .953
Importing certificates and keys from products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .954
Exporting certificates and keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .955
Deploying certificates and keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .956
Creating key passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .957
Appending SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .959
Chaining SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .959
Deleting SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .961

Chapter 32

Deployment Manager
Introduction to the Deployment Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .963
Editing a deployment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .963
Duplicating a deployment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .964
Deleting a deployment configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .965
Deploying a configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .965
Viewing deployment logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .965
Generating a deployment report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .965
Generating a deployment configuration snapshot report . . . . . . .966
Searching the configuration snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .966

Chapter 33

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance Data

xxix

SAN performance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .969
SAN performance measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .970
SAN performance management requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 971
SAN real-time performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
Generating a real-time performance graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . .976
Filtering real-time performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .977
Exporting real-time performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
Performance statistics counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982
IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982
IP configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982
IP real-time performance monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983
Monitoring real-time performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983
Adding products and ports to real-time performance . . . . . .985
Removing products and ports from real-time performance .985
Adding measures to products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
Removing measures from products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
Adding measures to ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987
Removing measures from ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .988
Adding collectibles to monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .988
The graph and table are populated with the collectible performance
values. The selected collectibles displays beneath the graph.989
Removing collectibles from monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989
Configuring the performance graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .989
Exporting a graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .994
Printing a graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .994
IP historical performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .995
Editing system collectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996
Displaying historical data collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996
Enabling a historical data collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .998
Adding or editing a historical data collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .998
Adding third-party device MIB objects manually . . . . . . . . . 1005
Configuring a MIB walk instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Duplicating a historical data collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005
Deleting a historical data collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006
Adding, editing, or duplicating a user-defined expression . 1006
Deleting an expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008
Viewing Historical Graphs/Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009
Mouse functions for graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1012
MIB data collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1013
Mapping a MIB object to a unit name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
IP Custom performance reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1014
Creating a custom report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
Interpreting the SNMP Monitor report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019
Exporting an SNMP Monitor report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1019
IP sFlow configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Configuring sFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
Creating custom sFlow reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1024
Scheduling custom sFlow reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

xxx

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Suspending a custom sFlow report schedule . . . . . . . . . . . .1037
IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports . . . . . . . . . . . . .1037
Device-level configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
802.1X configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Displaying sFlow monitoring reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
Selecting a report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039
Changing the number of records gathered for sFlow accounting1041
Interpreting an sFlow traffic report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1041
Viewing top MAC talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
Viewing top VLAN talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
Viewing all Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Viewing all IPv4 Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers . . . . . . . . . . 1044
Viewing IPv4 – top TCP talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Viewing IPv4 – top UDP talkers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1047
Viewing IPv4 – top ICMP talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
Viewing IPv4 – Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Viewing IPv6 Top Talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049
Viewing other Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Enabling and viewing TCP reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1051
Viewing BGP paths report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
Viewing VCS fabric Top Talker reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053
Troubleshooting sFlow reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
IP traffic accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
Changing the number of records displayed in a sFlow accounting report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Chapter 34

Frame Monitor
Frame Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1057
Frame types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
Frame Monitoring requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Creating a custom frame monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059
Editing a frame monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1061
Assigning a frame monitor to a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1061
Finding frame monitor assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
Removing a frame monitor from a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1062
Removing a frame monitor from a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063

Chapter 35

Power Center
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Power center overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065
Data monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
Viewing PoE data for products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
Viewing PoE data for ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067
Filtering port details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068
Viewing attached device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
Viewing PoE charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxxi

Refreshing PoE data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
Configuring automatic data refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1075
PoE power on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1075
Powering up PoE-capable ports on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
Powering down PoE-capable ports on demand . . . . . . . . . . .1076
Schedule PoE power deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1077
Scheduling an power up deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077
Scheduling a power down deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082
Updating a power deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Viewing the configured ports for a power deployment schedule1084
Deleting a power deployment schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
PoE thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Adding a PoE product threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086
Adding a PoE port threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088
Viewing PoE thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
Updating a PoE threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1091
Enabling PoE thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Disabling PoE thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092
Deleting PoE thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Viewing PoE performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
Monitoring real time power performance on products . . . . 1093
Monitoring real time power performance on ports . . . . . . . 1096

Chapter 36

Policy Monitor
Policy monitor overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
Fabric policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Switch and router policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1101
Host policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
Management policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Preconfigured policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
Viewing policy monitor status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Viewing existing policy monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1107
Adding a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
Policy monitor scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Editing a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Deleting a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
Configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1116
Viewing configuration rule details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1117
Adding a configuration rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
Duplicating a configuration rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121
Editing a configuration rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122
Exporting a configuration rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Importing a configuration rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Deleting a configuration rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123
Viewing predefined configuration conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . 1124
Adding a configuration condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124

xxxii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Selecting a product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Duplicating a configuration condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126
Editing a user-defined configuration condition . . . . . . . . . . 1127
Predefined conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128
Viewing a predefined configuration block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Adding a configuration block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1131
Duplicating a configuration block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
Editing a user-defined configuration block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1133
Deleting conditions and blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
Predefined blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134
Running a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
Viewing a policy monitor report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136
Exporting a policy monitor report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
Viewing historical reports for all policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
Viewing historical reports for a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139

Chapter 37

Fault Management
Fault management overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1141
Restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Event notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Configuring e-mail notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Defining filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Setting up basic event filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
Setting up advanced event filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
SNMP traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1147
Adding a trap recipient to one or more switches . . . . . . . . . 1148
Removing a trap recipient from one or more switches . . . . 1149
SNMP trap forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Event reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Adding an SNMP v3 credential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
Adding an SNMP v1 or v2c community string . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Importing a new MIB into the Management application. . . 1156
Trap customization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1157
SNMP informs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
Enabling or disabling SNMP informs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160
Syslogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1161
Adding a syslog recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1161
Removing a syslog recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
Syslog forwarding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163
Adding a syslog filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164
Snort message forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Event action definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Creating an event action definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166
Creating a new event action definition by copying an existing
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1179
Modifying an event action definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1179
Deleting an event action definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxxiii

Configuring event actions for Snort messages . . . . . . . . . . 1180
Pseudo events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
Displaying pseudo event definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Creating pseudo event definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
Setting pseudo event policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
Filtering pseudo event traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
Creating a pseudo event definition by copying an existing definition
1186
Editing a pseudo event definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Deleting a pseudo event definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186
Adding a pseudo event on the escalation policy . . . . . . . . . .1187
Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the escalation
policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188
Adding a pseudo event on the resolving policy . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the
resolving policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
Adding a pseudo event on the flapping policy . . . . . . . . . . . .1191
Creating an event action with a pseudo event
on the flapping policy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1191
Event custom reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1193
Defining report settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Defining the report identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195
Filtering a report definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1197
Filtering report events by date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
Creating a new report definition by copying
an existing definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Editing a report definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201
Deleting a report definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Event custom report schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
Adding or editing an event report schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203
Event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Viewing event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Copying part of a log entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
Copying an entire log entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
Exporting the entire log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
E-mailing all event details from the Master Log . . . . . . . . . 1207
E-mailing selected event details from the Master Log . . . . 1207
Displaying event properties from the Master Log . . . . . . . . 1207
Copying part of the Master Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Copying the entire Master Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Exporting the Master Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1209
Filtering events in the Master Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1210

Chapter 38

Packet Capture (Pcap)
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
Configuring packet captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Chapter 39

xxxiv

Technical Support

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Server and client support save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Capturing Server and Client support save data . . . . . . . . . 1215
Capturing Server support save data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1216
Capturing Client support save data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1217
Client support save using a command line interface . . . . . 1218
Device technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219
Scheduling technical support information collection . . . . . 1219
Starting immediate technical support information collection1222
Viewing the technical support repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225
Saving technical support information to another location . 1226
E-mailing technical support information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Copying technical support information to an
external FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227
Deleting technical support files from the repository . . . . . . 1228

Chapter 40

Reports
In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Reports overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Browser requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Viewing IP reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Exporting and saving IP reports to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232
IP report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
IP Wired Products report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1233
Detailed Product Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235
Detailed Cluster Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238
IP Module report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240
IP Port VLANs report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1241
IP Layer 3 VLAN report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1241
IP Subnet report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242
IP Address report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
MAC Address report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243
IP Physical Ports - Realtime report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
IP Stacking Ports - Realtime report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
IP Physical Media - Realtime report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245
IP Deployment reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Viewing a deployment report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246
Reports Template Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1247
Preconfigured reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
User-defined reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Accessing the Report Template Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248
Viewing a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxxv

Importing a report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting a report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Report content and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Products List report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Product Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detailed Cluster Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Traffic Ports report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting data from the report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix A

1250
1250
1250
1251
1252
1253
1255
1257
1259
1260

Application menus
Dashboard main menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
IP main menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
IP shortcut menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Appendix B

Call Home Event Tables

Appendix C

Event Categories
Link incident events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277
Product status events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277
Product audit events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278
Security events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Security events for FC devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
Security events for IP devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279
User action events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
Management server events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
Product events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281
IP Performance monitoring events. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281

Appendix D

User Privileges
About user privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
About Roles and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

Appendix E

Device Properties
Viewing SAN device properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Viewing Fabric properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301
Viewing SAN device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
Viewing Storage properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305
Viewing iSCSI Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1307
Viewing port properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
IP device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1314
Viewing IP device and port properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314
Viewing VCS fabric properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1319

xxxvi

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326
Viewing adapter port properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327
Properties customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a property field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a property field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a property field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a property field directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix F

Regular Expressions

Appendix G

CLI Templates

Appendix H

Troubleshooting

1329
1329
1330
1330
1331

In this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1357
Application Configuration Wizard troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Browser troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1358
Client browser troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Configuration backup and restore troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Element Manager troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1359
Firmware download troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
Launch Client troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362
Master Log and Switch Console troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 1363
Patch troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364
Professional edition login troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Server troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365
Server Management Console troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366
Supportsave troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
Technical support data collection troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . 1368
Wireless troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1368
Zoning troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1369

Appendix I

Database Fields
In this appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1371
Database tables and fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1371
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1601
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1601
AG_CONNECTION_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1601
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
CNA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602
CNA_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1604

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxxvii

CRYPTO_HOST_LUN_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605
CRYPTO_TARGET_ENGINE_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
DASHBOARD_PREFERENCES_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1606
DEPLOYMENT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607
DEPLOYMENT_LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607
DEVICE_CONNECTION_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1608
EE_MONITOR_STATS_5MIN_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
EE_MONITOR_STATS_30MIN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
EE_MONITOR_STATS_2HOUR_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
EE_MONITOR_STATS_1DAY_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609
TE_PORT_STATS_5MIN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1610
TE_PORT_STATS_30MIN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1610
TE_PORT_STATS_2HOUR_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1611
TE_PORT_STATS_1DAY_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1611
SWITCH_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1612
DEVICE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1613
N2F_PORT_MAP_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1615
DEVICE_NODE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1615
DEVICE_PORT_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1616
DEV_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1617
DEV_PORT_MAC_ADDR_MAP_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1618
ISL_CONNECTION_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1618
ISL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1618
ETHERNET_ISL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
EVENT_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620
EVENT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1621
FABRIC_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1623
FCIP_TUNNEL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1624
FCOE_DEVICE_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
FRU_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1625
GIGE_PORT_ECLOUD_LINK_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626
GIGE_PORT_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1627
HBA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1627
HBA_TARGET_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1629
HEALTH_STATUS_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1630
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1631
IFL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
ISL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1632
ISL_TRILL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1633
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP_MEMBER_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1634
ISL_TRUNK_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1635
L2_NEIGHBOR_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1636
MODULE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1637
NPORT_WWN_MAP_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638
PHANTOM_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
PRODUCT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONF_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
PORT_BOTTLENECK_STAT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
PORT_GROUP_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642
ROLE_PRIVILEGE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643

xxxviii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PORT_PROFILE_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1643
PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
PORT_PROFILE_MAC_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
PORT_VLAN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
PROTOCOL_VLAN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
SFLOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
SFLOW_MINUTE_L3_VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC_VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
SCOM_EE_MONITOR_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1646
SENSOR_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1647
SMART_CARD_USAGE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1648
SWITCH_CONFIG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
SWITCH_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1649
SWITCH_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
SWITCH_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652
SWITCH_SNMP_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1654
TIME_SERIES_DATA_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655
TIME_SERIES_DATA_VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656
TRILL_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1658
TRILL_TRUNK_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
USER_ROLE_RESOURCE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1660
VM_ADDRESS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1661
VLAN_INT_CLASSIFIER_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1661
VM_CONNECTIVITY_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
VM_NETWORK_CONNECTIVITY_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
VM_EE_MONITOR_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667
VM_HOST_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
VM_LUN_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668
VM_STATISTICS_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669
VR_CONN_MODULE_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1671
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
VR_CONN_NPIV_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1673
VMM_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1674
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1675
ZONE_DB_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1676
AP_USAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1676
EVENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1676
SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP_VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN_VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
PHYSICAL_DEVICE_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
SLOT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
MANAGED_ELEMENT_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
SNMP_DATA_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1678
SNMP_EXPR_DATA_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
SNMP_DATA_VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679
VM_VNETWORK_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1681
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER_INFO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1682
RESET_VCS_LICENSED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683
TRILL_TRUNK_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1683

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xxxix

WIRELESS_INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1684
WIRED_INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1685
CEE_PORT_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1686

Index

xl

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About This Document

In this chapter
• How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xliii
• Supported hardware and software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
• What’s new in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . li
• Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lii
• Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liii
• Getting technical help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liv
• Document feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liv

How this document is organized
This document is organized to help you find the information that you want as quickly and easily as
possible. This document supports Network Advisor 12.2.0 and later.
The document contains the following components:

•
•
•
•

Chapter 1, “Getting Started,” provides a high-level overview of the user interface.
Chapter 2, “Patches,” provides information about installing patches.
Chapter 3, “Discovery,” describes how to discover IP devices.
Chapter 4, “Management Groups,” describes how to create product and port management
groups.

• Chapter 5, “Application Configuration,” provides Management application configuration
instructions.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Chapter 6, “User Account Management,” provides information on how to manage users.
Chapter 7, “Dashboard Management,”provides details about the Dashboard tab.
Chapter 8, “View Management,” provides view and topology configuration instructions.
Chapter 9, “MRP Topology,” provides details about MRP topology.
Chapter 10, “Call Home,” provides call home configuration instructions.
Chapter 11, “Third-party tools,” provides instructions for adding and launching third-party tools.
Chapter 12, “Server Management Console,” provides information on using the Server
Management Console to stop and start the Management application services, back up the
Management application database, and capture technical support information.

• Chapter 13, “Wireless Management,” provides information about wireless devices.
• Chapter 14, “VCS Management,” provides information on VCS fabrics. This chapter is for
Network OS devices only.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xliii

• Chapter 15, “Host Management,” provides information on how to configure an HBA. This
chapter is for Fabric OS devices only.

• Chapter 16, “Fibre Channel over Ethernet,” provides information on how to configure FCoE.
This chapter is for Fabric OS devices only.

• Chapter 17, “Telemetry,” provides instructions for you to monitor, report, and analyze traffic
information and data on your network.

• Chapter 18, “Security Management,” provides security configuration instructions.
• Chapter 19, “Zoning,” provides zoning configuration instructions.
• Chapter 20, “Port Fencing,” provides information on how to configure port fencing. This
chapter is for Fabric OS devices only.

• Chapter 21, “FICON Environments,” provides information on how to manage FICON. This
chapter is for Fabric OS devices only.

• Chapter 22, “IP Element Manager,” provides instructions for accessing a device by connecting
to its command line interface (CLI) or Web Management interface.

• Chapter 23, “Configuration Repository and Backup,” provides information on saving and
backing up configurations.

• Chapter 24, “IP Configuration Wizard,” provides information on creating and deploying
configuration payloads.

• Chapter 25, “CLI Configuration Management,” provides information on creating configurations
and reports using command line interface commands.

• Chapter 26, “Image Repository for IP Products,” provides information for importing and
deploying boot, monitor, software, and unified images.

• Chapter 27, “VLAN Management,” provides information on how to manage Virtual Local Area
Networks (VLANs).

• Chapter 28, “MPLS Management,” provides information on how to configure Multi-protocol
Label Switching (MPLS).

• Chapter 29, “VIP Servers,” provides information on how to manage virtual IP servers.
• Chapter 30, “Global Server Load Balancing,” provides information on how to configure Global
Server Load Balancing policies.

• Chapter 31, “SSL Certificates for ServerIron Products,” provides information on how to import
and deploy SSL certificates and keys.

• Chapter 32, “Deployment Manager,” provides information about how to view, deploy, and
manage deployment configurations.

• Chapter 33, “Performance Data,” provides information on how to manage performance.
• Chapter 34, “Frame Monitor,” provides information on how to monitor frames. This chapter is
for Fabric OS devices only.

• Chapter 35, “Power Center,” provides information on how to monitor power on Power over
Ethernet (PoE) products.

• Chapter 36, “Policy Monitor,” provides information on how to configure best practice
guidelines.

• Chapter 37, “Fault Management,” provides event management instructions.
• Chapter 38, “Packet Capture (Pcap),” provides information on how to configure switches as
sensors to capture packets.

• Chapter 39, “Technical Support,” provides server, client, and device supportSave instructions.

xliv

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

• Chapter 40, “Reports,” provides instructions for generating reports.
• Appendix A, “Application menus,” provides information about the main and shortcut menus.
• Appendix B, “Call Home Event Tables,” provides supplemental information about call home
event tables.

• Appendix C, “Event Categories,” provides information about events.
• Appendix D, “User Privileges,” provides supplemental information about user privileges and
access levels.

• Appendix E, “Device Properties,” provides reference information related to fabric, product, and
port properties.

• Appendix F, “Regular Expressions,” provides a summary of Unicode regular expression
constructs that you can use in the Management application.

• Appendix G, “CLI Templates,” provides information about preconfigured CLI templates.
• Appendix H, “Troubleshooting,” provides general troubleshooting details.
• Appendix I, “Database Fields,” provides reference information related to databases.

Supported hardware and software
In those instances in which procedures or parts of procedures documented here apply to some
devices but not to others, this guide identifies exactly which devices are supported and which are
not.
Although many different software and hardware configurations are tested and supported by
Brocade Communications Systems, Inc. for Network Advisor 12.2.0, documenting all possible
configurations and scenarios is beyond the scope of this document.

Fabric OS hardware and software support
The following firmware platforms are supported by this release of Network Advisor 12.2.0:

• Fabric OS 5.0 or later in a pure Fabric OS fabric
• Fabric OS 6.0 or later in a mixed fabric
NOTE

Discovery of a Secure Fabric OS fabric in strict mode is not supported.
The hardware platforms in the following table are supported by this release of Network Advisor
12.2.0.

TABLE 1

Fabric OS-supported hardware

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

Brocade 6505 switch

24-port, 16 Gbps Edge switch

Fabric OS v7.0.1 or later

Brocade M6505 embedded switch

24-port, 16 Gbps embedded switch

Fabric OS v7.2.0 or later

Brocade 6510 switch

48-port, 16 Gbps switch

Fabric OS v7.0.0 or later

Brocade 6520 switch

96-port, 16 Gbps switch

Fabric OS v7.1.0 or later

Brocade 6547 embedded switch

48-port, 16 Gbps embedded switch

Fabric OS v7.2.0 or later

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xlv

TABLE 1

Fabric OS-supported hardware (Continued)

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Brocade 415 Host Bus Adapter

4 Gbps 1-port HBA

Brocade 425 Host Bus Adapter

4 Gbps 2-port HBA

Brocade 815 Host Bus Adapter

8 Gbps 1-port HBA

Brocade 825 Host Bus Adapter

8 Gbps 2-port HBA

Brocade 1860 Fabric Adapter

16 Gbps FC HBA mode
10 Gbps CNA mode
10 Gbps NIC mode

Adapter Software 3.0.0.0 or later

Brocade 1867 HBA

16 Gbps Mezzanine HBA

Adapter Software 3.0.3.0 or later

16 Gbps 4-slot Backbone Chassis

Fabric OS v7.0.0 or later

Brocade DCX 8510-8

16 Gbps 8-slot Backbone Chassis

Fabric OS v7.0.0 or later

FC16-32 Blade

16 Gbps 32-port blade

Fabric OS v7.0.0 or later

FC16-48 Blade

16 Gbps 48-port blade

Fabric OS v7.0.0 or later

Brocade DCX 8510-4
1, 2

Firmware level required

IronWare hardware and software support
The following firmware platforms are supported by this release of Network Advisor 12.2.0:

•
•
•
•
•
•

BigIron 2.7.02e (sustaining mode) or later
FastIron 7.2.0 or later
NetIron 5.1.0 or later
ServerIron (JetCore) 11.0 or later
ServerIron ADX 12.2.0 or later
TurboIron 4.2.0 or later

For platform-specific firmware requirements, refer to Table 2.
Table 2 lists the hardware platforms supported by this release of Network Advisor 12.2.0, the
terminology used in the documentation, as well as any specific firmware requirements.

TABLE 2

IronWare-supported hardware

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

BigIron family

Ethernet Chassis

BigIron 2.7.02e or 2.7.01b

BigIron RX-4 (BI-RX-4-AC)

Ethernet Chassis, 4 interface slots

BigIron 2.7.02e or 2.7.01b

BigIron RX-8 (BI-RX-8-AC)

Ethernet Chassis, 8 interface slots

BigIron 2.7.02e or 2.7.01b

BigIron RX-16 (BI-RX-16-AC-A)

Ethernet Chassis, 16 interface slots

BigIron 2.7.02e or 2.7.01b

Brocade 6910 Ethernet Access Switch

Ethernet Access Switch

release 2.0.2.7, loader version 1.0.1.3

FastIron family

Ethernet switch

See individual device.

xlvi

FastIron CX 624S (FCX624S)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 24 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 648S (FCX648S)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 48 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

TABLE 2

IronWare-supported hardware (Continued)

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

FastIron CX 624S-HPOE (FCX624S-HPOE)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 24 1GbE
RJ45 ports, 24 POE+ ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 648S-HPOE (FCX648S-HPOE)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 48 1GbE
RJ45 ports, 48 POE+ ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 624S-F (FCX624S-F)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 20 SFP ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 624-E (FCX624-E)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 24 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 624-I (FCX624-I)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 24 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 648-E (FCX648-E)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 48 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

FastIron CX 648-I (FCX648-I)

Ethernet L2/L3 Edge switch, 48 1GbE
RJ45 ports

FastIron 06.0.00 and later

ICX 6610 Stackable switch family

Campus LAN Edge stackable switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6610-24 Stackable switch

24 RJ-45 ports Campus LAN Edge
stackable switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6610-48 Stackable switch

48 RJ-45 ports Campus LAN Edge
stackable switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6610-24F Stackable switch

24 SFP ports Campus LAN Edge stackable
switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6610-24P Stackable switch

24 PoE ports Campus LAN Edge stackable
switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6610-48P Stackable switch

48 PoE ports Campus LAN Edge stackable
switch

FastIron 07.0.3 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX 6430-24 switch

24-port Campus LAN switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430-24-HPOE switch

24-port Campus LAN HPOE switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430-48 switch

48-port Campus LAN switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430-48-HPOE switch

48-port Campus LAN HPOE switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450 stacking switch

Campus LAN stacking switch

FastIron 8.0 or later

ICX 6450-24 switch

24-port Campus LAN switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24 Base L3 router

24-port Campus LAN Base L3 router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24 Base router

24-port Campus LAN Base router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24 Premium router

24-port Campus LAN Premium router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24-HPOE switch

24-port Campus LAN HPOE switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24-HPOE Base L3 router

24-port Campus LAN HPOE Base L3 router FastIron 07.4.00 and later

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xlvii

TABLE 2

IronWare-supported hardware (Continued)

Device name

xlviii

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

ICX 6450-24-HPOE Base router

24-port Campus LAN HPOE Base router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-24-HPOE Premium router

24-port Campus LAN HPOE Premium
router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48 switch

48-port Campus LAN switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48 Base L3 router

48-port Campus LAN Base L3 router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48 Base router

48-port Campus LAN Base router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48 Premium router

48-port Campus LAN Premium router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48-HPOE switch

48-port Campus LAN HPOE switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48-HPOE Base L3 router

48-port Campus LAN HPOE Base L3 router FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48-HPOE Base router

48-port Campus LAN HPOE Base router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450-48-HPOE Premium router

48-port Campus LAN HPOE Premium
router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430 IronStack switch

24-port Campus LAN stackable switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430 IronStack Base L3 router

Campus LAN Base L3 stackable router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430 IronStack Base router

Campus LAN Base stackable router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6430 IronStack Premium router

Campus LAN Premium stackable router

FastIron 07.4.00 and later

ICX 6450 IronStack switch

48-port Campus LAN stackable switch

FastIron 07.4.00 and later
Hyper Edge stacking requires FastIron
8.0 or later

ICX7750-26Q switch

26 fixed 40 GbE and six 40 GbE slot
module

FastIron 08.0.10 and later

ICX7750-48F switch

48 fixed 10 GbE and six fixed 40 GbE +
6×40 GbE slot

FastIron 08.0.10 and later

ICX7750-48C switch

48 10GBase-T and six fixed 40 GbE
+6×40 GbE slot

FastIron 08.0.10 and later

FastIron GS

Ethernet L2/L3 Access switch

FastIron GS-STK

Ethernet L2/L3 Access switch, stackable

FastIron LS

Enterprise LAN switch

FastIron LS-STK

Enterprise LAN switch, stackable

FastIron SuperX/SX

Enterprise LAN chassis

FSX 02.4.00 and later

FastIron SX 800 and FastIron SX 1600

SX-FI2XGMRXL6 two port 10G
management module supported

FastIron 08.0.10 and later

FastIron 8-port 10 GbE SFP Blade

8-port 10 GbE SFP Blade

FastIron 24-port Fiber SFP GbE Blade

24-port Fiber SFP GbE Blade

FastIron 24-port GbE Cu Blade

24-port GbE Cu Blade

FastIron 2-port 10GbE SFP+ Blade

2-port 10GbE SFP+ Blade

FastIron Edge Switch X-Series

Enterprise LAN Edge switch

FastIron Edge X 424

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 24
10/100/1000 Mbps ports

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

TABLE 2

IronWare-supported hardware (Continued)

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

FastIron Edge X 624

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 24
10/100/1000 Mbps ports

FastIron Edge X 448

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 48
10/100/1000 Mbps ports

FastIron Edge X 648

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 48
10/100/1000 Mbps ports

FastIron Edge X 424HF

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 20 100/1000
Mbps SFP ports

FastIron Edge X 624HF

Enterprise LAN Edge switch, 20 100/1000
Mbps SFP ports

FastIron WS devices

Enterprise Campus switch

Firmware level required

Motorola Controllers RFS4000 series

Wireless controller

Mobility 5.1

Motorola Controllers RFS6000 series

Wireless controller

Mobility 5.1

Motorola Controllers RFS7000 series

Wireless controller

Mobility 5.1

Motorola Access Point 7131

Wireless access point

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

Motorola Access Point 7131N

Wireless access point

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

Motorola Access Point 5181

Wireless access point

Mobility 2.5.X (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

Motorola Access Point 6511

Wireless access point

Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

NetIron family

Ethernet routers

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

NetIron MLX
(Supported regardless of license
configuration)

Ethernet router

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

NetIron MLXe
(Supported regardless of license
configuration)

Ethernet Core router

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

NetIron XMR
(Supported regardless of license
configuration)

Ethernet Backbone router

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

NetIron CES 2048CX (NI-CES-2048CX-AC)
(Supported regardless of license
configuration)

Ethernet Carrier router

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

NetIron CER
(Supported regardless of license
configuration)

Ethernet Edge router

NetIron 5.0.0 or 5.0.1

ServerIron family

Application product

ServerIron ADX 1000

Application switch

ServerIron ADX 1000F

Application Fiber switch

ADX 12.3.03 or later

ServerIron ADX 4000

4U Application Delivery chassis

ADX 12.1.00 or later

ServerIron ADX 10000

10U Application Delivery chassis

ADX 12.1.00 or later

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

xlix

TABLE 2

IronWare-supported hardware (Continued)

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

TurboIron Family

Data Center switch

4.1.00d or 4.2.00 or later

TurboIron 24X (T1-24X-AC)

Data Center switch

4.1.00d or 4.2.00 or later

Brocade 6650 Switch

Data Center switch

FastIron 7.5 and later

Brocade 6650 Base L3 Router

Data Center base L3 router

FastIron 7.5 and later

Brocade 6650 Router

Data Center router

FastIron 7.5 and later

1

The Management application cannot discover or manage wireless access points running Mobility 5.1.

Network OS hardware and software support
Network Advisor 12.2.0 supports the Network OS 4.1.0 firmware platform. For platform-specific
firmware requirements, if any, refer to Table 3.
Table 3 lists the hardware platforms supported by this release of Network Advisor 12.2.0, the
terminology used in the documentation, as well as any specific firmware requirements.

TABLE 3

l

Network OS-supported hardware

Device name

Terminology used in documentation

Firmware level required

Brocade VDX 2730 10 Gbps connection blade

VDX 2730 10 Gbps connection blade

2.1.1_fuj

Brocade VDX 2740 switch

VDX 2740 switch

4.0.0_bbd

Brocade VDX 6710 switch

VDX 6710 switch

2.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6720-24 switch

VDX 6720-24 switch

2.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6710T-1G switch

VDX 6710T-1G switch

4.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6720-60 switch

VDX 6720-60 switch

2.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6730-32 switch

VDX 6730-32 switch

2.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6730-76 switch

VDX 6730-76 switch

2.1 or later

Brocade VDX 6740 switch

VDX 6740 switch

4.0 or later

Brocade VDX 6740-T switch

VDX 6740-T switch

4.0 or later

Brocade VDX 8770-4 switch

VDX 8770-4 switch

3.0 or later

Brocade VDX 8770-8 switch

VDX 8770-8 switch

3.0 or later

Brocade VDX 8770 with 40G/10G Base-T/100G by line
card

VDX 8770 switch with 40G/10G Base-T/100G by line
card

4.1 or later

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

What’s new in this document
The following changes have been made since this document was last released:

• Information that was added:
- Troubleshooting


-

IP Element Manager


-

Element Manager troubleshooting
Configure dialog box

Dashboard Management


Top Port Traffic monitor

• Information that was changed:
- CLI Configuration Management


-





-



IP Element Manager




Element Manager interface overview
Displaying port properties
Element Manager toolbar
Performance data

Performance Data




-

Viewing VCS fabric properties
Viewing IP device and port properties

Database tables


-

Tracing Ethernet fabric routes

Device Properties


-

Monitoring and Alerting Policy Suite/Fabric Watch widgets
Out of Range violations widget
Port Health violations widget

VCS Management


-

Product configuration templates

Dashboard

Configuring a monitor from a performance graph
IP real-time performance monitoring
Traffic flow dashboard monitors

VLAN Management

VLAN Manager
Port VLAN
Information that was deleted:



•

-

License support for Ethernet fabrics

For further information about new features and documentation updates for this release, refer to
the release notes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

li

Document conventions
This section describes text formatting conventions and important notice formats used in this
document.

Text formatting
The narrative-text formatting conventions that are used are as follows:
bold text

Identifies command names
Identifies the names of user-manipulated GUI elements
Identifies keywords and operands
Identifies text to enter at the GUI or CLI

italic text

Provides emphasis
Identifies variables
Identifies paths and Internet addresses
Identifies document titles

code text

Identifies CLI output
Identifies command syntax examples

For readability, command names in the narrative portions of this guide are presented in mixed
lettercase: for example, switchShow. In actual examples, command lettercase is all lowercase.

Notes, cautions, and warnings
The following notices and statements are used in this manual. They are listed below in order of
increasing severity of potential hazards.

NOTE
A note provides a tip, guidance, or advice, emphasizes important information, or provides a
reference to related information.

ATTENTION
An Attention statement indicates potential damage to hardware or data.

Key terms
For definitions specific to Brocade and Fibre Channel, see the Brocade Glossary.
For definitions of SAN-specific terms, visit the Storage Networking Industry Association online
dictionary at:
http://www.snia.org/education/dictionary

Notice to the reader
This document may contain references to the trademarks of the following corporations. These
trademarks are the properties of their respective companies and corporations.

lii

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

These references are made for informational purposes only.
Corporation

Referenced trademarks and products

Linus Torvalds

Linux

Microsoft Corporation

Windows, Windows NT, Internet Explorer

Netscape Communications Corporation

Netscape

Red Hat, Inc.

Red Hat, Red Hat Network, Maximum RPM, Linux Undercover

Oracle

Solaris, Java Plug-in

The Open Group

UNIX

VMware, Inc.

VMware

Additional information
This section lists additional Brocade and industry-specific documentation that you might find
helpful.

Brocade resources
To get up-to-the-minute information, go to http://my.brocade.com to register at no cost for a user
ID and password.
White papers, online demonstrations, and data sheets are available through the Brocade website
at:
http://www.brocade.com/products-solutions/products/index.page
For additional Brocade documentation, visit the Brocade website:
http://www.brocade.com
Release notes are available on the MyBrocade website and are also bundled with the Fabric OS
firmware.

Other industry resources
For additional resource information, visit the Technical Committee T11 website. This website
provides interface standards for high-performance and mass storage applications for Fibre
Channel, storage management, and other applications:
http://www.t11.org
For information about the Fibre Channel industry, visit the Fibre Channel Industry Association
website:
http://www.fibrechannel.org

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

liii

Getting technical help
Contact your switch support supplier for hardware, firmware, and software support, including
product repairs and part ordering. To expedite your call, have the following information available:
1. Management Application Serial Number
To obtain the Management application serial number, select Help > License. The License
dialog box displays.
2. General Information

•
•
•
•
•

Switch model
Switch operating system version
Error numbers and messages received
supportSave command output
Detailed description of the problem, including the switch or fabric behavior immediately
following the problem, and specific questions

• Description of any troubleshooting steps already performed and the results
• Serial console and Telnet session logs
• syslog message logs
3. World Wide Name (WWN)
Use the licenseIdShow command to display the WWN of the chassis.
If you cannot use the licenseIdShow command because the switch is inoperable, you can get
the WWN from the same place as the serial number, except for the Brocade DCX. For the
Brocade DCX, access the numbers on the WWN cards by removing the Brocade logo plate at
the top of the nonport side of the chassis.

Document feedback
Quality is our first concern at Brocade and we have made every effort to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this document. However, if you find an error or an omission, or you think that a
topic needs further development, we want to hear from you. Forward your feedback to:
documentation@brocade.com
Provide the title and version number of the document and as much detail as possible about your
comment, including the topic heading and page number and your suggestions for improvement.

liv

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

Getting Started

1

In this chapter
• User interface components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
• Management server and client. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
• Accessibility features for the Management application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
• PostgreSQL database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
• Supported open source software products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

User interface components
The Management application provides easy, centralized management of the network, as well as
quick access to all product configuration applications. Using this application, you can configure,
manage, and monitor your networks with ease.
The Management application’s main window contains a number of areas. The following graphic
illustrates the various areas, and descriptions of them are listed below.

NOTE

Some widgets may be hidden. To display a widget to the Dashboard tab, click the Customize
Dashboard icon (“Customizing the dashboard widgets and monitors” on page 217).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1

1

Management server and client

FIGURE 1

Main window

1. Menu bar — Lists commands you can perform on the Management application. The available
commands vary depending on which tab (IP or Dashboard) you select. For a list of available
commands, refer to Appendix A, “Application menus”.
2. Toolbar — Provides buttons that enable quick access to dialog boxes and functions. The
available buttons vary depending on which tab (IP or Dashboard) you select. For a list of
available commands, refer to “IP main toolbar” on page 281 or “Dashboard toolbar” on
page 213.
3. Tabs — Provides quick access to the following views:

• Dashboard tab — Provides a high-level overview of the network managed by Management
application server. For more information, refer to “Dashboard Management” on page 211.

• IP tab — Displays the Master Log, Minimap, Connectivity Map (topology), and Product List.
For more information, refer to the “IP tab overview”.
4. Status bar — Displays the connection, port, product, special event, Call Home, and backup
status, as well as Server and User data.

Management server and client
The Management application has two parts: the Server and the Client. The Server is installed on
one machine and stores device-related information; it does not have a user interface. To view
information through a user interface, you must log in to the Server through a Client. The Server and
Clients may reside on the same machine, or on separate machines. If you are running Professional,
the server and the client must be on the same machine.

2

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

1

Logging into a server
You must log into a server to monitor your network.

NOTE
You must have an established user account on the server to log in.
To log into a server, complete the following steps.
1. Double-click the desktop icon or open the application from the Start menu.
The Log In dialog box displays (Figure 2).

FIGURE 2

Log In dialog box

2. Log into another server by entering the IP address to the other server in the Network Address
field.

NOTE

The server must be the exact same version, edition, starting port number, and network size as
the client.
3. Remove a server from the Network Address list by selected the IP address and clicking Delete.
4. Choose one of the following optins:

• If you configured authentication to CAC, enter your PIN in the CAC PIN field.
• If you configured authentication to the local database, an external server (RADIUS, LDAP,
or TACACS+), or a switch, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.

NOTE

Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server authentication.

b.

Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the
application to remember your password the next time you log in.
To change your password, refer to “Changing your password” on page 207.

5. Click Login.
6. Click OK on the Login Banner dialog box.
The Management application displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

3

1

Management server and client

Launching a remote client
NOTE
For higher performance, use a 64-bit JRE.
To launch a remote client, complete the following steps.
1. Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Management application server in the
Address bar.
If the web server port number does not use the default (443 if is SSL Enabled; otherwise, the
default is 80), you must enter the web server port number in addition to the IP address. For
example, IP_Address:Port_Number.
The Management application web start screen displays.
2. Click the Management application web start link.
The Log In dialog box displays.
3. Log into another server by entering the IP address to the other server in the Network Address
field.

NOTE

The server must be the exact same version, edition, starting port number, and network size as
the client.
4. Remove a server from the Network Address list by selected the IP address and clicking Delete.
5. Choose one of the following options:

• If you configured authentication to CAC, enter your PIN in the CAC PIN field.
• If you configured authentication to the local database, an external server (RADIUS, LDAP,
or TACACS+), or a switch, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.

NOTE

Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server authentication.

b.

Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the
application to remember your password the next time you log in.
To change your password, refer to “Changing your password” on page 207.

6. Click Login.
7.

Click OK on the Login Banner dialog box.
The Management application displays.

Clearing previous versions of the remote client
The remote client link in the Start menu does not automatically upgrade when you upgrade the
Management application. You must clear the previous version from the Java cache.
To clear the Java cache, complete the following steps.

4

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

1

1. Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Java.
The Java Control Panel dialog box displays.
2. Click View on the General tab.
The Java Cache Viewer dialog box displays.
3. Right-click the application and select Delete.
4. Click Close on the Java Cache Viewer dialog box.
5. Click OK on the Java Control Panel dialog box.
To create a remote client link in the Start menu, refer to “Launching a remote client” on
page 4.

Launching the Configuration Wizard
You can re-launch the Configuration wizard to change the following configurations:

• Server IP
• Server Ports
NOTE
Changes to these configurations require a server restart.

NOTE
You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
1. Choose one of the following options:

• On Windows systems, select Start > Programs > Management_Application_Name 12.X.X
> Management_Application_Name Configuration.

• On UNIX systems, execute sh

Install_Home/bin/configwizard on the terminal.

2. Click Next on the Welcome screen.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Complete the following steps on the FTP/SCP/SFTP Server screen.
a.

Choose one of the following options:

• Select Built-in FTP/SCP/SFTP Server to configure an internal FTP/SCP/SFTP server
and select one of the following options:

-

Select Built-in FTP Server to configure an internal FTP server
The internal FTP server uses a default account and port 21. You can configure
your own account from the Options dialog box. For instructions, refer to
“Configuring an internal FTP server” on page 173.

-

Select Built-in SCP/SFTP Server to configure an internal SCP/SFTP server
The internal SCP/SFTP server uses a default account and port 22. You can
configure your own account from the Options dialog box. For instructions, refer to
“Configuring an internal SCP or SFTP server” on page 174.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

5

1

Management server and client

• Select External FTP/SCP/SFTP Server to configure an external FTP server.
You can configure the external FTP server settings from the Options dialog box. For
instructions, refer to “Configuring an external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server” on page 175.
b.

Click Next.

If port 21 or 22 is busy, a message displays. Click OK to close the message and continue. Once
the Management application is configured make sure port 21 or 2221 is free and restart the
Server to start the FTP/SCP/SFTP service.

NOTE

If you use an FTP/SCP/SFTP Server which is not configured on the same machine as the
Management application, the Firmware Repository feature will not be available.
5. Complete the following steps on the Server IP Configuration screen.

NOTE

If the Management server or client has multiple Network Interface Cards and if any of these
interfaces are not plugged in, you must disable them; otherwise, the following features do not
work properly:
Server impact

•
•
•
•
•

Configuration wizard (does not display all IP addresses)
Trap and Syslog auto registration
Report content (Ipconfiguration element does not display all server IP addresses)
Network OS configuration backup through FTP
Trace dump through FTP

Client impact

•
•
•
•
•

Options dialog box (does not display all IP addresses)

a.

Select an address from the Server IP Configuration list.

b.

Select an address from the Switch - Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list.

Firmware import and download dialog box
Firmware import for Fabric OS and Network OS products
FTP button in Technical Support Repository dialog box
Technical supportSave of Fabric OS, Network OS, and Host products through FTP

NOTE

If the “hostname” contains invalid characters, the host name does not display in the list.
Valid characters include alphanumeric and dash (-) characters. The IP address is selected
by default. If an IPv6 address is selected, server start up will fail.
If DNS is not configured for your network, do not select the ‘hostname’ option from either
the Server IP Configuration or Switch - Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list.
Selecting the ‘hostname’ option prevents clients and devices from communicating with
the Server.
If you select a specific IP address from the Server IP Configuration screen and the selected
IP address changes, you will not be able to connect to the server. To change the IP
address, refer to “Configuring an explicit server IP address” on page 157.

6

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

c.

1

Click Next.

6. Complete the following steps on the Server Configuration screen.

NOTE

Do not use port 2638 for any of these port numbers. Port 2638 is used internally by the server.

FIGURE 3

Server Configuration screen

a.

Enter a port number in the Web Server Port # (HTTPS) field (default is 443).

b.

Enable HTTP redirection to HTTPS by selecting the Redirect HTTP Requests to HTTPS
check box.
When you enable HTTP redirection, the server uses port 80 to redirect HTTP requests to
HTTPS. You can configure the server port settings from the Options dialog box (Server Port
pane). For instructions, refer to “Configuring the server port” on page 177.

c.

Enter a port number in the Database Port # field (default is 5432).

d.

Enter a port number in the Starting Port Number field (default is 24600).

NOTE

For Professional software, the server requires 15 consecutive free ports beginning with
the starting port number.

NOTE

For Trial and Licensed software, the server requires 18 consecutive free ports beginning
with the starting port number.

e.

Enter a port number in the Syslog Port Number field (default is 514).

NOTE

If the default syslog port number is already in use, you will not receive any syslog
messages from the device. To find and stop the process currently running on the default
Syslog port number, refer to the Installation and Migration Guide.

f.

Enter a port number in the SNMP Port Number field (default is 162).

g.

Click Next.
If you enter a syslog port number already in use, a message displays. Click No on the
message to remain on the Server Configuration screen and edit the syslog port number
(return to step 6a). Click Yes to close the message and continue with step 7.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

7

1

Management server and client

If you enter a port number already in use, a Warning displays next to the associated port
number field. Edit that port number and click Next.
7.

Verify your configuration information on the Server Configuration Summary screen and click
Next.

8. Complete the following steps on the Start Server screen:
a.

Select the Start Client check box, if necessary.

b.

Click Finish.
After all of the services (Server and Client) are started, the Log In dialog box displays.

9. Click Yes on the restart server confirmation message.
10. Choose one of the following optins:

• If you configured authentication to CAC, enter your PIN in the CAC PIN field.
• If you configured authentication to the local database, an external server (RADIUS, LDAP,
or TACACS+), or a switch, enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.

NOTE

Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server authentication.

11. Click Login.
12. Click OK on the Login Banner.

Viewing active sessions
To view the Management application active sessions, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Active Sessions.
The Active Sessions dialog box displays (Figure 5).

FIGURE 4

Active Sessions dialog box

2. Review the active session information.
The following information displays:

• ID — Displays the name of the user (for example, Administrator).
• Description — Displays the description of the user (for example, Operator).
• Network Address — Displays the network address of the user.

8

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

1

• Client Type — Displays the type of Management application client.
• Connected — Displays the date and time the user connected to the server.
3. Click Close.

Disconnecting users
To disconnect a user, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Active Sessions.
The Active Sessions dialog box displays.
2. Select the user you want to disconnect and click Disconnect.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. The user you disconnected receives the following message:
The Client has been disconnected by User_Name from IP_Address at
Disconnected_Date_and_Time.
5. Click Close.
When you disconnect a client from using the Active Sessions dialog box, the following event
displays in the Master Log: Disconnect Client User_Name @ IP_Address.

Viewing server properties
To view the Management application server properties, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Server Properties.
The Server Properties dialog box displays.

FIGURE 5

Server Properties dialog box

2. Review the information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

9

1

Management server and client

TABLE 4

Server Properties

Field/Component

Description

Free Memory

The amount of free memory on the server.

IP Address

The IP address in IPv4 or IPv6 format.

Java VM Name

The Java Virtual Machine name.

Java VM Vendor

The Java Virtual Machine vendor.

Java VM Version

The Java Virtual Machine version running on the server.

Server Name

The server’s name.

OS Architecture

The operating system architecture on the server.

OS Name

The name of the operating system running on the server.

OS Version

The operating system version running on the server.

Region

The server’s geographical region.

Started At

The time the server was started.

Time Zone

The server’s time zone.

Total Memory

The total amount of memory on the server.

Trap Listening Port

The number of the UDP port that listens for SNMP traps.

Win32 Service

Specifies whether the Win32 service is available on the server. On Unix servers,
displays as ‘No’.

3. Click Close to close the Server Properties dialog box.

Viewing port status
The Port Status dialog box enables you to determine the availability of ports required for key
Management application features. You can view the port status for the following ports:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

CIM Indication for Event Handling — Port 24618
CIM Indication for HCM Proxy — Port 24619
FTP — Port 21
SCP/SFTP — Port 22
sFlow — Port 6343
SNMP Trap — Port 162
Syslog — Port 514
TFTP — Port 69
Web Server (HTTP) — Port 80
Web Server (HTTPS) — Port 443

To view the port status, complete the following steps.
1. Click the port status icon (

).

The Port Status dialog box displays.

10

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

FIGURE 6

1

Port Status dialog box

2. Review the port status details:

• Name — The Port name. Options include CIM Indication for Event Handling, CIM Indication
for HCM Proxy, FTP, SCP/SFTP, sFlow, SNMP Trap, Syslog, TFTP, Web Server (HTTP), and
Web Server (HTTPS).

• Port # — The required port number.
• Status — The status of the port. The status options are as follows:
Success — The port is listening or bound to the server.

Failed — The port fails to listen or bind to the server. It is occuppied by another
process.

Paritally Failed — The port is used by the server as well as other applications.

Disabled (external FTP port only) — This is considered a normal status.
Running Process – The name of the process using the port (not the Management
applciation). Blank when the port is only used by the Management applciation server. If
multiple processes occupy the same port, the process names display in a
comma-separated list.


•

• Recommended Actions — Suggested action to take to resolve the issues.
3. Click Close.

Server and client ports
In some cases, a network may utilize virtual private network (VPN) or firewall technology, which can
prohibit communication between Products and the Servers or Clients. In other words, a Server or
Client can find a Product, appear to log in, but is immediately logged out because the Product
cannot reach the Server or Client. To resolve this issue, check to determine if the ports in the table
below need to be opened up in the firewall.

NOTE

Professional edition does not support remote clients.
Table 5 lists the default port numbers and whether or not it needs to be opened up in the firewall
and includes the following information:

• Port Number — The port at the destination end of the communication path.
• Ports — The name of the port.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

11

1

Management server and client

• Transport — The transport type (TCP or UDP).
• Description — A brief description of the port.
• Communication Path — The “source” to “destination” vaules. Client and Server refer to the
Management application client and server unless stated otherwise. Product refers to the
Fabric OS, Network OS, or IronWare devices.

• Open in Firewall — Whether the port needs to be open in the firewall.
TABLE 5

Port usage and firewall requirements

Port Number

Ports

Transport

Description

Communication Path Open in Firewall

201

FTP Port (Control)

TCP

FTP Control port for internal
FTP server

Client–Server
Product–Server

Yes

211

FTP Port (Data)

TCP

FTP Data port for internal
FTP server

Client–Server
Product–Server

Yes

222

SSH or SCP or SFTP

TCP

Secure telnet and secure
upload and download to
product

Server–Product
Client –Product
Product – Server

Yes

23

Telnet

TCP

Telnet port from server/client
to product

Server–Product
Client–Product

Yes

252

SMTP Server port

TCP

Server–SMTP
SMTP Server port for e-mail
Server
communication if you use
e-mail notifications without SSL

492

TACACS+ Authentication port

TCP

TACACS+ server port for
authentication if you use
TACACS+ as an external
authentication

Server–TACACS+
Server

Yes

69

TFTP

UDP

File upload/download to
product

Product-Server

Yes

802

Management application HTTP server

TCP

Non-SSL HTTP/1.1 connector
port if you use secure
client-server communication.
You need this port for HTTP
redirection

Client–Server

Yes

801

Product HTTP server

TCP

Product non-SSL http port for
http and CAL communication if
you do not use secure
communication to the product

Server–Product

Yes

Product non-SSL http port for
http and CAL communication if
you do not use secure
communication to the product
and you do not use the
Management application
server proxy

Client–Product

Yes

1612
162

SNMP port

UDP

Default SNMP port

Server–Product

Yes

2

SNMP Trap port

UDP

Default SNMP trap port

Product-Server

Yes

2

LDAP Authentication Server Port

UDP
TCP

LDAP server port for
authentication if you use LDAP
as an external authentication

Server–LDAP
Server

Yes

389

12

Yes

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Management server and client

TABLE 5

1

Port usage and firewall requirements (Continued)

Port Number

Ports

Transport

Description

Communication Path Open in Firewall

4431,2

HTTPS server

TCP

HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) server
port if you use secure client server communication

Client-Server

Yes

4432

HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) server
port if you use secure
communication to the product

Server–Product

Yes

443

HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) server
port if you use secure
communication to the product
and you do not use the
Management application
server proxy

Client–Product

Yes

4432

HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) server
port if you use vCenter
discovery

Server-vCenter
Server

Yes

4652

SMTP Server port for SSL

TCP

SMTP Server port for e-mail
communication if you use
e-mail notifications with SSL

Server-SMTP
Server

Yes

5142

Syslog Port

UDP

Default Syslog Port

Product–Server
Managed Host Server

Yes

6362

LDAP Authentication SSL port

TCP

LDAP server port for
authentication if you use LDAP
as an external authentication
and SSL is enabled

Server–LDAP
Server

Yes

18122

RADIUS Authentication Server Port

UDP

RADIUS server port for
authentication if you use
RADIUS as an external
authentication

Server–RADIUS
Server

Yes

18132

RADIUS Accounting Server Port

UDP

RADIUS server port for
accounting if you use RADIUS
as an external authentication

Server–RADIUS
Server

Yes

5432

Database port

TCP

Port used by database if you
access the database remotely
from a third-party application

Remote ODBC–
Database

Yes

5988

SMI Server port

TCP

SMI server port on the
Management application and
the CIM/SMI port on HBAs if
you use SMI Agent without SSL

SMI Client- Server

Yes

Server-Managed
Host

Yes

SMI Agent Server–
Client

Yes

Server-Managed
Host

Yes

59891,2

SMI Server port with SSL enabled

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

TCP

SMI Agent port on the
Management application and
the CIM/SMI port on HBAs if
you use SMI Agent with SSL

13

1

Management server and client

TABLE 5

Port usage and firewall requirements (Continued)

Port Number

Ports

Transport

Description

Communication Path Open in Firewall

63432

sFlow

UDP

Receives sFlow data from
products if you are monitoring
with sFlow

Product-Server

Yes

246001,2

JNP (Java Naming Protocol) port

TCP

Use for service location. Uses
SSL for privacy.

Client–Server

Yes

246011,2

EJB (Enterprise Java Bean) connection
port

TCP

Client requests to server. Uses
SSL for privacy.

Client–Server

Yes

246021,2

HornetQ Netty port

TCP

Use for JMS (Java Message
Service), async messages from
server to client.
Uses SSL for privacy.

Client–Server

Yes

246031,2

JMX RMI port

TCP

Use for JMS control. Uses SSL
for privacy.

Client–Server

Yes

246041,2

RMI naming service port

TCP

Client–Server

Yes

24605

1,2

RMI/JRMP invoker port

TCP

Client–Server

Yes

24606

1,2

Event Handling CIM Indication listener
port

TCP

Used for HBA management

Managed Host Server

Yes

246071,2

HCM Proxy CIM Indication Listener port

TCP

Used for HBA management

Managed Host Server

Yes

246082

Reserved for future use

TCP

Not used

Client - Server

No

2

Reserved for future use

TCP

Not used

Client - Server

No

2

Reserved for future use

TCP

Not used

Client - Server

No

2

JBoss Transaction Services Recovery
Manager port

TCP

Not used remotely

Server

Yes

24609
24610

24611

246122

JBoss Transaction Status Manager port

TCP

Not used remotely

Server

Yes

2

JBoss Pooled invoker port

TCP

Not used remotely

Server

Yes

2

JBoss Socket invoker port

TCP

Not used remotely

Server

Yes

2

JBoss RMI dynamic class loading port

TCP

Web service port, not used
remotely

Server

Yes

246162

Apache JServ port

TCP

Proxys web server requests, not
used remotely

Server

Yes

246172

Remote Management application
connector access port

TCP

Not used remotely

Server

Yes

34568

HCM Agent discovery port

TCP

Used for HBA management via
JSON

Server - Managed
Host

Yes

555561

Launch in Context (LIC) client hand
shaking port

TCP

Client port used to check if a
Management application client
opened using LIC is running on
the same host

Client

No

24613
24614

24615

NOTE: If this port is in use, the
application uses the
next available port.
1.

14

Port does not need to be open in the firewall for Professional edtion.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Accessibility features for the Management application

1

2. The default port number. You must use the same port number for all products or hosts managed by the Management server. This port is
configurable in the Management server; however, some products and firmware versions do not allow you to configure a port.

Accessibility features for the Management application
Accessibility features help users who have a disability, such as restricted mobility or limited vision,
to use information technology products successfully.
The following list includes the major accessibility features in the Management application:

• Keyboard shortcuts
• Look and Feel

Keyboard shortcuts
You can use the keystrokes shown in the table below to perform common functions.

NOTE
To open a menu using keystrokes, press ALT plus the underlined letter. To open a submenu, open
the menu, then press the key for the underlined letter (SHIFT plus letter for capitals) of the submenu
option.

TABLE 6

Keyboard shortcuts

Menu Item or Function

Keyboard Shortcut

All Panels

F12

Collapse

CTRL + L

Command Tool

SHIFT + F4

Connectivity Map

F7

Copy

CTRL + C

Cut

CTRL + X

Delete

Delete

Delete All

CTRL +Delete

Help

F1

Internet Explorer

SHIFT + F2

Master Log

F5

FireFox

SHIFT + F1

Paste

CTRL + V

Product List

F9

Properties

Alt-Enter

Select All

CTRL + A

Show Ports

F4

SSH

Shift-F5

View Utilization

CTRL + U

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

15

1

Accessibility features for the Management application

TABLE 6

Keyboard shortcuts

Menu Item or Function

Keyboard Shortcut

Zoom In

CTRL + NumPad+

Zoom Out

CTRL + NumPad-

Look and feel customization
You can configure the Management application to mimic your system settings as well as define the
size of the font.
‘Look’ refers to the appearance of graphical user interface widgets and ‘feel’ refers to the way the
widgets behave.
The Management application currently uses the ‘Management_Application Default Look and Feel’
for some of the components (for example, Layout, Minimap, and so on) and the “Java Metal Look
and Feel” for others.

Setting the look and feel
NOTE

Setting the look and feel is only supported on Windows systems.
The following table details the Management application components that change when you set the
look and feel as well as those components that do not change.

TABLE 7

Look and feel changes

Components Affected

Components Not Affected

All Java native components with Metal Look And
Feel are affected.

The Connectivity map does not change when devices
are present. You must change the theme using the map
display settings (View > Map Display).

The Menu bar, Tool bar, Status bar, as well as all
tables and dialog boxes are affected.

All icons and images are not affected.

Layout is affected only when it is empty.

The Minimap is not affected.

1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Look and Feel in the Category list.
3. Choose from one of the following options:

• Select Default to configure the look and feel back to the Management application defaults.
• Select System to configure the Management application to have the look and feel of your
system.
This changes the look and feel for the components that use ‘Java Metal Look and Feel’.
For example, if you have your system display color scheme set to ‘High Contrast #1’, then
the Management application will be set to ‘High Contrast #1’. Font size of the components
is not affected by theme changes.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

16

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PostgreSQL database

1

5. Click OK on the message.

NOTE

Changes do not take affect until after you restart the client.

Changing the font size
The Options dialog box enables you to change the font size for all components including the
Connectivity map of the Management application interface.
Font size changes proportionately in relation to the system resolution. For example, if the system
resolution is 1024 x 768, the default font size would be 8 and large font size would be 10.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Look and Feel in the Category list.
3. Select one of the following options from the Font Size list:

• Select Default to return to the default font size.
• Select Small to change the font to a smaller font size.
• Select Large to change the font to a larger font size.
NOTE

Changing the font size to Large may cause the interface components (for example, text
and button labels) to display incorrectly.

4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.
5. Click OK on the message.

NOTE

Changes do not take affect until after you restart the client.

PostgreSQL database
You can connect to the database using one of the following options:

• pgAdmin III
• ODBC client
• Command line interface

Connecting to the database using pgAdmin III
To access the PostgreSQL database, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• On Windows systems, launch the dbadmin.bat script in the Install_Home\bin\ directory.
• On UNIX systems, launch the dbadmin script in the Install_Home\bin\ directory.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

17

1

PostgreSQL database

2. Selecting File > Add Server.
The New Server Registration dialog box displays.
3. Enter the DB_server_IP_address or “localhost” in the Host field.
4. Enter the port number (default is 5432) on which the PostgreSQL server is running in the Port
field.
5. Enter your username (default is dcmuser) in the Username field.
6. Enter your password (password) in the Password field.
7.

Click OK on the New Server Registration dialog box.
The pgAdmin III application displays.

8. To browse data in the database, complete the following steps.
a.

Expand the Tables tree in the Object browser pane.

b.

Right-click a table in the list and select View Data > View All Rows.

9. To execute a freestyle SQL query in the database, complete the following steps.
a.

Expand the Tables tree in the Object browser pane.

b.

Right-click a table in the list and select Scripts > SELECT script.
The Query dialog box displays.

10. Select File > Exit to close the pgAdmin III application.

Connecting to the database using the ODBC client (Windows systems)
The Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) driver enables you to configure the data source name
(DSN) for the database.
To install the ODBC driver and create a new data source, complete the following steps.
1. Double-click edb_psqlodbc.exe located on the DVD
(DVD_Drive/Management_Application/odbc/Windows).
2. Install the file to the usual location for your system’s application files (for example, C:\Program
Files\Management_Application ODBC Driver) on the Select Install Folder screen and click
Next.

NOTE

If you select an invalid location, the ODBC driver is installed in a different location than where
the ODBC executable drivers are located.
3. On the Ready to Install screen click Next.
4. Click Finish to complete the installation.
5. Choose one of the following opitions:

• (32-bit OS) Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data Sources
(ODBC).

• (62-bit OS) (Windows only) Select Start > Run, type %windir%\SysWOW64\odbcad32.exe
and press Enter.

18

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PostgreSQL database

1

The ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box displays.
6. Click the System DSN tab.
7.

Click Add.
The Create a New Data Source dialog box displays.

8. Select PostgreSQL Unicode.
9. Click Finish.
The PostgreSQL Unicode ODBC Driver (psqlODBC) Setup dialog box displays.
10. Enter a name for the data source in the Datasource field.
11. Enter the description of the database in the Description field.
12. Enter the name of the database in the Database field.
13. Select enable or disable from the SSL Mode list to specify whether or not to use SSL when
connecting to the database.
14. Enter the IP address or host name of the Management application server in the Server field.
15. Enter the database server port number (default is 5432) in the Port Number field.
16. Enter the database user name in the User Name field.
17. Enter the password in the Password field.
18. Click Test to test the connection.
19. Click OK on the Connection Test dialog box.
20. Click Save.
21. Click OK on the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box.
22. To export data, select Data > Import External Data > New Database Query and complete the
steps in the Data Connection Wizard.

Connecting to the database using the ODBC client
(Linux systems)
NOTE
The ODBC driver is not supported on 64-bit Linux systems.
You must have the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) driver to allow remote clients to export data
and generate reports. The ODBC driver enables you to configure the data source name (DSN) for
the Network Advisor database.
Before you install the Linux ODBC driver, download the ODBC RedHat Package Manager (RPM) file
based on the Linux version.

TABLE 8

ODBC RedHat Package Manager (RPM) file requirements

Linux version

RedHat Package Manager file

SUSE

Rpm –I unixODBC-2.2.12-197.17.i586.rpm

RedHat or Oracle Enterprise

Rpm –i unixODBC-2.2.11-1.i386.rpm

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

19

1

PostgreSQL database

Installing the ODBC driver on Linux systems
To install the ODBC driver and , complete the following steps.
1. Execute the following command in the terminal:
> su
>chmod 777 edb_psqlodbc.bin
> ./edb_psqlodbc.bin

2. On the Setup psqlODBC screen click Next.
3. Install the file to the usual location for your system’s application files (for example,
/opt/PostgreSQL/psqlODBC) on the Installation Directory screen and click Next.

NOTE

If you select an invalid location, the ODBC driver is installed in a different location than where
the ODBC executable drivers are located.
4. On the Ready to Install screen click Next.
5. On the Completing the psqlODBC Setup Wizard screen click Finish to complete the installation.

Adding the Datasourse on Linux systems
Before you edit the INI files, make sure the PostgreSQL database is up and running.

NOTE
For RedHat and Oracle Enterprise systems, the odbc.ini and odbcinst.ini files are located in /etc. For
SUSE systems, the odbc.ini and odbcinst.ini files are located in /etc/unixODBC.
1. Open the odbc.ini file in an editor and enter the datasource information as follows:
[TestDB]
Description = PostgreSQL 8.4
Driver = /opt/PostgreSQL/psqlODBC/lib/psqlodbcw.so
Database = dcmdb
Servername = 172.26.1.54
UserName = dcmadmin
Password = passw0rd
Port = 5432

2. Save and close the odbc.ini file.
3. Open the odbcinst.ini file in a text editor and make sure that the driver path information is
correct.
After you install the PostgreSQL ODBC driver, the odbcinst.ini should automatically update the
driver path. If the direver path is not updated, add the following:
[psqlODBC]
Description=PostgreSQL ODBC driver
Driver=/opt/PostgreSQL/psqlODBC/lib/psqlodbcw.so

4. Save and close the odbcinst.ini file.

20

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PostgreSQL database

1

Testing the connection on Linux systems
To test the connection, complete the following steps.
1. Download and install Open Office.
2. Select File > New > Database.
The Database Wizard displays.
3. On the Select database screen, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the Connect to an existing database option.

b.

Select ODBC from the list.

c.

Click Next.

4. On the Set up ODBC connection screen, complete the following steps.
a.

Click Browse.
The datasource saved in the odbc.ini file is populated in the Datasource dialog box.

b.

Select the datasource and click OK on the Datasource dialog box.

c.

Click Next.

5. On the Set up user authentication screen, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter the database user name in the User name field.

b.

Select the Password required check box.

c.

Click Test Connection to test the connection.
The Authentication Password dialog box displays.

d.

Enter the database password in the Password field and click OK.

e.

Click OK on the Connection Test dialog box.
If an error message (file not found while testing the connection) displays, copy the lib files
from the /lib/* directory to the /usr/lib/ directory.

f.

Click Next.

6. On the Save and proceed screen, click Finish.

Executing SQL queries from the CLI
To execute SQL queries from the command line interface (CLI) , complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• On Windows systems, launch the dbsql.bat script in the Install_Home\bin\ directory.
• On UNIX systems, launch the dbsql script in the Install_Home\bin\ directory.
2. Execute your query from the command window.
3. Close the command window.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

21

1

Supported open source software products

Changing the database user password
To change the read/write or read only database password, complete the following steps in the
Install_Home/bin directory.
1. Open a command window.
2. Type dbpassword User_Name Password New_Password Confirm_Password and press Enter.
Where User_Name is your user name, Password is your current password, and New_Password
and Confirm_Password are your new password. The read/write user name and password
defaults are dcmadmin and passw0rd (zero), respectively. The read only user name and
password defaults are dcmuser and password (all lowercase), respectively.
If the password changed successfully, the following message displays:
Password changed successfully.
If an error occurs and the password did not change, the following message displays:
Error while updating password. Please try again.
Press any key to continue.
If the current password and new password are the same, the following message displays:
Old and New passwords cannot be same. Use different password and try again.
Press any key to continue.
If the new password and confirm password do not match, the following message displays:
New password and confirm password do not match. Please try again.
Press any key to continue.
3. Launch the Server Management Console.
4. Click the Services tab.
5. Click Stop to stop all services.
6. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.
7.

Launch the Server Management Console.

8. Click Start to start all services.

NOTE

If the server is configured to use an external FTP server, the Server Management Console does
not attempt to start the built-in FTP service.
9. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Supported open source software products
Table 9 lists the open source software third-party software products used in this release.

TABLE 9

22

Open source software third-party software products

Open Source Software

License Type

7-ZipLZMASDK 4.65

public domain

Abator 1.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheAnt 1.7.1

Apache License v2.0

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Supported open source software products

TABLE 9

1

Open source software third-party software products

Open Source Software

License Type

ApacheCommonsBeanUtils 1.8.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsCodec 1.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsCollections 3.2.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsCompress 1.0

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsConfiguration 1.6

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsDBCP 1.2.2

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsDigester 2.0

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsDiscovery 0.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsFileUpload 1.2.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsHTTPClient 3.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsIO 1.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsJXPath 1.3

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsLang 2.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsLogging 0.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsMath 2.0

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsNet 2.0

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsPool 1.5.4

Apache License v2.0

ApacheCommonsValidator 1.3.1

Apache License v2.0

Apache Extras Companion for Apache log4j 1.1

Apache License v2.0

ApacheFTPServer 1.0.3

Apache License v2.0

Apache Log4j 1.2.16

Apache License v2.0

ASM 3.2

Custom License

Axis 1.4

Apache License v2.0

AXL Radius Client API 3.29

AXL Radius Client License

BeanScriptingFramework 2.4.0

Apache License v2.0

BeanShell 2.0b4

Sun Public License / Gnu Lesser Public License

BouncyCastleCryptoProvider 1.45

Bouncy Castle License

CastorBindingFramework 0.9.9.1

Apache License v2.0

Conf M 1.9.3

Java-based software library

DNSJava 2.0.7

BeanShell Software License

dom4j 1.6.1

dom4j License

EnterpriseDTFTP 1.5.6

LGPL

GlazedLists 1.8.0

LGPL or MPL

GoogleGuice 1.0

Apache

HPInsightSoftwareVCEMWebClientSDK 6.2

HP SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT KIT LICENSE
AGREEMENT

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

23

1

Supported open source software products

TABLE 9

24

Open source software third-party software products

Open Source Software

License Type

HornetQ 2.0.0

Apache License v2.0

iBATISDAOFramework 2.2.0

Apache

iBatisforJava 2.3.4

Apache License v2.0

Infinispan 4.0.0 FINAL

LGPL v2.1

InstallAnywhere 2010

Commercial

Ireasoning SNMP API 4.0

IREASONING

iTextJavaPDFLibrary 2.1.7

Affero General Public License

JasperReports 3.6.1

GNU Lesser General Public License version 3

JavaCIFSClientLibrary 1.3.12

LGPL v2.1

JavaServiceWrapper 3.3.9

Custom License

JavaTar2.5andTarTool1.4

public domain

JaxenXpathLibrary 1.1.1

Jaxen License

JbcParser 3.7

Math Parser License

JBossApplicationServer 5.1.0 GA

LGPL

JBossWeb 2.1.9

GNU Lesser General Public License version 3

JCalendar 1.3.3

LGPL v2.1

JCommon 1.0.16

LGPL v2.1

JDOM 1.1.1

Apache Style

JFreeChart 1.0.13

LGPL v2.1

JGoodiesForms 1.2.1

BSD

JGoodiesLooks 2.2.2

BSD

JGraph 5.13.0.1

BSD Style

JIDE 2.10.1

JIDE Software License

Jmesa 2.4.5

Apache

JSON-RPCJava 1.0.1

Apache License v2.0

KajabityTools 0.1

Apache License v2.0

L2Fprod.comCommonComponents 7.3

Apache License v2.0

MaverickJavaSSHAPI 1.4.25

SSH Tools License

MimeTypeDetectionUtility 2.1.2

Apache License v2.0

MyBatisPersistenceFrameworkandSchhemaMigrationsf
orJava 3.0.2 GA

Apache License v2.0

OpenSAML 2.3.0

Apache License v2.0

OpenSSLforLinux 1.0.0a

OpenSSL License

PostgreSQL 9.2.1

PostgreSQL License

QualityFirstLibrary 0.99.0

Mozilla License V1.1 and qflib License

Quartz Enterprise Job Scheduler 1.66

Apache License v2.0

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Supported open source software products

TABLE 9

1

Open source software third-party software products

Open Source Software

License Type

RockSawRawSocketLibrary 1.0.0

Apache License v2.0

SafeNet Sentinel Caffe 1.6.1

SafeNet License

SafeNet Sentinel RMS SDK 8.2.2

SafeNet License

Sblim-cim-client 1.3.9.3

HCM Sblim CIM Client

SimpleLoggingFacadeforJava 1.5.8

SLF4J License

JavaRuntimeEnvironment 1.6.0_31

Commercial

TableLayout 2009-06-10

Custom License

VIJavaAPI 2.1

BSD License

WBEM Solutions J WBEM Server 3.4.4

Commercial

WebNMSSNMPAPI 4.0.6

WebNMS License

XML RPC 1.2-B1

Open Source

YourKitJavaProfiler 9.5.1

YourKit License

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

25

1

26

Supported open source software products

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

2

Patches

In this chapter
• Installing a patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
• Uninstalling a patch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Installing a patch
The patch installer enables you to update the Management application between releases. Each
patch installer includes the previous patches within a specific release. For example, patch F
(11.X.Xf) includes the upgrades in the patch installers for A (11.X.Xa) through E (11.X.Xe).
To install a patch, complete the following steps.
1. Stop all services by completing the following steps.
a.

Launch the Server Console.

b.

Click the Services tab.

c.

Click Stop to stop all services.

NOTE

If you perform patch upgrade while services are running, an error message displays.

2. Go to the /bin directory.
Install_Home/bin (Windows)
/opt/Application_Name/bin (UNIX)
3. Execute the patch file for your operating system:
patch.bat (Windows)
patch.sh (UNIX)

The Upgrade dialog box displays.
4. Browse to the patch file.
The patch zip file uses the following naming convention:
__
.zip (for example na_1130a_.zip).
5. Click Upgrade.
If the patch process is interrupted (for example, loss of power), you must restart the patch
process.
The patch installer performs the following functions:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

27

2

Uninstalling a patch

• Extracts patch files to the Install_Home folder.
• Creates a back up (zip) of the original files to be updated and copies the zip file to the
Install_Home\patch-backup directory (for example,
Install_Home\patch-backup\na_11-3-0a.zip).
The first time you apply a patch, the back up patch zip file uses the following naming
convention: _--
.zip (for example, Install_Home\patch-backup\na_11-3-0a.zip).
Each additional time you apply a patch, the back up patch zip file uses the following
naming convention: _--.zip (for example,
Install_Home\patch-backup\na_11-3-0-patch-a.zip).

• Generates a patch log.
• Updates the conf file (Install_Home\conf\patch.conf) to include the patch version applied
and patch created date.

• Updates the patch version in the About dialog box (Select Help > About in the main
window).
6. Start all services by completing the following steps.
a.

Launch the Server Console.

b.

Click the Services tab.

c.

Click Start to start all services.

Uninstalling a patch
Note that only one set of back up files are retained which enables you revert back to the previous
version. You can only revert back one version. For example:

• If you upgrade from patch A to patch B, you can revert back to patch A.
• If you upgrade from patch A to patch B to patch C then to patch F, you can only revert back to
patch C.
To uninstall a patch, complete the following steps.
1. Stop all services by completing the following steps.
a.

Launch the Server Console.

b.

Click the Services tab.

c.

Click Stop to stop all services.

2. Go to the Install_Home/patch-backup directory.
3. Extract the patch zip file (for example, na_1120a_.zip).
4. Open the restore.xml file from the extracted files.
The artifacts (jar files, war files, and so on) you need to replace display as separate file tags in
the restore.xml file. The location of each artifact in the extracted folder is detailed in the src
value under each file tag.
5. Go to the location of the first artifact (as shown in the src value under the file tag).

28

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Uninstalling a patch

2

6. Copy the artifact from the extracted folder to the source folder in the
Install_Home/patch-backup directory.
7.

Repeat step 5 and 6 for all artifacts listed in the restore.xml folder.

8. Go to the Install_Home/conf directory.
9. Open the version.properties file in a text editor.
10. Change the patch version (patch.version) value to the reverted patch (for example, if you are
reverting from patch F to patch C then patch.version = c).
If the previous version is the initial version (no patches), change the patch version value to
none (for example, patch.version = None).
11. Go to the Install_Home/patch-backup/conf directory.
12. Copy the patch.conf file in this directory to the Install_Home/conf directory.
If the previous version is the initial version (no patches), delete the patch.conf file in the
Install_Home/conf directory.
13. Start all services by completing the following steps.
a.

Launch the Server Console.

b.

Click the Services tab.

c.

Click Start to start all services.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

29

2

30

Uninstalling a patch

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

3

Discovery

In this chapter
• IP discovery overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
• VDX/VCS discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
• Logical chassis cluster mode discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
• Configuring IP profile discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
• Configuring IP simple discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
• IP SNMP credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
• Default IP user credentials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
• IP Object identifier filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
• Defining global setting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
• IP discovery profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
• Individual IP device discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
• IP Rediscovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
• Host discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
• VM Manager discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

31

3

IP discovery overview

IP discovery overview
NOTE

Discovery only displays products that are assigned to your area of responsibility (AOR). For more
information about user accounts, refer to “Areas of responsibility” on page 194.

NOTE

You must have the Discover Setup - IP privilege to configure and run discovery. For more information
about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

NOTE
You must have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user account to discover new
products. For more information about user accounts, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.

NOTE

IP discovery requires Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) or Telnet support on the device to
determine device reachability.
Discovery is the method that the Management application uses to find data networking devices on
the network. When the Management application discovers devices, it finds all IP addresses on a
device and stores them in the Management application database. The Management application
uses the primary address of a product to communicate with the product. The primary address is
determined using the following rules:

• If you configure discovery to prefer loopback addresses (refer to “Defining global setting
preferences” on page 60), and there are loopback IP addresses configured in the product; and
the loopback IP address is reachable from the Management application server, then the
loopback IP address is the primary IP address of the product.

• If you did not configure discovery to prefer loopback addresses, the original IP address used to
discover the product is the primary IP address of the product.
The primary address is the address that appears on the Network Object Manager and other
configuration and display panels in the Management application.
The Management application provides two types of discovery, simple discovery and profile-based
discovery.
Simple discovery discovers the device with a specific IP address and/or DNS name. It is triggered
by device configuration changes on SNMP traps, certain configuration deployments to a device,
and adding device or rediscovering a device from the Discover Setup – IP dialog box.
Profile-based discovery allows you to define the discovery policy. It provides more flexible ways to
specify IP addresses to discover. It also enables you to discover new devices from already
discovered devices.
Profile-based discovery uses the following steps to build a list of candidate IP addresses to probe.
1. Discovery runs one of the following programs:

• On Windows systems, use ipconfig to find the default gateway.
• On UNIX systems, use netstat -r -n to determine the "seed" routers and extract IP
addresses from the program output.
Discovery adds these IP addresses to the list of candidate IP addresses.

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery overview

3

2. Discovery queries the database to retrieve the IP address for each previously discovered
device and adds these IP addresses to the list of candidate IP addresses.
3. Discovery adds the IP addresses from the IP address file to the list of candidate addresses.
4. As the discovery cycle proceeds, discovery adds addresses from the ping sweep address
ranges to the list of candidate addresses.
5. Discovery searches for neighbors of a discovered device using the information located in the
device's SNMP Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP), Cisco
Discovery Protocol (CDP), and Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) tables. To search for
neighbors, you must configure discovery to search for neighbor addresses (refer to
“Configuring advanced discovery profile preferences” on page 78).
After creating the list of candidate IP addresses, discovery uses multiple threads to probe devices.
You can define how many threads can be used at one time. Threads operate in parallel, so
communication to multiple devices occurs simultaneously. Each thread takes one address from the
list of candidate IP addresses and probes it. The first step in probing is to determine whether the
device is reachable or not. Discovery provides two methods to determine reachability. The first
method uses ICMP ping to probe the device. The second method opens a connection to the IP
address (currently to the Telnet port). This serves as a "ping" to confirm that the IP address is
reachable and some device is listening. By default, if the device responds by either accepting or
rejecting the connection, then the connection is closed and discovery continues.
The next step uses SNMP queries. The first query determines whether the device is a IronWare OS
or Network OS device or not. Discovery rotates through a list of candidate SNMP community strings
until it finds one that works. For devices that already exist in the database, the community string
recorded in the database for that device is tried first.
If you configure discovery to search for neighbor addresses (refer to “Configuring advanced
discovery profile preferences” on page 78), the second query scans the device's SNMP ARP table.
Discovery adds any IP address from the ARP table to the list of candidate IP addresses.
Similarly, if you configure discovery to search for neighbor addresses (refer to “Configuring
advanced discovery profile preferences” on page 78), the third query scans the device’s SNMP
LLDP, FDP, and CDP tables. Any neighbor IP address is added to the list of candidate IP addresses
to probe. Discovery adds any IP address from the LLDP, FDP, and CDP tables to the list of candidate
IP addresses.
Discovery also tries to determine the host name of the device by requesting the Management
application server operating system to perform various mappings of the device IP addresses to
host names and host names back to IP addresses, using whatever mechanism the operating
system uses (typically Domain Name Server) to determine the host name for a device.
If discovery determines that the device is reachable and manageable, then discovery uses the full
set of SNMP queries to collect asset information from the device. Discovery then adds or updates
the device in the database and sends notification to other applications.
Rediscovery updates can occur using any of the following methods:

• Lazy polling.
• Adaptive discovery (triggered by snmp traps).
• Manual rediscovery (refer to “IP Rediscovery” on page 108).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

33

3

IP discovery overview

Configuration requirements
Before configuring discovery, obtain the following information:

• SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read-write community strings or SNMPv3 read-write credentials for the
devices to be included in discovery. Make sure that devices you want to manage have the
SNMP credentials configured. For more information, refer to “IP SNMP credentials” on
page 46.

• Device IP addresses and subnets to probe during discovery. For more information, refer to
“Configuring address ranges” on page 66, “Adding user credentials” on page 52, and
“Defining global setting preferences” on page 60.

Discovery of IPv6 addresses
The Management application discovers both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of devices that have the IPv6
MIB objects implemented. The Management application discovers IPv4 addresses of devices
running IPv6 that do not have IPv6 MIB support. For more information, refer to “Defining global
setting preferences” on page 60.

NOTE

IronWare IPv6 devices must support the set of MIBs presented in Table 10 on page 34. To determine
IPv6 MIB object support on the device, refer to the release notes and user documentation for your
IPv6 product.

NOTE
Third-party IPv6 devices must support the set of MIBs presented in Table 11 on page 36.

MIB support
IP discovery requires SNMP management information base (MIB) support on the device for
management information collection. For a list of required MIBs, refer to Table 10 on page 34 or
Table 11 on page 36.

TABLE 10

Required MIB support for IronWare OS devices

IETF standard

MIB name

N/A

Brocade MIB

IEEE 802.1AB

LLDP-MIB

34

Required MIB object

Data collected

lldpObjects.lldpRemoteSystemsData For Layer 2 topology information:
Entire lldpObjects.lldpRemoteSystemsData

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery overview

TABLE 10

3

Required MIB support for IronWare OS devices (Continued)

IETF standard

MIB name

Required MIB object

Data collected

RFC 1213

MIB-II

mib-2.system
mib-2.interfaces.ifTable
mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable

From mib-2.interfaces.ifTable for interface
level information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange
From mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable for IP subnet
information:
• ipAdEntAddr
• ipAdEntNetMask
From mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable for Layer 3
topology information:
• ipForwarding

RFC 2465

IPv6-MIB

ipv6MIBObjects
ipv6NetToMediaTable
ipv6MIBObjects.ipv6AddrTable

From ipv6MIBObjects and
ipv6NetToMediaTable for interface level
information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange
From ipv6MIBObjects.ipv6AddrTable for IP
subnet information:
• ipv6AddrAddress
• ipv6AddrPfxLength

RFC 2863

IF-MIB

ifMIBObjects.ifXTable

From ifMIBObjects.ifXTable for interface level
information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange

RFC 4363

Q-BRIDGE-MIB

dot1qVlan.dot1qPortVlanTable

For VLAN information:
Entire dot1qVlan.dot1qPortVlanTable

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

35

3

IP discovery overview

Table 11 provides a list of MIB support required for third-party devices.

TABLE 11

Required MIB support for third-party devices

IETF standard

MIB name

Required MIB object

Data collected

RFC 1213

MIB-II

mib-2.system
mib-2.interfaces.ifTable
mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable

From mib-2.interfaces.ifTable for interface
level information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange
From mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable for IP subnet
information:
• ipAdEntAddr
• ipAdEntNetMask
From mib-2.ip.ipAddrTable for Layer 3
topology information:
• ipForwarding

RFC 2465

IPv6-MIB

ipv6MIBObjects
ipv6NetToMediaTable
ipv6MIBObjects.ipv6AddrTable

From ipv6MIBObjects and
ipv6NetToMediaTable for interface level
information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange
From ipv6MIBObjects.ipv6AddrTable for IP
subnet information:
• ipv6AddrAddress
• ipv6AddrPfxLength

RFC 2863

IF-MIB

ifMIBObjects.ifXTable

From ifMIBObjects.ifXTable for interface level
information:
• ifName/ifDescr
• ifAlias
• ifType
• ifMtu
• ifSpeed
• ifPhysAddress
• ifAdminStatus
• ifOperStatus
• ifLastChange

36

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VDX/VCS discovery

TABLE 11

3

Required MIB support for third-party devices (Continued)

IETF standard

MIB name

Required MIB object

Data collected

RFC 4133

ENTITY-MIB

entPhysicalTable
entAliasMappingTable (if available)

For module (line card) information:
Entire entPhysicalTable
Entire entAliasMappingTable, if available

RFC 4293

IP-MIB

mib2.ip.ipAddressTable

For ip address and subnet information
ipAddressAddrType
ipAddressAddr
ipAddressIfIndex
ipAddressType
ipAddressPrefix

VDX/VCS discovery
NOTE
Discovery of a VDX device requires Network OS 2.1.0 or later.

NOTE
Discovery a VCS fabric requires that the seed switch must be running Network OS 2.1.0 or later;
however, the fabric can include members running Network OS 2.0.0.

NOTE

VDX/VCS discovery requires read and write IP Discovery privilege. For more information about
privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

NOTE
You must have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user account to discover new
products. For more information about user accounts, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.
Network OS devices can only be discovered from the IP tab. You can discover a standalone VDX or
VCS-enabled devices as well as VCS fabrics. VDX/VCS devices display in the Network Objects,
L2 Topology, Ethernet Fabrics, IP Topology, and VLAN Topology views.
VDX device and VCS fabric discovery uses the Read/Write Login Prompt credentials for
authentication (refer to “Adding user credentials” on page 52). You cannot discover VDX devices
using root level privileges. If you do not provide discovery credentials, the Management application
uses the default switch credentials for the admin account. You can edit the credentials for multiple
VDX/VCS devices when they all have same firmware version (refer to “Editing IP device discovery”
on page 87).
VCS fabrics display in a tree structure with member nodes. When you discover a new fabric and
initial discovery is complete, the fabric automatically tracks the fabric members. Subsequently, if a
member is removed from the fabric, a minus (-) icon displays (see table below) next to the product
icon.

TABLE 12
Device Removed

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

37

3

VDX/VCS discovery

VCS devices use the following to determine reachability:

• Reachable — The VDX/VCS product is online and is accessible by ICMP, Netconf, and SNMP;
therefore, it is reachable.

• Degraded Link — The VDX/VCS product is not accessible by one of the following: ICMP, Netconf,
or SNMP.

• Not Reachable — The VDX/VCS product is offline and is not accessible by any of the following:
ICMP, Netconf, and SNMP.
The following sections detail the VDX/VCS discovery behavior.

Network OS discovery IP address format
You can discover Network OS devices using an IPv4 or IPv6 address. To configure the preferred IP
format for the Management application server to connect with Network OS devices, refer to
“Configuring the preferred IP format” on page 170.
During discovery, if the product has both an IPv4 and IPv6 address, the Management server uses
the preferred address. If a product does not have the preferred address type, the Management
server uses the other IP type. If the Management application is not IPv6 capable, the Management
application cannot discover products with an IPv6 address directly (as a seed switch). The
Management application can discover products with an IPv6 address indirectly when the seed
switch has an IPv4 address.

VCS in-band management interface discovery
You can discover VCS devices using in-band or out-of-band management interfaces. If you
configure a VCS cluster member with both in-band and out-of-band management interfaces, the
Management application uses the in-band management interface to fetch device data and the
member switch displays the in-band management interface IP address in the application. If you do
not configure an in-band management interface, the Management application uses the
out-of-band management interface for data collection.

Mapping VCS in-band management
For VCS device in-band management, you must map the VCS device WWN to the in-band
management interface IP address in the DeviceWWNToIPMap text file; otherwise, discovery fails.
1. Open the in-band mapping file (DeviceWWNToIPMap.txt) in a text editor (such as, Notepad).
The DeviceWWNToIPMap.txt file is located in the Install_Home/conf/discovery/ip directory.
2. Enter the in-band IP addresses you want to include in discovery.
You must use the following format: the device WWN, followed by a space, and then the valid
in-band IP address.
Example

10:00:00:05:33:51:62:42 172.26.20.10
# DeviceWWNToIPMap.txt
# In-Band Management IP address should be mapped to Device WWN.
# The format consists of two columns per line, separated by white space.
# Each column consists of Device WWN followed by white space and followed by
In-band IP address

38

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VDX/VCS discovery

3

#
# A sample entry:
# 10:00:00:05:33:51:62:42 172.26.20.10
#
# Changes to this file do not require restarting the management server.

3. Select File > Save.

Standalone discovery
• When you discover a VDX device that is not VCS-enabled, it displays as an individual L2 (DCB)
device.

• When you enable VCS mode on a discovered VDX device, after rediscovery the VDX displays as
a VCS fabric.

VCS fabric discovery
NOTE

Professional edition can only discover a VCS fabric with one member.

NOTE
IP Base edition can only discover a VCS fabric with two members.

• When you discover a VDX device that is VCS-enabled and is not connected to other
VCS-enabled devices, it displays as a VCS fabric with one member.

• When you discover a VDX device that is VCS-enabled and is connected to other VCS-enabled
devices, it displays as a VCS fabric with all connected VCS-enabled devices as members of the
fabric.

• When you discover any member in a VCS fabric through individual IP device discovery, that
member acts as the seed switch and discovers all other members in the VCS fabric. The
principal switch of the VCS fabric displays as a VCS fabric. The VCS fabric members display as
individual L2 (DCB) devices.

• When you discover multiple members in a VCS fabric through profile discovery, the principal
switch acts as the seed switch and discovers all other members (not included in profile
discovery) in the VCS fabric. The principal switch of the VCS fabric displays as a VCS fabric. The
VCS fabric members display as individual L2 (DCB) devices.

VCS fabric rediscovery
Rediscovery is the refreshing of the asset data for the selected product. Rediscovery of a
VCS-enabled device or VCS fabric uses the following behavior:

• If you select a fabric seed switch, rediscovery refreshes the fabric membership information.
• If you select a fabric member, rediscovery refreshes the fabric member’s asset data.
• If you select a missing fabric member, rediscovery results in the discovery of new fabric or
discovery of a standalone switch (dependent on what happened to the disconnected member).
You can also delete missing fabric members from discovery (refer to “Deleting IP devices from
discovery” on page 93).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

39

3

VDX/VCS discovery

NOTE

If you do not have the All IP Products AOR in your user account, you cannot rediscover missing
fabric members.

Seed switch failover
The Management application uses the seed switch to discover other members in the VCS fabric.
When you discover devices through individual discovery, the seed switch is the first member you
discover in the VCS fabric. When you discover devices through profile discovery, the seed switch is
the principal switch in the VCS fabric.

• If VCS mode is disabled on the seed switch, the Management application triggers rediscovery
of the other members in the VCS fabric and selects another member to act as the seed switch.

• If the seed switch becomes unreachable, the Management application selects another
member of the VCS fabric to act as the seed switch.

• If the seed switch becomes unreachable from the Management application and looses
connectivity with the VCS fabric, the Management application selects another member of the
VCS fabric to act as the seed switch.

• If the seed switch looses connectivity with the VCS fabric but is still reachable from the
Management application, the VCS fabric splits into two fabrics. When this occurs, the
Management application selects another member of the VCS fabric to act as the seed switch
and manages the original seed switch as a separate VCS fabric. When two fabrics regain
connectivity, the Management application uses the original seed switch as the seed switch for
the merged VCS fabric.

VCS fabric split and merge
• If the seed switch looses connectivity with the VCS fabric but is still reachable from the
Management application, the Management application selects another member of the
VCS fabric to act as the seed switch and manages the original seed switch as a separate
VCS fabric.
When the original seed switch rejoins the original VCS fabric, the Management application
uses the original seed switch as the seed switch for the merged VCS fabric.

• If a member (not the seed switch) looses connectivity with the VCS fabric but is still reachable
from the Management application, the VCS fabric splits into two fabrics. The Management
application treats the member that lost connectivity as a separate VCS fabric.
When the member rejoins the original VCS fabric, the Management application uses the
VCS fabric that was discovered first as the merged VCS fabric.

Network OS 2.0 device limitations
VDX devices running Network OS 2.0.0 cannot be discovered directly. However, if you discover a
VCS fabric (running Network OS 2.1.0 or later) that contains VDX devices (running Network OS
2.0.0), the Network OS 2.0.0 devices are included in discovery of the fabric and display on the
topology map. Network OS 2.0.0 devices have the following limitations:

• Display as unreachable members in the fabric.
• Assets (ports, LAGs, VLANs, and so on) are not collected.

40

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Logical chassis cluster mode discovery

3

• TRILL links between Network OS 2.1.0 devices and Network OS 2.0.0 devices do not display.

Logical chassis cluster mode discovery
Logical chassis cluster mode requires Network OS 4.0 or later and is one of two types of VCS
modes. In logical chassis cluster mode, both the data and configuration paths are distributed. The
entire cluster can be configured from the principal node. The other VCS mode is fabric cluster
mode, in which the data path for nodes is distributed, but the configuration path is not distributed
and each node keeps its configuration database independently. The generic term VCS mode
applies to both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis mode unless otherwise stated.
The State column of the Discover Setup - IP Dialog shown in Figure 7 is applicable only to nodes
that are members of a logical chassis cluster. The possible node states are described later in this
section.

FIGURE 7

Discovery Setup - IP dialog box with node state for logical chassis cluster

Logical chassis cluster discovery includes the following behavior:

• Manual- or profile-based discovery is the same as for a cluster in fabric cluster mode.
• Uses the IP address of any member of the logical chassis cluster for discovery.
• Sets the cluster IP address to the IP address of the principal node.
NOTE

You can change the principal node for the cluster by running the logical-chassis
principal-priority command from the NOS prompt. For more information, refer to the Network
OS Command Reference.

• Principal-switch failover does not occur if the cluster is unstable (for example, if the chassis
had been disabled for maintenance) because refresh collection will fail.

• If the cluster is configured with a virtual IP address before its discovery, and then discovery is
initiated, the cluster IP displays the virtual IP address instead of the IP address of the principal
node.

• If the cluster is configured with a virtual IP address after it is discovered by the Management
application, the virtual IP address is collected and saved in the database for the next lazy
polling or next adaptive collection.

• If another switch becomes the principal switch, the Management application sets the cluster IP
address to that of the new principal switch at the next lazy polling or next adaptive collection.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

41

3

Logical chassis cluster mode discovery

• The State column in the Discover Setup - IP dialog shown in Figure 7 applies only to nodes that
are in logical chassis mode. Possible states are:

-

Online—A node that is currently connected and operational.

-

Offline—A cluster member node that cannot be reached by the primary cluster node.

-

Rejoining—A node that is in the process of rejoining its cluster.

-

Replacing—A node that is being replaced.

On discovery, only online members are considered active cluster members. The
Management application server collects the device, port, and LAG information of active
cluster members. The the Management application client displays the member node as a
cluster member in the Ethernet Fabrics topology.
On refresh, if the member was an active member of a cluster and is now offline, the
member is marked as missing. If the member is not online after three consecutive short
ticks, auto-discovery gets initiated. If auto-chasing fails, the member remains missing.
On refresh, if the member was an active member of the cluster and is now rejoining, then
the member is marked as missing. If the member is not online after three consecutive
short ticks, auto discovery gets initiated. If auto chasing fails, the member remains
missing.
On refresh, if a member node is in the Replacing state, the member is shown as missing.
If the member is in the Replacing state for more than three consecutive short ticks,
auto-discovery gets initiated. If auto-chasing fails, the member remains missing.

Administratively removing a node from a logical chassis cluster
You can remove a node from a logical chassis cluster by using the Network OS command line
interface. For instructions, refer to the Network OS Administrator’s Guide and the Network OS
Command Reference, versions 4.0 or later.
Once the node is removed, all configurations corresponding to that node are removed from the
cluster configuration database.
The deleted node gets rebooted automatically and boots in VCS-disabled mode.
The deleted node also gets marked as missing in the cluster.
The Management application initiates auto-discovery immediately, and the deleted node gets
rediscovered in its current state.
As an example, Figure 8 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box before the administrator removes
a node from the cluster.

FIGURE 8

42

Discover Setup - IP dialog box before removal of node

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Logical chassis cluster mode discovery

3

Figure 9 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box after the administrator has removed the node
with the IP address of 172.26.5.130 from its logical chassis cluster.

FIGURE 9

Discover Setup - IP dialog box after disabling the node from logical chassis cluster

Figure 10 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box after The Management application has
performed rediscovery. The node with the IP address of 172.26.5.130 is shown as a degraded link.

FIGURE 10

Discover Setup - IP dialog box after rediscovery

How the Management application handles a cluster
mode change
In Network OS release 4.0, an administrator can change the mode of a cluster from fabric cluster
mode to logical chassis cluster mode, and vice versa. For instructions, refer to the Network OS
Administrator’s Guide and the Network OS Command Reference.

NOTE

All cluster-specific configurations are lost during a cluster-mode change.
On refresh collection, the Management application detects the mode change and retains all
database entries related to the cluster.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

43

3

HyperEdge stack discovery

HyperEdge stack discovery
HyperEdge stacks must contain at least one ICX 6610 device and one ICX 6650 device and all
stacking members must be running IronWare 8.0 or later (the exact same version). HyperEdge
stacks support up to 8 units in stack. Note that you do not recieve an error or warning message
when unit number exceeds 8. However, the HyperEdge stack may stop functioning.
For stacking between ICX 6610 devices, use the 40 Gbps Ethernet ports as the stacking ports.
For stacking between ICX 6610 and ICX 6450 devices, use the 10 Gbps Ethernet ports as the
stacking ports. The 10 Gbps Ethernet ports must have the POD license enabled with 10 Gbps
speed. On the ICX 6610 device, you must configure a 10 Gbps Ethernet port as a peripheral port.
You can connect the ICX 6450 device 10 Gbps Ethernet port to the ICX 6610 device peripheral
port.
For stacking between ICX 6450 devices, use the 10 Gbps Ethernet ports as the stacking ports.
If the ICX 6610 device have full Layer 2 and Layer 3 features, HyperEdge stacking extends the
ICX 6610 device Layer 3 and other advanced capabilities to the ICX 6450 device to process
packets going to ICX 6450 ports.
For HyperEdge stacking management, the master/active and standby units must be the ICX 6610
device. Management of the stacking device is through the master unit only. This includes SNMP,
sFlow, syslog, tftp, telnet and ssh traffic. The management port on each member unit (except the
master unit) of an HpyerEdge stack, is not visible and does not function.

Configuring IP profile discovery
NOTE

You must have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user account to discover new
products. For more information about user accounts, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.
To configure profile discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.

44

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring IP profile discovery

FIGURE 11

3

Discover Setup - IP dialog box

2. Click the Global Settings tab.
a.

To set SNMP credentials, refer to “IP SNMP credentials” on page 46.

b.

To configure default user names and passwords, refer to “Default IP user credentials” on
page 52.

c.

To configure global setting preferences, refer to “Defining global setting preferences” on
page 60.

3. Click the Profiles tab.
a.

To create a discovery profile, refer to “IP discovery profiles” on page 64.

b.

To include and exclude product types, refer to “IP Object identifier filters” on page 58.

c.

To include and exclude devices and enable ping sweep, refer to “Configuring address
ranges” on page 66.

d.

To configure profile preferences, refer to “Configuring advanced discovery profile
preferences” on page 78.

4. Click Start to start discovery. To run profile discovery, refer to “Starting discovery manually” on
page 80.
5. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
6. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

45

3

Configuring IP simple discovery

Configuring IP simple discovery
NOTE

You must have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user account to discover new
products. For more information about user accounts, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.
To configure simple discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. To add individual devices, refer to “Adding an IP device to discovery” on page 84.
3. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

IP SNMP credentials
NOTE
The Management application supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.
The Management application requires SNMP credentials to obtain information from devices and to
deploy configurations to devices. Because different devices may have different credentials,
discovery can store many sets of credentials to make sure that the correct credentials are available
when contacting a device.
Two types of credentials can be used for discovery: SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read-write community
strings and SNMPv3 read-write credentials. If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is enabled on a device, use
read-write community strings. If SNMPv3 is enabled on a device, use SNMPv3 read-write
credentials.
When a device is contacted, discovery tries the credentials in the order that they are listed on the
SNMP tab on the Global Setting tab of the Discover Setup - IP dialog box until it finds one that
matches the credentials on the device. Discovery tries the SNMPv3 credentials first. If none of the
SNMPv3 credentials work, discovery tries the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c credentials. Discovery must
detect the read only credentials to proceed to the read-write credentials. If discovery does not
detect any read-write credential, the device may still be discovered; however, all write operations
through SNMP (such as configure device) do not execute properly. When a match is found, the
device becomes discovered to the Management application, and its properties are saved in the
database so that it can be managed by the Management application.
Devices not discovered through profile-based discovery can be added individually. For more
information, refer to “Adding an IP device to discovery” on page 84.

Adding SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c credentials
If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is enabled, or if you want to use community strings to gain access to the
device, define community strings.
To add a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write community string, complete the following steps.

46

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP SNMP credentials

3

1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.

FIGURE 12

SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c credentials

4. Enter a unique label to identify the community string in the Display Label field of the Add/Edit
Read-Write Community Strings list.
This label can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
5. Enter the unique community string in the Community Strings field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.
6. Click the right arrow button to add the read-write community string to the Selected Read-Write
Community Strings list.

NOTE

Discovery uses the read-write community string to detect both SNMP read and SNMP write
community strings.
If the devices use multiple community strings, use the Up or Down buttons to place the most
commonly used community string at the top of the Selected Read-Write Community Strings list
to make discovery run more efficiently.

NOTE

If the Selected Read-Write Community Strings list does not contain any community strings, the
Management application uses the "public" and "private" community strings.
7.

Click Apply to save your work.

8. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
9. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

47

3

IP SNMP credentials

Adding SNMPv3 credentials
To add SNMPv3 read-write credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.

FIGURE 13

SNMPv3 credentials

4. Enter a unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field of the Add/Edit
SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials area.
This label can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
5. Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.
6. Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None
• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
7.

Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password displays as asterisks.

8. Select one of the following protocols from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and response
packets.
9. Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.

48

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP SNMP credentials

3

The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password displays as asterisks.
10. Click the right arrow button to add the SNMPv3 read-write credentials to the Selected SNMPv3
Read-Write Credentials list.

NOTE

If the devices use multiple credentials, use the Up or Down buttons to place the most
commonly used credentials at the top of the Selected SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials list to
make discovery run more efficiently.
11. Click Apply to save your work.
12. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
13. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c credentials
To edit a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write community string, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.
4. Select the community string you want to edit in the Selected Read-Write Community Strings list
and click the left arrow button.
The selected credentials display in the Add/Edit Read-Write Community Strings area.
5. Enter a unique label to identify the community string in the Display Label field the Add/Edit
Read-Write Community Strings area.
This label can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
6. Enter the unique community string in the Community Strings field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.
7.

Click the right arrow button to add the read-write community string to the Selected Read-Write
Community Strings list.

NOTE

If the devices use multiple community strings, use the Up or Down buttons to place the most
commonly used community string at the top of the Selected Read-Write Community Strings list
to make discovery run more efficiently.

NOTE

If the Selected Read-Write Community Strings list does not contain any community strings, the
Management application uses the "public" and "private" community strings.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

49

3

IP SNMP credentials

8. Click Apply to save your work.
9. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
10. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing SNMPv3 credentials
To edit SNMPv3 read-write credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.
4. Select the SNMPv3 credentials you want to edit in the Selected SNMPv3 Read-Write
Credentials list and click the left arrow button.
The selected credentials display in the Add/Edit SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials area.
5. Enter a unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field of the Add/Edit
SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials area.
This label can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
6. Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.
7.

Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None
• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
8. Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.
9. Select one of the following protocols from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and response
packets.
10. Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.
11. Click the right arrow button to add the SNMPv3 read-write credentials to the Selected SNMPv3
Read-Write Credentials list.

50

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP SNMP credentials

3

NOTE

If the devices use multiple credentials, use the Up or Down buttons to place the most
commonly used credentials at the top of the Selected SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials list to
make discovery run more efficiently.
12. Click Apply to save your work.
13. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
14. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Reordering SNMP credentials in the list
Discovery probes the network for devices, according to the order in the list of SNMPv3 read-write
credentials or SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write community strings. Discovery uses the first item to
find devices that are associated with those credentials or community strings, then continues down
the list. Therefore, place the most commonly used credentials or community strings first.
To rearrange the SNMPv3 read-write credentials or SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write community
strings lists, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.
4. Select an entry in the Selected SNMPv3 Read-Write Credentials or Selected Read-Write
Community Strings list and use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the entries.
5. Click Apply to save your work.
6. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
7.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Deleting SNMP credentials from the list
To delete an entry from the SNMPv3 read-write credentials or SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write
community strings lists, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the SNMP tab.
4. Choose one of the following options:

• Select the SNMPv3 read-write credentials you want to delete in the Selected SNMPv3
Read-Write Credentials list and click the left arrow button.

• Select the SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write community string you want to delete in the
Selected Read-Write Community Strings list and click the left arrow button.
5. Click Apply to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

51

3

Default IP user credentials

6. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
7.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Default IP user credentials
The Management application uses default user names and passwords to access devices when
contacting these devices through the command line interface (CLI) on the network. You can enter a
list of default names and passwords in the Management application before running discovery.
Discovery uses this list to contact devices to determine the correct user name and password for the
device. The first time discovery contacts a device, the Management application enters the default
names and passwords for the device into the Management application database. This feature
saves you the trouble of entering authentication passwords for every newly discovered device.

NOTE

Discovery does not remove an invalid user name or password from the device information unless it
is able to replace it with a valid one.
The Management application groups default user names and passwords by the following password
types:

• Read/Write Login Prompt — The login prompt the device uses when logging in by Telnet or CLI
to the device.

• Read/Write Enable Prompt — The enable prompt the device uses in CLI mode to go to device
enable mode.

• Enable Super User — The super user enable password configured on the device for Telnet
login. You can configure the super user enable password by using the enable
super-user-password CLI command. The super user enable password can be used to
authenticate users with the super user privilege configured on the device.
You can define more than one password for each password type. Discovery uses the passwords in
the order they are listed when it probes the devices.

Adding user credentials
To add default user names and passwords, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.

52

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Default IP user credentials

FIGURE 14

3

Default Passwords

4. Enter a login prompt user name and password by selecting Read/Write Login Prompt from the
Credential Type list and completing the following steps.

FIGURE 15
a.

Read/Write Login Prompt

Enter a unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

b.

Enter the user name in the User ID field.

c.

Enter the user password in the Password field.

d.

Click the right arrow button.

e.

If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to
place the most commonly used at the top of the Login Prompt list to make discovery run
more efficiently.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

53

3

Default IP user credentials

5. Enter an enable prompt user name and password by selecting Read/Write Enable Prompt from
the Credential Type list and completing the following steps.

FIGURE 16
a.

Read/Write Enable Prompt

Enter a unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

b.

Enter the user name in the User ID field.

c.

Enter the user password in the Password field.

d.

Click the right arrow button.

e.

If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to
place the most commonly used at the top of the Enable Prompt list to make discovery run
more efficiently.

6. Enter a super user password by selecting Enable Super User from the Credential Type list and
completing the following steps.

FIGURE 17
a.

Enable Super User

Enter a unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

7.

54

b.

Enter the super user password in the Password field.

c.

Click the right arrow button.

d.

If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to
place the most commonly used at the top of the Enable Super User list to make discovery
run more efficiently.

Click Apply to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Default IP user credentials

3

8. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
9. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing login prompt user credentials
To edit a login prompt user name and password, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.
4. Select Read/Write Login Prompt from the Credential Type list.
5. Select the user credential entry you want to edit in the Login Prompt List and click the left
arrow button.
The selected credentials display in the Add/edit Login Prompt area.
6. Edit the unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
7.

Edit the user name in the User ID field.

8. Edit the user password in the Password field.
9. Click the right arrow button.
10. If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to place
the most commonly used at the top of the Login Prompt List to make discovery run more
efficiently.
11. Click Apply to save your work.
12. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
13. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing enable prompt user credentials
To edit an enable prompt user name and password, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.
4. Select Read/Write Enable Prompt from the Credential Type list.
5. Select the user credential entry you want to edit in the Login Prompt List and click the left
arrow button.
The selected credentials display in the Add/edit Login Prompt area.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

55

3

Default IP user credentials

6. Edit the unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
7.

Edit the user name in the User ID field.

8. Edit the user password in the Password field.
9. Click the right arrow button.
10. If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to place
the most commonly used at the top of the Login Prompt List to make discovery run more
efficiently.
11. Click Apply to save your work.
12. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
13. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing enable super user credentials
To edit an enable super user, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.
4. Select Enable Super User from the Credential Type list.
5. Select the user credential entry you want to edit in the Login Prompt List and click the left
arrow button.
The selected credentials display in the Add/edit Login Prompt area.
6. Edit the unique label to identify the credentials in the Display Label field.
This label can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
7.

Edit the super user password in the Password field.

8. Click the right arrow button.
9. If the devices use multiple user names and passwords, use the Up or Down buttons to place
the most commonly used at the top of the Login Prompt List to make discovery run more
efficiently.
10. Click Apply to save your work.
11. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
12. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

56

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Default IP user credentials

3

Reordering user credentials in the list
Discovery tries the user credentials in order until one set of credentials is found that works, so
place the most common ones first.
To rearrange the user credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.
4. Select one of the following password types from the Credential Type list:

• Read/Write Login Prompt
• Read/Write Enable Prompt
• Enable Super User
5. Select an entry in the Login Prompt List and use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the
entries.
6. Click Apply to save your work.
7.

Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

8. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Deleting user credentials from the list
To delete an entry from the SNMPv3 read-write credentials or SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c read-write
community strings lists, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Default Passwords tab.
4. Select one of the following password types from the Credential Type list:

• Read/Write Login Prompt
• Read/Write Enable Prompt
• Enable Super User
5. Select an entry in the Login Prompt List and click the left arrow button.
6. Click Apply to save your work.
7.

Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

8. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

57

3

IP Object identifier filters

IP Object identifier filters
The object identifier (OID) filter allows you to select which product types to include or exclude from
discovery.
If you add a third-party product OID to the Included Product Types list during discovery and later
move it to the Excluded Product Types list, note that you will not be able to discover a new device
with that product OID. However, other functionality such as traps, fault management, statistics,
performance data collection, product polling for health monitoring and so on continue to run as
with any other discovered product.

Including product types
To include third-party product types in discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the OID Filter tab.

FIGURE 18

OID Filter tab

4. Select the Discover third party products check box to include third-party devices in discovery.

58

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Object identifier filters

3

5. In the top Add/Edit Product Types area, choose one of the following options:

• Enter the device’s sysObjectID you want to include in the Product Type list.
• Select an existing device sysObjectID from the Product Type list.
Table 13 lists the default third party product types.

TABLE 13

Default third-party product types

Product sysObjectID

Vendor

.1.3.6.1.4.1.9.

Cisco

.1.3.6.1.4.1.4874.

Juniper

.1.3.6.1.4.1.2636.1.

Juniper

6. Click the right arrow button to add the product type to the Included Product Types list.
The Included Product Types list displays the third-party device sysObjectIDs to include in
discovery. If this list is empty, discovery includes any device with a valid sysObjectID. If a
sysObjectID in this list is also in the Excluded Product Types list, discovery excludes it.
7.

Click Apply to save your work.

8. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
9. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Excluding product types
To exclude third-party product types from discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the OID Filter tab.
4. In the bottom Add/Edit Product Types area, choose one of the following options:

• Enter the device’s sysObjectID you want to include in the Product Type list.
• Select an existing device sysObjectID from the Product Type list.
Table 13 lists the default third party product types.
5. Click the right arrow button to add the product type to the Excluded Product Types list.
The Excluded Product Types list displays the third-party device sysObjectiDs to exclude from
discovery. If a sysObjectID in this list is also in the Included Product Types list, discovery
excludes it.
6. Click Apply to save your work.
7.

Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

8. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

59

3

Defining global setting preferences

Deleting product types from the list
To delete an entry from the Included Product Types or Excluded Product Type list, complete the
following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the OID Filter tab.
4. Select an entry from the Included Product Types or Excluded Product Type list and click the left
arrow button.
5. Click Apply to save your work.
6. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
7.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Defining global setting preferences
To define global setting preferences, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Preferences tab.

FIGURE 19

Preferences tab

4. Enter a value (from 32 through 10000) for the number of live discovery log messages to store
on the server in the Discovery Log Size field.
The default is 2500.

60

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Defining global setting preferences

3

5. Select one of the following Ping Type options:

• ICMP Ping (default). Go to step 7.
• TCP Ping. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the TCP port number (from 1 through 65536) in the TCP Ping Port field.
The default is 23.
7.

Enter the number of times (from 0 through 10) to ping the device when ping is unsuccessful in
the Ping Retries field.
The default is 0.

8. Select the Enable lazy polling check box to periodically rediscover all devices in the database.

NOTE

This setting cannot be disabled for DCB switches.
The lazy polling function sends login and log messages to the Master Log and the switch
console. If you are receiving too many messages due to lazy polling, clear the check box to
disable off lazy polling.
You cannot change the lazy polling interval for IronWare OS or Network OS devices. The lazy
polling interval is based on the size of your network. For IronWare OS devices, default values
are as follows:

• Small: 2 minutes
• Medium: 15 minutes
• Large: 30 minutes
For Network OS devices, default values are as follows:

• Small: 15 minutes
• Medium: 30 minutes
• Large: 60 minutes
9. Select the Enable event triggered polling check box to enable adaptive discovery on the
predefined SNMP traps.

NOTE

This setting cannot be disabled for DCB switches.

NOTE

Network OS devices must be running version 4.0 or later to enable this setting.

NOTE

For Network OS devices, adaptive discovery is also performed for Syslog events.
10. Select the Enable password validation on rediscover check box to enable CLI user credential
validation when rediscovering devices.
11. Select the Perform address to name lookups (e.g. with DNS) check box to configure discovery
to use the local DNS server for address-to-name resolution.
12. Select the Prefer loopback addresses for products check box to enable discovery to choose an
IP address associated with a router loopback interface to be the router primary IP address.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

61

3

Configuring event-based collection

Clear the check box to configure discovery to select the original IP address used to discover the
device.
13. Select the Import SSL Certificate and Key check box to enable discovery to download and
synchronize certificates from SSL capable Application products.
14. Choose one of the following options:

• Select the Discard all old topology information for each product discovered option to
delete all existing device topology data when running discovery.

• Select the Retain lost links __ hours (1 minimum) option to configure how long to retain
lost links on the topology maps and enter a value (from 1 through 9999) in the field. The
default is 168 hours.
15. Click Apply to save your work.
16. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
17. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Configuring event-based collection
If you discover more than 550 IP products, the Management application automatically turns off
event-based collection. To restart event-based collection, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Reduce the managed count by completing the following steps.
a.

Select the IP devices you want to remove from discovery in the Discovered Products table.
Select multiple devices by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one device.

NOTE

You cannot delete an active member from a VCS fabric.

b.

Click Delete.

3. Turn on event-based collection by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the Global Settings tab.

b.

Click the Preferences tab.

c.

Select the Enable lazy polling check box to periodically rediscover all devices in the
database.

NOTE

This settings cannot be disabled for DCB switches.

d.

62

Select the Enable event triggered polling check box to enable adaptive discovery on the
predefined SNMP traps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring event-based collection

3

NOTE

This settings cannot be disabled for DCB switches.

NOTE

Network OS devices must be running version 4.0 or later to enable this setting.

NOTE

For Network OS devices, adaptive discovery is also performed for Syslog events.
The lazy polling function sends login and log messages to the Master Log and the switch
console. If you are receiving too many messages due to lazy polling, clear the check box to
disable off lazy polling.
You cannot change the lazy polling interval for IronWare OS or Network OS devices. The
lazy polling interval is based on the size of your network. For IronWare OS devices, default
values are as follows:

• Small: 2 minutes
• Medium: 15 minutes
• Large: 30 minutes
For Network OS devices, default values are as follows:

• Small: 15 minutes
• Medium: 30 minutes
• Large: 60 minutes
e.

Click Apply to save your work.

4. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

63

3

IP discovery profiles

IP discovery profiles
NOTE

You cannot configure a discovery profile if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of
responsibility) in your user account.
A discovery profile contains the settings you configure when discovery is run. These settings
include address range parameters, ping sweep parameters, SNMP settings, default passwords,
and other settings. The Management application is shipped with a default discovery profile named
“Default”. You can create more than one discovery profile. You can select one discovery profile to
run automatically at startup. After startup, one or more profiles can be run consecutively.

Configuring a discovery profile
NOTE

You cannot configure a discovery profile if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of
responsibility) in your user account.
To configure a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab

FIGURE 20

64

Profile tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

3. Click Add.
A new row (named “new_profile”) displays in the Discovery Profiles table.
4. Click “new_profile” in the Profile Name field to enter a unique name for the profile.
This name can be from 1 through 255 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
5. Click the Address Ranges tab to configure address ranges for the profile.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.
6. Click the Scheduling tab to configure a discovery schedule for the profile.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.
7.

Click the Preferences tab to configure preferences for the profile.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring advanced discovery profile preferences” on
page 78.

8. Click the Global Settings tab.
To set SNMP credentials, refer to “IP SNMP credentials” on page 46.
To configure default user names and passwords, refer to “Default IP user credentials” on
page 52.
To configure global setting preferences, refer to “Defining global setting preferences” on
page 60.
9. Click Apply to save your changes.
10. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
11. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Duplicating a discovery profile
NOTE

You cannot duplicate a discovery profile if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of
responsibility) in your user account.
To duplicate a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile you want to copy and click Duplicate.
A new row (named “Copy of profile_name”) displays in the Discovery Profiles table
4. Click “Copy of profile_name” in the Profile Name field to enter a unique name for the profile.
This name can be from 1 through 255 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all printable
ASCII characters.
5. Click the Address Ranges tab to configure address ranges for the profile.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

65

3

IP discovery profiles

For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66 or “Editing
address ranges” on page 70.
6. Click the Scheduling tab to configure a discovery schedule for the profile.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.
7.

Click the Preferences tab to configure preferences for the profile.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring advanced discovery profile preferences” on
page 78.

8. Click the Global Settings tab.
To set SNMP credentials, refer to “IP SNMP credentials” on page 46.
To configure default user names and passwords, refer to “Default IP user credentials” on
page 52.
To configure global setting preferences, refer to “Defining global setting preferences” on
page 60.
9. Click Apply to save your changes.
10. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
11. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Configuring address ranges
To include and exclude addresses from profile discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile you want to edit in the Discovery Profiles table and click the Address Ranges
tab.
4. Include an address range by choosing one of the following options:

• To include an address range using the CIDR subnet format, refer to “Adding CIDR subnet
addresses” on page 67.

• To include an address range using the subnet format, refer to “Adding subnet addresses”
on page 68.

• To include an address range using the address range format, refer to “Adding IP
addresses” on page 68.

• To include all addresses, select all addresses from the Entry Type list.
5. Select the Also perform ping sweep check box to perform ping sweep on the address range.
6. Click the right arrow button to add the address range to the Included IP Addresses list.
7.

Exclude an address range by choosing one of the following options:

• To exclude an address range using the CIDR subnet format, refer to “Excluding CIDR
subnet addresses” on page 69.

• To exclude an address range using the subnet format, refer to “Excluding subnet
addresses” on page 69.

66

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

• To exclude an address range using the address range format, refer to “Excluding IP
addresses” on page 70.

NOTE

To exclude a VCS fabric, you must add all members of the VCS fabric to the exclude list.
8. Click the right arrow button to add the address range to the Excluded IP Addresses list.
9. Click Apply to save your changes.
10. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
11. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Adding CIDR subnet addresses
To add CIDR subnet addresses (IPv4 and IPv6), complete the following steps.
1. Select CIDR Subnet from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 21

Include CIDR Subnet

2. Enter the IP address in the IP Address field.
3. Enter the number of subnet mask bits in the Subnet Mask Bits field.
For IPv4, the number of subnet mask bits is from 0 through 32.
For IPv6, the number of subnet mask bits is from 0 through128.
4. To exclude an address range using the CIDR Subnet format, refer to “Excluding CIDR subnet
addresses” on page 69.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

67

3

IP discovery profiles

Adding subnet addresses
To add subnet addresses (IPv4 only), complete the following steps.
1. Select Subnet from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 22

Include Subnet

2. Enter the IP address in the IP Address field.
3. Enter the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
4. To exclude an address range using the Subnet format, refer to “Excluding subnet addresses”
on page 69.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

Adding IP addresses
To add an IP address range (IPv4 and IPv6), complete the following steps.
1. Select IP Address from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 23

Include Address Range

2. Enter the first IP address in the range in the first IP Address field.
3. Enter the last IP address in the range in the second IP Address field.
4. To exclude an address range using the IP Address format, refer to “Excluding IP addresses” on
page 70.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

68

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

Excluding CIDR subnet addresses
To exclude CIDR subnet addresses (IPv4 and IPv6), complete the following steps.
1. Select CIDR Subnet from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 24

Exclude CIDR Subnet

2. Enter the IP address in the IP Address field.
3. Enter the subnet mask bits in the Subnet Mask Bits field.
For IPv4, the subnet mask bits is between 0 and 32.
For IPv6, the subnet mask bits is between 0 and 128.
4. To include an address range using the CIDR Subnet format, refer to “Adding CIDR subnet
addresses” on page 67.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

Excluding subnet addresses
To exclude subnet addresses (IPv4 only), complete the following steps.
1. Select Subnet from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 25

Exclude Subnet

2. Enter the IP address in the IP Address field.
3. Enter the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
4. To include an address range using the Subnet format, refer to “Adding subnet addresses” on
page 68.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

69

3

IP discovery profiles

Excluding IP addresses
NOTE

To exclude a VCS fabric, you must add all members of the VCS fabric to the exclude list.
To exclude an IP address range (IPv4 and IPv6), complete the following steps.
1. Select IP Address from the Entry Type list.

FIGURE 26

Exclude Address Range

2. Enter the first IP address in the range in the first IP Address field.
3. Enter the last IP address in the range in the second IP Address field.
4. To include an address range using the Address Range format, refer to “Adding IP addresses”
on page 68.
5. To finish configuring the address ranges, return to “Configuring address ranges” on page 66.

Editing address ranges
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile you want to edit in the Discovery Profiles table and click the Address Ranges
tab.
4. To edit an included address range, select the address range you want to edit in the Included IP
Addresses list.
5. Click the left arrow button to display the address range details in the top Add/Edit IP Addresses
area.
6. Edit the included address range by choosing one of the following options:

• To edit the included addresses using the CIDR subnet format, refer to “Editing CIDR subnet
addresses” on page 71.

• To edit the included addresses using the subnet format, refer to “Editing subnet
addresses” on page 71.

• To edit the included addresses using the address range format, refer to “Editing IP
addresses” on page 71.
7.

70

Select the Also perform ping sweep check box to perform ping sweep on the address range.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

8. To edit an excluded address range, select the address range you want to edit in the Excluded
IP Addresses list.
9. Click the left arrow button to display the address range details in the bottom Add/Edit IP
Addresses area.
10. Edit the excluded address range by choosing one of the following options:

• To edit the excluded addresses using the CIDR subnet format, refer to “Editing CIDR
subnet addresses” on page 71.

• To edit the excluded addresses using the subnet format, refer to “Editing subnet
addresses” on page 71.

• To edit the excluded addresses using the address range format, refer to “Editing IP
addresses” on page 71.
11. Click the right arrow button to add the address range to the Excluded IP Addresses list.
12. Click Apply to save your changes.
13. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
14. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing CIDR subnet addresses
To edit the CIDR subnet address (IPv4 and IPv6) range, complete the following steps.
1. Change the IP address in the IP Address field.
2. Change the number of subnet mask bits in the Subnet Mask Bits field.
For IPv4, the number of subnet mask bits is from 0 through 32.
For IPv6, the number of subnet mask bits is from 0 through 128.
3. To finish editing the address ranges, return to “Editing address ranges” on page 70.

Editing subnet addresses
To edit the subnet address (IPv4 only) range, complete the following steps.
1. Change the IP address in the IP Address field.
2. Change the subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
3. To finish editing the address ranges, return to “Editing address ranges” on page 70.

Editing IP addresses
To edit the IP address range (IPv4 and IPv6), complete the following steps.
1. Change the first IP address in the range in the first IP Address field.
2. Change the last IP address in the range in the second IP Address field.
3. To finish editing the address ranges, return to “Editing address ranges” on page 70.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

71

3

IP discovery profiles

Scheduling discovery
You can create multiple schedules (to a maximum of 32) for each profile. When it is time for a
schedule to run, discovery handles schedules in the following manner:

• If discovery is already running for the profile, the scheduled discovery drops.
• If discovery is already running for a different profile, the scheduled discovery is queued. Once
all discovery jobs in the queue finish, the scheduled discovery runs.

• If no discovery is running, the scheduled discovery starts.
To schedule a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile you want to edit in the Discovery Profiles table and click the Scheduling tab.

FIGURE 27

Scheduling tab

4. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which discovery runs for the
profile:

• To configure discovery to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time discovery
schedule” on page 73.

• To configure hourly discovery, refer to “Configuring an hourly discovery schedule” on
page 73.

• To configure daily discovery, refer to “Configuring a daily discovery schedule” on page 74.
• To configure weekly discovery, refer to “Configuring a weekly discovery schedule” on
page 74.

• To configure monthly discovery, refer to “Configuring a monthly discovery schedule” on
page 75.

• To configure yearly discovery, refer to “Configuring a yearly discovery schedule” on
page 75.
5. Rearrange schedules in the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list by selecting an item in the list and
clicking the Up or Down buttons to move it.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
7.

Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

8. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

72

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

Configuring a one-time discovery schedule
To configure a one-time discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 28

Scheduling tab - One Time

2. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
4. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
5. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

Configuring an hourly discovery schedule
To configure an hourly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 29

Scheduling tab - Hourly

2. Select the minute past the hour you want discovery to run from the Minutes past the hour list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
3. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

73

3

IP discovery profiles

Configuring a daily discovery schedule
To configure a daily discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 30

Scheduling tab - Daily

2. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
4. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

Configuring a weekly discovery schedule
To configure a weekly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 31

Scheduling tab - Weekly

2. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want discovery to run from the Day of the Week list.
4. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
5. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

74

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

Configuring a monthly discovery schedule
To configure a monthly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 32

Scheduling tab - Monthly

2. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want discovery to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
4. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
5. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

Configuring a yearly discovery schedule
To configure a yearly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Yearly from the Frequency list.

FIGURE 33

Scheduling tab - Yearly

2. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
4. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
5. To finish configuring the discovery schedule, return to “Scheduling discovery” on page 72.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

75

3

IP discovery profiles

Suspending a discovery schedule
To suspend a discovery profile schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile for which you want to suspend a discovery schedule in the Discovery Profiles
table and click the Scheduling tab.
4. Select the schedule you want to suspend in the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list and click the
left arrow button.
5. Click the Suspend check box and click the right arrow button to return the schedule to the
Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
The suspended schedule displays at the bottom of the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
6. Click Apply to save your changes.
7.

Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

8. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing a discovery schedule
To edit a discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab
3. Select the profile you want to edit in the Discovery Profiles table and click the Scheduling tab.
4. Select the schedule you want to edit from the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
5. Click the left arrow button to display the schedule in the Add/Edit Schedules area.
6. Choose one of the following options to change the discovery schedule:

• To edit the one-time discovery schedule, refer to “Editing a one-time discovery schedule”
on page 77.

• To edit the hourly discovery schedule, refer to “Editing an hourly discovery schedule” on
page 77.

• To edit the daily discovery schedule, refer to “Editing a daily discovery schedule” on
page 77.

• To edit the weekly discovery schedule, refer to “Editing a weekly discovery schedule” on
page 77.

• To edit the monthly discovery schedule, refer to “Editing a monthly discovery schedule” on
page 78.

• To edit the yearly discovery schedule, refer to “Editing a yearly discovery schedule” on
page 78.

76

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

7.

3

Rearrange schedules in the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list by selecting an item in the list and
clicking the Up or Down buttons to move it.

8. Click Apply to save your changes.
9. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
10. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Editing a one-time discovery schedule
To edit a one-time discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
2. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
3. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
4. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Editing an hourly discovery schedule
To edit an hourly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the minute past the hour you want discovery to run from the Minutes past the Hour list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
2. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
3. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Editing a daily discovery schedule
To edit a daily discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
2. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
3. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Editing a weekly discovery schedule
To edit a weekly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
2. Select the day you want discovery to run from the Day of the Week list.
3. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

77

3

IP discovery profiles

4. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Editing a monthly discovery schedule
To edit a monthly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
2. Select the day you want discovery to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
3. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
4. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Editing a yearly discovery schedule
To edit a yearly discovery schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select the time of day you want discovery to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
2. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
3. Click the right arrow button to add the schedule to the Scheduled Discovery Cycles list.
4. To finish editing the discovery schedule, return to “Editing a discovery schedule” on page 76.

Configuring advanced discovery profile preferences
To configure advanced discovery profile preferences, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the profile you want to edit in the Discovery Profiles table and click the Preferences tab.

78

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

FIGURE 34

3

Preferences tab

4. Enter the maximum number (from 1 through 100) of simultaneous connections to devices
allowed by discovery in the Maximum Threads field.
5. Enter the name of the file that contains specific IP addresses to probe in the Discovery Address
File field.
The file supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. This file must be located in the
Install_Home\conf\discovery\ip folder on the server. The default file is the discovery_addrs.txt
file; however, you can create additional files. To create a discovery address file, refer to
“Creating a discovery address file” on page 80.
6. Select the Perform Ping sweeps on all detected subnets check box to systematically ping all IP
addresses in any subnet detected through the normal discovery process.
7.

Select the Automatically obtain seed addresses check box to use netstat or ipconfig to capture
a starting candidate IP address with which to begin the discovery process.

8. Select the Search for neighbors of probed products check box to read all ARP, LLDP, FDP, and
CDP tables to find neighboring devices.
9. Select the Probe already discovered products check box to rediscover devices previously
discovered.
10. Click Apply to save your changes.
11. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
12. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

79

3

IP discovery profiles

Deleting a discovery profile
You can delete any of the discovery profiles except the “Default” profile.
To delete a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the profile you want to delete in the Discovery Profiles table and click Delete.
4. Click Apply to save your changes.
5. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
6. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Creating a discovery address file
You can configure multiple profiles to use different discovery address files. You can configure
multiple profiles to use the same discovery address file.
To create a discovery address file, complete the following steps.
1. Open a text editor (such as Notepad).
2. Enter the IP addresses you want to include in discovery.
# discovery_addrs.txt
#
# Discovery reads this file at the
# start of each discovery cycle.
# Discovery probes the IP addresses in
#this file, as long as they are not
# excluded by any scoping restrictions.
#
10.1.2.54
10.55.2.68

3. Select File > Save.
4. Browse to the Install_Home\conf\discovery\ip folder.
This file must be saved to the Install_Home\conf\discovery\ip folder on the server.
5. Enter a name for the file.
6. Click Save.

Starting discovery manually
To start discovery for a profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.

80

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

3. Select the discovery profile on which you want to start discovery in the Discovery Profiles table
and click Start.
4. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Starting discovery automatically
To run discovery for a profile at startup, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the check box in the Run on Startup column for the discovery profile in the Discovery
Profiles table.

NOTE

You can only configure one profile to run discovery on startup.
4. Click Apply to save your work.
5. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
6. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Stopping discovery
To stop discovery for a profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the discovery profile on which you want to stop discovery in the Discovery Profiles table
and click Stop.
4. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Viewing discovery status
To view discovery status, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Review the status in the Status column of the Discovery Profiles table.
Status updates dynamically for any changes. Options include the following statuses:

• Running — Discovery is in progress for the profile.
Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

81

3

IP discovery profiles

•
•
•
•

Waiting — Discovery will start for this profile once the current profile discovery completes.
Scheduled — Discovery will be run for this profile at the scheduled time.
Idle — Discovery is not running.
Terminating — Discovery for the profile is either completing or has been terminated.

4. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Viewing discovery reports
To view a report for a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the discovery profile for which you want to view a report in the Discovery Profiles table
and click Report.
The report displays with the following information.

• Discovery Summary table — Provides discovery statistics.
• Discovery Configuration table — Records the discovery parameters.
• Detail — Provides discovery process details.
4. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

E-mailing discovery reports
To e-mail a report for a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the discovery profile for which you want to e-mail a report in the Discovery Profiles table
and click Report.
4. Click E-mail to send the report in an e-mail message.
5. Enter an e-mail address in the E-mail Recipients field or click the associated button to select
an e-mail address from the Users list.
6. (Optional) Enter additional e-mail addresses in the E-mail Recipients field.
To send an e-mail message to more than one recipient, separate the e-mail addresses using a
semicolon (;) delimiter.
7.

Click Send to send the report.

8. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
9. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

82

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP discovery profiles

3

Exporting discovery reports
To export a report for a discovery profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Select the discovery profile for which you want to export a report in the Discovery Profiles table
and click Report.
4. Choose one of the following options:

• To export the report to a .csv file, select Export > Export as CSV.
• To export the report to an HTML file, select Export > Export as HTML.
The File Download dialog box displays.
5. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box displays.
6. Browse to the file location where you want to save the report.
7.

Click Save.

8. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
9. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Viewing the discovery log
The discovery log displays the status of the current discovery activity. To configure the discovery log
size, refer to “Defining global setting preferences” on page 60.
To view the discovery log, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Profiles tab.
3. Click Discovery Log.
The Discovery Status Log dialog box displays with a list of discovery status messages. If
discovery is running, the discovery status messages automatically display and update
dynamically in the dialog box with the latest message at the top.
4. Click Close to close the Discovery Status Log dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

83

3

Individual IP device discovery

Individual IP device discovery
Simple discovery discovers the device with a specific IP address. It is triggered by device
configuration changes on SNMP traps, certain configuration deployments to a device, and adding
device or rediscovering a device.

Adding an IP device to discovery
NOTE
You cannot discover new products if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility)
in your user account.
To add an individual IP device to discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add product dialog box displays.

FIGURE 35

Add product dialog box

3. Choose one of the following options:

• Enter the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the IP device in the Network Address field.
• Enter the host name or DNS name (up to 64 characters) of the IP device in the Network
Address field.

NOTE

The Management application does not validate the Network address until you save your work.
4. Select one of the following options:

• Try only configured Discovery SNMP settings — Select to use the SNMP settings configured
in the Global Settings tab to contact the device.

• Also try these settings — Select to use specific SNMP settings to contact the device. If you
do not enter SNMP settings or if the settings do not authenticate on the device, the
application uses the SNMP settings configured in the Global Settings tab to contact the
device.

84

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Individual IP device discovery

3

NOTE

You can configure both SNMPv3 and SNMPv1/SNMPv2c credentials at the same time;
however, discovery tries the SNMPv3 credentials before trying the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
credentials.

5. Configure the SNMPv3 read-write credentials by completing the following steps.

NOTE

These credentials are not applicable for DCB devices.
a.

Click the SNMPv3 Read/Write tab.

FIGURE 36
b.

SNMPv3 credentials

Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None
• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
d.

Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

e.

Select one of the following protocols from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and
response packets.
f.

Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

6. Configure the SNMPv3 read only credentials by completing the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

85

3

Individual IP device discovery

a.

Click the SNMPv3 Read Only tab.

b.

Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None
• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
d.

Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

e.

Select one of the following privacy protocol types from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and
response packets.
f.

Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

7.

Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read-write credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write tab.

FIGURE 37
b.

SNMPv1/v2c credentials

Enter the community string in the Community field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and
allows all printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.

NOTE

If you do not enter a community string in the field, discovery uses the "public" and "private"
community strings to probe the devices.

86

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Individual IP device discovery

3

8. Configure the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read only credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the SNMPv1/v2c Read Only tab.

b.

Enter the community string in the Community field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and
allows all printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.

NOTE

If you do not enter a community string in the field, discovery uses the "public" and "private"
community strings to probe the devices.

9. Configure the Read/Write credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the Read/Write Credentials tab.

FIGURE 38
b.

Read/Write credentials

Enter the unique user name in the Login Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Enter the password in the Login Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password displays as asterisks. Not applicable to DCB
devices.

10. Click OK on the Add product dialog box.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays with the added IP device in the Discovered Products
table.
11. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

Editing IP device discovery
NOTE
Although, you can configure third-party product password settings through discovery, the
Management application ignores these third-party product settings.
To edit one or more IP devices, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

87

3

Individual IP device discovery

2. Select one or more IP devices you want to edit in the Discovered Products table.
Select multiple devices by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one device.

NOTE

You cannot edit IronWare and Network OS devices at the same time.

NOTE

You can only edit multiple Network OS devices that are running the same firmware level.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit product dialog box displays.
4. Select one of the following options:

• Try only configured Discovery SNMP settings — Select to use the SNMP settings configured
in the Global Settings tab to contact the device.

• Also try these settings — Select to use specific SNMP settings to contact the device. If you
do not enter SNMP settings or if the settings do not authenticate on the device, the
application uses the SNMP settings configured in the Global Settings tab to contact the
device.

NOTE

You can configure both SNMPv3 and SNMPv1/SNMPv2c credentials at the same time;
however, discovery tries the SNMPv3 credentials before trying the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c
credentials.

5. Change the SNMPv3 read-write credentials by completing the following steps.

NOTE

These credentials are not applicable for DCB devices.
a.

Click the SNMPv3 Read/Write tab.

FIGURE 39
b.

SNMPv3 credentials

Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None

88

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Individual IP device discovery

3

• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
d.

Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

e.

Select one of the following privacy protocol types from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and
response packets.
f.

Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

6. Change the SNMPv3 read only credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the SNMPv3 Read Only tab.

b.

Enter the SNMPv3 user name in the User ID field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Select one of the following protocols from the Authentication Protocol list:

• None
• HMAC_MD5
• HMAC_SHA
d.

Enter the SNMPv3 authentication password in the Authentication Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

e.

Select one of the following privacy protocol types from the Privacy Protocol list:

• None
• CBC-DES
• CFB_AES-128
If you select a privacy protocol, the selected protocol encrypts the SNMP request and
response packets.
f.

Enter the privacy password in the Privacy Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

7.

Change the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read-write credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write. tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

89

3

Individual IP device discovery

FIGURE 40
b.

SNMPv1/v2c settings

Enter the unique community string in the Community field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and
allows all printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.

NOTE

If you do not enter a community string in the field, discovery uses the "public" and "private"
community strings to probe the devices.

8. Change the SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c read only credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the SNMPv1/v2c Read Only tab.

b.

Enter the unique community string in the Community field.
The community string can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and
allows all printable ASCII characters. The string displays as asterisks.

NOTE

If you do not enter a community string in the field, discovery uses the "public" and "private"
community strings to probe the devices.

9. Change the Read/Write credentials by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the Read/Write Credentials tab.

FIGURE 41
b.

Read/Write credentials

Enter the password in the Super-User Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. Not applicable to DCB devices.

90

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Individual IP device discovery

c.

3

Change the unique user name in the Login Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

d.

Change the password in the Login Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

e.

Change the unique user name in the Enable Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. Not applicable to DCB devices.

f.

Change the password in the Enable Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 1 through 200 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks. Not applicable to DCB
devices.

10. Change the Port Config credentials by completing the following steps.

NOTE

These credentials are not applicable for DCB, VDX, or VCS devices.
a.

Click the Port Config Credentials tab.

FIGURE 42
b.

Port Config credentials

Change the unique user name in the Login Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

c.

Change the password in the Login Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

d.

Change the unique user name in the Enable Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

e.

Change the password in the Enable Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

91

3

Individual IP device discovery

11. Change the Read Only credentials by completing the following steps.

NOTE

These credentials are not applicable for DCB, VDX, or VCS devices.
a.

Click the Read Only Credentials tab.

FIGURE 43
a.

Read Only credentials

Change the unique user name in the Login Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

b.

Change the password in the Login Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

c.

Change the unique user name in the Enable Prompt User Name field.
The user name can be from 1 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters.

d.

Change the password in the Enable Prompt Password field.
The password can be from 8 through 16 characters long, case sensitive, and allows all
printable ASCII characters. The password display as asterisks.

12. Click OK on the Edit product dialog box.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays with the updated IP device in the Discovered
Products table.
13. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

92

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host discovery

3

Deleting IP devices from discovery
To delete one or more IP devices from discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Select the IP devices you want to remove from discovery in the Discovered Products table.
Select multiple devices by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one device.

NOTE

You cannot delete an active member from a VCS fabric.
3. Click Delete.

Host discovery
The Management application enables you to discover individual hosts, import a group of Host from
a comma separated values (CSV) file, or import all hosts from discovered fabrics or VM managers.

NOTE
Host discovery requires HCM Agent 2.0 or later.

NOTE

SMI and WMI discovery are not supported.

Discovering Hosts by Network address or host name
To discover a Host by Network address or host name, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

93

3

Host discovery

FIGURE 44

Discover Host Adapters dialog box

2. Click Add.
The Add Host Adapters dialog box displays.

FIGURE 45

Add Host Adapters dialog box

3. (Optional) Enter a discovery request name (such as, Manual 06/12/2009) in the Discovery
Request Name field.
4. Select Network Address from the list.
5. Enter the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 formats) or host name in the Network Address field.
6. Click Add.
The IP address or host name of the Host displays in the Host List.

94

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host discovery

7.

3

Configure Host credentials by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure HCM agent credentials, select the HCM agent option. Go to step 9.
• To configure CIM server credentials, select the CIM server (ESXi only) option. Continue
with step 8.
If you do not need to configure Host credentials, skip to step 13.
8. Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure discovery with authentication, select the HTTPS from the Protocol list.
• To configure discovery without authentication, select the HTTP from the Protocol list.
9. Enter the port number in the Port field.
HCM agent default is 34568. CIM server HTTPS default is 5989. CIM server HTTP default is
5988.
10. Enter your username in the User ID field.
HCM agent default is admin. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
11. Enter your password Password field.
HCM agent default is password. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
12. Repeat step 5 through step 11 for each Host you want to discover.
13. Click OK on the Add Host Adapters dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
A Host Group displays in Discovered Hosts table with pending status. To update the status
from pending you must close and reopen the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.
14. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Importing Hosts from a CSV file
To discover Hosts by importing a CSV file, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Host Adapters dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

95

3

Host discovery

FIGURE 46

Add Host Adapters dialog box

3. Enter a discovery request name (such as, MyFabric) in the Discovery Request Name field.
4. Click Import.
The Open dialog box displays.
5. Browse to the CSV file location.
The CSV file must meet the following requirements:

• Comma separated IP address or host names
• No commas within the values
• No escaping supported
For example, XX.XX.XXX.XXX, XX.XX.X.XXX, computername.company.com
6. Click Open.
The CSV file is imported to the Add Host Adapters dialog box. During import, duplicate values
are automatically dropped. When import is complete, the imported values display in the Host
List. If the file cannot be imported, an error displays.
7.

Verify the imported values in the Host List.

8. Configure Host credentials by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure HCM agent credentials, select the HCM agent option. Go to step 10.
• To configure CIM server credentials, select the CIM server (ESXi only) option. Continue
with step .
If you do not need to configure Host credentials, skip to step 13.
9. Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure discovery with authentication, select the HTTPS from the Protocol list.
• To configure discovery without authentication, select the HTTP from the Protocol list.

96

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host discovery

3

10. Enter the port number in the Port field.
HCM agent default is 34568. CIM server HTTPS default is 5989. CIM server HTTP default is
5988.
11. Enter your username in the User ID field.
HCM agent default is admin. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
12. Enter your password Password field.
HCM agent default is password. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
13. Click OK on the Add Host Adapters dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
A Host Group displays in Discovered Hosts table with pending status. To update the status
from pending you must close and reopen the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.
14. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Importing Hosts from a Fabric
To discover a Host from a discovered fabric, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Host Adapters dialog box displays.

FIGURE 47

Add Host Adapters dialog box

3. Enter a discovery request name (such as, MyFabric) in the Discovery Request Name field.
4. Select Hosts in Fabrics from the list.
5. Select All fabrics or an individual fabric from the list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

97

3

Host discovery

6. Click Add.
All hosts which are part of a managed fabric and have a registered host name display in the
list. If no host with a registered host name exists, an error message displays. Click OK to close
the error message.
7.

Configure Host credentials by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure HCM agent credentials, select the HCM agent option. Go to step 9.
• To configure CIM server credentials, select the CIM server (ESXi only) option. Continue
with step 8.
If you do not need to configure Host credentials, skip to step 12.
8. Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure discovery with authentication, select the HTTPS from the Protocol list.
• To configure discovery without authentication, select the HTTP from the Protocol list.
9. Enter the port number in the Port field.
HCM agent default is 34568. CIM server HTTPS default is 5989. CIM server HTTP default is
5988.
10. Enter your username in the User ID field.
HCM agent default is admin. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
11. Enter your password Password field.
HCM agent default is password. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
12. Click OK on the Add Host Adapters dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
A Host Group displays in Discovered Hosts table with pending status. To update the status
from pending you must close and reopen the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.
13. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Importing Hosts from a VM manager
To discover Hosts from a discovered VM manager, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Host Adapters dialog box displays.

98

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host discovery

FIGURE 48

3

Add Host Adapters dialog box

3. Enter a discovery request name (such as, MyVMManager) in the Discovery Request Name
field.
4. Select Hosts from VM Manager from the import by list.
5. Select All VM or an individual VM from the list.
6. Click Add.
All hosts which are part of a discovered VM manager and have a registered host name display
in the list. If no host with a registered host name exists, an error message displays. Click OK to
close the error message.
7.

Configure Host credentials by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure HCM agent credentials, select the HCM agent option. Go to step 9.
• To configure CIM server credentials, select the CIM server (ESXi only) option. Continue
with step 8.
If you do not need to configure Host credentials, skip to step 12.
8. Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure discovery with authentication, select the HTTPS from the Protocol list.
• To configure discovery without authentication, select the HTTP from the Protocol list.
9. Enter the port number in the Port field.
HCM agent default is 34568. CIM server HTTPS default is 5989. CIM server HTTP default is
5988.
10. Enter your username in the User ID field.
HCM agent default is admin. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
11. Enter your password Password field.
HCM agent default is password. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

99

3

Host discovery

12. Click OK on the Add Host Adapters dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
A Host Group displays in Discovered Hosts table with pending status. To update the status
from pending you must close and reopen the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.
13. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Editing Host adapter credentials
To edit Host credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Select the Host in the Discovered Hosts list and click Edit.
The Edit Host Adapters dialog box displays.

FIGURE 49

Edit Host Discovery dialog box

3. Configure Host credentials by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure HCM agent credentials, select the HCM agent option. Go to step 5.
• To configure CIM server credentials, select the CIM server (ESXi only) option. Continue
with step 4.
If you do not need to configure Host credentials, skip to step 8.
4. Configure discovery authentication by choosing one of the following options:

• To configure discovery with authentication, select the HTTPS from the Protocol list.
• To configure discovery without authentication, select the HTTP from the Protocol list.
5. Enter the port number in the Port field.
HCM agent default is 34568. CIM server HTTPS default is 5989. CIM server HTTP default is
5988.
6. Enter your username in the User ID field.
HCM agent default is admin. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.
7.

Enter your password Password field.
HCM agent default is password. Leave this field blank for the CIM server.

8. Click OK on the Edit Host Adapters dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
9. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

100

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host discovery

3

Removing a host from active discovery
If you decide you no longer want the Management application to discover and monitor a specific
host, you can delete it from active discovery. Deleting a host also deletes the host data on the
server (both system collected and user-defined data) except for user-assigned names for the device
port, device node, and device enclosure information.
To delete a host from active discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Select the host you want to delete from active discovery in the Discovered Hosts table.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
The deleted host displays in the Previously Discovered Addresses table.
5. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Rediscovering a previously discovered fabric
To return a host to active discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Select the host you want to return to active discovery in the Previously Discovered Addresses
table.
3. Click Discover.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
The rediscovered host displays in the Discovered Hosts table.
5. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Deleting a host adapter from discovery
To delete a host permanently from discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Select the host you want to delete permanently from discovery in the Previously Discovered
Addresses table.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
5. Click Close on the Discover Host Adapters dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

101

3

Host discovery

Viewing the host discovery state
The Management application enables you to view device discovery status through the Discover
Host Adapters dialog box.
To view the discovery status of a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Discover Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Right-click the Hosts node select Expand All to show all devices.
The Name field displays the discovery status icons in front of the device name. The following
table illustrates and describes the icons that indicate the current status of the discovered
devices.

TABLE 14

Discovery Status Icons

Icon

Description
Displays when the fabric or host is managed and the management status is okay.

Displays when the fabric or host is not managed.

The Discovery Status field details the actual status message text, which varies depending on
the situation. The following are samples of actual status messages:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Discovered
New Discovery Pending
Created host structure differs from discovered host; Discovery ignored
Brocade HBA Discovery Failed: HCM Agent connection failed
HCM Agent collection failed
CIM Server Authentication failed
CIM Server connection failed

Troubleshooting host discovery
If you encounter discovery problems, complete the following checklist to ensure that discovery was
set up correctly. For more complete information about troubleshooting adapters, refer to the
Adapters Troubleshooting Guide.
1. Verify IP connectivity by issuing a ping command to the host.

102

a.

Open the command prompt.

b.

From the Server, type ping Host_IP_Address.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VM Manager discovery

3

2. If the host is responding to ping, but discovery still fails, verify that HCM agent is up or not by
browsing to the following URL:
https://Host_IP_Address:34568/JSONRPCServiceApp/JSON-RPC
If HCM agent is running and reachable, you should receive a prompt of credentials and then
show an Error 500 (No Reason) result page.
3. Verify that firewall port 34568 is open.
There are firewall issues with the HCM Agent on Windows 2008 and VMware systems. When
installing the driver package on these systems, open TCP/IP port 34568 to allow agent
communication with the Management application.

• For VMware, use the following commands to open port 34568:



esxcfg-firewall –o 34568,tcp,in,https
esxcfg-firewall –o 34568,udp,out,https

• For Windows, use Windows Firewall and Advanced Service (WFAS) to open port 34568.

VM Manager discovery
The Management application enables you to discover VM managers. VM Manager discovery
requires vCenter Server 4.0 or later.

NOTE

vCenter discovery time is dynamically determined based on the number of hosts being managed by
the vCenter. For every 50 hosts managed, the vCenter collection period increases 30 minutes.
For 0-50 hosts managed, the collection duration is 30 minutes; for 50-100 hosts managed, the
collection duration is one hour, and so on.

VM Manager discovery requirements
• Discovery of a vCenter server (refer to “Discovering a VM manager” on page 103, step 4 and
step 5), requires a vCenter user with read-only or read-write privilege on the vCenter server
node and all objects in the inventory below the vCenter server.

• Enabling the vSphere client plug-in registration (refer to “Discovering a VM manager” on
page 103, step 6), requires a vCenter user with, at minimum, the following read-write privileges
on the vCenter server node and all objects in the inventory below the vCenter server:

-

Extension > Register extension
Extension > Unregister extension
Extension > Update extension

Discovering a VM manager
Before you discover a VM Manager, make sure you meet the discovery requirements (refer to “VM
Manager discovery requirements” on page 103).
To discover a VM manager, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

103

3

VM Manager discovery

FIGURE 50

Discover VM Managers dialog box

2. Click Add.
The Add VM Manager dialog box displays.

FIGURE 51

Add VM Manager dialog box

3. Enter the IP address or host name in the Network Address field.
4. Enter the VM manager port number in the Port field.
5. Enter the VM manager username in the User ID field.
6. Enter the VM manager password Password field.
7.

Select the Enable display of network information in vSphere client check box to enable
vSphere client plug-in registration.
Clear to disable vSphere client plug-in registration.

104

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VM Manager discovery

3

8. Select the Forward event to vCenter check box to enable event forwarding from the
Management application to vCenter.
Clear to disable event forwarding.
9. Click OK on the Add VM Manager dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
A VM manager displays in Discovered VM Managers table with pending status. To update the
status from pending you must close and reopen the Discover VM Managers dialog box.
10. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.
11. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Editing a VM manager
To edit VM manager discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Select the Host in the Discovered VM Managers list and click Edit.
The Edit VM Manager dialog box displays.

FIGURE 52

Edit VM Manager dialog box

3. Change the VM manager port number in the Port field.
4. Enter the VM manager username in the User ID field.
5. Enter the VM manager user password Password field.
6. Select the Enable display of network information in vSphere client check box to enable
vSphere client plug-in registration.
Clear to disable vSphere client plug-in registration.
7.

Select the Forward event to vCenter check box to enable event forwarding from the
Management application to vCenter.
Clear to disable event forwarding.

8. Click OK on the Edit VM Manager dialog box.
If an error occurs, a message displays. Click OK to close the error message and fix the problem.
9. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

105

3

VM Manager discovery

10. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Excluding a host from VM manager discovery
To exclude host from VM manager discovery complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Select the Host you want to exclude in the Discovered VM Managers list and click Exclude.
3. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Including a host in VM manager discovery
To include host in VM manager discovery complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Select a Host you want to include in the Discovered VM Managers list and click Include.
3. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Removing a VM manager from active discovery
If you decide you no longer want the Management application to discover and monitor a specific
VM manager, you can delete it from active discovery. Deleting a VM manager also deletes the data
on the server (both system collected and user-defined data) except for user-assigned names for the
device port, device node, and device enclosure information.
To delete a VM manager from active discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Select the VM manager you want to delete from active discovery in the Discovered VM
Managers table.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
The deleted VM manager displays in the Previously Discovered Addresses table.
5. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.
6. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Rediscovering a previously discovered VM manager
To return a VM manager to active discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.

106

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VM Manager discovery

3

2. Select the VM manager you want to return to active discovery in the Previously Discovered
Addresses table.
3. Click Discover.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
The rediscovered VM manager displays in the Discovered VM Managers table.
5. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.
6. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Deleting a VM manager from discovery
To delete a host permanently from discovery, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Select the VM manager you want to delete permanently from discovery in the Previously
Discovered Addresses table.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
5. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.
6. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Viewing the VM manager discovery state
The Management application enables you to view device discovery status through the Discover VM
Managers dialog box.
To view the discovery status of a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > VM Managers.
The Discover VM Managers dialog box displays.
2. Right-click the Hosts node select Expand All to show all devices.
The Discovery Status field details the actual status message text, which varies depending on
the situation.
The following are samples of actual VMM status messages:

• Active
• Failed – Not reachable
• Failed – Authentication failure
The following are samples of actual ESX host status messages:

•
•
•
•

Active
Discovery pending,
Excluded,
Conflict – Existing Host 

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

107

3

IP Rediscovery

3. Refresh the Discover VM Managers list by clicking Refresh.
4. Click Close on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.

Troubleshooting VM manager discovery
If you encounter discovery problems, complete the following checklist to ensure that discovery was
set up correctly.
Verify IP connectivity by issuing a ping command to the switch.
1. Open the command prompt.
2. From the Server, type ping Device_IP_Address.

IP Rediscovery
When you change device configuration using the CLI or Web Management Interface, the updated
configuration information does not automatically update in the Management application. You must
rediscover devices to update configuration information.
For VCS devices, if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user
account, you can not rediscover missing fabric members.
When you rediscover an IP device, the Management application captures and stores all changes to
its configuration since the last Discovery or Rediscovery cycle. Once Rediscovery completes,
configuration updates display in Network Object view.

Rediscovering IP devices
To rediscover one or more IP devices, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Select the IP devices you want to rediscover in the Discovered Products table.
For VCS devices, if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user
account, you can not rediscover missing fabric members.
Select multiple devices by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one device. You
can select up to 32 devices for rediscovery.
If you select to rediscover multiple devices, you should configure a discovery profile to run in
the background. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring a discovery profile” on
page 64.
For VCS devices, rediscovery depends on what part of the fabric you select to rediscover.

• If you select the VCS fabric, rediscovery refreshes the membership information.
• If you select a VCS member, rediscovery refreshes the asset data for the selected member.
• If you select a missing VCS member, rediscovery triggers the discovery of a new fabric
(VCS-enabled) or a standalone VDX switch (VCS-disabled).

108

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Rediscovery

3

3. Click Rediscover.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays. If you selected more than 10 devices, the client
only sends the first 10 devices to the server. When rediscovery is complete on the first device
and the server returns the status to the client, the client sends the next device to the server.
This process continues until rediscovery is complete.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays the progress status for each product in the
Progress Status column. If an error occurs the status displays as ‘Failed” and an error message
displays in the Description column.
Click Abort to stop rediscovery for any pending devices. Note that rediscovery continues for all
devices already sent to the server. The Rediscover product dialog box closes when rediscovery
is complete for the active rediscovery devices.
4. Click OK on the Rediscover product dialog box when rediscovery completes.

Rediscovering IP devices from the Product List
For VCS devices, if you do not have the All IP Products AOR (area of responsibility) in your user
account, you can not rediscover missing fabric members.
To rediscover one or more IP devices from the Product List, complete the following steps.
1. Select the IP tab.
2. Select the IP devices you want to rediscover in the Product List.
Select multiple devices by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one device. You
can select up to 32 devices for rediscovery.
If you select to rediscover a multiple devices, you should configure a discovery profile to run in
the background. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Configuring a discovery profile” on
page 64.
3. Click Rediscover on the Product List toolbar.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays. If you selected more than 10 devices, the client
only sends the first 10 devices to the server. When rediscovery is complete on the first device
and the server returns the status to the client, the client sends the next device to the server.
This process continues until rediscovery is complete.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays the progress status for each product in the
Progress Status column. If an error occurs the status displays as ‘Failed” and an error message
displays in the Description column.
Click Abort to stop rediscovery for any pending devices. Note that rediscovery continues for all
devices already sent to the server. The Rediscover product dialog box closes when rediscovery
is complete for the active rediscovery devices.
4. Click OK on the Rediscover product dialog box when rediscovery completes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

109

3

IP Rediscovery

Rediscovering a group
To rediscover all devices in a group, complete the following steps.
1. Select the IP tab.
2. Select the group you want to rediscover in the Product List.
You can select one group at a time.
3. Click Rediscover on the Product List toolbar.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays. If you selected more than 10 devices, the client
only sends the first 10 devices to the server. When rediscovery is complete on the first device
and the server returns the status to the client, the client sends the next device to the server.
This process continues until rediscovery is complete.
The Rediscover product dialog box displays the progress status for each product in the
Progress Status column. If an error occurs the status displays as ‘Failed” and an error message
displays in the Description column.
Click Abort to stop rediscovery for any pending devices. Note that rediscovery continues for all
devices already sent to the server. The Rediscover product dialog box closes when rediscovery
is complete for the active rediscovery devices.
4. Click OK on the Rediscover product dialog box when rediscovery completes.

Enabling password validation on rediscovery
To define global setting preferences, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Preferences tab.
4. Select the Enable password validation on rediscover check box to enable password validation
when rediscovering devices.
5. Click Apply to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
6. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

110

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

Management Groups

4

In this chapter
• Management groups overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
• Product group overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
• Port Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Management groups overview
The Management application enables you to group multiple devices or ports so that you can
configure common configurations and perform common monitoring functions for them. You
configure management groups through the Network Objects view.
The Network Object view lists the discovered products, default and user-defined product groups,
and user-defined port groups. You can use Network Object view to do the following:

•
•
•
•
•

Add devices to product groups.
Remove devices from product groups.
Add ports to port groups.
Remove ports from port groups.
Synchronize the device configuration with the Management application database before the
next Discovery process runs.

The number of devices, device groups, and port groups that Network Object view can manage
depends on the disk space available to the Management application. However, adding many
devices and groups could affect system performance.

Displaying Network Object view
To display the Network Object view, select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List
toolbar.
The Management application displays a list of discovered products as well as any product and port
groups in a table (Product List). For more information about the Network Object view, refer to
“Network Objects view” on page 307.
You can perform the following actions from the Network Object view:

• To configure product groups, refer to “Product group overview” on page 112.
• To configure port groups, refer to “Port Groups” on page 122.
• To search for a product in the Network Object view, refer to “Searching for a device” on
page 299.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

111

4

Product group overview

• To filter the Network Objects Product List, refer to “Filtering devices in the Network Objects
Product List” on page 308.

• To update device configuration information on the Network Object view, refer to “IP
Rediscovery” on page 108.

Product group overview
Once devices display in the Network Object view, you can associate the devices with a group.
Product groups allow you to monitor and manage multiple devices at one time. Once configured
you can use product groups to perform the following:

• Deploy common configurations to all devices in a group
• Implement common monitoring facilities for all devices in a group.
• Identify which MPLS configured devices can be managed by MPLS.
The Management application provides pre-defined System Groups and allows you to create
user-defined groups.

• System Groups — Groups pre-defined by the Management application. Discovered devices
automatically display in these groups. You can see all system groups; however, under each
group, you can only see devices that belong to your area of responsibility (AOR). The system
groups include the following:

-

112

Fixed Configuration Products
Layer 2 Switch Products
Other Products
Wireless Standalone APs
All IP Products
Load Balancer Products
Wireless Controllers
IP Wired Products
Chassis Products
Router Products
MPLS Licensed and Configured Products

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product group overview

4

• User-Defined Groups — Groups created by users. All users can see user-defined product
groups; however, you can only see products in the group that belong to your AOR. You can
create two type of groups - static and dynamic.

NOTE

You can add a standalone VDX product or a VCS fabric to a user-defined Product Group;
however, the VCS fabric members are not included with the group.

-

Static — You can define a product group by selecting the product you want to include inthe
group.

-

Dynamic — You can define a product group using the following product attributes:














Name
IP Address
Product Type
Serial #
Status
Vendor
Model
Firmware
Build Label
Location
Contact
Description
User_defined_property1 (up to 3)

Static product groups
You can define a static product group by selecting the product you want to include in the group.

Creating a static product group
To create a product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Select Add Product Group > Static from the Grouping list on the Product List toolbar.
The Add Product Group dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

113

4

Product group overview

FIGURE 53

Add Product Group dialog box

3. Enter a unique name (maximum 64 characters) for the product group in the Name field.
4. Enter a description (maximum 255 characters) for the product group in the Description field.
5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in theL2 Topology
view.
6. Add products to the group by selecting the product in the Available Products list and clicking
the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can add a standalone VDX product or a VCS fabric to a user-defined Product Group;
however, the VCS fabric members are not included with the group.
The selected products move from the Available Products list to the Selected Products list.
7.

Remove products from the group by selecting the product in the Selected Products list and
clicking the left arrow button.
The selected products move from the Selected Products list to the Available Products list.

8. Click OK.
The new group displays in the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

Editing a static product group
To create a product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to edit in the Product List and select Edit Group.
The Edit Product Group dialog box displays.
3. Edit the name for the product group in the Name field.
4. Edit the description for the product group in the Description field.

114

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product group overview

4

5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in the L2 Topology
view.
6. Add products to the group by selecting the product in the Available Products list and clicking
the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can add a standalone VDX product or a VCS fabric to a user-defined Product Group;
however, the VCS fabric members are not included with the group.
The selected products move from the Available Products list to the Selected Products list.
7.

Remove products from the group by selecting the product in the Selected Products list and
clicking the left arrow button.
The selected products move from the Selected Products list to the Available Products list.

8. Click OK.

Duplicating a static product group
To duplicate a product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to duplicate in the Product List and select Duplicate
Group.
The Add Product Group dialog box displays.
3. Edit the name for the product group in the Name field.
4. Edit the description for the product group in the Description field.
5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in the L2 Topology
view.
6. Add products to the group by selecting the product in the Available Products list and clicking
the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can add a standalone VDX product or a VCS fabric to a user-defined Product Group;
however, the VCS fabric members are not included with the group.
The selected products move from the Available Products list to the Selected Products list.
7.

Remove products from the group by selecting the product in the Selected Products list and
clicking the left arrow button.
The selected products move from the Selected Products list to the Available Products list.

8. Click OK.
The duplicated group displays in the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

115

4

Product group overview

Dynamic product groups
You can define a dynamic product group using the following product attributes:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Name — The name of the product.
IP Address — The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.
Product Type — The type of product.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Status — The status for the product and the port.
Vendor — The name of the product’s vendor
Model — The model number of the product.
Firmware — The firmware version of the product.
Build Label — The firmware build number.
Location — The physical location of the product.
Contact — The name of the person or group you should contact about the product.
Description — The description of the product.
User_defined_property1 (up to 3) — A user-defined product property value. You can create up
to 3 user-defined properties (refer to “Properties customization” on page 1329).

Creating a dynamic product group
To create a dynamic product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Select Add Product Group > Dynamic from the Grouping list on the Product List toolbar.
The Add Product Group - Dynamic dialog box displays.

FIGURE 54

Add Product Group - Dynamic dialog box

3. Enter a unique name for the product group in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the product group in the Description field.

116

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product group overview

4

5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in the L2 Topology
view.
6. Click Insert.
A new row displays in the Group Criteria table.
7.

Select one of the following from the Property list.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Name
IP Address
Product Type
Serial #
Status
Vendor
Model

NOTE

You can add a standalone VDX product or a VCS fabric to a user-defined Product Group;
however, the VCS fabric members are not included with the group.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Firmware
Build Label
Location
Contact
Description
User_defined_property1 (up to 3)

8. Select one of the following from the Operator list.
•

Equals (valid for Regular Expression or Value type)

•

Not Equals (valid for Regular Expression or Value type)

•

Starts With (only valid for Value type)
Not available if you select Status or Product Type from the Property list.

•

Ends With (only valid for Value type)
Not available if you select Status or Product Type from the Property list.

•

Contains (only valid for Value type)
Not available if you select Status or Product Type from the Property list.

•

Does not contain (only valid for Value type)
Not available if you select Status or Product Type from the Property list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

117

4

Product group overview

9. Enter a value or regular expression in the Value/Regular Expression cell.
This field is case sensitive.
If you selected Status from the Property list, the following predefined values are populated in
the Value/Regular Expression cell:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Reachable
Not Reachable
Down
Healthy
Marginal
Degraded Link
Unhealthy

If you selected Product Type from the Property list, the following predefined values are
populated in the Value/Regular Expression cell:

•
•
•
•
•

L2 Switch
Load Balancer
Router
Wireless Controller
Wireless Standalone AP

To fetch products that have an empty value for a property, select the operator Equals from the
Operator list and leave the Value/Regular Expression field blank.
10. Select Value or Regular Expression from the Type list
To enter another set of criteria, click Insert. A new row displays in the Group Criteria table.
Continue with step 11.
To test the group criteria, click Test. The Management application uses the group criteria to
search the available products in your AOR. The products that meet the criteria display in the
Test Results. table. For detailed information about the test results, refer to “Viewing test
results” on page 120.
To group the criteria, go to step 12.
11. Select a connector (And/Or) from the Connector list and repeat step 8 thorugh step 11.
12. Highlight the rows you want to group and click Group.
An open paren and close paren display in the Group Criteria table to deliniate the new group.
You can create up to three groups.
To ungroup a group, select a row and click Ungroup. If the selected row is part of 2 groups, only
the inner group ungroups.
13. Click OK.
The new group displays in the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

118

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product group overview

4

Editing a dynamic product group
To edit a dynamic product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to edit in the Product List and select Edit Group.
The Edit Product Group - Dynamic dialog box displays.
3. Change the name for the product group in the Name field.
4. Change the description for the product group in the Description field.
5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in the L2 Topology
view.
6. To add a new row, complete step 6 through step 11 of “Creating a dynamic product group” on
page 116.
7.

To delete a row, select the row and click Delete.

8. To ungroup the criteria, select a row in the group and click Ungroup.
9. To create a group, highlight the rows you want to group and click Group.
An open paren and close paren display in the Group Criteria table to deliniate the new group.
You can create up to three groups.
To ungroup a group, select a row and click Ungroup. If the selected row is part of 2 groups, only
the inner group ungroups.
10. Click OK.
The new group displays in the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

Duplicating a dynamic product group
To copy a dynamic product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to edit in the Product List and select Duplicate Group.
The Add Product Group - Dynamic dialog box displays.
3. Change the name for the product group in the Name field.
4. Change the description for the product group in the Description field.
5. Select the Topology Display Enable check box to display the product group in the L2 Topology
view.
6. To add a new row, complete step 6 through step 11 of “Creating a dynamic product group” on
page 116.
7.

To delete a row, select the row and click Delete.

8. To ungroup the criteria, select a row in the group and click Ungroup.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

119

4

Product group overview

9. To create a group, highlight the rows you want to group and click Group.
An open paren and close paren display in the Group Criteria table to deliniate the new group.
You can create up to three groups.
To ungroup a group, select a row and click Ungroup. If the selected row is part of 2 groups, only
the inner group ungroups.
10. Click OK.
The new group displays in the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

Viewing test results
To test the group criteria, click Test. The Management application uses the group criteria to search
the available products in your AOR. The products that meet the criteria display in the Test Results.
table. This table includes the following details:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Group/Product — The name of the product or product group.
Name — The name of the product.
IP Address — The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.
Product Type — The type of product.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Status — The status for the product and the port.
Vendor — The name of the product’s vendor
Model — The model number of the product.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware version of the product.
Build Label — The firmware build number.
Location — The physical location of the product.
Contact — The name of the person or group you should contact about the product.
Description — The description of the product.
User_defined_property1 (up to 3) — A user-defined product property value. You can create up
to 3 user-defined properties (refer to “Properties customization” on page 1329).

Viewing product group properties
To view group properties, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to view properties for in the Product List and select
Properties.
The Product Group Properties dialog box displays.
3. Review the information:

120

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product group overview

4

TABLE 15
Field/Component

Description

Properties tab

Select to display information about the group.

Name

The unique name (maximum 64 characters) for the product group.

Description

The description (maximum 255 characters) for the product group.

Creator

The user name of the creator (for example, Administrator).

Topology Display

Whether or not topology display is enabled.

Dynamic Group

Whether or not this is a dynamic group.

Products tab

Select to display information about products in the group.

Product Count

The number of products in the group.

Performance list

Select to launch the real time or historical performance.

Name

The name of the product.

Alias

The alias.

Host Name

The host name.

System Name

The system name.

IP Address

The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.

System OID

The system's object identifier.

Device Type

The type of device.

Serial #

The serial number of the product.

Status

The status for the product and the port.

Admin Status.

The admin status of the product. Options include:
Normal mode
Troubleshooting mode

Memo

Additional information about the product.

Vendor

The name of the product’s vendor.

Model

The model number of the product.

Port Count

The number of ports on the product.

Firmware

The firmware version of the product.

Build Label

The firmware build number.

Location

The physical location of the product.

Contact

The name of the person or group you should contact about the product.

Description

The description of the product.

Connected AP Count

The number of connected AP.

User_defined_property (up to 3)

A user-defined product property value. You can create up to 3
user-defined properties (refer to “Properties customization” on
page 1329).

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

121

4

Port Groups

Deleting a product group
You can delete more than one group at a time.

NOTE
You cannot delete a system group.
To delete a product group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the product group you want to delete in the Product List and select Delete Group.
Ctrl and click to select more than one group to delete.
A confirmation message displays.
3. Click Yes.
The group is deleted from the User-Defined Groups folder of the Product list.

Port Groups
Port groups allow you to group ports together across network devices to perform common
port-based configuration and monitoring activities.
Once configured you can use port groups to perform the following:

• Deploy common configurations to all ports in a group.
• Collect port usage data for all ports in a group.
You can see all port groups; however, under each group, you can only see devices that belong to
your area of responsibility (AOR). You can only see user-defined port groups that belong to your
AOR.

Creating a port group
To create a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Select Add Port Group from the Grouping list on the Product List toolbar.
The Add Port Group dialog box displays.
3. Enter a unique name for the port group in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the port group in the Description field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• All Ports — Select to display all ports.
• Ports Connected to APs — Select to display only ports connected to an access point (AP).

122

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port Groups

4

6. Add ports to the group by selecting the port in the Available Ports list and clicking the right
arrow button.

NOTE

The Management port, peri port, and stack ports are not included in the Available Ports list.
The selected ports move from the Available Ports list to the Selected Ports list.
For VDX 6740 or VDX 6740-T devices, if you create a port group with a 40 GbE port and then
the 40 GbE port is broken out into 4 10 GbE ports, the 40 GbE port is automatically removed
from the port group. You must manually add the 4 10 GbE ports back into the port group.
This also occurs when you merge 4 10 GbE ports into a single 40 GbE port. If you create a port
group with 4 10 GbE ports and then merge the 4 10 GbE ports into a 40 GbE port, the 4 10
GbE ports are automatically removed from the port group. You must manually add the 40 GbE
port back into the group.
7.

Remove ports from the group by selecting the port in the Selected Ports list and clicking the
left arrow button.
The selected ports move from the Selected Ports list to the Available Ports list.

8. Click OK.
The new group displays in the Port Groups folder of the Product list.

Editing a port group
To edit a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the port group you want to edit in the Product List and select Edit Group.
The Edit Port Group dialog box displays.
3. Edit the name for the port group in the Name field.
4. Edit the description for the port group in the Description field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• All Ports — Select to display all ports.
• Ports Connected to APs — Select to display only ports connected to an access point (AP).
6. Add ports to the group by selecting the port in the Available Ports list and clicking the right
arrow button.

NOTE

The Management port, peri port, and stack ports are not included in the Available Ports list.
The selected ports move from the Available Ports list to the Selected Ports list.
For VDX 6740 or VDX 6740-T devices, if you create a port group with a 40 GbE port and then
the 40 GbE port is broken out into 4 10 GbE ports, the 40 GbE port is automatically removed
from the port group. You must manually add the 4 10 GbE ports back into the port group.
This also occurs when you merge 4 10 GbE ports into a single 40 GbE port. If you create a port
group with 4 10 GbE ports and then merge the 4 10 GbE ports into a 40 GbE port, the 4 10
GbE ports are automatically removed from the port group. You must manually add the 40 GbE
port back into the group.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

123

4

Port Groups

7.

Remove ports from the group by selecting the port in the Selected Ports list and clicking the
left arrow button.
The selected ports move from the Selected Ports list to the Available Ports list.

8. Click OK.

Duplicating a port group
To duplicate a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the port group you want to duplicate in the Product List and select Duplicate Group.
The Add Port Group dialog box displays.
3. Edit the name for the port group in the Name field.
4. Edit the description for the port group in the Description field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• All Ports — Select to display all ports.
• Ports Connected to APs — Select to display only ports connected to an access point (AP).
6. Add ports to the group by selecting the port in the Available Ports list and clicking the right
arrow button.

NOTE

The Management port, peri port, and stack ports are not included in the Available Ports list.
The selected ports move from the Available Ports list to the Selected Ports list.
For VDX 6740 or VDX 6740-T devices, if you create a port group with a 40 GbE port and then
the 40 GbE port is broken out into 4 10 GbE ports, the 40 GbE port is automatically removed
from the port group. You must manually add the 4 10 GbE ports back into the port group.
This also occurs when you merge 4 10 GbE ports into a single 40 GbE port. If you create a port
group with 4 10 GbE ports and then merge the 4 10 GbE ports into a 40 GbE port, the 4 10
GbE ports are automatically removed from the port group. You must manually add the 40 GbE
port back into the group.
7.

Remove ports from the group by selecting the port in the Selected Ports list and clicking the
left arrow button.
The selected ports move from the Selected Ports list to the Available Ports list.

8. Click OK.

124

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port Groups

4

Viewing port group properties
To view port group properties, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the port group you want to view properties for in the Product List and select
Properties.
The Port Group Properties dialog box displays.
3. Review the information:

TABLE 16
Field/Component

Description

Properties tab

Select to display information about the group.

Name

The unique name (maximum 64 characters) for the product group.

Description

The description (maximum 255 characters) for the product group.

Creator

The user name of the creator (for example, Administrator).

Ports tab

Select to display information about products in the group.

Port Count
Port Actions list

The number of ports in the group.
Select one of the following options:
Enable
Disable
Display Attached Port Properties

•
•
•

Performance list

Select to launch the real time or historical performance.

Identifier

The identifier of the port.

Name

The name of the port.

MAC Address

The MAC Address of the port.

Port Status

The status of the port.

Port State

The state of the port.

Type

The port type.

Speed

The Speed of the port.

L2/Tag Mode

Indicates whether L2 tag mode is enabled or disabled. If enabled,
indicates whether the port is tagged, untagged, or dual.

Untagged VLAN ID

The untagged VLAN identifier of the port.

Duplex Mode

The duplex mode of the port, such as auto-sense, full-duplex, or none.

Stacking Port

Whether or not the port stacked.

Role

The role of the device, such as Edge.

Product

The name of the product.

User_defined_property (up to 3)

A user-defined port property value. You can create up to 3 user-defined
properties (refer to “Properties customization” on page 1329).

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

125

4

Port Groups

Deleting a port group
You can delete more than one group at a time.
To delete a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the port group you want to delete in the Product List and select Delete Group.
Ctrl and click to select more than one group to delete.
A confirmation message displays.
3. Click Yes.
The group is deleted from the Ports Groups folder of the Product list.

126

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

5

Application Configuration

In this chapter
• Server Data backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Server Data restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SAN data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event storage settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Flyover settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Name settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Miscellaneous security settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Syslog Registration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SNMP Trap Registration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Software Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FIPS Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128
134
135
139
140
142
149
151
152
153
155
180

Configurable preferences
You can use the Options dialog box to configure the following preferences in the Management
application:

• Event Storage — Use to configure the maximum number of historical events saved to the
repository as well as the retention period for the events. For more information, refer to “Event
storage settings” on page 139.

• Flyovers — Use to customize the properties display in product and connection flyovers. For
more information, refer to “Flyover settings” on page 140.

• Look and Feel — Use to customize the Management application interface to mimic your system
settings as well as define the size of the font. For more information, refer to “Look and feel
customization” on page 16.

• Performance Graph Style — Use to configure the color scheme and to display data points for all
performance graphics in the management application. For more information, refer to
“Performance Data” on page 969.

• Miscellaneous Security — Use to configure server security configurations and the login banner.
For more information, refer to “Miscellaneous security settings” on page 149.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

127

5

Server Data backup

• Server Backup — Use to configure backup settings. Backup is a service process that
periodically copies and stores application files to an output directory. The output directory is
relative to the server and must use a network share format to support backup to the network. If
you use a network path as the output directory, you must add network credentials. For more
information, refer to “Server Data backup” on page 128 and “Server Data restore” on
page 134.

• Syslog Registration — Use to automatically register the server as the syslog recipient on
products. For more information, refer to “Syslog Registration settings” on page 151.

• Trap Registration — Use to automatically register the server as the trap recipient on products. If
SAN products have Informs enabled, the registration is for the Informs. For more information,
refer to “SNMP Trap Registration settings” on page 152.

• Trap Forwarding Credentials — Use to configure SNMP credentials for the traps forwarded by
the server. For more information, refer to “SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings” on
page 153.

• Client/Server IP — Use to configure IP address of the Management application server. For more
information, refer to “Client/Server IP” on page 155.

• IP Preferences — Use to configure IP preferences. For more information, refer to “IP
preferences” on page 159.

• Memory Allocation — Use to configure memory allocation for the client and server. For more
information, refer to “Memory allocation settings” on page 166.

• Product Communication — Use to configure HTTP or HTTP over SSL for connecting to the
server. For more information, refer to “Product communication settings” on page 169.

• FTP/SCP/SFTP servers — Use to configure internal or external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server
settings. For more information, refer to “FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings” on page 172.

• Server Port — Use to configure server port settings. For more information, refer to “Server port
settings” on page 177.

• Support Mode — Use to configure support settings to enable enhanced diagnostics. For more
information, refer to “Support mode settings” on page 178.

Server Data backup
The Management application helps you to protect your data by backing it up automatically. Backup
is a service process that periodically copies and stores application files to an output directory. The
output directory is relative to the server and must use a network share format to support backup to
the network. The data can then be restored, as necessary.

NOTE

Backing up data takes some time. It is possible that, in a disaster recovery situation, configuration
changes made after the last backup interval will be missing from the backup.
The Management application allows you to view the backup status at a glance, initiate immediate
backup, enable or disable automatic backup, reconfigure the backup directory, interval, and start
time, and retrieve backup events.

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Server Data backup

5

What is backed up?
The data is backed up to the following directories:

• Backup\databases — contains database and log files.
• Backup\data — contains IP product firmware and configurations.
• Backup\conf – contains the Management application configuration files.

Management server backup
There are three options for backing up data to the Management server:

• Configuring backup to a CD drive
• Configuring backup to a hard drive
• Configuring backup to a network drive
The Management server is backed up to D:\Backup (Windows systems) by default. If there is not
second hard disk, this is a rewritable (CD-RW) compact disk. Make sure you have a CD-RW disk in
the CD recorder drive to ensure that backup can occur. Critical information from the Management
application is automatically backed up to the CD-RW when the data directory contents change or
when you restart the Management application.
Note that backing up to CD is not the recommended method. The usable capacity of a CD is
approximately 700 MB and needs to be replaced when full. Also, CD media has a limited number of
re-writes before the medium is exhausted, and write errors occur. It is recommended that you
configure the backup system to target a hard drive or a network drive as described in the
procedures below.

Back up directory structure overview
The Management server backs up data to two alternate folders. For example, if the backup
directory location is D:\Backup, the backup service alternates between two backup directories,
D:\Backup\Backup and D:\Backup\BackupAlt. The current backup is always D:\Backup and
contains a complete backup of the system. The older backup is always D:\BackupAlt.
If a backup cycle fails, the cause is usually a full CD-RW. When the backup cycle fails, there may
only be one directory, D:\Backup. There may also be a D:\BackupTemp directory. Ignore this
directory because it may be incomplete.

Configuring backup
To configure backup, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
The Server Backup pane displays (Figure 55) with the currently defined directory displays in
the Backup Output Directory field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

129

5

Server Data backup

FIGURE 55

Options dialog box (Server Backup pane)

3. Select the Enable Backup check box, if necessary.
4. Enter the time (using a 24-hour clock) you want the backup process to begin in the Next
Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields.
5. Select an interval from the Backup Interval drop-down list to set how often backup occurs.
6. Back up data to a hard drive by browsing to the hard drive and directory to which you want to
back up your data.

NOTE

This requires a hard drive. The drive should not be the same physical drive on which your
Operating System or the Management application is installed.
7.

Back up data to a network drive by completing the following steps.
To back up to a network drive, your workstation can be either in the same domain or in the
same workgroup. However, you must have rights to copy files for the network drive.

NOTE

The Management application should not directly access local or network resources through
mapped drive letters. When the Management application must access a remote resource (or
any process that is running in a different security context), you should use the Universal
Naming Convention (UNC) name to access the resource. For more information about services
and redirected drives, refer to http://support.microsoft.com/kb/180362/en-us.

NOTE

Configuring backup to a network drive is not supported on UNIX systems.

NOTE

It is recommended that this configuration be completed on the Local client (the client
application running on the Server) so that the backup path and location can be confirmed.

130

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Server Data backup

a.

5

Browse to the network share and directory to which you want to back up your data.

NOTE

You must specify the directory in a network share format (for example,
\\network-name\share-name\directory). Do not use the drive letter format (C:\directory).

b.

(Windows only) Enter the name of the Windows domain or workgroup in which you are
defined in the Domain Workgroup field.

NOTE

You must be authorized to write to the network device.

c.

(Windows only) Enter your Windows login name in the User Name field.

d.

(Windows only) Enter your Windows password in the Password field.

8. Back up data to a CD by completing the following steps.

NOTE

This is not recommended on a permanent basis. CDs have a limited life, and may only last a
month. An error message occurs if your Management application can no longer back up to the
disc.
a.

Verify that the CD backup directory is correct (default directory is D:\Backup).
It is assumed that drive D is a CD-RW drive.
You can change the directory or use the Browse button to select another directory.

b.

Install the formatted disc into the CD drive.
To back up to a writable CD, you must have CD-writing software installed. The disc must be
formatted by the CD-writing software so that it behaves like a drive.

9. Click Apply or OK.
The application verifies that the backup device exists and that the server can write to it.
For back up to a hard drive or writable CD, if the device does not exist or is not writable, an
error message displays that says you have entered an invalid device.
For back up to a network drive, if the device does not exist or you are not authorized to write to
the network drive, an error message displays that states you have entered an invalid device
path or invalid network credentials.
Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error.
Backup occurs, if needed, at the interval you specified.

Enabling backup
Backup is enabled by default. However, if it has been disabled, complete the following steps to
enable the function.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

131

5

Server Data backup

3. Select the Enable Backup check box.
4. Click Apply or OK.

Disabling backup
Backup is enabled by default. If you want to stop the backup process, you need to disable backup.
To disable the backup function, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
3. Clear the Enable Backup check box.
4. Click Apply or OK.

Viewing the backup status
The Management application enables you to view the backup status at a glance by providing a
backup status icon on the Status Bar. The following table illustrates and describes the icons that
indicate the current status of the backup function.

TABLE 17
Icon

Backup status
Description
Backup in Progress — displays the following tooltip: “Backup started at hh:mm:ss, in progress...
XX directories are backed up.”
Countdown to Next Scheduled Backup — displays the following tooltip: “Next backup scheduled
at hh:mm:ss.”
Backup Disabled — displays the following tooltip: “Backup is disabled.”

Backup Failed — displays the following tooltip: “Backup failed at hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy.”

Changing the backup interval
When the backup feature is enabled, your SAN is protected by automatic backups. The backups
occur every 24 hours by default. However, you can change the interval at which backup occurs.

NOTE

Do NOT modify the backup.properties file.
To change the backup interval, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.

132

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Server Data backup

5

3. Select an interval from the Backup Interval drop-down list to set how often backup occurs.
4. Click Apply or OK.
The minimum value is 6 hours and the maximum value is 24 hours.

Starting immediate backup
NOTE
You must have backup privileges to use the Backup Now function. For more information about
privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To start the backup process immediately, complete one of the following procedures:
Using the Backup Icon, right-click the Backup icon and select Backup Now.
The backup process begins immediately.
OR
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
3. Click Backup Now.
Click Yes on the confirmation message. The backup process begins immediately.
4. Click Apply or OK.

Reviewing backup events
The Master Log, which displays in the lower left area of the main window, lists the events that occur
on the Fabric.
If you do not see the Master Log, select View > Show Panels > All Panels.
The following backup events appear in the Master Log:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Backup started
Backup error
Backup Enabled
Backup Disabled
Backup Now
Backup destination change
Backup interval change
Backup start time change
Domain workgroup change
User name change
User password change
Number of files backed up on completion

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

133

5

Server Data restore

• Network share access problem when backup starts or during backup (not when the backup
configuration is changed)

Server Data restore
NOTE

You cannot restore data from a previous version of the Management application.

NOTE

You cannot restore data from a higher or lower configuration (Trial or Licensed version) of the
Management application.

NOTE
You cannot restore data from a different package of the Management application.
The Management application helps you to protect your data by backing it up automatically. The
data can then be restored, as necessary.
The data in the following directories is automatically backed up to disk. The data includes the
following items:

• Backup\databases — contains database and log files.
• Backup\data — contains IP product firmware and configurations.
• Backup\conf – contains the Management application configuration files.
In a disaster recovery situation, it is possible that configuration changes made less than 45
minutes before Server loss (depending on the backup interval you set) could be missing from the
backup.

Restoring data
NOTE

The restore data files must use the exact directory structure as the backup directory structure (refer
to “Back up directory structure overview” on page 129).
1. (Windows) Open the Server Management Console from the Start menu on the Management
application server.
OR
(UNIX) Open Install_Home/bin from the Management application server and type ./smc.sh at
the command line.
2. Click the Services tab.
The tab lists the Management application services.
3. Click Stop Services to stop all of the services.
4. Click the Restore tab.
5. Browse to the backup location.

134

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN data collection

5

Browse to the location specified in the Output Directory field on the Options dialog box Backup pane.
6. Click Restore.
Upon completion, a message displays the status of the restore operation. Click OK to close the
message and the Server Management Console. For the restored data to take effect, re-launch
the Configuration Wizard using the instructions in “Launching the Configuration Wizard” on
page 5.

Restoring data to a new server
NOTE
The restore data files must use the exact directory structure as the backup directory structure (refer
to “Back up directory structure overview” on page 129).
If your Management application server fails and you must recover information to a new server,
restore the data (Refer to “Restoring data” on page 134 for complete instructions).

SAN data collection
NOTE

SAN data collection is only supported on Fabric OS devices.
The Management application uses collectors to gather data from switches, persist the switches in
the database, and to publish the collected data to the client. Each collector polls data for one
feature area using HTTP or HTTPS (web pages or CAL calls) to communicate with the switch. For a
given switch, only one collector runs at a time. When you first discover a switch, all collectors
associated with that switch type run to gather data on the switch. After that, the Management
application schedules each collector to run independently. Since this is a fairly repetitive task, the
Management application has a collection framework which schedules these collectors to run
periodically (using lazy polling).
When a data collector fails, the Management application automatically retries the collection after
the short tick interval. However, there are two exceptions to this retry rule:

• If collection failure is due to an ACL rule blocking access to the switch, the Management
application retries collection after the lazy polling interval (not the short tick interval).

• If collection failure is due to incorrect switch credentials in the Management application, the
Management application retries collection three times after which all communication with the
switch is stopped to prevent lock out of the Fabric OS user due to too many failed login
attempts.
In addition to the automatic collection retry, you can configure adaptive asset collection to trigger
specific collectors to run when a particular event occurs. For example, when the Management
application receives an SNMP trap that a port has been disabled, the Management application
triggers the TopologyCollector (which collects ISL information) and the SwitchAssetCollector to
make sure that the client reflects the changes due to the port going down. Adaptive asset
collection occurs within the short tick interval.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

135

5

SAN data collection

The Management application uses the short tick interval to ping the switch for a periodic
reachability check. If the reachability check succeeds, then the Management application runs
pending collectors triggered by an event. When no SNMP traps or syslog events occur, the
Management application uses the lazy polling interval to schedule collection of configuration and
status changes. The lazy polling interval process schedules any pending collectors for the next
short tick. Therefore, the interval between collections when there are no SNMP traps or syslog
events is the lazy polling interval plus the short tick interval. To increase polling efficiency, you can
configure both the short tick interval (Check for state change every option) and the lazy polling
interval (If no state change, poll switch every option) on the Options dialog box. For step-by-step
instructions, refer to “Configuring asset polling” on page 168.
There are two types of collectors, fabric-level collectors and switch-level collectors. Fabric-level
collectors gather fabric-level information. The Management application collects fabric-level data
from the seed switch, for example, the NameServerCollector gathers data about all end devices
present in the fabric.
The Management application uses the following Fabric-level collectors:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

DeviceFDMICollector – Collects FDMI-related information for end devices in the fabric.
NameServerInfoCollector – Collects data about end devices in the fabric.
ActiveZoneInfoCollector – Collects the active zone configuration in the fabric.
ZoneInfoCollector – Collects the defined zone configuration in the fabric.
TopologyCollector – Collects data about the ISLs in the fabric.
TrunkInfoCollector – Collects data about trunks in the fabric.
WtJarsCollector – Downloads the jar files needed to launch WebTools from the Management
application.

Switch-level collectors gather individual switch-level information (such as, port details and so on).
The Management application also uses specialty collectors which run only for switches that have a
particular feature. For example the EncryptionBaseCollector only runs for encryption switches. The
Management application uses the following Switch-level collectors:

• BottleneckConfigCollector – Collects data about bottleneck configuration on the switch.
• BottleneckStatusCollector – Collects data about the bottleneck status (whether or not a port is
bottlenecked) for each port on the switch.

• EncryptionBaseCollector – Collects all encryption related data.
• GroupConfigChangeCollector – Collects encryption data related to HA Cluster, Target
Containers, Crypto Host, and Crypto LUN.

• GroupConfigCollector – Collects group member and group collection data.
• FabricCollector – Collects the fabric members (switches) and persists the members in the
application. This is the main collector that organizes fabric discovery.

• CeeSwitchCalCollector – Collects the association of a device port to a 10 G physical port on the
DCB switch.

•
•
•
•
•

136

DCBCollector – Collects data specific to the DCB switch.
FportTrunkCollector – Collects data about F-port trunks present on the switch.
GigePortCollector – Collects GigE-port data on the switch.
LicenseCollector – Collects data about licenses on the switch.
LiteSwitchAssetCollector – Collects the FMS mode setting on the switch.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product communication protocols

5

• SwitchAssetCollector – Collects data about the switch including, inventory details, port level
data, any blades that may be present (on directors), AG-port mapping, and auto trace dump
settings. This is the major collector for switch data.

•
•
•
•
•

FCIPCollector – Collects FCIP-related data on the older FCIP switches.
XFCIPCollector – Collects extended FCIP-related data on the newer FCIP switches.
MapsPolicyCollector – Collects data about MAPS policies configured on the switch.
MetaSANCollector – Collects data about the IFLs (Inter Fabric Links) on the switch.
FlowCollector – Collects data about the flow definitions on the switch. Also collects the
subflows for each flow definition. This collector requires the Fabric Insight license on the
switch.

• VPWwnInfoCollector – Collects data about the VPWWN (Virtual Port World Wide Name) on the
switch.
The Management application collects performance monitoring data via SNMP. Performance
monitoring data is collected asynchronously and is not affected by the collector scheduling.
Performance data (mostly port statistics) is collected every 5 minutes.

Product communication protocols
Table 18 details the protocols that the Management application uses for communication between
products and the Management application server.

TABLE 18

Product communication protocols

Protocol

Description

Management application use

Communicates with device type

ICMP

The Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) is part of the Internet Protocol Suite,
as defined in RFC 792.
ICMP messages are typically used for diagnostic or control purposes or generated in
response to errors in IP operations.

Used during initial discovery.
For IronWare devices, used for every subsequent polling cycle.
You can edit the IronWare polling interval on
the Options dialog box (refer to “Configuring
polling service preferences” on page 163).

Fabric OS
IronWare
Network OS

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP) is an internet-standard protocol for
managing devices on IP networks. SNMP is a
component of the Internet Protocol Suite as
defined by the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). It consists of a set of standards
for network management, including an application layer protocol, a database schema,
and a set of data objects.

Used during discovery, performance polling,
and operation status polling.
You can edit the IronWare operating polling
interval on the Options dialog box (refer to
“Configuring polling service preferences” on
page 163).
Note that performance polling (including
data collection for dashboards) completely
relies on SNMP.
For Historical data collection, the minimum
time interval is 1 minute for IronWare and
Network OS devices and 5 minutes for Fabric
OS devices.
For real time graphs, the minimum time
interval is 10 seconds.

Fabric OS
IronWare
Network OS

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

137

5

Product communication protocols

TABLE 18

Product communication protocols

Protocol

Description

Management application use

Communicates with device type

NETCONF

The Network Configuration Protocol (NETCONF), is an IETF network management protocol. NETCONF provides mechanisms to
install, manipulate, and delete the configuration of network devices. Its operations are
realized on top of a simple Remote Procedure Call (RPC) layer. The NETCONF protocol
uses an Extensible Markup Language (XML)
based data encoding for the configuration
data as well as the protocol messages. The
protocol messages are exchanged on top of
a secure transport protocol..

Used to discover all the information on VDX
including Device, Ports, Zoning details and
so on.
Also used for configuring various parameters
to VDX devices.

Network OS

HTTP/HTTPS The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is an
application protocol for distributed, collaborative, hypermedia information systems. HTTP
is the foundation of data communication for
the World Wide Web.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)
is a communications protocol for secure
communication over a computer network,
with especially wide deployment on the Internet. Technically, it is not a protocol in and of
itself; rather, it is the result of simply layering
the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) on top
of the SSL/TLS protocol, thus adding the
security capabilities of SSL/TLS to standard
HTTP communications.

Used to collect all information required to
manage Fabric OS devices.
Used to launch web element manager for
IronWare devices.
You can configure the HTTP/HTTPS protocol
from the Options dialog box (refer to “Product communication settings” on page 169).

Fabric OS
IronWare

SSH/Telnet

Secure Shell (SSH) is a cryptographic network protocol for secure data communication, remote command-line login, remote
command execution, and other secure network services between two networked computers that connects, via a secure channel
over an insecure network, a server and a client.
Telnet is a network protocol used on the
Internet or local area networks to provide a
bidirectional interactive text-oriented communication facility using a virtual terminal
connection. User data is interspersed
in-band with Telnet control information in an
8-bit byte oriented data connection over the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).

Used to send configurations to IronWare
devices.
For Network OS and IronWare products, used
to deploy CLI templates created through the
CLI Configuration Manager.
You can configure this protocol on the
Options dialog box (refer to “Configuring IP
communication” on page 171.

IronWare
Network OS

FTP

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a standard network protocol used to transfer files from one
host to another host over a TCP-based network

Used for firmware download.
For Fabric OS and Network OS devices, used
to collect technical support information.
For Network OS devices, used for configuration management (backup and restore).
For more information, refer to
“FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings” on
page 172.

Fabric OS
Network OS

138

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event storage settings

TABLE 18

5

Product communication protocols

Protocol

Description

Management application use

Communicates with device type

SCP

Secure copy (SCP) is a means of securely
transferring computer files between a local
host and a remote host or between two
remote hosts. It is based on the Secure Shell
(SSH) protocol.

Used for firmware download.
For Fabric OS and Network OS devices, used
to collect technical support information.
For Network OS devices, used for configuration management (backup and restore).
For more information, refer to
“FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings” on
page 172.

Fabric OS
IronWare
Network OS

SFTP

Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) or SSH
File Transfer Protocol is a network protocol
that provides file access, file transfer, and
file managementfunctionalities over any reliable data stream.

Used for firmware download.
For Fabric OS and Network OS devices, used
to collect technical support information.
For Network OS devices, used for configuration management (backup and restore).
For more information, refer to
“FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings” on
page 172.

Fabric OS
Network OS

Event storage settings
You can configure the maximum number of historical events save to the repository, how long the
events will be retained, as well as whether to store historical events to a file before purging them
from the repository.

Configuring event storage
To configure event storage, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Event Storage in the Category list (Figure 56).

FIGURE 56

Options dialog box (Event Storage pane)

3. Enter the maximum number of events you want to be retained in the repository in the
Maximum Events field.
Depending on your installation, the maximum number of events stored are as follows:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

139

5

Flyover settings

• Professional — 1 through 100,000
• Enterprise — 1 through 10,000,000
Default is 50,000. Older events are purged at midnight on the date the maximum event limit is
reached regardless of the retention days.
4. Enter then number of days (1 through 365) you want to store events in the Maximum Days
field.
The events are purged at midnight on the last day of the retention period regardless of the
number of maximum events.
5. Choose one of the following options:

• Select the Yes option to store all historical events from the repository to a file while purging
occurs.

• Select the No option to purge historical events from the repository without storing them as
a file.
6. Click OK.

Storing historical events purged from repository
To store historical events purged from the repository, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Event Storage in the Category list.
3. Select the Yes option.
4. Click OK.
Purged events from the master log table are stored in the Install_Home\data\archive\events
directory using the format event_MMDDYYY.zip (for example, event_04052011.zip. These files
are retained for a maximum of 30 days. The zip file contains multiple archive text files that use
the format event_MMDDYYY_N.txt (for example, event_04052011_1.txt).

Flyover settings
You can configure your system to display information for products and connections in a pop-up
window on the Connectivity Map.

Configuring flyovers
To display product and connection information in a pop-up window, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Flyovers in the Category list.

140

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Flyover settings

5

3. Select the Enable flyover display check box to enable flyover display on your system.
4. Select the Include labels check box to include labels on flyover displays.
5. Add product properties you want to display on flyover by selecting the Product tab (Figure 57)
and completing the following steps.

FIGURE 57

Options dialog box (Flyovers pane, Product tab)

a.

Select the protocol type from the Type list, if necessary.

b.

Select each property you want to display in the product flyover from the Available
Properties table.
Depending on which protocol you select, some of the following properties may not be
available:
IP

•
•

Display Name
IP Address

•

Status

c.

Click the right arrow to move the selected properties to the Selected Properties table.

d.

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the properties in the Selected
Properties table, if necessary.
The properties displayed in the Selected Properties table appear in the flyover display.

6. Remove product properties you do not want to display on flyover by selecting the property in the
Selected Properties table and clicking the left arrow.
7.

Add connection properties you want to display on flyover by selecting the Connection tab
(Figure 58) and completing the following steps.

FIGURE 58

Options dialog box (Flyovers pane, Connection tab)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

141

5

Name settings

a.

Select the protocol type from the Type list, if necessary.
Depending on which protocol you select, some properties may not be available for all
protocols.

b.

Select each property you want to display in the connection flyover from the Available
Properties table.
Depending on which protocol you select, some of the following properties may not be
available for all protocols:
IP

• IP_Address:Port-IP_Address:Port
c.

Click the right arrow to move the selected properties to the Selected Properties table.

d.

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the properties in the Selected
Properties table.
The properties displayed in the Selected Properties table appear in the flyover display.

8. Remove connection properties you do not want to display on flyover by selecting the property in
the Selected Properties table and clicking the left arrow.
9. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Turning flyovers on or off
Flyovers display when you place the cursor on a product. They provide a quick way to view a
product’s properties.
To turn flyovers on or off, select Enable Flyover Display from the View menu.

Viewing flyovers
On the Topology Map, rest the pointer over a product icon, port, or connection.
The pop-up window containing the product, port, or connection information displays.
For the product icon, the pop-up window displays the display name and IP address of the device.
For the connection, the pop-up window displays the IP address and port number for each device at
either end of the connection. If one of the connections is a cloud, the port number does not display.

Name settings
You can use Names as a method of providing familiar simple names to products and ports in your
SAN. Using your Management application you can:

• Set names to be unique or non-unique.
• Fix duplicate names.
• Associate a name with a product, port WWN, or Fabric Assigned WWN currently being
discovered.

• Add a WWN and an associated name for a product or port that is not yet being discovered.
• Remove or disassociate a name from a WWN.

142

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Name settings

5

Fixing duplicate names
To fix duplicated names, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Click Fix Duplicates.
The Duplicated Names dialog box displays (Figure 59).

FIGURE 59

Duplicated Names dialog box

The Duplicated Names dialog box contains the following information:

• Description — A description of the device.
• Duplicate Names table — Every instance of duplicate names.









Fabric — The fabric name.
FC Address — The Fibre Channel address.
Names — The current name of the device.
If you selected the Append Incremental numbers for all repetitive names option, the
names display with the incremental numbering.
If you selected the I will fix them myself option, this field becomes editable.
Operational Status — The operational status of the device. There are four possible
values:
Up — Operation is normal.
Down — The port is down or the route to the remote destination is disabled.
Disabled — The connection has been manually disabled.
Backup Active — The backup TCP port is active due to a failover.
Port # — The port number.
Type — The type of device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

143

5

Name settings

3. Select one of the following options.

• If you select Append Incremental numbers for all repetitive names, the names are edited
automatically using incremental numbering.

• If you select I will fix them myself, edit the name in the Name field.
4. Click OK on the Duplicated Names dialog box.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Viewing names
To view names associated with devices, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays (Figure 60).

FIGURE 60

Configure Names dialog box

2. Select All Names from the Display list.
Only devices with a name display. The table displays the following information.

• Scope list — Select a search value (Name or WWN) from the list.
• Search text box — Enter the name or WWN of the device for which you are searching.
• Search button — Click to search on the value in the Search field. For more information,
refer to “Searching for a device by name” on page 148.

144

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Name settings

5

• Display table — This table displays the following information:
Description–A description of the device.

Name–The name of the device. Enter a name for the device.

Operational Status–The operational status of the device (discovered, operational, and
unknown).

Type–The type of device (port, node, Fabric Assigned WWN, and unknown).

WWN–The world wide node (WWN) of the device. Enter a WWN for the device.
Click a column head to sort the list. Click a column head again to reverse the sort
order.
Remove button — Click to remove a device from the Display table. For more information,
refer to “Removing a name from a device” on page 147.


•

• Import button — Click to import name data. For more information, refer to “Importing
Names” on page 148.

• Export button — Click to export the name data. Depending on your operating system, the
default export location are as follows:



Desktop\My documents (Windows)
\root (Linux)

For more information, refer to “Exporting names” on page 147.

• Fix Duplicates button — Click to launch the Fix Duplicates dialog box. For more information,
refer to “Fixing duplicate names” on page 143.

• Apply Names button — Click to apply unassigned (detached) names to newly discovered
devices. For more information, refer to “Applying a name to a detached WWN” on
page 146.

• Detached WWN text box — Enter the WWN of the device you want to add.
• Name text box — Enter a name for the device you want to add.
• Add button — Click to add a device by detached WWN and Name to the table. For more
information, refer to “Adding a name to a new device” on page 146.
3. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.

Adding a name to an existing device
To add a name to an existing device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Select how you want to display devices from the Display list.
You can display devices by All Names, All WWNs, Fabric Assigned WWNs, Only Fabrics, Only
Products, Only Ports, or Switch and N Ports.
All discovered devices display.
3. Select the device to which you want to assign a name in the Display table.
4. Double-click in the Name column for the selected device or port and enter a name for the
device or port.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

145

5

Name settings

If you set names to be unique on the Options dialog box and the name you entered already
exists, the entry is not accepted. To search for the device already using the name, refer to
“Searching for a device by name” on page 148 or “Searching for a device by WWN” on
page 149 in the Configure Names dialog box or “Searching for a device” on page 299 in the
connectivity map.

NOTE

If you segment a fabric, the Fabric’s name follows the assigned principal switch.
5. Click OK on the confirmation message.
6. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.

Adding a name to a new device
To add a new device and name it, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Enter the WWN of the device in the Detached WWN field.
3. Enter a name for the device in the Name field.
4. Click Add.
The new device displays in the table.
If you set names to be unique on the Options dialog box and the name you entered already
exists, a message indicating the name already in use displays. Click OK to close the message
and change the name.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Applying a name to a detached WWN
To apply a name to a detached wwn, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Click Apply Names.
If there are any detached WWNs in a discovered state, the Apply Names dialog box displays.
3. Select or clear the check box for the associated switch or switch port.
Select a check box to apply the detached name as the switch or switch port name and remove
the duplicated WWN entry (detached) in the Configure Names dialog box.
Clear a check box to remove the duplicated WWN entry (detached) in the Configure Names
dialog box.
4. Click OK on the Apply Names dialog box.
5. Click OK on the Configure Names dialog box.

146

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Name settings

5

Removing a name from a device
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. In the Display table, select the name you want to remove.
3. Click Remove.
An application message displays asking if you are sure you want clear the selected name.
4. Click Yes.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Editing names
To edit the name associated with a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Select All Names from the Display list.
Only devices with a name display. The table displays the Name, WWN, Operational Status,
Type, and a Description of the device.
3. Click the name you want to edit in the Name column.
4. Edit the name and press Enter.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Exporting names
To export the names associated with devices, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Click Export.
The Export Files dialog displays.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the export file.
Depending on your operating system, the default export location are as follows:

• Desktop\My documents (Windows)
• \root (Linux)
4. Enter a name for the file and click Save.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

147

5

Name settings

Importing Names
If the name length exceeds the limitations detailed in the following table, you must edit the name
(in the CSV file) before import. Names that exceed these limits will not be imported. If you migrated
from a previous version, the .properties file is located in the Install_Home\migration\data folder.

TABLE 19
Device

Character limit

Fabric OS switch 6.2 or later

30 (24 character limit when in FICON mode)

Fabric OS switch 6.1.X or earlier

15

Fabric OS switch port 7.0 or later

128 (24 character limit when in FICON mode)

Fabric OS switch port 6.4.X or earlier

32 (24 character limit when in FICON mode)

HBA

256

HBA port

256

Others names

128

To import names, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Click Import.
The Import Files dialog displays.
3. Browse to the import (.csv) file location.
4. Select the file and click Import.
5. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.
6. Click OK on the confirmation message.

Searching for a device by name
You can search for objects (switch, fabric, product, ports, or N Ports) by name. To search for a name
in the Connectivity Map, refer to “Searching for a device” on page 299.
To search by name, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Select All Names from the Display list.
3. Select Name from the Scope list.
4. Enter the name you want to search for in the Search field.
You can search on partial names.

NOTE

To search for a device, the device must be discovered and display in the topology.

148

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Miscellaneous security settings

5

5. Click Search.
All devices with the specified name (or partial name) are highlighted in the Display table. You
may need to scroll to see all highlighted names.
If the search finds no devices, a ‘no item found’ message displays.
6. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.

Searching for a device by WWN
You can search for objects (switch, fabric, product, ports, or N Ports) by WWN (world wide name). To
search for a WWN in the Connectivity Map, refer to “Searching for a device” on page 299.
To search by WWN, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Names.
The Configure Names dialog box displays.
2. Select All Names from the Display list.
3. Select WWN from the Scope list.
4. Enter the WWN you want to search for in the Search field.
You can search on partial WWNs.

NOTE

To search for a device, the device must be discovered and display in the topology.
5. Click Search.
All devices with the specified WWN (or partial WWN) are highlighted in the Display table. You
may need to scroll to see all highlighted WWNs.
If the search finds no devices, a ‘no item found’ message displays.
6. Click OK to close the Configure Names dialog box.

Miscellaneous security settings
You can configure the Server Name, login banner, modify whether or not to allow clients to save
passwords, and modify whether or not to enforce the MD5 checksum during import. When the login
banner is enabled, each time a client connects to the server, the login banner displays with a legal
notice provided by you. The client's users must acknowledge the login banner to proceed,
otherwise they are logged out.

NOTE

M-EOS device support is no longer available in the Management application; therefore, the CHAP
Secret and Retype Secret fields are no longer required.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

149

5

Miscellaneous security settings

Configuring the server name
To configure the server name, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Security Misc in the Category list.
The Security Misc pane displays (Figure 61).

FIGURE 61

Options dialog box (Security Misc pane)

3. Enter the server name in the Server Name field.
The Server Name field cannot be empty.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring login security
To configure login security, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Security Misc in the Category list.
3. Choose one of the following options:

150

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Syslog Registration settings

5

• To allow users to save their password in the Login Security list, select Allow clients to save
password on login.

• To not allow users to save their password in the Login Security list, select Do NOT allow
clients to save password on login.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring the login banner display
To configure the login banner display, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Security Misc in the Category list.
3. Select the Display login banner upon client login check box.
4. Enter the message you want to display every time a user logs into this server in the Banner
Message field.
This field contains a maximum of 2048 characters.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Disabling the login banner
To disable the login banner display, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Security Misc in the Category list.
3. Clear the Display login banner upon client login check box.

NOTE

Users logging into the client will not see the banner when logging in to this Server.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Syslog Registration settings
You can automatically register the server as the syslog recipient on products.

Registering a server as a Syslog recipient automatically
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Syslog Registration in the Category pane.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

151

5

SNMP Trap Registration settings

The Syslog Registration pane displays (Figure 62).

FIGURE 62

Options dialog box (Syslog Registration pane)

3. Select the Auto register server as Syslog recipient check box, if necessary.
This check box is selected by default.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring the Syslog listing port number
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Syslog Registration in the Category pane.
The Syslog Registration pane displays (Figure 62).
3. Enter the Syslog listening port number of the Server in the Syslog Listening Port (Server) field,
if necessary.
The default Syslog listening port number is 514 and is automatically populated.
For Network OS devices, only the default port (514) can be registered as the Syslog Listening
Port.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

SNMP Trap Registration settings
You can automatically register the server as the trap recipient on products. If SAN products have
Informs enabled, the registration is for the Informs.

Registering a server as a SNMP trap recipient automatically
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Trap Registration in the Category pane.
The Trap Registration pane displays (Figure 63).

152

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings

FIGURE 63

5

Options dialog box (Trap Registration pane)

3. Select the Auto register server as SNMP trap or informs recipient check box, if necessary.
This check box is selected by default.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring the SNMP trap listing port number
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Trap Registration in the Category pane.
3. Enter the SNMP listening port number of the Server in the SNMP Listening Port (Server) field, if
necessary.
The default SNMP listening port number is 162 and is automatically populated.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings
You can configure SNMP credentials for the traps forwarded by the server.

Configuring SNMP v1 and v2c credentials
To configure a SNMP v1 or v2c credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Trap Forwarding Credentials in the Category pane.
The Trap Forwarding Credentials pane displays (Figure 64).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

153

5

SNMP Trap forwarding credential settings

FIGURE 64

Options dialog box (Trap Forwarding Credentials pane)

3. Enter the unique community string (case sensitive, 1 to 16 characters). in the Community and
Confirm Community fields.
Displays as asterisks. Allows all printable ASCII characters.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring SNMP v3 credentials
To configure a SNMP v1 or v2c credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Trap Forwarding Credentials in the Category pane.
The Trap Forwarding Credentials pane displays (Figure 64).
3. Enter the SNMP v3 name (case sensitive, 1 to 16 characters) to identify the credentials in the
User Name field.
Allows all printable ASCII characters.
4. Select on of the following authentication protocols from the Auth Protocol list.

• HMAC_MD5 (continue with step 5)
• HMAC_SHA (continue with step 5)
• NONE (go to step 6)
5. Enter the SNMP v3 authentication password (case sensitive, 1 to 16 characters) in the Auth
Password and Confirm Password fields.
Displays as asterisks. Allows all printable ASCII characters.
6. Select one of the following privacy protocol types from the Priv Protocol list.

• CBC-DES (continue with step 7)
• CFB_AES-128 (continue with step 7)

154

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

• NONE (go to step 8)
7.

Enter the privacy password (case sensitive, 8 to 16 characters) in the Priv Password and
Confirm Password fields.
Displays as asterisks. Allows all printable ASCII characters.

8. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Software Configuration
The Management application allows you to configure the following software settings:

•
•
•
•

Client/Server IP — IP configuration settings.
IP preferences — IP settings specific to IP product managemental.
Memory allocation settings — Memory allocation for the client and server.
Product communication settings — Connections between the server and SAN switches or IP
products.

• FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings — Internal or external FTP or SCP server settings.
• Server port settings — Server port settings.
• Support mode settings — Support settings to allow enhanced diagnostics.

Client/Server IP
You can configure connections between the client or switches and the Management application
server.

Configuring the server IP address
If your Operating System is IPv4-enabled or IPv6-enabled (running in dual mode), the server binds
using an IPv4 address. IPv6 only mode does not support server to client communication (the IPv6
address cannot be bound to the server).

NOTE

If the Management server or client has multiple Network Interface Cards and if any of these
interfaces are not plugged in, you must disable them; otherwise, the following features do not work
properly:
Server impact

•
•
•
•
•

Configuration wizard (does not display all IP addresses)
Trap and Syslog auto registration
Report content (Ipconfiguration element does not display all server IP addresses)
Network OS configuration backup through FTP
Trace dump through FTP

Client impact

• Options dialog box (does not display all IP addresses)
• Firmware import and download dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

155

5

Software Configuration

• Firmware import for Fabric OS and Network OS products
• FTP button in Technical Support Repository dialog box
• Technical supportSave of Fabric OS, Network OS, and Host products through FTP
To configure the IP address used by the server for client-server communications, complete the
following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Client/Server IP in the Category list to set the IP address.
The Client/Server IP pane displays (Figure 65).

FIGURE 65

Options dialog box (Client/Server IP option)

3. Choose one of the following options in the Server IP Configuration list.

• Select All. Go to step 4.
• Select a specific IP address. Continue with step 5.
• Select localhost. Continue with step 5.
When Server IP Configuration is set to All, you can select any available IP address as the
Return Address. If you select a specific IP address, the Return Address list shows the same IP
address and you cannot change it.
4. Select the return IP address in the Client - Server IP Configuration Return Address list.
5. Select the preferred IP address in the Switch - Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list.
If DNS is not configured for your network, do not select the ‘hostname’ option from either the
Return Address or Preferred Address list. Selecting the ‘hostname’ option prevents clients and
devices from communicating with the Server.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

NOTE

Changes to this option take effect after an application restart.

156

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
7.

Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Configuring an explicit server IP address
If you selected a specific IP address from the Server IP Configuration screen during installation and
the selected IP address changes, you will not be able to connect to the server. To connect to the
new IP address, you must manually update the IP address information.
To change the IP address, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• On Windows systems, select Start > Programs > Management_Application 12.X.X >
Management_Application Configuration.

• On UNIX systems, execute sh

Install_Home/bin/configwizard on the terminal.

2. Click Next on the Welcome screen.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Next on the FTP Server screen.
5. Complete the following steps on the Server IP Configuration screen (Figure 66).

FIGURE 66

Server IP Configuration screen

a.

Select an address from the Server IP Configuration list.

b.

Select an address from the Switch - Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list.

NOTE

If the “hostname” contains invalid characters, the host name does not display in the list.
Valid characters include alphanumeric and dash (-) characters. The IP address is selected
by default. If the an IPv6 address is selected, server start up will fail.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

157

5

Software Configuration

If DNS is not configured for your network, do not select the ‘hostname’ option from either
the Server IP Configuration or Switch - Server IP Configuration Preferred Address list.
Selecting the ‘hostname’ option prevents clients and devices from communicating with
the Server.
c.

Click Next.

6. Click Next on the Server Configuration screen.
7.

Click Next on the SMI Agent Configuration screen.

8. Verify the IP address on the Server Configuration Summary screen and click Next.
9. Click Finish on the Start Server screen.
10. Click Yes on the restart server confirmation message.
11. Choose one of the following options:

• If you configured authentication to CAC, enter your PIN in the CAC PIN field.
• If you configured authentication to the local database, an external server (RADIUS, LDAP,
or TACACS+), or a switch, enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.

NOTE

Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server authentication.

12. Click Login.
13. Click OK on the Login Banner.

Configuring the application to use dual network cards
Issues with Client-to-Server connectivity can be due to different reasons. Some examples are:

• The computer running the Server has more than one network interface card (NIC) installed.
• The computer running the Server is behind a firewall that performs network address
translation.
To make sure that Clients can connect to the Server, you may need to edit the IP configuration
setting in the Options dialog to manually specify the IP address that the Server should use to
communicate to its Clients.

NOTE

If your Operating System is IPv4-enabled or IPv6-enabled (dual mode), the server binds using IPv4
address by default.

NOTE
IPv6 only mode does not support server to client communication (the IPv6 address cannot be bound
to the server).
To configure the IP address to override the default RMI server host IP address, complete the
following steps.

NOTE

This configuration option replaces the -Djava.rmi.server.hostname value used in previous releases.

158

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Client/Server IP in the Category list to set the IP address.
3. Choose one of the following options in the Server IP Configuration list.

• Select All. Go to step 4.
• Select a specific IP address. Continue with step 5.
• Select localhost. Continue with step 5.
4. Select the return IP address in the Client - Server IP Configuration Return Address list.
When Server IP Configuration is set to All, you can select any available IP address as the
Return Address. If you select a specific IP address, the Return Address field shows the same IP
address and you cannot change it.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

NOTE

Changes take effect after you restart the Management Server.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
6. Click OK on the “changes take effect after “application restart” message.

IP preferences
You can configure the following preferences for IP products.

• Configuring change manager preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring custom report preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring deployment preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring deployment report preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring image repository preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring MPLS management preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring MPLS polling service preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring name service preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring polling service preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring sFlow accounting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring sFlow data collector preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring sFlow monitoring preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring SSL certificates preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring SNMP preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring syslog file reader preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring TFTP preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

160
161
161
161
162
162
162
163
163
163
163
164
164
165
165
165

159

5

Software Configuration

Configuring change manager preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
The IP Preferences pane displays (Figure 67).

FIGURE 67

Options dialog box (IP Preferences pane)

3. Select the ConfigReadFlash check box to obtain configuration back up from flash.
Clear to obtain configuration back up from DRAM. Default is clear (disabled).
4. Enter the number of configurations to retain per product in the ConfigsRetainedPerProduct
field.
Default is 20. Maximum is 30. Minimum is 5. When the system reaches the maximum limit for
a product, the oldest configuration is deleted and the new configuration is saved. However, if a
Baselined configuration becomes the oldest configuration, the baselined configuration is
retained.
5. Select the DoBackupAfterResync check box to turn on product configuration backup after
re-synch is performed from the client.
6. Select the DoBackupOnRunningConfigChangeTrap check box to turn on product configuration
backup after receiving a running configuration change trap.
7.

160

Select the DoBackupOnStartupConfigChangeTrap check box to turn on product configuration
backup after receiving a startup configuration change trap.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

8. Select the DoPostdeploymentBackup check box to turn on product configuration backup after
a payload is deployed using the Configuration Wizard.
9. Select the DoPredeploymentBackup check box to turn on product configuration backup before
a payload is deployed using the Configuration Wizard.
10. Enter the number of days to keep product configuration backup files on the server in the
KeepDataForDays field.
Minimum duration is 7 days. Maximum duration is 365. Default is 30.
Reducing this parameter may result in expiring a large number of records on server restart and
lead to reduced performance. If millions of records are impacted, this might last several hours.
11. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring custom report preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the maximum number of records to display in HTML Reports in the MaxRecordsToDisplay
field.
By default, 1000 records display, even if the event count is greater than 1000. You can enter a
value of from 10 (minimum) through 2000 (maximum) records.
4. Enter the maximum number of records to obtain from the database in the
MaxRecordsToFromDatabase field.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring deployment preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the number of days to retain deployment records in the Expiration.DaysToKeep field.
Minimum is 1. Maximum is 366. Default is 180.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring deployment report preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the number of Deployment Executions to show in a Deployment Report in the
NumberOfDeploymentExecutionsToDisplay field.
Minimum is 10. Maximum is 10000. Default is 50.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

161

5

Software Configuration

4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring IP device manager preferences
This configuration is only applicable to the Ethernet router series switch running firmware version
5.4 or later.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the number of Element Managers that can be launched from the Management
application in the LaunchLimitforElementManagerGUI field.
The default is 4. The minimum is 1. The maximum is 6.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring image repository preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Select the AllowManualImports check box to turn on launching the Manual Image Import
dialog box when you select an image that is not recognized as valid image format.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring MPLS management preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Select the EnableVcidThresholdNotification check box to enable notification when the VCID
pool usage crosses a threshold.
4. Enter a threshold percentage for the VCIDs pool usage in the VcidThresholdPercentage field.
Once this threshold is reached, a trap is generated to notify you that the VCID pool is running
out of IDs.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring MPLS polling service preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the frequency of MPLS polling in the PollingIntervalInSeconds field.
Default is 180 seconds.

162

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

4. Select the PollingState check box to enable MPLS polling.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring name service preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the maximum cache size for the DNS Lookup Manager in the DnsCacheSize field.
4. Enter the time (in milliseconds) for the DNS cache to stay in the cache without being accessed
in the DnsCacheTTL field.
5. Enter the time (in milliseconds) interval between each DNS Cache refresh in the
DnsCacheUpdateInterval field.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring polling service preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Select the EnablePingsForSwitches check box to enable Ping for wired IP devices.
4. Enter the polling interval in seconds in the PollingIntervalInSeconds field.
5. Select the PollingState check box to enable the polling state for IP device health.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring sFlow accounting preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Select the LogReportsToFile check box to enable sFlow accounting log reports to file.
4. Enter the maximum number of rows to display in the log report in the MaxRowsToShow field.
Default is 200.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring sFlow data collector preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

163

5

Software Configuration

3. Select the EnableReverseDNSLookup check box to enable reverse DNS Look up on the L3/L4
IP Address so that the host name is displayed together with the IP Address.
4. Enter the number of days to retain the SFlow hourly data in the KeepDataForDays field.
Minimum duration is 7 days. Maximum duration is 65 days. Reducing this parameter may
result in expiring a large number of records on server restart and lead to reduced performance.
If millions of records are impacted, this might last several hours.
5. Select the ProcessTCPFlagsData check box to monitor TCP traffic.
6. Enter the port number for the SFlow data collector in the ReceiveSFlowPktsOnPortNum field.
7.

Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring sFlow monitoring preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter a list of IP ports for which the application treats the port used for the opposite side of the
connection as 'ephemeral' (shown in reports as 'various') in the IPPortsForEphemeralWatch
field.
For example: FTP-DATA=20, FTP=21, SSH=22, TELNET=23, SMTP=25, DNS=53, HTTP=80,
POP2=109, POP3=110, NNTP=119, IMAP4=143, SNMP=161, SSL=443.
4. Enter the maximum pairs to be displayed in the report table in the MaxPairsToShow field.
5. Enter the maximum number of rows to be displayed in the report table in the MaxRowsToShow
field.
6. Enter the monitoring chart auto refresh rate in minutes in the RefreshRate field.
7.

Enter two control bits separated by a hyphen (for example, FIN-SYN) to define an invalid
combination in the TCPFlags_InvalidCombos field.
To enter multiple combinations, separate them with commas (for example, FIN-SYN, ACK-RST).
Control bit options include:

•
•
•
•
•
•

ACK — Acknowledgement field significant bit
URG — Urgent pointer field significant bit
PSH — Push function bit
RST — Reset connection bit
SYN — Synchronize sequence number bit
FIN — No more data from sender

8. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring SSL certificates preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.

164

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

3. Enter a number of days to display a warning for an expiring certificate in the
DaysUntilExpiryWarning field.
When the certificate reaches this value, the certificate displays orange. Default is 31.
Minimum is 0.
4. Enter a number of days to display the next warning for an expiring certificate in the
DaysUntilNextExpiryWarning field.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring SNMP preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the number of retries after first attempt to read in the Retries.Read field.
4. Enter the number of retries after first attempt to write in the Retries.Write field.
5. Enter the time-out period in seconds between Read retry attempts in the Timeout.Read field.
6. Enter the time-out period in seconds between Write retry attempts in the Timeout.Write field.
7.

Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Configuring syslog file reader preferences
To configure syslog file reader preferences, compete the following steps.
1. Enter a name for the file in the FileName field.
2. Select the KeepFileOpenBetweenPolls check box to keep the file open between polls.
3. Enter the message filter type in the MessageFilter field.
For example, ^snort.
4. Enter the polling interval in the PollingIntervalMilliSeconds field.
The default is 5000.
5. Select the ReadNewEventsOnly check box to only read new events.

Configuring TFTP preferences
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Enter the number of retries before aborting a read or write transfer in the maxRetries field.
4. Enter the time-out period in milliseconds between retry attempts in the timeout field.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

165

5

Software Configuration

Memory allocation settings
You can configure memory allocation for the client and server to improve performance. You can
trigger switch polling when a state changes or you can poll at intervals when no state change
occurs.

NOTE
SAN size is a consideration in selection of polling periods.

Configuring memory allocation settings
To configure memory allocation settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Memory Allocation in the Category list to set the memory allocation for the server and
client.
The Memory Allocation pane displays (Figure 68).

FIGURE 68

Options dialog box (Memory Allocation pane)

3. (Enterprise only) In the IP Network Size is list, complete the following steps:
For other editions, the IP Network size is medium. You cannot change the IP size.
a.

Select the size of the IP (small, medium, or large) you want to configure.
Product recommended counts change to the new default values when you change the IP
Network size. Recommended counts are as follows:

166

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

• Small — 20 products (recommended)
• Medium — 200 products (recommended)
• Large — 5,050 products (recommended)
Memory and asset polling values change to the new default values when you change the
IP Network size. You may increase these values. For default values, refer to step 4 and
step 5.
b.

Click OK on the confirmation message.

4. Enter the memory allocation (MB) for the client in the Client Memory Allocation field.
If you enter an invalid value, an error message displays with the minimum value allowed. Click
OK and edit the value again.
The current configured number of megabytes for client memory allocation displays in the
Current Value field. The default minimum number of megabytes for client memory allocation
displays in the Default Minimum field.
For all network sizes, the default minimum Client Heap Size is 950 MB.

NOTE

There is no restriction on the Client Heap Size value. The correct Client Heap Size value should
be given according to the RAM present in the server where it is launched.

NOTE

For a 32-bit server, configuring a value higher than 1024 MB impacts the client launch.
5. Enter the memory allocation (MB) for the server in the Server Memory Allocation field.
If you enter an invalid value, an error message displays with the minimum value allowed. Click
OK and edit the value again.
The current configured number of megabytes for server memory allocation displays in the
Current Value field. The default minimum number of megabytes for server memory allocation
displays in the Default Minimum field. The IP address of the server displays in the Server IP
field. The server name displays in the Server Name field.
To support more than 8 clients on a 64-bit server, increase the memory allocation for the
server to 3076 MB.
Minimum values are as follows:
For a 32-bit Windows/Linux Server

•
•
•
•
•

Professional: 768 MB
Professional Plus: 1024 MB
Enterprise Small : 768 MB
Enterprise Medium : 1024 MB
Enterprise Large : 1024 MB

Default values for IP only Server
Server Heap Size
For a 32-bit Windows/Linux Server

• Small : 768 MB
• Medium : 1024 MB

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

167

5

Software Configuration

• Large : 1024 MB
For all 64-bit servers, the default minimum Server Heap Size for all network sizes is 2048 MB.

NOTE

There is no restriction on the maximum value for Server Heap Size in a 64-Bit Server. The
correct server heap size value must be given according to the RAM present in the server.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

NOTE

Changes to this option take effect after an application restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
7.

Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Configuring asset polling
NOTE

Asset polling is only applicable for Fabric OS DCB products discovered from the IP tab.
Asset polling allows you set the length of time between state change polling. To maximize the
efficiency of the polling feature (balance the amount of possible information with any possible
performance impact), base your settings on the size of the SAN.
To configure asset polling, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Memory Allocation in the Category list to set the memory allocation for the server and
client.
The Memory Allocation pane displays (Figure 68).
3. Enter how often you want to check for state changes in the Check for state change every field.
Valid values are from 1 through 600 seconds. You cannot enter a value lower than the default
minimum value.
Default minimum values are as follows:

• Small (Professional): 60 seconds
• Medium: 120 seconds
• Large: 180 seconds
4. Enter how often you want to check for state changes in the If no state change, Poll switch every
field.
Valid values are from 1 through 3,600 seconds. Default values are as follows:

• Small (Professional): 120 seconds
• Medium: 900 seconds

168

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

• Large: 1800 seconds
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

NOTE

Changes to this option take effect after an application restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
6. Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Viewing the network size status
The Management application enables you to view the network size status at a glance by providing a
status icon on the Status Bar. Double-click the icon to launch the Memory Allocation pane of the
Options dialog box.

NOTE

If you exceed the recommended count, the network size status icon refreshes when the License is
refreshed (every three hours) or after a client restart.

NOTE
The recommended count is the supported scalability limit based on the network size. If the
maximum license count is less than the recommended count, the license count displays as the
recommended count.
The following table illustrates and describes the icons that indicate the current network size status.

TABLE 20
Icon

Description
This icon displays when the network size is within the recommended count.

This icon displays when the network size exceeds the recommended count. This icon displays
when any of the following counts are exceeded:
• IP Product Count
• IP Port Count

Product communication settings
You can configure HTTP or HTTPS connections between the products and the Management
application server.

Configuring SAN communication
To configure connections between the SAN devices and the Management application server,
complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

169

5

Software Configuration

1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Product Communication from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
The Product Communication pane displays (Figure 69).

FIGURE 69

Options dialog box (Product Communication pane)

3. To connect using HTTP, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the Connect using HTTP option.

b.

Enter the connection port number in the Port # field. Go to step 5.
The default HTTP port number is 80.

NOTE

To manage FIPS-enabled Fabric OS fabrics, you must configure Product Communication using
the Connect using HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) only option.
4. To connect using HTTPS (HTTP over SSL), complete the following steps.
a.

Select the Connect using HTTPS (HTTP over SSL) only option.

b.

Enter the connection port number in the Port # field. Continue with step 5.
The default HTTPS port number is 443.

5. (Fabric OS and Network OS products only) Select IPv4 or IPv6 to set the preferred IP format.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.
Changes to this option take effect after an application restart.
7.

Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Configuring the preferred IP format
To configure the preferred IP format for the Management application server to connect with
Fabric OS and Network OS devices, complete the following steps.

170

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Product Communication from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
The Product Communication pane displays (Figure 69).
3. (Fabric OS and Network OS products only) Select IPv4 (default) or IPv6 to set the preferred IP
format.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.
Changes to this option take effect after an application restart.
5. Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Configuring IP communication
To configure communication between IP product and the Management application server,
complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Product Communication from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
The Product Communication pane displays (Figure 70).

FIGURE 70

Options dialog box (Product Communication pane)

3. To connect to products using SSH, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the SSH only option.

b.

Enter the connection port number in the SSH Port field. Go to step 6.
The default SSH port number is 22.

4. To connect to products using Telnet, select the Telnet only option. Go to step 6.
5. To connect to products using SSH then Telnet, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the SSH then Telnet option.

b.

Enter the connection port number in the SSH Port field. Continue with step 6.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

171

5

Software Configuration

6. Select one of the following options to determine configuration file transfer communication:

•
•
•
•
7.

SCP only
TFTP only
SCP then TFTP
TFTP then SCP

Select one of the following options to configure the web element manager communication:

• HTTP
• HTTPS (HTTP over SSL)
• HTTPS then HTTP
8. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

FTP/SCP/SFTP server settings
NOTE

For FIPS-enabled Fabric OS switches, you must configure the FTP/SCP/SFTP server communication
to an external SCP server to download firmware and allow technical support.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a network protocol used to transfer data from one computer to
another over a TCP computer network. During installation, a built-in FTP server and its services are
installed. Other FTP servers on your system are recognized by the application as external FTP
servers.
For Windows systems, the built-in FTP server is the default configuration and installation starts the
FTP service if port 21 is not used by any other FTP server. For UNIX systems, built-in FTP is the
default for UNIX systems during installation; the external FTP server is the default only if port 21 is
busy.
Note that when uninstalling the application the built-in FTP server is removed with all other services
even if the FTP service is used by firmware upgrade or supportSave features.

NOTE
FTP is supported on all Fabric OS devices.
Secure Copy (SCP) is a means of securely transferring computer files between a local and a remote
host or between two remote hosts, using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol. You must configure SCP
on your machine to support Technical Support and firmware download.

NOTE

SCP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 5.3 and later.
SSH File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) is a network protocol used to transfer data from one computer to
another over a secure channel. You must configure SCP on your machine to support Technical
Support and firmware management.

NOTE

SFTP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 7.0 and later.
The built-in SCP/SFTP servers use the port 22 by default.

172

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

To view the port status for the FTP and SCP/SFTP servers, refer to “Viewing port status” on
page 10.

Accessing the FTP server folder
Choose from one of the following options to access the FTP server folder:

• To access the internal FTP folder, select Monitor > Techsupport > View Repository.
• To access the external FTP folder, type the following in a browser window:
ftp://Username@External_FTP_Server_IP_Address
(for example, ftp://admin@10.1.1.1) and press Enter. Type your password in the pop-up
window and press Enter. The external FTP folder displays.

Configuring an internal FTP server
To configure the internal FTP server settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select FTP/SCP/SFTP in the Category list.
The FTP/SCP/SFTP pane displays (Figure 71).

FIGURE 71

Options dialog box (FTP/SCP/SFTP pane)

3. Select the Use built-in FTP/SCP/SFTP Server option to use the default built-in FTP server.
All active fields are mandatory. The default user name is admin. The full path to the built-in FTP
directory displays in the Root Directory field.
4. Select the Built-in FTP Server check box.
5. Change your password by entering a new password in the Password and Confirm Password
fields.
The default password is passw0rd (where 0 is a zero).
6. Click Test to test the FTP server.
An “FTP Server running successfully” or an error message displays.
If you receive an error message, make sure your credentials are correct, the server is running,
the remote directory path exists, and you have the correct access permission; then try again.
7.

Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

173

5

Software Configuration

Configuring an internal SCP or SFTP server
NOTE

SCP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 5.3 and later.

NOTE

SFTP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 7.0 and later.
To configure the internal SCP or SFTP server settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select FTP/SCP/SFTP in the Category list.
The FTP/SCP/SFTP pane displays (Figure 71).

FIGURE 72

Options dialog box (FTP/SCP/SFTP pane)

3. Select the Use built-in FTP/SCP/SFTP Server option to use the default built-in SCP or SFTP
server.
All active fields are mandatory. The default user name is admin. The full path to the built-in SCP
or SFTP directory displays in the Root Directory field.
4. Select the SCP/SFTP Server check box.
5. Change your password by entering a new password in the Password and Confirm Password
fields.
The default password is passw0rd (where 0 is a zero).
6. Select the protocol (SCP or SFTP) from the Preferred Protocol list.
7.

Click Test to test the server.
An “SCP/SFTP Server running successfully” or an error message displays.
If you receive an error message, make sure your credentials are correct, the SCP/SFTP server
is stopped, the remote directory path exists, and you have the correct access permission; then
try again.

8. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

174

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

Configuring an external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server
NOTE

For FIPS-enabled Fabric OS switches, you must configure the FTP/SCP/SFTP server communication
to an external SCP or SFTP server to download firmware and allow technical support.

NOTE

SCP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 5.3 and later.

NOTE
SFTP is supported on Fabric OS devices running 7.0 and later.
To configure external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select FTP/SCP/SFTP in the Category list.
The FTP/SCP/SFTP pane displays (Figure 73).

FIGURE 73

Options dialog box (FTP/SCP/SFTP pane)

3. Select the Use External FTP Server and/or SCP Server option.
4. To configure an external FTP server, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the FTP Server check box to configure the external FTP server.
All fields are mandatory.

b.

Enter the IP address for the remote host in the Remote Host IP field.

c.

Enter a user name in the Remote Host User Name field.

d.

Enter the path to the remote host in the Remote Directory Path field.
Use a slash (/) or period (.) to denote the root directory.

e.

Enter the password in the Password Required for FTP field.

5. To configure an external SCP server, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

175

5

Software Configuration

a.

Select the SCP Server check box to configure the external SCP server.
All fields are mandatory.

b.

Enter the IP address for the remote host in the SCP Host IP field.

c.

Enter a user name in the SCP Host User Name field.

d.

Enter the path to the remote host in the SCP Directory Path field.
Use a slash (/) or period (.) to denote the root directory.

e.

Enter the password in the Password Required for SCP field.

f.

Select SCP from the Preferred Protocol (Secured) list.

6. To configure an external SFTP server, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the SFTP Server check box to configure the external SCP server.
All fields are mandatory.

b.

Enter the IP address for the remote host in the SFTP Host IP field.

c.

Enter a user name in the SFTP Host User Name field.

d.

Enter the path to the remote host in the SFTP Directory Path field.
Use a slash (/) or period (.) to denote the root directory.

7.

e.

Enter the password in the Password Required for SFTP field.

f.

Select SFTP from the Preferred Protocol (Secured) list.

Click Test to test the server.
A “Server running successfully” or an error message displays.
If you receive an error message, make sure your credentials are correct, the server is running,
the remote directory path exists, and you have the correct access (read and write) permissions;
then try again.

8. Click OK on the message.
9. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Testing the FTP, SCP, and SFTP server
To test the FTP, SCP, or SFTP server, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select FTP/SCP/SFTP in the Category list.
3. Choose one or more of the following options:

• If you are using the internal FTP server, select the Use built-in FTP/SCP/SFTP Server
option.
For step-by-step instructions about configuring the built-in server, refer to “Configuring an
internal FTP server” on page 173.

• If you are using the external FTP server, select the Use external FTP/SCP/SFTP Server
option.

176

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

For step-by-step instructions about configuring the built-in server, refer to “Configuring an
external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server” on page 175.
4. Click Test.
An “FTP, SCP, or SFTP Server running successfully” or an error message displays.
If you receive an error message, make sure your credentials are correct, the server is running,
the remote directory path exists, and you have the correct access permission; then try again.
5. Click OK on the message.
6. Click OK to close the Options dialog.

Server port settings
You can configure the server port settings so that you can assign a web server port number and set
the server port to be SSL-enabled.

Configuring the server port
To configure server settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Port in the Category list.
The Server Port pane displays (Figure 74).

FIGURE 74

Options dialog box (Server Port pane)

3. Enter a port number in the Web Server Port # (HTTPS) field.
The default is 443.
4. Enable HTTP redirection to HTTPS by selecting the Redirect HTTP Requests to HTTPS check
box.
When you enable HTTP redirection, the server uses port 80 to redirect HTTP requests to
HTTPS. Make sure that port 80 is available before you enable HTTP redirection.
5. Enter a port number in the Starting Port # field.
The default is 24600.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

177

5

Software Configuration

For Professional, the server requires 15 consecutive free ports beginning with the starting port
number.
For Trial and Licensed versions, the server requires 18 consecutive free ports beginning with
the starting port number.
6. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

NOTE

Changes to this option take effect after application restart.
7.

Click OK on the “changes take effect after application restart” message.

Support mode settings
You can configure support settings to allow enhanced diagnostics.

Configuring support mode settings
To configure support mode settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays (Figure 75).
2. Select Support Mode in the Category list.

NOTE

Only use this option when directed to by customer support.
The Support Mode pane displays (Figure 74).

FIGURE 75

Options dialog box (Support Mode pane)

3. Select the Log client support data - Log Level list, and select the type of log data you want to
configure.
Log level options include: All, Fatal, Error, Warn, Info, Debug, Trace, and Off. Default is Info.
4. Select the Log server support data - Log Level list, and select the type of log data you want to
configure.
Log level options include: All, Fatal, Error, Warn, Info, Debug, Trace, and Off. Default is Info.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

178

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software Configuration

5

NOTE

Changes to the server log levels reset to the default (INFO) after a server restart.

NOTE

Changes to the Log client support data log level is persisted on all clients launched from the
same machine for the same server.
client. log file properties

• Client logs are collected separately for each server. After successful login, a log file is
created and prefixed with the network address provided in the Login dialog box.
For example, 172.26.1.1.client.log or localhost.client.log
Each log file is limited to 5 MB. When a file reaches the maximum size, and there are less
than 5 log files for the Client, a new file is created.

• For local clients, log files (network_address.client.log.1 through
network_address.client.log.5) are created in the User_Home/Product_Name/localhost
directory.

• For web start clients, log files (network_address.client.log.1 through
network_address.client.log.5) are created in the
User_Home/Product_Name/Server_IP_Address directory.
server. log file properties

• There is only one server.log file each day with no log size limit.
• The server.log file rolls over at 12:00 midnight everyday.
• When the log file rolls over, it is compressed and renamed using the following file name
format:
server.yyyy-mm-dd.log.zip
for example, server.2010-04-14.log.zip, server.2010-04-15.log.zip, and so on

• For servers, log files are created in the Install_Home/logs/server directory.

Configuring the server log file purge limit
To configure server log file purging, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Support Mode in the Category list.

NOTE

Only use this option when directed to by customer support.
3. Select the maximum number of days to retain the server log file in the Log Purging Limit field.
Valid values are 1 through 90. Default is 14.
The log files are purged at 1:00 AM on the day after the retention period ends.
4. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

179

5

FIPS Support

FIPS Support
To manage FIPS-enabled Fabric OS fabrics and switches, make sure you complete the following
configuration requirements:

• Configure Product Communication to HTTPS (refer to “Configuring SAN communication” on
page 169) to allow communication between the server and the Fabric OS switches.

• Configure an external SCP server (refer to “Configuring an external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server” on
page 175) to allow firmware download, product technical support, and supportSave.

180

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

6

User Account Management

In this chapter
• Users overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Areas of responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Password policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Authentication Server Groups on the Management server . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

181
185
191
194
198
201
205

Users overview
The Management application allows you to manage accounts of users who manage devices on the
network. When a user logs in to the Management application, the user name and password can be
authenticated and authorized by the local server or by a supported external server.
User accounts are assigned privileges, which you define within roles. Each privilege provides
access to a specific feature of the Management application. This enables you to maintain privileges
common to a group of administrators within a role, instead of in individual accounts.
You can group devices, access points, and their groups in areas of responsibilities (AORs), then
assign one or more AORs to a user’s privilege. When you assign a user an AOR, that user will be
able to manage only the devices in that AOR. Devices in a user’s AOR are the only devices that user
sees in device trees and on the Dashboard tab. You can place selected devices, device groups, port
groups, access points, access point groups, and access point port groups in an AOR.
Users who create a device group are the only users who can manage the devices in that group.
Other users may view the groups, but do not have the ability to add, delete, or modify the groups.

Configuration requirements
To administer accounts on the Management application server, you must have an administrative
login on the platform on which the Management application is running. Use the “Administrator”
login to create other logins with administrative permissions.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

181

6

Users overview

Viewing configured users
To view configured users, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Users tab, if necessary.

FIGURE 76

Users dialog box - Users tab

The Users dialog box contains the following fields and components:

• Authentication-Primary — The primary authentication server type configured through the
Server Management Console.

• Secondary — The secondary authentication server type configured through Server
Management Console.

• Authorization — The authorization source configured through the Server Management
Console.

182

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Users overview

6

• Users table — The configured users.









User ID — The unique name used to identity a user.
Full Name — The user’s full name.
Roles — List of Roles the user belongs to separated by comma.
Area Of Responsibility — List of AORs the user belongs to separated by comma.
E-mail Notification — Whether e-mail notification is enabled for user.
Account Enabled — Whether the user account status is enabled.
Policy Violations — Whether there is a current policy violation for the user.
Account State — The current account state for the user. Options include:

-

Active
Locked by User manager
Password Expired
Password format policy violated
Password history policy violated
Locked Out threshold reached

Add button — Click to launch the Add Users dialog box and configure a new user (refer
to “Creating a new user account” on page 185).

Edit button — Click to launch the Edit Users dialog box for the selected user (refer to
“Editing a user account” on page 187).

Duplicate button — Click to launch the Duplicate Users dialog box for the selected user
(refer to “Copying a user account” on page 187).

Delete button — Click to delete the selected users (refer to “Deleting a user account”
on page 190).

Enable button — Select to enable the selected users (refer to “Enabling a user
account” on page 190). Disabled if the selected user is already enabled.

Disable button — Select to disable the selected users (refer to “Disabling a user
account” on page 189). Disabled if the selected user is already disabled.

Unlock button — Select to unlock the selected users account (refer to “Unlocking a
user account” on page 190).

Copy User Preferences button — Select to copy user preference from the selected
users account (refer to “Copying and pasting user preferences” on page 188).

Paste User Preferences button — Select to paste user preference from the selected
users account (refer to “Copying and pasting user preferences” on page 188).
Roles table — Lists the default system roles and any user-defined roles.


•



Name — The unique name of the role.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

183

6

Users overview

Default system roles for IP only environments include:

-

IP System Administrator
Network Administrator
Report User Group
Default system roles for SAN plus IP environments include:
SAN System Administrator
IP System Administrator
Network Administrator
Security Administrator
Zone Administrator
Operator
Security Officer
Host Administrator
Report User Group

Description — A description of the role.

Add button — Click to add a new role (refer to “Creating a new role” on page 191).

Edit button — Click to edit the selected role (refer to “Editing a role” on page 192).

Duplicate button — Click to copy the selected role (refer to “Copying a role” on
page 192).

Delete button — Click to delete the selected role (refer to “Deleting a role” on
page 193).
AOR table — Lists the default system AOR and any user-defined AORs.


•



Name — The unique name of the AOR. Default system AORs include:

-

All Fabrics — all discovered SAN devices.
All Hosts — all discovered Hosts devices.
All IP Products — all discovered IP devices.

Description — A description of the AOR.
Add button — Click to launch the Add AOR dialog box.

Edit button — Click to launch the Edit AOR dialog box for the selected AOR. You cannot
edit system AORs.

Duplicate button — Click to launch the Duplicate AOR dialog box for the selected AOR.
You cannot duplicate system AORs.

Delete button — Click to delete the selected AOR. You cannot delete system AORs.
E-mail Event Notification Setup button — Click to configure e-mail event notification (refer
to “Configuring e-mail notification” on page 209).



•

3. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

184

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User accounts

6

User accounts
NOTE

You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to add new accounts, set passwords for
accounts, and apply roles to the accounts. For a list of privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on
page 1283.
Management application user accounts contain the identification of the Management application
user, as well as privileges, roles, and AORs assigned to the user. Privileges provide access to the
features in Management application. A role is a group of selected privileges. A role can be assigned
to one or more Management application users who need access to the same menu options.
An AOR contains selected devices, device groups, device port groups, access points, access point
groups, and port groups that an Management application user is allowed to manage.

Creating a new user account
To create a new user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Add under the Users table.
The Add User dialog box displays.

FIGURE 77

Add User dialog box

3. Enter a unique name to identify the user in the User ID field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

185

6

User accounts

4. Enter a password for the user in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
Passwords displays as dots (.). For password policy details, refer to “Viewing your password
policy” on page 208.
5. Select the Account Status - Enable check box to enable the account of the user.
Account Status is enabled by default.
6. (Optional) Enter the full name of the user in the Full Name field.
7.

(Optional) Enter a description for the user in the Description field.

8. (Optional) Enter the phone number of the user in the Phone Number field.
9. Select the E-mail Notification - Enable check box to enable e-mail notification for the user.
E-mail Notification is disabled by default.
10. Click Filter to set up basic event filters for the user.
For step-by-step instructions about setting up basic event filters, refer to “Setting up basic
event filtering” on page 1144.
11. Enter the e-mail address of the user in the E-mail Address field.
Enter more than one e-mail address, separating each with a semi-colon. To send a text
message or page via e-mail, use the following format number@carrier.com, where number is
your phone number and carrier.com is the SMS server. For example, 3035551212@txt.att.net
(text message) or 3035551212@page.att.net (page).

NOTE

Check with your carrier for the exact e-mail address.
12. Assign roles and AORs by selecting the role or AOR in the Available Roles / AOR table and click
the right arrow button to move the role or AOR to the Selected Roles / AOR table.
Select multiple roles or AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role or
AOR.
13. Remove roles and AORs by selecting the role or AOR in the Selected Roles / AOR table and click
the left arrow button to move the role or AOR to the Available Roles / AOR table.
Select multiple roles or AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role or
AOR.
14. Click OK to save the new user and close the Add User dialog box.
The new user account displays in the Users table of the Users dialog box. You must assign at
least one role to a user account. Users without an assigned role cannot log into the client.
15. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

186

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User accounts

6

Editing a user account
To make changes to an existing user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user account you want to edit and click Edit under the Users table.
The Edit User dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 13 in “Creating a new user account” on page 185.
4. Click OK to save the user account and close the Edit User dialog box.
If you make changes to the user’s role or AOR while the user is logged in, a confirmation
message displays. When you click OK on the confirmation message, the user is logged out and
must log back in to see the changes.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Copying a user account
You can create a user account by copying an existing one. When you copy an account, you copy the
selected roles and AORs of that account. You can then enter a new user name, ID, e-mail address,
and telephone number.
To create a new user account from an existing account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user account you want to copy and click Duplicate under the Users table.
The Duplicate User dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 13 in “Creating a new user account” on page 185.
4. Click OK to save the new user and close the Duplicate User dialog box.
The new user account displays in the Users table of the Users dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

187

6

User accounts

Copying and pasting user preferences
Enables you to copy user preference settings, such as window and dialog box sizes, table column
and sort order, as well as other customizations, and all the user-defined views (including fabrics
and hosts) from the selected user account to one or more other user accounts.
If the fabric and hosts from the original user account are not included in the other user's AOR, then
the copied fabrics and hosts do not display in the other user's views. To include fabrics and hosts
from the original user account, you must add them to the other user's account (refer to “Assigning
roles and areas of responsibility to a user account” on page 188).
If a user-created view with the same name already exists in the other user's views, user-defined
views with the same name are ignored. For example, user_acct1 (copy) has the following
user-defined views: Fabric1, Fabric2, and Host1 and user_acct2 (paste) has the following
user-defined views: Fabric1, Fabric_CO, and Hosts. When you paste the user_acct1 user
preferences to user_acct2, user_acct2 now has the following user-defined views: Fabric1, Fabric2,
Fabric_CO, Host1, and Hosts.

NOTE
You cannot copy user preferences to user accounts that are currently logged in to the Management
application.

NOTE

You cannot copy user preferences to the original user account.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user account you want to copy user preferences from and click Copy User
Preferences under the Users table.
3. Select the user account you want to copy user preferences to and click Paste User Preferences
under the Users table.
If you need to make any other changes to this user account, refer to “Editing a user account”
on page 187.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account
To assign roles and AORs to an existing user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user account you want to edit and click Edit under the Users table.
The Edit User dialog box displays.
3. Assign roles and AORs by selecting the role or AOR in the Available Roles / AOR table and click
the right arrow button to move the role or AOR to the Selected Roles / AOR table.
Select multiple roles or AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role or
AOR.

188

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User accounts

6

4. Click OK to save the user account and close the Edit User dialog box.
If you make changes to the user’s role or AOR while the user is logged in, a confirmation
message displays. When you click OK on the confirmation message, the user is logged out and
must log back in to see the changes.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Removing roles and areas of responsibility from a
user account
To remove roles and AORs from an existing user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user account you want to edit and click Edit under the Users table.
The Edit User dialog box displays.
3. Remove roles and AORs by selecting the role or AOR in the Selected Roles / AOR table and click
the left arrow button to move the role or AOR to the Available Roles / AOR table.
Select multiple roles or AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role or
AOR.
4. Click OK to save the user account and close the Edit User dialog box.
If you make changes to the user’s role or AOR while the user is logged in, a confirmation
message displays. When you click OK on the confirmation message, the user is logged out and
must log back in to see the changes.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Disabling a user account
To make the user account inactive, but keep it in the database, you can disable the user account.

NOTE

You cannot disable the default "Administrator" account.
To disable a user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the enabled user account you want to disable in the Users table and click Disable.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
If currently accessing the server, the user will be logged out once the user account is disabled.
The user cannot log back in until you re-enable the user account.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

189

6

User accounts

Enabling a user account
To re-activate a user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the disabled user account you want to enable in the Users table and click Enable.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Deleting a user account
NOTE
You cannot delete the default "Administrator" user account.
To permanently delete a user account from the server, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the user you want to delete in the Users table and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
If currently accessing the server, the user will be logged out once the user account is deleted.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Unlocking a user account
NOTE
You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to unlock a user account.
You can unlock a user account when a user is locked out of the system because of too many invalid
login attempts.
To unlock a user account, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the locked user account you want to unlock in the Users table and click Unlock.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

190

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Roles

6

Roles
NOTE

You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to view, add, modify, or delete roles.
A role is a group of Management application tasks or privileges that can be assigned to several
users who have similar functions.
When you create a role, it immediately becomes available in the Users dialog box.

Creating a new role
To create a new role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Add under the Roles table.
The Add Role dialog box displays.

FIGURE 78

Add Role dialog box

3. Enter a name of the role in the Name field.
4. (Optional) Enter a short description for the role in the Description field.
5. Add or remove privileges as needed.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Adding privileges to a role” on page 193 or “Removing
privileges from a role” on page 194.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

191

6

Roles

6. Click OK to save the new role and close the Add Role dialog box.
The new role displays in the Roles list of the Users dialog box. To add users to this role, follow
the instructions in “Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account” on page 188.
7.

Click Close to close the Users dialog box

Editing a role
To make changes to an existing role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the role you want to edit in the Roles table and click Edit.
The Edit Role dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 5 in “Creating a new role” on page 191.
4. Click OK to save the role and close the Edit Role dialog box.
If you make changes to the user’s role or AOR while the user is logged in, a confirmation
message displays. When you click OK on the confirmation message, the user is logged out and
must log back in to see the changes.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Copying a role
You can create a new role by copying an existing one. When you copy a role, you copy the selected
privileges in that role.
To copy an existing role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the role you want to copy in the Roles table and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Role dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 5 in “Creating a new role” on page 191.
4. Click OK to save the role and close the Duplicate Role dialog box.
The new role displays in the Roles list of the Users dialog box. To add users to this role, follow
the instructions in “Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account” on page 188.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

192

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Roles

6

Deleting a role
To delete a role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the role you want to delete in the Roles table and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Adding privileges to a role
Each option under the Management application main menu corresponds to a privilege. By adding a
privilege to a role and assigning that role to a user, you give the user access to a feature of the
Management application. When a user logs in to the Management application, the user sees only
the options that correspond to the privileges listed in the Add Roles, Edit Roles, or Duplicate Roles
dialog box.
To add privileges to a role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Add, Edit, or Duplicate under the Roles table.
The Add Roles, Edit Roles, or Duplicate Roles dialog box displays.
3. Add read and write access by selecting the features to which you want to allow read and write
access in the Available Privileges list and click the right arrow button to move the features to
the Read & Write Privileges list.
Select multiple features by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one privilege.
The features are moved to the Read & Write Privileges list.
4. Add read-only access by selecting the features to which you want to allow read-only access in
the Available Privileges list and click the right arrow button to move the features to the Read
Only Privileges list.
Select multiple features by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one privilege.
The features are moved to the Read Only Privileges list.
5. Click OK to save your work.
6. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

193

6

Areas of responsibility

Removing privileges from a role
You remove privileges from the Edit or Duplicate Users dialog boxes.
To remove privileges from role, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the role you want to edit in the Roles table and click Edit or Duplicate under the Roles
table.
The Edit Roles or Duplicate Roles dialog box displays.
3. Remove read and write access by selecting the features to which you want to remove read and
write access in the Read & Write Privileges list and click the left arrow button to move the
features to the Available Privileges list.
Select multiple features by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one privilege.
The features are moved to the Available Privileges list.
4. Remove read-only access by selecting the features to which you want to remove read-only
access in the Read Only Privileges list and click the right arrow button to move the features to
the Available Privileges list.
Select multiple features by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one privilege.
The features are moved to the Available Privileges list.
5. Click OK to save your work.
6. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Areas of responsibility
NOTE

You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to view, add, modify, or delete
operational areas of responsibility.
An area of responsibility (AOR) allows you to place Fabrics, Hosts, Products, Product Groups, Port
Groups, and Application products into management groups that can be assigned to an
Management application user. Users can manage only the Fabrics, Hosts, Products, Product
Groups, Port Groups, and Application products in the AOR assigned to them, because only devices
their AOR display in the Product List and Topology Map.
For example, devices 10.10.10.1, 10.10.10.2, and 10.10.14.3 may be placed in AOR Group 1. This
AOR group can then be assigned to UserA. When using the Management application, UserA will be
able to create configurations, generate reports, and perform backups only to entries in AOR Group
1 (which consists of devices 10.10.10.1, 10.10.10.2, and 10.10.14.3).

194

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Areas of responsibility

6

Creating an AOR
When creating an AOR, you assign devices or groups to that AOR. After you save the AOR, it can be
assigned to one or more user account. Users of those accounts can then view the devices or
groups in their assigned AOR. Users can deploy configurations and payloads only to devices in
assigned AORs.
When you create an AOR, it immediately becomes available in the Users dialog box.
To create an AOR, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Add under the AOR table.
The Add AOR dialog box displays.

FIGURE 79

Users dialog box - Users tab

3. Enter a name of the AOR in the Name field.
4. (Optional) Enter a short description for the AOR in the Description field.
5. Assign or remove products as needed.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197 or
“Removing products from an AOR” on page 198.
6. Click OK to save the new AOR and close the Add AOR dialog box.
The new AOR displays in the AOR list of the Users dialog box.
7.

Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

195

6

Areas of responsibility

Editing an AOR
NOTE
You cannot edit system AORs.
To make changes to an existing AOR, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the AOR you want to edit in the AOR table and click Edit.
The Edit AOR dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 5 in “Creating an AOR” on page 195.
4. Click OK to save the AOR and close the Edit AOR dialog box.
If you make changes to the user’s role or AOR while the user is logged in, a confirmation
message displays. When you click Yes on the confirmation message, the user is logged out and
must log back in to see the changes.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Copying an AOR
NOTE
You cannot duplicate system AORs.
To create a new AOR by copying an existing one, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the AOR you want to copy in the AOR table and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate AOR dialog box displays.
3. Complete step 3 through step 5 in “Creating an AOR” on page 195.
4. Click OK to save the new AOR and close the Duplicate AOR dialog box.
The new AOR displays in the AOR table of the Users dialog box. To add this AOR to a user, follow
the instructions in “Assigning roles and areas of responsibility to a user account” on page 188.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box

196

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Areas of responsibility

6

Deleting an AOR
NOTE
You cannot delete system AORs.
To delete an AOR, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select the AOR you want to delete in the AOR table and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Assigning products to an AOR
You can assign hostsIP products to an AOR from the Add, Edit, or Duplicate AOR dialog box.
To assign hostsIP products to an AOR, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Add, Edit, or Duplicate under the AOR table.
The Add AOR, Edit AOR, or Duplicate AOR dialog box displays.
3. Click the Hosts tab.
4. Select the hosts you want to assign to the AOR in the Available Hosts table and click the right
arrow button to move the products to the Selected Products table.
Select multiple hosts by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one host.
5. Click the IP Products tab.
6. Choose one of the following options:

• Select the IP products you want to assign to the AOR in the Available IP Products table and
click the right arrow button to move the products to the Selected Products table.
Select multiple products by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
product.

• Select the System Product Group or User-Defined Device Group you want to assign to the
AOR in the Available IP Products table and click the right arrow button to move the groups
to the Selected Products table.
All products in the group will be assigned to the AOR.

• (Application products (ServerIron) only) Select the Application_Product Group you want to
assign to the AOR in the Available IP Products table and click the right arrow button to
move the group to the Selected Products table.
Select multiple products by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

197

6

Password policies

NOTE

You must include the Application product to which the real or virtual servers in the AOR for
the complete association to display in VIP manager.

NOTE

Virtual or real server IP addresses, configured for an Application product, display as a two
FLAT list under the associated Application product tree node in the Available IP Products
table.

7.

Click OK to save your work

8. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Removing products from an AOR
You can remove hostsIP products from and AOR from the Edit AOR or Duplicate AOR dialog box.
To remove hostsIP products from the AOR, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit or Duplicate under the AOR table.
The Edit AOR or Duplicate AOR dialog box displays.
3. In the Selected Products table, select the products or groups you want to remove and click the
left arrow button.
Select multiple products or groups by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
item.
4. Click OK to save your work.
5. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Password policies
NOTE
You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to configure password policy.
Passwords are an important aspect of computer security. They are the front line of protection for
user accounts. The purpose of the password policy is to establish a standard for the creation of
strong passwords, the protection of those passwords, and the frequency of change.

Configuring a password policy
To configure password policies for all user accounts, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Policy tab.

198

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Password policies

6

3. Configure the password expiration by completing the following steps.
a.

Enter the maximum number of days that can elapse before a password must be changed
by the user in the Password Age field.
Valid values are 0 through 999. The default is 0, which means the policy is disabled.

b.

Enter the number of days to warn the user prior to password expiration in the Warning
Period field.
Only enabled when the Password Age value is greater than zero. Valid values are 0 through
998. The default is 0. The Warning Period value must be less than the Password Age
value.

4. Enter the number of unique passwords you must use before you can reuse a password in the
History Count field.
Valid values are 1 through 24. The default is 1. When you update the History Count value, the
current password history is not cleared.
5. Configure the password format by completing the following steps.
a.

Select the Empty Password - Allow check box to allow user accounts to be created or
edited with empty passwords or to allow passwords with any format.
Empty Password is enabled by default.

b.

Enter the minimum password length in the Minimum Length field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 4
through 127. The default is 8.

c.

Enter the minimum number of uppercase characters required in the Upper Case
Characters field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 0.

d.

Enter the minimum number of lowercase characters required in the Lower Case
Characters field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 0.

e.

Enter the minimum number of digits required in the Number of Digits field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 0.

f.

Enter the minimum number of punctuation characters required in the Punctuation
Required field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 0.

g.

Enter the maximum number that the same character can repeat without a different
intervening character in the Maximum Repeat field.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 2.

h.

Enter the maximum number of sequence characters from the ASCII collating series or
keyboard sequences in the Maximum Sequence field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

199

6

Password policies

For example, 'ab' is a sequence of 2 and '456' is a sequence of 3.
Only enabled when the Empty Password - Allow check box is clear. Valid values are 0
through 127. The default is 1.
6. Configure the password lockout support by completing the following steps.
a.

Enter the number of failed login attempts allowed before the user account is locked out in
the Lockout Threshold field.
Valid values are 0 through 999. The default is 0 (disabled).

b.

Enter the time frame after which the account automatically unlocks and resumes normal
operation in the Lockout Duration field.
Only enabled when the Lockout Threshold is greater than zero. If you specify zero, the user
account is locked out indefinitely until an administrator manually unlocks it. Valid values
are 0 through 99999. The default is 30.

7.

Configure the password login policy by completing the following steps.
a.

Select Concurrent Login or Single Login from the Login Mode list.
Single Login allows only one user to login at a time. If you selected Single Login, continue
with step b.
Concurrent Login allows multiple users to login at the same time. If you selected
Concurrent Login, go to step 8.

b.

Select Reject New Sessions or Logout Existing Sessions from the Action list.

8. To configure the application to use the CLI login credentials of the user for all CLI deployments,
select the Use User CLI Credential check box in the CLI Credential area.
A confirmation message displays. Click Yes on the message.
Make sure to configure the User CLI Credentials in the User Profile dialog box (refer to
“Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209). These credentials will be used for all CLI
deployments and will override the CLI credentials configured during discovery or in the CLI
template.
9. Click View Policy Violators to view the user accounts affected by any policy violations caused by
your changes to the Policy tab before you save your work.
If none of the user accounts violate the updated password policy, an empty View Policy
Violators dialog box displays.
10. Click Apply.
11. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
12. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Viewing password policy violators
To view password policy violators, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Policy tab.

200

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Authentication Server Groups on the Management server

6

3. Click View Policy Violators.
The View Policy Violators dialog box displays.
4. Review the password policy violator details.
The View Policy Violators dialog box includes the following details:

• User ID — Displays the identifier of the user who violated the password policy.
• Full Name — Displays the full name of the user who violated the password policy.
• Reason — Displays the reason the user violated the password policy.
5. Click Close on the View Policy Violators dialog box.
6. Click Close on the Users dialog box.

Authentication Server Groups on the Management server
NOTE
You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to map roles and AORs to Active
Directory (AD) groups.

NOTE
You must configure an Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) server as the primary
authentication server and set Authentication Server Groups as the authorization preference (refer
to “Configuring LDAP server authentication” on page 382).
Authentication Server Groups enable you to configure user access rights to AD groups (including
users, contacts, computers, and other AD groups) by assigning roles and AORs to groups in the
Management application. LDAP provides user authentication and authorization using the AD
service in conjunction with LDAP on the switch.

Assigning roles and AORs to an AD group
Using Authentication Server Groups, you assign users to groups within the Authentication Server
Groups server, and assign roles and AORs to the groups within the Management application.
To assign roles and AORs to an AD group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Authentication Server Groups tab.
3. Select the roles and AORs you want to assign to the AD group in the Available Roles / AORs
table.
Select multiple roles and AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role
and AOR.
4. Select the AD group to which you want to assign the selected roles and AORs in the Active
Directory Groups table.
If the AD group you want does not display in the table, refer to “Loading an AD group” on
page 202.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

201

6

Authentication Server Groups on the Management server

5. Click the right arrow button.
The selected roles and AORs are moved to the Active Directory Groups table.
6. Click Apply to save your work
When you assign roles and AORs to an AD group and save the configurations, when you reopen
the Users dialog box and select the Authentication Server Groups tab, only the configured AD
group is available.

Removing roles and AORs from an AD group
To remove roles and AORs from an AD group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Authentication Server Groups tab.
3. Select the roles and AORs you want to remove in the Active Directory Groups table.
Select multiple roles and AORs by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one role
and AOR.
4. Click the left arrow button.
The selected roles and AORs are moved to the Available Roles / AORs table.
5. Click OK to save your work.

Loading an AD group
To load an AD group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Authentication Server Groups tab.
3. Click Fetch.
The Fetch AD Group dialog box displays.
4. Select the LDAP server network address from the Network Address list.
5. Enter the TCP port number in the TCP Port field, if necessary.
Default is 389 if security is not enabled. Default is 636 if security is enabled.
6. Select the authentication protocol MD5 from the Authentication list.
7.

Enter your LDAP server user login name in the User Name field.

8. Enter your LDAP server user login password in the Password field.
9. Select the Security Enable check box to enable the security channel between the Management
application server and the LDAP server.
When you enable security, the TCP port number automatically changes to port 636 and you
must enable certificate services on the LDAP server.
10. Click OK.

202

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Authentication Server Groups on the Management server

6

The Active Directory Groups table displays with all AD groups available in the specified LDAP
server, as well as any AD groups already mapped in the Management server (Local database).
To assign or remove roles and AORs, refer to “Assigning roles and AORs to an AD group” on
page 201 or “Removing roles and AORs from an AD group” on page 202.
11. Click Close to close the Users dialog box.

Deleting an AD group
Deleting an AD group deletes the roles and AORs assigned to the group and removes the group
from the Active Directory Groups table.
To delete an AD group, complete the following steps.
1. Select one or more AD groups that you want to delete from the Active Directory Groups table.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the deletion successful message.
5. Click OK to save your work.

Creating an AD user account
To create a new user account in Active Directory Users and Computers, complete the following
steps. For more information, click F1 for help or refer to www.microsoft.com.
1. Open the Active Directory Users and Computers console.
For example, on Windows XP, select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Active Directory
Users and Computers.
2. Right-click the Users folder and select New > User.
3. Enter a name in the First name field.
4. Enter a name in the Full name field
5. Enter a logon name in the User logon name field.
6. Click Next.
7.

Select the Password Never Expires option and click Next.

8. Click Finish.
9. Right-click the new user in the Users pane and select Reset Password.
10. Assign a new password with at least one special character and one number and click OK.
11. Close the Active Directory Users and Computers dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

203

6

Authentication Server Groups on the Management server

Assigning an AD user to an AD group
To assign a new group in Active Directory Users and Computers, complete the following steps. For
more information, click F1 for help or refer to www.microsoft.com
1. Open the Active Directory Users and Computers console.
For example, on Windows XP, select Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Active Directory
Users and Computers.
2. Right-click the new user in the Users pane and select Add to a Group.
3. Enter the group name in the Enter the object name to select text box and click Check Names.
4. Click OK.

Defining user accounts on the external LDAP server
If you configure the external LDAP server as the primary authentication server in the server
management console, you must define roles and AORs in the external LDAP server to match the
Management application roles and AORs.

Configuring roles and AORs on the external LDAP server
Open the Management console on the Active Directory installed server and complete the following
steps.
1. Select Start > Run.
2. Type mmc and press Enter.
3. Select File > Add/Remove Snap-in.
4. Click Add.
5. Select Active Directory Schema from the Available standalone snap-ins list and click Add.
6. Click Close.
7.

Right-click the Attributes folder (Console Root/Active Directory Schema/ Attributes) and select
New > Attribute.

8. Create the NmAors attribute by completing the following steps.
a.

Enter NmAors in the Common Name field.

b.

Enter NmAors in the LDAP Display Name field.

c.

Enter a unique object identifier in the Unique x500 Object ID field.

d.

Enter a description of the attribute in the Description field.

e.

Select Case Insensitive String in the Syntax list.

f.

Click OK.

9. Right-click the Attributes folder (Console Root/Active Directory Schema/ Attributes) and select
New > Attribute.
10. Create the NmRoles attribute by completing the following steps.

204

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User profiles

a.

Enter NmRoles in the Common Name field.

b.

Enter NmRoles in the LDAP Display Name field.

c.

Enter a unique object identifier in the Unique x500 Object ID field.

d.

Enter a description of the attribute in the Description field.

e.

Select Case Insensitive String in the Syntax list.

f.

Click OK.

6

11. Close the Management console.

Configuring authorization details on the external LDAP server
Open the ADSI Edit dialog box on the Active Directory installed server.
1. Select Start > Run.
2. Type adsiedit.msc and press Enter.
3. Right-click CN=User_Name in the CN=Users directory and select Properties.
Where User_Name is the name of the user you created in “Creating an AD user account” on
page 203.
4. Select NmAors in the Attributes list and click Edit.
5. Enter the areas of responsibility (such as, All Fabrics, All IP Products) in the Value field and
click OK.
6. Select NmRoles in the Attributes list and click Edit.
7.

Enter the Management application user roles (such as Host Administrator, IP System
Administrator, Network Administrator, Operator, Report User Group, SAN System Administrator,
Security Administrator, Security Officer, and Zone Administrator) in the Value field and click OK.

8. Close the ADSI Edit dialog box.

User profiles
User profiles contain the standard identification information of the user account, such as name,
password, phone number, and e-mail address. The Management application enables you to make
the following changes to your user profile:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Change your name
Change your password
Change your user account description
Change your phone number
Change your e-mail address
View your account state
View your password policy
Reset Management application messages
Enable e-mail notification
Configure e-mail notification

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

205

6

User profiles

• Configure CLI credentials

Viewing your user profile
To view your user profile, complete the following steps. To edit your user profile, refer to “Editing
your user profile” on page 207.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays the following information:

• User ID — Displays your user identifier.
• Full Name — Displays the name if entered while adding a user; otherwise, this field is
blank.

• Password — Displays your password as dots (.). If the password policy is configured for an
empty password, this field is blank. To change your password, refer to “Changing your
password” on page 207.

• Confirm Password — Displays your password as dots (.). If the password policy is
configured for an empty password, this field is blank.

• Description — Displays your description if entered while adding a user; otherwise, this field
is blank.

• Phone Number — Displays your phone number if entered while adding a user; otherwise,
this field is blank.

• Account State — Displays the current state of the account. Valid states include:
Active
Locked out by user manager

Locked out threshold reached

Password expired

Password format policy violated

Password history policy violated
E-mail Notification Enable check box — Select to enable e-mail notification.



•
• Filter — Click to configure e-mail notification (refer to “Configuring e-mail notification” on
page 209).

• E-mail Address — Displays your e-mail, text message, or page addresses if entered while
adding a user; otherwise, this field is blank.

• Password Age — Displays the age of the password in days. Default is zero.
• Password Policy View button — Click to display the current password policy (refer to
“Viewing your password policy” on page 208).

• CLI Credential Configure button — Click to display the CLI Credentials dialog box (refer to
“Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209).

• Optional Messages Reset button — Click to reset all optional messages to the default
behavior. For more information, refer to “Resetting optional messages” on page 209.
2. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box.

206

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User profiles

6

Editing your user profile
To edit your user profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Change your name in the Full Name field.
3. Change your password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
Passwords display as dots (.).
4. Change your user profile description in the Description field.
5. Change your phone number in the Phone Number field.
6. Select the E-mail Notification Enable check box to enable e-mail notification.
Clear the E-mail Notification Enable check box to disable e-mail notification.
7.

Click Filter to set up basic event filters.
For step-by-step instructions about setting up basic event filters, refer to “Setting up basic
event filtering” on page 1144.

8. Change your e-mail, text message, or page address in the E-mail Address field.
Enter more than one e-mail address, separating each with a semi-colon. To send a text
message or page via e-mail, use the following format number@carrier.com, where number is
your phone number and carrier.com is the SMS server. For example, 3035551212@txt.att.net
(text message) or 3035551212@page.att.net (page).

NOTE

Check with your carrier for the exact e-mail address.
9. To configure the application to use the CLI login credentials of the user for all CLI deployments,
Configure.
To configure the User CLI Credentials, refer to “Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209.
These credentials will be used for all CLI deployments and will override the CLI credentials
configured during discovery or in the CLI template.
10. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box to save your changes.

Changing your password
To change your password from your user profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Change your password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
Passwords display as dots (.).
3. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box to save your changes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

207

6

User profiles

If your password expires or your current password violates the password policy, you will be
prompted to change your password from the Change Password dialog box. To view your password
policy, click Password Policy - View.
To change your password from the Change Password dialog box, complete the following steps.
1. Enter your current password in the Existing Password field.
2. Enter your new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields.
Passwords display as dots (.).
3. Click OK to save your new password.

Viewing your password policy
To view your password policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Click Password Policy - View to display your password policy.
The View Password Policy dialog box displays.

• Password History Count — The number of unique passwords you must use before you can
reuse a password.

• Empty Password — Whether or not to allow empty passwords.
• Minimum Length — The minimum length allowed for the password.
• Upper Case Characters — The minimum number of uppercase characters required in the
password.

• Lower Case Characters — The minimum number of lowercase characters required in the
password.

• Number of Digits — The minimum number of digits required in the password.
• Punctuation Required — The minimum number of punctuation characters required in the
password.

• Maximum Repeat — The maximum number that the same character can repeat without a
different intervening character in the password.

• Maximum Sequence — The maximum number of sequence characters from the ASCII
collating series or keyboard sequences in the password.
3. Click OK on the Password Policy dialog box.
4. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box.

208

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User profiles

6

Resetting optional messages
To reset all Management application optional messages to their default behaviors, complete the
following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Click Optional Messages Reset.
The Password Policy dialog box displays.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
A successful reset message displays.
4. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box.

Configuring e-mail notification
To configure and enable e-mail notification, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Select the E-mail Notification - Enable check box to enable e-mail notification.
3. Click Filter to set up basic event filter.
For step-by-step instructions about setting up basic event filters, refer to “Setting up basic
event filtering” on page 1144.
4. Enter your e-mail, text message, or page address in the E-mail Address field.
Enter more than one e-mail address, separating each with a semi-colon. To send a text
message or page via e-mail, use the following format number@carrier.com, where number is
your phone number and carrier.com is the SMS server. For example, 3035551212@txt.att.net
(text message) or 3035551212@page.att.net (page).

NOTE

Check with your carrier for the exact e-mail address.
5. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box.

Configuring CLI credentials
NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
To configure CLI credentials, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > User Profile.
The User Profile dialog box displays.
2. Click Configure to set up basic event filter.
The CLI Credential dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

209

6

User profiles

3. Enter the user name for the product in the Product Login Account - Username field.
4. Enter the password for the product in the Product Login Account - Password field.

NOTE

If Telnet is used to log in to the device and Telnet only requires a password, then enter the
password in the Password field and leave the Username field blank.
5. (IronWare only) Enter the user name assigned to management privilege levels on the device in
the Product Enable Account - Username field.
6. (IronWare only) Enter the password assigned to management privilege levels on the device in
the Product Enable Account - Password field.

NOTE

If a device only requires the enable password, then enter the password in the Password field
and leave the Username field blank.
7.

Click OK on the CLI Credential dialog box.

8. Click OK on the User Profile dialog box.
Once you configure the CLI credentials, you must turn on the CLI credential policy through the
Users dialog box.

Configuring the CLI credential policy
NOTE
You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to configure user accounts.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
To configure the application to use the CLI login credentials of the user for all CLI deployments,
complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Click the Policy tab.
3. Select the Use User CLI Credential check box in the CLI Credential area.
A confirmation message displays. Click Yes on the message.
Make sure to configure the User CLI Credentials in the User Profile dialog box (refer to
“Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209). These credentials will be used for all CLI
deployments and will override the CLI credentials configured during discovery or in the CLI
template.
4. Click OK on the Users dialog box.

210

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

7

Dashboard Management

In this chapter
• Dashboard overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Default dashboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Status widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User-defined performance monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211
223
224
237
264

Dashboard overview
NOTE

Only devices in your area of responsibility (AOR) display in the dashboard.
The Dashboard tab (Figure 80) displays the status widgets, performance monitors, and the Master
Log. You can also display additional status widgets and performance monitors, as needed. The
Management application has the following default dashboards: Product Status and Traffic and IP
Port Health
The dashboard provides a high-level overview of the network and the current states of managed
devices. This allows you to easily check the status of the devices on the network. The dashboard
also provides several features to help you quickly access reports, device configurations, and
system logs.
The dashboard updates regardless of the currently selected tab (IP) or the LAN size. However, data
may become momentarily out of sync between the dashboard and other areas of the application.
For example, if you remove a product from the network while another user navigates from the
dashboard to a more detailed view of the product, the product may not appear in the detailed view.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

211

7

Dashboard overview

FIGURE 80

Dashboard tab
1. Menu bar — Lists commands you can perform on the dashboard. For a list of Dashboard tab
menu commands, refer to “Dashboard main menus” on page 1261.
The dashboard also provides a shortcut menu to reset the dashboard back to the defaults.
Reset the dashboard back to the default settings by right-clicking in the white space and
selected Reset to Default.
2. Toolbar — Provides buttons that enable quick access to dialog boxes and functions. For a list of
Dashboard tab toolbar options, refer to “Dashboard toolbar” on page 213.
3. Dashboard tab — Provides a high-level overview of the network managed by Management
application server.
4. IP tab — Displays the Master Log, Minimap, Connectivity Map (topology), and Product List. For
more information, refer to the “IP tab overview”.
5. Dashboard expand navigation bar — The expand navigation bar is located left of the status
widgets or performance monitors and provides a list of dashboards to choose from as well as
buttons to perform add and delete functions. For more information, refer to “Dashboards
expand navigation bar” on page 214.
6. Widgets — Displays operational status, inventory status, event summary, and overall network
or fabric status as well as performance monitors. For more information, refer to “Status
widgets” on page 224 and “Performance monitors” on page 237.
7.

212

Master Log — Displays all events that have occurred on the Management application. For more
information, refer to “Master Log” on page 287.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Dashboard overview

7

8. Status bar — Displays the connection, port, product, special event, Call Home, and backup
status, as well as Server and User data. For more information about the status bar, refer to
“Status bar” on page 289.

Dashboard toolbar
The toolbar (Figure 81) is located beneath the menu bar and provides icons and buttons to perform
various functions.

FIGURE 81

Toolbar

The toolbar contains the following icons and buttons:
1. Customize Dashboard — Displays the Customize Dashboard dialog box. Use to configure which
status widgets and performance monitors display on the Dashboard tab and Performance
Dashboard. For more information, refer to “Customizing the dashboard widgets and monitors”
on page 217
2. Users — Displays the Users dialog box. Use to configure users, user groups, and permissions.
For more information, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.
3. Export list — Saves the current dashboard display (all widgets) or a selected widget in a .png
format. For more information, refer to “Exporting the dashboard display” on page 219.
4. Print list — Prints the dashboard display (all widgets) or a selected widget. For more
information, refer to “Printing the dashboard display” on page 219.
5. Attach — Returns the dashboard to the main window. For more information, refer to “Attaching
and detaching the Dashboard tab” on page 219.
6. Detach — Detaches the dashboard to a separate window. For more information, refer to
“Attaching and detaching the Dashboard tab” on page 219.
7.

Dashboard display list — Use to select how to display the status widgets and performance
monitors in the dashboard. For more information, refer to “Setting the dashboard display” on
page 217.

8. Network Scope — Use to select the network you want to display in the dashboard. For more
information, refer to “Setting the network scope” on page 220.
9. Network Scope ellipsis button — Displays the Edit Scopes dialog box. Use to configure or delete
product and port scopes. For more information, refer to “Creating a customized network
scope” on page 221.
10. Time Scope list — Use to select the specific duration for which you want to display data. For
more information, refer to “Setting the data display time frame” on page 222.
11. Help — Displays the online help.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

213

7

Dashboard overview

Dashboard messages
The dashboard message bar (Figure 82) only displays when the Network Scope or Time Scope has
changed. You can also view all dashboard messages and clear them.

FIGURE 82

Dashboard message bar

The toolbar contains the following fields and components:
1. Details button — Use to view dashboard messages.
2. Close button — Use to close the dashboard message bar.

Dashboards expand navigation bar
The expand navigation bar (Figure 83) is located left of the status widgets or performance monitors
and provides a list of dashboards to choose from as well as buttons to perform add and delete
functions.

FIGURE 83

Expand navigation bar

The toolbar contains the following fields and components:
1. Dashboards expand navigation bar — Use to select the dashboard you want to view from the
list. For more information, refer to “Accessing a dashboard” on page 215.
2. Filter — Use to search for the dashboard you want to view.
3. Add button — Use to create a dashboard. For more information, refer to “Creating a
user-defined dashboard” on page 216.
4. Delete button — Use to delete the selected user-defined dashboard. For more information,
refer to “Deleting a user-defined dashboard” on page 217.

214

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Dashboard overview

7

General dashboard functions
The Management application also provides the following general functions which are applicable to
all widgets and monitors:

• Preference persistence — Any customization you make to the dashboards are persisted in that
dashboard. For example, if you customize a dashboard to display the Events widget and set the
Range to This Hour in the Dashboard tab and set it to Last 30 Days in the Performance
Dashboard, then these preferences persist when you log off and log back in again.

• Severity — Most widgets display a severity icon (worst severity of the data shown) next to the
widget title. The IP Status and IP and Host Inventory widgets also indicate the number of
products with that severity. The Events widget displays a severity icon with the highest severity
event color. The Status widget does not display the severity icon.

• Title bar buttons — Status widgets have the following three (left to right) title bar buttons:
expand/collapse, maximize/minimize, and close. Performance monitors are editable and have
the following four (left to right) title bar buttons: edit, expand/collapse, maximize/minimize,
and close.

• Resizing — All widgets can be resized by dragging the grab bars. Use the vertical grab bars
between widget columns to adjust the width of widgets in the adjacent columns. Use the
horizontal grab bars to adjust the height of adjacent widget rows.
Reset the dashboard back to the default size by right-clicking in the white space and selected
Reset to Default.

• Zoom in — Only widgets with a bar graph enable you to zoom in using your mouse. To zoom in,
click the upper left of the widget area on which you want to zoom in, drag the mouse to the
lower right, and release the mouse button.

• Zoom out — Only widgets with a bar graph enable you to zoom out using your mouse. To zoom
out, click the lower right widget area on which you want to zoom out, drag the mouse to the
upper left, and release the mouse button.

• Tooltips — Only widgets with a pie chart or bar graph display tooltips when you pause on a
section or bar.

-

For the pie chart widgets, the tooltip displays the name of the category, number of items in
that category, and the percentage.

-

For the bar graph widgets, the tooltip displays the count represented by the selected bar.

Accessing a dashboard
From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click the dashboard you want to view. Options
include:

• IP Port Health — Displays preconfigured IP performance monitors. You can display additional
status widgets and performance monitors in this dashboard.

• Product Status and Traffic — Displays preconfigured status widgets and performance monitors.
You can display additional widgets and monitors in this dashboard.

• SAN Port Health — Displays preconfigured SAN performance monitors. You can display
additional status widgets and performance monitors in this dashboard.

• User_defined dashboard — Displays a user-defined dashboard.
The dashboard you selected displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

215

7

Dashboard overview

Filtering the dashboards list
You can filter the list of dashboards to only display dashboard you need.
1. Click the Dashboards expand navigation bar.
2. Enter your filter criteria in the Filter text box.
3. To make the filter case sensitive or insensitive, choose one of the following options from the
filter icon list:

• Case sensitive — Select to make the filter case sensitive.
• Case insensitive — Select to make the filter case insensitive.
4. To allow wild cards or regular expressions, choose one of the following options from the filter
icon list:

• Use wildcards — Select to use wildcards in the Filter text box.
• Use regular expression -- Select to use a unicode regular expression. Enter a Unicode
regular expression in the Filter text box.
5. To determine how to match the filter text, choose one of the following options from the filter
icon list:

• Match from start — Select to match from the start of the dashboard name.
• Match exactly — Select to match the dashboard name exactly.
• Match anywhere — Select to match text anywhere in the dashboard name.
6. To determine how to handle leaf nodes as well as parent and children nodes, choose one of
the following options from the filter icon list:

• Match leaf node only — Select to only include leaf nodes in the filter.
• Hide nodes without children — Select to exclude nodes without children from the filter.
• Keep the children if any of their ancestors match — Select to include children in the filter
when any of their ancestors match.
7.

Press Enter.
The filter results display in the Dashboards expand navigation bar. To stop the filter, click the
stop filter (X) icon in the Filter text box.

Creating a user-defined dashboard
You can create a dashboard and customize it with the status widgets and performance monitors
you need to monitor your network.
1. Click the Dashboards expand navigation bar.
2. Click Add.
The Add Custom Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name and description for the dashboard.
4. Select the Copy active dashboard widgets to include all widget in the current dashboard to this
dashboard.
5. Click OK.

216

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Dashboard overview

7

The new dashboard displays in the Dashboards expand navigation bar and becomes the active
dashboard.

Deleting a user-defined dashboard
You can delete a user-defined dashboard.
1. Click the Dashboards expand navigation bar.
2. Select the dashboard you want to delete and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Setting the dashboard display
You can set the dashboard to minimize or expand all status widgets and performance monitors as
well as return to the default settings.
Select one of the following options from the dashboard display list:

• Collapse All — Select to minimize all widgets and monitors on the dashboard.
• Expand All — Select to expand all widgets and monitors on the dashboard.
• Reset to Default — Select to reset the dashboard to the default display settings.

Customizing the dashboard widgets and monitors
1. From the dashboard, click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
2. Click the Status tab.
The preconfigured general status widgets display.
3. Select the Display check box in the General Status Widgets list for each status widget you want
to add to the dashboard.
Clear the check box to remove the associated status widget from the dashboard.
The General Status Widgets list contains the following additional information:

• Title — The name of the status widget. For more information, refer to “Status widgets” on
page 224.

• Description — A general description of the status widget.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

217

7

Dashboard overview

4. Click the Performance tab (Figure 84).
The preconfigured performance monitors display. You can create up to 100 performance
monitors; however, you can only display up to 30 performance monitors. For more information
about performance monitors, refer to “Performance monitors” on page 237.

FIGURE 84

Customize Dashboard dialog box, Performance tab

5. Select the Display check box in the Performance Monitors list for each performance monitor
you want to add to the dashboard.
Clear the check box to remove the associated performance monitor from the dashboard.
The Performance Monitors list contains the following additional information:

• Title — The name of the performance monitor. For more information, refer to “Performance
monitors” on page 237

• Type — The type of monitor.
• Measure — The performance measures included in the monitor.
• Data Collectors — The data collectors that provide data for the monitor.
6. Click Add to add a new performance monitor. For more information, refer to “Configuring a
user-defined product performance monitor” on page 270.
7.

Click Edit to edit an existing performance monitor. For more information, refer to “Configuring a
user-defined product performance monitor” on page 270 or “Editing a preconfigured
performance monitor” on page 263.

8. Select one or more user-defined monitors and click Delete to delete the user-defined
performance monitors.
9. Select a monitor and click Collectors to launch the Historical Data Collectors dialog box. For
more information, refer to “Displaying historical data collectors” on page 996.
10. Click OK to close the Customize Dashboard dialog box.

218

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Dashboard overview

7

Exporting the dashboard display
You can export the current dashboard display (all widgets and monitors) or a selected widget or
monitor in a .png format.
1. Select one of the following options from the Export list:

• Dashboard — Exports the current dashboard.
• Name — Exports the selected widget (where Name is the name of the widget or monitor on
the dashboard).
The Export Dashboard to PNG File or Export Name to PNG File dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the location you want to save the file.
3. Enter a name for the snapshot in the File Name field, if needed.
Export uses the following naming convention: Name_yyyy_mm_dd_hh_mm_ss.png.
4. Click Save.
The file is saved to the location you selected.

Printing the dashboard display
You can print the current dashboard display (all widgets and monitors) or a selected widget or
monitor.
1. Select one of the following options from the Print list:

• Dashboard — Prints the current dashboard.
• Name — Prints the selected widget (where Name is the name of the widget or monitor on
the dashboard).
The Page Setup dialog box displays.
2. Change the page setup options, as needed.
3. Click OK.

Attaching and detaching the Dashboard tab
You can detach the Dashboard tab from the main application to display in a separate window.
To detach the Dashboard tab, click the Detach icon. The Dashboard - Dashboard_Name –
Application_Name window displays.
Reattach the Dashboard to the main application by clicking the Attach icon or by closing the
Dashboard - Dashboard_Name – Application_Name window. The Dashboard tab displays in the
main application window.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

219

7

Dashboard overview

Setting the network scope
You can configure the dashboard to display all objects in your area of responsibility (AOR) or a
subset of objects (fabrics, devices, or groups).

NOTE
Network scope does not affect the Events widget. The Events widget always includes all objects in
your AOR.
From the dashboard, select a network from the Network Scope list. Options include:

•
•
•
•
•
•

All
Any SAN fabric
Any Ethernet fabric
Any system-defined group
Any user-defined group
Any user-defined customized network

If you select a fabric scope, violation counts display for all products and ports in the fabric.
If you select a product scope, violation counts display for the selected products and the ports that
belong to the selected products.
If you select a port scope, violation counts display for the specified ports and the products to which
the ports belong. If any of the selected ports are initiator or target ports, violation counts display for
the attached switch port.
Select All to include all managed and monitored fabrics or groups in your AOR. The default is All. If
the fabric or group you select is deleted from discovery, the widget refreshes and returns to the
default (All).

220

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Dashboard overview

7

Creating a customized network scope
You can create a network scope from any objects in your AOR. You can create network scopes
based on Fabrics, Products, Product Groups, or Ports.
1. Click the Network Scope ellipsis button.
The Edit Scope dialog box displays with a list of existing user-defined network scopes in the
Network Scopes list.

FIGURE 85

Edit Scopes dialog box

2. Click Add.
A new network scope displays in the Network Scopes list.
3. Enter a name for the scope in the Name field.
4. Select one of the following options:

• Fabrics — Select to create your network from one or more fabrics.
• Products — Select to create your network from one or more products or product groups.
• Ports — Select to create your network from one or more ports or port groups.
5. Select one or more the objects you want to include in the network from the Available list and
click the right arrow button.
The objects display in the Selected list. To remove an object from the Selected list, select it and
click the left arrow button.
6. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Scope dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

221

7

Dashboard overview

Editing a user-defined network scope
You can edit any user-defined network scope.
1. Click the Network Scope ellipsis button.
The Edit Scope dialog box displays with a list of existing user-defined network scopes in the
Network Scopes list.
2. Select the network scope you want to edit in the Network Scopes list.
The network scope details display in the right side fields.
3. Change the name for the scope in the Name field, if needed.
4. To add objects, select one or more the objects you want to include in the network from the
Available Targets list and click the right arrow button.
The objects display in the Selected Targets list.
5. To remove an object from the Selected Targets list, select it and click the left arrow button.
6. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Scope dialog box.

Deleting a user-defined network scope
You can edit any user-defined network scope.
1. Click the Network Scope ellipsis button.
The Edit Scope dialog box displays with a list of existing user-defined network scopes in the
Named Scopes list.
2. Select the network you want to delete in the Named Scopes list.
3. Remove all objects from the Selected Targets list.
To remove an object from the Selected Targets list, select it and click the left arrow button.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Scope dialog box.

Setting the data display time frame
Setting the time scope in the dashboard toolbar configures the data display time range for the
status widgets and performance monitors that include a time range.

NOTE

Time scope does not affect the Events widget. For the Events widget, you set the time scope within
the widget.

NOTE
sFlow monitors only display data for up to 1 day.

222

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Default dashboards

7

From the dashboard, select on of the following duration options for which you want to display data
from the Time Scope list.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

30 Minutes — Displays data for the previous half hour.
1 Hour — Displays data for the previous hour.
6 Hours — Displays data for the previous 6 hours.
12 Hours — Displays data for the previous 12 hours.
1 Day — Displays data for the previous day.
3 Days — Displays data for the previous 3 days.
1 Week — Displays data for the previous week.
1 Month — Displays data for the previous month.

The displayed data changes to the new time frame for any status widget or performance monitor
affected by time.

Default dashboards
The Management application provides preconfigured dashboards which provide high-level overview
of the network, the current states of managed devices, and performance of devices, ports, and
traffic on the network.

Product Status and Traffic dashboard
The Product Status and Traffic dashboard provides the following preconfigured status widgets and
performance monitors:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

IP Inventory widget
Status widget
Events widget
Out of Range Violations widget
Top Product Memory Utilization monitor
Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
Top Products with Unused Ports monitor
Top Port Utilization Percentage monitor (includes details for all ports, Initiator ports, ISL ports,
and Target ports)

• Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor (includes details for all ports, Initiator ports, ISL
ports, and Target ports)

IP Port Health
The IP Ports Health dashboard provides the following preconfigured performance monitors:

•
•
•
•

Top Port Errors monitor
Top Port CRC Errors monitor
Top Port Discards monitor
Top Port Receive EOF monitor

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

223

7

Status widgets

•
•
•
•
•

Top Port Underflow Errors monitor
Top Port Overflow Errors monitor
Top Port Runtime Errors monitor
Top Port Too Long Errors monitor
Top Port Alignment Errors monitor

Status widgets
The Management application provides the following preconfigured status widgets:

• Access Point Status widget — Pie chart view of access point devices categorized by operational
and reachability status

• Events widget — Bar chart view of events grouped by severity and range
• Host Adapter Inventory widget — Stacked bar chart view of Host Adapters grouped by selected
category

• IP Inventory widget — Stacked bar chart view of IP devices grouped by operational status and
selected category

• IP Status widget — Pie chart view of IP devices categorized by operational and reachability
status

• Out of Range Violations widget — Table view of all out of range threshold violations reported by
Network OS devicesPort Health Violations widget — Table view of out of range port health
violations. There are four versions of this monitor based on the type of port: All ports, initiator
ports, ISL ports, and Target ports.

• Status widget — List view of various status attributes

Access Point Status widget
The Access Point Status widget displays the access point (AP) status as a pie chart.

FIGURE 86

Access Point Status widget

The Access Point Status widget includes the following data:

224

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Status widgets

7

• Severity icon/product count/widget title — The color of the worst status followed by the product
count with that status displays before the widget title.

• Show list — A list of available managed AP products.
• Pie chart — The AP status as a percentage of the total number of devices.
The pie chart displays the percentage in various colors on each slice. Tooltips showing the
number of devices in that state are shown when you pause on the slice. When there is one
status category with less than one percent of the total number of devices, the status widget
displays the number of devices in each category on each slice.

• Color legend — Displays the color legend below the pie chart using the color codes in Table 21.
TABLE 21

AP status color codes

Color

Type

Green

Online — AP is managed by controller and online.

Red

Offline — AP is managed by controller, but is offline.

Gray

Pending Adoption — Controller found AP but not managed.

Customizing the Access Point Status widget
You can customize the Access Point Status widget to display status for a specific product.
Change the grouping by selecting one of the following from the Show list:

•
•
•
•

All — Displays all the AP products.
AP7131 — Displays only AP 7131 products.
AP6511 — Displays only AP 6511 products.
AP650 — Displays only AP 650 products.

Accessing additional data from the Access Point Status widget
Double-click a section in the Access Point Status widget to navigate to a filtered view of the AP
Products report.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

225

7

Status widgets

Events widget
The Events widget (Figure 87) displays the number of events by severity level for a specified time
range as a stacked bar graph.

FIGURE 87

Events widget

The Events widget includes the following data:

• Severity icon/widget title/event count — The color of the worst severity followed by the event
count with that severity displays before the widget title.

• Range list — Use to customize this widget to display a specific time range. Options include: This
Hour, Last Hour, Today, Yesterday, Last 7 Days, and Last 30 Days.

• Show Syslog check box — Select to include Syslog information (default) on the Event Summary.
• Bar chart — The event severity using the color codes in Table 22.
TABLE 22

Event severity color codes

Color
Red (

Severity

)

Emergency

Brick Red(

)

Alert

Brick Red (

)

Critical

Brick Red (

)

Error

Gold (

)

Warning

Grey (

)

Notice

Blue (

)

Info

• Network Scope — The network scope does not affect the Events widget. The Events widget
always includes all objects in your AOR.

• Time Scope — The time scope.
The Events widget only includes events from products that are in your AOR.

226

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Status widgets

7

The x-axis represents the number of occurrences of a particular event severity during the selected
time period. If you pause on a bar, a tooltip shows the number of events with that severity level
during the selected time period. Also, for each severity, the cumulative number of traps, application
events, and security events is reported next to the horizontal bar. If Syslog messages are included,
then they are included in the count. To conserve space, the number is shown as is or truncated to
the nearest 1,000 ("K") or 1,000,000 ("M").
By default, Syslog events are included in the summary; however, because Syslog events occur at a
much higher frequency than other events and therefore could skew the bars for the other events,
you can exclude Syslog events. If they are excluded, they will not be displayed in the legend. Users’
selections are persisted (per user per server).

Customizing the Events widget
You can customize the Events widget to display events for a specific duration and to display Syslog
details.

• Display event information for a specific duration by selecting one of the following from the
Range list:

-

This Hour — Displays event information for the current hour beginning when you launch the
dashboard.

-

Last Hour — Displays event information for the previous hour to when you launch the
dashboard.

-

Today — Displays event information for the current day beginning at 12:00 AM.

-

Last 7 Days — Displays event information for the last 7 days, including the current day.

Yesterday — Displays event information for the previous day beginning at 12:00 AM of the
previous day.
Last 30 Days — Displays event information for the last 30 days, including the current day.

• Include Syslog information (default) on the Event Summary pane by selecting the Show Syslog
check box.
To exclude Syslog information, clear the Show Syslog check box.

Accessing additional data from the Events widget
Double-click a bar in the Events widget to navigate to an event custom report (HTML) that displays
the events corresponding to the event type selected.
For information about report details, refer to “Fault Management” on page 1141.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

227

7

Status widgets

Host Adapter Inventory widget
The Host Adapter Inventory widget (Figure 88) displays the host adapter products inventory as
stacked bar graphs.

FIGURE 88

Host Adapter Inventory widget

The Host Adapter Inventory widget includes the following data:

• Severity icon/Host product count/widget title — The color of the worst severity and the Host
product count with that severity displays before the widget title.

• Group By list — Use to customize this widget to display a specific grouping. Options include:
Model (default), Location, Driver, BIOS, and OS Type.

• Bar chart — Displays each group as a separate bar on the graph. Displays the current state of
all Host products discovered for a group in various colors on each bar. Tooltips showing the
number of devices in that state are shown when you pause on the bar.

• Time Scope — The time scope.

Customizing the Host Adapter Inventory widget
You can customize the Host Adapter Inventory widget to display product inventory for a specific
grouping. The group type and number of products in the group displays to the left of the associated
bar; for example, 2.3.0.005 [3], where 2.3.0.005 is the driver number and [3] is the number of
products running that driver level.

• Change the grouping by selecting one of the following from the Group By list:
- Model — Displays the Host product inventory by model.
- Location — Displays the Host product inventory by physical location.
- Driver — Displays the Host product inventory by driver.
- BIOS — Displays the Host product inventory by BIOS (boot code image version).
- OS Type — Displays the Host product inventory by operating system.

228

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Status widgets

7

• Zoom in on an area of the widget by dragging the mouse (upper left corner to lower right
corner) to select one or more bars.

NOTE

If the ratio between the longest and shortest bar reaches 5000:1, you should maximize the
widget prior to using zoom.
To return the widget to its original state, reverse the selection (drag from lower right corner to
upper left corner).

Accessing additional data from the Host Adapter Inventory widget
Double-click a bar in the Host Adapter Inventory widget to navigate to the Host Adapter Inventory
Report.

IP Inventory widget
The IP Inventory widget (Figure 89) displays the IP products inventory as stacked bar graphs.
For a VCS fabric, each VCS fabric is counted as an individual product.

FIGURE 89

IP Inventory widget

The IP Inventory widget includes the following data:

• Severity icon/product count/widget title — The color of the worst severity followed by the IP
product count with that severity displays before the widget title.

• Group By list — Use to customize this widget to display a specific group of products. Options
include: Firmware, Model, Product Type, Location, and Contact.

• Bar chart — Displays each group as a separate bar on the graph. Displays the current state of
all products discovered for a group in various colors on each bar. Displays the color legend
below the x-axis. Tooltips showing the number of devices in that state are shown when you
pause on the bar.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

229

7

Status widgets

• Color legend — Displays the color legend below the bar chart.
- Green — Reachable: IP product is online and accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP) and SNMP.
- Orange — Degraded Link: IP product is accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP); however, it is not
accessible by SNMP.

-

Maroon — Not Reachable: IP product is not online and not accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP).

• Time Scope — The time scope.

Customizing the IP Inventory widget
You can customize the IP Inventory widget to display product inventory for a specific grouping. The
group type and number of products in the group displays to the left of the associated bar; for
example, v04.1.00a [3], where v04.1.00a is the firmware number and [3] is the number of
products running that firmware level.

• Change the grouping by selecting one of the following from the Group By list:
- Firmware — Displays the product inventory by firmware release.
- Model — Displays the product inventory by model.
- Product Type — Displays the product inventory by product type.
- Location — Displays the product inventory by physical location.
- Contact — Displays the product inventory by contact name.
• Zoom in on an area of the widget by dragging the mouse (upper left corner to lower right
corner) to select one or more bars.

NOTE

If the ratio between the longest and shortest bar reaches 5000:1, you should maximize the
widget prior to using zoom.
To return the widget to its original state, reverse the selection (drag from lower right corner to
upper left corner).

Accessing additional data from the IP Inventory widget
Double-click a section of the bar in the IP Inventory widget to navigate to the IP Products - Status
dialog box (where Status is the status of the section you selected). For more information, refer to
“Viewing additional IP product data” on page 232

NOTE
It takes a few moments to populate newly discovered products in the IP Products - Status dialog box
(where Status is the section of the widget you selected).

230

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Status widgets

7

IP Status widget
The IP Status widget (Figure 90) displays the device status as a pie chart.

FIGURE 90

IP Status widget

The IP Status widget includes the following data:

• Severity icon/product count/widget title — The color of the worst status followed by the product
count with that status displays before the widget title.

• Pie chart — The device status as a percentage of the total number of devices.
The pie chart displays the percentage in various colors on each slice. Tooltips showing the
number of devices in that state are shown when you pause on the bar. When there is one
status category with less than one percent of the total number of devices, the status widget
displays the number of devices in each category on each slice.
For a VCS fabric, status is determined by the reachability of the individual members of the VCS
fabric. The IP Status widget displays the most severe reachability of a member of the VCS
fabric. For example, if one member of the VCS fabric has a reachability status of “degraded”
and all other members are “reachable”, then the VCS fabric status displays as “degraded”.

• Color legend — Displays the color legend below the pie chart using the following color code:
- Green — Reachable: IP product is online and accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP) and SNMP.
- Yellow — Degraded Link: IP product is accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP); however, it is not
accessible by SNMP.

-

Violet — Unhealthy: One or more units are not present, unit power is off, or the stacking
connection is down.

-

Blue — Not Reachable: IP product is not online and not accessible by IP (ICMP/TCP).

• Time Scope — The time scope.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

231

7

Status widgets

Accessing additional data from the IP Status widget
Double-click a section in the IP Status widget to navigate to the IP Products - Status dialog box
(where Status is the status of the section you selected). For more information, refer to “Viewing
additional IP product data” on page 232

NOTE

It takes a few moments to populate newly discovered products in the IP Products - Status dialog box
(where Status is the section of the widget you selected).

Viewing additional IP product data
1. Double-click a section in the IP Status or IP Inventory widgets.
The IP Products - Status dialog box (where Status is the section of the widget you selected)
displays with the following fields and components:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product name.
Fabric — The fabric associated with the product.
Product Type — The type of product.
State — The state for the product and the port.
Status — The status for the product and the port.
Tag — The tag number of the product.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The model number of the product.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware version of the product.
Location — The physical location of the product. This field is editable at the fabric level.
Contact — The name of the person or group you should contact about the product. This
field is editable at the fabric level.

2. Right-click any row in the table to access the corresponding shortcut menu for the device. For
more information about shortcut menus, refer to “IP shortcut menus” on page 1268.
3. Click Close.

232

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Fabric Watch widgets

7

Status widget
The Status widget (Figure 91) displays the number of products managed and the number of events
within the selected event time range, as well as various IP management processes and their
current state.

FIGURE 91

Status widget

The Status widget displays the following items for each product license:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

SAN Physical Switches — The number of discovered physical SAN switches.
Hosts — The number of managed hosts.
Events — The number of events within the last hour.
Ethernet Fabrics — The number of managed Ethernet fabrics.
IP Products — The number of managed IP products.
sFlow — The current sFlow state.
IP Discovery Status — The current IP discovery status.
Time Scope — The time scope.

Fabric Watch widgets
The widget includes the Fabric Watch threshold violations for devices running Network OS 3.0.0 or
later .
The Fabric Watch widgets display on the main Dashboard tab. The Management application
provides the following preconfigured Fabric Watchwidgets:

• Out of Range Violations widget — Table view of all out of range threshold violations reported by
your Network OS devices.

• Port Health Violations widget — Table view of out of range port health violations.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

233

7

Fabric Watch widgets

Out of Range Violations widget
The Out of Range Violations widget (Figure 92) displays the number of violations for each Fabric
Watch category, and the number of network objects (such as ports, trunks, and switches) for
Network OS devices with the Fabric Watch violation based on the selected fabric and a specified
time range.
By default, this widget refreshes every minute. If any violations occur on fabrics in your area of
responsibility (AOR) during the minute refresh time frame, the widget refreshes every 10 seconds.
If you delete, discover, or unmonitor a device, the widget refreshes.

FIGURE 92

Out of Range Violations widget

The Out of Range Violations widget includes the following fields and components:

• Severity icon/product count/widget title — The color of the worst severity and the number of
products with that severity displays before the widget title.

• Category — A list of the Fabric Watch dashboard categories. Always displays whether or not
there is an associated violation. Categories include:

-

Fabric Health
FCIP Health
FRU Health
Port Health
Security Violations
Switch Resources
Switch Status Policy
Traffic Performance
Virtual Machine Violations

NOTE

Network OS Fabric Watch violations with appropriate counter values are displayed for Switch
Status Policy, FRU Health, Security Violations, Switch Resources, and Port Health categories.
Traffic Performance, FCIP Health, Fabric Health, and Virtual Machine Violations categories are
not supported and display as blank.

234

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Fabric Watch widgets

7

• Violation Count — The total number of Fabric Watch rule violations for each category. Always
displays whether or not there is a violation.

• Network Object Count — The number and network object type (such as switch, virtual machine,
port, trunk, and so on) with a Fabric Watch violation for each category. Always displays whether
or not there is a violation.

• Refreshed — The time of the last update for the widget.

Customizing the Out of Range Violations widget
You can customize the widget to display violations for a specific fabric or group and time frame.

• To display data for a specific fabric or group, refer to “Setting the network scope” on page 220.
• To display data for a specific duration, refer to “Setting the data display time frame” on
page 222.

• Sort the contents by clicking the column header. Click the same column header again to
reverse the sort order.

Port Health Violations widget
The Port Health Violations widget (Figure 93) displays the number of violations for each product
based on the selected fabric and a specified time range. There are four port health violation
widgets: All, ISL, Initiator, and Target.

FIGURE 93

Port Health Violations widget

The Port Health Violations widget displays the following data for each product:

• Severity icon/port count/widget title — The color of the worst severity and the number of
products with that severity displays before the widget title.

• Product — A product label such as product name, IP address, node WWN, domain ID, or zone
alias.

• Port — A port identifier such as port name, number, address, WWN, user port number, or zone
alias.

NOTE

All non-FC ports display either the MAC address or the port name instead of WWN.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

235

7

Fabric Watch widgets

• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Violation Count — The number of Fabric Watch rule violations for the port.
• CRC Errors — The number of times an invalid cyclic redundancy check error occurs on a port or
a frame that computes to an invalid CRC.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Invalid Tx Words — The number of times an invalid transmission word error occurs on a port.
Loss of sync — The number of times a synchronization error occurs on the port.
Link Failures — The number of times a link failure occurs on a port or sends or receives NOS.
Loss of Signal — The number of times that a signal loss occurs in a port.
Protocol Errors — The number of times a protocol error occurs on a port.
Link Reset — The ports on which the number of link resets exceed the specified threshold
value.

• C3TXTO — The number of Class 3 discards frames because of timeouts.
• State changes — The state of the port has changed for one of the following reasons:
- The port has gone offline.
- The port has come online.
- The port is faulty.
• SFP Current — The amount of supplied current to the SFP transceiver.
• SFP Receive Power — The amount of incoming laser, in µwatts, to help determine if the SFP
transceiver is in good working condition.

• SFP Transmit Power — The amount of outgoing laser, in µwatts. Use this to determine the
condition of the SFP transceiver.

•
•
•
•

SFP Voltage — The amount of voltage supplied to the SFP transceiver.
SFP Temperature — The physical temperature of the SFP transceiver, in degrees Celsius.
SFP Power On Hours — The number of hours the 16 Gbps SFP transceiver is powered on.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the widget.

Network OS Fabric Watch violations with appropriate counter values are displayed for the following
categories.

• Abnormal Frame Terminations — The number of frames abnormally terminated.
• Symbol Errors — The number of undefined or invalid symbols received.
• IFG (InterFrame Gap) Errors — The interframe gap between successive frames that is violated.

Customizing the Port Health Violations widget
You can customize the widget to display violations for a specific fabric and time frame.

236

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• To display data for a specific fabric or group, refer to “Setting the network scope” on page 220.
• To display data for a specific duration, refer to “Setting the data display time frame” on
page 222.

• Sort the contents by clicking the column header. Click the same column header again to
reverse the sort order.

Accessing additional data from the widget
• Right-click a row in the widget to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device.Right-click any row and select Locate to locate the particular device to which the port
belongs in the Network Objects products list.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Violations dialog box.

Performance monitors
The Performance Dashboard provides a high-level overview of the performance on the network.
This allows you to easily check the performance of devices, ports, and traffic on the network. The
Performance Dashboard also provides several features to help you quickly access performance
metrics and reports.
The dashboards update every ten minutes regardless of the currently selected tab (IP) or the LAN
size.
You can change the default size of the status widgets and performance monitors by placing the
cursor on the divider until a double arrow displays. Click and drag the adjoining divider to resize the
window.
Reset the Performance Dashboard back to the default size by right-clicking in the white space and
selected Reset to Default.
The Management application provides the following preconfigured performance monitors:

TABLE 23

Preconfigure performance monitors

Monitor title

Description

Data collectors

Top Port Alignment Errors

Table view of the alignment errors measure

All SAN TE port collector

Top Port C3 Discards

Table view of the C3 discards measure

All SAN FC port collector

Top Port C3 Discards RX TO

Table view of the C3 discards RX TO measure. There are
four versions of this monitor based on the type of port: All
ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target ports.

All SAN FC port collector

Top Port CRC Errors

Table view of the CRC errors measure. There are four
versions of this monitor based on the type of port: All
ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target ports.

All SAN FC port collector, All SAN TE port
collector

Top Port Encode Error Out

Table view of the encode error out measure. There are four
versions of this monitor based on the type of port: All
ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target ports.

All SAN FC port collector

Top Port Errors

Table view of the errors measure

Port error count collector

Top Port Overflow Errors

Table view of the overflow errors measure

All SAN TE port collector

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

237

7

Performance monitors

TABLE 23

Preconfigure performance monitors

Monitor title

Description

Data collectors

Top Port Receive EOF

Table view of the received end-of-frames measure

All SAN TE port collector

Top Port Runtime Errors

Table view of the runtime errors measure

All SAN TE port collector

Top Port Sync Losses

Table view of the top port synchronization losses. There
are four versions of this monitor based on the type of port:
All ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target ports.

All SAN FC port collector

Top Port Too Long Errors

Table view of the too long errors measure

All SAN TE port collector

Top Port Traffic

Table view of the traffic measure

All SAN FCIP tunnel collector, All SAN FC port
collector, port throughput collector, All SAN
TE port collector

Top Port Underflow Errors

Table view of the underflow errors measure

All SAN TE port collector

Top Port Utilization Percentage

Table view of the port utilization percentage measure.
There are four versions of this monitor based on the type
of port: All ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target
ports.

All SAN FCIP tunnel collector, All SAN FC port
collector, port utilization collector, All SAN TE
port collector

Bottom Port Utilization
Percentage

Table view of the port utilization percentage measure.
There are four versions of this monitor based on the type
of port: All ports, initiator ports, ISL ports, and Target
ports.

All SAN FCIP tunnel collector, All SAN FC port
collector, port utilization collector, All SAN TE
port collector

Top Product CPU Utilization

Table view of the CPU utilization percentage measure

Network OS CPU/memory utilization
collector, NetIron/FastIron CPU/memory
utilization collector, Wireless ports collector

Top Product Memory Utilization

Table view of the memory utilization percentage measure

Network OS CPU/memory utilization
collector, NetIron/FastIron CPU/memory
utilization collector, Wireless ports collector

Top Product Response Time

Table view of the response time measure

Ping Stats collector (IP)

Top Product Temperature

Table view of the temperature measure

Network OS temperature collector, System
temperature collector

Top Products with Unused
Ports

Table view of the products with unused ports measure

Ports Not in Use Collector

These preconfigured performance monitors can be turned off, hidden, and edited; however, you
cannot delete the preconfigured monitors.
You can also create new performance monitors to display on the dashboard. For more information,
refer to “User-defined performance monitors” on page 264.

Displaying monitors on the Performance Dashboard
1. From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click Performance Dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard displays.
2. Click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Select the check box in the Display column for each performance monitor you want to display
on the Performance Dashboard.

238

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

4. Click OK.

Top Port Alignment Errors monitor
The Top Port Alignment Errors performance monitor displays the top ports with alignmenet errors in
a table.
The Top Port Alignment Errors performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Alignment Errors— The number (error count) of alignment errors for the duration specified in
the monitor.

• Alignment Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of alignment errors per second for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Accessing additional data from top or bottom port monitors
• Double-click a row or right-click a row and select Show Graph/Table to navigate to the Historical
Graphs/Tables dialog box for the selected measures. For more information, refer to
“Performance Data” on page 969.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

239

7

Performance monitors

Top Port C3 Discards monitor
The Top Port C3 Discards monitor (Figure 94) displays the top ports with Class 3 frames discarded
in a table. There are four port widgets: All, ISL, Initiator, and Target.

FIGURE 94

Top Port C3 Discards monitor

The Top Port C3 Discards monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• C3 Discards/sec — The number (error rate) of Class 3 discard errors per second for the
duration specified in the monitor.

• C3 Discards — The number (error count) of Class 3 discard errors for the duration specified in
the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

240

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port C3 Discards monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor
The Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor (Figure 95) displays the top ports with receive Class 3
frames received at this port and discarded at the transmission port due to timeout in a table.

FIGURE 95

Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor

The Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• C3 Discards RX TO/sec — The number (error rate) of Class 3 frames received at this port and
discarded at the transmission port due to timeout errors per second for the duration specified
in the monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

241

7

Performance monitors

• C3 Discards RX TO — The number (error count) of Class 3 frames received at this port and
discarded at the transmission port due to timeout errors for the duration specified in the
monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port C3 Discards RX TO monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device.

• In a Top N or Bottom N C3 Discards TX TO and C3 Discards RX TO monitors, right-click an
FC-port row and select Discarded Frames to navigate to the Discarded Frames dialog box. For
more information, refer to “Viewing discarded frames from a port” on page 384.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port CRC Errors monitor
The Top Port CRC Errors monitor (Figure 96) displays the top ports with frames that contain cyclic
redundancy check (CRC) errors in a table.

FIGURE 96

Top Port CRC Errors monitor

The Top Port CRC Errors monitor includes the following data:

242

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• CRC Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors per second
for the duration specified in the monitor.

• CRC Errors — The number (error count) of cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port CRC Errors monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

243

7

Performance monitors

Top Port Discards monitor
The Top Port Discards monitor (Figure 97) displays the top ports with receive and transmit discards
in a table.

FIGURE 97

Top Port Discards monitor

The Top Port Discards monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• RX Discards/sec — The number (error rate) of receive discard errors per second for the
duration specified in the monitor.

• RX Discards — The number (error count) of receive discard errors.
• TX Discards/sec — The number (error rate) of transmit discard errors for the duration specified
in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•

244

TX Discards — The number (error count) of transmit discard errors.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Status — The port status (for example, Up).
• Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.
To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Discards monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port Encode Error Out monitor
The Top Port Encode Error Out monitor (Figure 98) displays the top ports with encoding errors
outside of frames in a table.

FIGURE 98

Top Port Encode Error Out monitor

The Top Port Encode Error Out monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

245

7

Performance monitors

• Encode Error Out/sec — The number (error rate) of encoding errors outside of frames per
second for the duration specified in the monitor.

• Encode Error Out — The number (error count) of encoding errors outside of frames for the
duration specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Encode Out Errors monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port Errors monitor
The Top Port Errors monitor (Figure 99) displays the top ports with receive and transmit errors in a
table.

FIGURE 99

246

Top Port Errors monitor

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

The Top Port Errors monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count shown
next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• RX Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of receive errors per second for the duration specified
in the monitor.

• RX Errors — The number (error count) of receive errors.
• TX Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of transmit errors for the duration specified in the
monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

TX Errors — The number (error count) of transmit errors.
Product — The product affected by this monitor per second.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Errors monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

247

7

Performance monitors

Top Port Overflow Errors monitor
The Top Port Overflow Errors performance monitor (Figure 100) displays the top ports with overflow
erros in a table.

FIGURE 100 Top Port Overflow Errors performance monitor
The Top Port Overflow Errors performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Overflow Errors— The number (error count) of overflow errors for the duration specified in the
monitor.

• Overflow Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of overflow errors per second for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

248

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Top Port Receive EOF monitor
The Top Port Receive EOF performance monitor displays the top ports with received end-of-frames
in a table.
The Top Port Receive EOF performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Receive EOF — The number (count) of end of frames received.
• Receive EOF/sec — The number (rate) of end of frames received per second for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Top Port Runtime Errors monitor
The Top Port Runtime Errors performance monitor displays the top ports with runtime errors in a
table.
The Top Port Runtime Errors performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

249

7

Performance monitors

• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Runtime Errors— The number (error count) of runtime errors for the duration specified in the
monitor.

• Runtime Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of runtime errors per second for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Top Port Sync Losses monitor
The Top Port Sync Losses monitor (Figure 101) displays the top ports with synchronization failures
in a table.

FIGURE 101 Top Port Sync Losses monitor
The Top Port Sync Losses monitor includes the following data:

250

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Severity icon/monitor title — The color of the worst severity of the data shown next to the
monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

Sync Losses — The number of synchronization failures for the port.
Sync Losses/sec — The number of synchronization failures for the port per second.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Online).
Status — The port status (for example, In_Sync, No_Sync).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Link Resets monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Custom: Historical Performance Graphs dialog box. For
more information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port Too Long Errors monitor
The Top Port Too Long Errors performance monitor displays the top ports with frames longer than
the maximum frame size allowed errors in a table.
The Top Port Too Long Errors performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

251

7

Performance monitors

• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Too Long Errors— The number (error count) of frames longer than the maximum frame size
allowed errors for the duration specified in the monitor.

• Too Long Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of frames longer than the maximum frame size
allowed errors per second for the duration specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Top Port Traffic monitor
The Top Port Traffic monitor (Figure 102) displays the top ports with receive and transmit traffic in a
table.

FIGURE 102 Top Port Traffic monitor
The Top Port Traffic monitor includes the following data:

252

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Severity icon/monitor title — Displays the worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor
title.

NOTE

The Top Port Traffic widget displays the threshold colors based on the port speed. Click edit
icon of the widget to customize the threshold values.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

RX Traffic (MB/s) — The top receive traffic in megabits per second.
TX Traffic (MB/s) — The top transmit traffic in megabits per second.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Traffic monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Port Underflow Errors monitor
The Top Port Underflow Errors performance monitor displays the top ports with underlow errors in a
table.
The Top Port Underflow Errors performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

253

7

Performance monitors

• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Underflow Errors— The number (error count) of underflow errors for the duration specified in
the monitor.

• Underflow Errors/sec — The number (error rate) of underflow errors per second for the duration
specified in the monitor.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To edit a port performance monitor, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on
page 263.

Top Port Utilization Percentage monitor
The Top Port Utilization monitor (Figure 103) displays the top port utilization percentages in a table.

FIGURE 103 Top Port Utilization monitor
The Top Port Utilization monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title.
• Port — The port affected by this monitor.

254

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

RX Port Utilization Percentage — The top receive port utilization percentages.
TX Port Utilization Percentage — The top transmit port utilization percentages.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Utilization monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

255

7

Performance monitors

Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor
The Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor (Figure 104) displays the bottom port utilization
percentages in a table.

FIGURE 104 Bottom Port Utilization Percentage monitor
The Top Port Utilization Percentage monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title.
• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

RX Port Utilization Percentage — The bottom receive port utilization percentages.
TX Port Utilization Percentage — The bottom transmit port utilization percentages.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

Accessing additional data from the Top Port Utilization monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
The Top Product CPU Utilization monitor (Figure 105) displays the top product CPU utilization
percentages in a table.

FIGURE 105 Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
The Top Product CPU Utilization monitor includes the following data:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
CPU Utilization Percentage — The CPU utilization percentages.
Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

257

7

Performance monitors

• Contact — A contact name for the product.
• Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.
To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Product Memory Utilization monitor
The Top Product Memory Utilization monitor (Figure 106) displays the top product memory
utilization percentages in a table.

FIGURE 106 Top Product Memory Utilization monitor
The Top Product Memory Utilization monitor includes the following data:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

258

Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Memory Utilization Percentage — The top memory utilization percentages.
Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

7

Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Product Memory Utilization monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Product Response Time monitor
The Top Product Response Time monitor (Figure 107) displays the top product response time in a
table.

FIGURE 107 Top Product Response Time monitor
The Top Product Response Time monitor includes the following data:

• Severity icon/response time/monitor title — The worst severity of the data and the response
time displays next to the monitor title.

• Product — The product affected by this monitor.
• Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
• Response Time (ms) — The top response time in milliseconds.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

259

7

Performance monitors

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Product Response Time monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top Product Temperature monitor
The Top Product Temperature monitor (Figure 108) displays the top product temperature in a table.

FIGURE 108 Top Product Temperature monitor
The Top Product Temperature monitor includes the following data:

260

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

• Severity icon/temperature/monitor title — The worst severity of the data and the temperature
displays next to the monitor title.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Temperature — The top temperatures.
Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

Accessing additional data from the Top Product Temperature monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

261

7

Performance monitors

Top Products with Unused Ports monitor
The Top Products with Unused Ports monitor (Figure 105) displays the top products with ports not
in use in a table.

FIGURE 109 Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
The Top Products with Unused Ports monitor includes the following data:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data shown next to the monitor title.
Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Ports Not In Use — The number of ports not in use for the product.
Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the display
options, refer to “Editing a preconfigured performance monitor” on page 263.

262

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance monitors

7

Accessing additional data from the Top Product CPU Utilization monitor
• Right-click a row in the monitor to access the shortcut menu available for the associated
device. For more information about shortcut menus, refer to “Application menus” on
page 1261.

• Double-click a row to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Editing a preconfigured performance monitor
You can customize the monitor to display data by a selected time frame as well as customize the
display options.
1. Click the edit icon (

) on the monitor.

From the Performance tab of the Customize Dashboard dialog box, select the monitor you want
to edit and click Edit.
2. Select the number of products to include in a selected measure by entering a number in the
For Top N, Bottom N Monitors, N= field.
Valid values are from 1 through 25. The default is 10.
3. Configure the monitor to show only values greater than or less than a specified value by
completing the following steps.
a.

Select the Show values check box.

b.

Select greater than or less than from the list.

c.

Enter a value in the field.

4. Configure threshold numbers and associated colors by completing the following steps.
You can define three threshold numbers in decreasing order and four threshold colors. The
default values are as follows: 90 and above displays red; 75 and above displays orange; 60
and above displays yellow; and all others display blue.
a.

Select the check box.

b.

Enter a number in the field.

c.

Click the color square to launch the Color dialog box.

• To pick a color from a swatch, select the Swatches tab. Select a color from the display.
• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and brightness, click the HSV tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), value (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and lightness, click the HSL tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), lightness (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

• To specify a color based on values of red, green, and blue, click the RGB tab. Specify
the values for red (0 through 255), green (0 through 255), blue (0 through 255), and
alpha (0 through 255).

• To specify a color based on values of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, click the CMYK
tab. Specify the values for cyan (0 through 255), magenta (0 through 255), yellow (0
through 255), black (0 through 255), and alpha (0 through 255).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

263

7

User-defined performance monitors

• To reset to the default color, click Reset.
5. Click OK to save your changes.

User-defined performance monitors
The Performance Dashboard makes it easy for you to customize performance monitors specific to
your needs. You can define up to 100 performance monitors; however, you can only display up to
30 performance monitors at a time.

Monitor types
You can create the following types of monitors:

• Top N (Products, Ports, and Traffic Flows monitors) — Displays the top number of products,
ports, or traffic flows for the selected measure in a table.

• Bottom N (Products, Ports, and Traffic Flows monitors) Displays the bottom number of
products, ports, or traffic flows for the selected measure in a table.

• Distribution (Products and Ports monitors) — Displays the number (distribution) of products or
ports for each of the five percentage ranges defined for the selected measure in a bar graph

• Time Series (Products, Ports, and Traffic Flows monitors) — Displays the selected measures for
products, ports, or traffic flows in a chart.

• Top N sFlows — Displays the top sFlow for MAC, IP, VM, or VLAN based on available flow data in
a table.

• Performance graph — Displays the configured performance graph on the dashboard.

Measures
Depending on the object (products, ports, traffic) you want to monitor, you can choose from the
following measures:

• Product
- Memory Utilization Percentage — The memory utilization percentage for the product.
- CPU Utilization Percentage — The CPU utilization percentage for the product.
- Temperature — The temperature in Celsius for the product.
- Fan Speed — The fan speed in RPM for the product.
- Response Time — The response time in seconds for the product.
- System Up Time — The system up time in days for the product.
- Ports Not In Use — The number of ports not in use for the product.
- Ping Packet Loss Percentage — The ping packet loss percentage for the product.
- AP Client Count — The number of AP clients for the product.

264

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

• Port
- Common




-

IP



-

Port Utilization Percentage — The memory utilization percentage.
Traffic — The traffic in mbps.
CRC Errors — The number of CRC errors.
Errors — The number of errors.
Discards — The number of discarded frames.

Wireless





Dropped Events — The number of dropped events.
MAC Errors — The number of MAC errors.
Back Packets Received — The number of bad packets received.
Tx Errors — The number of transmit errors.

Top or bottom product performance monitors
The top or bottom product performance monitors (Figure 110) display the top or bottom number of
products (for example, top 10 products) for the selected measure in a table.

FIGURE 110 Top or bottom product performance monitor example
The top or bottom product performance monitor includes the following data:

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Product — The product affected by this monitor.
• Min — The minimum value of the measure in the specified time range.
• Measure_Type — The percentage bar of the selected measure.
By default, products display sorted by the Measure_Type value (Top products sort from highest
to lowest and bottom products sort lowest to highest). Click a column head to sort the columns
by that value.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

265

7

User-defined performance monitors

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Max — The maximum value of the measure in the specified time range.
Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To configure a product performance monitor, refer to “Configuring a user-defined product
performance monitor” on page 270.

Accessing additional data from top or bottom product monitors
In a Top N or Bottom N monitor, double-click a row or right-click a row and select Show Graph/Table
to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box for the selected measures. For more
information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Top or bottom port performance monitors
The top or bottom port performance monitors (Figure 111) display the top or bottom number of
ports (for example, bottom 10 ports) for the selected measure in a table.

FIGURE 111 Top or bottom port performance monitor example
The top or bottom port performance monitor includes the following data:

266

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

• Threshold icon/object count/monitor title — The color associated with the threshold and
number of objects within that threshold displays next to the monitor title.

• Severity icon/monitor title — The worst severity of the data based on the error count or error
rate shown next to the monitor title.

• Port — The port affected by this monitor.
• Connected_Port_Link (where Connected_Port_Link is Connected Port, Initiator, or Target) —
Displays one of the following:

-

Connected Port — The ISL or IFL port on the connected device. Click to launch the switch
port properties dialog box.

-

Initiator — The initiator port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

-

Target — The target port on the connected device. Click to launch the device properties
dialog box.

• Measure_Type — The percentage bar of the selected measure. Depending on the selected
measure, both the error rate (per second) and error count may display. For selected measures,
more than one Measure_Type may display (for example RX and TX).
By default, ports display sorted by the Measure_Type value (Top ports sort from highest to
lowest and bottom ports sort lowest to highest). Click a column head to sort the columns by
that value.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The product affected by this monitor.
Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Number — The port number.
State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
Status — The port status (for example, Up).
Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.

To configure a port performance monitor, refer to “Configuring a user-defined port performance
monitor” on page 273.

Accessing additional data from top or bottom port monitors
• In a Top N or Bottom N monitor, double-click a row or right-click a row and select Show
Graph/Table to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box for the selected measures.
For more information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

Distribution performance monitors
The distribution performance monitor (Figure 112) displays the distribution (number) of products or
ports for each of the five percentage ranges defined for the selected measure in a bar graph.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

267

7

User-defined performance monitors

FIGURE 112 Distribution performance monitor example
The distribution performance monitor includes the following data:

• Monitor title — The user-defined monitor title.
• Number of Products/Ports (y-axis) — The y-axis always displays a numbered range (zero to the
maximum number of objects) for the products or ports affected by the selected measure.

• Measure_Type (x-axis) — The x-axis display depends on the Measure_Type you selected for this
monitor. Each bar on the graph maps directly to one of the five percentage ranges defined for
the monitor. Measure_Type includes the following measures:

TABLE 24

•
•
•
•
•

Product measures types

Memory Utilization Percentage
CPU Utilization Percentage
Temperature (C)
Fan Speed (rpm)
Response Time (s)

TABLE 25

•
•
•
•

System Up Time (days)
Ports Not In Use
Ping Packet Loss Percentage
AP Client Count

Port measures types

Common
• Port Utilization Percentage
• Traffic
• CRC Errors

•
IP

•
•

Errors
Discards
Wireless
• Dropped Events
• MAC Errors
• Back Packets Received
• Tx Errors

• Refreshed — The time of the last update for the monitor.
To configure a distribution performance monitor, refer to “Configuring a user-defined product
performance monitor” on page 270 or “Configuring a user-defined port performance monitor” on
page 273.

268

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

Accessing additional data from the Distribution monitors
• Place the cursor on a bar in the graph to display the number of products included in the count
for the selected bar. For example, the tooltip “(Data Item 3, 22.6-33.8) = 6” means that there
are six products within the third percentage range (displays the temperatures within the
percentage range) for the selected measure (product temperature).

• Double-click a percentage range to navigate to the Monitor_Title Distribution Data Details
dialog box. for more information, refer to “Viewing product distribution data details” on
page 276 or “Viewing port distribution data details” on page 277.

Time series performance monitors
The time series performance monitors (Figure 113) display the selected measures in a chart.

FIGURE 113 Time series performance monitor example
The time series performance monitor includes the following data:

•
•
•
•
•

Monitor title — The user-defined monitor title.
Value (y-axis) — The number of objects affected by this monitor.
Time (x-axis) — The date and time the monitor collected the data.
Legend (below the x-axis) — The line color and the associated data that each line represents.
Network Scope — The network scope, such as Local or Published. Displays Local if you select
the targets when creating the monitor. Displays Published if you select the Use Network Scope
check box when creating the monitor.

Place the cursor on a data point in graph line to view details. Place the cursor on an Event icon to
view the event details. Right-click the graph to access the graph shortcut menu (refer to
“Configuring the performance graph” on page 989).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

269

7

User-defined performance monitors

To configure a time series performance monitor, refer to “Configuring a user-defined product
performance monitor” on page 270 or “Configuring a user-defined port performance monitor” on
page 273.

Top sFlows performance monitors
The top sFlows performance monitors display the top sFlow measures based on available flow data
in a table.
The top sFlow performance monitor includes the following data:

• MACs, IP Addresses, VMs, or VLANs — The number of products and associated ports affected
by this monitor.

•
•
•
•
•

Port In — The in port number.
Port Out — The out port number.
MBytes — The port speed.
Frames — The number of frames.
Percentage — The sFlow percentage for the product or port.

To configure an sFlow performance monitor, refer to “Configuring a user-defined sFlow
performance monitor” on page 275.

Accessing additional data from the sFlow monitors
• Double-click a device row to navigate to the sFlow Monitor Report dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Displaying sFlow monitoring reports” on page 1038.

Configuring a user-defined product performance monitor
1. From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click Performance Dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard displays.
2. Click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Click the Performance tab.
4. Click Add.
The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays.
5. Enter a unique title for the monitor.
The title can be up to 256 characters in length.
6. Select the type of monitor you are creating from the Monitor Type - Products area:

• Top N — Select to monitor the top N (number) products affected by the selected measure.
• Bottom N — Select to monitor the bottom N (number) products affected by the selected
measure.

• Distribution — Select to monitor the selected measure for five defined distribution
percentages.

270

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

• Time Series — Select to monitor a selected measure for a range of time and specified
target.
7.

Select the product measure for the monitor in the Measure area:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Memory Utilization Percentage
CPU Utilization Percentage
Temperature
Fan Speed
Response Time
System Up Time
Ports Not In Use
Ping Packet Loss Percentage
AP Client Count (not available for Time Series monitors)

8. (Top N and Bottom N monitors only) Select the number products to include in a selected
measure by entering a number in the For Top N, Bottom N Monitors, N= field.
Valid values are from 1 through 25. The default is 10.
9. (Top N, Bottom N, and Distribution monitors only) Configure the monitor to show only values
greater than or less than a specified value by completing the following steps.
a.

Select the Show values check box.

b.

Select greater than or less than from the list.

c.

Enter a value in the field.

10. (Top N, Bottom N, and Distribution monitors only) Configure threshold numbers and associated
colors by completing the following steps.
Depending on the monitor type you select, you can define up to four threshold numbers in
increasing or decreasing order and up to five associated threshold colors.
(Top N and Bottom N monitors only) The decreasing order defaults are as follows: 90 and
above displays red, 75 and above displays orange, 60 and above displays yellow, and all others
display blue. The maximum values allowed are -32,768 through 32,767 for SFP power and
0 through 32,767 for all other measures.
(Distribution monitors only) The increasing order defaults are as follows: 0 through 20 displays
green, 21 through 40 displays blue, 41 through 60 displays yellow, 61 through 80 displays
orange, and 81 through 100 displays red.
a.

(Top N and Bottom N monitors only) Select the check box.

b.

Enter a number in the field.

c.

Click the color square to launch the Color dialog box.

• To pick a color from a swatch, select the Swatches tab. Select a color from the display.
• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and brightness, click the HSV tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), value (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and lightness, click the HSL tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), lightness (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

271

7

User-defined performance monitors

• To specify a color based on values of red, green, and blue, click the RGB tab. Specify
the values for red (0 through 255), green (0 through 255), blue (0 through 255), and
alpha (0 through 255).

• To specify a color based on values of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, click the CMYK
tab. Specify the values for cyan (0 through 255), magenta (0 through 255), yellow (0
through 255), black (0 through 255), and alpha (0 through 255).

• To reset to the default color, click Reset.
11. (Time series monitors only) Add targets for the monitor by clicking Add and completing steps in
“Adding targets to a user-defined performance monitor” on page 272.
Remove targets from the monitor by selecting one or more targets in the Targets list and
clicking Remove.
12. Click OK on the Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitor in the Performance
Monitors list.
13. Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box.
The Performance Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitors at the bottom of the
dashboard.

Accessing additional data from user-defined product performance monitors
• In a Distribution monitor, double-click a percentage range to navigate to the Measure_Type
Distribution Data Details dialog box. For more information, refer to “Viewing product
distribution data details” on page 276 or “Viewing port distribution data details” on page 277.

• In a Top N or Bottom N product monitor, double-click a row or right-click a row and select Show
Graph/Table to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box for the selected measures.
For more information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

• In a Top N sFlow monitor, double-click a device row to navigate to the sFlow Monitor Report
dialog box. For more information, refer to “Interpreting an sFlow traffic report” on page 1041.

Adding targets to a user-defined performance monitor
You can only add targets for Time Series monitors.
1. From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click Performance Dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard displays.
2. Click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Click the Performance tab.
4. Click Add.
The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays.
5. Select Time Series from the Monitor Type - Product or Port area.
6. Select the port measure for the monitor in the Measure area
7.

272

Display data for a specific duration from the Duration options.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

8. Click Add beneath the Targets table.
The Performance Dashboard Monitor Targets dialog box displays.
Depending on the type of measure you select, you can add IP products/ports to the list of
targets.
If you selected a product measure, continue with step 9.
If you selected an IP port measure, continue with step 9.
9. Click the IP tab.
10. Select IP targets from the Available IP Sources list.
11. Click the right arrow button to move the targets to the Selected Sources list.
12. Click OK on the Performance Dashboard Monitor Targets dialog box.
The targets display in the Targets list of the Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box.
13. Click OK on the Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitor in the Performance
Monitors list.
14. Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box.
The Performance Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitors at the bottom of the
dashboard.

Configuring a user-defined port performance monitor
1. From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click Performance Dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard displays.
2. Click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Click the Performance tab.
4. Click Add.
The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays.
5. Select the type of monitor you are creating from the Monitor Type - Port area:

• Top N — Select to monitor the top N (number) ports affected by the selected measure.
• Bottom N — Select to monitor the bottom N (number) ports affected by the selected
measure.

• Distribution — Select to monitor the selected measure for five defined distribution
percentages.

• Time Series — Select to monitor a selected measure for a range of time and specified
targets.
6. Select the port measure for the monitor in the Measure area:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

273

7

User-defined performance monitors

Common
• Port Utilization Percentage
• Traffic
• CRC Errors

7.

•
IP

•
•

Errors
Discards
Wireless
• Dropped Events
• MAC Errors
• Back Packets Received
• Tx Errors

(Top N and Bottom N monitors only) Select the number of ports to include in a selected
measure by entering a number in the For Top N, Bottom N Monitors, N= text box.
Valid values are from 1 through 25. The default is 10.

8. (Top N, Bottom N, and Distribution monitors only) Configure the monitor to show only values
greater than or less than a specified value by completing the following steps.
a.

Select the Show values check box.

b.

Select greater than or less than from the list.

c.

Enter a value in the field.

9. (Top N, Bottom N, and Distribution monitors only) Configure threshold numbers and associated
colors by completing the following steps.
Depending on the monitor type you select, you can define up to four threshold numbers in
increasing or decreasing order and up to five associated threshold colors.
(Top N and Bottom N monitors only) The decreasing order defaults are as follows: 90 and
above displays red, 75 and above displays orange, 60 and above displays yellow, and all others
display blue. The maximum values allowed are -32,768 through 32,767 for SFP power and
0 through 32,767 for all other measures.
(Distribution monitors only) The increasing order defaults are as follows: 0 through 20 displays
green, 21 through 40 displays blue, 41 through 60 displays yellow, 61 through 80 displays
orange, and 81 through 100 displays red.
a.

(Top N and Bottom N monitors only) Select the check box.

b.

Enter a number in the field.

c.

Click the color square to launch the Color dialog box.

• To pick a color from a swatch, select the Swatches tab. Select a color from the display.
• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and brightness, click the HSV tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), value (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and lightness, click the HSL tab. Specify
the hue (0 through 360 degrees), saturation (0 through 100%), lightness (0 through
100%), and transparency (0 through 100%).

• To specify a color based on values of red, green, and blue, click the RGB tab. Specify
the values for red (0 through 255), green (0 through 255), blue (0 through 255), and
alpha (0 through 255).

274

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

7

• To specify a color based on values of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, click the CMYK
tab. Specify the values for cyan (0 through 255), magenta (0 through 255), yellow (0
through 255), black (0 through 255), and alpha (0 through 255).

• To reset to the default color, click Reset.
10. (Time series monitors only) Add targets for the monitor by clicking Add and completing the
steps in “Adding targets to a user-defined performance monitor” on page 272.
Remove targets from the monitor by selecting one or more targets in the Targets list and
clicking Remove.
11. Click OK on the Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitor in the Performance
Monitors list.
12. Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box.
The Performance Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitors at the bottom of the
dashboard.

Accessing additional data from user-defined port performance monitors
• In a Distribution monitor, double-click a percentage range to navigate to the Measure_Type
Distribution Data Details dialog box. For more information, refer to “Viewing product
distribution data details” on page 276 or “Viewing port distribution data details” on page 277.

• In a Top N or Bottom N monitor, double-click a row or right-click a row and select Show
Graph/Table to navigate to the Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box for the selected measures.
For more information, refer to “Performance Data” on page 969.

• In a Top N sFlow monitor, double-click a device row to navigate to the sFlow Monitor Report
dialog box. For more information, refer to “Interpreting an sFlow traffic report” on page 1041.

Configuring a user-defined sFlow performance monitor
1. From the Dashboards expand navigation bar, double-click Performance Dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard displays.
2. Click the Customize Dashboard icon.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays.
3. Click the Performance tab.
4. Click Add.
The Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box displays.
5. Select the type of monitor you are creating from the Monitor Type - Top N sFlows area:

•
•
•
•

MAC
IP
VM
VLAN

6. Select the number of products to include in a selected measure by entering a number in the
For Top N, Bottom N Monitors, N= text box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

275

7

User-defined performance monitors

Valid values are from 1 through 25. The default is 10.
7.

Configure the monitor to show only values greater than or less than a specified value by
completing the following steps.
a.

Select the Show values check box.

b.

Select greater than or less than from the list.

c.

Enter a value in the field.

8. Add targets for the monitor by clicking Add and completing the steps in “Adding targets to a
user-defined performance monitor” on page 272.
9. Remove targets from the monitor by selecting one or more targets in the Targets list and
clicking Remove.
10. Click OK on the Add Performance Dashboard Monitor dialog box.
The Customize Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitor in the Performance
Monitors list.
11. Click OK on the Customize Dashboard dialog box.
The Performance Dashboard dialog box displays with the new monitors at the bottom of the
dashboard.

Accessing additional data from user-defined sFlow performance monitors
• In a Top N sFlow monitor, double-click a device row to navigate to the sFlow Monitor Report
dialog box. For more information, refer to “Interpreting an sFlow traffic report” on page 1041.

Viewing product distribution data details
Each bar on the product distribution graph maps directly to one of the five percentage ranges
defined for the distribution performance monitor (refer to “Distribution performance monitors” on
page 267).
1. Double-click a bar in the graph.
The Monitor_Title Data Details dialog box displays.
2. Review the data.
The product distribution data details include the following fields and components:

• Product — The name of the product affected by the selected measure.
• Measure_Type — This column depends on which measure you select for the monitor.










276

Memory Utilization Percentage — The memory utilization percentage for the product.
CPU Utilization Percentage — The CPU utilization percentage for the product.
Temperature — The temperature in Celsius for the product.
Fan Speed — The fan speed in RPM for the product.
Response Time — The response time in seconds for the product.
System Up Time — The system up time in days for the product.
Ports Not In Use — The number of ports not in use for the product.
Ping Packet Loss Percentage — The ping packet loss percentage for the product.
AP Client Count — The number of AP clients for the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

User-defined performance monitors

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

7

Fabric — The fabric to which the device belongs.
Product Type — The type of product (for example, switch).
State — The product state (for example, Offline).
Status — The product status (for example, Reachable).
Tag — The product tag.
Serial # — The serial number of the product.
Model — The product model.
Port Count — The number of ports on the product.
Firmware — The firmware level running on the product.
Location — The location of the product.
Contact — A contact name for the product.

3. Click Close.

Viewing port distribution data details
Each bar on the port distribution graph maps directly to one of the five percentage ranges defined
for the distribution monitor (refer to “Distribution performance monitors” on page 267).
1. Double-click a bar in the graph.
The Monitor_Title Data Details dialog box displays.
2. Review the data.
The port distribution data details include the following fields and components:

• Port — The port affected by the selected measure.
• TX/RX — Whether the port is transmitting (TX) or receiving (RX) data. This column is not
available for all measures.

• Measure_Type — This column depends on which measure you select for the monitor.


Common
- Port Utilization Percentage — The memory utilization percentage.



CRC Errors — The number of CRC errors.

IP



Traffic — The traffic in mbps.

Errors — The number of errors.
Discards — The number of discarded frames.

Wireless
- Dropped Events — The number of dropped events.

-

MAC Errors — The number of MAC errors.
Back Packets Received — The number of bad packets received.
Tx Errors — The number of transmit errors.

• Product — The product affected by this monitor.
• Type — The type of port (for example, U-Port).
• Identifier — The port identifier.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

277

7

User-defined performance monitors

• Port Number — The port number.
• State — The port state (for example, Enabled).
• Status — The port status (for example, Up).
3. Click Close.

Configuring a monitor from a performance graph
1. Configure the performance graph.
To configure a real-time performance graph, refer to “Monitoring real-time performance” on
page 983. To configure a historical performance graph, refer to “Performance Data” on
page 969.
2. Click Save As Widget to create a monitor of the graph data for the dashboard.
The Performance Dashboard Monitor Title dialog box displays. The Management application
generates a default name for the monitor using the following naming convention: Chart_Type MM DD, YYYY HH:MM AM/PM. For example, Realtime Chart Monitor - Nov 2, 2012 11:02 AM.
For more information, refer to “Viewing Historical Graphs/Tables” on page 1009.
3. Enter a unique name for the monitor and click OK.
4. Click OK on the confirmation message.

278

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

8

View Management

In this chapter
• IP tab overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Icon legend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customizing the main window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Product List customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Address Finder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP topology view manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network Objects view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Topology view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• L2 Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ethernet Fabrics view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VLAN Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host Topology view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP topology map components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Port actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

280
290
293
297
299
301
306
307
309
309
310
310
313
315
327

FIGURE 114 Utilization Legend

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

279

8

IP tab overview

IP tab overview
The IP tab displays the Product List, Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.
You can change the default size of the display by placing the cursor on the divider until a double
arrow displays. Click and drag the adjoining divider to resize the window. You can also show or hide
an area by clicking the left or right arrow on the divider.
The following graphic illustrates the various areas, and descriptions of them are listed below.

NOTE

Some areas may be hidden by default. To view areas of the IP tab, select View > Show Panels > All
Panels, or press F12.

FIGURE 115 Main Window - IP tab
1. Menu bar — Lists commands you can perform on the IP tab. Some menu items display as
disabled unless you select the correct object from the product list or topology map. For a list of
the many functions available on each menu, refer to “IP main menus” on page 1262.
2. IP main toolbar — Provides buttons that enable quick access to dialog boxes and functions. For
more information, refer to “IP main toolbar” on page 281.
3. Dashboard tab — Provides a high-level overview of the network managed by Management
application server. For more information, refer to the “Dashboard Management” on page 211.
4. IP tab — Displays the Master Log, Minimap, Connectivity Map (topology), and Product List.
5. Product List toolbar — Enables you to select the type of topology map you want to display in the
main window. Does not display until you discover a product or network. For more information,
refer to “Network Objects view” on page 307.

280

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP tab overview

8

6. Topology Map toolbar — Provides tools for viewing the Topology Map as well as exporting the
Topology Map as an image. Does not display until you discover a device or network. For more
information, refer to “Topology Map toolbar” on page 283.
7.

Product List — Lists the products discovered in the Management application. For more
information, refer to “IP Product List” on page 284.

8. Topology Map — Displays the topology, including discovered and monitored devices and
connections. For more information, refer to “Topology Map” on page 285.
9. Master Log — Displays all events that have occurred on the Management application. For more
information, refer to “Master Log” on page 287.
10. Minimap — Displays a “bird’s-eye” view of the entire topology. Does not display until you
discover a fabric. For more information, refer to “Minimap” on page 288.
11. Status bar — Displays data regarding the connection, port, product, special event, call home,
and backup status, as well as Server and User data. For more information, refer to “Status bar”
on page 289.

IP main toolbar
The toolbar is located beneath the Menu bar and provides icons to perform various functions.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

FIGURE 116 Main toolbar
The icons on your toolbar vary based on the licensed features on your system.
1. Users — Displays the Users dialog box. Use to configure users, roles, and areas of
responsibility.
2. Properties — Displays the Properties dialog box of the selected device. Use to view or edit
device properties.
3. Launch Element Manager — Launches the Element Manager of the selected device. Use to
configure a device through its Element Manager.
4. IP Product Discovery — Displays the Discover Setup - IP dialog box. Use to configure discovery.
5. Zoning — Displays the Zoning dialog box. Use to configure zoning.
6. Configuration Wizard — Displays the Configuration Wizard. Use to create and deploy product
configurations as well as configure payloads.
7.

CLI Configuration — Displays the CLI Configuration dialog box. Use to create, verify, and deploy
global and product monitoring configurations.

8. Configuration Repository — Displays the Configuration Repository dialog box. Use to set up,
track, and back up product configurations.
9. Event Actions — Displays the Event Actions dialog box. Use to manage event actions for SAN
and IP configurations.
10. Product Label — Use to set the device labels to display as Name and IP Address, Name, or IP
Address.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

281

8

IP tab overview

11. Legend — Use to view the topology legend. For more information, refer to “Topology map
elements” on page 315.
12. Product List Search — Use to search for a device in the product list.
13. Help — Displays the Online Help.

Product List toolbar
This toolbar is located at the top of the product list and provides lists, links, and buttons to perform
various functions. The items on this toolbar vary based on what you select from the Type list.

1

2

3

4

FIGURE 117 Product list toolbar
1. View list — Use to select the one of the following view types: Network Objects, IP Topology, L2
Topology, and VLAN Topology.
The areas of the main display vary depending on the display type you select.

• Network Objects — Displays the Product List toolbar, Product List, and Master Log.
• L2 Topology — Displays the Product List toolbar, Product List, Topology Map toolbar,
Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.

• Ethernet Topology — Displays the Product List toolbar, Product List, Topology Map toolbar,
Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.

• IP Topology — Displays the Product List toolbar, Product List, Topology Map toolbar,
Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.

• VLAN Topology — Displays the Product List toolbar, Product List, Topology Map toolbar,
Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.

• Host Topology — Displays the Host Product List toolbar, Product List, Topology Map toolbar,
Topology Map, Master Log, and Minimap.
2. Grouping type list — Use to create product and port groups, as well as edit, duplicate, and
delete groups. Only displays when you select Network Objects from the Type list.
3. Filter check box and link — Use to create a product filter based on reachability status. Only
displays when you select Network Objects from the Type list.
4. Rediscover button — Use to restart the discovery process.

282

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP tab overview

8

Host Product List toolbar
The Port Display buttons are located at the top right of the Product List and enable you to configure
how ports display. You have the option of viewing connected (or occupied) product ports,
unoccupied product ports, or attached ports. Not enabled until you discover a fabric or host.

NOTE
Occupied/connected ports are those that originate from a device, such as a switch. Attached ports
are ports of the target devices that are connected to the originating device.

1

2

3

FIGURE 118 Port Display buttons
1. Show/Hide Occupied Port — Displays or hides the ports of the devices in the fabrics (present in
the topology map) that are connected to other devices.
2. Show/Hide Attached Port — Displays or hides the attached ports of the target devices.
3. Show/Hide Unoccupied Port — Displays or hides the ports of the devices (shown in the
topology map) that are not connected to any other device.

Topology Map toolbar
This toolbar is located at the top of the Topology Map and provides icons and buttons to perform
various functions.

FIGURE 119 Topology Map toolbar
The items on the Topology Map toolbar vary based on what you select from the Type list on the
Product List toolbar.
1. View Name — Name of the selected topology.
2. STP button — Only displays when you select VLAN Topology from the View list. Use to enable or
disable STP. Rest cursor on button to display tooltip.
3. Topology Display button — Use select the layout, add an map image, or change the background
color for the topology map.
4. Export icon — Use to export the topology to a PNG file.
5. Print icon — Use to print the current Topology Map image.
6. Zoom Out icon — Use to zoom out on the Topology Map.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

283

8

IP tab overview

7.

Reset zoom list — Use to reset the zoom (Actual Size, Fit Content, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%,
125%, 150%, 200%, or 500%) of the Topology Map.

8. Zoom In icon — Use to zoom in on the Topology Map.

Host topology map toolbar
The Host Topology map toolbar is located at the top right side of the View window and provides
tools to export the topology, to zoom in and out of the Topology Map, collapse and expand groups,
and fit the topology to the window. Not enabled until you discover a host.

1

2

3

4

5

6

FIGURE 120 Host Topology Map toolbar
1. Export — Use to export the topology to a PNG file.
2. Zoom In — Use to zoom in on the Connectivity Map.
3. Zoom Out — Use to zoom out on the Connectivity Map.
4. Fit in View — Use to scale the map to fit within the Connectivity Map area.
5. Expand — Use to expand the map to show all ports in use on a device.
6. Collapse — Use to collapse the map to show only devices (hides ports).

IP Product List
Lists the devices discovered in the Management application.
The Product List, located on the IP tab, displays an inventory of all discovered devices and ports.
The Product List is a quick way to look up product and port information, including serial numbers
and IP addresses.
To display the Product List, select View > Show Panels > Product List or press F9.
You can edit information in the Product List by double-clicking in a field marked with a green
triangle. You can sort the Product List by clicking a column heading.
The following columns (presented here in default order) are included in the Product List.

• Group/Product — The icon and name of the product or product group. Also, the status of the
product or product group.
For VDX/VCS products, the status is computed from the operational status and reachability
status.

•
•
•
•

284

Name — Displays the name of the product.
IP Address — Displays the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.
Product Type — Displays the type of product, such as Router or L2 Switch.
Serial # — Displays the serial number of the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP tab overview

8

• Status — Displays the status for the produc, such as Reachable, Marginal, Degraded Link, or
Not Reachable.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

State (Ethernet Fabrics only) — Displays the Ethernet Fabric state, such as online or offline.
Vendor — Displays the name of the product’s vendor.
Model — Displays the model number of the product.
Port Count — Displays the number of ports on the product.
Firmware — Displays the firmware version of the product.
Build Label (not available for Ethernet Fabrics or Network Objects) — Displays the firmware
build number.
Location — Displays the physical location of the product.
Contact — Displays the name of the person or group you should contact about the product.
Description — Displays the description of the product.
User-defined property labels — Displays the user-defined property labels. You can create up to
three user-defined property labels.

Product List functions
• Customize — Customize the Product list. For more information, refer to “Product List
customization” on page 297.

• Sort — Click a column head to sort the list. Click a column head again to reverse the sort order
• Two-way selection — Select a device in the Product List and that device is highlighted on the
Topology Map and vice versa.

• Table shortcut menus — Right-click a column header in the Product List to view the menu. For a
list of right-click menus, refer to “Customizing application tables” on page 294.

• Device shortcut menus — Right-click a device in the Product List to view the menu. For a list of
right-click menus, refer to “IP shortcut menus” on page 1268.

Topology Map
The Topology map displays the topology, including discovered and monitored devices and
connections. For more information about topology maps, refer to “IP topology view manager” on
page 306.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

285

8

IP tab overview

FIGURE 121 Topology Map

Topology Map functions
• Two-way selection — Select an icon on the topology map and that device is highlighted in the
Product List and vice versa. For more information about icons, refer to “Icon legend” on
page 290.

• Node/Device double-click — Double-click a node (subnet) to display the devices beneath it.
Double-click a device to display the Properties dialog box for the selected device. For more
information about device properties, refer to “IP device properties” on page 1314.

• User-defined properties — User-defined properties display in the Product List. For more
information, refer to “Properties customization” on page 1329.

• Zoom In/Zoom Out — Click the appropriate button to zoom in or out on the topology map.
On the L2, Ethernet Fabrics, IP, and VLAN topologies, click anywhere on the topology map and
use the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.

• ToolTips — Pause on a node, device, or connection to view information. For more information
about tooltip flyovers, refer to “Flyover settings” on page 140.

• Shortcut menus — Right-click a device in the Product List to view the menu. For a list of
shortcut menus, refer to “IP shortcut menus” on page 1268.

Topology map keyboard shortcuts
For the L2, Ethernet Fabrics, IP, and VLAN topologies, you can use the keystrokes shown in the
table below to perform common topology map functions.

TABLE 26

Topology keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcut Description

286

Number Pad +

Zoom in on the topology.

Number Pad -

Zoom out on the topology.

Control + 0

Set the zoom level to 100%.

Control + P

Launch the Print dialog box.

Control + E

Launch the Export dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP tab overview

TABLE 26

8

Topology keyboard shortcuts

Keyboard Shortcut Description
Control + ,

Launch the Topology Display dialog box.

Right Arrow

Move the selection to the node on the right (if available).

Left Arrow

Move the selection to the node on the left (if available).

Up Arrow

Move the selection to the node above the current selection (if available).

Down Arrow

Move the selection to the node that is below the current selection (if available).

Master Log
The Master Log, which displays in the lower area of the main window, lists the events and alerts
that have occurred on the Network. If you do not see the Master Log, select View > Show Panels >
All Panels or press F5.
The default order of the Master Log columns is ‘Severity’, ‘Acknowledged’, ‘Last Event Server Time’,
and ‘Description’. Which columns are displayed and in what order can be controlled through the
“Customize Columns” dialog, as described in “Displaying columns” and in “Changing the order of
columns”. You can sort the Master Log by clicking a column heading. By default, the Master Log is
sorted by the Last Event Server Time column. To filter information in the Master Log, refer to
“Filtering events in the Master Log” on page 1210. To view event properties, refer to “Displaying
event properties from the Master Log” on page 1207.
The following fields and columns are included in the Master Log:

• Severity — The severity of the event. When the same event (Warning or Error) occurs
repeatedly, the Management application automatically eliminates the additional occurrences.
For more information about events, refer to “Fault Management” on page 1141. For a list of
the event icons, refer to “Event icons” on page 292.

• Acknowledged — Whether the event is acknowledged or not. Select the check box to
acknowledge the event.

• Source Name — The product on which the event occurred.
• Source Address — The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product on which the event
occurred.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Origin — The event source type (for example trap, pseudo event, application, or syslog).
Category — The type of event that occurred (for example, client/server communication events).
Description — A description of the event.
Last Event Server Time — The time and date the event last occurred on the server.
Count — The number of times the event occurred.
Module Name — The name of the module on which the event occurred.
Message ID — The message ID of the event.
Product Address — The IP address of the product on which the event originated.
Contributor — The name of the contributor on which the event occurred.
Node WWN — The world wide name of the node on which the event occurred.
Fabric Name — The name of the fabric on which the event occurred.
Operational Status — The operational status (such as, unknown, healthy, marginal, or down) of
the product on which the event occurred.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

287

8

IP tab overview

•
•
•
•
•
•

First Event Product Time — The time and date the event first occurred on the product.
Last Event Product Time — The time and date the event last occurred on the product.
First Event Server Time — The time and date the event first occurred on the server.
Audit — The audit of the event.
Virtual Fabric ID — The VFID of the product on which the event occurred.
Zone Alias — Displays the zone alias of the product or port.

Minimap
The Minimap, which displays in the lower right corner of the main window, is useful for getting a
bird’s-eye view of the topology, or to quickly jump to a specific place on the topology. To jump to a
specific location on the topology, click that area on the Minimap. A close-up view of the selected
location displays on the topology.
Use the Minimap to view the entire topology and to navigate more detailed map views. This feature
is especially useful if you have a large topology. Does not display until you discover a device.

FIGURE 122 IP Minimap

Anchoring or floating the Minimap
You can anchor or float the Minimap to customize your main window.

• To float the Minimap and view it in a separate window, click the Detach icon (

) in the upper

right corner of the Minimap.

• To anchor the Minimap and return the Minimap to its original location on the main window, do
one of the following steps:

-

288

Click the Attach icon (
Click the Close icon (

) in the upper right corner of the Minimap.
) in the upper right corner of the Minimap.

Double-click the logo in the upper left corner of the Minimap.
Click the logo in the upper left corner of the Minimap and select Close (ALT + F4).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP tab overview

8

Resizing the Minimap
On an anchored Minimap, place the cursor on the left border of the Minimap until a double-pointed
arrow displays. Click and drag the adjoining divider.
On a floating Minimap, place the cursor on a border of the Minimap until a double-pointed arrow
displays. Click and drag to change the window size.

Status bar
The status bar displays at the bottom of the main window. The status bar provides a variety of
information about the SAN and the application. The icons on the status bar change to reflect
different information, such as the current status of products, fabrics, and backup.

FIGURE 123 Status Bar
The icons on your status bar will vary based on the licensed features on your system.
1. Connection Status — Displays the Server-Client connection status. Also displays whether the
client topology is in sync with the server. Resynchronize with the server by restarting the client.
2. Server Status — Displays the status of the server disk space (for example, low or sufficient).
3. Server Backup Status — Displays a backup status icon, which allows you to determine the
current backup status. Right-click and select Backup now to begin back up immediately.
Right-click and select Configure backup to launch the Options dialog box - Server Backup pane
and configure backup. Let the pointer pause on the backup status icon to display the following
information in a tooltip.

• Backup in Progress icon — Backup started at hh:mm:ss, in progress... XX files in
Directory_Name are backed up.

• Countdown to Next Scheduled Backup icon — Waiting for next backup to start.
• Backup Disabled icon — Backup is disabled.
• Backup Failed icon — Backup failed at hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy.
4. Network Size Status — Displays a memory allocation status icon, which allows you to
determine the current network size status. Double-click the icon to launch the Memory
Allocation pane of the Options dialog box. Let the pointer pause on the backup status icon to
display the following information in a tooltip.

• Network size within limits icon — Network size is within the recommended count.
• Ne work size exceeds limits icon — Network size exceeds the recommended count.
5. Server Port Status — Displays port status for the following ports: CIM Indication for Event
Handling, CIM Indication for HCM Proxy, FTP,SCP/SFTP, SNMP Trap, Syslog, , Web Server
(HTTP), and Web Server (HTTPS). Click to launch the Port Status dialog box. For more
information about port status, refer to “Viewing port status” on page 10.
6. Product Status — Displays the status of the most degraded device in the SAN. For example, if
all devices are operational except one (which is degraded), the Product Status displays as
degraded. Click this icon to open the Product Status Log.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

289

8

Icon legend

7.

Fabric Status — Displays the state of the fabric that is least operational, based on ISL status.
The possible states are: operational, unknown, degraded or failed. Select a product or fabric
from the Connectivity Map or Product List and click this icon to open the related Fabric Log
(only available for persisted fabrics).

8. Configuration Deviation Status (IronWare and Network OS products only) — Displays whether or
not product’s have deviated from their baseline configuration. Click this icon to open the
Change Tracking tab of the Configuration Repository dialog box.
9. Policy Monitor Status — Displays whether or not a policy monitor has failed or partially failed.
Click to launch the Policy Monitor dialog box. For more information about policy monitors, refer
to “Viewing policy monitor status” on page 1106.
10. Special Events — Displays whether or not a special event has been triggered. Click to launch
the Special Events dialog box. For more information about special events, refer to “Creating an
event action definition” on page 1166.
11. Call-Home Status — (Trial and Licensed version only) Displays a call home status icon when
one or more product are discovered, which allows you to determine the current call home
status. Click to launch the Call Home Notification dialog box. For more information about Call
Home status and icons, refer to “Viewing Call Home status” on page 358.
12. Server Name — Displays the name of the Server to which you are connected. Click to launch
the Server Properties dialog box. For more information, refer to “Viewing server properties” on
page 9.
13. Total Users — Displays the number of clients logged into the server. Click to launch the Active
Sessions dialog box. For more information, refer to “Viewing active sessions” on page 8.
14. User’s ID — Displays the user ID of the logged in user. Click to launch the User Profile dialog
box. For more information, refer to “User profiles” on page 205.
15. Trial license (Not shown) — Displays the trial expiration information to the right of the User’s ID.

Icon legend
Various icons are used to illustrate devices and connections in a network. The following tables list
icons that display on the Connectivity Map and Product List.

IP product icons
The following table lists the manageable IronWare and Network OS product icons that display on
the topology. Manageable devices display with blue icons. Unmanageable devices display with gray
icons. Some of the icons shown only display when certain features are licensed.

TABLE 27
Icon

290

Description

Icon

Description

IP Fixed Configuration Switch

IP Stackable Switch

IP Chassis

HyperEdge Stackable Switch

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Icon legend

8

TABLE 27
Icon

Description

Icon

Description

VLAN

Wireless Access Point

Wireless Controller

VDX Switch (L2)

VCS fabric

Unlicensed VCS fabric

VDX Router (L3-enabled)

IP Subnet

Layer 2 Cloud

Unmanaged Product

Third-Party Product

Host product icons
The following table lists the manageable Host product icons that display on the topology. Fabric OS
manageable devices display with blue icons. Unmanageable devices display with gray icons. Some
of the icons shown only display when certain features are licensed.

TABLE 28
Icon

Description

Icon

Description

HBA

HBA Mezzanine Card

CNA

CNA Mezzanine Card

Unmanaged HBA

Any IO

Host

Unmanaged Host

VM Host

Virtual HBA

Ethernet Cloud

Layer 2 Cloud

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

291

8

Icon legend

IP group icons
The following table lists the manageable IP product group icons that display on the topology.

TABLE 29
Icon

Description

Icon

Description

Switch Group, Product Group

IP port icons
The following table lists the port icons that display in the Product List.

TABLE 30
Icon

Description
IP Port
Virtual IP Port
IP Port Group

IP product status icons
The following table lists the product status icons that display on the topology.

TABLE 31
Icon

Status

No icon

Reachable
Degraded/Marginal
Down/Failed
Degraded Link
Not Reachable
Unknown/Link Down
Unhealthy

Event icons
The following table lists the event icons that display on the topology and Master Log. For more
information about events, refer to .

292

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Customizing the main window

8

TABLE 32
Event Icon

Description
Emergency
Alert
Critical
Error
Warning
Notice
Informational
Debug

Customizing the main window
You can customize the main window to display only the data you need by displaying different levels
of detail on the Connectivity Map (topology) or Product List.

Zooming in and out of the Connectivity Map
You can zoom in or out of the Connectivity Map to see products and ports.

Zooming in
To zoom in on the Connectivity Map, use one of the following methods:

• Click the zoom-in icon ( ) on the Connectivity Map toolbar.
• Press CTRL and the plus sign on the number pad on the keyboard.

FIGURE 124 Zoom dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

293

8

Customizing the main window

Zooming out
To zoom out of the Connectivity Map, use one of the following methods:

• Click the zoom-out icon ( ) on the Connectivity Map toolbar.
• Press CTRL and the minus sign on the number pad on the keyboard.

Exporting the topology
You can save the topology to an image (PNG format).
1. Click Export in the toolbar.
The Export Topology To PNG File dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the directory where you want to export the image.
3. Edit the name in the File Name field, if necessary.
4. Click Save.
If the file name is a duplicate, a message displays. Click Yes to replace the image or click No to
go back to the Export Topology To PNG File dialog box and change the file name.
The File Download dialog box displays.
5. Click Open to view the image or click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Customizing application tables
You can customize any table in the Management application main interface (for example, the
Master Log or the Product List) or in individual dialog boxes in the following ways:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display only specific columns
Display columns in a specific order
Resize the columns to fit the contents
Sort the table by a specific column or multiple columns
Copy information from the table to another application
Export information from the table
Search for information
Expand the table to view all information
Collapse the table

Displaying columns
To only display specific columns, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click anywhere in the table and select Customize or Table > Customize.
The Customize Columns dialog box displays.

294

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Customizing the main window

8

FIGURE 125 Customize Columns dialog box
2. Choose from the following options:

• Select the check box to display a column.
OR
Select the column name and click Show.

• Clear the check box to hide a column.
OR
Select the column name and click Hide.

• Click Select All to select all check boxes.
• Click Deselect All to clear all check boxes.
• Click Restore Defaults to restore the table to the original settings.
3. Click OK.

Changing the order of columns
To change the order in which columns display, choose from one of the following options.
Rearrange columns in a table by dragging and dropping the column to a new location.
OR
1. Right-click anywhere in the table and select Customize or Table > Customize.
The Customize Columns dialog box displays.
2. Select the name of the column you want to move and use the Move Up button and Move Down
button to move it to a new location.
3. Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

295

8

Customizing the main window

Resizing the columns
You can resize a single column or all columns in the table.
To resize a single column, right-click the column header and select Size Column to Fit or Table >
Size Column to Fit.
To resize all columns in the table, right-click anywhere in the table and select Size All Columns to Fit
or Table > Size All Columns to Fit.

Sorting table information
To sort the table by a single column, click the column header.
To reverse the sort order, click the column header again.
To sort the table by multiple columns, complete the following steps.
1. Click the primary column header.
2. Press CTRL and click a secondary column header.

Copying table information
You can copy the entire table or a specific row to another application (such as Notepad, Excel,
Word, and so on).
1. Choose from one of the following options:

• Right-click anywhere in the table and select Table > Copy Table.
• Select the table row that you want to export and select Table > Copy Row.
2. Open the application to which you want to copy the Product List information.
3. Select Edit > Paste (or press CTRL + V).
4. Save the file.

Exporting table information
You can export the entire table or a specific row to a text file.
1. Choose from one of the following options:

• Right-click anywhere in the table and select Table > Export Table.
• Select the table row that you want to export and select Table > Export Row.
The Save table to a tab delimited file dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the location where you want to save the file.
3. Enter the file name in the File Name field.
4. Click Save.

296

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product List customization

8

Searching for information in a table
You can search for information in the table by any of the values found in the table.
1. Right-click anywhere in the table and select Table > Search.
The focus moves to the Search field.

FIGURE 126 Search field
2. Enter all or part of the search text in the Search field and press Enter.
The first instance is highlighted in the table.
3. Press Enter to go to the next instance of the search text.

Expanding and collapsing tables
You can expand a table to display all information or collapse it to show only the top level.
To expand the entire table, right-click anywhere in the table and select Expand All or Table >
Expand All.
To collapse the entire table, right-click anywhere in the table and select Collapse All or Table >
Collapse All.

Product List customization
NOTE

Properties customization requires read and write permissions to the Properties - Add / Delete
Columns privilege.
You can customize the Product List by creating user-defined product and port property labels. You
can also edit or delete user-defined property labels, as needed.
You can create up to three user-defined property labels from the Product List for each of the
following object types: product and port properties. Product property labels created from the
Product List display in the Product List and the Properties dialog box. You can create port property
labels from the Product List; however, you can only view them on the Ports tab of the Properties
dialog box. User-defined properties must be unique across all Properties dialog boxes and the
Product List.
You cannot edit the user-defined property field contents from the Product List; however, you can
edit the field in the Properties dialog box.
Property fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. To edit a field
with a green triangle ( ), click in the field and make your changes.

Adding a property label
You can create up to three user-defined product and port property labels from the Product List. To
add a new property label (column heading), complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

297

8

Product List customization

1. Right-click any column heading on the Product List and select Add Column.
The Add Property dialog box displays.
2. Enter a label and description for the property.
The label must be unique and can be up to 30 characters.
The description can be up to 126 characters.
3. Select the property type from the Type list.
Options include: Product or Port.
4. Click OK.
The new property displays in the last column of the Product List as well as the associated
Properties dialog box based on the selected type.
You cannot edit the user-defined property field contents from the Product List; however, you
can edit the field in the Properties dialog box.
Property fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. To edit a
field with a green triangle ( ), click in the field and make your changes.

Editing a property label
You can only edit labels that you create on the Product List.
To edit a user-defined property label (column heading), complete the following steps.
1. Right-click the column heading on the Product List for the property you want to edit and select
Edit Column.
The Edit Property dialog box displays.
2. Change the label and description for the property, as needed.
The label must be unique and can be up to 30 characters.
The description can be up to 126 characters.
You cannot change the property type.
3. Click OK.
The property details are updated in the Product List as well as the Properties dialog box.
You cannot edit the user-defined property field contents from the Product List; however, you
can edit the field in the Properties dialog box.
Property fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. To edit a
field with a green triangle ( ), click in the field and make your changes.

Deleting a property label
You can only delete labels that you created on the Product List. To delete a label, complete the
following steps.
1. Right-click the user-defined column heading on the Product List you want to delete and select
Delete Column.
2. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

298

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Search

8

The column you selected is deleted from the Product List as well as the Properties dialog box.

Search
You can search for a objects by text or regular expression.

• Text — Enter a text string in the search text box. This search is case sensitive.
For example, if you are searching for a device in the Product List, you can enter the first five
characters in a device name. All products in the Product List that contain the search text
display highlighted.

• Regular Expression — Enter a Unicode regular expression in the search text box. (For hints,
refer to “Regular Expressions” on page 1333.) All products in the Product List that contain the
search text display highlighted. This search is case insensitive.
For example, you might need to search ports. To search for a port using a Unicode regular
expressions, enter “2/1|2/2|2/3”. This search will find Ports 2/1, 2/2, and 2/3 on all
devices.
The Search features contains a number of components. The following graphic illustrates the
various areas, and descriptions of them are listed below.

1

2

3

4

1. Text field — Enter the text or unicode regular expression for which you want to search.
2. Search list — Select one of the following options:

• Text option — Select this option if you entered a text string in the text field.
• Regular Expression option — Select this option if you entered a unicode regular expression
in the text field.

• Clear Search command — Select this option to clear the search text field
• Help command — Select this option to view help for this feature.
3. Search up button — Click to search upward in the list.
4. Search down button — Click to search downward in the list.

Searching for a device
You can search for a device by name, WWN, or device type. When searching in the Connectivity
Map, make sure you search the right view (View > Manage View > Display View > View_Name) with
the appropriate options of port display (View > Port Display > Display_Option) and connected end
devices (View > Port Display > Show All) enabled.
To search for a device, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

299

8

Search

1. Enter your search criteria in the search field.

NOTE

To search for a device, the device must be discovered and display in the topology.
2. Choose one of the following options:

• Select Text from the search list and enter a text string in the search text box.
This search is case sensitive.

• Select Regular Expression from the search list and enter a Unicode regular expression in
the search text box.
This search is case insensitive
3. Press Enter or click the search icon.
The search results display highlighted.
If the search finds more than one match, a message displays, advising you to restrict the
search by restricting the search by node (refer to “Restricting a search by node” on page 300)
or by looking for exact matches (refer to “Searching for an exact match” on page 301).

Restricting a search by node
When a device is assigned to a product group, it may be listed in the Product node, as well as
Product Groups node. Therefore the search results include the device under both the Product node
and the Product Group node.

NOTE
To search for a device, the device must be discovered and display in the topology.
To restrict the search only to specific nodes, complete the following steps.
1. Select the Product node or Product Group node that you want to search.
2. Choose one of the following options:

• Select Text from the search list.
• Select Regular Expression from the search list.
3. Enter your search criteria in the search field.

• Text — Enter a text string in the search text box. This search is case sensitive.
For example, you can enter the first five characters in a device name. All products in the
Product List that contain the search text display highlighted.

• Regular Expression — Enter a Unicode regular expression in the search text box. (For hints,
refer to “Regular Expressions” on page 1333.) All products in the Product List that contain
the search text display highlighted. This search is case insensitive.
4. Press Enter or click the search icon.
The search results display highlighted.

300

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Address Finder

8

Searching for an exact match
To search for an exact match, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• Select Text from the search list.
• Select Regular Expression from the search list.
2. Enter your search criteria in the search field.

• Text — Enter a text string in the search text box. This search is case sensitive.
For example, you can enter the first five characters in a device name. All products in the
Product List that contain the search text display highlighted.

• Regular Expression — Enter a Unicode regular expression in the search text box. (For hints,
refer to “Regular Expressions” on page 1333.) All products in the Product List that contain
the search text display highlighted. This search is case insensitive.
3. Press Ctrl and click the search icon.
The search results display highlighted.
Example

If you search for IP address “192.1.1.101” and then press CTRL and click the search icon, the
application only highlights “192.1.1.101”. This search does not highlight "SI-101
[192.1.1.101]".
If you search for port "1/2" and then press CTRL and click the search icon, the application only
highlights port “1/2”. This search does not highlight ports "1/2", "1/20", "1/21", "1/22", and
so forth.

Clearing search results
To clear search results, select Clear Search from the search list.

Address Finder
NOTE
Address Finder is not supported on Fabric OS products.

NOTE

Address Finder is only supported on Network OS products running 3.0 or later.
Address Finder locates where hosts are connected to your network from traffic on the network. The
list of interfaces provides information on the location of the source of the address, relative to each
network device, although the source may be directly or indirectly connected to the listed interfaces.
Address Finder uses the network topology information recorded during the discovery process
based on information from devices running Foundry Discovery Protocol (FDP) and Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and from the topology_data.txt file.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

301

8

Address Finder

If a workstation is connected to a third-party device, and that device is connected to a IronWare or
Network OS device, then Address Finder should be able to report the downstream port from which
that traffic is coming (that is, the port to which the third-party device is connected), as long as the
workstation is sending traffic that passes through the IronWare or Network OS device.
This directional information indicates which device interface can be used to reach the target MAC
address. By combining this information with the knowledge of the network topology, you can trace a
path from a device to the wireless client in question.
Address Finder finds MAC addresses that are in the forwarding tables at the moment when the
search is performed.
You can use Address Finder if you have the Address Finder privilege in your user account or role.
For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

Finding IP addresses
NOTE
Address Finder is only supported on Network OS products running 3.0 or later.
When searching for an IP address, Address Finder sends a couple of packets to the target IP
address to prime Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) caches. It then looks in the Management
application database to find all the Layer 3 devices on the target subnet, and then queries the ARP
table of each one to find the target IP address. The result of the query provides the corresponding
MAC address. Once the MAC address is known, then the MAC address is searched for in the
learned MAC address tables of each device that is in the database that has an IP address on the
same subnet as the target IP address. To find a MAC address, refer to “Finding MAC addresses” on
page 304.
To find an IP address, complete the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Tools > Address Finder.
The Address Finder dialog box displays.

FIGURE 127 Address Finder dialog box

302

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Address Finder

8

3. Select the IP Address option and enter the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) that you want to
find.

NOTE

IPv6 address search is only supported on Ethernet router products running IronWare OS 5.4 or
later.

NOTE

IPv6 address search is not supported on Network OS products.
4. Select the Find only in the selected products check box to limit the search to selected products.
When you access Address Finder from the Element Manager interface (refer to “Element
Manager interface overview” on page 725), the Find only in the selected products check box is
selected by default to limit the search to the selected Ethernet router device.
5. Select the product you want to include in the search in the Available Products list.
6. Click the right arrow button to move the selected products to the Selected Products list.
7.

Click Find to begin the search.
If the search is successful, the products display in the Products Found table as they are found.
Note that products may not display immediately.
Click Stop to stop the search.
The table shows the following information:

• Product — The product icon and host name of the device that has seen or learned the IP
addresses for which you searched, or the host name of the device where the IP address
belongs to the network device.

• Product IP Address — The IP address of the device that has seen or learned the target IP
address.

•
•
•
•
•

Interface — The interface that has seen or learned the MAC address.
Interface Name — The administratively configured name of the interface.
VLAN Name — The VLAN ID of the interface.
Target MAC Address — The MAC address you wanted to find.
Target IP Address — The IP address you wanted to find.

Sort the search results by clicking the column header. Click the same column header again to
reverse the sort order.

NOTE

Address Finder cannot detect IP addresses assigned to POS or ATM ports. However, Address
Finder will find IP addresses across a POS or ATM port.
You can sort the search results by a specific column by clicking the column header. Click the
same column header again to reverse the sort order.
If errors occur during the search, the Errors button becomes enabled. Click Errors to display the
error messages. Error messages are grouped by the error description (Reason). You may need
to scroll down to read the entire error message. Click OK when you have finished reading the
message. Make any necessary corrections in the network before repeating the search.
8. Click Port Properties to launch the Port Properties dialog box for the device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

303

8

Address Finder

9. Click Attached Port Properties to launch the Port Properties dialog box for the device.

NOTE

The Attached Port Properties button is only supported for Network OS devices.
The Ports tab of the VCS Properties dialog box displays with the attached ports highlighted.
10. Click Close to close the Address Finder dialog box.

Finding MAC addresses
NOTE
MAC address search is supported on Network OS products running 2.1.0 or later.
To find a MAC address, Address Finder searches the learned MAC address tables of each device
that is in the database. To find a IP address, refer to “Finding IP addresses” on page 302.
To find a MAC address, complete the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Tools > Address Finder.
The Address Finder dialog box displays.

FIGURE 128 Address Finder dialog box
3. Select the MAC Address option and enter the address in hexadecimal characters in the field.
You can use any of the following methods to separate the characters in the address:

•
•
•
•
•

Hyphens (for example: aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff)
Periods (for example: aa.bb.cc.dd.ee.ff)
Colons (for example: aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff)
Spaces (for example: aa bb cc dd ee ff)
No spaces (for example: aabbccddeeff)

To find more than one address, use question marks as wildcard characters (for example:
aa-bb-cc-dd-??-??).

304

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Address Finder

8

NOTE

Wildcard character search is not supported on Network OS products.
4. Select the Find only in the selected products check box to limit the search to selected products.
When you access Address Finder from the Element Manager interface (refer to “Element
Manager interface overview” on page 725), the Find only in the selected products check box is
selected by default to limit the search to the selected Ethernet router device.
5. Select the product you want to include in the search in the Available Products list.
6. Click the right arrow button to move the selected products to the Selected Products list.
7.

Click Find to begin the search.
If the search is successful, the products display in the Products Found table as they are found.
Note that products may not display immediately.

NOTE

When Address Finder searches for the Target MAC address and no topology information exists
(for example, FDP & LLDP is disabled on the router and switch), two entries display – one from
the router and one from the switch.

NOTE

When you find targets using the MAC address wildcard, the Products Found table shows the
IP addresses of hosts connected to the routers. IP addresses of hosts connected to L2
switches are blank because Layer 2 switches typically do not learn the IP addresses of end
nodes attached to the Layer 2 switch as it is not in the ARP table of the switch.

NOTE

You cannot use special addresses (such as a broadcast MAC address (FFFF.FFFF.FFFF) or any
MAC in multicast range (0100.5E00.0000 – 0100.5E7F.FFFF) to find products.
Click Stop to stop the search.
The table shows the following information:

• Product — The product icon and host name of the device that has seen or learned the MAC
addresses for which you searched, or the host name of the device where the MAC address
belongs to the network device.

• Product IP Address — The IP address of the device that has seen or learned the target IP
address.

•
•
•
•

Interface — The interface that has seen or learned the MAC address.
Interface Name — The administratively configured name of the interface.
VLAN — The VLAN ID of the interface.
Target MAC Address — The MAC address you wanted to find. This field standardizes the
MAC address format as follows: aa.bb.cc.dd.ee.ff.

• Target IP Address — The IP address you wanted to find.
You can sort the search results by a specific column by clicking the column header. Click the
same column header again to reverse the sort order.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

305

8

IP topology view manager

If errors occur during the search, the Errors button becomes enabled. Click Errors to display the
error messages. Error messages are grouped by the error description (Reason). You may need
to scroll down to read the entire error message. Click OK when you have finished reading the
message. Make any necessary corrections in the network before repeating the search.
8. Click Port Properties to launch the Port Properties dialog box for the device.
9. Click Attached Port Properties to launch the Port Properties dialog box for the device.

NOTE

The Attached Port Properties button is only supported for Network OS devices.
The Ports tab of the VCS Properties dialog box displays with the attached ports highlighted.
10. Click Close to close the Address Finder dialog box.

IP topology view manager
The topology view manager enables you to choose how to view devices in your network. Topology
views only contain devices included in your area of responsibility (AOR).
To display topology views in the Management application, make sure you meet the following
requirements.

• Make sure that all IronWare OS or Network OS devices on the network have the Foundry
Discovery Protocol (FDP) or Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) enabled so that connections
between devices display. To enable FDP or LLDP using the Configuration Wizard, refer to “IP
Configuration Wizard” on page 765.

NOTE

FDP is not supported in an IPv6 network; therefore, you must enable LLDP on the devices to
displays link in a L2 topology.

• Make sure that all non-IronWare OS or Network OS devices have LLDP or the Cisco Discovery
Protocol (CDP) enabled so that connections between devices display.

• Make sure all devices display under the Network Object tree. If they do not display, you should
run discovery or add the devices manually in the Discover Setup IP dialog box.

• Make sure you have the appropriate privilege (IP - Main Display - Ethernet Fabric, IP - Main
Display - IP, IP - Main Display - L2, IP - Main Display - MRP, or IP - Main Display - VLAN) for the
topology map you want to view. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges”
on page 1283.

Displaying topology views
To display a topology view, select the one of the following view types from the view list on the
Product List toolbar:

•
•
•
•

306

Network Objects — For more information, refer to “Network Objects view” on page 307.
IP Topology — For more information, refer to “IP Topology view” on page 309.
L2 Topology — For more information, refer to “L2 Topology view” on page 309.
Ethernet Fabrics — For more information, refer to “Ethernet Fabrics view” on page 310.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network Objects view

8

• VLAN Topology — For more information, refer to “VLAN Topology view” on page 310.
• Host Topology — For more information, refer to “Host Topology view” on page 313.

Network Objects view
The Network Objects view displays a list of discovered products in a table (Product List). This view
allows you to manage user authentications and permissions on discovered devices. In addition, you
can place devices into management groups, which are used for configuration, deployment,
accounting, monitoring, and reporting processes.
The following columns (presented here in alphabetical order) are included in the Product List:

• Build Label. Select to display the firmware build number.
• Contact. Select to display the name of the person or group you should contact about the
product. This field is editable at the fabric level.

• Description. Select to display the description of the product. This field is editable at the fabric
level.

•
•
•
•
•

Product Type. Select to display the type of product.
Firmware. Select to display the firmware version of the product.
Group/Product. Select to display discovered products, product groups, and port groups.
IP Address. Select to display the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.
Location. Select to display the physical location of the product. This field is editable at the
fabric level.

• Model. Select to display the model number of the product.
• Name. Select to display the name of the product. This field is editable at the fabric, device, and
port levels.

•
•
•
•
•

Port Count. Select to display the number of ports on the product.
Serial #. Select to display the serial number of the product.
Status. Select to display the status for the product and the port.
Vendor. Select to display the name of the product’s vendor.
User-defined property labels — Displays the user-defined property labels. You can create up to
three user-defined property labels.

Network Object view functions
• Sort — Click a column head to sort the list. Click a column head again to reverse the sort
orders.

• Node/Device double-click — Double-click a node (subnet) to display the devices beneath it.
Double-click a device to display the Properties dialog box for the selected device. For more
information, refer to “IP device properties” on page 1314.

• User-defined properties — User-defined properties display in the Product List. For more
information, refer to “Properties customization” on page 1329.

• Shortcut menus — Right-click a device in the Product List to view the menu. For a list of
shortcut menus, refer to “IP shortcut menus” on page 1268.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

307

8

Network Objects view

Filtering devices in the Network Objects Product List
To filter specific devices from the Network Objects Product List, complete the following steps.
1. Select Network Objects from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Click Filter.
The Product Filter dialog box displays. Only the categories or objects listed under the Selected
Categories list display on the Network Objects Product List. Available categories include:

•
•
•
•
•

Contact — Lists the contact name for the discovered products.
Firmware — Lists the firmware on the discovered products.
Location — Lists the location of the discovered products.
Model — Lists the models of the discovered products.
Product Type — Lists the types of discovered products.

3. Select the Enable filter check box.
4. Filter the Product List by product status by selecting one or more of the following check boxes:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Reachable
Degraded Link
Not Reachable
Unhealthy
Healthy
Marginal
Down

By default, all product status types are included. Clear the check mark from each status type
you do not want to include in the filter.
5. Add a category or object within the category to the filter by selecting the category or object in
the Available Categories list and clicking the right arrow button.
6. Remove a category or object from the filter by selecting the category or object in the Selected
Categories list and clicking the left arrow button.
7.

Click OK.
The updated Product List contains only the selected categories and objects. The Filter check
box displays with a check mark.

Clearing the Network Objects Product List filter
To clear the filter and display all discovered devices in the Network Objects Product List, clear the
Filter check box.
The updated Product List contains only all discovered devices as well as all product groups and
port groups.

308

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Topology view

8

IP Topology view
The IP Topology view displays a map of the devices on your network. To display the topology map
for IP, you must have the IP - Main Display - IP privilege. For more information about privileges, refer
to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
For more information about the components and customization of the topology map, refer to the
following sections:

• “IP topology map components” on page 315.
• “Topology map elements” on page 315.
• “Topology map layout” on page 317.
For more information about functions you can perform on the topology map, refer to “Topology Map
functions” on page 286.

L2 Topology view
The L2 Topology view displays a map of the Layer 2 traffic for devices on your network. The links on
the map show physical links between physical ports of devices. If devices have more than one
physical link between them, all physical links display on the topology map. To display the topology
map for Layer 2, you must have the IP - Main Display - L2 privilege. For more information about
privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The L2 Topology view Product List has two categories, System Groups and User-defined Groups.
System Groups has only All IP Products as a category, which contains all IP products in the system.
User-defined Groups contain all user-defined product groups with Topology Display enabled. Each
user-defined product group shows the products contained within that product group.
For more information about the components and customization of the topology map, refer to the
following sections:

• “IP topology map components” on page 315.
• “Topology map elements” on page 315.
• “Topology map layout” on page 317.
For more information about functions you can perform on the topology map, refer to “Topology Map
functions” on page 286.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

309

8

Ethernet Fabrics view

Ethernet Fabrics view
The Ethernet Fabrics view displays a map of the traffic for VCS devices on your network. To view the
fabric members and TRILL (Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links) connections for a fabric,
double-click the fabric in the Product List. To display the topology map for Ethernet Fabrics, you
must have the Main Display - Ethernet Fabric privilege. For more information about privileges, refer
to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The Ethernet Fabrics view Product List contains all the VCS fabrics known to the system. Within
each VCS fabric, nodes that are part of that VCS fabric display. You can only view one VCS fabric at
a time.
For more information about the components and customization of the topology map, refer to the
following sections:

• “IP topology map components” on page 315.
• “Topology map elements” on page 315.
• “Topology map layout” on page 317.
For more information about general functions you can perform on the topology map, refer to
“Topology Map functions” on page 286.

VLAN Topology view
The VLAN Topology view displays a map of the VLAN traffic for devices on your network. You can
also view primary, isolated, and community PVLAN in the VLAN Topology and Product List. You can
access the STP or RSTP Topology from this view. To display topologies for VLANs, you must have the
Main Display - VLAN privilege in your user role. For more information about privileges, refer to “User
Privileges” on page 1283.
The VLAN Product List contains all the port VLANs and PVLANs known to the system. Within each
VLAN, products that are a part of that VLAN display. You can select which VLAN topology you wish to
view. The default VLAN ID is the first entry in the VLAN Product List.
For more information about the components and customization of the topology map, refer to the
following sections:

•
•
•
•

“IP topology map components” on page 315.
“Topology map elements” on page 315.
“Viewing STP/RSTP topology” on page 311.
“Topology map layout” on page 317.

For more information about functions you can perform on the topology map, refer to “Topology Map
functions” on page 286.

STP/RSTP topology
You can display topology maps for STP or RSTP configurations from the VLAN Topology view. Before
you display the STP or RSTP topology, make sure you meet the following requirements:

• The devices are running FDP or LLDP.
If you do not enable FDP or LLDP on a product, the product displays without any links.

310

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN Topology view

8

• The snIfStpTable MIB table (OID.1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.3.5.2) is enabled on the device and has
either STP or RSTP configured. This MIB is not supported on third-party products.

Viewing STP/RSTP topology
To view this topology map, complete the following steps.
1. Select VLAN Topology from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Pause on the STP button. A tool tip appears, indicating whether STP is on or off.
2. If STP is off, click STP to turn it on.
3. Select a VLAN or PVLAN from the VLAN Product List.
All devices with STP mode on the selected VLAN display on the map, regardless of their
connectivity. STP-enabled devices display with a Bridge ID.
The STP Topology view supports both STP and RSTP; however, the map does not differentiate
between the two protocols. You can use the STP/RSTP report to determine which protocol is
enabled on a device. MSTP protocol is not supported.
When STP mode is active, dynamic updates is not active. Instead, a Refresh button displays on
the Topology Map toolbar, next to the STP button, to enable you to manually trigger an update.
Table 33 displays the elements of the STP Topology map.

TABLE 33

STP/RSTP Topology map elements

Element

Description

Device name
IP address
Bridge ID

Each device on the map displays its device name, IP address and bridge ID.

[Root]

The root bridge.
The bridges on the topology in normal operating state.

solid line
The port is in a forwarding state and has the root port role.
link with arrow head
The port is in a blocking state or discarding.
link with block
The port is in a disabled state.
link with diamond

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

311

8

VLAN Topology view

TABLE 33

STP/RSTP Topology map elements

Element

Description

# (U)
# (T)
# (D)

The port or interface number used to create the link and one of the
following:
• (U) — Untagged port
• (T) — Tagged port
• (D) — Dual-mode port

tool tips

Link tool tips — identifies the devices at each end of the link to help you
locate the devices on the map.
Node tool tips — identifies the device name, IP address, and bridge ID of the
node. If the node is a root bridge, [Root] appears in the tool tip.

Generating an STP/RSTP Report
If STP is enabled on the VLAN Topology, you can generate an STP/RSTP report for a device.
To generate an STP/RSTP report, complete the following steps.
1. Select VLAN Topology from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Mouse over the STP button. A tool tip appears, indicating whether STP is on or off.
2. If STP is off, click STP to turn it on.
3. Select a VLAN or PVLAN from the VLAN Product List.
4. Right-click a device on the topology map and select STP Report from the list.
The STP/RSTP Report displays. The report is divided into two areas. The top area shows STP
information that applies globally to the device. It indicates the STP Mode (802.1x for STP or
802.1w for RSTP) and the values of the global parameters. The second area displays STP or
RSTP configuration for each device port.

Exporting an STP/RSTP Report
To export an STP/RSTP report, complete the following steps.
1. Select VLAN Topology from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Mouse over the STP button. A tool tip appears, indicating whether STP is on or off.
2. If STP is off, click STP to turn it on.
3. Select a VLAN or PVLAN from the VLAN Product List.
4. Right-click a device on the topology map and select STP Report from the list.
The STP/RSTP Report displays.
5. Click Export.
The File Download dialog box displays.
6. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box displays.
7.

Browse to the location where you want to save the report.

8. Enter a name for the report in the File Name field.

312

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host Topology view

8

9. Click Save.

E-mailing an STP/RSTP Report
To export an STP/RSTP report, complete the following steps.
1. Select VLAN Topology from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Mouse over the STP button. A tool tip appears, indicating whether STP is on or off.
2. If STP is off, click STP to turn it on.
3. Select a VLAN or PVLAN from the VLAN Product List.
4. Right-click a device on the topology map and select STP Report from the list.
The STP/RSTP Report displays.
5. Click E-mail.
6. Enter one or more e-mail addresses in the E-mail Recipients or Other Recipients fields.
7.

Edit the Subject field, if necessary.

8. Enter a message in the Body text box.
9. Click Send.

Host Topology view
The Host Topology view displays a list of discovered hosts in a table (Product List). This view allows
you to manage user authentications and permissions on discovered devices.
The following columns (presented here in alphabetical order) are included in the Product List:

• Additional Port Info. Displays additional port information.
• All Levels. Displays all discovered fabrics, groups, devices, and ports as both text and icons.
Also, displays the status of the fabrics, groups, devices, and ports. For a list of icons that
display in the All Levels column, refer to the following tables:

•
•
•
•
•

“Host product icons” on page 291
“IP product icons” on page 290
“IP port icons” on page 292

Additional Port Info. Displays additional information about the port.
Attached Port #. Displays the number of the attached port.
BB Credit. Displays the BB Credit of the port.
Class. Displays the class value of the FICON device port.
Contact. Displays the name of the person or group you should contact about the product. This
field is editable at the fabric level.

• Description. Displays the description of the product. This field is editable at the fabric level.
• Domain ID. Displays the Domain ID for the product in the format xx(yy), where xx is the
normalized value and yy is the actual value on the wire.

• FC Address. Displays the Fibre Channel address of the port.
• Firmware. Displays the firmware version of the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

313

8

Host Topology view

•
•
•
•

IP Address. Displays the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Port #. Displays the number of the port.

Location. Displays the physical location of the product. This field is editable at the fabric level.
Model. Displays the model number of the product.
Name. Displays the name of the product. This field is editable at the fabric, device, and port
level.
Port Count. Displays the number of ports on the product.
Port Type. Displays the type of port (for example, expansion port, node port, or NL_port).
Product Type. Displays the type of product.
Protocol. Displays the protocol for the port.
Serial #. Displays the serial number of the product.
Speed Configured (Gbps). Displays the actual speed of the port in Gigabits per second.
State. Displays the state for the product and the port.
Status. Displays the status for the product and the port.
Symbolic Name. Displays the symbolic name for the port.
TAG. Displays the tag number of the product.
Vendor. Displays the name of the product’s vendor.
WWN. Displays the world wide name of the product or port.
Zone Alias. Displays the zone alias of the product or port.
User-defined property labels — Displays the user-defined property labels. You can create up to
three user-defined property labels.

For more information about the components and customization of the topology map, refer to the
following sections:

• “IP topology map components” on page 315.
• “Topology map elements” on page 315.
• “Topology map layout” on page 317.
For more information about functions you can perform on the topology map, refer to “Topology Map
functions” on page 286.

314

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

IP topology map components
Topology maps are divided into three sections:

• Product List — The top left pane displays a list of all devices (topology tree) in your AOR. Devices
display in topology groups. The Management application has a Search tool that you can use to
find a device quickly. (Refer to “Using the Search tool” on page 53 for more information.)
For more information about the Product List and functions you can perform on the Product List,
refer to “IP Product List” on page 284.

• Topology Map — The top right pane displays the devices using graphic elements (icons).
Automatically displays links between devices running FDP or LLDP on the topology maps.
For more information about the Topology Map and functions you can perform on the Topology
Map, refer to “Topology Map” on page 285.

• Minimap — The bottom right pane displays an overall view of the Topology Map. To jump to a
specific location on the Topology Map, click that area on the Minimap, and a close-up view of
the selected location displays on the Topology Map. For more information about the Minimap
and using the Minimap, refer to “Minimap” on page 288.

Topology map elements
Topology maps are comprised of nodes and connections. To display the topology legend, click the
Legend button on the main toolbar.
The Legend dialog box displays.

FIGURE 129 Legend dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

315

8

IP topology map components

Table 34 displays the elements included in the topology.

TABLE 34
Icon

Legend components
Description

Icon

Description

Products
Third-Party

FC+IP Fixed Configuration

Fixed Configuration

FC+IP Chassis

Stackable

Wireless Controller

Chassis

Wireless AP

Ethernet Fabric

HyperEdge

Unknown

Not Reachable

Degraded Link

Marginal

Down

Unhealthy

IP Subnet

Layer 2 Clouds

Normal Connection

Trunk

Status

Logical

Connections

Missing

The following list describes the basic elements included in a topology map.

• IP devices — This node displays as a blue box. To view all IP product icons, refer to “IP product
icons” on page 290. Double-click a product icon to display the Properties dialog box. For more
information, refer to “IP device properties” on page 1314.

• Third-party devices — This node displays as a gray box.
• Subnets — This node displays as a blue circle. Double-click a subnet to display the devices
within the subnet.

316

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

• Layer 2 Clouds — This node displays as a blue cloud. When two or more devices with FDP or
LLDP enabled connect to a device or network without FDP or LLDP capability, the L2 cloud icon
is displayed to represent the connection between the device types. This icon means that
IronWare OS or Network OS devices are not directly connected to each other and each
IronWare OS or Network OS device does not have Layer 2 information from other devices.

• Interface connections — The connections between nodes (devices, IP Subnets, or Layer 2
clouds) display as a gray line. The numbers on the line show the ports or virtual routing
interfaces that form the connection.

• Missing interface connections — A dashed line indicates a missing connection.
• Trunks — Each trunk (MCT or ICL) displays as a straight line with circles at each end.

Viewing flyovers on the topology map
The Management application allows you to enable flyover display on Topology Maps. To enable
flyover display, refer to “Turning flyovers on or off” on page 142.

• Device node — Mouse over to view the display name, IP address, and status of the device.
• Connections — Flyover display varies depending on the type of connection.
- Interface connection — Mouse over to display IP address and port number for each end of
the connection.

-

Trunk connection — Mouse over to display the truck group identifier and the IP address,
port number, and type of trunk (MCT or ICL) for each end of the connection.

-

Layer 2 Cloud connections — Mouse over to display IP address for each end of the
connection.

Topology map layout
The Management application provides several layouts for the IP Topology, Ethernet Fabrics, L2
Topology, and VLAN Topology views, so that you can determine which one provides the best display
of your network topology. When selecting a layout, keep the following in mind:

• When you first open a Topology view, the Topology Map uses the layout option specified in the
Topology Display dialog box. In a typical topology, the default layout for all topology views is
Organic. For IP Topology, the default layout is Circular. For VLAN topologies, the default layout is
Orthogonal (Merge Lines).

• The position of nodes on the next layout type depends on their position in the previously
displayed layout. You may see a better display if you choose the Circular layout first, then
choose the next layout you want to try.

• As you move from one layout to another the Management application animates the process of
redrawing the map.
When a topology map update is in progress, you can interact with client. The layout
management is a background thread. The amount of computing resource required to draw a
new layout depends on the number of nodes and connections on the network. If the layout
execution duration exceeds a minimum threshold, a progress bar displays. The minimum
threshold duration is 1 second.

• During a session, as you enter and exit any of the topology views, the last layout used is the
one displayed when you return to that topology view. However, the layouts are reset to the
default layouts when you logout of the Management application.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

317

8

IP topology map components

The following examples show the differences between the layouts. They may or may not match the
map drawn for your network. Also, some of the examples may look alike; however, the layouts may
look different on networks with more devices.

Organic
The Organic layout distributes the nodes evenly, makes connection lengths uniform, minimizes
crisscrossing of connections, and tries to prevent nodes from touching each other. This layout is
best for the visualization of highly connected backbone regions with attached peripheral ring or
star structures.

Orthogonal
The Orthogonal layout displays the nodes compactly with no overlaps, minimizes crisscrossing of
connections, and tries to prevent nodes from touching each other. This layout is best for
medium-sized sparse graphs since it produces clear representations of complex networks.

318

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

Orthogonal (Merge Lines)
The Orthogonal (Merge Lines) layout displays the nodes in a concise tree-like structure using
vertical and horizontal line segments.

Hierarchical
The Hierarchical layout is best for a complex map. This layout might have a start point and end
point, with some overall flow between those points.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

319

8

IP topology map components

Circular
The Circular layout distributes all nodes in a circle, with equal spacing between each neighbor
node.

Free Form
This layout is the one you customize by repositioning the nodes on the map.

Selecting a topology map layout
To change the topology layout, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•

L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
IP Topology
VLAN Topology

2. Click the Topology Display icon on the Topology Map toolbar.
The Topology Display dialog box displays.

320

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

FIGURE 130 Topology Display dialog box
3. Select one of the following topology layouts in the Layout area.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Organic
Orthogonal
Orthogonal (Merge Lines)
Hierarchical
Circular
Free Form

4. Click Recompute Layout Now.
The Management application redraws the Topology Map.
5. Click OK on the Topology Display dialog box.

Creating a customized layout
You can create one customized layout for each group node in each topology view.
To customize the layout for a topology map, complete the following steps.
1. Select the view you want to customize from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•

IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
VLAN Topology

2. Click a node and drag it to a new position on the map.
The application automatically changes the layout to Free Form. To move one or more nodes at
the same time, complete the following steps:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

321

8

IP topology map components

a.

Use Ctrl + click to select one or more nodes or click in an empty part of the topology and
drag a box around the nodes you want to move.

b.

Select one of the highlighted nodes and drag the selected nodes to a new position on the
map.

3. Repeat step 2 until you have repositioned all nodes.
Navigation to another view topology or tab or exiting the application automatically saves your
changes. If you change the topology map layout (refer to “Selecting a topology map layout” on
page 320) and want to return to this customized layout, complete the following steps.
a.

Click the Topology Display icon on the Topology Map toolbar.
The Topology Display dialog box displays.

b.

Select Free Form in the Layout area.

c.

Click OK on the Topology Display dialog box.

Creating customized topology links
The Management application enable you to create network topology links manually using the
topology_data.txt file located in the Install_Home\conf\discovery\ip directory. You only need to add
the link in one direction between two devices. Once you add the link, L2 neighbor collection uses
the topology_data.txt file, in addition to links detected using FDP and LLDP, to construct links for
each device. You add multiple entries for a single device as needed.
Changes to the topology_data.txt file do not require a management server restart, the changes
display during the next L2 neighbor collection for the devices.
The data file uses the following format:

• The hash character (#) at the beginning of a line indicates a comment and is not parsed during
L2 neighbor collection.

•
•
•
•

Specify each link on a separate line.
Each link consists of two columns separated by white space.
Each column consists of an IP address, then a vertical bar (|), then the interface name.
The interface name must use the exact format returned by the ifName MIB variable for that
device.The interface name can be found in the Interface Name column of the Detailed Product
Report, Physical Ports section.

• If the ifName value contains a space in the name, then the interface name should be within
double quotes.
Examples
143.140.1.222|ethernet8/12 192.1.7.182|ethernet49
10.24.84.1|"ExT 0/15" 10.24.84.4|"ExT 0/16"
143.140.1.222|"ethernet 8/12" 192.1.7.182|"ethernet 49"
143.140.1.222|"ethernet 8/12" 192.1.7.182|ethernet49

To create a customized topology link, complete the following steps.
1. Open the topology_data.txt (located in Install_Home\conf\discovery\ip) file in a text editor.
2. Add the link using the following format:

322

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

Device_One_IP_Address|Interface_Name Device_Two_IP_Address|Interface_Name where
Device_One_IP_Address is the IP address for the device at one end of the link,
Interface_Name the is the exact format returned by the ifName MIB variable for the device,
and Device_Two_IP_Address is the IP address for the device at the other end of the link.
3. Save and close the topology_data.txt file.
The customized topology links display during the next L2 neighbor collection for the devices.

Customizing the Topology Map
To customize the Topology Map, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Topology Display icon on the Topology Map toolbar.
The Topology Display dialog box displays.

FIGURE 131 Topology Display dialog box
2. Change the background color by selecting a color from the Color list.
a.

To select a color not included in the Color list, select More Colors from the Color list.
The Choose a Color dialog box displays.

b.

Choose one of the following options to select the color you want:

• To pick a color from a swatch, select the Swatches tab. Select a color from the display.
• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and value, click the HSV tab. Specify the
hue (0 to 359 degrees), saturation (0 to 100%), value (0 to 100%), and transparency
(0 to 100%).

• To specify a color based on hue, saturation, and lightness, click the HSL tab. Specify
the hue (0 to 360 degrees), saturation (0 to 100%), lightness (0 to 100%), and
transparency (0 to 100%).

• To specify a color based on values of red, green, and blue, click the RGB tab. Specify
the values for red, green, blue, and alpha (0 to 255) or enter a color code in the Color
Code field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

323

8

IP topology map components

• To specify a color based on values of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, click the CMYK
tab. Specify the values for cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and alpha (0 to 255).
c.

Click OK on the Choose a Color dialog box.

3. Add an image to the background by selecting an image from the Image list.
To import an image, refer to “Adding a background image to a map” on page 324.
4. Set the background image mode by selecting one of the following from the Mode list:

• Dynamic — Select when the background image is considered to be part of the displayed
contents and not a decoration. In this mode, an object on a specific point of the image,
stays on that specific point during zooming or scrolling on the topology. In this mode, the
application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the bounds of the
background image.

• Fullscreen — Select to display the upper left corner of the background image in the upper
left corner of the topology and scale the background image to the size of the topology. In
this mode, the background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect). If you resize the
topology, the background image scales accordingly.

• Tiled — Select to display the background image as tiles on the topology. In this mode, the
background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect).

• Bricked — Select to display the background image as bricks on the topology. In this mode,
the background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect).

• Centered — Select to display the background image centered in the topology. In this mode,
the application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the bounds of
the background image. In this mode, the background is static (zooming or scrolling have
no effect).

• Plain — Select to display the background image at a specific origin on the topology. In this
mode, the application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the
bounds of the background image. In this mode, the background is static (zooming or
scrolling have no effect).
5. Click OK on the Topology Display dialog box.

Adding a background image to a map
Make sure you have the background image on your hard drive. You can use any image type
(supported by Java), including GIF, JPG, JPEG, or PNG file format.

NOTE

The image file name cannot be longer than 64 characters.
You can add a background image to each topology sub type. For example VLAN 5 and VLAN 14 can
have different background images.
To add a background image to a Topology Map, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Topology Display icon on the Topology Map toolbar.
The Topology Display dialog box displays with the name of the current background image in the
Image list. The Image lists includes all imported background images.
2. Click Import.
The Open dialog box displays.

324

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP topology map components

8

3. Browse to the map image.
4. Click Open.
The imported image displays in the Image list.
5. Set the background image mode by selecting one of the following from the Mode list:

• Dynamic — Select when the background image is considered to be part of the displayed
contents and not a decoration. In this mode, an object on a specific point of the image,
stays on that specific point during zooming or scrolling on the topology. In this mode, the
application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the bounds of the
background image.

• Fullscreen — Select to display the upper left corner of the background image in the upper
left corner of the topology and scale the background image to the size of the topology. In
this mode, the background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect). If you resize the
topology, the background image scales accordingly.

• Tiled — Select to display the background image as tiles on the topology. In this mode, the
background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect).

• Bricked — Select to display the background image as bricks on the topology. In this mode,
the background is static (zooming or scrolling have no effect).

• Centered — Select to display the background image centered in the topology. In this mode,
the application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the bounds of
the background image. In this mode, the background is static (zooming or scrolling have
no effect).

• Plain — Select to display the background image at a specific origin on the topology. In this
mode, the application uses the background color to draw visible regions outside the
bounds of the background image. In this mode, the background is static (zooming or
scrolling have no effect).
6. Click OK on the Topology Display dialog box.
The image displays in the background of the Topology Map.

Deleting a background image from the library
You can only delete images not in use in any topology or by any user. To delete a background image
to a Topology Map, complete the following steps.
1. Click Map on the Topology Map tool bar.
The Topology Background Map dialog box displays.
2. Select the image you want to delete in the Image Library list and click Delete.
3. Click OK on the Topology Background Map dialog box.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Exporting the topology
To export a Topology Map as an image file, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Export icon on the Topology Map tool bar.
The Export dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

325

8

IP topology map components

2. Browse to the location where you want to save the map image.
3. Enter a name for the map in the File Name field.
4. Select the export file type in the File of Type list.
Options include: PNG, GIF, JPG, BMP, PDF, and EMF.
5. Click Save.

Printing a map
To print a Topology Map, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Print icon on the Topology Map tool bar.
The Print dialog box displays.
2. To configure the page setup, click Page on the Print dialog box.
The Page Setup dialog box displays.
a.

Select the page size from the Size list.

b.

Select the source from the Source list.

c.

Select Portrait or Landscape from the Orientation area.

d.

Enter the top, bottom, left and right margins in the Margins area.

e.

Click OK on the Page Setup dialog box.

3. To zoom in and out, click Zoom In or Zoom Out.
4. To set a specific zoom, select an option from the list.
Options include: Fit, Fit Width, 10%, 25%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%, 200%, 300%, or
400%.
5. To set additional options (such as poster print, headers, and footers), click Options.
The Print Options dialog box displays.

326

a.

Click the General tab.

b.

Enter the number of rows in the Poster Rows field.

c.

Enter the number of columns in the Poster Columns field.

d.

Enter the number of columns in the Poster Columns field.

e.

To add poster coordinates, select the Add Poster Coords check box.

f.

Click the Title tab.

g.

Enter a title in the Text field.

h.

Select a color for the title bar from the Titlebar Color list.

i.

Select a color for the title from the Text Color list.

j.

Enter a title in the Text area.

k.

Enter the font size in the Font size field.

l.

Click the Footer tab.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port actions

8

m. Enter a footer in the Text field.
n.

Select a color for the footer from the Footer Color list.

o.

Select a color for the title from the Text Color list.

p.

Enter a title in the Text area.

q.

Enter the font size in the Font size field.

r.

Click OK on the Print Options dialog box.

6. Click Print.
The Print dialog box displays.
7.

Select a printer from the Name list.

8. Click OK on the Print dialog box.
9. Click the close (X) button on the Print dialog box.

Port actions
The Management application allows to you enable and disable port actions, display the port
properties of the Network OS device to which the FCoE WWN is attached, as well as access
performance monitoring from the Port tab of the Properties dialog box.

Enabling port actions
To enable port actions, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Object
IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
VLAN Topology

2. Right-click the device in the Product List and select Properties.
The Device_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port tab.
4. Select Enable from the Port Actions list.

NOTE

If the VDX FC Port is enabled through the Properties dialog box, the Port Status displays as
"No_Light”. To obtain the updated value, re-open the Properties dialog box after the next
collection cycle.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

327

8

Port actions

Disabling port actions
To disable port actions, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Object
IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
VLAN Topology

2. Right-click the device in the Product List and select Properties.
The Device_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port tab.
4. Select Disable from the Port Actions list.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Displaying port properties for an attached device
The Display Attached Port Properties option is only applicable for routed-in devices. The device
must be managed by the Management application and part of your AOR.
To display the port properties of the Network OS device to which the FCoE WWN is attached,
complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Object
IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
VLAN Topology

2. Right-click the device in the Product List and select Properties.
The Device_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port tab.
4. Select a port with one or more world wide names (WWN) displaying in the Connected Devices
field.
5. Select Display Attached Port Properties from the Port Actions list.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The VCS_Name Properties dialog box displays with the attached ports highlighted in the Ports
tab.

328

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port actions

8

Accessing performance monitoring
To access performance monitoring dialog boxes, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Object
IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics
VLAN Topology

2. Right-click the device in the Product List and select Properties.
The Device_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port tab.
4. Select one of the following from the Performance list.

• Real Time Graph/Table
• Historical Graph/Table
The Real Time Graph/Table or Historical Graph/Table dialog box displays.
To configure and generate real time performance, refer to “IP real-time performance
monitoring” on page 983.
To configure and generate historical performance, refer to “IP historical performance
monitoring” on page 995.
5. Click OK to close the Device_Name Properties dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

329

8

330

Port actions

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

9

MRP Topology

In this chapter
• MRP Topology overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing a MRP Topology map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing a MRP ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring the application to show a dashed line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Selecting a topology map layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Creating a customized layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Customizing the MRP Topology map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Refreshing MRP Topology data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing MRP properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

331
332
333
335
335
338
339
340
340

MRP Topology overview
The Metro Ring Protocol (MRP) is a IronWare proprietary protocol used to prevent Layer 2 loops and
to provide fast reconvergence in a Layer 2 ring topology. The MRP Topology view displays a map of
the MRP rings on your network. To display the topology map for MRP, you must have the IP - Main
Display – MRP privilege in your user role and the MRP device must be in your area of responsibility
(AOR).
Before you display the MRP topology, make sure you meet the following requirements on your
devices:

• The device is MRP-enabled.
• The devices are running FDP or LLDP.
If you do not enable FDP or LLDP on a product, the product displays without any links.

• The snMetroRingTable MIB table (OID.1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.1.3.29.2.1) is enabled on the device
and has MRP configured. This MIB is not supported on third-party products.
MRP Topology view is available for the following devices:

-

FastIron Edge Switch running FES software release 04.0.00 and later.
FastIron X Series devices running FSX software release 04.0.00 and later.
FastIron CX switches running FCX software release 04.0.00 and later.
FastIron GS, FastIron LS, and FastIron WS running FGS software release 04.0.00 and later.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

331

9

Viewing a MRP Topology map

You can use the CLI Configuration Manager to deploy MRP configurations to devices. You can also
configure MRP using the device CLI. You can use the Element Manager to access the device or go
directly to the device CLI. You must enable the MRP trap on the devices so that the Management
application can monitor MRP ring status. For more information about MRP rings and configuration
instructions, refer to your hardware’s configuration guide.

Viewing a MRP Topology map
The MRP Topology view does not support dynamic updates. You must manually refresh the view
For more information, refer to “Refreshing MRP Topology data” on page 340.
To view a MRP Topology map, select Monitor > MRP Topology.
The MRP Topology dialog box displays.

FIGURE 132 MRP Topology dialog box
The MRP Topology map is divided into two sections:

• Product List — The top left pane displays a list of all MRP rings (topology tree) discovered in the
network that are in your AOR. Each ring is identified by its ring number. Double-click a ringin the
Product List to display the devices in the MRP ring. The Management application has a Search
tool that you can use to find a device quickly. (Refer to “Using the Search tool” on page 53 for
more information.)
When you select a ring in the Product List, the application displays the ring in the Topology
Map. When you select a device in the Product List, the application highlights the device on the
Topology Map as well.

• Topology Map — The right pane displays the devices in a MRP ring using graphic elements
(icons). Links between devices running FDP or LLDP display automatically on the topology
maps.

332

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing a MRP ring

9

When you select a device on the Topology Map, the application highlights the device in the
Product List.

Viewing a MRP ring
To view a MRP ring, click a ring in the Product List.
The selected ring displays in the Topology Map.

FIGURE 133 MRP Topology dialog box
MRP Topology maps are comprised of nodes (rings) and connections (devices). Table 35 displays
the basic elements included in a MRP topology map.

TABLE 35

MRP Topology map elements

Element

Description

Device icon

Each device on the map displays its device name and IP address.

[MASTER]

Denotes the master device.
The nodes on the ring are connected and in normal operating state.

solid line
---------------broken line

The two end points of an MRP link are disabled. To show a broken line on the
topology, refer to “Configuring the application to show a dashed line” on
page 335
The port is in a pre-forwarding or forwarding state and shows the direction of
the packet flow.

link with arrow head

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

333

9

Viewing a MRP ring

TABLE 35

MRP Topology map elements

Element

Description
The port is in a blocking state or discarding.

link with block
MRP is disabled on the port.
link with solid black circle
# or # / #

The forwarding or receiving port number of slot/port number. To make the
forwarding and receiving port number data visible on the map, you must
enable Link Information Visibility (default is disabled) on the MRP Topology
Options dialog box. For instructions, refer to “Customizing the MRP Topology
map” on page 339.

tool tips

Link tool tips — identifies the devices at each end of the link to help you locate
the devices on the map.
Node tool tips — identifies the device name and IP address of the node.

The Management application obtains MRP status by monitoring the MRP traps that devices send.
These traps are reported in the Master Log. Make sure MRP traps are enabled on the devices that
are members of an MRP ring. For the MRP Status to display correctly, you must discover a proper
ring through the Management application. If the link (edge) or a device (Vertex) is missing, the
status does not display correctly; however, the feature may work.
MRP ring status is defined by specific rules and represented by one of the following icons:

TABLE 36
Icon

Description
MRP ring is in normal operation.

Normal

Error

Both ports on a MRP-enabled device are disabled.
No Master node on the MRP ring.
Two or more Master nodes exist on the MRP ring.
The Master node is in Forwarding or Forwarding state and none of the devices on the MRP ring
are in an Error state.

Warning
The Topology toolbar is located at the top of the Topology Map and provides icons and buttons to
perform various functions.

• Layout type list. Use to select the layout (Organic, Fast Organic, Hierarchical, Self Organizing,
Circular, or Saved) of the Topology Map. For more information about layout types, refer to
“Topology map layout” on page 317.

• Layout button. Use to set the layout selected from the Layout type list. For more information
about layout types, refer to “Selecting a topology map layout” on page 335.

• Save button. Use to save changes to the MRP Topology map. For more information about layout
types, refer to “Creating a customized layout” on page 338.

• Map button. Use to add a background image to the Topology Map. For more information about
adding a background image, refer to “Adding a background image to a map” on page 324.

334

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring the application to show a dashed line

•
•
•
•
•
•

9

Options button. Use to configure topology options.
Fit Window icon. Use to scale the map to fit within the Topology Map area.
Actual Size icon. Use to scale the map to fit within the Topology Map area.
Zoom In icon. Use to zoom in on the Topology Map.
Zoom Out icon. Use to zoom out on the Topology Map.
Export icon. Use to export the topology to a PNG file. For export instructions, refer to “Exporting
the topology” on page 325.

• Print icon. Use to print the current Topology Map image. For print instructions, refer to “Printing
a map” on page 326.

Configuring the application to show a dashed line
To configure the application to show a dashed line when links are broken, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2. Click the Global Settings tab.
3. Click the Preferences tab.
4. Select the Retain lost links __ hours (1 minimum) option to configure how long to retain lost
links on the topology maps and enter a value (from 1 through 9999) in the field.
The default is 168 hours.
5. Click Apply to save your work.
6. Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.

Selecting a topology map layout
To change the topology layout, select one of the following topology layouts from the layout type list
on the Topology Map toolbar.

• Fast Organic
The Fast Organic layout is a variation on the Organic layout; however, connections are drawn
closer to the nodes. The time it takes to draw the Fast Organic layout is proportional to the
number of nodes squared. Generally, this layout is best for smaller networks.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

335

9

Selecting a topology map layout

• Organic
The Organic layout distributes the nodes evenly, makes connection lengths uniform, minimizes
criss-crossing of connections, and tries to prevent nodes from touching each other.

• Hierarchical
The Hierarchical layout is best for a complex map. This layout might have a start point and end
point, with some overall flow between those points.

336

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Selecting a topology map layout

9

• Self Organizing
The Self Organizing layout distributes nodes and connections evenly on the display area in a
linear layout.

• Circular
The Circular layout distributes all nodes in a circle, with equal spacing between each neighbor
node.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

337

9

Creating a customized layout

• Saved
This layout is the one you customized by repositioning the nodes on the map. If you have not
customized the layout, this Saved option is disabled. Also, if you select the Saved Layout
Preferred check box on the Topology Options dialog box, this layout takes precedence over the
default layout.
The Management application redraws the MRP Topology map. For more information about
layout types, refer to “Topology map layout” on page 317.

Creating a customized layout
You can create one customized layout for each Ring node in each topology view.
To customize the layout for a topology map, complete the following steps.
1. Select the topology layout you want to customize from the layout type list on the Topology Map
toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Fast Organic
Organic
Hierarchical
Self Organizing
Circular

2. Click a node and drag it to a new position on the map.

338

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Customizing the MRP Topology map

9

3. Repeat step 2 until you have repositioned all nodes.
4. Click Save on the MRP Topology map toolbar to retain the changes you made.

Customizing the MRP Topology map
To customize the MRP Topology map, complete the following steps.
1. Click Options on the MRP Topology map tool bar.
The MRP Topology Options dialog box displays.

FIGURE 134 Topology Options dialog box
2. Change the background color by completing the following steps:
a.

Click the ellipsis button in the Background Color row.

b.

Select the color you want.

c.

Click OK.

3. Click the Grid Size row and select the size you want (5, 10, 15, or 20) from the list.
4. Select the Grid Visibility check box to make the grid visible in the topology map.
Clear the check box to not display a grid.
5. Select the Link Information Visibility check box to make the forwarding and receiving port
number data visible in the topology map.
6. Change the starting point of a MRP Topology Map by completing the following steps:
By default, the first entry on the Product List is the starting point of a view. For example, if
Ring 2 is the first ring on the Product List, then Ring 2 displays when you open the
MRP Topology map.
a.

Click the Starting Point row.

b.

Enter the ring ID, for example, Ring 1.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

339

9

Refreshing MRP Topology data

7.

Click the Layout row and select the layout you want from the list.

8. Select the Saved Layout Preferred check box to set the customized layout as the default for the
topology group.
This parameter supersedes the Layout parameter. If you select this parameter, the Saved
layout displays even if a different layout is indicated in the Layout parameter.
9. Click Close on the MRP Topology Options dialog box.

Refreshing MRP Topology data
To refresh the MRP Topology data, click Refresh.
The MRP topology data syncs up with the data in the Management application server (not the
switch). If you make MRP changes on the switch using the CLI, the Management application server
uses the received traps to sync up the data. When the Management application receives traps,
data collection for that specific object begins and once collection is complete the Management
application server database is updated with the data. Note that data collection usually takes 2-3
minutes to finish depending on the network connectivity. However, data collection may take longer
when network connectivity is slow or the switch is far away.
You can verify received traps through the Master Log. If no traps are received, data collection is
triggered by the next lazy poll cycle. The lazy poll cycle is based on the configured network size
(small = every 5 minutes; medium = every 15 minutes). The Management application server polls
data collection from the switch and then updates the database.

Viewing MRP properties
To view MRP properties for a device, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device on the topology map and select MRP Properties.
The MRP Properties dialog box displays.
2. Review the MRP property details:

• Hello Time — The interval, in milliseconds, at which the Forwarding port on the ring’s
master node sends Ring Hello Packets (RHPs).

• Last Updated Time — The date and time of the last update.
• Pre-forwarding Time — The number of milliseconds an MRP interface that has entered the
pre-forwarding state will wait before changing to the Forwarding state.

• Primary Port — The primary port of the device.
• Primary Port Active — The port number sending RHPs.
• Primary Port State — The state (Pre-forwarding, Forwarding, Blocking, or Disabled) of the
primary port.

•
•
•
•

340

Primary Port Type — The primary port type (Regular or Tunnel).
RHP Received — The number of RHPs received on the interface.
RHPs Transmitted — The number of RHPs sent on the interface.
Ring ID — The ring identifier.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing MRP properties

•
•
•
•
•

Ring Name — The MRP ring name.

•
•
•
•

Secondary Port Type — The secondary port type (Regular or Tunnel).

9

Role — The role (Master or Member) of the device.
Secondary Port — The secondary port of the device.
Secondary Port Active — The port number receiving RHPs.
Secondary Port State — The state (Pre-forwarding, Forwarding, Blocking, or Disabled) of
the secondary port.
State — Whether MRP is enabled or disabled on the device.
State Changed — The number of MRP interface state changes that have occurred.
TC RHPs Received — The number of Topology Change RHPs received on the interface. A
Topology Change RHP indicates that the ring topology has changed.

• VLAN ID — The VLAN ID or master VLAN ID in the topology group used by the ring.
3. Click Close on the MRP Properties dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

341

9

342

Viewing MRP properties

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

10

Call Home

In this chapter
• Call Home overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing Call Home configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Showing a Call Home center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Hiding a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling supportSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Testing the Call Home center connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Disabling a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing Call Home status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Assigning a device to the Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing a device from a Call Home center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing all devices and filters from a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Defining an event filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Assigning an event filter to a Call Home center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Assigning an event filter to a device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Overwriting an assigned event filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing all event filter from a Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing an event filter from a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing an event filter from the Call Home Event Filters list . . . . . . . . .
• Searching for an assigned event filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

344
345
348
348
349
356
356
357
357
358
359
359
359
360
361
361
362
362
363
363
363

343

10

Call Home overview

Call Home overview
NOTE

Call Home is supported on Windows systems for all modem and e-mail Call Home centers and is
supported on UNIX for the e-mail Call Home centers.
Call Home notification allows you to configure the Management application server to automatically
send an e-mail alert or dial in to a support center to report system problems on specified devices
(Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS switches, routers, and directors). If you are upgrading from a
previous release, all of your Call Home settings are preserved.
Call Home supports multiple Call Home centers which allows you to configure different devices to
contact different Call Home centers. When you make any Call Home configuration changes or a Call
Home event trigger occurs, the Management application generates an entry to the Master Log.
You can configure Call Home for the following Call Home centers:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Brocade E-mail (Windows and UNIX)
EMC (Windows only)
HP LAN (Windows only)
IBM (Windows only)
IBM E-mail (Windows and UNIX)
NetApp E-mail (Windows and UNIX)
Oracle E-mail (Windows and UNIX)

When configuring modem and HP LAN Call Home centers, you must enter the customer contact
information in the device’s Element Manager. You may also need to configure the Management
application server IP address manually as an SNMP trap recipient for Fabric OS, IronWare, and
Network OS devices.
Call Home allows you to automate tasks that occur when the Call Home event trigger is fired. When
a Call Home event trigger occurs, the Management application generates the following actions:

• Sends an e-mail alert to a specified recipient or dials in to a support center.
• Triggers supportSave on the switch (if supportSave is enabled on the switch) prior to sending
an alert. The supportSave location is included in the alert.

NOTE

The HP LAN Call Home alert displays the directory separation characters with a double
backslash (\\) instead of a single backslash (\).

• Adds an entry to the Master Log file and screen display.
• Generates an XML report (only available with EMC Call Home centers) with the product details,
which is sent with the e-mail alert.

• Generates an HTML report for e-mail-based Call Home centers.
For more information about Call Home events, refer to “Call Home Event Tables” on page 1275. For
more information about events, refer to “Fault Management” on page 1141.

344

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing Call Home configurations

10

Call Home allows you to perform the following tasks:

• Assign devices to and remove devices from the Call Home centers.
• Define filters from the list of events generated by Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS
devices.

• Edit and remove filters available in the Call Home Event Filters table.
• Apply filters to and remove filters from the devices individually or in groups.
• Edit individual Call Home center parameters to dial a specified phone number or e-mail a
specific recipient.

• Enable and disable individual devices from contacting the assigned Call Home centers.
• Show or hide Call Home centers on the display.
• Enable and disable Call Home centers.

System requirements
Call Home (except for e-mail and HP LAN) requires the following hardware equipment:

• Any Windows server with an internal or external modem connection
• Analog phone line

Viewing Call Home configurations
To view Call Home center configurations, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays (Figure 135).

FIGURE 135 Call Home dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

345

10

Viewing Call Home configurations

The Call Home dialog box contains the following fields and components:

• Products List — Displays all discovered products. The list allows for multiple selections and
manual sorting of columns. This list displays the following information:








Product Icon — The status of the products’ manageability.
Name — The name of the product.
IP Address — The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.
Node WWN — The node world wide name of the product.
Fabric Name — The name of the VCS.
Vendor — The vendor ID of the product.
Call Home Status — One of the following Call Home statuses for the product.
Enabled — The product is manageable and Call Home is enabled.
Disabled — The product is manageable and Call Home is disabled.
Not Manageable — The product is discovered but not manageable.
Server Not Registered — The server is not registered to receive Call Home events
from the product.

NOTE

Call Home status only displays for Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS products.

Domain/RBridge ID — The domain or RBridge ID of the product.
Product Type — The type of product (switch, Layer 2 switch, router, or director).
Right arrow buttons (top) — Click to assign the selected product to the selected Call Home
center (refer to “Assigning a device to the Call Home center” on page 359). Disabled when
no product is selected in the Products List or when more than one Call Home center is
selected in the Call Home Centers list.



•

• Left arrow button (top) — Click to remove the selected product from the selected Call Home
center (refer to “Removing a device from a Call Home center” on page 359). Disabled
when no product or Call Home center is selected in the Call Home Centers list.

• Call Home Event Filters list — Displays all Call Home event filters. This list displays the
following information:
Filter Name — The name of the event filter.
Description — The description of the event filter.
Add button — Click to open the Call Home Event Filter dialog box and add an event filter
(refer to “Defining an event filter” on page 360).



•

• Edit button — Click to open the Call Home Event Filter dialog box and edit an event filter
(refer to “Defining an event filter” on page 360).

• Remove button — Click to remove the event filter (refer to “Removing an event filter from
the Call Home Event Filters list” on page 363) from the Call Home Event Filters list.

• Find button (>) — Click to find all instances of the selected event filter in the Call Home
Centers list.

• Right arrow button (bottom) — Click to assign the selected event filter (refer to “Assigning
an event filter to a Call Home center” on page 361 or “Assigning an event filter to a device”
on page 361) to the selected Call Home center or product. Disabled when no event filter is
selected in the Call Home Event Filters list.

346

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing Call Home configurations

10

• Left arrow button (bottom) — Click to remove the selected event filter (refer to “Removing
all event filter from a Call Home center” on page 362 or “Removing an event filter from a
device” on page 363) from the selected Call Home center or product. Disabled when no
event filter, product, or Call Home center is selected in the Call Home Centers list.

• Call Home Centers list — The Call Home centers, products assigned to the Call Home
centers, and event filters assigned to the Call Home centers and products. This list
displays the following information:












Centers — A tree with Call Home centers as the parent node, assigned products as
subnodes, and event filters as the child node to the assigned products.
Enabled check box — Select the check box to enable the associated Call Home center
or clear the check mark to disable the Call Home center. By default, all check boxes
are selected during a fresh install.
Support Save check box — Select the check box to enable supportSave, which collects
diagnostic information on Fabric OS switches.
IP Address — The IP address of the product.
Node WWN — The node WWN of the product.
Fabric Name — The name of the VCS.
Vendor — The vendor of the product.
Call Home Status — One of the following Call Home statuses for the product:
Enabled — The product is manageable and Call Home is enabled.
Disabled — The product is manageable and Call Home is disabled.
Not Manageable — The product is discovered but not manageable.
Server Not Registered — The server is not registered to receive Call Home events
from the product.

NOTE

Call Home status only displays for Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS products.

Domain/RBridge ID — The domainor RBridge ID of the product.
Product Type — The type of product (switch, Layer 2 switch, router, or director).
Edit Centers button — Select a call home center in the Centers list anc click Edit to open
the Configure Call Home Center dialog box and modify Call Home center information (refer
to “Editing a Call Home center” on page 349).



•

• Show/Hide Centers button — Click to open the Centers dialog box and add or delete a Call
Home center (refer to “Showing a Call Home center” on page 348 or “Hiding a Call Home
center” on page 348).
2. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

347

10

Showing a Call Home center

Showing a Call Home center
To show a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Click Show/Hide Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Centers dialog box displays with a predefined list of Call Home centers (Figure 136).

FIGURE 136 Centers dialog box
3. Select the check boxes of the Call Home centers you want to display.
Clear the check box to hide the Call Home center.
4. Click OK on the Centers dialog box.
The Call Home dialog box displays with the selected Call Home centers listed in the Call Home
Centers list.

Hiding a Call Home center
NOTE

Before you can hide a Call Home center, you must remove all assigned products.
To hide a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Click Show/Hide Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Centers dialog box displays with a predefined list of Call Home centers.
3. Clear the check boxes of the Call Home centers you want to hide and click OK.
The Call Home dialog box displays with only the selected Call Home centers listed in the Call
Home Centers list.

348

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a Call Home center

10

Editing a Call Home center
To edit a Call Home center, select from the following procedures:

• Editing the IBM Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing an e-mail Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing the EMC Call Home center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing the HP LAN Call Home center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

349
350
354
355

Editing the IBM Call Home center
To edit the IBM Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select IBM in the Call Home Centers list.
3. Click Edit Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays (Figure 137).

FIGURE 137 Configure Call Home Center dialog box (IBM option)
4. Make sure the Call Home center type you selected displays in the Call Home Centers list.
If the Call Home center type is incorrect, select the correct type from the list.
5. Select the Enable check box to enable this Call Home center.
6. Set the time interval at which to check the Call Home center by selecting the Set heartbeat
interval at ___ days (1-28) check box and entering the interval in the field.
7.

Enter how long you want to wait before timing out the heartbeat interval in the Time Out field.
The default is 60 seconds.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

349

10

Editing a Call Home center

8. Enter how often you want to retry the heartbeat interval in the Retry Interval field.
The default is 10 seconds.
9. Enter the maximum number of retries in the Maximum Retries field.
The default is 3.
10. Enter the primary phone number or extension of the Call Home center in the Call Home Center
- Primary Connection field.
11. Enter the backup phone number or extension of the Call Home center in the Call Home Center
- Backup Connection field.
12. Enter the phone number or extension of the local server in the Local Server - Phone Number
field.
13. Enter the identification number of the local server in the Local Server - Server ID field.
14. Click Send Test to test the phone number.
The selected Call Home center must be enabled to test the phone number.
A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center. You must contact the
Call Home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format.
15. Click OK to close the “Test Event Sent” message.
16. Click OK.
The Call Home dialog box displays with the Call Home center you edited highlighted in the Call
Home Centers list.
17. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Editing an e-mail Call Home center
E-mail Call Home centers are available for Brocade, IBM, NetApp, and Oracle. To edit one of these
Call Home centers, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the Call Home center you want to edit (Brocade E-mail, IBM E-mail, NetApp E-mail, or
Oracle E-mail) in the Call Home Centers table.
3. Click Edit Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers table).
The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays (Figure 138).

350

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a Call Home center

10

FIGURE 138 Configure Call Home Center dialog box (Brocade, IBM, NetApp, or Oracle E-mail option)
4. Make sure the Call Home center type you selected displays in the Call Home Centers list.
If the Call Home center type is incorrect, select the correct type from the list.
5. Select the Enable check box to enable this Call Home center.
6. Enter your contact name in the Customer Details - Name field.
7.

Enter your company name in the Customer Details - Company field.

8. Enter the phone number of the customer contact in the Customer Details - Phone (Office) field.
9. Enter the mobile phone number of the customer contact in the Customer Details - Phone
(Mobile) field.
10. Enter the name of the e-mail server in the SMTP Server Settings - Server Name field.
11. Select the SMTP over SSL check box to enable secure communication between the SMTP
server and the Management application.
12. Enter the port number of the server in the SMTP Server Settings - Port field.
The default is 465 if SMTP over SSL is enabled; otherwise, the default is 25.
13. Enter a user name in the SMTP Server Settings - Username field.
This is a required field when the SMTP server authentication is enabled.
14. Enter a password in the SMTP Server Settings - Password field.
This is a required field when the SMTP server authentication is enabled.
15. Enter your e-mail address in the E-mail Notification Settings - Reply Address field.
You can enter more than one e-mail address, separating each with a semi-colon. To send a text
message or page by way of e-mail, use the following format: number@carrier.com (where
number is your phone number and carrier.com is the SMS server; for example,
3035551212@txt.att.net (text message) or 3035551212@page.att.net (page)).

NOTE

Check with your carrier for the exact e-mail address format.
This e-mail address must be a registered MyBrocade member.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

351

10

Editing a Call Home center

16. Enter an e-mail address in the E-mail Notification Settings - Send To Address field.
For Brocade E-mail Call Home centers, enter callhomeemail@brocade.com.
17. Click Send Test to test the mail server.
The selected Call Home center must be enabled to test the mail server.
A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center. You must contact the
Call Home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format. To see the
content included in an e-mail message, refer to “Call Home alert e-mail messages” on
page 352.
18. Click OK to close the “Test Event Sent” message.
19. Click OK.
The Call Home dialog box displays with the Call Home center you edited highlighted in the Call
Home Centers list.
20. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Call Home alert e-mail messages
When an event triggers a Call Home alert, an e-mail message is sent to the selected Call Home
center. The e-mail message includes the following information:

• E-mail subject line — [Severity - Event_Reason_Code - FRU_Code or Event_Type Factory_Serial_Number] Call Home Alert about product IP_Address with support save
information
A pontential e-mail subject line is shown in the following example:
[3 - 1427 - FW-1427 - AMH0344D006] Call Home Alert about product 172.26.24.85 with
support save information

• E-mail content — Provides the following information about the triggered event:
- Event Description — Details about the event that triggered the alert. Includes the following
data:





-

Management Server Information — Details about the Management server. Includes the
following data:




-

Server Name
Server IP
Server Version

Contact Information — Customer contact information. Includes the following data:





352

Product WWN
Product IP address
Time
SupportSave location

Customer Name
Contact Name
Phone 1
Phone 2

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a Call Home center

-

Source — Details about the product. Includes the following data:




















-






Event Time
Event Severity
Event Reason Code
FRU Code/Event Type
Event Description

Event Data — Information about the triggered event. Includes the following data:







-

Firmware Version
Supplier Serial number
Factory Serial number
IP Address
Model number
Type
Product Name
Product WWN
Ethernet IP
Ethernet IP Mask
FCIP
FCIP Mask
Product Type
Domain ID
Product Manufacturer
Product Type Number
Manufacturing Plant
Product Status
Status Reason

Event — Details about the triggered event. Includes the following data:


-

10

Event level
Event number
Event count
Event time
Event Message Id
Event Description

Last 30 Events on the Product (Brocade E-mail and NetApp E-mail only) — Table with the
last 30 product and product status events. The first event is always the event that
triggered the e-mail alert. Includes the following data for each event:







Event level
Event number
Count
Time
Message ID
Description

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

353

10

Editing a Call Home center

Editing the EMC Call Home center
To edit an EMC Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the EMC Call Home center you want to edit in the Call Home Centers list.
3. Click Edit Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays (Figure 139).

FIGURE 139 Configure Call Home Center dialog box (EMC option)
4. Make sure the EMC Call Home center type displays in the Call Home Centers list.
If the Call Home center type is incorrect, select the correct type from the list.
5. Select the Enable check box to enable this Call Home center.
6. Set the time interval at which to check the Call Home center by selecting the Set heartbeat
interval at ___ days (1-28) check box and entering the interval in the field.
7.

Enter the path to the ConnectEMC application in the ConnectEMC field or browse to the
ConnectEMC application location.

8. Enter the phone number or extension of the local server in the Local Server - Modem # field.
9. Enter the identification number of the local server in the Local Server - Cabinet Serial # field.
10. Enter the site name for the local server in the Local Server - Site Name field.
11. Click Send Test to test the Connect EMC application.
The selected Call Home center must be enabled to test the ConnectEMC application.
A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center. You must contact the
Call Home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format.
12. Click OK to close the “Test Event Sent” message.

354

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a Call Home center

10

13. Click OK.
The Call Home dialog box displays with the Call Home center you edited highlighted in the Call
Home Centers list.
14. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Editing the HP LAN Call Home center
To edit an HP LAN Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the HP LAN Call Home center you want to edit in the Call Home Centers list.
3. Click Edit Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays (Figure 140).

FIGURE 140 Configure Call Home Center dialog box (HP LAN option)
4. Make sure the HP LAN Call Home center type displays in the Call Home Centers list.
If the Call Home center type is incorrect, select the correct type from the list.
5. Select the Enable check box to enable this Call Home center.
6. Enter the IP address of the Call Home center in the Service Gateway field.
The default is 2069.
7.

Enter the port number of the Call Home center in the Port field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

355

10

Enabling a Call Home center

8. Click Send Test to test the address.
The selected Call Home center must be enabled to test the IP address.
A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center. You must contact the
Call Home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format.

NOTE

The HP LAN Call Home alert displays the directory separation characters with a double
backslash (\\) instead of a single backslash (\).
9. Click OK to close the “Test Event Sent” message.
10. Click OK.
The Call Home dialog box displays with the Call Home center you edited highlighted in the Call
Home Centers list.
11. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Enabling a Call Home center
To enable a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the Enable check box of the Call Home center you want to enable in the Call Home
Centers list.
3. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Enabling supportSave
NOTE

SupportSave is only supported on products running Fabric OS 5.2 or later or Network OS 2.1.X or
later.
When you enable supportSave through the Call Home center, all Call Home events trigger the
supportSave operation and the supportSave stored location on the FTP server is transmitted with
the Call Home event.
To enable a supportSave for a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the Support Save check box of the Call Home center or device for which you want to
enable supportSave in the Call Home Centers list.
3. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

356

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Testing the Call Home center connection

10

Testing the Call Home center connection
Once you add and enable a Call Home center, you should verify that Call Home is functional.
To verify Call Home center functionality, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
2. Click Edit Centers (beneath the Call Home Centers list).
The Configure Call Home Center dialog box displays.
3. Select the Call Home center you want to check in the Call Home Centers list.
4. Make sure that the Enabled check box is selected.

NOTE

You must configure the Call Home center before you test the connection. To configure a Call
Home center, refer to “Editing a Call Home center” on page 349.
5. Click Send Test.
A faked event is generated and sent to the selected Call Home center. You must contact the
Call Home center to verify that the event was received and in the correct format.
6. Click OK to close the “Test Event Sent” message.
7.

Click OK to close the Configure Call Home Center dialog box.

8. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Disabling a Call Home center
When a Call Home center is disabled, no devices can send Call Home events to the Call Home
center. However, the devices and event filters assigned to the disabled Call Home center are not
removed. You can still perform the following actions on a disabled Call Home center:

• Edit Call Home center configuration.
• Add devices and event filters to the Call Home center.
To disable a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Clear the Enable check box of the Call Home center you want to disable in the Call Home
Centers list.
The selected Call Home center and its devices and event filters become unavailable. However,
the Call Home center is not disabled until you save your changes. When a device is assigned to
the Call Home center, a confirmation message displays.
3. Click OK to confirm.
4. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

357

10

Viewing Call Home status

Viewing Call Home status
You can view Call Home status from the main Management application window or from the Call
Home Notification dialog box.
The Management application enables you to view the Call Home status at a glance by providing a
Call Home status icon on the status bar. Table 37 illustrates and describes the icons that indicate
the current status of the Call Home function.

TABLE 37

Call Home icons

Icon

Description
Normal — Displays when Call Home is enabled on all devices and no filters are applied.

Degraded — Displays when Call Home is enabled on all devices and at least one filter is
active.

Disabled — Displays when any of the following conditions are met:
• At least one device's Call Home is disabled.
• At least one non-manageable device.
• At least one device does not have the Management server registered as a trap recipient.

To view more detail regarding Call Home status, click the Call Home icon. The Call Home
Notification dialog box displays the following information for the list of devices that have assigned
filters or Call Home disabled:

• Product — The name of the device. Click to go to the device in the topology.
• IP Address — The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the device.
• Status — The status of the device. The possible status options include:
- Enabled — The device is manageable, Call Home is enabled, and a filter is applied.
- Disabled — Call Home is disabled on at least one device or Call Home is disabled from the
Call Home dialog box.

-

Not Manageable — Manageability is lost.
Server Not Registered — The server is not registered to receive Call Home events from this
device.

NOTE

Call Home status only displays for Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS products.

• Filter — The name of the active event filter assigned to the device.
• Call Home button — Click to launch the Call Home dialog box, where you can configure Call
Home centers.

358

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Assigning a device to the Call Home center

10

Assigning a device to the Call Home center
Discovered devices (switches, routers, and directors) are not assigned to a corresponding Call
Home center automatically. You must manually assign each device to a Call Home center before
you use Call Home.
To assign a device or multiple devices to a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the devices you want to assign to a Call Home center in the Products List.
3. Select the Call Home center to which you want to assign the devices in the Call Home Centers
list.
You can only assign a device to one Call Home center at a time.
4. Click the right arrow button.
The selected devices display beneath the selected Call Home center. Devices assigned to a
Call Home center do not display in the Products List.
5. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Removing a device from a Call Home center
To remove a device or multiple devices from a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the Call Home center from which you want to remove devices in the Call Home Centers
list.
3. Select the devices you want to remove from the selected Call Home center.
4. Click the left arrow button.
A confirmation message displays.
5. Click OK.
The selected devices are removed from the Call Home center and display in the Products List.
6. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Removing all devices and filters from a Call Home center
To remove all devices and filters from a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the Call Home center from which you want to remove devices and filters in the Call
Home Centers list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

359

10

Defining an event filter

3. Click the left arrow button.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK.
All devices assigned to the selected Call Home center display in the Products List. Any assigned
filters are also removed.
5. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Defining an event filter
To define an event filter, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Click Add beneath the Call Home Event Filter list.
The Call Home Event Filter dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the filter in the Name field.
4. Enter a name for the description in the Description field.
5. Select the check box for the events you want to include in the filter in the Available Call Home
Event Types list.
To exclude the event, clear the check box. By default, all check boxes are selected during a new
installation. Click Select All to select all event types in the list or select Unselect All to clear the
selected event types in the list. For more information about Call Home events, refer to
Appendix B, “Call Home Event Tables”.
The Available Call Home Event Types list displays the following information:

•
•
•
•
•

Description — The description of the event.
Type — The type of firmware for the selected event.
FRU Code/Event Type — The field-replaceable unit (FRU) code and event type for the event.
Severity — The severity of the event.
Event Reason Code — The event reason code of the event.

6. Click OK on the Call Home Event Filter dialog box.
The event filter name and the description are displayed in the Call Home dialog box.
To assign event filters to a Call Home center or a device, refer to “Assigning an event filter to a
Call Home center” on page 361 or “Assigning an event filter to a device” on page 361.
7.

360

Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Assigning an event filter to a Call Home center

10

Assigning an event filter to a Call Home center
Event filters allow Call Home center users to log in to a Management server and assign specific
event filters to the devices. This limits the number of unnecessary or “acknowledge” events and
improves the performance and effectiveness of the Call Home center.
You can only select one event filter at a time; however, you can assign the same event filter to
multiple devices or Call Home centers. When you assign an event filter to a Call Home center, the
event filter is assigned to all devices in the Call Home center. For more information about Call
Home events, refer to Appendix B, “Call Home Event Tables”.

NOTE

You cannot assign an event filter to a Call Home center that does not contain devices.
To assign an event filter to a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the event filters you want to assign in the Call Home Event Filters list.
3. Select the Call Home centers to which you want to assign the event filters in the Call Home
Centers list.
4. Click the right arrow button.
The selected event filters are assigned to the selected Call Home centers.
5. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Assigning an event filter to a device
To assign an event filter to a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the event filter you want to assign in the Call Home Event Filters list.
For more information about Call Home events, refer to Appendix B, “Call Home Event Tables”.
3. Select one or more devices to which you want to assign the event filter in the Call Home
Centers list.
4. Click the right arrow button.
The selected event filter is assigned to the selected devices. The event filter displays beneath
the specified device or all of the devices under the specified Call Home center.
5. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

361

10

Overwriting an assigned event filter

Overwriting an assigned event filter
A device can only have one event filter at a time; therefore, when a new filter is applied to a device
that already has a filter, you must confirm the new filter assignment.
To overwrite an event filter, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the event filter you want to apply in the Call Home Event Filters list.
For more information about Call Home events, refer to Appendix B, “Call Home Event Tables”.
3. Select the devices to which you want to apply the event filter in the Call Home Centers list.
4. Click the right arrow button.
For existing event filters, a confirmation messages displays.
5. Click Yes.
The selected event filter is applied to the selected devices. The event filter displays beneath
the specified device or all of the devices under the specified Call Home center.
6. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Removing all event filter from a Call Home center
To remove all event filters from a Call Home center, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Choose one of the following options in the Call Home Centers list:

• Right-click a Call Home center and select Remove Filters.
• Select a Call Home center and click the left arrow button.
All event filters assigned to the Call Home center are removed.
3. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

362

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Removing an event filter from a device

10

Removing an event filter from a device
To remove an event filter from a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Choose one of the following options in the Call Home Centers list:

• Right-click a device to which the event filter is assigned and select Remove Filter.
• Select an event filter assigned to a device and click the left arrow button. Press CTRL and
click to select multiple event filters assigned to multiple devices.
All event filters assigned to the device are removed.
3. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Removing an event filter from the Call Home Event Filters list
To remove an event filter from the Call Home Event Filters list, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the event filter you want to remove in the Call Home Event Filters list.
3. Click Remove.

• If the event filter is not assigned to any devices, a confirmation message displays asking if
you want to remove the event filter. Click Yes.

• If the event filter is assigned to any devices, a confirmation message displays informing
you that removing this event filter will remove it from all associated devices. Click Yes.
The event filter is removed from any associated devices and the Call Home Event Filters list.
To determine to which devices the event filter is assigned, select the event filter and then click
the Find button (>).
4. Click OK to close the Call Home dialog box.

Searching for an assigned event filter
To find all devices to which an event filter is assigned, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > Call Home.
The Call Home dialog box displays.
2. Select the event filter you want to find in the Call Home Event Filters list.
3. Click the Find button (>).
All instances of the event filter are highlighted in the Call Home Centers list.
If the selected event filter is not assigned to any devices in the Call Home Centers list, a not
found message displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

363

10

364

Searching for an assigned event filter

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

11

Third-party tools

In this chapter
• About third-party tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Starting third-party tools from the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Launching a Telnet session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Launching HCM Agent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Entering the server IP address of a tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding an option to the Tools menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Changing an option on the Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing an option from the Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Changing an option on a device’s shortcut menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing an option from a device’s shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

365
365
366
367
367
368
369
370
370
372
373

About third-party tools
NOTE

Installing tools is only available with the Trial and Licensed version versions.
You can open other software products (such as, Firefox, Windows Explorer, Web Tools, Element
Managers, FCR Configuration, HCM Agent and so on) you frequently use from the Tools menu or
shortcut menus.
You can add third-party tools to the Tools menu or shortcut menus to open other software products
(such as, Firefox, Windows Explorer, Web Tools, Element Managers, FCR Configuration, HCM Agent
and so on) you frequently use.

Starting third-party tools from the application
You can open third-party tools from the Tools menu or a device’s shortcut menu. Remember that
you cannot open a tool that is not installed on your computer. You must install the tool on your
computer and add the tool to the Tools menu or the device’s shortcut menu.

NOTE
Installing tools is only available with the Trial and Licensed version versions.
To open an application, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

365

11

Launching a Telnet session

1. Select the device.
2. Use one of the following techniques:

• Select Tools > Product Menu > Tool_Name.
• Select Tools > Tool_Name.
• Right-click the device, and select the tool from the menu.
If the third-party tool is a web-based application, you must enter the IP address of the
applications server as a parameter to be able to open the application. For step-by-step
instructions about entering the IP address of the server, refer to “Entering the server IP
address of a tool” on page 368.

Launching a Telnet session
You can use Telnet to log in and issue command line-based commands to a device.

NOTE
The device must have a valid IP address. If the device does not have a valid IP address, the Telnet
selection will not be available on the shortcut menu. You must right-click the device icon, select
Properties, and enter the device’s IP address before you can open a Telnet session.

Launching an Telnet session from the IP tab
To launch a telnet session, complete the following steps.
On the Topology Map, right-click a device and select CLI through Server.

Launching an Element Manager
Element Managers are used to manage Fibre Channel switches and directors. You can open a
device’s Element Manager directly from the application.
To launch a device’s Element Manager, complete the following steps.
On the Connectivity Map, double-click the device you want to manage.
The Element Manager displays.
OR
On the Connectivity Map, right-click the device you want to manage and select Element Manager >
Hardware.
The Element Manager displays.
OR
1. Select a device.
2. Select Configure > Element Manager > Hardware.
The Element Manager displays.
OR

366

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Launching HCM Agent

11

1. Select a device.
2. Click the Element Manager icon on the toolbar.
The Element Manager displays.

Launching HCM Agent
Use Fabric OS HCM Agent to enable and manage Fabric OS HBAs. You can open HCM Agent directly
from the application. For more information about HCM Agent, refer to the HCM Agent
Administrator’s Guide. For more information about Fabric OS HBAs, refer to the documentation for
the specific device.
To launch a Fabric OS HBA’s Element Manager, complete the following steps.

NOTE

You must have Element Manager - Product Administration privileges for the selected device to
launch HCM Agent. If you do not have Element Manager - Product Administration privileges, you will
need to enter those credentials to launch HCM Agent. For more information about privileges, refer
to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
On the Connectivity Map, double-click the Fabric OS HBA or CNA device you want to manage.
HCM Agent displays.
OR
On the Connectivity Map, right-click the Fabric OS HBA or CNA device you want to manage and
select Element Manager.
HCM Agent displays.
OR
1. Select a Fabric OS HBA or CNA.
2. Select Configure > Element Manager > HCM.
HCM Agent displays.

Adding a tool
You can specify third-party tools so they appear on the Setup Tools dialog box. From there, you can
add them to the Tools menu and then open the tools directly from the Management application.
To add a tool, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Tools Menu tab.
3. Click Define.
The Define Tools dialog box displays (Figure 141).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

367

11

Entering the server IP address of a tool

FIGURE 141 Define Tools dialog box
4. Type the tool’s name in the Tool Name field as you want it to appear on the Tools menu.
5. Type or browse to the path of the executable file in the Path field.
6. Type or browse to the path of the folder that you want to set as your working folder in the
Working Folder field.
7.

Click Add to add the tool.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays with the new tool added to the Tools Menu Item table.

NOTE

You must click Add before clicking OK; otherwise, your changes will be lost.
8. Click OK to save your work and close the Define Tools dialog box.
To add this tool to the Tools menu, refer to “Adding an option to the Tools menu” on page 369.
9. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Entering the server IP address of a tool
If the third-party tool is a web-based application, you must enter the IP address of the applications
server as a parameter to be able to open the application.
To enter the server IP address, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Tools Menu tab.
The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools, including the tool name as it displays
on the Tools menu, parameters, and keystroke shortcuts.
3. Select the tool you want to edit in the Tool Menu Items table.
The settings for the selected tool display in the fields at the top of the dialog box.
4. Edit the IP address of the server (for example, http://IP_Address or
http://IP_Address:Port_Number) in the Parameters field.
5. Click Edit.

368

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding an option to the Tools menu

11

NOTE

You must click Edit before clicking OK; otherwise, your changes will be lost.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Adding an option to the Tools menu
You can add third-party tools to the Tools menu which enables you to launch tools directly from the
application.
To add a option to the tools menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Tools Menu tab.
The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools, including the tool name as it displays
on the Tools menu, parameters, and keystroke shortcuts (Figure 142).

FIGURE 142 Setup Tools dialog box (Tools menu tab)
3. Type a label for the option as you want it to appear on the Tools menu in the Menu Text field.
4. Select the application from the Tool list, or click Define if you want to specify a new tool.
To specify a new tool, refer to “Adding a tool” on page 367.
5. (Optional) Enter parameters, such as a URL, in the Parameters field.
6. (Optional) Select a keyboard shortcut in the Keystroke list.

NOTE

You cannot assign the same keyboard shortcut to two different tools.
7.

Click Add.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

369

11

Changing an option on the Tools menu

The new tool displays in the Tool Menu Items table.

NOTE

You must click Add before clicking OK; otherwise, the new menu option is not created.
8. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.
The tool you configured now displays on the Tools menu.

Changing an option on the Tools menu
You can edit parameters for third-party tools that display on the Tools menu.
To edit a option to the tools menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Tools Menu tab.
The Tool Menu Items table displays all configured tools, including the tool name as it displays
on the Tools menu, parameters, and keystroke shortcuts.
3. Select the tool you want to edit in the Tool Menu Items table.
The settings for the selected tool display in the fields at the top of the dialog box.
4. Edit the label for the option as you want it to appear on the Tools menu in the Menu Text field.
5. Select the application from the Tool list.
6. Edit the parameters, such as a URL, in the Parameters field.
7.

Select a new keyboard shortcut in the Keystroke list.

8. Click Edit.

NOTE

You must click Edit before clicking OK; otherwise, your changes will be lost.
9. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Removing an option from the Tools menu
You can remove a tool from the third-party tool list.
To remove a option to the tools menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Tools Menu tab.
3. Select the row of the tool you want to remove in the Tools Menu Items table.
4. Click Remove.

370

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding an option to a device’s shortcut menu

11

If the tool is not being utilized, no confirmation message displays.
5. Click Update to remove the tool.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Adding an option to a device’s shortcut menu
You can add an option to a device’s shortcut menu.
To add an option to the device’s shortcut menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Product Menu tab.
The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured shortcut menu options.
3. Type or select the text in the Menu Text list as you want it to appear on the menu.
4. Choose one of the following options:

-

To display the menu option only for devices that meet the conditions listed, select the
Match Conditions option.

-

To display the menu option on the shortcut menus for all devices, select the All option.
If you select All, skip to step 8. Otherwise, continue to step 5.

5. Select the appropriate type in the Condition 1 Property name list.
6. Enter the appropriate value for the selected property in the Condition 1 Value field.
7.

(Optional) Select the Condition 2 Property type and enter the Value for that property type
(Condition 1 AND Condition 2 must be true) to define a second condition to be simultaneously
true.

NOTE

To set up a condition where Condition 1 OR Condition 2 must be true, define two menu items,
one for each condition.
8. Select the tool that you want to launch from the Tool list, or click Define to add a tool.
To specify a new tool, refer to “Adding a tool” on page 367.
9. Select the Append device ID check box to specify the parameter used when opening the tool.

-

To specify that the device’s IP address should be used when opening the tool, select the IP
Address option.

-

To specify that the device’s Node WWN should be used when opening the tool, select the
Node WWN option.

10. Click Add to add the new menu item.
It displays in the Product Popup Menu Items table.

NOTE

You must click Add before clicking OK; otherwise, your changes will be lost.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

371

11

Changing an option on a device’s shortcut menu

11. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Changing an option on a device’s shortcut menu
You can change the parameters for a tool that displays on a device’s shortcut menu.
To edit an option to the device’s shortcut menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Product Menu tab.
The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured shortcut menu options.
3. Select the menu item you want to change in the Product Popup Menu Items table.
The settings for the selected menu item display in the fields at the top of the dialog box.
4. Edit or select the text in the Menu Text list as you want it to appear on the menu.
5. Choose one of the following options:

-

To display the menu option only for devices that meet the conditions listed, select the
Match Conditions option.

-

To display the menu option on the shortcut menus for all devices, select the All option.
If you select All, skip to step 8. Otherwise, continue to step 5.

6. Change the type in the Condition 1 Property name list.
7.

Change the value for the selected property in the Condition 1 Value field.

8. (Optional) Change the Condition 2 Property type or edit the Value for that property type
(Condition 1 AND Condition 2 must be true) to edit a second condition to be simultaneously
true.

NOTE

To set up a condition where Condition 1 OR Condition 2 must be true, define two menu items,
one for each condition.
9. Select the tool from the Tool list that you want to launch, or click Define to add a tool.
To specify a new tool, refer to “Adding a tool” on page 367.
10. Select the Append device ID check box to specify the parameter used when opening the tool.

-

To specify that the device’s IP address should be used when opening the tool, select the IP
Address option.

-

To specify that the device’s Node WWN should be used when opening the tool, select the
Node WWN option.

11. Click Edit.

NOTE

You must click Edit before clicking OK; otherwise, your changes will be lost.
12. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

372

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Removing an option from a device’s shortcut menu

11

Removing an option from a device’s shortcut menu
You can remove a tool that displays on a device’s shortcut menu.
To remove an option to the device’s shortcut menu, complete the following steps.
1. Select Tools > Setup.
The Setup Tools dialog box displays.
2. Click the Product Menu tab.
The Product Popup Menu Items table displays all configured menu options.
3. Select the menu item you want to remove in the Product Popup Menu Items table.
4. Click Remove.
5. Click OK to save your work and close the Setup Tools dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

373

11

374

Removing an option from a device’s shortcut menu

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

12

Server Management Console

In this chapter
• Server Management Console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Services tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ports tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AAA Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Restore tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Technical Support Information tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HCM Upgrade tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SMI Agent Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

375
376
379
380
392
392
393
394

Server Management Console overview
The Server Management Console (SMC) is an automatically installed, stand-alone application for
managing the Management application server. You can perform the following tasks using the SMC:

• From the Services tab, you can start, stop, refresh, and restart services on the server.
• From the Ports tab, you can view the Management application server or web server port
number.

• From the AAA Settings tab (Enterprise Licensed version only), you can configure an
authentication server (LDAP or Radius server), and establish authentication policies.

• From the Restore tab, you can restore server application data.
• From the Technical Support Information tab, you can collect information for technical support.
• From the HCM Upgrade tab, you can upgrade the Management application to use a new
version of Host Connectivity Manager (HCM).

• From the SMI Agent Configuration Tool tool, you can configure the SMI Agent settings, such as
security, CIMOM, and certificate management as well as launch Management application
dialog boxes.

Launching the SMC on Windows
Open the Server Management Console from the Start menu on the Management application
server.
You can also drag the SMC icon onto your desktop as a short cut.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

375

12

Services tab

Launching the SMC on Linux
NOTE
The Server Management Console is a graphical user interface and should be launched from the
XConsole on Linux systems.
Perform the following steps to launch the Server Management Console on Linux systems.
1. On the Management application server, go to the following directory:
Install_Directory/bin
2. Type the following at the command line:
./smc
OR
sh smc

Services tab
You must be logged in at the administrator (Windows systems) or root (UNIX systems) level to stop,
start, and restart the Management application services. Stopping and restarting the Management
application services causes clients connected to the server to lose connection, and they must
re-log in to the server.

Monitoring and managing Management application services
To monitor the status of the Management application services, complete the following steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab (Figure 143).

FIGURE 143 Services tab

376

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Services tab

12

3. Review the following information for each available service.

•
•
•
•

Name — The name of the server; for example, FTP Server or Database Server.
Process Name — The name of the process; for example, postgres.exe (Database Server).
Status — The status of the service; for example, started or stopped.
Start Time — The date and time the service started. The Start Time for Service Location
Protocol displays as ‘Not Available’.

4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Refreshing the server status
To refresh the server status for each of the Management application services, complete the
following steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Refresh to update the table with the latest status of the services in case the services
were stopped or restarted outside of the Server Management Console.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Stopping all services
To stop all services, complete the following steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Stop to stop all services.
Note that clicking Restart stops and then restarts all services.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Stopping the CIMOM services
To stop the CIMOM (Common Information Model Object Manager) services, complete the following
steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Stop CIMOM.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

377

12

Services tab

Starting all services
NOTE
The Start button restarts running services in addition to starting stopped services which causes
client-server disconnect.
To start all services, complete the following steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Start to start all services.

NOTE

If the server is configured to use an external FTP server, the Server Management Console does
not attempt to start the built-in FTP service.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Restarting all services
To stop and restart all services, complete the following steps.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Restart to stop then restart all services.

NOTE

If the server is configured to use an external FTP server, the Server Management Console does
not attempt to start the built-in FTP service.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Changing the database password
Requires User Management read and write privilege.
1. Launch the Server Management Console.
2. Click the Services tab.
3. Click Change Database Password.
The authentication Login dialog box displays.
4. Enter your Management application user name and password.
5. Click OK.
The Database Password dialog box displays.

378

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Ports tab

12

6. Select the database user name for which you want to change the password in the User Name
field.
Options include dcmadmin and dcmuser.
Changing the dcmadmin password requires all Management application services, except for
the database server, to be stopped and then re-started.
Changing the dcmuser password requires all ODBC remote client sessions to be restarted.
7.

Enter your current password in the Old Password field.

8. Enter you new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password fields.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Yes on the warning message.

Ports tab
Use the Ports tab of the Server Management Console to view the Management application server
and Web server port numbers. The default Web Server port number is 80 (HTTP) or 443 (HTTPS).
The Management application server default port number is 24600.

Viewing server port numbers
To view the Management application server or web server port number, complete the following
steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• For Windows systems, open the Server Management Console from the Start menu on the
Management application server.

• For Linux systems, on the Management application server, go to the Install_Directory/bin
directory and type the following at the command line:
./smc
OR
sh smc

2. Click the Ports tab.
3. Review the following information for each available service.

• Management_Application_Name Server Port text box — The Management application
Server Port number. The default is 24600.

• Web Server Port # (HTTPS) text box — The Web Server Port number for HTTPS. The default
is 443.
You can configure the server port settings from the Options dialog box (Server Port pane).
For instructions, refer to “Configuring the server port” on page 177.
You can also configure the server port settings from the configuration wizard. For
instructions, refer to “Launching the Configuration Wizard” on page 5.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

379

12

AAA Settings tab

AAA Settings tab
Authentication enables you to configure an authentication server and establish authentication
policies. You can configure the Management application to authenticate users against the local
database (Management application server), an external server (RADIUS, LDAP, CAC or TACACS+), or
a switch. Authentication is configured to the local database by default. When you use an external
server, the Management application sends the login information to the external server to make
sure the name and password are valid.
If you configure primary authentication to an external or switch authentication, you can also
configure secondary authentication to the local server. When you log in to the Management
application, if the primary server is unavailable, the Management application attempts with the
next configured primary server. If all primary servers are unavailable, then the Management
application falls back to the secondary authentication. Fall back can occur when the server is
unavailable, authentication fails, or the user is not found.

Configuring Radius server authentication
If you are using a Radius server for authentication, make the following preparations first:

• Make sure that the server you want to use is on the network that the Management application
manages.

• Make sure that the external server and its user accounts have been properly configured. For
example, you must define roles and areas of responsibility (AOR) in the external server to
match the Management application roles and AOR.

• Select an Authentication Type (you will be prompted to provide a type in the Add or Edit Radius
Server dialog box). The Authentication Type is the authentication policy you choose for
handling authentication. The options are PAP and CHAP.

-

PAP, password protected protocol, is based on password verification. Passwords are not
encrypted, and are not secure from eavesdroppers during transmission.

-

CHAP, challenge handshake protocol, uses a three-way handshake method of verification
based on a shared secret. If you are using CHAP, have the shared secret available to you.
You will need to type it in as a configuration parameter.

• Know the Shared Secret.
• Have the IP address of the server available.
• Know the TCP port you are using and make sure it is open in the firewall. For Radius servers,
ports 1812 or 1813 (actually UDP ports) are commonly used. Some older Radius server use
1645 or 1646 instead of 1812 and 1813; check with the Radius server vendor if you are not
sure which port to specify.

• Know how long you want to wait between attempts to reach the server if it is busy. This is
expressed as a timeout value (default is 3 seconds) in seconds. Values are between 1 and 15.

• Determine how many attempts (default is 3 times) to make to reach the server before stopping
and assuming it is unreachable. Values are between 1 and 5.

• If possible, establish an active connection with the Radius server before configuration. This
enables you to test the connection as part of the configuration procedure.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. Select Radius Server from the Primary Authentication list.

380

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

3. Add or edit a Radius server by referring to “Configuring a Radius server” on page 381.
4. Rearrange the Radius servers in the table by selecting a server and click the Up or Down
button to move it.
5. Delete a Radius server by selecting the server and click Delete.
6. Test the established active connection with the Radius server by clicking Test.
Test attempts to contact the Radius server by issuing a ping command.
7.

Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary
Authentication list:

• Local Database
• None
8. Set the fall back condition to secondary authentication by selecting one of the following
options from the Fail Over Option list:

• Radius Servers Not Reachable
• Radius Authentication Failed
9. Set the authorization preference by selecting one of the following options from the
Authorization Preference list:

• Local Database
• Primary Authentication Server
10. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
11. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring a Radius server
To add or edit a Radius server, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options from the AAA Settings tab:

• Click Add.
• Select an existing Radius server and click Edit.
The Add or Edit Radius Server dialog box displays (Figure 144).

FIGURE 144 Add or Edit Radius Server

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

381

12

AAA Settings tab

2. Enter the radius server’s IP address in the IP Address field.
3. Enter the TCP port, if necessary, used by the Radius server in the TCP Port field.
Default is 1812.
4. Select the authentication policy (PAP or CHAP) from the Authentication Type field.
Default is CHAP.
5. Enter the shared secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Secret fields.
6. Enter the timeout timer value (in seconds) that specifies the amount of time to wait between
retries when the server is busy in the Timeout (Sec) field.
Default is 3 seconds.
7.

Enter the number of attempts to be made to reach a server before assuming it is unreachable
in the Attempts field.
Default is 3 attempts.

8. Click OK to return to the AAA Settings tab.
The Radius Servers and Sequence table displays the following information:

•
•
•
•

Network Address — The network address of the Radius server.
Authentication Type — The authentication type (such as, CHAP).
TCP Port — The TCP port number of the Radius server.
TimeOut (Sec) — The timeout value in seconds specified when sending an authentication
request to the server. Default is 3.

• Attempts — The number of attempts made to reach a server before determining it is
unreachable. Default is 3.

Configuring LDAP server authentication
NOTE
You cannot configure multiple Active Directory groups (domains) for the LDAP server.

NOTE

You cannot enter Domain\User_Name in the Management application dialog box for LDAP server
authentication.
If you are using an LDAP server for authentication, make the following preparations first:

• Make sure that the LDAP server you want to use is on the network that the Management
application manages.

• Have the IP address of the server available.
• Know the TCP port you are using. The LDAP server uses Transport Layer Security (TLS). LDAP
over TLS generally uses port 389. If security is enabled the port number is 636. Check with the
LDAP server administrator if you are not sure which port to specify.

• Know how long you want to wait between attempts (default is 3 seconds) to reach the server if
it is busy. This is expressed as a timeout value in seconds. Values are between 1 and 15.

• Determine how many attempts (default is 3 times) to make to reach the server before stopping
and assuming it is unreachable. Values are between 1 and 5.

382

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

NOTE

If the LDAP server’s IP address is entered in the Management application, the LDAP server’s
hostname (if any) must still be known to the Management application host OS. The
Management application server must be using a DNS server that knows the LDAP server’s
hostname, or you must manually add the LDAP server’s hostname to the local hosts file (for
Linux the file is located in /etc/hosts and for Windows the file is located in
C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts for Windows).
To configure an LDAP server for authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. Select LDAP Server from the Primary Authentication list.
If you configure the external LDAP server as the primary authentication server, make the
following preparations first:

• Make sure that the external LDAP server and its user accounts have been properly
configured (refer to “Creating an AD user account” on page 203). For example, you must
define roles and areas of responsibility (AOR) in the external server to match the
Management application roles and AOR.

• Make sure to configure the custom attributes “NmRoles” and “NmAors” on the LDAP
server (refer to “Configuring roles and AORs on the external LDAP server” on page 204).
NmRoles defines the Management application user roles (such as Host Administrator, IP
System Administrator, Network Administrator, Operator, Report User Group, SAN System
Administrator, Security Administrator, Security Officer, and Zone Administrator). NmAors
defines the areas of responsibility (such as, All Fabrics, All IP Products).
3. Add or edit a LDAP server by referring to “Configuring an LDAP server” on page 384.
The LDAP Servers and Sequence table displays the following information:

•
•
•
•
•

Network Address — The network address of the LDAP server.
Authentication Type — The authentication type (such as, CHAP).
Security — Whether or not security is enabled.
TCP Port — The TCP port number of the LDAP server.
TimeOut (Sec) — The timeout value in seconds specified when sending an authentication
request to the server. Default is 3.

• Attempts — The number of attempts made to reach a server before determining it is
unreachable. Default is 3.
4. Rearrange the LDAP servers in the table by selecting a server and click the Up or Down button
to move it.
5. Delete a LDAP server by selecting the server and click Delete.
6. Test the established active connection with the LDAP server by clicking Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays.
7.

Enter your user name and password and click OK.
Test attempts to contact the LDAP server by issuing a ping command and verifies the following:

• Verifies connections to the LDAP Server
• Verifies authentication with the LDAP Server

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

383

12

AAA Settings tab

• Verifies user privileges on the Local database
8. Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary
Authentication list:

• Local Database
• None
9. Set the fall back condition to secondary authentication by selecting one of the following
options from the Switch to secondary authentication when list:

• LDAP Servers Not Reachable
• LDAP Authentication Failed
• User Not Found in LDAP
10. Set the authorization preference by selecting one of the following options from the
Authorization Preference list:

• Local Database
Use the LDAP server for authentication and the Management application local
database for authorization.

The user name in the local database must match the LDAP user name (password
does not need to match) and must have the appropriate roles and AORs. If the
Management application user name and LDAP user name do not match, create the
user and assign the respective roles and AORs (refer to “User Account Management”
on page 181).
Primary Authentication Server


•

Use the LDAP server for authentication and authorization.
In the LDAP server, create new custom attributes (NmRoles & NmAors) in the AD
server and assign the appropriate Roles and AORs (refer to “Configuring roles and
AORs on the external LDAP server” on page 204).
If this user already exists in the local database, the roles and AORs are overwritten
with the new roles and AORs configured in the LDAP Server.
LDAP Authorization



•




Use to assign roles and AORs to user groups and not to individual users.
When roles and AORs are assigned to a group, all AD users in the group can obtain the
roles and AORS assigned to the group. To assign roles and AORs to an AD Group, refer
“Assigning roles and AORs to an AD group” on page 201.
You do not need to create users in the local database.

11. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
12. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring an LDAP server
To add or edit a LDAP server, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. Select LDAP Server from the Primary Authentication list.

384

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

3. Choose one of the following options:

• Click Add.
• Select an existing LDAP server and click Edit.
The Add or Edit LDAP Server dialog box displays (Figure 145).

FIGURE 145 Add or Edit LDAP server
4. Enter the LDAP server’s hostname in the Network address field.
If DNS is not configured in your network, provide an IP address instead of the hostname.
5. Enable security by selecting the Security Enabled check box.
When you enable security, the TCP port number automatically changes to port 636 and you
must enable certificate services on the LDAP server.
6. Enter the TCP port used by the LDAP server in the TCP Port field.
Default is 389 if security is not enabled. Default is 636 if security is enabled.
7.

Enter the timeout timer value (in seconds) that specifies the amount of time to wait between
retries when the server is busy in the Timeout (Sec) field.
Default is 3 seconds.

8. Enter the number of attempts to be made to reach a server before assuming it is unreachable
in the Attempts field.
Default is 3 attempts.
9. Click OK to return to step 4 on the AAA Settings tab.

Configuring TACACS+ server authentication
If you are using a TACACS+ server for authentication, make the following preparations first:

• Make sure that the server you want to use is on the network that the Management application
manages.

• Make sure that the external server and its user accounts have been properly configured. For
example, you must define roles and areas of responsibility (AOR) in the external server to
match the Management application roles and AOR.
To configure TACACS+ server authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. For Primary Authentication, select TACACS+ Server.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

385

12

AAA Settings tab

3. Add or edit a TACACS+ server by referring to “Configuring a TACACS+ server” on page 386.
4. Rearrange the TACACS+ servers in the table by selecting a server and click the Up or Down
button to move it.
5. Delete a TACACS+ server by selecting the server and click Delete.
6. Test the established active connection with the TACACS+ server by clicking Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays.
7.

Enter your user ID and password and click Test.
Test verifies your user ID and password for the local database and verifies user privileges on
the Management application server.

8. Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary
Authentication list:

• Local Database
• None
9. Set the fall back condition to secondary authentication by selecting one of the following
options from the Fail Over Option list:

• TACACS+ Server Not Reachable
• TACACS+ Server Authentication Failed
10. Set the authorization preference by selecting one of the following options from the
Authorization Preference list:

• Local Database
• Primary Authentication Server
11. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
12. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring a TACACS+ server
To add or edit a TACACS+ server, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options from the AAA Settings tab:

• Click Add.
• Select an existing TACACS+ server and click Edit.
The Add or Edit TACACS+ Server dialog box displays (Figure 145).

386

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

FIGURE 146 Add or Edit TACACS+ Server
2. Enter the TACACS+ server’s hostname in the Network Address field.
If DNS is not configured in your network, provide an IP address instead of the hostname.
3. Enter the TCP port used by the TACACS+ server in the TCP Port field.
Default is 49.
4. Enter the shared secret in the Shared Secret and Confirm Secret fields.
5. Enter the timeout timer value (in seconds) that specifies the amount of time to wait between
retries when the server is busy in the Timeout (Sec) field.
Default is 3 seconds.
6. Enter the number of attempts to be made to reach a server before assuming it is unreachable
in the Attempts field.
Default is 3 attempts.
7.

Click OK to return to the AAA Settings tab.
The Radius Servers and Sequence table displays the following information:

• Network Address — The network address of the TACACS+ server.
• TCP Port — The TCP port number of the LDAP server.
• TimeOut (Sec) — The timeout value in seconds specified when sending an authentication
request to the server. Default is 3.

• Attempts — The number of attempts made to reach a server before determining it is
unreachable. Default is 3.

Configuring Common Access Card authentication
NOTE

Common Access Card (CAC) authentication does not support SMI Agent and launch-in-context dialog
boxes.

NOTE
CAC authentication is only supported on Windows systems.
Common Access Card (CAC) authentication requires the following preparations:

• Make sure to connect the CAC reader to the Management application client workstation.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

387

12

AAA Settings tab

• Make sure to obtain and install the active client library on the client workstation. The active
client library is not shipped with the Management application.

• Make sure to log in to the Management application client using a smartcard.
• Make sure that the Active Directory (AD) server you want to use is on the network that the
Management application manages.

• Make sure that the Management application server and client system clocks are synchronized
even if they are in different time zones.

• Make sure that the AD server you want to use is connected to the Management application
client.

• Make sure you have the username and password of the Management application service
account configured on the AD server to which the client is connected. It is recommended that
you create and use the following name for this account: NetworkMangementSVC.

NOTE

If there are Management application clients from different domains, then each client’s AD
server must be configured with same user account and Kerberos Service Principal Name (SPN)

• Make sure you have the Kerberos SPN that is configured on the Key Distribution Center (KDC)
of the AD server and map it to the Management application server account. It is
recommended that you create and use the following name for this account:
NetworkMangementSPN.
If you need to add a Kerberos SPN to the KDC of the AD server, use the following command on
the Management application client or the AD server to which the client is connected:
setspn -S /

For example: setspn -S NetworkManagementSPN/DCM-VNext-65.JCB.com
NetworkManagementSvc

NOTE

If there are multiple Management application servers, then a Kerberos Service Principal Name
must be added for each server.
To configure CAC authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. Select CAC from the Primary Authentication list.
3. Set the authorization preference by selecting one of the following options from the
Authorization Preference list:

• Local Database — Uses the AD server for authentication and the Management application
local database for authorization.

• Primary Authentication Server — Uses the AD server for authentication and authorization.
If you select Primary Authentication Server or LDAP Authorization, CAC authentication uses the
same AD servers for authentication and authorization.
4. Enter the username for the Management application service account configured on the AD
server in the Username field.

388

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

5. Enter the password for the Management application service account configured on the AD
server in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
6. Enter the Kerberos SPN in the Kerberos Service Principal Name field.
The SPN name uses the following syntax: /, where hostname is
the Management application server’s host name with domain name. For example:
NetworkManagementSPN/DCM-VNext-65.JCB.COM
7.

Test the established active connection with the server by clicking Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays. Test performs the following functions and
verifications:

• Obtains the Kerberos Ticket Granting Ticket (TGT) of the currently logged in user from
Windows cached credentials.

• Sends the TGT to the AD server to which the Management application server is connected
and requests the session ticket for the SPN configured on AD server.
Kerberos encryptsthe session ticket with the credentials of the AD server user account
mapped to this SPN.

• Logs on to the AD of the Management application server using the AD server
single-sign-on (SSO) service account.

• Verifies the service ticket by decrypting it using AD server SSO service account credentials.
8. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
9. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring switch authentication
Switch authentication enables you to authenticate a user account against the switch database and
the Management application server. You can configure up to three switches and specify the fall
back order if one or more of the switches is not available.

NOTE

Switch authentication is only supported on Fabric OS devices.
To configure switch authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. For Primary Authentication, select Switch.
3. Click Add.
4. Enter the switch IP address and click OK.
You can add up to three switches.
5. Select a switch and click the Up or Down button to set the fall back order.
6. Select a switch and click Delete to remove a switch from the list.
7.

Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary
Authentication list:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

389

12

AAA Settings tab

• Local Database
• None
8. Click Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays.
9. Enter your user ID and password and click Test.
Test verifies your user ID and password on the switch and verifies user privileges on the
Management application server.
10. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
11. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring Windows authentication
Windows authentication enables you to authenticate a user account against the Windows user
accounts and the Management application server when running on Windows hosts.
The following list details the supported Windows authentication types and the associated
platforms:

• NT domain authentication — supported on Windows XP/2003/2008 platforms only
• Windows Workgroup authentication — supported on Windows XP/2003/2008 platforms only
• Windows local user accounts — supported on Windows XP/2003/2008 platforms only.
To configure Windows authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. For Primary Authentication, select Windows Domain.
3. Enter the domain name in the Windows Domain Name field.
4. Set secondary authentication by selecting one of the following options from the Secondary
Authentication list:

• Local Database
• None
5. Click Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays.
1. In the User ID field, choose one of the following options:

• To authenticate a user account against the current domain, enter your user name.
• To authenticate a user account against a different domain, enter Domain\User_Name.
2. Enter your password in the Password field and click OK.
Test verifies your user ID and password on the Windows domain and verifies user privileges on
the Management application server.
3. Click Apply to save the configuration.

390

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AAA Settings tab

12

To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
4. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Configuring local database authentication
Local database authentication enables you to authenticate a user account against the local
database and the Management application server.
To configure local database authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. For Primary Authentication, select Local Database.
3. Click Test.
The Test Authentication dialog box displays.
4. Enter your user ID and password and click Test.
Test verifies your user ID and password for the local database and verifies user privileges on
the Management application server.
5. Click Apply to save the configuration.
To display the authentication audit trail, refer to “Displaying the client authentication audit
trail” on page 391.
6. Click Close to close the Server Management Console.

Displaying the client authentication audit trail
All responses to authentication requests coming from clients are logged to an audit trail log file.
This file is automatically backed up on the first day of every month.
1. Select the AAA Settings tab.
2. Click Display next to Authentication Audit Trail.
The Login dialog box displays.
3. Enter your username and password in the appropriate fields and click OK.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.
The Authentication Audit Trail log displays.
The audit trail shows user names that have attempted to log in to the Management application,
and changes to user authentication.
4. Click the Client to Server Authentication tab to view the client to server authentication status.
5. Click the Authentication Settings Changes tab to view the previous authentication changes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

391

12

Restore tab

Restore tab
The Restore tab enables you to restore the application data files used by the Management
application server.

Restoring the database
To restore application data files, you must know the path to the backup files. This path is
configured from the Server > Options dialog box. For more information about backup, refer to
“Server Data backup” on page 128.

NOTE
You cannot restore data from a previous version of the Management application.

NOTE

You cannot restore data from a higher or lower configuration (Trial or Licensed version) of the
Management application.

NOTE

You cannot restore data from a different package of the Management application.
To restore the application data files, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Stop all services.
3. Click the Restore tab.
4. Click Browse to select the path (defined in the Output Directory field on the Options dialog box
- Backup pane) to the database backup location.
5. Click Restore.
Upon completion, a message displays the status of the restore operation. Click OK to close the
message and the Server Management Console. For the restored data to take effect, re-launch
the Configuration Wizard using the instructions in “Launching the Configuration Wizard” on
page 5.

Technical Support Information tab
The Technical Support Information tab of the SMC allows you to capture technical support
information for the Management application as well as the configuration files for all switches in
discovered fabrics. This information is saved in a zip file in a location that you specify.

Capturing technical support information
To capture technical support information, complete the following steps.
1. Select the Technical Support Information tab.
2. Select the Include database check box to capture database server support save files and
choose one of the following options:

392

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

HCM Upgrade tab

12

• Select the Partial option to exclude historical data and events from the database capture.
• Select the Full option to include historical data and events from the database capture.
NOTE

It is recommended that you only capture the partial database.

NOTE

You should only capture the full database when you need to debug Historical Performance
Management or Historical Events issues.
3. Enter the path where you want to save the support data and a name for the support save file in
the Output Path field.
For example, Full_Path\Support_Save_File_Name.zip. You can also browse to the location you
want to save the support data and append the file name to the path when you return to the
Technical Support Information tab.
If you do not specify an output path, the Management application automatically saves the data
to the Install_Home/support directory. The default name of the Server Support Save is
DCM-SS-Time_Stamp.

NOTE

For Linux systems, you cannot have blank spaces in the output path (target directory). If the
output path contains blank spaces, the supportShow files are not complete.
4. Click Capture.
A confirmation message displays when the capture is complete.
5. Click OK.

HCM Upgrade tab
The HCM Upgrade tab enables you to upgrade the Management application to include a new
version of HCM.

Upgrading HCM on the Management server
To upgrade HCM, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

393

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

1. Select the HCM Upgrade tab.

FIGURE 147 HCM Upgrade tab
2. Click Browse to select the HCM installation folder location (for example, C:\Program
Files\BROCADE\Adapter on Windows systems and /opt/brocade/adapter on Linux systems).
3. Click Upgrade.
4. Click Close.

SMI Agent Configuration Tool
The SMIA Configuration Tool enables you to configure SMI Agent settings, such as security, CIMOM,
and certificate management. This tool is automatically installed with the Management application
as part of the Server Management Console. This SMIA Configuration Tool consists of the following
tabs:

• Home tab — enables you to access Management application features such as, fabric and host
discovery, role-based access control, application configuration and display options, server
properties, as well as the application name, build, and copyright.

• Authentication tab — enables you to configure mutual authentication for Client, CIMMOM
server, and Indication using a secure protocol.

• CIMOM tab — enables you to configure the CIMOM server port, the CIMOM Bind Network
Address, and the CIMOM log.

• Certificate Management tab — enables you to import Client and Indication certificates, export
Server certificates, as well as view and delete current certificates.

• Summary tab — enables you to view the CIMOM server configuration and current configuration.

394

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

Launching the SMIA configuration tool on Windows
NOTE
All Management application services must be running before you can log into the SMIA
Configuration Tool. To start the Management application services, click Start on the Server
Management Console dialog box.
1. Launch the Server Management Console from the Start menu on the Management application
server.
You can also drag the SMC icon onto your desktop as a short cut.
2. Click Configure SMI Agent on the Server Management Console dialog box.
The Log In dialog box displays.

FIGURE 148 Log In dialog box
3. Enter your username and password in the appropriate fields.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively. If you migrated from a previous
release, your username and password do not change.
4. Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the application to
remember your password the next time you log in.
5. Click Login.
The SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

395

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

FIGURE 149 SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box

Launching the SMIA configuration tool on Unix
NOTE

All Management application services must be running before you can log into the SMIA
Configuration Tool. To start the Management application services, click Start on the Server
Management Console dialog box.
Perform the following steps to launch the Server Management Console on Unix systems.
1. On the Management application server, go to the following directory:
Install_Directory/bin
2. Type the following at the command line:
./smc
OR
sh smc

3. Click Configure SMI Agent on the Server Management Console dialog box.
The Login dialog box displays.
4. Enter your username and password in the appropriate fields and click OK.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively. If you migrated from a previous
release, your username and password do not change.
The SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box displays.

396

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

Launching a remote SMIA configuration tool
To launch a remote SMIA configuration tool, complete the following steps.
1. Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Management application server in the
Address bar.
If the web server port number does not use the default (443 if is SSL Enabled; otherwise, the
default is 80), you must enter the web server port number in addition to the IP address. For
example, IP_Address:Web_Server_Port_Number.
The Management application web start screen displays.
2. Click the SMIA configuration tool application web start link.
The Log In dialog box displays.
3. Enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.

NOTE

Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server authentication.
4. Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the application to
remember your password the next time you log in.
5. Click Login.
The SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box displays

Service Location Protocol (SLP) support
The Management application SMI Agent uses Service Location Protocol (SLP) to allow applications
to discover the existence, location, and configuration of WBEM services in enterprise networks.
You do not need a WBEM client to use SLP discovery to find a WBEM Server; that is, SLP discovery
might already know about the location and capabilities of the WBEM Server to which it wants to
send its requests. In such environments, you do not need to start the SLP component of the
Management application SMI Agent.
However, in a dynamically changing enterprise network environment, many WBEM clients might
choose to use SLP discovery to find the location and capabilities of other WBEM Servers. In such
environments, start the SLP component of the Management application SMI Agent to allow
advertisement of its existence, location, and capabilities.
SLP installation is optional and you can configure it during Management application configuration.
Once installed, SLP starts whenever the Management application SMI Agent starts.

SLP support includes the following components:
• slpd script starts the slpd platform
• slpd program acts as a Service Agent (SA). A different slpd binary executable file exists for UNIX
and Windows systems.

• slptool script starts the slptool platform-specific program
• slptool program can be used to verify whether SLP is operating properly or not. A different
slptool exists for UNIX and Windows.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

397

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

By default, the Management application SMI Agent is configured to advertise itself as a
Service Agent (SA). The advertised SLP template shows its location (IP address) and the WBEM
Services it supports. The default advertised WBEM services show the Management application
SMI Agent:

• accepts WBEM requests over HTTP without SSL on TCP port 5988
• accepts WBEM requests over HTTPS using SSL on TCP port 5989

slptool commands
Use the following slptool commands to verify whether the SLP is operating properly.

• slptool findsrvs service:service-agent
Use this command to verify that the Management application SMI Agent SLP service is properly
running as a Service Agent (SA).
Example output: service:service-agent://127.0.0.1,65535

• slptool findsrvs service:wbem
Use this command to verify that the Management application SMI Agent SLP service is properly
advertising its WBEM services.
Example outputs:
service:wbem:https://10.0.1.3:5989,65535
service:wbem:http://10.0.1.3:5988,65535
This output shows the functionalities of the Management application SMI Agent:

• accepts WBEM requests over HTTP using SSL on TCP port 5989
• accepts WBEM requests over HTTP without SSL on TCP port 5988
• slptool findattrs service:wbem:https://IP_Address:Port
NOTE

Where IP_Address:Port is the IP address and port number that display when you use the
slptool findsrvs service:wbem command.
Use this command to verify that Management application SMI Agent SLP service is properly
advertising its WBEM SLP template over the HTTP protocol.
Example output:
Install_Home\cimom\bin>slptool findattrs service:wbem:http://10.24.35.61:5988
(template-type=wbem),(template-version=1.0),(template-description=This
template describes the attributes used for advertising WBEM Servers),
(template-url-syntax=http://10.24.35.61:5988),(service-hi-name=WBEM Solutions
J WBEM Server),(service-hi-description=WBEM Solutions J WBEM Server),
(service-id=WBEMSolutions:f1f65c3b-27f1-4b70-9ced-e412e93a8d5e),(Communicatio
nMechanism=CIM-XML),(OtherCommunicationMechanismDescription =null),
(InteropSchemaNamespace=interop),(ProtocolVersion=1.2),
(FunctionalProfilesSupported=Basic Read,Basic Write,Schema Manipulation,
Instance Manipulation,Association Traversal,Query Execution,Qualifier
Declaration,Indications),(FunctionalProfileDescriptions=null),(MultipleOperat
ionsSupported=true),(AuthenticationMechanismsSupported=Basic),(Authentication
MechanismDescriptions=null),(Namespace=root/brocade1,interop),(Classinfo=0,0)

398

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

,(RegisteredProfilesSupported=SNIA:SMI-S,DMTF:Profile Registration,SNIA:FC
HBA,DMTF:LaunchInContext,SNIA:Fan,SNIA:Fabric,SNIA:Switch,DMTF:Role Based
Authorization,SNIA:Power Supply,SNIA:Sensors,SNIA:Server)

• slptool findattrs service:wbem:http://IP_Address:Port
NOTE

Where IP_Address:Port is the IP address and port number that display when you use the
slptool findsrvs service:wbem command.
Use this command to verify that the Management application SMI Agent SLP service is properly
advertising its WBEM SLP template over the HTTPS protocol.
Example output:
Install_Home\cimom\bin>slptool findattrs service:wbem:
https://10.24.35.61:5989(template-type=wbem),(template-version=1.0),(template
-description=This template describes the attributes used for advertising WBEM
Servers),(template-url-syntax=https://10.24.35.61:5989),(service-hi-name=WBEM
Solutions J WBEM Server),(service-hi-description=WBEM Solutions J WBEM
Server),(service-id=WBEMSolutions:f1f65c3b-27f1-4b70-9ced-e412e93a8d5e),(Comm
unicationMechanism=CIM-XML),(OtherCommunicationMechanismDescription
=null),(InteropSchemaNamespace=interop),(ProtocolVersion=1.2),(FunctionalProf
ilesSupported=Basic Read,Basic Write,Schema Manipulation,Instance
Manipulation,Association Traversal,Query Execution,Qualifier Declaration,
Indications),(FunctionalProfileDescriptions=null),
(MultipleOperationsSupported=true),(AuthenticationMechanismsSupported=Basic),
(AuthenticationMechanismDescriptions=null),(Namespace=root/brocade1,interop),
(Classinfo=0,0),(RegisteredProfilesSupported=SNIA:SMI-S,DMTF:Profile
Registration,SNIA:FC HBA,DMTF:LaunchInContext,SNIA:Fan,SNIA:Fabric,
SNIA:Switch,DMTF:Role Based Authorization,SNIA:Power Supply,SNIA:Sensors,
SNIA:Server)

SLP on UNIX systems
This section describes how to verify the SLP daemon on UNIX systems.
SLP file locations on UNIX systems
• SLP log — Install_Home/cimom /cfg/slp.log

• SLP daemon — Install_Home/cimom /cfg/slp.conf
You can reconfigure the SLP daemon by modifying this file.

• SLP register — Install_Home/cimom /cfg/slp.reg
You can statically register an application that does not dynamically register with SLP using
SLPAPIs by modifying this file. For more information about these files, read the comments
contained in them, or refer to http://www.openslp.org/doc/html/UsersGuide/index.html.
Verifying SLP service installation and operation on UNIX systems
1. Open a command window.
2. Type % su root and press Enter to become the root user.
3. Type # Install_Home/cimom/bin/slptool findsrvs service:service-agent and press Enter to
verify the SLP service is running as a Service Agent (SA).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

399

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

4. Type # Install_Home/cimom/bin/slptool findsrvs service:wbem and press Enter to verify the
SLP service is advertising its WBEM services.
5. Choose one of the following options to verify the SLP service is advertising the WBEM SLP
template over its configured client protocol adapters.

• Type # Install_Home/cimom /bin/slptool findattrs service:wbem:http://IP_Address:Port
and press Enter.

• Type # Install_Home/cimom /bin/slptool findattrs service:wbem:https://IP_Address:Port
and press Enter.

NOTE

Where IP_Address:Port is the IP address and port number that display when you use the
slptool findsrvs service:wbem command.

SLP on Windows systems
This section describes how to verify the SLP daemon on Windows systems.
SLP file locations on Windows systems
• SLP log — Install_Home\cimom \cfg\slp.log

• SLP daemon — Install_Home\cimom\cfg\slp.conf
You can reconfigure the SLP daemon by modifying this file.

• SLP register — Install_Home\cimom\cfg\slp.reg
You can statically register an application that does not dynamically register with SLP using
SLPAPIs by modifying this file. For more information about these files, read the comments
contained in them, or refer to http://www.openslp.org/doc/html/UsersGuide/index.html.
Verifying SLP service installation and operation on Windows systems
1. Launch the Server Management Console from the Start menu.
2. Click Start to start the SLP service.
3. Open a command window.
4. Type cd c:\Install_Home\cimom \bin and press Enter to change to the directory where slpd.bat
is located.
5. Type > slptool findsrvs service:service-agent and press Enter to verify the SLP service is
running as a Service Agent.
6. Type > slptool findsrvs service:wbem and press Enter to verify the SLP service is advertising its
WBEM services.
7.

Choose one of the following options to verify the SLP service is advertising the WBEM SLP
template over its configured client protocol adapters.

• Type > slptool findattrs service:wbem:http://IP_Address:Port and press Enter.
• Type > slptool findattrs service:wbem:https://IP_Address:Port and press Enter.
NOTE

Where IP_Address:Port is the IP address and port number that display when you use the
slptool findsrvs service:wbem command.

400

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

Home tab
The Home tab of the SMIA Configuration Tool enables you to access the following Management
application features or information:

• Fabric Discovery — enables you to view discovered fabrics, discover new fabrics, as well as edit
the default SNMP configuration.

• Host Discovery — enables you to view discovered hosts, discover new hosts, as well as edit the
default SNMP configuration. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Host discovery” on
page 93.

• Users — enables you to create or delete Management application users with System
Administrator privileges. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “User accounts” on page 185.

• Options — enables you to configure the Management application settings. For step-by-step
instructions, refer to “Application Configuration” on page 127.

• Server — enables you to view server properties. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Viewing
server properties” on page 9.

• About — enables you to display information about the Management application, including the
build number, Java version, and trademark information.

• Upgrade button (Trial version only) — enables you to upgrade from managing 2560 switch
ports to 9000 switch ports. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Upgrading the Management
application” on page 38.

Accessing Management application features
To access Management application features such as, fabric and host discovery, role-based access
control, application configuration and display options, server properties, as well as the application
name, build, and copyright, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Home tab, if necessary.
2. Select from the following to access the feature or dialog box.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Fabric Discovery
Host Discovery
Users
Options
Server
About
Upgrade (Trial version only)

3. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Authentication tab
NOTE

You must have User Management Read and Write privileges to make changes on the CIMOM tab.
For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The Authentication tab enables you to configure mutual authentication for Client and Indication
using a secure protocol.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

401

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

Enabling or disabling CIM client and indication mutual authentication
When you enable client mutual authentication, all CIM client and indication requests to the SMI
Agent must pass credentials (KeyStore and TrustStore) to validate the requests. The KeyStore file
provides the credentials and the TrustStore file verifies the credentials. When you enable indication
mutual authentication, both the CIM client and the CIMOM server maintain the TrustStore files.
The CIM client KeyStore file sends credentials to be validated by the CIMOM server TrustStrore file
for any communication from the CIM client to the CIMOM server and the CIMOM server KeyStore
file sends credentials to be validated by the CIM client TrustStrore file for any communication from
the CIMOM server to the CIM client
To enable or disable CIM client and indication mutual authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Authentication tab.

FIGURE 150 Authentication tab
2. Select the Enable Client Mutual Authentication check box, as needed.
If the check box is checked, CIM client mutual authentication is enabled. If the check box is
clear (default), client mutual authentication is disabled.
3. Select the Enable Indication Mutual Authentication check box, as needed.
If the check box is checked, indication mutual authentication is enabled. If the check box is
clear (default), indication mutual authentication is disabled.
4. Click Apply.

NOTE

Changes on this tab take effect after the next CIMOM server restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).

402

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

5. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Configuring CIMOM server authentication
CIMOM server authentication is the authentication mechanism between the CIM client and the
CIMOM Server. You can configure the CIMOM server to allow the CIM client to query the CIMOM
server without providing credentials; however, the CIMOM server requires the Management
application credentials to connect to the Management application server to retrieve the required
data. Therefore, if you select no authentication, you must provide Management application
credentials to retrieve data from the Management application server.
To configure CIMOM server authentication, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Authentication tab.
2. Choose from one of the following options:

• Select No Authentication to allow the CIM client to query the CIMOM server without
providing credentials; however, note that the CIMOM server requires the Management
application credentials to connect to the Management application server to retrieve the
required data. To provide Management application credentials, complete the following
steps.
a.

Enter the Management application user name in the Username field.

b.

Enter the Management application user password in the Password field.

• Select Management_Application Authentication to allow the CIM client to query the
CIMOM server and the Management application server using the credentials configured
on the Users tab.
3. Click Apply.

NOTE

Changes on this tab take effect after the next CIMOM server restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
4. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

403

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

CIMOM tab
NOTE
You must have SAN - SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes on the
CIMOM tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The CIMOM tab enables you to configure the CIMOM server port, the CIMOM Bind Network
Address, and the CIMOM log.

Configuring the SMI Agent port number
To configure the SMI Agent port number, complete the following steps.
1. Click the CIMOM tab.

FIGURE 151 CIMOM tab
2. Select or clear the Enable SSL check box, to enable or disable SSL for the SMI Agent.

NOTE

Disabling SSL will disable Indication and Client Mutual Authentication.
If the check box is checked (default), SSL is enabled. If the check box is clear, SSL is disabled.
3. Enter the SMI Agent port number in the SMI Agent Port # field.
This port number must be within the range of 1 through 65535. Defaults are 5989 with SSL
enabled and 5988 with SSL disabled.

404

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

4. Click Apply.

NOTE

Changes on this tab take effect after the next CIMOM server restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
If you disabled SSL, a confirmation message displays. Click Yes to continue.
5. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Configuring the CIMOM Bind Network Address
NOTE

You must have SAN - SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes on the
CIMOM tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To configure the network bind address, complete the following steps.
1. Click the CIMOM tab.
2. Select a network address from the IP Configuration Bind Network Address list to which you
want to bind the CIMOM server.
The default network address is the host system name.
3. Click Apply.

NOTE

Changes on this tab take effect after the next CIMOM server restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
4. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

405

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

Configuring the CIMOM log
NOTE

You must have SAN - SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes on the
CIMOM tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To configure the CIMOM log, complete the following steps.
1. Click the CIMOM tab.
2. Select a log category from the Log Level list to start logging support data for the server.
Options include the following:

• Off — select to turn off logging support data.
• Severe — select to only log support data that indicates serious failures which prevent
normal program operation.

• Warning — select to only log support data that indicates a potential problem.
• Info (default) — select to only log support data for informational messages.
• Config — select to only log support data for static configuration messages used to assist in
debugging problems associated with particular configurations.

•
•
•
•

Fine — select to only log message data used to provide trace information.
Finer — select to only log message data used to provide detailed trace information.
Finest — select to only log message data used to provide highly detailed trace information.
All — select to log support data for all messages.

3. Click Apply.

NOTE

Changes on this tab take effect after the next CIMOM server restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).
4. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

406

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

Certificate Management tab
NOTE
You must have SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes on the Certificate
Management tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The Certificate Management tab enables you to manage your CIM client and Indication
authentication certificates. Using this tab, you can perform the following operations:

•
•
•
•

“Importing a certificate”
“Viewing a certificate”
“Exporting a certificate”
“Deleting a certificate”

Importing a certificate
To import a certificate, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Certificate Management tab.

FIGURE 152 Certificate Management tab
2. Select the Client or Indication from the Authentication list.
The appropriate certificates display in the Certificates list.
3. Enter the full path or browse to the certificate you want to import (for example, on Windows the
path is C:\Certificates\cimom-indication-auth2.cer and on Linux the path is
opt/Certificates/cimom-indication-auth2.cer).
You can only import certificate files with the CER extension (.cer).
4. Enter a name for the certificate in the Certificate Name field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

407

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

5. Click Import.
The new certificate displays in the Certificates list and text box.
If the certificate location is not valid, an error message displays. Click OK to close the message
and reenter the full path to the certificate location.
If you did not enter a certificate name, an error message displays. Click OK to close the
message and enter a name for the certificate.
If the certificate file is empty or corrupted, an error message displays. Click OK to close the
message.
6. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Viewing a certificate
NOTE
You must have SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view the Certificate Management tab. For
more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To view a certificate, complete the following steps.
1. Select Client or Indication from the Authentication list.
The appropriate certificates display in the Certificates list.
2. Select the certificate you want to view in the Certificates list.
The certificate details display in the Certificates text box.
3. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Exporting a certificate
NOTE

You must have SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes to the Certificate
Management tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To export a certificate, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Certificate Management tab.
2. Select Client or Indication from the Authentication list.
The appropriate certificates display in the Certificates list.
3. Select the certificate you want to export in the Certificates list.
4. Click Export Server Certificate.
The Save As dialog box displays.
5. Browse to the directory where you want to export the certificate.
6. Edit the certificate name in the File Name field, if necessary.
7.

Click Save.

8. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

408

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

Deleting a certificate
NOTE

You must have SMI Operation Read and Write privileges to view or make changes to the Certificate
Management tab. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To delete a certificate, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Certificate Management tab.
2. Select Client or Indication from the Authentication list.
The appropriate certificates display in the Certificates list.
3. Select the certificate you want to delete in the Certificates list.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The selected certificate is removed from the Certificates list.
6. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Summary tab
The Summary tab enables you to view summary information about the Server configuration and
the current configuration.

Viewing the configuration summary
To view summary information about the Server configuration and the current configuration,
complete the following steps.

NOTE
Server configuration changes in the Summary tab only take effect after the CIMOM restart.

NOTE

You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 12.X.X > Server Management Console).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

409

12

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

1. Click the Summary tab.

FIGURE 153 Summary tab
2. Review the summary.

NOTE

When the CIMOM server is stopped, the server configuration information does not display on
the Summary tab.
The following information is included in the summary.

TABLE 38

410

Field/Component

Description

Client Mutual Authentication

Displays whether or not the client mutual authentication is enabled or
disabled for the Server Configuration and the Current Configuration.

Indication Mutual Authentication

Displays whether or not the indication mutual authentication is enabled
or disabled for the Server Configuration and the Current Configuration.

CIMOM Server Authentication

Displays whether or not the CIMOM server authentication is enabled or
disabled for the Server Configuration and the Current Configuration.

User Name

Displays the user name for the Server Configuration and the Current
Configuration. Only enabled if CIMOM Server Authentication is No
Authentication.

SSL

Displays whether or not the SSL is enabled or disabled for the Server
Configuration and the Current Configuration.

SMI Agent Port #

Displays the SMI Agent port number for the Server Configuration and the
Current Configuration.

Bind Network Address

Displays the Bind Network address for the Server Configuration and the
Current Configuration.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

12

TABLE 38
Field/Component

Description

Log Level

Displays the log level for the Server Configuration and the Current
Configuration. Options include the following:
• 10000 — Off
• 1000 — Severe
• 900 — Warning
• 800 — Info (default)
• 700 — Config
• 500 — Fine
• 400 — Finer
• 300 — Finest
• 0 — All

Managed Ports

Displays the number of managed ports. For more information about
managed port count rules, refer to “Managed count” on page 35.

Licensed Ports

Displays the number of licensed ports.

3. Click Close to close the SMIA Configuration Tool dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

411

12

412

SMI Agent Configuration Tool

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

13

Wireless Management

In this chapter
• Wireless management overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wireless device discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wireless devices on the dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Port groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• View management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wireless device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuration repository and backup management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CLI configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cluster mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VLAN management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Performance management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Policy Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Fault management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• AP Products report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413
414
414
415
415
416
416
416
418
419
420
420
421
421
421
422

Wireless management overview
Wireless controllers manage access points by providing centralized management of system wide
wireless LAN functions, such as security policies, intrusion prevention, and RF management. The
controller applies rules or actions to all devices on the wireless network. The controller also collects
management data from the individual access points and transfers that data to a centralized
controller.
Wireless access points allow wireless devices, such as laptops and smart phones, to connect to a
wired network. Access points receive data from wireless devices and forward the data to the
Ethernet switch.
The Management application supports some management operations of the wireless devices in
the network. However, the Management application does not provide full feature access for
wireless controllers and access points. This chapter details the management features currently
available for wireless controllers and standalone access points.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

413

13

Wireless devices

Wireless devices
The Management application supports three models of wireless controllers.

TABLE 39

Wireless controller models

Device Name

Firmware required

RFS 4000

Mobility 5.3 or later

RFS 6000

Mobility 5.3 or later

RFS 7000

Mobility 5.3 or later

The Management application supports four models of wireless access points.

TABLE 40

Wireless access points

Device Name

Firmware required

AP 650

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

AP 7131

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

AP 7131N

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

AP 5181

Mobility 2.5.X (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

AP 6511

Mobility 4.1.1 (standalone mode)
Mobility 5.1 1 (adaptive mode)

1

The Management application cannot discover or manage wireless access points running Mobility 5.1.

Wireless device discovery
The Management application enables you to discover individual wireless devices or multiple
wireless devices using a discovery profile.

NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode cannot be discovered by the Management application.
Instructions for discovering IP devices are detailed in Chapter 3, “Discovery” and include
information about the following:

• “Configuring a discovery profile” on page 64
• “Adding an IP device to discovery” on page 84
After discovery, the Management application inspects the SNMP trap recipient and syslog recipient
registration on wireless controllers. If there is an error with the registration, a Master Log event
displays as a Warning event. The Warning event provides the reason for the error to enable you to
fix the problem.

414

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Wireless devices on the dashboard

13

Wireless devices on the dashboard
Wireless controllers and standalone access points display in the following dashboard widgets:

•
•
•
•

IP Inventory
IP Status
AP Status
Status

NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the dashboard.
For more information about the Dashboard, refer to Chapter 7, “Dashboard Management” which
includes information about the following:

•
•
•
•

“Dashboard overview” on page 211
“Status widgets” on page 224
“Performance monitors” on page 237
“User-defined performance monitors” on page 264

Port groups
Port groups allow you to group ports together across network devices to perform common
port-based configuration and monitoring activities.
Once configured you can use port groups to perform the following:

• Deploy common configurations to all ports in a group.
• Collect port usage data for all ports in a group.
You can see all port groups; however, under each group, you can only see devices that belong to
your area of responsibility (AOR). You can only see user-defined port groups that belong to your
AOR.
Instructions for managing port groups are detailed in Chapter 4, “Management Groups” and
include information about the following:

•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a port group” on page 122
“Editing a port group” on page 123
“Duplicating a port group” on page 124
“Viewing port group properties” on page 125
“Deleting a port group” on page 126

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

415

13

View management

View management
Wireless controllers and standalone access points display in the Network Objects, L2 Topology, IP
Topology, and VLAN Topology views.

NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the topology.
Instructions for managing customized views of the topology are detailed in Chapter 8, “View
Management” and include information about the following:

•
•
•
•
•

“Displaying topology views” on page 306
“Network Objects view” on page 307
“IP Topology view” on page 309
“L2 Topology view” on page 309
“VLAN Topology view” on page 310

Wireless device properties
NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the Management application.
The Management application enables you to view properties for individual devices as well as
device group properties.
Instructions for viewing wireless device properties are detailed in the following sections:

• “Viewing product group properties” on page 120
• “Viewing IP device and port properties” on page 1314

Element Manager
NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the Management application.
The Management application enables you to perform additional configuration of the wireless
devices using an Element Manager (web-based graphical user interface (GUI)) or command line
interface (CLI).
The Element Manager (Brocade Mobility) is a software management application that allows full
control of all managed features for the wireless devices in your IP network. For more information
about the Element Manager, refer to the Brocade Mobility RFS4000, RFS6000, and RFS7000
System Reference Guide available at http://www.brocade.com.
The CLI also enables you to configure, monitor, and troubleshoot wireless controllers. For more
information about the command line interface and a list of available commands, refer to the
Brocade Mobility RFS4000, RFS6000, and RFS7000 CLI Reference Guide available at
http://www.brocade.com.

416

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager

13

Browser and system requirements
The Element Manager requires a browser supporting Adobe Flash Player 10. The system accessing
the Element Manager should have a minimum of 512Mb RAM for the Element Manager to display
and function properly.
The following browsers have been validated with the Element Manager:

• Firefox 3.6
• Internet Explorer 7.x
• Internet Explorer 8.x
NOTE

Leading and trailing spaces are not allowed in any text fields in the Element Manager. In addition,
the Element Manager does not support the “?” character in text fields.

Launching the Element Manager
NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the Management application.
To launch the Element Manager, complete the following steps.
1. On the Product List, right-click the device you want to manage and select Element Manager >
Web.
OR
On the Topology Map (L2 or IP only), right-click the device you want to manage and select
Element Manager > Web.
If the device credentials match the credentials provided in discovery, the Element Manager
displays.
If the device credentials do not match the credentials provided in discovery, the Element
Manager login dialog box displays. Continue with step 2.
2. Enter your user name in the Username field.
The default user name is admin.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
The default password admin123.
4. Click Login.
The Element Manager displays.
OR
1. Select a device in the Product List.
2. Select Configure > Element Manager > Web.
The Element Manager login dialog box displays.
3. Enter your user name in the Username field.
The default user name is admin.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

417

13

Configuration repository and backup management

4. Enter your password in the Password field.
The default password admin123.
5. Click Login.
The Element Manager displays.
OR
1. Select Reports > Wired Products from the main menu.
The Wired Products report displays.
2. Click the IP address of a product in the IP Address column.
The Element Manager displays.

Launching a Telnet session
NOTE
Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the Management application.
You can use Telnet to log in and issue command line-based commands to a device.

NOTE

The device must have a valid IP address. If the device does not have a valid IP address, the Telnet
selection will not be available on the Tools menu or the shortcut menu. You must right-click the
device icon, select Properties, and enter the device’s IP address before you can open a Telnet
session.
To launch the CLI, complete the following steps.
On the Product List or Topology Map (L2 or IP only), right-click a device and select CLI through
Server.
The Telnet session window displays.

Configuration repository and backup management
NOTE
Requires Mobility 5.3 or later.
Configuration repository and backup allows you to display each product configuration, including the
name of the product, the version number of the configuration, the software release the product is
running, and the product type, compare configurations, and backup configurations to the
management server.
Instructions for configuration repository and backup are detailed in “Configuration Repository and
Backup” on page 743 and include information about the following:

•
•
•
•

418

“Saving the configuration status” on page 746
“Viewing the configuration” on page 748
“Restoring a configuration” on page 750 (You can only restore configurations as startup.)
“Searching the configuration repository” on page 751

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI configuration management

•
•
•
•
•
•

13

“Exporting a configuration to a text file” on page 752
“Comparing configuration snapshots” on page 756
“Generating a configuration snapshot report” on page 758
“Viewing the pre- and post-configuration snapshot” on page 759
“Saving a configuration snapshot” on page 760
“Scheduling a configuration backup” on page 762

CLI configuration management
CLI configuration provides a text-based interface that allows you to enter command line interface
(CLI) commands to create configurations and reports for IronWare and Network OS devices. You
can deploy the configurations and reports on demand or at a scheduled time.
Instructions for creating product and monitoring configurations are detailed in Chapter 25, “CLI
Configuration Management” and include information about the following:

• “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779
• “Creating a monitoring configuration” on page 795
• “Editing the Motorola Controller CLI responses properties file” on page 792
Some controller CLI commands require you to confirm command execution. By default, the
Management application confirms “Yes” to all confirmation commands. If you want to change the
confirmation command to “No” or “Abort”, complete the following steps.
1. Open the ipConfig.properties (located in Install_Home\conf\) file in a text editor.
2. Edit the flags, as needed.
# This flag will control the execution of Network OS and Controller
confirmation CLI commands.
# For example, reload or copy running-config startup-config. With this option
# you can pass either yes(1) or no(2) or stop the execution(3)
#
CLIConfigManager.ValueForConfirmationCLICommands=1
CLIConfigManager.ValueForConfirmationCLICommands.MinInt=1
CLIConfigManager.ValueForConfirmationCLICommands.MaxInt=3
CLIConfigManager.ValueForConfirmationCLICommands.IsDisplay=false

3. Save and close the file.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

419

13

Cluster mode

Cluster mode
A cluster is a set of wireless controllers working collectively to provide redundancy and load
sharing. You can discover wireless controllers in cluster mode.
To verify that the wireless controller is in cluster mode, check the following:
1. Check the Properties dialog box.
Right-click the wireless controller and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.

• If the controller is the active controller, the Access Points tab is included.
• If the controller is the standby controller, the Access Points tab is not included.
2. Check the Detailed AP Products report (refer to “AP Products report” on page 422).
For wireless controllers in cluster mode, it should show the cluster name (“Detailed AP
Products report” on page 423)
3. Check the Wired Products report (refer to “IP Wired Products report” on page 1233).
In the Wired Products report, click the controller in cluster mode to display the Cluster details:

• Cluster Name — The cluster name.
• Cluster Mode — The cluster mode of the AP. Options include Active and Standby.
If the controller is the active controller, the cluster mode is Active.
If the controller is the standby controller, the cluster mode is Standby.
Cluster members — The IP address of the controllers in cluster mode.



•

4. Check the port group (“Port Groups” on page 122) connected to the AP.
The port group should only show the port information for the active controller in clustering
mode.

VLAN management
You can use VLAN Manager to view existing Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) configurations on
the wireless products and the network.
Instructions for configuring policy monitors are detailed in Chapter 27, “VLAN Management” and
include information about the following:
“Displaying a list of VLANs” on page 822
“VLAN Manager tabs” on page 822
“Displaying VLANs in the VLAN view” on page 823
“Displaying VLANs by products” on page 825

420

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Performance management

13

Performance management
NOTE

Wireless access points in adaptive mode do not display in the Management application.
Historical performance enables you to collect data from managed wireless devices. You can use
the provided data collectors or create your own data collectors.
Instructions for collecting historical performance data are detailed in “IP historical performance
monitoring” on page 995.

Policy Monitors
Use this feature to provide best practice guidelines for network setup at the fabric, switch, port and
device level as well as software configurations at the product and the Management application
level.
Instructions for configuring policy monitors are detailed in Chapter 36, “Policy Monitor” and include
information about the following:

•
•
•
•
•

“Adding a policy monitor” on page 1108
“Editing a policy monitor” on page 1115
“Configuration rules” on page 1116
“Running a policy monitor” on page 1135
“Viewing a policy monitor report” on page 1136

Fault management
Fault management enables you to monitor your network using the following methods:

• Monitor logs for specified conditions and notify you or run a script when the specified condition
is met.

• Create event-based policies, which contain an event trigger and action.
• Configure E-mail event notification.
Instructions for configuring fault management are detailed in Chapter 37, “Fault Management”.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

421

13

AP Products report

AP Products report
The AP Products report displays general and detailed configuration information about AP products
that are under the management server.
The information on the report comes from the software image version that is in the management
application for that product. To ensure that the latest configuration information is in the
management application, run the Discovery process or resynchronize the product.
To view the AP Products report, select Reports > AP Products from the main menu.
The AP Products report displays.
The AP Products report contains the fields and components detailed in Table 41.

TABLE 41

422

AP Products report

Field/Component

Description

AP Products Count

The number of AP products in the report.

Product status

Whether the AP is online (green icon), offline (red icon), or pending adoption (gray icon).

Name

The name of the product. Click to launch the Detailed AP Report (refer to Table 42).

Connected Switch

The name, IP address, and port number of the switch connected to the AP.

Controller

The name and IP address of the controller managing the AP.

Cluster Name

Controller cluster name.

MAC Address

The AP product MAC. Click to launch the Detailed AP Report (refer to Table 42).

Model

The model of the AP.

RF Domain Name

The RF domain name set for the AP.

Profile Name

The AP profile name.

Serial Number

The serial number of the AP.

Firmware

The firmware level of the AP.

Client Count

Number of wireless clients or stations connected to or associated with the AP.

Last Scanned

The date and time the last time the AP was scanned.

Export list

Click to export the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting and saving IP reports
to a file” on page 1232.

E-mail list

Click to e-mail the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail
recipients” on page 1232.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

AP Products report

13

The Detailed AP Products report contains the fields and components detailed in Table 42.

TABLE 42

Detailed AP Products report

Field/Component

Description

Status

Whether the AP is online (green icon), offline (red icon), or pending adoption (gray icon).

Name

The device name used to identify AP.

MAC Address

The AP device MAC.

Model

The model of the AP.

Serial Number

The serial number of the AP.

Firmware version

The firmware level of the AP.

Connected Switch

IP address of the controller or switch connected to the AP. Also displays the port number
if the AP is directly connected.

Controller

IP address of the controller which manages the AP. Also displays the port number if the
AP is directly connected.

Cluster Name

The controller cluster name.

Profile Name

The AP profile name.

RF Domain Name

The RF domain name set for the AP.

Location

The location set for the AP.

Contact

The contact set for the AP.

Time Zone

The time zone set for the AP.

Country

The country set for the AP.

VLAN for Control
Traffic

The VLAN for control traffic set for the AP.

Client count

The number of wireless clients or stations connected or associated to the AP.

Export list

Click to export the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting and saving IP reports
to a file” on page 1232.

E-mail list

Click to e-mail the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail
recipients” on page 1232.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

423

13

424

AP Products report

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

14

VCS Management

In this chapter
• VCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Logical chassis cluster operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Serial firmware update and activation for Network OS devices . . . . . . . . .
• Support for Network OS VDX 2740 embedded switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VCS product groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Port profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Ethernet fabric traceroute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

425
427
430
431
431
432
432
441
445

VCS
Network OS VCSTM technology is a Layer 2 Ethernet technology that allows you to create flatter,
virtualized, and converged data center networks. VCS technology is scalable, permitting you to
expand your network at your own pace.
VCS technology comprises the following concepts:

• Ethernet fabric
• Distributed intelligence
• Logical chassis
When two or more VCS mode-enabled switches are connected together, they form an Ethernet
fabric and exchange information among each other to implement distributed intelligence. To the
rest of the network, the Ethernet fabric appears as a single logical chassis.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

425

14

VCS

VCS mode types
Beginning with Network OS 4.0, VCS mode encompasses two mode types:

• Fabric cluster mode (shown in Figure 154)—The data path for nodes is distributed, but the
configuration path is not distributed. Each node maintains its configuration database
independently.

• Logical chassis cluster mode (shown in Figure 155)—Both the data and configuration paths are
distributed. The entire cluster can be configured from the principal node. Logical chassis mode
requires Network OS 4.0 or later.

FIGURE 154 Fabric cluster mode

FIGURE 155 Logical chassis cluster mode
For more information about fabric cluster and logical chassis cluster modes, refer to the Network
OS Administrator’s Guide.
The term VCS mode refers to both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis cluster mode unless
otherwise indicated.

426

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Logical chassis cluster operations

14

Ethernet Fabrics view management
The Ethernet Fabrics view displays a map of the traffic for VCS devices on your network. To view the
fabric members and Transparent Interconnection of Lots of Links (TRILL) connections for a fabric,
double-click the fabric in the Product List. To display the topology map for Ethernet Fabrics, you
must have the Main Display - Ethernet Fabric privilege. For more information about privileges, refer
to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
The Ethernet Fabrics view Product List contains all the VCS fabrics known to the system. Within
each VCS fabric, nodes that are part of that VCS fabric display. You can only view one VCS fabric at
a time. Missing TRILL links are not displayed in the Ethernet Fabrics topology.

Logical chassis cluster operations
This section contains these topics:

• “Logical chassis cluster mode discovery”
• “Administratively removing a node from a logical chassis cluster”
• “How the Management application handles a cluster mode change”

Logical chassis cluster mode discovery
The State column of the Discover Setup - IP Dialog (Figure 156) is applicable only to nodes that are
members of a logical chassis cluster. The possible node states are described later in this section.

FIGURE 156 Discovery Setup - IP dialog box with node state for logical chassis cluster
Logical chassis cluster discovery includes the following behavior:

• Manual- or profile-based discovery is the same as for a cluster in fabric cluster mode.
• Uses the IP address of any member of the logical chassis cluster for discovery.
• Sets the cluster IP address to the IP address of the principal node.
NOTE

You can change the principal node for the cluster by running the logical-chassis
principal-priority command from the Network OS prompt. For more information, refer to the
Network OS Command Reference.

• Principal-switch failover does not occur if the cluster is unstable (for example, if the chassis
had been disabled for maintenance) because refresh collection will fail.

• If the cluster is configured with a virtual IP address before its discovery, and then discovery is
initiated, the cluster IP displays the virtual IP address instead of the IP address of the principal
node.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

427

14

Logical chassis cluster operations

• If the cluster is configured with a virtual IP address after it is discovered by the Management
application, the virtual IP address is collected and saved in the database for the next lazy
polling or next adaptive collection.

• If another switch becomes the principal switch, the Management application sets the cluster IP
address to that of the new principal switch at the next lazy polling or next adaptive collection.

• The State column in the Discover Setup - IP dialog applies only to nodes that are in logical
chassis mode. Refer to Figure 156. Possible states are:

-

Online—A node that is currently connected and operational.

-

Offline—A cluster member node that cannot be reached by the primary cluster node.

-

Rejoining—A node that is in the process of rejoining its cluster.

-

Replacing—A node that is being replaced.

On discovery, only online members are considered active cluster members. The
Management application server collects the device, port, and LAG information of active
cluster members. The the Management application client displays the member node as a
cluster member in the Ethernet Fabrics topology.
On refresh, if the member was an active member of a cluster and is now offline, the
member is marked as missing. If the member is not online after three consecutive short
ticks, auto-discovery gets initiated. If auto-chasing fails, the member remains missing.
On refresh, if the member was an active member of the cluster and is now rejoining, then
the member is marked as missing. If the member is not online after three consecutive
short ticks, auto discovery gets initiated. If auto chasing fails, the member remains
missing.
On refresh, if a member node is in the Replacing state, the member is shown as missing.
If the member is in the Replacing state for more than three consecutive short ticks,
auto-discovery gets initiated. If auto-chasing fails, the member remains missing.

Administratively removing a node from a logical chassis cluster
You can remove a node from a logical chassis cluster by using the Network OS command line
interface. For instructions, refer to the Network OS Administrator’s Guide and the Network OS
Command Reference, versions 4.0 or later.
Once the node is removed, all configurations corresponding to that node are removed from the
cluster configuration database.
The deleted node gets rebooted automatically and boots in VCS-disabled mode.
The deleted node also gets marked as missing in the cluster.
The Management application initiates auto-discovery immediately, and the deleted node gets
rediscovered in its current state.
As an example, Figure 157 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box before the administrator
removes a node from the cluster.

428

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Logical chassis cluster operations

14

FIGURE 157 Discover Setup - IP dialog box before removal of node
Figure 158 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box after the administrator has removed the node
with the IP address of 172.26.5.130 from its logical chassis cluster.

FIGURE 158 Discover Setup - IP dialog box after disabling the node from logical chassis cluster
Figure 159 shows the Discover Setup - IP dialog box after The Management application has
performed rediscovery. The node with the IP address of 172.26.5.130 is shown as a degraded link.

FIGURE 159 Discover Setup - IP dialog box after rediscovery

How the Management application handles a cluster
mode change
In Network OS release 4.0, an administrator can change the mode of a cluster from fabric cluster
mode to logical chassis cluster mode, and vice versa. For instructions, refer to the Network OS
Administrator’s Guide and the Network OS Command Reference.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

429

14

Serial firmware update and activation for Network OS devices

NOTE

All cluster-specific configurations are lost during a cluster-mode change.
On refresh collection, the Management application detects the mode change and retains all
database entries related to the cluster.

Serial firmware update and activation for Network OS devices
With Network OS release 4.0, you can update and activate firmware on an entire cluster (either
logical chassis mode or fabric cluster mode), on selected nodes in the cluster, or on nodes in
standalone mode, by performing the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab in the upper-left corner of the Management application.
2. Select Ethernet Fabrics from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Cluster node members (or root node) are displayed, depending on your configuration.
3. Select the desired node or nodes for firmware updates and activation.
4. Right-click the highlighted nodes, then select Firmware > Firmware Management.

NOTE

If you are performing a firmware activation (but not a serial update) on only one node, you can
highlight this node, then perform a right-click and select Firmware > Firmware Activate. If this is
the only action you want to perform, you are done and do not need to continue with the steps
below.
5. In the Firmware Management dialog box, click the Unified Firmware Images tab.
6. Click Update.
7.

From the Hardware Type list, select VDX.

8. Use the Serial Update and Firmware Activate check boxes as desired. For example:

• You can select both boxes and enable the Firmware Activate check box to activate
firmware on each node in a serial process.

• You can leave the Serial Update check box clear and enable the Firmware Activate check
box to activate firmware on each node in a parallel process.

• You can select the Serial Update check box and leave the Firmware Activate check box
unselected to begin the firmware download serially on selected nodes while delaying
firmware activation on each node.
9. Click Next.
10. Follow any additional online instructions, and the procedure(s) that you selected begin.

430

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Support for Network OS VDX 2740 embedded switch

14

Support for Network OS VDX 2740 embedded switch
The Network OS VDX 2740 switch is a 10GB VDX, embedded Network OS switch module for IBM
Pure System Chassis. The VDX 2740 switch gets discovered by the Management application in the
same manner as any other device. Upon discovering this switch, the Management application
registers as the Element Manager for the VDX 2740 switch. The Management application as
Element Manager is available only for the VDX 2740 switch.
To launch the Management application as Element Manager, enter the IP address of the Network
OS VDX 2740 switch in a browser address bar and hit Return.

NOTE

The Network OS VDX 2740 switch requires firmware version nos4.0.0_bbd .

Network OS
Network OS is a scalable network operating system available for the Network OS data center
switching portfolio products, including the VDX product line. Purposely built for mission-critical,
next-generation data centers, Network OS supports the following capabilities:

• Simplified network management
Network OS VCS technology, a fabric-based Layer 2 Ethernet technology that includes virtual
fabric switching, simplifies network management in next-generation virtualized data centers
with auto-provisioning and self-healing capabilities.

• High resiliency
VCS-based distributed computer service improves network resiliency using proven link state
routing.

• Improved network utilization
TRILL-based Layer 2 routing service provides equal-cost multipaths in the network, resulting in
improved network utilization.

• Server virtualization
Automatic Migration of Port Profiles (AMPP) functionality provides fabric-wide configuration of
Ethernet policies, achieves per-port profile forwarding, and enables network-level features to
support virtual machine (VM) mobility.
Refer to “Port profile configuration using the management application” on page 435 for
information about AMPP configuration.

• Network convergence
The Data Center Bridging (DCB)-based lossless Ethernet service provides isolation between IP
and storage traffic over a unified network infrastructure. Multi-hop Fibre Channel over Ethernet
(FCoE) allows an FCoE initiator to communicate with an FCoE target that is a number of hops
away.
Refer to “DCB configuration management” on page 486 for information about lossless
Ethernet services.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

431

14

VCS product groups

VCS product groups
The standalone Network OS switches and the VCS fabric are treated as a single Layer 2 (L2) switch
for both static and dynamic product groups. The product group membership cannot contain fabric
members. The standalone Network OS VDX switches are shown in Table 43.

TABLE 43

Network OS-supported hardware

Device name

Firmware level required

Network OS VDX 2730 10 Gbps connection blade

v2.1.1_fuj

Network OS VDX 2740 switch

nos4.0.0_bbd

Network OS VDX 6710 switch

2.1 or later

Network OS VDX 6720-24 switch

2.1 or later

Network OS VDX 6720-60 switch

2.1 or later

Network OS VDX 6730-32 switch

2.1 or later

Network OS VDX 6730-76 switch

2.1 or later

Network OS VDX 8770-4 switch

3.0 or later

Network OS VDX 8770-8 switch

3.0 or later

Network OS VDX 6740 switch

4.0 or later

Network OS VDX 6740T switch

4.0 or later

Static product group
The standalone VDX switch and the VCS fabric can be added as a static product group member.
The fabric members, however, are not included in the available product panel.

Dynamic product group
The standalone VDX switch and the VCS fabric are included when the dynamic product group is
defined. The criteria search and filter the fabrics based on user-defined search criteria. The search
criteria do not consider fabric members.

Port profiles
A port profile is a collection of network policies supported by the switch. By configuring port profiles
on the Network OS VDX switch (refer to Table 43 for a list of supported VDX switches), the virtual
machine (VM) that is configured on the virtual network interface card (vNIC) can migrate to any
other port on that switch, but still retain the same network policies.
The default port profile, shown in Figure 160, contains the entire configuration needed for a VM to
obtain access to the LAN and SAN.

NOTE

FCoE sub-profiles can be applied on default port profiles only and are supported on Network OS
version 2.1 and later. You can view the FCoE profile association on Network Advisor version 11.3.0
and later.

432

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port profiles

14

Port profile

VLAN profile

QoS profile

Security profile

FIGURE 160 Port profile contents
NOTE
A port profile does not contain some of the interface-level configurations, such as LLDP, SPAN, LAG,
and so on.

AMPP characteristics
Note the following points regarding the Automatic Migration of Port Profiles (AMPP) feature:

• Port groups and port profiles are collections of network policies. The vNICs inherit these
network policies.

• Port profiles are associated with physical switches.
• VMs can have one or more vNICs, and port profiles are applied on the switch ports where
vNICs are learned.

• Port profiles are reapplied to a new switch port if the same vNIC is learned on a new port.
• When a port is configured in port profile mode, the downlink profile is activated on the ports. A
properly configured downlink profile enables all vNIC traffic to pass through, allowing the
switch to perform MAC learning. There is one downlink profile per switch and the downlink
profile cannot be deleted.

Life of a port profile
A port profile during creation goes through multiple states. Port profiles go through the following
states:

• Created — This state specifies that a port profile is created but may not be complete when the
port profile is created or modified.

• Activated — This state specifies that a port profile is activated and is available for MAC
address-to-port profile association. If the created port profile is not complete, the activation
fails. You must resolve any conflicts or dependencies and reactivate the port profile.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

433

14

Port profiles

• Associated — This state specifies that one or more MAC addresses have been associated with
this port profile within the fabric.

• Applied — This state indicates that the port profile is applied on the profiled port where the
associated MAC address appears. Configuration of two different port profiles can coexist on a
profiled port, but the application of the later port profile fails if there is a conflict.
The port profile states are configured using the Network OS command line interface. For complete
configuration details, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.

AMPP events and behavior
Table 44 describes the AMPP events and the applicable failure behaviors.
For complete information about configuring AMPP, refer to the Network OS Administrator’s Guide
and the Network OS Command Reference.

TABLE 44

434

AMPP behavior and failure descriptions

AMPP event

Applicable behavior and failures

Create port profile

If the port profile does not exist, then it is created. If it exists, then it is available for
modification (if it is not yet activated).

Activate port profile

If the port profile configuration is not complete, activation fails. Unless the port profile
is activated, it is not applied on any switch port.
If all the dependency validations succeed, the port profile is in the active state and is
ready for association.

De-activate port profile

This event removes the applied port profile configuration from all the profiled ports.
De-activation is allowed even if there are MAC addresses associated with the port
profile.

Modify port profile

A port profile can be edited only in the pre-activation stage.
The port profile is set to the inactive state if any conflicting attributes are configured
or some dependent configuration is not completed, and any attempt to associate the
port profile to a MAC address may not be allowed.

Associate MAC
addresses to a port
profile

If mapping already exists with another port profile, AMPP does not allow a MAC
address to be mapped to multiple port profiles.
If mapping does not exist, the port is configured to allow the MAC address with all the
policies specified in the port profile applied to that MAC address on that port or
switch.

De-associate MAC
addresses from a port
profile

If mapping exists, all the policies configured for a specific MAC address are removed
from that port or switch.

Deleting a port profile

An in-use error is generated if the port profile is in an activated state. AMPP forces you
to de-activate the profile before deleting.
If the port profile is in an inactive state, then deletion of the port profile removes all
the MAC address associations as well.

Modifying port profile
content when in an
associated state

An in-use error is generated if the port profile is already activated.

Moving the VM MAC
address and notifying
the fabric

All policies associated with the port profile ID are mapped on the MAC address and
applied to the new port in the fabric.

Unused port profile

You must manually remove the MAC address mapping to remove any MAC address
association.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port profiles

14

Port profile configuration using the management application
You can manage MAC addresses and port profiles from the Port Profiles tab of the Fabric_Name
Properties dialog box, as shown in Figure 161.

FIGURE 161 Fabric_Name Properties dialog box — Port Profile tab

Assigning MAC addresses to a port profile
Use the Assign MACs dialog box to select discovered Media Access Control (MAC) addresses and
assign them to the selected port profiles. A maximum of 16,000 MAC addresses can be assigned
to a port profile.

NOTE

MAC addresses cannot be added until the profile is activated. You must use the command line
interface to activate the port profile. Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for instructions.
1. Select a VCS-capable switch from the device tree.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
The Fabric Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port Profiles tab.
4. In the Selected Profile Details area, click the Associated MACs tab.
5. Click Add.
The Assign MACs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 162.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

435

14

Port profiles

FIGURE 162 Assign MACs dialog box
6. From the Source list, select Virtual Machine Managers or Switch Port Connectivity as the
source of the discovered MAC address.
7.

Select a discovered MAC address to assign to the port profile and click the right arrow button to
add it to the Selected MACs list.

8. Click OK.
Related topics

• “Comparing port profiles”
• “Deploying port profiles”

Managing offline MAC addresses
To add unique MAC addresses to the Discovered MACs list where you can assign them to a port
profile, complete the following steps.
1. Select a VCS-capable switch from the device tree.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
The Fabric Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port Profiles tab.
4. In the Selected Profile Details area, click the Associated MACs tab.
5. Click Add.
The Assign MACs dialog box displays.
6. Click Add Offline MACs.
The Assign Offline MACs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 163. Use this dialog box to
add, remove, or import offline MAC addresses.

436

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port profiles

14

FIGURE 163 Assign Offline MACs dialog box
7.

To manage offline MAC addresses, perform one of the following tasks:

• To assign an offline MAC address to the selected, activated profile, enter the MAC address
in the MAC list and click Add. Alternatively, select an offline MAC address from the MAC List
and click Add to assign it to the Port Profile list.

• To remove a MAC address from the MAC List, select it from the list and click Remove.
• To select and import a CSV file, click Import.
8. Click OK to save the changes.

Comparing port profiles
To summarize differences between the original port profiles and profiles on other switches,
complete the following steps.

NOTE
A MAC address can be associated with only one profile at a time.
1. Select a VCS-capable switch from the device tree.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
The Fabric Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port Profiles tab.
4. In the Selected Profile Details area, click the Associated MACs tab.
If the associated MAC address is not selected, the MAC Match button is disabled under the
Profile Comparison Summary dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

437

14

Port profiles

5. Click Compare.
The Profile Comparison Summary dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 164.

NOTE

A green circle icon in the comparison summary indicates a complete match to the MAC
address on the target switch; a yellow triangle icon indicates a partial match.

FIGURE 164 Profile Comparison Summary dialog box
6. Select a product from the Available Products with Profiles list and click one of the following
match options as the comparison criteria. You can select multiple switches and fabrics.

• MAC Match — Compares the MAC addresses in the reference profile to the MAC addresses
contained in the target profile (one profile at a time). The MAC address comparison
displays the following possible values:





438

Same — The MAC addresses in the reference and matched profiles are the same.
All Present — All of the MAC addresses in the reference profile are contained in the
target profile, but the target profile has some additional MAC addresses.
Some Present — Some of the MAC addresses in the reference profile are contained in
the target profile, but the target profile has more or fewer MAC addresses.
None Present — None of the MAC addresses in the reference profile are contained in
the target profile.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port profiles

14

• Name Match — Compares the original profile with the profile with the same name on the
target switch.

• Network Match — Finds a profile on the target switch to provide the same networking
settings on the target switch.

NOTE
Select a column or multiple columns in the Comparison Summary list, as shown in Table 45, and
click Remove to remove it as matching criteria. The Reference Profile column cannot be removed.

TABLE 45

Profile Comparison Summary list

Field/Component

Description

Profile Properties

•
•
•
•
•

VLAN Settings

•
•

•
•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Match Type — The type of comparison criteria: MAC match, name
(profile name) match, or network match
Overall Match — The icon that signals if there is an exact match
(green circle icon) or a partial match (yellow triangle icon)
Profile Name — The profile name that is compared against the
target MAC address
Associated MAC Count — The number of associated MAC addresses
MAC Comparison — Indicates whether the compared MAC
addresses are the same or different
L2 Mode — The switch port mode of the port profile (access or
trunk)
Configuration — One of the following VLAN configuration options:
- All — Indicates that the port profile will allow all VLAN IDs
- None — Indicates that the port profile will not allow any VLAN
IDs
- All Except  — Indicates that the port profile will
allow any packet except the VLAN IDs specified
-  — Indicates that the port profile will allow any
packet with the VLAN IDs specified
Untagged VLAN — The port VLAN assigned to the interface as
untagged
Tagged VLAN Count — The number of port VLANs assigned to the
interface as tagged
Tagged VLAN Comparison — Indicates whether the compared
tagged VLANs are the same or different

439

14

Port profiles

TABLE 45

Profile Comparison Summary list (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

QoS Settings

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ACL Settings

FCoE Settings
NOTE: FCoE sub-profiles can be
applied on default port profiles
only and are supported on
Network OS version 2.1 and
later. You can view the FCoE
profile association on Network
Advisor version 11.3.0 and
later.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Mode — The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the port
Flow Control — Non-DCB mode. The Ethernet priority flow control
mode of the port. Possible modes are Off, 802.3x pause, Tx On or
Off, Rx On or Off. The default flow control mode is Off
DCB Map — The details about the CoS map and the Traffic Class
map
Precedence — DCB mode. The map’s priority
Fabric Remap Priority — DCB mode. The fabric remap priority of the
port
Lossless Remap Priority — DCB mode. The FCoE lossless remap
priority of the port
DCB Map Contents — DCB mode
Trust — Non-DCB mode. Whether the Ethernet trust of the port is
enabled or disabled
CoS to CoS Map Name — Non-DCB mode
CoS to CoS Map Contents — Non-DCB mode
Traffic Class Map Name — Non-DCB mode
Traffic Class Map Contents — Non-DCB mode
Name — The name of the access control list (ACL)
Type — The ACL type (Extended or Standard)
Contents — The contents of the ACL
FCoE Map Name — The name of the FCoE map
Fabric Map Name — The name of the Fabric map
Fabric Map Contents — The parameters within the Fabric map
DCB Map Name — The name of the DCB map
DCB Map Contents — The parameters within the DCB map

Deploying port profiles
The Deploy Port Profiles to Products dialog box allows you to commit switch-level configuration
changes to one or more target switches.
1. Select a VCS-capable switch from the device tree.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
The Fabric Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Port Profiles tab.
4. Configure the port profile and click OK to launch the Deploy Port Profiles to Products dialog
box, shown in Figure 165.

440

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms

14

FIGURE 165 Deploy Port Profiles to Products dialog box
5. Select an available target from the Available Targets list and click the right arrow button to
move the target selected for configuration deployment to the Selected Targets list.

NOTE

If a fabric is selected and moved in a VCS fabric, all members are moved to the Selected
Targets list. Individual members of a VCS fabric can be added and removed from the Selected
Targets list.
6. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
7.

Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.

8. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms
System Monitor supports the Network OS VDX switches shown in Table 43. The following System
Monitor features are supported on Network OS VDX platforms:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

FRU monitoring
System thresholds
Alert notifications
Resource monitoring
SFP monitoring
Security monitoring
Port statistics monitoring

Refer to the Network OS Administrator’s Guide and Network OS Command Reference for
configuration information.

FRU monitoring
System Monitor monitors the health of each component of the switch. The following FRUS and
components are monitored:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

441

14

System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Fan — Configures fan settings
Power — Configures power settings
Temp — Displays the threshold for the temperature sensor component
CID-card — Displays the threshold for the CID card component
SFP — Displays the threshold for the small form factor pluggable (SFP) device
compact-flash — Displays the threshold for the compact flash device
MM — Displays the threshold for the management module
LineCard — Displays the threshold for the line card
SFM — Displays the threshold for the switch fabric module

System thresholds
System Monitor monitors the health of each component and, based on the threshold value, each
component can be in a marginal state or a down state. Possible states for all monitored FRUs are
removed, inserted, on, off, and faulty. A state of none indicates the switch is not configured. If the
FRU is removed, inserted, or goes into a faulty state, System Monitor sends a RASlog message or
an e-mail alert.
Refer to the “RAS System Messages” chapter of the Network OS Message Reference for details
about each RASlog message.

Alert notifications
System Monitor provides event notifications by way of RASlog messages or e-mail alerts, depending
on the configuration.

• RASlog — If a component is in a marginal state or a down state, System Monitor generates a
RASlog message to alert the user. It also generates a separate RASlog message for the overall
health of the switch.

• Email — An e-mail alert sends information about a switch event to a specified e-mail address.
The e-mail specifies the threshold and describes the event, much like an error message.

Resource monitoring
System Monitor monitors CPU and memory usage of the system and alerts the user when
configured thresholds are exceeded. When the CPU usage exceeds the limit, a system monitor alert
is triggered. The default CPU limit is 75 percent. When configuring memory, the limit specifies a
usage limit as a percentage of available resources.
When used to configure memory, monitoring the limit value must be greater than the low limit and
less than the high limit. Three thresholds are supported for memory monitoring:

• High_limit — Specifies an upper usage limit for memory as a percentage of available memory.
This value must be greater than the value set by the -limit parameter. The maximum is 90
percent. When memory usage exceeds this limit, System Monitor generates a CRITICAL RASlog
message. The default is 80 percent.

442

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms

14

• Limit — Specifies the default CPU limit. When the limit is exceeded, System Monitor sends out a
RASlog WARNING message. When usage returns below the limit, System Monitor sends a
RASlog INFO message. Valid values range from 0 to 80 percent, and the default value is
different for different systems.

• Low_limit — Specifies a lower usage limit for memory as a percentage of available memory.
This value must be less than the value set by the -limit parameter. When memory usage
exceeds or falls below this limit, System Monitor generates a RASlog INFO message. The
default for all platforms is 50 percent.

SFP parameter monitoring
System Monitor monitors the SFP parameters shown in Table 46.

TABLE 46

SFP parameter descriptions

SFP parameter

Description

Suggested SFP impact

Temperature

Measures the physical temperature of the
SFP transceiver, in degrees Celsius.

High temperature suggests the SFP
transceiver might be damaged.

Receive Power (RXP)

Measures the amount of incoming laser, in
uWatts.

Describes the condition of the SFP
transceiver. If this parameter exceeds the
threshold, the SFP transceiver is
deteriorating.

Transmit Power (TXP)

Measures the amount of outgoing laser, in
uWatts.

Describes the condition of the SFP
transceiver. If this parameter exceeds the
threshold, the SFP transceiver is
deteriorating.

Current

Measures the amount of supplied current
to the SFP transceiver.

Indicates hardware failures.

Voltage

Measures the amount of voltage supplied
to the SFP transceiver.

A value higher than the threshold indicates
the SFP transceiver is deteriorating.

Security monitoring
System Monitor monitors all attempts to breach your SAN security, helping you fine-tune your
security measures. If there is a security breach, System Monitor sends a RASlog alert. The following
security areas are monitored:

• Telnet violation, which occurs when a Telnet connection request reaches a secure switch from
an unauthorized IP address.

• Login violation, which occurs when a secure fabric detects a login failure.

Port statistics monitoring
System Monitor monitors port statistics on all external Gigabit Ethernet interfaces: 1 Gb, 10 Gb,
and 40 Gb. When any monitored error crosses the configured high or low thresholds, an alert is
generated.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

443

14

System Monitor support on Network OS VDX platforms

Interface error types
Table 47 describes the interface counters that System Monitor monitors on external interfaces.

TABLE 47

Interface errors monitored by System Monitor

Interface error

Description

Port Fence
support

Threshold
defaults

CRC Align Errors

The total number of frames received that had a
length (excluding framing bits but including Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) octets) of from 64 through
1518 octets. The error indicates either a bad FCS
with an integral number of octets (an FCS error) or a
bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (an
Alignment error).

No

Low 12
Buffer 0
High 300

RX Symbol Error

The interface detects an undefined (invalid) symbol
received. Large symbol errors indicate a bad device,
cable, or hardware.

No

Low 0
Buffer 0
High 5

RX IFG Violated

A minimum-length interframe gap (IFG) between
successive frames is violated. A typical IFG is 12
bytes.

Yes

Low 5
Buffer 0
High 100

RX Missing Termination
Characters

The number of frames that terminated by anything
other than the Terminate character; this includes
termination due to the Error character.

No

Low 12
Buffer 0
High 300

NOTE

The default settings for the above high threshold, above low threshold, below high threshold, and
below low threshold actions are None.

444

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Ethernet fabric traceroute

14

Ethernet fabric traceroute
NOTE

All nodes in the VCS cluster must have the NETCONF interface availability for L2TraceRoute and
must be running Network OS 3.0.0 or later.
Traceroute diagnostics enables you to determine the connectivity, path, and reachability of the
Ethernet fabric between a source port and a destination port within an individual VCS fabric. You
can perform traceroute diagnostics from any RBridge where the source MAC address is learned in
the VCS cluster and that RBridge becomes the starting node for the traceroute packet. Once
configured, the traceroute request identifies the Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) path a packet takes
from the source address to a destination address. Traceroute performs a hop-by-hop inspection
between two end-device MAC addresses to identify the traffic loss and any points of congestion in
the path.

Tracing Ethernet fabric routes
1. To diagnose traceroute, you can do either of the following:

• Select Monitor > Diagnostics > Traceroute.
• Right-click the VM and select Diagnostics > Traceroute.
• Right-click the VCS and select Diagnostics > Traceroute.
The Traceroute dialog box displays (see Figure 166). The Source field displays the
corresponding VM MAC addresses by default and the Destination field is blank.
If you do not have the privilege to lauch traceroute, the following warning message
displays:
You do not have privilege to perform this operation.
Click OK to close the warning message.
If VCS is not managed or discovered by the Management application, the following error
message displays:
Unable to launch Traceroute dialog because the selected VM is not connected to VCS or
the VCS is not managed by Network Advisor.
Click OK to close the error message.

FIGURE 166 Traceroute dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

445

14

Ethernet fabric traceroute

2. Enter a MAC address, VM name, or IP address in the Source field or click the Source button to
select or search for a source address from the Select Source - Traceroute dialog box (see
Figure 167).

FIGURE 167 Select Source - Traceroute dialog box
In the Select Source - Traceroute dialog box, you can either search from the Available MAC
Addresses list or select a row containing the required source MAC address, VM name, or IP
address and click OK. This list contains all the discovered port MAC addresses (host or device)
connected to the VCS cluster.
The format of the selected source address is displayed based on the conditions in the following
table.
Source address format

Condition

MAC address (VM name) - if VM name exists

When a MAC address is entered and the focus is lost.

MAC address (VM name) - if VM name exists

When a VM name is entered and the focus is lost.

IP address (VM name) - if VM name exists

When an IP address is entered and the focus is lost.

3. Enter a MAC address, VM name, or IP address in the Destination field or click the Destination
button to select or search for a destination address from the Select Destination - Traceroute
dialog box.
In the Select Destination - Traceroute dialog box, you can either search from the Available MAC
Addresses list or select a row containing the required destination MAC address, VM name, or IP
address and click OK. This list contains all the discovered port MAC addresses (host or device)
connected to the VCS cluster.

446

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Ethernet fabric traceroute

14

4. Choose one of the following options:

• Assign appropriate RBridge ID — Select this option to use Address Finder to identify the
RBridge ID of the source.
The Management application finds the RBridge ID on which the MAC address is learned.

• Select RBridge ID — Select this option to select an RBridge ID from the list of the RBridge
IDs currently present in the cluster.
Before you select an RBridge ID from the list, you must know on which RBridge ID the MAC
address is learned.
5. Select a VLAN from the VLAN list.
Valid values are from 1 through 3583.

NOTE

Both the source and destination must be on the same VLAN.
To customize the traceroute packet, continue with step 6.
To start the traceroute, go to step 14.
6. Select the Advanced options check box.
7.

Choose one of the following options from the IP Protocol Type list:

• TCP
• UDP
8. Enter a source IP address (IPv4 only) in the Source IP field.
9. Enter a source port number in the Source Port field.
Valid values are from 0 through 65535.
10. Enter a destination IP address (IPv4 only) in the Destination IP field.
11. Enter a destination port number in the Destination Port field.
Valid values are from 0 through 65535.
12. Enter the number of times you want to repeat the traceroute request on the fabric in the
Repeat Trace Route field.
Valid values are from 1 through 10. The default is 1. There is a one-second delay between the
requests.
13. Enter a value with which to increment the source and destination port numbers on each
repeated request in the Increment field.
Valid values are from 0 through 1000. The default is 1. If you do not want to increment the port
on each repeated request, enter 0.
For example, if you configure the source port to 5, the destination port to 7, the repeat count to
5, and the increment ports to 5, the port numbers shown in Table 48 are sent on each
traceroute request.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

447

14

Ethernet fabric traceroute

TABLE 48

Trace Route example

Request Source port number Destination port number
1

5

7

2

10

12

3

15

17

4

20

22

5

25

27

14. Click Start to initiate the traceroute request.
Click Stop to cancel the traceroute request.

NOTE

The traceroute request is not automatically cancelled on the switch. The switch continues until
the request is complete.
The traceroute results display in table format at the bottom of the Ethernet Fabrics Traceroute
for Ethernet_Fabric dialog box.
15. To review diagnostic results, select a traceroute request from the list on the Diagnostics
Results tab.

FIGURE 168 Ethernet Fabrics Traceroute for Ethernet_Fabric dialog box — Diagnostics Results tab
The Diagnostics Results tab updates dynamically as each traceroute request becomes
available. The results list on the left contains a traceroute for each repeated request. The
results table details the selected traceroute. Each row represents a hop and the data includes
the following information:

• RBridge ID: The RBridge ID of the VCS member.
• Switch Name: The display name or IP address or display name and IP address of the VCS
member (defined by you in the main window).

• Incoming Port: The port numbers in the path to the source RBridge from the destination
RBridge.

• Outgoing Port: The port numbers in the path to the destination RBridge from the source
RBridge.

• Round Trip Delay: The round trip delay in microseconds.
NOTE

The round trip delay for the starting RBridge (edge) is always 0 microseconds for a
successful trace as this represents a self-loop.

448

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Ethernet fabric traceroute

14

• Status: Whether the traceroute succeeded or failed.
NOTE

A failed status indicates that the destination is not reachable from the outgoing port of this
RBridge after the switch initiates the traceroute command.

16. To review the average round trip delay for the RBridge across the requests, click the Average
Round Trip Delay tab.
The Average Round Trip Delay tab displays the round trip data for the RBridge for all repeated
requests:

• RBridge ID: The RBridge ID of the VCS member.
• Switch Name: The display name or IP address or display name and IP address of the VCS
member (defined by you in the main window).

• Average: The average round trip delay of all traceroute samples in microseconds for each
hop.

• Traceroute number: The round trip delay in microseconds for each hop.
NOTE

The round trip delay for the starting RBridge (edge) is always 0 microseconds for a
successful trace as this represents a self-loop.

Exporting diagnostic data
You can export data to a CSV-formatted text file. To export data from the Ethernet Fabrics
Traceroute for Ethernet_Fabric dialog box, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• To export diagnostic results, click the Diagnostics Results tab.
• To export the average round trip delay for the RBridge across the requests, click the
Average Round Trip Delay tab.
2. Right-click anywhere in the table and select Export Table.
The Save table to a tab delimited file dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the directory where you want to save the data.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

449

14

450

Ethernet fabric traceroute

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

15

Host Management

In this chapter
• Host management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Brocade adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HCM software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host adapter discovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VM Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HCM and Management application support on ESXi systems . . . . . . . . . .
• Adapter software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Bulk port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adapter port WWN virtualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Role-based access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host performance management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host security authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• supportSave on adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host fault management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Backup support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

451
452
454
456
456
457
459
464
468
473
474
475
477
477
479

Host management
Extensive management operations are supported on the switches and fabrics of the SAN using the
Management application. Adapters and hosts are visible as part of the fabrics managed by the
Management application.
The Management application integrates with another manageability application called the Host
Connectivity Manager (HCM) to provide complete management of the Host Bus Adapters (HBAs)
and Converged Network Adapters (CNAs).
The Management application focuses on operations such as fault management, performance
management, and configuration management for multiple adapters and adapter ports and security
configuration using Fibre Channel Security Protocol (FC-SP) that is set up on the adapter port and
the switch.
HCM supports management for individual adapters (4/8/16 Gbps HBAs), 10 Gbps CNAs, 10 Gbps
or 16 Gbps Fabric Adapters, and other devices, such as the host, DCB ports, FCoE ports, and
Ethernet ports.
The Management application, in conjunction with HCM, provides end-to-end management
capability. For information about configuring, monitoring, and managing individual adapters using
the HCM GUI or the Brocade Command Utility (BCU), refer to the Adapters Administrator’s Guide.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

451

15

Brocade adapters

Brocade adapters
The following sections describe the three Brocade adapter types:

• “Host Bus Adapters”
• “Converged Network Adapters”
• “Fabric Adapters”

Host Bus Adapters
Brocade offers five models of Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters (HBAs). These models provide
reliable, high-performance host connectivity for mission-critical SAN environments. The Brocade
HBAs are listed in Table 49.

TABLE 49

Brocade Fibre Channel HBA models

Model number

Description

825

Dual-port stand-up HBA with a per-port maximum of 8 Gbps using an 8 Gbps
SFP.1

2

815

Single-port stand-up HBA with a maximum of 8 Gbps using an 8 Gbps SFP.1

1

Dual-port mezzanine HBA with a per-port maximum of 8 Gbps. This HBA installs
in server blades that install in
supported blade system enclosures.

2

425

Dual-port stand-up HBA with a per-port maximum of 4 Gbps using a 4 Gbps
SFP.3

2

415

Single-port stand-up HBA with a maximum of 4 Gbps using a 4 Gbps SFP.3

1

804

2

Number of ports

1

A 4 Gbps SFP installed in Brocade 815 or 825 HBAs allows 4, 2, or 1 Gbps speed only.
Brocade 804 mezzanine cards connect to the embedded switch modules or embedded interconnect modules on
the blade system chassis by way of an internal backplane and, therefore, no optical modules (SFP transceivers)
are involved. With the exception of no SFP transceivers, the Brocade 804 mezzanine FC HBA card functions the
same as the other Brocade HBAs.
3 An 8 Gbps SFP installed in Brocade 425 or 415 HBAs allows 4 or 2 Gbps speed only.
2

Using Brocade HBAs, you can connect your server (host system) to devices on the Fibre Channel
SAN. The combined high performance and proven reliability of a single-ASIC design makes these
HBAs ideal for connecting hosts to SAN fabrics based on Brocade Fabric or M-Enterprise operating
systems.

452

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Brocade adapters

15

Converged Network Adapters
Table 50 describes available Brocade Converged Network Adapters (CNAs) for PCIe x 8 host bus
interfaces, hereafter referred to as Brocade CNAs. These adapters provide reliable,
high-performance host connectivity for mission-critical SAN environments.

TABLE 50

Brocade Fibre Channel CNA models

Model number
1741M-k

Port speed

1

1020
1010
1007

2

Number of ports

Adapter type

10 Gbps maximum

2

Expansion

10 Gbps maximum

2

Stand-up

10 Gbps maximum

1

Stand-up

10 Gbps maximum

2

Expansion

1

The Brocade 1741M-k and Brocade 1007 are two-port 10 GbE CNAs that mount on a blade server that installs in
a system enclosure. The adapter uses FCoE to converge standard data and storage networking data onto a shared
Ethernet link. Ethernet and Fibre Channel communication are routed through the DCB ports on the adapter to the
blade system enclosure midplane and onto the installed switch modules installed in the enclosure.
2
The Brocade 1741M-k and Brocade 1007 CNAs connect to the embedded switch modules or embedded
interconnect modules on the blade system chassis by way of an internal backplane and, therefore, no optical
modules (SFP transceivers) are involved. With the exception of no SFP transceivers, the Brocade 1741M-k and
Brocade 1007 CNAs function the same as the other Brocade CNAs.

For information on installing the Brocade CNAs on a blade server, refer to the Brocade Adapters Installation and
Reference Guide.

Brocade CNAs combine the functions of a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) and Network Interface Card
(NIC) on one PCIe x 8 card. The CNAs appear as NICs and Fibre Channel adapters to the host.
These CNAs fully support FCoE protocols and allow Fibre Channel traffic to converge onto 10 Gbps
Data Center Bridging (DCB) networks. FCoE and 10 Gbps DCB operations are simultaneous.
The combined high performance and proven reliability of a single-ASIC design makes these CNAs
ideal for connecting host systems on Ethernet networks to SAN fabrics based on Brocade Fabric or
M-Enterprise operating systems.

Fabric Adapters
Table 51 describes the available Brocade 1860 Fabric Adapter model. The Brocade 1860 provides
dual mode support for the port. You can configure the port mode as a 16 Gbps Fibre Channel (FC)
HBA and a 10 Gbps CNA mode using the Brocade Command Utility (BCU).

TABLE 51

Brocade Fabric Adapter models

Model number

Port speed

1860-1
860-2

16 Gbps FC HBA and 10 Gbps CNA or NIC

1867

16 Gbps FC mezzanine card

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Number of ports
1 or 2
2

453

15

HCM software

AnyIOTM technology
Although the Brocade 1860 Fabric Adapter can be shipped in a variety of small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) transceiver configurations, you can change port function to the following modes
using Brocade AnyIOTM technology, provided the correct SFP transceiver is installed for the port:

• HBA or Fibre Channel mode — This mode utilizes the Brocade Fibre Channel storage driver. An
8 or 16 Gbps Fibre Channel SFP transceiver can be installed for the port. The port provides
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) functions on a single port so that you can connect your host system to
devices on the Fibre Channel SAN. Ports with 8 Gbps SFP transceivers configured in HBA mode
can operate at 2, 4, or 8 Gbps. Ports with 16 Gbps SFP transceivers configured in HBA mode
can operate at 2, 4, 8, or 16 Gbps.
Fabric Adapter ports set in HBA mode appear as “FC” ports when discovered in HCM. They
appear as “FC HBA” to the operating system.

• Ethernet or NIC mode — This mode utilizes the Brocade network driver. A 10 GbE SFP+
transceiver must be installed for the port. This mode supports basic Ethernet, Data Center
Bridging (DCB), and other protocols that operate over DCB to provide functions on a single port
that are traditionally provided by an Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC). Ports configured in
this mode can operate at up to 10 Gbps. Fabric Adapters that ship from the factory with 10
GbE SFP transceivers installed or no SFP transceivers installed are configured for Ethernet
mode by default.
Fabric Adapter ports set in NIC mode appear as Ethernet ports when discovered in HCM. These
ports appear as “10 GbE NIC” to the operating system.

• CNA mode — This mode provides all functions of Ethernet or NIC mode, plus adds support for
FCoE features by utilizing the Brocade FCoE storage driver. A 10 GbE SFP+ transceiver must be
installed for the port. Ports configured in CNA mode connect to an FCoE switch. The port
provides all traditional CNA functions for allowing Fibre Channel traffic to converge onto 10
Gbps DCB networks. The ports appear as Network Interface Cards (NICs) and Fibre Channel
adapters to the host. FCoE and 10 GbE operations run simultaneously.
Fabric Adapter ports set in CNA mode appear as FCoE ports when discovered in HCM. These
ports appear as “10 GbE NIC” to the operating system.

HCM software
The Host Connectivity Manager (HCM) is a management software application for configuring,
monitoring, and troubleshooting Brocade HBAs and CNAs in a SAN environment. For instructions
about how to install the HCM software, refer to the Adapters Installation and Reference Manual.
You can manage the software on the host or remotely from another host. The communication
between the management console and the agent is managed using JSON-RPC over HTTPS or
CIM-XML over HTTPS.

NOTE

All HCM, utility, SMI-S Provider, boot software, and driver installation packages, as well as the Driver
Update Disk (DUD), are described in the Adapters Installation and Reference Manual.

454

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

HCM software

15

HCM features
Common HBA and CNA management software features include the following:

• Discovery using the agent software running on the servers attached to the SAN, which enables
you to contact the devices in your SAN.

• Configuration management, which enables you to configure local and remote systems. With
HCM, you can configure the following items:

-

Brocade 4 Gbps and 8 Gbps HBAs
HBA ports (including logical ports, base ports, remote ports, and virtual ports) associated
with the local host
Brocade 10 Gbps single-port and 10 Gbps dual-port CNAs
Brocade 16 Gbps FC adapters
DCB ports (CNA only)
FCoE ports (CNA only)
Ethernet ports (CNA only)

• Diagnostics, which enables you to test the adapters and the devices to which they are
connected:

-

Link status of each adapter and its attached devices

-

Read/write buffer test, which tests the link between the adapter and its devices

Loopback test, which is external to the adapter, to evaluate the ports (transmit and receive
transceivers) and the error rate on the adapter
FC protocol tests, including echo, ping, and traceroute
Ethernet loopback test (CNA only)
Diagnostic Port (D-Port) test

• Monitoring, which provides statistics for the SAN components.
• Security, which enables you to specify a Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP)
secret and configure authentication parameters.

• Event notifications, which provide asynchronous notification of various conditions and
problems through a user-defined event filter.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

455

15

Host adapter discovery

Host adapter discovery
The Management application enables you to discover individual hosts, import a group of hosts from
a CSV file, or import host names from discovered fabrics. The maximum number of host discovery
requests that can be accepted is 1000. Host discovery requires HCM Agent 2.0 or later.
ESXi host adapter discovery requires the Brocade HBA CIM provider to be installed on the ESXi
host.

NOTE

Pure Fabric discovery alone shows adapters behind Access Gateway and all adapter ports as virtual.
When you discover an adapter and ports using host discovery, the adapter and all its ports are
shown as physical.
Instructions for discovering hosts are detailed in Chapter 3, “Discovery”.

VM Manager
A vCenter server can be discovered by adding a VM Manager to the Management application. Refer
to Chapter 3, “Discovery” for information about discovering VM Managers.

Adding a VM Manager
1. Click Add on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.
The Add VM Manager dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 169.

FIGURE 169 Add VM Manager dialog box
2. Enter the IP address or host name of the VM Manager (VMM) into the Network Address field.
The maximum number of supported characters is 256.
3. Enter the VMM server port number into the Port field. The valid port number range is from 0
through 65536. The default port number is 443.
4. Enter the user ID into the User ID field to identify the user of the VMM. The maximum number
of supported characters is 64.
5. Enter the password into the Password field. The maximum number of supported characters is
64.
6. Click OK.

456

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

HCM and Management application support on ESXi systems

15

The VMM discovery process begins. When complete, the vCenter server and all ESX and ESXi
hosts managed by that vCenter display in the Host product tree.

Editing a VM Manager
The fields in the Edit VM Manager dialog box are identical to the fields in the Add VM Manager
dialog box except for the Network Address field, which you cannot edit.
1. Click Edit on the Discover VM Managers dialog box.
The Edit VM Manager dialog box displays.
2. Enter the VMM server port number into the Port field. The valid port number range is from 0
through 65536.
3. Enter the user ID into the User ID field to identify the user of the VMM. The maximum number
of supported characters is 64.
4. Enter the password into the Password field. The maximum number of supported characters is
64.
5. Click OK.
The VMM discovery process begins. When complete, the vCenter server and all ESX and ESXi
hosts managed by that vCenter display in the Host product tree.

Deleting a VM Manager
You cannot delete an ESX host. Hosts can only be excluded or included. If you select a host from
the Discovered VM Managers list in the Discover VM Managers dialog box and click Delete, the
host displays in the Previously Discovered Addresses list.

HCM and Management application support on ESXi systems
Through the Brocade Adapters ESXi Management feature, ESXi systems support HCM and the
Management application when CIM Provider is installed on these systems.
For installation and other information on CIM Provider, refer to the following publications:

• CIM Provider for Brocade Adapters Developer’s Guide
• CIM Provider for Brocade Adapters Installation Guide

ESXi CIM listener ports
The Management application server uses two CIM indication listener ports to listen for CIM
indications.

• HCM Proxy Service CIM Indication Listener Port — This port is used to listen for CIM indications
from ESXi hosts managed through HCM instances launched by the Management application.
You can learn the value of these ports through the Port Status dialog box.

• Fault Management CIM Indication Listener Port — This port is used to listen for CIM indications
from ESXi hosts managed through the Management application’s host adapter discovery.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

457

15

HCM and Management application support on ESXi systems

The two ports described above are part of the range of ports reserved for use by the Management
application server, configurable during installation from the Server Configuration wizard. Refer to
the Installation and Migration Guide for server configuration instructions.

Adding host adapter credentials for ESXi
CIM-based discovery is available for ESXi versions 4.1 and later. The CIM server transport does not
support operating systems other than ESXi.

NOTE

CIM server credentials are optional. If you do not provide credentials, basic authentication on the
CIM server is disabled and the Management application attempts discovery without authentication.
The Protocol, Port, User ID, and Password fields on the Add Host Adapters dialog box are persisted
when changing from HCM agent to CIM Server (ESXi only).
1. Select Discover > Host Adapters.
The Host Adapters dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Host Adapters dialog box, shown in Figure 170, displays.

FIGURE 170 Add Host Adapters dialog box

458

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adapter software

15

3. Select CIM server (ESXi only) as the Contact option.
4. (Optional) Select HTTP or HTTPS from the Protocol list. HTTPS is the default.
5. Click OK.

Adapter software
The Adapter Software dialog box allows you to perform the following tasks:

• Select and import a driver file or delete existing drivers from the driver repository
• Update the driver to the hosts
NOTE
For Linux and Solaris systems, you cannot upgrade to driver file version 3.0.3.0. You must upgrade
to version 3.0.3.1 or later.
The ability to update drivers to the hosts is available for hosts that are disovered through the Host
Connectivity Manager (HCM) agent with driver version 2.3.0.0 or later. Driver updates cannot be
performed for ESXi hosts, which are discovered using the CIM Server. Use the VMware vSphere
Update Manager to update the drivers on ESXi hosts.
To update the drivers to selected hosts, complete the following steps.
1. Select Host > Adapter Software from the Configure menu.
The Adapter Software dialog box, Driver tab, shown in Figure 171, displays.

FIGURE 171 Adapter Software dialog box, Driver tab
2. Select one or more hosts from the Available Hosts list and click the right arrow button to move
the selected hosts to the Selected Hosts list.
The Available Host list displays the following information for hosts that are discovered through
the HCM agent with driver version 2.3.0.0 or later:

• Hosts — The IP address of the host.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

459

15

Adapter software

• Name — The name of the host. The first three digits indicate the host’s operating system;
for example, WIN or LIN.

• Operating System — The host operating system; for example, Microsoft Windows or Red
Hat Linux.

• Driver Version — The host’s current driver version.
• Architecture — The host’s architecture; for example, 32-bit or 64-bit.
3. Select one or more hosts from the Selected Hosts list. You can select mutliple hosts, but if the
selected host count is greater than 20, a batch of 20 hosts is initiated for the driver update
first and the remaining hosts are queued.
The Selected Hosts list displays the following information for hosts that have been selected for
the driver update:

• Host — The IP address of the host.
• Operating System — The host operating system; for example, Microsoft Windows or Red
Hat Linux.

•
•
•
•
•

Driver to Update — Select the driver to update from the list.
Status — The ready status of the selected host.
Architecture — The host’s architecture; for example, 32-bit or 64-bit.
Current Driver Version — The host’s current driver version.
Message — Additional information pertaining to the selected host.

4. Select the host’s corresponding driver to update from the Driver to Update list. Once the driver
has been selected for each host, click Update .
Alternatively, you can select one or more hosts from the Selected Hosts list and click Select
Latest to automatically select the latest operating system-specific driver for each selected host.
If you want to import a driver from another location, follow the instructions in “Driver
repository” on page 460.

Driver repository
You can access the Driver Repository dialog box from the Adapter Software dialog box. Initially, the
repository is empty. You must import files into the repository. Imported driver files are then
displayed in the Available Driver Files list in the Driver Repository dialog box.

Importing a driver into the repository
To import drivers into the Management application, perform the following tasks.
1. From the Adapter Software dialog box, click the Repository button.
The Driver Repository dialog box, shown in Figure 172, displays.

460

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adapter software

15

FIGURE 172 Driver Repository dialog box
2. Click Import on the Driver Repository dialog box.
The Import Driver Repository dialog box displays.
3. Locate the driver file using one of the following methods:

• Search for the file you want from the Look In list.
• Enter the name of the image file you want to import in the File Name field.
4. Click Open.
After the import completes, you see a message that the driver imported successfully.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a driver file from the repository
1. Select one or more driver files from the Available Driver Files list on the Driver Repository
dialog box.
2. Click Delete.
The driver file is removed from the Driver Repository dialog box.

NOTE

Windows drivers (.exe files) cannot be imported into the server repository when the
Management application server is running on Linux or Solaris platforms.

Boot image repository
The boot code image stored in the adapter’s flash memory contains the instructions that enable
the server to locate the boot disk in SAN. The boot code image contains the basic input/output
system (BIOS), extensible firmware interface (EFI), and open firmware which enable the adapters to
be compatible with any system platform.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

461

15

Adapter software

Importing a boot image into the repository
Boot images are required for adapters that are shipped without a boot image or when it is
necessary to overwrite images on adapters that contain older or corrupted boot image versions.
1. From the Management application menu bar, select Configure > Host > Adapter Software.
2. Click the Boot Image tab.
The Boot Image Management dialog box, shown in Figure 173, displays.

FIGURE 173 Boot Image Management dialog box

462

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adapter software

15

3. From the Boot Image Management dialog box, click the Repository button.
The Boot Image Repository dialog box, shown in Figure 174, displays.

FIGURE 174 Boot Image Repository dialog box
4. Click Import on the Boot Image Repository dialog box.
5. The Import Boot Image dialog box displays.
6. Locate the boot image file using one of the following methods:

• Search for the file you want from the Look In list. Boot image files version 2.0.0.0 and
2.1.0.0 are .zip files and other boot image files are .tar files.

• Enter the name of the image file you want to import in the File Name field.
7.

Click Open.
After the import completes, you see a message that the boot image imported successfully.

NOTE

The boot image file is imported to
Install_Server_Home/data/adapter_software/adapter_boot_images.
8. Click OK.

Downloading a boot image to a selected host
To download boot images to a selected host, perform the following tasks.
1. Select one or more hosts from the Available Hosts list on the Boot Image Management dialog
box, and click the right arrow button to move the selected hosts to the Selected Hosts list.
You can select up to 50 hosts. The first 20 hosts execute the download concurrently. If you
select more than 20 hosts, they will be queued and will start when the previous download
completes.

NOTE

The boot image version must be 2.0.0.0 or later.
2. Click Select Latest to automatically select the latest boot image for the selected hosts.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

463

15

Bulk port configuration

3. From the Boot Image Management dialog box, click the Update button to download a boot
image to one or more selected hosts.
One of the following download status messages displays in the Status column of the Selected
Hosts list:

•
•
•
•

Ready
Queued
In progress
Failed — If the download failed, the failure reason displays in the Message column of the
Selected Hosts list; for example, failed to connect to HCM agent, a checksum error
occurred, or the file is invalid.

• Finished
4. Alternatively, you can click the Select Latest button to automatically select the latest boot
image for the selected hosts.

Deleting a boot image from the repository
1. Select one or more boot images from the Boot Image File Name list on the Boot Image
Repository dialog box.
2. Click Delete.
The boot image is removed from the boot image repository.

Backing up boot image files
You can back up the boot image files from the repository using the Options dialog box. Refer to
“Backup support” on page 479 for instructions.

Bulk port configuration
Use the Adapter Host Port Configuration dialog box to create and assign port-level configurations to
either a single or multiple adapter ports at a time. You can save up to 50 port-level configurations.
The Management application supports the following default port configurations, which you can
select and assign to one port or multiple ports. You cannot edit the default configurations, but you
can delete them.

•
•
•
•

Default Port — The port property. The default value is Enabled.
Default FDFS — The Frame Data Field Size property. The default value is 2048.
Default QoS — The Quality of Service property. The default value is Enabled.
Default TRL — The Target Rate Limiting property. The default value is Enabled.

Configuring host adapter ports
To create, edit, duplicate, or delete port configurations, complete the following steps.
Select Host > Adapter Ports from the Configure menu.
The Configure Host Adapter Ports dialog box, shown in Figure 175, displays.

464

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Bulk port configuration

15

FIGURE 175 Configure Host Adapter Ports dialog box

Adding a port configuration
The Add Port Configuration dialog box allows you to create a maximum of 50 customized port
configurations which you can then select and assign to ports.
1. Click Add on the Configure Host Adapter Ports dialog box.
The Add Port Configuration dialog box, shown in Figure 176, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

465

15

Bulk port configuration

FIGURE 176 Add Port Configuration dialog box
2. Enter a name for the port configuration in the Configuration Name field. A maximum of 128
alphanumeric characters is supported.
3. Configure at least one of the following port properties:

-

Port — Enable or disable the port. Enable is the default.

-

Target Rate Limiting — Enable the Target Rate Limiting feature to minimize congestion at
the adapter port. Limiting the data rate to slower targets ensures that there is no
buffer-to-buffer credit back-pressure between the switch due to a slow-draining target.

Frame Data Size — Select the frame data size, in bytes, of the port. Options include Auto,
512, 1024, 2112, and 2048; the default value is 2112. Select auto to set the frame data
field size automatically. Buffer credits determine the maximum amount of frame data. If
the number of buffer credits is not large enough to handle the link distance and speed,
performance can be severely limited.

NOTE

NOTE: Target Rate Limiting and QoS cannot be enabled at the same time.

466

-

Path TOV — Enter a path timeout value (TOV) to either force an immediate failover (by
setting the TOV to 0) or to specify a delay in seconds (1 through 60 seconds). The default
value is 30 seconds.

-

Boot over SAN — The Boot over SAN feature allows you to target remote boot devices (LUNs
on SAN storage arrays) from which to boot the host system. Configure the following boot
parameters:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Bulk port configuration

15

Boot Speed — Set the port speed. Possible values are Auto Negotiate (to auto-negotiate
the speed) and 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 Gbps and unknown speeds.
Boot Option — From the list, select one of the following:

• Auto Discovered From Fabric — Enables Boot over SAN using boot LUN information
stored in the fabric. This is the default setting.

• First Visible LUN — Enables Boot over SAN from the first discovered LUN in the SAN.
Bootup Delay — Enter a bootup delay value. Valid values are 0, 1, 2, 5, and 10 minutes and
the default value is 0 minutes. The Bootup Delay feature allows you to configure the delay
to device discovery, offsetting the disk spinup delay time when servers and storage
devices are powered on simultaneously.

-

Port Topology — Specify the topology type. The supported topology mode is point-to-point
(p2p) or loop. You can set the toplogy to loop only if QoS and Target Rate Limiting are
disabled.

-

QoS — Enable the Quality of Service (QoS) feature to assign traffic priority (high, medium,
or low) for a given source and destination traffic flow. By default, all flows are marked as
medium.

NOTE

NOTE: QoS and Target Rate Limiting cannot be enabled at the same time.

QoS Percentage — The QoS priority flow value extends QoS support by allowing the user to
configure custom bandwidth values for High, Medium, and Low QoS priorities. The QoS %
value represents the bandwidth in percentage for each of the priorities (high, medium, and
low) and the three values must equal 100 percent.
The default priority flow settings of the switch are 60 (high), 30 (medium), and 10 (low). If
QoS is disabled and enabled again without providing the high, medium, and low bandwidth
values, the default values are applied.

-

vNIC Configuration — Enables you to configure a single physical CNA Ethernet port into
multiple virtual Network Interface Cards (vNICs).

• Enter the maximum allowable output bandwidth in increments of 100 Mbps in the
vNIC Max Bandwidth (Mbps) box. The maximum bandwidth is 10 Gbps and this is the
default.

• Enter the minimum allowable output bandwidth in the Min Bandwidth (Mbps) box. The
minimum bandwidth is 0 Mbps. A zero value of minimum bandwidth (the default)
implies that no bandwidth is guaranteed for that vNIC.

• BB Credit Recovery — Enables you to enable or disable buffer-to-buffer (BB) credits, which
are a flow control mechanism that represent the availability of resources at the receiving
port. Supported state change notification (BB_SCN) values are from 1 through 15 and the
default is 1.
4. Click OK.
The Adapter Port Configuration Status dialog box displays.
5. Click Start.
The adapter port configuration is applied to the ports.
6. Click Close after the configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress list).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

467

15

Adapter port WWN virtualization

Editing a port configuration
The Edit Port Configuration dialog box allows you to modify port configuration parameters that were
configured using the Add Port Configuration dialog box.
1. Click Edit on the Configure Host Adapter Ports dialog box.
The Edit Port Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Modify the parameters that are described in “Adding a port configuration” on page 465.
3. Click OK to save the changes.

Duplicating a port configuration
1. Click Duplicate on the Configure Host Adapter Ports dialog box.
The Duplicate Port Configuration dialog box displays. The default name of the configuration file
is source_name copy1.
2. Change the name of the configuration and click OK to save the changes.

Deleting a port configuration
1. Select a configuration from the Port Configuration list in the Configure Host Adapter Ports
dialog box.
2. Click the Delete button.
The port configuration is removed from the list.

Adapter port WWN virtualization
Adapter port world wide name (WWN) virtualization enables the adapter port to use a
switch-assigned WWN rather than the physical port WWN for communication, allowing you to
preprovision the server with the following configuration tasks:

• Create the zones with the Fabric Assigned WWN (FAWWN) before the servers and devices are
connected to the switches, before they are exposed to the SAN network.

• Create LUN mapping and LUN masking without the devices present in the network.
• Preconfigure boot LUN zoning. You can configure Solaris ports or Linux ports on the switch,
enabling the server to boot automatically with the predefined boot LUNs.

NOTE

Fabric Assigned WWN (FAWWN) is not supported for base switches or FICON-enabled switches.

Configuring FAWWNs on switch ports
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box, shown in Figure 177, enables you to perform the
following tasks:

• Enable and disable the Fabric Assigned WWN feature status on a switch or Access Gateway
port.

468

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adapter port WWN virtualization

15

• Set the type value to auto or user-defined. When the User button is clicked, the WWN is cleared
from the table and editing is enabled.

• Delete the Fabric Assigned WWN from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.

FIGURE 177 Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box

Enabling the FAWWN feature on a switch or AG ports
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the Enable button.
The selected switch’s port status is enabled.
4. Click OK.
The Fabric Assigned WWN Confirmation and Status dialog box displays.
5. Click Start to save the changes to the switch.
6. Click Close on the Fabric Assigned WWN Configuration and Status dialog box.

Disabling the FAWWN feature on a switch or AG ports
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

469

15

Adapter port WWN virtualization

The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the Disable button.
The selected switch’s FAWWN feature status is disabled.
4. Click OK.

Auto-assigning a FAWWN to a switch or AG port
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port or AG port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the User button.
The system sets the type to User and the Fabric Assigned WWN parameters are now editable.
4. Enter a valid WWN on the selected switch.
5. Click OK.

Manually assigning a FAWWN to a switch or AG port
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port or AG port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the Auto button.
If the switch port does not have an Auto FAWWN map type and the FAWWN feature is not yet
enabled on the port, a To Be Generated message displays.
4. Click OK.

Modifying a FAWWN on a switch or AG port
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port or AG port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the User button.
The Fabric Assigned WWNs parameters are now editable.

470

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adapter port WWN virtualization

15

Deleting a FAWWN from a switch or AG port
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch port or AG port from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list.
3. Click the Delete button.
The Fabric Assigned WWN row is deleted from the Fabric Assigned WWN - Configuration list for
the selected switch port or AG port.

FAWWNs on attached AG ports
The Configure Fabric Assigned Assigned WWNs dialog box, shown in Figure 178, enables you to
configure the Fabric Assigned WWN feature on a selected attached Access Gateway (AG) port.
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Click the Attached AG Ports tab.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box — Attached AG Ports tab displays.

FIGURE 178 Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box--Attached AG Ports tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

471

15

Adapter port WWN virtualization

Adding AG port FAWWNs
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Click the Attached AG Ports tab.
3. Select a row in the Fabric Assigned WWN Configuration - AG Ports list.
4. Click Add.
The Add AG Fabric Assigned WWN Configuration dialog box displays.
5. Enter a valid world wide name (WWN), with or without colons, for the Access Gateway node.
Optionally, you can select an existing AG Node WWN from the list. The AG Node WWN box
includes all discovered AG Node WWNs that are connected to the selected switch.
6. Enter a port or a port range using numbers or a hyphen (-). For example, you can enter a range
as 1-6 or you can separate values with a comma; for example: 1, 2, 5, 7-10, 20.
7.

Click the Enable button to enable the FAWWN.

8. Set the FAWWN type to one of the following map types:

• Auto — If the switch port does not have an Auto FAWWN map type and the FAWWN feature
is not yet enabled on the port, a  message displays.

• User defined — If this option is selected, you must enter a valid world wide name, with or
without colons. The User defined text box cannot be empty.
9. Click OK to add the rows for this configuration to the Fabric Assigned WWN Configuration - AG
Ports list.

Deleting AG port FAWWNs
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.
The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Click the Attached AG Ports tab.
3. Select an online AG FAWWN row and click the Delete button.
The AG FAWWN row is cleared from the Fabric Assigned WWN Configuration - AG Ports list.

Moving an AG port FAWWN across switches
The AG port FAWWN can be online or offline when moved across switches.
1. Select Configure > Fabric Assigned WWN.
or
Right-click the switch and select Fabric Assigned WWN.

472

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Role-based access control

15

The Configure Fabric Assigned WWNs dialog box displays.
2. Click the Attached AG Ports tab.
3. Right-click the WWN row you want to move, select the Copy Row option, and paste the contents
into a text editor.
4. Select an online AG FAWWN row and click the Delete button.
5. Select a switch from the Switch list and click Add to launch the Add AG Fabric Assigned WWN
Configuration dialog box.
6. Using the information you copied to the text editor, configure the AG port FAWWN information
to be moved to the selected switch.
7.

Click OK.
The specified AG FAWWN row is added to the new switch.

Role-based access control
The Management application enables you to create resource groups and assign users to the
selected role within that group. This enables you to assign users to a role within the resource group.
The Management application provides one preconfigured resource group (All Fabrics). When you
create a resource group, all available roles are automatically assigned to the resource group. Once
the resource group is available, you can assign a user to a role within the resource group.

Host adapter management privileges
You can launch the Host Connectivity Manager (HCM) if you have read and write permissions to the
Host Adapter Management privilege. Other HBA-related operations are controlled by the following
privileges:

• The HBA technical support launch point is controlled by the Technical Support Data Collection
privilege.

• The Fibre Channel Security Protocol (FC-SP) launch point is controlled by the Security privilege.
Read-write (RW) and read-only (RO) permissions are required.

• The HBA performance monitoring launch point is controlled by the Performance privilege.

Host adapter administrator privileges
The Host Adapter Administrator role has the following privileges:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Add and delete properties
Discovery setup
Host management
Performance
Properties edit
Security
Servers
View management

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

473

15

Host performance management

• Port Mapping
• Virtual Network Management
Instructions for managing resource groups and users using roles and privileges are detailed in
“User accounts,”“Roles,” and “Areas of responsibility,” in Chapter 6, “User Account Management”.

Host performance management
Real-time performance enables you to collect data from managed HBA and CNA ports. You can use
real-time performance to configure the following options:

• Select the polling rate from 20 seconds up to 1 minute.
• Select up to 32 ports total from a maximum of 10 devices for graphing performance.
• Choose to display the same Y-axis range for both the Tx MBps and Rx MBps measure types for
easier comparison of graphs.

NOTE

In the Port Picker dialog box, the Brocade 1860 Fabric Adapter in AnyIO mode displays in both
categories (HBA port measures and CNA port measures). The ports are properly filtered to display
only the CNA or HBA port based on the selection.
Table 52 lists the counters that are supported for the FC ports and for the HBA and CNA ports.

TABLE 52

Counters

FC port measures

HBA port measures

CNA port measures

Tx % utilization

Tx % utilization

Tx % utilization

Rx % utilization

Rx % utilization

Rx % utilization

Tx MBps

Tx MBps

Tx MBps

Rx MBps

Rx MBps

Rx MBps

CRC errors

CRC errors

Signal losses

Signal losses

Sync losses

Sync losses

Link failures

Link failures

Sequence errors

Primitive sequence protocol errors

Invalid transmissions
Rx link resets
Tx link resets
NOS count
Error frames
Dropped frames
Undersized frames
Oversized frames
Bad EOF frames

474

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host security authentication

TABLE 52

15

Counters (Continued)

FC port measures

HBA port measures

CNA port measures

Invalid ordered sets
Non-frame coding error
Received paused frames
Transmitted paused frames
Received FCoE pause frames
Transmitted FCoE pause frames
Received FCS error frames
Transmitted FCS error frames
Received alignment error frames
Received length error frames
Received code error frames

Instructions for generating real-time performance data are detailed in “Generating a real-time
performance graph” on page 976.

Host security authentication
Fibre Channel Security Protocol (FC-SP) is a mechanism used to secure communication between
two switches or between a switch and a device such as an HBA port.
You can use either the Management application or the HCM GUI to display the authentication
settings and status. When you enable FC-SP authentication using the Management application,
you can also set the authentication settings on the attached 8 Gbps 8-FC port.

NOTE

FC-SP is only available for Brocade HBAs that are managed using the HCM agent and CIM Server.
FC-SP is not available for virtual ports or unmanaged HBA ports. The user must have the Security
privilege to use this feature. FC-SP is not supported for hosts connected to Access Gateway
mode-enabled devices.

Configuring security authentication using the Management application
Access the Fibre Channel Security Protocol Configuration dialog box by selecting an adapter port
from the device tree. Select the appropriate device based on how you want to configure security
authentication.
1. Select Configure > Element Manager > HCM.
The Host Connectivity Manager (HCM) launches.
2. From HCM, select Configure > Authentication.
The Fibre Channel Security Protocol Configuration dialog box, shown in Figure 179, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

475

15

Host security authentication

FIGURE 179 Fibre Channel Security Protocol Configuration dialog box
3. Configure the following parameters on the Fibre Channel Security Protocol Configuration dialog
box:
a.

Select the Enable Authentication check box to enable the authentication policy.
If authentication is enabled, the port attempts to negotiate with the switch. If the switch
does not participate in the authentication process, the port skips the authentication
process.

b.

In the Algorithm list, select one of the following options:

• MD5 - A hashing algorithm that verifies a message’s integrity using Message Digest
version 5. MD5 produces a 128-bit digest and is the required authentication
mechanism for LDAP v3 servers.

• SHA1 - A secure hashing algorithm that computes a 160-bit message digest for a data
file that is provided as input.

• MD5SHA1 - Similar to the MD5 hashing algorithm, but used for DH-CHAP
authentication.

• SHA1MD5 - Similar to the SHA1 hashing algorithm, but used for DH-CHAP
authentication.
c.

Enter a secret in the CHAP Secret field. Enter the secret again in the Retype Secret field.
The length of the secret must be from 8 through 41 characters in length. The Secret field
cannot be blank.

d.

From the Group list, select DHNULL as the DH-group type value.

4. Click OK to save the changes and close the dialog box.
FC-SP settings are also applied to the attached switch.

476

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

supportSave on adapters

15

supportSave on adapters
Host management features support capturing support information for managed Brocade adapters,
which are discovered in the Management application. You can trigger supportSave for multiple
adapters at the same time.
supportSave cannot be used to collect support information for ESXi hosts managed by a CIM
Server. Refer to the Brocade Adapters Administrator’s Guide for information about supportSave on
ESXi hosts.

NOTE

You cannot schedule host supportSave information.
Instructions for scheduling and capturing technical support files are detailed in Chapter 39,
“Technical Support”.

Host fault management
Fault management enables you to monitor your SAN using the following methods:

• Monitors logs for specified conditions and sends a notification or runs a script when the
specified condition is met.

• Creates event-based policies, which contain an event trigger and action.
• Configures e-mail event notifications.
• Receives and forwards Syslog messages from Fabric OS switches and Brocade HBAs,
managed using the Host Connectivity Manager (HCM).

• Through the Brocade Adapters ESXi Management feature, ESXi systems support the HCM and
the Management application when the CIM provider is installed on these systems.

NOTE

The host name of the ESXi host being discovered through CIM discovery in the Management
application should be configured such that it resolves to the same IP address used for
discovering that ESXi host in the Management application.

Adapter events
You can configure triggers and actions for the following event types:

• Product Audit Event — Occurs when a target product is audited.
• Product Status Event — Occurs when a device or connection changes to up or down.
• Product Threshold Alert Event — Notifies you when a threshold alert has been reached.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

477

15

Host fault management

Filtering event notifications
The Management application provides notification of many different types of SAN events. If a user
wants to receive notification of certain events, you can filter the events specifically for that user.

NOTE
The e-mail filter in the Management application is overridden by the firmware e-mail filter. When the
firmware determines that certain events do not receive e-mail notification, an e-mail notification is
not sent for those events even when the event type is added to the Selected Events table in the
Define Filter dialog box. Refer to for more information.
To configure an e-mail event, use the instructions in .

Syslog forwarding
NOTE
Syslog messages are only available on Fabric OS devices and HBAs (managed using the HCM Agent).
CIM events are only logged in the master log and the forwarding of CIM events is not supported.
Syslog forwarding is the process by which you can configure the Management application to send
Syslog messages to other computers. Switches only send the Syslog information through port 514;
therefore, if port 514 is being used by another application, you must configure the Management
application to listen on a different port. Then you must configure another Syslog server to listen for
Syslog messages and forward the messages to the Syslog listening port of the Management
application. Brocade HBAs only send the Syslog information through port 514; therefore, if port 514
is being used by another application, the Management application cannot send Syslog messages
to another computer.
Syslog messages are persisted in the database. You can view the Syslog messages from the
Management application. However, the Management application does not convert the Syslog
messages into event objects except for the audit Syslog messages.
For more information about Syslog forwarding, refer to “Syslog forwarding” on page 1163.

478

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Backup support

15

Backup support
The Management application helps you to protect your data by backing it up automatically. The
data can then be restored, as necessary.

Configuring backup to a hard drive
NOTE
Configuring backup to a hard drive requires a hard drive. The drive should not be the same physical
drive on which your operating system or the Management application is installed.
To configure the backup function to a hard drive, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
The currently defined directory displays in the Output Directory field.
3. Select the Enable Backup check box, if necessary.
4. Choose one or more of the following options:

• Select the Include Adapter Boot Image check box to back up boot image files from the boot
image repository.

• Select the Include FTP Root directory check box.
If you select the FTP Root directory, the FTP Root sub-directories, Technical Support, and
Trace Dump are selected automatically and you cannot clear the sub-directory selections.
If you do not select the FTP Root directory, the sub-directories can be selected individually.
5. Enter the time (using a 24-hour clock) you want the backup process to begin in the Next
Backup Start Time Hours and Minutes fields.
6. Select an interval from the Backup Interval list to set how often backup occurs.
7.

Browse to the hard drive and directory to which you want to back up your data.

8. Click Apply or OK.
The application verifies that the backup device exists and that the server can write to it.
If the device does not exist or is not writable, an error message displays that states you have
entered an invalid device. Click OK to go back to the Options dialog box and fix the error.
Backup occurs, if needed, at the interval you specified.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

479

15

Backup support

Enabling backup
Backup is enabled by default. However, if it has been disabled, complete the following steps to
enable the function.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
3. Select the Enable Backup check box.
4. Click Apply or OK.

Disabling backup
Backup is enabled by default. If you want to stop the backup process, you must disable backup. To
disable the backup function, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select Server Backup in the Category list.
3. Clear the Enable Backup check box.
4. Click Apply or OK.

480

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

16

Fibre Channel over Ethernet

In this chapter
• FCoE overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enhanced Ethernet features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FCoE protocols supported. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FCoE licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Saving running configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DCB configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Switch policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DCB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• QoS configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FCoE provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VLAN classifier configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LLDP-DCBX configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 802.1x authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Switch, port, and LAG deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS switches in VCS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• DCB performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• FCoE login groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Virtual FCoE port configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

481
482
483
484
484
486
487
488
501
508
510
514
517
520
524
536
538
543

FCoE overview
Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) leverages Ethernet enhancements, called Data Center Bridging
(DCB), to transport encapsulated Fibre Channel frames over Ethernet. Ethernet is the physical layer
over which the encapsulated Fibre Channel frames are transported.
One of the barriers to using Ethernet as the basis for a converged network has been the limited
bandwidth that Ethernet has historically provided. However, with 10 Gbps Ethernet, the available
bandwidth offers the potential to consolidate all the traffic types over the same link.
Unlike Fibre Channel, Ethernet is not a peer-to-peer protocol. The mechanism used to discover new
ports, MAC address assignments, and Fibre Channel logins and logouts is called the FCoE
Initialization Protocol (FIP).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

481

16

Enhanced Ethernet features

DCBX protocol
Data Center Bridging Exchange (DCBX) protocol allows enhanced Ethernet devices to convey and
configure their DCB capabilities and ensures a consistent configuration across the network. DCBX
protocol is used between DCB devices, such as a converged network adapter (CNA) and an FCoE
switch, to exchange configuration with directly connected peers.

NOTE
When DCBX protocol is used, any other Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) implementation must
be disabled on the host systems.

Enhanced Ethernet features
Data Center Bridging (DCB) is a set of IEEE 802 standard Ethernet enhancements that enable Fibre
Channel convergence with Ethernet. The two basic requirements in a lossless Ethernet
environment are Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) and priority-based flow control. These
capabilities allow the Fibre Channel frames to run directly over 10 Gbps Ethernet segments without
adversely affecting performance.

Enhanced Transmission Selection
Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) allows lower priority traffic classes to use available
bandwidth that is not being used by higher priority traffic classes and maximizes the use of
available bandwidth.
ETS allows configuration of bandwidth per priority group.
Priority group ID (PG ID) usage is defined as follows:

• PG ID 0, 7 are used when the priority group is limited for its bandwidth use.
• PG ID 8, 14 are reserved.
• PG ID 15.0 through 15.7 are used for priorities that are not limited for their bandwidth use.
The configured priority group percentage refers to the maximum percentage of available link
bandwidth after PG ID 15.0 to 15.7 is serviced, assuming all priority groups are fully subscribed. If
one of the priority groups does not consume its allocated bandwidth, then any unused portion is
available for use by other priority groups.

Priority-based flow control
Priority-based flow control (PFC) allows the network to selectively pause different classes of traffic
and create lossless lanes for Fibre Channel, while retaining packet drop congestion management
for IP traffic. A high-level pause example follows:

• During periods of heavy congestion, the receive buffers reach high threshold and generate a
pause.

• The pause tells transmission (Tx) queues to stop transmitting.
• After the receive (Rx) buffers reach low threshold, a zero pause is generated.
• The zero pause signals the Tx queues to resume transmitting.

482

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

FCoE protocols supported

16

Ethernet jumbo frames
The basic assumption underlying FCoE is that TCP/IP is not required in a local data center network
and the necessary functions can be provided with Enhanced Ethernet. The purpose of an
“enhanced” Ethernet is to provide reliable, lossless transport for the encapsulated Fibre Channel
traffic. Enhanced Ethernet provides support for jumbo Ethernet frames and in-order frame delivery.
The Fabric OS FCoE 10 Gbps converged network adapter supports jumbo packets of up to 9 KB,
compared to the original 1,518-byte maximum transmission unit (MTU) for Ethernet. The frame size
increase allows the same amount of data to be transferred with less effort.

FCoE protocols supported
The Fabric OS FCoE converged network adapter supports two layers of protocols: Ethernet link layer
and FCoE layer.

Ethernet link layer protocols supported
The following protocols support the Ethernet link layer:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

802.1q (VLAN)
802.1Qaz (Enhanced Transmission Selection)
802.1Qbb (priority-based flow control)
802.3ad (link aggregation)
802.3ae (10 Gb Ethernet)
802.1p (priority encoding)
IEEE 1149.1 (JTAG) for manufacturing debug and diagnostics
IPv4 specification (RFC 793/768)
IPv6 specification (RFC 2460)
TCP/UDP specification (RFC 793/768)
ARP specification (RFC 826)
RSS with support for IPV4TCP, IPV4, IPV6TCP, IPV6 hash types
HDS (Header-data split)

FCoE protocols
The following protocols support Fibre Channel over Ethernet:

• FIP (FC-BB5-compliant):
- Support for FIP Discovery protocol for dynamic FCF discovery and FCoE link management
- Support for FPMA and SPMA type FIP fabric login
• Support for Initiator mode only (FCP-3-compliant in Initiator mode)
• SCSI protection information support
• IP-over-FC
• NPIV support

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

483

16

FCoE licensing

FCoE licensing
The FCoE license enables Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) functionality on the following
supported DCB switches:

•
•
•
•
•

Network OS 10 GbE 24-port 8 GbE 8 FC port switch
Network OS VDX 6710, 6720, and 6730 switches
Network OS VDX 6740 and 6740T switches
Network OS VDX 8770-series switches
Network OS VDX 2730 10 GbE connection blade for the Fujitsu PRIMERGY BX900 and BX400
Blade Servers

Without the FCoE license, the DCB switches are pure Layer 2 Ethernet switches and do not allow
FCoE bridging capabilities.

NOTE
The VCS license includes the FCoE Base license. With the VCS license, the virtual FCoE ports are
displayed for Network OS switches in VCS mode.

Saving running configurations
The Save Running to Startup dialog box lists discovered DCB switches with Fabric OS version 6.3x
firmware or later. You can select available switches and move them to the Selected Switches list.
Upon startup, the DCB switch configuration is copied to the selected switches.

NOTE

The Save Running to Startup dialog box launches if there is at least one DCB switch discovered. If
no DCB switches exist, a warning message displays.

Copying switch configurations to selected switches
1. To access the Save Running to Startup dialog box, select Configure > Configuration > Save
Running to Startup.
The Save Running to Startup dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 180.

484

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Saving running configurations

16

FIGURE 180 Save Running to Startup dialog box
2. Highlight a discovered DCB switch from the Available Switches list, and click the right arrow
button to move the switch to the Selected Switches list.
3. Highlight the selected switch and click OK to start the configuration.
The running configuration is saved to the selected switch, effective on the next system startup.
If you restore the DCB switch using the Restore Switch Configuration dialog box, you are
prompted to select one of two restoration methods:

• As the running configuration and reboot
ATTENTION

Rebooting a switch connected to a fabric will stop all traffic to and from the switch. All ports
on the switch will become inactive until the switch comes back online.

• As the startup configuration (no reboot)
For instructions on how to restore a saved switch configuration, refer to the section “Restoring
a switch configuration for a selected device” in the “Device Configuration” chapter.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

485

16

DCB configuration management

DCB configuration management
Depending on the platform, the DCB switch has one of the configurations shown in Table 53.

TABLE 53

DCB configurations

Device type

Configuration possibilities

IBM blade server

•
•

Dell embedded switch module

Fabric OS DCB switch

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

14 internal 10-Gbps ports for IBM BladeCenter H
(BCH) chassis type
12 internal 10-Gbps ports IBM BladeCenter HT
(BCHT) chassis type
8 external 10-Gbps DCB ports
8 8-Gbps FC ports
16 10-Gbps internal ports
8 10-Gbps external ports
4 8-Gbps FC ports
8 16-Gbps FC ports
24 10-Gbps Ethernet ports

Fabric OS FCOE10-24 blade

24 10-Gbps Ethernet ports

Network OS VDX switches

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Network OS VDX 2730 10 Gbps connection blade
Network OS VDX 6710 switch
Network OS VDX 6720-24 switch
Network OS VDX 6720-60 switch
Network OS VDX 6730-32 switch
Network OS VDX 6730-76 switch
Network OS VDX 6740 switch
Network OS VDX 6740T switch
Network OS VDX 8770-4 switch
Network OS VDX 8770-8 switch

You must configure DCB interfaces and ports differently than you configure Fibre Channel ports to
effectively use the converged network features.
For example, priority-based flow control (PFC) and Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) are the
two QoS policy enhancements you must configure to create a lossless Ethernet. You then use DCBX
protocol on DCB-enabled devices to exchange configuration information.
The DCB ports of FOS DCB devices are categorized into two types:

• External ports - The eight external ports are the same as the original 10 Gbps Ethernet DCB
ports. The default name in the device tree is ExT /.

• Internal ports - The default name for the 12 or 14 internal ports is InT /.
802.1x, LAG configuration, and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) are not supported on internal
ports.

486

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Switch policies

16

Switch policies
You can configure and enable a number of DCB policies on a switch, port, or link aggregation group
(LAG).
The following switch policy configurations apply to all ports in a LAG:

• DCB map and Traffic Class map
• Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
The switch policies are described in the following sections.

DCB map and Traffic Class map
With DCB, Fibre Channel uses a buffer management system based on buffer-to-buffer credits, with
corresponding confirmation by the R-RDY frame. The flow control standard used for DCB is based
on “pause” frames. Coupled with an appropriate input buffer, lossless transport of frames is
possible.
Priority-based flow control (PFC) deals with the prioritization of frames. This standard IEEE 802.1Q
allows application-specific bandwidth reservations in DCB. When you create a DCB map, you
specify the precedence (priority) and then you map the priority groups with the Class of Service
(CoS) and apply bandwidth percentages.
Refer to “QoS configuration” on page 501 for instructions on how to create DCB maps and Traffic
Class maps.

LLDP profiles
Data Center Bridging Exchange (DCBX) protocol enables Enhanced Ethernet devices to discover
whether a peer device supports particular features, such as Priority-based Flow Control (PFC) or
Class of Service (CoS). In a Data Center Bridging (DCB) environment, LLDP is enhanced with DCBX
protocol to further share or change the configured DCB enhancements.
Refer to “LLDP-DCBX configuration” on page 514 for instructions on how to configure LLDP for
FCoE.

802.1x policy
802.1x is a standard authentication protocol that defines a client-server-based access control and
authentication protocol. 802.1x restricts unknown or unauthorized clients from connecting to a
LAN through publicly accessible ports.
Refer to “802.1x authentication” on page 517 for information on setting 802.1x parameters.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

487

16

DCB configuration

DCB configuration
To launch the DCB Configuration dialog box, select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.

NOTE

For FOS DCB devices, the Protocol Down Reason column, shown in Figure 181, displays the values
only for the external ports of embedded platforms but not for the internal ports.

FIGURE 181 DCB Configuration dialog box

Minimum DCB configuration for FCoE traffic
You must complete the following procedures to create the basic configuration of DCB for FCoE
traffic.

NOTE

This section is applicable for Fabric OS versions 6.3.0, 6.3.1, 6.3.2, 6.4.1, and 6.4.2. This section is
not applicable for Fabric OS versions 6.3.1_dcb, 6.3.1_cee, 6.4.1_fcoe, and 7.0.x.
In release 12.1 of the Management application, you cannot perform DCB configuration on Network
OS VDX switches. You can only view Network OS switch configuration in the Management
application DCB dialog. Refer to “Network OS switches in VCS mode” on page 524 for more
information.

NOTE

Editable operations from the Management application on Network OS products are not supported
for this release. You must use the command line interface to configure or modify parameter on
Network OS products. For more information, refer to the Network OS Command Reference.
Beginning with Network OS 4.0, VCS mode encompasses two mode types:

• Fabric cluster mode—The data path for nodes is distributed, but the configuration path is not
distributed. Each node keeps its configuration database independently.

• Logical chassis cluster mode—Both the data and configuration paths are distributed. The
entire cluster can be configured from the principal node. Logical chassis mode requires
Network OS 4.0 or later.

488

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

For more information about fabric cluster mode and logical chassis cluster mode, refer to the
Network OS Administrator’s Guide and the Network OS Command Reference, versions 4.0 or later.
The term VCS mode refers to both fabric cluster mode and logical chassis cluster mode unless
otherwise indicated.

NOTE

In the Management application, a logical chassis cluster is shown without all its members; a fabric
cluster is shown with all its members.

Creating a DCB map to carry the LAN and SAN traffic
To create a DCB map to carry the LAN and SAN traffic, complete the following steps.

NOTE
This procedure is applicable for Fabric OS versions earlier than Fabric OS 7.0. For Fabric OS versions
7.0 and later, you can only edit the default DCB map.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the switch to edit from the Products/Ports list and click Edit.
The Edit Switch dialog box displays.
3. Click the QoS tab.
The Edit Switch dialog box - QoS tab displays, as shown in Figure 182.

FIGURE 182 Edit Switch dialog box - QoS tab
4. Select DCB from the Map Type list.
5. Configure the following DCB Map parameters in the DCB Map area:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

489

16

DCB configuration

• Name - Enter a name to identify the DCB map.
• Precedence - Enter a value from 1 through 100. This number determines the map’s
priority.

• Priority Flow Control check box - Check to enable priority-based flow control on individual
priority groups.

• CoS - Click the CoS cell to launch the Edit CoS dialog box, where you can select and assign
one or more priorities (PG ID 15.0 through 15.7).
All of the eight CoS values (0-7) must be used in a DCB map. Duplicate CoS values in two
or more priority groups are not allowed.

NOTE

You can only edit CoS fields that are displayed with a green tick mark.

% Bandwidth (optional) - While in the Edit CoS dialog box, enter a bandwidth value for PG
IDs 15.0 through 15.7. You must map each CoS to at least one of the PG IDs.
Note the following points:

• You cannot define a bandwidth percentage for strict priorities (PG ID 15.0-15.7). The
total bandwidth percentage for PG ID 15.0 through 15.7 must equal 0.

• If you set a CoS value to one or more of the PG IDs 0-7, you must also enter a non-zero
bandwidth percentage. The total bandwidth percentage must equal 100.

• For PG IDs 0-7 that do not have an assigned CoS value or PFC enabled, the bandwidth
percentage must be 0.
6. Click the right arrow button to add the map to the DCB Maps list.
If a DCB map exists with the same name, a validation dialog box launches and you are asked if
you want to overwrite the map.
7.

Click OK.

8. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Configuring LLDP
To configure LLDP, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the switch to edit from the Product/Ports list and click Edit.
The Edit Switch dialog box displays.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab.
The Edit Switch dialog box - LLDP-DCBX tab displays, as shown in Figure 183.

490

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

FIGURE 183 Edit Switch dialog box - LLDP-DCBX tab
4. Select the Global Configuration LLDP profile in the LLDP Profiles list.
5. Click the left arrow button to edit.
6. Select the FCoE Application and FCoE Logical Link check boxes in the Advertise list to
advertise them on the network.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the switch.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Configuring the DCB interface with the DCB map and global LLDP profile
To configure the DCB interface, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the Te port connected to the CNA from the Product/Ports list and click Edit..
The Edit Port dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 186.
3. Select the Port tab, if necessary, and select the Enable check box.
4. Select L2 from the Interface Mode list.
5. Select Converged (for a Brocade CNA) or Access (for a QLogic CNA) from the L2 Mode list.
6. Click the QoS tab and select the Assign a map check box.
7.

Select DCB from the Map Type list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

491

16

DCB configuration

8. Select the DCB map you created in “Creating a DCB map to carry the LAN and SAN traffic” on
page 489 from the Available DCB Maps list.
9. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab and select the Enable LLDP-DCBX on Te Port Number check box.
10. Select Assign the Global Configuration.
11. Click OK.
The Deploy to Ports dialog box displays.
12. Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
13. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected ports.
14. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Creating the FCoE VLAN to carry FCoE traffic
NOTE
You can complete this procedure using the Management application on embedded platforms such
as the Fabric OS converged 10 GbE switch module for the IBM BladeCenter or the Dell M8428-k
switch. You must use Web Tools to complete this procedure for the Fabric OS Fabric OS switch or the
FCOE10-24 port blade.
To create the FCoE VLAN, complete the following steps. This procedure is applicable for Fabric OS
versions earlier than Fabric OS 7.0.
1. Select the Fabric OS FCoE switch in the device tree.
2. Select Configure > Element Manager > Admin.
The Web Tools application displays. You can also launch Web Tools by clicking the Element
Manager button on the DCB Configuration dialog box.
3. Click the DCB tab.
4. Click the VLAN tab.
5. Click Add.
The VLAN Configuration dialog box displays.
6. Enter the VLAN identifier in the VLAN ID field.
7.

Click OK on the VLAN Configuration dialog box.

8. Select the VLAN you created and click Edit to convert the VLAN to FCoE VLAN.
9. Select the FCoE check box.
10. Select the DCB interface to carry the FCoE traffic from the Selection List and click Add to add it
to the Selected List.
11. Click OK on the VLAN Configuration dialog box to save your changes.
12. Close the Web Tools application.

492

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

Creating and activating VLAN classifiers on the DCB interface
NOTE

You can complete this procedure using the Management application for Fabric OS versions 7.0 and
later. For Fabric OS versions earlier than Fabric OS 7.0, you must use the CLI.
To create and activate the VLAN classifiers on the DCB interface, complete the following steps.
1. Log in to the switch and enter global configuration mode.
switch:>cmsh
switch#configure terminal

2. Create and apply VLAN classifiers to the DCB interface to classify Ethernet frames on an
untagged interface to VLAN.
switch(config)#vlan
switch(config)#vlan
switch(config)#vlan
switch(config)#vlan

classifier
classifier
classifier
classifier

rule 1 proto fip encap ethv2
rule 2 proto fcoe encap ethv2
group 1 add rule 1
group 1 add rule 2

3. Apply the VLAN classifier group to the DCB interface.
switch(conf-if-te-0/7)#vlan classifier activate group 1 vlan 1002

4. Save the running-config file to the startup-config file.
switch#copy running-config startup-config

Adding a LAG
Link aggregation, based on the IEEE 802.3ad protocol, is a mechanism to bundle several physical
ports together to form a single logical channel or trunk. The collection of ports is called a link
aggregation group (LAG).

NOTE

An internal port cannot be part of a LAG. You can create LAGs with external ports only.

• The Add LAG button on the DCB Configuration dialog box is enabled when a single DCB switch
or ports of a single DCB switch are selected.

• The Add LAG button is disabled when multiple switches are selected, ports from different
switches are selected, or LAGs are selected.

• The Edit LAG button is enabled when a single LAG, port, or switch is selected.
Creating a LAG is not supported for Network OS products. You must use the command line
interface to configure a LAG for Network OS products. Refer to the Network OS Command
Reference for more information.

NOTE

When LLDP-DCBX is disabled on the switch, a yellow banner displays on the DCB Configuration
dialog box, indicating that LLDP-DCBX is not only disabled on the switch, but is also disabled for all
ports and LAGs on the switch.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

493

16

DCB configuration

2. Select the DCB switch or one or more DCB ports from the Products/Ports list to add to a link
aggregation group (LAG).
3. Click Add LAG or Edit LAG.
The Add LAG or Edit LAG dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 184.

FIGURE 184 Add LAG dialog box
4. Configure the following LAG parameters:

NOTE

Ports with 802.1x authentication or ports that are enabled in L2 mode or L3 mode are not
supported in a LAG.

• LAG ID - Enter the LAG identifier, using a value from 1 through 63. Duplicate LAG IDs are
not allowed.

• Status - Click the Enable check box to enable the LAG. You must enable the LAG to use the
DCB functionality.

• Interface Mode - Select None or L2. Ports that are in L2 mode cannot be added to a LAG.
The L3 interface mode option is displayed in the Edit LAG dialog box only.

• L2 Mode - Select Access or Trunk:
Access mode allows only one VLAN and allows only untagged frames.
Trunk mode allows more than one VLAN association and allows tagged frames.
IP/Netmask - The netmask is used to divide an IP address into subnets. It specifies which
portion of the IP address represents the network and which portion represents the host,
and can only be configured if the interface mode is L3.



•




494

Primary - The primary IP address assigned to a 10 Gbps DCB/FC switch module.
Secondary - The secondary IP address is optional. Secondary IP addresses are helpful
when the interface port is part of multiple subnets.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

5. Select at least one available DCB port from the Available Members list and click the right arrow
button to move it to the LAG Members list.
The DCB ports are now part of the link aggregation group.
6. Continue to configure the following LAG parameters. These parameters are always enabled.

• Type - Sets the limit on the size of the LAG. The type values include Standard, where the
LAG is limited to 16 ports, and Brocade LAG, where the LAG is limited to 4 ports. The
default is Standard.
For Network OS devices, you can add a maximum of 8 ports to the LAG.

NOTE

You cannot create Fabric OS-type LAGs from different anvil chips. If you do, an error
message displays. Only the first port is considered as part of the LAG.

• Mode - Sets all ports added to the LAG members list in either Static or Dynamic mode. The
default is Dynamic, Active, but LAG members can be Active or Passive if the LAG member
is Dynamic.
7.

When you have finished configuring the policies, click OK.
The Deploy to LAGs dialog box displays.

8. Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box launches.
9. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected LAG or
LAGs.
10. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Editing a DCB switch
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select the DCB switch from the Products/Ports list.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Switch dialog box displays (Figure 185).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

495

16

DCB configuration

FIGURE 185 Edit Switch dialog box
4. Configure the policies for the Edit Switch dialog box tabs, which are described in the following
sections:

•
•
•
•
•

“QoS configuration” on page 501
“FCoE provisioning” on page 508
“VLAN classifier configuration” on page 510
“LLDP-DCBX configuration” on page 514
“802.1x authentication” on page 517

5. When you have finished configuring the policies, apply the settings to the switch.

NOTE

Clicking Cancel when there are pending changes launches a pop-up dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The Deploy to Products dialog box displays.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box launches.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Editing a DCB port
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.

496

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

2. Select a DCB port from the Products/Ports list.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Port dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 186.

FIGURE 186 Edit Port dialog box
4. Modify the following DCB port parameters as required:

• Interface Mode - Select None or L2. For external ports, the L3 interface mode displays in
addition to None or L2. If you select L3 as the interface mode, the IP/Netmask field is
enabled and you can then assign the primary and secondary IP addresses.



L2 mode is enabled if you select L2 as the interface mode. If a DCB port is enabled on
the 10 Gbps DCB/FC switch module, the L2 mode is disabled.
L3 mode appears only for the external ports of embedded platforms.

NOTE

You can change the interface mode from L2 to None only if the port is assigned to the
default VLAN 1.

• IP/Netmask - The netmask is used to divide an IP address into subnets. It specifies which
portion of the IP address represents the network and which portion represents the host,
and can only be configured if the interface mode is L3.



Primary - The primary IP address assigned to a 10 Gbps DCB/FC switch module.
Secondary - The secondary IP address is optional. Secondary IP addresses are helpful
when the interface port is part of multiple subnets.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

497

16

DCB configuration

5. When you have finished configuring the policies, apply the settings to the DCB port.

NOTE

Clicking Cancel when there are pending changes launches a pop-up dialog box.
6. Click OK when you have finished modifying the DCB port parameters.
The Deploy to Ports dialog box displays.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box launches.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected port or
ports.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Editing a LAG
Use the following procedure to change members and policies in a link aggregation group (LAG).

NOTE
Editing a LAG is not supported for Network OS products. You must use the command line interface
to configure a LAG for Network OS products. Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for more
information.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select the link aggregation group (LAG) from the Products/Ports list.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit LAG dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 187.

498

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB configuration

16

FIGURE 187 Edit LAG dialog box
4. Configure the following LAG parameters, as required:

NOTE

Ports with 802.1x authentication or ports that are enabled in L2 mode or L3 mode are not
supported in a LAG.

• LAG ID - The LAG identifier, which is not an editable field.
• Status - Click the Enable check box to enable the LAG. You must enable the LAG to use the
DCB functionality.

• Interface Mode - Select None or L2. For external ports, the L3 interface mode displays, in
addition to None or L2. If you select L3 as the interface mode, the IP/Netmask field is
enabled and you can then assign the primary and secondary IP addresses.

• A port must be in non-L2 mode if you are adding the port as a member of a LAG.
• You cannot change the interface mode from L2 to None if the LAG is assigned to a
VLAN.

• L2 Mode - Select Access or Trunk.
Access mode allows only one VLAN and allows only untagged frames.
Trunk mode allows more than one VLAN association and allows tagged frames.
IP/Netmask - The netmask is used to divide an IP address into subnets. It specifies which
portion of the IP address represents the network and which portion represents the host,
and can only be configured if the interface mode is L3. Primary and secondary IP address
fields are applicable only to the external ports and the interface mode must be L3 to
enable these fields.



•




Primary - Enter the primary IP address assigned to an L3 port.
Secondary - Enter the secondary IP address (optional). Multiple (secondary) IP
addresses help when the interface and port are part of multiple subnets.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

499

16

DCB configuration

5. Continue to configure the following LAG parameters. These parameters are disabled until you
add a DCB port to the LAG Members list.

• Mode - The ports that are LAG members are in either Static or Dynamic mode. You cannot
change the mode on existing members of a LAG.
If the mode is set as Dynamic, you can change the dynamic mode type (to Active or
Passive) only for newly-added ports, not for existing port members of a LAG.

• Type - The type value options are Standard, where the LAG is limited to 16 ports, and
Brocade, where the LAG is limited to four ports. The default is Standard. The type is set
when you add a LAG; you cannot edit the type using the Edit LAG dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The Deploy to LAGs dialog box displays.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected LAG or
LAGs.

NOTE

If the primary or secondary IP address already exists on another interface, an error message
displays in the Status area.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Enabling a DCB port or LAG
If you select multiple switches or multiple ports and LAGs from two or more switches, both the
Enable button and the Disable button are disabled.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select one or more DCB ports or LAGs (which can span multiple switches) that you want to
enable.

NOTE

All selected LAGs must be in the same state (enabled or disabled); otherwise, both the Enable
and Disable buttons are disabled.
3. Click Enable.
The Confirmation and Status dialog box launches with the selected ports or LAGs.

500

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

QoS configuration

16

4. Click Start on the Confirmation and Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected ports
or LAGs.
The selected DCB ports or LAGs are enabled in the DCB Configuration dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Confirmation and Status dialog box.

Deleting a LAG
You can only delete a link aggregation group (LAG) that is selected from a single switch. If you
select multiple switches or multiple ports from two or more switches, the Delete button is disabled.

NOTE
Deleting a LAG is not supported for Network OS products. You must use the command line interface
to delete a LAG for Network OS products. Refer to the Network OS Command Reference for more
information.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select one or more LAGs (that can span multiple switches) that you want to delete from the
Products/Ports list.
3. Click Delete.
The Confirmation and Status dialog box launches with the selected LAGs.
4. Click Start on the Confirmation and Status dialog box to save the changes to the DCB switches.
The selected LAGs are deleted in the DCB Configuration dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Confirmation and Status dialog box.

QoS configuration
QoS configuration involves configuring packet classification, mapping the priority and traffic class,
controlling congestion, and scheduling. The configuration of these QoS entities consists of DCB
Map and Traffic Class Map configuration.
In a Data Center Bridging (DCB) configuration, Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) and
priority-based flow control (PFC) are configured by utilizing a priority table, a priority group table,
and a priority traffic table. The Traffic Class map is the mapping of user priority to traffic class.

Priority-based flow control
Priority-based flow control (PFC) is an enhancement to the existing pause mechanism in Ethernet.
PFC creates eight separate virtual links on the physical link and allows any of these links to be
paused and restarted independently, enabling the network to create a no-drop Class of Service
(CoS) for an individual virtual link.
Table 54 shows examples of how priority grouping might be allocated in a 15-priority group
scenario.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

501

16

QoS configuration

TABLE 54

Priority grouping allocated in a 15-priority group example

Priority group ID

Bandwidth (%)

Priority flow control

0

55

on

1

25

on

2

0

off

3

0

off

4

5

off

5

0

off

6

15

on

7

0

off

15.0-15.7

Strict priority

on

No bandwidth % configuration
allowed

Creating a DCB map
The procedure in this section applies only for Fabric OS versions earlier than Fabric OS 7.0.
When you create a DCB map, each of the Class of Service (CoS) options (0-7) must be mapped to
at least one of the Priority Group IDs (0-7) and the total bandwidth percentage must equal 100. All
QoS, DCB map, and Traffic Class map configurations apply to all ports in a LAG.
There can be, at the most, 16 entries in the Priority Group table. Eight of the entries are Strict
Priority entries with a Priority Group ID (15.0-15.7) and eight are user-definable entries with a
Priority Group ID of 0-7. Refer to Table 54 for an example of priority group configuration.

NOTE

The 10 Gbps DCB/FC switch module can have only one DCB map.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 188.

502

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

QoS configuration

16

FIGURE 188 QoS, Create DCB Map dialog box
4. Select DCB from the Map Type list.
5. Configure the following DCB map parameters in the DCB Map area:

• Name - Enter a name to identify the DCB map.
NOTE

Only one DCB map (the default) is supported on Fabric OS version 6.3.1_dcb and version
7.0.0 and later.

• Precedence - Enter a value from 1 through 100. This number determines the map’s
priority.

• Priority Flow Control check box - Check to enable priority-based flow control on individual
priority groups.

• CoS - Click the CoS cell to launch the Edit CoS dialog box, where you can select and assign
one or more priorities (PG ID 15.0 through 15.7).
All of the eight CoS values (0-7) must be used in a DCB map, separated with a comma and
a space. Duplicate CoS values in two or more priority groups are not allowed.

NOTE

You can only edit CoS fields that are displayed with a green tick mark.
% Bandwidth (optional) - While in the Edit CoS dialog box, enter a bandwidth value for
priority group (PG) IDs 15.0 through 15.7. You must map each CoS to at least one of the
PG IDs.
Note the following points:

• You cannot define a bandwidth percentage for strict priorities (PG ID 15.0-15.7). The
total bandwidth percentage for PG ID 15.0 through 15.7 must equal 0.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

503

16

QoS configuration

• If you set a CoS value to one or more of the PG IDs 0-7, you must also enter a non-zero
bandwidth percentage. The total bandwidth percentage must equal 100.

• For PG IDs 0-7 that do not have an assigned CoS value or PFC enabled, the bandwidth
percentage must be 0.
6. Click the right arrow button to add the map to the DCB Maps list.
If a DCB map exists with the same name, a validation dialog box launches and you are asked if
you want to overwrite the map.
7.

Click OK.

8. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Editing a DCB map
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Select a DCB map from the DCB Maps list and click the left arrow button to load its values in
the left pane. The fields are now editable.
5. Keep the same DCB map name and modify the following values, as required. Refer to Table 54
for an example of priority group configuration.

• Name - Enter a name to identify the DCB map.
• Precedence - Enter a value from 1 through 100. This number determines the map’s
priority.

• % Bandwidth - Enter a bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7. The total of all priority
groups must equal 100 percent.

• Priority Flow Control check box - Check to enable priority flow control on individual priority
groups.

• CoS - Click the CoS cell to launch the Edit CoS dialog box, where you can select and assign
one or more priorities (PG ID 15.0 through 15.7).
6. Click the right arrow button to re-add the map to the DCB Maps list.
If the DCB map already exists, an overwrite message displays.
7.

When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Deleting a DCB map
You cannot delete the DCB map of a 10 Gbps DCB/FC switch module. To delete the DCB map of an
8 Gbps DCB switch, complete the following steps.

504

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

QoS configuration

16

1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Select one or more DCB maps.
5. Click the left arrow button.
The selected DCB map row is removed from the list.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

NOTE

With Fabric OS version 7.0 and later, there is only one DCB map (default), that you cannot
delete.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Assigning a DCB map to a port or link aggregation group
The Edit Port dialog box - QoS tab allows you to assign DCB maps to ports and LAGs on a selected
switch.

NOTE

QoS maps are created using the Edit Switch dialog box, accessible from the DCB Configuration
dialog box.
A port can have either a DCB map or a Traffic Class map assigned to it, but it cannot have both.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a port or LAG, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Port or Edit LAG dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Click the Assign a map to  check box to assign the selected port to a DCB map.
If you do not select this check box, all QoS edit features are disabled.
5. Select DCB Map in the Map Type list.
6. Select a DCB map in the Available DCB Maps list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

505

16

QoS configuration

If no DCB maps were created on the switch, the Available DCB Maps list is empty. Otherwise,
the following DCB map details display:

• PG - ID — Lists the priority group ID (15.0 through 15.7 and 0 through 7).
• % Bandwidth — Lists the bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7. The total of all priority
groups must equal 100 percent.

• Priority Flow checkbox — Check to enable priority-based flow control on individual priority
groups.

• CoS — Lists the Class of Service (CoS) value that corresponds to the priority group ID rows.
The CoS value must be mapped to at least one of the priority group IDs (0-7).
7.

When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports/LAGs dialog
box.

Creating a Traffic Class map
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Select Traffic Class from the Map Type list.
5. Name the Traffic Class map.
6. Click the Traffic Class cell in a CoS row and directly enter a value from 0-7. You can leave the
cell empty to indicate zero (0).
7.

Click the right arrow button to add the map to the Traffic Class Maps list.
If the name of the Traffic Class map already exists, an overwrite warning message displays.
Click Yes to overwrite the existing Traffic Class map.

8. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Editing a Traffic Class map
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Select a Traffic Class map from the Traffic Class Maps list and click the left arrow button to
load its values in the left pane. The fields are now editable.

506

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

QoS configuration

16

If the name of the Traffic Class map already exists, an overwrite warning message displays.
Click Yes to overwrite the existing Traffic Class map.
5. Keep the same Traffic Class map name and modify the values, as required.
6. Click the right arrow button to re-add the map to the Traffic Class Maps list.
7.

When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Deleting a Traffic Class map
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Select a Traffic Class map that you want to delete from the Traffic Class Maps list.
5. Click the left arrow button.
The selected Traffic Class map row is removed from the list.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.

Assigning a Traffic Class map to a port or link
aggregation group
You can assign a Traffic Class map to a port or ports under the LAG; however, a port does not
require a Traffic Class map be assigned to it. A port can have either a DCB map or a Traffic Class
map assigned to it, but it cannot have both.

NOTE

You cannot configure QoS or LLDP-DCBX on a LAG.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a port or LAG, and click Edit.
3. Click the QoS tab on the Edit Port or Edit LAG dialog box.
The QoS dialog box displays.
4. Click the Assign a map check box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

507

16

FCoE provisioning

5. Select Traffic Class in the Map Type list.
6. Select a Traffic Class map in the Traffic Class Map list.
7.

When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports/LAGs dialog
box. Refer to “Switch, port, and LAG deployment” on page 520 for more information.

FCoE provisioning
The Management application supports FCoE provisioning only on Fabric OS version 6.3.1_dcb.
The command line interface (CLI) supports FCoE provisioning for the following versions of Fabric
OS:

•
•
•
•

Fabric OS 6.3.1_cee
Fabric OS 6.3.1_del
Fabric OS 6.4.1_fcoe
Fabric OS 7.0.x

Refer to the Fabric OS Command Reference for CLI procedures.
FCoE provisioning simplifies the number of steps required to configure a DCB port to carry the FCoE
traffic. The FCoE map contains the default DCB map and the VLAN ID. You can change the default
VLAN ID using the FCoE tab of the Edit Switch dialog box, shown in Figure 185.

NOTE

For FOS DCB switches, the default DCB map associated with the default FCoE map can be edited on
the switch from the Edit Switch dialog box - QoS tab.

Changing the VLAN ID on the default FCoE map
You can change the VLAN ID on the default FCoE map only when no ports or LAGs are participating
as members of the switch. You must first manually remove the FCoE map option for each of the
port members before you change the VLAN ID on the switch.

NOTE

You can complete this procedure using the Management application on embedded platforms such
as the Fabric OS converged 10 GbE switch module for the IBM BladeCenter or the Dell M8428-k
switch. You cannot perform this task on the Fabric OS Fabric OS switch or the FCOE10-24 port blade.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch and click Edit.
3. Click the FCoE tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The Edit Switch dialog box, FCoE tab displays the following FCoE map parameters:

NOTE

The FCoE tab does not display for the Fabric OS Fabric OS switch or the FCOE10-24 port blade.

508

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

FCoE provisioning

16

• Name — The name of the FCoE map that will be available for assignment to ports on this
switch. This is a read-only field.

• VLAN ID — Enter an FCoE VLAN identifier to associate with the FCoE map. The values range
from 2 through 3583, and 1002 is the default.

• DCB Map — The DCB map that is associated with the FCoE map. This is a read-only field.
4. Accept the default VLAN ID of 1002, or change the value. The valid VLAN ID range is from 2
through 3583.
5. Click the right arrow button to move the FCoE map parameters into the FCoE Maps list.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.
7.

Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.

Enabling or disabling the FCoE map on the port
You must first manually disable an FCoE map-enabled port if you want to edit the VLAN ID of the
FCoE map. Refer to “Changing the VLAN ID on the default FCoE map” on page 508 for information
on editing the VLAN ID using the Edit Switch dialog box, FCoE tab.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a port and click Edit.
3. Click the FCoE tab on the Edit Port dialog box.
The Edit Port dialog box, FCoE tab displays the following parameters:

• FCoE Map field — Displays the name of the FCoE map (read-only).
• VLAN ID list — The FCoE VLAN identifier associated with the FCoE map. The values range
from 2 through 3583, and 1002 is the default.

• DCB Map — Displays the name of the DCB map (read-only).
• Details of selected DCB Map list:





PG - ID — Lists the priority group ID (15.0 through 15.7 and 0 through 7)
% Bandwidth — Lists the bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7. The total of all
priority groups must equal 100 percent.
Priority Flow check box — Check to enable priority-based flow control on individual
priority groups.
CoS — Lists the Class of Service (CoS) value that corresponds to the priority group ID
rows. The CoS value must be mapped to at least one of the priority group IDs (0-7).

4. If enabled, click the Enable FCoE check box to disable the port’s membership on the FCoE
map.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

509

16

VLAN classifier configuration

5. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports dialog box.
6. Click OK after changing the attributes of the current deployment.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
7.

Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.

VLAN classifier configuration
The Management application supports VLAN classifier management only on Fabric OS 6.3.1_dcb
and Fabric OS 7.0.0.
VLAN classifier rules are used to define specific rules for classifying untagged packets to selected
VLANs based on protocol and MAC addresses. The classified frames are then tagged with a VLAN
ID.
VLAN classifier rules can be categorized into the following areas:

• 802.1Q protocol-based classifier rules
• MAC address-based classifier rules
VLAN classifiers are created on a per-switch basis.

NOTE

The VLAN Classifiers tab on the Edit Switch dialog box displays only on switches with Fabric OS
versions 7.0.0 and later.

Adding a VLAN classifier rule
The Edit Switch dialog box, VLAN Classifiers tab allows you to create rules and group them into
VLAN classifiers, which can then be applied to access port and LAG VLAN members and converged
port VLAN members.
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch and click Edit.
3. Click the VLAN Classifiers tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The Edit Switch dialog box, VLAN Classifiers tab displays, as shown in Figure 189. The Available
Rules list contains the following information:

• Rule ID — The rule identifier. Valid rule ID values are from 1 through 256.
• Rule Type — Valid rule types are MAC (MAC address-based rule) and Proto (802.1Q
protocol-based rule).

• Encapsulation — The encapsulation type (Ethv2, nosnaplic, or snaplic). The Encapsulation
column only displays a value when Proto is the rule type.

510

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN classifier configuration

16

FIGURE 189 Edit Switch dialog box, VLAN Classifiers tab
4. Click the Add button under the Available Rules list.
The Add Rules dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 190.

FIGURE 190 Add Rules dialog box
The Rule ID field is pre-populated with the next available rule ID number.
5. Keep the rule ID number as it is, or change the number using a value from 1 through 256.
6. Select a rule type. Valid rule types are MAC (MAC address-based rule) and Proto (802.1Q
protocol-based rule).
7.

If Ethernet Type is selected as the protocol rule type, enter any valid four-digit hexadecimal
value within the allowed range of 0x0000 through 0xFFFF. For the other Proto options, the hex
ID value is hard-coded as follows:

• ARP — 0x0808
• IP — 0x8881
• IPv6 — 0x86DD
8. Select an encapsulation type from the list. Options include Ethv2, nosnapllc, and snapllc. The
Encapsulation list only accepts a value when Protocol is selected as the rule type.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

511

16

VLAN classifier configuration

9. Click OK to add the rule to the Available Rules list on the VLAN Classifiers tab of the Edit Switch
dialog box and close the Add Rules dialog box.

NOTE

Clicking Apply also adds the rule to the Available Rules list on the VLAN Classifiers tab of the
Edit Switch dialog box, and in addition, the Add Rules dialog box remains open and clears all
entries for you to define the next rule.
10. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Editing a VLAN classifier rule
1. From the VLAN Classifiers tab of the Edit Switch dialog box, select a row in the Available Rules
list and click Edit.
The Edit Rules dialog box displays with the fields pre-populated with the rule details. The Rule
ID field is disabled.
2. Select a rule type. Valid rule types are MAC (MAC address-based rule) and Proto (802.1q
protocol-based rule).
3. If Ethernet is selected as the protocol-based rule type, enter any valid four-digit hexadecimal
value within the allowed range of 0x0000 through 0xFFFF. For the other Proto options, the hex
ID value is hard-coded as follows:

• ARP — 0x0808
• IP — 0x8881
• IPv6 — 0x86DD
4. Select an encapsulation type from the list. Options include Ethv2, nosnapllc, and snapllc. The
Encapsulation list only accepts a value when Protocol is selected as the rule type.
5. Click OK to add the edited rule to the Available Rules list on the VLAN Classifiers tab of the Edit
Switch dialog box and close the Edit Rules dialog box.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Deleting a VLAN classifier rule
1. From the VLAN Classifiers tab of the Edit Switch dialog box, select a row in the Available Rules
list and click Delete.
A message displays if the rules are participating in VLAN classifier groups that are currently
associated with VLAN port or LAG members.
2. Click Yes to remove the selected rule row from the list.
3. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

512

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN classifier configuration

16

Creating a VLAN classifier group
You can assign existing rules to a selected VLAN classifier and form a VLAN classifier group. If no
rules are available, you can add rules to a selected switch using the Add Rules dialog box.
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch and click Edit.
3. Click the VLAN Classifiers tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The Edit Switch dialog box, VLAN Classifiers tab displays.
4. Select a classifier ID from the VLAN Classifier list. Values range from 1 through 16.
5. Click the Add button under the VLAN Classifier list.
The classifier with the selected ID is displayed in the VLAN Classifier list.
6. Select the classifier from the VLAN Classifier list and then select the rules you want to add
under this classifier from the VLAN Classifier Rules list.

• If no rules are available, the following error message displays: “No rules are available on
this switch. Choose Add under the Available Rules list to add rules to this switch.”

• If no classifier group IDs are available, the list is disabled.
7.

Click the right arrow button.
The selected rules are assigned to the selected VLAN classifier ID in the VLAN Classifier list.

8. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Deleting a VLAN classifier group
1. Click the VLAN Classifiers tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The Edit Switch dialog box, VLAN Classifiers tab displays.
2. Select a classifier from the VLAN Classifiers list.
3. Click Delete.
The VLAN classifier group is deleted.
4. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

513

16

LLDP-DCBX configuration

LLDP-DCBX configuration
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) provides a solution for the configuration issues caused by
increasing numbers and types of network devices in a LAN environment, because, with LLDP, you
can statically monitor and configure each device on a network.
Data Center Bridging Exchange (DCBX) protocol enables Enhanced Ethernet devices to discover
whether a peer device supports particular features, such as Priority-based Flow Control (PFC) or
Class of Service (CoS). In a Data Center Bridging (DCB) environment, LLDP is enhanced with DCBX
protocol to further share or change the configured DCB enhancements. You must enable the DCBX
protocol and configure certain parameters in order to effectively utilize the benefits of a converged
network.
Using the LLDP-DCBX dialog box, you can create and manage LLDP profiles and assign an LLDP
profile to a port or link aggregation group (LAG).

Configuring LLDP for FCoE
To configure LLDP for FCoE, complete the following steps.

NOTE

When a TE port is selected to assign to an LLDP profile, a yellow banner displays with the following
error message: “LLDP-DCBX is disabled on this switch. The configuration becomes functional when
LLDP-DCBX is enabled on the switch.”
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the switch to edit in the DCB Ports and LAGs list and click Edit.
The Edit Switch dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 191.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab.

FIGURE 191 Edit Switch dialog box - LLDP-DCBX tab

514

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LLDP-DCBX configuration

16

Adding an LLDP profile
NOTE
When a TE port is selected to assign to an LLDP profile, a yellow banner displays with the following
error message: “LLDP-DCBX is disabled on this switch. The configuration becomes functional when
LLDP-DCBX is enabled on the switch.”
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The LLDP-DCBX dialog box displays.
4. Click the Enable LLDP-DCBX checkbox.
5. Configure the LLDP Profile parameters:

• Enter a name for the LLDP profile.
If the name of the LLDP profile already exists on the switch, an overwrite warning displays.

• Enter a meaningful description of the LLDP profile.
• Select a mode from the list: Both Tx (transmitted) or Rx (received), Tx only, or Rx only.
• Enter a hello interval time (in seconds) for the bridge in the Hello (secs) field. The value
range is from 4 through 180 and the default value is 30.

• Enter a multiplier (in seconds). The value range is from 1 through 10 and the default is 4.
• Check the profile parameters that you want to display as part of the LLDP profile from the
Advertise list:










Port description - The user-configured port description.
System name - The user-configured name of the local system.
System capabilities - The system capabilities running on the system.
System description - The system description containing information about the
software running on the system.
Management IP address - The management IP address of the local system.
Dot x
DCBX - The DCBX profiles.
FCoE application - The FCoE application feature.
FCoE logical link - The logical link level for the SAN network.

6. Click the right arrow button to move the newly created profile into the LLDP Profiles list.
7.

When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

515

16

LLDP-DCBX configuration

Editing an LLDP profile
1. Select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
The LLDP-DCBX Profile dialog box displays.
4. Select an LLDP profile in the LLDP Profile list.

NOTE

You can edit the  profile. You cannot, however, delete or duplicate
global configurations.
5. Click the left arrow to load the LLDP profile’s values in the left pane.
6. Modify the values, as described in “Adding an LLDP profile” on page 515. You are not allowed
to modify the LLDP profile’s name.
7.

Click the right arrow to update the LLDP profile parameters.

8. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Deleting an LLDP profile
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, and click Edit.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
4. Select an existing LLDP profile from the LLDP Profiles list in the upper right pane.

NOTE

You cannot delete . You can, however, edit global configurations. For
more information, refer to “Product configuration templates” on page 779.
5. Click the left arrow button.
The selected LLDP profile is removed from the list.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.
7.

Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box launches.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

516

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1x authentication

16

Assigning an LLDP profile to a port or ports in a LAG
You create LLDP profiles using the Edit Switch dialog box, which you access from the DCB
Configuration dialog box. Global configuration parameters, which is the default selection, are
displayed in the Assigned Profile table.

NOTE
A yellow banner displayed on the LLDP-DCBX dialog box indicates that LLDP-DCBX is disabled on the
switch. The configuration options become functional when LLDP-DCBX is enabled on the switch.
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a port or link aggregation group (LAG), and click Edit.
3. Click the LLDP-DCBX tab on the Edit Port or Edit LAG dialog box.
The Assign an LLDP profile dialog box displays.
4. Click Assign an LLDP profile to  button to enable the feature.

NOTE

Assign the Global Configuration is the default. The Available Profiles list is disabled if global
configuration is selected. In addition, the Assign an LLDP profile button is disabled if no LLDP
profiles exist on the switch.
5. Select an LLDP profile from the Available Profiles list.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports/LAGs dialog
box. Refer to “Switch, port, and LAG deployment” on page 520 for more information.

802.1x authentication
802.1x is a standard authentication protocol that defines a client-server-based access control and
authentication protocol. 802.1x restricts unknown or unauthorized clients from connecting to a
LAN through publicly accessible ports.

NOTE

802.1x is not supported for internal ports.
A switch must be enabled for 802.1x authentication before you configure its parameters. See
“Setting 802.1x parameters for a port” for more information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

517

16

802.1x authentication

Enabling 802.1x authentication
802.1x authentication is enabled or disabled globally on the switch using the Edit Switch dialog
box.
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch and click Edit.
3. Click the 802.1x tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
4. Click the Enable 802.1x check box to enable 802.1x authentication, and click OK.
5. Configure the 802.1x parameters, which are described in “Setting 802.1x parameters for a
port” on page 518.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Disabling 802.1x authentication
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch and click Edit.
3. Click the 802.1x tab on the Edit Switch dialog box.
4. Clear the Enable 802.1x check box to disable 802.1x authentication.
5. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Products dialog
box.

Setting 802.1x parameters for a port
The 802.1x parameters can be configured whether or not the feature is enabled on the switch. The
default parameters are initially populated when 802.1x is enabled, but you can change the default
values as required.
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a port and click Edit.
3. Click the 802.1x tab on the Edit Port dialog box.
The Enable 802.1x dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 192.
4. Click the Enable 802.1x check box to enable 802.1x authentication.
The 802.1x parameters are enabled for editing.

518

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1x authentication

16

FIGURE 192 802.1x dialog box
5. Configure the following 802.1x parameters:

• Wait Period - The number of seconds the switch waits before sending an EAP request. The
value range is 15 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30.

• Retry Count - The maximum number of times that the switch restarts the authentication
process before setting the switch to an unauthorized state. The value range is 1 to 10. The
default value is 2.

• Quiet Period - The number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state after a
failed authentication exchange with the client. The value range is 1 to 65535 seconds. The
default value is 60.

• Re-authentication State - Enable or disable the periodic re-authentication of the client. The
default is Disable.

• Re-authentication Interval - The number of seconds between re-authentication attempts.
The value range is 1 to 4294967295. The default value is 3600 seconds. This feature is
not dependent on the re-authentication state being enabled.

• Port Control - Select an authorization mode from the list to configure the ports for
authorization. Options include auto, force-authorized, or force-unauthorized and the
default value is auto.
6. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to launch the Deploy to Ports dialog box.
Refer to “Switch, port, and LAG deployment” on page 520 for more information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

519

16

Switch, port, and LAG deployment

Switch, port, and LAG deployment
The Deploy to Products, Deploy to Ports, and Deploy to LAGs dialog boxes provide the flexibility to
commit DCB configurations either right away or at a scheduled time. These dialog boxes also allow
you to commit the switch-level configuration changes to one or more target switches.

NOTE

Deployment from the Management application to a Network OS device is not supported.

Deploying DCB product, port, and LAG configurations
The switch, port, and LAG deployment dialog boxes provide common deployment options, save
configuration options, and schedule options. Depending on which product, port, or LAG you select,
the Deploy to Products, Deploy to Ports, or Deploy to LAGs dialog box displays upon deployment.
1. Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a switch, port, or LAG, and click Edit.
3. Configure the switch, port, or LAG. When you have finished the configuration, click OK to
launch the appropriate dialog box. Refer to Figure 193, Figure 194, and Figure 195.

FIGURE 193 Deploy to Products dialog box

520

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Switch, port, and LAG deployment

16

FIGURE 194 Deploy to Ports dialog box

FIGURE 195 Deploy to LAGs dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

521

16

Switch, port, and LAG deployment

4. Click one of the following deployment options:

•
•
•
•

Deploy now
Save and deploy now
Save deployment only
Schedule

5. Click one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running
• Save to running and startup
• Save to running and startup then reboot
The name for the scheduled product deployment is pre-populated with a
“DCB-MM-DD-YYYY-HR-MIN-SS” prefix. This is an editable field.
6. Provide a description for the product/port/LAG deployment.
7.

If the Schedule option is selected, click the Use check box for one-time deployment. One-time
deployment is the only option.
The name of the origin product is a read-only field. The origin product receives the entire
configuration, unless it is removed from the Selected Targets list.

8. Select one or more of the following configurations, to be deployed on the selected targets.

NOTE

These configurations can be pushed to target DCB switches, FOS version 6.3.1_cee or
6.3.1_del.
For switches:

•
•
•
•
•
•

QoS, DCB Map
QoS, Traffic Class Map
FCoE Map
VLAN Classifiers and Rules
LLDP Profiles
802.1x Configuration

NOTE

See “Source to target switch Fabric OS version compatibility for deployment” for restrictions.
For ports:

•
•
•
•
•

522

Port attributes (interface mode, etc.)
QoS, DCB Map / Traffic Class Map
FCoE Map
LLDP Profiles
802.1x Configuration

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Switch, port, and LAG deployment

16

NOTE

On the Deploy to Ports dialog box, you can write port configurations to the switch by enabling
the check box at the bottom of the dialog box.
For LAGs:

• LAG attributes (Interface Mode, etc.)
• QoS, DCB Map / Traffic Class Map
• LLDP Profiles
9. Click to move the available targets selected for configuration deployment to the Selected
Targets list.
10. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box launches.
11. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected devices.
12. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Source to target switch Fabric OS version compatibility for deployment
Table 55 lists the restrictions that exist when deploying source switches to target switches.

TABLE 55

Source to target switch Fabric OS version compatibility

Source Fabric OS version and device

Target Fabric OS version supported

Comments

Fabric OS DCB switch and
FCOE10-24 DCB blade with Fabric
OS version 6.4.2 or earlier.

Allows Fabric OS DCB switch and
FCOE10-24 DCB blade with Fabric
OS version 6.4.2 or earlier.

You cannot copy legacy
configurations to Fabric OS version
7.0 switches, because these
switches support FCoE maps and
can have only one default DCB map.
Legacy Fabric OS switches,
however, can have more than one
default map.

Excludes Fabric OS Converged 10
Gbe switch module for IBM
BladeCenter with Fabric OS
6.3.1_cee, Fabric OS 6.4.1_fcoe,
and Fabric OS 6.3.1_dcb.
Fabric OS FCOE10-24 DCB blade
with Fabric OS 6.4.1_fcoe

Allows FCOE10-24 DCB blade with
Fabric OS 6.4.1_fcoe or Fabric OS
7.0.0.
Allows Fabric OS Converged 10 Gbe
switch module for IBM BladeCenter
with Fabric OS 6.3.1_cee or Fabric
OS 6.3.1_dcb.

Both the source and the target
support only one default DCB map.
You can copy QoS, LLDP, and
802.1x configurations from the
source to the target.

Excludes Fabric OS DCB switch and
FCOE10-24 DCB blade with Fabric
OS 6.4.2 or earlier.
Fabric OS DCB switch
FCOE10-24 DCB blade with Fabric
OS 7.0.

Allows Fabric OS DCB switch and
FCOE10-24 DCB blade with Fabric
OS 7.0.0.

VLAN classifiers are supported, but
the FCoE map is not supported on
Fabric OS 7.0.0.

Excludes all others.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

523

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 55

Source to target switch Fabric OS version compatibility (Continued)

Source Fabric OS version and device

Target Fabric OS version supported

Comments

Fabric OS Converged 10 GbE switch
module for IBM BladeCenter with
Fabric OS 6.3.1_cee and 6.3.1_dcb

Allows Fabric OS Converged 10 Gbe
switch module for IBM BladeCenter
with Fabric OS 6.3.1_cee, Fabric OS
6.3.1_dcb.

Both source and target switches
must support the FCoE map and
VLAN classifiers.

Allows Dell M8428-k switch with
Fabric OS 6.3.1_dell, Fabric OS
6.3.1_dcb.
Dell M8428-k switch with Fabric OS
6.3.1_dell and 6.3.1_dcb

Allows Fabric OS Converged 10 Gbe
switch module for IBM BladeCenter
with Fabric OS 6.3.1_cee, Fabric OS
6.3.1_dcb.

Both source and target switches
must support the FCoE map and
VLAN classifiers.

Allows Dell M8428-k switch with
Fabric OS 6.3.1_dell, Fabric OS
6.3.1_dcb.

Network OS switches in VCS mode
For a Network OS switch in VCS mode or standalone mode, you can use the management
application to perform the following tasks:

• View Network OS switches, ports, LAGs, and vLAGs and their basic configuration details and
detailed DCB configurations.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Enable and disable ports, LAGs, and vLAGs.
View real-time performance graphs.
View historical graphs and reports.
View profiled port, LAG, and vLAG configurations.
View the list of virtual FCoE ports.
Enable, disable, and view Connected End Device details for the listed virtual FCoE ports.
Launch the VLAN Manager.
Launch the Access Control List (ACL) Manager.

NOTE
Network OS switches in standalone mode do not support FCoE login group management or virtual
FCoE port management.

NOTE

Network OS switches in VCS mode do not support FCoE login group management.

524

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

16

Supported VCS platforms
The following switches are supported in a virtual fabric switching environment:

• VDX 2730 10 GbE connection blade for the Fujitsu PRIMERGY BX900 and BX400 Blade
Servers

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

VDX 6710
VDX 6720-24
VDX 6720-60
VDX 6730-32
VDX 6730-76
VDX 6740
VDX 6740T
VDX 8770-4
VDX 8770-8

Viewing switches in VCS mode
1. Launch the DCB Configuration dialog box using one of the following methods:

• Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the device tree, and select Configure > DCB.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the topology map and select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a Network OS switch in the DCB Products/Ports table and click View.
The View Switch dialog box displays, allowing you to view the Network OS switch parameters.
3. Click one of the following tabs and refer to the appropriate corresponding table for a
description of the feature parameters.

• QoS — Refer to “Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch” on page 526.
• FCoE — Refer to “Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch” on page 526.
• VLAN Classifiers — Refer to “Viewing VLAN classifiers and rules parameters on the Network
OS switch” on page 527.

• LLDP-DCBX — Refer to “Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch” on
page 527.

• 802.1x — “Viewing the 802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch” on page 528.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

525

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch
Table 56 describes the parameters that displays on the View Switch dialog box - QoS tab.

NOTE

Network OS switches in VCS mode support only the DCB map. Network OS switches in standalone
mode supports both the DCB and Traffic Class maps.

TABLE 56

QoS configuration parameters on VCS switch

Map Type

Displays the map type: DCB or Traffic Class for a Standalone Network OS
switch or DCB for Network OS switches in VCS mode.

DCB Maps list

DCB Map Parameters

Displays the following map information:
Name — The name of the map.
Precedence — The precedence number that determines the map’s
priority. Valid values are from 1 through 100.
• Fabric Remap Priority — The fabric remap priority of the port. Valid
values are CoS 0 through CoS 6, and the default is CoS 0.
• Lossless Remap Priority — The FCoE lossless remap priority of the
port. Valid values are CoS 0 through CoS 6, and the default is
CoS 0.

•
•

Displays the following map parameters:
PG ID — Lists the priority group ID (15.0 to 15.7 and 0 to 7).
% Bandwidth — Lists the bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7.
The total of all priority groups must equal 100%.
• Priority Flow — Check to enable priority flow control on individual
priority groups.
• CoS — Lists the Class of Service (CoS) value that corresponds to the
Priority Group ID rows. The CoS value must be mapped to at least
one of the Priority Group IDs (0-7).

•
•

Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch
Table 57 describes the parameters that displays on the View Switch dialog box - FCoE tab.

TABLE 57

FCoE configuration parameters on VCS switch

Field/Component
FCoE Map
Note: The default FCoE map contains
both the default Fabric map and the
default DCB map.
Fabric Map

526

Description
Displays the following information about the FCoE map:
Fabric Map — The name of the Fabric map. The default Fabric map
consists of virtual fabric and FCoE VLAN-related information.
• DCB Map — The name of the DCB map.

•

Displays the following information about the Fabric map:
VLAN ID — The FCoE VLAN identifier associated with the Fabric
map.
• FCMAP — The unique MAC address prefix an FCoE Forwarder (FCF)
uses to identify FCoE traffic on a particular FCoE VLAN.
• Fabric ID — The Fabric identifier.
• Priority — The FCoE priority forwarding class to queue mapping.
• FIP Advertisement Interval — Displays the frequency, in seconds, at
which FIP advertisements are set.
• FIP Keep Alive Timeout — Displays whether the Keep Alive Timeout
feature is enabled. The feature represents the amount of time (in
seconds) to keep keep-alive connections active.

•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

16

Viewing VLAN classifiers and rules parameters on the Network OS switch
Table 58 describes the parameters that display on the View Switch dialog box - VLAN Classifiers
tab.

TABLE 58

VLAN classifiers and rules configuration parameters on VCS switch

Field/Component
Available Rules

VLAN Classifiers

Description
Displays the following Available Rules information:
Rule ID — The rule identifier. Valid rule ID values are from 1 through
256.
• Rule Type — Valid rule types are MAC (MAC address-based rule) and
Proto (802.1Q protocol-based rule).
• Encapsulation — The encapsulation type
(ethv2/nosnaplic/snaplic). Encapsulation only displays a value
when Proto is selected as the rule type.

•

Displays the following VLAN Classifier information:
Classifiers/Rules — A tree that displays the classifier nodes and
rules.
• Rule Type — Valid rule types are MAC (MAC address-based rule) and
Proto (802.1Q protocol-based rule).
• Encapsulation — The encapsulation type
(ethv2/nosnaplic/snaplic). Encapsulation only displays a value
when Proto is selected as the rule type.

•

Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch
Table 59 describes the LLDP profiles table (in global configuration) and the LLDP profiles.

TABLE 59

LLDP-DCBX configuration parameters on VCS switch

Field/Component

Description

LLDP Profiles list

Lists the currently available LLDP profiles, the profile parameters (name
and description) and whether the profiles are enabled or disabled.

LLDP Profile Parameters

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Displays the following details of the selected LLDP profile:
Mode — The Transmit and Received mode. Options include Both
Transmit and Received, Transmit Only, or Receive Only.
• iSCSI Priority — The CoS priority value for iSCSI traffic. The value
range is from COS 0 through COS 7 and the default value is COS 4.
• Hello — The hello interval time (in seconds) for the bridge. The value
range is from 4 through 180 and the default value is 30.
• Multiplier — The multiplier (in seconds). The value range is from 2
through 10 and the default is 4.
• Advertise — The following profiles that are configured to advertise.
- Port Description
- System Capabilities
- System Name
- System Description
- Management IP Address
- Dot 1
- Dot 3
- DCBX
- FCoE Application
- FCoE Logical Link
- iSCSI Application

•

527

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

Viewing the 802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch
Table 60 describes the parameter that displays on the View Switch dialog box - QoS tab.

TABLE 60

802.1x configuration parameter on VCS switch

Field/Component

Description

802.1x

Displays the enabled or disabled status of the 802.1x configuration on
the Network OS switch.

Viewing ports in VCS mode
1. Launch the DCB Configuration dialog box using one of the following methods:

• Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the device tree, and select Configure > DCB.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the topology map and select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a Network OS switch port in the DCB Products/Ports table and click View.
The View Port dialog box displays, allowing you to view the Network OS switch port parameters.
3. Click one of the following tabs and refer to the appropriate corresponding table for a
description of the feature parameters.

•
•
•
•

Port — “Viewing port parameters on the Network OS switch port” on page 528
QoS — Refer to “Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch port” on page 529.
FCoE — Refer to “Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch port” on page 530.
LLDP-DCBX — Refer to “Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch port” on
page 531.

• 802.1x — “Viewing the 802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch port” on page 531.

Viewing port parameters on the Network OS switch port
Table 61 describes the parameters that displays on the View Port dialog box — Port tab.

TABLE 61

528

Port parameters on the Network OS switch port

Field/Component

Description

Port

The status of the port (enabled or disabled).

Profile

The port’s profiled status (enabled or disabled). When enabled, the
Interface Mode, L2 Mode, and Default CoS are configured by way of port
profiles.

Interface Mode

The port’s configured operating mode. Options include L2 (Layer 2) and
None.  is displayed if the port is profiled.

L2 Mode

The L2 mode. Supported L2 modes for a port are Access, Trunk, and
Converged.  is displayed if the port is profiled.

Default CoS

The default Cost of Service (CoS) assigned to the port. The value range is
from COS 0 through COS 7 and the default value is COS 0.  is
displayed if the port is profiled.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 61

16

Port parameters on the Network OS switch port (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

MTU

The maximum transmission unit (MTU) in bytes. The value range is from
1522 through 9216 and the default value is 2500.

iSCSI Priority

The CoS priority value for iSCSI traffic. The value range is from COS 0
through COS 7 and the default value is COS 4.

Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch port
Table 62 (DCB) and Table 63 (non-DCB) describe the parameters that displays on the View Port
dialog box - QoS tab.

NOTE

Network OS switches with VCS enabled supports only the DCB map. Network OS switches in
standalone mode supports both the DCB and Traffic Class maps.
QoS-DCB

TABLE 62

QoS (DCB) parameters on the Network OS switch port.

Field/Component

Description

Mode

The QoS mode (DCB).

Fabric Remap Priority

The fabric remap priority of the port. Valid values are CoS 0 through CoS
6, and the default is CoS 0.

DCB Map

The DCB map that is associated with the FCoE Map. This is a read-only
field.

Lossless Remap Priority

The FCoE lossless remap priority of the port. Valid values are CoS 0
through CoS 6, and the default is CoS 0.

Precedence

This number determines the map’s priority. Valid values are from 1
through 100.

DCB Map Parameters

•
•
•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PG ID — Lists the priority group ID (15.0 to 15.7 and 0 to 7).
% Bandwidth — Lists the bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7.
The total of all priority groups must equal 100%.
Priority Flow Control — When enabled, enables priority flow control
on individual priority groups.
CoS — Lists the Class of Service (CoS) value that corresponds to the
Priority Group ID rows. The CoS value must be mapped to at least
one of the Priority Group IDs (0-7).

529

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

QoS - Non-DCB

TABLE 63

QoS (non-DCB) parameters on the Network OS switch port

Field/Component

Description

Mode

The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the port (non-DCB).

Trust

Indicates whether the Ethernet trust of the port is enabled or disabled.

NOTE: Applicable only for standalone
Network OS devices.
Flow Control

The Ethernet priority flow control mode of the port. The default flow
control mode is Off. Possible modes are as follows:
• Off
• 802.3x pause
• Tx On or Off
• Rx On or Off
• Priority Flow Control. For this mode, the Tx and Rx values for each
CoS display in the table.

Maps

Displays details about the following DCB maps:
CoS to CoS — Displays the details of the CoS to CoS map assigned
to the port.
• Traffic Class — Displays the details of the Traffic Class map
assigned to the port.

•

Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch port
Table 64 describes the parameters that displays on the View Port dialog box - FCoE tab.

TABLE 64

530

FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch port

Field/Component

Description

FCoE

If the port was FCoE-enabled, then the FCoE field is Enabled. If the FCoE
map is not assigned to the selected port, the FCoE tab is hidden.

FCoE Map Parameters

Displays the following FCoE map and Fabric map parameters:
FCoE Map
• Fabric Map — The Fabric map that is associated with the FCoE map.
• DCB Map — The DCB map that is associated with the FCoE map.
Fabric Map
• VLAN ID — Displays the FCoE VLAN identifier that associates the
VLAN with the FCoE map. The values range from 2 through 3583,
and 1002 is the default.
• FCMAP — The unique MAC address prefix an FCoE Forwarder (FCF)
uses to identify FCoE traffic on a particular FCoE VLAN.
• Fabric ID — The Fabric identifier. The default value is 128.
• Priority — The FCoE priority forwarding class to queue mapping. The
default priority value is 3.
• FIP Advertisement Interval — Displays the frequency, in seconds, at
which FIP advertisements are set. The default interval value is
8000.
• FIP Keep Alive Timeout — Displays whether the Keep Alive Timeout
feature is enabled. The feature represents the amount of time (in
seconds) to keep keep-alive connections active. The default value
is Enabled.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

16

Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch port
Table 65 describes the LLDP profiles table (in global configuration) and the LLDP profiles.

TABLE 65

LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch port

Field/Component

Description

LLDP-DCBX

Indicates whether LLDP-DCBX feature is enabled or disabled.

LLDP Profile Parameters

Displays the following LLDP profile parameters:
Name — The name of the LLDP profile.
Description — A description of the LLDP profile.
Mode — The Transmit and Received mode. Options include Both
Transmit and Received, Transmit Only, or Receive Only.
• iSCSI Priority — The CoS priority value for iSCSI traffic. The value
range is from COS 0 through COS 7 and the default value is COS 4.
• Hello — The hello interval time (in seconds) for the bridge. The value
range is from 4 through 180 and the default value is 30.
• Multiplier — The multiplier (in seconds). The value range is from 2
through 10 and the default is 4.
• Advertise — The profiles that are configured to advertise. The profile
options are as follows:
- Port Description
- System Capabilities
- System Name
- System Description
- Management IP Address
- Dot 1
- Dot 3
- DCBX
- FCoE Application
- FCoE Logical Link
- iSCSI Application

•
•
•

Viewing the 802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch port
Table 66 describes the parameter that displays on the View Port dialog box - QoS tab.

TABLE 66

802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch port

Field/Component

Description

802.1x

Indicates whether 802.1x is enabled or disabled. The 802.1x fields are
hidden if 802.1x authentication is disabled on the port.

Wait Period (sec)

The number of seconds the switch waits before sending an EAP request.
The value range is 15 to 65535 seconds. The default value is 30.

Retry Count

The maximum number of times that the switch restarts the
authentication process before setting the switch to an unauthorized
state. The value range is 1 to 10. The default value is 2.

Quiet Period (sec)

The number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state after a
failed authentication exchange with the client. The value range is 1 to
65535 seconds. The default value is 60.

Re-authentication State

Whether the periodic re-authentication of the client is enabled or
disabled. The default is Disable.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

531

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 66

802.1x parameter on the Network OS switch port (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Re-authentication Interval (sec)

The number of seconds between re-authentication attempts. The value
range is 1 to 4294967295. The default value is 3600 seconds. This
feature is not dependent on the re-authentication state being enabled.

Port Control

The authorization mode to configure the ports for authorization. Options
include Auto, Force-authorized, or Force-unauthorized. The default value
is Auto.

Viewing LAGs in VCS mode
1. Launch the DCB Configuration dialog box using one of the following methods:

• Select Configure > DCB from the menu bar.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the device tree, and select Configure > DCB.
• Right-click the DCB switch from the topology map and select Configure > DCB.
The DCB Configuration dialog box displays, showing the status of all DCB-related hardware and
functions.
2. Select a Network OS switch LAG in the DCB Products/Ports table and click View.
The View LAG dialog box displays, allowing you to view the Network OS switch port parameters.
3. Click one of the following tabs and refer to the appropriate corresponding table for a
description of the feature parameters.

• LAG — “Viewing LAG parameters on the Network OS switch LAG” on page 532
• QoS — Refer to “Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch LAG” on page 533.
• LLDP-DCBX — Refer to “Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch LAG” on
page 535.

• FCoE — Refer to “Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch” on page 526.

Viewing LAG parameters on the Network OS switch LAG
Table 67 describes the parameters that displays on the View LAG dialog box — LAG tab.

TABLE 67

LAG parameters on the Network OS switch LAG

Field/Component

Description

LAG ID

For Network OS switches in VCS mode, the LAG ID range is from 1
through 6144. For Network OS switches in standalone mode, the LAG ID
range is from 1 through 64.

Interface Mode

The interface mode, which can be none or layer 2 (L2).

Profile

Indicates whether the LAG profile is enabled or disabled.

L2 Mode

The L2 mode (Access or Trunk):
Access mode allows only one VLAN and allows only untagged
frames.
• Trunk mode allows more than one VLAN association and allows
tagged frames.

•

NOTE:  displays if the LAG is profiled.

532

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 67

16

LAG parameters on the Network OS switch LAG (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Status

Indicates whether the LAG is enabled or disabled. You must enable the
LAG to use the DCB functionality.

Default CoS

The Cost of Service (CoS) value for incoming untagged frames. Values
are 0-7 or  if the port is profiled. The default CoS is 0.

Type

Displays the limit on the size of the LAG. The type values include
Standard, where the LAG is limited to 16 ports, and Brocade LAG, where
the LAG is limited to 8 ports. The default is Standard.

MTU

The maximum transmission unit (MTU). Valid values are from 1522
through 9216 bytes, and the default is 2500 bytes.

Mode

Displays how the ports are added to the LAG members table in either
Static or Dynamic mode. The default is Dynamic, Active, but LAG
members can be Active or Passive if the LAG member is Dynamic.

Minimum Links

Displays the minimum number of operationally UP links needed to
declare the port channel UP. This field is applicable only for standalone
Network OS devices.

LAG Members list

Lists the ports that are members of the LAG.

Viewing QoS parameters on the Network OS switch LAG
Table 68 (DCB) and Table 69 (non-DCB) describe the parameters that displays on the View LAG
dialog box - QoS tab.

NOTE

Network OS switches in VCS mode support only the DCB map. Network OS switches in standalone
mode supports both the DCB and Traffic Class maps.
QoS-DCB

TABLE 68

QoS (DCB) parameters on the Network OS switch LAG.

Field/Component

Description

Mode

The QoS mode (DCB).

Fabric Remap Priority

The fabric remap priority of the LAG. Valid values are CoS 0 through CoS
6, and the default is CoS 0.

DCB Map

The DCB map that is associated with the FCoE Map. This is a read-only
field.

Lossless Remap Priority

The FCoE lossless remap priority of the LAG. Valid values are CoS 0
through CoS 6, and the default is CoS 0.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

533

16

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 68

QoS (DCB) parameters on the Network OS switch LAG. (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Precedence

This number determines the map’s priority. Valid values are from 1
through 100.

DCB Map Parameters

•
•
•
•

PG ID — Lists the priority group ID (15.0 to 15.7 and 0 to 7).
% Bandwidth — Lists the bandwidth value for priority group IDs 0-7.
The total of all priority groups must equal 100%.
Priority Flow Control — When enabled, enables priority flow control
on individual priority groups.
CoS — Lists the Class of Service (CoS) value that corresponds to the
Priority Group ID rows. The CoS value must be mapped to at least
one of the Priority Group IDs (0-7).

QoS - Non-DCB

TABLE 69

QoS (non-DCB) parameters on the Network OS switch LAG

Field/Component

Description

Mode

The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the LAG (non-DCB).

Trust

Indicates whether the Ethernet trust of the LAG is enabled or disabled.

NOTE: Applicable only for standalone
Network OS devices.
Flow Control

Maps

The Ethernet priority flow control mode of the LAG. The default flow
control mode is Off. Possible modes are as follows:
• Off
• 802.3x pause
• Tx On or Off
• Rx On or Off
• Priority Flow Control. For this mode, the Tx and Rx values for each
CoS display in the table.
Displays details about the following DCB maps:
CoS to CoS — Displays the details of the CoS to CoS map assigned
to the port.
• Traffic Class — Displays the details of the Traffic Class map
assigned to the port.

•

Viewing FCoE parameters on the Network OS switch LAG
Table 70 describes the parameters that displays on the View LAG dialog box - FCoE tab.

NOTE
The Interface mode is None and the L2 mode is empty for the FCoE-provisioned LAG.

534

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Network OS switches in VCS mode

TABLE 70

16

FCoE configuration parameters on VCS switch

Field/Component
FCoE Map
Note: The default FCoE map contains
both the default Fabric map and the
default DCB map.
Fabric Map

Description
Displays the following information about the FCoE map:
Fabric Map — The name of the Fabric map. The default Fabric map
consists of virtual fabric and FCoE VLAN-related information.
• DCB Map — The name of the DCB map.

•

Displays the following information about the Fabric map:
VLAN ID — The FCoE VLAN identifier associated with the Fabric
map.
• FCMAP — The unique MAC address prefix an FCoE Forwarder (FCF)
uses to identify FCoE traffic on a particular FCoE VLAN.
• Fabric ID — The Fabric identifier.
• Priority — The FCoE priority forwarding class to queue mapping.
• FIP Advertisement Interval — Displays the frequency, in seconds, at
which FIP advertisements are set.
• FIP Keep Alive Timeout — Displays whether the Keep Alive Timeout
feature is enabled. The feature represents the amount of time (in
seconds) to keep keep-alive connections active.

•

Viewing LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch LAG
Table 71 describe the parameters that displays on the View LAG dialog box - LLDP-DCBX tab.

TABLE 71

LLDP-DCBX parameters on the Network OS switch LAG

Field/Component

Description

Enable LLDP-DCBX check box

Indicates whether LLDP-DCBX feature is enabled or disabled and
whether the global configuration or a specified LLDP profile has been
assigned to the vLAG ports.

LLDP Profile Parameters

Displays the following LLDP profile parameters:
• Name — The name of the LLDP profile.
• Description — A description of the LLDP profile.
• Mode — The Transmit and Received mode. Options include Both
Transmit and Received, Transmit Only, or Receive Only.
• Hello — The hello interval time (in seconds) for the bridge. The value
range is from 4 through 180 and the default value is 30.
• Multiplier — The multiplier (in seconds). The value range is from 1
through 10 and the default is 4.
• Advertise — The profiles that are configured to advertise. The profile
options are as follows:
- DCBX
- FCoE Application
- FCoE Logical Link

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

535

16

DCB performance

DCB performance
Performance monitoring provides details about the quantity of traffic and errors a specific port or
device generates on the fabric over a specific time frame. You can also use Performance features
to indicate the devices that create the most traffic and to identify the ports that are most
congested.
The Performance menu items launch either SAN or IP performance dialog boxes based on which
tab you select. Note the following points:

• The DCB configuration dialog box can be launched from either the SAN or IP tab.
• The appropriate IP Performance tab launches depending on whether you selected a port or a
switch.

Real-time performance graph
You can monitor a device’s performance through a performance graph that displays transmit and
receive data. The graphs can be sorted by the column headers. You can create multiple real-time
performance graph instances.

Generating a real-time performance graph from the SAN tab
To generate a real-time performance graph for a FOS device, complete the following steps.
1. Click the SAN tab.
2. Select a DCB port from the DCB Configuration dialog box, and select Real Time Graph from the
Performance list.
A message displays, prompting you to close the DCB Configuration dialog box.
3. Click OK to close the DCB Configuration dialog and open the Performance dialog box.
The Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 196.

FIGURE 196 Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box - SAN tab
For complete information about Real Time Performance Graphs, refer to “SAN real-time
performance data” on page 976.

536

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

DCB performance

16

Generating a real-time performance graph from the IP tab
To generate a real-time performance graph for a Network OS or FOS DCB switch, complete the
following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select a DCB port from the DCB Configuration dialog box, and select Real Time Graph from the
Performance list.
A message displays, prompting you to close the DCB Configuration dialog box.
3. Click OK to close the DCB Configuration dialog and open the Performance dialog box.
The Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 197.

FIGURE 197 Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box - IP tab
For complete information about Real Time Performance Graphs, refer to “SAN real-time
performance data” on page 976.

Historical performance graph
The Historical Performance Graph dialog box enables you to customize how you want the historical
performance information to display.

Generating a historical performance graph
You can generate a historical performance graph by selecting both Network OS and FOS DCB
devices from the IP Tab or by selecting only Network OS DCB devices from the IP tab.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

537

16

FCoE login groups

1. Select a DCB port from the DCB Configuration dialog box, and select Historical Graph from the
Performance list.
A message displays, prompting you to close the DCB Configuration dialog.
2. Click OK to close the DCB Configuration dialog and open the Performance dialog box.
The Historical Performance Graph dialog box displays.
For complete information about Real Time Performance Graphs, refer to “SAN real-time
performance data” on page 976.

Historical performance report
The Historical Performance Report dialog box enables you to customize how you want the historical
performance information to display.

Generating a historical performance report
1. Select a DCB port from the DCB Configuration dialog box, and select Historical Report from the
Performance list.
A message displays, prompting you to close the DCB Configuration dialog box.
2. Click OK to close the DCB Configuration dialog and open the Performance dialog box.
The Historical Performance Report dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 198.

FIGURE 198 Historical Performance Report dialog box

FCoE login groups
The FCoE Configuration dialog box allows you to manage the FCoE login configuration parameters
on the DCB switches in all discovered fabrics. FCoE login configuration is created and maintained
as a fabric-wide configuration.
With the FCoE license, the FCoE Configuration dialog box displays virtual FCoE port information and
enables you to manage the virtual port information. The topology displays directly connected
converged network adapters (CNAs) and the Properties dialog box for the virtual FCoE port details.

538

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

FCoE login groups

16

Without the FCoE license, the virtual FCoE port displays in the device tree, but you cannot enable,
disable, or view virtual FCoE port information.

NOTE

FCoE Login Group is not available for Network OS DCB devices.
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays all configured login groups and the following details
associated with a selected device, shown in Figure 199.

• FCoE login — Indicates whether the switch is FCoE enabled or disabled.
• Group Status — Indicates whether the group is active or conflicted.
• Member Status — Indicates whether the device associated with the group is active or
conflicted.

• Member WWN — Displays the world wide name (WWN) of the device associated with the
group.

• Type — Displays the model type.

FIGURE 199 FCoE Configuration dialog box
2. Perform one of the following tasks:
Under Login Group:

• Click Add to launch the Add Login Group dialog box, where you can select an existing
switch or enter the WWN of a switch on which the FCoE login group will be created. See
“Adding an FCoE login group” on page 540.

• Click Edit to launch the Edit Login Group dialog box, where you can edit the login group
parameters. See “Editing an FCoE login group” on page 541.

• Click Delete to remove the login group from the list. See “Deleting one or more FCoE login
groups” on page 542.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

539

16

FCoE login groups

Adding an FCoE login group
Complete the following steps to add switches to a login group. You can manually add ports by
entering the world wide name (WWN) or select available managed CNAs from all discovered hosts.
Only directly-connected devices are supported.
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
or
Right-click the DCB device and select FCoE.
2. Click Add.
The Add Login Group dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 200.

FIGURE 200 Add Login Group dialog box
3. Select an existing switch from the Switch list, or enter the WWN of the switch that will be added
to the FCoE login group.
4. Select one of the following Login Members options:

• Allow all — Click to allow all login members into the Available Members list.
• Allow specific — Click to allow specific login members into the Available Members list. If
you select this option, you can add specific login members using the options in the
Available Members area.
5. Select one of the following Available Member options:

• Port WWN — Click to enter the world wide name (WWN) of the port to associate with the
selected switch. The member port WWN text field allows a maximum of 16 digits.

• Managed CNAs — Click to show a list of products and ports which can be selected as login
group members.
6. Select available members from the Products/Ports list and click the right arrow button to move
the available members to the Selected Members list.

540

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

FCoE login groups

7.

16

Click OK.
The FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog displays.

8. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
9. Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
On closing the FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog box, the FCoE Configuration
Dialog refreshes the data and the latest information is displayed.

• “FCoE login groups”

Editing an FCoE login group
Complete the following steps to edit the name of a login group. You can manually add ports by
entering the world wide name (WWN) or select available managed CNAs from all discovered hosts.
Only directly-connected devices are supported.
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
2. Select a group from the Login Groups list and click Edit.
The Edit Login Group dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 186.

FIGURE 201 Edit Login Group dialog box
NOTE

The Fabric field and the Switch field are read-only fields.
3. Perform one of the following editing tasks:

• Rename the login group by entering the new name into the Name field. The Allow All option
must be selected to rename the login group.

• Select one of the following options to add or remove login members into the Available
Members list. The Allow Specific option must be selected to add or remove login members.

• Port WWN — Click to enter the world wide name (WWN) of the port to associate with
the selected switch. The member port WWN text field allows a maximum of 16 digits.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

541

16

FCoE login groups

• Managed CNAs — Click to show a list of products and ports which can be selected as
login group members.
4. Select available members from the Products/Ports list and click the right arrow button to move
the available members to the Selected Members list.
5. Click OK.
The FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog displays.
6. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
7.

Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
On closing the FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog box, the FCoE Configuration
Dialog refreshes the data and the latest information is displayed.

Deleting one or more FCoE login groups
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
or
Right-click the DCB device and select FCoE.
The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select a group from the Login Groups list and click Delete.
The FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog displays.
3. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
4. Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
The login group is removed from the Login Group table.

Disabling the FCoE login management feature on a switch
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
or
Right-click the DCB device and select FCoE.
The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select an FCoE-enabled switch from the Login Groups list and click Disable.
The FCoE Login Group Confirmation and Status dialog displays.
3. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
4. Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
The FCoE login management feature is disabled and all login groups on the selected switch are
deleted.
The value in the FCoE Login Management State column for the selected switch is Disabled and
no login groups appear under the switch after the FCoE Configuration dialog box refresh
operation.

• “FCoE login groups”

542

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Virtual FCoE port configuration

16

Enabling the FCoE login management feature on a switch
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
or
Right-click the DCB device and select FCoE.
The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select an FCoE-disabled switch from the Login Groups list and click Enable.
3. The FCoE Login Group Configuration and Status dialog box displays.
4. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
5. Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
The FCoE login management feature is enabled on the selected switch.
The value in the FCoE Login Management State column is Enabled after the FCoE
Configuration dialog box refresh operation.

Virtual FCoE port configuration
The virtual FCoE port has the following configuration features:

• Displays the virtual FCoE ports on each of the DCB devices, which provides the Ethernet with
bridging capability

• One-to-one mapping of FCoE ports with 10 Gbps Ethernet ports
• Option to enable or disable the virtual FCoE ports
• Option to view the end devices connected to a virtual FCoE port

Viewing virtual FCoE ports
Configuration of virtual FCoE ports requires installation of the FCoE license on the switch.

NOTE
For Network OS switches running the Network OS version 3.0 and later, the Management application
retrieves all dynamically and statically bonded virtual FCoE ports in the virtual FCoE port pool and
displays them. If there are no bonded virtual FCoE ports on any cluster member, then the cluster is
not displayed.
The physical port and LAG details are displayed in the Switch Port column in the following
circumstances:

• There is a dynamic binding between the virtual FCoE port and the physical port or LAG.
• There is a static binding between the virtual FCoE port and the physical port or lag and there
are end devices connected to it.
To view the virtual FCoE ports, complete the following steps:
1. Select Configure > FCoE from the menu bar.
or

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

543

16

Virtual FCoE port configuration

Right-click the DCB device and select FCoE.
The FCoE Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the Virtual FCoE Ports tab.
The Virtual FCoE Ports tab displays, as shown in Figure 202.

FIGURE 202 Virtual FCoE Ports dialog box
3. Select one or more virtual ports from the Ports list.
4. Perform one of the following tasks:

• Click Enable to enable a selected virtual FCoE port from the Virtual FCoE Ports tab.
• Click Disable to disable a selected virtual FCoE port from the Virtual FCoE Ports tab.
• Click Connected Devices to view a list of FCoE virtual ports and to what they are directly
connected.
5. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Clearing a stale entry
A stale entry is a device that logged in and logged off but, because a port went down after an FLOGI
was received, the device failed to receive the message. The entry in the FCoE Connected Devices
table becomes stale and you must clear it manually.

NOTE

Clearing a stale entry is not supported for Network OS devices.
1. Select a virtual FCoE port from the FCoE Configuration dialog box and click Connected Devices.
The Connected Devices dialog box displays.
2. Select one or more rows from the Connected Devices table and click Disconnect.
The DCB Confirmation and Status dialog displays.

544

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Virtual FCoE port configuration

16

The selected connected device should be cleared from the switch cache and from the table.
Note, however, that the connected devices might still be active and this operation could
potentially stop traffic between the connected devices and the switch.
3. Review the changes carefully before you accept them.
4. Click Start to apply the changes, or click Close to abort the operation.
On closing the DCB Confirmation and Status dialog box, the FCoE Configuration Dialog
refreshes the data and the latest information about the FCoE ports are displayed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

545

16

546

Virtual FCoE port configuration

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

17

Telemetry

In this chapter
• Telemetry overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
• Policy-based routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
• ACL Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Telemetry overview
NOTE
Network telemetry is only supported on Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone
router products running 5.4 or later.
Network telemetry enables you to monitor, report, and analyze traffic information and data on your
network. The Management application provides three features that enable you to perform Network
telemetry:

• ACLs - Collection of permit and deny statements (rules) used to permit or deny incoming
frames from passing through an interface. To create an ACL, refer to “Layer 3 access control
list policy” on page 580.

• PBR - Collection of ACLs and route maps (rules) that enable you to redirect traffic. To create a
policy-based routing policy, refer to “Adding a new policy” on page 550.

• ACL accounting - Counters used to track the number of times an ACL is used to filter traffic. To
enable ACL accounting, refer to “Enabling or disabling ACL accounting” on page 558.

Policy-based routing
NOTE

Network telemetry is only supported on Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone
router products running 5.4 or later.
Normally, when a router receives a packet it forwards it based on the destination address in the
packet, PBR enables you to forward the packet based on other criteria such as, source or
destination network, source or destination address, source or destination port, and protocol.
PBR uses access control lists (Layer 3 ACLs) and route maps (PBR policies) to filter and route IP
packets to one or more specified ports.

• ACLs are used to classify the traffic.
• PBR policies are used to set routing attributes and next hop for the traffic. Next hop can be IP
(IPv4 or IPv6 formats), Flood VLAN, or Port/LAG.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

547

17

Policy-based routing

The Management application creates an IPv4 PBR or IPv6 PBR based on the ACLs defined in the
policy.

• If any rule in the policy contains an IPv4 ACL, the Management application creates an IPv4 PBR
applies the PBR to the ports.

• If any rule in the policy contains an IPv6 ACL, the Management application creates an IPv6 PBR
applies the PBR to the ports.

• If the policy contains an IPv4 ACL and an IPv6 ACL in the same or different rules in the policy,
the Management application creates both IPv4 and IPv6 PBRs applies the PBRs to the ports.

Viewing existing PBR policies
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone routerproduct and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 203 Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box

• Policies and Rules table — All PBR policies defined on the selected product.


548

Policy/Rule — PBR policy or rule name.
The policy name can be up to 80 characters and must be unique on the product.
There is no specific limit to the maximum number of defined policies; however, it is
limited by the system memory.
The rule name can be up to 127 characters and must be unique within the policy.
There is no specific limit to the number of rules with a single policy; however, PBR only
uses the first 64 rules for comparison, then ignores the rest.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy-based routing

17

Source — Port (one or more) to which this PBR policy is bound. For PBR policies bound
to multiple ports, displays all ports separated by commas. For globally applied PBR
policies, displays blank.

Match — L3 ACL policy associated with the rule. You can define up to 10 ACL policies
(5 IPv4 and 5 IPv6) per rule.

Next Hop — Destination for the packets that pass ACL filter. You can define multiple
next hops. PBR selects the first next hop from the next hop list that is up. If the first
next hop goes down, PBR uses another next hop if available. If no next hops are
available, the product routes the traffic in the normal way.

Preserve VLAN — Whether or not VLAN tags are preserved or not.

Sequence — Sequence number of the rule. The Management application
auto-generates the number based on the order in which the policies are listed in the
Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box. Sequence numbers must be unique
within a policy.
Using the CLI, you can specify a sequence number when you create a rule and the
Management application obtains the sequence number when PBR policies are read
from the product. For more information, refer to the configuration guide for your
product.
Add button list — Select to choose one of the following options:


•

Add New Policy — Select to open the PBR Policy Configuration dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Adding a new policy” on page 550.

Add New Rule — Select to open the Add Rule Policy_Name dialog box. For more
information, refer to “Adding rules to a policy” on page 550.

From Saved Configurations — Select to open the PBR Saved Configurations dialog box.
For more information, refer to “Adding policies from saved configurations” on
page 552.
Edit button — Click to edit the policy or rule selected in the Policy and Rules table. For more
information, refer to “Editing a policy” on page 552 or “Editing a rule” on page 552.


•

• Delete button — Click to deleted the policy or rule selected in the Policy and Rules table.
For more information, refer to “Deleting a policy or rule” on page 553.

• Up button — Click to move a rule up within in the policy.
• Down button — Click to move a rule down within in the policy.
• Available Ports table — Select a policy in the Policy and Rules table to display all ports not
currently assigned to any policy. You can only bind one interface to one policy.
Identifier — Port number in slot/port format.
Name — Port name.
Right arrow button — Click to move ports selected in the Available Ports table to the
Selected Ports table.



•

• Left arrow button — Click to move ports selected in the Selected Ports table to the
Available Ports table.

• Selected Ports table — Select a policy in the Policy and Rules table to display ports
currently assigned to the policy.




Identifier — Port number in slot/port format.
Name — Port name.
Allow All VLANs check box — Checked if enabled (default). Clear is not enabled.

2. Click Cancel to close the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

549

17

Policy-based routing

Adding a new policy
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select Add > New Policy.
The PBR Policy Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the new policy and click OK on the PBR Policy Configuration dialog box.
4. To add one or more rules to the policy, refer to “Adding rules to a policy” on page 550.
5. Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Adding rules to a policy
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select a policy or rule in the Policies and Rules table and select Add > New Rule.
The Add Rule - Policy_Name dialog box displays.

FIGURE 204 Add Rule Policy_Name dialog box
3. Enter a name for the rule in the Name field.

550

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy-based routing

17

The rule name can be up to 127 characters and must be unique within the policy.
4. Select one or more ACLs to use in the rule from the Available ACLs table.
Each rule can match up to 10 ACLs (5 IPv4 and 5 IPv6) and can have multiple hops to a
destination.
The Available ACLs table displays the available IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs on this product. IPv4 and
IPv6 have two separate policy lists. IPv4 PBR rules can only have IPv4 ACLs and IPv4
addresses in the next hop. IPv6 PBR rules can have can have IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs and IPv4 and
IPv6 addresses in the next hop.
The Available ACLs table includes the following information:

• ACL Name — Name of the ACL.
• IP Version — Whether the ACL is IPv4 or IPv6.
You can create or edit an ACL by clicking Launch L3 ACL Editor. For more information, refer to
“Layer 3 access control list policy” on page 580
5. Click the right arrow button to move the selected ACLs to the Match ACLs table.
The Match ACLs table identifies which ACL policies this rule uses.
If you select an ACL that is in an orphan state (ACL deleted, never created, creation scheduled
for later date, or creation failed), the PBR configuration is still valid, but is treated as “deny
any”.
6. Rearrange the order of the ACLs in the Match ACLs table by selecting an ACL and using the Up
or Down buttons.
7.

Select the packet destination for the ACL filter in the Enter Next Hop area by selecting one of
the following options from the Next Hop list:

• Interface (default) — Port or LAG. Go to step step 8.
• IP (IPv4 or IPv6) — IP address. Go to step step 9.
• Flood VLAN — VLAN identifier. Go to step step 10.
8. Enter the port or LAG interface in slot/port format in the field. Go to step step 12.
9. Enter the IP address in IPv4 or IPv6 format in the field. Go to step step 11.
10. Enter the VLAN identifier in the field. Go to step step 11.
11. Keep the VLAN tag in the packets by selecting the VLANs Preserve check box.
12. Validate your entry and move the data to the Next Hops table by clicking the right arrow button.
You can edit an existing hop by selecting the hop from the Next Hops table and clicking the left
arrow button.
13. Repeat step 7 through step 12 for each hop you want to add to the rule.
14. Rearrange the order of the hops in the Next Hops table by selecting a hop and using the Up or
Down buttons.
15. Click OK on the Add Rule - Policy_Name dialog box.
16. Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

551

17

Policy-based routing

Adding policies from saved configurations
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select Add > From Saved Configurations.
The PBR Saved Configurations dialog box displays.
3. Select the configuration you want to add from the list and click OK.
4. Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Editing a policy
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select a policy in the Policy and Rules table and click Edit.
The PBR Policy Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the policy and click OK.
4. To add one or more rules to the policy, refer to “Adding rules to a policy” on page 550.
5. To edit a rule in the policy, refer to “Editing a rule” on page 552.
6. To delete a rule in the policy, refer to “Deleting a policy or rule” on page 553.
7.

Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Editing a rule
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select a rule in the Policy and Rules table and click Edit.
The Edit Rule - Rule_Name dialog box displays.
3. To edit the rule to the policy, refer to step 4 through step 14 in “Adding rules to a policy” on
page 550.
4. Click OK on the Edit Rule - Policy_Name dialog box.
5. Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.

552

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy-based routing

17

The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Deleting a policy or rule
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Policy Based Routing.
The Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy or rule you want to delete in the Policy and Rules table and click Delete.
A confirmation message displays. Click Yes to delete the selected rule or the selected policy
and all associated rules.
3. Click OK on the Product_Name PBR Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box displays. To deploy the PBR policy, refer to “Deploying
a PBR policy on demand” on page 553, “Saving a PBR policy deployment” on page 554, or
“Scheduling a PBR policy deployment” on page 555.

Deploying a PBR policy on demand
To deploy a PBR policy immediately, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• Deploy now — Select to deploy the configuration immediately on the product or port
without saving the deployment definition.

• Save and deploy now — Select to deploy the configuration immediately on the product or
port and save the deployment definition for future deployment.
2. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
3. Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.
5. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

553

17

Policy-based routing

6. Select the product monitoring template you want to use from the CLI Template list.
7.

Select one or more of the following to capture snapshots:

• Select the Pre-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
prior to deployment of the security configuration.

• Select the Post-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
after deployment of the security configuration.
If you select the Post-deployment check box, enter the amount of time (between 1 and
300 seconds) you want the application to wait before capturing the snapshot in the Delay
field.
8. Select one or more products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the Available
Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
9. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box.

Saving a PBR policy deployment
To save a PBR policy deployment definition for future deployment, complete the following steps.
1. Select Save deployment only.
2. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
3. Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.
5. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.
6. Select the product monitoring template you want to use from the CLI Template list.

554

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy-based routing

7.

17

Select one or more of the following to capture snapshots:

• Select the Pre-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
prior to deployment of the security configuration.

• Select the Post-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
after deployment of the security configuration.
If you select the Post-deployment check box, enter the amount of time (between 1 and
300 seconds) you want the application to wait before capturing the snapshot in the Delay
field.
8. Select one or more products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the Available
Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
9. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box.

Scheduling a PBR policy deployment
To schedule a PBR policy deployment, complete the following steps.
1. Select Schedule.
2. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
3. Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.
5. Click the Schedule Enable check box and click the ellipsis button to schedule deployment.
The Schedule Properties dialog box displays.
6. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for
the schedule:

• To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment
schedule” on page 556.

• To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on
page 556.

• To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on
page 557.

• To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on
page 557.

• To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule”
on page 557.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

555

17

Policy-based routing

7.

Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.

8. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.
9. Select the product monitoring template you want to use from the CLI Template list.
10. Select one or more of the following to capture snapshots:

• Select the Pre-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
prior to deployment of the security configuration.

• Select the Post-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
after deployment of the security configuration.
If you select the Post-deployment check box, enter the amount of time (between 1 and
300 seconds) you want the application to wait before capturing the snapshot in the Delay
field.
11. Select one or more products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the Available
Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
12. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - PBR dialog box.

Configuring a one-time deployment schedule
To configure a one-time schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 7 of “Scheduling a PBR policy
deployment” on page 555.

Configuring an hourly deployment schedule
To configure an hourly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the minute past the hour you want deployment to run from the Minutes past the hour
list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 7 of “Scheduling a PBR policy
deployment” on page 555.

556

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy-based routing

17

Configuring a daily deployment schedule
To configure a daily deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 7 of “Scheduling a PBR policy
deployment” on page 555.

Configuring a weekly deployment schedule
To configure a weekly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Week list.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 7 of “Scheduling a PBR policy
deployment” on page 555.

Configuring a monthly deployment schedule
To configure a monthly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 7 of “Scheduling a PBR policy
deployment” on page 555.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

557

17

ACL Accounting

ACL Accounting
NOTE

ACL accounting is only supported on Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone
router products running 5.4 or later.
Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router products monitor the number of
times an ACL is used to filter incoming or outgoing traffic on an interface. When ACL rules are
configured, ACL accounting enables you to perform the following functions:

• Diagnostics — Track the number of hits to the ACL rule by the flowing packets going to the
destination IP, Flood VLAN, Port, or LAG. This enables you to determine if the configured ACL
rules are working correctly.

• Traffic Pattern — Track the number of hit transmit and receive statistics flowing from a
particular source to the destination. This enables you to determine if the traffic is as expected
or if it needs to be reconfigured.

• On demand statistics collection — Filter data from the product based on a counter (1 second,
1 minute, 5 minutes, and cumulative).

• Multiple port hit statistics — Aggregate statistics for multiple ports based on filtered ports and
selected counter.

Enabling or disabling ACL accounting
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Security > ACL Accounting.
The ACL Accounting dialog box displays and obtains the ACL accounting status from product.
If ACL accounting is enabled, the Disabled option is selected.
If ACL accounting is disabled, the Enabled option is selected.
2. Click OK on the ACL Accounting dialog box.

Resetting ACL counters
NOTE

Counters are automatically cleared when you reboot the product.
Counters, which are stored in the hardware, track of the number of times an ACL filter is used. ACL
accounting counters include:

•
•
•
•

1 second — Number of hits during the last second. This counter is updated every second.
1 minute — Number of hits during the last minute. This counter is updated every minute.
5 minutes — Number of hits during the last five minutes. This counter is updated five minutes.
Cumulative — Total number of accumulated hits. This counter begins when an ACL is bound to
an interface and is updated every minute until it is cleared.

1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Security > ACL Accounting.
The ACL Accounting dialog box displays.

558

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

ACL Accounting

17

2. Select the Clear all counters on device check box.
3. Click OK on the ACL Accounting dialog box.

Viewing ACL counters
Before you can view ACL counters, you must enable ACL accounting on the product (refer to
“Enabling or disabling ACL accounting” on page 558).
To view ACL accounting on a product, select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet
Backbone router product and select Configure > Security > Layer 2/3 ACL > Product.
The Product_Name - Layer 2/3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays. Go to step 4.
OR
To view ACL accounting on a port, complete the following steps.
1. Select an Ethernet router, Ethernet core router, or Ehternet Backbone router product and select
Configure > Security > Layer 2/3 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - Layer 2/3 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
3. Click OK on the Port Selection - Layer 2/3 ACL dialog box.
The Product_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2/3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Select a duration (1 second, 1 minute, 5 minutes, or Cumulative) from the Hit Stats Duration
list.
5. Click Refresh.
The last time (client time) the Management application client successfully collected the hit
statistics displays in the Refresh Time field.
The number of hits for the ACL displays in the Hits column of the Details of Selected ACL list.
(Products level only) Ports that have the selected ACL bound display in the Assigned Ports list.
6. Click Cancel on the Product_Name - Layer 2/3 ACL Configuration dialog box or Product_Name
- Port_Number - Layer 2/3 ACL Configuration dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

559

17

560

ACL Accounting

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

18

Security Management

In this chapter
• Security overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Layer 2 access control list management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Layer 3 access control list policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Media Access Control (MAC) filter management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Security configuration deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

561
561
580
620
629

Security overview
Security management enables you to filter traffic using Layer 2 and Layer 3 access control lists
(ACLs) and Media Access Control (MAC) filters:

• Access control lists enable you to filter traffic based on Layer 2 or Layer 3 information in the
packet header of the Ethernet frame.

-

Layer 2, the data link layer, transfers data between the source and destination within the
same network.

-

Layer 3, the network layer, transfers data between the source and destination through one
or more networks.

• MAC Filters enable you to filter traffic based on the MAC layer header in the Ethernet frame.

Layer 2 access control list management
A Layer 2 access control list (ACL) enables you to filter traffic based on the information in the IP
packet header using the MAC address and Ethernet type.

NOTE

Layer 2 ACLs can filter traffic for both Fabric OS and IronWare FCoE devices.
An ACL is a unique collection of permit and deny statements (rules) that apply to frames. You can
use ACLs to permit or deny incoming frames from passing through an interface to which you
assigned the ACLs. When the interface receives the frame, the device compares the fields in the
frame against any ACLs assigned to the interface to verify that the frame has the required
permissions to be forwarded. The device compares the frame, sequentially, against each rule in the
assigned ACL. If the frame matches the permit rule, the traffic is forwarded; otherwise, the traffic is
dropped.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

561

18

Layer 2 access control list management

You should configure the ACL on the device before you assign the ACL to an interface. You can
create multiple ACLs and save them to the device configuration. However, the ACL does not filter
traffic until you assign it to an interface. You can assign an ACL on a physical port, Virtual LAN
(VLAN), or Link Aggregation Group (LAG).
For IronWare OS products, you can create a standard ACL. For Fabric OS devices, you can create
two types of ACLs:

• Standard ACL — Use to permit and deny traffic based on the source MAC address of incoming
frames. You should use standard ACLs when you only need to filter traffic based on the source
address.

• Extended ACL — Use to permit and deny traffic based on the source and destination MAC
addresses and EtherType, of incoming frames.

IronWare Layer 2 ACL configuration
This section provides procedures for configuring a standard or extended Layer 2 ACL on a device,
assigning the Layer 2 ACL to an interface, and clearing Layer 2 ACL assignments from a device.

Creating a Layer 2 ACL configuration (IronWare)
To create a Layer 2 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select a device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 205 Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
2. Select New from the Add list.
The Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

562

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

FIGURE 206 Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
3. Enter a number for the ACL in the Number field.
For IronWare 5.4 and later, ACL numbers range from 400 through 1399.
For IronWare 5.3, ACL numbers range from 400 through 599.
For IronWare less than 5.3, ACL numbers range from 400 through 499.
4. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
5. In the Source Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Source Address and Source Mask fields.
a.

Enter the source MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the Source
Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the source MAC address in the Source Mask field.

6. In the Destination Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Destination Address and Destination Mask fields.

7.

a.

Enter the destination MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the
Destination Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the destination MAC address in the Destination Mask
field.

Enter a specific VLAN ID or select Any from the VLAN list.

8. In the Ethernet Type list, select one of the following options to specify the Ethernet type being
transferred in the Ethernet frame:

• ARP — Address Resolution Protocol
• IPV4-L5 — Internet Protocol, version 4-L5
• IPV6 — Internet Protocol, version 6

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

563

18

Layer 2 access control list management

• Any — Any of the protocols
9. (Deny actions only) Select the Log Enable check box to generate a log for this configuration.
10. Click the right arrow button.
The new ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list.
11. To create additional rules for the same ACL, repeat step 4 through step 10.
12. Click OK on the Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL rule displays in the ACLs list. To create additional ACL, repeat step 2 through
step 12.
13. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631.

Editing a Layer 2 ACL configuration (IronWare)
To edit a Layer 2 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to edit and click Edit.
The ACL_Number - Edit Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Change the description of the ACL in the Description field.
4. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the ACL rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 4 through step 10 in “Creating a Layer 2 ACL configuration (IronWare)” on
page 562.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the
same ACL, repeat step 4.

5. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 10 in “Creating a Layer 2 ACL
configuration (IronWare)” on page 562.
The new ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To create additional ACL rules, repeat step 4
through step 10.
6. To delete an ACL rule, select the rule in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.
7.

Click OK on the ACL_Number - Edit Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.

8. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631.

564

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

Copying a Layer 2 ACL configuration (IronWare)
To copy a Layer 2 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select a device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to copy and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Enter a number for the ACL in the Number field.
For IronWare 5.4 and later, ACL numbers range from 400 through 1399.
For IronWare 5.3, ACL numbers range from 400 through 599.
For IronWare less than 5.3, ACL numbers range from 400 through 499.
4. Enter a description of the ACL in the Description field.
5. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the ACL rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 4 through step 10 in “Creating a Layer 2 ACL configuration (IronWare)” on
page 562.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the
same ACL, repeat step 5.

6. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 10 in “Creating a Layer 2 ACL
configuration (IronWare)” on page 562.
The new ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To create additional ACL rules, repeat step 4
through step 10.
7.

To delete an ACL rule, select the rule in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

8. Click OK on the Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
9. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

565

18

Layer 2 access control list management

Assigning a Layer 2 ACL configuration to an interface (IronWare)
NOTE

You cannot modify or delete a Layer 2 ACL that is bound to a port.
To assign a Layer 2 ACL configuration to an interface, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays.

FIGURE 207 Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
3. Click OK.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

566

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

FIGURE 208 Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
4. (Ethernet routers only) Select a duration (1 Second, 1 Minute, 5 Minutes, or Cumulative) to
track the number of times an ACL filter is used in the Hits Stats Duration list.
Click Refresh to collect the hit statistics. The application updates the Hits column of the Details
of Selected ACL list.
5. To assign an ACL configuration to inbound messages, select the Inbound check box and
complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Assign ACL option and choose one of the following options from the first Assign
ACL list:

• Select ACLs on this Product to assign ACLs deployed on the product to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs deployed on the switch or associated with a
save deployment object.

• Select ACLs bound to this port to assign ACLs bound to the interface to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs bound to the interface.

• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.
b.

Select the ACL you want to assign to the port from the second Assign ACL list.

c.

Select the Write to Product check box to create the selected ACL on the device if it does not
already exist.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

567

18

Layer 2 access control list management

6. To assign an ACL configuration to outbound messages, select the Outbound check box and
complete the following steps:

NOTE

You can only assign an ACL to an outbound message on an Application product.
a.

Select the Assign ACL option and choose one of the following options from the first Assign
ACL list:

• Select ACLs on this Product to assign ACLs deployed on the product to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs deployed on the switch or associated with a
save deployment object.

• Select ACLs bound to this port to assign ACLs bound to the interface to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs bound to the interface.

• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.

7.

b.

Select the ACL you want to assign to the port from the second Assign ACL list.

c.

Select the Write to Product check box to create the selected ACL on the device if it does not
already exist.

Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Clearing Layer 2 ACL assignments (IronWare)
To clear Layer 2 ACL configuration from interfaces, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
3. Click OK.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
4. To clear inbound messages, complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Inbound check box.

b.

Select the Clear ACL Assignment option.

5. To clear outbound messages, complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Outbound check box.

b.

Select the Clear ACL Assignment option.

6. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

568

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

Fabric OS Layer 2 ACL configuration
NOTE
Only available for Fabric OS DCB products.
This section provides procedures for configuring a standard for extended Layer 2 ACL on a device,
assigning the Layer 2 ACL to an interface, as well as clearing Layer 2 ACL assignments from a
device.

Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To create a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select New from the Add list.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 209 Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration (Standard) dialog box
3. Select Standard from the Type list.
4. Enter a name for the ACL in the Name field.
5. Enter a sequence number for the ACL in the Sequence field.
6. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
7.

In the Source list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Source field. Enter the source MAC address on which the
configuration filters traffic in the Source field.
8. Select the Count check box to enable counting.
Count specifies the number of times the ACL rule is applied.
9. Click the right arrow button.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

569

18

Layer 2 access control list management

The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To create additional ACL entries, repeat
step 3 through step 9.
10. Click OK on the Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL configuration displays in the ACLs list. To create additional ACLs, repeat step 2
through step 10.
11. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Editing a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To create a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration on a Fabric OS device, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL you want to edit in the ACLs list and click Edit.
The Configuration_Name Edit Standard Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 9 in “Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric
OS)” on page 569.
The updated ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional ACL entries,
repeat step 3.

4. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 9 in “Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL
configuration (Fabric OS)” on page 569.
The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To add additional ACL entries, repeat step 4.
5. To delete an existing ACL rule, select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click
the left arrow button.
6. Click OK on the Edit - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The updated ACL configuration displays in the ACLs list. To edit additional ACLs, repeat step 2
through step 4.
7.

Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Copying a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To copy a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration on a Fabric OS device, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL you want to duplicate in the ACLs list and click Duplicate.

570

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

The Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays with the default name ‘Copy of
Original_Name’.
3. Enter a new name for the ACL in the Name field.
4. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 9 in “Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric
OS)” on page 569.
The updated ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional ACL entries,
repeat step 4.

5. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 9 in “Creating a standard Layer 2 ACL
configuration (Fabric OS)” on page 569.
The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To add additional ACL entries, repeat step 5.
6. To delete an existing ACL rule, select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click
the left arrow button.
7.

Click OK on the Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL configuration displays in the ACLs list. To copy additional ACLs, repeat step 2
through step 10.

8. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Creating an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To create an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration on a Fabric OS device, complete the following
steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select New from the Add list.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Select Extended from the Type list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

571

18

Layer 2 access control list management

FIGURE 210 Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration (Extended) dialog box
4. Enter a name for the ACL in the Name field.
5. Enter a sequence number for the ACL in the Sequence field.
6. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
7.

In the Source list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• Host
• MAC
Selecting MAC or Host enables the Source field. Enter the source address on which the
configuration filters traffic in the Source field.
8. In the Destination Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• Host
• MAC
Selecting MAC or Host enables the Destination field. Enter the destination address on
which the configuration filters traffic in the Destination field.
9. Select the Count check box to enable counting.
Count specifies the number of packets filtered (allowed or denied) for the ACL rule.
10. Select the Ether Type check box to specify the Ethernet protocol.
11. In the Ether Type list, select one of the following to specify the Ethernet type being transferred
in the Ethernet frame:

•
•
•
•

ARP — Address Resolution Protocol
FCoE — Fibre Channel over Ethernet
IPV4- — Internet Protocol, version 4
Custom — Enter a custom protocol. Valid values are 1536 through 65535.

12. Click the right arrow button.

572

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To create additional ACL entries, repeat
step 5 through step 12.
13. Click OK on the Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACL Entries list. To create additional ACL entries, repeat step 2
through step 13.
14. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Editing an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To edit an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration on a Fabric OS device, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL you want to edit in the ACLs list and click Edit.
The Configuration_Name Edit Extended Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration
(Fabric OS)” on page 571.
The updated ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional ACL entries,
repeat step 3.

4. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 12 in “Creating an extended Layer 2 ACL
configuration (Fabric OS)” on page 571.
The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To add additional ACL entries, repeat step 4.
5. To delete an existing ACL rule, select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click
the left arrow button.
6. Click OK on the Edit - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The updated ACL displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional ACLs, repeat step 2 through
step 6.
7.

Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Copying an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration (Fabric OS)
To copy an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL you want to copy in the ACLs list and click Duplicate.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

573

18

Layer 2 access control list management

The Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays with the default name ‘Copy of
Original_Name’.
3. Enter a new name for the ACL in the Name field.
4. To edit an existing ACL rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended Layer 2 ACL configuration
(Fabric OS)” on page 571.
The updated ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional ACL entries,
repeat step 4.

5. To add a new ACL rule, complete step 4 through step 12 in “Creating an extended Layer 2 ACL
configuration (Fabric OS)” on page 571.
The new ACL entry displays in the ACL Entries list. To add additional ACL entries, repeat step 5.
6. To delete an existing ACL rule, select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click
the left arrow button.
7.

Click OK on the Duplicate - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACL Entries list. To copy additional ACLs, repeat step 2 through
step 7.

8. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Assigning a Layer 2 ACL configuration to an interface (Fabric OS)
To assign Layer 2 ACL configuration to a interface, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port or Link Aggregation Group (LAG) in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow
button.
LAGs display in the Available Ports list using the following convention: Po LAG_Number.
3. Click OK.

574

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

The Device_Name - Port_Number/LAG LAG_Number- Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
displays.

FIGURE 211 Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
4. Select the Assign ACL option and choose one of the following options from the first Assign ACL
list:

• Select ACLs on this Product to assign ACLs deployed on the product to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs deployed on the switch or associated with a
save deployment object.

• Select ACLs bound to this port to assign ACLs bound to the interface to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs bound to the interface.

• Select Deployment_Name (a user-configured deployment) to assign a user-configured
deployment on the port.
5. Select the ACL you want to assign to the port from the second Assign ACL list.
6. Select the Write to Product check box to create the selected ACL on the device if it does not
already exist.
7.

Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Clearing Layer 2 ACL assignments (Fabric OS)
To clear Layer 2 ACL configuration from interfaces, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port or LAG in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
LAGs display in the Available Ports list using the following convention: Po LAG_Number.
3. Click OK.
The Device_Name - Port_Number/LAG LAG_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
displays.
4. Select the Clear ACL Assignment option.
5. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number/LAG LAG_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration
dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

575

18

Layer 2 access control list management

The Deploy to Ports - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Creating a Layer 2 ACL from a saved configuration
To create a Layer 2 ACL from a saved configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select From Saved Configurations from the Add list.
The Layer 2 ACL Saved Configurations dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more configurations to add to the new Layer 2 ACL configuration.
4. Click OK on the Layer 2 ACL Saved Configurations dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
5. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Deleting a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the application
To delete a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the application, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the Layer 2 ACL you want to delete in the ACLs list and click Delete.
This deletes the Layer 2 ACL configuration from the application.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.

NOTE

The Layer 2 ACL configuration is not deleted from the switch until you deploy the configuration
to the switch.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Deleting a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the switch
To delete a Layer 2 ACL configuration from the switch, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the Incremental option as the configuration type.
3. Select Delete from the Operation list for the Layer 2 ACL configuration you want to delete.

576

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

4. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.

NOTE

The Layer 2 ACL configuration is not deleted from the switch until you deploy the configuration
to the switch.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631.

Network OS Layer 2 ACL configuration
NOTE
You cannot configure a Layer 2 ACL using the Management application. You must configure the
Layer 2 ACL through the Network OS CLI (refer to the Network OS Command Reference).
Once you configure Layer 2 ACLs through the Network OS CLI, you can use the Management
application to view Layer 2 ACL configurations for a VCS fabric or standalone device. You can also
view the Layer 2 ACL that are bound to an interface (ports, LAGs, vLAGs, VLANs, or ports in profile
mode) on the fabric or device.

Viewing Layer 2 ACL configuration on a fabric (Network OS)
To view Layer 2 ACL configurations on a Network OS VCS fabric, complete the following steps.
1. Select the VCS fabric and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Fabric_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays. Depending on the display
label you chose on the IP tab, the Fabric_Name is the name of the fabric, the IP address of the
fabric, or the name and IP address of the fabric.

FIGURE 212 Fabric_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
2. Select the fabric node from the RBridge list.
By default, the principal switch of the fabric is selected.
3. Review the Layer 2 ACL configuration details.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

577

18

Layer 2 access control list management

• RBridge list — Only displays when you select a VCS fabric. Select a node from the fabric.
• ACLs list — Displays the ACLs to be deployed for this configuration. The ACLs list includes
the following details:
Operation — Displays the ACL operation (no action) during deployment.

Name — The name of the ACL.

Type — The ACL type. Options include: Extended or Standard.
Details of Selected ACLs list — Displays the details of the ACL selected in the ACLs list. The
Details of Selected ACLs table includes the following details:


•

Sequence — The Layer 2 ACL entry sequence number.
Action — Whether the ACL permits or denies traffic.

Source — The source MAC address on which the ACL filters traffic.

Destination (Extended only) — The destination MAC address on which the ACL filters
the traffic.

Count — Whether count is enabled or disabled.

Ether Type (Extended only) — The Ethernet protocol. Values include ARP, FCoE, IPv4, or
Custom.
Add button — The button appears dimmed because it is unavailable.



•
• Edit button — The button appears dimmed because it is unavailable.
• Duplicate button — The button appears dimmed because it is unavailable.
• Delete button — The button appears dimmed because it is unavailable.
4. Click OK to close on the Fabric_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.

Viewing Layer 2 ACL configuration on a device (Network OS)
NOTE

You cannot configure a Layer 2 ACL using the Management application. You must configure the
Layer 2 ACL through the Network OS CLI (refer to the Network OS Command Reference).
To view Layer 2 ACL configurations on a Network OS standalone device, complete the following
steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays. Depending on the display
label you choose, the Device_Name is the name of the device, the IP address of the device, or
the name and IP address of the device.

578

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 2 access control list management

18

FIGURE 213 Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
2. Review the Layer 2 ACL configuration details.

• ACLs list — Displays the ACLs to be deployed for this configuration. The ACLs list includes
the following details:
Operation — Displays the ACL operation (no action) during deployment.

Name — The name of the ACL.

Type — The ACL type. Options include: Extended or Standard.
Details of Selected ACLs list — Displays the details of the ACL selected in the ACLs list. The
Details of Selected ACLs table includes the following details:


•

Sequence — The Layer 2 ACL entry sequence number.
Action — Whether the ACL permits or denies traffic.

Source — The source MAC address on which the ACL filters traffic.

Destination (Extended only) — The destination MAC address on which the ACL filters
the traffic.

Count — Whether count is enabled or disabled.

Ether Type (Extended only) — The Ethernet protocol. Values include ARP, FCoE, IPv4, or
Custom.
Add button — Displays; however, is not available.



•
• Edit button — Displays; however, is not available.
• Duplicate button — Displays; however, is not available.
• Delete button — Displays; however, is not available.

3. Click OK to close on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.

Viewing Layer 2 ACL configuration on an interface (Network OS)
NOTE

You cannot configure a Layer 2 ACL using the Management application. You must configure the
Layer 2 ACL through the Network OS CLI (refer to the Network OS Command Reference).
To view Layer 2 ACL configurations on an interface, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

579

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

1. Select the fabric, a node in the fabric, or a standalone device and select Configure > Security >
Layer 2 ACL > Port.
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Port list.
3. Click OK on the Port Selection - Layer 2 ACL dialog box.
The Device/Fabric_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
Depending on the Display Label you choose, the Device/Fabric_Name is the name of the
device or fabric, the IP address of the device or fabric, or the name and IP address of the
device or fabric.

FIGURE 214 Device/Fabric_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box
4. Review the Layer 2 ACL configuration details.
Details of Selected ACL table — Displays the details of the ACL selected in the ACLs list.The
Details of Selected ACL table includes the following details:

•
•
•
•

Sequence — The Layer 2 ACL entry sequence number.
Action — Whether the ACL permits or denies traffic.
Source — The source MAC address on which the ACL filters traffic.
Destination (Extended only) — The destination MAC address on which the ACL filters the
traffic.

• Count — Whether count is enabled or disabled.
• Ether Type (Extended only) — The Ethernet protocol. Values include ARP, FCoE, IPv4, or
Custom.
5. Click OK to close on the Device/Fabric_Name - Port_Number - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog
box.

Layer 3 access control list policy
A Layer 3 access control list (L3 ACL) enables you to filter incoming and outgoing traffic based on
the information in the IP packet header.

580

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

An ACL is a unique collection of permit and deny statements (rules) that apply to frames. You can
use ACLs to permit or deny incoming and outgoing frames from passing through an interface to
which you assigned the ACLs. When the interface receives the frame, the device compares the
fields in the frame against any ACLs assigned to the interface to verify that the frame has the
required permissions to be forwarded. The device compares the frame, sequentially, against each
rule in the assigned ACL. If the frame matches the ‘permit’ rule, the traffic is forwarded; otherwise,
the traffic is dropped.
You must configure the ACL on the device before you assign the ACL to an interface. You can create
multiple ACLs and save them to the device configuration. However, the ACL does not filter traffic
until you assign it to an interface. You can assign an ACL on the following interface types: physical
port, Virtual LAN (VLAN), or Link Aggregation Group (LAG).
You can create two types of ACLs:

• Standard ACL — Use to permit and deny traffic based on the source IP address, host name, or
network. You should use standard ACLs when you only need to filter traffic based the source.
You can create up to 99 standard ACLs ranging from 1 through 99. For more information, refer
to “Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581.

• Extended ACL — Use to permit and deny traffic based on the source and destination using the
following:

-

Source and destination IP address
Host name
User-defined network and network groups
IP protocol
Source and destination port

You can create up to 100 extended ACLs ranging from 100 through 199. For more information,
refer to “Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585.

Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration
To create a standard L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

581

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 215 Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box
2. Select New IPv4 from the Add list.
The Add - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 216 Add - L3 ACL Configuration (Standard) dialog box
3. Select Standard from the Type list.
4. Enter a name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
5. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
6. Enter a description for the ACL in the Remarks field.
7.

582

Choose one of the following options from the Source list:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

• To enter an IP address, select IP Address and complete the following steps:
a.

Enter the source IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP Address list and
text field.

b.

Enter a portion of the source IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the Wildcard
Mask field.
The wildcard mask is a four-part value in IP address format consisting of ones and
zeros. Use zeros in the mask if the packet source address must match the IP address.
Use ones if to match any value.
For example, if you enter ‘209.157.22.26’ in the IP Address field and ‘0.0.0.255’ in
the Wildcard Mask field, then all hosts in the Class C subnet ‘209.157.22.x’ match the
ACL.

• To select a network, select IP Address and choose a network from the list.
To configure a network, click the ellipsis button and refer to “Network configuration” on
page 602.

• To enter a host name, select Host and enter the source host name on which the ACL filters
traffic in the Host list and text field.
8. Enter a VLAN identifier (valid values are from 1 to 4095) from the VLAN list.
9. Select the Log Enable check box to enable logging.
10. Click the right arrow button.
11. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
12. Click OK on the Add - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
13. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
14. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
15. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Creating a L3 ACL from a saved configuration
To create a ACL from a saved configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select From Saved Configurations from the Add list.
The L3 ACL Saved Configurations dialog box displays.
3. Select one or more configurations to add to the new ACL configuration.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

583

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

4. Click OK on the L3 ACL Saved Configurations dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
5. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
6. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
7.

To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration
To edit a standard L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the standard ACL configuration you want to edit in the ACLs list.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
4. To edit an existing rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.
The rule displays in the ACL Entry area.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 10 in “Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on
page 581.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the
same ACL, repeat step 4.

5. To add a new rule, complete step 5 through step 10 in “Creating a standard L3 ACL
configuration” on page 581.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 5.
6. To delete an existing rule, select the rule you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and click the
left arrow button.
7.

Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.

8. Click OK on the Edit - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
9. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
10. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
11. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

584

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration
To copy a standard L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the standard ACL configuration you want to copy in the ACLs list.
3. Click Duplicate.
The Duplicate - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays with the default name ‘Copy of
Original_Name’.
4. Enter a new name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
5. To edit an existing rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.
The rule displays in the ACL Entry area.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 10 in “Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on
page 581.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the
same ACL, repeat step 4.

6. To add a new rule, complete step 5 through step 10 in “Creating a standard L3 ACL
configuration” on page 581.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 5.
7.

To delete an existing rule, select the rule you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and click the
left arrow button.

8. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
9. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
10. Click OK on the Duplicate - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
11. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
12. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
13. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration
To create an extended L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select New IPv4 from the Add list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

585

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

The Add - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Select Extended from the Type list.

FIGURE 217 Add - L3 ACL Configuration (Extended) dialog box
4. Enter a name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
5. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
6. Enter a description for the ACL in the Remarks field.
7.

Choose one of the following options from the Source list:

• To enter an IP address, select IP Address and complete the following steps:
a.

Enter the source IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP Address list and
text field.

b.

Enter a portion of the source IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the Wildcard
Mask field.
The wildcard mask is a four-part value in IP address format consisting of ones and
zeros. Use zeros in the mask if the packet source address must match the IP address.
Use ones if to match any value.
For example, if you enter ‘209.157.22.26’ in the IP Address field and ‘0.0.0.255’ in
the Wildcard Mask field, then all hosts in the Class C subnet ‘209.157.22.x’ match the
ACL.

• To select a network, select IP Address and choose a network from the list.
To configure a network, click the ellipsis button and refer to “Network configuration” on
page 602.

• To enter a host name, select Host and enter the source host name on which the ACL filters
traffic in the Host list and text field.
8. Choose one of the following options from the Destination list:

586

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

• To enter an IP address, select IP Address and complete the following steps:
a.

Enter the destination IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP Address list
and text field.

b.

Enter a portion of the destination IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the
Wildcard Mask field.

• To select a network, select IP Address and choose a network from the list.
To configure a network, click the ellipsis button and refer to “Network configuration” on
page 602.

• To enter a host name, select Host and enter the destination host name on which the ACL
filters traffic in the Host list and text field.
9. Enter a VLAN identifier (valid values are from 1 to 4095) from the VLAN list.
10. Select the Log Enable check box to enable logging.
11. Click Advanced Settings to configure additional settings for the ACL configuration.

NOTE

You must configure advanced settings to create an extended Layer 3 ACL.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays. To configure additional settings, refer to
“Configuring L3 ACL advanced settings” on page 598.
12. Click the right arrow button.
The new ACL displays in the ACL Entries list.
13. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
14. View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.
15. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
16. Click OK on the Add - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
17. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
18. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
19. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration
To edit an extended L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

587

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to edit in the ACLs list and click Edit.
The Edit - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. To edit an existing rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.
The rule displays in the ACL Entry area.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on
page 585.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 3.

4. To add a new rule, complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 4.
5. To delete an existing rule, select the rule you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and click the
left arrow button.
6. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
7.

View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.

8. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
9. Click OK on the Edit - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The updated ACL displays in the ACLs list.
10. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
11. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
12. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration
To copy an extended L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to copy in the ACLs list and click Duplicate.

588

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

The Duplicate - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays with the default name ‘Copy of
Original_Name’.
3. Enter a new name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
4. To edit an existing rule, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the rule you want to edit in the ACL Entries list and click the left arrow button.
The rule displays in the ACL Entry area.

b.

Complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on
page 585.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To edit additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 4.

5. To add a new rule, complete step 5 through step 12 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
The updated ACL rule displays in the ACL Entries list. To update additional rules for the same
ACL, repeat step 5.
6. To delete an existing rule, select the rule you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and click the
left arrow button.
7.

Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.

8. View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.
9. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
10. Click OK on the Duplicate - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
11. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
12. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
13. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

589

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

Creating an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration
To create an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select an Ethernet router product and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select New IPv6 from the Add list.
The Add - L3 ACL (IPv6) Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 218 Add - L3 ACL (IPv6) Configuration dialog box
3. Enter a name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
4. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
5. Enter a description for the ACL in the Remarks field.
6. Choose one of the following options from the Source list:

• To enter an IP address, select IP Address and complete the following steps:
a.

Enter the source IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP Address list and
text field.
You can enter the IPv6 address in compressed (for example, you can compress
2001:db8:0:0:0:0:2:1 can be shortened to 2001:db8::2:1) or raw format.

b.

Enter the prefix length (1 through 128) in the Prefix Length field.

• To enter an IPv6 address, select IP Address and complete enter the source IPv6 address
on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP list and text field.

• To select a network, select IP Address and choose a network from the list.
• To enter a host name, select Host and enter the source host name on which the ACL filters
traffic in the Host list and text field.
7.

590

Choose one of the following options from the Destination list:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

• To enter an IP address, select IP Address and complete the following steps:
a.

Enter the destination IP address on which the ACL filters traffic in the IP Address list
and text field.
You can enter the IPv6 address in compressed (for example, you can compress
2001:db8:0:0:0:0:2:1 can be shortened to 2001:db8::2:1) or raw format.

b.

Enter the prefix length (1 through 128) in the Prefix Length field.

• To select a network, select IP Address and choose a network from the list.
• To enter a host name, select Host and enter the destination host name on which the ACL
filters traffic in the Host list and text field.
8. Enter a VLAN identifier (valid values are from 1 to 4095) from the VLAN list.
9. Select the Log Enable check box to enable logging.
10. Click Advanced Settings to configure additional settings for the ACL configuration.

NOTE

You must configure advanced settings to create an extended Layer 3 ACL.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.

FIGURE 219 Add - L3 Advanced Settings dialog box (IPv6)
To configure additional settings, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced settings” on page 598.
11. Click the right arrow button.
The new ACL displays in the ACL Entries list.
12. Repeat step 4 through step 11 to add additional entries.
13. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
14. View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.
15. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
16. Click OK on the Add - L3 ACL (IPv 6) Configuration dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

591

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
17. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
18. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
19. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration
To edit an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select an Ethernet router product and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to copy in the ACLs list and click Edit.
The Edit - L3 ACL (IPv 6) Configuration dialog box displays.
3. To add a new ACL entry, repeat step 4 through step 11 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
4. To edit an existing ACL entry, select the ACL you want to edit in the ACL Entries list, click the left
arrow button and repeat step 4 through step 11 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
5. To delete an existing ACL entry, select the ACL you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and
click the left arrow button.
6. Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.
7.

View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.

8. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.
9. Click OK on the Edit - L3 ACL (IPv 6) Configuration dialog box.
The updated ACL displays in the ACLs list.
10. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
11. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
12. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

592

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration
To copy an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select an Ethernet router product and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL configuration you want to copy in the ACLs list and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate - L3 ACL (IPv6 ) Configuration dialog box displays with the default name ‘Copy of
Original_Name’.

FIGURE 220 Duplicate - L3 ACL (IPv6) Configuration dialog box
3. Edit the name or number for the ACL in the ACL Name/Number field.
4. To add a new ACL entry, repeat step 4 through step 11 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
5. To edit an existing ACL entry, select the ACL you want to edit in the ACL Entries list, click the
right arrow button and repeat step 4 through step 11 in “Creating an extended L3 ACL
configuration” on page 585.
6. To delete an existing ACL entry, select the ACL you want to delete in the ACL Entries list and
click the left arrow button.
7.

Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to rearrange the ACLs in the ACL Entries list.

8. Select an ACL in the ACL Entries list and click View to the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box
for the ACL.
9. View the advanced settings for an ACL by selected the ACL in the ACL Entries list and clicking
View.
The L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box displays.
10. Click Close on the L3 ACL Advanced Settings dialog box to close.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

593

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

11. Click OK on the Duplicate - L3 ACL (IPv 6) Configuration dialog box.
The new ACL displays in the ACLs list.
12. To set the configuration type and operations, refer to “Configuring the ACL configuration type
and operations” on page 597.
13. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
14. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Deleting a L3 ACL configuration
NOTE
You cannot delete an IPv6 L3 ACL that is bound to a port.
To delete an ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the device and select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the ACL you want to delete in the ACLs list and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to “Saving
a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Assigning a L3 ACL configuration to an interface
To assign L3 ACL configuration to a interface, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - L3 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
3. Click OK.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - ACL Port Configuration dialog box displays.

594

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

FIGURE 221 Device_Name - Port_Number - ACL Port Configuration dialog box
4. (Ethernet routers only) Select a duration (1 Second, 1 Minute, 5 Minutes, or Cumulative) to
track the number of times an ACL filter is used in the Hits Stats Duration list.
Click Refresh to collect the hit statistics. The application updates the Hits column of the Details
of Selected ACL list.
5. To assign an ACL configuration to inbound messages, select the Inbound check box and
complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Assign ACL option and choose one of the following options from the first Assign
ACL list:

• Select ACLs on this Product to assign ACLs deployed on the product to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs deployed on the switch or associated with a
save deployment object.

• Select ACLs bound to this port to assign ACLs bound to the interface to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs bound to the interface.

• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.
b.

Select the ACL you want to assign to the port from the second Assign ACL list.
For Ethernet router products runing IronWare 5.4 or later, you can assign ACLs to IPv4 and
IPv6 ports. To assign the ACL to an IPv4 port, select the IPv4 check box and select an ACL
from the IPv4 list. To assign the ACL to an IPv6 port, select the IPv6 check box and select
an ACL from the IPv6 list.

c.

Select the Write to Product check box to create the selected ACL on the device if it does not
already exist.

6. To assign an ACL configuration to outbound messages, select the Outbound check box and
complete the following steps:

NOTE

You can only assign an ACL to an outbound message on an Application product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

595

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

a.

Select the Assign ACL option and choose one of the following options from the first Assign
ACL list:

• Select ACLs on this Product to assign ACLs deployed on the product to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs deployed on the switch or associated with a
save deployment object.

• Select ACLs bound to this port to assign ACLs bound to the interface to the port.
The second list is populated with the ACLs bound to the interface.

• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.
b.

Select the ACL you want to assign to the port from the second Assign ACL list.
For Ethernet router products runing IronWare 5.4 or later, you can assign ACLs to IPv4 and
IPv6 ports. To assign the ACL to an IPv4 port, select the IPv4 check box and select an ACL
from the IPv4 list. To assign the ACL to an IPv6 port, select the IPv6 check box and select
an ACL from the IPv6 list.

c.
7.

Select the Write to Product check box to create the selected ACL on the device if it does not
already exist.

Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - ACL Port Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to “Security
configuration deployment” on page 629

Clearing L3 ACL assignments
NOTE

For Ethernet router products running 5.4 or later, if the selected port has an IPv6 ACL assigned, the
ACL bound to the port field displays “0”. You cannot clear the ACL on this port.
To clear L3 ACL configuration from interfaces, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Port.
The Port Selection - L3 ACL dialog box displays.
2. Select a port in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button.
3. Click OK.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - ACL Port Configuration dialog box displays.
4. To clear inbound messages, complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Inbound check box.

b.

Select the Clear ACL Assignment option.

5. To clear outbound messages, complete the following steps:
a.

Select the Outbound check box.

b.

Select the Clear ACL Assignment option.

6. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - Layer 3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to “Security
configuration deployment” on page 629

596

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Configuring the ACL configuration type and operations
To configure the ACL configuration type and operation, complete the following steps.
1. Select the configuration type by choosing one of the following options:

• Incremental — Deploys add and delete operations. During deployment, the Management
application checks all ACLs to determine if the ACL name or number matches any ACL
number already deployed on a switch.
If the ACL name or number matches, the following actions occur:





Add operation — The ACL on the switch is overwritten by the one in configuration
during deployment.
Delete operation — Deletes the ACL from the switch during deployment.
No Action operation — Skips the ACL during deployment; however, if you save the
deployment the ‘no action’ ACL remains part of the configuration and can be added or
deleted at a later date.

If the ACL name or number does not match, the following actions occur:
Add operation — The ACL is appended on the switch.
No Action operation — Skips the ACL during deployment; however, if you save the
deployment the ‘no action’ ACL remains part of the configuration and can be added or
deleted at a later date.
Overwrite — Only deploys add operations. During deployment, the Management
application clears all ACLs currently on the switch and then applies the new configuration.



•

2. (Ethernet routers only) To set the hit statistics duration, refer to “Configuring hit statistics” on
page 597.
3. To deploy the configuration, click OK on the Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - L3 ACL dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Configuring hit statistics
To configure hit statistics, complete the following steps.
1. Select an Ethernet router product and select Configure > Security > L3 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select a duration (1 second, 1 minute, 5 minutes, or Cumulative) from the Hit Stats Duration
list.
3. Click Refresh to refresh the hit statistics.
The Refresh Time field displays the last time the Management application client successfully
collected the hit statistics.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

597

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

Configuring L3 ACL advanced settings
You configure L3 ACL advanced settings for extended L3 ACL device configurations. To configure an
extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 590
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To configure advanced settings for an extended L3 ACL configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Click Advanced Settings on the Add/Edit/Duplicate - L3 ACL Configuration dialog box.

FIGURE 222 Advanced Settings dialog box
2. (IPv4 ACL only) Select one of the following types of service (TOS) to use to filter the packet from
the Type of Service list.

• None — Select to not filter by TOS.
• Normal — Select to filter packets that match the normal TOS. The decimal value is 0.
• Other — Select filter by one or more additional options.
3. (IPv4 ACL only) If you selected Other from the Type of Service list, select one or more of
following additional options:

• Min-monetary cost (1) — Select to have the ACL filter packets that match the minimum
monetary cost TOS. The decimal value is 1.

• Max-reliability (2) — Select to have the ACL filter packets that match the maximum
reliability TOS. The decimal is 2.

598

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

• Max-throughput (4) — Select to have the ACL filters packets that match the maximum
throughput TOS. The decimal value is 4.

• Min-delay (8) — Select to have the ACL filter packets that match the minimum delay TOS.
The decimal value is 8.
4. Select one of the following protocols from the Protocol list to filter the packet by protocol.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

IP (IPv4 ACL only) — Internet Protocol
ICMP (IPv4 ACL only) — Internet Control Message Protocol
IGMP — Internet Group Management Protocol
IGRP — Internet Gateway Routing Protocol
OSPF — Open Shortest Path First
TCP — Transmission Control Protocol
UDP — User Datagram Protocol

If the protocol you use is not in the list, enter a value from 0 through 255 in the text field.
5. Select one of the following precedences from the Precedence list to filter the packet by
precedence.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

none — Select to not filter packets by precedence.
routine — Select to filter packets with the routine precedence.
priority — Select to filter packets with the priority precedence.
immediate — Select to filter packets with the immediate precedence.
flash — Select to filter packets with the flash precedence.
flash-override — Select to filter packets with the flash override precedence.
critical — Select to filter packets with the critical precedence.
internet — Select to filter packets with the internetwork control precedence.
network — Select to filter packets with the network control precedence.

6. (TCP and UDP protocols only) To filter packets by the source port, complete the following steps.
Only available when you select TCP or UDP from the Protocol list.
a.

Select one of the following options:

• none — Select to not use the source port numbers to filter packets.
• equals — Select to use the TCP or UDP port name or number specified in the Start
field.

• not equal — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers except the port name or
number specified in the Start field.

• greater than — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers greater than the port
number or the numeric equivalent of the port name specified in the Start field.

• less than — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers that are less than the port
number or the numeric equivalent of the port name specified in the Start field.

• range — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers between the TCP or UDP port name
or number specified in the Start field and the End field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

599

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

b.

Enter a port number or select a port application name from the Start list.
If you selected range from the Operator list, enter the port number or name of the lower
numbered port in the range. Click the ellipsis button to launch the Service dialog box to
see a list of services and service groups. For more information about services and service
groups, refer to “Service configuration” on page 611.

c.

Enter a port number or select a port application name from the End list.
If you selected range from the Operator list, enter the port number or name of the higher
numbered port in the range.

7.

(TCP and UDP protocols only) To filter packets by the destination port, complete the following
steps.
Only available when you select TCP or UDP from the Protocol list.
a.

Select one of the following options:

• none — Select to not use the destination port numbers to filter packets.
• equals — Select to use the TCP or UDP port name or number specified in the Start
field.

• not equal — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers except the port name or
number specified in the Start field.

• greater than — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers greater than the port
number or the numeric equivalent of the port name specified in the Start field.

• less than — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers that are less than the port
number or the numeric equivalent of the port name specified in the Start field.

• range — Select to use all TCP or UDP port numbers between the TCP or UDP port name
or number specified in the Start field and the End field.
b.

Enter a port number or select a port application name from the Start list.
If you selected range from the Operator list, enter the port number or name of the lower
numbered port in the range. Click the ellipsis button to launch the Service dialog box to
see a list of services and service groups. For more information about services and service
groups, refer to “Service configuration” on page 611.

c.

Enter a port number or select a port application name from the End list.
If you selected range from the Operator list, enter the port number or name of the higher
numbered port in the range.

8. (IPv4 ACL only - ICMP protocol only) To filter packets by the ICMP message type, complete the
following steps.

600

a.

Choose one of the following message types:T

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

any-icmp-type
echo
echo-reply
information request
mask-reply
mask-request
parameter-problem

•
•
•
•
•
•

redirect
source-quench
time-exceeded
timestamp-reply
timestamp-request
unreachable

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

b.

18

Choose one of the following code types:
The available code types vary depending on the selected message type.T

echo

•

echo
echo-reply
• echo-reply
information-request
• information-request
mask-reply
• mask-reply
mask-request
• mask-request
parameter-problem
• parameter-problem
• general-parameter-problem
redirect
• net-redirect
• host-redirect
• net-tos-redirect
• host-tos-redirect
source-quench
• source-quench
time-exceeded
• ttl-exceeded
• reassembly-timeout

timestamp-reply
timestamp-reply
timestamp-request
• timestamp-request
unreachable
• net-unreachable
• host-unreachable
• protocol-unreachable
• port-unreachable
• packet-too-big
• source-route-failed
• destination-network-unknown
• destination-host-unknown
• source-host-isolated
• destination-net-prohibited
• destination-host-prohibited
• net-tos-unreachable
• host-tos-unreachable
• administratively-prohibited
• host-precedence-violation
• precedence-cutoff

•

9. (IPv4 ACL only) Select one of the following options to match packets to a hardware forwarding
queue from the Priority list.

•
•
•
•

0:qosp0
1:qosp1
2:qosp2
3:qosp3
This changes the internal forwarding priority of the packet. If the outgoing interface is an
802.1Q interface, the specified priority is mapped to the equivalent 802.1p (CoS) priority
and the packet is marked with the new 802.1p priority.

10. (IPv4 ACL only) Select the hardware forwarding queue to which you want to assign outgoing
packets from the Priority Force list.
11. (IPv4 ACL only) Select a priority map to filter packets based on their 802.1p value from the
Priority Map list.
Selecting a priority map does not change the forwarding priority of the packet or mark the
packet with a new priority.
12. (IPv4 ACL only) Enter a Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCP) marking value to mark
packets with a specified TOS value in the DSCP-Marking (0-63) field.
13. Enter a DSCP mapping value to maps a DSCP value to an internal forwarding priority in the
(IPv4 ACL only) DSCP-Mapping (0-63) field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

601

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

14. Click OK on the Advanced Settings dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 590
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

Network configuration
The Management application allows you to filter traffic from a specific Network. A Network is made
up of one or more devices in a subnet. Use the following procedures to configure a network:

•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing existing networks” on page 602
“Creating a network” on page 603
“Editing a network” on page 604
“Copying a network” on page 605
“Deleting a network” on page 605

Viewing existing networks
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To view all existing networks, complete the following steps.

602

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

1. Click the Networks tab.

FIGURE 223 Network dialog box, Networks tab
2. Review the List of Networks table:

• Name — The user-defined network name.
• Subnet — The IP address of the subnet.
• Mask — The IP address of the mask.
3. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Creating a network
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To create a network, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Networks tab.
2. Click Add.
The Add Network dialog box displays.

FIGURE 224 Add Network dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

603

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

3. Enter a name for the network in the Name field.
4. Enter a valid IP address (IPv4 format) in the Subnet field.
5. Enter a valid IP address in the Mask field.
If you use the ACL Network as the source IP address, the Subnet mask from the ACL Network
will be converted to Wildcard mask when deploying the ACL to the device.
The Network dialog box only accepts subnet mask.
6. Click OK on the Add Network dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Editing a network
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587

To edit a network, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Networks tab.
2. Select the network you want to edit in the List of Networks table and click Edit.
The Edit Network dialog box displays.
3. Enter a valid IP address (IPv4 format) in the Subnet field.
4. Enter a valid IP address in the Mask field.
5. Click OK on the Edit Network dialog box.
6. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

604

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Copying a network
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To copy a network, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Networks tab.
2. Select the network you want to copy in the List of Networks table and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Network dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the network in the Name field.
4. Enter a valid IP address (IPv4 format) in the Subnet field.
5. Enter a valid IP address in the Mask field.
6. Click OK on the Duplicate Network dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Deleting a network
NOTE

You cannot delete a network that is in use.

NOTE

You cannot delete a network that is in a Network Group.
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To delete a network, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Networks tab.
2. Select one or more networks that you want to delete in the List of Networks table and click
Delete.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

605

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Network group configuration
The Management application allows you to filter traffic from a specific network group. A network
group is made up of one or more devices, networks, or network groups. Use the following
procedures to configure a network:

•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing existing network groups” on page 606
“Creating a network group” on page 607
“Editing a network group” on page 608
“Copying a network group” on page 609
“Deleting a network group” on page 611

Viewing existing network groups
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To view all existing network groups, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Network Group tab.

FIGURE 225 Network dialog box, Network Group tab

606

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

2. Review the List of Network Groups table:

•
•
•
•
•

Name — The user-defined network group name.
Host Names — The name of each host in the network group.
Address Range — The range of IP addresses for the network group.
Networks — The name of each network in the network group.
Network Groups — The name of each network group in the network group.

3. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Creating a network group
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To create a network group, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Network Groups tab.
2. Click Add.
The Add Network Group dialog box displays.

FIGURE 226 Network dialog box, Network Group tab
3. Enter a name for the network group in the Group Name field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

607

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

4. To add a host to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter a valid host name in the Host Name field.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the host name to the Selected table.

5. To add an address range to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter an IP address for the start of the range in the Start field.

b.

Enter an IP address for the end of the range in the End field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

6. To add a network to the network group, complete the following steps.

7.

a.

Select one or more networks from the Networks table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

To add another network group to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more network groups from the Network Groups table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

8. Click OK on the Add Network Group dialog box.
The Network dialog box - Network Groups tab displays with the new network group in the List of
Network Groups table.
9. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Editing a network group
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To edit a network group, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Network Groups tab.
2. Select the network group you want to edit in the List of Network Groups table and click Edit.
The Edit Network Group dialog box displays.
3. To remove a component from the network group, select the component in the Selected table
and click the left arrow button.
4. To add a host to the network group, complete the following steps.

608

a.

Enter a valid host name in the Host Name field.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the host name to the Selected table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

5. To edit an address range to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the range you want to edit in the Selected table and click the left arrow button.

b.

Change the IP address for the start of the range in the Start field.

c.

Change the IP address for the end of the range in the End field.

d.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range back to the Selected table.

6. To add an address range to the network group, complete the following steps.

7.

a.

Enter an IP address for the start of the range in the Start field.

b.

Enter an IP address for the end of the range in the End field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

To add a network to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more networks from the Networks table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

8. To add another network group to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more network groups from the Network Groups table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

9. Click OK on the Edit Network Group dialog box.
The Network dialog box - Network Groups tab displays.
10. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Copying a network group
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To copy a network group, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Network Groups tab.
2. Select the network group you want to copy in the List of Network Groups table and click
Duplicate.
The Duplicate Network Group dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the network group in the Group Name field.
4. To remove a component from the network group, select the component in the Selected table
and click the left arrow button.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

609

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

5. To add a host to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter a valid host name in the Host Name field.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the host name to the Selected table.

6. To edit an address range to the network group, complete the following steps.

7.

a.

Select the range you want to edit in the Selected table and click the left arrow button.

b.

Change the IP address for the start of the range in the Start field.

c.

Change the IP address for the end of the range in the End field.

d.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range back to the Selected table.

To add an address range to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter an IP address for the start of the range in the Start field.

b.

Enter an IP address for the end of the range in the End field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

8. To add a network to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more networks from the Networks table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

9. To add another network group to the network group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more network groups from the Network Groups table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move to the Selected table.

10. Click OK on the Duplicate Network Group dialog box.
The Network dialog box - Network Groups tab displays with the new network group in the List of
Network Groups table.
11. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

610

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Deleting a network group
NOTE

You cannot delete a network group that is in use.
You can access the Network dialog box when configuring a standard or extended L3 ACL device
configuration. To configure a standard or extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 581
“Editing a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 584
“Copying a standard L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588

To delete a network group, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Network Groups tab.
2. Select one or more network groups that you want to delete in the List of Network Groups table
and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the ACL, return to one of the above procedures.

Service configuration
The Management application allows you to filter traffic from a specific service source or destination
port. A service is either TCP or UDP port. Use the following procedures to configure a service:

•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing existing services” on page 612
“Creating a service” on page 613
“Editing a service” on page 614
“Copying a service” on page 614
“Deleting a service” on page 615

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

611

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

Viewing existing services
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To view all existing services, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.

FIGURE 227 Service dialog box, Services tab
2. Review the List of Services table:

•
•
•
•

Name — The service name.
Protocol — Whether the service uses the TCP or UDP protocol.
Port — The port number.
User-defined — Whether the service is user-defined or not.

3. Click Close on the Network dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced settings” on
page 598.

612

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

Creating a service
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To create a service, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Click Add.
The Add Service dialog box displays.

FIGURE 228 Add Service dialog box
3. Enter a name for the service in the Name field.
4. Select one of the following protocol options:

• TCP
• UDP
5. Enter a port number in the Port field.
6. Click OK on the Add Service dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

613

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

Editing a service
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To edit a service, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Select the service you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit Service dialog box displays.
3. Select one of the following protocol options:

• TCP
• UDP
4. Enter a port number in the Port field.
5. Click OK on the Edit Service dialog box.
6. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Copying a service
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To copy a service, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Select the service you want to copy and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Service dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the service in the Name field.

614

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

4. Select one of the following protocol options:

• TCP
• UDP
5. Enter a port number in the Port field.
6. Click OK on the Duplicate Service dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Deleting a service
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To delete one or more services, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Services tab.
2. Select one or more services that you want to delete and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

615

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

Service group configuration
The Management application allows you to filter traffic from a specific service group. A service
group is made up of one or more port ranges, services, or service groups. Use the following
procedures to configure a service group:

•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing existing service groups” on page 616
“Creating a service group” on page 617
“Editing a service group” on page 618
“Copying a service group” on page 619
“Deleting a service group” on page 620

Viewing existing service groups
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To view all existing service groups, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Service Groups tab.

FIGURE 229 Service dialog box, Service Group tab
2. Review the List of Service Groups table:

•
•
•
•

616

Name — The service group name.
Port Range — The range (1 — 65535) of port numbers.
Services — The name of each service in the service group.
Service Groups — The name of each service group in the service group.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

3. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Creating a service group
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To create a service group, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Service Groups tab.
2. Click Add.
The Add Service Group dialog box displays.

FIGURE 230 Add Service Group dialog box
3. Enter a name for the service group in the Name field.
4. To enter a range of ports, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter the starting port number in the Start Port field.

b.

Enter the ending port number in the End Port field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

617

18

Layer 3 access control list policy

5. To add a service to the group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more services to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected services to the Selected table.

6. To add a service group to the group, complete the following steps.

7.

a.

Select one or more service groups to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected service groups to the Selected table.

Click OK on the Add Service dialog box.
The Service dialog box, Service Group tab displays with the new group in the List of Service
Groups table.

8. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Editing a service group
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To edit a service, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Service Groups tab.
2. Select the service group you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit Service Group dialog box displays.
3. To enter a range of ports, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter the starting port number in the Start Port field.

b.

Enter the ending port number in the End Port field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

4. To add a service to the group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more services to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected services to the Selected table.

5. To add a service group to the group, complete the following steps.

618

a.

Select one or more service groups to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected service groups to the Selected table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Layer 3 access control list policy

18

6. Click OK on the Edit Service Group dialog box.
The Service dialog box, Service Group tab displays with the new group in the List of Service
Groups table.
7.

Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Copying a service group
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To copy a service, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Service Groups tab.
2. Select the service group you want to copy and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate Service Group dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the service group in the Name field.
4. To enter a range of ports, complete the following steps.
a.

Enter the starting port number in the Start Port field.

b.

Enter the ending port number in the End Port field.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move the address range to the Selected table.

5. To add a service to the group, complete the following steps.
a.

Select one or more services to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected services to the Selected table.

6. To add a service group to the group, complete the following steps.

7.

a.

Select one or more service groups to add to the group in the Services table.

b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected service groups to the Selected table.

Click OK on the Duplicate Service Group dialog box.
The Service dialog box, Service Group tab displays with the new group in the List of Service
Groups table.

8. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

619

18

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

Deleting a service group
You can access the Service dialog box when configuring an extended L3 ACL device configuration.
To configure an extended L3 ACL, refer to one of the following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 587
“Copying an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 588
“Creating an extended L3 ACL configuration” on page 585
“Editing an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 592
“Copying an IPv6 L3 ACL configuration” on page 593

To delete one or more services, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Service Groups tab.
2. Select one or more services that you want to delete and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click Close on the Service dialog box.
To finish configuring the advanced settings for the ACL, refer to “Configuring L3 ACL advanced
settings” on page 598.

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management
The Media Access Control (MAC) layer controls the movement of data packets to and from one
computer to another across a network. Security Management enables you to filter access based on
the MAC layer headers in the Ethernet frame.
You can only configure MAC filters on the following IronWare devices:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Ethernet Layer 2/L3 Edge switch (FastIron CX)
Ethernet Layer 2/L3 Access switch (FastIron GS)
Enterprise LAN switch (FastIron LS)
Enterprise LAN chassis (FastIron SX)
Enterprise LAN Edge switch (FastIron Edge X)
Data Center switch (TurboIron)
Application product (ServerIron (SI) – SI-4G-SSL)

NOTE
If you add an unsupported device to the security configuration, the Management application skips
the unsupported devices during deployment.
You can configure a MAC filter to forward or drop incoming packets using the following criteria:

• Source MAC address
• Destination MAC address
• Encapsulation type and Ethertype

620

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

18

You can configure and manage MAC filters at the device or interface (port/trunk) level.

NOTE

You can only apply MAC filters inbound traffic.
When you configure MAC filters on a device, the MAC filter does not execute until you deploy it on
an interface. Once deployed to an interface, the device performs the action associated with the
first matching filter (of all filters deployed to the device) to the packet. If the packet does not match
any of the filters deployed on the interface, the device drops the packet.
You can only apply MAC filters to physical ports and trunks. If you apply a MAC filter to a trunk, you
must apply the MAC filter to the primary port of the trunk.

NOTE

You cannot apply a MAC filter to a virtual interface.

Creating a MAC filter configuration
To create a MAC filter configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Product.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 231 Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box
2. Select New from the Add list.
The Add MAC Filter dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

621

18

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

FIGURE 232 Add MAC Filter dialog box
3. Enter a MAC filter number in the MAC Filter # field.
MAC filter numbers range from 1 through 1024.
4. (Optional) Enter a description of the MAC filter in the Description field.
The description is saved to the Management application database only. It is not saved to the
switch.
5. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
6. In the Source Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Source Address and Source Mask fields.

7.

a.

Enter the source MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the Source
Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the source MAC address in the Source Mask field.

In the Destination Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Destination Address and Destination Mask fields.
a.

Enter the destination MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the
Destination Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the destination MAC address in the Destination Mask
field.

8. In the Ethernet Type list, select one of the following to specify the Ethernet type being
transferred in the Ethernet frame:

•
•
•
•

622

etype — EtherType
llc — IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control
snap — Subnetwork Access Protocol
none — no type

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

18

9. In the Operator list, select one of the following to specify a binary operator:

•
•
•
•

= (equal to)
!= (not equal to)
> (greater than)
< (less than).

This field is not available when the Ethernet Type is none.
10. Enter the type of frame in the Frame Type field.
This ia 2 byte hexadecimal value. Valid values include 0600 to FFFF. This field is not available
when the Ethernet Type is none.
11. Click OK on the Add MAC Filter dialog box.
The new MAC filter displays in the MAC Filters table. To create additional MAC filters, repeat
step 2 through step 11.
12. Click OK on the Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
The Deploy to Products - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Creating a MAC filter from a saved configuration
To create a MAC filter configuration from a saved configuration objects, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Product.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select From Saved Configurations from the Add list.
The MAC Filter Saved Configurations dialog box displays.

FIGURE 233 MAC Filter Saved Configurations dialog box
3. Select one or more objects from the MAC Filter Saved Configurations table.
You can select one or more MAC filters, one or more saved deployment configurations, or a
combination of both.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

623

18

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

4. Click OK on the MAC Filter Saved Configurations dialog box.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays with the selected MAC filters in
the MAC Filters table. If you selected a saved deployment configuration, all MAC filters
associated with the saved deployment configuration display in the MAC Filters table.
5. Click OK on the Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Editing a MAC filter
To edit a MAC filter configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Product.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the configuration you want to edit in the MAC Filters table and click Edit.
The Edit MAC Filter dialog box displays.

FIGURE 234 Edit MAC Filter dialog box
3. Change the description of the MAC filter in the Description field.
4. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
5. In the Source Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Source Address and Source Mask fields.

624

a.

Enter the source MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the Source
Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the source MAC address in the Source Mask field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

18

6. In the Destination Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Destination Address and Destination Mask fields.

7.

a.

Enter the destination MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the
Destination Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the destination MAC address in the Destination Mask
field.

In the Ethernet Type list, select one of the following to specify the Ethernet type being
transferred in the Ethernet frame:

•
•
•
•

etype — EtherType
llc — IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control
snap — Subnetwork Access Protocol
none — no type

8. In the Operator list, select one of the following to specify a binary operator:

•
•
•
•

= (equal to)
!= (not equal to)
> (greater than)
< (less than).

This field is not available when the Ethernet Type is none.
9. Enter the type of frame in the Frame Type field.
This ia 2 byte hexadecimal value. Valid values include 0600 to FFFF. This field is not available
when the Ethernet Type is none.
10. Click OK on the Edit MAC Filter dialog box.
The updated MAC filter displays in the MAC Filters table.
11. Click OK on the Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
The Deploy to Products - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Copying a MAC filter
To copy a MAC filter configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Product.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the configuration you want to copy in the MAC Filters table and click Duplicate.
The Duplicate MAC Filter - MAC_Filter_Number dialog box displays.
3. Enter a MAC filter number in the MAC Filter # field.
MAC filter numbers range from 1 through 1024.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

625

18

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

4. Enter a description of the MAC filter in the Description field.
5. Select Permit or Deny from the Action list.
6. In the Source Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Source Address and Source Mask fields.

7.

a.

Enter the source MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the Source
Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the source MAC address in the Source Mask field.

In the Destination Address list, select one of the following options:

• Any
• MAC
Selecting MAC enables the Destination Address and Destination Mask fields.
a.

Enter the destination MAC address on which the configuration filters traffic in the
Destination Address field.

b.

Enter the mask associated with the destination MAC address in the Destination Mask
field.

8. In the Ethernet Type list, select one of the following to specify the Ethernet type being
transferred in the Ethernet frame:

•
•
•
•

etype — EtherType
llc — IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control
snap — Subnetwork Access Protocol
none — no type

9. In the Operator list, select one of the following to specify a binary operator:

•
•
•
•

= (equal to)
!= (not equal to)
> (greater than)
< (less than).

This field is not available when the Ethernet Type is none.
10. Enter the type of frame in the Frame Type field.
This ia 2 byte hexadecimal value. Valid values include 0600 to FFFF. This field is not available
when the Ethernet Type is none.
11. Click OK on the Duplicate MAC Filter - MAC_Filter_Number dialog box.
The new MAC filter displays in the MAC Filters table.
12. Click OK on the Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

626

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

18

Deleting a MAC filter
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Product.
The Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the MAC filter you want to delete in the MAC Filters table and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the Device_Name - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.

NOTE

The MAC Filter is not deleted from the switch until you deploy the configuration to the switch.
The Deploy to Products - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To save the configuration, refer to
“Saving a security configuration deployment” on page 631

Assigning MAC filters
To assign a MAC filter configuration to a port or product, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Port.
The Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select the port you want to add to the MAC filter in the Available Ports list and click the right
arrow button.
3. Click OK on the Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Select the Assign MAC Filter option.
5. Choose one of the following options from the first list:

• MAC Filters bound to this interface — Select to assign an ACL deployment saved on the
port.

• From the Product — Select to assign an MAC filter deployment saved on the product.
• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.
6. Select the MAC filter number from the second list.
7.

Click Add.
The MAC filter you selected displays in the MAC Filters table. Repeat step 5 through step 7 for
each MAC filter you want to assign to the product or port.

8. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

627

18

Media Access Control (MAC) filter management

Clearing MAC filter assignments
To clear a MAC filter assignment from a port or product, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Port.
The Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select the port you want to clear the MAC filter from in the Available Ports list and click the right
arrow button.
You can select more ports or products from the Deploy to Ports - MAC Filter dialog box.
3. Click OK on the Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Select the Clear MAC Filter Assignment option.
5. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Deploying a security configuration on demand” on page 630.

Adding a MAC filter configuration to an interface
To add a MAC filter configuration to an interface, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Security > MAC Filter > Port.
The Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select the port or trunk you want to add to the MAC filter in the Available Ports list and click the
right arrow button.
3. Click OK on the Port Selection - MAC Filter dialog box.
The Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Select the Assign MAC Filter option.
5. Choose one of the following options from the first list:

• MAC Filters bound to this interface — Select to assign an ACL deployment saved on the
port.

• From the Product — Select to assign an MAC filter deployment saved on the product.
• Deployment_Name — Select to assign a user-configured deployment on the port.
6. Select the MAC filter number from the second list.
7.

Click Add.
The MAC filter you selected displays in the MAC Filters table. Repeat step 5 through step 7 for
each MAC filter you want to assign to the port.

8. Click OK on the Device_Name - Port_Number - MAC Filter Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Ports - MAC Filter dialog box displays. To deploy the configuration, refer to
“Security configuration deployment” on page 629.

628

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Security configuration deployment

18

Security configuration deployment
Figure 235 shows the standard interface used to deploy security configurations.

FIGURE 235 Deploy to Product/Ports dialog box
Before you can deploy a security configuration, you must create the security configuration. For
step-by-step instructions, refer to the following sections:

• “Layer 2 access control list management” on page 561
• “Layer 3 access control list policy” on page 580
• “Media Access Control (MAC) filter management” on page 620
Security Management enables you to configure, persist, and manage a security configuration as a
“deployment configuration object”. A deployment configuration object is comprised of the following
parts:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Security configuration (Layer 2 ACL, L3 ACL, or MAC filter)
Target information
Deployment option
Persistence option
Scheduling option
Snapshot option

To create a deployment configuration object, you must save the deployment. Once you create a
deployment configuration object, you can access the security configuration from the Deployment
manager. For more information about the Deployment manager, refer to “Deployment Manager” on
page 963.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

629

18

Security configuration deployment

Deploying a security configuration on demand
To deploy a security configuration immediately, complete the following steps.

FIGURE 236 Deploy to Product/Ports dialog box
1. Choose one of the following options:

• Deploy now — Select to deploy the configuration immediately on the product or port
without saving the deployment definition.

• Save and deploy now — Select to deploy the configuration immediately on the product or
port and save the deployment definition for future deployment.
2. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
3. Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.
5. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.
6. Select the product monitoring template you want to use from the CLI Template list.
7.

630

Select one or more of the following to capture snapshots:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Security configuration deployment

18

• Select the Pre-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
prior to deployment of the security configuration.

• Select the Post-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
after deployment of the security configuration.
If you select the Post-deployment check box, enter the amount of time (between 1 and
300 seconds) you want the application to wait before capturing the snapshot in the Delay
field.
8. Select one or more ports or products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the
Available Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
9. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box.

Saving a security configuration deployment
To save a security configuration deployment, complete the following steps.

FIGURE 237 Deploy to Product/Ports dialog box
1. Select the Save deployment only option to save the deployment definition for future
deployment.
2. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
3. Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

631

18

Security configuration deployment

5. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.
6. Select the product monitoring template you want to use from the CLI Template list.
7.

Select one or more of the following to capture snapshots:

• Select the Pre-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
prior to deployment of the security configuration.

• Select the Post-deployment check box to capture a snapshot of the product’s configuration
after deployment of the security configuration.
If you select the Post-deployment check box, enter the amount of time (between 1 and
300 seconds) you want the application to wait before capturing the snapshot in the Delay
field.
8. Select one or more ports or products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the
Available Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
9. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box.

Scheduling a security configuration deployment
To schedule a security configuration deployment, complete the following steps.

FIGURE 238 Deploy to Product/Ports dialog box
1. Select Configure > Security > Layer 2 ACL > Product.
The Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

632

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Security configuration deployment

18

2. Choose one of the following options:

• Select New from the Add list.
The Add - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.

• Select an ACL in the list and click Edit.
The Edit - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box displays.
3. Configure the Layer 2 ACL and click OK on the Add/Edit - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
4. Click OK on the Device_Name - Layer 2 ACL Configuration dialog box.
The Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box displays.
5. Select the Schedule option.
6. Select one of the following save configuration options:

• Save to running
• Save to running and startup
• Save to running and startup then reboot
7.

Enter a name for the deployment in the Name field.

8. Enter a description for the deployment in the Description field.
9. Click the Schedule Enable check box and click the ellipsis button to schedule deployment.
The Schedule Properties dialog box displays.
10. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for
the schedule:

• To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment
schedule” on page 634.

• To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on
page 634.

• To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on
page 634.

• To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on
page 634.

• To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule”
on page 635.
11. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
12. Click the Snapshot Use check box and click the ellipsis button to select the product monitoring
template.

NOTE

The Snapshot Use check box is only available for IronWare products.
The Pre-Post Snapshot Properties dialog box displays.
13. Select one or more ports or products to which you want to deploy the configuration in the
Available Targets list and click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Targets list.
14. Click OK on the Deploy to Products - Layer 2 ACL dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

633

18

Security configuration deployment

Configuring a one-time deployment schedule
To configure a one-time schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To configure security configuration schedule, refer to step 11 of “Scheduling a security
configuration deployment” on page 632.

Configuring an hourly deployment schedule
To configure an hourly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the minute past the hour you want deployment to run from the Minutes past the hour
list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
To configure security configuration schedule, refer to step 11 of “Scheduling a security
configuration deployment” on page 632.

Configuring a daily deployment schedule
To configure a daily deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
To configure security configuration schedule, refer to step 11 of “Scheduling a security
configuration deployment” on page 632.

Configuring a weekly deployment schedule
To configure a weekly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Week list.
To configure security configuration schedule, refer to step 11 of “Scheduling a security
configuration deployment” on page 632.

634

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Security configuration deployment

18

Configuring a monthly deployment schedule
To configure a monthly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
To configure security configuration schedule, refer to step 11 of “Scheduling a security
configuration deployment” on page 632.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

635

18

636

Security configuration deployment

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

19

Zoning

In this chapter
• Zoning overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Zone database size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Zoning configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Zoning administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

637
640
640
661

Zoning overview
Zoning is a fabric-based service that enables you to partition your network into logical groups of
devices that can access each other and prevent access from outside the group. Grouping devices
into zones in this manner not only provides security, but also relieves the network from Registered
State Change Notification (RSCN) storms that occur when too many native FCoE devices attempt to
communicate with one another.
You can use zoning to partition your network in many ways. For example, you can partition your
network into two zones, winzone and unixzone, so that your Windows servers and storage do not
interact with your UNIX servers and storage. You can use zones to logically consolidate equipment
for efficiency or to facilitate time-sensitive functions; for example, you can create a temporary zone
to back up nonmember devices.
A device in a zone can communicate only with other devices connected to the fabric within the
same zone. A device not included in the zone is not available to members of that zone. When
zoning is enabled, devices that are not included in any zone configuration are inaccessible to all
other devices in the fabric.
Zones can be configured dynamically. They can vary in size, depending on the number of
fabric-connected devices, and devices can belong to more than one zone.
Consider Figure 239, which shows configured zones, Red, Green, and Blue.

•
•
•
•

Server 1 can communicate only with the Storage 1 device.
Server 2 can communicate only with the RAID and Storage 2 devices.
Server 3 can communicate with the RAID and Storage 1 devices.
The Storage 3 device is not assigned to a zone; no other zoned fabric device can access it.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

637

19

Zoning overview

Blue Zone

Server 2
Server 1

Storage 2

Red Zone
Storage 1
RAID

Green Zone
Storage 3

Server 3

FIGURE 239 Zoning
NOTE

A Network OS fabric supports zoning only if all devices in the fabric are running Network OS v2.1.0
or later.

NOTE

Zone objects based on physical port number or port ID (D,I ports) are not supported in Network OS
fabrics.

Online zoning
Online zoning allows you to do the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

638

View both defined and active zone information in the fabric.
Create and modify zones and zone configurations in the software zone database.
Activate a zone configuration in order to publish the zone information in the selected fabric.
Deactivate the current active zone configuration.
Configure zoning policies in the selected fabric.
Generate zoning reports for the fabric.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning overview

19

Offline zoning
Offline zoning is supported in Network OS fabrics.
Offline zoning is supported in Network OS and Fabric OS fabrics.

NOTE
Offline zoning is available only for Enterprise and Professional Plus editions.
Offline zoning enables you to copy a fabric zone database and edit it offline. The benefits to offline
zoning include the following:

• You want to make changes to the zone database now, but apply them later.
For example:

-

If you make incremental changes to zoning on an ongoing basis, but want to apply the
changes to the fabric during scheduled downtime.

-

If you are expecting new servers to be delivered, but want to make changes to zoning now
and apply the changes after the servers are delivered and ready to go online.

• You want to keep multiple copies of the zone database and switch between them.
For example, if you want to allow specific servers access to tape drives for backup during
specific time windows, you can have multiple zone databases (one or more for backup and one
for normal operation) and switch between them easily.

• You want to analyze the impact of changes to storage access before applying the changes.
For example, if you deploy a new server and want to ensure that the zoning changes result in
only the new server gaining access to specific storage devices and nothing else. Refer to
“Comparing zone databases” on page 662.

Zoning naming conventions
The naming rules for zone names, zone aliases, and zone configuration names vary with the type of
fabric. The following conventions apply:

• Names must start with an alphabetic character and may contain alphanumeric characters and
the underscore ( _ ) character.

• Names are not case-sensitive.
• Zone, alias, and configuration names cannot begin with “bfa_”,“red_”, “lsan_red_”, or
“d__efault__”. Zone configuration names cannot begin with “r_e_d_i_r_c__fg”. These prefixes
are reserved.

• Names cannot begin with a numeric character or a special character.
• The recommended character limit is 64 characters.
• Duplicate names are not allowed between zones, zone aliases, and zone configurations within
a zone database.
If you enter an invalid zone or zone configuration name, an error or warning message displays
depending on the type of fabric you are trying to zone.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

639

19

Zone database size

Zone database size
The supported maximum zone database size is 1 MB.
If the fabric contains only Backbone Chassis platforms, the supported maximum zone database
size is 2 MB.

NOTE

Network OS recommends a maximum zone database size of 150 KB. As the size of the zone
database increases, performance decreases.
The Professional Edition does not support large zone databases. In the Professional Edition, the
maximum size of the zone database without zone aliases is 32 KB. If the zone database contains
aliases, the maximum size is less than 32 KB.

Zoning configuration
At a minimum, zoning configuration entails creating zones and zone members. However, you can
also create zone aliases, zone configurations and zone databases. You can define multiple zone
configurations, deactivating and activating individual configurations as your needs change. Zoning
configuration can also involve enabling or disabling the default zone.

Configuring zoning
The following procedure provides an overview of the steps you must perform to configure zoning.
Note that for any zoning-related procedure, changes to a zone database are not saved until you
click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box. If you click Cancel or the close button (X), no changes
are saved.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. If you want to show all the discovered fabrics in the Potential Members list, right-click in the
Potential Members list and select Display All.
5. Create the zones.
For specific instructions, refer to “Creating a zone” on page 641.
6. Add members to each zone.
For specific instructions, refer to “Adding members to a zone” on page 642.
7.

Create a zone configuration.
For specific instructions, refer to “Creating a zone configuration” on page 650.

8. Activate the zone configuration.

640

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

For specific instructions, refer to “Activating a zone configuration” on page 652.
9. Set zoning policies, if necessary.
For specific instructions, refer to “Enabling or disabling the default zone for fabrics” on
page 646.
10. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Creating a zone
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Click New Zone.
A new zone displays in the Zones list.
5. Type the name for the zone.
For zone name requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on
page 639.
The new, empty zone is created. You cannot save an empty zone. Refer to “Adding members to a
zone” on page 642 for instructions on adding members and saving the zone.

Viewing zone properties
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click the zone you want to review in the Zones list and select Properties.
The Zone Properties dialog box displays.
5. Review the zone properties.
Note that when any modifications are made to an active zone, the Zone Properties dialog box
continues to show the status as Active until the changes are saved to the zone database.
You can change the zone name by double-clicking the name and then modifying the name in
the editable field.
6. Click OK to close the Zone Properties dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

641

19

Zoning configuration

Adding members to a zone
Use this procedure to add a member to a zone when the member is listed in the Potential Members
list of the Zone DB tab.
Enterprise and Professional Plus editions: For instructions to add a member to a zone when the
member is not listed in the Potential Members list, refer to the procedure “Creating a member in a
zone” on page 643.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
If you want to show all the discovered fabrics in your fabric group in the Potential Members list,
right-click in the Potential Members list and select Display All.
4. Select one or more zones to which you want to add members in the Zones list. (Press SHIFT or
CTRL and click each zone name to select more than one zone.)
5. Select an option from the Type list.
By default, the first time you launch the Zoning dialog box for a zoning scope, the Potential
Members list displays valid members using the following rules:

• If you select the WWN type, the valid members display by the Attached Ports.
• If you select the Alias type, the valid members display by the device Alias.
6. Select one or more members to add to the zone in the Potential Members list. (Press SHIFT or
CTRL and click each member to select more than one member. To add all ports on a device,
select the device.)
You cannot add duplicate members to the same zone.
7.

Click the right arrow between the Potential Members list and Zones list to add the selected
members to the zone.
A message is displayed if unsupported potential members are moved to the Zones list. Click
OK to close the message box. Reconsider your selections and make corrections as
appropriate.

8. For offline zone databases only, complete the following steps to save the zone configuration
into the switch from the offline zone database:
a.

Select Save to Switch from the Zone DB Operation list.

b.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The selected zone database is saved to the fabric without enabling a specific zone
configuration.

9. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

642

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

Creating a member in a zone
Use this procedure to add a member to a zone when the member is not listed in the Potential
Members list of the Zone DB tab.
For instructions to add a member to a zone when the member is listed in the Potential Members
list, refer to the procedure “Adding members to a zone” on page 642.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zones to which you want to add members in the Zones list. (Press SHIFT or
CTRL and click each zone name to select more than one zone.)
5. Click New Member.
The Add Zone Member dialog box displays.
6. Select an option from the Member Type list.
The fields in the dialog box vary based on the Member Type option you select.
7.

Fill in the remaining fields in the dialog box.
Click the Help button for additional information on each field.

8. Click OK to save your changes and close the Add Zone Member dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to save your changes and keep the Add Zone Member dialog box open so you can
add more new members. Repeat step 5 through step 8 as many times as needed, and proceed
to step 9 when appropriate.
9. For offline zone databases only, complete the following steps to save the zone configuration
into the switch from the offline zone database:
a.

Select Save to Switch from the Zone DB Operation list.

b.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The selected zone database is saved to the fabric without enabling a specific zone
configuration.

10. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Removing a member from a zone
Use the following procedure to remove one or more members from a zone or zones. Note that the
member is not deleted; it is only removed from the zone.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

643

19

Zoning configuration

2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Click the plus sign (+) by the appropriate zone in the Zones list to expand the listing and show
the zone’s members.
5. Perform one of the following actions:

• Right-click the name of the zone member you want to remove in the Zones list and select
one of the following options from the shortcut menu that displays:

• Remove - To remove the zone member from the selected zone.
• Remove All - To remove the zone member from all zones to which it belongs.
• To remove multiple zone members, select the members to be removed from the zone, and
click the left arrow between the Potential Members list and the Zones list.
When successful, the zone member is removed from the Zones list.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Renaming a zone
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click the name of the zone you want to change in the Zones list and select Rename.
5. Type the new name for the zone.
For zone name requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on
page 639.
6. Press Enter to save the new name.
For Network OS fabrics, if an invalid name is entered for a zone or zone configuration, the
application displays a warning message. If there is a naming violation according to the vendor,
the switch returns the error message for the exact information along with the zone
configuration activation failure message.
7.

Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

644

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

Deleting a zone
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zones in the Zones list that you want to delete, then right-click and select
Delete.
A message displays asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Click Yes to delete the selected zones.
The message closes and the zone or zones are removed from the Zones list.

NOTE

If you delete something in error, click Cancel on the Zoning dialog box to exit without saving
changes. When you reopen the dialog box, the zone is restored.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Duplicating a zone
When you duplicate a zone, you make a copy of it in the same zone database. The first time a zone
is duplicated, the duplicate is automatically given the name _copy. On subsequent
duplications, a sequential number is assigned to the zone name, such as _copy_1,
_copy_2, and _copy_3.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zones in the Zones list that you want to duplicate, then right-click and
select Duplicate.
The duplicated zone or zones display in the Zones list.
5. (Optional) Type a new name for the zone and press Enter to save the name.
Depending on the characters included in the name you enter, a message may display informing
you the name contains characters that are not accepted by some switch vendors. Click OK and
enter a different name or accept the default name assigned to the zone. (For zone name
requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on page 639.)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

645

19

Zoning configuration

6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Customizing the zone member display
In the Zoning dialog box, you can customize which properties are displayed and in what order.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays, based on the Configure > Zoning menu selection.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Click the plus sign (+) by the appropriate zone in the Zones list to expand the listing and show
the zone members.
5. Right-click the name of any zone member and select Member Display.
The Zone Member Display dialog box displays.
6. Select or clear the check boxes for the properties you want to display or hide.
All of the options are selected by default. You cannot clear the WWN/Domain,Port Index check
box. It is always selected.
7.

Select a property and click the Up or Down buttons to rearrange the order in which the
properties are displayed.

8. Click OK.
The display is changed for all zone members in the Zones list.

Enabling or disabling the default zone for fabrics
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select the zoning database you want from the Zone DB list.
5. Click Zoning Policies.
The Zoning Policies dialog box displays.
6. Make sure the appropriate fabric is named on the Zoning Policies dialog box.
7.

Perform one of the following actions based on the task you want to complete:

• To enable the default zone, click Enable, and then click OK.
• To disable the default zone, click Disable, and then click OK.

646

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

The Zoning Policies dialog box closes and the Zone DB tab displays.
8. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Creating a zone alias
An alias is a logical group of port index numbers and WWNs. Specifying groups of ports or devices
as an alias makes zone configuration easier by enabling you to configure zones using an alias
rather than inputting a long string of individual members. You can specify members of an alias
using the following methods:

• Identifying members by switch domain and port index (D,I) number pair.
• Identifying members by device node and device port WWNs.
Zone aliases are supported only in Network OS.
For Network OS, only device node and device port WWNs are supported as members of the zone
alias. Network OS does not support D,I members.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Click New Alias.
The New Alias dialog box displays.
6. Type a name for the alias in the Alias Name field.
Refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on page 639 for rules about zone alias names.
7.

(Optional) Show all discovered fabrics in the Potential Members list by right-clicking in the
Potential Members list and selecting Display All.

8. Select one or more members that you want to add to the alias in the Potential Members list.
(Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each member to select more than one member.)
You can also add WWNs not listed in the Potential Members list by entering the WWN in the
Detached WWN field and clicking Add.
9. Click the right arrow between the Potential Members list and the Selected Member(s) list to
add the selected members to the alias.
10. Click OK or Apply on the New Alias dialog box to save your changes.
11. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Editing a zone alias
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

647

19

Zoning configuration

3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Select the alias you want to edit in the Alias list and click Edit.
The Edit Alias dialog box displays.
6. Add members to the alias by completing the following steps.
a.

Select an option from the Type list to choose how to display the objects in the Potential
Members list.
For Network OS fabrics, WWN is selected by default and cannot be changed.

b.

Show all discovered fabrics in the Potential Members list by right-clicking in the Potential
Members list and selecting Expand All.

c.

Select one or more members that you want to add to the alias in the Potential Members
list. (Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each member to select more than one member.)
You can also add WWNs not listed in the Potential Members list by entering the WWN in
the Detached WWN field and clicking Add.

d.
7.

Click the right arrow between the Potential Members list and the Selected Member(s) list
to add the selected members to the alias.

Remove members from the alias by completing the following steps.
a.

Select one or more members that you want to remove from the alias in the Selected
Member(s) list. (Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each member to select more than one
member.)

b.

Click the left arrow between the Potential Members list and the Selected Member(s) list to
remove the selected members from the alias.

8. Click OK or Apply on the Edit Alias dialog box to save your changes.
9. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Removing an object from a zone alias
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Show all objects in the Alias list by right-clicking an object and selecting Tree > Expand All.
6. Select one or more objects that you want to remove from the alias in the Alias list. (Press SHIFT
or CTRL and click each member to select more than one member.)
You can select objects from different zone aliases.
7.

Right-click one of the selected objects and select Remove.
The selected objects are removed from the associated zone aliases.

8. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

648

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

Exporting zone aliases
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Click Export.
The Export Alias dialog box displays.
6. Browse to the location to which you want to export the zone alias data.
7.

Enter a name for the export file in the File Name field.

8. Click Export Alias.
9. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Renaming a zone alias
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Right-click the zone alias you want to rename and select Rename.
6. Edit the name and press Enter.
Refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on page 639 for rules about zone alias names.
7.

Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Deleting a zone alias
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Right-click the zone alias you want to delete and select Delete.
6. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The selected zone alias is deleted from the Alias list.
7.

Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

649

19

Zoning configuration

Duplicating a zone alias
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
4. Select Alias from the Type list.
5. Right-click the zone alias you want to duplicate and select Duplicate.
The duplicated zone alias displays in the Alias list (for example, _Copy).
6. Edit the name.
To edit the name, refer to “Renaming a zone alias” on page 649.
7.

Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.

Creating a zone configuration
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Click New Configuration.
A new configuration displays in the Zone Configurations list.
5. Enter a name for the zone configuration.
For zone name requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on
page 639.
6. Press Enter.
Depending on the characters included in the name you enter, a message may display informing
you the name contains characters that are not accepted by some switch vendors. Click OK and
enter a different name or accept the default name assigned to the zone. (For zone name
requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on page 639.)
7.

Add zones to the zone configuration.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Adding zones to a zone configuration” on page 651.

8. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

650

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

Viewing zone configuration properties
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Potential Members list.
4. Right-click the zone configuration you want to review in the Zone Configurations list and select
Properties.
The Zone Configuration Properties dialog box displays.
5. Review the zone configuration properties.
6. Click OK to close the Zone Configuration Properties dialog box.

Adding zones to a zone configuration
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zone configurations to which you want to add zones in the Zone
Configurations list. (Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone configuration name to select
more than one zone configuration.)
5. Select one or more zones to add to the zone configurations in the Zones list. (Press SHIFT or
CTRL and click each zone name to select more than one zone.)
6. Click the right arrow between the Zones list and the Zone Configurations list to add the zones
to the zone configurations.
7.

Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Removing a zone from a zone configuration
Use the following procedure to remove a zone from a zone configuration. Note that the zone is not
deleted; it is only removed from the zone configuration.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

651

19

Zoning configuration

4. Click the plus sign (+) by the appropriate zone configuration in the Zone Configurations list to
expand the listing and show the zone configuration members.
5. Perform one of the following actions:

• Right-click the name of the zone you want to remove in the Zone Configurations list and
select Remove.

• To remove multiple zones, select the zones to be removed from the zone configuration,
and click the left arrow between the Zones list and the Zone Configurations list.
When successful, the zone is removed from the Zone Configurations list.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Activating a zone configuration
When a zone configuration is active, its members can communicate with one another. Only one
zone configuration can be active at any given time.

NOTE
Only one server should be run at a time (actual servers performing discovery) or logon conflicts may
occur. Also, activation speeds may differ depending on the hardware vendor and type of zoning
used.
You cannot activate a zone configuration if any of the following is true:

• You do not have access privileges to activate zone configurations. You will not be able to
activate a zone configuration unless your access privileges are redefined.

• The fabric is not manageable.
• You do not have Read/Write or Activate privileges for the selected fabric and the selected
zone database (for FC fabrics and Network OS fabrics only).

• The selected fabric is not supported by the Management application.
• The selected fabric is no longer discovered.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. (Optional) Select a zone database from the Zone DB list (Enterprise and Professional Plus
editions only).
5. Select the zone configuration you want to activate in the Zone Configurations list.
6. Click Activate.
7.

652

Review the information in the Activate Zone Configuration dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

a.

Make sure the selected zone configuration is the one you want to activate.

b.

(Optional) Select the Generate a report with the activation of new zone configuration
check box to generate the Zone Configuration Activation report.

c.

If you are activating a zone configuration from the offline zone database, select or clear
the Save only the selected zone configuration to the existing zone database in the fabric
check box.

• If the check box is cleared (default), the entire offline zone database is saved to the
switch and replaces the existing online zone database.

• If the check box is selected, only the selected zone configuration in the offline zone
database are saved to the switch and are added to the existing online zone database.
8. Click OK to activate the zone configuration.
A message displays informing you that the zones and zone configurations you change will be
saved in the zone database and asking whether you want to proceed. Click Yes to confirm the
activation, or click No to cancel the activation.
When you click Yes, a busy window displays indicating the activation is in progress. A status
field informs you whether the activation succeeded or failed. When it succeeds, icons for the
active zone configuration and its zones display green. When it fails, the message includes the
reason for the failure.
9. Click OK to continue.
The Activate Zone Configuration dialog box is closed and the Zone DB tab displays.
10. Click OK.
The zone configuration is activated and the entire zone database is sent to the fabric.

Deactivating a zone configuration
Use this procedure to deactivate the active zone configuration.
There are several conditions that could cause the Deactivate button to be unavailable. They include
the following:

• There is no active zone configuration in the selected fabric.
• The fabric is not manageable.
• You do not have Read/Write or Activate privileges for the selected fabric and the selected zone
database (for FC fabrics and Network OS fabrics only).

• The selected fabric is not supported by the Management application.
• The selected fabric is no longer discovered.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Active Zone Configuration tab.
3. Select a fabric from the Active Zone Configuration list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Click Deactivate.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

653

19

Zoning configuration

5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
If the deactivation succeeded, the zone configuration no longer displays in the Active Zone
Configuration tab.
If the deactivation failed, the zone configuration still displays in the Active Zone Configuration
tab.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Renaming a zone configuration
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click the name of the zone configuration you want to change in the Zone Configurations
list and select Rename.
5. Type the new name for the zone configuration.
For zone configuration name requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming
conventions” on page 639.
6. Press Enter to save the new name.
7.

Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Deleting a zone configuration
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zone configurations in the Zone Configurations list that you want to delete,
then right-click and select Delete.
A message displays asking you to confirm the deletion.
5. Click Yes to delete the selected zone configuration.
The message closes and the selected zone configurations are removed from the Zone
Configurations list.

654

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

NOTE

If you select “Do not show me this again.” on the confirmation message, the next time you
delete a zone configuration, it will be deleted without requesting confirmation from you. If you
delete something in error, click Cancel on the Zoning dialog box to exit without saving changes
since the last operation (Apply or Activate). When you reopen the dialog box, the zone
configuration is restored.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Duplicating a zone configuration
When you duplicate a zone configuration, you make a copy of it in the same zone database. The
first time a zone configuration is duplicated, the duplicate is automatically given the name
_copy. On subsequent duplications, a sequential number is assigned to the zone
configuration name, such as _copy_1, _copy_2, and
_copy_3.
Note that these naming conventions apply to both duplicate and deep duplicate operations.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select one or more zone configurations in the Zone Configurations list that you want to
duplicate, then right-click and select one of the following options:

• Duplicate - To duplicate the zone configuration or configurations.
• Deep Duplicate - To duplicate the zone configuration or configurations and all included
zones.
The duplicated zone configuration or sets display in the Zone Configurations list.
5. (Optional) Type a new name for the zone configuration and press Enter to save the name.
For zone name requirements and limitations, refer to “Zoning naming conventions” on
page 639.
6. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Creating an offline zone database
Offline zone databases are supported only in Enterprise and Professional Plus editions. Use this
procedure to create a zone database and save it offline.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

655

19

Zoning configuration

2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a zone database from the Zone DB list.
4. Select Save As from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Save Zone DB As dialog box displays.
5. Enter a name for the database in the Zone DB Name field and click OK.
6. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
If you want to show all discovered fabrics in the Potential Members list, right-click in the
Potential Members list and select Display All.
7.

Create the desired zones.
For specific instructions, refer to “Creating a zone” on page 641.

8. Add members to each zone.
For specific instructions, refer to “Adding members to a zone” on page 642 and “Creating a
member in a zone” on page 643.
9. Create a zone configuration.
For specific instructions, refer to “Creating a zone configuration” on page 650.
10. Activate the zone configuration.
For specific instructions, refer to “Activating a zone configuration” on page 652.
11. Set zoning policies, if necessary.
For specific instructions, refer to “Enabling or disabling the default zone for fabrics” on
page 646.
12. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Deleting an offline zone database
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
databases for the selected entity.
3. Select the offline zone database you want to delete in the Zone DB list.

NOTE

Only offline databases can be deleted.
4. Select Delete from the Zone DB Operation list.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

656

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

The message closes and the selected zone configurations are removed from the Zone
Configurations list.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Refreshing a zone database
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a zone database from the Zone DB list.
4. Select Refresh from the Zone DB Operation list.
A message displays informing you that refresh will overwrite the selected database. Click Yes
to continue.
5. Click OK.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Merging fabrics
When you merge fabrics, the defined and active zone configurations in both fabrics must match.
1. Compare and merge the two zone databases, and save the database to the offline repository.
Refer to “Merging two zone databases” on page 658.
2. Ensure that the active zone configurations in each fabric are the same, including the same
name.
Refer to “Renaming a zone configuration” on page 654.
3. Load the newly merged zone database from the offline repository.
4. Activate the zone configuration.
5. If the active zone configuration names are the same in each fabric, then load the offline
repository, and activate the zone configuration on each fabric.
6. If the active configuration names are different in each fabric, rename the zone configurations
to be the same, and copy the zones.
7.

Ensure that the active configurations are the same.
a.

Load the newly created offline zone database.

b.

Add the active zones to the zone configuration that is the active configuration on the other
fabric.

c.

Rename the inactive configuration.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

657

19

Zoning configuration

Merging two zone databases
If a zone or zone configuration is merged, the resulting zone or zone configuration includes all
members that were marked for addition or removal as well as all members not otherwise marked.
NOTE:

You cannot merge the following zones with a Network OS fabric:

•
•
•
•
•

Zones with aliases (can merge with Network OS 3.0.0 and later)
Zones with D,I members
TI zones
QoS zones
Redirection zones

1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select Compare from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 240.

FIGURE 240 Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box
3. Select a database from the Reference Zone DB list.
4. Select a database from the Editable Zone DB list.
The Reference Zone DB and Editable Zone DB areas display all available element types (zone
configurations, zones, and aliases) for the two selected zone databases. In the Editable Zone
DB area, each element type and element display with an icon indicator (Table 72) to show the
differences between the two databases.

658

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning configuration

19

5. (Optional) Merge elements (zone configurations, zones, or aliases) by completing the following
steps:
a.

Select one or more of the same element type from the Reference Zone DB area.
You can select zone configurations, zones, or aliases, but do not mix element types.

b.

Select the same type of element in the Editable Zone DB area.
If you selected a zone configuration in the Reference Zone DB area, you must select a
zone configuration in the Editable Zone DB area.

c.

Click Merge.
If the Merge button is inactivated, check that you have selected similar element types in
both the Reference Zone DB area and the Editable Zone DB area. You can merge
elements only with similar elements. You cannot merge a zone with a zone configuration,
for example.

6. (Optional) Merge all elements by clicking Merge All.
7.

(Optional) Add elements (aliases, zones, and zone configurations) to the editable database by
completing the following steps.
a.

Select one or more of the same element type in the Reference Zone DB area.
These are the elements that are added to the editable zone database.

b.

Select an element in the Editable Zone DB area.
You can add zone aliases and zone members to a zone. You can add zones to a zone
configuration. And you can add zone configurations to the zone database.

c.

Click Add.
If the Add button is inactivated, check that you have selected appropriate element types in
both the Reference Zone DB area and the Editable Zone DB area.

8. (Optional) Remove elements from the editable zone database by selecting an available
element (one that you have added) from the Editable Zone DB area and clicking Remove.
Note that if a zone is removed from a zone configuration, it is removed only from that single
zone configuration. However, if the zone is removed from the list of zones, it is removed from all
zone configurations.
9. Click Save As to save the editable zone database in the offline repository (for Enterprise and
Professional Plus editions only).

Creating a common active zone configuration in two fabrics
Before you can merge two fabrics, the defined and active zone configurations in both fabrics must
match. Refer to “Merging two zone databases” on page 658 for instructions on how to merge the
zone databases in two fabrics.
After you merge the two zone databases, you create a common active zone configuration before
physically merging the fabrics.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

659

19

Zoning configuration

2. Select Compare from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 240.
3. Select the database for the first fabric from the Reference Zone DB list.
4. Select the database for the second fabric from the Editable Zone DB list.
5. Set up a zone configuration that contains the active zones in both fabrics:
a.

Select the name of the active zone configuration from the Reference Zone DB area.

b.

Select the name of the active zone configuration in the Editable Zone DB area.

c.

Click Merge.
All of the active zones from both fabrics are now in one zone configuration.

6. Click Save As to save the editable zone database in the offline repository for the second fabric.
7.

Click Save As again, and select the name of the first fabric from the Fabric list to save the
editable zone database in the offline repository for the first fabric.

8. Click Close to close the Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box and return to the Zoning dialog
box.
9. In both fabrics, load the offline repository and activate the zone configuration from step b.
Refer to “Activating a zone configuration” on page 652 for instructions.

Saving a zone database to a switch
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a zone database from the Zone DB list.
3. Select Save to Switch from the Zone DB Operation list.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The selected zone database is saved to the fabric without enabling a specific zone
configuration.
5. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.

Exporting an offline zone database
NOTE
You cannot export an online zone database.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select an offline zone database from the Zone DB list.
3. Select Export from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Export Zone DB dialog box displays.
4. Browse to the location where you want to export the zone database file (.xml format).

660

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning administration

19

5. Click Export Zone DB.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.

Importing an offline zone database
NOTE
You cannot import an online zone database. You cannot import a zone database that contains zones
with duplicate members.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select an offline zone database from the Zone DB list.
3. Select Import from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Import Zone DB dialog box displays.
4. Browse to the zone database file (.xml format).
5. Click Import Zone DB.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.

Rolling back changes to the offline zone database
Use this procedure to reverse changes made to an offline zone database.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select the zone database you want to roll back from the Zone DB list.
You must select an offline zone database that has a value in the Last Saved to Fabric column.
You cannot roll back changes for zone databases that were never saved to the fabric.
3. Select Roll Back from the Zone DB Operation list.
The selected zone database reverts back to what it was before the changes were applied.
4. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.

Zoning administration
This section provides instructions for performing administrative functions with zoning. You can
rename, duplicate, delete, and perform other tasks on zone members, zones, and zone
configurations.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

661

19

Zoning administration

Comparing zone databases
You can compare zone databases against one another to identify any and all differences between
their memberships prior to sending them to the switch. Once the two databases have been
compared, icons display to show the differences between the two databases. These icons are
illustrated and described in Table 72.

TABLE 72
Icon

Compare icon indicators
Description
Added — Displays when an element is added to the editable database.
Modified — Displays when an element is modified on the editable database.
Removed — Displays when an element is removed from the editable database.

To compare two zone databases, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select Compare from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 241.

FIGURE 241 Compare/Merge Zone DBs dialog box
3. Select a database from the Reference Zone DB list.
4. Select a database from the Editable Zone DB list.

662

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning administration

19

The Reference Zone DB and Editable Zone DB areas display all available element types (zone
configurations, zones, and aliases) for the two selected zone databases. In the Editable Zone
DB area, each element type and element display with an icon indicator (Table 72) to show the
differences between the two databases.
5. Set the display for the database areas by selecting one of the following from the Comparison
View list:

• Storage-to-Host Connectivity — Displays only storage and host devices.
• Host-to-Storage Connectivity — Displays only host and storage devices.
• Full — Displays all zone configurations, zones, and aliases.
6. Set the level of detail for the database areas by selecting one of the following options from the
Tree Level list:

NOTE

This list is only available when you set the Comparison View to Full .

• All Level — Displays all zone configurations, zones, and aliases.
• Zone Configurations — Displays only zone configurations.
• Zones — Displays only zones.
7.

Select the Differences only check box to display only the differences between the selected
databases.

8. Select the Sync Scroll Enable check box to synchronize scrolling between the selected
databases.
9. Click Previous or Next to navigate line-by-line in the Editable Zone DB area.
10. Click Close.
To merge two zone databases, refer to “Merging two zone databases” on page 658.

Managing zone configuration comparison alerts
You can turn off the automatic zone configuration comparison function if you no longer want to see
two of the alert messages that the comparison can produce. When a zone configuration is
successfully activated, the comparison function can display an alert icon if either of two conditions
exist.
The messages are “The active zone configuration does not exist in the zone database” and “The
active zone configuration does not match  in the zone database.” To turn off
the icons and the messages, complete the following steps.
1. After successfully activating a zone configuration, click the Active Zone Configuration tab in the
Zoning dialog box.
2. Select Turn off the comparison alerts between the active zone configuration and the zone
database check box.
Any existing alert icons and messages are cleared and further comparisons are prevented.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

663

19

Zoning administration

Setting change limits on zoning activation
Use this procedure to set a limit on the number of changes a user can make to the zone database
before activating a zone configuration. If the user exceeds the limit, zone configuration activation is
not allowed. By default, all fabrics allow unlimited changes. Changes include adding, removing, or
modifying zones, aliases, and zone configurations.
Use this procedure to set the following limits:

• Set a different limit for each fabric.
• Set limits on some fabrics while allowing other fabrics to have unlimited changes.
• Set a limit for fabrics that will be discovered later.
NOTE

You must have the Zoning Set Edit Limits privilege to perform this task.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Set Change Limits.
The Set Change Limits for Zoning Activation dialog box displays.
2. Click Change Count for the fabric on which you want to set limits.
The field changes to an editable field.
3. Enter the maximum number of zone database changes that can be made for that fabric before
a zone configuration is activated.
To set a limit, enter a positive integer.
To allow unlimited changes, enter 0.
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3 for each fabric on which you want to set limits.
5. To set a limit for new, undiscovered fabrics, enter a value in the Default Change Count for New
Fabrics field.
This limit is enforced on all new fabrics as they are discovered. The default value is 0
(Unlimited).
6. Select the Enforce change limits during zone activation check box to enforce the change limits.
If you want to set the limits now, but turn on enforcement of the limits at a later time, make
sure the check box is clear.
7.

Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.

Clearing the fabric zone database
ATTENTION
Clearing the zone database removes all zoning configuration information, including all aliases,
zones, and zone configurations, in the fabric.
Clearing the fabric zone database is disruptive to the fabric.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.

664

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning administration

19

This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
databases for the selected entity.
3. Select the Fabric Zone DB from the Zone DB list.
4. Select Clear All from the Zone DB Operation list.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The message closes and the Fabric Zone DB is cleared of all zoning configurations.
6. Click OK to close the Zoning dialog box.

Removing all user names from a zone database
Use this procedure to remove all user names from the selected offline zone database.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
databases for the selected entity.
3. Select a zone database that you have checked out (your user name is in the Current User
column) in the Zone DB list.
4. Select Undo CheckOut from the Zone DB Operation list.
5. Click Yes in the confirmation message.
This removes the user names of users currently logged in to the client from the Current User
column for this zone database.
6. Click OK to save your work and close the Zoning dialog box.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Finding a member in one or more zones
Use this procedure to locate all instances of a member in the Zones list on the Zone DB tab.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. If you want to show all fabrics discovered in the Potential Members list, right-click in the
Potential Members list and select Display All.
5. Select the devices or ports you want to find in the Potential Members list.
6. Click Find > between the Potential Members list and the Zones list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

665

19

Zoning administration

If the member is found, all instances of the zone member found are highlighted in the Zones
list.

Finding a zone member in the potential member list
Use this procedure to locate a zone member in the Potential Members list on the Zone DB tab.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select the zone member in the Zones list that you want to find in the Potential Members list.
(Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone member to select more than one zone member.)
5. Click Find < between the Potential Members list and the Zones list.
If the member is found, it is highlighted in the Potential Members list.

Finding zones in a zone configuration
Use this procedure to locate all instances of a zone in the Zone Configurations list on the Zone DB
tab.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select the zone you want to find in the Zones list. (Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone to
select more than one zone.)
5. Click Find > between the Zones list and the Zone Configurations list.
If the zone is found, all instances of the zone are highlighted in the Zone Configurations list.

Finding a zone configuration member in the zones list
Use this procedure to locate a zone configuration member in the Zones list on the Zone DB tab.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.

666

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning administration

19

This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Select the zone configuration member (for example, the zone) in the Zone Configurations list
that you want to find in the Zones list. (Press SHIFT or CTRL and click each zone configuration
member to select more than one zone configuration member.)
5. Click Find < between the Zones list and the Zone Configurations list.
If the zone is found, it is highlighted in the Zones list.

Listing zone members
Use this procedure to identify the zone in the active zone configuration of the fabric to which an
individual port belongs and the members of that zone.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click in the Potential Members list and select List Zone Members.
The List Zone Members dialog box displays. If the port is a member of a zone, the fabric name,
the port name, and WWN zone members display.
5. Click Close to exit the List Zone Members dialog box.

Listing un-zoned members
Use this procedure to identify the device ports in the current fabric that are not part of the active
zone configuration.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click in the Potential Members list and select List Un-Zone Members.
The Un-Zone Members dialog box displays. The dialog box shows the fabric name and the
connected device ports that are not part of the active zone configuration.
5. Click Close to exit the Un-Zone Members dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

667

19

Zoning administration

Removing an offline device
The Management application enables you to remove an offline device from all zones and zone
aliases in the selected zone DB.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
3. Select Offline Utility from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Offline Device Management dialog box displays.
4. Select the check box for the offline device you want to remove in the Remove column.
Select the Remove check box to select all offline devices.
5. Click OK on the Offline Device Management dialog box.
A warning message displays informing you that the selected zone members will be replaced
from all zones and aliases in the selected zone DB.
6. Click OK on the message.
7.

Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Replacing zone members
You can replace one instance of a zone member in one zone, or all instances of the zone member
in all the zones to which it belongs.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Click the Zone DB tab if that tab is not automatically displayed.
3. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
4. Right-click the zone member you want to replace in the Zones list and select one of the
following options from the shortcut menu that displays:

• Replace - To replace the zone member in a selected zone.
• Replace All - To replace all instances of the selected zone member.
The Replace Zone Member dialog box displays.
5. Select the option from the Member Type list that you want to use to identify the replacement
zone member.
For Network OS fabrics, only WWN and Alias are supported.

668

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning administration

19

6. Enter the WWN, name, domain and port index numbers, or alias — whichever is appropriate for
the method you chose in step 5.
When you choose the WWN method, you may define a name for the replacement zone
member.
7.

Click OK.
The new zone member replaces the old zone member in the Zones list and the Replace Zone
Member dialog box closes.

8. Click OK or Apply to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Replacing an offline device by WWN
The Management application enables you to replace an offline device by WWN from all zones and
zone aliases in the selected zone DB.
1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
3. Select Offline Utility from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Offline Device Management dialog box displays.
4. Clear the Remove column check box for the offline device you want to replace.
5. Select WWN (default) in the corresponding Replace Using list.
6. Enter the WWN or select the name of the offline device in the corresponding Replace Value list.
If the selected name has multiple device or device port WWNs assigned (names are set to
non-unique in the Management application), the Device or Device Port WWN of Non-unique
Name dialog box displays. The WWN list includes all device and device port WWNs assigned to
the selected name.
7.

Click OK on the Offline Device Management dialog box.
A warning message displays informing you that the selected zone members will be removed
from all zones and aliases in the selected zone DB.

8. Click OK on the message.
9. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

Replacing an offline device by name
The Management application enables you to replace an offline device by name from all zones and
zone aliases in the selected zone DB.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

669

19

Zoning administration

1. Select Configure > Zoning > Fabric.
The Zoning dialog box displays.
2. Select a fabric from the Zoning Scope list.
This identifies the target entity for all subsequent zoning actions and displays the zoning
database for the selected entity.
3. Select Offline Utility from the Zone DB Operation list.
The Offline Device Management dialog box displays.
4. Clear the Remove column check box for the offline device you want to replace.
5. Select Name in the corresponding Replace Using list.
6. Select the name of the offline device in the corresponding Replace Value list.
If the selected name has multiple device or device port WWNs assigned (names are set to
non-unique in the Management application), the Device or Device Port WWN of Non-unique
Name dialog box displays. The WWN list includes all device and device port WWNs assigned to
the selected name.
7.

Select the WWN you want to use from the WWN list and click OK.

8. Click OK on the Offline Device Management dialog box.
A warning message displays informing you that the selected zone members will be removed
from all zones and aliases in the selected zone DB.
9. Click OK on the message.
10. Click OK or Apply on the Zoning dialog box to save your changes.
Any zones or zone configurations you have changed are saved in the zone database.

670

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

20

Port Fencing

In this chapter
• About port fencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

671
674
677
687
692

About port fencing
NOTE

This feature is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

All Fabric OS devices must have Fabric Watch and must be running firmware Fabric OS 6.2 or later.

NOTE
This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Port Fencing allows you to protect your SAN from repeated operational problems experienced by
ports. Use Port Fencing to set threshold limits for the number of specific port events permitted
during a given time period on the selected object. For default threshold values for Fabric OS
devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch Administrator's Guide.
Port Fencing objects include the SAN, Fabrics, Directors, Switches (physical), Virtual Switches,
Ports, as well as Port Types (E_port, F_port, and FX_port). Use Port Fencing to directly assign a
threshold to these objects. When a switch does not support Port Fencing, a “No Fencing Changes”
message displays in the Threshold field in the Ports table.
If the port detects more events during the specified time period, the device firmware blocks the
port, disabling transmit and receive traffic until you investigate, solve the problem, and manually
unblock the port.
Physical fabrics, directors, switches, port types, and ports display when you have the privileges to
manage that object and are indicated by the standard product icons.

NOTE

Port Fencing displays any existing thresholds discovered on manageable fabrics, directors, and
switches running firmware version Fabric OS 6.2 or later.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

671

20

About port fencing

Viewing port fencing configurations
NOTE
This feature is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Port Fencing allows you to protect your SAN from repeated operational problems experienced by
ports. Use Port Fencing to set threshold limits for the number of specific port events permitted
during a given time period on the selected object. For default threshold values for Fabric OS
devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch Administrator's Guide.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays (Figure 243).

FIGURE 242 Port Fencing dialog box
The Port Fencing dialog box contains the following field and components:

• Violation Type list — The name of the ISL, Link, or Security threshold currently active on
this port. If the object does not support Port Fencing, this field displays “# No Fencing
Support #”. This field displays as inactive (grayed-out) when the object is only partially
managed by the management application.
(ISL Threshold only) If the port type is E_port, the ISL Threshold name displays in a bold
font to indicate when the threshold is currently active on the port type.

672

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About port fencing

20

• Thresholds table — List of configured thresholds based on the threshold type selected in
the Violation Type list.
Limit (Fabric OS) — The number of events allowed for the assigned threshold.
If the object has no fencing support or no fencing changes, this field displays two
hyphens separated by a space (- -). When the object is only partially managed by the
management application, this field displays as inactive (grayed-out).
 Period (Fabric OS) — The time limit (in seconds or minutes) for the assigned threshold.
This field displays as inactive (grayed-out) when the object is only partially managed by
the management application.
 Ports Affected — The total number of ports on all objects that could be affected by the
threshold setting. It does not show the current number of ports affected. This value
updates in real time as you add and subtract each threshold from each object.
Find button — Select a threshold in the thresholds table and click the find button (>) to
highlight each instance of the selected threshold in the Ports table.


•

• Right arrow button — Select a threshold in the thresholds table and click the right arrow
button to add the selected threshold to the selected fabrics, switches, or switch ports
(refer to “Assigning thresholds” on page 685).

• Left arrow button — Select a threshold in the Ports table and click the left arrow button to
remove the selected threshold from the associated fabrics, switches, or switch ports (refer
to “Removing thresholds from individual objects” on page 692).

• Add button — Click to add an ISL protocol threshold (refer to “Adding thresholds” on
page 677).

• Edit button — Click to edit an ISL protocol threshold (refer to “Editing thresholds” on
page 687).

• Delete button — Click to delete an ISL protocol threshold (refer to “Removing thresholds
from the thresholds table” on page 693).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

673

20

Thresholds

• Ports table — All managed fabric, director, switch, port type, and port objects (label and
icon) in its hierarchical relationship to the other objects in the tree.
Ports — Displays all discovered fabrics, devices, and ports as both text and icons.
 Port Type — The operational port type of the port. This field displays as inactive
(grayed-out) when either the object’s firmware does not support Port Fencing or the
object is only partially managed by the management application.
 Directly Assigned — A right arrow icon to indicate that the threshold is directly assigned
to this object and is inherited by all objects below it in the tree. This field displays as
inactive (grayed-out) when either the object’s firmware does not support Port Fencing
or the object is only partially managed by the management application.
 Changed indicator — The change icons in real time when you change information in
the dialog box. One change icon indicates a new threshold was applied (either directly
or inherited) to the port, and another indicates that a threshold was removed from this
object (during this session) and no threshold applies to the port.
 Threshold_type Threshold — The name of the ISL threshold policy.
 Limit (Fabric OS) — The number of events allowed for the assigned threshold.
If the object has no fencing support or no fencing changes, this field displays two
hyphens separated by a space (- -). When the object is only partially managed by the
management application, this field displays as inactive (grayed-out).
 Period (Fabric OS) — The time limit (in seconds or minutes) for the assigned threshold.
This field displays as inactive (grayed-out) when the object is only partially managed by
the management application.
 Operational State — The operational state of the port.
 Blocked Configuration — The current configuration of the port (Blocked or Unblocked).
 Port WWN — The port world wide name of the port.
 Connected Product — The device label of the connected object.
 Connected Port # — The port number of the connected port.
 Connected Port WWN — The port world wide name of the connected port.
 Connected Port Name — The name of the connected port configured in the Element
Manager.
 FC Address — The FC address of the port.
Properties button — Click to display the Properties dialog box for the fabric, switch, or port
selected in the Ports table. The All Fabrics and Port Type objects do not have properties.
For more information, refer to “Viewing SAN device properties” on page 1302.


•

• Unblock button — Click to unblock a blocked port after a warning message displays (refer
to “Unblocking a port” on page 686). This button becomes active after you select a
blocked port in the Ports table.
2. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Thresholds
You can create thresholds, which you can then assign to available objects in the tree. Port Fencing
threshold types include the following:

• C3 Discard Frames (Fabric OS only)
• Invalid CRCs (Fabric OS only)

674

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Thresholds

•
•
•
•

20

Invalid Words (Fabric OS only)
Link Reset (Fabric OS only)
Protocol Errors (Fabric OS)
State Change (Fabric OS only)

NOTE

Fabric OS devices are allowed only 2 defined thresholds (one default and one custom) for each
threshold type and only one of these thresholds can be active on the device.
During the dynamic operation of a Fabric, any port could be any type. For example, a technician
could disconnect a port from a switch and reconnect that port to a storage port, or the port could
change from an E_port to an F_port. Therefore, when calculating the Affected Ports value the
Management application does not look for the current port type, but looks at the policy priority level
in relation to the other policies currently assigned to this switch.
When there are two or more policies on a switch, the total number of Affected Ports may be more
than the total number of ports on the switch (the same port may adopt different policies depending
on changes in the port’s port type).
For default threshold values for Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch
Administrator's Guide.

C3 Discard Frames threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices running 6.3 or later.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when a C3 Discard Frames violation meets the Fabric OS
switch threshold. This threshold is only supported on directors, switches, and blades with a 4 Gbps,
8 Gbps, or 16 Gbps ASIC.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

32-port, 4 Gbps FC Switch
64-port, 4 Gbps FC Switch
32-port, 4 Gbps FC Interop Switch
4 Gbps Router, Extension Switch
4 Gbps Extension Switch
4 Gbps 32-port Switch
8 Gbps 32-port Switch
8 Gbps 40-port Switch
8 Gbps 24-port Embedded Switch
8 Gbps 16-port Embedded Switch
8 Gbps 8-FC port, 10 GbE 24-DCB port Switch
16 Gbps 24-port Edge switch
16 Gbps 48-port Edge switch
Director Chassis
8-slot Backbone Chassis
4-slot Backbone Chassis

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

675

20

Thresholds

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

16 Gbps 8-slot Backbone Chassis
16 Gbps 4-slot Backbone Chassis
8 Gbps Encryption Switch
Encryption Blade
10 Gbps FCoE Port Router Blade
FC 8 GB 64-port Blade
8 Gbps Extension Blade
FC 8 Gbps 16-port Blade
FC 8 Gbps 32-port Blade
FC 8 Gbps 48-port Blade
FC 8 Gbps 64-port Blade
FC 16 Gbps 32-port Blade
FC 16 Gbps 48-port Blade

Invalid CRCs threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when an Invalid CRCs violation meets the Fabric OS switch
threshold.

Invalid words threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when an Invalid Words violation meets the Fabric OS
switch threshold.

Link Reset threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when the link timeout errors meet the threshold.

Protocol error threshold
Use Protocol Error thresholds to block a port when one of the following protocol errors meet the
threshold:

• ISL Bouncing–ISL has repeatedly become unavailable due to link down events.
• ISL Protocol Mismatch–ISL has been repeatedly put into the Invalid Attachment state due to a
protocol error.

676

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding thresholds

20

State Change threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices running 6.3 or later.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when a state change violation type meets the Fabric OS
switch threshold.
For 4 Gbps Router, Extension Switches and Blades only, when you apply this threshold on an E Port,
the threshold is also applied to the VE Ports (internally by Fabric OS).

Adding thresholds
NOTE

Only available for Fabric OS products.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
The Management application allows you to create Invalid CRCs, Invalid words, Link, Link Reset,
Protocol Error, Security, and Sync Loss thresholds.

Adding a C3 Discard Frames threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices running 6.3 or later.
Use to block a port when a C3 Discard Frames violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold.
For default threshold values for Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch
Administrator's Guide.
To add an C3 Discard Frames threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays (Figure 243).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

677

20

Adding thresholds

FIGURE 243 Port Fencing dialog box
2. Select C3 Discard Frames (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add C3 Discard Frames Threshold dialog box displays.

FIGURE 244 Add C3 Discard Frames Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 8.
• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the number of C3 discarded frames allowed for the threshold in the Threshold errors
field.
7.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames
allowed is met.

678

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding thresholds

20

• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames
allowed is reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames
allowed is reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames
allowed is reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of C3 discarded frames allowed
is reached within a day.
8. Click OK to add the C3 discarded frames threshold to the table and close the Add C3 Discard
Frames Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
9. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Adding an Invalid CRCs threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when an Invalid CRC violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold. For
default threshold values for Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch
Administrator's Guide.
To add an Invalid CRCs threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Invalid CRCs (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add Invalid CRCs Threshold dialog box displays.

FIGURE 245 Add Invalid CRCs Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 8.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

679

20

Adding thresholds

• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the number of invalid CRCs allowed for the threshold in the Threshold errors field.
7.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid CRCs allowed is
met.

• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid CRCs allowed is
reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid CRCs allowed is
reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid CRCs allowed is
reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid CRCs allowed is
reached within a day.
8. Click OK to add the Invalid CRCs threshold to the table and close the Add Invalid CRCs
Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
9. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Adding an Invalid Words threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when the Invalid Words violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold. For
default threshold values for Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch
Administrator's Guide.
To add an Invalid Words threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Invalid Words (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add Invalid Words Threshold dialog box displays.

680

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding thresholds

20

FIGURE 246 Add Invalid Words Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 8.
• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the number of invalid words allowed for the threshold in the Threshold errors field.
7.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid words allowed is
met.

• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid words allowed is
reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid words allowed is
reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid words allowed is
reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of invalid words allowed is
reached within a day.
8. Click OK to add the Invalid Words threshold to the table and close the Add Invalid Words
Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
9. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Adding a Link Reset threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE
This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when the Link Reset violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold. For
default threshold values for Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch
Administrator's Guide.
To add a Link Reset threshold, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

681

20

Adding thresholds

1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Link Reset (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add Link Reset Threshold dialog box displays.

FIGURE 247 Add Link Reset Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select one of the following options:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 8.
• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the number of link resets allowed for the threshold in the Threshold errors field.
7.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of link resets allowed is met.
• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of link resets allowed is
reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of link resets allowed is
reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of link resets allowed is
reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of link resets allowed is
reached within a day.

682

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding thresholds

20

8. Click OK to add the Link Resets threshold to the table and close the Add Link Reset Threshold
dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
9. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Adding a Protocol Error threshold
NOTE
Only available for Fabric OS products.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use this type of threshold to block a port when one of the following ISL protocol errors meet the
threshold:

• ISL Bouncing–ISL has repeatedly become unavailable due to link down events.
• ISL Segmentation–ISL has repeatedly become segmented.
• ISL Protocol Mismatch–ISL has been repeatedly put into the Invalid Attachment state due to a
protocol error.
To add a Protocol Error threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Protocol Error from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add Protocol Error Threshold dialog box displays.

FIGURE 248 Add Protocol Error Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select the Fabric OS check box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

683

20

Adding thresholds

a.

Select one of the following options:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 6.
• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step b.
b.

Enter the number of protocol errors allowed for the threshold from the Threshold errors
field.

c.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors allowed
is met.

• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors
allowed is reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors
allowed is reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors allowed
is reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of protocol errors allowed is
reached within a day.
6. Click OK to add the protocol errors threshold to the table and close the Add Protocol Error
Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
7.

Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Adding a State Change threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices running 6.3 or later.

NOTE
This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when a state change violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold. For 4
Gbps Router, Extension Switches and Blades only, when you apply this threshold on an E Port, the
threshold is also applied to the VE Ports (internally by Fabric OS). For default threshold values for
Fabric OS devices, refer to Chapter 7 of the Fabric Watch Administrator's Guide.
To add an State Change threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select State Change (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add State Change Threshold dialog box displays.

684

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding thresholds

20

FIGURE 249 Add State Change Threshold dialog box
4. Enter a name for the threshold in the Name field.
5. Select one of the following options from the Policy Type field:

• Default — Uses device defaults. Go to step 8.
• Custom — Uses your selections. Continue with step 6.
6. Enter the number of state changes allowed for the threshold in the Threshold errors field.
7.

Select the time period for the threshold from the errors per list. The following choices are
available:

• None — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of state changes allowed is
met.

• Second — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of state changes allowed is
reached within a second.

• Minute — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of state changes allowed is
reached within a minute.

• Hour — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of state changes allowed is
reached within a hour.

• Day — the port is blocked as soon as the specified number of state changes allowed is
reached within a day.
8. Click OK to add the state changes threshold to the table and close the Add State Change
Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
9. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Assigning thresholds
You can assign thresholds to any active object in the Ports table. You can only assign one threshold
to an object at a time. If you assign a threshold to a switch, director, or fabric object, or to the All
Fabrics object, the threshold is assigned to all subordinate objects (which do not have a directly
assigned threshold) in the tree.
However, if an object inherits a threshold from another object above it in the hierarchy, you cannot
remove that inherited threshold directly from the subordinate object. You must either remove the
threshold from the higher object to which it was directly assigned or directly assign a different
threshold to the subordinate object.
To assign an existing threshold to fabric, director, switch, port type, and port objects, complete the
following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

685

20

Adding thresholds

1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to assign from the Thresholds table.
4. Select the objects (All Fabrics, Fabric, Director, Switch, Port Type, and/or Port) to which you
want to assign the threshold from the Ports table.
5. Click the right arrow.
A directly assigned icon ( ) displays next to the objects you selected in the Ports table to show
that the threshold was applied at this level and was inherited by every subordinate object
below it in the tree (if not affected by lower level direct assignments).
An added icon (
applied.

) appears next to every object in the tree to which the new threshold is

6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Unblocking a port
The Management application allows you to unblock a port (only if it was blocked by Port Fencing)
once the problem that triggered the threshold is fixed. When a port is blocked an Attention icon ( )
displays next to the port node.
To unblock a port, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Right-click anywhere in the Ports table and select Expand.
3. Select a blocked port from the Ports table.
4. Click Unblock.
5. Click OK on the message.
If you did not solve the root problem, the threshold will trigger again.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Avoiding port fencing inheritance
When you directly assign a threshold to an object, the threshold is inherited by all subordinate
objects in the tree (unless they already have directly assigned thresholds). You cannot remove an
inherited threshold from a subordinate object. However, the Management application allows you to
effectively avoid inheritance for individual subordinate objects while maintaining inheritance for
other subordinate objects. To avoid inheritance for an individual subordinate object, you must
create a new threshold with a maximum limit of events allowed and a minimum time period, then
assign the new threshold to the subordinate object.
To turn off port fencing inheritance, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.

686

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing thresholds

20

2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Click Add.
The Add Type Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Type a name for the new threshold (for example, AvoidProtocolError) in the Name field.
5. Select or enter the maximum number of errors or violations allowed in the Threshold
errors/violations field.
6. Select the minimum time period available from the Threshold minutes/seconds list.
7.

Click OK on the Add Type Threshold dialog box.

8. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Editing thresholds
The Management application allows you to edit the name, number of events needed, and time
period of ISL Protocol, Link, and Security thresholds.

Editing a C3 Discard Frames threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when a C3 Discard Frames violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold.
To edit a C3 Discard Frames threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select C3 Discard Frames (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit C3 Discard Frames dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 7 in “Adding a C3 Discard Frames threshold” on page 677.
5. Click OK on the Edit C3 Discard Frames Threshold dialog box.
If the threshold has already been assigned to ports, an “Are you sure you want to make the
requested changes to this threshold on “X” ports?” message displays. Click OK to close.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

687

20

Editing thresholds

Editing an Invalid CRCs threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when the Invalid CRCs Threshold violation type meets the Fabric OS switch
threshold.
To edit an Invalid CRCs threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Invalid CRCs (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit Invalid CRCs Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 7 in “Adding an Invalid CRCs threshold” on page 679.
5. Click OK on the Edit Invalid CRCs Threshold dialog box.
If the threshold has already been assigned to ports, an “Are you sure you want to make the
requested changes to this threshold on “X” ports?” message displays. Click OK to close.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Editing an Invalid Words threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE
This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when the Invalid Word Threshold violation type meets the Fabric OS switch
threshold.
To edit an Invalid Words threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Invalid Words (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit Invalid Words Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 7 in “Adding an Invalid Words threshold” on page 680.

688

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing thresholds

20

5. Click OK on the Edit Invalid Words Threshold dialog box.
If the threshold has already been assigned to ports, an “Are you sure you want to make the
requested changes to this threshold on “X” ports?” message displays. Click OK to close.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Editing a Link Reset threshold
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when the Link Reset violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold.
To edit a Link Reset threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Link Reset (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit Link Reset Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 7 in “Adding a Link Reset threshold” on page 681.
5. Click OK on the Edit Link Reset Threshold dialog box.
If the threshold has already been assigned to ports, an “Are you sure you want to make the
requested changes to this threshold on “X” ports?” message displays. Click OK to close.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Editing a Protocol Error threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE
This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when one of the following ISL protocol errors meet the threshold:

• ISL Bouncing–ISL has repeatedly become unavailable due to link down events.
• ISL Segmentation–ISL has repeatedly become segmented.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

689

20

Editing thresholds

• ISL Protocol Mismatch–ISL has been repeatedly put into the Invalid Attachment state due to a
protocol error.
To edit a Protocol Error threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select Protocol Error from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit Protocol Error Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 5 in “Adding a Protocol Error threshold” on page 683.
5. Click OK on the Edit Protocol Error Threshold dialog box.
If the threshold has already been assigned to ports, an “Are you sure you want to make the
requested changes to this threshold on “X” ports?” message displays. Click OK to close.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Editing a State Change threshold
NOTE

This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices running 6.3 or later.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
Use to block a port when a state change violation type meets the Fabric OS switch threshold. For
4 Gbps Router, Extension Switches and Blades only, when you apply this threshold on an E Port, the
threshold is also applied to the VE Ports (internally by Fabric OS).
To edit an State Change threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select State Change (Fabric OS only) from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to change and click Edit.
The Edit State Change Threshold dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 4 through step 7 in “Adding a State Change threshold” on page 684.
5. Click OK to add the state change threshold to the table and close the Edit State Change
Threshold dialog box.
To assign this threshold to fabrics, switches, or switch ports, refer to “Assigning thresholds” on
page 685.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

690

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing thresholds

20

Finding assigned thresholds
The Management application allows you to find all ports with a specific threshold applied.

NOTE
This search is performed on the threshold name. Since Fabric OS devices do not retain the threshold
name, the ability to search for a threshold on a Fabric OS device is not available in most cases.
To find assigned thresholds, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Select a threshold from the Threshold table.
4. Click Find.
5. Every port which uses the selected threshold is highlighted in the Ports table.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Viewing thresholds
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Review the Thresholds and Ports tables.
4. Repeat step 2 and step 3, as necessary.
5. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Viewing all thresholds on a specific Fabric OS device
NOTE
This threshold is only available for Fabric OS devices.

NOTE

This feature requires a Trial or Licensed version.
To view all thresholds assigned to a specific switch, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Right-click anywhere in the Ports table and select Expand.
3. Right-click the device for which you want to view threshold information and select Switch
Thresholds.
The Switch Thresholds dialog box displays with a list of all thresholds assigned to the selected
switch.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

691

20

Removing thresholds

4. Review the Thresholds table.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

# (Number) — The line number for each threshold in the table.
Status — The threshold status.
Directly Assigned Indicator — Whether or not the threshold was directly assigned.
Name — The threshold name.
Limit — The number of events required to trigger the threshold.
Period — The time limit required (for the number of events) to trigger a port blocking action.
Area — The threshold type.
Class — The port type.
Disabled on Ports — The port numbers on which the threshold is disabled.

5. Click Close on the Switch Thresholds dialog box.
6. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Removing thresholds
When you assign a new threshold to an object, the threshold that was active on that object is
automatically removed. The Management application also allows you to remove thresholds from an
individual Fabric, Switch, or Switch Port, from all Fabrics, Switches, and Switch Ports at once, as
well as from the Threshold table.

Removing thresholds from individual objects
To remove thresholds from the All Fabrics object, an individual Fabric, Chassis group, Switch, or
Switch Port, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the object with the threshold you want to remove in the Ports table.
4. Click the left arrow.

NOTE

If the selected object inherits a threshold assignment from an object higher in the tree, you
cannot remove the threshold. However, you may assign a different threshold directly to the
selected subordinate objects or change the assignment on the higher object.
A removed icon ( ) displays next to every instance where the threshold was removed from a
selected object and it does not inherits a threshold from higher in the tree.
If an inherited threshold replaces the removed threshold, an added icon (
every instance where the threshold was replaced.

692

) displays next to

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Removing thresholds

20

A directly assigned icon ( ) displays next to each object with an assigned threshold which
does not inherit a threshold from higher in the tree.

NOTE

If you remove a threshold from All Fabrics, it removes the threshold from individual Fabrics,
switches, and switch ports in all Fabrics except for a Chassis group. You must remove repeat
the procedure for the Chassis group.
5. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Removing thresholds from the thresholds table
To remove thresholds from all Fabrics, Switches, and Switch Ports as well as the Threshold table,
complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Port Fencing.
The Port Fencing dialog box displays.
2. Select a threshold type from the Violation Type list.
3. Select the threshold you want to remove in the Thresholds table.
4. Click Delete.
A removed icon (
click Delete.

) displays next to the selected threshold in the Thresholds table when you

5. Click OK on the Port Fencing dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

693

20

694

Removing thresholds

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

21

FICON Environments

In this chapter
• FICON configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring a switch for FICON operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to another device
• Activating an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Changing the Allow/Prohibit Matrix display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cascaded FICON fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Cascaded FICON fabric merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Port groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Swapping blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

695
696
702
704
705
708
708
709
709
712
717
720

FICON configurations
NOTE
FICON configurations are available only for Fabric OS products.
IBM Fibre Connection (FICON) is a protocol used between IBM (and compatible) mainframes and
storage. FICON configurations can be categorized into three types, based on complexity:

• Point-to-point configurations that do not use a switch.
• Switched point-to-point configurations, also called single switch configurations, connect a host
channel to a storage control unit using a single switch. In this type of configuration, the
channel is configured to use single-byte addressing.

• Cascaded configurations, also called high integrity fabrics, connect host channels and storage
control units that reside in different domains. Cascaded FICON fabrics must be configured as
high integrity fabrics. In this type of configuration, the channel is configured to use two-byte link
addressing. Figure 250 and Figure 251 are examples of cascaded FICON configurations. IBM
does not support configurations that have more than two domains in a path from a FICON
Channel interface to a FICON Control Unit interface to Channel-to-Channel (CTC) except under
special circumstances.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

695

21

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

FIGURE 250 Cascaded configuration, two domains

FIGURE 251 Cascaded configuration, three domains, but only two in a path

Configuring a switch for FICON operation
This section provides a basic guide for configuring a switch for FICON operation. Procedures
assume that the switch is installed and IP addresses are assigned to the switch for discovery and
access by the Management application. These procedures may refer to additional sections in this
chapter or chapters in this manual for more detailed information.

Planning the configuration
Perform the following tasks to plan your configuration:
1. Obtain a high-level drawing of the intended fabric configuration.
2. Obtain all required license keys for the switch and Management application features.
Licenses must be converted from transaction codes delivered with the switch. Access to a
public internet connection is required. It is highly recommended that you obtain license keys
before the scheduled configuration.
3. Obtain all versions of firmware for switches that the will be managed by the Management
application so that you can add them to the firmware Repository in step 13.
Although switches are loaded with the latest firmware at the time of manufacture, firmware
may be out of date due to switch storage and transit times. If adding a switch to an existing
fabric, you may need to upgrade the existing fabric, downgrade the new switch, or use a
mixture of firmware in the fabric. Note that using firmware versions for switches in the same
fabric that vary by one release is not recommended.

696

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

21

Observe the following best practices:

• Always check the version of firmware on a switch
• Unless otherwise advised by a certified Fabric OS support professional, always load the
most recently qualified firmware.

• Before upgrading or downgrading firmware read the upgrade and downgrade
considerations in the firmware release notes.
4. If incorporating more than one switch into a fabric, refer to planning steps in “Cascaded FICON
fabric” on page 709.
5. Make a record of the following information for the switch:

• Fabric name.
• Switch name.
• Domain ID (DID).
Domain IDs are entered in either decimal or hexadecimal. If you enter the domain ID in
decimal, ensure you use the correct hexadecimal equivalent. For example, if the first byte
of the link address is 33, then the domain ID in decimal is 51. Also, use a domain ID that is
the hexadecimal equivalent of the Switch ID in the IOCP. For example, for Switch ID 1F, set
Domain ID to 31 in decimal or 1F in hexadecimal.
The recommended best practice is the make the hexadecimal equivalent of the domain ID
match the switch ID in HCD or IOCP. Also, use a unique domain ID for every switch,
although this is obviously not possible in very large data centers.

• Fabric ID (FID).
Configure a FID if you are enabling a virtual fabric. A FID can be any number between
1-128, and all switches in the same fabric must have the same FID. Note that FMS cannot
be enabled in the default switch on the 8-slot Backbone Chassis or 16 Gbps 8-slot
Backbone Chassis. Therefore, the recommended best practice is leave the default switch
FID at 128 and create a new logical switch for all FICON ports. A simple FID numbering
scheme starting from 1 is recommended. There is no correlation between the FID and the
DID.

• Management IP address.
• Administrator password.
Although the Management application is typically configured for managing the switch as
an admin user, root will also work. The default admin password is “password.” You do not
need to change the password during installation; however if the password is changed, the
password for device discovery must be changed also. Although launched from the
Management application, Element Manager (Web Tools) passwords do not propagate the
Management application.
The recommended best practice is to create identical passwords for all switches in the
same fabric. This not only simplifies discovery, but in most cases since users are given
access to a fabric, not an individual switch, there are fewer passwords to remember and
maintain.

• Call home number.
This may not apply. If using a call home service you will need the phone number for the
service and an understanding of what is being covered in the service agreement.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

697

21

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

• Required firmware for the switch. Refer to step 3.
• Port addressing.
The port address is important because it is implemented in HCD or IOCP. The easiest port
addressing scheme is to start from 0x00 at the bottom left of the port card, increment on
ports going up the card, then continue starting numbering from the bottom right of the
next column of ports. Any port addressing scheme is possible however.
6. If you are considering creating a cascaded switch configuration, consider connecting all ISLs
between switches first. This will help simplify cascaded configuration. If this is not possible,
you can merge cascaded fabrics later using steps in “Cascaded FICON fabric merge” on
page 712.
7.

If you are considering connecting cascaded switches over IP networks, refer to the planning
considerations in the “Connecting cascaded FICON fabrics over FCIP” in Chapter 22, “Fibre
Channel over IP”.

Configuring the switch
Perform the following steps to configure a switch for FICON operation.
1. Launch the Management application and select the SAN tab.

NOTE

The recommended best practice is to run the application client from a server other than the
Management application server itself. Sometimes during installation this is not practical. To
start a client on the Management application server, double click on the application icon. To
open a client from a system other than the Management application server, open a browser
and enter the IP address of the Management application server.
2. Configure the Management application display for FICON. Refer to the “Setting your FICON
display” section of Chapter 5, “Application Configuration”.
3. Select the Decimal-Hex drop down selector on the tool bar at the top of the SAN tab to display
domain IDs and port numbers in hex format.
4. Select Discover > Fabrics.
The Discover Fabrics dialog box displays. If the switch is already in a fabric, it is automatically
added and should display under the discovered fabric. If the switch does not display, perform
step 5 and step 6.
5. Select Add on the Discover Fabrics dialog box.
The Add Fabric Discovery dialog box displays.
6. Perform one of the following tasks to configure a switch for discovery:

• Add information for the switch in the IP Address tab and click OK.
FIGURE 252 Add Fabric Discovery dialog box (IP Address tab)
NOTE

Selecting Automatic to use the SNMPv3 profile is recommended.

698

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

21

• To manually configure SNMP for discovery, select Manual to activate the SNMP tab, then
select the SNMP tab. Fill out the fields as required.
.

FIGURE 253 Add Fabric Discovery dialog box (SNMP tab)
Refer to the “SAN discovery overview” section in Chapter 3, “Discovery” for more information
on using these dialog boxes.
7.

Add all required licenses to the switch using the following steps:
a.

Select a discovered switch from the Product List panel, and then select Element Manager
> Admin.
The Web Works Switch Administration window displays.

b.

Select the License tab and click Add.
The Add License dialog box displays.

c.

Past or enter the license key in the License Key field.

d.

Click Add License.

e.

Repeat steps b through d for additional licenses.

f.

Click Refresh to display new licenses in the License tab.

8. As an optional step, manage switch users by selecting the User tab on the Web Works Switch
Administration window. Use this tab to add users, change passwords, or perform other steps to
manage switch users.

NOTE

If you change the password for a user that was used for Management application discovery,
you must delete the switch from the Discover Fabrics dialog box, and then discover the switch
again with the new login credentials.
9. To download firmware to the switch, select Configure > Firmware Management from the SAN
tab on the Management application window as shown in Figure 254 on page 700.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

699

21

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

FIGURE 254 Selecting Firmware Management from Configure menu
The Firmware Management dialog box displays.
10. Select the Download tab (Figure 255).

FIGURE 255 Firmware download
11. Select the switches in the Available Switches panel where you want to download firmware, and
then click the right arrow to move them under Selected Switches.
12. Click Download.

700

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring a switch for FICON operation

21

13. Select the Repository tab to import new firmware files for downloads. Refer to the “Firmware
management” section in Chapter 12, “SAN Device Configuration” for more information on
importing firmware.
14. If you are not using virtual fabrics or you do not plan to enable virtual fabrics and only use the
default switch, skip to step 15. As an option at this point, you can configure virtual fabrics by
referring to procedures in the following sections under “Configuring Virtual Fabrics” in the
“Virtual Fabrics” chapter, then return to step 15.

• “Enabling Virtual Fabrics”
• “Creating a logical switch or base switch”
• “Assigning ports to a logical switch”
For best practices for configuring virtual fabrics, refer to “FICON best practices for Virtual
Fabrics” on page 551.
15. To configure the switch as part of a fabric, follow procedures under “Configuring a cascaded
FICON fabric” on page 710, then return to step 16.
16. If a name does not display for the switch after configuring the fabric, right click the switch icon
in topology of the SAN tab and select Properties.
The switch Properties dialog box displays.
17. Edit the switch name.
18. Define port fencing parameters for the switch using the following steps (optional):

NOTE

Although this is an optional step, best practice is to configure port fencing.
a.

Configure thresholds that you require for the switch using steps under the “Adding
thresholds” in Chapter 20, “Port Fencing”.
Following are recommend parameters for the various thresholds:

• C3 Discard Frames = 2 per minute.
• Invalid Words = 25 per minute.
• Invalid CRCs = 3 per minute. Note that it is not uncommon for an ISL to travel through
a path that is more prone to noise than internal data center connections to control
units and channels. Therefore, a slightly higher CRC threshold may be better for E-Port
connections. In most cases the CRC is set to 3.

• Link Reset = 2 per minute.
• Protocol Error = 2 per minute.
• State Change = 7 per minute.
b.

Assign a threshold to the switch using steps under “Assigning thresholds” in Chapter 20,
“Port Fencing”.

19. Set the zoning policy for the switch by referring to steps under “Enabling or disabling the
default zone for fabrics” in Chapter 19, “Zoning”.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

701

21

Configuring FICON display

The recommended policy is to disable the default zone (No Access). Although enabling the
default zone (All Access) can be used for FICON environments, prohibiting connection between
ports using the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box requires activating at least one zone.
Even if you do not want to prohibit connections using the matrix, configuring a single zone
containing all ports provides the same benefits as All Access, while providing flexibility to
configure “prohibits” or more restrictive zoning in the future. In addition, when moving an ISL in
the future, there will not need to modify zoning.
20. Configure zoning using steps under “Configuring zoning” in Chapter 19, “Zoning”.
Be sure to reference the “Zoning and FICON” section of Chapter 19, “Zoning” for more
information on FICON environments.
21. Configure the Allow/Prohibit Matrix for the switch using steps under “Configuring an
Allow/Prohibit Matrix” on page 702.
22. Configure Call Home by referring to procedures in Chapter 10, “Call Home”.

NOTE

The call home number and the events to trigger a call home depend on your service contract
and service provider. Contact your service provider for additional information.
23. Enable bottleneck detection using the following Fabric OS bottlneckmon commands:

• bottleneckmon --cfgcredittools -intport -recover onLrOnly - This command monitors for lost
credits on links. This is necessary because occasional errors on links can cause lost
credits that can result in IFCCs and poor performance over time.

• bottleneckmon --enable -alert - This command causes AN-1004 RAS log messages to
generate whenever congestion occurs and AN-1010 RAS log messages to generate
whenever severe congestion occurs. The recommended best practice is to enable alerts
now so that you don’t forget when you merging the fabrics.
The bottlneckmon command operates the entire chassis, regardless of the FID where it is
executed.
24. Clear error counters (common during switch configuration) by right-clicking the switch in the
Connectivity Map or Product List and selecting Performance > Clear Counters.

Configuring FICON display
You can set display settings for FICON display so that the columns of any table that contains end
device descriptions to move the following eight columns to be the first columns: FC Address, Serial
#, Tag, Device Type, Model, Vendor, Port Type, and WWN.

Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix
The Allow/Prohibit Matrix is a FICON port attribute that can be used to prohibit communication
between specific ports. Allow/Prohibit Matrix are not recommended on E_Ports (inter-switch links).

702

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix

21

The Allow/Prohibit Matrix can be manipulated by host-based management programs using FICON
Control Unit Port (CUP), or from a Management application program to create policies and
determine paths for data and command flows. Up to eight Allow/Prohibit matrices can be modified
at the same time. Allow/Prohibit Matrix settings apply per switch rather than per fabric, and only
work when an active zone configuration is present in the fabric.
Multiple configurations can be defined, edited, copied, or removed. Only one configuration can be
active per switch.
Configuring the Allow/Prohibit matrix requires that a zone configuration be activated on the fabric.
Prohibits can be configured without an active zone configuration, but they cannot be enforced until
an effective zone is configured.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch from Available Switches.
Two default configurations (Active and IPL) are displayed in a tree structure under the switch.
Existing configurations are also displayed.
3. Choose one of the following options:

• Double-click a configuration file.
• Select a configuration file and click the right arrow.
A matrix displays in the Allow/Prohibit Matrix panel. The switch ports are displayed on both the
vertical axis and horizontal axis. An Allow icon ( ) indicates communication is allowed
between the ports, as shown in Figure 256 on page 703.

FIGURE 256 Active Configuration in Allow/Prohibit Matrix panel
4. Prohibit a connection between two ports by clicking the intersection point between the ports.
A prohibit icon ( ) displays at the intersection point. If you know the port addresses of the
ports for which you want to prohibit or allow communication and do not want to search the
matrix for the exact port intersection point, use the procedure in “Configuring an Allow/Prohibit
Matrix manually” on page 704.
5. Repeat step 4 as needed to create the matrix you want to apply. If you want to change a
selection from prohibit to allow, click the intersection point to clear the prohibit icon.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

703

21

Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually

6. When you have completed the matrix, click Save if you started with a new matrix, or Save As to
save a copy of an existing matrix.
7.

Click Analyze Zone Conflicts.
This operation can be done before or after a configuration is saved. This operation checks the
current zoning settings for conflicts with settings in the Allow/Prohibit Matrix. Zone conflict is
analyzed against the switch for port zoning only. The table cells display in the red background if
the two ports are not in the same zone in an active zone configuration.

8. Click Close on the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box.

Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually
To configure to allow or prohibit communication between specific ports manually, complete the
following steps.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select a switch from Available Switches.
Two default configurations (Active and IPL) are displayed in a tree structure under the switch.
Existing configurations are also displayed.
3. Choose one of the following options:

• Double-click a configuration file.
• Select a configuration file and click the right arrow.
A matrix displays. The switch ports are displayed on both the vertical axis and horizontal axis.
An Allow icon ( ) indicates communication is allowed between the ports.
4. Click Manual Allow/Prohibit.
The Manual Allow/Prohibit dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 257 on page 704.

FIGURE 257 Manual Allow/Prohibit dialog box
NOTE

The Manual Allow/Prohibit dialog box is only available for Fabric OS products.
5. Select one of the following options:

704

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to another device

21

• Select Allow to allow communication between two specific ports.
• Select Prohibit to prohibit communication between two specific ports.
6. Enter the port number of the first port for which you want to allow or prohibit communication in
the Port Address 1 field.
7.

Enter the port number of the second port for which you want to allow or prohibit
communication in the Port Address 2 field.

8. Click Add.
The information displays in the Selected Ports for Modification list.
To delete any of these manual configurations, select the configuration you want to delete in the
Selected Ports for Modification list and click Remove.
The Selected Ports for Modification list displays the following information:

• Port Address 1 column — The port number of the first port for which you want to allow or
prohibit communication.

• Port Address 2 column — The port number of the second port for which you want to allow
or prohibit communication.

• State column — Whether you want to allow or prohibit communication.
9. Repeat step 5 through step 8 for each allow or prohibit configuration.
10. Click OK on the Manual Allow/Prohibit dialog box.
11. When you have completed the matrix, click Save if you started with a new matrix, or Save As if
you edited a copy of an existing matrix.
12. Click Analyze Zone Conflicts.
This operation can be done before or after a configuration is saved. This operation checks the
current zoning settings for conflicts with settings in the Allow/Prohibit Matrix. Zone conflict is
analyzed against the switch for port zoning only. The table cells display in the red background if
the two ports are not in the same zone in an active zone configuration.
13. Click Close on the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box.

Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to
another device
When copying or saving a configuration from a small switch (source switch with fewer ports; for
example, 64 ports) to a larger switch (destination switch with a larger number of ports; for example,
256 ports) only the port address range of the smaller switch will be affected on the larger switch.
All additional port addresses will display the default settings (port state defaults to “Allow” and the
Blocked check box defaults to cleared).
Copying or saving a configuration from a larger switch to a smaller device only copies or saves the
port address range that matches the smaller switch. Additionally a message displays that the
additional port addresses from the larger switch are discarded.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

705

21

Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to another device

When copying or saving a configuration from or to logical switches, the only ports affected are the
port addresses defined in the logical switch. The FICONd CUP Daemon retains the full compliment
of records regardless of the size of the logical switch. Therefore, copying or saving a configuration
from or to logical switches should work the same as copying or saving between standard switches.

Copying an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration
To duplicate an existing Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select the Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration you want to copy.
You can do this by expanding the view for the switch under Available Switches and selecting a
configuration, or you can select the matrix under Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
3. Click Duplicate.
The Save As/Duplicate dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 258 on page 706.

FIGURE 258 Save As/Duplicate dialog box
4. Enter a name for the configuration.
5. Enter a description for the configuration.
6. Select the check box for the switch to which you want to save the configuration in the Selected
Switch list.
7.

Click OK.
A message displays stating that the outstanding port configuration is discarded when copying
a configuration from the switch with more ports to a switch with fewer ports and vice versa.
Click OK to close the message.
The copied configuration displays in the Available Switches list under the selected switch. To
edit this configuration, refer to “Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix” on page 702 or
“Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually” on page 704.

706

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Saving or copying Allow/Prohibit Matrix configurations to another device

21

Saving an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration to
another device
To save an existing Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration to another device, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select the Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration you want to save.
You can do this by expanding the view for the switch under Available Switches and selecting a
configuration, or you can select the matrix under Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
3. Click Save As.
The Save As/Duplicate dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 259 on page 707.

FIGURE 259 Save As/Duplicate dialog box
4. Enter a name for the configuration.
5. Enter a description for the configuration.
6. Select the check box for the device to which you want to save the configuration in the Selected
Switch list.
7.

Click OK.
A message displays stating that the outstanding port configuration is discarded when copying
a configuration from the switch with more ports to a switch with fewer ports and vice versa.
Click OK to close the message.
The saved configuration displays in the Available Switches table under the selected switch. To
edit this configuration, refer to “Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix” on page 702 or
“Configuring an Allow/Prohibit Matrix manually” on page 704.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

707

21

Activating an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration

Activating an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration
You must have an active zone configuration before you can activate an Allow/Prohibit Matrix
configuration.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select the Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration you want to activate.
You can do this by expanding the view for the switch under Available Switches and selecting a
configuration, or you may select the matrix under Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
3. Click Activate.
A confirmation message displays, as shown in Figure 260 on page 708.

FIGURE 260 Activate Matrix Confirmation message
4. Select the Active=Saved check box to save the active configuration as the startup
configuration (IPL).
5. Click OK to confirm.
If you select the Active=Saved check box, the text [=Active] is appended to the IPL file in the
Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box.
The Active=Saved check box and the IPL filename represent the current state of the
Active=Saved Mode (ASM) bit on the switch. However, this is limited to changes done to the
ASM configuration through the Management application. If changes occur through external
means (such as, Webtools or the CLI) the changes are not reflected in the Management
application until the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box is re-launched.

NOTE

Active=Saved” means the matrix configuration will survive a power failure. If not selected, all
ports can access each other after power is restored.

Deleting an Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration
You cannot delete the active configuration, the IPL configuration, or a configuration that is marked
as having uncommitted changes.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.

708

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Changing the Allow/Prohibit Matrix display

21

2. Select the Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration you want to delete.
You can do this by expanding the view for the switch under Available Switches and selecting a
configuration, or you can select the matrix under Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click Yes to confirm.

Changing the Allow/Prohibit Matrix display
You can modify the matrix display on the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box using the
Window Arrangement list above the matrix display or the Clear all port names option below the
display.

Changing window arrangement
There are three options for the Allow/Prohibit Matrix display on the Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix
dialog box located in the Window Arrangement list above the display.

• The matrix definitions may be cascaded (this is the default view).
• The matrix definitions may be tiled horizontally.
• The matrix definitions may be tiled vertically.
Perform the following steps to change the display to the desired format.
1. Select Configure > Allow/Prohibit Matrix.
The Configure Allow/Prohibit Matrix dialog box displays.
2. Select Cascade, Tile Horizontally, or Tile Vertically from the Window Arrangement list.

Clearing port names
Use the following steps to clear all port names from the selected matrix.
1. Select Clear Port Names below the matrix display.
A warning displays asking you to confirm the operation.
2. Select Yes to clear all port names from the matrix or select No to cancel the operation.

Cascaded FICON fabric
NOTE

You must have FICON Management privileges to configure a fabric for cascaded FICON.
The Management application enables you to easily configure a fabric for cascaded FICON. Note
that configuring a fabric for cascaded FICON may be disruptive to current I/O operations in the
fabric, as this involves disabling and enabling the switches in the fabric.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

709

21

Cascaded FICON fabric

FICON configuration performs the following operations on the selected fabric:

• Turns on the insistent domain ID flag (IDID) on all switches.
• Sets High Integrity Fabric Configuration (HIFC) on the seed switch.
- Fabric-wide consistency policy (FWCP) is configured to include SCC in strict mode.
- SCC policy is created or modified to limit connectivity to only the switches in the selected
fabric.

• Enables port-based routing on all switches.
• Enables In-Order Delivery (IOD) on all switches.
• Enables Dynamic Load Sharing (DLS) based on user selection and the firmware level.
NOTE

To enable DLS, all switches in the fabric must be 8 Gbps or faster and running Fabric OS 6.4 or
later.

• (Optional) Turns on FICON Management Server (FMS) mode on all switches.
Consider the following information when enabling FMS mode.

-

If switches are running Fabric OS 7.0 and later, FMS will not be enabled unless the
switches have an active CUP license.

-

If switches are running Fabric OS earlier than version 7.0 and do not have a CUP license,
after successful configuration, you can access the Port Connectivity (Allow/Prohibit)
matrix, but the host system cannot communicate with the FICON Management Server
unless you install a CUP license. If a CUP license is later installed on these switches, then
FMS mode must be re-enabled on these switches.

-

For logical fabrics running Fabric OS v7.1 or later, you can enable FMS mode when logical
switches are configured to allow XISL use.

Configuring a cascaded FICON fabric
The FICON wizard automatically creates HIFC settings that support a cascaded FICON fabric.
1. Select Configure > FICON > Configure Fabric or right-click a fabric in the product tree and
select FICON > Configure Fabric.
The Configure Cascaded FICON Fabric screen of the FICON Configuration dialog displays, as
shown in Figure 261 on page 711.

710

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Cascaded FICON fabric

21

FIGURE 261 Configure Cascaded FICON Fabric /Switch dialog box
2. Use the Fabric list to select the fabric you want to configure.

NOTE

(Fabric OS switches only) All switches in a fabric must be running Fabric OS version 5.3 or later.
If a Fabric OS version earlier than version 5.3 is present in the topology, the fabric is not listed.
3. Select the FMS Mode check box to manage the fabric by a host-based management program
using FICON CUP protocol.
If you select FMS Mode, each switch is checked for a CUP license. Any switches that do not
have a CUP license are listed, with a reminder that a CUP license is necessary to communicate
with the FICON Management Server.
4. Select the DLS check box to enable Dynamic Load Sharing (DLS) or Lossless DLS only on
switches that support lossless DLS. For more information, refer to “Enabling DLS” on
page 712. You must enable DLS to select routing policies.
5. Select one of the following options to enable port-based, exchange-based, or device-based
routing on switches:

• Port-Based, enables port-based routing on 4 Gbps platform switches.
• Exchange-Based, enables exchange-based routing for the fabric if all switches are 8 Gbps
or greater platforms running Fabric OS 6.4 or later. If these requirements are not met, an
error message displays.

• Device-Based, enables device-based routing for the fabric if all switches in the fabric are 8
Gbps or greater platforms running Fabric OS 7.1 or later. If these requirements are not
met, an error message displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

711

21

Cascaded FICON fabric merge

NOTE

Either exchange based routing, port based routing, or device-based routing is enabled on all
switches of the selected fabric. You cannot enable a mixed routing policy.
6. Click OK if you want to proceed.
A warning message displays listing the switches of the selected fabric that are to be disabled
and re-enabled in order to enable the desired routing policy and IDID.
7.

Click Yes to continue.
If configuration is successful, a confirmation message displays.
If FMS Mode was selected, each switch is checked for a CUP license. Any switches that do not
have a CUP license are listed, with a reminder that a CUP license is necessary to communicate
with the S/B FICON Management Server.

NOTE

FMS mode cannot be enabled on switches running Fabric OS 7.0 and later unless the switches
have an active CUP license.

Enabling DLS
Consider the following when enabling Dynamic Load Sharing (DLS) in step 4:

• DLS requires DLS support on the switch. Lossless DLS requires Lossless DLS support on the
switch.

• Enabling DLS will enable IOD without Lossless DLS on all other switches, enable DLS on
switches that support DLS, and disable DLS on all other switches.

• DLS is only supported on the 40-port, 8 Gbps FC Switch, 80-port, 8 Gbps FC Switch, 512-port
Backbone Chassis, and 4-slot Backbone Chassis.

• Enabling DLS may result in dropped frames when paths fail over. It is recommended that you
set the preferred IOD delay time to minimize frame drops.

• To enable DLS, all switches in the fabric must be 8 Gbps or faster and running Fabric OS 6.4 or
later.

Cascaded FICON fabric merge
The Management application provides a wizard to help you merge two fabrics for cascaded FICON.
Note that merging two cascaded FICON fabrics may be disruptive to current I/O operations in both
fabrics as this involves disabling and enabling the switches in both fabrics. The merge process will
not make any configuration changes on the primary (production) fabric that are disruptive.

NOTE

It is recommended that you run a configuration backup on all switches before performing the fabric
merge. This helps you to revert back the switch configurations later.
The cascaded FICON fabrics merge wizard performs the following operations:

• Checks the primary and secondary fabrics for any merge issues.

712

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Cascaded FICON fabric merge

21

• Configures High Integrity Fabric Configuration (HIFC) on the seed switch of the primary and
secondary fabric.

-

SCC policy will be created or modified to limit connectivity to switches from both fabrics.
Configures Fabric-Wide Consistency Policy (FWCP) on both fabrics.
FWCP is configured in tolerant mode for SCC for an Fibre Channel Routing (FCR) fabric.

• Enables Port-Based Routing (PBR) on all switches in the secondary fabric if all the switches in
the primary fabric are found to be enabled for PBR. Note that a mixed policy of
Exchanged-Based Routing (EBR), Device-Based Routing (DBR) and PBR cannot be enabled on
a fabric.

• Enables Exchange-Based Routing (EBR) on all switches in the secondary fabric if all switches in
the primary fabric are enabled for EBR. Note that EBR requires that switches operate at 8 Gbps
or greater with Fabric OS 6.4 or later. If all the EBR-enabled switches in the primary fabric are
found to meet these requirements and a switch in the secondary fabric does not meet these
requirements, an error message displays. Note that a mixed policy of EBR and PBR cannot be
enabled on a fabric.

• Enables Device-Based Routing (DBR) on all switches in the secondary fabric if all switches in
the primary fabric are enabled for DBR. Note that DBR requires that switches operate at 8
Gbps or greater with Fabric OS 7.1 or later. If all the DBR-enabled switches in the primary fabric
are found to meet these requirements and a switch in the secondary fabric does not meet
these requirements, an error message displays. Note that a mixed policy of PBR, EBR, and DBR
cannot be enabled on a fabric.

• (Optional) Turns on FICON Management Server (FMS) mode on all switches. If some switches
already have FMS mode enabled, it is re-enabled.
Consider the following information when enabling FMS mode.

-

If switches are running Fabric OS 7.0 and later, FMS will not be enabled unless the
switches have an active CUP license.

-

If switches are running Fabric OS earlier than version 7.0 and do not have a CUP license,
after successful configuration, you can access the Port Connectivity (Allow/Prohibit)
matrix, but the host system cannot communicate with the FICON Management Server
unless you install a CUP license. If a CUP license is later installed on these switches, then
FMS mode must be re-enabled on these switches.

-

For logical fabrics running Fabric OS v7.1 or later, you can enable FMS mode when logical
switches are configured to allow XISL use.

• (Optional) Configures long distance settings on selected ports of primary and secondary
fabrics (requires an Extended Fabric license).

NOTE

If the distance between the merged fabrics is 10 km or greater, you must configure the
connection as a long distance connection.
Note that the merge wizard does not enable primary fabric switches for DLS, In-Order Delivery
(IOD), insistent domain ID flag (IDID), and Advanced Performance Tuning (APT).

• In-Order Delivery (IOD) will be enabled on all switches in the secondary fabric.
• Dynamic Load Sharing (DLS) will be enabled on switches in the secondary fabric that are
operating at 8 Gbps or greater and are running Fabric OS 6.3 or later.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

713

21

Cascaded FICON fabric merge

NOTE

To enable DLS, all switches in the fabric must be 8 Gbps or faster and running Fabric OS 6.3 or
later.

• Primary fabric switches will not be disturbed for disruptive operations, such as IDID and APT.
Instead, all primary fabric switches will be validated for current routing policies and the same
policies will be enabled on all the secondary fabric switches.
The cascaded FICON fabrics merge wizard performs the following operations to avoid Active
Directory (AD), Access Control List (ACL), and zone database merge conflicts between the two
fabrics:

• Clears Admin Domain, Access Control Lists (ACLs), and zone databases, if they exist, from the
secondary fabric that you select within the wizard.

NOTE

Clearing the ACL database in a large fabric can take a long time; for example, in a 50-switch
fabric, this operation can take from 30 minutes to 1 hour.

• Sets the default zoning configuration on the secondary fabric to match the default zoning
status of the primary fabric.

• Modifies ACL policy on the secondary fabric to match the primary fabric parameters, including
Accept Distribution and FWCP.

• Sets FWCP in strict mode for SCC for the primary fabric.
• Sets FWCP in tolerant mode for the Fibre Channel Routing (FCR) fabric.

Merging two cascaded FICON fabrics
If you want to join two cascaded FICON fabrics, they must be merged. If the distance between
fabrics is 10 km or more, an Extended Fabrics license is required, and an extra step is required to
configure the connection as a long distance connection. To successfully configure a long distance
connection, use the same E_Ports and cable distance values used when configuring Extended
Fabrics. For long distance connections, it is recommended that you create the Extended Fabrics
configuration first, have an active connection, and have the E_Port and cable distances values
ready before you merge the fabrics.
1. Select Configure > FICON > Merge Fabrics or right-click a fabric in the product tree and select
FICON > Merge Fabrics.
The Overview screen of the cascade FICON fabrics merge wizard displays.

NOTE

Cascade FICON fabrics merge wizard is only available for Fabric OS products.
2. Click Next.
The Select fabrics screen displays.
3. Select the two fabrics you want to merge under Available Fabrics, and click the right arrow to
move them to Selected Fabrics. You may do this one fabric at a time, or select both by pressing
CTRL and then clicking each fabric.

714

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Cascaded FICON fabric merge

21

NOTE

All switches in a fabric must be running Fabric OS version 5.3 or later and must be reachable.
If a Fabric OS version earlier than version 5.3 is present in the fabric, the fabric is not listed.

NOTE

Switches running Fabric OS 6.3 or earlier cannot be merged with switches running
Fabric OS 6.4 or later.

NOTE

For 8 Gbps switches, all switches in the fabric must be 8 Gbps or faster. 8 Gbps switches
cannot be merged with switches that have SFP transceivers with a speed less than 8 Gbps.
4. Click Next.
The Set up merge options screen displays.
5. Select FMS Mode to manage the fabric by a host-based management program using FICON
CUP protocol. Note that you cannot enable FMS mode on switches running Fabric OS 7.0 or
later unless they have an active CUP license.
6. Select a secondary fabric where AD, ACL, and zone databases, if defined, will be cleared.
7.

Read the bulleted list of actions so you understand the actions that are taken to avoid conflicts
when the fabrics are merged.

8. Click Next.
The Check merge screen displays.
A Status details table shows progress through merge check points. A rotating arrow under
Status indicates a Merge check step is in progress. A blue check mark indicates successful
completion of that Merge check. A red stop sign indicates a failed step. If the configuration is
successful, all configuration items have blue check marks.
9. If the merge fails, but is recoverable, click Resolve.
10. If desired, click Check Merge Again to run the merge check test again.
11. Click Next to continue.
The Configure long distance (optional) dialog box displays. If the distance between the merged
fabrics is 10 km or greater, you must configure the connection as a long distance connection.
Selecting a distance invokes an algorithm to compute the required number of BB credits
available to the port. The longer the link, the greater latency, resulting in the potential for more
outstanding frames in the link, and the need for more BB credits. FICON may require more BB
credits than the algorithm provides, and it is a good practice to specify a distance that is longer
than the actual distance to be sure enough BB credits are allocated.
12. Perform the appropriate following action based on whether the connection is a long distance
connection:

• If it is not a long distance connection, click Next to view the Configure merge screen.
Proceed to step 13.

• If it is a long distance connection, expand the fabrics under Selected Fabrics to the switch
port level.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

715

21

Cascaded FICON fabric merge

a.

Select the E_Ports used for the connection on the local switch and on the remote
switch, and click the right arrow.
The selected E_Ports are moved to Selected Ports.
If there is no E_Port in the selected fabrics, a warning message displays.

b.

Specify the Cable length between switch ports.
The range is form 10 through 500 km. The default is 50 km.

c.

Select ARBs or IDLEs to configure the Fibre Channel Primitive Signal Fill Words.
For Fabric OS version 6.1.0b or earlier, the setting is always ARBs. You cannot change
to IDLEs.
For Fabric OS version 6.1.0c or later, the default setting is IDLEs, however, you can
change it to ARBs.

d.

Click Next.
The Configure merge screen displays.

13. Read and review the information on the Configure merge screen. If you understand and agree,
click Next to confirm the information.
A Summary screen displays.
14. Read the information, and click Finish to close the wizard.

Resolving merge conflicts
You can resolve the following types of switch configuration conflicts:

•
•
•
•

Domain ID
TOV
Buffer To Buffer Credit
Disable Device Probe

NOTE

This test will be skipped if all primary and secondary fabric switches are found to be Fabric OS
7.0 and later.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Route Priority Per Frame
Sequence Level Switching
Suppress Class F
Long Distance Setting
Data Field Size
VC Priority

Note that not all tests support resolution. If a test supports resolution, the Description column
contains the text “Resolvable”.
To resolve merge conflicts, complete the following steps.
1. Select the failed test where the Description column contains the text “Resolvable”.
2. Click Resolve.

716

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port groups

21

A “The switches in fabric Name will be disabled prior to making the configuration change. The
switches will be reenabled after the configuration changes are applied. Please confirm to
proceed.” warning message displays.
3. Click OK on the warning message.
The values of the fabric chosen on the Set up merge options screen are applied to all devices
in the second fabric. Once the settings are applied, the test is run again and the merge results
are updated.
If the test passes, go to step 4.
If an error occurs, an error message displays. You must use Web Tools or the CLI to resolve this
conflict. Click OK on the error message and go to step 4.
If you are resolving a domain ID error, there may be multiple switches involved. If multiple
switches have the domain ID error, the Configure Domain IDs dialog box displays listing all
devices that have the domain ID conflict.
a.

Select the device for which you want to resolve the domain ID in the Available Switches list
and click the right arrow button.

b.

Select a new domain ID for the device from the Domain ID list.

c.

Repeat steps a and step b for each device in the Available Switches list.

d.

Click OK on the Configure Domain IDs dialog box.

4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 until all resolvable tests pass.
5. Perform step 11 through step 14 of the procedure “Merging two cascaded FICON fabrics” on
page 714 to finish resolving a merge conflict.

Port groups
A port group is a group of FC ports from one or more switches within the same fabric. Port groups
are user-specific; you can only view and manage port groups that you create.
The ports display in the order in which you add them to the port group. The order in which you add
ports to a port group is persisted in both the port group and the Allow/Prohibit Matrix. While port
groups can be at the fabric level (ports from multiple switches within the same fabric), the
Allow/Prohibit Matrix is at the switch level. Therefore, when you view the Allow/Prohibit Matrix for a
port group with ports from multiple switches, the matrix only shows the ports for the selected
switch.
To reorder the ports, you must remove the ports, save your changes, then open the Port Groups
dialog box and add the ports back to the port group in the new order.
Once you create a port group, you can view and edit the Allow/Prohibit Matrix for the port group.
Allow/Prohibit Matrix is a FICON port attribute that can be used to prohibit communication between
specific ports. For more information about the Allow/Prohibit Matrix, refer to “Configuring an
Allow/Prohibit Matrix” on page 702.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

717

21

Port groups

Creating a port group
NOTE
At least one switch must be reachable to create a port group.
To create a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Groups.
The Port Groups dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 262 on page 718.

FIGURE 262 Port Groups dialog box
2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the port group in the Name field.
4. Enter a description for the port group in the Description field.
5. Select one or more ports to add to the group in the Group Type - FC Ports list.
A port group must have at least one port in the Membership List. All ports must be from
switches in the same fabric.
6. Click the right arrow button.
The selected ports display in the Membership List.
7.

Click Update.
The new port group displays in the Port Groups list.

8. Click OK to close the Port Groups dialog box.

Viewing port groups
To view port groups, complete the following steps.

718

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port groups

21

1. Select Configure > Port Groups.
The Port Groups dialog box displays only port groups defined by you.
If a fabric becomes un-monitored, any port groups associated with that fabric do not display in
the Port Groups list. Once the fabric becomes monitored again, the associated port groups
display in the Port Groups list.
If a fabric is removed from discovery, any port groups associated with that fabric are removed
permanently from the Port Groups dialog box.
If a device is removed from a fabric, then all ports associated with that device are
automatically removed permanently from the port group. If the port group only contains ports
from the removed device, then the port group is removed permanently from the Port Groups
dialog box.
If a fabric or device is added to the topology while the Port Groups dialog box is open, it does
not display in the Group Type - FC Ports tree until you close and reopen the Port Groups dialog
box.
2. Edit the port group, as needed.
To edit a port group, refer to “Editing a port group” on page 719.
3. Delete the port group, as needed.
To delete a port group, refer to “Deleting a port group” on page 720.
4. Click OK.

Editing a port group
To edit a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Groups.
The Port Groups dialog box displays.
2. Select the port group you want to edit in the Port Groups list.
The information for the selected port group displays in the update information area.
3. Change the name for the port group in the Name field, if necessary.

NOTE

If you change the port group name, it is the same as copying the existing port group with a new
name.
4. Change the description for the port group in the Description field, if necessary.
5. Select one or more ports to add to the group in the Group Type - FC Ports list.
6. Click the right arrow button.
The selected ports display in the Membership List.
7.

Select one or more ports to remove from the group in the Membership List.

8. Click the left arrow button.
The selected ports are removed from the Membership List.
9. Click Update.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

719

21

Swapping blades

10. Click OK.

Deleting a port group
To delete a port group, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Groups.
The Port Groups dialog box displays.
2. Select the port group you want to delete in the Port Groups list.
3. Click Remove.
The selected ports are removed from the Port Groups list.
4. Click OK.

Swapping blades
NOTE

Blade-based port swap is mainly used for FICON and is only applicable for port blades. However, the
Management application does not block blade-based port swap for other application blades,
including the 8 Gbps 24-port blade.
You can swap all of the ports from one blade to another blade. During this operation, all ports in
the selected blades are swapped. This operation disrupts the traffic on all ports for the selected
blades. If GE_Ports are present on the blade, only the non-GE_Ports are swapped.
To swap blades, you must meet the following requirements:

• The chassis must be running Fabric OS 6.3 or later.
• You must have read and write access for the Product Administration privilege.
• The chassis must have at least two blades of the same type present.
Example

The source blade has ports sp1 and sp2, and the destination blade has ports dp1 and dp2. During
the swap operation, the address sp1 is swapped with dp1 and address sp2 is swapped with dp2.

NOTE

To perform the swap blades function, you must have read and write access for the Product
Administration privilege.
To swap blades, complete the following steps.
1. Select a chassis that contains at least two of the same type of blades.
2. Select Configure > Switch > Swap Blades.
The Swap Blades dialog box displays.
3. Select the blade you want to replace from the first Swap Blades list.
Once you select a blade, the second list automatically filters out the selected blade and any
blade types that do not match the selected blade.

720

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Swapping blades

21

4. Select the blade with which you want to replace the first blade from the second Swap Blades
list.
5. Select the Enable ports after swap is complete check box to enable ports on the destination
blade after the swap is complete.
6. Click OK.

NOTE

This operation disrupts the traffic on all ports for the selected blades.
7.

Click Yes on the confirmation message.
Once the swap blade operation is complete, a “success” or “failure” message displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

721

21

722

Swapping blades

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

22

IP Element Manager

In this chapter
• Element Manager overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Element Manager CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Element Manager interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Web Management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Web Management interface troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

723
723
725
741
742

Element Manager overview
The Element Manager allows you to access a device by connecting to its graphical user interface
(GUI), command line interface (CLI), or Web Management interface.

NOTE

You cannot connect to Application products (ServerIron) through the Element Manager.

Element Manager CLI
The Element Manager allows you to access a device by connecting to its command line interface
(CLI) through Telnet (default) or SSH. For a procedure to change from Telnet to SSH, refer to
“Configuring IP communication” on page 171.

NOTE

You must have the Element Manager Read/Write privileges to change the device configuration
through the Element Manager CLI.

NOTE
You must have the Element Manager - Port Config Read/Write privileges to manage specific ports
through the Element Manager CLI.

NOTE

Telnet or SSH access to the device CLI must be enabled on the device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

723

22

Element Manager CLI

Accessing the IP Element Manager CLI
The Element Manager CLI uses SNMP to query the login authentication type (for example, Telnet
Login or Enable Password Login) that the device uses to create the Telnet session token. If SNMP
fails, the Element Manager CLI will not work for that device.
To display the Element Manager CLI, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device on the Network Objects list or the IP or L2 Topology views and select CLI
through Server.
The Element Manager CLI displays and an attempt is made to establish a Telnet session with
the credentials configured in your user profile (refer to “Configuring CLI credentials” on
page 209). If the user profile credentials are no longer valid, the User Account for Login to
Device_IP_Address dialog box displays.
2. Enter the user name and password for login in the appropriate fields.

NOTE

These credentials are only used for the Element Manager CLI login. You should also update
these credentials in your user profile. Refer to “Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209.
3. Click OK. The Element Manager CLI displays (Figure 263).
If successful, the Connect button is disabled and the Disconnect button is enabled.
When an active CLI session exists and the device goes offline, the connection terminates and a
message “Disconnected IP_Address” displays.

FIGURE 263 Element Manager CLI

724

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager interface overview

22

Element Manager interface overview
The Element Manager interface provides management and monitoring functions to troubleshoot
issues on the Ethernet router series switch running firmware version 5.4 or later.
Element Manager is accessible from the Management application and provides the details of the
switch and its ports.

Accessing the Element Manager interface
To launch the Element Manager interface, choose one of the following options:

• Select Configure > Element Manager > GUI.
• Right-click a Ethernet router device on the Network Objects list or VLAN or the IP or L2 Topology
views and select Element Manager > GUI.
The Element Manager interface displays (Figure 264).

NOTE
You can launch a maximum of six Element Managers from the Management application. For more
information, refer to “Configuring IP device manager preferences” on page 162.

FIGURE 264 Element Manager - main window
The Element Manager interface consists of the following components:
1. Switch properties area - Displays the switch properties. For more information, refer to “Switch
properties” on page 726.
2. Properties button - Click to launch the Properties dialog box. For more information, refer to
“Viewing IP device and port properties” on page 1314.
3. Address Finder button - Locates where hosts are connected to your network from traffic on the
network. For more information, refer to “Address Finder” on page 301.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

725

22

Element Manager interface overview

4. Element Manager toolbar - Provides quick access to dialog boxes and functions. For more
information, refer to “Element Manager toolbar” on page 728.
5. Port properties list - Displays the port properties for the selected view (Port, Table, or VLAN).
For more information, refer to “Displaying port properties” on page 729.
6. Status bar - Displays the Auto Rediscover progress and last discovered details of the switch.

NOTE

The User Administrator has control over what functions individual users can see and use in the
Element Manager. For information on user privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

Switch properties
The switch properties area in the Element Manager displays details of the selected switch. The
fields in Table 73 are non-editable.

TABLE 73

Top panel components

Field

Description

Name

Displays the name of the product.

Serial #

Displays the serial number of the product.

Status

Displays the status of the product; whether it is reachable, not reachable, or degraded.

Model

Displays the model number of the product.

Contact

Displays the name or contact number of the person or group you must contact about the
product.

Firmware

Displays the firmware version of the product.

IP Address

Displays the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.

Type

Displays the type of the product.

Admin Status

Displays the administrative status of the product.

Port Count

Displays the number of ports on the product.

Location

Displays the physical location of the product.

Build Label

Displays the firmware build number.

To view more switch properties, cluster information, and the related port properties, click
Properties. The Properties dialog box displays (Figure 265). For more information on the listed
switch properties and cluster information, refer to “Viewing IP device and port properties” on
page 1314.

726

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager interface overview

22

FIGURE 265 Properties dialog box
You can enable and disable port actions as well as access performance monitoring from the Ports
tab of the Properties dialog box (Figure 266). Refer to “Port actions” on page 327 for more
information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

727

22

Element Manager interface overview

FIGURE 266 Properties dialog box - Ports tab

Element Manager toolbar
The Element Manager toolbar (Figure 267) is located beneath the switch properties.

FIGURE 267 Element Manager - toolbar
The Element Manager toolbar provides the following icons and buttons:
1. View list — Select a view (Port, Table, or VLAN) from the list. For more information, refer to
“Displaying port properties” on page 729.
2. Offline Port Count — Displays the total number of ports on the switch that are in the offline or
down state.
3. Performance button — Select to access real-time graphs and historical graphs. For more
information, refer to “Performance data” on page 734.
4. Configure button — Click to launch the Configure VLAN, Port Actions, Port Mirroring, sFlow, and
MR Switch Over dialog boxes. For more information, refer to “Configure dialog box” on
page 735.
5. Events button - Click to view events that have occurred on the selected switch.

728

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager interface overview

22

6. Rediscover button — Click to manually refresh the Element Manager and display the latest
information from the switch.
7.

Auto Rediscover check box — Select the check box to automatically refresh the Element
Manager in five-minute intervals. Clear the check box to stop auto-rediscovery.

8. Product List Search — Use to search for a port in the port list. For detailed instructions, refer to
“Search” on page 299.
9. Help — Click to display the online help.

Displaying port properties
You can select any of the following views from the view list on the Element Manager toolbar to view
the port properties:

• Port View: Select this view for a hierarchical view of the slots and trunks listing their respective
ports.

• Table View: Select this view for a sequential list of the ports in the slot #/port # format.
• VLAN View: Select this view for a hierarchical view of the VLANs listing their respective ports.
Table 74 describes the properties of the Port View and Table View.

TABLE 74

Port View and Table View port properties

Field/Component

Description

Identifier

The identifier of the port. Displays a chronological order of the ports in
chassis/slot/port format.

Name

The name of the port.

MAC Address

The MAC address of the port.

Status

The operational status (Up or Down) of the port.

State

The management state (Enabled or DIsabled) of the port.
NOTE: To enable or disable a port, right-click a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port
(or ports) and select Enable or Disable.

Type

The type of the port.

Speed

The speed of the port.

L2/Tag Mode

Whether the port is tagged or untagged or dual.

Untagged VLAN ID

The untagged VLAN identifier of the port.

Tagged VLAN ID

The tagged VLAN identifier of the port.
NOTE: To wrap the VLAN IDs displayed in the column, right-click the Tagged VLAN ID
column and select Wrap. By default, the VLAN IDs are not wrapped in the
column.

Duplex Mode

The duplex mode of the port.

MCT Client Name

The MCT client name.

Role

The role of the port. Possible values include the following roles:
• MCT
• ICL

Module

The name of the module to which the port belongs.
NOTE: This property is displayed only in Table View.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

729

22

Element Manager interface overview

TABLE 74

Port View and Table View port properties (Continued)

Field/Component
SFP / Port Optics tab

Description
Select to display the details of all the SFP and port optics.
NOTE: To export SFP details, click the link under the Physical Ports - SFP Details
section of Detailed Report.

Tx Power

The power transmitted by the port in a device.

Rx Power

The power received by the port in a device.

Transceiver
Temperature

The temperature of the port, in Celsius.

Tx Bias Current

The current supplied to the SFP transceiver.
NOTE: To export power supply details, click the link under the Chassis - Power Supply
section of Detailed Report.

Wavelength

The wavelength of the port.

Serial #

The number to identify the port.

Media

The type in which the port is present.

Table 75 describes the properties of the VLAN View.

TABLE 75

730

VLAN View port properties

Field/Component

Description

Identifier

The identifier of the port.

Name

The name of the VLAN or port.

Type

The type of the port.

Port Mode

Indicates the tag mode of the port.
• Tagged represents the port is in dual mode but is in the tagged state for that
particular VLAN.
• Untagged represents the port is untagged for that particular VLAN.
• The third port mode is Dual mode.

QoS

The Quality of Service (QoS) to assign traffic priority (high, medium, or low) for a given
source and destination traffic flow.

STP Type

The type of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) - STP, RSTP, and None.

STP Status

Indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled.

Virtual/Routing Interface

The virtual routing interface number. You can add an IP address to the virtual routing
interface once the VLAN is deployed.

Path Cost

The STP cost of using the port to reach the root bridge.

Transparent VLAN
Flooding

The enabled or disabled status of transparent VLAN flooding. Enabled status allows
the packets to be forwarded without any form of CPU intervention including MAC
learning and MAC destination lookups.

Port Priority

The preference that STP gives this port relative to other ports for forwarding traffic out
of the spanning tree.

Role

The role of the port. Possible values include the following roles:
• MCT
• ICL

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager interface overview

22

Comparing physical port properties
You can compare multiple physical port properties, for example, a healthy port with an offline port.
1. From Port View or Table View, select two or more ports (press Ctrl and click each port).
2. Right-click one of the selected ports, and select Properties.

FIGURE 268 Physical port properties
For example, in Figure 268, ports 1/1, 1/3, and 1/5 are selected. The selected port properties
display in the Port Properties dialog box and the order of port selection is also retained, as shown
in Figure 269.

FIGURE 269 Comparing physical port properties

Comparing physical and virtual port properties
You can compare physical and virtual port properties.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

731

22

Element Manager interface overview

1. From VLAN View, select one or more virtual ports and physical ports.
2. Right-click one of the selected ports, and select Properties (Figure 270).

FIGURE 270 Physical and virtual port properties
The selected port properties are displayed in the Port Properties dialog box, where the selected
physical port properties are displayed under the Ports tab and the selected virtual port properties
are displayed under the Virtual Interfaces tab, as shown in Figure 271.

FIGURE 271 Comparing physical and virtual port properties

732

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Element Manager interface overview

22

Status indicator icons
Table 76 describes the icons that are used to indicate the status of a switch, slot, or port.

TABLE 76

Status indicator icons

Status icon

Description
Indicates the port is down.
Indicates the switch is not reachable.
Indicates a degraded link (the switch is reachable but cannot receive SNMP).
Indicates an IP slot containing a line card.
Indicates an IP slot containing no line card.
Indicates a port in an IP slot containing no line card.
Indicates that the module or line card is blocked or down.
Indicates that the module or line card is booting, initializing, interactive, LP
synchronizing, not present, powered off, rebooting, recovering, strip synchronizing, loading software, or FID synchronizing.

If a port or multiple ports in a slot are down, the status rolls up to the slot level to display a down
icon on the slot.

Search
You can search for a objects by text or regular expression.

NOTE
The Search function retains your last 10 search criteria.
Refer to “Search” on page 299 for more information.

Table capabilities
You can customize any table in the Management application main interface (for example, the
Master Log or the Product List) or in individual dialog boxes in the following ways:
• Display only specific columns
• Display columns in a specific order
• Resize the columns to fit the contents
• Sort the table by a specific column or multiple columns
• Copy information from the table to another application
• Export information from the table
• Search for information
• Expand the table to view all information

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

733

22

Element Manager interface overview

• Collapse the table.
Refer to “Customizing application tables” on page 294 for information on table functions.

Performance data
You can use the following options to monitor the performance data of a switch:

• Real Time Graph/Table
• Historical Graph/Table

Real-time performance monitoring
Real-time performance monitoring allows you to view a snapshot of the current performance data.
To monitor the real-time performance of the switch, complete the following steps.

NOTE
You can monitor real-time graphs for a slot, multiple slots, a trunk, multiple trunks, a port, or multiple
ports.
1. In the Element Manager, right-click a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and
select Performance > Real Time Graph/Table.
Or
Select a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports), and select Real Time Graph/Table
from the Performance button on the Element Manager toolbar, as shown in Figure 272.

FIGURE 272 Real Time Graph/Table performance data
The performance data for the selected slots, trunks, or ports is displayed in the Real Time
Graphs/Tables window. Refer to “IP real-time performance monitoring” on page 983 for more
information.

Historical performance monitoring
Historical performance monitoring allows you create data collectors by choosing MIB object and by
choosing or creating mathematical expressions. You can also configure a historical data graph or
table to display data.

734

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configure dialog box

22

1. In the Element Manager, right-click a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and
select Performance > Historical Graph/Table.
Or
Select a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports), and select Historical Graph/Table
from the Performance button on the Element Manager toolbar, as shown in Figure 273.

FIGURE 273 Historical Graph/Table performance data
The performance data for the selected slots, trunks, or ports is displayed in the Historical
Graphs/Tables window. Refer to “IP historical performance monitoring” on page 995 for more
information.

Configure dialog box
The Configure button allows you to manage the Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN), the associations
for the selected ports.

Configuring VLAN
To access the Configure VLAN dialog box from Element Manager, right-click a module (or modules),
trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and select VLANs.
Or
Select a module (or modules), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports), and click the Launch VLAN
button on the Element Manager toolbar.
The Configure VLAN dialog box displays. For more information, refer to “Adding or modifying port
VLANs” on page 827.

Resetting port counters
Resetting port counters allows you to clear the statistics of a module (or modules), trunk (or
trunks), or port (or ports).
1. In the Element Manager, select a module (or modules), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports).
2. Click the Configure icon and select Port Actions > Reset Counter on the toolbar (as shown in
Figure 274).
To access the Resetting port counters dialog box from Element Manager, right-click a module
(or modules), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and select Reset port counter.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

735

22

Management Module switchover

A warning message displays:
You want to reset the selected interface statistics. Do you want to continue?
Click Yes to clear all the statistics of the port.

FIGURE 274 Resetting port counters

Enable or Disable
Enable or disable on a module will perform module power on or off. It is applicable only to the
configuration module.
To enable or disable a port, right-click a slot (or slots), trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and select
Enable or Disable.

NOTE
After performing the enable or disable operation on ports or at module level, the changes will be
reflected only after the discovery of the product.

Management Module switchover
The Management Module allows you to manage all of the routing actions of a device. If there is
more than one Management Module you can make one of the modules the active module and the
other module the standby module.

NOTE

If the active Management Module fails, you must switch to the the standby module.

Changing the standby Management Module to active
To change the standby Management Module to active, click Configure > MR Switch Over (as shown
in Figure 275).
Or

736

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Switch Fabric Module

22

To access the MR switch over dialog box from Element Manager, right-click a module (or modules),
trunk (or trunks), or port (or ports) and select MR Switch Over.

FIGURE 275 MR Switch Over
The MR Switch Over Status dialog box is displayed and confirms if the Management Module is
active (as shown in Figure 276).

NOTE

MR Switch Over option will be disabled for single Management Module switch.

FIGURE 276 MR Switch Over Status dialog box

Switch Fabric Module
Switch Fabric Modules switch packets from one interface module to another. The Switch Fabric
Module displays the serial number, state, and the status of the switch (as shown in Figure 277).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

737

22

Port mirroring

FIGURE 277 Switch Fabric Module

Port mirroring
Port mirroring analyzes the traffic flowing in a port by monitoring the particular port. Port mirroring
helps to monitor the inbound traffic, outbound traffic, or both.

Configuring port mirroring
1. Click the Configure icon in the Element Manager toolbar.
2. Select Port Mirroring (as shown in Figure 278).
The Port Mirroring dialog box is displayed (as shown in Figure 279).

FIGURE 278 Port Mirroring

738

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port mirroring

22

FIGURE 279 Port Mirroring dialog box
The Port Mirroring dialog box provides the following buttons to perform various functions.

• Left pane (Mirror Ports) — Displays the mirror ports of a device.
- Add — Adds mirror ports.
- Delete — Deletes the mirror ports.
• Right pane (Monitored Ports) — Displays the monitored ports of a device.
- Identifier — Displays the ports where traffic must be monitored.
- Mode — Displays if the traffic is inbound (TX), outbound (RX), or both.
- Add — Adds monitored ports.
- Edit — Edits the monitored ports.
- Delete — Deletes the monitored ports.

Adding a port to port mirroring
To add mirror ports in a device, perform the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Mirroring.
The Port Mirroring dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Mirror Ports pane, click Add (Mirror Port). Select a port from the list to act as a mirror
port. You can configure multiple monitoring ports to a specific mirror port to monitor traffic.

NOTE

An error message is displayed if the monitored port is being mirrored in Rx and Tx.
3. Select Mode from the list based on whether to monitor inbound traffic, outbound traffic, or
both.

Editing a port in port mirroring
To edit monitored ports in a device, perform the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Mirroring.
The Port Mirroring dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a port in the Mirror Ports pane.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

739

22

sFlow

3. In the Monitored Ports pane, click Edit. Select a port from the list to edit the monitor port.

NOTE

An error message is displayed if the monitored port is being mirrored by some other mirror
port.
4. Select Mode from the list based on whether to monitor inbound traffic, outbound traffic, or
both.

Deleting a port from port mirroring
To delete mirror ports in a device, perform the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Port Mirroring.
The Port Mirroring dialog box is displayed.
2. Select a port in the Mirror Ports pane.
3. In the Monitored Ports pane, click Delete. Select a port from the list to delete the monitor port.

sFlow
The IP Element Manager supports sFlow to capture traffic data and configure sFlow collector.

Configuring sFlow in Element Manager
1. Click the Configure icon in the Element Manager toolbar..
2. Select sFlow (as shown in Figure 280).
or
To access the sFlow from Element Manager, right-click a module (or modules), trunk (or
trunks), or port (or ports) and select sFlow.

FIGURE 280 sFlow dialog box
3. To configure sFlow, refer to “Configuring sFlow” on page 1020.

740

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Web Management interface

22

Web Management interface
The Element Manager allows you to access a device by connecting to its Web Management
interface.

NOTE

You must have the Element Manager Read/Write privilege to change the device configuration
through the Web Management interface.

NOTE

Web Management interface access must be enabled on the device.

Accessing the Web Management interface
To launch the Web Management interface, choose one of the following options:

• Select Configure > Element Manager > Web.
• Right-click a device on the Network Objects list or the IP or L2 Topology views and select
Element Manager > Web.

• From the Wired Product Report, IP Subnet Report, or IP Address Report, click the IP address of
the product.
If you select a Fabric OS DCB device, Web Tools displays. For information about Web Tools,
refer to the Web Tools Administrator’s Guide.
The Web Management interface displays (Figure 281). You can use the Web Management
interface to manage the device configuration.

FIGURE 281 Web Management interface
If the device does not have a supported web interface, an error message displays: “Failed to
connect to the web management interface. The product might not support web interface.”

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

741

22

Web Management interface troubleshooting

Accessing the IP device front panel
To display the Element Manager front panel, choose one of the following options:

• Select Configure > Element Manager > Front Panel.
• Right-click a device on the Network Objects list or the IP or L2 Topology views and select
Element Manager > Front Panel.
The Web Management interface - Front Panel displays (Figure 282). You can use the Front Panel to
manage port configuration.

FIGURE 282 Web Management Interface - Front Panel
If the device does not have a supported web interface, an error message displays: “Failed to
connect to the web management interface. The product might not support web interface.”

Web Management interface troubleshooting
Table 77 lists a possible issue and the recommended solution for launching the Web Management
interface.

TABLE 77

Troubleshooting

Problem

Resolution

The Web Management interface does not launch even
when you configure both the IronWare OS products and
the Management application server to use HTTPS to
launch the Web Management interface. You should still
be able to launch the product Web Management
interface directly by entering the URL in a web browser.
Failure is due to insecure SSL certificates (MD2, MD5,
DES, 3DES, and RC2) deployed in the IronWare OS
products.
To configure IronWare OS products to use HTTPS, use
the web-management https command to enable HTTPS
in the device for web-based communication.
To configure the Management server to use HTTPS,
refer to “Configuring IP communication” on page 171.

Workaround 1 — Editing the Java security file

742

1

2

3
4

Open the java.security file located in the Install_Home\jre\lib\security\
directory in a text editor.
Install_Home is the directory where the Management application is
installed.
Comment out the following attributes:
#jdk.certpath.disabledAlgorithms=MD2
#jdk.tls.disabledAlgorithms=MD5, DES, 3DES, RC2
Save and close the file.
Restart the Management application service (“Stopping all services” on
page 377).

Workaround 2 — Removing and replacing SSL certificates
Remove the insecure certificates using the MD2, MD5, DES, 3DES, or RC2
signature algorithms from the IronWare OS products and replace with more
secure ciphers such as SHA1.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

23

Configuration Repository and Backup

In this chapter
• Configuration repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuration deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Change tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuration snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Schedule backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

743
753
753
755
762

Configuration repository
The Product Configurations tab of the Configuration Repository dialog box allows you to display
each product configuration, including the name of the product, the version number of the
configuration, the software release the product is running, and the product type. To open the
configuration repository, complete the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
The Product Configurations tab of the Configuration Repository dialog box displays, as shown
in Figure 283.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

743

23

Configuration repository

FIGURE 283 Configuration Repository dialog box — Product Configurations tab
The Configuration Repository dialog box displays the following information:

• Product Name — The name of the backed-up product
• Date — The date when the configuration file was stored in the server and the time when
the last backup attempt occurred.

• Version — The version of the configuration file. The version number is incremented by one
for each new version

• Backup Type — The type of backup used to obtain the configuration files from the device.
Backup options include the following types:









744

Discovery — The discovery backup is obtained after the discovery process
Pre-deployment — Occurs before a configuration change is deployed to the device
Post-deployment — Occurs after a configuration change is deployed to the device
Re-sync — Occurs when a trap is generated by the device during a startup or running
configuration change, or when a user performs a manual resynchronization of the
device
For Network OS devices, Re-sync backup occurs after manual rediscovery of the VCS
cluster member device and when a CLI configuration deployment occurs on the
product.
Manual — Occurs when a user clicks the Save Running/Startup Configuration button
Scheduled — Occurs when backups are regularly scheduled
Startup Config Change Trap — When startup configuration is changed for a device, the
startup config change trap is triggered and the configuration backup is captured.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration repository



23

Running Config Change Trap — When a running configuration is changed for a device,
the running config change trap is triggered and the configuration backup is captured.
For Startup Config Change Trap and Running Config Change Trap, make the following
configurations:

-

Enable DoBackupOnStartupConfigChangeTrap and
DoBackupOnRunningConfigChangeTrap on the OPtions dialog box (refer to
“Configuring change manager preferences” on page 160).

-

Disable event triggered polling in discovery (refer to “Defining global setting
preferences” on page 60).

-

Register the server with the product for SNMP traps (refer to “Adding a trap
recipient to one or more switches” on page 1148

• Firmware — The version of the release on the backed-up device
• Configuration Type — The type of configuration (running or startup) taken
• Baseline — Enabled when you select a configuration as the baseline. By default, the first
version configuration is the baseline. You can change the baseline configuration at any
time.
4. Click the Baseline check box (if enabled) to designate the configuration as the base
configuration. The Change Tracking feature uses the base configuration to compare the latest
backup configuration file with the configuration that is designated as the baseline and to
update the Configuration Deviation Status icon on the Status Bar (refer to “Viewing
configuration deviation status” on page 753).
5. Select two configurations for the same product to view the Master Log events that occurred
between the two selected configurations in the Events Associated with Differences table.

NOTE

The Events Associated with Differences table is blank for configuration files triggered on a
Fabric OS DCB device.

NOTE

The Events Associated with Differences table is blank when you select configuration files from
different products.
The Events Associated with Differences table is only available when you select two
configuration backup files for the same product. List of events (up to 100) associated with the
configurations. Right-click an event and select properties to view the Event Properties dialog
box (refer to “Displaying event properties from the Master Log” on page 1207). This table
contains the following data:

• Acknowledge check box — Select to acknowledge the event and remove it from the Master
Log. The event is not removed from the Events Associated with Differences table.

• Source Address — IP address of the product on which a change occurred.
• Category — Audit log event category. Options include application, product audit, and user
action events.

• Description — Description of the event.
• Last Event Server Time — Time and date the event last occurred on the server.
• Message ID — Message ID of the event.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

745

23

Configuration repository

• Relative Time (mins) — Relative time from the selected backup time to the event occurred
time.

• User — Name of the user responsible for triggering the event.
6. Click the following buttons to access the corresponding dialog boxes:

• Restore button — Select one or more configuration files from the Configurations list and
click to restore to that configuration. To restore a configuration, refer to “Restoring a
configuration” on page 750.

• Search button — Click to launch the Search Configuration Repository dialog box, which
allows you to search the contents of configurations in the repository of the management
server. Refer to “Searching the configuration repository” on page 751 for more
information.

• Compare button — Select two configurations (same product or two different products) and
click to launch the Compare dialog box with the differences between the two
configurations are highlighted.

• View button — Select a row in the Configurations list and click to display the contents of the
selected configuration.

• Delete button — Select one or more configurations from the Configurations list and click to
manually delete the configuration from the repository of the management server.

NOTE

You cannot delete the baseline or latest configuration.

NOTE

When a configuration backup is added to the server, it is assigned a version number in
sequential order. Deleting a configuration backup does not renumber the remaining
versions.

• Export button — Select one or more configurations and click to launch the Export
Configuration dialog box, which allows you to export the configurations to a text file. Refer
to “Exporting a configuration to a text file” on page 752 for more information.

Saving the configuration status
Use the Save Configuration Status dialog box to show the progress of the configuration retrieval for
the product you select. If the product is a new version, it is saved in the management server with
the server time captured as the date parameter.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
4. Select the product from the Product list.
Press Ctrl or Shift and then click each product to select more than one product.
If you select a product group, the save configuration is run against all products in the selected
group.
If you select a VCS fabric, the save configuration is run against all members in the VCS fabric.

746

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration repository

23

5. Select one of the following save options from the list:

• Save Running Configuration — Select to retrieve the running configuration from the device.
If there is no change in the running configuration since the latest running configuration
(available in the repository), then the retrieval is skipped.

• Save Startup Configuration — Select to retrieve the startup configuration from the device.
If there is no change in the startup configuration since the latest startup configuration
(available in the repository), then the retrieval is skipped.
Either of these options launches the Save Configuration Status dialog box, shown in
Figure 284.

FIGURE 284 Save Configuration Status dialog box
6. Review the progress and status of the configuration retrieval for the products you selected in
the Status column and the Status Details field.
7.

Click Close to close the dialog box, or click Abort to cancel the operation.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

747

23

Configuration repository

Viewing the configuration
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
4. Select a configuration and click View to display configuration information.
The View Configuration dialog box displays details of the selected configuration.

NOTE

You can view only one configuration at a time.

• Description — Displays a description of the device configuration.
• Configuration list — Displays details of the backed up configuration.
• Find — Enter a text string and perform one of the following actions:
Click Find Next — Searches the next matching string in the configuration.
 Click Find Previous — Searches the previous matching string in the configuration.
Reached bottom of the page icon — Displays when there are no more entries to display.


•
•
•
•
•

Highlight grid — Click to highlight the text string.
Match Case check box — Click to render the search case-sensitive.
Repeats check box — Click to continue the search at the top when the bottom is reached.
Previous button — Click to display the previous configuration (from current choice) in the
Configurations list.

• Next button — Click to display the next configuration (from current choice) in the
Configurations list.

• Export button — Click to export the currently viewed configuration to a text file.

Comparing product configurations
The Comparison dialog box allows you to display the contents of two configurations side-by-side. To
compare two configurations, perform the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
4. Select a product to view the configurations.
5. Select two configurations and click Compare.
The Compare dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 285.

748

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration repository

23

FIGURE 285 Compare dialog box
The Compare dialog box displays the following information:

• Product — The IP address of the device.
• Date — The Displays the date the device configuration was taken.
• Change Navigator buttons/legend — The Enabled when there is at least one change
between to two compared files.







Go to first change button ( ) — Click to move to the first change.
Go to previous change button ( ) — Click to move to the previous change.
Go to next change button ( ) — Click to move to the next change.
Go to last change button (
) — Click to move to the last change.
Number of changes label — Indicates the number of changes. If there are no
differences, displays “No change”.
Differences legend — Displays the color legend for differences:

-

Changed status displays in blue.
Inserted status displays in green.
Deleted status displays in grey.

• Phrase not found icon — Displays when the search text string is not found.
• Configuration contents areas — Displays the contents of the selected configurations.
• Find — Enter a text string and take one of the following actions:
Click Find Next — Searches the next matching string in the configuration.
Click Find Previous — Searches the previous matching string in the configuration.
Highlight grid — Click to highlight the text string.



•
• Match Case check box — Click to render the search case-sensitive.
• Repeats check box — Click to continue the search at the top when the bottom is reached.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

749

23

Configuration repository

• Events Associated with Differences table — Only available when you select two
configuration backup files for the same product. List of events (up to 100) associated with
the configurations. Right-click an event and select properties to view the Event Properties
dialog box (refer to “Displaying event properties from the Master Log” on page 1207). This
table contains the following data:

NOTE

The Events Associated with Differences table is blank for configuration files triggered on a
Fabric OS DCB device.

NOTE

The Events Associated with Differences table is blank when you select configuration files
from different products.










Acknowledge check box — Select to acknowledge the event and remove it from the
Master Log. The event is not removed from the Events Associated with Differences
table.
Source Address — IP address of the product on which a change occurred.
Category — Audit log event category. Options include application, product audit, and
user action events.
Description — Description of the event.
Last Event Server Time — Time and date the event last occurred on the server.
Message ID — Message ID of the event.
Relative Time (mins) — Relative time from the selected backup time to the event
occurred time.
User — Name of the user responsible for triggering the event.

6. Click Close.

Restoring a configuration
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
4. Select the configuration you want to restore from the Configurations list.
To restore configurations for multiple products, select one configuration for each product.
5. Click Restore.
If you select to restore a VCS configuration, a message displays. Select one of the following
options on the message and click OK.

• Running
• Startup
• Startup and Reload
If you select to restore a IronWare product configuration, a message displays. Select one of the
following options on the message and click OK.

• Startup

750

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration repository

23

• Startup and Reload
6. Review the status details for accuracy.

Searching the configuration repository
The Search Configuration Repository dialog box allows searching for products that have a particular
configuration in the management server’s repository. Use the search feature to refine the
configuration repository based on the filter criteria described in this section.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
The Configuration Repository dialog box displays.
4. Click the Search button.
The Search Configuration Repository dialog box, as shown in Figure 286, displays.

FIGURE 286 Search Configuration Repository dialog box
5. Select a product from the Available Products list and click the right arrow button to move one or
more products to the Selected Products list.
Press Ctrl or Shift and then click each product to select more than one product.
6. Enter a search text string, with a limit of 255 characters, into the Containing Text field. This text
string is used to search on configurations of the selected products.
7.

Enable the following options, as required:

• Match Case check box - Select the check box to make the search case-sensitive.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

751

23

Configuration repository

• Regular expressions check box - Select the check box to use unicode regular expressions
in your search.

• Search options — Specify the following types of available searches:
• Latest configurations — Searches the text in the most recent configurations of the
selected products.

• All configurations — Searches the text in all configurations of the selected products.
• Date range — Searches the configuration files of the selected products within the
specified date range.
8. Click the Find button to find the text string and display the search results in the Search Results
list.
9. Click the Stop button to stop the search in progress.
10. Click the View button to display the contents of the selected configuration file. The
configuration entry that matches the search criteria is displayed in red.
11. Click the Group button to create product groups.

NOTE

You can only use the Product Group feature if you have the Configuration Management
privilege and the Search Configuration Repository dialog box has search results.
12. Click Close to close the Search Configuration Repository dialog box.

Exporting a configuration to a text file
The Export button on the Configuration Repository dialog box allows you to export the configuration
of the selected product to a text file. You must have the Configuration Management privilege in your
Management application user account to perform this task.
Follow these steps to export a configuration to a text file. You can export a maximum of 25
configurations simultaneously.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Product Configurations tab.
4. Select one or more products from the Product list.
5. Select one or more configurations from the Configurations list.
6. Click Export.
The Export Configuration dialog box displays.
7.

Browse to the location to which you want export the configuration and click Export.
The default locations for the product configuration are as follows:

• Windows: Desktop\My Documents
• Linux: \root
If you select configurations from the same product, the default text file name is
IP_Address_config.txt. IPv6 addresses use dashes (-) instead of colons (:) in file naming.

752

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration deviation

23

If you select configurations from multiple products, the default text file name is
MultiProduct_config.txt.

Configuration deviation
The Management application backs up the product configuration after a change is detected in the
product configuration. The initial copy of a product configuration backup becomes the baseline
configuration. Once the baseline configuration is established, the Management application
compares all additional product configuration backup files to the baseline configuration for
deviation. You can view configuration deviation status on the Status Bar of the Management
application window.

Viewing configuration deviation status
The Management application enables you to view the configuration deviation status at a glance by
providing a configuration deviation status icon on the Status Bar.
Point to the configuration deviation status icon on the Status Bar. Depending on the status, one of
the following status icons displays.

TABLE 78

Configuration Status Icons

Icon

Description
No deviation in the baseline configuration — None of the product configurations are deviated
from baseline configuration.

Deviation in the baseline configuration —  products configurations are deviated from their
baseline configuration.

To view the configuration changed details, click the configuration deviation status icon on the
Status Bar. The Change Tracking tab of the Configuration Repository dialog box displays with the
list of product configurations that have deviated from the baseline configuration. For more
information, refer to “Change tracking” on page 753.

Change tracking
Use the change tracking feature to compare the latest backup configuration file with the
configuration that is designated as the baseline.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Change Tracking tab.
The Change Tracking tab of the Configuration Repository dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 287.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

753

23

Change tracking

FIGURE 287 Configuration Repository dialog box - Change Tracking tab
The Configuration Change Tracking list displays the following information:

• Name — The product name and IP address
• Baseline Time — The date and time when the baseline configuration for the device was
copied into the repository of the management server

• Backup Time — The time when the last backup attempt occurred for the selected device
• Change Status — The change status of the latest device backup
• Backup Type — How the backup was obtained. Backup options include the following types:










Discovery — Obtained after the discovery process
Pre-deployment — Occurs before a configuration change is deployed to the device
Post-deployment — Occurs after a configuration change is deployed to the device
Running Config Change Trap — Occurs when a running configuration is changed
Startup Config Change Trap — Occurs when a startup configuration is changed
Re-sync — Occurs when a trap is generated by the device during a startup or running
configuration change, or when a user performs a manual resynchronization of the
device
For Network OS devices, Re-sync backup occurs after manual rediscovery of the VCS
cluster member device and when a CLI configuration deployment occurs on the
product.
Manual — Occurs when a user clicks the Save Running/Startup Configuration button
Scheduled — Occurs when obtained backup at the scheduled time

4. Perform one of the following actions:

• Click the Refresh button to update the network and retrieve the latest data from the
database.

• Click the View button to compare the contents of the latest configuration and the baseline
configuration. You can view only one configuration at a time.

• Click the Export button to export the currently viewed change tracking records to a .csv file.
The default file name is “Change_Tracking_Report.csv.”

754

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration snapshots

23

5. Click OK to save the configuration.
6. Click Close to exit the dialog box.

Configuration snapshots
The Configuration Repository dialog box - Configuration Snapshots tab, shown in Figure 288, allows
you to compare two configuration snapshots; for example, the pre-configuration and
post-configuration snapshots.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
The Configuration Snapshots tab displays, as shown in Figure 288.

FIGURE 288 Configuration Repository dialog box - Configuration Snapshots tab
The Configuration Snapshots tab displays the following information:

•
•
•
•

Product Name — The name of the product
Product Snapshots — The product snapshots
Date — The date when the snapshot file was stored in the server
Snapshot Type — The type of snapshot generated. There are three types:
Manual: Generated manually by clicking the Save Snapshot button on the Backup
Configuration Manager.
 Pre-Snapshot: Generated before the new configuration was deployed to the device.
 Post-Snapshot: Generated after the new configuration was deployed to the device.
CLI Template — The name of the snapshot template used for the pre- or post-snapshot
deployment.


•

• Status — The snapshot status
Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

755

23

Configuration snapshots

4. Click the following buttons to access the corresponding dialog boxes:

• Search button — Click to launch the Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box, which allows
you to search the contents of snapshots in the repository of the management server. Refer
to “Searching the configuration repository” on page 751 for more information.

• Compare button — Select two snapshots (same product or two different products) and
click to launch the Comparison dialog box.
If you select two snapshots from the Configuration Snapshots list and click Compare, the
differences between the two configurations are highlighted.

• View button — Select a row in the Configuration Snapshots list and click to display the
contents of the selected snapshot.

• Delete button — Select one or more snapshots from the Configuration Snapshots list and
click to manually delete the snapshots from the repository of the management server.

• Report button — Click to launch the Configuration Snapshot Report dialog box. Refer to
“Generating a configuration snapshot report” on page 758 for more information.

Comparing configuration snapshots
The Comparison dialog box allows you to display the contents of two configurations side-by-side. To
compare two configuration snapshots, perform the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
4. Select one or more products to view the snapshots.
5. Select two snapshots and click Compare.
The Compare dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 289.

756

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration snapshots

23

FIGURE 289 Compare dialog box
The Compare dialog box displays the following information:

• Product — The IP address of the device.
• Date — The Displays the date the device configuration was taken.
• Change Navigator buttons/legend — The Enabled when there is at least one change
between to two compared files.







Go to first change button ( ) — Click to move to the first change.
Go to previous change button ( ) — Click to move to the previous change.
Go to next change button ( ) — Click to move to the next change.
Go to last change button (
) — Click to move to the last change.
Number of changes label — Indicates the number of changes. If there are no
differences, displays “No change”.
Differences legend — Displays the color legend for differences:

-

Changed status displays in blue.
Inserted status displays in green.
Deleted status displays in grey.

• Phrase not found icon — Displays when the search text string is not found.
• Configuration contents areas — Displays the contents of the selected configurations.
• Find — Enter a text string and take one of the following actions:
Click Find Next — Searches the next matching string in the configuration.
 Click Find Previous — Searches the previous matching string in the configuration.
Highlight grid — Click to highlight the text string.


•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

757

23

Configuration snapshots

• Match Case check box — Click to render the search case-sensitive.
• Repeats check box — Click to continue the search at the top when the bottom is reached.
6. Click Close.

Generating a configuration snapshot report
If the configuration snapshot list is too long, you can condense the list by running a report. To
generate a configuration snapshot report, perform the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
4. Click the Report button.
The Configuration Snapshot Report dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 290.

FIGURE 290 Configuration Snapshot Report dialog box
5. Select the start date and end date of the configuration snapshots you want to view.
6. Click Find.
The Management application displays the list of snapshots that match the start date and end
date you specified.
7.

You can expand each tree node to view details about the configuration snapshot. Expand the
configuration snapshot name under the Device Configuration column to display the list of
configuration snapshots that have been recorded for that device configuration.

8. Expand a specific configuration snapshot folder to display the status of each record. Status
can be one of the following:

• Not Applicable
• Change — The device configuration deployment included both pre- and post-configuration
snapshot options. There is a difference between the pre-configuration snapshot and the
post- configuration snapshot.

758

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration snapshots

23

• No Change — The device configuration deployment included pre-configuration and
post-configuration snapshots. There is no difference between the two snapshots.

• Error — An error was encountered in one or more devices during the deployment of the
snapshots. The devices where the error occurred are listed under the Error status.

NOTE

Click the Stop button to stop running the configuration snapshot report.

Viewing the pre- and post-configuration snapshot
You can create a device configuration payload that issues device-monitoring commands to the
devices when the payload is deployed. Device-monitoring commands can be issued before
(pre-configuration snapshot), after (post-configuration snapshot), or before and after (pre-payload
deployment and post-payload deployment).
Outputs of the device-monitoring commands are available as configuration snapshots. To view
these snapshots, complete the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
4. Select a device from the Product Name column to display the configuration snapshots that are
available for that device.
5. Click View to display information for that deployment.
The View Pre/Post Configuration Snapshot dialog box displays details of the selected
configuration.

NOTE

You can view only one snapshot at a time.

• Device — The IP address of the product.
• Date — The date and time when deployment was initiated.
• Device Configuration list — Displays the name of the deployed configuration, and can
come from any one of the following:
Payload configuration name, saved using the Configuration Wizard.
MAC filter configuration name.
 VLAN configuration name.
 Manual Configuration Snapshot Retrieval, which identifies a configuration retrieved by
clicking the Save Snapshot button.
 INTERNAL:user-date&time, which indicates a payload deployment with pre- or
post-snapshot properties, but the payload was not saved.
Snapshot Template — The name of the snapshot template used for the pre- or
post-snapshot deployment.



•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

759

23

Configuration snapshots

• Snapshot Type — The type of snapshot generated. There are three types:
Manual: Generated manually by clicking the Save Snapshot button on the Backup
Configuration Manager.
 Pre-Snapshot: Generated before the new configuration was deployed to the device.
 Post-Snapshot: Generated after the new configuration was deployed to the device.
CLI Command — The name of the device-monitoring template from the CLI Configuration
Manager used for the pre- or post-snapshot deployment.


•

• Configuration list — Displays details of the snapshot.
• Find — Enter a text string and perform one of the following actions:
Click Find Next — Searches the next matching string in the configuration.
 Click Find Previous — Searches the previous matching string in the configuration.
Reached bottom of the page icon — Displays when there are no more entries to display.


•
• Highlight grid — Click to highlight the text string.
• Match Case check box — Click to render the search case-sensitive.
• Repeats check box — Click to continue the search at the top when the bottom is reached.

Saving a configuration snapshot
You can select a CLI template from the Save Configuration Snapshot dialog box. The CLI template is
the product-monitoring template from the CLI Configuration Manager, used for pre- or
post-configuration snapshot deployment.
To select and retrieve a CLI template, perform the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
4. Select a product from the Group/Product list.
If no CLI product-monitoring templates exist, a message displays, prompting you to create a CLI
product-monitoring template using CLI Configuration Manager.
5. Click Save Snapshot.
The Save Configuration Snapshot dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 291.

FIGURE 291 Save Configuration Snapshot dialog box
6. Select a product-monitoring template that was previously created through the CLI
Configuration Manager from the CLI template list.
Make sure the template you select is configured for the selected products. You cannot apply an
IronWare template to a Network OS product.

760

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration snapshots

7.

23

Click OK to save the configuration snapshot.
The Save Snapshot Status dialog box displays details of the backup status.

• Backup Status list — Displays the product name and IP address, as well as the progress
and status of the configuration save.

• Status Details — Displays details of a pending configuration save.
Click Abort to abort a pending configuration save.

Searching the configuration snaphots
The Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box allows searching for products that have a particular
snapshot in the management server’s repository. Use the search feature to refine the snapshot
repository based on the filter criteria described in this section.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Configuration Repository.
3. Click the Configuration Snapshots tab.
4. Click the Search button.
The Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box, as shown in Figure 292, displays.

FIGURE 292 Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box
5. Select a product from the Available Products list and click the right arrow button to move one or
more products to the Selected Products list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

761

23

Schedule backup

Press Ctrl or Shift and then click each product to select more than one product.
6. Enter a search text string, with a limit of 255 characters, into the Containing Text field. This text
string is used to search on snapshots of the selected products.
Press Ctrl or Shift and then click each product to select more than one product.
7.

Enable the following options, as required:

• Match Case check box - Select the check box to make the search case-sensitive.
• Regular expressions check box - Select the check box to use unicode regular expressions
in your search.

• Search options — Specify the following types of available searches:
• Latest configurations — Searches the text in the most recent snapshots of the
selected products.

• All configurations — Searches the text in all snapshots of the selected products.
• Date range — Searches the snapshot files of the selected products within the
specified date range.
8. Click the Find button to find the text string and display the search results in the Search Results
list.
9. Click the Stop button to stop the search in progress.
10. Click the View button to display the contents of the selected snapshot file. The snapshot entry
that matches the search criteria is displayed in red.
11. Click the Group button to create product groups.

NOTE

You can only use the Product Group feature if you have the Configuration Management
privilege and the Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box has search results.
12. Click Close to close the Search Pre/Post Snapshots dialog box.

Schedule backup
Using the Schedule Backup dialog box, you can poll the IronWare OS or Network OS product at
regular intervals. You must have the Configuration Management privilege in your user account or
role to access the Backup Scheduler.

NOTE
By default, the Backup Scheduler backs up configurations once a day, at 1:00 AM, and software
images once a day, at 2:00 AM. Use the Backup Scheduler if you want to change the default.

Scheduling a configuration backup
The backup scheduler contains two types of scheduled backups: automatic configuration backup
and automatic software image backup. This section presents a procedure for automatic
configuration backup.

762

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule backup

23

NOTE

The Management application enables you to save the same switch configuration to the repository
using two methods: on demand (Configure > Configuration > Save) or by defining a schedule
(Configuration > Schedule Backup).
To schedule a configuration backup, complete the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Configuration > Schedule Backup.
The Schedule Backup dialog box displays.

FIGURE 293 Schedule Backup dialog box
3. Select a backup configuration from the Backup Scheduler list.
4. Click the Edit button.
The Edit Automatic Configuration Backup dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 294.

FIGURE 294 Edit Automatic Configuration Backup dialog box
5. Enter the following information:

• Frequency - The interval at which scheduled tasks are to run. The following schedule types
are available:

•
•
•
•
•
•

One Time
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Yearly

• Time (hh:mm) - The time of day to run the backup. Options include hour, minute, and AM or
PM.

• Minutes past the hour - For hourly backups, select the number of minutes past the hour
from the list.

• Day of the week - If you selected Weekly as the frequency type, select the day from the list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

763

23

Schedule backup

• Day of the month - If you selected Monthly as the frequency type, select the day of the
month from the list.
6. Click OK.
The new schedule appears in the Backup Scheduler list of the Schedule Backup dialog box.
When scheduled backups begin, the Management application polls each product to check its
current configuration.

NOTE

Software image backup is not initiated on VDX or VCS devices.

Disabling a backup schedule
To disable a scheduled backup, complete the following steps.
1. Select an entry in the Backup Scheduler list of the Schedule Backup dialog box.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Automatic Configuration Backup dialog box displays.
3. Select the Disable Scheduling check box.
The Status column is updated as Disabled.

764

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

24

IP Configuration Wizard

In this chapter
• Configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Payloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Creating a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Duplicating a payload configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Modifying a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deploying a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting a payload configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

765
766
767
774
774
776
776

Configuration requirements
The Configuration Wizard allows you to create and deploy payloads of configurations to IOS devices
on the network. A payload is a configuration of device properties, such as SNMP settings, user
account information, software image, and others.

NOTE

You cannot use the Configuration Wizard to deploy configurations to non-IOS devices.
Before creating payload configurations, make sure the following prerequisites have been
completed:

• The discovery process must be run to add devices to the Management application. Devices
must be under the Management application before you can deploy configurations to them.

• The Configuration Management privilege must be in your Management application user
account or role.

• You must configure the username and password required to log in to the device when using
the Command Line Interface (CLI). Some payloads, such as image updates, banners, and
SNMP community strings, are deployed to devices using the CLI instead of SNMP; therefore,
the Management application must log in to the device with a CLI username and password.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

765

24

Payloads

Payloads
Payloads are defined as product payloads or interface payloads. Product payloads are deployed to
the devices, whereas interface payloads are deployed to ports.
The available payloads are listed in Table 79.

TABLE 79

Payloads available for deployment

Payload name

Description

Product Payloads:

766

802.1Q Tag Type

Sets the tag type, or tag ID, that identifies the aggregate VLAN.

Banners

Displays messages when a user logs in to a device at a Privileged EXEC CLI
level, or when a user accesses a device using Telnet or Secure Shell.

Boot Sequence

Specifies the sources from which the device will boot.

CLI Configuration

Deploys CLI configuration definitions that have been created in the CLI
Configuration Manager to wired devices.

CLI Product Monitoring

Deploys CLI product monitoring definitions that have been created in the CLI
Configuration Manager to wired devices.

DNS

Defines a domain that serves as a gateway to the DNS (Domain Name Server).

DNS Name Search List

Creates a list of DNS names and adds, deletes, or replaces target products that
match the names in the list.

Enable Passwords

Assigns passwords to management privilege levels on the IOS device.

FDP Settings

Enables IOS devices to advertise themselves to other IOS devices on the
network.

Image Update: Boot

Deploys boot and monitor images to devices.

Image Update: Software

Updates the software image file on a device.

Firmware Image Update:
Unified

Updates the unified firmware image file on a device.

LDP Settings

Configures LDP settings on a product.

Protocols

Enables or disables routing protocols on devices.
This payload cannot be deployed to non-IP IOS devices.

RADIUS Parameters

Specifies the number of times an IOS device can resend an authentication
request and wait for a response from the RADIUS server.

RADIUS Servers

Indicates which RADIUS servers are used for authentication.

Reload Products

Reloads selected products at one time.

SNMP Community Strings

Configures SNMP v1 and V2 community strings.

SNMP Identification

Sets the contact, location, and system name information about a product.

SNMP Trap Enable

Configures which standard traps are sent to trap receivers by the product.

SNMP Trap Receivers

Defines the trap receivers for a product.

SNMP V3 Settings

Defines the user accounts that can access the product using SNMP v3.

Syslog Receivers

Defines the systems that have been identified to receive system log events.

TACACS+ Parameters

Configures the TACACS/TACACS+ retransmit, timeout, and dead time
authentication parameters.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating a payload configuration

TABLE 79

24

Payloads available for deployment (Continued)

Payload name

Description

TACACS+ Servers

Indicates which TACACS/TACACS+ servers are to be used for authentication.

Telnet

Sets Telnet password and idle timeout value, and enables Telnet
authentication on devices for use with AAA authentication.

Time Zone/SNTP

Specifies the time zone and specifies whether the date and time are to be set
by an SNTP server clock.

User Accounts

Configures accounts for users and administrators who are allowed to access
the product.

Interface Payloads:
LDP Settings

Configures LDP settings on an interface.

PoE Control

Powers up and powers down an interface that can be powered up over an
Ethernet connection.

Port

Changes basic port parameters in VLAN Manager.

sFlow Configuration

Enables and configures sFlow on a device, globally or per interface

SNMP Trap for Port

Specifies whether a link-change trap is sent if the state of a port changes.

Creating a payload configuration
The Configuration Wizard facilitates the creation and deployment of payload configurations.
1. Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
2. Click Add.
The Select Payload pane displays, as shown in Figure 295. This pane displays all of the
payloads you can deploy to wired devices.
Payloads are grouped under Product Payloads or Interface Payloads. Product payloads are
deployed to the devices, whereas interface payloads are deployed to ports.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

767

24

Creating a payload configuration

FIGURE 295 Configuration dialog box - Select Payload pane
3. Select Product Payloads or Interface Payloads, and select the payloads you want to configure.
You can include more than one payload in a configuration. See Table 79 on page 766 for a
brief description of the payloads.
4. Click Next.
The next pane that displays depends on the payloads you are configuring. For example,
Figure 296 shows the next pane for the SNMP Identification payload.

768

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating a payload configuration

24

FIGURE 296 Configuration dialog box - Product Payload - SNMP Identification pane
5. Enter the required information for the payload and click Next. Click Help for detailed
information on each payload you can define.
After all of the payloads you have selected are configured, the Deployment Targets pane
displays, as shown in Figure 297 on page 770.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

769

24

Creating a payload configuration

FIGURE 297 Configuration dialog box - Deployment Targets pane
6. In the Available Targets list, select the products, product groups, and IP subnets to which the
payload configuration is to be deployed.

• To select a target, expand the entry to display the entries under it, click the target in the
Available Targets list, and click the right-arrow button to move it to the Selected Targets
list.
If the target is not on the list, run the discovery process.

NOTE

The Deployment Targets pane of the Configuration wizard does not include VCS devices
when launched from the Configuration Wizard command on the Configure menu.

• To remove a target, select it in the Selected Targets list and click the left arrow button to
move it back to the Available Targets list.
7.

Click Next.
The Deployment Properties pane displays, as shown in Figure 298 on page 771.

770

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating a payload configuration

24

FIGURE 298 Configuration dialog box - Deployment Properties pane
8. Select one of the persistence properties.

• Don’t Save to Flash or Reload
Select this option if you just want to update the device running configuration. The payload
configuration is not saved to the device flash memory, nor is the device rebooted when the
payload configuration is deployed.

• Save to Flash
Select this option if you want to make the payload configuration permanent in the device
flash memory and saved to the running configuration. Selecting this option is the same as
entering a write memory command on the device CLI. The payload configuration is applied
to the device when the device reboots.

• Save to Flash and Reload
Select this option if you want to save the payload configuration to the device flash memory
and reboot the device. It is the same as entering the write memory and reload commands
to the device CLI.

NOTE

This option is available only to Management application users who have the “Reload
Device” privilege in their user account.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

771

24

Creating a payload configuration

9. (Optional) Enter the following information if you want the Management application to run and
save a report before or after this configuration is deployed to the device.
a.

Select the Pre-Deployment check box if you want the Management application to run and
save a report before this configuration is deployed.

b.

Select the Post-Deployment check box if you want the Management application to run and
save a report after this configuration is deployed.

c.

From the CLI Template list, select the template that contains the show commands that are
executed before or after this configuration is deployed to the target.

d.

If you selected the Post-Deployment check box, and you want the Management application
to wait a few seconds after this deployment before proceeding to the post-deployment,
indicate the delay on the Post-Deployment Delay slider.

10. Select whether you want to save this configuration.

• Select One-time deployment, do not save configuration if you want to deploy the
configuration, but not save it.

• Select Save configuration if you want the Management application to save the
configuration.
If you select this option, enter a name for the configuration and an optional description in
the Name and Description fields.
11. Click Next.
If you selected Save configuration, the Deployment Schedule pane displays, as shown in
Figure 299. Continue with step 12.

FIGURE 299 Configuration dialog box - Deployment Schedule pane

772

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating a payload configuration

24

12. Select Save Without Scheduling Deployment or Schedule Deployment.
If you select Schedule Deployment, select the frequency, time, and date parameters for the
deployment.
13. Click Next.
The Summary Page pane displays, as shown in Figure 300.

FIGURE 300 Configuration dialog box - Summary Page pane
14. Review the information on the Summary Page pane.

• The Deployment and Targets tab shows the deployment definition and the targets in the
configuration. The Selected Targets list allows you to verify to which devices the payloads
in the configuration are deployed.

• The Configuration tab summarizes the payloads in the configuration you have created.
If you must make changes, click Previous to return to a previous pane, or click another pane in
the Steps area on the left side of this pane.
15. Click Save or Deploy. The availability of the Save and Deploy buttons depends on what you
selected on the Deployment Properties pane.

• Save appears if you selected Save configuration. The saved configuration then appears in
the Product Configurations list in the Configuration Wizard dialog box.

• Deploy appears if you selected One-time deployment, do not save configuration. If you
click Deploy, the Deployment Status dialog box displays. If you want to view the
configuration deployment status at another time, select Reports > Deployment.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

773

24

Duplicating a payload configuration

Duplicating a payload configuration
You can create a payload configuration by copying an existing configuration.
1. Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
2. Select a configuration from the Product Configurations list.
3. Click Duplicate.
The Copy Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Enter a name for the new payload configuration. If you do not enter a name, the Management
application assigns the name “XXX copy”, where XXX is the name of the original configuration.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
You can then use the Edit button to make changes to the payload configuration.

Modifying a payload configuration
You can add payloads to a configuration, delete payloads from a configuration, and modify existing
payloads in a configuration.
You can also change the deployment targets, properties, and schedule.
1. Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
2. Select a configuration from the Product Configurations list.
3. Click Edit.
The Select Payload pane displays. The payloads that currently exist in the configuration are
checked.
On the left side of the wizard, the Steps area displays the existing payloads and the
deployment items you can change (targets, properties, schedule), as shown in Figure 301 on
page 775.

774

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Modifying a payload configuration

24

FIGURE 301 Configuration dialog box - Select Payload pane for editing a configuration
4. Add or remove payloads in the configuration.

• To add a payload to the configuration, select either Product Payloads or Interface
Payloads, and then select the payload you want to add.

• To remove a payload from the configuration, clear the check box of the payload.
Note that a configuration must have at least one payload. You cannot save a configuration
unless it has at least one payload.
5. Modify what needs to be changed in the Select Payload, Deployment Targets, Deployment
Properties, and other panes.

• Click Next to navigate sequentially through the panes.
• Click an item in the Steps area to jump directly to the appropriate section.
• Click Save at any time to save your changes and return to the Configuration Wizard dialog
box.
Refer to the steps in “Creating a payload configuration” on page 767 for additional information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

775

24

Deploying a payload configuration

Deploying a payload configuration
Payload configurations are deployed to targets in one of the following ways:

• On a scheduled basis, if a deployment schedule has been set up for the configuration.
• On demand, if Save Without Scheduling Deployment is selected in the Deployment Schedule
pane of the Configuration Wizard. Configurations can be manually deployed when required.
Refer to step 12 in “Creating a payload configuration” on page 767 for more information on setting
up a deployment schedule.
Use the following procedure to deploy the configuration on demand.
1. Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
2. Select the configuration you want to deploy from the Product Configurations list.
3. Click Deploy.
4. Click Yes in the confirmation message.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.

NOTE

If a configuration has more than one payload and a failure occurs during deployment of a
payload, the Management application aborts the deployment of that payload, but continues to
deploy the remaining payloads.
5. Click Close when you are finished viewing the information.

Deleting a payload configuration
1. Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
2. Select the configuration you want to delete from the Product Configurations list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes in the confirmation message.

776

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

25

CLI Configuration Management

In this chapter
• CLI configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing existing templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Product configuration templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Changing product credentials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Importing parameter values into a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Previewing CLI commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CLI command guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Testing a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Valid and invalid responses from devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CLI configuration deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Monitoring configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CLI deployment reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• CLI configuration scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

777
778
779
784
785
786
787
789
790
793
794
795
802
803

CLI configuration overview
NOTE

The CLI Configuration feature requires the IP CLI Configuration privilege.

NOTE

CLI Configuration deployment requires the IP - CLI Configuration Deploy privilege.

NOTE
The CLI Configuration feature cannot manage non-IP devices or third-party IP devices.
CLI Configuration provides a text-based interface that allows you to enter command line interface
(CLI) commands to create configurations and reports for IronWare and Network OS devices. You
can deploy the configurations and reports on demand or at a scheduled time.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

777

25

Viewing existing templates

Configuration requirements
Before you use the CLI Configuration, you should meet the following requirements:

• Telnet or SSH (or both) must be selected on the Management application server to match the
protocol(s) with the devices. For more information about configuring Telnet or SSH, refer to
“Product communication settings” on page 169.

• Authentication and authorization methods required to deploy the payloads must be enabled on
the devices to which the configurations are to be deployed.

• Passwords required to access the device must be entered for the device. You can enter the CLI
password from the following dialog boxes:

-

Definition tab of the Configuration or Monitoring Template dialog box (refer to “Product
configuration templates” on page 779 or “Monitoring configurations” on page 795).

-

Default Passwords tab on the Global Settings tab of the Discover - Setup IP dialog box
(refer to “Default IP user credentials” on page 52).

-

Edit product dialog box (refer to “Editing IP device discovery” on page 87).
CLI Credential dialog box (refer to “Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209).

Viewing existing templates
The Management application provides several example Configuration templates. For a list of the
example templates, refer to “CLI Templates” on page 1339.
Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.

• Templates table — Displays a list of existing configurations.
- Name — Name of the device configuration.
- Description — Information about the configuration.
- Type — Whether the template is a Configuration or Monitoring template.
- Parameters — Indicates if parameters are included in the configuration.
- Additional Targets — Indicates whether you selected to be prompted for additional targets
during manual deployment.

-

Scheduled — Whether the configuration is scheduled (Yes) or not (No).

• Add button — Click to create a new configuration (“Creating a new product configuration” on
page 779 or “Creating a monitoring configuration” on page 795).

• Edit button — Click to edit an existing configuration (“Editing a product configuration” on
page 788 or “Editing a monitoring configuration” on page 801).

• Duplicate button — Click to copy an existing configuration (“Copying a product configuration”
on page 787 or “Copying a monitoring configuration” on page 800).

• Delete button — Click to delete the selected configurations (“Deleting a configuration” on
page 793).

• Verify button — Click to verify the selected configuration (“Testing a configuration” on
page 789).

• Deploy button — Click to deploy the selected configuration (“CLI configuration deployment” on
page 794).

778

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product configuration templates

25

Product configuration templates
You can create, modify, duplicate, delete, verify, and deploy a product configuration from the CLI
Configuration dialog box. Product configurations allow you to create device configuration by
entering a set of configuration CLI commands. To view a list of existing configurations, refer to
“Viewing existing templates” on page 778. For information about the example templates, refer to
“CLI Templates” on page 1339.

Creating a new product configuration
To create a new configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The CLI Template dialog box displays.

FIGURE 302 CLI Template dialog box - Definition tab
3. Click the Definition tab and enter a name and description for the new configuration.

NOTE

Do not use special characters in the name.
a.

Enter a name and description for the new configuration.

b.

Select Configuration to create a product configuration.

c.

To change CLI credentials, click Change Template Credentials and refer to “Changing
product credentials” on page 784.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

779

25

Product configuration templates

4. Click the Target tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 303 CLI Configuration Template dialog box - Target tab
a.

Select the devices to which you want the configuration deployed from the Available Targets
table.
The Available Targets table displays an inventory of the available product targets and
includes the same detail as the Product List (refer to “IP Product List” on page 284).
You can deploy the configuration to individual devices, devices in a device group, or
devices in an IP subnet.
For VCS fabrics, you can deploy the configuration to one or more individual members in a
fabric (select each member) or to all members of a fabric (select the VCS fabric).

b.

Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Targets table.
To search for devices, right-click anywhere in the table and select Search. For more
information about searching for devices, refer to “Searching for a device” on page 299.
The Selected Targets table displays the selected products and includes the same detail as
the Product List (refer to “IP Product List” on page 284).

c.

780

Select the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box to be able to
select additional targets during manual deployment.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product configuration templates

25

5. Click the CLI Commands tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 304 CLI Template dialog box - CLI Commands tab
a.

(Configuration templates only) Select the Evaluate CLI responses check box to validate the
CLI commands.
You can add a dash (-) to the beginning of a CLI command to ignore command validation
even when you select the Evaluate CLI responses check box.
Clear the Evaluate CLI responses check box to send all CLI commands to the device
regardless of the success or failure of the previous command.

b.

Enter CLI commands in the CLI Commands field.
For a list of guidelines to use when entering CLI commands, refer to “CLI command
guidelines” on page 787.
The Management application provides several CLI command examples (including ACL,
MPLS, Network OS-AMPP, Network OS-Access Gateway, Network OS-QOS,
MISCELLANEOUS, MCT, Network OS-THRESHOLDING, HYPEREDGE, VRF, VCS Virtual
Fabrics, Network OS-NAS, PRIVATE VLAN, Ironware OS VLAN,and Network OS VLAN). To
view the CLI command examples, navigate to the Example CLI Commands folder (refer to
“CLI Templates” on page 1339).
Add commands from the CLI templates or examples by selecting one or more commands
from the CLI Templates or Example CLI Commands folder and clicking the right arrow
button.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

781

25

Product configuration templates

c.

To enter a parameter for a CLI command, select the parameter type from the CLI
Commands list - Parameters folder and click the right arrow to move the parameter type to
the CLI Commands text area.
Parameters use the following format: $, where name is the parameter
and data_type is the type of parameter.
Parameter types include integer ($), string ($),
slot/port ($), MAC address ($), and IP address
($).

d.

Edit the parameter by entering the variable or character string you want to use for the
parameter in place of the name variable.

NOTE

Each parameter must be unique. The Management application does not check for
duplicate parameters.
access list 400 deny $

In the example, access list 400 deny is the CLI command, ip is the parameter variable
and IP_ADDRESS is the parameter type.
e.

(Optional) Select a template from the CLI Templates folder and click the right arrow to
include it in the configuration.
This allows you to deploy more than one template to a device in a single deployment. Only
templates defined in the Management application display. The list and button only display
when there is at least one user-defined CLI template.

6. Click the Parameters tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 305 CLI Template dialog box - Parameters tab
a.

Select the Always prompt for parameter review/edit during manual deployment check box
to display the Parameter tab in the Prompt dialog box during manual deployment.
Clear to not display the Parameter tab in the Prompt dialog box during manual
deployment. If this check box is clear and you do not fill in all parameter values, the
Prompt dialog box displays.
When selected, the Parameter tab displays in the Prompt dialog box during manual
deployment even if you filled in all parameter values on the Parameters tab of the CLI
Template dialog box.

b.

Select one of the following options from the Mode list for the parameter import mode.

• Same Values for each Target — Select to set the same values for all selected targets.
• Different Values for each Target — Select to set individual values for the selected
targets.

782

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product configuration templates

c.

25

Enter a value for each parameter in the associated field.
Note that the Target column remains visible at all times in the Parameters table.
Fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. The fields only
accepts valid values base on the parameter data type.
Parameters include the following options:

•
•
•
•

String — Enter a string with a maximum of 64 ASCII characters.
Integer — Enter an integer with a maximum of 12 numeric characters.
Slot/Port — Enter the slot number and port number.
MAC address — Enter hexadecimal characters with or without a valid delimiter (such
as hyphen, colon, period, and space). Wildcards (such as ? and *) are supported.

• IP address — Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
You can copy and paste new values for the parameter from an external file (plain text or
table format). If the file you copy from is in table format, you can copy multiple fields (cells)
at the same time.
To import parameter values from a CSV file, refer to “Importing parameter values into a
configuration” on page 785.
7.

Click the Schedule tab and complete the following steps.
a.

Select the Schedule check box.

b.

Choose one of the following options from the Frequency list.

•
•
•
•
•
•

One Time (refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment schedule” on page 803)
Hourly (refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on page 803)
Daily (refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on page 804)
Weekly (refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Monthly (refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Yearly (refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on page 805)

8. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the
Configuration tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the
Configuration Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 9.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 10.
9. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
10. Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

783

25

Changing product credentials

11. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
12. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Changing product credentials
Passwords required to access the device must be entered for the device.
1. Click Change Template Credentials on the Definition tab of the CLI Template dialog box.
The CLI Template dialog box displays.

NOTE

If you selected the Use User CLI Credential check box in the Policy tab of the Users dialog box
(refer to “Password policies” on page 198) and you configured credentials in your User Profile
(refer to “Configuring CLI credentials” on page 209), the Management application only uses
those credentials to access the device.

NOTE

Entering a password is not required if the password required to access the device is already
entered during discovery or configured in your user profile.

FIGURE 306 CLI Credentials dialog box

784

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Importing parameter values into a configuration

25

2. Enter the user name for the product in the Product Login Account - Username field.

NOTE

If Telnet is used to log in to the device and Telnet only requires a password, then enter the
password in the Password field and leave the Username field blank.
3. Enter the password for the product in the Product Login Account - Password field.
4. (IronWare only) Enter the user name assigned to management privilege levels on the device in
the Product Enable Account - Username field.

NOTE

If a device only requires the enable password, then enter the password in the Password field
and leave the Username field blank.
5. (IronWare only) Enter the password assigned to management privilege levels on the device in
the Product Enable Account - Password field.
6. Click OK on the CLI Template dialog box

Importing parameter values into a configuration
You can define the parameter values in a comma-separated value file (CSV) and then import them
into the CLI template. The CSV file can include a description of the CLI template. The description
must start with a pound sign (#) and cannot be longer than 512 characters.
The first line after the description defines the header for the import. The first entry in the header
must be “Target”, then list all parameters (defined on the CLI Commands tab) to be included in the
import.
The target can be an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format), the product group name (such as San Jose
products), or All (all products). The parameters can be included in any order. The application
ignores empty rows or columns during import.

NOTE

All values are case sensitive (including the “Target” header).
For example, if you define the following commands on the CLI Commands tab, Table 80 shows the
CSV file content required for using different values for each target and Table 81 shows the CSV file
content required for using the same values for each target
! Required for LSP egress address in LSP Manager as well as a soft interface for
IP routing
interface loopback $
enable
ip ospf area $
ip address
$

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

785

25

Previewing CLI commands

TABLE 80

Different values for each target

#Description of the template. This template provides different values for each target..
Target,

LOOPBACK_INTERFACE|INTEGER,

OSPF_AREA|INTEGER LOOPBACK_INTERFACE_IP|STRING

10.20.30.100,

1,

4,

loopback1,

10.20.30.200,

2,

5,

loopback2,

Layer 2 Switch Products, 3,

6,

loopback3,

TABLE 81

Same value for each target

#Description of the template. This template provides different values for each target..
Target,

LOOPBACK_INTERFACE|INTEGER, OSPF_AREA|INTEGER LOOPBACK_INTERFACE_IP|STRING

All,

1,

4,

loopback1,

To import parameter values, complete the following steps.
1. Click Import on the Parameters tab of the CLI Template dialog box.
The Open dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the location of the parameters (CSV) file.
3. Click Open.
The parameters specified in the CSV file display in the Parameters table. Note that the Target
column remains visible at all times in the Parameters table.
You can copy and paste new values for the parameter from an external file (plain text or table
format). If the file you copy from is in table format, you can copy multiple fields (cells) at the
same time.

Previewing CLI commands
1. Select a row in the Parameters table.
2. Click Preview.
The Preview of CLI Commands with Parameter Values dialog box displays.

FIGURE 307 Preview of CLI Commands with Parameter Values dialog box
3. Click Close.

786

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI command guidelines

25

CLI command guidelines
When adding CLI commands to the configuration, use the following guidelines:

• Only configuration templates can be added to a template defined in the CLI Template dialog
box.

• Templates can be nested and the same template can be included several times as long as it
does not cause a circular dependency.

• Targets for deployment are only retrieved from the template you create, not any included
templates.

• Only configuration- level commands, those that you enter when you are in the configure
terminal mode, can be included in a device configuration. For example, you can enter the
snmp-server contact Administrator command, but you cannot enter a show run command.

• Before you execute the reload or copy tftp commands, you must execute the exit command to
exit the config terminal.

• Do not enter a configure terminal command. The Management application automatically
assumes the commands you enter are under the configuration level.

• Add a space or a tab at the beginning of a command that is sublevel to the configuration
command. For example, to enter the command for an interface in the device CLI, enter the
following commands:
interface e 2/8
port-name Interleaf

• To save the configuration to the device running configuration, either end the configuration with
the write memory command or deploy the definition using the CLI configuration payload in the
Configuration Wizard.

Copying a product configuration
To copy an existing configuration to create a new one, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Select the configuration you want to copy in the Configuration table and click Duplicate.
The CLI Configuration Template dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 3 through step 4 from the “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779.
5. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the
Configuration tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the
Configuration Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

787

25

CLI command guidelines

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 6.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 7.
6. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
7.

Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

8. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Editing a product configuration
To make changes to an existing configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click the Configuration tab.
3. Select the configuration you want to edit in the Configuration table and click Edit.
The CLI Configuration Template dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 3 through step 4 from the “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779.
5. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the
Configuration tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the
Configuration Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

788

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Testing a configuration

25

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 6.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 7.
6. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
7.

Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

8. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Testing a configuration
To test a configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Select the configuration you want to verify in the Templates table and click Verify.
3. Click Yes on the “Do you want to verify?” message to confirm.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with step 4.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go to
step 5.
4. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

789

25

Valid and invalid responses from devices

5. Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays detailing whether the configuration will deploy
successfully.
6. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Valid and invalid responses from devices
When you deploy a configuration to a device, some commands may send responses back to the
Management application. By default, any message that the Management application receives is
treated as an error, unless it matches an entry in the cliResponses.properties (IronWare) or
NOSCliResponse.properties (Network OS) file. These files contain a list of messages that the
Management application recognizes as valid responses.
If you think the response is valid, you can add the response to the list in the
cliResponses.properties (IronWare) or NOSCliResponse.properties (Network OS) file using one of
the following methods:

• Add the response to the cliResponses.properties (IronWare) file (refer to “Editing the CLI
responses properties file” on page 790)

• Add the response to the NOSCliResponse.properties (Network OS) file (refer to “Editing the
Network OS CLI responses properties file” on page 791)

• Add the response to the MotorolaControllerCliResponse.properties file (refer to “Editing the
Network OS CLI responses properties file” on page 791)

• Using a dash character in CLI configuration manager (refer to “Using a dash character in CLI
Configuration manager” on page 793)

Editing the CLI responses properties file
The cliResponses.properties (IronWare) file is under the Install_Home\conf\cli directory. Edit the
file using a text editor. Add the response using the following Unicode regular expressions format.
For example, if you try to delete a nonexistent TACACS server by entering the following entry in CLI
Configuration Manager:
no tacacs-server host 1.5.8.3

When you deploy the configuration, the following error messages are generated:
error: Failed to delete TACACS+ server 1.5.8.3
Error: Failed to delete TACACS+ server 1.5.8.3

To classify these messages as valid responses in the Management application, you can add the
following entry to the appropriate responses file:
^no tac=^error: failed to delete

790

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Valid and invalid responses from devices

25

The strings on the left and the right side of the equal sign are Unicode regular expressions used for
pattern matching. The expression on the left is matched against the command string, while the
expression on the right is matched against the messages returned by the command that matches
the pattern on the left. The entry in the example indicates that for any command that begins with
"no tac", any messages that are returned beginning with "error: failed to delete" are valid
responses. (Note that the matching is done in a case-insensitive manner, so you do not need to
explicitly specify "error" and "Error" to match the messages shown in the example.) For details on
the supported Unicode regular expression syntax, refer to “Regular Expressions” on page 1333.
The new response is available to the Management application as soon as you save the file; you do
not need to restart the Management application.

Editing the Network OS CLI responses properties file
The NOSCliResponse.properties (Network OS) file is under the Install_Home\conf\cli directory. Edit
the file using a text editor.
You can add a success response between the SUCCESS_RESPONSE_START and
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_END tags using the following Unicode regular expressions format.
#Success Map
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_START
^su[port]*\s+s[witchd]*\s+=.*First Failure Data Capture.*enabled.*
^n[o]\s+su[port]*\s+s[witchd]*\s+=.*First Failure Data Capture.*disabled.*
^f[fdc]*=.*First Failure Data Capture.*enabled.*
^n[o]\sf[fdc]*=.*First Failure Data Capture.*disabled.*
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_END

You can add a failure response between the FAILURE_RESPONSE_START and
FAILURE_RESPONSE_END tags using the following Unicode regular expressions format.
#Failure Map
FAILURE_RESPONSE_START
^nt[p]*\s+s[erv]*\s+=.*too many.*
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+h[ost]*\s+=.*Maximum number of hosts in this version group
reached.*
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+u[ser]*\s+=.*Maximum limit of users in this access group
reached.*no
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+=.*too many.*
FAILURE_RESPONSE_END

The strings on the left and the right side of the equal sign are Unicode regular expressions used for
pattern matching. The expression on the left is matched against the command string, while the
expression on the right is matched against the messages returned by the command that matches
the pattern on the left. For details on the supported Unicode regular expression syntax, refer to
“Regular Expressions” on page 1333.
The new response is available to the Management application as soon as you save the file; you do
not need to restart the Management application.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

791

25

Valid and invalid responses from devices

Editing the Motorola Controller CLI responses properties file
The MotorolaControllerCliResponse.properties file is under the Install_Home\conf\cli directory.
Edit the file using a text editor.
You can add a success response between the SUCCESS_RESPONSE_START and
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_END tags using the following Unicode regular expressions format.
#Success Map
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_START
^su[port]*\s+s[witchd]*\s+=.*First Failure Data Capture.*enabled.*
^n[o]\s+su[port]*\s+s[witchd]*\s+=.*First Failure Data Capture.*disabled.*
^f[fdc]*=.*First Failure Data Capture.*enabled.*
^n[o]\sf[fdc]*=.*First Failure Data Capture.*disabled.*
SUCCESS_RESPONSE_END

You can add a failure response between the FAILURE_RESPONSE_START and
FAILURE_RESPONSE_END tags using the following Unicode regular expressions format.
#Failure Map
FAILURE_RESPONSE_START
^nt[p]*\s+s[erv]*\s+=.*too many.*
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+h[ost]*\s+=.*Maximum number of hosts in this version group
reached.*
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+u[ser]*\s+=.*Maximum limit of users in this access group
reached.*no
^sn[mp\-serv]*\s+=.*too many.*
FAILURE_RESPONSE_END

The strings on the left and the right side of the equal sign are Unicode regular expressions used for
pattern matching. The expression on the left is matched against the command string, while the
expression on the right is matched against the messages returned by the command that matches
the pattern on the left. For details on the supported Unicode regular expression syntax, refer to
“Regular Expressions” on page 1333.
The new response is available to the Management application as soon as you save the file; you do
not need to restart the Management application.

Configuration command response validation
Command responses are only validated for configuration deployments. Validation occurs in the
following order:
1. Failure Map — Checks the response message against the regex defined in the failure map. If a
match is found, it is treated as failure response from the device and stops the validation
process.
2. Success Map — Checks the response message against the regex defined in the success map.
If a match is found, it is treated as a success response from the device and stops the validation
process.
3. General Failure Strings — Checks the response message against the general failure strings. If a
match is found, it is treated as a failure response from the device and stops the validation
process.

792

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Deleting a configuration

25

NOTE

If the response message does not fall in any of the categories above, it is treated as a success
response from the device and stops the validation process.

Using a dash character in CLI Configuration manager
You can override how the Management application treats messages without editing the CLI
responses properties file. To do this, enter a dash (-) at the beginning of each configuration line. For
example, to create a configuration that defines an IP address for port 3/2, enter the following
commands in the CLI Configuration Manager:
-interface ethernet 3/2
- ip address 192.45.6.110 255.255.255.0

NOTE
Make sure there is no space between the dash and the first character of a command entered at the
configuration level. When entering a sublevel command, you must use a space or a tab between the
dash and the first character of the command.
Using the dash tells the Management application to ignore any response, even if the response is
not in the cliResponses.properties file.

Configuration error checking
To prevent invalid commands from being entered in a configuration definition, the
cliShowCommands.properties file under the Install_Home\conf\cli\ directory specifies what
commands cannot be included in a configuration definition. The command lists the following:

• An entry in a command=disallowed format indicates a command that must not be entered in
the CLI Command tab.
For example, you see the ping=disallowed entry. Ping cannot be included in a configuration or
monitoring definition.

• A command that does not have "disallowed" can only be used under the monitoring. For
example, by default, the sh (show) command is included in the cliShowCommands.properties
file. This means that the sh command can be entered only under monitoring. For more
information on monitoring, refer to “Monitoring configurations” on page 795.
You can add commands to the lists in the cliShowCommands.properties file. However, any
commands you add to that file are commands that are treated as display commands only or
are commands that cannot be used in a definition if they are listed with the "=disallowed"
expression.

Deleting a configuration
To delete a configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

793

25

CLI configuration deployment

2. Select one or more configurations to delete in the Templates table and click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the “Do you want to delete?” message to confirm.
4. Click Close to close the CLI Configuration dialog box.

CLI configuration deployment
Deploy the configuration using one of the following methods:

• At a scheduled date and time
Schedule a configuration deployment in the CLI Template dialog box. For step-by-step
instructions, refer to “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779 or “Creating a
monitoring configuration” on page 795.

• On demand
To deploy an existing configuration on demand, refer to “Deploying a configuration on demand”
on page 794.

Deploying a configuration on demand
If you are using the on demand method, the configuration is saved to the device running
configuration. If you want to save it to the device startup configuration, make sure the write
memory command is the last command in the configuration or deploy the configuration using the
Configuration Wizard. Once you deploy a device configuration definition, a Deployment Report and
a Product CLI Report are generated.
To deploy a configuration on demand, complete the following steps.
1. From the Configuration tab of the CLI Configuration dialog box, select the configuration you
want to deploy and click Deploy.
2. Click Yes on the “Do you want to deploy the configuration Configuration_Name?” message to
confirm.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment.
3. Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.
4. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
5. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

794

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Monitoring configurations

25

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Monitoring configurations
You can create, modify, duplicate, and delete a monitoring configuration from the CLI Configuration
dialog box. Monitoring configurations allow you to create device reports by entering a set of show
CLI commands. To view a list of existing configurations, refer to “Viewing existing templates” on
page 778. For information about the example templates, refer to “CLI Templates” on page 1339.

Creating a monitoring configuration
To create a new monitoring configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The CLI Template dialog box displays.

FIGURE 308 CLI Template dialog box - Definition tab
3. Click the Definition tab and complete the following steps.
a.

Enter a name and description for the new configuration.

NOTE

Do not use special characters in the name.
b.

Select Monitoring to create product reports using show commands.

c.

To change CLI credentials, click Change Template Credentials and refer to “Changing
product credentials” on page 784.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

795

25

Monitoring configurations

4. Click the Targets tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 309 CLI Template dialog box - Target tab
a.

Select the devices to which you want the configuration deployed from the Available Targets
table.
You can deploy the configuration to individual devices, devices in a device group, or
devices in an IP subnet.
For VCS fabrics, you can deploy the configuration to one or more individual members in a
fabric (select each member) or to all members of a fabric (select the VCS fabric).
The Available Targets table displays an inventory of the available product targets and
includes the same detail as the Product List (refer to “IP Product List” on page 284).

b.

Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Targets table.
To search for devices, right-click anywhere in the table and select Search. For more
information about searching for devices, refer to “Searching for a device” on page 299.
The Selected Targets table displays the selected products and includes the same detail as
the Product List (refer to “IP Product List” on page 284).

c.

796

Select the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box to be able to
select additional targets during manual deployment.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Monitoring configurations

25

5. Click the CLI Command tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 310 CLI Template dialog box - CLI Commands tab
d.

Enter the show commands in the CLI Commands text area.

NOTE

Only commands listed in the cliShowCommands.properties file can be entered for a
monitoring configuration. For more information, refer to “Configuration error checking” on
page 793.

For a list of guidelines to use when entering CLI commands, refer to “CLI command
guidelines” on page 787.
Add commands from the CLI templates or examples by selecting one or more commands
from the CLI Templates or Examples of CLI Commands folder and clicking the right arrow
button. For more information, refer to “CLI Templates” on page 1339.
e.

To enter a parameter for a CLI command, select the parameter type from the CLI
Commands list - Parameters folder and click the right arrow to move the parameter type to
the CLI Commands text area.
Parameters use the following format: $, where name is the parameter
and data_type is the type of parameter.
Parameter types include integer ($), string ($),
slot/port ($), MAC address ($), and IP address
($).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

797

25

Monitoring configurations

f.

Edit the parameter by entering the variable or character string you want to use for the
parameter in place of the name variable.

NOTE

Each parameter must be unique. The Management application does not check for
duplicate parameters.
show interface ethernet $

In the example, show interface ethernet is the CLI command, port is the parameter
variable, SLOT_PORT is the parameter type, and [Slot#]/Port# is the format for the port
number.
g.

(Optional) Select a template from the CLI Templates folder and click the right arrow to
include it in the configuration.
This allows you to deploy more than one template to a device in a single deployment. Only
templates defined in the Management application display. This list only displays when
there is at least one user-defined CLI template.

6. Click the Parameters tab and complete the following steps.

FIGURE 311 CLI Template dialog box - Parameters tab
a.

Select the Always prompt for parameter review/edit during manual deployment check to
display the Parameter tab in the Prompt dialog box during manual deployment.
Clear to not display the Parameter tab in the Prompt dialog box during manual
deployment.
When selected, the Parameter tab displays in the Prompt dialog box during manual
deployment even if you filled in all parameter values on the Parameters tab of the CLI
Template dialog box.

b.

Select one of the following options from the Mode list for the parameter import mode.

• Same Values for each Target — Select to set the same values for all selected targets.
• Different Values for each Target — Select to set individual values for the selected
targets.

798

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Monitoring configurations

c.

25

Enter a value for each parameter in the associated field.
Fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. The fields only
accepts valid values base on the parameter data type.
Parameters include the following options:

•
•
•
•

String — Enter a string with a maximum of 64 ASCII characters.
Integer — Enter an integer with a maximum of 12 numeric characters.
Slot/Port — Enter the slot number and port number.
MAC address — Enter hexadecimal characters with or without a valid delimiter (such
as hyphen, colon, period, and space). Wildcards (such as ? and *) are supported.

• IP address — Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address.
You can copy and paste new values for the parameter from an external file (plain text or
table format). If the file you copy from is in table format, you can copy multiple fields (cells)
at the same time.
To import parameter values from a CSV file, refer to “Importing parameter values into a
configuration” on page 785.
7.

Click the Schedule tab and complete the following steps.
a.

Select the Schedule check box.

b.

Choose one of the following options from the Frequency list.

•
•
•
•
•
•

One Time (refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment schedule” on page 803)
Hourly (refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on page 803)
Daily (refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on page 804)
Weekly (refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Monthly (refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Yearly (refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on page 805)

8. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the Monitoring
tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the Configuration
Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 9.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 10.
9. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
10. Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

799

25

Monitoring configurations

11. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
12. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Copying a monitoring configuration
To copy an existing monitoring configuration to create a new one, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click the Monitoring tab.
3. Select the configuration you want to copy in the Monitoring table and click Duplicate.
The CLI Monitoring Template dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 3 through step 4 from the “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779.
5. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the Monitoring
tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the Configuration
Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 6.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 7.
6. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
7.

800

Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Monitoring configurations

25

8. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

Editing a monitoring configuration
To make changes to any of the existing configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > CLI Configuration.
The CLI Configuration dialog box displays.
2. Click the Monitoring tab.
3. Select the configuration you want to edit in the Monitoring table and click Edit.
The CLI Monitoring Template dialog box displays.
4. Complete step 3 through step 4 from the “Creating a new product configuration” on page 779.
5. Review your entries on all the template tabs and choose one of the following options:

• Click OK to save the configuration and add it to the list of configurations on the Monitoring
tab. The new definition can be added to a configuration payload in the Configuration
Wizard and deployed later.
To test the configuration, refer to “Testing a configuration” on page 789.

• Click Deploy to deploy the configuration to the selected targets. Click Yes on the
confirmation message.
If you selected the Prompt for additional targets during manual deployment check box, the
Target tab of the Deployment of Configuration_Name dialog box displays. Continue with
step 6.
If the configuration contains parameters that must be defined, the Deployment of
Configuration_Name dialog box displays with a list of all parameters in the deployment. Go
to step 7.
6. Define additional targets for the deployment (refer to step 4), as needed.
7.

Edit the mode and the parameter values (refer to step 6), as needed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

801

25

CLI deployment reports

8. Click OK.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
When deployment is complete, click Report to view the CLI Deployments Report.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
To check the results of the deployment in the Product CLI Report, refer to “CLI deployment
reports” on page 802. For details about valid and invalid responses when you deploy a
configuration, refer to “Valid and invalid responses from devices” on page 790.

CLI deployment reports
The CLI Deployments Report contains the reports generated when testing or deploying product
configuration and monitoring definitions from the CLI Configuration dialog box to IronWare and
Network OS devices. It is not available for third-party devices or non-IP devices.
If you are assigned to an area of responsibility (AOR), you can view only the CLI Deployments Report
for the configurations that you deploy from the CLI Configuration dialog box.

Viewing CLI deployment reports
NOTE
You can launch the CLI Deployments Report directly from the Deployment Status dialog box by
clicking Report. For information about deploying a configuration, refer to “CLI configuration
deployment” on page 794
To view a CLI deployment report for a product from the main window, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Product CLI.
The CLI Deployments Report displays listing the reports that have been generated.
To sort the list by a single column, click the column header.
To reverse the sort order, click the column header again.
2. Click the name of the report you want to view.
You can expand an entry to show the list of devices for which the report was generated and
whether or not the report was successfully generated. If the report was not generated, error
messages appear under the Error column.

802

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI configuration scheduling

25

3. Choose one of the following options:

• To display a report for one device, click the IP address of the device on the list.
• To display a report that includes all devices for which the report was generated, click the
name of the report in the Template Name column.
The Product CLI Report displays.
To export a report refer to “Exporting and saving IP reports to a file” on page 1232.

CLI configuration scheduling
You can configure when and how often to run each configured CLI template. Options include:

•
•
•
•
•
•

One Time (refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment schedule” on page 803)
Hourly (refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on page 803)
Daily (refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on page 804)
Weekly (refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Monthly (refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule” on page 804)
Yearly (refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on page 805)

Configuring a one-time deployment schedule
To configure a one-time schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To finish configuring the CLI template, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

Configuring an hourly deployment schedule
To configure an hourly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the minute past the hour you want deployment to run from the Minutes past the hour
list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

803

25

CLI configuration scheduling

Configuring a daily deployment schedule
To configure a daily deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

Configuring a weekly deployment schedule
To configure a weekly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Week list.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

Configuring a monthly deployment schedule
To configure a monthly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

804

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI configuration scheduling

25

Configuring a yearly deployment schedule
To configure a yearly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Yearly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to step 8 of “Creating a new product
configuration” on page 779.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

805

25

806

CLI configuration scheduling

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

26

Image Repository for IP Products

In this chapter
• Obtaining software files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Products supporting the image import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Boot image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Software image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Unified image management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Serial firmware update and activation for NOS devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

807
808
808
811
814
818

Obtaining software files
Program files required to run IronWare OS IP products can include boot, monitor, software, and
unified management programs, depending on the product. These program files are imported into
the Management application manually from the Firmware Management repository.

NOTE
Importing images requires users to have the Firmware Management privilege.
Multiple versions of files may be stored for a product. A stored image can be deployed to
appropriate products managed by the Management application.
You can obtain copies of software files by downloading them from the Knowledge Portal
(kp.brocade.com). Updates are available to customers that have current technical support
maintenance contracts. For more information, contact your service representative.
Copy the software files to a directory that is accessible from the Management application server.
The following sections discuss how to import images into the Management application:

• “Boot image management” on page 808
• “Software image management” on page 811
• “Unified image management” on page 814
Refer to the release notes for a specific software version to determine which files are required for
the software version.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

807

26

Products supporting the image import

Products supporting the image import
Table 82 lists the products that support the boot images, software images, and unified images.

TABLE 82

Products supporting the image import

Image type

Products supported

Boot images

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Software images

Unified images

•
•
•

Ethernet chassis (BigIron RX)
Ethernet routers (NetIron XMR, MLX, CES 00, CER)
Terathon (BigIron MG8, NetIron 40G, NetIron IMR 640)
Ethernet switches (FastIron Switches) and Data Center switch (TurboIron 24X)
ServerIron, ServerIron ADX
IP Encryption switch (SecureIron)
IronPoint FES
Ethernet chassis (BigIron RX)
Ethernet routers (NetIron XMR, MLX, CES 00, CER)
Terathon (BigIron MG8, NetIron 40G, NetIron IMR 640)
ServerIron, ServerIron ADX
IP Encryption switch (SecureIron)
Ethernet switches (FastIron Switches) and Data Center switch (TurboIron 24X)
EdgeIron 4802CF, 48G, 48GS, and 8x 10G
IronPoint FES
Ethernet chassis (BigIron RX) (release 02.2.01)
Ethernet routers (NetIron XMR, MLX, CES 00, CER) (Ethernet Edge router (CER)
release 03.5.00-application images only)
Terathon (BigIron MG8, NetIron 40G, NetIron IMR 640), (release 02.3.00)
VDX switches (release 2.1.0 and later)
NetIron Simplified XMR/MLX and CES/CER (release 5.3.0 and later)

Boot image management
Management of boot and monitor images from IronWare and Network OS products can be done
using the following Management application modules:

• Firmware Management — Manually imports boot images into the Management application.
This module also allows you to delete boot images from the Management application.

• Configuration Wizard — Deploys boot and monitor images that are available in the
Management application to IronWare and Network OS products. The Configuration
Management privilege is required to deploy boot and monitor images using the Configuration
Wizard.

Viewing the list of boot images
You can view a list of boot and monitor images that are known to the Management application from
the Boot Images tab of the Firmware Management dialog box if you have the Firmware
Management privilege in your Management application user account or role.
The Boot Images tab lists the boot or monitor images in the Management application and contains
the following buttons:

808

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Boot image management

26

• Import — Opens the Import Boot Image dialog box that allows you to browse and select the
boot or monitor image file you want to import into the Management application. Newly
imported images are saved to the Management application. They are displayed on the Boot
Images tab.

• Delete — Deletes the boot or monitor image from the Management application.
• Help — Provides information about the feature.
NOTE

The image features discussed in this section are available only to the products listed in “Products
supporting the image import” on page 808.

Manually importing boot images
The Import Boot Image dialog box allows you to browse and select an image file and add it to the
Boot Images list.

NOTE
You must select the AllowManualImports option in the Options dialog box — IP Preferences pane to
display the Import Boot Image dialog box. If this option is not selected, the following error message
displays: “The specified file is not a valid image file.”
To import boot images into the Management application, perform the following tasks.
1. Obtain the boot and monitor images you need. Refer to “Obtaining software files” on page 807.
2. Click the IP tab.
3. Select Configure > Firmware Management.
4. From the Firmware Management dialog box, click the Boot Images tab.
5. Click Import.
6. In the Import Boot Image dialog box, enter the name of the image file you want to import. You
can also click the Browse button to search for the file you want.
7.

Click OK.
After the import completes successfully, you see a message that the boot image imported
successfully. The Boot Image table lists the image version and the image label.
If the import fails because of missing or invalid information in the image header, one of the
following displays:

• If the AllowManualImports check box is not selected on the Options dialog box - IP
Preferences pane (refer to “Configuring image repository preferences” on page 162), the
following error message displays: “The specified file is not a valid image file.” Click Yes to
close the message.

• If the AllowManualImports check box is selected on the Options dialog box - IP Preferences
pane, the Import Boot Image dialog box displays. Continue to import the image by
completing the following steps.
a.

Select the software type from the Software Type list.

b.

Select the hardware from the Hardware Type list (the hardware product where the
image can be deployed).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

809

26

Boot image management

c.

Enter the image version in the Image Version field.

d.

Enter the label for the image in the either the Image Label field or the User Defined
Label field.
These fields are from 1 through 32 alphanumeric characters and allow the following
special characters: underscore (_), period (.), and hyphen (-).
The image file name excludes the file extension. For example, if the file name is
M2B07504.bin, the Image Label is M2B07504.
Enter additional information for the image in the User Defined Label field. This entry
appears under the More Information column of the Boot Images list of the Firmware
Management dialog box.

e.

Click OK on the Import Boot Image dialog box.
If the imported file already exists or the import operation fails for any reason, a
message displays with details.

8. Click OK.

Deploying boot images to products
The Management application stores previously imported boot and monitor images from IronWare
and Network OS products. These images can be placed in a boot image payload and deployed to
products using the Configuration Wizard.

Deleting boot images from the Management application
If a boot or monitor image must be deleted from the Management application, complete the
following steps.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Click the Boot Images tab on the Firmware Management dialog box.
3. Select the boot image that you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
A confirmation warning displays.
5. Click Yes to continue with the delete, or No to cancel it.

810

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software image management

26

Software image management
Software images are program files other than boot, monitor, or unified images. You can manage
software images using the following Management application modules:

• Discovery — Copies software images from IronWare and Network OS products on the network
into the Management application.

• Backup Scheduler — Copies software images from IronWare and Network OS products on a
regularly scheduled basis.

• Firmware Management — Manually imports software images into the Management
application. This module also allows you to delete software images from the Management
application.

• Configuration Wizard — Deploys software images that are available in the Management
application to IronWare and Network OS products.

Viewing the list of software images
To view the list of software images, select the Software Images tab on the Firmware Management
dialog box.

NOTE

You can view a list of software images that are known to the Management application from the
Software Images tab of the Firmware Management dialog box if you have the Firmware
Management privilege in your Management application user account or role.
For HyperEdge stacks, only the Master (ICX 6610) displays in the software images list.
The Software Images tab lists the software images in the Management application and contains
the following buttons:

• Import — Opens a dialog box that allows you to browse and select the software image file you
want to import and save in the Management application.

• Delete — Deletes the software image from the Management application.
• Help — Provides information about the feature.

Manually importing software images
To manually import software images into the Management application, perform the following tasks.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. Select Configure > Firmware Management.
3. From the Firmware Management dialog box, click the Software Images tab.
4. Click Import.
5. In the Import Software Image dialog box, enter the name of the image file you want to import.
You can also click the Browse button to search for the file you want.
6. Click OK.
After the import completes successfully, you see a message that the software image imported
successfully. The Software Image table lists the image version and the image label.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

811

26

Software image management

If the import fails because of missing or invalid information in the image header, one of the
following displays:

• If the AllowManualImports check box is not selected on the Options dialog box - IP
Preferences pane (refer to “Configuring image repository preferences” on page 162), the
following error message displays: “The specified file is not a valid image file.” Click Yes to
close the message.

• If the AllowManualImports check box is selected on the Options dialog box - IP Preferences
pane, the Import Software Image dialog box displays. Continue to import the image by
completing the following steps.
a.

Select the software type from the Software Type list.

b.

Select the hardware from the Hardware Type list.

c.

Enter the image version in the Image Version field.

d.

Enter the label for the image in the either the Image Label field or the User Defined
Label field.
These fields are from 1 through 32 alphanumeric characters and allow the following
special characters: underscore (_), period (.), and hyphen (-).

e.

Click OK on the Import Software Image dialog box.
If the imported file already exists or the import operation fails for any reason, a
message displays with details.

Automatically retrieving software images from products
The Backup Scheduler of the Management application checks the products under the
Management application at regular intervals to determine if they have new software images. New
images are copied (backed up) to the Management application.
The Backup Scheduler contains two types of scheduled backups: automatic configuration backup
and automatic software image backup. This section presents the procedure for automatic software
image backup. Refer to “Scheduling a configuration backup” on page 762 for the automatic
configuration backup procedure.
Make sure that the Management application is running; otherwise, scheduled tasks will not run.

NOTE
By default, the Backup Scheduler backs up software images once a day, at 2:00 am.

812

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Software image management

26

You can change the default schedule from the Backup Scheduler by performing the following tasks.
1. Click the IP tab.
2. From the Management application menu bar, select Configure > Configuration > Schedule
Backup.
or
Right-click Configuration > Schedule Backup.
The Schedule Backup dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 312.

FIGURE 312 Schedule Backup dialog box
3. Select the automatic software image backup task from the list, and click Edit.
The Edit Automatic Software Image Backup dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 313.

FIGURE 313 Edit Automatic Software Image Backup dialog box
4. Disable the scheduled backup or modify the frequency and time.
Refer to “Scheduling a configuration backup” on page 762 for information about how to
schedule a configuration backup.
5. Click OK.

Deploying software images to products
The Management application stores previously imported software images. These software images
can be placed in a software image payload and deployed to products using the Configuration
Wizard.
For a HyperEdge stack, you must deploy the ICX 6610 and ICX 6450 software images to the active
master unit separately. Make sure that both software images have the same software image
version. When both software image upgrades are complete, reload the HyperEdge stack. The
master unit upgrades the software images to the appropriate member units.

Deleting software images from the Management application
If a software image stored in the Management application must be deleted, perform the following
steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

813

26

Unified image management

1. Click the Software Images tab on the Firmware Management dialog box.
2. Select the software image that you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
A confirmation warning displays.
4. Click Yes to continue with the delete, or No to cancel it.

Unified image management
Unified images contain all images required to manage the product. Instead of upgrading each type
of image separately, you can use a unified image to upgrade all image types. For example, a unified
image for the BigIron RX Series contains boot, monitor, management, and interface images. When
deployed, a unified image can update all image types on a product simultaneously.
Unified images are not available for all IronWare and Network OS products, but if your product has
a unified image, you can manage that image from the Unified Firmware Images tab of the Firmware
Management dialog box. Management of images can be done using the following Management
application modules:

• Firmware Management — Manually imports unified images into the Management application.
This module also allows you to delete unified images from the Management application.
Alternatively, you can click the Update button to download unified firmware images to the
device.

• Configuration Wizard — Deploys unified images that are available in the Management
application to IronWare and Network OS products.

NOTE

Refer to the release notes for your IronWare and Network OS product to determine if unified images
are available for the product.

Viewing the list of unified images
You can view a list of unified images that are known to the Management application from the
Unified Firmware Images tab of the Firmware Management dialog box if you have the Firmware
Management privilege in your Management application user account or role.
To view the list of unified images, select the Unified Firmware Images tab from the Firmware
Management dialog box, as shown in Figure 314.

NOTE

For Network OS VDX switches, you can select either the logical chassis cluster or the fabric cluster
nodes.

814

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Unified image management

26

FIGURE 314 Firmware Management dialog box - Unified Firmware Images tab
The Unified Firmware Images tab contains the following buttons:

• Import — Opens a dialog box that allows you to browse and select the unified image file you
want to import into the Management application. Newly imported images are saved to the
Management application.

• Delete — Deletes the unified image from the Management application.
• View — Opens a dialog box that allows you to enter the location of the release notes or search
for the location of the release notes.

• Update — Updates the firmware images by way of the Configuration Wizard.

Importing unified images into the Management application
The Import Firmware Image from File dialog box allows you to browse and select an image file and
add it to the Unified Firmware Images tab.

NOTE

If the Management application does not recognize the image, you must enter the following
information manually.

NOTE

Allowing for manual import is not supported for simplified NetIron and unified VDX images.
To import unified images into the Management application, perform the following tasks.
1. Obtain the unified image you need. Refer to “Obtaining software files” on page 807.
2. Click the IP tab.
3. Select Configure > Firmware Management.
4. From the Firmware Management dialog box, click the Unified Firmware Images tab.
5. Click Import.
The Import Firmware Image from File dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

815

26

Unified image management

NOTE

You must install the Management application on an external FTP server or SCP server to
activate the Import Firmware Image from File dialog box.
6. In the Import Firmware Image from File field, enter the location of the unified image, or click
Browse to search for an existing image file. The image file can be in one of the following
formats: .tar, .gz, .zip, or .bin.
7.

In the Release Notes Location field, enter the location of the release notes or click Browse to
search for the location of the release notes. Release notes can be in one of the following
formats: .pdf or .txt.

NOTE

Importing release notes is optional and only supported for simplified NetIron and VDX firmware
images.
8. Click OK.
After the import completes successfully, a message displays that the unified image imported
successfully. The message also lists the image version and the image label.
If the import fails because of missing or invalid information in the image header, one of the
following displays:

• If the AllowManualImports check box is not selected on the Options dialog box - IP
Preferences pane (refer to “Configuring image repository preferences” on page 162), the
following error message displays: “The specified file is not a valid image file.” Click Yes to
close the message.

• If the AllowManualImports check box is selected on the Options dialog box - IP Preferences
pane, the Manual Import Unified Image dialog box displays. Continue to import the image
by completing the following steps.
a.

Enter the name of the unified image in the Image File field.

b.

Select an image type from the Unified Image Type list.

c.

Enter the image file name, excluding the file extension, in the Image Label field.

d.

Enter additional information for the image in the User Defined Label field. This entry
appears under the More Information column on the Unified Firmware Images tab.

e.

Click OK on the Manual Import Unified Image dialog box.
If the imported file already exists or the import operation fails for any reason, a
message displays with details.
After the import completes successfully, a message displays that the unified image
imported successfully.

816

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Unified image management

26

Updating unified images
Use the Configuration Wizard to update firmware images. You can access the Configuration Wizard
using one of the following methods:

• Select Configure > Configuration Wizard.
• Complete the following steps.
a.

Select Configure > Firmware > Management.

b.

Click the Unified Firmware Images tab on the Firmware Management dialog box.

c.

Click Update.

Refer to “Modifying a payload configuration” on page 774 for information on updating firmware
images using the Configuration Wizard.
For NetIron CER/CES devices running 5.4, when deploying the simplified firmware image from 5.4
to 5.5, complete the following steps.
1. Upgrade the simplified firmware image from 5.4 to 5.5.
Note that the FPGA image fails to download.
2. Reload the product.
3. Upgrade the FPGA (pbifmetro.bin) image manually.
4. Reload the product.

Deploying unified images to products
The Management application stores previously imported unified images. These images can be
placed in a unified image payload and deployed to products using the Configuration Wizard.

NOTE

Firmware images deploy to products one device at a time. If a combination of cluster nodes is
selected and the standalone VDX switches are targets, the deployment occurs for the cluster nodes
as well as for the standalone VDX switches.

Deleting unified images from the Management application
If a unified image must be deleted from the Management application, perform the following steps.
1. Click the Unified Firmware Images tab on the Firmware Management dialog box.
2. Select the unified image that you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
A confirmation warning displays.
4. Click Yes to continue with the delete, or No to cancel it.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

817

26

Serial firmware update and activation for NOS devices

Serial firmware update and activation for NOS devices
With Network OS release 4.0, you can update and activate firmware on an entire cluster (either
logical chassis mode or fabric cluster mode), on selected nodes in the cluster, or on nodes in
standalone mode, by performing the following steps.
1. Click the IP tab in the upper-left corner of the Management application.
2. Select Ethernet Fabrics from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
Cluster node members (or root node) are displayed, depending on your configuration.
3. Select the desired node or nodes for firmware updates and activation.
4. Right-click the highlighted nodes, then select Firmware > Firmware Management.

NOTE

If you are performing a firmware activation (but not a serial update) on only one node, you can
highlight this node, then perform a right-click and select Firmware > Firmware Activate. If this is
the only action you want to perform, you are done and do not need to continue with the steps
below.
5. In the Firmware Management dialog box, click the Unified Firmware Images tab.
6. Click Update.
7.

From the Hardware Type list, select VDX.

8. Use the Serial Update and Firmware Activate check boxes as desired. For example:

• You can select both boxes and enable the Firmware Activate check box to activate
firmware on each node in a serial process.

• You can leave the Serial Update check box clear and enable the Firmware Activate check
box to activate firmware on each node in a parallel process.

• You can select the Serial Update check box and leave the Firmware Activate check box
unselected to begin the firmware download serially on selected nodes while delaying
firmware activation on each node.
9. Click Next.
10. Follow any additional online instructions, and the procedure(s) that you selected begin.

818

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

27

VLAN Management

In this chapter
• VLAN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Port VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Spanning Tree Protocol configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VLAN routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

819
827
834
840

VLAN Manager
NOTE

VLAN Management is not supported on Fabric OS devices.
VLAN Manager allows you to manage Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) on Brocade products.
You can use VLAN Manager to view existing VLAN configurations on the products and the network,
and edit the configuration on supported platforms, including Network OS platforms but not the
Brocade 6910. By default, interfaces on a device that are not assigned to a VLAN are members of
the default port VLAN; therefore, all device interfaces assigned to the default VLAN constitute a
single Layer 2 broadcast domain.
When you assign an interface to a port VLAN, that interface is automatically removed from the
default VLAN, VLAN 1. Interfaces assigned to port VLANs can be defined as untagged, tagged, and
converged ports. An untagged port can be a member of only one VLAN, while a tagged port can be
a member of more than one VLAN. Interfaces defined as converged allow tagged and untagged
traffic to pass through an interface at the same time.

Default VLAN
When you enable port-based VLANs, all ports in the system are added to the default VLAN. The
default VLAN ID is 1. The default VLAN is configurable except on Network OS devices. If you want to
use the VLAN ID "VLAN 1" as a configurable VLAN, you can assign a different VLAN ID to the default
VLAN. You must specify a valid VLAN ID that is not already in use. For example, if you have already
defined VLAN 10, do not try to use "10" as the new VLAN ID for the default VLAN. Valid VLAN IDs are
from 1 through 4095. For DCB and Network OS products, the user-configurable range is from 1
through 3583 (3584 through 4095 are reserved). When GVLAN is enabled, the VLAN range
supported for the Brocade VDX 8770 and Brocade VDX 6740 and VDX 6740-1G is from 4091
through 4095.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

819

27

VLAN Manager

Super-aggregated VLAN
A super-aggregated VLAN allows multiple VLANs to be placed within another VLAN. This feature
allows you to construct Layer 2 paths and channels. It is useful for Virtual Private Network (VPN)
applications in which you need to provide a private, dedicated, Ethernet connection for an
individual client that can transparently reach its subnet across multiple networks.

Private VLAN
NOTE
PVLAN read-only support is provided.
Private VLAN (PVLAN) provides device isolation through the application of Layer 2 forwarding
constraints. PVLAN allows end devices to share the same IP subnet while being isolated at Layer 2.
This enables network designers to employ larger subnets and thereby reduce the address
management overhead.
There are three types of PVLAN:

• Primary VLAN — A primary VLAN is a unique and common VLAN identifier within the PVLAN
domain and its VLAN ID pairs.

• Isolated VLAN — An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN that isolates all hosts connected to its
ports at Layer 2.

• Community VLAN — A community VLAN is a secondary VLAN that is associated with a group of
ports that connect to a certain community of end devices based on mutual trust relationships.
A PVLAN domain is built with at least one pair of VLAN IDs: one primary VLAN ID (Vp) plus one or
more secondary VLAN IDs (Vs).

FIGURE 315 Private VLAN

Remote Switched Port Analyzer
Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) VLAN is used to monitor source ports, VLANs, and
destination ports on different switches in your network. You can configure any VLAN as an RSPAN
VLAN that meets the following conditions:

• The same RSPAN VLAN is used for an RSPAN session in all the switches.
• All participating switches support RSPAN.

820

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN Manager

27

FIGURE 316 Remote Switch Port Analyzer

Transparent LAN Support
Transparent LAN Support (TLS) supports the VLAN group rather than an individual VLAN. The TLS
service provided is associated with a single transparent VLANs that represents all the VLAN in a
group. When Transparent LAN Support (TLS) is assigned to a Virtual Fabric VLAN, the ports that are
tagged to TLS allow you to configure multiple cTags.

FIGURE 317 Transparent LAN Support

Configuration requirements for VLAN Manager
Before you can manage VLANs with VLAN Manager, you must complete the following tasks:

• Make sure that the discovery process has been run. Discovery captures configuration
information from IronWare OS products and places that information in the Management
application database. Refer to Chapter 3, “Discovery” for details on running discovery.

• Make sure the VLAN Manager privilege is in your Management application user role or account
if you need to use VLAN Manager.

• If you want to view VLAN connectivity in the Layer 2 topology, make sure Foundry Discovery
Protocol (FDP) or Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is enabled on the devices on the
network.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

821

27

VLAN Manager

Displaying a list of VLANs
To view the list of VLANs that were discovered on the network, select Configure > VLANs.
The VLAN View tab of the VLAN Manager dialog box displays.
The VLAN Manager toolbar contains the following buttons:

•
•
•
•

Add — Launches the Add VLAN dialog box.
Edit — Launches the Edit VLAN dialog box.
Delete — Launches the Delete VLAN dialog box.
STP — Allows you to configure STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST, or RPVST information for a product, port,
or VLAN.

• ACL — Launches the ACL Configuration dialog box, where you can assign access control lists to
a VLAN.

• 802.1ag CFM — If the Management application manages at least one of the service provider
products (NetIron XMR, MLX, CES, or CER), this button launches the 802.1ag CFM
configuration dialog box.

• Virtual Port IP — Launches the IP Address dialog box, which allows you to add an IP address to
a Switch Virtual Interface (SVI) on DCB products (also known as a Virtual Routing Interface).

• Deployments — Launches the Deploy VLANs dialog box and displays only saved VLAN and STP
deployments.

VLAN management in a VCS environment
Table 83 lists the VLAN management features that are supported in VCS mode (Fabric mode),
logical chassis mode, and standalone mode.

TABLE 83

VLAN management features supported for VCS mode

Feature

VCS (FC mode)

Logical chassis mode

Standalone mode

VLAN topology

Yes (shown at the fabric level)

Yes

Yes

STP topology

No

No

Yes

VLAN Manager

Yes (shown at the fabric level)

Yes

Yes

STP views

No

No

Yes

VLAN reports

Yes

Yes

Yes

STP reports

No

No

Yes

VLAN Manager tabs
VLAN Manager has three views:

• VLAN view
Displays distinct Layer 2 broadcast domains by VLAN ID. If FDP or LLDP is not enabled on a
device, each VLAN from each device is displayed in separate folders by VLAN ID. If FDP or LLDP
is enabled on the devices, a VLAN folder shows device connectivity on the Layer 2 broadcast
domains.

822

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN Manager

27

If there are super-aggregated VLANs that have been configured on the network, VLANs are
grouped by their super-aggregated VLAN memberships.
If the VLANs are in different networks, they display as different nodes, even if FDP or LLDP is
not enabled on the device.

-

For VCS fabric technology, a single VCS node displays in the VLAN view based on VLAN
membership of the fabric nodes. This view is supported in Fabric mode.

- Network OS products in standalone mode display like any other product in the VLAN view.
• Product view
Displays the VLANs configured on a device. The information is grouped by products. Select a
product to view the VLANs that are on that device.

-

For VCS fabric technology, a single VCS node displays in the Product view. All the VLANs
across its nodes display in Fabric mode.

-

Network OS products in standalone mode display like any other product in the Product
view.

• Port Group view
Displays all VLANs configured for the selected port group. Port group support is only available
in the VLAN editor launched from the Port Group View tab.

-

The Products list displays the switch name, VLAN name, PVLAN type, TLS, QoS, router port,
and FCoE.

NOTE

The PVLAN Type column is displayed only when you configure PVLAN using the CLI.

-

The Ports list displays the VLAN interface parameters for the selected product: switch
name, port identifier, port type, port name, port mode, STP, path cost, port priority, and
classifiers.

NOTE

The product must be part of the area of responsibility (AOR), along with the port groups, to
display and perform all the operations.

Displaying VLANs in the VLAN view
The VLAN View tab displays all the VLANs discovered on the network and lists them by VLAN IDs
(Figure 318).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

823

27

VLAN Manager

FIGURE 318 VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View tab
To view the VLANs or products in the VLAN View tab, complete the following steps.
1. Click the VLAN View tab in the VLAN Manager dialog box.
2. Expand the folder under the VLAN View tab, then double-click a super-aggregated VLAN to
display its port VLANs or products.
VLANs are listed by their topologically distinct broadcast domains. A VLAN that is listed several
times means that the products on which the VLAN has been configured cannot communicate
with each other. Either they are not physically connected or FDP or LLDP is not enabled on
these products. If FDP or LLDP is enabled, then each VLAN lists the products in that broadcast
domain.
3. Select a VLAN to expand the list of products listed under that VLAN. Use the Search tool to find
VLANs, products, or ports quickly.
A VLAN may be listed several times. For example, the first three VLAN1s have only one product.
Each product in each VLAN is in its own broadcast domain and either does not have
connectivity with other products or FDP or LLDP is not enabled on that product.
The fourth VLAN1 has several products listed under it. All those products are in the same Layer
2 broadcast domain.
When a port VLAN is selected, the Edit, Delete, and STP buttons become available. At this
point, you can create or modify port VLANs, delete a port VLAN, configure STP or RSTP
definitions for IronWare OS products, and configure STP, MSTP, RSTP, PVST, and RPVST
definitions for Network OS products in standalone mode.

824

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN Manager

27

4. Click a product under a port VLAN to select it. The interfaces on that product that belong to the
VLAN are listed in the interface list.
The list shows the following information:

• Port — The interface number. This can be a port number represented as a unit, slot
number or port number, or a virtual routing interface ID.

• Port Type — A description of the type of interface on the product, for example,
ETHERNET_INTERFACE or VIRTUAL_INTERFACE.

• Port Name — The name of the interface, if one was configured.
• Port Mode — Indicates the tag mode of the interface. Tagged represents the port is in dual
mode but is in the tagged state for that particular VLAN. Untagged represents the port is
untagged for that particular VLAN. The third port mode is Converged.

• STP — Indicates whether STP is enabled or disabled.
• Path Cost — The STP cost of using the port to reach the root bridge.
• Port Priority — The preference that STP gives this port relative to other ports for forwarding
traffic out of the spanning tree.

• Classifiers — The VLAN Classifier group IDs associated with Access/Converged ports and
link aggregation groups. The following values are displayed if Virtual Fabrics is configured
on a Network OS device.

-

cTag -— Tagged mode
MAC Address and MAC Group ID — Untagged mode

Displaying VLANs by products
The Product View tab of the VLAN Manager dialog box presents the products that have been
discovered on the network and the VLANs that have been assigned to them.

NOTE

Only products assigned to Management application areas of responsibility (AORs) are listed under
the VLANs in the Product View tab.
To view VLANs, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Product View tab in the VLAN Manager dialog box.
The Product View tab of the VLAN Manager dialog box displays (Figure 319).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

825

27

VLAN Manager

FIGURE 319 VLAN Manager dialog box - Product View tab
2. Expand a product to display the port VLANs that have been configured on that product.
3. Click a VLAN in the list to display the interfaces on that product that belong to the VLAN.
4. Click MAC Group IDs to display the MAC group address (Figure 320).
The MAC group address dialog box is displayed.

FIGURE 320 MAC Group Address
NOTE

The MAC addresses are displayed with the associated MAC group IDs

826

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port VLANs

27

Port VLANs
VLAN Manager facilitates the creation, modification, and deletion of port VLANs on products that
are known to the Management application. It also aids in the bulk deployment of these VLANs. For
example, VLAN 3 can be configured on four products. If the VLAN definition for VLAN 3 is modified,
the new definition can be deployed to all four products at one time.
The Configure Port VLAN function in VLAN Manager allows you to define a port VLAN definition that
adds a new VLAN to a product or modify an existing port VLAN on a product. The port VLANs can be
designated as tagged, untagged, or converged.

Adding or modifying port VLANs
To create or modify port VLANs, complete the following steps.
1. On the VLAN Manager dialog box, click the VLAN View or Product View tab to enable the Add
button.
2. Click Add to add port VLANs or click Edit to modify existing port VLANs.
The Ports tab of the Add VLAN dialog box displays (Figure 321).

FIGURE 321 Add VLAN dialog box - Ports tab
3. Enter a VLAN ID in the Configure VLANs field.
You can enter more than one ID, either by range (for example, 10-20, 30-40) or by separating
individual IDs with a comma (for example, 10, 45, 79, 30). For DCB products, the VLAN ID
range is from 1 through 3583 and for Network OS products the range is from 1 through 8191.
cTag classifiers are supported for Virtual Fabrics and the range is from 2 through 4094.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

827

27

Port VLANs

4. Click the Load Products button. Products that already have the entered VLAN IDs configured on
them are automatically moved to the Selected Products list. The Load Products button is
disabled by default.
5. Under the Available Products list, select one or more products to which the VLAN will be
assigned. You can also use the Search tool to find ports.
6. Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Products list.
7.

Expand the folder for a selected product in the Available Ports list to display all the interfaces
or trunk groups on the product that can be added to the VLAN.
The Selected Ports list displays the list of configured VLANs. Initially, these VLANs contain no
ports. If no ports or trunk groups are selected, an empty VLAN is created on the products (DCB
and Network OS products).

8. In the Available Ports list, select the interfaces that you want to assign to a VLAN.
If you place your pointer over an interface in the Available Ports list, a tooltip appears, showing
the VLAN assignment of the interface. You can also use the Search toolbar to search for ports
under the Available Ports list, then assign the ports found to the VLAN.
9. In the Available Ports list, select the port-channel that you want to assign to a VLAN.
10. In the Select VLANs list, select the VLAN you want to assign to the selected interfaces. The list
includes the default VLAN (VLAN1) and the VLAN or VLANs you are currently creating. You can
assign one or more VLANs to the selected ports.
In the Selected Ports list, each VLAN node is shown as Tagged, Untagged, or Dual Mode. If a
port is already tagged in one VLAN, it can be marked as Tagged in other VLANs. The port can
also be marked as Untagged in other VLANs, which changes its mode to Dual Mode. Dual
Mode is not supported on Network OS products.
11. Complete one of the following tasks:

• If you want to assign the interface to the VLAN as an untagged port, select Type as Tagged
and click right arrow button.

• If you want to assign the interface to the VLAN as a tagged port, select Type as Untagged
and click right arrow button.

• If you want to make the VLAN on the interface dual mode, assign that interface as tagged
and select the same interface and assign as untagged to another VLAN. Dual mode ports
can be added to any VLAN except for the default (VLAN 1).
12. Add a cTag by completing the following steps.
a.

Select the port from the Available Ports list.

b.

From the VLAN ID folder, select a VLAN ID greater than 4096.

c.

From the Type list, select Tagged.
The cTag classifier list is enabled.

d.

Enter the valid cTag ID (from 2 through 4094) and click the right arrow.

13. Click the Select Classifiers button to launch the Select Classifier Groups dialog box, shown in
Figure 322, where you can assign classifiers and rules for supported DCB and Network OS
platform-based VLANs.

828

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port VLANs

27

The Select Classifiers button is disabled by default. To enable the button, select an untagged
and classifier-configured port in the Selected Ports list..

FIGURE 322 Select Classifier Groups dialog box
NOTE

The cTag classifier list is disabled when Untagged is selected.

NOTE

The MAC and MAC Group classifier configurations are not supported in Network Advisor

Adding or modifying dual mode ports
You can configure an interface in a VLAN as a dual mode port by assigning it as a tagged port to
one VLAN and as an untagged port to another VLAN. You can add a dual mode port to any VLAN
except the default VLAN, VLAN 1.

NOTE
Dual mode is not supported on Network OS products.
To add or modify a dual mode port, perform the following steps.
1. Follow the steps in “Adding or modifying port VLANs” on page 827 to familiarize yourself with
adding tagged and untagged ports to a VLAN.
2. Select Configuration Manager > VLAN Manager.
The VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View tab displays.
3. Click the Product View tab.
4. Click Add.
5. From the Available Ports list on the Ports tab of the Add VLAN dialog box, select the interface
that will be added as a dual mode port.
6. Select a VLAN from the Select VLANs list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

829

27

Port VLANs

7.

Click the Untag button and click the left arrow to assign the port as an untagged port to the
selected VLAN. The Selected Ports list shows the interface listed under the VLAN to which it
was assigned.

8. Select the same interface from the Available Ports list.
9. Select another VLAN from the Select VLANs list.
10. Click the Tag button and click the right arrow to assign the port as a tagged port to the second
VLAN. The Selected Ports list shows the port as untagged under one VLAN and tagged under
another VLAN.

Assigning DCB ports to a VLAN
In Data Center Bridging (DCB) switches, the L2 interface mode of the port determines whether a
port can be in an untagged, tagged, or converged mode. Table 84 shows the L2 mode and tagged
mode compatibility on the DCB interface.

TABLE 84

L2 mode and tagged mode compatibility on a DCB interface

L2 mode

Tagged mode

Access, Converged

Untagged

Trunk, Converged

Tagged

Converged

Dual

NOTE

To make L2 interface mode changes, you must have the DCB Management privilege.
You can change the L2 interface mode of a port using the Add LAG dialog box. Refer to “Adding a
LAG” on page 493 for instructions.

830

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port VLANs

27

Adding VLAN properties
The Add VLAN dialog box has two tabs: Ports and Properties. The VLAN properties vary for different
products, for example:

• When an IronWare OS VLAN is selected, the Name, QoS, Spanning Tree, and Router Interface
fields, and the Transparent VLAN Flooding enable check box display.

• When a DCB VLAN or product is selected and moved to the Products/VLAN list, the Name and
Admin Status fields and the FCoE check box display. All the fields displayed for DCB products
are read-only.
To add VLAN properties, complete the following steps.
1. On the Add VLAN dialog box, click the Properties tab.
The Add VLAN dialog box — Properties tab, shown in Figure 323, displays.

FIGURE 323 Add VLAN dialog box — Properties tab
2. Click the VLAN View option to view the products to which the VLANs are to be deployed, or click
the Product View option to display the VLANs that are to be deployed to that product.
3. Select the Fabric OS (FOS) VLAN, IronWare (IOS) VLAN, or Network OS (NOS) VLAN type from
the Target Context list. You must select only one VLAN type. If multiple VLAN types are
selected, the target context becomes the default and an error message displays.
4. Enter the following information:
For IOS VLAN Properties:

• Name — Displays the name of the VLAN, which is editable.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

831

27

Port VLANs

• QoS — Select a QoS level from the list.
- Select Low (None or 0) through High (7) for NetIron CES products. Select None for NetIron
CER and NetIron CES products if the product does not have VLAN priority configured.
(None applies only to NetIron CER and NetIron CES products.)

-

Select Low (0) through High (7) for all other IronWare OS IP products.

• Spanning Tree — Select the type of Spanning Tree Protocol from the Spanning Tree list. The list
options include STP, RSTP, and None.

• Router Interface — If you want to add a virtual routing interface to the VLAN, enter the virtual
routing interface number in this field. You can add an IP address to the virtual routing interface
once the VLAN is deployed.

-

From the Product View tab, you can configure one virtual routing interface per VLAN for
each product.

-

From the VLAN View tab, you can edit virtual routing interfaces on multiple products for a
specific VLAN.
The Router Interface field is editable for products that support routing and have a router
image of the firmware installed.

• Transparent VLAN Flooding (NetIron 5.4 and later) — Selecting this check box allows packets to
be forwarded without any form of CPU intervention including MAC learning and MAC
destination lookups.

NOTE

Because this feature floods all VLAN packets in hardware, it is not expected to work in
conjunction with routing functions.

For FOS VLAN properties:

-

Name — Displays the name of the VLAN, which is editable.
Admin Status — Displays one of the following administrative statuses for the VLAN
interface:

• Up — The special routing interface is up and can route traffic from other VLANs.
• Down — The special routing interface is down and cannot route traffic from other
VLANs.

-

FCoE — Indicates whether Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) is enabled or disabled on
the VLAN.

For NOS VLAN properties:

-

Target Context — Select a VLAN type (FOS VLAN, IOS VLAN, or NOS VLAN) from the list.

-

Virtual Interface — Select the check box to enable the virtual interface.

Name — Displays the name of the VLAN, which is editable.
QoS — Select a QoS level from the list.
Spanning Tree — Select the type of Spanning Tree Protocol from the list. The list options
include STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST, RPVST, and None.

5. Click OK to save the changes.

832

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Port VLANs

27

Modifying port VLAN properties
Complete the following steps to modify port VLANs using the VLAN View tab or the Product View tab
on the Edit VLAN dialog box.
1. On the VLAN Manager dialog box, click the VLAN View or Product View tab.
2. If in the VLAN view, select and expand a VLAN entry, or if in the Product view, select and expand
a product and click the Edit button.

NOTE

When a Network OS VLAN is selected, the Name and Admin fields display. In VCS Fabric mode,
the VLAN name from the seed switch of the fabric displays.
The Ports tab of the Edit VLAN dialog box displays.
3. Select the IronWare (IOS) VLAN, Fabric OS (FOS) VLAN, or Network OS (NOS) VLAN type from
the Target Context list. You must select only one VLAN type. If multiple VLAN types are
selected, the target context becomes the default and an error message displays.
4. Modify the information detailed in step 4 of “Adding VLAN properties” on page 831.
5. Click OK to save the changes.

Deleting port VLANs from products
Deleting a port VLAN removes all the interfaces on a product from that VLAN. A port VLAN can be
deleted in both the VLAN and Product views.

Deleting a port VLAN in VLAN view
1. On the VLAN Manager dialog box, select VLAN View.
2. Select the VLAN to be deleted. You can select multiple VLANs by holding down the Ctrl and
Shift keys and clicking the VLAN nodes.
3. Click Delete to launch the Deploy VLANs dialog box.
4. Deploy the VLAN configuration to the product by completing the deployment steps in
“Deploying VLAN configurations” on page 834.
Once the VLAN is deployed, it is deleted from the product.

Deleting a port VLAN in Product view
1. On the VLAN Manager dialog box, select Product View.
2. Expand the product on which you want the VLAN to be deleted.
3. Select the VLAN under the product. You can select multiple VLANs by holding down the Ctrl and
Shift keys and clicking the VLAN nodes.
4. Click Delete to launch the Deploy VLANs dialog box.
5. Deploy the VLAN configuration to the product by completing the deployment steps in
“Deploying VLAN configurations” on page 834.
Once the VLAN is deployed, it is deleted from the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

833

27

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

Deploying VLAN configurations
The Deploy VLANs dialog box allows you to deploy a VLAN configuration to target products.
Duplicate action is not supported.
1. Select a deployment option:

• Click the Deploy now option if you want to deploy the VLAN definition.
• Click the Save deployment only option if you want to save the VLAN definition without
scheduling its deployment.

• Click the Schedule option if you want to schedule the deployment of the VLAN definition.
2. Select a Save Configuration option:

• Click the Save to running option to save the configuration while the system is running.
• Click the Save to running and startup option to save the configuration both while the
system is running and when the system starts up.

• Click the Save to running and startup then reboot option to save the configuration both
while the system is running and when the system starts up, and then automatically reboot.
3. Enter a name in the Name field that will be used to identify the configured VLAN.
4. Enter a description in the Description field that will be used to identify the configured VLAN.
5. Click the Schedule check box, which is available if you selected Schedule as a deployment
option, to select a frequency.
6. Click the Snapshots check box if you want the Management application to run and save a
report after this configuration is deployed to the device. You can run snapshots before and
after deployments only for IronWare products. Snapshots are not supported for DCB products.
7.

Click OK to deploy the configuration on the selected port VLAN.

8. Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected products.
9. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) is a Layer 2 protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged
local area network (LAN). STP allows a network design to include spare (redundant) links to provide
automatic backup paths if an active link fails. STP creates a spanning tree within a mesh network
of connected Layer 2 bridges and disables those links that are not part of the tree, leaving a single
active path between any two network nodes.

NOTE
STP is disabled when a Network OS product is in VCS mode and an error message is displayed if you
configure STP from the Management application. The VCS nodes do not participate in the STP
topology; however, STP can be enabled on external switches connected to the VCS fabric.
The Management application supports the following types of STP:

• STP — The Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1d) is a link layer network protocol that ensures a
loop-free topology for any bridged LAN.

834

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

27

• RSTP — Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w Internet standard) is a refinement of STP,
which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change.

• MSTP — Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s Internet standard) allows several VLANs
to be mapped to a reduced number of spanning tree instances. This is possible because most
networks do not need more than a few logical topologies. Each instance handles multiple
VLANs that have the same Layer 2 topology.
DCB, Network OS (v3.0.0 and later), and IronWare products in standalone mode support viewing of
STP, Rapid STP (RSTP), and Multiple STP (MSTP). Network OS products in standalone mode also
support Per-VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) and Rapid PVST (RPVST). For Network OS (v4.0.0 and
later), configurations of Spanning Tree Protocol on PVLAN can be viewed in the STP Configuration
dialog box.

Configuring STP or RSTP on a port VLAN
You can configure Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
attributes from the VLAN View tab or the Product View tab on the VLAN Manager dialog box.

NOTE
The VLAN View tab displays VLAN membership information for the Brocade 6910 switch; however,
STP configuration is not supported on the IronWare OS 6910 switch.
1. Perform one of the following tasks to select the VLAN on which STP or RSTP will be configured:

• On the VLAN View tab, expand the list of VLANs and select one or multiple VLANs on which
STP or RSTP will be configured.

• On the Product View tab, expand the product, product group, or IP subnet folder that
contains the products on which the VLAN you want is configured. Then expand the entry to
display its VLAN and select the VLAN where STP or RSTP will be configured. You can select
more than one VLAN from this tab.
For either view, you can use the Search tool to look for the VLAN on which STP or RSTP will be
configured.

NOTE

The parameters display differently depending on whether the STP configuration is at the
product, VLAN, or port level.
Either of these methods enables the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box.
2. Click the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box to display the STP Configuration dialog
box (Figure 324).
The products on which the VLAN is configured appear on the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

835

27

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

FIGURE 324 STP Configuration dialog box
3. Select the target switch, VLAN, or port from the Target Context list. Target contexts and
spanning tree options at the product, VLAN, or port level are listed in Table 85.

TABLE 85

Spanning tree configuration matrix

Target context

STP type

IOS VLAN

STP, RSTP

IOS Port

STP, RSTP

FOS Product

STP, RSTP, MSTP

FOS VLAN

MSTP

FOS Port

STP, RSTP, MSTP

NOS Product

STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST, and RPVST

NOS VLAN

MSTP

NOS Port

STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVST, and RPVST

4. Select the type of Spanning Tree Protocol from the Spanning Tree list.
5. Select the Enable check box if you want to enable the protocol you selected.
6. Enter a value in the Priority field to identify the root bridge in a spanning tree (instance of STP).
The bridge with the lowest value has the highest priority and is the root. A higher numerical
value means a lower priority; thus, the highest priority is 0. The values range from 0 through
61440 for a Fabric OS device; the default is 32768. The values range from 0 through 65535
for an IronWare OS device; the default is 32768.
7.

Enter the number of seconds a bridge waits (the listen and learn period) before it begins to
forward data packets in the Forward Delay field. The values range from 4 through 30 seconds.
The default is 15 seconds.

8. Enter the number of seconds a root bridge waits before it sends the next BPDU in the Hello
Time field. The values range from 1 through 10 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
9. Enter the number of seconds a bridge waits for a hello packet from the root bridge before
initiating a topology change in the Max Age field. The values range from 6 through 40 seconds.
The default is 20 seconds.

836

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

27

10. The Force Version list is available only if you selected RSTP. This parameter forces the bridge to
send BPDUs in a specific format. You can enter one of the following values:

• 0: The bridge has been forced to operate in STP default mode.
• 1: The bridge has been forced to operate in RSTP default mode.
11. Specify an interval in the Re-enable Port Interval field, available only if you selected RSTP. This
interval specifies the number of seconds to wait before the port is enabled. The values range
from 10 through 1000000. The default is 300.
12. Click the Re-Enable Port State check box, which is available only if you selected RSTP, to
enable or disable the timeout mechanism for the port.
13. Select the Path Cost option: Standard or Custom, available only if you selected RSTP. The path
cost is the cost of using the port to reach the root bridge. When selecting among multiple links
to the root bridge, STP chooses the link with the lowest path cost and blocks the other paths.
Each port type has its own default STP path cost.
14. Click the right arrow button to move the selected product to the Selected VLANs list.
15. Click OK to launch the Deploy STP dialog box.

Deploying an STP configuration on a port VLAN
The Deploy STP dialog box allows you to view the STP configuration summary and configure
deployment parameters for a selected VLAN.
The Deploy STP dialog box allows you to deploy an STP configuration to target products. Duplicate
action is not supported.
1. Select a deployment option:

• Click the Deploy now option if you want to deploy the STP configuration.
• Click the Save deployment only option if you want to save the STP configuration without
scheduling its deployment.

• Click the Schedule option if you want to schedule the deployment of the STP configuration.
2. Select a Save Configuration option:

• Click the Save to running option to save the configuration while the system is running.
• Click the Save to running and startup option to save the configuration both while the
system is running and when the system starts up.

• Click the Save to running and startup then reboot option to save the configuration both
while the system is running and when the system starts up, and then automatically reboot.
3. Enter a name in the Name field that will be used to identify the configured VLAN.
4. Click the Schedules check box, which is available if you selected Schedule as a deployment
option, to select a frequency.
5. Click the Snapshots check box if you want the Management application to run and save a
report after this configuration is deployed to the device.
6. Click OK to launch the Deployment Status dialog box.
7.

Click Start on the Deployment Status dialog box to save the changes to the selected products.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

837

27

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

8. After the deployment has successfully completed, click Close to close the Deployment Status
dialog box.

Configuring MSTP on a product
You can configure MSTP attributes from the VLAN View tab or the Product View tab on the VLAN
Manager dialog box.
1. Perform one of the following tasks to select the VLAN on which MSTP will be configured:

• On the VLAN View tab, expand the list of VLANs and select one or multiple VLANs on which
MSTP will be configured.

• On the Product View tab, expand the product, product group, or IP subnet folder that
contains the products on which the VLAN you want is configured. Then expand the entry to
display its VLAN and select the VLAN where MSTP will be configured. You can select more
than one VLAN from this tab.
Either of these methods enables the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box. For either
view, you can use the Search tool to look for the VLAN on which MSTP will be configured.
2. Click the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box to display the STP Configuration dialog
box.
3. Select the target switch, VLAN, or port from the Target Context list.
4. Select MSTP from the Spanning Tree list.
The products on which the VLAN is configured appear on the STP Configuration dialog box
(Figure 325).

FIGURE 325 STP Configuration dialog box (with MSTP selected)
5. Select the Enable check box if you want to enable MSTP.
6. Enter a value in the Priority field to identify the root bridge in a spanning tree (instance of
MSTP). The bridge with the lowest value has the highest priority and is the root. A higher
numerical value means a lower priority; thus, the highest priority is 0. The values range from 0
through 61440. The default is 32768.
7.

838

Enter the number of seconds a bridge waits (the listen and learn period) before it begins to
forward data packets in the Forward Delay field. The values range from 4 through 30 seconds.
The default is 15 seconds.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Spanning Tree Protocol configuration

27

8. Enter the number of seconds a root bridge waits before it sends the next BPDU in the Hello
Time field. The values range from 1 through 10 seconds. The default is 2 seconds.
9. Enter the number of seconds a bridge waits for a hello packet from the root bridge before
initiating a topology change in the Max Age field. The values range from 6 through 40 seconds.
The default is 20 seconds.
10. Enter the interval after which the port will be enabled in the Re-enable Port Interval field. The
value ranges from 10 through 1000000. The default is 300.
11. Click the Re-enable Port State check box to enable the timeout mechanism for the port.
12. Select the Path Cost behavior option (Standard or Custom).
13. Specify the number of hops in a region before the Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs) are
discarded and the information held for a port is aged in the Max Hops field. The hop count
determines when to trigger a reconfiguration. The value ranges from 1 through 40. The default
is 20.
14. Enter MSTP in the Region field.
15. Enter the revision number for the configuration in the Revision field. The values range from 0
through 255. The default is 0.
16. Click OK to launch the Deploy STP dialog box.

Assigning an MSTP instance to a VLAN
NOTE
For Network OS products in standalone mode, you can configure from 1 through 31 MSTP instances
and for Fabric OS DCB switches, you can configure from 1 through 15 MSTP instances; for the Fabric
OS converged 10 GbE switch module for the IBM BladeCenter, you can configure from 1 through 31
MSTP instances.
1. Click the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box to display the STP Configuration dialog
box.
2. Select a VLAN node (in this example, a FOS node) in the Selected VLANs list, and click the left
arrow button.
The target is automatically set to FOS VLAN in the Target Context list.
3. Select MSTP from the Spanning Tree list.
The STP Configuration dialog box displays the Available MSTP Instances list.
4. Select one instance from the Available MSTP Instances list and, using the right arrow button,
assign it to a VLAN in the Selected VLANs list.

Adding an MSTP instance
1. Click the STP button on the VLAN Manager dialog box to display the STP Configuration dialog
box.
2. Select a VLAN node (in this example, a FOS node) in the Selected VLANs list, and click the left
arrow button.
The target is automatically set to FOS VLAN in the Target Context list.
3. Select MSTP from the Spanning Tree list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

839

27

VLAN routing

The STP Configuration dialog box displays the Available MSTP Instances list.
4. Select an MSTP instance from the list under the Available MSTP Instances list, or enter the
MSTP instance number.
5. Click Add.
A new row is added to the Available MSTP Instances list. You can change the bridge priority,
which is set, by default, to 32768.

VLAN routing
A VLAN restricts the broadcast domain to only its interface members. If nodes connected to two
different VLANs want to communicate, they require an external router to route between the VLANs.
Optionally, DCB products offer the ability to create a Switch Virtual Interface (SVI) to route between
VLANs.
An SVI is a VLAN of switch ports represented by one interface to a routing or bridging system. There
is no physical interface for the VLAN and the SVI provides the Layer 3 processing for packets from
all switch ports associated with the VLAN. There is one-to-one mapping between a VLAN and an
SVI; therefore, only a single SVI can be mapped to a VLAN. The VLAN is mapped to a network
address using the SVI. All the nodes in the VLAN will belong to the subnet of the SVI.

NOTE

An SVI is also called a Virtual Routing Interface (VRI) in IronWare OS terms and Virtual Ethernet (VE)
in Network OS terms. The SVI in DCB products, VRI in IronWare OS products, and VE in Network OS
products are the same.

Managing IP addresses on an SVI
Switch Virtual Interfaces (SVIs) can be added to port VLANs when you create or modify VLAN
definitions. SVIs can only be created in Layer 3 products.
Once VLAN definitions are deployed to products, you can add an IP address to the SVI by
completing the following steps.
1. On the VLAN Manager dialog box, complete one of the following tasks:

• Click the VLAN View tab and expand the VLAN node. Select the product that contains the SVI
that you want to define. The list of interfaces appears in the interface list. Click the SVI in the
list of interfaces to select it.

• On the Product View tab, expand the product or group folders. Expand the products under the
folder and select the VLAN that contains an SVI. The list of interfaces appears in the interface
list. Click the SVI in the list of interfaces to select it.

NOTE

You must select the Virtual Interface (Port Type) row in the Ports table to enable the IP button.
2. Click the IP button.
The Virtual Port - IP Configuration dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 326. If IP addresses
have been configured for the SVI, they are listed in the Selected IP Addresses list.

840

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLAN routing

27

FIGURE 326 Virtual Port - IP Configuration dialog box
3. Complete one of the following steps:

• To add a new IP address to the SVI, enter the IP address in the IP Address field and click the
right arrow button to move it to the Selected IP Addresses list.

• To modify an IP address of an SVI, select the IP address from the list and click the left arrow
button to move the IP address back to the IP Parameters list. Because this list is for a single IP
address, multiple IP addresses cannot be edited.
4. Enter the following information:

• Primary or Secondary options (DCB products only) — Indicates whether the IP address is the
primary or secondary IP address of the VLAN.

• Type — Select the type of IP address you want to assign to the VLAN. Choose CIDR or
IP/Subnet.

• Enter the IP address in the fields provided:
- If you chose the CIDR format, enter a subnet address in the
subnet_address/subnet_mask_bits format (for example, 192.168.2.10/24).

-

If you chose the IP/Subnet format, enter a subnet address in the
subnet_address/subnet_mask format (for example, 192.168.2.10/255.255.255.0).

5. Click the right arrow button to add the IP address to the Selected IP Addresses list. If additional
IP addresses are needed, continue adding them to the SVI and VE. You can assign a maximum
of 255 IP addresses on DCB products and a maximum of 24 IP addresses on IronWare OS
products.
6. Click OK to begin the deployment of the address to the product.
The Deploy IP Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 327).

FIGURE 327 Deploy IP Configuration dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

841

27

VLAN routing

7.

Click the Deploy now option.

8. Select a Save Configurations option:

• Click the Save to running option to save the configuration while the system is running.
• Click the Save to running and startup option to save the configuration both while the system is
running and when the system starts up.

• Click the Save to running and startup then reboot option to save the configuration both while
the system is running and when the system starts up, and then automatically reboot.

• Enter a name in the Name field that will be used to identify the configured VLAN.
9. Enter a description in the Description field that will be used to identify the configured VLAN.
10. Click OK to deploy the IP address.

842

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

28

MPLS Management

In this chapter
• MPLS pre-configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• LSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS Virtual Leased Line (VLL) overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VLL manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VPLS Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VCID pools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• 802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

843
844
845
846
867
869
882
884
897
898

MPLS pre-configuration
Before you use the MPLS, you should make sure that you meet the following requirements.
1. Make sure all MPLS-capable devices meet the MPLS license requirements (refer to “MPLS
licensing” on page 844.
2. Configure a loopback interface on each Ethernet router device and assign an IP address.
3. Make sure the customer-facing ports are not running FDP/CDP to be configured as a VLL or
VPLS endpoint. Disable FDP/CDP on those ports.
4. Complete the following steps using a command line interface. For step-by-step procedures,
refer to your product’s configuration guide.
a.

Make sure that core-facing interfaces have unique IP address for MPLS.

b.

Make sure OSPF or IS-IS is configured for traffic engineering (if you need LSP
functionality).

c.

Make sure the core-facing interfaces and loopback interfaces are part of OSPF or IS-IS for
traffic engineering (if you need LSP functionality).

5. Enable MPLS on core-facing interfaces using the Management application (refer to
“Configuring LDP” on page 845).
6. Create LSPs between the Provider Edge routers in both directions using the Management
application (refer to “LSP” on page 846).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

843

28

MPLS licensing

7.

Create VLL instances using the Customer-facing ports using the Management application
(refer to “VLL manager” on page 869).

8. Create VPLS instances using the Customer-facing ports using the Management application
(refer to “VPLS Manager” on page 884).

MPLS licensing
The following are MPLS capable products:

• Ethernet Backbone router, Ethernet Core router, and Ethernet router running version 5.0.00 or
earlier

• Ethernet Edge router and Ethernet Carrier router with MPLS software license running version
5.1.00 or later

• Ethernet Edge router and Ethernet Carrier router running version 5.0.00 or earlier
The following configurations are supported as MPLS configurations:

• Virtual Leased Line (VLL and Local-VLL).
• Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS).
• Label Switching Path (LSP) features, including RSVP LSP and related configurations.
During discovery, all MPLS-licensed products are added to the MPLS Licensed and Configured
Products product group (Figure 328).

FIGURE 328 MPLS Licensed and Configured Products group

844

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

MPLS overview

28

The following conditions must be met for inclusion in the MPLS Licensed and Configured Products
product group:

• Your version of the Management application supports MPLS.
• Adding the product does not exceed the MPLS product license limit.
For more information about how the Management application counts MPLS products, refer to
Brocade Network Advisor Software Licensing Guide.
When the license limit is at 90%, when launching a VLL, VPLS or LSP, the following message is
displayed:
Managed MPLS count has crossed 90% of licensed MPLS count.

This is shown once per session.
If the MPLS product license limit is reached, when an MPLS capable product is discovered with a
configuration, those MPLS configurations (VLL, VPLS or LSPs) will not be discovered, and the
following message is logged in Master Log:
Managed MPLS count exceeds the licensed MPLS count.

When a network discovery is performed and if the network contains many MPLS-licensed products,
there is no particular order in which the products are added to the MPLS Licensed and Configured
Products product group. Any products in that group may be used in VLL, Local-VLL, VPLS or LSP
configurations.
It is possible to add an MPLS-capable product that is not in the product group when configuring a
VLL, Local-VLL or VPLS if the license limit is not exceeded. When the license limit is reached, an
add/edit/duplicate/delete operation can be performed only on the products in the product group.

MPLS overview
Multi-protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is a packet-switching protocol that handles packet
forwarding decisions based on the content of a label assigned to the packet. Label-based switching
provides independence from the underlying data link layer protocol, allowing MPLS to carry traffic
that uses different underlying structures and protocols, such as SONET frames, ATM frames,
Ethernet frames, and IP packets. MPLS provides the basis for the following:

• Label-switched paths (LSPs).
• Virtual Leased Line (VLL) implementations.
• Virtual Private Line Services (VPLS).
For more information about MPLS, refer to your product’s Configuration Guide.

Configuring LDP
LDP is configured from the Configuration wizard Product Payload - LDP Settings dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

845

28

LSP

1. Select the Set option to set the selected settings in the product configuration. This creates a
new configuration newly or overwrites the existing configuration. Unset removes the settings.

NOTE

To enable MPLS on the target devices, select the Set option then click Add and complete the
wizard.
2. Select the checkboxes and enter the required information in the fields provided as follows:

-

Advertise Labels ACL - Enables the 64 character text field for entering an Access Control
List (ACL) name.

-

Hello Interval - The interval in seconds between sending LDP hello messages. The range is
1-32767. The hello interval must be smaller than the hold time set by Hello Timeout.

-

Use FEC 128 for autodiscovered peers - FEC 129 is the default. FEC 128 applies only to
VPLS environments that include both static-configured peers and auto-discovered peers.

-

Hello Timeout - This value represents the hold time value in seconds. The hold time is the
amount of time that an MPLS interface waits to receive a hello message from its peers. If a
hold time value is set per interface, that value is used. If not, the value received in hello
messages from its peers is used. The range is 1-65535.

-

Hello Timeout for Targeted Sessions - For targeted sessions, the value received in hello
messages from its peers determines the time that an MPLS interface waits for a peer to
send a hello message. The range is 1-65535.

-

Hello Interval for Targeted Sessions - Interval between sending targeted Hellos. The range
is 1-65535.

-

Keepalive Count - The number of keepalive intervals until a timeout.
Keepalive Interval - The interval between sending session keepalives.
LDP Sessions - Selecting the checkbox activates the LDP Sessions fields and buttons:

3. Click Add to adds a row to the LDP Sessions table.
The Edit button allows you to edit a selected entry in the table.
The Delete button allows you to delete a selected entry in the table.

LSP
The LSP allows you to manage RSVP LSPs and associated configurations such as Admin Groups
and Paths. You can perform the following tasks from the LSP:

•
•
•
•

View, add, edit, duplicate, or delete admin groups.
View, add, edit, duplicate, or delete paths.
View, add, edit, duplicate, or delete RSVP LSPs.
View, add, edit, duplicate, or delete saved configurations.

An LDP Configuration button is provided in the LSP as a convenience to add LDP settings to the
product payload if you are deploying LDP. Refer to “Configuring LDP” for a description of the
procedure.

846

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

In addition to the topology information in the TED, the product considers attributes and
requirements specified in configuration statements for the LSP. The LSP allows you to specify and
adjust many of the parameters used when the product calculates a traffic-engineered path for a
signalled LSP, including the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•

An RSVP signalled LSP address for the egress LER.
Explicit path to be used by the LSP.
Bandwidth required by the LSP.
Setup priority for the LSP.
Metric for the LSP.
Whether the LSP includes or excludes links belonging to specified administrative groups.

Viewing LSP Admin Group information
MPLS interfaces on an LSP can be organized into administrative groups (admin groups). LSP admin
groups are typically used to manage CSPF path selection by including or excluding network
segments identified as admin groups. Take the following steps to view LSP admin groups.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Admin Groups tab (Figure 329).

FIGURE 329 LSP dialog box, Admin Groups tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

847

28

LSP

3. Use the View selector to choose between displaying by Product or Admin Group ID.

-

Product - The product view shows a tree structure under Products/Admin Groups with
products at the top level. Click the product name to expand the tree and display any
associated admin groups.

-

ID - The ID view groups admin group instances by admin group ID. An admin group
instance may be configured in multiple products, so the same product may be displayed
under different admin group IDs.

4. Select a product or ID in the tree structure. The admin group name, ID, and product name
display in the Name, ID, and Product fields, and the interfaces in the admin group display
under Ports.

Viewing LSP path information
An LSP path is a list of router hops across an MPLS domain. Paths are configured separately from
LSPs. This allows paths to be used by any LSP that knows the path name. Take the following steps
to view LSP paths.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Paths tab (Figure 330).

FIGURE 330 LSP dialog box, Paths tab
3. A tree structure displays under Products/Paths with products at the top level. Click the product
name to expand the tree and display any associated paths.

848

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

4. Select a path to display the path name in the Name field, the Product name in the Product
field, and the Hop Details. The Hop Details include the following:

-

Hop IP Address - The IP addresses for all the defined hops are listed.
Hop Type - Either Strict or Loose. Strict means that the node must be directly connected to
the previous node on the Hop Details list. Loose, means that there may be one or more
hops between the previous node on the Hop Details list.

Viewing RSVP LSP information
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) controls signalling messages sent to each LSR in the LSP to
reserve resources for traffic-engineered paths and cause labels to be dynamically associated with
interfaces. Take the following steps to view RSVP LSP information.
The dialog box allows you to view a list of RSVP LSPs by product or by RSVP LSP name. You can also
add, edit, duplicate, or delete RSVP LSPs, and launch the LDP Configuration wizard.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the RSVP LSPs tab (Figure 331).

FIGURE 331 LSP dialog box, RSVP LSP tab
3. A tree structure displays under Products/RSVP LSPs with products at the top level. Click the
product name to expand the tree and display all associated LSPs.
4. Select an LSP to display the LSP name in the Name field, the source product name (ingress
LER) in the Source field, and destination product name (egress LER) the Destination field. Click
the Advanced Settings button to view the RSVP LSP Advanced Settings dialog box (Figure 338).
Refer to “Configuring advanced RSVP LSP settings” for a description of Advanced Settings.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

849

28

LSP

5. Click LDP Configuration to launch the LDP configuration wizard.

Viewing saved LSP configurations
Take the following steps to view all saved LSP configurations.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Saved Configurations tab (Figure 332).

FIGURE 332 LSP dialog box, Saved Configurations tab
Saved LSP configurations are listed by name, description, payload, and deployment schedule.
Related topics
“MPLS overview”
“Configuring LDP”

850

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

Adding an LSP admin group
MPLS interfaces can be organized into administrative groups (admin groups). Typically, an admin
group is used to identify a network segment. You can use admin groups to manage CSPF path
selection by including or excluding network segments identified as admin groups. If you include an
admin group, only those segments in that admin group are selected. If you exclude an admin group,
that admin group is excluded from CSPF path selection.
Metrics can be associated with individual admin groups and applied on the particular segments. If
you do not use include and exclude to manage admin groups, paths are selected based on the
metrics associated with the individual admin groups.
This dialog box is the first page of the Admin Group Configuration Wizard. It allows you to provide a
name and ID for the Admin Group and to assign the ports used as interfaces.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Admin Groups tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The Admin Group Configuration dialog box of the Admin Group Configuration wizard displays
(Figure 333).

FIGURE 333 Add Admin Groups Configuration dialog box, Configuration Info pane
4. Enter an a name for the Admin Group in the Name field. A maximum of 32 ASCII characters is
allowed.
5. Enter an Admin Group ID in the ID field. The ID must be an integer from 0 to 31.
6. Under Available Ports, select the ports you want to include in the admin group and click the
right arrow button to move the ports to Selected Ports. Note that only those physical interfaces
(ports) which have an IP address assigned are shown. All other interfaces are filtered out do
not display.
7.

If this is a one-time deployment and you don’t want to save the admin group configuration to
flash, click Deploy. If you want the configuration to persist, click Next.
If you click Next, the Persistence Properties dialog box of the Admin Group Configuration wizard
displays (Figure 334).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

851

28

LSP

FIGURE 334 Add Admin Groups Configuration dialog box, Deployment Properties pane
8. Select the desired properties.
9. Click Deploy.

Editing an LSP admin group
You can edit an LSP admin group by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Admin Groups tab.
3. Select the admin group you want to edit.
4. Click the Edit button.
The Edit Admin Group Configuration dialog box of the Admin Group Configuration wizard
displays (Figure 333). Refer to “Adding an LSP admin group” for a description of how to use the
Admin Group Configuration wizard.

Duplicating an LSP admin group
When you want to add a new LSP admin group, you can save work by duplicating an existing admin
group and editing the name and any other parameters you may want to change. You can duplicate
an LSP admin group by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Admin Groups tab.
3. Select the admin group you want to duplicate.
4. Click the Duplicate button.
The Copy Admin Group Configuration dialog box of the Admin Group Configuration wizard
displays (Figure 333). The Name field contains the name of the duplicated admin group with
_Copy appended. Refer to “Adding an LSP admin group” for a description of how to use the
Admin Group Configuration wizard.

852

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

Deleting an LSP admin group
You can delete an LSP admin group by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Admin Groups tab.
3. Select the admin group to be deleted.
4. Click the Delete button.
The Delete Admin Group Configuration dialog box of the Admin Group Configuration wizard
displays.
5. Click on a series of Next buttons to deploy.

Adding an LSP path
An LSP path is a list of router hops across an MPLS domain. Paths are configured separately from
LSPs. This allows paths to be used by any LSP that knows the path name. An LSP always has a
primary path and may have several secondary paths for redundancy.
Creating a path is not absolutely necessary when configuring an LSP. If you do not create a path,
CSPF uses the information in the TED to calculate the path.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Paths tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The Path Configuration dialog box of the Path Configuration wizard displays (Figure 335).

FIGURE 335 Path Configuration dialog box
4. Enter a name for the path in the Name field. A maximum of 32 ASCII characters is allowed.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

853

28

LSP

5. Click the Add button. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected hop higher or lower in
the table.
An empty line is added under Hop Details. The first entry is always considered to be the local
node and the Ingress LER. LER nodes should be then be added in order from Ingress to Egress.
If you need to change the order, you can select an entry and use the Up and Down arrows to
change its position. Actual routing depends on whether or not Type is set to Strict or Loose.
This is described in step 7.
6. Enter the IP address for the hop under IP Address.
7.

Under Type, select either Strict or Loose.
If you choose Strict, the node must be directly connected to the previous node on the Hop
Details list. If you choose Loose, you allow the possibility that there may be one or more hops
between the previous node on the Hop Details list and the node you are adding to the list.

8. Under Available Products, select the product where you want the hop configured and click the
right arrow to move the selected product to Selected Products.
The Available Products list displays a filtered list of discovered products. To be included on the
list, the products must meet the following requirements:

• Ethernet routers
• Ethernet Carrier and Edge routers running 5.1.00 must have the MPLS license enabled on
the router.
9. Continue adding hops until the path is complete.
10. Click on a series of Next buttons to deploy.
11. Click Deploy to save and deploy the path definition.

Editing an LSP path
You can edit an LSP path by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Paths tab.
3. Select the path you want to edit.
4. Click the Edit button.
The Path Configuration dialog box of the Path Configuration wizard displays (Figure 335). Refer
to“Adding an LSP path” for a description of how to use the Path Configuration wizard.

854

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

Duplicating an LSP path
When you want to add a new LSP path, you can save work by duplicating an existing path and
editing the name and any other parameters you may want to change. You can duplicate an LSP
path by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Paths tab.
3. Select the path you want to duplicate.
4. Click the Duplicate button.
The Path Configuration dialog box of the Path Configuration wizard displays (Figure 335). The
Name field contains the name of the duplicated path with _Copy appended. Refer to“Adding an
LSP path” for a description of how to use the Path Configuration wizard.

Deleting an LSP path
You can delete an LSP admin path by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Paths tab.
3. Select the path you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete button.
The LSP Delete Path Configuration wizard displays (Figure 336).

FIGURE 336 Delete Path Configuration wizard
5. Click on a series of Next buttons to deploy.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

855

28

LSP

Configuring advanced RSVP LSP settings
Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) can be used to send signalling messages to each LSR in the
LSP to reserve resources and cause labels to be dynamically associated with interfaces. This
enables you to engineer network traffic routing to avoid points of congestion and make efficient
use of high bandwidth interfaces.
Two separate protocols are needed to perform this task:

• Routing protocol - The routing protocol distributes network topology information through the
network so that the route of an LSP can be calculated automatically.

• Signaling protocol- The signaling protocol informs the switches along the route which labels
and links to use for each LSP.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the RSVP LSP tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The RSVP LSP Configuration dialog box of the RSVP LSP Configuration wizard displays
(Figure 337).

FIGURE 337 RSVP LSP Configuration dialog box
4. Enter a name for the configuration in the Name field. A maximum of 32 ASCII characters is
allowed.
5. Click the Select button and select the source product from the listed products.
6. Click the Select button and select the destination product from the listed products.
The destination product's loopback interface is used as the ’destination IP address’.
7.

856

Enable is pre-selected to automatically enable LSP configuration when it is deployed. If want
the LSP configuration to be disabled when it is deployed, clear this check box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

8. Click Advanced Settings to establish traffic engineering parameters.
The RSVP LSP Advanced Settings dialog box has three tabs: Global, Paths, and Fast Reroute.
The default view is the Global tab (Figure 338).

FIGURE 338 RSVP LSP Advanced Settings Global tab
From the Global tab you can set the following:

-

Adaptive checkbox - Select the Adaptive checkbox to allow you to change parameters while
an LSP is in enabled state.

-

Under Admin Groups settings use the Select buttons to use admin groups to manage CSPF
path selection by including or excluding network segments identified as admin groups. The
Admin Groups Selector dialog box displays (Figure 339).

FIGURE 339 Admin Groups Selector dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

857

28

LSP

You can place selected admin groups into any of the following categories:

• Include All - An interface must be a member of all selected groups.
• Include Any - An interface is included if it is a member of any of the selected groups.
• Exclude All - Interfaces in the selected groups are excluded.
-

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) check box - This check box allows you to enable
or disable BFD. If you enable BFD, the following parameters need to be specified:

• Transmit Time - The interval in seconds between BFD messages sent by this router to
its peers indicating that it is still operational. The allowable range is shown on the
dialog box.

• Receive Time - The interval in seconds that this router will wait for a BFD messages
sent by its peers. The allowable range is shown on the dialog box. This value is used
with the Multiplier value to determine when a peer is no longer considered
operational.

• Multiplier - The number of times that this router will wait to receive a message before
a peer is no longer considered operational. The actual time the router will wait is equal
to (Receive Time) X (Multiplier). The allowable range is shown on the dialog box.

-

CoS - Assigns a layer two class of service to the LSP. A value of 7 is the highest priority, and
a value of 0 is the lowest priority. Select None to remove any current CoS setting.

-

CSPF Tie Breaking Mode - It is possible that CSPF may calculate multiple equal cost paths
between an ingress LER and an egress LER. For that case, you can choose a tie breaking
mode to determine which path is used. The choices for tie breaking mode are as follows:

• Least Fill - The path that is least used.
• Most Fill - The path that is most used.
• Random - A random choice is made between the equal cost paths.
-

Constrained Shortest Path First (CSPF) - Select this check box if you want the ingress LER
to use CSPF to calculate a traffic-engineered path between the ingress and egress LERs.
CSPF uses the configured attributes of the LSP and information in the Traffic Engineering
Database (TED) to calculate the path.

• From - In situations where you want additional control over the path, you can specify
an interface address in the From field. In this case, the path calculation resolves to
the actual interface rather than the router ID when configuring a hop.

• Hop Limit - If you want CSPF to use a hop limit when choosing a path, enter the
number of hops in the Hop Limit field. The range is 0-255. If no hop limit is specified,
a hope limit of 255 is assumed.

858

-

Metric - You can assign a metric to an LSP to establish a preference/priority scheme for
LSP usage. The metric is expressed an integer. The range is as shown on the dialog box.
The lower the number, the higher the preference. An LSP with a metric of 1 will be used
before an LSP with a metric of 2. By default, all LSPs are assigned a metric of 1.

-

MTU - Sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size in bytes for packets traversing the
LSP. The range is displayed on the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

-

28

Path Select Mode - The choices are Manual and Unconditional. If Manual is chosen, traffic
is shifted to an alternate path only if the selected path fails. If the path recovers, traffic is
shifted back. If Unconditional is chosen, the traffic stays on the selected path even if the
path fails. If you do not want to specify a path select mode or want to remove the
configured path select mode, select None.

• Primary - Selected by default.
• Secondary - Activated if a Path Selection Mode other than None is selected. To define
a secondary path, enter the secondary path name in the Secondary field.

-

Record Routes - Select this checkbox to record LSP path information so that it can be
displayed.

-

Reoptimize Timer - The re-optimize timer is a periodic timer for triggering the activation of
all pending LSP configuration changes.

-

Revert Timer - The revert timer allows a period of time to elapse after a failback to a
primary path. This allows some time for conditions on a path to stabilize and prevents
unnecessary repetitive failover/failbacks that might occur if a path goes up and down
frequently.

-

Setup Priority - The setup priority is used in concert with Hold Priority to determine priority
for an LSP at the ingress LER. The setup priority determines priority when several LSPs are
enabled at the same time, as is the case at start-up or after a re-boot. The setup priority is
also used in concert with the Mean Rate to determine if there is enough reservable
bandwidth available on an interface to allow the LSP to be activated.

-

Hold Priority - The hold priority can be used to prevent an operating LSP from giving up
resources to an LSP with a higher setup priority. Both the setup and hold priorities allow
values from 0 to 7, with 0 as the highest priority and 7 as the lowest. To be useful, the hold
priority needs to equal to or less than the setup priority. For example, assume you have two
LSPs with a setup priority of 2 and a hold priority of 1. If either LSP should be interrupted
by a re-boot, the hold priority would prevent shifting of resources because the setup
priority is lower. The hold priority is also used in concert with the Mean Rate to allocate
reservable bandwidth to an LSP.

-

Traffic Engineering - The following settings determine the bandwidth requirements for an
LSP:

• Mean Rate - Sets the average data rate supported. Mean Rate is used in concert with
Hold Priority in allocating reservable bandwidth for an LSP. As LSPs are activated,
bandwidth is allocated to meet their mean rate requirements. As bandwidth is
allocated, the amount of reservable bandwidth available is correspondingly reduced.
The LSP’s hold priority is used to conserve the use of the remaining bandwidth.
available bandwidth is adjusted downward for lower priority LSPs to ensure that
bandwidth remains available higher priority LSPs. If the mean rate for a given priority
becomes higher than the bandwidth available for that priority, that LSP is preempted
and the bandwidth is made available to LSPs with a higher hold priority.
Mean Rate is also used with Setup Priority in determining if there is enough
reservable bandwidth available to allow an LSP to be activated. In this case as
bandwidth is allocated and the amount of reservable bandwidth available is
correspondingly reduced, there may not be enough bandwidth available to meet the
mean rate requirements for an LSP with a low setup priority.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

859

28

LSP

• Maximum Rate - Sets the maximum data rate supported for data bursts above the
mean rate.

• Maximum Burst - Sets the maximum number of bytes that can be handled at the
maximum rate.

-

Use LSP for OSPF shortcuts - Enables the use of traffic engineering data carried in OSPF
extensions that contain information about the interface’s metric, bandwidth reservations,
and admin group memberships.

-

Use LSP for IS-IS shortcuts - Enables you to configure the IS-IS shortcut parameters. This
setting allows you to configure the target product to send out IS-IS TE packets for all of its
MPLS-enabled interfaces.
When an MPLS-enabled product receives an IS-IS TE packet, it stores the traffic
engineering information in its Traffic Engineering database (TED). The product then uses
information in the TED when performing calculations to determine a path for an LSP.





Level — Select a level (level1 or level2) for the LSP.
Relative Metric — Enter a relative metric (-16777215 through 16777215) for the LSP.
Announce check box — Select to enable announce for the LSP. The default is 10.
Announce Metric — Only available when you select the Announce check box. Enter an
announce metric (1 through 16777215) for the LSP.

9. Select the Paths tab (Figure 340).

FIGURE 340 RSVP LSP Advanced Settings Paths tab
From the Paths tab you can configure primary and secondary paths for the LSP.

860

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

a.

28

Use the Primary Path Select button to display the Path Selector dialog box (Figure 341).

FIGURE 341 Path Selector dialog box
b.

Select the path you want to use as the primary path from Available Paths, and use the right
arrow to move the path to Selected Paths.

c.

Click OK.

Secondary paths for the LSP are listed under Paths. Use the Add and Delete buttons to add or
delete a secondary path. Use the up and down arrows to move entries up and down in the
table.
10. Select the Fast Reroute tab (Figure 342).

FIGURE 342 RSVP LSP Advanced Settings Fast Reroute tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

861

28

LSP

From the Fast Reroute tab you can configure an LSP to request a facility backup provided by a
bypass LSP in the event of a failure along the LSP path. Each LSR in an LSP except the egress
router may act as a Point of Local Repair (PLR). If a failure occurs on an LSP, the PLR tries to
initiate a bypass LSP to provide a backup route for the protected path. The PLR then becomes
the ingress of a bypass LSP. The bypass LSP carries the traffic of the LSPs it protects around
the break. The point past the break where traffic re-enters is called the merge point.
In Figure 343, R2 is the PLR. The double line that originates at R2 and then traverses R6 and
R7 to terminate at R4 is the bypass LSP. The bypass LSP terminates in R4 and traffic merges
back into the protected LSPs. This router is the merge point and the egress router for the
bypass LSP.
R1

R2

R3

R6

R4

R5

R7

FIGURE 343 Bypass LSP
When you use fast reroute to request a facility backup, the characteristics of the backup LSP
should match well with the LSP that is requesting the facility backup:

862

-

The value specified in the Detour Bandwidth/Backup LSP and the Hop Limit fields should
be the same as the requesting LSP.

-

Select the Request Facility Backup checkbox to enable the facility backup request.
Setup Priority and Hold Priority should be the same as the requesting LSP.
Admin group Include All, Include Any, and Exclude Any selections should be the same as
the requesting LSP. Use the Select buttons to display the Admin Groups Selector dialog box
(Figure 339).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

Editing an RSVP LSP
You can edit an RSVP LSP by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the RSVP LSP tab.
3. Select the RSVP LSP you want to edit.
4. Click the Edit button.
The RSVP LSP Configuration dialog box of the RSVP LSP Configuration wizard displays
(Figure 337). Refer to “Configuring advanced RSVP LSP settings” for a description of how to
use the RSVP LSP Configuration wizard.

Duplicating an RSVP LSP
When you want to add a new RSVP LSP, you can save work by duplicating an existing RSVP LSP and
editing the name and any other parameters you may want to change. You can duplicate an RSVP
LSP by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the RSVP LSP tab.
3. Select the RSVP LSP you want to duplicate.
4. Click the Duplicate button.
The RSVP LSP Configuration dialog box of the RSVP LSP Configuration wizard displays
(Figure 337). Name field contains the name of the duplicated RSVP LSP with _Copy appended.
Refer to “Configuring advanced RSVP LSP settings” for a description of how to use the RSVP
LSP Configuration wizard.

Deleting an RSVP LSP
You can delete an RSVP LSP by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the RSVP LSP tab.
3. Select the RSVP LSP you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete button.
The Delete RSVP LSP Configuration wizard displays (Figure 344).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

863

28

LSP

FIGURE 344 Delete RSVP Configuration wizard
5. Click a series of Next buttons to deploy the payload.

Editing a saved LSP configuration
You can edit a saved LSP configuration by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Saved Configuration tab.
3. Select the saved configuration
4. Click the Edit button.

Duplicating a saved LSP configuration
When you want to add a new LSP configuration, you can save work by duplicating an existing
configuration and editing the name and any other parameters you may want to change. You can
duplicate an LSP configuration by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Saved Configuration tab.
3. Select the saved configuration
4. Click the Duplicate button.

864

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

LSP

28

Deleting a saved LSP configuration
You can delete a saved LSP configuration by taking the following steps.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > LSP.
2. Select the Saved Configuration tab.
3. Select the saved configuration
4. Click the Delete button.

Displaying LSP Topologies
Refer to the View Management chapter for descriptions for topology map layout options and
navigation aids.
You can display topology maps for configured LDP and RSVP LSPs by taking the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > MPLS > LSP Topology.
The LSP Topology View displays (Figure 345).

FIGURE 345 LSP Topology View
2. You can select any of several options to gather information.

-

The tree structure has folders for RSVP LSPs, LDP LSPs, and products without LSP
configurations. Selecting an RSVP LSP in the tree highlights the corresponding LSP in the
topology view.

-

Hovering over a link on the topology view shows the LSP name as a tooltip.
Double-clicking the product shows all LSPs originating from the product.

3. If you would like to filter the display, use the Options selector in the tool bar to launch the LSP
Topology View Options dialog box (Figure 347).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

865

28

LSP

FIGURE 346 LSP Topology View Options
4. Use the LSP Type selector to limit the display to RSVP LSPs Only or LDP Tunnels Only.
If you right-click on an LSP, three options are displayed (Figure 347).

FIGURE 347 LSP right-click options on the Topology View

866

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

MPLS Virtual Leased Line (VLL) overview

28

• Select Drill-down to LSP Hops Topology to display LSPs and hops as a line from the
ingress router with an arrow to indicate direction. Operationally enabled LSPs are
shown with a solid line. Operationally disabled LSPs are shown with a dotted line.

• Select LSP Ping to launch the LSP Ping dialog box.
• Select LSP Traceroute to launch the LSP Trace Route dialog box.

MPLS Virtual Leased Line (VLL) overview
MPLS VLL provides point-to-point Ethernet or VLAN connectivity over an MPLS domain. VLL is also
known as Pseudo-Wire emulation. Figure 348 illustrates a basic VLL configuration.

MPLS Domain
Ingress

Penultimate

Egress

CE Device

CE Device

PE Router

Tunnel LSP

PE Router

FIGURE 348 Basic VLL configuration
Packets are forwarded over an MPLS VLL as described below.
1. A Customer Edge (CE) product forwards a packet to an LER serving as a Provider Edge (PE)
router at the edge of the MPLS domain.
2. The PE router assigns the packet to an RSVP-signalled LSP whose destination is an LER (also
serving as a PE router) that is connected to a CE product at the far end of the MPLS domain.
The PE router at the other end of the MPLS domain is known as this PE router’s VLL peer. The
RSVP-signalled LSP used to reach the VLL peer is known as the tunnel LSP. Alternatively, an
LDP-signalled, tunneled LSP can be used.
If a Class of Service (COS) value is set for the VLL, the product selects a tunnel LSP that also
has this COS value, if one is available. If no tunnel LSP with this COS value is available, the
product selects a tunnel LSP with the highest configured COS value (although never higher
than the COS setting for the VLL).
If there are multiple tunnel LSPs that can be used to reach the VLL peer, the PE router selects
one of the tunnel LSPs by using a round-robin method.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

867

28

MPLS Virtual Leased Line (VLL) overview

The PE router pushes two labels onto the packet:

• The inner VC label is used for determining what happens to the packet once it reaches the
VLL peer. This label is significant only to the VLL peer.

• The outer tunnel label is used for forwarding the packet through the MPLS domain. This
label corresponds to an RSVP-signalled tunnel LSP.
After applying the two labels to the packet, the PE router forwards it to the next LSR in the
tunnel LSP.
3. The penultimate LSR in the tunnel LSP removes the tunnel label and forwards the packet (now
with the VC label as the top label) to the PE router at the other edge of the MPLS domain.
4. The VLL peer at the egress of the tunnel LSP examines the VC label. This VC label is mapped to
an endpoint for the VLL. The endpoint of a VLL specifies what happens to packets exiting the
VLL.
The endpoint can specify either an untagged port or a tagged port. For untagged ports, the
endpoint consists of an interface. For tagged ports, the endpoint consists of an interface and
the Outer VLAN ID and Inner VLAN ID. The egress LER removes the VC label and forwards the
packet out the interface specified as the endpoint. If the endpoint is a tagged port, the product
transmits the packet with the specified VLAN ID, forwarding it out the specified interface to the
CE product.
The two VLL peers advertise VC labels to each other using the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP).
Each PE router attempts to initiate an LDP session with its VLL peer. After the LDP session is
established, the locally assigned VC label, along with a VLL VC ID, is advertised to the VLL peer. In a
similar way, the PE also learns the remotely assigned VC label from the VLL peer. Alternatively, you
can configure static local and remote VC labels manually on both VLL peers; in this case, LDP is not
used.

NOTE

If MTUs are mismatched on both sides of a VLL session, the session does not come up.

868

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

VLL manager
The VLL Manager allows you to manage VLL instances. You can perform the following tasks from
the VLL manager:

• View current VLL instances.
• View VLL configurations.
• Add, edit, duplicate, or delete VLL instances.
NOTE

When configuring a VLL, a check is made to determine if there are LSPs configured for the target
products. You may proceed with configuration, but an LSP is needed for a working connection.

Viewing VLL instances
To view currently defined VLL instances, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VLL.
2. Select the VLL Manager Views tab (Figure 349).

FIGURE 349 VLL Manager Views tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

869

28

VLL manager

3. You can filter output by name or by VCID by using the selector next to the VLL field.

-

You can use an Asterisk (*), as a wildcard character if you select By Name.
You can enter individual VCIDs or a range of VCIDs if you select By VCID.

NOTE

If you choose By VCID you can search only for remote VLLs (VLLs whose endpoints are on two
different products), but not for local VLLs (VLLs whose endpoints are on the same product).
4. Enter a product name or click the Select button to launch the Select Products dialog box to
select a product.
5. Select Type to filter VLLs by type. The choices are All (all VLLS matching the name or VCID
criteria), Local-VLL, and Remote VLL.
6. Click the Get button to begin the search for the VLL name.
VLLs that match the filter criteria display under VLL Settings and Endpoint Settings.
The table shows the following information:

-

VCID of the VLL. This cell is blank for a local VLL.
Name of the VLL.
Status of the VLL:

•
•
•
•
-

Conflict - Indicates if there are conflicts with VLL endpoint instances. Conflicts can arise,
especially with VLLs configured using the product CLI. If there are conflicts, this column
also indicates they type of conflict that exists:

•
•
•
•
•

7.

All peers are up
All peers are down
Some peers are down
Undefined

Name mismatch - Name of the VLL in the two products are not the same
No endpoint - The VLL has no endpoint defined
Duplicate VCID - Another VLL is using the VCID
Peer is missing - A VLL peer is missing
VLL mode mismatch - VLL mode type between the two products are not the same

-

A Endpoint - The first endpoint of the VLL. It displays the product name, IP address where
the endpoint is configured, and the port name.

-

Z Endpoint - The second endpoint of the VLL. It displays the product name, IP address
where the endpoint is configured, and the port name.

Select a row in the table to display details for the selected VLL in the Details area.
VLL settings display the following information about a selected VLL in the fields below:

• Name - The name of the VLL.
• VLL Mode • Tagged: A VLAN ID tag is added to the packets on the ingress router. When the packet
arrives at the egress router, the tag is stripped off and the packet is forwarded.

• Raw: The ingress router does not add a VLAN ID to the packets.
• Local VLL - Both VLL endpoints are on the same device.
• Status -

870

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

•
•
•
•

28

All peers are up.
All peers are down.
Some peers are down.
VCID - The VCID of the VLL.

Endpoint Settings display the following information about the A Endpoint and Z Endpoint of the
selected VLL in the fields below:

•
•
•
•

Name - The endpoint device name and IP address.
COS - Class of Service associated with the endpoint.
VLL Mode Tagged: A VLAN ID tag is added to the packets on the ingress router. When the packet
arrives at the egress router, the tag is stripped off and the packet is forwarded.

• Raw: The ingress router does not add a VLAN ID to the packets.
• Tag Mode • Tagged: If the endpoint is a tagged port, the device transmits the packet with the specified
VLAN ID and forwards it out the specified interface.

• Untagged: If the endpoint is an untagged port, the device removes any VLAN ID before
transmitting it out the specified interface.

• L2 Status - Layer 2 status (Up or Down).
• Outer VLAN ID - Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The service provider
end point tag.

• Inner VLAN ID - Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The customer end
point tag.
8. Right click any entry in the table to display the Print pop up menu. Select Print from the menu
to print the table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

871

28

VLL manager

Viewing Saved VLL configurations
To view current saved VLL configurations, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VLL.
2. Select the Saved Configurations tab (Figure 350).

FIGURE 350 VLL Manager Saved Configurations tab
3. You can use the Name field to filter output by configuration name. You can use an Asterisk (*)
as a wild card character.
4. Click the Get button to begin the search.
Configurations that match the filter criteria display under Saved Configurations, showing the
configuration ID, the configuration name, and the RBAC user name that created the
configuration.
5. When you select a configuration, the following information displays in the fields below Saved
Configurations:
6. Right click any entry in the table to display the Print pop up menu. Select Print from the menu
to print the table.

872

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

Adding or editing a VLL instance
To add a new VLL instance do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VLL.
2. Select either the Views tab or the Saved Configurations tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The VLL Configuration wizard Target Selector dialog box displays (Figure 351).

FIGURE 351 VLL Manager Target Selector dialog box
4. Enter a name for the endpoint in the Name field. The name must be unique on each product
and cannot contain spaces, asterisks (*), or question marks (?).
5. Select the Local VLL check mark box if both VLL endpoints are on the same product.
6. If you want to use a specific VCID, enter the VCID. If you do not specify a VCID, the next
available VCID in the VCID pool is assigned.
7.

VLL Mode is disabled if the Local VLL check mark box is selected indicating that both VLL
endpoints are on the same product. If the VLL endpoint is on different product (a remote VLL),
use the VLL Mode selector to choose one of the following for the endpoint:

-

Tagged: A VLAN ID tag is added to the packets on the ingress router. When the packet
arrives at the egress router, the tag is stripped off and the packet is forwarded.

-

Raw: The ingress router does not add a VLAN ID to the packets.

8. If you want to copy the VLL configurations for one or more products or ports under Discovered
Endpoints, select the product or port and then select the Use Discovered Settings check box.
9. Under Available Endpoints, expand the Devices folder to display the available devices. Then
expand the device folder, and slot folder to select a port for an endpoint. Ports that run FDP or
CDP protocol are filtered out because they cannot be a VLL or VPLS endpoint. For a remote VLL
the two endpoints must come from different devices. For a Local VLL, the ports selected must
be from the same device.
10. Use the right arrow button to move the port to the Selected Endpoints box. Make sure you
select two endpoints from two different devices.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

873

28

VLL manager

11. Click Next.
The VLL Configuration wizard Product Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 352).

FIGURE 352 VLL Configuration wizard Device Configuration dialog box
NOTE

If you are configuring a local VLL, you cannot make changes to this dialog box. If you are
configuring a non-local VLL, select a device from the device list.

Configuring devices using the VLL Manager
1. From the Product Configuration pane of the VLL Configuration Wizard, click each device entry.
The last discovered CoS and MTU settings for the device are displayed in the Discovered area.
You can modify the settings under the Configured area.
2. Enter values for the following:

874

-

COS - From the drop down list, select the Class of Service (COS) you want to assign to this
instance. Packets that go through this instance are assigned this instance. Select 0 - 7.

-

MTU - Enter a Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for the device. MTU is the size of the
largest data packet that can pass along a device. MTU must be 64 - 90.

-

Configured Peers - The Peers table shows the peer of the selected device. You can select
the IP address of the peer by clicking the drop down arrow for Peer IP address. By default,
the ingress IP address of a tunnel is selected.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

3. Click Next.
The VLL Configuration wizard Port Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 353).

FIGURE 353 VLL Configuration wizard Port Configuration dialog box
The last discovered port settings for VLLs are displayed in the Discovered Endpoint Settings
table. You can make changes to the settings in the Configured Endpoint Settings table.
4. To configure port settings for a port that has not been configured, select a port from the
interfaces tree and click Add to add a row to the Configured Endpoint Settings table.

NOTE

You must configure two endpoints.
Provide the following information:
a.

From the Tag Mode list, select one of the following:

• Tagged: If the endpoint is a tagged port, the device transmits the packet with the
specified VLAN ID and forwards it out the specified interface.

• Untagged: If the endpoint is an untagged port, the device removes any VLAN ID before
transmitting it out the specified interface.
b.

For tagged ports only, enter a VLAN ID for the service provider end point tag in the Outer
VLAN ID field.
Packets with this VLAN ID are transmitted out the specified interface. If you configure dual
tagged (inner and outer VLAN ID) endpoints, make sure you meet the following
requirements:

• Requires an Ethernet router, Core router, or Backbone router with firmware version 5.0
and later.

• You can only define a specific Inner VLAN ID/Outer VLAN ID combination once for all
VLL or VPLS instances.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

875

28

VLL manager

• You can only define one dual tagged endpoint per port.
• You cannot define a dual tagged endpoint on a port if there is a 802.1ag configuration
defined on the port.
c.

For tagged ports only, enter a VLAN ID for the customer end point in the Inner VLAN ID
field.
Packets with this VLAN ID are transmitted out the specified interface.

d.

From the COS list, select a COS for the port.
This field applies only to local VLLs.

5. Click Apply.
If any of the endpoints
6. Click Next.
The VLL Configuration wizard Deploy Target Actions dialog box displays (Figure 354).

FIGURE 354 VLL Configuration wizard Deploy Target Actions dialog box

Deploying target actions using the VLL Manager
1. From the Deploy Target Actions pane, under the Resultant Endpoint Actions, Endpoint Targets
column, select the device, or expand the folder for the device to display the VLAN ID (if the
Tagged is configured for the port’s tag mode) and the port on which the VLL is to be assigned.
2. The Actions column displays the action to take when the VLL is deployed to the devices. An
action is displayed for the device, the VLAN, and the port to which the VLL will be deployed.
Possible actions are:

• CREATE: Adds the configuration to the device.
• DELETE: Removes the configuration from the device.
• UPDATE: Modifies the configuration on the device if the configuration is being edited.
3. Click Next.
The VLL configuration wizard Deployment Properties dialog box displays (Figure 355).

876

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

FIGURE 355 VLL configuration wizard Deployment Properties

Deploying VLL properties using the VLL Manager
1. From the Deployment Properties pane of the VLL Configuration Wizard, under Persistence
Properties, chose one of the following:

-

Do not Save to Flash or Reload - Use this option if you want to update the running
configuration. The payload configuration is not saved to the device flash memory, nor is
the device rebooted when the VLL configuration is deployed.

-

Save to Flash - Use this option if you want to make the payload configuration permanent in
the device flash memory and saved to the running configuration. This is equivalent to
entering a write memory command. The payload configuration is applied to the device
when the device reboots.

-

Save to Flash and Reload - Use this option if you want to save the payload configuration to
the device flash memory and reboot the device. This is equivalent to entering the write
memory and reload commands. The availability of this option depends on your user
privileges.

2. Determine if you want to save the payload configuration in the Management application. If this
is a one-time deployment, select One time deployment, do not save configuration. If you want
to save the configuration for future deployment, select Save configuration, and enter a
configuration name and description.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

877

28

VLL manager

3. Click Next.
If you did not select Save configuration on the Deployment Properties dialog box, the Summary
dialog box displays (Figure 357), and you may skip to step 1.
If you selected Save configuration on the Deployment Properties dialog box, the Deployment
Schedule dialog box displays (Figure 356). Refer to “Scheduling deployment using the VLL
Manager” on page 878.

FIGURE 356 VLL configuration wizard Deployment Schedule dialog box

Scheduling deployment using the VLL Manager
1. From the Deployment Schedule pane of the VLL Configuration Wizard, select from the following
deployment options:

878

-

Save without scheduling deployment - saves the payload configuration without a
deployment schedule.

-

Schedule Deployment - enables you to schedule a time for deployment using the
Frequency, Time (hh:mm), and Date selectors.

-

Disable Schedule - Checkbox for disabling a scheduled deployment.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

2. Click Next.
The VLL configuration wizard Summary dialog box displays (Figure 357).

FIGURE 357 VLL configuration wizard Summary dialog box

Reviewing the VLL Manager summary
1. From the Summary pane of the VLL Configuration Wizard, review the VLL configuration wizard
Summary information.
The Deployment and Targets tab displays the information you entered on the previous pages.
The Configuration tab displays the configuration in CLI format.

Reviewing the VLL Manager configuration
1. From the Summary pane of the VLL Configuration Wizard, review the information on the page.
The Configuration tab displays the configuration in CLI format.
2. Click the Previous to return to pages that you want to modify. Click Cancel to cancel the
configuration. When you have finished, click Next.
The configuration is assigned a Configuration ID. The name you assigned the configuration is
displayed and the administrator who created the configuration is identified.
3. Click the Previous to return to pages that you want to modify. Click Cancel to cancel the
configuration.
4. When you have finished, click Next.
The configuration is assigned a Configuration ID. The name you assigned the configuration is
displayed and the administrator who created the configuration is identified.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

879

28

VLL manager

Creating a new VLL instance using duplicate
To create a new VLL instance using duplicate, do the following.
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VLL.
2. Select either the Views tab or the Saved Configurations tab.
3. Select the instance you want to duplicate from the list of VLL instances.
4. Click the Duplicate button.
The Target Selection dialog box displays.
5. The text Source_Name_Copy is displayed for Name. Enter a unique name for the new instance.
Name cannot contain spaces, asterisks (*), or question marks (?).
6. Also, the Management application automatically fills in the VCID for the new instance. It
obtains the next available VCID from the VCID pool. You can change the VCID if desired as long
as it is not used in a current VLL instance.
7.

Modify any of the remaining values in the instance by following the procedure presented in
“Adding or editing a VLL instance” on page 873.

NOTE

If you are modifying the selected endpoints, the device folder under the Available Endpoints lists all
MPLS capable devices, whether or not they are covered by your MPLS license. If you select an MPLS
capable device that is not covered by your MPLS license, and if you are adding an endpoint that
would exceed the device license limit, you will not be able to configure VLL services for that device.

Editing a VLL instance
To edit a VLL instance, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VLL.
2. Select either the Views tab or the Saved Configurations tab.
3. Select the instance you want to edit from the list of VLL instances.
4. Click the Edit button.
The Target Selection dialog box displays.

Deleting VLL instances
You can delete a VLL configuration from a device, whether or not it is on a device covered by your
MPLS license. Do the following.
1. Select the VLL instance you want to delete from the VLL Configuration list. You can select more
than one by pressing CTRL + click to select the instances.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Next to go to the next step.
4. Click Deploy to launch the Deployment Properties dialog box.

880

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VLL manager

28

Filtering VLL traffic monitoring
The VLL Manager Monitor dialog box allows you to monitor traffic on VLLs.
1. Select Monitor > MPLS > VLL.
The VLL Monitor Dialog box displays (Figure 358).

FIGURE 358 VLL Monitor dialog box
2. You can filter output by name or by VCID by using the selector next to the VLL field.

-

You can use an Asterisk (*), as a wildcard character if you select By Name.
You can enter individual VCIDs or a range of VCIDs if you select By VCID.

NOTE

If you choose By VCID you can search only for non-local VLLs (VLLs whose endpoints are on two
different devices), but not for local VLLs (VLLs whose endpoints are in the same device).
3. Enter a product name or click the Select button to launch the Select Products dialog box to
select a product.
4. Select Type.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

881

28

Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) overview

5. Click the Get button to begin the search.
VLLs that match the filter criteria display under VLL Instances.

NOTE

If a VLL is from a device that is not covered by the MPLS license, the row is grayed out. You will
not be able to edit that VLL, but you can delete it from the device.
The VLL Instances table shows the following information:

-

VCID of the VLL

-

In Packets - Number of packets received by the A Endpoint. This data is not available in the
NetIron CER and NetIron CES

-

Z Endpoint - Name and IP address of the device that serves as the last endpoint for the
VLL

-

In Packets - Number of packets transmitted through the Z Endpoint. This data is not
available in the NetIron CER and NetIron CES.

Name of the VLL
A Endpoint - Name and IP address of the device that serves as the first endpoint for the
VLL

Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) overview
Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) is a method for carrying Layer 2 frames between customer edge
(CE) devices across an MPLS domain. VPLS provides point-to-multipoint connectivity across the
MPLS domain, allowing traffic to flow between remotely connected sites as if the sites were
connected by a Layer 2 switch.
Figure 359 shows two separate VPLS instances have been created, one for Customer A’s VPN and
one for Customer B’s VPN. Customer A's VPLS instance consists of virtual Circuit (VC) LSPs
between PE devices R1, R2, and R3. Customer B’s VPLS instance consists of VC LSPs between PE
devices R3 and R4. Since VC LSPs are unidirectional, separate VC LSPs exist in each direction
between each of the PE devices. When Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) is enabled on the MPLS
interfaces on the PE devices, the VC LSPs are established automatically through LDP when you
specify the VPLS peers on the PE devices.

882

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Virtual Private LAN Services (VPLS) overview

28

CE Device
Customer A

R2

R3

R1
CE Device

CE Devices
Customer A

MPLS Domain

Customer A

VLAN 200

VLAN 100

Customer B

Customer B

CE Devices

VLAN 200

VLAN 100

R4

FIGURE 359 VPLS configuration with two customer VPNs
Unlike a Virtual Leased Line (VLL), a VPLS instance can have multiple endpoints. The PE device
performs local and remote VLAN tag translation, so that multiple VLANs can be specified under a
single VPLS instance. A VPLS instance consists of a full mesh of VC LSPs between the customer’s
Provider Edge (PE) devices. The full mesh of PE devices in a VPLS configuration allows one PE
device to reach any other PE device in the VPN in exactly one hop, with no transit PE devices in
between.
A PE device performs MAC address learning, flooding, and forwarding for the CE devices in each
VPLS instance. For example, when PE device R1 receives a Layer 2 frame with a given MAC
destination address from Customer A’s CE device, it looks up the MAC address in a Layer 2
forwarding table that records associations between MAC addresses and VC LSPs. This forwarding
table is known as the VPLS MAC database.
The PE device uses MAC address found in the VPLS MAC database to find the associated VC LSP.
The PE device then encapsulates the frame as an MPLS packet and pushes an inner VC label and
outer tunnel label onto the packet. The packet is then sent over a tunnel LSP to the VC peer.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

883

28

VPLS Manager

VPLS Manager
The VPLS Manager allows you to manage VPLS instances. You can perform the following tasks from
the VLL manager:

• View current VPLS instances and peer topologies.
• View VPLS configurations.
• Add, edit, duplicate, or delete VPLS instances.
NOTE

When configuring VPLS, a check is made to determine if there are LSPs configured for the target
products. You may proceed with configuration, but an LSP is needed for a working connection.

Viewing VPLS instances and peer topologies
To view currently defined VPLS instances and peer topologies, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VPLS.
2. To view information about current VPLS instances, select the Views tab and the Details tab
(Figure 360).

FIGURE 360 VPLS Manager Views tab

884

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

3. To specify new filter criteria, select By Name or By VCID from the VPLS list. You can use the
following to filter the VPLS instances:

• Asterisk (*) as a wildcard character if you select By Name.
• Individual VCIDs or a range of VCIDs, separating each entry with a comma if you selected
By VCID.
4. Click Get to begin the search.
Information about products that match the search criteria displays under VPLS Settings, PE
Products, and Endpoints on the Details tab.
VPLS settings

-

VCID of the VPLS
Name of the VPLS
Current status of the VPLS. This status is derived from the state of all PE devices for a
VPLS.

Endpoint settings

-

PE Devices




-

PE Devices: Name and IP address of the PE device on which the VPLS is configured.
Peer up: Shows the number of peers that are up.
Endpoint up: Shows the number of endpoints that are up.

Endpoints






Endpoint: Names and IP addresses of the endpoint devices.
Tag Mode: Tagged if a VLAN tag is used. Untagged if a VLAN tag is not used.
Outer VLAN ID - Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The service
provider end point tag.
Inner VLAN ID - Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The customer end
point tag.
L2 Status: Layer 2 status - Up or Down.

5. To view VPLS peer topologies, select the Peer Topology tab.
A topology map displays (Figure 361).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

885

28

VPLS Manager

FIGURE 361 VPLS Manager Peer Topology tab

886

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

Viewing Saved VPLS configurations
To view current VPLS configurations, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VPLS.
2. Select the Saved Configurations tab (Figure 362).

FIGURE 362 VPLS Manager Saved Configurations tab
3. You can use the Name field to filter output by configuration name.
You can use an Asterisk (*) as a wild card character.
4. Click Get to begin the search.
Configurations that match the filter criteria display under Saved Configurations, showing the
configuration ID, the configuration name, and the name of the user that created the
configuration.
When you select a configuration, configuration information displays in the fields below Saved
Configurations.

• VPLS Settings — Displays the following information about a selected VLL in the fields
below:




Configuration ID — The VCID of the VPLS.
Name — The name of the VPLS.
Status — Current status of the VPLS. This status is derived from the state of all PE
devices for a VPLS.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

887

28

VPLS Manager

• PE Products table — Displays the following information:
PE Devices — Names and IP addresses of the endpoint devices.
 Peers Up — The number of peers that are up.
 Endpoints Up — The number of endpoints that are up.
Endpoints table — Displays the following information:


•







Endpoints — Names and IP addresses of the endpoint devices.
Tag Mode — Tagged if a VLAN tag is used. Untagged if a VLAN tag is not used.
Outer VLAN ID — Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The service
provider end point tag.
Inner VLAN ID — Present if the Tag Mode for the endpoint is Tagged. The customer end
point tag.
L2 Status — Displays whether L2 is up or down.

5. Right-click any entry in the table to display the Print pop up menu. Select Print from the menu
to print the table.
6. Click Close to close the VPLS Manager dialog box.

Adding or editing a VPLS instance
To add a VPLS Instance, do the following.
1. From the Saved Configurations tab of the VPLS Manager, click the Add button.
The Target Selector dialog box of the VPLS configuration wizard displays (Figure 363).

FIGURE 363 VPLS Configuration wizard Target Selector dialog box
2. Enter a name for the VPLS. The name must be unique on each device and cannot contain
spaces, asterisks (*), or question marks (?).
3. If you want to use a specific VCID, enter the VCID. If you do not specify a VCID, the next
available VCID in the VCID pool is assigned.

888

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

4. If you want to copy the VPLS configurations for one or more products or ports under Discovered
Endpoints, select the product or port and then select the Use Discovered Settings check box.
5. Under Available Endpoints, expand the Devices folder to display the available devices. Then
expand the device folder, and slot folder to select a port for an endpoint.
6. Use the right arrow button to move the port to the Selected Endpoints box. Make sure you
select two endpoints from two different devices.

NOTE

The device folder lists all MPLS capable devices, whether or not they are covered by your MPLS
license. If you select an MPLS capable device that in not covered by your MPLS license, you will
not be able to configure VPLS services for that device. If you select an endpoint on a device
that is not covered by your MPLS license and the device is not in the All MPLS Licensed and
Configured Devices group, you see an error message saying that the MPLS device limit will be
exceeded.
7.

Click Next.
The Device Configuration dialog box displays (Figure 364).

FIGURE 364 VPLS Configuration wizard Device Configuration dialog box

Configuring devices using the VPLS Manager
1. Click each device entry under Devices to determine if there are discovered settings for that
device. The last discovered settings for the device are displayed in the Discovered area.
2. Under the Configured area, enter values for the following:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

889

28

VPLS Manager

a.

From the drop down list, select the Class of Service (COS) you want to assign to this
instance.

b.

Enter a Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) for a VPLS instance. MTU is the size of the
largest data packet that can pass along a device. Determine the range of values you can
enter by checking the configuration guide for your device.
The Peers table shows the peer of the selected device.

c.

You can select the IP address of the peer by clicking the drop down arrow for Peer IP
address. By default, the ingress IP address of a tunnel is selected.

d.

Enter the maximum number of MAC entries that the VPLS instance is allowed to learn.
Determine the range of values you can enter by checking the configuration guide for your
device.

3. Click Next.
The Port Configuration page displays (Figure 365).

FIGURE 365 VPLS Configuration wizard Port Configuration dialog box
Discovered VPLS port settings appear under Discovered Endpoint Settings.

Configuring endpoint settings
1. From the Port Configuration page of the VPLS Configuration wizard, select a port from the
Interfaces tree and click the Add button under Configured Endpoint Settings.
A row is added to the Configured Endpoint Settings list.
2. Click the empty Tag Mode field and select one of the following:

-

Tagged if you want packets transmitted with a specified VLAN ID.
Untagged if you want any VLAN ID removed before transmitting the packet.

3. If you chose Tagged mode, complete the following steps.

890

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

a.

Click the empty Outer VLAN ID field and enter the VLAN ID you want to use.

b.

Click the empty Inner VLAN ID field and enter the VLAN ID you want to use. Skip this step if
you are using single tagging.

4. Click Next.
The Deploy Target Actions dialog box displays (Figure 366).

FIGURE 366 VPLS Configuration wizard Deploy Target Action dialog box
The VPLS instance name and VCID are shown in the Name and VCID fields.

Deploying target actions using VPLS Manager
1. From the Deploy Target Actions pane, the Endpoint Targets column lists the names and IP
addresses of the devices to which the VPLS instance will be deployed. Expand the folder for a
device to display any VLANs and ports to which the VPLS instance will be deployed.
The Actions column displays the action that will be taken when the VPLS instance is deployed
to the devices. Possible actions are:

•
•
•
•

CREATE: Adds the configuration to the device.
DELETE: Removes the configuration from the device.
UPDATE: Modifies the configuration on the device if the configuration is being edited.
NOOP: No change is required.

2. Click Next.
The Deployment Properties page displays (Figure 367).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

891

28

VPLS Manager

FIGURE 367 VPLS Configuration wizard Deployment Properties dialog box

Deploying VPLS properties using VPLS Manager
1. From the Deployment Properties pane, choose one of the following persistence properties:

-

Do not Save to Flash or Reload - Use this option if you want to update the running
configuration. The payload configuration is not saved to the device flash memory, nor is
the device rebooted when the payload configuration is deployed.

-

Save to Flash - Use this option if you want to make the payload configuration permanent in
the device flash memory and saved to the running configuration. This is equivalent to
entering a write memory command. The payload configuration is applied to the device
when the device reboots.

-

Save to Flash and Reload - Use this option if you want to save the payload configuration to
the device flash memory and reboot the device. This is equivalent to entering the write
memory and reload commands. The availability of this option depends on your user
privileges.

2. Determine if you want to save the payload configuration in the Management application. If this
is a one-time deployment, select One time deployment, do not save configuration. If you want
to save the configuration for future deployment, select Save configuration, and enter a
configuration name and description.
3. Click Next.
If you did not select Save configuration on the Deployment Properties dialog box, the Summary
dialog box displays (Figure 369), and you may skip to step 1.
If you selected Save configuration on the Deployment Properties dialog box, the Deployment
Schedule dialog box displays (Figure 368). Proceed with step 1.

892

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

FIGURE 368 VPLS Configuration wizard Deployment Schedule dialog box

Scheduling deployment using VPLS Manager
1. If the Deployment Schedule dialog box displays, select from the following deployment options:

-

Save without scheduling deployment - saves the payload configuration without a
deployment schedule.

-

Schedule Deployment - enables you to schedule a time for deployment using the
Frequency, Time (hh:mm), and Date selectors.

2. Click Disable Schedule to disable a schedule. If you clear the check box, the schedule is
enabled.
3. Click Next.
The Summary dialog box displays (Figure 369).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

893

28

VPLS Manager

FIGURE 369 VPLS Configuration wizard Deployment Summary dialog box

Reviewing the VPLS Manager summary
1. On the Deployment and Targets Summary pane, review the summary information.
The Deployment and Targets tab displays the information you entered on the previous pages.
The Configuration tab displays the configuration in CLI format.
2. Click the Previous to return to pages that you want to modify. Click Cancel to cancel the
configuration. When you have finished, click Next.
The configuration is assigned a Configuration ID. The name you assigned the configuration is
displayed and the administrator who created the configuration is identified.

Creating a new VPLS instance from a duplicate
To create a new VPLS instance from a duplicate, do the following.
1. Select the instance you want to duplicate from the list of VPLS instances.
2. Click the Duplicate button. The text Source_VPLS_Name_Copy is displayed in the Name field.
3. Enter a unique name for the new instance. The name cannot contain spaces, asterisks (*), or
question marks (?).

894

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VPLS Manager

28

4. The next available VCID in the VCID pool is automatically placed in the VCID field. You can
change the VCID if desired as long as it is not used in a current VLL instance.
5. Modify any of the remaining values in the instance by following the procedure presented in
“Adding or editing a VPLS instance” on page 888.

NOTE

The device folder under Available Endpoints lists all MPLS capable devices, whether or not they are
in the All MPLS Licensed and Configured Devices group. If they are not and if adding the device
endpoints in the VPLS configuration would exceed the license limit, then you will not be able to
deploy the configurations.

Editing a VPLS instance
To edit a VPLS instance, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VPLS.
2. Select either the Views tab or the Saved Configurations tab.
3. Select the instance you want to edit from the list of VLL instances.
4. Click the Edit button.
The Target Selection dialog box displays.

NOTE

The device folder under Available Endpoints lists all MPLS capable devices, whether or not they
are in the All MPLS Licensed and Configured Devices group. If they are not and if adding the
device endpoints in the VPLS configuration would exceed the license limit, then you will not be
able to deploy the configurations.

Deleting a VPLS instance
You can delete a VPLS configuration from a device, whether or not it is covered by your MPLS
license. Do the following.
1. Select the VPLS instance you want to delete from the VPLS list. You can select more than one
by pressing CTRL + click to select the instances.
2. Click the Delete button on the tool bar.
The VPLS Configuration box appears.
3. Review the VCIDs and names listed to make sure you want to delete those configurations.
4. Click the Configuration tab to view the list of VPLS instances to be deleted.
5. Click Save to save the configuration, or Cancel if you changed your mind.
The saved configuration appears under the Saved Configuration tab. The VPLS configuration is
deleted from the devices only if they are deployed successfully. the Management application
will resynch the devices from which the VPLS instance was deleted and remove the VPLS
configuration for those devices from its database.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

895

28

VPLS Manager

Filtering for VPLS traffic monitoring
The VPLS Manager Monitor allows you to filter and monitor VPLS traffic.
1. Select Monitor > MPLS > VPLS.
The VPLS Monitor dialog box displays (Figure 370).

FIGURE 370 VPLS Monitor dialog box
2. You can filter output by name or by VCID by using the selector next to the VPLS field.

-

You can use an Asterisk (*), as a wildcard character if you select By Name.
You can enter individual VCIDs or a range of VCIDs if you select By VCID.

3. Enter a product name or click the Select button to launch the Select Products dialog box to
select a product.
4. Select Type.
5. Click the Get button to begin the search.

NOTE

VPIf a VPLS instance is from a device that is not covered by the MPLS license, the row is grayed
out. You will not be able to edit that instance, but you can delete it from the device.
The VPLS Instances table shows the following information:

•
•
•
•
•

VCID — VCID of the instance.
Name — Name of the instance.
A Endpoint — Name and IP address of the devices that serve as VPLS endpoints.
L2 Status — Layer 2 status - Up or Down.
Out Packets — Number of packets transmitted out of the Endpoint. Only available for
Ethernet Core and Backbone routers.

• In Octets — Number of octets received in the Endpoint. Only available for Ethernet Carrier
and Edge routers.

896

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

VCID pools

28

VCID pools
VCID pools contain VCID that can be used in a VLL or VPLS instance. You may create a combined
VCID pool containing VCIDs that are shared by VLL and VPLS, or you may create a segmented VCID
pool that provides separate VCID pools for VLL and VPLS configurations.

Viewing, creating, and deleting VCID pools
To view a VCID Pool and to create or delete VCID pools, do the following:
1. Select Configure > MPLS > VCID Pool.
The VCID Pool dialog box displays (Figure 371).

FIGURE 371 VCID Pool dialog box
2. For VCID Pool Type, select Combined if you want to create a combined VCID pool containing
VCIDs that are shared by VLL and VPLS, or Segmented if you want to create a segmented VCID
pool that provides separate VCID pools for VLL and VPLS configurations.
If you select Combined, and single Pool Values list is displayed. If you select Segmented, a
VPLS Pool list and a VLL Pool list are displayed.
The Pool Values list displays starting and ending numbers in the pool, the percentage of VCIDs
available in the pool, and the next available VCID.
3. Click the Add button to add an empty entry to the table.
4. Click the Delete button to delete a selected entry.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

897

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

5. Edit the Start and End fields to specify the desired range of VCIDs. You can use any numbers
between 1 to 4294967294. If you are creating a segmented pool, be sure the VLL and VPLS
VCIDs do not overlap.
6. Click OK.

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management
802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) is an IEEE standard used to define protocols and
practices for Ethernet Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM). 802.1ag CFM enables
you to manage your network infrastructure remotely. Once you configure a maintenance
association and its associated end points, you can perform the following fault management
checks:

•
•
•
•

Fault detection using connectivity status
Fault verification using loopback messages
Fault isolation using linktrace messages
Fault isolation using frame delay

NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.

Configuring a maintenance association
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager
• VLL Manager
• VLAN Manager
NOTE
802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To configure a maintenance association, complete the following steps.

898

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

1. Choose one of the following options:

• From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:
Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.
 Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.
From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.


•

• From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Maintenance Association dialog box displays.
3. Select a maintenance domain from the list or enter a new maintenance domain name in the
Domain field/list.
The maintenance domain name must be less than 21 characters with no spaces.
4. If you selected a new maintenance domain name from the Domain list, select a level (1
through 7) for the maintenance domain from the Level list.
If you selected a maintenance domain from the Domain list, the Level automatically displays.
5. Enter a name for the maintenance association in the Association Name field.
The maintenance association name must be less than 21 characters with no spaces.
6. Enter an interval for the Continuity Check Messages (CCM) from the CCM Interval list.
The default value is 10 seconds. Options include: 1 sec, 1 minute, 10 second, 10 minutes, 3.3
ms, 10 ms, and 100 ms.
7.

Select a maintenance intermediate point (MIP) policy from the MIP Policy list.
Options include:

• Default — Creates MIPs in all service ports for a particular maintenance domain.
• Explicit — Only creates a MIP when there is a MEP on the port at a lower level maintenance
domain.
8. Select a product from the Product list.
The list contains all products that are part of the VPLS.
9. Select a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID list.
The list contains all VLAN IDs in the VPLS.
10. Select a port from the Port list.
The list contains all VPLS end-points for the selected VLAN ID.
11. Enter a unique identifier for the end-point in the End Point ID field.
Valid values include 1 through 8191.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

899

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

12. Select the MEP direction from the Direction list.
Options include:

• Up — Select to set the MEP direction away from the monitored VLAN.
• Down — Select to set the MEP direction towards the monitored VLAN.
13. Click the right arrow button to move the defined MEP to the Selected Maintenance End Points
table.
The Selected Maintenance End Points table lists the following configured MEP parameters:

•
•
•
•
•

The product on which the MEP is located
The VLAN ID of the MEP
The port of the MEP
The user-defined end-point identifier of the MEP
The direction (up or down) of the MEP

14. Click OK on the Add Maintenance Association dialog box.
The Deploy to Products dialog box displays.
15. Select one of the following options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
16. Click OK on the Deploy to Products dialog box.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
While deployment is in progress, you can do the following:

• Click Abort to stop deployment of the entire configuration.
NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.

• Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.
NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment of the configuration.

After deployment is complete, you can select an entry in the Deployment Status list to display
details about the deployment in the Status Details field.
17. Click Close on the Deployment Status dialog box.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays with the new association in the Maintenance
Association Details table.

900

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

18. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Editing a maintenance association
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To Edit a maintenance association, complete the following steps.
1. Click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the maintenance association you want to edit in the Maintenance Association Details
table.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Maintenance Association dialog box displays.
4. Select a maintenance domain from the list or enter a new maintenance domain name in the
Domain field/list.
The maintenance domain name must be less than 21 characters with no spaces.
5. If you entered a new maintenance domain name in the Domain list, select a level (1 through 7)
for the maintenance domain from the Level list.
If you selected a maintenance domain from the Domain list, the Level automatically displays.
6. Enter a name for the maintenance association in the Association Name field.
The maintenance association name must be less than 21 characters with no spaces.
7.

Enter an interval for the Continuity Check Messages (CCM) from the CCM Interval list.
The default value is 10 seconds. Options include: 1 sec, 1 minute, 10 second, 10 minutes, 3.3
ms, 10 ms, and 100 ms.

8. Select a maintenance intermediate point (MIP) policy from the MIP Policy list.
Options include:

• Default — Creates MIPs in all service ports for a particular maintenance domain.
• Explicit — Only creates a MIP when there is a MEP on the port at a lower level maintenance
domain.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

901

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

9. To add a MEP, complete the following steps.
a.

Select a product from the Product list.
The list contains all products that are part of the VPLS.

b.

Select a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID list.
The list contains all VLAN IDs in the VPLS.

c.

Select a port from the Port list.
The list contains all VPLS end-points for the selected VLAN ID.

d.

Enter a unique identifier for the end-point in the End Point ID field.
Valid values include 1 through 8191.

e.

Select the MEP direction from the Direction list.
Options include:

• Up — Select to set the MEP direction away from the monitored VLAN.
• Down — Select to set the MEP direction towards the monitored VLAN.
f.

Click the right arrow button to move the defined MEP to the Selected Maintenance End
Points table.
The Selected Maintenance End Points table lists the configured MEPs. Repeat step 9 for
each MEP you want to add.

10. To edit a MEP, complete the following steps.
a.

Select a MEP in the Selected Maintenance End Points table and click the left arrow button
to edit it in the Available Maintenance End Points area.

b.

Select a product from the Product list.
The list contains all products that are part of the VPLS.

c.

Select a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID list.
The list contains all VLAN IDs in the VPLS.

d.

Select a port from the Port list.
The list contains all VPLS end-points for the selected VLAN ID.

e.

Enter a unique identifier for the end-point in the End Point ID field.
Valid values include 1 through 8191.

f.

Select the MEP direction from the Direction list.
Options include:

• Up — Select to set the MEP direction away from the monitored VLAN.
• Down — Select to set the MEP direction towards the monitored VLAN.
g.

Click the right arrow button to move the defined MEP to the Selected Maintenance End
Points table.
The Selected Maintenance End Points table lists the configured MEPs. Repeat step 10 for
each MEP you want to edit.

902

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

11. Click OK on the Edit Maintenance Association dialog box.
The Deploy to Products dialog box displays.
12. Select one of the following options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
13. Click OK on the Deploy to Products dialog box.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
While deployment is in progress, you can do the following:

• Click Abort to stop deployment of the entire configuration.
NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.

• Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.
NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment of the configuration.

After deployment is complete, you can select an entry in the Deployment Status list to display
details about the deployment in the Status Details field.
14. Click Close on the Deployment Status dialog box.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays with the new association in the Maintenance
Association Details table.
15. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

903

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

Adding a MEP to a maintenance association
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To add a MEP to an existing maintenance association, complete the following steps.
1. Click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the maintenance association you want to edit in the Maintenance Association Details
table.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Maintenance Association dialog box displays.
4. In the Available Maintenance End Points area, select a product from the Product list .
The list contains all products that are part of the VPLS.
5. Select a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID list.
The list contains all VLAN IDs in the VPLS.
6. Select a port from the Port list.
The list contains all VPLS end-points for the selected VLAN ID.
7.

Enter a unique identifier for the end-point in the End Point ID field.
Valid values include 1 through 8191.

8. Select the MEP direction from the Direction list.
Options include:

• Up — Select to set the MEP direction away from the monitored VLAN.
• Down — Select to set the MEP direction towards the monitored VLAN.
9. Click the right arrow button to move the defined MEP to the Selected Maintenance End Points
table.
The Selected Maintenance End Points table lists the configured MEPs. Repeat step 4 through
step 10 for each MEP you want to add.

904

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

10. Click OK on the Edit Maintenance Association dialog box.
The Deploy to Products dialog box displays.
11. Select one of the following options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
12. Click OK on the Deploy to Products dialog box.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
While deployment is in progress, you can do the following:

• Click Abort to stop deployment of the entire configuration.
NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.

• Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.
NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment of the configuration.

After deployment is complete, you can select an entry in the Deployment Status list to display
details about the deployment in the Status Details field.
13. Click Close on the Deployment Status dialog box.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays with the updated details in the Maintenance
Association Details table.
14. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

905

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

Editing a MEP
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To edit a MEP in an existing maintenance association, complete the following steps.
1. Click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the maintenance association you want to edit in the Maintenance Association Details
table.
3. Click Edit.
The Edit Maintenance Association dialog box displays.
4. Select the MEP that you want to edit in the Selected Maintenance End Points table and click
the left arrow button to edit it in the Available Maintenance End Points area.
5. Select a product from the Product list.
The list contains all products that are part of the VPLS.
6. Select a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID list.
The list contains all VLAN IDs in the VPLS.
7.

Select a port from the Port list.
The list contains all VPLS end-points for the selected VLAN ID.

8. Enter a unique identifier for the end-point in the End Point ID field.
Valid values include 1 through 8191.
9. Select the MEP direction from the Direction list.
Options include:

• Up — Select to set the MEP direction away from the monitored VLAN.
• Down — Select to set the MEP direction towards the monitored VLAN.
10. Click the right arrow button to move the updated MEP to the Selected Maintenance End Points
table.
The Selected Maintenance End Points table lists the configured MEPs. Repeat step 4 through
step 10 for each MEP you want to edit.

906

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

11. Click OK on the Edit Maintenance Association dialog box.
The Deploy to Products dialog box displays.
12. Select one of the following options:

• Save to running — Select to update the running configuration; however, the deployment is
not saved to the product’s flash memory.

• Save to running and startup — Select to update the running configuration as well as save
the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory. Selecting this option is the
equivalent to a write memory command on the product CLI.

• Save to running and startup then reboot — Select to update the running configuration,
save the deployment configuration to the product’s flash memory, and reboot the product.
Selecting this option is the equivalent to entering a write memory and a reload command
on the product CLI.
13. Click OK on the Deploy to Products dialog box.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
While deployment is in progress, you can do the following:

• Click Abort to stop deployment of the entire configuration.
NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.

• Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.
NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment of the configuration.

After deployment is complete, you can select an entry in the Deployment Status list to display
details about the deployment in the Status Details field.
14. Click Close on the Deployment Status dialog box.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays with the updated details in the Maintenance
Association Details table.
15. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

907

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

Viewing the MEPs in a maintenance association
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To view the MEPs in a maintenance association, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

-

From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:

• Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.

• Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.

-

From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.

-

From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.

The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the maintenance association in the Maintenance Association Details list.
The MEPs associated with the maintenance association display in the Maintenance End Points
(MEP) table:

•
•
•
•
•

The product on which the MEP is located
The VLAN ID of the MEP
The port of the MEP
The user-defined end-point identifier of the MEP
The direction (up or down) of the MEP

3. Use the dialog box to perform any of the following tasks:

• To add a MEP to a maintenance association, refer to “Adding a MEP to a maintenance
association” on page 904.

• To edit a MEP, refer to “Editing a MEP” on page 906.
• To delete a MEP to a maintenance association, refer to “Deleting a maintenance
association” on page 909.

• To check the status of all remote MEPs for the selected MEP, refer to “Checking the
connectivity status of remote MEPs” on page 910.

908

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

• To send a loopback message to a specific MEP or MIP in the domain, refer to “Sending a
loopback message” on page 911.

• To send a linktrace message to a specific MEP or MIP in the domain, refer to “Sending a
linktrace message” on page 912..
4. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Deleting a maintenance association
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE
802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

Only maintenance domains that are not linked to other associations will be deleted.
To delete a maintenance association, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device and select 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select one or more maintenance associations you want to delete in the Maintenance
Association Details table.
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation message displays with a Delete the maintenance domain? check box. Make
sure that the check box is selected.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

909

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

Checking the connectivity status of remote MEPs
Use the 802.1ag CFM Connectivity dialog box to check the status of all remote maintenance end
points (MEP) for the selected MEP. You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
To check the status of all remote MEPs for the selected MEP, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:
Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.
 Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.
From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.


•

• From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the MEP for which you want to check the status of remote MEPs in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.
3. Click Connectivity.
The 802.1ag CFM Connectivity dialog box displays.
4. Select the MEP for which you want to check the status of remote MEPs in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.
5. Click Connectivity.
The 802.1ag CFM Connectivity dialog box displays.
6. Review the connectivity details:

•
•
•
•
•
•

910

Source Product - The product that contains the selected MEP.
Domain - The domain of the selected MEP.
Association - The maintenance association of the selected MEP.
Source MEP - The port number of the selected MEP.
Connectivity Status table - Lists the connectivity status for each remote end point.
Remote MEP - The remote MEP identifier.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

•
•
•
•
7.

28

Product - The product containing the remote MEP.
Port - The port of the remote MEP.
MAC Address - The MAC address of the remote MEP.
Operational State - The state of the port attached to the MEP. Valid values include:
Unknown, Idle, Start, Failed, and OK.

Click Close on the 802.1ag CFM Connectivity dialog box.

8. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Sending a loopback message
Use this dialog box to send a loopback message to a specific maintenance end point (MEP) or
maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the domain.
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE
802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
Use loopback messages to identify fault locations by sending a query to maintenance end points
(MEP) or maintenance intermediate points (MIP) along the service path of the domain.
To send a loopback message to a specific MEP or MIP in the domain, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:
Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.
 Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.
From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.


•

• From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays.
2. Select the MEP for which you want to send a loopback message to a specific maintenance end
point (MEP) or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the domain in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

911

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

3. Click Loopback.
The 802.1ag CFM Loopback dialog box displays the product that contains the selected MEP,
the domain, the maintenance association, and the port number of the selected MEP.
4. Select the MEP for which you want to send a loopback message to a specific maintenance end
point (MEP) or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the domain in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.
5. Click Loopback.
The 802.1ag CFM Loopback dialog box displays.
6. Select one of the following destination options:

• MEP ID — Select this option to send the loopback message to a MEP and enter the MEP ID
in the field. THe MEP ID value can be 1 through 8191.

• MIP — Select this option to send the loopback message to a MIP and enter the MAC
address for the MIP.
7.

Enter a timeout value in seconds (from 1 through 30) in the Timeout field.

8. Enter the number of loopback messages to send in the Loopback Message Count field. The
loopback message count value can be from 1 through 1024.
9. Click Execute.
The status of the loopback message displays one of the following status types:

• Success (Messages_Sent/Messages_Received)
• Failed
10. Click Close on the 802.1ag CFM Loopback dialog box.
11. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Sending a linktrace message
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE
802.1ag CFM is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running firmware release 5.2
or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
Use linktrace messages to identify fault locations by sending a query to maintenance end points
(MEP) or maintenance intermediate points (MIP) along the service path of the domain.
To send a link trace message to a specific MEP or MIP in the domain, complete the following steps.

912

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

1. Choose one of the following options:

• From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:
Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.
 Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.
From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.


•

• From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays the product that contains the selected MEP,
the domain, the maintenance association, and the port number of the selected MEP.
2. Select the MEP for which you want to send a link trace message to a specific maintenance end
point (MEP) or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the domain in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.
3. Click Linktrace.
The 802.1ag CFM Linktrace dialog box displays.
4. Select the MEP for which you want to send a linktrace message to a specific maintenance end
point (MEP) or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the domain in the Maintenance End
Points (MEP) table.
5. Click Linktrace.
The 802.1ag CFM Linktrace dialog box displays.
6. Select one of the following destination options:

• MEP ID — Select this option to send the linktrace message to a MEP and enter the MEP ID
in the field. THe MEP ID value can be 1 through 8191.

• MIP — Select this option to send the linktrace message to a MIP and enter the MAC
address for the MIP.
7.

Enter a timeout value in seconds (from 1 through 30) in the Timeout field.

8. Enter the number of hops to allow before dropping the packet in the Time to Live (TTL) field.
The time to live value is decremented by each router that forwards the message. The message
is dropped if the time to live reaches zero. The time to live value can be from 1 through 64
hops.
9. Click Execute to send the linktrace message.
The details of the hop display in the Hop Details table.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

913

28

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

10. Review the hop details:

-

The Hop Details table lists the connectivity status for each remote MEP and MIP.
The hop number.
The MAC address of the remote MEP/MIP.
Whether the MEP or MIP forwarded the message.
The ingress or egress MEP and MIP.

• For a linktrace on a VLAN service, displays the associated port name in the format of
Slot_Number/Port_Number.

• For a linktrace on a VLL or VPLS, displays the IPv4 address of the peer product.
-

The ingress or egress action, based on the MEP or MIP direction:

• If direction is DOWN, displays Ingress OK.
• If direction is UP, displays Egress OK.
-

Relay Action

• If the linktrace message is forwarded, displays FDB.
• If the linktrace message reaches the MEP or MIP, displays HIT.
11. Click Close on the 802.1ag CFM Linktrace dialog box.
12. Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Configuring frame delay
You can access 802.1ag CFM from the following features:

• VPLS Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VLL prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLL Manager (requires the IP - MPLS – VPLS prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
• VLAN Manager (requires the VLAN Manager prvilege with read-write or read-only permission)
NOTE

802.1ag CFM Frame Delay is only supported on IronWare Ethernet Routers devices running
firmware release 5.4 or later.

NOTE

You cannot configure an 802.1ag CFM on a maintenance end point (MEP) configured with dual
tagged VLANs.
Use frame delay to identify fault locations by sending a query between maintenance end points
(MEP) along the service path of the domain.
To determine frame delay between two MEPs, complete the following steps.
1. Choose one of the following options:

• From the VPLS Manager dialog box, Views tab, choose one of the following options:



914

Select a device from the VPLS Peer Status/VPLS Name/VCID list and click 802.1ag
CFM.
Select the Peer Topology tab and right-click a device in the topology and select
802.1ag CFM.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

28

• From the VLL Manager dialog box, Views tab, select an instance from the VLL Instances
table and click 802.1ag CFM.

• From the VLAN Manager dialog box - VLAN View or Product View, select a VLAN from list
and click 802.1ag CFM.
The Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box displays the product that contains the selected MEP,
the domain, the maintenance association, and the port number of the selected MEP.
2. Select the MEP for which you want to configure frame delay in the Maintenance End Points
(MEP) table.
3. Click Delay.
The 802.1ag CFM Delay dialog box displays with the following details:

•
•
•
•

Source Product - The product that contains the selected MEP.
Domain Name - The domain of the selected MEP.
Association Name - The maintenance association of the selected MEP.
Source MEP - The port number of the selected MEP.

4. Select one of the following destination options:

• To configure the destiation by ID, select the MEP ID check box and select an ID from the
list. The MEP ID list displays all available destination MEP IDs in the following format:
device_name - port_ID - destination_MEP_ID.

• To configure the destiation by MAC address, select the MEP MAC Address check box and
select an address from the list.
5. Click Execute to determine the frame delay.
The delay measurements between service end-points in the bottom of the dialog box:

• Minimum: The minimum round trip frame delay time.
• Maximum: The maximum round trip frame delay time.
• Average: The average round trip frame delay time.
If the average frame delay value is less than 1,000 microseconds, these values display in
microseconds; otherwise, the frame delay value display in milliseconds.
6. Click Close on the 802.1ag CFM Delay dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Configure 802.1ag CFM dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

915

28

916

802.1ag Connectivity Fault Management

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

29

VIP Servers

In this chapter
• VIP Servers overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing the VIP Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing VIP Server information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Enabling or disabling servers or server ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Server port statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

917
917
919
921
921

VIP Servers overview
The VIP Servers dialog box allows you to manage virtual IPs (VIPs) on a ServerIron device. A VIP is
the virtual IP address or server name to which client browsers send requests. For detailed
information on VIPs, refer to the ServerIron Configuration Guide.
The current version of the VIP Servers dialog box can be used to manage ServerIron devices
running software version 09.5.02n or software release 10.2.01c or later.
No other software versions are supported.

VIP Server functions
Based on a Management application area of responsibility (AOR), the VIP Servers dialog box
provides the following functions:

• Displays VIP addresses configured on a ServerIron device
• Displays virtual server and real server port bindings that have been configured on a ServerIron
device

• Displays real server and virtual server port status
• Enables or disables real servers, real server ports, virtual servers, or virtual server ports

Viewing the VIP Servers
1. Click the IP tab on the Management application.
2. Select Configure > Application Delivery > VIP Servers.
The VIP Servers dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 372.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

917

29

Viewing the VIP Servers

FIGURE 372 VIP Servers dialog box
The View list allows you to select which real server, real server port, virtual server, or virtual server
ports you want to view. For detailed information, refer to “Viewing VIP Server information” on
page 919.
The VIP Servers list displays the ServerIron devices that have been discovered by the Management
application ports, and information about the real server or virtual server. Only the real servers and
virtual servers in your area of responsibility (AOR) are displayed in this list.
The VIP Servers dialog box contains the following buttons:

• Statistics — Click to display the Server Port Statistics list, which shows statistics of the real
server, virtual server, real server port, and virtual server port. For detailed information, refer to
“Server port statistics” on page 921.

• Enable — Click to enable a real server, real server port, virtual server, or virtual server port
using the VIP Servers dialog box. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Enabling servers or
server ports” on page 921.

• Disable — Click to disable a real server, real server port, virtual server, or virtual server port
using the VIP Servers dialog box. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Disabling servers or
server ports” on page 921.

• Delete — Select a row in the Server Port Statistics list and click Delete to delete the statistics.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Deleting a row from the Server Port Statistics list” on
page 922.

918

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing VIP Server information

29

Viewing VIP Server information
1. From the View list on the VIP Servers dialog box, select which ports you want to view from the
following options:

• Real server ports view of the virtual server, shown in Figure 373
• Virtual server ports view of the real server, shown in Figure 374
• Real server view of the virtual server, shown in Figure 375 on page 920
2. Click the plus sign (+) symbol next to an entry to expand all the real servers and virtual servers
configured on the ServerIron device and port bindings between the real server ports and
virtual server ports, or click the minus sign ( - ) symbol to collapse associated servers and
ports.

FIGURE 373 Real server ports view of the virtual server

FIGURE 374 Virtual server ports view of the real server

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

919

29

Viewing VIP Server information

FIGURE 375 Real server view of the virtual server
The following fields describe the components in the VIP Servers list on the VIP Servers dialog box.
VIP Servers list

• The name and IP addresses of the real server or virtual server.
• The name or port numbers of the real server port or virtual server port.
• Only the servers in a Management application user’s AOR are listed in the list. Also, if the
server is down, that server is not listed in the list, even if it is in the user’s AOR.

-

If you select Virtual Server: Ports > Real Server Ports, the display shows the virtual servers
configured on a ServerIron device, and the virtual server ports configured under each
virtual server.

-

You then see the real server ports to which the virtual server ports are bound.

-

You then see the virtual server ports to which the real server ports are bound.

If you select Real Server: Ports > Virtual Server Ports, the display shows the real servers
configured on a ServerIron device, and the real server ports configured under each real
server.
If you select Virtual Server > Real Server, you see the virtual servers and the real servers
bound to them:

• A V icon identifies the entry as a virtual server port.
• An R icon indicates a real server port.
Status — The status of the real server, virtual server, or server port: Enabled, No response, or
Delete Pending.
Current Connections — The number of current corrections on the real server port or virtual server
port.

920

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Enabling or disabling servers or server ports

29

Enabling or disabling servers or server ports
If you have the VIP Server Manager privilege with read-write permission, you can enable and
disable real servers, virtual servers, real server ports, and virtual server ports. If you have the VIP
Server Manager Leaf Node privilege with read-write permission, you can enable and disable only
the server leaf nodes. If you have both VIP-Server Mgr privilege and VIP-Server Mgr Leaf Node
privilege with read-write permission, you can enable and disable on all levels.

Enabling servers or server ports
To enable a server or server port, complete the following steps:
1. Select the ServerIron device that has the servers or ports you want to enable and click the plus
sign (+) symbol to expand its contents.
2. Select the server or port you want to enable, and click Enable.
3. When a confirmation message appears, click Yes.

Disabling servers or server ports
To disable a server or server port, complete the following steps.
1. Select the ServerIron device that has the server or port you want to disable and click the plus
sign (+) symbol to expand its contents.
2. Select the server or port you want to disable, and click Disable.
3. When a confirmation message appears, click Yes.

Server port statistics
To monitor the statistics for real and virtual server ports on the Server Port Statistics list, shown in
Figure 372 on page 918, complete the following steps.
1. Select one or more ServerIron devices, real servers, virtual servers, or server ports from the
VIP Servers list.
2. Click Statistics.
The Server Port Statistics list displays the following information:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Device Name — The name of the device and its IP address.
Server IP Address — The IP address of the server.
Server Port — The name of the server port.
Server Port Type — The type of server port: virtual or real.
Curr Conn — The number of current connections on the real or virtual server port.
Total Conn — The number of total connections on the real or virtual server port.
Peak Conn — The number of connections during peak time on the real or virtual server
port.

• Failed Time — The number of failed connections.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

921

29

Server port statistics

•
•
•
•
•

RX Packets — The number of packets received by the port.
TX Packets — The number of packets transmitted by the port.
RX Bytes — The number of bytes received by the port.
TX Bytes — The number of bytes transmitted by the port.
Last Update — The date and time when information for the server was updated.

Deleting a row from the Server Port Statistics list
If you no longer need the statistics for a port, right-click the row of the port in the Server Port
Statistics list and select Delete.

922

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

30

Global Server Load Balancing

In this chapter
• GSLB Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GSLB policy management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GSLB site management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• GSLB zone configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Controller configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

923
925
931
933
937

GSLB Manager
The Global Server Load Balancing (GSLB) Manager allows you to configure GSLB policies for a
ServerIron ADX product. The ServerIron ADX product on which the GSLB protocol is enabled serves
as a proxy to the Domain Name System (DNS) servers and evaluates the IP addresses in the DNS
replies from the DNS server for which the ServerIron ADX product is a proxy. Based on the results of
the evaluation, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product can change the order of the addresses in the
reply so that the “best” host address for the client is on top.
The GSLB Manager feature is supported for ADP products (ServerIron version 09.0 and later and
ADX version 12.0 or later) only. For more information on GSLB, refer to the ServerIron manuals.

Configuration requirements
Before using the GSLB Manager, confirm the following requirements:

• The GSLB Manager privilege is in your Management application user account or role.
• The ServerIron ADX products to which the policies, sites, and zones will be deployed are listed
in the Network Object Manager tree. If they are not, make sure they are on the network that is
being managed by the Management application. Then run discovery or add the ServerIron ADX
products to the Management application using Network Object Manager.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

923

30

GSLB Manager

Viewing the GSLB Manager
To view the GSLB Manager, perform the following steps.
Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
The Policy Configuration tab in the GSLB dialog box, shown in Figure 376, displays.

FIGURE 376 GSLB dialog box - Policy Configuration tab
The GSLB dialog box displays the following buttons:

•
•
•
•

Add — Creates a new GSLB policy, site, or zone definition and a new controller configuration.
Edit — Modifies existing GSLB Manager definitions and configurations.
Duplicate — Creates a new definition or configuration by copying an existing one.
Delete — Deletes a definition or configuration from GSLB Manager.

The GSLB dialog box contains the following tabs:

•
•
•
•

924

Policy Configuration — GSLB policies are managed from this tab.
Site Configuration — GSLB sites are managed from this tab.
Zone Configuration — GSLB zones are managed from this tab.
Controller Configuration — GSLB payloads are managed from this tab. GSLB payloads contain
GSLB policies, sites, and zones and are deployed to GSLB controllers. Once deployed on the
controller, DNS responses to GSLB zones are modified, based on the policies and site
definitions.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB policy management

30

GSLB policy management
A GSLB policy allows a GSLB ServerIron ADX product to evaluate each IP address in a DNS reply,
based on defined criteria called metrics. The GSLB ServerIron ADX product can reorder the list of
addresses and place the IP address for the best site at the top of the list.

Creating a GSLB policy
To create a GSLB policy, perform the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Policy Configuration tab.
The Policy Configuration tab is displayed by default when you first launch GSLB Manager. The
tab shows the name of the GSLB policies that have already been created in the Management
application, and the Management application users who created them. The policy name and
the user who created it uniquely identifies the GSLB policy.
3. Click Add to create a new GSLB policy.
The Policy Configuration dialog box, shown in Figure 377, displays.
There are two tabs on the Policy Configuration dialog box:

• Metrics tab - The GSLB ServerIron ADX product evaluates each IP address in the DNS reply
based on the metrics order. Based on the results, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product can
reorder the list to place the IP address for the best site on the top of the list.

• Prefix tab - The GSLB ServerIron ADX product keeps a list of prefixes in its cache that
contains round-trip time (RTT) information. RTT is the amount of time it takes for a remote
site to initiate a TCP connection from the client plus the amount of time until the remote
site receives the client acknowledgment of the connection request.
When the GSLB ServerIron ADX product receives RTT information, the IP address of the
client is compared to the prefixes in the cache. If the address fits within the network of one
of the prefixes, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product stores the RTT information for that site
under the prefix entry.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

925

30

GSLB policy management

FIGURE 377 Policy Configuration dialog box - Metrics tab
4. Provide the following information on the Policy Configuration dialog box.
a.

Enter a policy name for the GSLB policy in the Policy Name field. The combination of a
GSLB policy name and the Management application user who created it must be unique.

b.

Select the policy type from the Policy Type list. Options include the Global or Host policy
types.

c.

In the Protocol Status Interval field, specify how often the site ADC/ADX products report
their session list statistics and CPU utilization to the GSLB ServerIron ADX product.

d.

Specify the health status in the Health Status Interval field. This number determines the
interval at which the ServerIron ADX products report the health check information to the
GSLB ServerIron ADX product.

NOTE

If the health status interval is configured globally (that is, if the policy type is Global), the
interval applies to all peer site ADC/ADX products that support the distributed health
check feature.

926

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB policy management

e.

30

Select the tie breaker method from the Tie Breaker list. This value is used in case multiple
addresses pass the policy criteria without one address emerging as the best choice:

• Least Response: Selects the address of the site that has been selected least often in
previous DNS responses.
Note: ADX-type products do not support the Least Response tie-breaker method.

• Round Robin: Selects the first IP address in the DNS response for the first client
request, then selects the next address for the next client request, and so on.
5. Provide the following additional information for Domain Name System (DNS) servers.
a.

In the Check Interval field, indicate how often the GSLB ServerIron ADX product refreshes
its zone and host information with DNS servers.

b.

Select the TTL check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to modify the Time to Live
(TTL) value in DNS responses before sending the responses to the client DNS server.

c.

If the TTL check box is selected, enter the number of seconds in the TTL Value field. The
GSLB ServerIron ADX product changes the time to live (TTL) in each DNS record in the DNS
responses before sending them to the client DNS server. If the TTL check box is not
selected, the ServerIron ADX product does not change the TTLs, regardless of the value in
this field.

d.

Select the Active check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to remove IP addresses
obtained from DNS replies that fail a health check. The ServerIron ADX product removes
these addresses as long as the DNS query contains at least one address that passes the
health check.
By default, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product retains the same number of IP addresses in
the DNS replies from the DNS server. The GSLB policy swaps the IP address on the top of
the list with the best address selected by the GSLB policy.

e.

If you do not want the default behavior, select the Best only check box to allow the
ServerIron ADX product to remove all addresses except the one that the host-level GSLB
policy selects as the best address.

f.

Select the Cache Proxy check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to act as a proxy
for a DNS server, by responding directly to the client queries without forwarding them to
the DNS server.

g.

Select the Transparent Intercept check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to
either redirect or directly respond to client requests only for domains configured on the
ServerIron ADX product. If the domain name requested by the client is not configured on
the ServerIron ADX product, the query is forwarded to the DNS server without interception,
and the reply is untouched by GSLB.

h.

Select the CNAME Detect check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to apply GSLB
to Canonical Name (CNAME) records. A CNAME record refers to another domain name
instead of an IP address.

i.

Select the Override check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to replace the IP
address in the DNS reply with the IP address you configure for the proxy server.

Applying metrics on the Metrics tab
The GSLB ServerIron ADX product evaluates each IP address in the DNS reply based on the metrics
order. Based on the results, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product can reorder the list to place the IP
address for the best site on the top of the list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

927

30

GSLB policy management

To apply policy metrics, perform the following steps.
1. Click the Metrics tab on the Policy Configuration dial box.
2. Select the order from the Metric Order list. Metric order is the order in which the GSLB
ServerIron ADX product applies the policy metrics:

• Default Order: Metrics are applied in a fixed order as defined in the GSLB ServerIron ADX
product.

• Select Order: Metrics are applied in the order specified in this parameter.
3. Select the configuration you want from the Available Configurations list, and click the right
arrow button to move it to the Selected Configurations list.
If you want to remove the configuration from the Selected Configurations list, select the
configuration, and click the left arrow button to move it back to the Available Configurations
list.

NOTE

If Select Order is selected in the Metric Order list, metrics are applied in the order they appear
in the Selected Configurations list. You can change the order of the configurations by selecting
a configuration, and clicking the Up or Down button to move it up or down in the list.
4. If Connection Load is selected in the Selected Configurations list, enter values for the following
options.

NOTE

If Host is selected as the policy type, these options are disabled.

• Limit — Enter a load limit value for the connection. The valid limit range is from 1 through
2147483647 and the default value is 5.

• Multiplier — Enter a multiplier value from 1 through 60. The default value is 5.
• Intervals — Enter an interval value from 1 through 8. The default value is 5.
• Connection Load Weights
a.

Click to add a row to the Connection Load Weights list, where you can add connection
load weight values.

b.

Select a row and click to delete the row from the Connection Load Weights list.

Adding a prefix on the Prefix tab
1. Click the Prefix tab on the Policy Configuration dialog box, shown in Figure 378.
2. Click Add.
A new row is added to the Geo Prefix/Static Prefix list.

928

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB policy management

30

FIGURE 378 Policy Configuration dialog box - Prefix tab
3. Enter the IP address and select a location from the Location list.
If you select NONE for the location, the prefix is considered static. If you select any other
location, the prefix is considered geographical (Geo). Static prefixes never age out, but
geographical prefixes are dynamic and can age out.

Deleting a prefix from the Prefix list
1. Click the Prefix tab on the Policy Configuration dialog box.
2. Select a row in the Geo Prefix/Static Prefix list.
3. Click Delete.

Importing IP addresses from a file
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Policy Configuration tab.
3. In the Geo Prefix/Static Prefix list, click Import.
The List of Prefix Networks and Location dialog box displays.
4. Click Import on the Prefix tab of the Policy Configuration dialog box.
The List of Prefix Networks and Locations dialog box, shown in Figure 379, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

929

30

GSLB policy management

5. Enter a list of prefix networks and locations in the text box. Each entry should be on a separate
line, and separate the prefix network and location with a comma. The location must be one of
the following:

•
•
•
•
•

Asia
Europe
North America
South America
None

If the location is None, it is added as a static prefix.
6. Select one of the following options:

• Overwrite: Deletes and replaces any prefix in the list.
• Append: Adds to the prefixes in the list.

FIGURE 379 List of Prefix Networks and Location dialog box
7.

930

Click OK to continue.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB site management

30

GSLB site management
The Site Configuration dialog box allows you to configure a GSLB ServerIron ADX product with site
parameters. A GSLB site contains GSLB ServerIron ADX products that belong to that site.
Click the Site Configuration tab on the GSLB dialog box to view the GSLB sites that have been
defined for the system, and perform one of the following tasks:

• Click Add to create a new GSLB site.
• Select an existing GSLB site, and click Edit if you want to modify it.
• Select an existing GSLB site, and click Duplicate if you want to create a new site by copying an
existing site.

Adding a site configuration
1. Click Add on the Site Configuration tab on the GSLB dialog box.
The Site Configuration dialog box displays, shown in Figure 380.

FIGURE 380 Site Configuration dialog box
2. Enter a name for the site configuration in the Name field and a site name in the Site Name
field.
3. Select the location of the site from the Site Location list.
4. Select the Distributed Health Check check box if you want to enable health checks for all
ServerIron ADX products at this site.
5. Enter the weight assigned to the ServerIron ADX product in the site in the Weight field. GSLB
traffic can be distributed among GSLB sites based on weights configured for the sites. The
weights determine the percentage of traffic each site receives in comparison with other sites,
which may or may not have weights. Weight applies to all the ServerIron ADX products in the
site.
The weight can be from 0 through 100. The default is 0. If you want to use this weight, then do
not enter IP weights in the zone configuration.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

931

30

GSLB site management

NOTE

The weight of the ServerIron ADX product displays in the IP Weights list of the Add Hosts dialog
box.

Adding ServerIron ADX products to the site
You must add at least one site ADC/ADX product to create a site configuration.
1. Click the Add button.
When you click Add, a row is added to the Site ADCs list. The ServerIron ADX products that the
Management application has discovered appear in the Site ADC column. The name of the
selected ServerIron ADX product displays in the ADC Name column. You can edit the ADC
name.
2. Enter a value from 0 through 255 in the Admin Preference column to specify an administrative
preference. The default is 128.
The GSLB ServerIron ADX product prefers the site with the highest administrative preference. If
you set the preference for a site ServerIron ADX product to 0, the site is administratively
removed from GSLB selection.
The GSLB ServerIron ADX product evaluates each IP address in the DNS reply based on a set of
criteria. Depending on the results of this evaluation, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product reorders
the list to place the best IP address on the top of the list. Usually, the GSLB ServerIron ADX
product uses server health as one of the most important criteria to evaluate the server IP
addresses in a DNS reply.
The Admin Preference parameter overrides the setting for the Distributed Health Check
parameter. You can select the type of health check that will be used. The site default uses the
setting for the site Distributed Health Check parameter, described in step 4 of “Adding a site
configuration” on page 931.

• If enabled, the site default uses the health check for the ServerIron ADX product site
instead of the health check for the GSLB site configured on the site Distributed Health
Check parameter.

• If disabled, the health check for this site ServerIron ADX product is disabled, even if the
health check for the GSLB site is enabled.
3. Continue to add site ServerIron ADX products. When you have finished, click OK to save your
changes.
The new configuration is added to the Site ADCs products list.

NOTE

To delete a site ServerIron ADX product, select it from the Site ADCs list and click Delete.

932

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB zone configuration

30

GSLB zone configuration
When you manage GSLB zones, you specify the DNS zone name and the host information
(applications) within each zone for which you want the GSLB ServerIron ADX product to provide
GSLB. There are no defaults for zone parameters. As soon as you specify the hosts and
applications, the GSLB ServerIron ADX product queries the DNS server (the one for which the GSLB
ServerIron ADX product is a proxy) for the IP addresses associated with the hosts and begins
sending health checks to the hosts.
Click the Zone Configuration tab on the GSLB dialog box to determine what zones have been
configured for your system.
The Hosts list on the Zone Configuration dialog box shows the GSLB zones that have been defined
and the Management application user who created the definition.

Managing zones
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Zone Configuration tab on the GSLB dialog box and perform one of the following
tasks:

• Click Add to create a new GSLB zone.
• Select an existing GSLB zone, and click Edit if you want to modify it.
• Select an existing GSLB zone, and click Duplicate if you want to create a new zone by
copying an existing zone.

Adding a zone configuration
You must add at least one host to create a zone configuration.
1. Click Add on the Zone Configuration dialog box on the GSLB dialog box.
The Zone Configuration dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 381.

FIGURE 381 Zone Configuration dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

933

30

GSLB zone configuration

2. Enter a name for the zone in the Zone Name field.
The combination of a GSLB zone name and the Management application user who created it
must be unique.
3. Perform one of the following tasks:

• Click the Add button to open the Add Hosts dialog box, where you can add hosts to a zone.
• Select the host from the Hosts list, and click Edit to modify information for a host.
• Select the host from the Hosts list, and click Delete to delete a host.
When you click Add or Edit, the Add Hosts dialog box, shown in Figure 382, displays.

FIGURE 382 Add Hosts dialog box

934

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

GSLB zone configuration

30

Adding a host to a zone
The Add Hosts dialog box allows you to specify host information within each zone.

NOTE
When you specify the hosts and applications, the GSLB ServerIron queries the DNS server (the one
for which the GSLB ServerIron is a proxy) for the IP addresses associated with the hosts and begins
sending health checks to the hosts.
1. Enter the name of the host in the Host Name field. You do not need to enter the entire
fully-qualified domain name (FQDN); you can enter only the host portion of the name. For
example, if the FQDN is www.brocade.com, do not enter the entire name. Enter only “www”.
The remainder of the name is already specified by the GSLB DNS zone name.
When you configure a zone name in GSLB, you enter the zone name, then associate host
applications with the zone name. For example, you might configure the following applications
for the “brocade.com” zone:

• www.brocade.com (HTTP application)
• ftp.brocade.com (FTP application)
Some e-commerce sites also accept just a zone name as an alias for a specific application
within that zone. For example, a site might accept both “www.brocade.com” and
“brocade.com” as valid names for the HTTP application on the web host. In this case, the
second name has a null host name. No application is explicitly associated with the
“brocade.com” zone, but the DNS server is configured to associate “foundyrnet.com” with the
same IP addresses and application as “www.brocade.com” (for example, using address
records or alias records).
2. Select the policy you want to deploy to the GSLB ServerIron ADX product from the Host Policy
list. You can either select one of the policies defined under the Host Policy list or the policy that
is the default for the controller.
3. Select the name of the well-known port or application from the Host Port list for which you want
to provide GSLB.
4. Select the HTTP Settings check box to enable HTTP settings. For HTTP hosts, you can enable
HTTP health checks.

• If you enable HTTP settings, the URL field becomes available. Enter the URL that you want
to use for HTTP health checks.

• If you enable HTTP settings, the Status Codes list becomes available. When HTTP health
checks are performed, the DNS server responds with a status code. If the status code is
within a specified range, the server passes the health check. You can enter up to four
ranges.
5. Enter the minimum status code number in the Minimum column and the maximum status
code number in the Maximum column in the Status Codes list.
6. Click Add to add the status code ranges in the Status Codes list.

NOTE

To delete a range, select the range, then click Delete to remove it from the Status Codes list.
7.

Click Add to add an IP address and weight in the IP Weights list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

935

30

GSLB zone configuration

The IP Weights list is used if IP Weights is specified in the selected policy (during site
configuration using the Site Configuration dialog box). You assign a weight to an IP address so
that the ServerIron ADX product distributes GSLB traffic among IP addresses in a DNS reply.
8. Enter the IP address to which you want to assign a weight in the IP Address column.
9. Enter a value from 0 through 100 in the Weight column. The default is 0.

NOTE

To delete an IP address and weight, select the entry, then click Delete to remove it from the IP
Weights list.
10. Continue adding hosts to the Add Hosts dialog box. When you have finished, click OK to add
the zone to the Hosts list of the Zone Configuration dialog box.

Deleting a zone configuration
To delete a zone configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select the zone you want to delete from the Hosts list of the Zone Configuration dialog box.
2. Click Delete.
3. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click Yes.

Editing the list of IP addresses and weights
The List of IP Addresses and Weights dialog box allows you to import a list of IP addresses and
weights by overwriting existing entries or appending to existing entries.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Zone Configuration tab.
3. Click Add.
The Zone Configuration dialog box displays.
4. Click Add.
The Add Hosts dialog box displays.
5. Click Add in the IP Weights list.
The List of IP Addresses and Weights dialog box displays.
6. Enter a list of IP addresses into the List of IP Addresses and Weights text box. If a zone has IP
weights, you can change the IP weights for a single host in a zone. Each entry must be on a
separate line, separated by a comma.
7.

Click the Overwrite option to select the option to overwrite existing IP addresses and weights.

8. Click the Append option to add new IP addresses and weights to the current list.

• “Adding a zone configuration” on page 933

936

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Controller configuration

30

Controller configuration
Once policies, sites, and zones are configured, you can assign and deploy a policy to a ServerIron
ADX product that is the GSLB controller.
The Controller Configuration tab on the GSLB dialog box allows you to assign and deploy a policy to
a ServerIron product that is the GSLB controller, after policies, sites, and zones are configured.

NOTE

All configuration options on the Controller Configuration tab are deployed to the selected GSLB
controller. To site ServerIron ADX products, however, only the GSLB Communication Port and Enable
Logging options are deployed.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Controller Configuration tab to view the controller definitions that have been defined
for the system.
The Controller Configuration tab displays.
3. Perform one of the following tasks:
a.

Click Add to launch the Controller Configuration dialog box, which you use to deploy a
policy to a GSLB ServerIron ADX product that is the GSLB controller.

b.

Select an existing controller configuration and click Edit to modify an existing controller
definition.

c.

Select an existing controller configuration and click Duplicate to create a controller
configuration by copying an existing one.

d.

Select an existing controller configuration and click Delete to remove it from the Controller
Configuration list.

e.

Click Deploy to deploy the selected controller configuration from the list.

NOTE

All configuration options on the Controller Configuration tab are deployed to the selected GSLB
controller, but only the GSLB Communication Port and Enable Logging parameters are
deployed to site GSLB ServerIron ADX products.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

937

30

Controller configuration

Creating a new GSLB controller configuration
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
1. Click the Controller Configuration tab of the GSLB dialog box to view the controller definitions
that have been defined for the system.
2. Click Add to create a new GSLB controller configuration, or select an existing GSLB controller
configuration and click Edit or Duplicate.
The Controller Configuration dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 383.

FIGURE 383 Controller Configuration dialog box
1. Enter a name for the configuration in the Configuration Name field. The combination of a GSLB
controller name and the Management application user who created the definition must be
unique.
2. Select the ServerIron ADX product from the Controller list that will be the GSLB controller.
3. Select the controller policy from the Controller Policy list that will be deployed to the controller.
The list comes from the list on the Policy Configuration tab.
4. Enter the GSLB Communication Port number that the controller ServerIron ADX product will
use for the GSLB protocol in the GSLB Communication Port field. This parameter setting is
deployed to the controller and to site ServerIron ADX products specified in this configuration.
5. Select the Reload on Deployment check box if you want the ServerIron ADX product to perform
a software reload when this configuration is deployed to the selected products.
6. Select the Enable Logging check box if you want to enable logging of the following information
for DNS requests assisted by the GSLB ServerIron ADX product:

938

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Controller configuration

•
•
•
•
•

30

Source IP address (the address of the client making the request)
Best IP address (site address provided by the ServerIron ADX product)
Host
Zone
Metric used

This parameter setting is deployed to the controller and to the site ServerIron ADX products
specified in this configuration. When you enable logging of this information, the ServerIron ADX
product generates a syslog message for each DNS request assisted by the ServerIron ADX
product.

NOTE

The ServerIron ADX product sends the log messages only to the external syslog servers you
have configured on the ServerIron ADX product. The messages do not appear in the ServerIron
ADX product syslog buffer.
7.

Select the Save to Flash check box if you want this configuration to be saved to the ServerIron
ADX product memory when it is deployed to the product.

8. From the Available Sites/ServerIrons list, expand the site that contains the site ServerIron ADX
product that will be under the controller ServerIron ADX control. The list of sites comes from the
list on the Site Configuration tab.
Select the site that you want to be controlled by the controller ServerIron ADX product and click
the right arrow button to move it into the Selected Sites/ServerIrons list.
The site name, administrative preference, and distributed health checks are listed in the list.
Expand the entry for a site to display the individual ServerIron ADX products that belong to that
site.
If you want to overwrite the site administrative preference or distributed health check definition
for one ServerIron ADX product, select the ServerIron ADX product, and enter new values for
the Administrative Preference or Distributed Health Check parameters.
9. From the Available Zones/Hosts list, expand the zone that has the host that will be under the
controller ServerIron ADX control. The list of zones comes from the list on the Zone
Configuration tab.
Select the host that you want and click the right arrow to move it into the Selected Zones/Hosts
list. The zone or host name, TCP/UDP port, policy, and IP weights are listed in the list.
10. If a zone has IP weights, you can change the IP weights for a single host in a zone. Expand the
zone, select the host, and click Edit.
The IP Weights dialog box displays.
a.

Enter the IP address to which you want to assign an IP weight that is different from the one
for the zone or host.

b.

Enter the IP weight in the IP Weight field.

NOTE

You can also add and delete IP addresses along with their IP weights.
11. When you have finished, click OK to add the configuration to the Available Zones/Host list on
the Controller Configuration dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

939

30

Controller configuration

Deploying a controller configuration
Under GSLB Manager, only the entries under the Controller Configuration tab can be deployed to a
ServerIron ADX product that will run the GSLB protocol. Controller configuration deployment can be
scheduled or deployed on demand.
To schedule a controller configuration, refer to “Scheduling a deployment” on page 941.
To deploy a configuration on demand, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click the Controller Configuration tab.
3. Select the configuration you want to deploy from the Controller list.
4. Click Deploy.

NOTE

When you deploy a controller configuration, the Management application deletes all GSLB
configurations from the ServerIron ADX product to which the configuration is deployed, and
then adds the configuration to the ServerIron ADX product. Therefore, make sure you deploy
GSLB controller configurations when traffic is least likely to be affected.
The Deployment status progress indicator displays. Wait for the deployment to complete. The
configuration remains under the Configuration Controller tab once it is deployed.

940

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Controller configuration

30

Scheduling a deployment
To schedule the deployment of a controller configuration, complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > GSLB.
2. Click Add, Edit, or Duplicate on the Controller Configuration tab.
The Controller Configuration dialog box has two tabs: Controller Configuration and Schedule.
3. Click the Schedule tab of the Controller Configuration dialog box.
The Controller Configuration dialog box - Schedule tab displays, as shown in Figure 384.

FIGURE 384 Controller Configuration dialog box - Schedule tab
4. Provide the following information.
a.

Click the Save Without Scheduling Deployment option if you want to save the deployment
definition without scheduling it.

b.

Click the Schedule Deployment option if you want to schedule and save the deployment
definition.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

941

30

Controller configuration

c.

Select a schedule type from the Frequency list:

•
•
•
•
•
•

One Time
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Yearly

The Time (hh:mm) list appears if you select any schedule type except Hourly.
d.

Select the time when the payload configuration will be deployed. Indicate the hour, minute,
and whether it is AM or PM.
The Minutes past the hour list appears if you selected Hourly as the schedule type.

e.

Select the minutes after the hour when the definition will be deployed.
The Day of the Week list appears if you select Weekly as the schedule type.

f.

Select the day of the week when the definition will be deployed.
The Day of the Month list appears if you selected Monthly as the schedule type.

g.

Select the day of the month when the definition will be deployed.
The Date list appears if you selected One Time or Yearly as the schedule type.

h.

942

Indicate the date of the deployment.
i.

Open the calendar and select the date.

ii.

Select the Suspend Scheduling check box to disable the schedule.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

31

SSL Certificates for ServerIron Products

In this chapter
• SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SSL certificate configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Generating a certificate signing request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Duplicating an SSL certificate and key file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing SSL certificate details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Importing certificates and keys from file locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Importing certificates and keys from products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exporting certificates and keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deploying certificates and keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Creating key passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Appending SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Chaining SSL certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting SSL certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

943
944
947
950
951
952
952
953
954
955
956
957
959
959
961

SSL certificates
SSL Certificates provides centralized Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate and key management
for ServerIron and ADX products that have the SSL capability. Use SSL Certificates to back up SSL
certificates and keys from the ServerIron and ADX products, and restore them, as necessary. You
can also add SSL certificates and keys to SSL certificates by cutting and pasting existing certificate
and key file contents.
The SSL certificates and keys can only be deployed from the SSL Certificates dialog box to the
following SSL-capable ServerIron devices:

•
•
•
•

ServerIron with WSM6-SSL module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron with WSM6-SSL-Slave module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron 4G-SSL (Stackable), running software release 10.2.01c or later
ADX running software release 12.1.00 or later

NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To
add a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

943

31

SSL certificate configuration

You must have the appropriate user privileges to access SSL Certificates.

NOTE

SSL Certificates does not generate signed certificates and keys. You can generate a certificate
signing request (CSR), but the signed certificates and keys managed by SSL Certificates must be
signed by a certificate authority (CA) and must be stored in an accessible location. Certificates and
keys are added to SSL Certificates by cutting and pasting the certificate and key file contents
obtained from a certificate authority into SSL Certificates.
You can configure SSL certificates preferences from the Options dialog box. For step-by-step
instructions, refer to “Configuring SSL certificates preferences” on page 164.
You can import the SSL certificates and keys during discovery from SSL-capable products on the
Discover Setup - IP dialog box. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Defining global setting
preferences” on page 60.

SSL certificate configuration
To access SSL Certificates, select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box has two tabs:

• The Certificate View tab (Figure 385).
• The Product View tab (Figure 386).

FIGURE 385 SSL Certificates dialog box - Certificate View tab

Accessing SSL certificates on the Certificate View tab
The SSL Certificates dialog box Certificate View tab allows you to view, add, edit, duplicate, append,
delete, chain, import, export, and deploy SSL certificates. You can also create a certificate signing
request (CSR) and create key passwords from this tab.

944

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SSL certificate configuration

31

The SSL certificates and keys can only be deployed from SSL Certificate Manager to the following
SSL-capable IronWare OS devices:

•
•
•
•

ServerIron with WSM6-SSL module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron with WSM6-SSL-Slave module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron 4G-SSL (Stackable), running software release 10.2.01c or later
ADX running software release 12.1.00 or later

NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add a Virtual IP
server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
The Certificate View tab contains the following fields and components.

-

Certificates/Keys — A table displaying certificates and certificate information.

-

Valid Certificates — The number of valid certificates.

-

Key — The user-assigned key name. The same name may be used on different products.

-

Expiration — The expiration date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is
blank. For chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

-

Certificate Size — The certificate size in bytes. If only a key is present, this field is blank.

-

Common Name — The common name for the certificate. For chained certificates, the
name for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

-

Chain — Yes if certificates are chained, No if certificates are not chained. If only a key is
present, this field is blank.

-

Need Deploy — Yes if the certificate or key is not deployed to the product. No if the
certificate or key is deployed to the product.

-

Description — A text area that shows user comments and annotations.

-

Chain button — Use to chain certificates.

Products — A tree structure showing products that have certificates/keys. When you select
a certificate/key, the product associated with that certificate/key is highlighted.
Certificates About to Expire — The number of certificates that are about to expire.
Expired Certificates — The number of certificates that have expired.
ID — A unique system-assigned ID for each certificate entry.
Status — Possible values are Valid, About to Expire, or Expired.
Certificate — The user-assigned certificate name. The same name may be used on
different products.
Start Date — The start date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is blank. For
chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

Key Strength — The key strength (size in bits). If only a certificate is present, this field is
blank.

Certificates selector — Use this selector to Add, Edit, Duplicate, Append, or Delete
certificates.
View button — Use to view certificates.
Import selector — Use this selector to import a certificate or key from a file or a product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

945

31

SSL certificate configuration

-

Export button — Use to export a certificate.
Deploy button — Use to deploy certificates.
Signing Request button — Use to generate certificate signing request.
Key Passwords button — Use to add or edit a key password.

Accessing SSL certificates on the Product View tab
The SSL Certificates dialog box Certificate View tab allows you to view, add, edit, duplicate, append,
delete, chain, import, export, and deploy SSL certificates. You can also create a certificate signing
request (CSR) and create key passwords from this tab.
The SSL certificates and keys can only be deployed from SSL Certificate Manager to the following
SSL-capable IronWare devices:

•
•
•
•

ServerIron with WSM6-SSL module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron with WSM6-SSL-Slave module, running software release 10.2.01c or later
ServerIron 4G-SSL (Stackable), running software release 10.2.01c or later
ADX running software release 12.1.00 or later

NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To
add a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197

FIGURE 386 SSL Certificates dialog box - Product View tab

946

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Generating a certificate signing request

31

The Product View tab contains the following fields and components.

-

Products — A product tree structure. When you select a product, certificates are displayed
under Certificates.
If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add a
Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197

-

Certificates/Keys — A list of certificates by product.

-

Status — Possible values are Valid, About to Expire, or Expired.

-

Expiration — The expiration date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is
blank. For chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

-

Certificate Size — The certificate size in bytes. If only a key is present, this field is blank.

-

Common Name — The common name for the certificate. For chained certificates, the
name for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

-

Chain — Yes is certificates are chained, No if certificates are not chained. If only a key is
present, this field is blank.

-

Need Deploy — Yes if the certificate or key is not deployed to the product. No if the
certificate or key is deployed to the product.

-

View button — Launches the View Certificate dialog box.

Certificate — The user-assigned certificate name. The same name may be used on
different products.
Key — The user-assigned key name. The same name may be used on different products.
Start Date — The start date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is blank. For
chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

Key Strength — The key strength (size in bits). If only a certificate is present, this field is
blank.

Delete button — Deletes a selected certificate.
Import button — Import a certificate or key from a file.
Deploy button — Launches the Deploy Certificate/Key dialog box.

Generating a certificate signing request
You can use SSL Certificates to generate a certificate signing request (CSR). The CSR must be
submitted to a certificate authority (CA) for signing. The signed certificate is then exported from the
CA to a secure location. It can then be imported into SSL Certificates.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. Click Signing Request.
The Certificate Signing Request dialog box displays (Figure 387).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

947

31

Generating a certificate signing request

FIGURE 387 Certificate Signing Request dialog box
If the selected certificate key entry has a key, the Use the key selected in certificate view option
is automatically selected.
If a key is not available for the selected entry, the Generate a new key option is automatically
selected.
3. Choose one of the following options:

• Select the Use the key selected in certificate view option to use the certificate key entry
selected on the Certificate View tab of the SSL Certificates dialog box. Go to step 6.

• Select the Generate a new key option to generate a new key. Continue with step 4.
4. Enter a number in the Key strength field.
The key strength is from 512 through 4096 bits. The default is 1024 bits.
5. Enter the password in the Password field.
The password is from 4 through 254 characters, case-sensitive, and allows all printable ASCII
characters.
6. Click OK.
The Generate CSR Key dialog box displays (Figure 388).

948

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Generating a certificate signing request

31

FIGURE 388 Generate CSR Key dialog box
7.

Enter your organization’s user data:

•
•
•
•

Common Name - A common name for the CSR (1 through 32 alphanumeric characters).
Unit Name - A unit name for the CSR (1 through 32 alphanumeric characters).
Organization - The name of your organization (1 through 64 alphanumeric characters).
E-mail Address - The e-mail address for the CSR. This is the From: address when the CSR is
submitted for signing. It can be up to 64 characters long.

• Locality Name - A name for your locality (1 through 64 alphanumeric characters).
• State or Province - Your state or province (1 through 32 alphanumeric characters).
• Country - A two-character country code.
8. Enter a name for the SSL key in the Key Name field (1 through 32 alphanumeric characters).
9. In the Key field, paste the newly generated SSL key, or a previously generated key that has
been selected from the Certificate View tab.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

949

31

Adding an SSL certificate and key file

10. Enter the key password in the Password field, if necessary.
By default, the Password field displays the password (entered in the Certificate Signing
Request dialog box) as asterisks (*).
11. Click OK.
The generated CSR displays in the CSR field.
12. The CSR needs to be copied and pasted into a file. Obtain instructions from the CA for
submitting the CSR for signing.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Adding an SSL certificate and key file
To add an SSL certificate and key file, you must have received a signed certificate from an
Certificate Authority (CA) and you must have a copy of a signed certificate ready to paste. If you
want to include a certificate key, you must also have the key available.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, use the Certificates arrow to select Add.
The Add SSL Certificate dialog box displays (Figure 389).

FIGURE 389 Add SSL Certificate dialog box
3. Enter a name in the Certificate Name field.
The name can be from 1 through 32 characters in length.
4. Paste the signed certificate request into the Certificate field.

950

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing an SSL certificate and key file

31

The certificate request must be in .PEM format, and must not be expired. No size limit is
enforced.
5. If you want a key to accompany the certificate, select the With Private Key check box.
This enables the Key Name, Key, and Password fields.
If you select With Private Key, continue with step 6. If you do not select With Private Key,
continue with step 9.
6. Enter a name in the Key Name field. Any alphanumeric character can be used except a space.
The field is case-sensitive. The maximum number of characters is 24.
7.

Paste the SSL key into the Key field. The key must be in .PEM format. No size limit is enforced.

8. Enter a password for the SSL key in the Password field.
All printable ASCII characters are allowed. The field is case-sensitive. The maximum number of
characters is 32.
9. Select the Repeat Expiration Alarm check box to repeat sending the certificate expiration trap.
10. Enter descriptive text for the certificate in the Description field.
All printable ASCII characters are allowed. The field is case-sensitive. The maximum number of
characters is 1024.
11. Click OK to create the certificate and key.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Editing an SSL certificate and key file
You can only select to repeat sending a certificate expiration trap or edit the certificate key
decription from the Edit Certificate dialog box.

NOTE

You cannot edit the Certificate Name, Certificate, With Private Key, Key Name, or Key fields.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, use the Certificates arrow to select Edit .
The Edit Certificate dialog box displays.
3. Select the Repeat Expiration Alarm check box to repeat sending the certificate expiration trap.
4. Change the descriptive text for the certificate in the Description field.
All printable ASCII characters are allowed. The field is case sensitive. The maximum number of
characters is 1024.
5. Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

951

31

Duplicating an SSL certificate and key file

Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Duplicating an SSL certificate and key file
You can only edit the certificate name, the key name, and the certificate key decription from the
Duplicate Certificate dialog box.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, use the Certificates arrow to select Duplicate .
The Duplicate Certificate dialog box displays.
3. Change the name in the Certificate Name field.
The name can be from 1 through 32 characters in length.
4. Change the name in the Key Name field.
Only enabled when the With Private Key check box is selected.
Any alphanumeric character may be used except a space. The field is case sensitive. The
maximum number of characters is 24.
5. Change the descriptive text for the certificate in the Description field.
All printable ASCII characters are allowed. The field is case sensitive. The maximum number of
characters is 1024.
6. Click OK.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Viewing SSL certificate details
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You can only select to repeat sending a certificate expiration trap or edit the certificate key
decription from the Edit Certificate dialog box.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, select the certificate you want to view and click View .
The View Certificate Details dialog box displays the selected certificate in a readable format. If
the selected certificate is chained, a tree structure displays that allows you to select a chained
certificate.

952

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Importing certificates and keys from file locations

31

3. Click Close.

Importing certificates and keys from file locations
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
The certificates and keys must already be stored in known locations before importing the
certificates and keys from file locations. You must know the certificate or key name, and the
password associated with the key.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, use the Import arrow to select From File.
The Import from File - SSL Certificates/Keys dialog box displays (Figure 390).

FIGURE 390 Import from File - SSL Certificates/Keys dialog box
3. Select the Input Format. Privacy Email (PEM) and RSA public-key cryptography standards
(PKCS) formats are supported.
4. Enter the name of the file that contains the certificate in the Certificate File Name field or click
Browse to browse to the location.
5. Enter the certificate name in the Certificate Name field.
6. If a key is to be associated with the certificate, enter the name of the file that contains the key
in the Key File Name field or click Browse to browse to the location.
If you selected PKCS as the Input Format, the Browse button is unavailable.
7.

Enter the key name in the Key Name field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

953

31

Importing certificates and keys from products

8. Enter the password associated with the key in the Password field.
9. (Optional) Enter a description of the certificate in the Description field.
10. Click OK to import the certificate and key files.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Importing certificates and keys from products
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You can import deployed certificates and keys from products to manage them from SSL
certificates.

NOTE
To import keys from ADX devices, key passwords must be entered in the Key Passwords dialog box
prior to import. If the key passwords are not entered in the Key Passwords dialog box, the keys from
ADX devices are not imported. ADX software release 12.2 and later supports a master key password.
Using the master key password feature, you can configure one master password on the product to
import all keys from the device. Use the following commands to set and clear the master passwords
on ADX devices.
ssl set export-master-pswd 
ssl clear export-master-pswd 
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, click the Import arrow and select From Product.
The Import from Product - SSL Certificates/Keys dialog box displays (Figure 391).

954

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Exporting certificates and keys

31

FIGURE 391 Import from Product - SSL Certificates/Keys dialog box
3. Select a product from the Available Sources list.
4. Use the right arrow button to move the selected product to the Selected Sources list.
5. Click OK to import certificates and keys for the selected products.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Exporting certificates and keys
NOTE
If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You must know where you want to store the certificate or key before exporting the certificate or key.
You also must know the certificate or key name.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, select a certificate and click Export.
The Export to File dialog box displays.
3. Select the Export Format option.
Privacy Email (PEM) and RSA public-key cryptography standards (PKCS) formats are supported.
For the PEM format, two files, one certificate and one key, are exported.
For the PKCS format, one file, which contains the certificate and key, is exported.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

955

31

Deploying certificates and keys

If you export the certificate file only (no key file), the PKCS option is not enabled.
4. Enter the location of the file in the File Location field or click Browse to browse to the location.
5. Enter the certificate name in the Certificate Name field.
6. Enter the key name in the Key Name field.
If you export the certificate file only (no key file), the Key Name field is not enabled.
If you select PKCS as the export format, the Key Name field is not enabled.
7.

Click OK to export the certificate and key files.

Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Deploying certificates and keys
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You can deploy an SSL certificate and key to a ServerIron or ADX product using the following
procedure.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. Select a certificate from the Certificate View tab.
3. Click Deploy.
The Deploy Certificates/Keys dialog box displays (Figure 392).

956

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating key passwords

31

FIGURE 392 Deploy Certificates/Keys dialog box
4. Select a product from the Available Targets list.
5. Use the right arrow button to move the selected product to the Selected Targets list.
6. Click OK.
The certificate and key selected from the Certificate View tab are deployed to the selected
products.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

Creating key passwords
You can create candidate key passwords used when importing SSL keys from a ServerIron product
using the following procedure.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, click Key Passwords.
The Key Passwords dialog box displays (Figure 393).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

957

31

Creating key passwords

FIGURE 393 Key Passwords dialog box
3. Under Add/Edit Key Password, enter an ASCII character string (from 1 through 16 characters)
in the Display Label field that identifies the password you enter in the Password field. Use the
key name or a character string that is easy to identify with a specific key.
The label provides a means for identifying the password. The password itself is not exposed.
4. Enter a password (4 through 254 ASCII characters) for the SSL encryption key in the Password
field.
5. Use the right arrow key to move the password to the Key Password List.
You can use the left arrow key to move a key back to Add/Edit Key Password to edit the Display
Label and Password fields. Use the Up and Down buttons to rearrange the Key Password List.
6. Click OK to save your work.
Related topic
“SSL certificate configuration”

958

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appending SSL certificates

31

Appending SSL certificates
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You can append an SSL certificate with another certificate.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, select the certificate to which you want to append another
certificate.
3. Use the Certificates arrow to select Append.
The Append Certificate dialog box displays. The Append Certificate dialog box contains the
same fields and components as the Add Certificate dialog box (Figure 389). For information
about the fields and components, refer to “Adding an SSL certificate and key file” on page 950.
4. Add the certificate content you want to append to the certificate you selected in step 2 in the
Certificate field.
5. Click OK to save changes.

Chaining SSL certificates
NOTE
If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197
You can chain a certificate to another certificate selected from the Certificate View tab.

NOTE

You cannot chain a key only entry.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. From the Certificate View tab, select the certificate to which you want to chain another
certificate.
Make sure the Status for the certificate to which you want to chain another certificate is Valid.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

959

31

Chaining SSL certificates

3. Click Chain.
The Chain Certificates dialog box displays (Figure 394).

FIGURE 394 Chain Certificates dialog box
The Certificates table includes the following details:

• ID — A unique system-assigned ID for each certificate entry.
• Status — Possible values are Valid, About to Expire, or Expired.
• Certificate — The user-assigned certificate name. The same name may be used on
different products.

• Key — The user-assigned key name. The same name may be used on different products.
• Start Date — The start date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is blank. For
chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

• Expiration — The expiration date for the certificate. If only a key is present, this field is
blank. For chained certificates, the date for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

• Certificate Size — The certificate size in bytes. If only a key is present, this field is blank.
• Key Strength — The key strength (size in bits). If only a certificate is present, this field is
blank.

• Common Name — The common name for the certificate. For chained certificates, the
name for the last certificate in the chain is displayed.

• Chain — Yes is certificates are chained, No if certificates are not chained. If only a key is
present, this field is blank.

• Deployed — Yes if the certificate or key is not deployed to the product. No if the certificate
or key is deployed to the product.

• Summary — An overall count of certificates.

960

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Deleting SSL certificates

31

4. Select the certificate you want to chain to the certificate you selected in step 2. The Chain
status for the selected certificate must be Yes.
Make sure the Status for the second certificate is Yes.
The description of the certificate displays in the Description field, if a description was entered
when the certificate was created.
5. Click OK.
If the root certificate status has a Chain status of Yes, the certificate selected in the Chain
Certificates dialog box is chained to the certificate selected from the Certificate View tab of the
SSL Certificates dialog box.

Deleting SSL certificates
NOTE

If the ADX is running software release 12.3.00 or later, you can only view and manage SSL
certificates that are bound to Virtual IP servers that are in your Area of Responsibility (AOR). To add
a Virtual IP server to your AOR, refer to “Assigning products to an AOR” on page 197

NOTE
When certificates and keys are bound to devices, the delete operation deletes the certificates and
keys from the SSL Certificates dialog box as well as the product.
To delete a selected SSL certificate , complete the following steps.
1. Select Configure > Application Delivery > SSL Certificates.
The SSL Certificates dialog box displays.
2. Choose one of the following options:

• From the Certificate View tab, select the SSL certificate that you want to delete and select
Certificates > Delete.

• From the Product View tab, select the SSL certificate that you want to delete and click
Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message to delete the certificate.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

961

31

962

Deleting SSL certificates

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

32

Deployment Manager

In this chapter
• Introduction to the Deployment Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing a deployment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Duplicating a deployment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting a deployment configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deploying a configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing deployment logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Generating a deployment report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Generating a deployment configuration snapshot report. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Searching the configuration snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

963
963
964
965
965
965
965
966
966

Introduction to the Deployment Manager
The Deployment Manager allows you to view, edit, duplicate, delete, deploy, and generate reports
for the following types of deployment configurations:

•
•
•
•

DCB
VLAN
STP
Security

You cannot create configurations using the Deployment Manager. The deployment configurations
must have been previously created and saved. Refer to the following sections for information about
creating these types of configurations:

• “Fibre Channel over Ethernet” on page 481 (for DCB configurations)
• “VLAN Management” on page 819 (for VLAN and STP configurations)
• “Security Management” on page 561
Deployments that were created through the legacy Configuration Wizard are listed in the
Deployment Manager dialog box, but cannot be modified, deployed, or deleted. You can only
launch reports for these deployments.

Editing a deployment configuration
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 395.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

963

32

Duplicating a deployment configuration

FIGURE 395 Task Scheduler dialog box
2. Select a deployment configuration in the Saved or Scheduled tab.
Policy-based routing configurations cannot be edited.
3. Click Edit.
A dialog box specific to the type of deployment displays. This is the same dialog box that was
used when the deployment was created.
4. Update the dialog box with the information you want to change.

Duplicating a deployment configuration
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment configuration in the Saved or Scheduled tab.

NOTE

VLAN configurations and policy-based routing configurations cannot be duplicated.
3. Click Duplicate.
A dialog box specific to the type of deployment displays. This is the same dialog box that was
used when the original deployment was created.
4. Update the dialog box with any information you want to change.

964

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Deleting a deployment configuration

32

A copy of the deployment configuration is created with the name “originalName copyn”. For
example, if the original name is “test”, the new name is “test copy1”. If you duplicate “test”
again, the name of the second duplicate is “test copy2”.

Deleting a deployment configuration
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment configuration in the Saved or Scheduled tab.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.
The deployment configuration is deleted and removed from the Task Scheduler dialog box.
If the deployment configuration is already in progress, it is not deleted.

Deploying a configuration
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment configuration in the Saved or Scheduled tab.
3. Click Deploy.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
4. Click Start.
The selected configuration is deployed.
You cannot deploy configurations that are already in progress.

Viewing deployment logs
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Click the Log tab.
A list of deployment configurations that are executed and the status of each displays.

Generating a deployment report
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment in the Saved, Scheduled, or Log tab.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

965

32

Generating a deployment configuration snapshot report

3. Click Report.
An HTML report displays. You can click the Configuration Name or Deployment Time to see
additional details.

Generating a deployment configuration snapshot report
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment in the Saved or Scheduled tab.
3. Click Deploy.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays.
4. Click Snapshot Report.
The Configuration Snapshot Report dialog box displays.
5. (Optional) If the configuration snapshot list is too long, you can filter the list.
a.

Select the start date and end date of the configuration snapshots you wish to view.

b.

Click Find.
The Management application displays the list of snapshots that match the start date and
end date you specified.

6. Select a product from the Device Configuration column to display the configuration snapshots
that are available for that product.
7.

Click View to display information for that deployment.
The View Pre/Post Configuration Snapshot dialog box displays details of the selected
configuration.

Searching the configuration snapshots
1. Select Configure > Task Scheduler.
The Task Scheduler dialog box displays.
2. Select a deployment in the Saved, Scheduled, or Log tab.
3. Click Snapshot.
The Configuration Snapshot Search dialog box displays.
4. Identify the targets you want to search.
Select a target in the Available Targets list and click the right arrow to move the target to the
Selected Targets list.
5. Define search criteria.
You can specify whether the targets should contain or not contain specific text, and whether to
display all configurations, the most recent configurations, or only those configurations that fall
within a specific date range.

966

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Searching the configuration snapshots

32

6. Click Find.
The Management application displays the list of snapshots that match the search criteria you
specified.
You can select configurations in the Search Results list to display details, view the snapshot report,
and compare two configurations,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

967

32

968

Searching the configuration snapshots

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

Performance Data

33

In this chapter
• SAN performance overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969
• SAN real-time performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
• IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
• IP configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
• IP real-time performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
• IP historical performance monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
• MIB data collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
• IP Custom performance reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
• IP sFlow configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
• IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
• IP traffic accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054

SAN performance overview
NOTE

SAN performance is only supported on Fabric OS devices.
Performance monitoring provides details about the quantity of traffic and errors that a specific port
or device generates on the fabric over a specific time. You can also use performance monitoring to
indicate the devices that create the most traffic and identify the ports that are most congested.
Performance monitoring allows you to monitor your SAN using the following methods (requires a
Licensed version):

• Gather and display real-time performance data (Switch Ports - FC, Switch Ports - GE, Switch
Ports - 10 GE, ISL Ports, E_Port Trunks, end-to-end Monitors, FCIP Tunnels, device Ports,
managed HBA Ports, and managed CNA Ports).
The Professional version only allows you to monitor your SAN by gathering and displaying
real-time performance data (Switch Ports - FC, Switch Ports - GE, Switch Ports - 10GE, ISL
Ports, E_Port Trunks, end-to-end Monitors, FCIP Tunnels, device Ports, managed HBA Ports,
managed CNA Ports).

• Create custom port and time data filters for historical performance data that can be saved as a
favorite.

•
• Provide enhanced performance reports.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

969

33

SAN performance overview

SAN performance measures
Performance measures enable you to select one or more measures to define the graph or report.
The measures available to you depend on the object type from which you want to gather
performance data.

NOTE
Devices with 10GE ports must be running Fabric OS 6.4.1 or later to obtain the correct TE_Port
statistics (TX/RX).

NOTE

Devices with 10GE ports must have the RMON MIB enabled on the switch. For more information
about the rmon collection command, refer to the Fabric OS Converged Enhanced Ethernet
Command Reference.
You can define a report or graph for the following performance data:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Current — Available in mAmps for installed SFPs.
Rx Power — Available in dBm for installed SFPs.
Tx Power — Available in dBm for installed SFPs.
Temperature — Available in Centigrade for installed SFPs.
Voltage — Available in mVolts for installed SFPs.
Tx % Utilization — Available for FC, GE, managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, E_port trunks,
10GE ports, and FCIP tunnels.

• Rx % Utilization — Available for FC, GE, managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, 10GE ports,
E_port trunks, and FCIP tunnels.

• Tx MB/Sec — Available for FC, GE, managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, 10GE ports,
E_port trunks, FCIP tunnels, and end-to-end monitors.

• Rx MB/Sec — Available for FC, GE, managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, 10GE ports,
E_port trunks, FCIP tunnels, and end-to-end monitors.

• CRC Errors — Available for FC, managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, 10GE ports and
end-to-end monitors.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

970

Signal Losses — Available for managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, and FC ports.
Sync Losses — Available for managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, and FC ports.
Link Failures — Available for managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, and FC ports.
Sequence Errors — Available for FC ports.
Invalid Transmissions — Available for FC ports.
Rx Link Resets — Available for FC ports.
Tx Link Resets — Available for FC ports.
C3 Discard — Available for FC ports.
C3 Discard RX Timeout — Available for FC ports
C3 Discard Tx Timeout — Available for FC ports
C3 Discard Unreachable — Available for FC ports.
C3 Discard Others — Available for FC ports.
Encode Error out — Available for FC ports.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN performance overview

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

BB Credit Zero — Available for FC ports.

•
•
•
•

Dropped Frames — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.

33

Truncated Frames — Available for FC ports.
FEC Corrected Blocks — Available for FC ports.
FEC Uncorrected Blocks — Available for FC ports.
Dropped Packets — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Cumulative Compression Ratio — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Current Compression Ratio — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Latency — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Link Retransmits — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Timeout Retransmits — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Fast Retransmits — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Duplicate Ack Received — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Window Size RTT — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
TCP Out of Order Segments — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Slow Start Status — Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Uncompressed Tx/Rx MB/sec - Available for FCIP tunnels only.
Overflow Errors — Available for 10GE ports only.
Runtime Errors — Available for 10GE ports only.
Receive EOF — Available for 10GE ports only.
Too Long Errors — Available for 10GE ports only.
Underflow Errors — Available for 10GE ports only.
Alignment Errors — Available for 10GE ports only.
NOS Count — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.
Error Frames — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.
Under Sized Frames — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.
Over Sized Frames — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.
Primitive Sequence Protocol Errors — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA
ports.
Bad EOF Frames — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.
Invalid Ordered Sets — Available for managed HBA ports, managed CNA ports, and FC ports.
Non Frame Coding Error — Available for managed HBA ports and managed CNA ports.

SAN performance management requirements
To collect performance data, make sure the following requirements have been met:

• Make sure the SNMP access control list for the device is empty or the Management application
server IP is in the access control list.
Example of default access control list
FCRRouter:admin> snmpconfig --show accesscontrol
SNMP access list configuration:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

971

33

SAN performance overview

Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

No
No
No
No
No
No

access
access
access
access
access
access

host
host
host
host
host
host

configured
configured
configured
configured
configured
configured

yet
yet
yet
yet
yet
yet

Example of Management application Server IP address included in access control list
FCRRouter:admin> snmpconfig --show accesscontrol
SNMP access list configuration:
Entry 0: Access host subnet area 172.26.1.86 (rw)
Entry 1: No access host configured yet
Entry 2: No access host configured yet
Entry 3: No access host configured yet
Entry 4: No access host configured yet
Entry 5: No access host configured yet

To add the Management application server IP address to the access control list, use the
snmpconfig --add accesscontrol command.
To set the default access control, use the snmpconfig --default accesscontrol command.

• Make sure that the SNMP credentials in the Management application match the SNMP
credentials on the device.

-

To check the SNMP v1 credentials on the device, use the snmpconfig --show snmpv1
command.
Example of SNMP v1
HCLSwitch:admin> snmpconfig --show snmpv1
SNMPv1 community and trap recipient configuration:
Community 1: Secret C0de (rw)
Trap recipient: 10.103.4.63
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4
Community 2: OrigEquipMfr (rw)
Trap recipient: 10.1.12.240
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4
Community 3: private (rw)
Trap recipient: 10.103.5.105
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4
Community 4: public (ro)
Trap recipient: 2.168.102.41
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4
Community 5: common (ro)
Trap recipient: 10.32.150.116
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4
Community 6: FibreChannel (ro)
Trap recipient: 1001:0:0:0:0:0:0:172
Trap port: 162
Trap recipient Severity level: 4

-

972

To set the SNMP v1 credentials on the device, use the snmpconfig --set snmpv1
command.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN performance overview

33

Example of setting SNMP v1
HCLSwitch:admin> snmpconfig --set snmpv1
SNMP community and trap recipient configuration:
Community (rw): [test]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [172.26.1.183]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Community (rw): [OrigEquipMfr]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [172.26.24.26]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Community (rw): [custom]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [172.26.1.158]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Community (ro): [custom]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [0.0.0.0]
Community (ro): [common]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [0.0.0.0]
Community (ro): [FibreChannel]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [172.26.1.145]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]

-

To check the SNMP v3 credentials on the device, use the snmpconfig --show snmpv3
command.
Example of SNMP v3
sw1:FID128:admin> snmpconfig --show snmpv3
SNMPv3 USM configuration:
User 1 (rw): snmpadmin1
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv
User 2 (rw): snmpadmin2
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv
User 3 (rw): snmpadmin3
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv
User 4 (ro): snmpuser1
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv
User 5 (ro): snmpuser2
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv
User 6 (ro): admin
Auth Protocol: noAuth
Priv Protocol: noPriv

-

To set the SNMP v3 credentials on the device, use the snmpconfig --set snmpv3
command.
FM_4100_21:admin> snmpconfig --set snmpv3
SNMPv3 user configuration(SNMP users not configured in Fabric OS user
database will have physical AD and admin role as the default):
User (rw): [snmpadmin1] admin
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3] 1
New Auth Passwd:
Verify Auth Passwd:
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(1..6) [2] 1
New Priv Passwd:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

973

33

SAN performance overview

Verify Priv Passwd:
User (rw): [snmpadmin2]
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3]
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(2..2) [2]
User (rw): [snmpadmin3]
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3]
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(2..2) [2]
User (ro): [snmpuser1]
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3]
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(2..2) [2]
User (ro): [snmpuser2]
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3]
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(2..2) [2]
User (ro): [snmpuser3]
Auth Protocol [MD5(1)/SHA(2)/noAuth(3)]: (1..3) [3]
Priv Protocol [DES(1)/noPriv(2)/3DES(3)/AES128(4)/AES2(5)/AES256(6)]):
(2..2) [2]
SNMPv3 trap recipient configuration:
Trap Recipient's IP address : [2.168.71.32]
UserIndex: (1..6) [1]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [1.1.1.1]
UserIndex: (1..6) [2]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [10.64.209.171]
UserIndex: (1..6) [1]
Trap recipient Severity level : (0..5) [4]
Trap recipient Port : (0..65535) [162]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [0.0.0.0]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [0.0.0.0]
Trap Recipient's IP address : [0.0.0.0]

-

To check SNMP credentials in the Management application, complete the following steps.
1. Select Discover > Fabrics.
The Discover Fabrics dialog box displays.
2. Select an IP address from the Available Addresses list.
3. Click Edit.
The AddFabric Discovery dialog box displays.
4. Select the Manual option to view SNMP credentials.
5. Click the SNMP tab.
6. Select v1 or v3 from the SNMP Version list.
7.

Make sure SNMP credentials match those on the device.

8. Click OK on the AddFabric Discovery dialog box.
9. Click Close on the Discover Fabrics dialog box.

-

974

To set SNMP credentials in the Management application, refer to “Discovery” on page 31.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN performance overview

33

• Make sure that the SNMP security level is set to the appropriate level for the switch.
- To check the SNMP security level, use the snmpconfig --show secLevel command.
Example of checking SNMP security level
snmpconfig --show secLevel
GET security level = 0, SET level = 0
SNMP GET Security Level: No security
SNMP SET Security Level: No security

-

To set the SNMP security level, use the snmpconfig --set secLevel command.
Example of checking SNMP security level
snmpconfig --set secLevel 0
Select SNMP GET Security Level
(0 = No security, 1 = Authentication only, 2 = Authentication and Privacy,
3 = No Access): (0..3) [0]

• To collect performance data for GE ports and FCIP statistics, make sure that SNMP v3
credentials match and that FCIP-MIB capability is enabled.

-

To check FCIP-MIB capability, use the snmpconfig --show mibcapability command.
Example of showing FCIP-MIB
FCRRouter:admin> snmpconfig --show mibcapability
FCIP-MIB: YES

-

To enable FCIP-MIB capability, use the snmpconfig --set mibcapability command.
Example of enabling FCIP-MIB
FCRRouter:admin> snmpconfig --set mibcapability
FA-MIB (yes, y, no, n): [yes]
FICON-MIB (yes, y, no, n): [yes]
HA-MIB (yes, y, no, n): [yes]
FCIP-MIB (yes, y, no, n): [yes]
ISCSI-MIB (yes, y, no, n): [yes]

• To collect performance data on a Virtual Fabric-enabled device, use the userconfig --show
command to make sure the Fabric OS user has access to all the Virtual Fabrics. Make sure that
the SNMPv3 user name is the same as the Fabric OS user name. Otherwise, the data is not
collected for virtual switches with a non-default Virtual Fabric ID. By default, the admin user
has access to all Virtual Fabrics.
Example of Fabric OS user verification
sw1:FID128:admin> userconfig --show
Account name: admin
Description: Administrator
Enabled: Yes
Password Last Change Date: Unknown
Password Expiration Date: Not Applicable
Locked: No
Home LF Role: admin
Role-LF List: admin: 1-128
Chassis Role: admin
Home LF: 128

-

Make sure I/O is running on the switch to obtain real statistics. To view switch statistics,
use the portperfshow (FC Ports) or portshow fciptunnel (FCIP tunnels) command.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

975

33

SAN real-time performance data

Example for FC ports
Sprint-65:root> portperfshow 5

Example for FCIP tunnels
Sprint-65:root> portshow fciptunnel ge0 1 -perf

SAN real-time performance data
Real-time performance monitoring enables you to collect data from managed devices in your SAN.
Real-time performance monitoring is only supported on the following managed objects: FC (E_Ports
and F_Ports), GE_Ports, E_Port trunks, 10GE_Ports, managed HBA Ports, managed CNA Ports, and
FCIP tunnels. You can use real-time performance monitoring to configure the following options:

• Select the polling rate from 10 seconds up to 1 minute.
• Select up to 100 ports total from a maximum of 20 devices for graphing performance.
For E_Port trunks, you can select up to 25 trunks (the trunk member [port] count must be
below 100) from a maximum of 20 devices for graphing performance.

NOTE

Virtual Fabric logical ISL ports are not included in performance collection.

• Choose to display the same Y-axis range for both the Tx MB/Sec and Rx MB/Sec measure
types for easier comparison of graphs.

Generating a real-time performance graph
You can monitor a device’s performance through a performance graph that displays transmit and
receive data. The graphs can be sorted by the column headers. You can create multiple real-time
performance graph instances.

NOTE

To make sure that statistics for a switch does not fail, you must configure SNMP credentials for the
switch. For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Discovery” on page 31.
To generate a real-time performance graph for a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select the fabric, device, or port for which you want to generate a performance graph
2. Select Monitor > Performance > Real-Time Graph.
If you selected a port, the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box for the selected port
displays. To filter real-time performance data from the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog
box, refer to “Filtering real-time performance data” on page 977.
If you selected a fabric or device, the Realtime Port Selector dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 396 on page 977. Continue with step 3.

976

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN real-time performance data

33

FIGURE 396 Realtime Port Selector dialog box
NOTE

You can set columns in right side of the dialog box for FICON display using Server > Options >
SAN DIsplay. The first eight columns will display FC Address, Serial #, Tag, Product Type, Model,
Vendor, Port Name, Port Type, and Port WWN.
3. Select the object type from the Show list by which you want to graph performance.

NOTE

Devices with 10GE ports must be running Fabric OS 6.4.1 or later to obtain the correct TE_Port
statistics (TX/RX).

NOTE

Devices with 10GE ports must have the RMON MIB enabled on the switch. For more
information about the rmon collection command, refer to the Fabric OS Converged Enhanced
Ethernet Command Reference.
4. Right-click anywhere in the Available list and select Expand All from the menu.
5. Select the ports or trunks you want to include in the performance graph in the Available list.
Press Ctrl or Shift and then click to select more than one port.
6. Click the right arrow to move the selected ports to the Selected list.
7.

Click OK.
The Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box displays.

Filtering real-time performance data
To filter real-time performance data from the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box, complete
the following steps.
1. Open the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box.
For step-by-step instructions, refer to “Generating a real-time performance graph” on
page 976.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

977

33

SAN real-time performance data

2. Select how the data is measured, in received frames, transmitted frames, or CRC errors.
For a list of possible performance measures, refer to “SAN performance measures” on
page 970.
3. To select more than one measure, click the Additional Measures expand arrows and select the
check box for each additional measure. If Additional Measures area is not shown, click the
down arrow.
For a list of possible performance measures, refer to “SAN performance measures” on
page 970.
4. (Optional) Enter a value (percentage) in the Reference Line field to set a reference for the
transmit and receive utilization.
Note that this field is only available when you select Tx % Utilization or Rx % Utilization from the
Measures list.
5. Select how detailed the data will display from the Granularity list. Options are in increments of
10 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds, 25 seconds, 30 seconds, 45 seconds, or 1 minute.
6. Select Plot Events to display advanced monitoring service (AMS) violation events received
during the chart time range and Master Log events logged on the same product as the
measure being plotted.
7.

Move the Row Height slider to the left to make the row height smaller or to the right to make it
larger.

8. Select the Display tabular data only check box to show only text with no graphs or icons.
The Source and Destination icons and the Graph column do not display.
9. Click Apply.
The selected data automatically displays in the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box.
10. Click the close button (X) to close the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box.

Graph display
The columns in the graphical portion of the Real Time Performance Graphs dialog box display the
following information:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Source Fabric - The source fabric being monitored.
Source - The source device being monitored.
Source Port - The source port being monitored.
Tunnel ID - The ID of the FCIP tunnel being monitored.
Destination Fabric - The destination fabric.
Description - Description of the FCIP tunnel.
Port Type - Type of port being monitored.
Graph - Graph of data over time.
Destination - The destination device.
Destination Port - The port through which the selected device is connected to the destination
device.

• Destination Tunnel ID - The ID of the destination FCIP tunnel.

978

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN real-time performance data

33

• Destination Port Type - The port type through which the selected device is connected to the
destination device.

• Additional Measures columns - Displays each measure selected in the Measures list and
Additional Measures area.

• Measures columns - A column for each selected measure in the Measures list or Additional
Measures area.

Exporting real-time performance data
To export real-time performance data, complete the following steps.
1. Generate a performance graph.
To generate a performance graph, refer to “Generating a real-time performance graph” on
page 976.
2. Right-click anywhere in the graph table and select Export Table.
The Save table to a tab delimited file dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the file location where you want to save the performance data.
4. Enter a name for the file and click Save.

Performance statistics counters
Table 86 details the formulas used to calculate performance statistics based on counter type and
protocol.
To calculate FC, GE, FCIP and TE port statistics, the Management application uses SNMP to query
the respective object identifiers (OID) (listed in Table 86).
To calculate HBA and CNA statistics, the Management application uses APIs provided by HCM.
To calculate end-to-end monitor (EE monitor) statistics, the Management application uses HTTP to
obtain the TX, RX, and CRC error values.
The polling interval for historical graphs is 5 minutes. The polling interval for real-time graphs is
based on the granularity value (configured in the Real Time Graph dialog box).

TABLE 86

Performance statistic counters

Counter name

Type

Protocol

Source OID value

Formula

TX

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.6

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

RX

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.7

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX

GE

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.10

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

RX

GE

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.10

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

979

33

SAN real-time performance data

TABLE 86

Performance statistic counters

Counter name

Type

Protocol

Source OID value

Formula

RX

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

Uncompressed
Tx/Rx MB/sec

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.6

(delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX

EE Monitors

HTTP

PortRX (variable from the
return html file)

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

RX

EE Monitors

HTTP

PortTX (variable from the
return html file)

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX

HBA, CNA

HCM API N/A

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

RX

HBA, CNA

HCM API N/A

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX

TE

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6

TX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

RX

TE

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.10

RX = (delta value1 / (1000 * 1000)) /
(polling interval2)

TX% / RX%

FC, GE,
HBA, CNA

N/A

N/A

TX% or RX% = ((TX or RX) /
((105000000 * port speed)*
(polling interval2))) * 100
If utilization is less than 1, the value is 0.0.

TX% / RX%

FCIP

N/A

N/A

TX% or RX% = ((bytes transferred) / (maximum bytes
transmitted))*100 where maximum bytes transmitted = tunnel
speed * 134217728 (maximum bytes transmitted 1 Gbps).
If utilization is less than 1, the value is 0.0.

TX% / RX%
(Pre-Fabric OS
6.4.1 release)

TE

N/A

N/A

TX% or RX% = ((TX or RX) /
((105000000 * 10)*
(polling interval2))) * 100
If utilization is less than 1, the value is 0.0.

Cumulative
Compression
Ratio

FCIP

N/A

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.4

Compression Ratio = current value/ 1000
The compression ratio is the current compression ratio value.

Current
Compression
Ratio

FCIP

N/A

N/A

(ifHCInOctets + ifHCOutOctets) /
fcipExtendedLinkCompressedBytes

Receive EOF

TE

.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.5

Receive EOF = delta value1 /
(1000 * 1000)

Other3
1.

The difference of the value retrieved between two consecutive polling cycles.

2.

The duration between two polling cycle in seconds.

3.

Additional performance counters are detailed in Table 86.

980

Other counters = delta value1

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SAN real-time performance data

33

Table 87 lists the additional counters for which you can obtain performance statistics.

TABLE 87

Performance counters

Counter name

Type

Protocol

Source OID value

CRC Errors

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.40

Signal Losses

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.43

Sync Losses

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.44

Link Failures

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.39

Sequence Errors

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.42

Invalid Transmissions

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.41

Rx Link Resets

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.33

Tx Link Resets

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.34

C3 Discard

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.28

C3 Discard Rx Timeout

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.25

C3 Discard Unreachable

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.26

C3 Discard Tx Timeout

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.27

C3 Discard Others

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.28

Encode Error Out

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.29

Temperature

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.28.1.1.1

Voltage

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.28.1.1.2

Current

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.28.1.1.3

Rx Power

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.28.1.1.4

Tx Power

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.28.1.1.5

Invalid Oredered Set

FC

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.45

BB Credit Zero

FC

SNMP

1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.8

Truncated Frames

FC

SNMP

1.3.6.1.3.94.4.5.1.47

FEC Corrected Blocks

FC

SNMP

1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.31

FEC Uncorrected Blocks

FC

SNMP

1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.27.1.32

Latency

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.5

Dropped Packets

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.3

Link Retransmits

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.2

Timeout Retransmits

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.9

Fast Retransmits

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.10

Duplicate Ack Received

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.11

Window Size RTT

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.12

TCP Out of Order Segments

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.13

SlowStart Status

FCIP

SNMP

.1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.4.1.1.14

CRC Errors

EE Monitors

HTTP

PortCRC (variable from the return html file)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

981

33

IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis

FIGURE 397

NOTE

Policies set for switches enabled for Monitoring and Alerting Policy Suite (MAPS) also display in
this dialog box.

IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis
Use information in the following sections to monitor IP performance and analyze IP traffic.

• IP configuration requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982
• IP real-time performance monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
• IP historical performance monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
• IP Custom performance reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014
• IP sFlow configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
• IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037
• IP traffic accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054

IP configuration requirements
To be able to use SNMP Monitor for performance monitoring, make sure the following
requirements are met:

• Ensure that SNMP is enabled on the devices you want to monitor and that SNMP community
strings have been defined for set and get operations.

• Make sure discovery has been run and the devices appear on the Network Object Manager
tree. If a device is not on the tree, add the device using Network Object Manager.

• Define what data you want to collect.
• If you need to monitor devices within specific device groups, you must create the device
groups.

• You must have the SNMP Monitor privilege in your user account or role.
Management application comes with default MIB files, such as standard MIB and Brocade
proprietary MIB files.

982

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

33

IP real-time performance monitoring
Real-time performance monitoring allows you to view a snapshot of current performance data. You
can enable real-time performance monitoring without configuring historical data collectors. The
data is not stored in the database. Performance monitoring allows you to define a data collector by
mapping a Management Information Base (MIB) object to a unit name (refer to “MIB data
collectors” on page 1013).
Real-time performance measures are built-in expressions. The following measures are available:
Device measures

Port measures

•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Power Allocation (NS)
Power Allocation % (NS)
CPU utilization
Memory utilization
Temperature

Optics
Power Allocation (NS)
Consumption (W)
Power Consumption %
Input and output utilization
Throughput
Input and output errors
FC Port transmit and receive utilization (VDX only)
FC Port transmit and receive in megabits per second (VDX
only)

Monitoring real-time performance
If no products have been selected for real-time performance monitoring, you can select products
and data collectors by taking the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Real Time Graphs/Tables.
The Select Sources - Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays, as shown in .Figure 398 on
page 983.

FIGURE 398 Select Sources - Real Time Graphs / Tables dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

983

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

2. Select the products you want in the Available Products list and click the right arrow button to
move them to the Selected Products list.

NOTE

You cannot select more than 100 products and ports.
3. Select the ports you want in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button to move
them to the Selected Ports list.
4. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
5. Use the Show list to toggle the tree structure display between Products and Collectibles.
When you select Products, the tree structure shows devices on the network that are being
polled for collectible data.
When you select Collectibles, the tree structure shows the MIB objects and expressions
associated with products.
6. Add collectors to be monitored by completing the following steps.

NOTE

You cannot select more than 20 collectors at a time.
a.

Choose from the following options:

• To view performance for all collectors defined for the product, click the product. To
add collectors to a product, refer to “Adding measures to products” on page 986.

• To view performance for all collectors defined for the port, click an individual port. To
add collectors to a port, refer to “Adding measures to ports” on page 987.

• To view a single collector, click an individual collector under a product or port.
b.
7.

Click the right arrow button.

Remove collectors from the monitor by selecting the collector beneath the graph and clicking
the left arrow button.

8. To configure the look and feel of the performance graph from the Real Time Graphs/Tables
dialog box, refer to “Configuring the performance graph” on page 989.
9. Click the Collection Status Summary tab to view the following information.
The Collection Status Summary tab provides a high-level overview of all defined collectors. The
information is displayed in the following columns:

• Product - Shows the product name and IP address. There may be multiple instances of the
product name for each collectible assigned to the product.

• Port - The port name when a port is selected.
• Collectible - The MIB objects and expressions used by the data collector.
• Status - The status field uses the following icons, as shown in Table 88 on page 985.

984

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

TABLE 88

33

Collection status icons

Failed. No value was ever collected for this collectible.
Warning: Data collection failed in the last polling cycle.
Successful: Last collection successful.
Scheduled but not currently active.

• Last Value - The last (most current) value collected.
• Last Time Polled - The time that the collector was last polled.
10. Click Sources to add products and ports to or remove products and ports from real-time
performance monitoring. Refer to “Adding products and ports to real-time performance” on
page 985 and “Removing products and ports from real-time performance” on page 985.
11. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Adding products and ports to real-time performance
To add products and ports to real-time performance monitoring, complete the following steps.
1. Click Sources from the Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box.
2. Select the products you want in the Available Products list and click the right arrow button to
move them to the Selected Products list.

NOTE

You cannot select more than 100 products and ports.
3. Select the ports you want in the Available Ports list and click the right arrow button to move
them to the Selected Ports list.
4. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Removing products and ports from real-time performance
To remove products and ports from real-time performance monitoring, complete the following
steps.
1. Click Sources from the Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box.
2. Select the products you want to remove in the Selected Products list and click the left arrow
button to move them to the Available Products list.
3. Select the ports you want to remove in the Selected Ports list and click the left arrow button to
move them to the Available Ports table.
4. Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

985

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

5. The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Adding measures to products
To add measures to products, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device and select Performance > Real Time Graph/Table.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
2. Select Products from the Show list.
The available products display in a list.
3. Select a product in the list and click Measures.
The Select measures - Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
4. Select Device Measures from the Show list.
5. To add a MIB measure to the product, complete the following steps.
a.

Click MIBS tab in the Available Measures area.

b.

Select the MIB measure you want to add to the product.
Select multiple measures by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
measure.
You can also search (refer to “Search” on page 299) for a MIB in the list.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Measures list.

6. To add an expression to the product, complete the following steps.
a.

Click the Expressions tab in the Available Measures area.

b.

Select the expression you want to add to the product.
Select multiple expressions by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
expression.
To add an expression to the list, refer to “Adding, editing, or duplicating a user-defined
expression” on page 1006.

c.
7.

Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Measures list.

If you want to launch the Expressions dialog box, click the Expressions button.

8. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Removing measures from products
To remove measures from products, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device and select Performance > Real Time Graph/Table.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
2. Select Products from the Show list.
The available products display in a list.

986

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

33

3. Select a product in the list and click Measures.
The Select measures - Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
4. Select Device Measures from the Show list.
5. To remove an MIB or expression from the product, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the MIB or expression you want to remove from the product in the Selected
Measures list.
Select multiple MIBs and expressions by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more
than one MIB or expression.

b.

Click the left arrow button to remove them from the Selected Measures list.

6. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Adding measures to ports
To add measures to ports, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device and select Performance > Real Time Graph/Table.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
2. Select Products from the Show list.
The available products display in a list.
3. Expand the list and select a port in the list and click Select Measures.
The Select measures - Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
4. Select Port Measures from the Show list.
5. To add a MIB measure to the port, complete the following steps.
a.

Click the MIBS tab in the Available Measures area.

b.

Select the MIB measure you want to add to the port.
Select multiple measures by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
measure.
You can also search (refer to “Search” on page 299) for a MIB in the list.

c.

Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Measures list.

6. To add an expression to the port, complete the following steps.
a.

Click the Expressions tab in the Available Measures area.

b.

Select the expression you want to add to the port.
Select multiple expressions by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more than one
expression.
To add an expression to the list, refer to “Adding, editing, or duplicating a user-defined
expression” on page 1006.

c.
7.

Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Measures list.

If you want to launch the Expressions dialog box, click the Expressions button.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

987

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

8. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Removing measures from ports
To remove measures from ports, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click a device and select Performance > Real Time Graph/Table.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
2. Select Products from the Show list.
The available products display in a list.
3. Expand the list and select a port in the list and click Measures.
The Select measures - Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
4. Select Port Measures from the Show list.
5. To remove an MIB or expression from the port, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the MIB or expression you want to remove from the port in the Selected Measures
list.
Select multiple MIBs and expressions by holding down the CTRL key and clicking more
than one MIB or expression.

b.

Click the left arrow button to remove them from the Selected Measures list.

6. Click OK.
The Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Adding collectibles to monitoring
NOTE
You cannot select more than 20 collectors at a time.
To add collectibles to performance monitoring, complete the following steps.
1. Add all collectibles defined for a device by completing the following steps.
a.

Select Show > Products to show devices on the network that are being polled for
collectible data.

b.

Select the product you want to include in performance in the tree. Press CTRL and click to
select multiple products.

c.

Click the right arrow button.
The graph and table are populated with the collectible performance values. All collectibles
defined for the selected product display beneath the graph.

2. Add all collectibles defined for a port by completing the following steps.

988

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

33

a.

Select Show > Products to show devices on the network that are being polled for
collectible data.

b.

Select the port you want to include in performance in the tree. Press CTRL and click to
select multiple ports.

c.

Click the right arrow button.
The graph and table are populated with the collectible performance values. All collectibles
defined for the selected port display beneath the graph.

3. Add an individual collectibles by completing the following steps.
a.

Select Show > Collectibles to show the MIB objects and expressions.

b.

Select the collectible to include in performance in the tree. Press CTRL and click to select
multiple collectibles.

c.

Click the right arrow button.

The graph and table are populated with the collectible performance values. The selected
collectibles displays beneath the graph.

Removing collectibles from monitoring
To remove collectibles from performance monitoring, complete the following steps.
1. Select the collectible you want to delete remove the graph. Press CTRL and click to select
multiple collectible.
2. Click the left arrow button.

Configuring the performance graph
To configure the look and feel of the performance graph from the Historical or Real Time
Graphs/Tables dialog boxes, complete the steps under “Configuring the performance graph
display” and “Configuring graph options” on page 991.

Configuring the performance graph display
Use the procedure to configure the graph display for the Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog box and
Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box as well as time series monitors on the Dashboard tab or
Performance Dashboard.
1. Right-click the graph and select one of the following options.

• Select the Show Controls check box to show or hide additional display options on the
graph (refer to step 3 through step 9 for more information).

•
•
•
•
•
•

Select the Show Legend check box to show or hide the measurements beneath the graph.
Select Clear Graph to clear the graph.
Select Deleted Selected Measures to delete the selected measures from performance.
Select Zoom In to zoom in on the graph.
Select Zoom Out to zoom out on the graph.
Select Fit in window to fit the graph in the window.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

989

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

• Select Go to Latest to go to the latest data point on the graph.
• Select the Use Logarithmic Axis check box to present data on a logarithmic or
non-logarithmic axis.

• Select the Show Values check box to annotate data point values in the graph.
• Select the Enable Auto Scrolling check box to automatically jump to display the new data
when new data is collected while the graph is in view.

• Select the Enable Transition Effect check box to automatically adjusts the range on the
vertical axis so that all the data are contained within the view area when you drag the
chart into a different time range on the SNMP monitoring graph.

• Select Plot Min/Max to plot minimum and maximum values along with the average data
point This option is not available if minimum interval granularity (5 minutes for SAN
historical graph) is selected. The width of the color band displayed on the graph indicates
the variation during the time period.

• Select Show Events to display advanced monitoring service (AMS) violation events
received during the chart time range and master log events logged on the same product as
the measure being plotted.

• Select Chart Styles to display data as a line chart, area chart, or bar chart.
• Select Options to launch the Graph Options dialog box. Refer to “Configuring graph
options” on page 991 for more information.

• Select Export to export to a spreadsheet (.csv) or an image (.png).
• Select Print to print the graph.
2. (Historical Graphs/Tables and Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog boxes only) Select Graph Style
on the Real Time Graphs/Tables dialog toolbar to display an Options dialog box. The following
options are available for Performance Graph Styles:

• Color Scheme - Change the graph background to white or black.
• Show Data Points - Displays data points on the graph. Figure 399 on page 990 is an
example of a graph when Show data points is selected.

FIGURE 399 Show data points graph

990

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

33

NOTE

Although these settings will apply to all performance graphics in the management application.
the change will not reflect instantly on the Performance Dashboard monitor that displays the
graph. Rather it will be updated the next time those monitors are launched.
3. Click Options to launch the Graph Options dialog box. Refer to “Configuring graph options” on
page 991 for instructions on using this dialog box.
4. Select the Graph or Table option to display data in graphical or tabular format.
5. Select a time range relative to the present for the display of historical data from the For list.
The options are incremental from the last 30 minutes to the last 24 hours.
6. (Historical graphs and monitors only) Select the Plot Min/Max check box to plot minimum and
maximum values along with the average data point.
The range between the minimum and maximum values will be represented in a color band
surrounding the data points. The width of the color band indicates the variation during the time
period. Note that this option is not available if you select Minimum Interval granularity.
7.

(Historical graphs and monitors only) Select one of the following options from the Granularity
list to set the granularity of the data point to display on the graph:

•
•
•
•

5 minutes
30 minutes
2 hours
1 day

NOTE

The graph will not update dynamically if the granularity is 30 minutes, 2 hours, or 1 day. To
update, move from one granularity setting to another. The graph will update dynamically when
Minimum interval is selected.
8. Select the Events check box to display advanced monitoring service (AMS) violation events
received during the chart time range.
9. (Real Time Graphs/Tables and Historical Graphs/Tables dialog boxes only) Click Save as
Widget to create a performance monitor published widget on the active dashboard. For
instructions, refer to “Configuring a monitor from a performance graph” on page 278.

Configuring graph options
Use the following steps to configure graph options for Real Time Performance Graph display as well
as time series monitors on the Dashboard tab or Performance Dashboard.
1. Click Options on the graph.
The Graph Options dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 400 on page 992.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

991

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

FIGURE 400 Graph Options dialog box (Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box)
NOTE

Figure 400 illustrates the Graph Options dialog box available from the Historical
Graphs/Tables dialog box. The Graph Options dialog box available from the Real Time
Graphs/Tables dialog box is similar, but has fewer control options.
2. Select the type of chart style from the Chart Style list.
Available chart styles include Line Chart, Area Chart, or Bar Chart.
3. Select the graph accuracy to up to three decimal places in the Value Decimal Places list.
4. Select from the following check boxes to define how polled data displays:

• Use logarithmic axis check box — Data can be presented on a logarithmic or
non-logarithmic axis. Each unit in a non-logarithmic axis presents the data in equal
segments. However, logarithmic axis units are not equal and can increase exponentially by
10. Therefore, use a logarithmic axis if you have a large amount of data to view.

• Show values check box — Annotates data point values in the graph.
• Enable automatic scrolling check box — If new data is collected while the chart is in view,
the chart will automatically jump to display the new data.

• Enable transition effect check box — The SNMP monitoring chart automatically adjusts the
range on the vertical axis so that all the data are contained within the view area when you
drag the chart into a different time range. Enabling this option provides an animated
smooth transition between the adjustments while the monitoring chart is being dragged or
any action that may cause the range of vertical axis to change.

• Show Threshold/Rearm — Displays threshold and rearm events on the chart.

992

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP real-time performance monitoring

33

• (Historical graphs and monitors only) Plot Min/Max - Plots minimum and maximum values
along with the average data. The range between the minimum and maximum values will
be represented by the width of a color band surrounding the data points as shown in the
following illustration. Note that this option is not available if you select Minimum Interval
granularity. It also does not apply and is not available for Real Time Performance graphs.

FIGURE 401 Data points graph

• Show Events - Select to display advanced monitoring service (AMS) violation events
received during the chart time range and master log events logged on the same product as
the measure being plotted. Each event will be represented by the same severity icon that
is shown in the master log (refer to icons a bottom of following graph). Hovering the cursor
over the icon displays details of the violation, such as violation time, switch/port
information, violated rule name, and violated rule condition. Monitoring and Alerting Policy
Suite (MAPS) violations are plotted for a product or port level measure (whichever is
selected) during the plotted time range. The show events graph is shown in Figure 402 on
page 993

FIGURE 402 Show events graph
5. In the Time Range area, select one of the following options:

• Select Relative time to set a time range relative to the present for the display of historical
data.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

993

33

IP real-time performance monitoring

a.

(Historical graphs and monitors only) Select the granularity of the data points to
display on the graph from the Granularity list. Options are 5 minutes, 30 minutes, 2
hours, or 1 day.

NOTE

The graph will not update dynamically if the granularity is 30 Minutes, 2 Hours, or 1 day. To
update, click Apply. The graph will update dynamically when Minimum interval is selected.
b.

Select the duration of time for data display on the graph from Select list.
Real time options are incremental from the last 30 minutes to the last 6 hours.
Historical options are incremental from the last 30 minutes to the last 24 hours.

• (Historical graphs and monitors only) Select Absolute time to get a snapshot of data from a
specific time range and complete the following steps.
a.

Select the start date from the Start Date list.

b.

Select the start time (1 through 12) from the first Start Time list.

c.

Select AM or PM from the second Start Time list.

d.

Select the end date from the End Date list.

e.

Select the end time (1 through 12) from the first End Time list.

f.

Select AM or PM from the second End Time list.

6. Include items in the graph by selecting the Display check box for each item in the Items
Available for Display list.
7.

Set the scale factor for each item by entering a value (integer between -2147483648 and
2147483647) in the Scaling Factor column for each item in the Items Available for Display
table.

8. Click OK on the Graph Options dialog box.

Exporting a graph
To export a graph, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click the graph and select Export.
The Choose Export File Format dialog box displays.
2. Select one of the following options.

• Spreadsheet (.csv)
• Image (.png)
The Save dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the export file.
4. Enter a name for the export file.
5. Click Save.

Printing a graph
To print a graph, complete the following steps.

994

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

1. Right-click the graph and select Print.
The Page Setup dialog box displays.
2. Edit the paper, orientation, and margins, as needed.
3. Click Printer to select a printer.
4. Click OK.

IP historical performance monitoring
Historical performance monitoring allows you create data collectors by choosing MIB object and by
choosing or creating mathematical expressions. You can also configure a historical data graph or
table to display data. The following options and features are available for obtaining historical
performance data:

• Define a data collector by mapping a MIB (Management Information Base) object to a unit
name (refer to “MIB data collectors” on page 1013).

• Specify and adjust threshold values and polling intervals, and set time schedules for data
collection. Historical data is recorded in a database for retrieval in the form of graphs and
tables.

• Store records for each port.
• Create a custom graph or table display for data by defining options such as the following:
- Selecting a product for displaying data.
- Selecting measures to collect.
- Modifying collectors.
- Plotting minimum and maximum values.
- Displaying data points or polling intervals.
- Displaying events.
- Selecting a graph or table format.
- Enabling granularity of data to display:





-

5 minutes granularity for last 8 days
30 minutes granularity for last 14 days
2 hour granularity for last 30 days
1 day granularity for last 730 days

Displaying advanced monitoring service (AMS) violation events.
Providing a period for plotting the graph or table.

Related topics
“Editing system collectors”
“Displaying historical data collectors”
“Enabling a historical data collector”
“Adding or editing a historical data collector”
“”

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

995

33

IP historical performance monitoring

“Adding third-party device MIB objects manually”
“IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis”
“IP configuration requirements”
“IP real-time performance monitoring”
“IP Custom performance reports”
“IP sFlow configuration”
“IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports”
“IP traffic accounting”
Using Flow Vision dialog box options

Editing system collectors
Subject to the following restrictions, you can edit system collectors using the Data Collector wizard
(refer to “Adding or editing a historical data collector” on page 998).
You can modify the following attributes:

• Enable/disable settings - Collector Basics page
• Target selection - Select Source page
• Threshold and Rearm settings - Threshold and Rearm page
You cannot modify the following attributes:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Name - Collector Basics page
Device or port level - Collector Basics page
Polling interval - Collector Basics page
Schedule setting - Collector Basics page
MIB selection - MIB Object page
Expression selection - Expression page
MIB index - MIB Index page

NOTE

The MIB Index page for system collectors will not show because you cannot configure the MIB
index for system collectors.

Displaying historical data collectors
Select Monitor > Performance > Historical Data Collectors to display configured historical data
collectors.

996

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

FIGURE 403 Historical Data Collectors dialog box
All configured data collectors are listed, showing the following information:

• Name - The name of the data collector.
• Enabled - Whether or not the data collector is enabled (Yes) or disabled (No).
NOTE
The Netiron Ether Stats Collector and NOS Ethernet Port Optics Collector will be disabled by default.

• Polling Interval - The time interval, in minutes, between attempts to contact the information
source and gather data.

NOTE

The Polling Interval for NOS ethernet port optics collector is 30 minutes.

• Collectibles Type - At what level the data will be collected and the types of MIB objects used:
- Product Level - SNMP data is collected at the product (device) level.
- Port Level - SNMP data is collected at the port level.
• Source Defined - Whether or not the information source (product or port) is defined (Yes) or not
configured (No).

• System Collectors - Whether or not this is a system data collector. Refer to the following
sections for more information:

-

“Editing system collectors” on page 996
“Duplicating system data collectors” on page 1006

When you select a listed data collector, The following information is displayed in the Collector
Details field:

• MIB Variables - The MIB variables used (if any).
• Expression - The expression used (if any).
• Source - The defined products used as information sources by this collector.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

997

33

IP historical performance monitoring

Enabling a historical data collector
Use the following steps to enable a data collector to collect historical data or disable a data
collector from collecting data.
1. Select an historical data collector on the Historical Data Collectors dialog box.

• If the collector is disabled, the Enable button is active.
• If the collector is enabled, the Disable button is active.
2. Click Enable to enable the collector.
3. Click Disable to disable the collector.

Adding or editing a historical data collector
Use the following procedure to add or edit a historical data collector using the Data Collector
wizard.

NOTE

There are specific options that you can edit for system collectors. Refer to “Editing system collectors”
on page 996 for details.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Historical data collectors.
The Historical Data Collectors dialog box displays.
2. Perform either of the following steps:

• Select a collector and click the Edit button.
The Data Collector wizard Collector Basics dialog box displays where you can edit values
for the existing collector.

• Click the Add button
The Data Collector wizard Collector Basics dialog box displays where you can add values
for a new collector.

998

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

FIGURE 404 Data Collector wizard Collector Basics dialog box
3. Enter a descriptive name for the data collector in the Name field.
4. Use the Polling Interval list to set the polling interval.
The choices are 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, and 30 minutes.
5. Select the Target Type.

• If you select Product level, SNMP data is collected at the product (device) level.
• If you select Port level, SNMP data is collected at the port level.
6. Select the Status of the collector.

• If you select Enabled, the data collector starts collecting data immediately.
• If you select Disabled, the data collector stops collecting data.
• If you select Schedule, you may set up a time schedule for running the data collector.
The following options become active when you select Schedule:

• Frequency - This list allows you to run the data collector on a Yearly, Monthly, Weekly, Daily,
Hourly, or One Time basis. Appropriate options are displayed allowing you to set a start
time and duration for data collection.

•
•
•
•

If you select Yearly, or One Time, the Time (hh:mm) and Date selectors display.
If you select Monthly, the Time (hh:mm) and Day of the Month selectors display.
If you select Weekly, the Time (hh:mm) and Day of the Week selectors display.
If you select Daily, the Time (hh:mm) selector displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

999

33

IP historical performance monitoring

• Duration - Enter a value in the Duration field, and then select the unit of measure. The
options are Minutes, Hours, and Days.
7.

Click Next on the Collector Basics dialog box.
The MIB Objects dialog box displays.

FIGURE 405 Data Collector wizard MIB Objects dialog box
The Available MIB Objects tree includes all integer-based objects that are available by default
and any that have been imported. Third-party device MIB objects are not available by default.
You must manually add the third-party device MIB objects (refer to “Adding third-party device
MIB objects manually” on page 1005).

NOTE

Performance does not support string-based MIB objects.
8. Expand a MIB folder to display the MIB objects.
9. Select a MIB object.
A description of the MIB object displays under Details of .
10. To include the MIB object in your data collector, click the right arrow button to move the object
to the Selected MIB Objects list. You can select multiple MIB objects, however, you cannot
move a folder. Note the limit on the number of objects that can be selected and the number of
choices remaining.
11. Click Next on the MIB Objects dialog box.
The Expressions dialog box displays.

1000

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

FIGURE 406 Data Collector wizard Expressions dialog box
The Available Expressions list shows all expressions that are available by default and any that
have been defined by the user.
12. Select an expression from the Available Expressions list.
A description of the expression displays under Details of .
13. To include the expression in your data collector, click the right arrow button to move the
expression to the Selected Expressions list. Note the limit on the number of expressions that
can be selected and the number of choices remaining.

NOTE

You can click the Expression button to add a user-defined expression at this time. Refer to
“Adding, editing, or duplicating a user-defined expression”for instructions.
14. Click Next on the Expressions dialog box.
The Select Sources dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1001

33

IP historical performance monitoring

FIGURE 407 Data Collector wizard Select Sources dialog box
The Available Products/Ports tree structure includes all products and ports that can be
monitored. You can expand folders to display all available products and ports.
If you have selected Port Level on the Collector Basics dialog box, trunk objects will be included
as available targets in the form of LAG, vLAG, or TRILL objects. Only ifindex-based MIBs or
expressions are supported.
15. Select a folder, individual products, and ports that you want to monitor (the sources of data for
your data collector) and click the right arrow to move the folder, product, or port to the Selected
Products/Ports list.
When you select a product and move it to Selected Products/Ports, the folder is moved into a
Products folder tree structure. When you select a port and move it to Selected Products/Ports,
the port is moved into a Ports folder tree structure.
You can also select a product group or port group. When you select a group and move it, all
member products or ports are moved to the Selected Products/Ports list.
16. Click Next on the Select Sources dialog box.
The MIB Index dialog box displays.

1002

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

FIGURE 408 Data Collector wizard MIB Index dialog box
You can define index values for each MIB object that requires an index.
17. From the MIB Instances list, select the required MIB variable.
The Complete SNMP OID, the Index Name, and the Index Value display beneath the MIB
Instances list.
18. You have several options for entering index information:

• Select the Dynamic walk check box to dynamically select index values for a particular
index. When enabled, instances are selected based on a MIB walk.

• Click the Populate All button to populate the index with all objects. You can then use the
Delete Index button to delete any objects you do not need.
If you selected a product collector, the index is populated with indexes of all instances of
the selected MIB variable.
If you selected a port collector, the index is populated with the ifIndex value of the port with
which the MIB variable is associated.

• Click the MIB Walk button to start a MIB walk facility. Refer to “Configuring a MIB walk
instance” on page 1005.

• Click the Add Index button to add an index.
• Click the Delete Index button to delete an index.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1003

33

IP historical performance monitoring

19. Click Next on the MIB Index dialog box.
The Threshold & Rearm dialog box displays.

FIGURE 409 Data Collector wizard Threshold & Rearm dialog box
This Threshold & Rearm dialog box allows you to establish a a threshold value that triggers a
trap message when the threshold is met, and to establish conditions for repeating threshold
check and trap messages.
20. Select the Enable threshold and rearm events check box to enable the Threshold and Rearm
selectors.
21. Select the Fixed Threshold value and assign a Threshold Trap Severity level.
22. Select the Fixed Rearm value and assign a Rearm Trap Severity level. If the Fixed Rearm value
is the exact value used to trigger rearming (repeating the threshold check and trap message),
select Absolute. If the Fixed Rearm value is expressed as a percentage of the threshold value,
select Percent of threshold.
23. Click Finish to accept your entries.

1004

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

Adding third-party device MIB objects manually
To add a third-party device MIB object manually, complete the following steps.
1. Copy the third-party device MIB objects to the Install_Home\conf\mibs\ip directory.
2. Go to Install_Home\conf\mibs and open the mibs_to_compile.txt file in a text editor.
3. Add the MIB file names to the mibs_to_compile.txt file.
4. Save and close the mibs_to_compile.txt file.
5. Launch the MIB Objects dialog box to view the third-party device MIB objects. Refer to “Adding
or editing a historical data collector” on page 998.

Configuring a MIB walk instance
To configure a MIB walk instance, complete the following steps.
1. Launch the MIB Index dialog box. Refer to “Adding or editing a historical data collector” on
page 998.
2. Select an MIB object from the MIB Instance list and click MIB Walk.
The MIB Walk dialog box displays all existing instances of the selected MIB on the selected
product.

FIGURE 410 MIB Walk dialog box
3. Select an instance from the list and click Add Instances to add the selected index to the list.
4. Select an instance from the list and click Set Instances to override the existing index with the
selected index.
5. Click Close to close the MIB Walk dialog box.

Duplicating a historical data collector
You can create a new data collector by duplicating an existing data collector, changing the name,
and editing any values in the duplicate that you want to change.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1005

33

IP historical performance monitoring

1. Select Monitor > Performance > Historical Data Collectors.
2. Select the data collector you want to duplicate.
3. Click Duplicate.
The Data Collector wizard is launched. The wizard is pre-populated with the data for the
selected data collector. The Name field shows the name of the collector followed by the word
copy. Go to any step to edit any of the values.
4. Click Finish on any of the wizard dialog boxes when you are done.

Duplicating system data collectors
Although you can duplicate a system collector, only the following target types will carry over to the
duplicate collector:

•
•
•
•
•

Individual products
Individual ports
User-defined port groups
User-defined product groups
System product groups

The following internal product group or port groups will carry over to the duplicated collector:

• FastIron/NetIron products
• Network OS products
• IP physical ports

Deleting a historical data collector
You can delete one or more data collectors from the Historical Data Collectors dialog box.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Historical Data Collectors.
2. Select the data collector or data collectors you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
You are prompted to confirm the delete operation.
4. Click Yes to confirm.

NOTE

You cannot delete system data collectors.

Adding, editing, or duplicating a user-defined expression
You may want to create an expression to collect information in a specific way. For example, you may
want the total count of all received and transmitted packets on an interface, requiring a value
derived from two MIB objects; the MIB object for the incoming packet count and the MIB object for
the outgoing packet count. Take the following steps to add a user-defined expression.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Expressions.
The Expressions dialog box displays.

1006

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

2. Perform either of the following steps:

• Click Add.
The Add Expressions dialog box displays.

FIGURE 411 Add Expressions dialog box

• Select the expression you want to edit or duplicate from the Expressions list and click Edit or
Duplicate.
The Edit Expression or Duplicate Expression dialog box displays with the details for the
selected expression. If you are duplicating an expression, the Management application
appends _copy to the name of the expression.
3. Enter a name for the expression in the Name field.
4. (Optional) Enter text that you want to display in the legend area of the graph in the Unit field.
5. Enter a brief description in the Description field.
6. Select a MIB object from the Available MIB Objects tree structure.
A description of the MIB object displays in the MIB Details field.
7.

Build your expression in the Expression field using the operators above the field.

• MIB Object.Abs — The raw value of the MIB variable that is polled from the product will be
used in the SNMP expression calculation.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1007

33

IP historical performance monitoring

• MIB Object.Delta — Assuming the MIB value polled in the current polling period is M(T1)
and the value polled in the previous polling period is M(T0), the MIB value to be used in the
expression is calculated using M(T1)- M(T0).

• MIB Object.Rate — Assuming the MIB value polled in the current polling period is M(T1)
and the value polled in the previous polling period is M(T0), the MIB value to be used in the
expression is calculated using (M(T1)- M(T0))/ (T1 – T0) (T0 and T1 are measured in
seconds).
The following example is the formula used to create the If%Errors expression, which calculates
the error percentage for input packets on an interface.
(iFInErrors / (ifHCInUcastPkts + ifInMulitcastPkts + ifInBroadcastPkts)) * 100
8. Click OK to accept your changes.

Deleting an expression
Complete the following steps to delete an expression.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Expressions.
The Expressions dialog box displays.
2. Select the expression you want to delete from the Expressions list.
3. Click Delete.
A confirmation dialog box displays.
4. Click OK to delete the expression.

1008

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

Viewing Historical Graphs/Tables
1. Right-click a row in a performance monitor on the dashboard and select Show Graph/Table.
OR
Select Monitor > Performance > Historical Graphs/Tables.
The Historical Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.
2. Select the Data Monitoring tab.
The main features are a tree structure and a graph area. You can collapse the tree structure to
expand the graph area.

FIGURE 412 Historical Graphs/Tables Data Monitoring tab
3. Use the Show selector to toggle the tree structure display in the left panel between Products
and Collectibles.

• Select Products and the left panel displays the tree structure of devices and device
interfaces on the network being polled for collectible data. The right panel displays
measures currently being collected for the selected product or port in the left panel.
In addition, measures collected for attached wireless access point (AP) devices and
controllers display. Refer to Figure 415 on page 1010 for an example.
Measures also displays for IP products that appear in the device tree. Refer to Figure 414
for NetIron devices.

FIGURE 413

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1009

33

IP historical performance monitoring

FIGURE 414 NetIron Historical Graph display

FIGURE 415 Wireless access point devices and controllers display

• Select Collectibles and the left panel displays measures (MIB objects and expressions)
currently being collected. Select a measure, and the targets (products or ports) from which
the measure was collected display in the right panel. If SAN historical data collection is
enabled, corresponding SAN products and ports display.
Measures also display for SAN products, ports, and FCIP tunnels that appear in the device
tree. In addition, measures collected for attached wireless access point (AP) devices and
controllers display. You can select these collectibles to create applicable historical graphs
and tables.
4. Select Collectors to open the Historical Data Collectors dialog box. Use this dialog box to
display, enable or disable, add or delete, and duplicate historical data collectors. Refer to the
following sections for instructions:

• “Displaying historical data collectors” on page 996
• “Enabling a historical data collector” on page 998
• “Adding or editing a historical data collector” on page 998
5. Optional: To configure the look and feel of the performance graph from the Historical
Graphs/Tables dialog box, refer to “Configuring the performance graph” on page 989.

1010

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP historical performance monitoring

33

6. Optional:Once data collection begins, the data is presented on the chart (if Graph is selected)
or table (if Table is selected).
If a graph is displayed, the legend under the graph shows what data each color represents.
Also, you see the following text:

• MIB: Shows the name of the MIB object that is being used to collect the data and the
device that is being polled. If the target is a port, then the interface ID is also displayed.

• EXP: Shows the name of the expression being used to collect the data and the device that
is being polled. If the target is a port, then the interface ID is also displayed.
Each collectible is represented by a different color and the color for a collectible can change as
new data is collected.
If a table is displayed, the first column displays the time of the collection. The remaining
columns display the value of each collectible at the specified time. There is one column for
every collectible you select to display.
7.

Optional: To add the performance monitor published widget to the active dashboard, click Save
As Widget.
The Performance Dashboard Monitor Title dialog box displays.
Select Add the Widget to active dashboard (Product status and Traffic) check box to enable the
published widget. By default, the check box is enabled.
Click OK.

8. Select the Collection Status Summary tab.

FIGURE 416 Historical Graphs/Tables Collection Status Summary tab
The Collection Status Summary tab provides a high-level overview of all defined collectors. The
information is displayed in the following columns:

• Product - Shows the product name. There maybe multiple instances of the product name for
each collectible assigned to the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1011

33

IP historical performance monitoring

• Port - The port name when a port is selected.
• Collectible - The MIB objects and expressions used by the data collector. When you select a
collectible row, collectible information displays in the bottom portion of the panel, such as
errors, error count, and messages.

• Collector - The data collector name.
• Status - The status field uses the following icons:.
Failed. No value was ever collected for this collectible.
Warning: Data collection failed in the last polling cycle.
Successful: Last collection successful.
Scheduled but not currently active.

• Last Value - The last (most current) value collected.
• Last Time Polled - The time that the collector was last polled.
When you use the Show selector to select Products, devices and ports display in a tree structure in
the left-most column. If you select a device or port, the right collectibles column lists all the
collectors that have been defined for the device or port.
If you use the Show selector to select Collectible, the left-most column shows all the collectibles
(MIB objects or SNMP expressions) currently being collected. Select a collectible to display a tree
structure in the right column of all products and ports from which the expression or MIB object are
to be collected.
When a specific collectible is selected, collectible detail, error count, and error messages display in
an area below the table.

Mouse functions for graphs
The following mouse functions can be used for graphs:

• Zoom: Use the mouse wheel to zoom in or zoom out of a graph.
• Graph panning: Hold down the left mouse button and move the mouse left and right to pan
through the graph.

• Selective zooming: Select an area that you want to zoom by holding down the right mouse
button at one edge of the area, then drag the mouse to the left or right to the other edge of the
area. The area you selected changes color. Release the right mouse button to zoom the
selected area.

• Highlighting: Place the mouse over a data point. Information about that data point appears in a
tooltip-like format.

• Drag and drop from trees: If you want to monitor additional devices on the same graph, select
the device from the device tree, then drag and drop it into the graph. You can monitor up to
twenty entries in one graph. If you drag and drop a device node, all MIB variables and
expressions collected from that device are included.

1012

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

MIB data collectors

33

MIB data collectors
The Management application enables you to define a data collector by mapping a MIB object to a
unit name in the mib_unit.properties file. This property file is located in the
Install_Home/conf/mibs directory. The default mib_unit.properties file contains commonly used
MIB unit definitions.
Once mapped, the unit name displays on the line chart of the performance graphs when you select
that MIB object as a data collector.
You can map a unit name from either a MIB name or MIB object identifier (OID).
Example
#MIB OID mapping
1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6 = Octects
#MIB name mapping
ifHCInOctets=Octects

Mapping a MIB object to a unit name
To map a MIB name or OID to a unit name, complete the following steps.
1. Open the mib_unit.properties file in a text editor.
The mib_unit.properties file is located in the Install_Home/conf/mibs directory.
2. To map a MIB OID, use the following format:
1.3.6.1.2.1.31.1.1.1.6 = Octects

3. To map a MIB name, use the following format:
ifHCInOctets=Octects

4. Save and close the file.
You can then annotate the performance graphs using the unit name by assigning the MIB
object as a data collector. For counter values, the unit name is appended with “/sec” to
indicate the rate information for that counter value.
If you define a data collector with a MIB object that does not have an associated unit name, the
unit name displays as an empty string on the performance graph.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1013

33

IP Custom performance reports

IP Custom performance reports
You can create customized reports and run or schedule them in the same manner as a standard
report.
You can modify, copy, or delete customized reports. Select the report from the Report Definitions
tab, then click the Edit, Duplicate, or Delete button.
Related topics
“IP performance monitoring and traffic analysis”
“IP real-time performance monitoring”
“IP historical performance monitoring”
“IP Custom performance reports”
“IP Custom performance reports”
“IP sFlow configuration”
“IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports”
“IP traffic accounting”

Creating a custom report
Complete the following steps to create a report.
1. Select Monitor > Performance > Custom Reports.
The Performance Custom Reports dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 417 on page 1014.

FIGURE 417 Performance Custom Reports dialog box
2. Perform one of the following steps:

• Click Add to add a new report.

1014

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Custom performance reports

33

• Select an existing report from the Performance Custom Reports dialog box and click Edit
to edit the report.

• Select an existing report from the Performance Custom Reports dialog box and click
Duplicate to duplicate the report.

• Select an existing report from the Performance Custom Reports dialog box and click
Delete to delete the report.
If you select Add, Edit, or Duplicate, the Add/Edit/Duplicate Report Definition dialog box
displays, as shown in Figure 418 on page 1015. If you are editing or duplicating an existing
report, fields are already populated. Simply make changes as required.

FIGURE 418 Add/Edit /Duplicate Report Definition dialog box - Collection Items tab
By default, the Collection Items tab is selected. On this tab, the collectibles in all data collector
configurations are listed by device in the Available Collection Items list.
3. Select the collectible you want to include in the report and click the right arrow button to move
it to the Selected Collection Items list. To move a collectible back to the Available Collection
Items list, select it and click the left arrow button.
4. Select the decimal places for displaying values. From 1 to 3 places are available.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1015

33

IP Custom performance reports

5. To schedule the report to run at a specific time, click the Time Settings tab.

FIGURE 419 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Time Settings tab
You can choose from the following settings:

• Relative Time - Enables you to select a time range relative to the present for the display of
historical data. The choices are incremental from the last 30 minutes to the last 24 hours.

• Absolute Time - Enables you to get a snapshot of data from a specific time range, as
specified by the Start Date, Start Time, End Date, and End Time parameters.
Data collected for the report comes from data sampled at different granularities depending on
your time setting as shown in Table 89.

TABLE 89

1016

Granularity of data collected for time settings

Time Settings

Sampling Granularity

Less than or equal to 12 hours

Real-time or “raw”

Less than or equal to 1 week

30 minutes

Less than or equal to 30 days

2 hours

Up to 2 years

1 day

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Custom performance reports

33

6. To arrange the order of the columns in the generated report, click the Result Settings tab.

FIGURE 420 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Result Settings tab

• Data types that will be collected are listed in the Available Columns list. Select the data
type you want to include in the report and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Columns box.

• Select a data type to be used to sort the report. Select that data type from the Selected
Columns list and click the right arrow button to move it to the Sort by Columns list. Click
the left arrow button to move a data type back to the Selected Columns list. You can select
more than one column. If more than one column is selected, the report will be sorted
according to the sequence of the data types in the Sort by Columns list.

• Use the up and down arrows to move attributes up and down in the columns.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1017

33

IP Custom performance reports

7.

Click the Identification tab.

FIGURE 421 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Identification tab
8. Enter a name for the report in the Name field. You can use up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
This name appears under the Name column on the SNMP Monitor reports tree. This name
must be unique for each SNMP Monitor report.
9. Enter a title for the report, which will be used as the title of a generated report, in the Title field.
You can use up to 128 alphanumeric characters.
10. Select one of the following options:

• Select the Do not share this definition option if you do not want to share this definition with
other Management application users. Go to step 12.
If this option is selected, Management application users will not see this definition on the
Report Definitions table when they log in.

• Select the Share this definition (read only) option if you want other Management
application users to have read-only permission for this definition. Continue with step 10.
11. Select the roles that will have view and run access to this definition in the Available Roles list
and click the right arrow button to move those roles into the Selected Roles list.
If you selected the Share this definition (read only) option, a list of Management application
roles appears in this list. All Management application users who have the selected roles will be
able to view, copy, and run the definition.

1018

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Custom performance reports

33

12. Select the user accounts that will be able to view and run this definition in the Available Users
list and click the right arrow button to move those user accounts into the Selected Roles box.
Click the left arrow button to move the user accounts back to the Available Users list.
You can share this definition with specific Management application users. If you selected the
Share this definition (read only) option, a list of Management application user accounts
appears in this list.
13. Choose one of the following options:

• To save your entries, click OK.
• To run the report immediately, click Run.
The Management application generates the HTML report first, then generates a CSV file.
The HTML report launches in a browser immediately after the report is complete.
Click Abort to stop the report generation.

Interpreting the SNMP Monitor report
An SNMP Monitor report displays the information such as the following:

•
•
•
•

Report title - Title of the report as defined in the SNMP Monitor report definition.
Day, date and time - Time range when data was collected.
Graph - Graph of the collection activity.
Legend - Legend to help interpret the data on the graph. Each collectible is indicated by a
different color.

• Details table - Details for each collectible included in the report.
• Records Per Page - The number of records displayed on each page of the report is controlled at
the bottom of the reports page. You can select the number of records from the drop-down list.

Exporting an SNMP Monitor report
To export an SNMP Monitor report to a .csv file, press the Export button on the report and save the
displayed report to a .csv file.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1019

33

IP sFlow configuration

IP sFlow configuration
The Management application supports the creation of sFlow reports to capture traffic data.

Configuring sFlow
You can use the sFlow configuration wizard to configure an sFlow data collector and a destination
for the sFlow data collector.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Configure sFlow.
The Interface Payload - sFlow Configuration dialog box displays.

FIGURE 422 Interface Payload - sFlow Configuration dialog box
Under SFlow Configuration Selection, there are two check boxes:

• sFlow Settings - Allows you to enable or disable sFlow, and allows you to configure traffic
sampling rates.

• sFlow Destination - Allows you to add or delete sFlow collector entries in the device.
Select both if you are adding an sFlow data collector. If you are enabling or disabling sFlow of
modifying traffic sampling rates, you may select only sFlow Settings.

1020

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

2. Click Next.
The Interface Payload - sFlow Settings dialog box displays.

FIGURE 423 Interface Payload - sFlow Settings dialog box
3. Under Global Settings, select Enable to have the sFlow report enabled when it is deployed.
Select Disable to deploy the sFlow report as initially disabled.
4. Use the Rate Sampling selector to choose either Adaptive or Custom sampling.
If you choose Adaptive, the management server selects the sampling interval and traffic
sampling rate. The sampling rate is the ratio between the total number of incoming packets
and the number of flow samples taken at the product level. When Adaptive is chosen, the
sampling rate is based on interface speeds as shown in Table 90 on page 1021.

TABLE 90

Interface Payload

Interface Speed

Sampling rate

10 Mbps

256

100 Mbps

512

1 Gbps

1024

10 Gbps

2048

100 Gbps

8192

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1021

33

IP sFlow configuration

If you choose Custom, you may set your own sampling interval and traffic sampling rate.

-

Global Settings

• Counter sampling interval - defines the interval in seconds between samples. For
Ironware devices, the range is 0 to 86400. For Network OS devices, the range is 1 to
65535.

• Traffic sampling rate - the ratio between the total number of incoming packets and the
number of flow samples taken at the product level. The ratio is expressed as n to 1; for
example, if you specify a sampling rate of 100, the ratio is 100:1. The lower the ratio,
the higher the demand on CPU resources to process the samples. For Ironware
devices, the range is 1 through 1048576. For Network OS devices, the range is 2 to
16777215.

-

Port Level Settings

• Apply sFlow forwarding settings - This check box is used to enable traffic sampling at
the port level using the rate value specified in the sFlow forwarding sampling rate
field.

• sFlow forwarding sampling rate - the ratio between the total number of incoming
packets and the number of flow samples taken at the port level. The ratio is expressed
as n to 1; for example, if you specify a sampling rate of 100, the ratio is 100:1. The
lower the ratio, the higher the demand on CPU resources to process the samples.

• Disable sFlow forwarding - disables port level sampling.
5. Click Next.
The Product Payload - Select Action dialog box displays.
There are four possible actions to take:

-

Select Add to add entries to the target products.
Select Delete to remove matching entries to the target products.
Select Replace All to replace all existing entries to the target products.
Select Clear All to clear all existing entries from the target products.

The Product Payload - SFlow Destination dialog box displays.
6. Click Next.
The Product Payload - sFlow Destination dialog box displays.
7.

Click Add to add collector details and complete the following steps.
a.

Use the IP Address selector to select an IP address from the existing list of IP addresses of
management server NICs, or enter a new IP address in the field. IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
are allowed. IPv6 addresses are not supported for Network OS previous to v4.0 and Fabric
OS previous to v7.2.

b.

Enter the port number in the UDP Port field for the UDP port used to forward sFlow
samples to the collector.

NOTE

VCS devices use the default port 6343. If you change the VCS device default port number,
all sflow configuration are deployed to the device except the port number. The 6343 port
number cannot be changed.

c.

1022

Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

A new row appears under Collector Details for the collector you just added.

NOTE

A limit of four collectors is enforced in the Collector Details table. If you add more than four
collectors, an error message displays. An error message also displays if you try to add a
collector with the same IP address and UDP port combination as an existing collector.

NOTE

For VCS devices running Network OS v4.0 and above, you can deploy up to five collectors.
If you add more than five collectors, an error message displays. For versions prior to v4.0,
you can deploy only one collector.

8. Click Next.
The Deployment Targets dialog box displays.
9. Select the product or port to which you want to deploy this collector and click the right arrow to
move under the Selected Targets column.
10. Click Next.
The Deployment Properties dialog box displays.
11. Select one of the following options to set the Persistence Properties:

-

Do not Save to Flash or Reload — Use this option if you want to update the running
configuration. The payload configuration is not saved to the device flash memory, nor is
the device rebooted when the payload configuration is deployed.

-

Save to Flash — Use this option if you want to make the payload configuration permanent
in the device flash memory and saved to the running configuration. This is equivalent to
entering a write memory command. The payload configuration is applied to the device
when the device reboots.

-

Save to Flash and Reload — Use this option if you want to save the payload configuration to
the device flash memory and reboot the device. This is equivalent to entering the write
memory and reload commands. The availability of this option depends on your user
privileges.

12. Select one of the following check box to set the Pre-Post Snapshot Properties:

-

To run and save a report before this configuration is deployed to the product, select the
Pre-deployment check box and select a CLI template from the list.

-

To run and save a report after this configuration is deployed to the product, select the
Post-deployment check box, select a CLI template from the list, and select the post
deployment delay.

13. Select one of the following options to determine if you want to save the payload configuration.

-

To schedule a one-time deployment, select One time deployment, do not save
configuration.

-

To save the configuration for future deployment, select Save configuration and enter a
configuration name and description.

14. Click Next.
The Summary Page dialog box displays.
15. Review the configuration summary and click Deploy.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1023

33

IP sFlow configuration

Creating custom sFlow reports
You may create custom sFlow reports if you want to capture traffic analysis information that is not
available in the standard reports.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Custom Reports.
The Traffic Analyzer Custom Reports dialog box displays.

FIGURE 424 Traffic Analyzer Custom Reports dialog box, Definition tab
2. Select the Report Definitions tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The Add Report Definitions dialog box displays.

1024

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

4. Select the Product & Port tab.

FIGURE 425 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Product & Port tab
The Product & Port tab contains tables of available products and ports that may be selected for
sFlow data collection.
5. Determine if you want a report on only one product or port or on two or more products or ports,
and select either Single or Multiple as appropriate.
Options are displayed differently depending on your choice of Single or Multiple. If you chose
Single, complete the following steps.

-

To monitor both inbound and outbound traffic, select Show bidirectional flow.
To monitor edge port traffic, select Show edge port traffic. Only available when you move a
VCS fabric to the Selected Products list
Select products and ports from Available Products, Available Inbound Ports, and Available
Outbound Ports and move them to Selected Products, Selected Inbound Ports, and
Selected Outbound Ports using the right arrow.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1025

33

IP sFlow configuration

For VCS fabrics, if you select Single mode, the following report definition behavior may occur:

-

Displays all ports from all members of the selected VCS fabric in the available ports tables
on the Product & Port tab.

-

Automatically includes fabric changes (adding or deleting members) when you run the
report.

-

Generates an application event and displays a warning message for the following issues
when you edit or run a report:

• If the selected fabric is deleted for any reason (such as, seed switch changed to
standalone VDX or merging with another fabric).

• If the selected fabric port is deleted for any reason (such as, member leaving the
fabric).

• If the selected standalone VDX is added to a fabric for any reason (VDX device forming
a node fabric or joining a fabric).
If you chose Multiple, complete the following steps:

-

Use the Traffic Mode selector to choose Inbound, Outbound, or Both as the traffic
direction.

-

Select products and ports from Available Products/Ports, and move them to Selected
Products/Ports, using the right arrow.

For VCS fabrics, if you select Multiple mode, the selected device remains in the report
definition regardless of any changes to the fabric or mode.
6. Select the VM tab.

FIGURE 426 Add Report Definition dialog box, VM tab
7.

1026

Examine each listed item and decide the following:

-

Do you want to enter values in the field, or be prompted to enter the value when running
the report? If you want to be prompted, select the Prompt check box. Go to step 9.

-

If you choose to list values in the field, would you rather include or exclude the listed
values? The selector next to the field may be used to include (=) or exclude (!=) the values.
Go to step 9.

-

Are the values relevant to the design of your report? If not, leave the fields blank. Continue
with step 8.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

8. If you do not chose the Prompt check box, complete the following for each field.

-

Source VM — Enter the name, IP address, or MAC address of the source VMs in comma
separated value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select
the VMs from the Select VMs dialog box.

-

Destination VM — Enter the name, IP address, or MAC address of the destination VMs in
comma separated value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to
select the VMs from the Select VMs dialog box.

-

Source VM Host — Enter the name or IP address of the source VM hosts in comma
separated value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select
the VM hosts from the Select VM Hosts dialog box.

-

Destination VM Host — Enter the name or IP address of the destination VM hosts in
comma separated value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to
select the VM hosts from the Select VM Hosts dialog box.

9. Select the Layer 2 tab.

FIGURE 427 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Layer 2 tab
10. Examine each listed item and decide the following:

-

Do you want to enter values in the field, or be prompted to enter the value when running
the report? If you want to be prompted, select the Prompt check box.

-

If you choose to list values in the field, would you rather include or exclude the listed
values? The selector next to the field may be used to include (=) or exclude (!=) the values.

-

Are the values relevant to the design of your report? If not, leave the fields blank.

11. If you do not chose the Prompt check box, complete the following for each field.

-

Source MAC Address — Enter the source MAC addresses in comma separated value (CSV)
format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the MAC addresses from
the Source MAC Address Selector dialog box.

-

Destination MAC Addresses — Enter the destination MAC addresses in comma separated
value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the MAC
addresses from the Destination MAC Address Selector dialog box.

-

Source VLAN Numbers — Enter the source VLAN numbers in comma separated value (CSV)
format.

-

Destination VLAN Numbers — Enter the destination VLAN numbers in comma separated
value (CSV) format.

-

Input Priority (QoS priorities for inbound traffic) — Enter the input priority (O - 7).
Output Priority (QoS priorities for outbound traffic) — Enter the output priority (0 - 7).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1027

33

IP sFlow configuration

12. Select the Layer 3 & 4 tab.

FIGURE 428 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Layer 3 & 4 tab
13. Examine each listed item and decide the following:

1028

-

Do you want to enter values in the field, or be prompted to enter the value when running
the report? If you want to be prompted, select the Prompt check box.

-

If you choose to list values in the field, would you rather include or exclude the listed
values? The selector next to the field may be used to include (=) or exclude (!=) the values.

-

Are the values relevant to the design of your report? If not, leave the fields blank.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

14. If you do not chose the Prompt check box, you may enter any of the following in comma
separated value (CSV) format in the fields provided:

-

Layer 3 Protocols — Enter the L3 protocols in comma separated value (CSV) format or click
the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the protocols from the Layer 3 Protocols
dialog box.

-

Source Addresses — Enter the addresses in comma separated value (CSV) format or click
the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the addresses from the L3 Source
Addresses dialog box.

-

Source Address Groups — Enter the addresses in comma separated value (CSV) format or
click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the addresses from the L3 Source
Address Groups dialog box.

-

Destination Addresses — Enter the addresses in comma separated value (CSV) format or
click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the addresses from the L3 Source
Addresses dialog box.

-

Destination Address Groups — Enter the addresses in comma separated value (CSV)
format or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the addresses from the
L3 Source Address Groups dialog box.

-

TOS/DSCP values — Enter one or more TOS or DSCP value (0-255).
Layer 4 Protocols — The layer 4 protocols you can use as a filter depends on which layer 3
protocols you selected. Enter the L4 protocols in comma separated value (CSV) format or
click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the protocols from the Layer 4
Protocols dialog box.

-

Source Ports — Enter the ports in comma separated value (CSV) format or click the ellipsis
button to the right of the field to select the ports from the L4 Source Port dialog box.

-

Source Port Groups — Enter the port groups in comma separated value (CSV) format or
click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the port groups from the L4 Source
Port Groups dialog box.

-

Destination Ports — Enter the ports in comma separated value (CSV) format or click the
ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the ports from the L4 Source Port dialog
box.

-

Destination Port Groups — Enter the port groups in comma separated value (CSV) format
or click the ellipsis button to the right of the field to select the port groups from the L4
Source Port Groups dialog box.

15. Select the User Identification tab.

FIGURE 429 Add Report Definitions dialog box, User Identification tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1029

33

IP sFlow configuration

16. Decide if you want to enter the user names in the fields provided, or if you want to be prompted
for the user names.

-

If you want to be prompted, select the Prompt check box. This disables the field.
If you do not want to be prompted, enter the name of the user that is sending the traffic in
the Source User field, and enter the name of the user that is receiving the traffic in the
Destination User field.

17. Select the Routing tab.

FIGURE 430 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Routing tab
18. Examine each listed item and decide the following:
Do you want to enter values in the field, or be prompted to enter the value when running the
report? If you want to be prompted, select the Prompt check box.
If you do not chose the Prompt check box, you may enter any of the following in the fields
provided:

-

Source Subnet Bits - Enter the source subnet of the route.
Destination Subnet Bits - Enter the destination subnet of the route.
Local AS - Enter the local AS number.
Source AS - Enter the destination AS number.
Source Peer AS -Enter a source peer AS number.
AS Paths - Enter an AS path number.
Flow Label - Enter a flow label.

19. Select the Time Settings tab.

FIGURE 431 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Time Settings tab

1030

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

20. Select Relative time if the you want to retrieve information relative to a time range, or Absolute
time if you want to run the report at a specific date and hour.

-

If you select Relative time, use the Range selector to
If you select Absolute time, use the Start Date and Start Time selectors to set the time that
data collection begins, and the End Date and End Time selectors to set the time when data
collection ends.

21. Select the Result Settings tab.

FIGURE 432 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Result Settings tab
22. Select one of the following options for displaying report data from Result Type list:

-

Detailed Table - Displays data in table format.

-

Bottom N Chart and Table - Displays a pie chart of the bottom N talkers above the tabular
data.

Top N Chart and Table - Displays a pie chart of the top N talkers for your selected sorting
options above tabular data.

For the Bottom N Chart and Table and Top N Chart and Table selections, Total Bytes is
automatically selected under Selected Columns if Total Bytes or Total Frames is not already
selected. The Time column cannot be selected and the Sort By Columns box is not displayed in
the dialog box (refer to Figure 433 on page 1032).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1031

33

IP sFlow configuration

FIGURE 433 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Result Settings tab
23. If you selected Bottom N Chart and Table or Top N Chart and Table, select the top or bottom
number (N) of talkers that you want in the report by clicking the arrows on the selector to the
right of the Result Type list. Select a minimum of 5, with increments of 5 to a maximum of 25.
Figure 435 on page 1034 shows an example report for the top five talkers shown in total bytes
for source and destination MAC addresses.
24. Under Available Columns, select the attributes you want to display, and click the right arrow to
move them to Selected Columns. Among those you move should be the attribute you want to
use to sort the columns. For example, you may want to display Destination Address,
Destination MAC Address, and Destination Port and sort them by Device.
25. Under Selected Columns, select the attribute you want to use to sort the columns and use the
right arrow to move that attribute to Sort by Columns (only available if you select Detailed Table
for the Result Type.
You can use the up and down arrows to arrange the order in which columns will display in your
report.

1032

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

26. Select the Identification tab. Add Report Definitions dialog box displays, as shown in
Figure 434 on page 1033.

FIGURE 434 Add Report Definitions dialog box, Identification tab
27. Enter a name for the report in the Name field. The name must be unique among all sFlow
reports, and can be a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.
28. Enter the report title in the Title field. The Title field supports a maximum of 128 alphanumeric
characters.
29. Select Do not share the definition if you do not want other users to see the report definition
when they log in.
30. Select Share this definition if you want other users to have read only access to the report
definition.
31. If you select Share this definition, a list of user roles displays under Available Roles. Select user
roles that you want to empower to view and run the report definition, and use the right arrow
button to move the roles to Selected Roles.
32. If you select Share this definition, a list of users displays under Available Users. Select users
that you want to empower to view and run the report definition, and use the right arrow button
to move the users to Selected Users.
Click OK to save the definition or click Run to run the report.
The Figure 435 on page 1034 shows an example report for the top five talkers shown in total
bytes for source and destination MAC addresses.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1033

33

IP sFlow configuration

FIGURE 435 Example report for top 5 MAC Talkers

Scheduling custom sFlow reports
You can schedule a custom sFlow report from the Schedules tab of the Custom Reports dialog box.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Custom Reports.
2. Select the Schedules tab. Custom sFlow Reports dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 436
on page 1035.

1034

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP sFlow configuration

33

FIGURE 436 Custom sFlow Reports dialog box, Schedules tab
3. Click Add.
The Add Schedule dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 437 on page 1036.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1035

33

IP sFlow configuration

FIGURE 437 Add Schedule dialog box
4. Enter a name for the schedule in the Name field.
5. Use the Report Definition selector to select the report definition you want to schedule.

NOTE

Report definitions that included a prompt are not listed.
6. Use the Format selector to choose either HTML or CSV format.
7.

Use the Frequency selector to choose to run the data collector on a Yearly, Monthly, Weekly,
Daily, Hourly, or One Time basis. Appropriate options are displayed allowing you set a start time
and duration for data collection.

-

If you select Yearly, or One Time, the Time(hh:mm) and Date selectors display.
If you select Monthly, the Time(hh:mm) and Day of the Month selectors display.
If you select Weekly, the Time(hh:mm) and Day of the Week selectors display.
If you select Daily, the Time(hh:mm) selector displays.

8. If you want to send the report to an e-mail recipient, check the E-mail check box.
9. If you checked the E-mail check box, select recipients under Available Recipients and use the
right arrow to move them to Selected Recipients. Use the Other Recipients field to add
recipients that are not listed under Available Recipients.
10. Enter an e-mail address for replies in the Reply To field. This is mandatory.
11. Enter text for the subject line in the Subject Line field.

1036

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

12. You may include text that you want to add before the auto-generated report content in the Body
Prologue field.
13. You may include text that you want to add after the auto-generated report content in the Body
Epilogue field.
14. Click OK.

Suspending a custom sFlow report schedule
To suspend the schedule of a custom sFlow report, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Custom Reports.
2. Select the Schedules tab.
3. Select the schedule you want to suspend and click Edit.
The Edit Schedule dialog box displays.
4. Select the Suspend schedule check box.
5. Click OK.

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports
Traffic analyzer monitoring includes reports that can be used to display sFlow traffic information.
The sFlow standard, as described in RFC 3176, is a method for capturing traffic data in switched or
routed networks. An sFlow agent samples traffic on the hardware. The sFlow datagrams are stored
and may be analyzed and organized into reports.

• Layer 2 reports: MAC addresses, VMs, and VLANs
• Layer 3 or Layer 4 traffic reports: All Layer 3 protocols, IP, IPv4, and IPv6
IPv4 and IPv6 reports provide the following additional reports:

-

Top users of all Layer 4 protocols
Top TCP Talkers
Top ICMP Talkers
Top UDP Talkers
Top talkers for all services.
Top talkers for all Layer 4 protocol services excluding TCP, UDP, and ICMP

• TCP reports: Invalid TCP flags and valid TCP flags
• Miscellaneous: BGP path reports

Device-level configuration requirements
To be able to collect sFlow network traffic data, make sure sFlow is supported and enabled on the
product or port you want to monitor. The number of sFlow destinations you can have depends on
the device and the software release it is running. Refer to the configuration guide for your device for
details on how to enable and configure sFlow monitoring on the device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1037

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

802.1X configuration requirements
802.1X user information can be displayed on sFlow reports. To ensure that this information is
displayed, do the following:

• Make sure the device and software release it is running supports 802.1X.
• 802.1X must be enabled on the device ports.
• Clients must be running software platforms that support 802.1X (for example, Windows XP
operating system).

• RADIUS authentication servers must have the 802.1X feature enabled and properly
configured.

Displaying sFlow monitoring reports
NOTE
You cannot display sFlow monitoring reports for DCB or ADX devices.
To display sFlow monitoring reports, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
The Monitor sFlow dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 438 on page 1038.

FIGURE 438 Monitor sFlow dialog box
2. Select a report that has a bar graph icon under Report Available.
For VCS fabrics, the report only displays traffic sampled from the edge ports of the fabric.
3. Click View to display the report.

1038

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

4. To launch the sFlow Configuration wizard and configure an sFlow data collector, select
Configure sFlow.

Selecting a report
Use the report header to configure the report display. This section explains the available fields and
selection options.

Report list
Select the type of traffic that you want to view from the list.

•
•
•
•

For Layer 2 reports, select MAC, VM, or VLAN.
For L3/L4 reports, select IPv4, IPv6, IPX, AppleTalk (AT), VM, or Others.
For TCP reports, select Invalid TCP Flags or Valid TCP Flags.
For Misc. reports, select BGP Paths.

When you select IPv4 or IPv6 from the Report list, another list appears. From this additional list,
select the Layer 4 protocol to be included in the report. You can select All, TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other,
which includes all protocols excluding TCP, UDP, and ICMP.

Direction list
This is only available for VM Reports. Select one of the following from the list:

• Source
• Destination
• Both

Graph list
If the Graph box is enabled, select the format of the graph to be used to display the report. You can
choose, Bar, Line, or Pie.

End Date/Time list
Select the date and time when the report is to end from the lists.

Span list
Span is the amount of data you want to include in the report. Select 1, 2, 4, 6, or 12 hours or 1 day
(24 hours) from the list.

How End Date/Time and Span works:
Assume you have seven days of sFlow data from June 1 through 7. You want to view the first four
hours of data during June 2. From the End Date/Time lists, select 6/2 for day and 4 am for time. In
the Span list, select 4h. The resulting report shows four hours of data for June 2, beginning at 12
am and ending at 4 am.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1039

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

Also, if you select 1, 2, 4, or 6 hours for span, top talkers are shown as stacked bar graphs; each
bar represents two minutes of data. For example, each bar below represents 2 minutes of data.
Each bar is divided into the top talkers for that 2-minute period.

Measure list
Select how data is to be sorted: Bytes or Frames. Frames is the default.

Refresh list
If you select 12 hours or 1 day for span, each bar represents one hour of aggregated data and a
bar represents each top talker. For example, each set of 6 bars represents an hour of data; one bar
represents a top talker.
Select the refresh rate for the graph from the list. The default refresh rate is configured in the
configuration.properties file.

NOTE
The sFlow Monitoring report automatically refreshes the displayed information as specified in the
Refresh Rate box. Once any of the Monitoring Actions arrow is clicked, this auto-refresh action fails.
This is true even if you click Cancel in the confirmation dialog. You must initiate a refresh by changing
the values in any of the header selections for the auto-refresh to start working again.

2D or 3D button
Click this button to toggle between a two-dimensional and three-dimensional graph.

Graph check box
Select this check box if you want data to be presented in a graph format.

Table check box
Select this check box if you want data to be presented in a table.
If Table (box) is enabled, a table shows details for the top resource users, beginning with the
heaviest user. If you are viewing a report for a device group, the top users in the group are
presented. If you are viewing a report for a device, the top resource users for the device are listed.
Traffic for the remaining users on the network appear at the end of the table, along with the traffic
total.
If the table is displayed, you can also do the following to manage a port that appears on the report:

•
•
•
•

Disable a port.
Enable a port.
Apply rate limiting policies to a port.
Apply ACL policies to a port.

Show DNS Name
Select this check box if you want domain name server (DNS) names of IP addresses to be displayed
on the report.

1040

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

Include Remaining Talkers
The sFlow monitoring reports display the top five talkers and remaining talkers. To exclude any
remaining talkers in the chart area, select this check box.

Report Title and Device Group Name or Device Name and Device IP Address
This field shows the name of the report, followed by one of the following:

• Device group name (Group level): If you selected a report for a device group.
• Device name and IP address: If you selected a report for a device

Date and time
This field shows the date and time the report was requested.

Changing the number of records gathered for sFlow accounting
To change the number of records gathered for sFlow accounting, complete the following steps.
1. Go to the Install_Home/conf/ directory.
2. Open the ipconfig.properties file in a text editor.
3. Change the SFlowAccounting.MaxRowsToFetchPerDevice parameter to the number of records
you want gathered for sFlow accounting.
4. Save and close the ipconfig.properties file.

Interpreting an sFlow traffic report
All sFlow traffic reports contain the following sections:

•
•
•
•
•

Navigation arrows.
Data presented in a graph, if enabled.
Color legend.
Data presented in a table, if enabled.
Total traffic appears in frames and megabytes.

The report header displays the criteria selected for the report.
If the Graph check box is selected, a graph appears below the report header. Data for the most
current time on the report is displayed when a report is requested. The navigation arrows in the
report header allow you to display the next or previous panel of the report. Refer to the “Selecting a
report” on page 1039 for information on what the graph represents.
There are differences in the graphs for periods up to six hours and for the 12 and 24 hour graphs:

• For periods up to 6 hours, the graph shows stacked bars. Each bar represents a flow
aggregated for a 2-minute period. Each stack represents all the flows in the system aggregated
for a 2-minute period.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1041

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

• The 12 and 24 hour graphs show bars (not stacked bars). Each bar represents a flow
aggregated for a 1-hour period. There are six bars to a set, starting with red and ending with
gray. Each set represents all the flows in the system aggregated for a 1-hour period, beginning
with the time shown on the x-axis. You see this time halfway between the set of six bars.
The first five colors used on the graph represent the top five resource users. The last color (gray by
default) represents all the remaining users in the device group. The color legend defines the
individual source and destination of the traffic.
If Table is enabled, a table appears under the graph and presents details about the top users. The
number of pairs displayed depends on the value of the MaxPairsToShow parameter on the Options
dialog box (refer to “Configuring sFlow monitoring preferences” on page 164). Combined usage by
all remaining users and a total for all users appear at the end of the table. The number of top
resource users shown and the number of rows displayed on a report depends on how sFlow
parameters in the Options dialog box are defined.
Refer to the following sections to interpret the table:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing top MAC talkers” on page 1042
“Viewing top VLAN talkers” on page 1043
“Viewing all Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic” on page 1044
“Viewing all IPv4 Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers” on page 1044
“Viewing IPv4 – top TCP talkers” on page 1045
“Viewing IPv4 – top UDP talkers” on page 1047
“Viewing IPv4 – top ICMP talkers” on page 1048
“Viewing IPv6 Top Talkers” on page 1049, discusses the following reports:

-

Top IPV6 Talkers using all Layer 4 services
Top TCP Talkers
Top UDP Talkers
Top ICMP Talkers
Top IPV6 Talkers of all Layer 4 service, excluding TCP, UDP, and ICMP

• “Viewing other Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers” on page 1050
• “Enabling and viewing TCP reports” on page 1051
• “Viewing BGP paths report” on page 1053
The sFlow report that you request may not display all the data collected. The reports may be
truncated if there are more rows than the limit specified in the Options dialog box file. To view the
entire report, you must export it to a tab-separated file.

Viewing top MAC talkers
The Top MAC Talkers report shows the top pairs of source and destination MAC addresses being
used on the network. Follow the steps below to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a product group, click the report icon for the product group you want.

1042

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

• To view a report for a product, click the name of the product group to which the product
belongs, and on the Product list page, click the icon for the product.
3. Click View to display the report.
4. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
5. In the Reports list, select MAC.
The following information is provided:

• MAC - The source and destination MAC addresses of the traffic and the VM host (Top VM
Talkers reports). If Source and Destination VM Host column values are not related to VM, no
values will display.

• Port - The ID of ports on which the traffic is being received and being sent. For VCS fabrics, the
send and receive ports are from different devices.

• VLAN - The ID of the source and destination VLANs in the traffic.
• Ethernet QOS - The 802.1p priority tag configured on the incoming and outgoing traffic.
• User (802.1X) - The name of the user who originated the traffic and the user who received the
traffic. This name is the ID the client used to gain access to the network.

• Frames - The size of the traffic in frames.
• MBytes - The size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.
A subtotal is displayed under each top user by source and destination MAC addresses. If the report
is for a product group, the name and IP address of the product that the traffic accessed appear in
parentheses next to the MAC addresses. If the report is for an individual product, only the MAC
addresses are displayed.
A subtotal for the remaining network users and a total of all network traffic appears at the bottom
of the report.

Viewing top VLAN talkers
The Top VLAN Talkers report shows the top pairs of source and destination VLAN IDs being used by
the top users. Complete the following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L2 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select VLAN.
The report presents the following information:

•
•
•
•

VLAN - The ID of the source and destination VLANs used by the users.
Ethernet QOS - The 802.1p priority tag configured on the incoming and outgoing traffic.
Port - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received and being sent.
For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1043

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

• MAC - The source and destination MAC addresses of the traffic and the VM host (Top VM
Talkers reports). If Source and Destination VM Host column values are not related to VM, no
values will display.

• User (802.1X) - The name of the user who originated the traffic and the user who received the
traffic. This name is the ID the client used to gain access to the network.

• Frames - The size of the traffic in frames.
• MBytes - The size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.
A subtotal is displayed for each of the top users. At the end of the report, a subtotal for the
remaining network users and a total for the entire network are displayed.

Viewing all Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic
The Layer3/4 All report displays the top users of all Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic. Complete the
following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Report list, select All.
The report you see is similar to the one shown in Other Layer 3/Layer4 Talkers. (Refer to “Viewing
other Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers” on page 1050.)

Viewing all IPv4 Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers
The IPV4 Top Layer 3/4 Top Talkers report shows the top users of all Layer 3 and Layer 4 services
on IPv4 traffic. Complete the following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Report list, select IPv4.
5. In the next list, select All.
The report provides the following information:

1044

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

• L3 columns
- Source - The source IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic and VM hosts (Top VM Talkers
reports). If enabled, host names of the IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

Destination - The destination IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic and VM hosts (Top VM
Talkers reports). If enabled, host names of the IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

TOS/DSCP - The TOS bit value or the Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCP) value in
the packets.

• Port - For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.
- In - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received.
- Out - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being sent.
• L4 Protocol columns
- Name - Name of the Layer 4 protocol used in the packet.
- Src Port - ID of the port on which the packet originated. The value shown in this column
can be one of the following values:



-

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.

Dest Port - ID of the port on which the packet was received. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:

ID of the well-known port.
 The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.
User (802.1X)


•

-

Source - Name of the user who originated the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to
gain access to the network.

-

Destination - Name of the user who received the traffic. This name is the ID the client used
to gain access to the network.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.

Viewing IPv4 – top TCP talkers
The Top IPV4–TCP Talkers report shows the top users of IPv4 TCP services. Complete the following
steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select IPV4.
5. In the next list, select TCP.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1045

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

The report shows the following information:

• IPV4
- Source - The source IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the IP
address are shown in parentheses.

-

Destination - The destination IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the
IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

TOS/DSCP - The TOS bit value or the Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCP) value in
the packets.

• Port - For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.
- In - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received.
- Out - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being sent.
• TCP
- Src Port - ID of the port on which the TCP packet originated. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:



-

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various”, if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.

Dest Port - ID of the port on which the TCP packet was received. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various”, if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.
User (802.1X)



•

-

Name of the user who originated the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to gain
access to the network.

-

Name of the user who received the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to gain
access to the network.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.
A subtotal is displayed for each of the top users. This subtotal is displayed by source and
destination IP addresses. If the report is for a device group, the name and IP address of the device
that the traffic accessed appear in parentheses. If the report is for an individual device, only the
source and destination IP addresses appear.
At the end of the report, a subtotal for the remaining network users and a total for the entire
network are displayed.

1046

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

Viewing IPv4 – top UDP talkers
The Top IPV4–UDP Talkers report shows the top users of IPv4 UDP services. Complete the following
steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select IPV4.
5. In the next list, select UDP.
The report shows the following information:

• IPV4
- Source - The source IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the IP
address are shown in parentheses.

-

Destination - The destination IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the
IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

TOS/DSCP - The TOS bit value or the Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCP) value in
the packets.

• Port - For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.
- In - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received.
- Out - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being sent.
• UDP
- Src Port - ID of the port on which the UDP packet originated. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:



-

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.

Dest Port - ID of the port on which the UDP packet was received. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:

ID of the well-known port.
 The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.
User (802.1X)


•

-

Source - Name of the user who originated the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to
gain access to the network.

-

Destination - Name of the user who received the traffic. This name is the ID the client used
to gain access to the network.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1047

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

A subtotal is displayed for each of the top users. This subtotal is displayed by source and
destination IP addresses. If the report is for a device group, the name and IP address of the device
that the traffic accessed appear in parentheses. If the report is for an individual device, only the
source and destination IP addresses appear.
At the end of the report, a subtotal for the remaining network users and a total for the entire
network are displayed.

Viewing IPv4 – top ICMP talkers
The Top IPV4–ICMP Talkers report shows the top users of IPv4 ICMP services. Complete the
following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3 or L4 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select IPV4.
5. In the next list, select ICMP.
The report shows the following information:

• IPV4
- Source - The source IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the IP
address are shown in parentheses.

-

Destination - The destination IP addresses of the IPv4 traffic. If enabled, host names of the
IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

TOS/DSCP - The TOS bit value or the Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCP) value in
the packets.

• Port - For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.
- In - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received.
- Out - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being sent.
• ICMP
- Src Port - ID of the port on which the ICMP packet originated. The value shown in this
column can be one of the following values:
ID of the well-known port.
The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.
User (802.1X)



•

-

Source - Name of the user who originated the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to
gain access to the network.

-

Destination - Name of the user who received the traffic. This name is the ID the client used
to gain access to the network.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.

1048

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.
A subtotal is displayed for each of the top users. This subtotal is displayed by source and
destination IP addresses. If the report is for a device group, the name and IP address of the device
that the traffic accessed appear in parentheses. If the report is for an individual device, only the
source and destination IP addresses appear.
At the end of the report, a subtotal for the remaining network users and a total for the entire
network are displayed.

Viewing IPv4 – Others
The Top IPV4–Others report shows the top users of IPv4 traffic excluding TCP, UDP, or ICMP
services. Complete the following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select IPV4.
5. In the next list, select Others.
A report, similar to other IPv4 reports is displayed; however, instead of the TCP, UDP, and ICMP
columns, a column showing the Layer 4 protocol on the traffic appears on the report.

Viewing IPv6 Top Talkers
The IPv6 Top Talkers reports display the top users of Layer 3 and Layer 4 IPv6 traffic. Reports for
top users of the following services are available:

• All Layer 3 and Layer 4 IPv6 services – Display this report by selecting L3/L4 Reports > IPV6 >
All.

•
•
•
•

IPv6 TCP users – Display this report by selecting L3 or L4 Reports > IPV6 > TCP.
IPv6 UDP users – Display this report by selecting L3 or L4 Reports > IPV6 > UDP.
IPv6 ICMP users – Display this report by selecting L3 or L4 Reports > IPV6 > ICMP.
IPv6 users of other Layer 3 and Layer 4 services – Display this report by selecting L3 or L4
Reports > IPV6 > Others.

The IPv6 reports are similar to their IPv4 counterparts, except for the following:

• IPv4 reports show IP addresses in IPV4 format; but, IPv6 reports have IP addresses in IPv6
format.

• IPV4 reports show the TOS/DSCP values; but, IPv6 reports show Traffic Class values.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1049

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

Viewing other Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers
The Others report under the Layer3/Layer 4 report category provides information on Layer 3
protocols excluding IPV4, IPV6, IPX, and AppleTalk services. Complete the following steps to display
the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click the report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click the report icon for the device.
3. In the Category list, select L3/L4 Reports.
4. In the Reports list, select Other.
The report shows the following information:

• L3
- Source - The source IP addresses of the Layer 3 traffic and VM hosts (Top VM Talkers
reports). If enabled, host names of the IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

Destination - The destination IP addresses of the Layer 3 traffic and VM hosts (Top VM
Talkers reports). If enabled, host names of the IP address are shown in parentheses.

-

Protocol - The Layer 3 protocol on the traffic.

• Port - For VCS fabrics, the send and receive ports are from different devices.
- In - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being received.
- Out - The ID of the port on which the traffic is being sent.
• L4 Protocol
- Name - Name of the Layer 4 protocol on the traffic.
- Src port - ID of the port on which the traffic originated. The value shown in this column can
be one of the following values:



-

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.

Dest Port - ID of the port on which the traffic was received. The value shown in this column
can be one of the following values:

ID of the well-known port.
The term “various,” if the value is greater than 1023 (threshold for well-known ports)
and if the port number on the other side of the connection is an ephemeral port.
User (802.1X)



•

-

Source - Name of the user who originated the traffic. This name is the ID the client used to
gain access to the network.

-

Destination - Name of the user who received the traffic. This name is the ID the client used
to gain access to the network.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.

1050

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

Enabling and viewing TCP reports
You can monitor TCP traffic to determine if there is any unusual activity on the network, such as
TCP attacks. Identifying unusual activity will aid in understanding the nature of the traffic and the
ports that are affected, so that you can take corrective actions. For example, you may decide to
disable a port on which TCP attacks are being received.
This feature is disabled by default; however, enabling the feature increases the number of distinct
flows that the Management application server must process and, therefore, increases the load on
the server. Complete the following steps to enable TCP reports.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Go to the SFlowDataCollector preferences section.
4. Select the ProcessTCPFlagsData check box to monitor TCP traffic.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.
Once TCP reports are enabled, the following reports can be displayed to determine any usual TCP
traffic:

• Valid TCP Flags: TCP traffic containing packets that do not have any invalid bit combinations.
• Invalid TCP Flags: TCP traffic containing packets that have invalid bit combinations as defined
in the configuration.properties file.

Defining invalid TCP packet combinations
TCP packets can be checked to see if they contain the following control bits:

•
•
•
•
•
•

ACK: Acknowledgement field significant bit
URG: Urgent pointer field significant bit
PSH: Push function bit
RST: Reset connection bit
SYN: Synchronize sequence number bit
FIN: No more data from sender

An occurrence of two of these bits together in a TCP packet could be regarded as invalid. You
specify in the configuration.properties file which combinations are invalid combinations. By default,
the following combinations are regarded as invalid:

•
•
•
•
•

RST-SYN
RST-FIN
RST-PSH
RST-URG
FIN-SYN

Complete the following steps to change these combinations.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1051

33

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane.
3. Go to the SFlowDataMonitoring preferences section.
4. Click in the TCPFlags_InvalidCombos parameter field to edit the invalid bit combinations.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Displaying the invalid TCP Flags report
Complete the following steps to display the invalid TCP flags report.
1. On the Management application menu bar, click Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the initial Monitoring page, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click a report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, then on the Device list page, click a report icon for the device.
3. In the Report list, select TCP Reports.
4. In the Type list, select Invalid TCP Flags.
You see a report similar to the Valid TCP Flags report, except only invalid TCP flags are included in
the report.

Valid TCP flags report
The Valid TCP Flags report shows TCP traffic containing packets that do not have any invalid bit
combinations. Complete the following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the initial Monitoring page, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click a report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, and on the Device list page, click a report icon for the device.
3. In the Report list, select TCP Reports.
4. In the Type list, select Valid TCP Flags.
The report shows the following information:

• TCP Flags - All TCP flags present in the packet are identified by the first letter of the flag. For
example, if the packet contains the ACK flag, the letter A appears in this column. If the packet
contains the PSH and ACK flags, AP appears in this column.

•
•
•
•

Port - The ID of the ports on which the flag is being received and being sent.
MAC - The source and destination MAC addresses of the traffic that generated the flag.
Ethernet QOS - The 802.1p priority tag configured on the incoming and outgoing traffic.
IP - The source and destination IP address of the traffic and the TOS or DSCP value assigned to
it.

• TCP Port - The name or number of the TCP port of incoming and outgoing traffic.
• User (802.1X) - Name of the user who originated the traffic and the user who received the
traffic. This name is the ID the client used to gain access to the network.

1052

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Traffic analyzer monitoring and sFlow reports

33

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• MBytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.

Viewing BGP paths report
The BGP Paths report shows source and destination traffic based on BGP autonomous systems
paths. Complete the following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the initial Monitoring page, choose one of the following options:

• To view a report for a device group, click a report icon for the device group you want.
• To view a report for a device, click the name of the device group to which the device
belongs, then on the Device list page, click a report icon for the device.
3. In the Report list, select Misc Reports.
4. In the Type list, select BGP Path.
The report shows the following information:

• Source AS - The AS path number that is the source of this BGP route. A 32-bit AS path number
may be displayed.

• Destination AS Path - The AS path number that is the destination of this BGP route. A 32-bit AS
path number may be displayed.

• Frames - Size of the traffic in frames.
• Mbytes - Size of the traffic in megabytes for the time duration shown on the report.

Viewing VCS fabric Top Talker reports
The VCS fabric Top Talker report only displays traffic captured on the edge ports. Complete the
following steps to display the report.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Monitor sFlow.
2. On the Monitor sFlow dialog box, click the report icon for the fabric you want.
3. Click View to display the report.
The VCS fabric level report provides an aggregated view of the entire fabric. The content of the
report depends on your selections in the sFlow Monitor Report dialog box. You can view the
following report types:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Viewing top MAC talkers” on page 1042
“Viewing all Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic” on page 1044
“Viewing all IPv4 Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers” on page 1044
“Viewing IPv4 – top TCP talkers” on page 1045
“Viewing IPv4 – top UDP talkers” on page 1047
“Viewing other Layer 3 or Layer 4 Top Talkers” on page 1050
“Viewing BGP paths report” on page 1053

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1053

33

IP traffic accounting

Troubleshooting sFlow reports
If the sFlow Monitoring report launches with an error on RedHat Linux, use the following steps to
resolve.
1. Stop the server.
2. Run the command unset DISPLAY on the terminal.
3. Restart the server.

NOTE
You can only restart the server using the Server Management Console (Start > Programs >
Management_Application_Name 11.X.X > Server Management Console).

IP traffic accounting
Traffic analysis accounting reports the total number of frames and total number of bytes that have
entered and exited a port. Accounting details are separated into incoming and outgoing traffic
reports.
1. Select Monitor > Traffic Analysis > Traffic Accounting.
The Traffic Accounting dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 439 on page 1054.

FIGURE 439 Traffic Accounting dialog box
2. Use the Start Date and End Date selectors to specify the time period for the accounting report.
3. Under Port Groups, select one of the listed groups.

1054

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP traffic accounting

33

4. You have three options for displaying traffic accounting information:

• Click Summary to view the entire accounting summary report for the selected group.
• Click In Traffic to view inbound traffic on the ports in the selected group.
• Click Out Traffic to view outbound traffic on the ports in the selected group.
The number of records gathered for each device is limited to 10,000 by default. To change the
number of records gathered, refer to “Changing the number of records displayed in a sFlow
accounting report” on page 1055 and “Changing the number of records displayed in a sFlow
accounting report” on page 1055.

Changing the number of records displayed in a sFlow accounting report
To change the number of records displayed in the report, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
2. Select IP Preferences from the Software Configurations list in the Category pane
3. Scroll down to the SFlow Accounting section.
4. Enter the maximum number of rows to display in the log report in the MaxRowsToShow field.
5. Click Apply or OK to save your work.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1055

33

1056

IP traffic accounting

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

34

Frame Monitor

In this chapter
• Frame Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Creating a custom frame monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing a frame monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Assigning a frame monitor to a port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Finding frame monitor assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing a frame monitor from a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Removing a frame monitor from a switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1057
1059
1061
1061
1062
1062
1063

Frame Monitor
NOTE

Only available for Fabric OS products.

NOTE
Frame Monitoring is supported in Professional Plus and Enterprise Editions only. It is not supported
in the Professional Edition.
Frame monitors count the number of frames transmitted through a port that match specific values
in the first 64 bytes of the frame. Since the entire Fibre Channel frame header and many upper
protocol (for example, SCSI) headers fall within the first 64 bytes of a frame, frame monitors can
detect different types of traffic transmitted through a port. Each frame monitor keeps a timestamp
of its last refresh. It also keeps a generation count, which is incremented each time the monitor is
cleared.
Frame monitors generate alerts whenever the frame count for a certain frame type crosses the
threshold configured for that frame type. You can configure high thresholds for every frame type,
specify actions to be taken when the threshold is exceeded, and configure how often the data are
sampled.
Virtual Fabrics considerations: You can assign frame monitors to ports in a logical switch. If a port
is moved from one logical switch to another, however, all monitors that were assigned to the port
are cleared in the new logical switch.
Trunking considerations: For trunked ports, the frame monitor is configured on the trunk master.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1057

34

Frame Monitor

Frame types
The frame type can be a standard type (for example, a SCSI read command filter that counts the
number of SCSI read commands that have been transmitted by the port) or a user-defined frame
type customized for your particular use.

Pre-defined frame types
Pre-defined frame types include the following:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ABTS (Abort Sequence Basic Link Service command)
BA_ACC (Abort Accept)
IP
SCSI
SCSI Read
SCSI Write
SCSI RW
SCSI-2 Reserve
SCSI-3 Reserve

Custom frame types
In addition to the standard frame types, you can create custom frame types to gather statistics that
fit your needs. To define a custom frame type, you must specify a series of offsets, bitmasks, and
values. For all transmitted frames, the switch performs these tasks:

•
•
•
•

Locates the byte found in the frame at the specified offset.
Applies the bitmask to the byte found in the frame.
Compares the new value with the given value.
Increments the filter counter if a match is found.

You can specify up to four values to compare against each offset. If more than one offset is
required to properly define a filter, the bytes found at each offset must match one of the given
values for the filter to increment its counter. If one or more of the given offsets does not match any
of the given values, the counter does not increment. The value of the offset must be between 0 and
63, in decimal format. Byte 0 indicates the first byte of the Start of Frame (SOF), byte 4 is the first
byte of the frame header, and byte 28 is the first byte of the payload. Thus only the SOF, frame
header, and first 36 bytes of payload can be selected as part of a filter definition. Offset 0 is a
special case, which can be used to monitor the first 4 bytes of the frame (SOF). When the offset is
set to 0, the values 0–7 that are checked against that offset are predefined as shown in Table 91.

TABLE 91

1058

Predefined values at offset 0

Value

SOF

Value

SOF

0

SOFf

4

SOFi2

1

SOFc1

5

SOFn2

2

SOFi1

6

SOFi3

3

SOFn1

7

SOFn3

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Creating a custom frame monitor

34

Frame Monitoring requirements
To configure Frame Monitoring, the following requirements must be met:

• The switch must be running Fabric OS 7.0.0 or later.
• Frame Monitoring requires the Advanced Performance Monitoring license and the Fabric
Watch license.

NOTE

The Advanced Performance Monitoring license is required to configure frame monitors. The
monitoring functionality requires the Fabric Watch license.
The maximum number of frame monitors and offsets per port is platform-specific. Refer to the
Fabric OS Administrator’s Guide for more information.

Creating a custom frame monitor
Pre-defined frame monitors are already installed on switches that support Frame Monitoring. Use
this procedure if you want to create a custom frame monitor.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays (Figure 440).

FIGURE 440 Frame Monitor dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1059

34

Creating a custom frame monitor

2. Select the Switch option.
The Products / Monitors list displays the switches that support Frame Monitoring.
3. Enter the monitor data in the Configure Monitor area.
4. Select one or more switches in the Products / Monitors list, and click the right arrow button to
assign the frame monitor to those switches.
5. Select the Port option.
6. Expand the switch in the Products / Ports list.
The Monitors list displays all of the frame monitors defined for that switch.
7.

Select one or more ports.
You must select only ports belonging to the same switch.

8. Select one or more frame monitors in the Monitors list.
9. Click the right arrow button to move the frame monitor to the selected ports.
The Monitor Details list displays the monitors that are assigned to a selected port. If no
monitors are assigned, or if more than one port is selected, the Monitor Details list does not
display.
10. Click OK.
The Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box displays (Figure 441).

FIGURE 441 Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box

1060

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a frame monitor

34

11. Click Start.
The frame monitor configuration is applied to the switches.
12. Click Close after configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress column).

Editing a frame monitor
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the Switch option.
3. Expand the Products / Monitors list to display the frame monitors for each switch.
4. Select a frame monitor and click the left arrow button.
The frame monitor is removed from the switch and the Configure Monitor area is populated
with the values for that frame monitor.
5. Make changes to the monitor data in the Configure Monitor area.
6. Select one or more switches in the Products / Monitors list, and click the right arrow button to
assign the frame monitor to those switches.
If the frame monitor already exists on the switches, the frame monitor is modified. If the frame
monitor does not exist on the switch, it is added.
7.

Click OK.
The Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start.
The frame monitor configuration is applied to the switches and ports.
9. Click Close after configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress column).

Assigning a frame monitor to a port
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the Port option.
3. Expand the switch in the Products / Ports list.
The Monitors list displays all of the frame monitors defined for that switch.
4. Select one or more ports.
You must select only ports belonging to the same switch.
5. Select one or more frame monitors in the Monitors list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1061

34

Finding frame monitor assignments

6. Click the right arrow button to move the frame monitor to the selected ports.
The Monitor Details list displays the monitors that are assigned to a selected port. If no
monitors are assigned, or if more than one port is selected, the Monitor Details list does not
display.
7.

Click OK.
The Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box displays.

8. Click Start.
The frame monitor configuration is applied to the ports.
9. Click Close after configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress column).

Finding frame monitor assignments
Using the following procedure, you can select a frame monitor on a switch and see the ports to
which it is assigned.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the Port option.
3. Select a switch in the Products / Ports list.
The Monitors list displays all of the frame monitors defined for that switch.
4. Select a frame monitor in the Monitors list.
5. Click the Find arrow.
The ports to which the frame monitor is assigned are highlighted.

Removing a frame monitor from a port
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the Port option.
3. Expand the switch in the Products / Ports list.
The Monitors list displays all of the frame monitors defined for that switch.
4. Select the port from which you want to remove the frame monitor.
The Monitor Details list displays all of the frame monitors assigned to that port.
5. Select one or more frame monitors in the Monitor Details list.
6. Click Remove.
7.

Click OK.
The Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box displays.

1062

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Removing a frame monitor from a switch

34

8. Click Start.
The frame monitor configuration is applied to the ports.
9. Click Close after configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress column).

Removing a frame monitor from a switch
When you remove a frame monitor from a switch, the frame monitor is automatically removed from
all assigned ports in the switch.
You can remove only custom frame types; you cannot remove the pre-defined frame types.
1. Select Monitor > Fabric Watch > Frame Monitor.
The Frame Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the Switch option.
The Products / Monitors list displays the switches that support Frame Monitoring.
3. Expand the Products / Monitors list to display the frame monitors for each switch.
4. Select a frame monitor and click the left arrow button.
The frame monitor is removed from the switch and the Configure Monitor area is populated
with the values for that frame monitor.
5. Click OK.
The Frame Monitor Configuration Status dialog box displays.
6. Click Start.
The frame monitor configuration is applied to the switches and ports.
7.

Click Close after configuration is complete (indicated by “Completed” in the Progress column).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1063

34

1064

Removing a frame monitor from a switch

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

35

Power Center

In this chapter
• Power center overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Data monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PoE power on demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Schedule PoE power deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• PoE thresholds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing PoE performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1065
1066
1075
1077
1086
1093

Power center overview
NOTE
Power over Ethernet (PoE) is only supported on IronWare PoE-capable products.
PoE products enable you to safely pass electrical power, along with data, on Ethernet cabling. The
power comes from a power supply within a PoE-capable networking device (such as an Ethernet
switch). For more information about PoE, refer to the IronWare Ethernet switch Configuration
Guide.
You can use Power Center to perform the following functions on PoE-capable products:

• Determine how much poweris consumed by devices (phones and so on) connected to the
product.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Create power thresholds.
Monitor power thresholds.
Power up ports.
Power down ports.
Determine PoE capacity.
Determine PoE allocation.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1065

35

Data monitoring

Data monitoring
Power Center enables you to view PoE data for ports and products in both table and chart formats.

Viewing PoE data for products
To view PoE data for a product, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.

FIGURE 442 Power Center dialog box
3. Review the details in the PoE Products list:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1066

Group/Product — Lists of the discovered PoE Products, Product Groups, and Ports.
Status — The threshold status icon for the product.
Last Refresh — The time of the last data refresh on the product.
PoE Ports — The number of PoE-capable ports on the product.
Enabled Ports — The number of PoE-enabled ports on the product.
Conn. Ports — The number of PoE ports connected to a powered device.
Capacity (W) — The total PoE capacity of the product in Watts.
Allocation (W) — The amount ofpower allocated bythe productto the connected devices in
Watts. Only displays when the product running agent version 7.2.2 or later. If the product is
running a agent version 7.2.1 or earlier, “-“ displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Data monitoring

35

• Allocation % — The percentage of allocated capacity. For example, if the Capacity (W) is
480 W and Allocation (W) is 120 W, then the Allocation percentage is 25. Only displays
when the product running agent version 7.2.2 or later. If the product is running a agent
version 7.2.1 or earlier, “-“ displays.

• Consumption (W) — The power consumed by all powered devices connected to the product
in Watts.

• Consumption % — The current power consumed as a percentage of allocated power.
• Allocations Count — The number of times power is allocated to the powered devices. Use
this value to determine when a powered device requests multiple power allocations. Only
displays when the product running agent version 7.2.2 or later. If the product is running a
agent version 7.2.1 or earlier, “-“ displays.
4. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Viewing PoE data for ports
To view PoE data for a port, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a product in the Product list.
The port data for the selected product displays in the Port Data list.

FIGURE 443 Port Data list on the Power Center dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1067

35

Data monitoring

4. Review the details in the Port Data list:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Product filter — The name of the Product.
Port filter — The port identifier.
Name filter — The port name.
Status filter — The Ethernet status of the port. Values include: Up and Down.
State filter — The Ethernet state of the port. Values include: Enabled and Disabled.
Admin State filter — The PoE administrative state of the port. Values include: On (enabled)
and Off (disabled).

• Oper. State filter — The PoE operational state of a port. Values include: On (connected to a
powered device) and Off (not connected to a powered device).

NOTE

The administrative state must be On for operational state to be On.

• Allocation (W) filter — The amount of allocated power to the port in Watts.
• Consumption (W) filter — The power consumed by the device connected to the port in
Watts.

• Consumption % filter — The power consumed as a percentage of allocated power.
• Type filter — The type of the device connected to the port. Values include: 802.3af and
802.3at.

• Class filter — The class of the device connected to the port. Values include: Class 0
through Class 4.

• Priority filter — The priority of the device connected to the port. Values include: invalid,
critical, high, low, medium, and other.

• Mfr. filter — The manufacturer of the device connected to the port. This information is
obtained using LLDP neighbor details command.

• Model filter — The model of the device connected to the port. This information is obtained
using LLDP neighbor details command.

• Software filter — The software version on the attached device.
5. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Filtering port details
To filter port details, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a product in the Product list.
The port data for the selected product displays in the Port Data list.

1068

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Data monitoring

35

4. Use the following filters to sort the Port Data list:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product filter
Port filter
Name filter
Status filter
State filter
Admin State filter
Oper. State filter

NOTE

The administrative state must be On for operational state to be On.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Allocation (W) filter
Consumption (W) filter
Consumption % filter
Type filter
Class filter
Priority filter
Mfr. filter.
Model filter
Software filter

5. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Viewing attached device properties
To view properties for devices attached to a product or port, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a product or port in the Product list and click Attached Devices.
The Attached Devices tab of the Properties dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1069

35

Data monitoring

FIGURE 444 Attached Devices tab of the Properties dialog box
4. Review the details in the Attached Devices tab:

• POE Port Count — The number of PoE ports, that have power devices which support LLDP,
connected to the selected device.

•
•
•
•
•
•

System name — The system name of the connected device.
System capabilities — The system capabilities enabled on the remote system.
Enabled capabilties — The system capabilities enabled on the connected device.
Device Type — The type of Power-via-MDI (Power over Ethernet) on the remote device.
Power Source — The type of Power Source on the remote device.
Power Priority — The priority required by the powered device (PD) connected remotely to
the port.

• Power Value — The available power (in Watts) from the Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE)
through the port on the remote device.

• Application Type — The primary function of the application for the policy on the connected
device.

• Policy Flags — Indicates whether the network policy for the application type is known, as
well as whether the application is using a tagged VLAN.

• VLAN ID — The extension of the VLAN Identifier for the remote system connected to the
port.

• L2 Priority — The 802.1p priority associated with the remote system connected to the port.
• DSCP Value — The Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP), as defined in IETF RFC 2474
and RFC 2475, associated with the remote system connected to the port.

• Med Hardware revision — The hardware revision on the connected device.
• Med Software revision — The software revision on the connected device.

1070

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Data monitoring

35

• Med Serial number — The serial number on the connected device.
• Med Manufacturer — The manufacturer name on the connected device.
• Med Model name — The model name on the connected device.
5. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
6. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Viewing PoE charts
To view a PoE chart, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select Charts from the View list.
3. Review the Chart data:

FIGURE 445 Product Power Allocation Percentage bar graph
Displays the power allocation percentages for all products in a bar graph using the following
colors:

•
•
•
•
•

0 – 20 % = Green
20 – 40 % = Blue
40 – 60 % = Yellow
60 – 80 % = Orange
80 – 100 % = Red

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1071

35

Data monitoring

FIGURE 446 Product Power Consumption Percentage bar graph
Displays the power consumption percentages for all products in a bar graph using the following
colors:

•
•
•
•
•

0 – 20 % = Green
20 – 40 % = Blue
40 – 60 % = Yellow
60 – 80 % = Orange
80 – 100 % = Red

Click a bar in the chart to display the products panel and highlight the corresponding products.

FIGURE 447 Power Threshold Events bar graph
Displays the number of threshold events triggered by severity in a bar graph using the following
colors:

• Critical = Red
• Warning = Yellow
• Info = Grey

1072

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Data monitoring

35

FIGURE 448 Product Power Top Allocations stacked bar graph
Displays the top five products with the highest power allocation values in Watts in a stacked
bar graph.
Click a bar in the chart to display the products panel and highlight the corresponding product.

FIGURE 449 Product Power Top Consumers stacked bar graph
Displays the top five products with the highest power consumption values in Watts in a stacked
bar graph.
Click a bar in the chart to display the products panel and highlight the corresponding product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1073

35

Data monitoring

FIGURE 450 PoE Port Utilization pie chart
Displays how many ports with PoE turned on and how many with connected devices in a pie
chart using the following colors:

• PoE Off = Red
• PoE On - Unconnected = Blue
• PoE On - Connected = Green
Click the pie chart to display the products panel and highlight the All Products row.
4. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Refreshing PoE data
To refresh the PoE data for all products in the Group/Product list, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Click Refresh.
3. Click Yes on the “Are you sure you want to refresh the data of all n products?” message.
The PoE data for all products is updated in the Power Center dialog box.
4. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.
To refresh the PoE data for specific products, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select one or more products for which you want to refresh the PoE data in the Group/Product
list.
The PoE data for the selected products is updated in the Power Center dialog box.
3. Click Refresh.
4. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

1074

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PoE power on demand

35

Configuring automatic data refresh
To configure automatic refresh the PoE data, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select the Auto refresh check box to refresh the data automatically at a specified interval.
3. Select the auto refresh interval from the Interval (min) list.
Options include: 15, 30, or 60.
4. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

PoE power on demand
You can use the Management application to power up on one or more PoE-capable ports on
demand or in a deployment schedule. If you need to periodically power up PoE-capable ports at
specific time, you can define a deployment schedule.

Powering up PoE-capable ports on demand
To immediately power up on one or more PoE- capable ports, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.

FIGURE 451 Power Center dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1075

35

PoE power on demand

3. Select a product in the PoE Product list.
The selected Product’s PoE ports display in the Port Data list. The PoE operational state (On or
Off) for each port displays in the Admin State column.
4. Select one or more ports and click PoE On.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.
6. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
The updated PoE operational state of the selected port displays in the Admin State column.
7.

Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Powering down PoE-capable ports on demand
To immediately power down on one or more PoE-capable ports, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a product in the PoE Product list.
The PoE-capable ports display in the Port Data list. The PoE operational state (On or Off) of a
port displays in the Admin State column.
4. Select one or more ports and click PoE Off.
5. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The Deployment Status dialog box displays, which allows you to view the progress and status of
the deployment.
Click Abort to stop the deployment.

NOTE

The abort action does not stop the tasks that have already started.

1076

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule PoE power deployment

35

6. Click Close to close the Deployment Status dialog box.

NOTE

Closing the Deployment Status dialog box does not stop deployment.
The updated PoE operational state of the selected port displays in the Admin State column.
7.

Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Schedule PoE power deployment
You can define a deployment schedule on a port, product, port group, or product group. However,
when you schedule a deployment on a product, port group, or product group, the schedule is only
configured on the ports present when you create the schedule. If you add ports to the productor
products to the product group, the deployment schedule is not configured on the new ports. To
configure the deployment schedule on the new ports, refer to “Updating a power deployment
schedule” on page 1083.

Scheduling an power up deployment
To schedule a power up deployment, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a port, product, port group, or product group in the PoE Product list and click Schedule
PoE On/Off.
The Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1077

35

Schedule PoE power deployment

FIGURE 452 Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box
4. (Ports only) Select a port from the Port list.
5. Enter a name for the schedule in the Schedule Name field.
6. Enter a description for the schedule in the Description field.
7.

Select the Enable check box to enable the schedule.

8. Select the PoE On option to enable PoE.
9. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for
the schedule:

• To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment
schedule” on page 1079.

• To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on
page 1079.

• To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule”
on page 1081.

• To configure yearly deployment, refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on
page 1081.
10. Click Add.
11. Click Close to close the Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box.
12. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

1078

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule PoE power deployment

35

Configuring a one-time deployment schedule
To configure a one-time schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an power on PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an power off PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

Configuring an hourly deployment schedule
To configure an hourly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the minute past the hour you want deployment to run from the Minutes past the hour
list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an enable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an disable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1079

35

Schedule PoE power deployment

Configuring a daily deployment schedule
To configure a daily deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an enable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an disable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

Configuring a weekly deployment schedule
To configure a weekly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Week list.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an enable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an disable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

1080

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule PoE power deployment

35

Configuring a monthly deployment schedule
To configure a monthly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an enable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an disable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

Configuring a yearly deployment schedule
To configure a yearly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Yearly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
To finish configuring the deployment schedule, return to one of the following procedures:

• To configure an enable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling an power up
deployment” on page 1077.

• To configure an disable PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Scheduling a power down
deployment” on page 1082.

• To update a PoE schedule, refer to step 10 of “Updating a power deployment schedule” on
page 1083

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1081

35

Schedule PoE power deployment

Scheduling a power down deployment
To schedule a power down deployment on one or more PoE-capable ports, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a port, product, port group, or product group in the PoE Product list and click Schedule
PoE On/Off.
The Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box displays.
4. (Ports only) Select a port from the Port list.
5. Enter a name for the schedule in the Schedule Name field.
6. Enter a description for the schedule in the Description field.
7.

Select the Enable check box to enable the schedule.

8. Select the PoE Off option.
9. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for
the schedule:

• To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment
schedule” on page 1079.

• To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on
page 1079.

• To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule”
on page 1081.

• To configure yearly deployment, refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on
page 1081.
10. Click Add.
11. Click Close to close the Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box.
12. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

1082

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule PoE power deployment

35

Updating a power deployment schedule
To update a power deployment on one or more PoE-capable ports, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a port, product, port group, or product group in the PoE Product list and click Schedule
PoE On/Off.
The Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box displays.
4. Select the schedule you want to update from the All Schedules list.
If you need to make changes to the deployment schedule, continue with step 5.
If new PoE-capable ports have been added to the product or group for which this deployment is
configure, go to step 10.
5. (Ports only) Select a port from the Port list.
6. Change the name for the schedule in the Schedule Name field.
7.

Change the description for the schedule in the Description field.

8. Select the Enable check box to enable the schedule.
9. Choose one of the following options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for
the schedule:

• To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time deployment
schedule” on page 1079.

• To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly deployment schedule” on
page 1079.

• To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly deployment schedule” on
page 1080.

• To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly deployment schedule”
on page 1081.

• To configure yearly deployment, refer to “Configuring a yearly deployment schedule” on
page 1081.
10. Click Update.
11. Click Close to close the Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box.
12. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1083

35

Schedule PoE power deployment

Viewing the configured ports for a power deployment schedule
To view all ports to which a power deployment schedule is configured, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a port, product, port group, or product group in the PoE Product list and click Schedule
PoE On/Off.
The Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box displays.
4. Select the schedule for which you want to view the configured ports from the All Schedules list.
5. Click Show Ports.
The Scheduled Ports [Schedule_Name] dialog box displays.

FIGURE 453 Scheduled Ports [Schedule_Name] dialog box
6. Review the following information:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The name of the Product.
Port — The port identifier.
Name — The port name.
Status — The Ethernet status of the port. Values include: Up and Down.
State — The Ethernet state of the port. Values include: Enabled and Disabled.
Admin State — The PoE administrative state of the port. Values include: On (enabled) and
Off (disabled).

• Oper. State — The PoE operational state of a port. Values include: On (connected to a
powered device) and Off (not connected to a powered device).

NOTE

The administrative state must be On for operational state to be On.

• Allocation (W) — The amount of allocated power to the port in Watts.
• Consumption (W) — The power consumed by the device connected to the port in Watts.

1084

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Schedule PoE power deployment

35

• Consumption % — The power consumed as a percentage of allocated power.
• Type — The type of the device connected to the port. Values include: 802.3af and 802.3at.
• Class — The class of the device connected to the port. Values include: Class 0 through
Class 4.

• Priority — The priority of the device connected to the port. Values include: invalid, critical,
high, low, medium, and other.

• Mfr.. — The manufacturer of the device connected to the port. This information is obtained
using LLDP neighbor details command.

• Model — The model of the device connected to the port. This information is obtained using
LLDP neighbor details command.

• Software — The software version on the attached device.
7.

Click Close to close the Scheduled Ports [Schedule_Name] dialog box.

8. Click Close to close the Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box.
9. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Deleting a power deployment schedule
To delete a power deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select PoE Products from the View list.
3. Select a port, product, port group, or product group in the PoE Product list and click Schedule
PoE On/Off.
The Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box displays.
4. Select the schedule you want to delete from the All Schedules list.
To delete more than one deployment schedule, press Ctrl and click each schedule you want to
delete.
5. Click Delete.
6. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
7.

Click Close to close the Schedule PoE On/Off dialog box.

8. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1085

35

PoE thresholds

PoE thresholds
Power Center enables you to define a threshold on a product or port. You cannot define a threshold
on a product group or port group.
You can define Product thresholds using the following measures:

• PoE Capacity — The total PoE capacity of the product in Watts.
NOTE

PoE capacity requires the product to be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.

• PoE Allocation — The amount of allocated power to the product in Watts.
• Allocation % — The percentage of available capacity.
NOTE

PoE capacity requires the product to be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.

• Consumption % — The current power consumed as a percentage of allocated power.
• Allocations Count — The number of times power is allocated to the powered devices. Use this
value to determine when a powered device requests multiple power allocations.

NOTE

Allocations Count requires the product to be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.
You can define Port thresholds using the following measures:

• Port allocation — The amount of allocated power to the port in Watts.
• Port consumption — The amount of allocated power to the port in Watts.
• Port consumption % — The power consumed as a percentage of allocated power

Adding a PoE product threshold
To create a threshold for a PoE product, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays.

1086

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PoE thresholds

35

FIGURE 454 Thresholds dialog box
3. Choose one of the following measures:

•
•
•
•
•
•

PoE Capacity (The product must be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.)
PoE Allocation
Allocation % (The product must be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.)
PoE Consumption
Consumption %
Allocations Count (The product must be running agent version 7.2.2 or later.)

4. Select one of the following from the Conditions list:

• >
• <
• ==
5. Enter the number of events that must be generated to trigger the threshold event in the Value
field.
The value should not exceed the capacity of the product.
If you select a percentage measure, the value should be less than or equal to 100.
6. Select the severity level for the threshold event from the Severity list.

• Info
• Warning
• Critical

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1087

35

PoE thresholds

7.

Select the time period to be monitored for the number of threshold events in the Interval (min)
list.
The time period starts with the first event and runs its full duration if the event limit is not
reached. Interval values, in minutes, include:

• 15
• 30
• 60
Click Refresh on the Power Center dialog box to determine if any thresholds are triggered.
8. Click Add.
The new threshold displays in the All Thresholds list.
9. Select the Enabled check box of the new threshold in the All Thresholds list to enable the
threshold on the product.
10. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
11. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Adding a PoE port threshold
To create a threshold for a PoE port, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a port in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays.

1088

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PoE thresholds

35

FIGURE 455 Thresholds dialog box
3. Choose one of the following measures:

• Port allocation
• Port consumption
• Port consumption %
4. Select one of the following from the Conditions list:

• >
• <
• ==
5. Enter the number of events that must be generated to trigger the threshold event in the Value
field.
The value should not exceed the capacity of the product.
If you select a percentage measure, the value should be less than or equal to 100.
6. Select the severity level for the threshold event from the Severity list.

• Info
• Warning
• Critical

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1089

35

PoE thresholds

7.

Select the time period to be monitored for the number of threshold events in the Interval (min)
list.
The time period starts with the first event and runs its full duration if the event limit is not
reached. Interval values, in minutes, include:

• 15
• 30
• 60
8. Click Add.
The new threshold displays in the All Thresholds list.
9. Select the Enabled check box of the new threshold in the All Thresholds list to enable the
threshold on the product.
10. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
11. Click Refresh on the Power Center dialog box to determine if any thresholds are triggered.
12. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Viewing PoE thresholds
To view PoE thresholds, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays with the thresholds defined for that product.
3. Review the following information in the All Threshold list.

• Enabled check box — Checked when the threshold is enabled. Clear when the threshold is
disabled.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product — The Product for which the threshold is configured.
Port — The Port for which the threshold is configured.
Measure — The power measure on which you defined the threshold condition.
Condition — The condition you defined for the threshold.
Value — The value you defined for the threshold.
Severity — The severity you defined for the threshold.
Interval (min) — The time period in minutes you defined for the threshold.
Enabled Threshold — The number of enabled thresholds.

4. Select a threshold in the All Threshold list to review the following information in the Selected
Threshold Events list.

• Time — The date and time that the event was triggered.
• Event Value — The value of the triggered event.
5. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
6. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

1090

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

PoE thresholds

35

Updating a PoE threshold
To update a PoE threshold, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays with the thresholds defined for that product.
3. Select the threshold you want to edit in the All Thresholds list.
The selected threshold displays in the Thresholds Editor area.
4. Select the Enabled check box to enable the threshold on the product.
5. Choose one of the following measures:

• Port allocation
• Port consumption
• Port consumption %
6. Select one of the following from the Conditions list:

• >
• <
• ==
7.

Enter the number of events that must be generated to trigger the threshold event in the Value
field.
The value should not exceed the capacity of the product.
If you select a percentage measure, the value should be less than or equal to 100.

8. Select the severity level for the threshold event from the Severity list.

• Info
• Warning
• Critical
9. Select the time period to be monitored for the number of threshold events in the Interval (min)
list.
The time period starts with the first event and runs its full duration if the event limit is not
reached. Interval values, in minutes, include:

• 15
• 30
• 60
10. Click Update.
The updated threshold displays in the All Thresholds list.
11. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1091

35

PoE thresholds

12. Click Refresh on the Power Center dialog box to determine if any thresholds are triggered.
13. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Enabling PoE thresholds
To enable PoE thresholds, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays with the thresholds defined for that product.
3. Choose one of the following options:

• Click Enable All to enable all thresholds in the list.
• Select a threshold in the All Thresholds list, select the Enabled check box in the
Thresholds Editor area, and click Update to enable the threshold on the product.
4. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Disabling PoE thresholds
To disable PoE thresholds, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays with the thresholds defined for that product.
3. Choose one of the following options:

• Click Disable All to disable all thresholds in the list.
• Select a threshold in the All Thresholds list, clear the Enabled check box in the Thresholds
Editor area, and click Update to disable the threshold on the product.
4. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

1092

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing PoE performance

35

Deleting PoE thresholds
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product in the PoE Product list and click Thresholds.
The Thresholds dialog box displays with the thresholds defined for that product.
3. Select the threshold you want to delete and click Delete.
Select more than one threshold to delete by pressing Ctrl and clicking each threshold you want
to delete.
4. Click Close to close the Thresholds dialog box.
5. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Viewing PoE performance
To view PoE performance, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select one of the following from the Graphs/Tables list.

• Real Time Power Graphs/Tables — Select to show power-related information in a real-time
graph or table. Refer to IP Real time performance monitoring.

• Real Time Performance Graphs/Tables — Select to show performance-related information
in a real-time graph or table. Refer to “IP real-time performance monitoring” on page 983.

• Historical Performance Graphs/Tables — Select to show performance-related historical
information in a historical graph or table. Refer to “IP historical performance monitoring”
on page 995.
The Select Sources dialog box displays.
3. Click Close to close the Power Center dialog box.

Monitoring real time power performance on products
To view real time power performance graphs or tables, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a product from the Product list.
3. Select Real Time Power Graphs/Tables from the Graphs/Tables list.
The Real Time Power Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1093

35

Viewing PoE performance

FIGURE 456 Real Time Power Graphs/Tables dialog box
4. Select the measures you want to include and click the right arrow button to display it on the
Data Monitoring tab.
Product power measures include the following:

• Allocation (W)
• Allocation %
5. Click the Data Monitoring tab to view a performance monitoring graph or table.

• Click the Graph option to view a performance graph.
The legend under the graph shows what data each color represents. To configure graph
options, refer to “Configuring the performance graph” on page 989.

• Click the Table option to view a performance table.
The first column displays the time of the collection. The remaining columns display the
value of each collectible at the specified time. There is one column for every collectible you
selected to display.

1094

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing PoE performance

35

6. Click the Collection Status Summary tab to view the following information:
The Collection Status Summary tab provides a high level overview of all defined collectors. The
information is displayed in the following columns:

• Product - Shows the product name and IP address. There maybe multiple instances of the
product name for each collectible assigned to the product.

• Port - The port name when a port is selected.
• Collectible - The MIB objects and expressions used by the data collector.
• Status - The status field uses the following icons.
Failed. No value was ever collected for this collectible.
Warning: Data collection failed in the last polling cycle.
Successful: Last collection successful.
Scheduled but not currently active.

• Last Value - The last (most current) value collected.
• Last Time Polled - The time that the collector was last polled.
7.

Click Select Sources to add product and ports to or remove product and ports from real time
power performance monitoring. Refer to “Adding products and ports to real-time performance”
on page 985 and “Removing products and ports from real-time performance” on page 985.

8. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1095

35

Viewing PoE performance

Monitoring real time power performance on ports
To view real time power performance graphs or tables, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Power Center.
The Power Center dialog box displays.
2. Select a a port from the Port Data list.
3. Select Real Time Power Graphs/Tables from the Graphs/Tables list.
The Real Time Power Graphs/Tables dialog box displays.

FIGURE 457 Real Time Power Graphs/Tables dialog box
4. Select the measures you want to include and click the right arrow button to display it on the
Data Monitoring tab.
Port power measures include the following:

• Allocation (W) — snAgentPoePortWattage
• Consumption (W) — snAgentPoePortConsumed
• Consumption %

1096

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing PoE performance

35

5. Click the Data Monitoring tab to view a performance monitoring graph or table.

• Click the Graph option to view a performance graph.
The legend under the graph shows what data each color represents. To configure graph
options, refer to “Configuring the performance graph” on page 989.

• Click the Table option to view a performance table.
The first column displays the time of the collection. The remaining columns display the
value of each collectible at the specified time. There is one column for every collectible you
selected to display.
6. Click the Collection Status Summary tab to view the following information:
The Collection Status Summary tab provides a high level overview of all defined collectors. The
information is displayed in the following columns:

• Product - Shows the product name and IP address. There maybe multiple instances of the
product name for each collectible assigned to the product.

• Port - The port name when a port is selected.
• Collectible - The MIB objects and expressions used by the data collector.
• Status - The status field uses the following icons.
Failed. No value was ever collected for this collectible.
Warning: Data collection failed in the last polling cycle.
Successful: Last collection successful.
Scheduled but not currently active.

• Last Value - The last (most current) value collected.
• Last Time Polled - The time that the collector was last polled.
7.

Click Select Sources to add product and ports to or remove product and ports from real time
power performance monitoring. Refer to “Adding products and ports to real-time performance”
on page 985 and “Removing products and ports from real-time performance” on page 985.

8. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1097

35

1098

Viewing PoE performance

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

36

Policy Monitor

In this chapter
• Policy monitor overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Preconfigured policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing policy monitor status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing existing policy monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Adding a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Policy monitor scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Editing a policy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Deleting a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Running a policy monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing a policy monitor report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing historical reports for all policy monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing historical reports for a policy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1099
1105
1106
1107
1108
1113
1115
1115
1116
1135
1136
1139
1139

Policy monitor overview
Use the Policy Monitor feature to provide best practice guidelines for network setup at the fabric,
switch, port, and device level, as well as software configurations at the Fabric OS, Ironware,
Network OS, and the Management application level.
Configuring policy monitors enables you to perform the following:

•
•
•
•

Provide selectable and configurable built-in rules to check for best practices
Schedule policies to run periodically
Run a policy manually (on demand)
Generate a report that will detail any issues found by the policy

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1099

36

Policy monitor overview

Fabric policy monitors
Fabric policy monitors enable you to set the following policy monitors on Ethernet fabrics (refer to
“Adding a policy monitor” on page 1108):

• Check zoning status — This fabric policy monitor enables you to determine if zoning is enabled
or disabled on the fabric.
Zoning plays a key role in the management of device communication. When you enforce
zoning, devices not in the same zone cannot communicate. Zoning provides protection from
disruption in the fabric (putting bounds on the scope of RSCNs). The best practice is always to
enable zoning.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator can use the
Zoning dialog box (Configure > Zoning > Fabric) to fix the violation. Refer to “Zoning” on
page 637.
For example, if you use the policy monitor to make sure that the zoning status is enabled, you
can fix the violation through the Zoning dialog box by locating the target fabric, defining a zone
configuration, and activating the zone configuration.

• Check that all zones belong to at least one zone config — This fabric policy monitor enables you
to determine if there are any orphaned zones in the fabric zone database.
Too many orphaned zones can fill up the fabric zone database and complicate other ongoing
administrative tasks.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator can use the
Zoning dialog box (Configure > Zoning > Fabric) to fix the violation. Refer to “Zoning” on
page 637.
For example, the Administrator can fix the violation through the Zoning dialog box using one of
the following methods:

-

Defining a new zone configuration and moving the orphaned zones to the new zone
configuration.

-

Moving the orphaned zones to an existing zone configuration.
Cleaning up unused orphaned zones.

• Check the number of initiator ports zoned to each storage port — This fabric policy monitor
enables you to determine the total number of initiator ports zoned to each storage port.
When too many initiators share the same connection (share the bandwidth of the storage
port), congestion can occur.
There are four possible zone member types: device port WWN, device node WWN, (D,I), and
Fabric Assigned WWN.

1100

-

Device port WWN — The application counts the connected device ports and uses them for
the ratio calculation.

-

Device node WWN zone member — The application finds the corresponding device ports
and uses them for the ratio calculation.

-

D,I — If the switch port is connected to a device, the application finds the connected device
ports and uses them for the ratio calculation.

-

Fabric Assigned WWN — If the switch or Access Gateway (AG) port has a connected device
port, the application finds the connected device ports and uses them for the ratio
calculation.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy monitor overview

36

Some devices can function as both initiator and target. If the application finds this type of
device as one of the active zone members, this device port is treated as both initiator and
target:

-

Target (storage port) — The application counts the number of initiator ports zoned to this
storage port.

-

Initiator — The application counts this device as an initiator port for other storage ports in
the same zone.

Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator must make
sure the initiator port limit is under the recommended number.

• Check zones that do not contain any online member — This fabric policy monitor enables you to
identify zones in which all zone members are offline.

NOTE

The application does not count end devices which are missing from the fabric and D,PI zone
members (online or offline) as online zone members. The application only counts zones with
online WWN members as online zone members.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, you can use the Zoning dialog
box (Configure > Zoning > Fabric) to bring the devices back online (refer to “Zoning” on
page 637).
For example, if you use the policy monitor to determine when all WWN members in a zone are
offline, you can fix the violation through the Zoning dialog box by locating the target fabric and
bringing the devices back online.

• Check that all profiles are the same on each RBridge in an Ethernet fabric — This fabric policy
monitor enables you to determine if all RBridge profiles in a Ethernet fabric are the same. The
first check is to determine if the name matches. If the name matches, policy monitor checks
the other profile content (such as VLAN, QoS, and Security), and then the MAC associations.
A port profile is a collection of network policies supported by the switch. By configuring port
profiles on the VDX switch, the virtual machine (VM) that is configured on the virtual network
interface card (vNIC) can migrate to any other port on that switch, but still retain the same
network policies.
Use this check during VM migration to make sure that the migrated VM behaves the same way
on the next host.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, compare the port profiles
(refer to “Comparing port profiles” on page 437) to find the mismatches and then fix the
discrepancies.

Switch and router policy monitors
Switch and router policy monitors enable you to set the following policy monitors on switches and
routers.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1101

36

Policy monitor overview

• Check for HTTPS (secure HTTP) configuration — This switch and router policy monitor enables
you to check each target to see if HTTPS is active for device data transmission.

NOTE

Not supported on Network OS products and the following IronWare products: Ethernet Core
routers, Ethernet Carrier Routers, Ethernet Edge router, and Data Center switch, as well as the
6650 Ethernet switch, router, and L3 router.
The preferred Management application product communication must be HTTPS for this check
to pass.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, enable HTTPS on the device.
Disable HTTP settings on the device, if enabled.

• Check if the product is configured to send events to this server — This switch and router policy
monitor enables you to determine if the Management application server is registered as an
SNMP recipient and Syslog recipient.
If the server has multiple NICs, the server uses an IP address reachable from the switch for
event registration. This policy cannot determine if the server is using a reachable IP address for
the event registration.
If the Management application server fails to register as a listener for SNMP, Syslog, and other
events, the Management application server cannot notify you of changes to the fabric or
device. If a fabric or switch fails, the Management application cannot provide notification, log,
or support data. Therefore, you may not realize that there is an inconsistency between the
physical device status and the device status in the Management application for some time.
This policy cannot determine if the SNMP trap or syslog listener ports are available or working.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows an “SNMP not registered as recipient”
violation, the Administrator can register the Management server as an SNMP recipient through
the SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box (Monitor > SNMP Setup > Product Trap Recipients). Refer
to “Fault Management” on page 1141.
If the policy monitor report shows an “Syslog not registered as recipient” violation, the
Administrator can register the Management server as an Syslog recipient through the Syslog
Recipients dialog box (Monitor > Syslog Configuration > Product Syslog Recipients). Refer to
“Fault Management” on page 1141.

• Check for SSH (secure Telnet) configuration — This switch and router policy monitor enables
you to check each target to see if SSH is enabled for device data transmission.

NOTE

Not supported on the following IronWare products: Application products running 12.3.X or
earlier and the 6910 Ethernet switch.
The preferred Management application product communication must be SSH for this check to
pass.
For Network OS verifies SSH access is enabled and telnet access is disabled through the IP
ACL active or applied policy rules. You should verify that the IP ACL active rules deny telnet
access to all.
For IronWare products, verifies SSH access is enabled and telnet access is disabled through
CLI commands.

1102

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy monitor overview

36

Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, enable SSH on the device.
Disable Telnet settings on the device, if enabled.

• Check for SNMPv3 (secure SNMP) configuration — This switch and router policy monitor
enables you to check each target to see if SNMPv3 is active for device data transmission and
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are not configured.

NOTE

For this check to pass, you must discover the products using SNMPv3 credentials.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, configure SNMPv3 on the
device. Remove SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 settings on the device, if configured.

• Check for VLAN configurations match for each connection (IP only) — This switch and router
policy monitor enables you to determine the consistency of VLAN configurations for each
connection on the selected IP devices.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, configure VLANs on each
device to contain the same interface membership.

• Configuration Rules — This switch and router policy monitor enables you to use predefined
rules or create your own rules to compare content against a baseline (such as a product’s
backup configuration file). A configuration rule is a logical expression built with configuration
conditions and blocks. For more information, refer to “Viewing a predefined configuration rule”
on page 1116.

-

Predefined rules — The predefined rules include the following:




-

No Interface Shutdown Rule — Fails if any of the interfaces in the device are shut
down.
Port Profile Interface Rule — Fails if any of the interfaces on the device do not have a
port profile.

User-defined rules — You can configure your own configuration rules using predefined
conditions and blocks (refer to “Adding a configuration rule” on page 1120).

Host policy monitors
Host policy monitors enable you to set the following checks on host devices.

• Check for multiple fabrics connections — This host policy monitor enables you to determine if
each host is connected to multiple fabrics to prevent a single point of failure.
Available hosts include both automatic hosts and manual hosts. Automatic hosts are those
hosts discovered through Host or VM Manager discovery. Manual hosts are those host
enclosures that are manually created through Host Port Mapping in the fabric topology.
The Management application determines if the host has redundant connections to different
fabrics based on discovery type and connection knowledge that the Management application
collects; however, there is no guarantee that redundant paths exist to the same storage target.
Depending on how you discover the hosts, there are recommended configurations you should
complete to avoid inaccuracy:

-

Fabric discovery for manual host enclosures to fabric connections.
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1103

36

Policy monitor overview

Make sure to configure the host port mapping. (refer to “Host port mapping overview” on
page 419)

-

Host adaptor discovery with 2.1 or later driver for host to unmanaged fabric connections
(refer to “Host discovery” on page 93)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host.

-

Fabric plus Host adapter discovery with 2.1 or earlier driver (refer to “Host discovery” on
page 93)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host.

-

Fabric plus VM Manager for hosts discovered through vCenter (refer to “VM Manager
discovery” on page 103)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host.
Make sure you discover the associated fabrics.

-

VM Manager plus Host adapter discovery (refer to “VM Manager discovery” on page 103)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host.
Make sure you discover the associated fabrics.

Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator can add a
host connection to additional fabrics.

• Check for connections through two fabrics to each target LUN — This host policy monitor
enables you to determine if there are redundant connections between the host group and the
target LUN.
To prevent a single point of failure, the host should have a redundant connection to the target
LUN. Available hosts include both automatic hosts and manual hosts. An automatic host is a
host discovered through Host adapter discovery or VM Manager discovery. A manual host is a
host enclosure manually created through host port mapping in the fabric topology.
Depending on how you discover the hosts, there are recommended configurations you should
complete to avoid inaccuracy:

-

Host adapter discovery (refer to “Host discovery” on page 93)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs (with a 2.1 or later driver) on the host.

-

Fabric plus Host discovery
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs on the host connected to the fabric.
Make sure to configure the host port mapping (refer to “Host port mapping overview” on
page 419).

-

Fabric plus VM Manager discovery
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs (with a 2.1 or later driver) on the host connected to the
fabric.

-

VM Manager plus Host discovery (refer to “VM Manager discovery” on page 103)
Make sure there are Brocade HBAs (with a 2.1 or later driver) on the host.
Make sure you discover the associated fabrics.

1104

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Preconfigured policy monitors

36

Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator can add
redundant connections (either a host to attached fabrics or attached fabrics to a target LUN or
more inter-fabric routes) to establish a complete path from host to target LUN.

Management policy monitor
The management policy monitor enables you to set a policy monitor on the Management
application.
Check to see if the server backup is enabled and working — This management policy monitor
enables you to determine if backup is enabled for the Management application server and if the
backup output directory is accessible and writable.
Server backup automatically backs up the Management application database on a user-defined
schedule.
Rule Violation Fix — If the policy monitor report shows a violation, the Administrator can edit the
backup configuration through the Options dialog box, Server Backup pane (Server > Options). Refer
to “Management server backup” on page 129.

Preconfigured policy monitors
The Management application provides preconfigured policy monitors. The preconfigured policy
monitors include the following:
Default IP Policy — Available for SAN products and contains the following values:

•
•
•
•

Name — Default IP Policy
Description — Default policy to run on all IP targets
Frequency — Weekly
Next Run — Next time the policy will run using the format:
. For
example, Fri Jun 08 08:00:00 PDT 2012.

• Last Run — Empty
• Result — Empty
• Rule — The default IP policy is configured with the following rules:
- All profiles are the same on each RBridge in an Ethernet fabric
- Event registration
- Predefined rules – “No Interface Shutdown Rule” and “Port Profile Interface Rule”
- Management application backup enabled
• Targets — The default IP policy is configured with the following targets:
- Fabric Checks — All Fabrics
- Switch/Router Checks — IP Wired Products and Wireless Controllers product groups

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1105

36

Viewing policy monitor status

Viewing policy monitor status
You can view policy monitor status from the main Management application window or from the
Policy Monitor dialog box.
The Management application enables you to view the policy monitor status at a glance by providing
a policy monitor status icon on the Status Bar. The following table illustrates and describes the
icons that indicate the current status of the policy monitor function.

TABLE 92
Icon

Policy Monitor Icons
Description
Passed — Displays when all policy monitors, excluding un-alerted and acknowledged
monitors, pass. Pause on icon to display flyover detail: Policy monitor is OK.

Failed — Displays when at least one policy monitor failed. Pause on icon to display flyover
detail: The last run of number policy monitor(s) has one or more failures.

To view more detail regarding policy monitor status, click the Policy Monitor icon. The Policy Monitor
dialog box displays. For more information, refer to “Viewing existing policy monitors” on page 1107

1106

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing existing policy monitors

36

Viewing existing policy monitors
To view existing policy monitors, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor (Figure 458).
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.

FIGURE 458 Policy Monitor dialog box
2. Review the policy monitor details:

• Name — The user-defined name of the policy.
• Description — A description of the policy.
• Alert — Select to receive e-mail alerts and have the policy monitor status icon display in the
Status bar when the monitor fails or partially fails.

• Frequency — The frequency (one time, hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly) at which the policy
is scheduled.

• Next Run — The time the policy will run again.
• Last Run — The time the policy ran last.
• Result — The result of last policy monitor run. There are four possible results: Passed,
Partially Failed, Failed, and Not Applicable.

• Acknowledged — Whether the policy is acknowledged or not. Select the check box to
acknowledge the policy. Disabled when the associated Alert check box is cleared.
3. To add a policy monitor, click Add (refer to “Adding a policy monitor” on page 1108).
4. To edit the selected policy monitor, click Edit (refer to “Editing a policy monitor” on page 1115).
5. To delete the selected policy monitor, click Delete (refer to “Deleting a policy monitor” on
page 1115).
6. To run the selected policy and view the report, click Run (refer to “Running a policy monitor” on
page 1135).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1107

36

Adding a policy monitor

7.

To open the last executed report for a selected policy monitor, select a policy monitor and click
Report (refer to “Viewing a policy monitor report” on page 1136).

8. To view the report history for all policy monitors, click History (refer to “Viewing historical
reports for a policy monitor” on page 1139).
9. To view the report history for a selected policy monitor, select a policy monitor and click History
(refer to “Viewing historical reports for a policy monitor” on page 1139).
10. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Adding a policy monitor
To view existing policy monitors, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays (Figure 459).

FIGURE 459 Add Policy Monitor dialog box, Fabric Checks tab

1108

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding a policy monitor

36

3. Enter a user-defined name for the policy in the Name field.
The name must be unique. It cannot be over 64 characters, nor can the field be empty. It
cannot include asterisks.
4. Enter a description of the policy in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 128 characters. It cannot include asterisks.
5. Click the Schedule Use check box and choose one of the following options:

• To use the default frequency (one time, runs at current system time plus fifteen minutes),
go to step 6.

• To configure the frequency, click the ellipsis button and choose one of the following
options to configure the frequency at which deployment runs for the policy monitor:










To configure deployment to run only once, refer to “Configuring a one-time policy
monitor schedule” on page 1113.
To configure hourly deployment, refer to “Configuring an hourly policy monitor
schedule” on page 1114.
To configure daily deployment, refer to “Configuring a daily policy monitor schedule”
on page 1114.
To configure weekly deployment, refer to “Configuring a weekly policy monitor
schedule” on page 1114.
To configure monthly deployment, refer to “Configuring a monthly policy monitor
schedule” on page 1114.

6. To set policy monitors for fabrics, select the Fabric Checks tab and complete the following
steps.
a.

Select the Check zoning status check box to determine if zoning is enabled or disabled on
the fabric.

• Select the Enabled option to determine if zoning is enabled.
• Select the Disabled option to determine if zoning is disabled.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Fabric policy
monitors” on page 1100.
b.

Select the Check that all zones belong to at least one zone config check box to determine
if there are orphaned zones in the fabric zone database.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Fabric policy
monitors” on page 1100.

c.

Select the Check the number of initiator ports zoned to each storage port check box to
determine the total number of initiator ports zoned to each storage port.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Fabric policy
monitors” on page 1100.

d.

Select the Check zones that do not contain any online member check box to identify zones
in which all zone members are offline.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Fabric policy
monitors” on page 1100.

e.

Enter the initiator port limit in the Initiator Port Limit field.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1109

36

Adding a policy monitor

The default recommended threshold ratio is 20:1 (20 initiator ports to 1 target port).
Therefore, if the ratio for the storage port is equal to or higher than 20:1, the policy
monitor considers it as a violation and logs it in the report.
f.

Select the Check that all profiles are the same on each RBridge in an Ethernet fabric
check box to determine if all RBridge profiles in an Ethernet fabric are the same.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Fabric policy
monitors” on page 1100.

g.

Select the fabrics to which you want to apply this policy in the Available Fabrics list and
click the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can use the All Fabrics target in the Available Fabrics table for future provisioning.
Select All Fabrics and click the right arrow button to apply this policy to all discovered
fabrics.
The selected fabrics display in the Selected Fabrics list.

7.

To set policy monitors for switches, select the Switch/Router Checks tab (Figure 460) and
complete the following steps.

FIGURE 460 Add Policy Monitor dialog box, Switch/Router Checks tab

1110

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Adding a policy monitor

a.

36

Select one or more of the following checks in the Available Checks list to include them in
the policy monitor:
For more information about these checks and fixes for rule violations, refer to “Switch and
router policy monitors” on page 1101.

NOTE

The Check for HTTPS (secure HTTP) configuration are not supported on Network OS
products and the following IronWare products: Ethernet Core routers, Ethernet Carrier
Routers, Ethernet Edge router, and Data Center switch, as well as the 6650 Ethernet
switch, router, and L3 router..

NOTE

The Check for Secure SSH (secure Telnet) configuration checks are not supported on the
following IronWare products: Application products running 12.3.X or earlier and the 6910
Ethernet switch.

• Select the Check if the product is configured to send events to this server check to
determine if the Management application server is registered as an SNMP recipient
and Syslog recipient.

• Select the Check for HTTPS (secure HTTP) configuration check to check each target to
see if HTTPS is active for device data transmission.

• Select the Check for SSH (secure Telnet) configuration check to check each target to
see if SSH is enabled for device data transmission.

• Select the Check for SNMPv3 (secure SNMP) configuration check to check each target
to see if SNMPv3 is active for device data transmission and SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 are
not configured.

• Select the Check for VLAN configurations match for each connection (IP only) check to
determine the consistency of VLAN configurations for each connection on the selected
IP devices.
b.

Click the right arrow button to move the selected checks to the Selected Checks list.

c.

Select the switches or routers to which you want to apply this policy in the Available
Switches/Routers list and click the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can use the All Fabrics targets (under the Product Groups > System Product Groups
node) in the Available Switches/Routers list) for future provisioning. Select All Fabrics and
click the right arrow button to apply this policy to all discovered fabrics.
The selected switches display in the Selected Switches/Routers list.

8. To set policy monitors for hosts, select the Host Checks tab (Figure 461) and complete the
following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1111

36

Adding a policy monitor

FIGURE 461 Add Policy Monitor dialog box, Hosts Checks tab
a.

Select the Check for redundant connections to attached fabrics check box to determine if
there are at least the minimum number of configured physical connections between the
host and the attached fabric.
The default is 2. For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to
“Host policy monitors” on page 1103.

b.

Enter the minimum number of connections between the host and the attached fabric in
the Minimum Connections field.
The default is 2.

c.

Select the Check for connections through two fabrics to each target LUN check box to
determine if there are redundant connections between the host group and the target LUN.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Host policy
monitors” on page 1103.

d.

Select the hosts to which you want to apply this policy in the Available Hosts list and click
the right arrow button.

NOTE

You can use the All Host target in the Available Hosts list for future provisioning. Select All
Hosts and click the right arrow button to apply this policy to all discovered hosts.
The selected hosts display in the Selected Hosts list.

9. To set policy monitors for the Management application (Figure 462), complete the following
steps.

1112

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Policy monitor scheduling

36

FIGURE 462 Add Policy Monitor dialog box, Management Checks tab
a.

Select the Management Checks tab.

b.

Select the Check to see if the server backup is enabled and working check box to
determine the following configurations:

• Backup enabled for the Management application server.
• Backup output directory is accessible and writable.
This policy only applies to scheduled backup, not manual (on demand) backup.
For more information about this check and a fix for rule violations, refer to “Management
policy monitor” on page 1105.
10. Click OK on the Add Monitor dialog box.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays with the new policy monitor in the Monitors list.
11. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Policy monitor scheduling
You can schedule a policy monitor to run automatically. For step-by-step instructions, refer to the
following procedures:

•
•
•
•
•

“Configuring a one-time policy monitor schedule” on page 1113
“Configuring an hourly policy monitor schedule” on page 1114
“Configuring a daily policy monitor schedule” on page 1114
“Configuring a weekly policy monitor schedule” on page 1114
“Configuring a monthly policy monitor schedule” on page 1114

Configuring a one-time policy monitor schedule
To configure a one-time schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select One Time from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click the Date list to select a date from the calendar.
4. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
To finish configuring the policy monitor, return to step 6 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1113

36

Policy monitor scheduling

Configuring an hourly policy monitor schedule
To configure an hourly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Hourly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the minute past the hour you want deployment to run from the Minutes past the hour
list.
Where the minute value is from 00 through 59.
3. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
To finish configuring the policy monitor, return to step 6 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.

Configuring a daily policy monitor schedule
To configure a daily deployment schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Daily from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
To finish configuring the policy monitor, return to step 6 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.

Configuring a weekly policy monitor schedule
To configure a weekly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Weekly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.
Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Week list.
4. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
To finish configuring the policy monitor, return to step 6 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.

Configuring a monthly policy monitor schedule
To configure a monthly schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monthly from the Frequency list.
2. Select the time of day you want deployment to run from the Time (hh:mm) lists.

1114

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Editing a policy monitor

36

Where the hour value is from 1 through 12, the minute value is from 00 through 59, and the
day or night value is AM or PM.
3. Select the day you want deployment to run from the Day of the Month list (1 through 31).
4. Click OK on the Schedule Properties dialog box.
To finish configuring the policy monitor, return to step 6 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.

Editing a policy monitor
To edit an existing policy monitor, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy you want to edit in the Monitors list and click Edit.
The Edit Policy Monitor dialog box displays. The Edit Policy Monitor dialog box has the same
fields and components as the Add Policy Monitor dialog box.
3. Change the user-defined name for the policy in the Name field.
The name must be unique. It cannot be over 64 characters, nor can the field be empty. It
cannot include asterisks.
4. Change the description of the policy in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 128 characters. It cannot include asterisks.
5. To edit the policy monitor checks, repeat step 5 through step 9 of “Adding a policy monitor” on
page 1108.
6. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors list of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Deleting a policy monitor
To delete an existing policy monitor, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy you want to delete in the Monitors list.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
5. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1115

36

Configuration rules

Configuration rules
A configuration rule is a logical expression built with configuration conditions and blocks. You can
use configuration rules to perform a configuration compliance check against a baseline (such as a
product’s backup configuration file).

Viewing a predefined configuration rule
You can view detailed information about predefined configuration rules on the Add Monitor or Edit
Monitor dialog box.
1. Select the predefined configuration rule you want to view.
The configuration rule displays in the Details area.
2. Review the configuration rule.
For specific detailed information about the predefined rules, refer to “Predefined configuration
rules” on page 1116.

Predefined configuration rules
The Management application provides the following predefined configuration rules:

• No Interface Shutdown Rule — The rule fails when any interface (10 Gbps port or LAG) on the
device shuts down. Table 93 defines the logical expressions for this rule.

TABLE 93

No Interface Shutdown Rule expressions

AND/OR ( Block/Condition Name
Start: Network OS Ten Gigabit
Ethernet Interfaces

) Details - Description/Condition/Configuration
Processes all 10 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on a Network
OS device.
interface TenGigabitEthernet .*

Network OS Interface NOT
shutdown

Condition test fails if the interface is shut down.
Not Matches - Lines in any order
shutdown

AND

End: Network OS Ten Gigabit
Ethernet Interfaces

!

Start: Network OS LAG
Interfaces

Processes all LAG interfaces on a Network OS device.

Network OS Interface NOT
shutdown

Checks whether the interface is configured as shutdown.
This condition should be used within an interface block.

interface Port-channel .*

Not Matches - Lines in any order
shutdown
End: Network OS LAG
Interfaces

!

• Port Profile Interface Rule — The rule fails when any interface (10 Gbps port or LAG) on the
device does not have a port profile. Table 94 defines the logical expressions for this rule.

1116

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

TABLE 94

36

Port Profile Interface Rule expressions

AND/OR ( Block/Condition Name

) Details - Description/Condition/Configuration

Start: Network OS Ten Gigabit
Ethernet Interfaces

Processes all 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface on a Network OS
device.
interface TenGigabitEthernet .*

Network OS Interface Port
Profiled

Checks whether the interface port profiled. This condition
should be used with in an interface block.
Matches - Lines in any order
port-profile-port

AND

End: Network OS Ten Gigabit
Ethernet Interfaces

!

Start: Network OS LAG
Interfaces

Processes all LAG Interfaces on a Network OS device

Network OS Interface Port
Profiled

Checks whether the interface port profiled. This condition
should be used with in an interface block.

interface Port-channel .*

Matches - Lines in any order
port-profile-port
End: Network OS LAG
Interfaces

!

Viewing configuration rule details
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays (Figure 463).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1117

36

Configuration rules

FIGURE 463 Add Configuration Rule dialog box
This Add Configuration Rule dialog box contains the following fields and components:

• Name — A unique name for the rule.
The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special characters allowed are an
underscore (_) or space.

• Description — A description for the rule.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

• Library list — Contains a list of predefined and user-defined conditions or blocks. You
cannot modify or delete predefined conditions or blocks. For more information, about
predefined conditions and blocks, refer to “Predefined conditions” on page 1128 and
“Predefined blocks” on page 1134.
The Library list contains the following details:









1118

Condition/Block — Conditions or blocks in a folder structure. For example, the
predefined conditions use the following structure:
Conditions/Predefined/Condition_Name.
Description — Description of condition or block. This field is blank for folders.
Add button — Click and select Condition or Block to add a condition or block. For more
information, refer to “Adding a configuration condition” on page 1124 or “Adding a
configuration block” on page 1131.
Edit / View button — Select a user-defined condition or block and click to edit. Select a
predefined condition or block and click to view. For more information, refer to “Editing
a user-defined configuration condition” on page 1127, “Editing a user-defined
configuration block” on page 1133, “Viewing predefined configuration conditions” on
page 1124, or “Viewing a predefined configuration block” on page 1130.
Delete button — Select one or more user-defined conditions or blocks and click to
delete. For more information, refer to “Deleting conditions and blocks” on page 1134.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

• Find > (right arrow) button — To find a condition or block in the Selected Conditions/Blocks
list, select a condition or block in the Library list and click.
The condition or block is highlighted in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list.

• Find < (left arrow) button — To find a condition or block in the Library list, select a condition
or block in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list and click.
The condition or block is highlighted in the Library list.

• Right arrow button — To add a condition or block to a rule, select the condition or block in
the Library list and click to add it to the Selected Conditions/Block list.
When you add a condition to a block, it is prefixed with an OR connector, except for the first
condition in the block. The first condition in the block cannot have any connector operator.
If you select a mixture of blocks and conditions in the Library list and you select one or
more blocks in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list, when you click the right arrow,
conditions are added to the selected blocks in the list and any new blocks are added at the
end of the logical expression.
You cannot add a condition or block more than once at the logical expression level.
However, you can add the same condition to one or more blocks. You cannot add a
condition more than once to a single block.

• Left arrow button — To remove a condition or block from a rule, select a one or more
conditions and blocks in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list and click the left arrow
button.

• Selected Conditions/Block list — Contains the logical expression of one or more conditions
and blocks for the rule.
The Selected Conditions/Block list contains the following details:









AND/OR — To change the logical operator separator, select AND or OR from the
AND/OR column.
Valid values include AND and OR. The first item in a rule and the first connector in a
block display empty fields and cannot be edited. Each condition or block you add
displays with an AND connector (except the first item) in the list of conditions or
blocks. If you add one or more conditions to a block, each condition displays with an
OR connector (except the first condition) in the block.
Fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable.
( — Enter an open parenthesis to start a group (a set of conditions and blocks).
You can create up to three groups. You can nest groups. To ungroup a group, clear the
( and ) columns that delineate the group.
Condition — A list of conditions and blocks included in the rule.
) — Enter a close parenthesis to close a group (a set of conditions and blocks).
You can create up to three groups. You can nest groups. To ungroup a group, clear the
( and ) columns that delineate the group.
Move Up button — Use to move a condition or block up in the rule (except the first
item).
You can only move one item (condition or entire block) up at a time. If you move a
condition to the first position in the rule or in a block, the logical operator (AND/OR
column) is cleared. You can move a condition into a block by moving it between the
start and end of a block. If the condition is already part of the block, it skips the block
and moves above the block.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1119

36

Configuration rules



Move Down button — Use to move a condition or block down in the rule (except the
last item).
You can only move one item (condition or entire block) down at a time. If you move a
condition from the first position in the rule or in a block, the logical operator (AND/OR
column) is automatically populated. You can move a condition into a block by moving
it between the start and end of a block. If the condition is already part of the block, it
skips the block and moves below the block.

5. Click Cancel on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.
6. Click Cancel on the Add Monitor dialog box.
7.

Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Adding a configuration rule
You can create your own rules to compare content against a baseline.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays (Figure 463).
5. Enter a name for the rule in the Name field.
The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special characters allowed are an
underscore (_) or space.
6. Enter a description for the rule in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.
7.

Select one or more conditions and blocks in the Library list and click the right arrow button to
add the conditions and blocks to the rule.
The Library list contains a list of predefined and user-defined conditions or blocks. You cannot
modify or delete predefined conditions or blocks. For more information, about predefined
conditions and blocks, refer to “Predefined conditions” on page 1128 and “Predefined blocks”
on page 1134.
To add a condition, refer to “Adding a configuration condition” on page 1124.
To add a block, refer to “Adding a configuration block” on page 1131.
To delete a condition or block, refer to “Deleting conditions and blocks” on page 1134.

8. To add conditions to a block, select a block in the Selected Conditions/Block list, then select
the conditions (one or more) you want to add to the block in the Library list and click the right
arrow button.

1120

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

9. To change the logical operator separator, select AND or OR from the AND/OR column.
Valid values include AND and OR. The first item in a rule and the first connector in a block
display empty fields. Each condition or block you add displays with an AND connector (except
the first item) in the list of conditions or blocks. If you add one or more conditions to a block,
each condition displays with an OR connector (except the first condition) in the block.
Fields containing a green triangle (

) in the lower right corner are editable.

10. To group a set of conditions and blocks, enter an open parenthesis in the ( column of the
condition or block where you want to start a grouping and enter a close parenthesis in the )
column after the last condition or block you want to include in the group.
You can create up to three groups. You can nest groups. To ungroup a group, clear the ( and )
columns that delineate the group.
11. To move a condition or block up in the rule, select one condition or block (except the first item)
and click Move Up.
You can only move one item (condition or entire block) up at a time. If you move a condition to
the first position in the rule or in a block, the logical operator (AND/OR column) is cleared. You
can move a condition into a block by moving it between the start and end of a block. If the
condition is already part of the block, it skips the block and moves above the block.
12. To move a condition or block down in the rule, select one condition or block (except the last
item) and click Move Down.
You can only move one item (condition or entire block) down at a time. If you move a condition
from the first position in the rule or in a block, the logical operator (AND/OR column) is
automatically populated. You can move a condition into a block by moving it between the start
and end of a block. If the condition is already part of the block, it skips the block and moves
below the block.
13. To find a condition or block in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list, select a condition or block in
the Library list and click Find > (right arrow).
The condition or block is highlighted in the Selected Conditions/Blocks list.
14. To find a condition or block in the Library list, select a condition or block in the Selected
Conditions/Blocks list and click Find < (left arrow).
The condition or block is highlighted in the Library list.
15. To remove a condition or block from a rule, select one or more conditions and blocks in the
Selected Conditions/Blocks list and click the left arrow button.
16. Click OK on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.
17. Click OK on the Add Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
18. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Duplicating a configuration rule
You can create a new configuration rule based on a predefined or user-defined configuration rule.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1121

36

Configuration rules

1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select the configuration rule (either predefined rule or user-defined) you want to duplicate in
the Available Checks list or Selected Checks list.
5. Click Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
6. Change the name for the rule in the Name field.
The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special characters allowed are an
underscore (_) or space.
7.

Change the description for the rule in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

8. To edit the configuration rule, repeat step 7 through step 15 of “Adding a configuration rule” on
page 1120.
9. Click OK on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Add Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
11. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Editing a configuration rule
You can edit your own rules to compare content against a baseline.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select the configuration rule you want to edit in the Available Checks list and click Edit.
The Edit Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Change the name for the rule in the Name field.
The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special characters allowed are an
underscore (_) or space.
6. Change the description for the rule in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.
7.

1122

To edit a configuration rule, repeat step 7 through step 15 of “Adding a configuration rule” on
page 1120.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

8. Click OK on the Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.
9. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
10. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Exporting a configuration rule
You can export user-defined configuration rules from one instance of the Management application
to another.
1. From the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box, select Export from the Export list.
The Export Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the location where you want to export the configuration rule (xml format) file and
click Export.
3. Click OK on the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box.

Importing a configuration rule
You can import user-defined configuration rules (xml format) one at a time.
Imported rules must meet the following criteria:

• The rule cannot have the same name as a predefined configuration rule.
• The rule cannot have any invalid rule or condition parameters.
• The rule cannot have any invalid block parameters.
1. From the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box, select Import from the Export list.
The Import Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
2. Browse to the configuration rules (xml format) file and click Import.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message, if necessary.
4. Click OK on the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box.

Deleting a configuration rule
You can only delete user-defined configuration rules.
1. From the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box, select one or more user-defined configuration
rules you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the Add Monitor or Edit Monitor dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1123

36

Configuration rules

Viewing predefined configuration conditions
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the predefined condition you want to view and click Edit/View.
The View Condition dialog box displays. This dialog box contains the following fields and
components:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Product field and ellipsis button — Not editable in the View Condition dialog box.
Configuration list — Not available in the View Condition dialog box.
Name — The name of the selected condition.
Description — The description of the selected condition.
Use regular expression check box — Not available in the View Condition dialog box.
Configuration the lines below list — Not available in the View Condition dialog box.
Configuration text box — The configuration lines with which you want to compare the
product configuration.

• Lines in exact order check box — Not available in the View Condition dialog box.
• Remediation text box — Details how to correct the failure, if the condition fails.
Remediation content displays in the Configuration Rule Report for each failed condition.
The remediation detail cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.
6. Click Cancel on the View Condition dialog box.
7.

Click Cancel on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.

8. Click Cancel on the Add Monitor dialog box.
9. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Adding a configuration condition
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays.

1124

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

5. Select Add > Condition.
The Add Condition dialog box displays (Figure 464).

FIGURE 464 Add Condition dialog box
6. Enter a user-defined name for the rule in the Name field.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Enter a description of the rule in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

8. Select the backup configuration file you want to use by completing the following steps.
a.

Click the Product ellipsis button complete the steps in “Selecting a product” on
page 1126.
If the product has no configuration files, the Configuration list is empty. You can manually
trigger configuration file back up for the products to populate this list.
If the product has multiple configuration files, the latest configuration file is selected and
displays in the Configuration list by default.

b.

Select the backup configuration file you want to use from the Configuration list.
The contents of the backup configuration file display in the CLI Configuration File text box.
Select the lines you want to use in the CLI Configuration File text box and click the right
arrow to move the lines to the Configuration text box.

9. Check the Use regular expressions check box to enter a regular expression in the Configuration
text box.
10. Select one of the following options to determine whether the configuration lines should match
or not match from Configuration the lines below list:

• Matches — Select this option from the list if you want the configuration line to match the
line in the device configuration file.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1125

36

Configuration rules

• Not Matches — Select this option from the list if you do not want the configuration line to
match the line in the device configuration file.
11. Enter one or more configuration lines with which you want to compare the device configuration
in the Configuration text box.
12. Select the Lines in exact order check box to match the configuration lines in the same order in
the Configuration text box as the device configuration.
Clear the Lines in exact order check box to search and match each configuration line in the
Configuration text box.
13. Enter details to correct the failure, if the condition fails, in the Remediation text box.
Remediation content displays in the Configuration Rule Report for each failed condition. The
remediation detail cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.
14. Click OK on the Add Condition dialog box.
15. Click OK on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.
16. Click OK on the Add Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
17. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Selecting a product
You can only select one product at a time.
1. From the Add Condition dialog box, click the Product ellipsis button to select a product.
The Select Product dialog box displays.
2. Select a product from the Available Products list, and click the right arrow button to move the
product to the Selected Product table.
The Available Products list contains the same fields as the IP Product list (refer to “IP Product
List” on page 284).
3. To remove a product from the Selected Product list, select the product and click the left arrow
button to move the product to the Available Products list.
The Selected Product list contains the same fields as the IP Product list (refer to “IP Product
List” on page 284).
4. Click OK on the Select Product dialog box.

Duplicating a configuration condition
Enables you to create a new condition based on a predefined or user-defined condition.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.

1126

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

4. Select the configuration rule you want to edit in the Available Checks list and click Edit.
The Edit Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the predefined or user-defined condition you want to edit and click Add > Condition.
The Add Condition dialog box displays.
6. Change the user-defined name for the rule in the Name field, if necessary.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Change the description of the rule in the Description field, if necessary.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

8. To edit a configuration condition, repeat step 8 through step 13 of “Adding a configuration
condition” on page 1124.
9. Click OK on the Add Condition dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.
11. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
12. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Editing a user-defined configuration condition
NOTE

You cannot edit a predefined configuration condition.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select the configuration rule you want to edit in the Available Checks list and click Edit.
The Edit Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the user-defined condition you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit Condition dialog box displays.
6. Change the user-defined name for the rule in the Name field, if necessary.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Change the description of the rule in the Description field, if necessary.
The description cannot be over 1, 024 ASCII characters.

8. To edit a configuration condition, repeat step 8 through step 13 of “Adding a configuration
condition” on page 1124.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1127

36

Configuration rules

9. Click OK on the Edit Condition dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.
11. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table.
12. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Predefined conditions
The Management application provides predefined conditions. Table 95 lists the predefined
conditions that can be used in a block or at the configuration rule level. For example, interface
conditions should be used in a port or LAG interface block and SNMP conditions can be used at the
rule level.

TABLE 95

Predefined conditions

Name

Use
Matches/
regular
Not Matches
expression

Configuration

Lines in
exact
order

Network OS Interface shutdown check Checks whether the interface is
configured as shutdown. This
condition should be used within an
interface block.

No

Matches

shutdown

No

Network OS Interface NOT shutdown
check

Condition test fails if the interface is
shutdown.

No

Not Matches

shutdown

No

Network OS Interface sflow Enabled
check

Checks whether sFlow is enabled on
the interface. This condition should
be used within an interface block.

No

Matches

sflow enable
sflow sample-rate
32768

Yes

Network OS Interface All VLANs check

Checks whether the interface is
configured to be part of all VLANs.
This condition should be used within
an interface block.

No

Matches

switchport trunk
allowed vlan all

No

Network OS Interface Trunk mode
check

Checks whether the interface is
configured to be in trunk mode. This
condition should be used within an
interface block.

No

Matches

switchport
switchport mode
trunk

Yes

Network OS Interface Switchport
mode check

Checks whether the Network OS
interface is configured to be a
switchport or not. If not configured,
the test will fail.

No

Matches

switchport

No

Network OS Interface Access mode
check

Checks whether the interface is
configured to be in access mode. This
condition should be used within an
interface block.

No

Matches

switchport
switchport mode
access

Yes

Network OS Interface Port Profiled
check

Checks whether the interface port is
profiled. This condition should be
used within an interface block.

No

Matches

port-profile-port

No

1128

Description

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

TABLE 95

36

Predefined conditions (Continued)

Name

Description

Use
Matches/
regular
Not Matches
expression

Configuration

Lines in
exact
order

IronWare OS Interface shutdown
check

Checks whether the IronWare device
port is in shutdown state. (This is not
applicable for Ethernet router
products.) This condition should be
used within an interface block.

No

Matches

disable

No

IronWare OS Interface sflow check

Checks whether sFlow is configured
on the IronWare device port. This
condition should be used within an
interface block.

No

Matches

sflow-forwarding
sflow sample 32768

Yes

IronWare OS SNMP community
Strings configured check

Checks whether SNMP community
strings are configured.

Yes

Matches

snmp-server
community .*

No

Network OS SNMP community strings
configured check

Checks whether SNMP community
strings are configured.

Yes

Matches

snmp-server
community private rw
snmp-server
community public

No

IronWare OS Interface name check

Checks whether the port is named or
not.

Yes

Matches

port-name.*

No

IronWare OS VLAN name check

Checks whether the VLAN is named or
not.

Yes

Matches

vlan(.)+name(.)+$

No

IronWare OS Super User password
enabled check

Checks whether the super user
password is enabled on the device or
not.

Yes

Matches

^enable
super-user-password

No

IronWare OS Password min length
enabled check

Checks whether the password
minimum length is enabled or not.
The range allowed is from 8 through
255 characters.

Yes

Matches

^enable
password-min-length
([8-9]|[1-9][0-9]|1[09][0-9]|2[0-4][0-9]|2
5[0-5])$

No

IronWare OS AAA Console Enabled
check

Checks whether the AAA console is
enabled or not

Yes

Matches

^enable aaa
console$

No

IronWare OS SSH timeout check

Checks whether the IP SSH timeout
value has been configured for the
device in the range [1 - 120].

Yes

Matches

No
'^ip ssh +timeout
(0*([1-9][0-9]?|1[01]
[0-9]|120))$'

IronWare OS SSH idle-time check

Checks whether the IP SSH
idle-timeout is less than or equal to
10 minutes.

Yes

Matches

^ip ssh +idle-time
([0-9]|10)$

No

IronWare OS SSH Client Allowed
check

Checks to see if the SSH client is
allowed or not.

Yes

Matches

ip ssh +client.*

No

RFS with Configuration Auto Install
Disabled

Checks whether auto-installation of
the configuration is disabled in a
user-specified profile. This condition
should be used inside the profile
block. If the profile name is not
specified in the configuration or if the
user selects all the profiles (profile.*),
then it will match against the first
available profile.

No

Matches

no autoinstall
configuration

No

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1129

36

Configuration rules

TABLE 95

Predefined conditions (Continued)

Name

Description

Use
Matches/
regular
Not Matches
expression

Configuration

Lines in
exact
order

RFS with Firmware Auto Install
Disabled

Checks whether auto-installation of
the firmware is disabled in
user-specified profile. This condition
should be used inside the profile
block. If the profile name is not
specified in configuration or if user
selects all the profiles (profile.*) then
it will match against first available
profile

No

Matches

no autoinstall
firmware

No

RFS Radio Interface check

Checks whether the specified profile
is configured with Radio interfaces.
This condition should be used inside
the profile block. If the profile name is
not specified in the configuration or if
the user selects all the profiles
(profile.*), then it will match against
the first available profile.

Yes

Matches

interface radio.*

No

RFS Gigabit Ethernet Interface check

Checks whether the specified profile
is configured with Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces. This condition should be
used inside the profile block. If the
profile name is not specified in the
configuration or if the user selects all
the profiles (profile.*), then it will
match against the first available
profile.

Yes

Matches

interface ge.*

No

RFS Fast Ethernet Interface check

Checks whether the specified profile
is configured with Fast Ethernet
interfaces. This condition should be
used inside the profile block. If the
profile name is not specified in the
configuration or if the user selects all
the profiles (profile.*), then it will
match against the first available
profile.

Yes

Matches

interface fe.*

No

RFS AAA policy Health Check Interval

Checks whether the health check
interval has been configured in the
AAA policy.

No

Matches

health-check interval

No

Viewing a predefined configuration block
A configuration block is a continuous group of lines within a configuration file within which
conditions will be checked. The block is defined by the line that starts the block and the line that
ends the block.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.

1130

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the predefined block you want to view and click Edit/View.
The View Block dialog box displays. This dialog box contains the following fields and
components:

•
•
•
•

Name — The name of the selected block.
Description — The description of the selected block.
Use regular expression check box — Not available for the View Block dialog box.
Block Start — The start of the selected block used to match a block start label in the
device configuration.

• Block End — The end of the selected block used to match (up to and including this string)
in the device configuration.
6. Click Cancel on the View Block dialog box.
7.

Click Cancel on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.

8. Click Cancel on the Add Monitor dialog box.
9. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Adding a configuration block
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Add Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Click the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select Add > Configuration Rule.
The Add Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select Add > Block.
The Add Block dialog box displays (Figure 465).

FIGURE 465 Add Block dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1131

36

Configuration rules

6. Enter a user-defined name for the block in the Name field.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Enter a description of the block in the Description field.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

8. Select the Use regular expression check box to use a regular expression in the Block Start
field.
This enables you to match one or more blocks in the device configuration.
9. Enter the start of a block that you want to match to a block start label in the device
configuration in the Block Start field.
The block start cannot be over 256 characters.
10. Enter the block end that you want to use to match (up to and including this string) in the device
configuration in the Block End field.
The block end cannot be over 256 characters. By default, this field contains an exclamation
point (!). Do not use a regular expression as a block end.
11. Click OK on the Add Block dialog box.
12. Click OK on the Add Configuration Rule dialog box.
13. Click OK on the Add Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
14. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Duplicating a configuration block
Enables you to create a new configuration block based on a predefined or user-defined
configuration block .
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Select the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select the configuration rule you want to edit in the Available Checks list and click Edit.
The Edit Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the predefined or user-defined block you want to duplicate and click Add > Block.
The Add Block dialog box displays.

1132

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Configuration rules

36

6. Change the user-defined name for the rule in the Name field, if necessary.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Change the description of the rule in the Description field, if necessary.
The description cannot be over 1024 ASCII characters.

8. To edit a configuration block, repeat step 8 through step 10 of “Adding a configuration block”
on page 1131.
9. Click OK on the Add Block dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.
11. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.
12. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Editing a user-defined configuration block
NOTE

You cannot edit a predefined configuration block.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click Edit.
The Edit Monitor dialog box displays.
3. Select the Switch/Router Checks tab.
4. Select the configuration rule you want to edit in the Available Checks list and click Edit.
The Edit Configuration Rule dialog box displays.
5. Select the user-defined block you want to edit and click Edit.
The Edit Block dialog box displays.
6. Change the user-defined name for the rule in the Name field, if necessary.
The name must be unique. The name cannot be over 128 characters. The only special
character allowed is an underscore (_).
7.

Change the description of the rule in the Description field, if necessary.
The description cannot be over 1, 024 ASCII characters.

8. To edit a configuration block, repeat step 8 through step 10 of “Adding a configuration block”
on page 1131.
9. Click OK on the Edit Block dialog box.
10. Click OK on the Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.
11. Click OK on the Edit Monitor dialog box.
The updated policy monitor displays in the Monitors table of the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1133

36

Configuration rules

12. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Deleting conditions and blocks
You can only delete user-defined conditions or blocks. Before you delete a user-defined condition
or block, you must remove it from any rules.
1. From the Add Configuration Rule or Edit Configuration Rule dialog box, select one or more
user-defined conditions or blocks you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
4. Click OK on the Add Configuration Rule or Edit Configuration Rule dialog box.

Predefined blocks
The Management application provides predefined blocks.
Table 96 lists the predefined blocks that can be used in a configuration rule.

TABLE 96

Predefined blocks

Name

Description

Use
Block Start
regular
expression

Block End

Network OS TenGigabit Ethernet
Interfaces

Processes all 10 Gigabit Ethernet
Interfaces on a Network OS device.

Yes

interface TenGigabitEthernet .*

!

Network OS Gigabit Ethernet
Interfaces

Processes all Gigabit Ethernet
Interfaces on a Network OS device.

Yes

interface GigabitEthernet .*

!

Network OS Vlan Interfaces

Processes all VLAN Interfaces on a
Network OS device.

Yes

interface Vlan .*

!

Network OS LAG Interfaces

Processes all LAG Interfaces on a
Network OS device.

Yes

interface Port-channel .*

!

Network OS Protocol LLDP

Processes the protocol LLDP block.

No

protocol lldp

!

IronWare OS Ethernet Interfaces

Processes all Ethernet ports on the
IronWare device.

Yes

interface ethernet .*

!

IronWare OS VLAN Interface

Processes VLANs on the IronWare
device.

Yes

vlan .*

!

RFS AAA Policies

Processes all the AAA policies
available for the RFS device.

Yes

aaa-policy.*

!

RFS Profile

Processes all the profiles available for
RFS device.

Yes

profile.*

!

1134

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Running a policy monitor

36

Running a policy monitor
Before you run a policy monitor, make sure your policy monitors are valid. Valid policy monitors
must have at least one policy selected with one or more targets. Management checks do not
require a target.
To run an existing policy monitor, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy you want to run in the Monitors list.
3. Click Run.
When the policy monitor check is complete, the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report displays
(Figure 466) in a web browser.

FIGURE 466 Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report
4. Review the report details (refer to “Viewing a policy monitor report” on page 1136).
To export a report, refer to “Exporting a policy monitor report” on page 1138.
To e-mail a report, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients” on page 1232.
5. Click the close button (X) on the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report browser window.
6. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1135

36

Viewing a policy monitor report

Viewing a policy monitor report
NOTE

You must run the policy monitor at least once before you can view a report.
To view an existing policy monitor report, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy for which you want to view a report in the Monitors list.
3. Click Report.

NOTE

If you have run this policy more than once, the latest report displays.
The Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report displays (Figure 466) in a web browser.
4. Review the report details:

• Name — Name of the policy monitor report.
• Date — Date and time the report was finished.
• Export button — To export a report, refer to “Exporting a policy monitor report” on
page 1138.

• E-Mail button — To e-mail a report, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients” on
page 1232.

• Status Summary — Number of checks that passed, partially failed, failed, not applicable,
or unknown.
When a policy status fails or partially fails, the status is highlighted in pink.

• Trigger — Trigger for the report. Valid results include Manual, Event Action, and Scheduled.
• Run Time — Date and time the report was triggered.
• Individual_Policy_Checks — Name of the policy check and a table displaying the results of
the check. The following information is included in the report data for each policy check:
Management Check — Displays the status of the management check. The management
check provides the following information:



Name — Name of the management check.
Status — Result of the check and reason for failure if known. Valid results include
Passed, Partially Failed, Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.

Fabric Checks — Fabric checks provide the following information for each selected check:



1136

Name — Fabric name.
Status — Result of the check and reason for failure if known. Valid results include
Passed, Partially Failed, Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing a policy monitor report

36

Fabric checks include the following options:




Check zoning is enabled
Check that all zones belong to at least one zone configuration
Check the number of initiator ports zoned to each storage port is less than
Configured_Value. This check provides the following additional detail for this check:





Storage Port — WWN of the storage port.
Initiator Count — Number of initiator ports zoned to the storage port.
Initiator Port — WWN of the initiator port.
Zone — Zone name containing the initiator/storage port zoning pair.

Check zones that do not contain any online member. This check lists the zones that
contain only offline members.
Ethernet Fabric — Checks that all profiles are the same on each RBridge in an
Ethernet fabric. This check provides the following additional detail for this check:

-

Profile — Name of the profile.
Status — Whether the profile matched (Passed) or did not match (Failed).
RBridge ID (Matching Sets) — Number of matching or missing sets. For example,
(Missing: 73) (Matching: 2).

Switch Checks — Switch checks provide the following information for each selected check:



Name — Product name.
Status — Result of the check and reason for failure if known. Valid results include
Passed, Partially Failed, Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.

Switch Checks include the following options:


Switch — Check for HTTPS (secure HTTP) configuration. This check provides the
following additional detail for this check:




HTTP Status — Whether HTTP is enabled or disabled on the product.

Switch — Check if the product is configured to send events to this server.
Switch - Check for SSH (secure Telnet) configuration.This check provides the following
additional detail for this check:



HTTPs Status — Whether HTTPS is enabled or disabled on the product.

SSH Status — Whether SSH is enabled or disabled on the product.
Telnet Status — Whether Telnet is enabled or disabled on the product.

Switch - Check for SNMPv3 (secure SNMP) configuration. This check provides the
following additional detail for this check:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1137

36

Viewing a policy monitor report



SNMP Status — Whether SNMP is enabled or disabled on the product.

Switch - Check for VLAN configurations match for each connection (IP only). This check
provides the following additional detail for this check:



SNMPv3 Status — Whether SNMPv3 is enabled or disabled on the product.

Local Switch Port — Name of the local switch port.
Local VLANs — Local VLAN number
Status — Whether the configurations matched (Passed) or did not match (Failed).
Remote VLANs — Remote VLAN number.
Remote Port — Name of the remote switch port.
Remote Switch — Name and IP address of the remote switch.

Configuration Rule Checks — Switch checks provide the following information for each
selected check:

-

Block/Condition Name — Name of the block or condition.

-

Condition Details — Details about the condition.

Matched Block — Name of the matched block.
Status — Whether the configurations matched (Passed) or did not match (Failed).
Failed Condition — Name of the failed condition.
Match/Not Match — Whether the configurations matched (Match) or did not
match (Not Match).
Remediation — Details how to correct the failure, if the condition fails.

Host Checks — Switch checks provide the following information for each selected check:



Name — Product name.
Status — Result of the check and reason for failure if known. Valid results include
Passed, Partially Failed, Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.

Displays the Host name and status of the policy check for the following option:



Host — Check for at least Configured_Minimum_Value connections to attached fabrics
Host — Check for connections through two fabrics to each target LUN. This check
provides the following additional detail for this check:

-

LUN Serial # — LUN serial number.
Adaptor Port — Host adapter port number.
Fabric — Fabric name.
Storage Port — Storage port number.

5. Click the close button (X) on the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report browser window.
6. Click Close on the Policy Monitor dialog box.

Exporting a policy monitor report
1. Click Export.
The File Download dialog box displays.
2. Click Save.

1138

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing historical reports for all policy monitors

36

The Save dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the file location where you want to save the report and click Save.
4. Click the close button (X) on the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report browser window.

Viewing historical reports for all policy monitors
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Click History.
The Report History dialog box displays the last 10 reports run for all monitors. The Report
History dialog box retains up to 10 reports for each policy monitor.

• Name — Name of the policy monitor.
• Date — Date and time the report was finished.
• Result — Result of the policy monitor run. Valid results include Passed, Partially Failed,
Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.
3. Select the report you want to view and click Display.
The Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report displays in a web browser. For detailed information
about reports, refer to “Viewing a policy monitor report” on page 1136.
4. Click the close button (X) on the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report browser window.
5. Click Close on the Report History dialog box.

Viewing historical reports for a policy monitor
1. Select Monitor > Policy Monitor.
The Policy Monitor dialog box displays.
2. Select the policy for which you want to view the report history and click History.
The Report History dialog box displays. The Report History dialog box displays up to 10 reports
for the selected policy monitor.

• Name — Name of the policy monitor.
• Date — Date and time the report was finished.
• Result — Result of the policy monitor run. Valid results include Passed, Partially Failed,
Failed, Not Applicable, and Unknown.
3. Select the report you want to view and click Display.
The Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report displays in a web browser. For detailed information
about reports, refer to “Viewing a policy monitor report” on page 1136.
4. Click the close button (X) on the Policy_Name - Policy Monitor Report browser window.
5. Click Close on the Report History dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1139

36

1140

Viewing historical reports for a policy monitor

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

37

Fault Management

In this chapter
• Fault management overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Defining filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SNMP traps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• SNMP informs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Syslogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event action definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Pseudo events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event custom reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event custom report schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Event logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1141
1142
1144
1147
1160
1161
1166
1181
1193
1202
1205

Fault management overview
Fault management enables you to monitor your managed SAN and IP networks using the following
methods:

• Listen, forward, and process SNMP traps for SAN and IP devices, which eliminates the need to
poll devices for events.

• Receive and forward Syslog messages from Fabric OS switches, IP devices, and Brocade
adapters — HBAs and CNAs are managed using the Host Connectivity Manager (HCM) Agent.

• Manage pseudo events.
• Configure the following event actions:
- Logging policy
- E-mail alerts
- Scripts
- Broadcast to clients
- Special events handling
- Deploy CLI configurations (IP only)
• Monitor audit logs and event logs for specified conditions.
• Support application events.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1141

37

Event notification

Restrictions
The following items affect Fault Management operation.

Supported IP address types
The Management application receives traps and syslog messages for physical IP addresses only.

Event Purging
The default maximum number of days that historical events are stored is 365. You can select a
different default (from 1 to 365 ) in the Options dialog box under Event Storage.

Event Archiving
The default number of days that purged events are archived is 30. This value cannot be changed.

Event notification
The Management application records the SAN and IP events in the Master Log. You can configure
the application to send event notifications to e-mail addresses at certain time intervals. This is a
convenient way to keep track of events that occur on the SAN and IP networks. You can also
configure products to “call home” for certain events, notifying the service center of product
problems. For instructions about configuring call home for events, refer to “Call Home” on
page 343.

Configuring e-mail notification
To send e-mail notification of events to users, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Notification > E-mail.
The E-mail Event Notification Setup dialog box (shown in Figure 467) displays.

FIGURE 467 E-mail Event Notification Setup dialog box

1142

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event notification

37

2. Select the Enable E-mail Event Notification check box to enable the application to send e-mail
messages in case of event notifications.
3. Enter the IP address or the name of the SMTP mail server that the server can use to send the
e-mail notifications in the E-mail Server field.
The Management application accepts IP addresses in IPv4 and IPv6 formats. The IPv4 format
is valid when the operating system has IPv4 mode only or dual stack mode. The IPv6 format is
valid when the operating system has IPv6 mode only or dual stack mode.
4. Select the SMTP over SSL check box to enable secure communication.
5. Enter the port number of the SMTP mail server in the SMTP Port field.
If SMTP over SSL is not enabled, the default is 25.
If SMTP over SSL is enabled, the default is 465.
6. Enter the authentication ID of the SMTP mail server in the SMTP ID field.

NOTE

The SMTP ID field is optional unless the SMTP server enables authentication.
7.

Enter the authentication password of the SMTP mail server in the SMTP Password field.

NOTE

The SMTP Password field is optional unless the SMTP server enables authentication.
8. Enter the sender’s e-mail address in the Reply Address field.
9. Enter the length of time the application should wait between notifications in the Summary
Interval field and list.
Notifications are combined into a single e-mail message and sent at each interval setting. An
interval setting of zero causes notifications to be sent immediately.

ATTENTION
Setting too short an interval can cause the recipient’s e-mail inbox to fill very quickly.
10. Select one of the following e-mail test options:

• Select Send to and enter an e-mail address for a user to send a test e-mail message to a
specific user.

• Select Send to all users enabled for notification to send a test e-mail message to all users
already set to receive notification.
11. Click Send Test E-mail to test the e-mail server.
A message displays whether the server was found. If the server was not found, verify that the
server address was entered correctly and that the server is running. If you are using an SMTP
mail server, also verify that the SMTP ID and password information was entered correctly.
12. Click OK to save your work and close the E-mail Event Notification Setup dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1143

37

Defining filters

Defining filters
The Define Filter dialog box, shown in Figure 468, allows you to define event filters by product,
event category, and severity. You can define event filters on SAN products, IP products, or hosts.

Setting up basic event filtering
To set up advanced event filtering on the selected events for a user, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select a user in the Users list and click Edit.
The Edit User dialog box displays.
3. Select the E-mail Notification Enable check box and click the Filter link.
The Define Filter dialog box, shown in Figure 468, displays.

FIGURE 468 Define Filter dialog box
4. Select which product type you are defining (SAN, IP, or Hosts) and click the appropriate tab.
5. Select the Events Description check box and enter a description of the event in the field.
6. Select the Allow Products check box to control whether or not all products are always displayed.

1144

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Defining filters

37

• When selected (the default), all products, even newly-added products, are added to the
Selected Products to be displayed list.

• If the check box is cleared, only the products listed in the Selected Products to be
displayed list are shown in the Master Log and all newly-added products are added to the
Available Products list.
7.

Select one or more event categories from the Available Event Category list and click the right
arrow button to move it to the Selected Event Category and Severity to be displayed list. You
can move any or all event categories.

8. Select at least one severity for each event. Severity options include Emergency, Alert, Critical,
Error, Warning, Notice, Debug, Info, and Unknown.

NOTE
If you delete event actions that are part of the filtering criteria, they will not display in the Master Log,
which displays in the lower left area of the main window, and lists all events and alerts that have
occurred on the managed networks.

Setting up advanced event filtering
To set up advanced event filtering on the selected events for a user, complete the following steps.
1. Select Server > Users.
The Users dialog box displays.
2. Select a user in the Users list and click Edit.
The Edit User dialog box displays.
3. Select the E-mail Notification Enable check box and click the Filter link.
The Define Filter dialog box displays.
4. Click Advanced.
The Advanced tab of the Define Filter dialog box, shown in Figure 469, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1145

37

Defining filters

FIGURE 469 Define Filter dialog box - Advanced tab
5. Select the Start Date check box to display only the events that were logged after the specified
start date. The default start date and time is the current date and time.
6. To include events in the event filter, complete the following steps.
a.

Select the event type you want to include from the Event Category list.
All event types are listed in alphabetical order.

b.

Select the event column for the event from the Event Column list.
All event columns are listed in alphabetical order.

7.

c.

Enter all or part of the event type value in the Value Contains field.

d.

Click the right arrow button to move the event type to the Additional Filters - Include these
Events list.

e.

To add additional filters, repeat step a through step d.

To exclude events from the event filter, complete the following steps.

NOTE

You can configure a maximum of ten filters to be included.

1146

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

a.

37

Select the event type you want to remove from the Event Category list.
All event types are listed in alphabetical order.

b.

Select the event column for the event from the Event Column list.
All event columns are listed in alphabetical order.

c.

Enter all or part of the event type value in the Value Contains field.

d.

Click the right arrow button to move the event type to the Additional Filters - Exclude these
Events list.

e.

To remove additional filters, repeat step a through step d.

8. To display events generated by an event action, select the event action from the Available
Event Action list and click the right arrow button to move it to the Selected Event Action to be
displayed list.
9. Click OK to close the Define Filter dialog box.

SNMP traps
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) provides a means to monitor and control network
products and to manage configurations, statistics, performance, and security through
authentication and privacy protocols.
The Management application allows you to configure SNMP traps. The SNMP configuration tasks
are described in the following sections:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

“Adding a trap recipient to one or more switches” on page 1148
“Removing a trap recipient from one or more switches” on page 1149
“SNMP trap forwarding” on page 1149
“Adding a trap destination” on page 1150
“Adding a new trap filter” on page 1151
“Event reception” on page 1153
“Adding an SNMP v3 credential” on page 1155
“Adding an SNMP v1 or v2c community string” on page 1156
“Importing a new MIB into the Management application” on page 1156
“Trap customization” on page 1157
“Unregistering a registered trap” on page 1159
“Customizing a registered trap definition” on page 1159
“Reverting the customization of a registered trap to default” on page 1160

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1147

37

SNMP traps

Adding a trap recipient to one or more switches
The SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box allows you to register any recipient as a trap recipient on
selected products. You can register different recipients for different products.

NOTE
You can register and unregister other recipient servers on the Fabric OS switches on a per-switch
basis. For IP products, you can perform registration only at the switch level.
To add a trap recipient to one or more switches, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Product Trap Recipients.
The SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box, shown in Figure 470, displays.

FIGURE 470 SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box
2. Click Add from the Action list.
3. Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap receiver (the recipient server) in the Recipient IP
Address field. This is a mandatory field. IPv4 addresses are accepted, but a Domain Name
System (DNS) name is not accepted.
4. Enter the SNMP trap port of the recipient in the Recipient Port field. This is a mandatory field.
Valid numeric values range from 1 through 65535 and 162 is the default.
5. Select the fabric or switches from the Available list and click the right arrow button to move it to
the Selected list. You can select multiple products.

NOTE

For IP products and product groups, only switches are available to select.
6. If the selected product is a SAN or Network OS device, select a severity from the Severity list.
Severity levels can be one of the following: None, Critical, Error, Warning, Info, or Debug.
The Severity list is disabled for IP products. None is the default.

1148

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

7.

37

Click the View Recipients button to list the recipients that correspond to a selected fabric or
product from the Available list.
The Trap Recipients - Fabric dialog box or the Trap Recipients - IP address dialog box
(depending on which product you selected) displays a list of configured recipients.

8. Click OK.
The Management application registers the recipient IP address as an SNMP trap recipient.
The SNMP version and credentials from the SNMP profile (for example, SNMP v3) are
registered.

Removing a trap recipient from one or more switches
To remove a trap recipient from one or more switches, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Product Trap Recipients.
The SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box, shown in Figure 470, displays.
2. Click Remove from the Action list.
3. Enter the IP address of the SNMP trap port (the recipient server) in the Recipient IP Address
field.
4. Select the fabric or switches from the Available list.

NOTE

For IP products, only switches are available to select.
5. Click OK.
The Management application removes the recipient from the managed switches.

SNMP trap forwarding
The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box allows the Management application to forward received
SNMP traps to product trap recipients.
You can use the SNMP Trap Forwarding feature to set up filters to determine which traps will be
forwarded. The filters can be one of the following:

•
•
•
•

Severity of the trap
Available products type
Trap type
Message types (application messages or pseudo events)

To forward SNMP traps, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Trap Forwarding.
The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box, shown in Figure 471, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1149

37

SNMP traps

FIGURE 471 SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box

Adding a trap destination
The Add Trap Destination dialog box allows you to configure destinations for forwarding SNMP
traps.
To add a trap destination, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Trap Forwarding.
The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box, shown in Figure 471, displays.
2. Select the Enable trap forwarding check box.

1150

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

37

3. Click Add in the Destinations area of the SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box.
The Add Trap Destination dialog box, shown in Figure 472, displays.

FIGURE 472 Add Trap Destination dialog box
4. Enter a general description of the trap destination in the Description field.
5. Enter the IP address of the trap destination in the IP Address field. This is a mandatory field.
IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are accepted, but a DNS name is not accepted.
6. Enter the SNMP trap listening port of the recipient in the Port # field. This is a mandatory field.
Valid numeric values range from 1 through 65535.
The Enable check box, Add Source Address check box, and SNMP Trap Repeater check box are
selected by default. When selected, all traps, whether the source is managed or unmanaged,
are forwarded. When unselected, only traps from the selected products are forwarded. When
selected, the Open View Source Name is added to the variable binding (varbind) value to the
trap before forwarding.
7.

Select a supported SNMP type from the Trap Forwarding Type list. Supported SNMP types are
v1, v2c, and v3. The default SNMP type is v1.

8. You can choose not to select a filter (zero), or you can select up to five filters from the Available
Filters list. Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Filters list.
9. Click OK.

Adding a new trap filter
The Add Trap Filter dialog box allows you to configure trap filters for forwarding SNMP traps. You
can add trap filters on SAN products, IP products, or hosts. These filters can be on individual
switches or the Fabric as a whole.
To add a new trap filter, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Trap Forwarding.
The SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1151

37

SNMP traps

2. Click Add in the Trap Filters area of the SNMP Trap Forwarding dialog box.
The Add Trap Filter dialog box, shown in Figure 473, displays.

FIGURE 473 Add Trap Filter dialog box
3. Enter a unique name for the trap filter in the Filter Name field.
4. Enter a general description of the trap filter in the Description field.
5. Select the Forward Application Messages check box to forward application events.
6. Select the Forward pseudo events check box to forward pseudo events.
7.

Select a severity level from the Severity pulldown menu. The severity level can be one of the
following, and appear in descending order of severity.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1152

Emergency
Alert
Critical
Error
Warning
Notice
Info

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

37

• Debug
Traps with the selected severity and those with higher severity levels are forwarded. For
example, by default, Critical severity is selected. Therefore, traps with Critical, Alert, and
Emergency severity levels are forwarded. To have all traps forwarded, select Debug, the lowest
severity level.
8. Select the SAN, IP, or Hosts tab. Depending on the tab selected, the products available to
which you can add a trap filter display in the Available Products list.
9. By default, all traps are listed in the Available Traps list, under the folders for the MIB to which
they belong. You can limit the list by selecting one of the following MIB types:

• MIB Information - Select this check box if you want the default SNMP name for the traps to
be displayed.

• MIB Alias - Select this check box if you want the aliases for traps to be displayed.
10. After limiting the list of available traps, expand the MIB folder to which the trap you want
belongs under the Available Trap Type list and select that trap. Click the right arrow button to
move it to the Selected Trap Type list.
11. Click OK.
SNMP Traps and Syslog messages from the selected switches or Fabric will now be forwarded
to the configured destination server.

Event reception
The Event Reception feature provides an interface to add the credentials and community strings
required to decode traps. You can use the Event Reception dialog box to configure the trap
message, severity, and alias name that is used by the Event Processor.
The Event Reception dialog box contains two tabs:

• The Trap Credentials tab allows you to configure the server to accept or drop SNMP traps and
add SNMP credentials and community strings for decoding traps.

• The Trap Configuration tab allows you to customize the trap description or message, severity,
and alias name.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1153

37

SNMP traps

To access the Event Reception dialog box, select Monitor > SNMP > Event Reception.
The Event Reception dialog box, shown in Figure 474, displays.

FIGURE 474 Event Reception dialog box - Trap Credentials tab
By default, the Management application receives SNMP v1 and v2c traps from IronWare OS and
Network OS IP products that have any SNMP community strings. You can accept or restrict SNMP
v1 and v2c traps by selecting one of the following check boxes in the Event Reception dialog box:

• Do not accept SNMP v1/v2c traps
Use this option to turn off receiving SNMP v1 and v2c traps.If selected, the Management
application will not receive any SNMP v1 and v2c traps.

• Accept SNMP v1/v2c traps with any community string
Use this option to turn on receiving SNMP v1 and v2c traps with any community string.

• Accept SNMP v1/v2c traps with only these community strings
Use this option to turn on receiving SNMP v1 and v2c traps with only the specified
community strings.
The Management application can receive SNMP v1 traps from Fabric OS SAN switches and
directors that have any SNMP community strings. It can receive SNMP v3 traps and informs from
these SAN products.
Table 97 explains the combinations of security and authentication, which will help you when you
make your SNMP credentials configuration decisions.

1154

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

TABLE 97

37

SNMP security and authentication

SNMP
credential type

Privacy protocol

Authentication

Result

v1

No authentication
No privacy protocol

Community string Uses a community string to match for authentication.

v2c

No authentication
No privacy protocol

Community string Uses a community string to match for authentication.

v3

No authentication
No privacy protocol

User name

Uses a user name to match for authentication.

v3

Authentication
No privacy protocol

MD5 or SHA

Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD5
(Message Digest Algorithm) or HMAC-SHA algorithms
(Secure Hash Algorithm).

v3

Authentication
Privacy protocol

MD5 or SHA

Provides authentication based on the HMAC-MD or
HMAC-SHA algorithms (Hash-based Message
Authentication).
Provides privacy based on CBC_DES (Cipher Block
Chaining) or CFB_AES_128 (Cipher Feedback).

For information about how to configure SNMP credentials, refer to “Adding an SNMP v3 credential”
on page 1155 or “Adding an SNMP v1 or v2c community string” on page 1156.

Adding an SNMP v3 credential
The SNMP v3 Credentials dialog box allows you to add the SNMP v3 credentials.
To add an SNMP v3 credential, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Event Reception.
The Event Reception dialog box displays.
2. Select an SNMP v3 credential from the SNMP v3 Credentials list on the Event Reception dialog
box.
3. Click Add.
The Add SNMP v3 Credentials dialog box, shown in Figure 475, displays.

FIGURE 475 Add SNMP v3 Credentials dialog box
4. Type the user name in the User Name field.
For configurations that do not have authentication or privacy, the Management application
uses the user name to match for authentication.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1155

37

SNMP traps

5. Select an authentication protocol from the Auth Protocol list. You can select -None-,
HMAC-MD5, or HMAC_SHA. HMAC_MD5 is the default.
If you select no authentication, the Management application uses the user name to match for
authentication.
6. Type a password in the Auth Password field and re-type the password in the Auth Confirm
Password field.
7.

Select a privacy protocol from the Priv Protocol list. You can select -None-, CBC_DES, or
CFB_AES_128.
If you select no privacy, the Management application uses the user name to match for
authentication.

8. Type a password in the Priv Password field and re-type the password in the Confirm Priv
Password field.
9. Click OK.

Adding an SNMP v1 or v2c community string
The SNMP v1/2 Community String dialog box allows you to add the SNMP v1 or v2c credentials.
To add an SNMP v1 or v2c community string credential, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Event Reception.
The Event Reception dialog box displays.
2. Click the Accept SNMPv1/v2c traps with only these community strings button.
3. Click Add.
The SNMP v1/v2c Community String dialog box, shown in Figure 476, displays.

FIGURE 476 SNMP v1/v2 Community String dialog box
4. Enter a unique community string in the Community String field, which will be used to match for
authentication in SNMP v1 and v2c configurations. This field is case-sensitive.
5. Re-enter the string in the Confirm Community String field.
6. Click OK.

Importing a new MIB into the Management application
The SNMP traps that the Management application receives must be registered in the Management
application in order for these traps to be available. To register a trap, you must first identify the MIB
file that contains the trap information in the mibs_to_compile.txt file. Then, you must register the
traps using the Event Reception dialog box.

1156

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

37

To add the MIB file that contains the trap you want to register to mibs_to_compile.txt, complete the
following steps.
1. Go to \conf\mibs\ (Windows) or /conf/mibs/ (UNIX) directory and copy
the MIB file into that directory. You may want to copy the MIB into a subdirectory of that
directory.
2. In the \conf\mibs\ (Windows) or /conf/mibs/ (UNIX) directory, search
for the mibs_to_compile.txt file.
3. Using a text editor, open the mibs_to_compile.txt file and add the MIB information to the
document.
When adding the MIB information, be aware of the following rules:

• MIBs are compiled in the order that they are listed in the mibs_to_compile.txt file.
• You can add composite MIB files (more than one MIB in a single file).
• MIB file names in the mibs_to_compile.txt file are case-sensitive. Make sure the case of
the file name you enter matches the case of the actual MIB file. Also, be sure to enter the
complete path of the MIB file, or the portion relative to the mibs directory.
The following is an example of how to add the two Cisco MIB files.
#
# Cisco Mibs
#
CISCO-SMI.mib
CISCO-CONFIG-COPY-MIB.mib
#
# End Cisco Mibs
#

4. Save the file.
The Management application recompiles all the MIB files. If compilation is successful, the
traps can now be registered in the Event Reception dialog box.

NOTE

If there are compilation errors, you can view the errors in the server log:
\logs\server\server.log (Windows) or /logs/server/server.log (UNIX).
5. If you make changes to the MIB file, open the mibs_to_compile.txt file and save the file.
The Management application recompiles the MIB files and reloads the changes.

Trap customization
The Trap Configuration tab of the Event Reception dialog box enables you to configure the following
settings:

• Register and unregister various Management Information Bases (MIBs)
• Customize trap description messages based on varbinds and severity and specify alias names

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1157

37

SNMP traps

Registering traps
Traps must be registered in the Event Reception dialog box to make them available.
To register traps, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Event Reception.
2. Click the Trap Configuration tab.
The Trap Configuration tab of the Event Reception dialog box, shown in Figure 477, displays.
The Registered and Not Registered buttons at the top of the Traps tree serves as a filter for the
traps. If there are unregistered traps, they are listed when you select the Not Registered
button.
Traps appear under each MIB folder. The MIB folders correspond to the MIBs identified in the
mibs_to_compile.txt file.

FIGURE 477 Trap Configuration tab of the Event Reception dialog box
3. Expand a folder for a MIB to display the traps in the MIB. If the list is too long, use the Search
tool to find a MIB or trap.
4. Select the trap you want to register.
The SNMP name and Object Identification (OID) of the trap appear at the top line of the
configuration pane. Also, the status of the trap shows Not Registered, which is the default
definition of the trap.
Details about the trap appear in the fields beneath the MIB Name field.

1158

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

SNMP traps

37

Trap details supply the following information:

• The name of the MIB to which the trap belongs
• Information about the trap
• Any variable bindings (varbinds) that the trap uses. Information about the varbind, its
name, OID, and type, is displayed

• Recommended action specified by the user
5. Enter the following information:
a.

Select the severity level you want to assign to the trap from the Severity list. If you do not
select a severity, it defaults to Emergency.

b.

Enter the message you want to display for this trap in the Message field. If the trap has
varbinds, use $#, where # represents the varbind number, to indicate the varbind. You
must enter a message.

c.

Enter an alias string that serves as a second name for the trap in the MIB Alias field. This
string might be more understandable to users. This parameter is optional. The Event
Processor uses this alias, and this alias is displayed in the Event Action.

d.

Configure the recommended action for the trap.

6. When you have finished, click OK to accept your entries.
The status of the trap changes to Registered - Customized and the trap appears in the Event
Log.

Unregistering a registered trap
You can unregister only the traps that you have registered. You cannot unregister traps that come
with the Management application by default.
To unregister a trap that you have registered, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Event Reception.
2. Click the Trap Configuration tab.
3. Click the Registered button.
The Trap tree displays the MIBs that contain the registered traps.
4. Expand a MIB folder to display the traps that have been registered for that MIB.
5. Select a trap to display its current definition.
6. Click the Not Registered button.
7.

Click OK.
Once unregistered, the status of the trap changes to Not Registered.

Customizing a registered trap definition
To modify the definitions of registered traps, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Trap Configuration tab.
2. Click the Registered button.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1159

37

SNMP informs

The Trap tree displays the MIBs that contain the registered traps.
3. Expand a MIB folder to display the traps that have been registered for that MIB.
4. Select a trap to display its current definition. You can change the severity, message, or alias of
the trap.
5. When you have finished, click OK or Apply to accept your entries.
If you modified a default trap, its status changes from Registered - Default to Registered Customized.

Reverting the customization of a registered trap to default
To revert to the default definitions of registered-customized traps, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Trap Configuration tab.
2. Click the Registered button.
The Trap tree displays the MIBs that contain the registered traps.
3. Expand a MIB folder to display the traps that have been registered for that MIB.
4. Select a trap to display its current definition.
5. If the trap has been customized, a button labeled Default is available. Click Default to revert
the previous changes to its default.

SNMP informs
The SNMP Informs dialog box allows you to enable or disable informs on informs-capable products.
SNMP traps are unreliable because the receiver does not send any acknowledgment when it
receives a trap. The sender cannot determine if the trap was received. However, an SNMP manager
that receives an inform request acknowledges the message with an SNMP response protocol data
unit (PDU). If the manager does not receive an inform request, it does not send a response. If the
sender (switch) never receives a response, the inform request can be sent again. For this reason,
informs are more likely to reach their intended destination.
When using informs, the engine ID must be set to correspond to the management engine IP
address to authenticate the inform request. When informs are enabled, the sender sends initial
informs request for engine ID discovery from any of its ephemeral ports (ranging from 32768 to
65535) to port 161 on the Management server. The sender receives the acknowledgement of the
informs requests on these ephemeral ports. If there is a firewall between the Management
application and the switches, the ephemeral ports must be open for SNMP informs to work.

Enabling or disabling SNMP informs
To enable or disable SNMP informs, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > SNMP Setup > Informs.
The SNMP Informs dialog box displays.
2. Select a product group from the Fabric / Products list.

1160

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Syslogs

37

The products display in the SNMP Informs Capable Products list, where you can determine if
the product’s status is enabled or disabled.
3. Select a product in the SNMP Informs Capable Products list and click the appropriate Action
button, depending on whether you want to enable or disable SNMP informs for that product.
4. Click OK.

Syslogs
Use the Options dialog box to automatically register the Management application server as the
syslog recipient on all managed SAN and IP products. The syslog listening port number is 514 by
default. If you change the port number from 514, auto-registration is disabled.

NOTE

Network OS products do not support non-default Syslog port registration.

NOTE
IronWare OS 6910 switches are not listed in the Syslog Recipient dialog box.

Adding a syslog recipient
The Syslog Recipients dialog box allows you to register any recipient as a syslog recipient on
selected products. You can register different recipients for different products.
You can register and unregister other recipient servers on the Fabric OS switches on a per-fabric
basis. For IP products, you can perform registration only at the switch level.

NOTE
IPv6 Syslog registration is not supported for IronView OS products.
To add a syslog recipient, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Syslog Configuration > Product Syslog Recipients.
The Syslog Recipients dialog box, shown in Figure 478, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1161

37

Syslogs

FIGURE 478 Syslog Recipients dialog box
2. Select Add from the Action list.
3. Enter the IP address of the syslog port (the recipient server) in the Recipient IP Address field.
This is a mandatory field. IPv4 addresses are accepted, but a DNS name is not accepted.
4. Enter the syslog port of the recipient in the Recipient Port field. Valid numeric values range
from 1 through 65535. The default value is 514.

NOTE

For IronWare products, a non-default port can be registered. For Network OS and Fabric OS
products, non-default ports cannot be registered.
5. Select the fabric or switches from the Available list and click the right arrow button to move it to
the Selected list. You can select multiple products.

NOTE

For IP products, only switches are available to select.
6. Click OK.
The Management application registers the recipient IP address as a syslog recipient.

Removing a syslog recipient
To remove a syslog recipient, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Syslog Configuration > Syslog Forwarding.
The Syslog Recipients dialog box displays.
2. Select Remove from the Action list.
3. Enter the IP address of the syslog port (the recipient server) in the Recipient IP Address field.
4. Select the fabric or switches from the Available list.
5. Click OK.

1162

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Syslogs

37

The Management application removes the recipient from the managed switches.

Syslog forwarding
The Syslog Forwarding dialog box enables the Management application to forward syslog events to
a destination on another host. You can use the Syslog Forwarding feature to set up filters to
determine which syslog events will be forwarded.

Adding a syslog forwarding destination
The Add Syslog Destination dialog box allows you to configure destinations for forwarding syslog
events.
To add a syslog destination, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Syslog Configuration > Syslog Forwarding.
The Syslog Forwarding dialog box, shown in Figure 479, displays.

FIGURE 479 Syslog Forwarding dialog box
2. Select the Enable syslog forwarding check box.
3. Click Add.
The Add Syslog Destination dialog box, shown in Figure 480, displays. The Enable and Syslog
Repeater check boxes are selected by default.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1163

37

Syslogs

FIGURE 480 Add Syslog Destination dialog box
4. Enter a general description of the syslog destination in the Description field.
5. Enter the IP address of the syslog destination in the IP Address field. This is a mandatory field.
IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are accepted, but a DNS name is not accepted.
6. Enter the syslog listening port of the recipient in the Port # field. This is a mandatory field. Valid
numeric values range from 1 through 65535. The default is 514.
7.

Select the Enable check box to enable syslog forwarding to this recipient.

8. Select the Syslog Repeater check box if you want to forward all syslogs, whether the source is
managed or unmanaged. If the Syslog Repeater check box is unselected, syslogs from the
managed products are sent to the server. If no filter is selected, then syslogs from all products
are sent.
9. You can choose not to select a filter (zero) or you can select up to five filters from the
Available Filters list. Click the right arrow button to move them to the Selected Filters list. This
is enabled only when Syslog Repeater is not selected.
10. Click OK.

Adding a syslog filter
You can add a syslog filter on SAN products, IP products, or hosts.
To add a syslog filter, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Syslog Configuration > Syslog Forwarding.
The Syslog Forwarding dialog box displays.
2. Select the Enable syslog forwarding check box.
3. Select Add in the Filters area.
The Add Syslog Filter dialog box, shown in Figure 481, displays.

1164

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Syslogs

37

FIGURE 481 Add Syslog Filter dialog box
4. Enter a unique name for the syslog filter in the Filter Name field.
5. Enter a general description of the syslog filter in the Description field.
6. (Optional) For additional filtering, enter a text string using from 1 through 512 characters or
wild card symbols in the Regular Expression field. The regular expression is used to describe a
pattern in text. You can use an asterisk (*) to indicate a wildcard, as in the following examples:

• *cdef: Matches a message ending with cdef
• abc*: Matches a message beginning with abc
• *abc*: Matches a message that contains abc
7.

Select a severity level from the Severity pulldown menu. The severity level can be one of the
following, and appear in descending order of severity.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Emergency
Alert
Critical
Error
Warning (Default)
Notice
Info
Debug

Events with the selected severity and those with higher severity levels are forwarded.
For example, by default, Critical severity is selected. Therefore, events with Critical, Alert, and
Emergency severity levels are forwarded.
To have all traps forwarded, select Debug, the lowest severity level.
8. Select the Forward Snort® Messages check box to turn on Snort message forwarding. Refer to
“Snort message forwarding” on page 1166 for more information.
9. Select the SAN, IP, or Hosts tab. Depending on the tab selected, the products available to
which you can add a syslog filter display in the Available Products list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1165

37

Event action definitions

10. Select the product from the Available Products list and click the right arrow button to move it to
the Selected Products list.
11. Click OK.

Snort message forwarding
Snort is a third-party tool that monitors network traffic in real time. When Snort detects dangerous
payloads or other abnormal behavior, it sends an alert to the syslog in real time. You can turn Snort
messages on or off using the Add Syslog Filter dialog box
By default, the Forward Snort© Messages feature is not enabled. You must enable it to have Snort
messages forwarded to the configured syslog destinations.
You can forward Snort messages, by selecting the Forward Snort® Messages check box in the
Add Syslog Filter dialog box (refer to step 8 in “Adding a syslog filter” on page 1164).

Event action definitions
To reduce the amount of events being logged in the Management application database, the
Event Actions dialog box allows you to control what events the Management application monitors,
on which products they are to be monitored, how often they are to be monitored, and what to do
when the monitored events are generated. This information can be defined by creating an event
action definition.
For example, you can create an event action definition if you want the Management application to
monitor link up and link down traps only, and only on products that belong to Product Group 1.
Furthermore, you may want these traps to be logged in the Management application database only
if they occur 10 times within a 5-minute interval. You may also want an e-mail message sent to a
network administrator when these traps are generated.
In another case, you may not want to log any occurrence of Topology Change traps from Product
Group 2. You may also want to disable a port on a product if an event that resembles an attack on
the network occurs at a certain frequency.

Creating an event action definition
You can configure event policies for events you want to monitor. Use the Event Actions dialog box,
shown in Figure 482, to customize the event management policy using triggers and actions.
To customize the event management policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box, shown in Figure 482, displays.

1166

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

FIGURE 482 Event Actions dialog box
2. Click Add to display the Identification pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
3. Enter a name and description for the event action and select the Enabled check box.
4. Click Next to advance to the Events pane.

Selecting an event for an event action
To select an event for an event action, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Next to advance to the Events pane.
By default, the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays, shown in Figure 483.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1167

37

Event action definitions

FIGURE 483 Add Event Action dialog box - Events pane
3. Select one of the following event types from the Show list:

•
•
•
•
•

Traps (default)
Application Events
Pseudo Events
Custom Events
Snort® Message

Depending on what event type you select, a box listing the available events or pseudo events
displays.
4. By default, all traps are listed in the Available Traps list, under the folders for the MIB to which
they belong. You can limit the list by doing any of the following:

-

Click one of the following buttons:

• MIB Information, if you want the default SNMP name for the traps to be displayed.
• MIB Alias, if you want the aliases for the traps to be displayed.
-

Use the Trap Filter tool to limit the trap list to the trap severities you want. To use this tool,
click the Filter button to display the Trap Filters dialog box.

5. Click the Filter button to launch the Trap Filters dialog box, which allows you to find the trap you
want.
6. After limiting the list of available traps, expand the MIB folder to which the trap you want
belongs under the Available Traps list and select that trap. Click the right arrow button to move
it to the Selected Traps list.
7.

1168

If you selected Application Events in step 3, select the application events in the left table and
use the arrow button to move them to the right.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

8. If you selected Pseudo Events in step 3, select one or more of the pseudo events you created
that you want to include in the definition, then click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Pseudo Events list.
9. If you selected Custom Events in step 3, click Next to accept the defaults; otherwise, select the
Event Category, Severity, Message ID, and Description Contains, as required.
10. If you selected Snort® Message in step 3, select the Snort® messages in the left table and
use the arrow button to move them to the right.
To import Snort® rules, click the Import Snort® Rules button.
11. Select Configure varbind filters to configure filters on varbind values (refer to “Configuring
varbind filters” on page 1169 for more information). If you do not want to configure varbind
filters, click Next.
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box is displayed. You can use the Search tool
to search for sources.

Configuring varbind filters
If actions must be confirmed based on a trap variable binding value (varbinds), select the
Configure varbind filters check box on the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box. This
enables you to configure filters on varbind values for this event action.

NOTE
Varbind filter configuration is only available if you selected Traps in step 3 of “Creating an event
action definition” on page 1166.
The varbinds for the selected trap are listed in the Available Varbinds list, shown in Figure 484.
To configure varbind filters for an event action, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Next to advance to the Events pane.

FIGURE 484 Available Varbinds and Selected Varbinds lists
3. Select the varbind you want to include in the configuration and click the right arrow button to
move it to the Selected Varbinds list.
If you selected more than one trap and those traps have the same varbinds, then their
varbinds are listed in the Available Varbinds list. However, if the traps you selected have
different varbinds, the Available Varbinds list is empty.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1169

37

Event action definitions

4. For each varbind in the Selected Varbinds list, select one of the following operations for the
condition you want to filter:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

= – Equal to
!= – Not equal
< – Less than
> – Greater than
>= – Greater than or equal to
<= – Less than or equal to
In – Matches collection
Not_in – Does not match collection
~ – Arbitrary Unicode regular expression

5. Enter the value of the varbind. The value you enter must conform to the data type required by
the varbind. For example, if the varbind expects an integer and you enter a text string, your
entry will be rejected. Alternatively, you can select values from drop-down lists, shown in
Figure 484.
6. Click Next.
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays. Proceed to “Selecting source
address products and ports”.

Selecting source address products and ports
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box, shown in Figure 485, allows you to enter the
IP address, the world wide name, or the name of the source to use as event senders. Alternatively,
you can select source address products to use as event senders from the available list of sources.
You can select from the available list of SAN products, IP products, or hosts by selecting the
appropriate tab.

FIGURE 485 Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box

1170

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

To configure the identity of the event action source, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Next to advance to the Sources pane.
3. Click the Provide the IP Address / Node WWN / Name of the source button if you want to
manually enter the IP address, the world wide name (WWN), or the name of the source in the
IP Address field.
4. Click the Select from the available list of sources button as an alternative to manually entering
the IP address, WWN, or name of the source. You can select source address products or ports
to use as event senders from the available list of sources.
5. Select the Use If index in source matching check box if you want to use if Index to filter traps on
a specific port of a product; otherwise, the filter is applied globally on a product.
6. If the Use IfIndex in source matching check box is selected, select the varbind to be used from
the Trap Varbind (IfIndex) list.
7.

Select the event senders you want from the Available Sources list, then click the right arrow
button to move them in the Selected Sources list.

• If you selected a non-IronWare OSNetwork OSproduct as the source, that product can send
e-mail alerts only.

• If you selected Pseudo Events from the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box,
and there is only one pseudo event available, double-click the pseudo event in the
Available Sources list.

• If you selected a product group or port group as event senders, select a group from the list.
NOTE

The selected source count cannot exceed 100.
8. Click Next.
The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays. Proceed to “Configuring event
action policies”.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1171

37

Event action definitions

Configuring event action policies
The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box, shown in Figure 486, allows you to define the
frequency of the event, enter a message for an event that will be displayed in the event log, and
specify the event severity.

FIGURE 486 Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box
To configure the event action policies, complete the following steps.
1. Click Take actions for the selected events when they occur (default) if you want the action to be
triggered each time the selected events occur.
2. Click Take actions for the selected events based on below criteria if you want the action to be
triggered only when the occurrence of the event meets the specified criteria.

• Click Frequency bound (act as count reaches the count specified) if you want the
Management application to perform the specified action once the specified number of
occurrences has occurred during the specified duration. For example, if you want the
action to be applied when 10 link down traps occur during a one-minute interval, then the
specified action will be applied as soon as 10 link down traps occur, even though the oneminute duration has not elapsed.

• Click Time bound (act at the end of the duration specified) if you want the Management
application to perform the specified action once the specified number of occurrences has
occurred and the specified duration has elapsed. For example, if you want the action to be
applied when 10 link down traps occur during a one-minute duration, the Management
application waits until 10 link down traps occur and one minute has elapsed before the
defined action is applied. There is a one-second delay for the action to be applied.
For either option, if the number of occurrences has not been met and the time duration has
elapsed, the observation window is advanced to the next occurrence after the first occurrence
on the current window.
3. Enter values in the If occurs __ times within __ fields and select a value from the Minutes list if
you want the action to be applied only if the event occurs at a certain frequency.

1172

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

4. Indicate how often the policy is to be reset. You can choose one of the following options:

• Reset immediately - Repeats the policy as soon as the specified action has been applied.
• Wait until ____ seconds or minutes - If this parameter is selected, the policy will not be
applied to the product for the specified duration of time. Enter the duration in minutes or
hours. You can suppress the policy just for the events specified in the policy or for any
event that occurs on the product. Once the duration expires, the policy can be repeated.
5. In the Message field, enter the message that will be displayed in the Event Log for the
generated event. This entry replaces the default message that is displayed for a trap. Also, this
message is used as the Event Action message and is displayed in single quotes on the Event
Log report.
6. From the Severity list, select the severity you want to assign to the generated event.
7.

Click Next.

8. The Actions Group - Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays. Proceed to
“Editing event actions”.

Editing event actions
The Action Group - Actions pane of the Edit Event Action dialog box, shown in Figure 487, defines
what action the Management application takes when the criteria are met.

FIGURE 487 Action Group - Actions pane of the Edit Event Action dialog box

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1173

37

Event action definitions

To configure the policies for the event action, complete the following steps.
1. Select Apply as a Logging Policy to indicate whether or not you want the event occurrence to be
logged in the Management application database:

-

Select Log to log the occurrence in the Management application database and Master
Log.

-

Select Drop to not log the occurrence in the Management application database or Master
Log.

NOTE

If the policy specifies Act as specified on the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog
box, and you select Log for this parameter, only events that meet the criteria defined in the
Act as specified area are logged. For example, if the event is logged when 10 link down
traps occur during a one-minute interval, then one record will be logged after 10 link down
traps occur. If you want all 10 link down traps to be logged, then create a policy where
Act on all occurrences is selected on the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.

2. Select the Auto Acknowledge check box to suppress events without being in troubleshooting
mode. Activating this also helps to avoid cluttering Master Log with unwanted messages
without modifying filters.

NOTE

Auto Acknowledge is enabled only when Take actions for the selected events when they occur
is selected in the Policy step of the Event Actions Wizard. If you edit an Event Action that has
Auto Acknowledge selected and change this option in the Policy step to Time-bound or
Frequency-bound, you will be required to confirm your choice.
3. Select the Enable Troubleshooting check box to suppress events based on user-entered
criteria. You can suppress events for up to 168 hours (7 days). This action is applicable to IP
devices only.
4. Select the Alert by E-mail check box if you want an e-mail message to be sent to an
administrator if the policy criteria have been met.
5. Select the Run Policy Monitor check box to execute a policy monitor as an action based on a
selected event, and then select the target for the policy monitor from the list. Target options
include Event Sender and Specified in Config.
6. Select the Launch a Script check box if you want to execute to an external script file when the
matching criteria have been met, and then enter the script in the accompanying field.
7.

Select the Broadcast to Client check box, and click Configure to broadcast a message to all the
clients when the matching criteria have been met.

NOTE

The remaining parameters are not available if a non-IronWare OSNetwork OS product is
selected as an event sender.
The Broadcast Message dialog box displays.

1174

a.

Select a severity level from the list.

b.

Type a message in the Message Content field.

c.

Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

8. The Mark as Special Events check box is unselected by default. Leave it this way if you want
the event action to be added to the Special Event Handling event action category. Refer to
“Special events handling” for more complete information.
9. Click the Collect support save check box to enable SupportSave on the event. The check box is
unselected by default.
10. Select the Deploy CLI Configuration check box and click Configure if you want to deploy a
configuration from CLI Configuration Manager to products if the policy criteria have been met.
You can only deploy a CLI configuration for IP products.

NOTE

If the CLI configuration you chose from CLI Configuration Manager contains a non-IronWare OS
or Network OS product as a target, the configuration will not be deployed to the non-IronWare
OS or Network OS product.
11. You can either select an existing CLI configuration or create a new one and select that
configuration. After selecting a CLI configuration, the name of the CLI configuration is
displayed in the Selected Configuration field.

• Has Parameters - Displays Yes if the CLI configuration has parameters that require values
to be entered before it can be deployed, and displays No if no parameter needs to be
defined.

• The Parameters list lists the parameters that need to be defined in the configuration.
• The Parameter column displays the parameter and its variables in the CLI
configuration.

• The Source column lists the appropriate SNMP attributes for the parameters. Each
attribute contains a specific parameter value, such as an IP address. Select the
attribute you want from the list.

• The Transformation column uses the product IP addresses and MAC addresses listed
in the Address Finder. If the Address Finder list is empty, the product or port will not be
found. From this column, specify what you want Event Processor to do with the value
in the attribute:

-

Find Device: Find the product with the IP address in the attribute and deploy the
CLI configuration to that product.

-

Find Port: Find the port on a product with the IP address in the attribute and
deploy the CLI configuration to that port.

-

Find Intruder MAC: Find the product with the IP address in the attribute that
matches the intruder MAC address and deploy the CLI configuration to that
product.

-

None: Event Processor only reports occurrence of the products.

12. Select the Deploy Product Configuration check box if you want to deploy a payload from the
Configuration Wizard to the products if the policy criteria have been met.

NOTE

If the configuration payload you choose from the Configuration Wizard contains a non-IronWare
OS or Network OS product as a target, the payload will not be deployed to the non-IronWare OS
or Network OS product.
13. From the Target list, select the product (the target source) to which the payload will be
deployed:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1175

37

Event action definitions

• Event Sender: Deploy the payload to the product that sent the event. If the event was sent
by a non-IronWare OS or Network OS product, the event action will not be deployed to that
product.

• Derived from: Deploy the payload to the product that matches the IP address as specified
in the attribute of the selected source. If the matching product is a non-IronWare OS or
Network OS product, the event action will not be deployed to that product.

• Specified in the Config: Deploy the payload to the product that is specified in the payload.
If the configuration you choose contains a non-IronWare OS or Network OS product as a
target, the configuration will not be deployed to the non-IronWare OS or Network OS
product.
14. If you selected Derived from as the target in step 13, select the attribute from the Source list.
15. From the Transformation column, specify what you want Event Processor to do with the value
in the attribute:

• None — Event Processor only reports the occurrence of the product.
• Find Device — Find the product with the IP address in the attribute and deploy the payload
to that product.

• Find Intruder MAC — Find the product with the IP address in the attribute that matches the
intruder MAC address and deploy the CLI configuration to that product.

• Find Port — Find the port on a product with the IP address in the attribute and deploy the
CLI configuration to that port.
The Transformation column uses the product IP addresses and MAC addresses listed in the
Address Finder. If the Address Finder list is empty, the product or port will not be found.
16. Click Next to display the Action Group - E-mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action dialog box
if you selected Alert by E-mail. If you did not select Alert by E-mail, you will advance to the
Summary pane.

Special events handling
The following special error conditions are examples of events that are categorized as Special
Events Handling events, a separate category that appears in the Name list of the Event Actions
dialog box. All pre-selected events are SNMP traps.

•
•
•
•

Invalid T1 zone configuration event
48-blade inserted into a non-Virtual Fabric chassis
Port fencing Fabric Watch trap, when a port is fenced
Blade Processor FPGA version is incompatible with the Fabric OS firmware version

Though these error conditions are automatically considered “special events handling” events, you
can add or edit any event action and mark the action as a special event for special events handling
using the Actions pane of the Edit Event Action dialog box.
See step 8 of “Editing event actions” on page 1173 for information on enabling special events
handling for an event using the Actions pane of the Edit Event Action dialog box.

Acknowledging special events
When the Management application receives and processes events selected as special events, the
following status bar icon displays:

1176

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

FIGURE 488 Status bar with highlighted special events icon
To configure special event acknowledgements, complete the following steps.
1. Click the special events icon to launch the Special Events dialog box, shown in Figure 489.
The Special Events dialog box, shown in Figure 489, lists the most recent 1000 events that
have been identified as special events.

FIGURE 489 Special Events dialog box
2. Select the Acknowledged check box that corresponds to the special event you want to
acknowledge.
If an event is marked as acknowledged either in the Special Events dialog box or the Master
Log, the event is acknowledged in both places.
3. To view all acknowledged special events, select the Show Acknowledged check box in the
upper right corner of the dialog box. This check box is unselected by default.
The acknowledged special events display, sorted by the last event server time.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1177

37

Event action definitions

Configuring event action e-mail settings
The Action Group - E-Mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action dialog box, shown in Figure 490,
allows you to select e-mail recipients from a list, add new e-mail recipients, and compose e-mail
messages.

FIGURE 490 Action Group - E-Mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action dialog box
To configure the e-mail settings for the event action, complete the following steps.
1. Select the Management application user to whom the e-mail message will be sent from the
Available Recipients list, and click the right arrow button to move the recipient to the
Selected Recipients list.

NOTE

Make sure the user you select has an e-mail address defined in a user account.
2. (Optional) Add additional e-mail recipient addresses in the Other Recipients field. Separate
multiple e-mail addresses with a semicolon. At least one e-mail address must be specified by
either selecting an available recipient from the list (step 1) or entering an e-mail recipient.
3. If you want the e-mail message for the alert to display a description on the subject line, enter
the text in the Subject Line field.

NOTE

You can create a prefix that is included in the subject line of every e-mail alert that the
Management application sends. The prefix is defined in the configuration.properties file. The
prefix plus the text entered in this field cannot exceed 255 characters.
4. If you want a prologue to be inserted at the beginning of the e-mail message, enter up to 255
characters in the Body Prologue field. The event action message follows the prologue.

1178

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event action definitions

37

5. If you want an epilogue to be placed at the end of the e-mail message, enter up to 255
characters in the Body Epilogue field.

NOTE

The prologue, the event action message, and the epilogue form the body of the e-mail alert.
6. Click Finish.
The Summary pane of the Edit Event Action dialog box displays an overview of the e-mail
configuration you are creating.
7.

Review your entries and take one of the following actions:

-

Click Finish to approve the configuration.

-

Click Cancel to cancel the operation.

Click Previous to return to the Action Group - E-Mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action
dialog box.

Creating a new event action definition by copying an existing definition
You can create a new event action definition by copying one that is in the Event Actions list.
To create a new event action definition by copying an existing definition, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Select the definition that you want to copy from the Event Actions list.
3. Click the Duplicate button to display the Duplicate Event Actions dialog box.
The name of the event action is the name of the selected action with the word “copy”
appended. For example, Action1 becomes Action1 copy.
4. Enter a new name for the definition.
5. Change the description of the definition, if needed. You can perform this action in any of the
panes of the Add Event Action dialog box.
6. Click Finish to save the new definition.

Modifying an event action definition
CAUTION
Use caution when you modify an event action. Saving changes to an event action definition resets
the runtime information for the events in the definition.
To modify an existing event action definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Select the definition that you want to edit from the Event Actions list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1179

37

Event action definitions

3. Click Edit to display the Edit Event Action dialog box.
4. Make the changes you want to make to the definition. You can perform this action in any of the
panes of the Add Event Action dialog box.
5. Click Finish to save your definition.

Deleting an event action definition
To delete an event action definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Select the definition that you want to delete from the Event Actions list.
3. Click Delete.
A message displays asking you to confirm the deletion request.
4. Click Yes to delete the definition, or No to cancel the request.

Configuring event actions for Snort messages
To configure an event action for Snort messages, complete the following steps.
1. From the Identification pane of the Add Event Action dialog box, click Next to advance to the
Events pane. See “Creating an event action definition” on page 1166 for complete instructions
on event actions.
The Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays, shown in Figure 491. Snort®
Message is the default in the Show list.

FIGURE 491 Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box

1180

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

2. Click the Import Snort® Rule button.
The Import Snort® Rule File dialog box displays, shown in Figure 492.

FIGURE 492 Import Snort® Rule File dialog box
3. Enter the complete path of the Snort rule file located on the Syslog server.
4. Click OK to import the Snort rules.
5. While still in the Add Event Action dialog box, continue to click Next until you advance to the
Action Group - Actions pane.
6. Select the Deploy CLI Configuration check box and click Configure if you want to deploy a
configuration from CLI Configuration Manager to products if the policy criteria have been met.
You can only deploy a CLI configuration for IP products.

NOTE

If the CLI configuration you chose from CLI Configuration Manager contains a non-IronWare
OSNetwork OS product as a target, the configuration will not be deployed to the non-IronWare
OSNetwork OS product.
7.

Select one of the following existing CLI configuration parameter sources from the Parameter
list:

-

Source IP — The source IP address of the attack.
Source Port — The source port of the attack.
Destination IP — The destination IP address of the attack.
Destination Port — The destination port of the attack.

8. Continue to advance through the Add Event Action dialog box. The Summary pane of the Edit
Event Action dialog box displays an overview of the e-mail configuration you are creating.
9. Review your entries and take one of the following actions:

-

Click Finish to approve the configuration.
Click Previous to return to the Action Group - E-Mail Settings pane of the dialog box.
Click Cancel to cancel the operation.

Pseudo events
A pseudo event is a combination of different SNMP traps that you decide would constitute a single
event. For example, there are two separate SNMP traps for link up and link down occurrences. You
might decide that these two occurrences should be just one event.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1181

37

Pseudo events

Displaying pseudo event definitions
To display the properties of a pseudo event definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.

FIGURE 493 Pseudo Events dialog box
2. To view additional information for a definition, select a definition from the list. Additional
information displays in the Details of Selected Pseudo Event list at the bottom of the dialog
box.

Creating pseudo event definitions
To create a pseudo event definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
2. Click Add.
3. The Identification pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
4. Type a unique name for the pseudo event. Duplicate names are not allowed.
5. Select the Enabled check box to enable the pseudo event or clear the check box to disable the
pseudo event.
6. Click Next.
The Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box, shown in Figure 494, displays.

1182

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

Setting pseudo event policies
The Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box, shown in Figure 494, allows you to create
escalation, resolve, and flapping policies for the pseudo event, and then specify the time duration
for each of these policies in minutes or seconds.

FIGURE 494 Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box
To create policies for a pseudo event definition, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Escalation button to create an escalation policy, and then enter the duration of time
that the Management application waits before performing the specified action. Specify the
escalation time in minutes or seconds.
When an event occurs, an escalation policy waits for a duration of time to see if the event
remains in that state. If it does, then the specified action in the definition is performed.
Refer to “Adding a pseudo event on the escalation policy” on page 1187 for complete
instructions.
2. Click the Resolve button to create a resolve policy, and then enter the duration of time the
Event Processor waits before generating the pseudo event. Specify the resolve time in minutes
or seconds.
When a down event occurs, a resolving policy waits for a specified duration to see if the event
remains in that state by checking if an up event occurs. If an up event occurs, a resolving
pseudo event is generated by the Event Processor.
Refer to “Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the resolving policy” on page 1190
for complete instructions.
3. Click the Flapping button to create a flapping policy, and then enter the number of occurrences
and the duration of time before the Management application performs the action specified in
an event action. Specify the number of flapping times in minutes or seconds.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1183

37

Pseudo events

The flapping policy checks to see if the event consistently transitions between two opposite
states during a specified length of time. If it does, then the specified action in the definition is
performed.
Refer to “Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the flapping policy” on page 1191
for complete instructions.
4. Enter a description in the Message field. This description is displayed in the event log for this
pseudo event. The event log displays the exact text you enter in this field; therefore, this
message should describe the events in the event action policy.
5. Select a severity from Severity list. You must assign a severity to the pseudo event.
6. Click Next.
The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box, shown in Figure 495, displays.
Refer to the following topics for specific procedures using this dialog box.

• “Creating pseudo event definitions” on page 1182
• “Editing a pseudo event definition” on page 1186

Filtering pseudo event traps
The Events pane contains a Selected Down Trap list and a Selected Up Trap list. The Selected
Down Trap list defines the traps for the down state of a product or an interface. The Selected Up
Trap list defines the traps for the up state of the product or an interface.

NOTE
By default in a SAN+IP configuration, all traps known to the Management application are included
in the Available Traps list, under the folders for the MIB to which they belong.
To filter pseudo event traps, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
2. Click Add.
The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box, shown in Figure 495, displays.

1184

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

FIGURE 495 Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box
3. From the Available Traps list, select the trap for the down state of a product or interface.
By default, all traps known to the Management application are included in the Available Traps
list, which is a list of all traps that are available based on the MIB and filter criteria.
4. Select a trap for the Selected Down Trap list and a trap for the Selected Up Trap list.
You cannot select the same trap for up and down conditions. Move the traps from the Available
Traps list to the Selected Down Trap and Selected Up Trap lists using the right arrow button.
5. You can change the text associated with the selected trap by doing either of the following:

-

Click one of the following buttons:

• MIB Information, if you want the default SNMP name for the traps to be displayed.
• MIB Alias, if you want the aliases for the traps to be displayed.
-

Use the Trap Filter tool to limit the trap severity. To use this tool, click the Filter button to
display the Trap Filters dialog box.

6. After limiting the list of available traps, expand the MIB folder to which the trap you want
belongs under the Available Traps list, or right-click to select that trap. Click the right arrow
button to move it to the Selected Traps list.
7.

Select a trap for the up state of the condition.

NOTE

You must select a down and an up trap. You cannot select the same trap for the up and down
conditions.
8. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
9. Click Finish to save your definition. The new pseudo event appears on the Pseudo Event list on
the Pseudo Event dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1185

37

Pseudo events

Creating a pseudo event definition by copying an existing definition
You can create a pseudo event definition by copying an existing definition.
To create a pseudo event definition by copying an existing definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
2. Select the pseudo event definition that you want to copy from the Pseudo Events list.
3. Click the Duplicate button.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
The name of the event action is the name of the selected action with the word “copy”
appended. For example, “Event1” becomes “Event1 copy”.
4. Enter a new name for the pseudo event definition.
5. Make the changes you want to make to the definition. Refer to “Creating pseudo event
definitions” on page 1182 for details.
6. Click Finish to save your definition.

Editing a pseudo event definition
Use caution when you modify pseudo event definitions. Saving changes to a pseudo event
definition resets the run-time information for that pseudo event.
To edit a pseudo event definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
2. Select the pseudo event definition that you want to edit from the Pseudo Events list.
3. Click the Edit button to display the Edit Pseudo Event dialog box.
4. Make the changes you want to make to the definition. Refer to “Creating pseudo event
definitions” on page 1182 for details.
5. Click Finish to save your definition.

Deleting a pseudo event definition
Use caution when you delete pseudo event definitions. Deleting a pseudo event definition discards
the run-time information for that pseudo event.
To delete a pseudo event definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
2. Select the pseudo event definition that you want to delete from the Pseudo Events list.
3. Click Delete.
A message displays, prompting you to confirm the deletion request.

1186

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

4. Click Yes to delete the selected definition.
The definition is removed from the Pseudo Events list.

Adding a pseudo event on the escalation policy
Use the escalation policy to be notified if a critical event occurs on a product, port, or system. When
the event occurs, the escalation policy waits for a duration of time to see if the event remains in
that state. If it does, then the specified action in the definition is performed.
The following two-part procedure uses both the Identification pane of the Add Pseudo Events dialog
box and the Add Event Actions dialog box to create an event action with the escalation policy.
To add a pseudo event definition to the escalation policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box, shown in Figure 493, displays.
2. Click Add.
The Identification pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the pseudo event.
4. Select the Enabled check box to enable the event, and click Next.
The Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
5. Click the Escalation button, and then enter the duration of time the Event Processor will wait
before generating the pseudo event. Specify the escalation time in minutes or seconds.
6. Click Next.
The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
7.

Select a critical event, such as LinkDown, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Down Trap list.

8. Select a remediation event, such as LinkUp, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Up Trap list.
9. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
10. Click Finish to complete the pseudo event configuration.
Now, you must create a new event action definition using the Add Event Actions dialog box.
Refer to the following sections for instructions on performing this task.

•
•
•
•
•

“Creating an event action definition” on page 1166
“Creating a new event action definition by copying an existing definition” on page 1179
“Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the escalation policy” on page 1188
“Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the resolving policy” on page 1190
“Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the flapping policy” on page 1191

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1187

37

Pseudo events

Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the escalation policy
To create an event action with a pseudo event on the escalation policy, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Add to display the Identification pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
3. Enter a name and description for the event action and select the Enabled check box to enable
the event.
4. Click Next to display the Events pane.
By default, the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
5. Select the Pseudo Events event type from the Show list.
The available pseudo events display.
6. Select the pseudo event you created and click Next.
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
7.

Select the source that you will use to monitor this event from the Selected Sources list.

8. Click Next to advance to the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
9. Click the Take actions for the selected events when they occur button if you want to take action
for the selected events when they occur.
10. Click Next to advance to the Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
11. Select the Alert by E-mail check box. An e-mail notification will be sent to the designated e-mail
recipient if the policy criteria have been met.
12. Click Next to display the Action Group - E-mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Action Group - E-mail Settings pane of the Add Event Action dialog box allows you to select
e-mail recipients from a list, add new e-mail recipients, and compose e-mail messages.
13. Select the Management application user to whom the e-mail message will be sent from the
Available Recipients list, and click the right arrow button to move the recipient to the Selected
Recipients list.

NOTE

Make sure the user you select has an e-mail address defined in a user account.
14. Add additional e-mail recipient addresses in the Other Recipients field. Separate multiple
e-mail addresses with a semicolon.
15. If you want the e-mail message for the alert to display a description on the subject line, enter
the text in the Subject Line field.
16. If you want a prologue to be inserted at the beginning of the e-mail message, enter up to 255
characters in the Body Prologue field. The event action message follows the prologue.

1188

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

17. If you want an epilogue to be placed at the end of the e-mail message, enter up to 255
characters in the Body Epilogue field.

NOTE

The prologue, the event action message, and the epilogue form the body of the e-mail alert.
18. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
19. Click Finish.
The Summary pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays an overview of the e-mail
configuration you are creating.
For more information about adding an event action, refer to “Event action definitions” on
page 1166.

Adding a pseudo event on the resolving policy
When a down event occurs, a resolving policy waits for a specified duration to see if the event
remains in that state by checking if an up event occurs. If an up event occurs, a resolving pseudo
event is generated by the Event Processor.
The following two-part procedure uses both the Add Pseudo Events dialog box and the Add Event
Actions dialog box to create an event action with the resolving policy.
To add a pseudo event definition to the resolving policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Identification pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the pseudo event, and select the Enabled check box to enable the event.
4. Click Next.
The Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
5. Click the Resolve button, and then enter the duration of time the Event Processor will wait
before generating the pseudo event. Specify the resolve time in minutes or seconds.
6. Click Next.
The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event Events dialog box displays.
7.

Select a critical event, such as LinkDown, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Down Trap list.

8. Select a remediation event, such as LinkUp, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Up Trap list.
9. Click Finish to complete the pseudo event configuration.
Now, you must create a new event action definition using the Add Event Actions dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1189

37

Pseudo events

Creating an event action with a pseudo event on the
resolving policy
To create an event action with a pseudo event on the resolving policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Add to display the Identification pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
3. Enter a name and description for the event action and select the Enabled check box to enable
the event.
4. Click Next to display the Events pane.
By default, the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
5. Select the Pseudo Events event type from the Show list.
The available pseudo events display.
6. Select the pseudo event you created and click Next.
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
7.

Select the source that you will use to monitor this event from the Selected Sources list.

8. Click Next to advance to the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
9. Define the frequency of the event’s occurrence that would trigger the action.

• Click the Take actions for the selected event when they occur button if you want to take
action for the selected events when they occur.

• Click the Take actions for the selected events based on below criteria button if you want to
take action for the selected events based on specified criteria.
10. Click Next to advance to the Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
11. Select Apply as a Logging Policy to indicate whether or not you want the event occurrence to be
logged in the Management application database:

• Select Log to log the occurrence in the Management application database.
• Select Drop to not log the occurrence in the Management application database.
12. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
13. Click Finish.
For more information about adding an event action, refer to “Event action definitions” on
page 1166.

1190

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Pseudo events

37

Adding a pseudo event on the flapping policy
The flapping policy checks to see if the event consistently transitions between two opposite states
during a specified length of time. If it does, then the specified action in the definition is performed.
The following two-part procedure uses both the Add Pseudo Events dialog box and the Add Event
Actions dialog box to create an event action with the flapping policy.
To add a pseudo event on the flapping policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Pseudo Events.
The Pseudo Events dialog box displays.
2. Click Add.
The Identification pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
3. Enter a name for the pseudo event, and select the Enabled check box to enable the event.
4. Click Next.
The Policy pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
5. Click the Flapping button, and then enter the duration of time the Event Processor will wait
before generating the pseudo event. Specify the number of flapping times in minutes or
seconds.
6. Click Next.
The Events pane of the Add Pseudo Event dialog box displays.
7.

Select a critical event, such as LinkDown, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Down Trap list.

8. Select a remediation event, such as LinkUp, and click the right arrow button to move it to the
Selected Up Trap list.
9. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
10. Click Finish to complete the pseudo event configuration.
Now, you must create a new event action definition using the Add Event Actions dialog box.

Creating an event action with a pseudo event
on the flapping policy
To create an event action with a pseudo event on the flapping policy, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Event Processing > Event Actions.
The Event Actions dialog box displays.
2. Click Add to display the Identification pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
3. Enter a name and description for the event action and select the Enabled check box to enable
the event.
4. Click Next to display the Events pane.
By default, the Events pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
5. Select the Pseudo Events event type from the Show list.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1191

37

Pseudo events

The available pseudo events display.
6. Select the pseudo event you created and click Next.
The Sources pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
7.

Select the source that you will use to monitor this event from the Selected Sources list.

8. Click Next to advance to the Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Policy pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
9. Click the Take actions for the selected events when they occur button if you want to take action
for the selected events when they occur.
10. Click Next to advance to the Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box.
The Action Group-Actions pane of the Add Event Action dialog box displays.
11. Select the Deploy CLI Configuration check box and click the Configure button if you want to
deploy a configuration from CLI Configuration Manager to products if the policy criteria have
been met.

NOTE

If the CLI configuration you chose from CLI Configuration Manager contains a non-IronWare
OSNetwork OS product as a target, the configuration will not be deployed to the non-IronWare
OSNetwork OS product.
12. You can either select an existing CLI configuration or create a new one and select that
configuration. After selecting a CLI configuration, the name of the CLI configuration is
displayed in the Selected Configuration field.

-

Has Parameters - Displays Yes if the CLI configuration has parameters that require values
to be entered before it can be deployed, and displays No if no parameter needs to be
defined.

-

The Parameters list lists the parameters that need to be defined in the configuration.

• The Parameter column displays the parameter and its variables in the CLI
configuration.

• The Source column lists the appropriate SNMP attributes for the parameters. Each
attribute contains a specific parameter value, such as an IP address. Select the
attribute you want from the list.

• The Transformation column uses the product IP addresses and MAC addresses listed
in the Address Finder. If the Address Finder list is empty, the product or port will not be
found. From this column, specify what you want Event Processor to do with the value
in the attribute:

1192

-

Find Device: Find the product with the IP address in the attribute and deploy the
CLI configuration to that product.

-

Find Port: Find the port on a product with the IP address in the attribute and
deploy the CLI configuration to that port.

-

Find Intruder MAC: Find the product with the IP address in the attribute that
matches the intruder MAC address and deploy the CLI configuration to that
product.

-

None: The Event Processor only reports occurrence of the products.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom reports

37

13. Select the Deploy Product Configuration check box if you want to deploy a payload to the
products if the policy criteria have been met.
14. Select the Apply as a Logging Policy check box to indicate whether or not you want the event
occurrence to be logged in the Management application database:

• Select Log to log the occurrence in the Management application database.
• Select Drop to not log the occurrence in the Management application database.
15. Click Next to advance to the Summary pane.
16. Click Finish.
For more information about adding an event action, refer to “Event action definitions” on
page 1166.

Event custom reports
The Event Custom Reports dialog box allows you to manage customized event filter definitions and
schedule when the definitions are run.
To access the dialog box, select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box, shown in Figure 496, displays.

FIGURE 496 Event Custom Reports dialog box - Report Definitions tab
The Event Custom Reports dialog box has two tabs:

• The Report Definitions tab lists all the previously created report definition objects. This tab
enables you to add a new definition or modify, delete, or duplicate existing report definitions.

• The Schedules tab lists all the previously created schedules on the report definition. This tab
enables you to add a new schedule or modify, delete, or duplicate existing schedules. Users
cannot view, edit, or share a schedule that was created by another user.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1193

37

Event custom reports

Defining report settings
You can configure report settings so that you see only a restricted set of information in a report.

NOTE
You can change the number of displayed event custom report records by following the procedure in
“Configuring custom report preferences” on page 161. By default, 1000 records display, even if the
event count is greater than 1000.

NOTE

You must first enter a name and title on the Identification tab before you can run the result settings.
To configure report settings, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Add button.
3. The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Product tab, shown in Figure 497, displays.
4. Click the Result Settings tab.
The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Result Settings tab displays.

FIGURE 497 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Result Settings tab

1194

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom reports

37

NOTE

The Available Column list lists the attributes you can include in the report. Each attribute
represents a column on the report.
5. Select the attribute you want, then click the right arrow to move your selection to the Selected
Columns list. To remove an attribute from the Selected Columns list, select the attribute that
you want to remove, then click the left arrow button.

• If you selected the Count column, the Management application adds the First Seen and
Last Seen columns to a report.

• For products that support stacking, the Port column shows the port.
6. Data for all attributes is sorted in ascending order and is sorted in the sequence that the
attributes appear in the Sort By Columns list. In the Selected Columns list, select which
attribute will be used to sort the generated report. Then click the right arrow button to move
your selection to the Sort by Columns list. To remove an entry from the Sort by Columns list,
select the entry, then click the left arrow button.
7.

Click OK to save the definition, Run to launch the report, or click the Identification tab to
display the parameters that you use to identify the definition.

Defining the report identity
The Identification tab in the Event Custom Reports dialog box allows you to enter the identity
information of the report information.
To define the report identity, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Add button.
3. The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Product tab displays.
4. Click the Identification tab.
The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Identification tab, shown in Figure 498, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1195

37

Event custom reports

FIGURE 498 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Identification tab
5. In the Name field, enter a name for the definition.
This name appears under the Name column on the Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom
Reports dialog box. This name must be unique for each report group. This is a required
parameter.
6. In the Title field, enter a title for the definition, which will be used as the title of a generated
report. This is a required parameter.
7.

Click the Do not share this definition button if you do not want to share this definition with
other Management application users.
If you select this button, no Management application users will see this definition on the
Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box when they log in.

8. Click the Share this definition (Read only) button if you want other Management application
users to have Read Only permission for this definition.
If you selected the Share this definition (Read only) button, a list of Management application
roles appears in the Available Roles list.
9. Select the roles that will have view and run access to this definition, then press the right arrow
button to move the role in the Selected Roles list.

NOTE

All Management application users who have the selected roles will be able to view, copy, and
run the definition.

1196

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom reports

37

10. Select the roles that will have view and run access to this definition, then press the right arrow
button to move the role in the Selected Roles list.
All Management application users who have the selected roles will be able to view, copy, and
run the definition.

NOTE

You can share the available users definition with specific Management application users. If
you click the Share this definition (Read only) button, a list of Management application user
accounts appears in the Available Users list.
11. Select the user account that will be able to view and run this definition, then press the right
arrow button to move that user account in the Selected Users list.
12. Click OK to save the definition, or click Run to launch the report.

Filtering a report definition
You can filter a report definition. To do so, you must first enter a name and title on the
Identification tab and select at least one column in the Results Setting tab to run or save a filter.
You can select from the available list of SAN products, IP products, or hosts by selecting the
appropriate tab.

NOTE
The swDeviceStatusTrap (OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.0.15) trap is sent from the switch whenever
there is a device login or logout. This trap is part of the SW-MIB and is listed under the SW-MIB of
the SNMP Trap Recipients dialog box, the Event Actions dialog box, and the SNMP Trap Forwarding
dialog box. For a complete list of event categories, refer to “Event Categories” on page 1277.
To filter a report definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Add button.
3. The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Product tab, shown in Figure 499, displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1197

37

Event custom reports

FIGURE 499 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Product tab
4. Click the Filter tab.
The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Filter tab, shown in Figure 500, displays.

FIGURE 500 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Filter tab

1198

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom reports

37

5. To limit the search results to traps, syslog, and pseudo event messages with a specific text
string, enter the text string in the Description field.
You can use an asterisk (*) to indicate a wildcard, as in the following examples:

• *cdef: Matches a message ending with cdef
• abc*: Matches a message beginning with abc
• *abc*: Matches a message that contains abc
For example, if you want to find the events that have the text “Auth” in the message, enter
“*Auth*”.

NOTE

You can view all port history events for a switch by creating an event custom report and
entering a description of Port Login/Logout History for that particular switch. The Port
Login/Logout history trap will be listed under the Available traps list of the Add Trap Filter
dialog box and the Add Event Action dialog box — Events pane.
For information about event categories, refer to “Event Categories” on page 1277.
6. To limit the search results to traps, syslog, and pseudo event messages from a specific IP
address, enter the IP address or the AP MAC address in the Address field. You can enter
multiple addresses. Separate each address with a comma.
7.

Select the Acknowledge check box if you want messages that have been acknowledged to be
included in the report.

8. Select the severity from the Available Severity list, and click the right arrow button to move your
selection to the Selected Severity list. Events with the selected severity are included in the
report.
9. Select the event type you want to include in the report from the Available Event Category list.
Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Event Category list.
10. Select the event action you want to include in the report from the Available Event Actions list.
Click the right arrow button to move your selection to the Selected Event Actions list.
11. Click OK to save the definition, Run to launch the report, or click the Time Settings tab on the
Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box if you want to filter the events by date and time.

Filtering report events by date and time
The Event Custom Reports dialog box — Time Settings tab allows you to specify the time range of
the events to be reported.
To filter report events by date and time, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Add button.
The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Product tab displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1199

37

Event custom reports

3. Click the Time Settings tab.
The Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Time Settings tab, shown in Figure 501, displays.

FIGURE 501 Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box - Time Settings tab
4. Choose between relative time (the default) and absolute time.

• Click Relative Time if you want to filter traffic based on when the report is generated, and
then select a relative time from the Range list. Relative time is calculated based on the
date and time the report is generated.

• Click Absolute Time if you want to filter traffic sent at a specific date and time.
a.

Select the specific start date from the Start Date list.

b.

Select the specific hour time for the start time from the Start Time list, and select AM
or PM.

c.

Select the specific end date from the End Date list.

d.

Select the specific hour for the end time from the End Time list, and select AM or PM.

5. Click OK to save the definition, or click Run to launch the report.

1200

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom reports

37

Creating a new report definition by copying
an existing definition
The simplest way to create a new report definition is by copying an existing definition.
To create a new report definition is by copying an existing definition, complete the following steps.
1. Select the definition you want to copy from the Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom
Reports dialog box.
2. Click Duplicate.
The name of the definition is the name of the selected definition with the word “copy”
appended. For example, “SelectedPortName” becomes “SelectedPortName copy”.
3. Click the Identification tab to enter a new name and description for the new definition.
4. Make changes to the report as required.
5. Perform one of the following tasks when you are finished modifying the definition:

• Click OK to save the report.
• Click Cancel to discard your changes and exit from the Report Definitions tab of the Event
Custom Reports dialog box.

• Click Reset to discard your changes without exiting from the Report Definitions tab of the
Event Custom Reports dialog box.

• Click Run to launch the report.
The new definition is added to the Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box.

Editing a report definition
For your definitions, you can modify a definition and save the changes you have made. For a shared
definition from another user, you can modify the definition, then run that definition to obtain the
desired report; however, you will not be able to save your changes.
To edit a report definition, complete the following steps.
1. Click the Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box and select the
definition you want to modify.
2. Click Edit.
3. When the Add/Edit Report Definition dialog box displays, modify the definition. (Refer to
“Filtering a report definition” on page 1197.)
4. When you have finished, perform one of the following tasks:

• If you own this definition, the OK button is available. Click OK to save your changes.
• Click Run to generate the report.
• Click Cancel to discard your changes and exit the Report Definitions tab of the Event
Custom Reports dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1201

37

Event custom report schedules

Deleting a report definition
You can delete a report definition, but only if it belongs to you.
To delete a report definition, complete the following steps.
1. To access the dialog box, select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Report Definitions tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box and select the
definition you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
A message displays, prompting you to confirm the deletion.
4. Click Yes to delete the definition or No to cancel your request.

Event custom report schedules
Click the Schedules tab, shown in Figure 502, to display its contents. The Schedules list shows the
definitions that have been scheduled to automatically run at a specified date and time.

FIGURE 502 Schedules tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box
From the Schedules tab of the Event Custom Reports dialog box, you can perform the following
tasks:

• View — Displays the report data of the scheduled report definition. The View button is not
enabled for a report that is listed as Not Available.

• Add — Launches the Add Schedule dialog box.
• Edit — Launches the Edit Schedule dialog box with the selected schedule information
pre-populated.

1202

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event custom report schedules

•
•
•
•

37

Duplicate — Creates a copy of the selected report schedule.
Delete — Deletes the selected schedule from the Schedules list.
Enable — Enables the selected schedule.
Disable — Disables the selected schedule.

Adding or editing an event report schedule
The Add Schedule dialog box, shown in Figure 503, allows you to select an existing report definition
and configure the parameters, such as the schedule’s format, frequency, recipients, and message
content, for when the report is run and to whom the report is sent.
To add or edit an event report schedule, complete the following steps.
1. Select Reports > Event Custom Reports.
The Event Custom Reports dialog box displays.
2. Click the Schedules tab.
3. Click the Add button.
The Add Schedule dialog box displays.

FIGURE 503 Add Schedule dialog box
4. Enter the name of the new schedule in the Name field. You must enter a unique name for the
schedule. The name can be up to 64 characters in length and it is case-sensitive.
5. Select the Suspend schedule check box if you want to disable the schedule. For example, you
may want to temporarily prevent a report from being generated until further notice. You can
clear the check mark to resume the automatic generation of the report.
6. Select the report definition you want to schedule from the Report Definition list. If a report is
deleted, the corresponding schedule will be deleted.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1203

37

Event custom report schedules

7.

Select one of the following periods from the Frequency list:

• One Time
• Hourly — If you selected Hourly as the schedule type, Minutes past the hour appears.
Select the minutes after the hour when the report will be generated.

• Daily — If you selected Daily as the schedule type, Time (hh:mm) appears.
• Weekly — If you selected Weekly as the schedule type, Day of the week appears. Select the
day of the week when the report will be generated.

• Monthly — If you selected Monthly as the schedule type, Day of the month appears. Select
the day of the month when the report will be generated.

• Yearly — If you selected Yearly as the schedule type, Day of the year appears. Select the
day of the year when the report will be generated.
8. Select a report format from the Format list: HTML or CSV.
9. Select the time when the report will be generated. Indicate the hour, minute, and whether it is
AM or PM. This parameter appears if you selected any schedule type except Hourly.
10. Select the E-mail check box if you want the report to be sent to e-mail recipients. The server
limits the displayed or sent report to 1000 records.
11. Change the value of the customReports.MaxRecordsToDisplay parameter in the
configuration.properties file to the number of records you want displayed or sent.
12. Indicate the date when the report is generated. Open the calendar and select the date. This
parameter appears if you selected One Time or Yearly as the schedule type.
13. Enter an e-mail address to which the e-mail recipient can send a response. The e-mail address
is a mandatory field.
14. From the Available Recipients list, select the user to whom the report will be sent. Click the
right arrow button to move that user name to the Selected Recipients list. Click the left arrow
button to remove the name from the Selected Recipients list and return it to the Available
Recipients list.

NOTE

Make sure an e-mail address is configured in the user’s account for the selected user.
15. Enter other e-mail addresses to which the report should be sent in the Other Recipients field,
separating multiple addresses with a semicolon. At least one e-mail address from the
Application Recipients or Other Recipients must be entered.
16. In the Reply To field, enter an e-mail address to which the e-mail recipient can send a
response. This is a mandatory field.
17. In the Subject Line field, enter the text that you want to appear in the subject line of the e-mail
message. You can leave this field empty.
18. If you want introductory text to be included at the beginning of the e-mail message, enter the
text in the Body Prologue field. The maximum number of characters supported by the Body
Prologue field is 256.
19. If you want specific text to be included at the end of the e-mail message, enter that text in the
Body Epilogue field. The maximum number of characters supported by the Body Epilogue field
is 256.

1204

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event logs

37

Event logs
You can view all events that take place through the Master Log at the bottom of the main window.
You can also view a specific log by selecting an option from the Logs submenu of the Monitor
menu. The logs are described in the following list:

• Audit Log — Displays all Application Events raised by the application modules and all Audit
Syslog messages from the switches and Brocade HBAs.

• Product Event Log — Displays all Product Event type events from all discovered switches and
Brocade HBAs.

• Security Log — Displays all security events for the discovered switches.
• Syslog Log — Displays syslog messages from switches and HBAs.
The Management application also has an event notification feature. By configuring event
notification, you can specify when the application should alert you of an event. For details, refer to
“Configuring e-mail notification” on page 1142.
For information about the Master Log interface, fields, and icons, refer to “Master Log” on
page 287.

Viewing event logs
You can view log data through the Master Log on the main window. If you want to see only certain
types of events; for example only security events, open a specific log through the Logs dialog box.

NOTE

You can also launch the Fabric logs and the Product Status logs from the status bar.
To view an event log, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Logs > .
The  Logs dialog box displays the type of log you selected.
2. Review the information in the log.
3. Click Close.

Copying part of a log entry
You can copy data from logs to other applications. Use this method to analyze or store the data
using another tool.
To copy part of an event log, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Logs > .
The  Logs dialog box displays the type of log you selected.
2. Select the rows you want to copy:

• To select contiguous rows, select the first row you want to copy, press Shift, and click the
contiguous row or rows you want to copy.

• To select non-contiguous rows, select the first row you want to copy, press CTRL, and click
the additional row or rows you want to copy.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1205

37

Event logs

3. Right-click one of the selected rows and select Copy Rows.
4. Open the application to which you want to paste the data.
5. Click where you want to paste the data.
6. Press CTRL+V (or select Edit > Paste from the other application).
All data and column headings are pasted.
7.

Click Close to close the dialog box.

Copying an entire log entry
You can copy data from logs to other applications. Use this method to analyze or store the data
using another tool.
To copy an event log, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Logs > .
The  Logs dialog box displays the type of log you selected.
2. Right-click a row and select Copy Table.
3. Open the application to which you want to paste the data.
4. Click where you want to paste the data.
5. Press CTRL+V (or select Edit > Paste from the other application).
All data and column headings are pasted.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Exporting the entire log
You can export the log data to a tab-delimited text file.
To export an event log, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Logs > .
The  Log dialog box displays the type of log you selected.
2. Right-click a row and select Export Table.
The Save table to a tab delimited file dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the location where you want to export the data.
4. Enter a name for the file in the File Name field.
5. Click Save.
All data and column headings are exported to the text file.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

1206

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event logs

37

E-mailing all event details from the Master Log
NOTE
You must configure e-mail notification before you can e-mail event details from the Master Log. To
configure e-mail notification, refer to “Configuring e-mail notification” on page 1142.
To e-mail all event details from the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click an entry in the Master Log.
2. Select E-mail > All.
The E-mail dialog box displays.
3. Enter the e-mail address of the person to receive the e-mail notifications in the To field.
4. Enter your e-mail address in the From field.
5. Click OK.

E-mailing selected event details from the Master Log
NOTE
You must configure e-mail notification before you can e-mail event details from the Master Log. To
configure e-mail notification, refer to “Configuring e-mail notification” on page 1142.
To e-mail selected event details from the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click the selected events in the Master Log.
2. Select the events that you want to e-mail.
3. Select E-mail > Selection.
The E-mail dialog box displays.
4. Enter the e-mail address of the person to receive the e-mail notification in the To field.
5. Enter your e-mail address in the Reply From field.
6. Click OK.

Displaying event properties from the Master Log
You can view detailed information for an event.

NOTE

Network OS events display in both the SAN and IP tab of the Master Log.
To display event details from the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click an entry in the Master Log.
2. Select Properties.
The Event Properties dialog box, shown in Table 98, displays.
3. Review the information.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1207

37

Event logs

TABLE 98

Event Properties

Event Field

Description

Probable Cause

The most likely reason the event occurred.

Description

A description of the event.

Count

Number of times this event occurred on the host.

Origin

The event’s origin, for example, SNMP trap.

Message ID

The message associated with the event.

Port Name

The port name associated with the event.

First Event Server Time

The time the event occurred.

Fabric Name

The VCS fabric name.

Product Address

The IP address of the product on which the event occurred.

Audit

Information regarding the audit.

Category

One of the following event categories, which are detailed in “Event Categories”
on page 1277:
• Product Event
• Link Incident Event
• Product Audit Event
• Product Status Event
• Security Event
• User Action Event
• Management Server Event

Last Event Product Time

The day, date, and time the last event occurred on the product.

Last Event Server Time

The day, date, and time the last event occurred on the server.

Severity

The event severity.

Source Name

The source of the event.

Virtual Fabric ID

The virtual fabric identifier.

Contributor

The contributor to this event.

Recommended Action

The recommended action to take to remedy the event.

First Event Product Time

The day, date, and time the first event occurred on the product.

Operational Status

The product’s operational status.

Module Name

The module associated with the event.

Source Address

The IP address of the source.

Acknowledged

Indicates whether the event has been acknowledged.

4. Click Close to close the Event Properties dialog box.

1208

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event logs

37

Copying part of the Master Log
You can copy data from logs to other applications. Use this method to analyze or store the data
using another tool.
To copy part of the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Select the rows you want to copy in the Master Log:

• To select contiguous rows, select the first row you want to copy, press Shift, and click the
contiguous row or rows you want to copy.

• To select non-contiguous rows, select the first row you want to copy, press CTRL, and click
the additional row or rows you want to copy.
2. Right-click one of the selected rows and select Table > Copy Rows.
3. Open the application to which you want to paste the data.
4. Click where you want to paste the data.
5. Press CTRL+V (or select Edit > Paste from the other application). All data and column headings
are pasted.

Copying the entire Master Log
You can copy the entire Master Log to other applications. Use this method to analyze or store the
data using another tool.
To copy the entire Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click an entry in the Master Log.
2. Select Table > Copy Table.
3. Open the application to which you want to paste the data.
4. Click where you want to paste the data.
5. Press CTRL+V (or select Edit > Paste from the other application). All data and column headings
are pasted.

Exporting the Master Log
You can export the Master Log to a tab-delimited text file. Use this method to analyze or store the
data using another tool.
To export the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click an entry in the Master Log.
2. Select Table > Export Table.
The Save table to a tab delimited file dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the location where you want to export the data.
4. Enter a name for the file in the File Name field.
5. Click Save. All data and column headings are exported to the text file.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1209

37

Event logs

Filtering events in the Master Log
You can filter the events that display in the Master Log on the main window. By default, all event
types display in the Selected Events list.
When you select a filter from the Filter drop-down menu, the Master Log refreshes to display the
events associated with that filter. This filter setting is kept when you exit the client.
For more information about the Master Log, refer to “Master Log” on page 287.
To filter events in the Master Log, complete the following steps.
1. Select the filter you want from the Filter drop-down menu at the top of the Master Log panel.

FIGURE 504 Master Log Filter menu
2. If you do not see the filter you want, click the … button immediately to the left of the menu.
The Define Filters dialog box displays.

FIGURE 505 Define Filter dialog box - Basic tab, IP tab selected
3. Use the following to include or exclude products.

1210

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Event logs

37

• To include an event type in the filter, select the event from the Available Products list and
click the right arrow.

• To exclude an event type from the filter, select the event from the Selected Products to be
displayed list and click the left arrow.

• To include all products, select the Allow All Products check box.
4. Select from the following to include or exclude event types.

• To include an event type in the filter, select the event category from the Available Event
Category list and click the right arrow.

• To exclude an event type from the filter, select the event from the Selected Event Category
and Severity to be displayed list and click the left arrow.
5. From the Selected Event Category and Severity to be displayed list, select one of the following
severity levels to assigned to the selected event action:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Emergency
Alert
Critical
Errors
Warning
Notice
Info
Debug
Unknown

Clear the severity level check boxes to turn off the filter for the selected events.
6. (Optional) To filter events based on a string (such as telnet or login) that appears in the event
description, select the Events Description check box and enter the string that the filter is to use
in the associated text box.
7.

Enter a name for the filter in the Name field. The Filter name length is limited to 128
alphanumeric characters. You cannot use other characters in this text box.

8. If you want to create multiple filters, click Add after you define the filter. This adds the defined
filter to the Filters list, but does not close the dialog.
9. When you have created all the filters you want, click OK.
The Define Filters dialog closes and you are returned to the main window.

The ‘unnamed’ filter
If a filter is migrated from a previous release, it is saved with the name unnamed. If a filter was not
present in the release you are migrating from, then there will be no unnamed filter. If the unnamed
filter was the default filter for you in the previous release, it will be set as the default filter for you in
the current release.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1211

37

Event logs

The ‘none’ filter
The filter named none is the default configuration filter. You cannot to edit or delete this filter.
Selecting this filter lets you view Master Log events with no filtering applied. This is the default filter
selected when no other filter is applied by the user or when there is no migrated filter.

Editing a Filter
To edit a filter, select the filter you want to edit in the Filters panel and make the desired changes to
the filter configuration. Any changes you make will be reflected in the Filters panel when navigating
to another filter, but changes are not made permanent until you click OK.

Duplicating a Filter
To duplicate a filter, select the filter you want to duplicate in Filters panel and click Add. The content
of the selected filter will be loaded, but with the name field left blank. Enter a name for the new
filter and click OK.

Deleting a Filter
To delete a filter, select the filter and click Delete. Deleting a filter removes the filter name from the
Filters panel of the Define Filters dialog box. A filter is not permanently deleted until you click OK.

Notes on filters
• Changing the filter in one client session does not alter the filter selection on other clients.
However, if the currently selected filter is updated, once the filter is saved, the master log is
reloaded to reflect the changes to that filter. This affects all your client sessions.

• If the currently selected filter is deleted, the master log is reloaded, and changes the selected
filter to none for all your client sessions.

• Copying user preferences includes all user-created filters.

1212

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

Packet Capture (Pcap)

38

In this chapter
• Configuring packet captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Configuring packet captures
Organizations can configure switches as sensors to capture packets through the embedded sFlow
capability and send them back to the Management application, which acts as an sFlow collector.
The Management application then converts the sFlow data to Pcap format, which is understood by
a variety of open source products. The open source products can then provide valuable tools to
detect and defend against network attacks.

NOTE

Snort® is the only Pcap-aware tool supported by the Management application. For more information,
refer to “Snort message forwarding” on page 1166.
To configure packet captures (PCAP)-related properties, complete the following steps:
1. Select Configure > Packet Capture (Pcap).
The Configure Pcap dialog box, shown in Figure 506, displays.

FIGURE 506 Configure Pcap dialog box
2. Click the Convert sFlow to Pcap check box to convert sFlow data to PCAP-formatted packets.
3. Click the Enable Pcap check box to instruct the Management application to analyze the
PCAP-formatted packets.
4. Enter a value required by your PCAP-aware tool in the Replay Switch text box. This parameter is
used to send data to the PCAP-aware tool. The default value is -r.
5. Enter the full path of the command that will be invoked to launch the PCAP-aware tool into the
Pcap Tool Location text box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1213

38

Configuring packet captures

For example, if SNORT is installed under the C:\\SNORT\ directory, enter the following
commands to launch SNORT:
C:\\SNORT\bin\SNORT.exe -c
C:\\SNORT\etc\SNORT.conf -Xeds -K none

6. Specify the working directory for the PCAP-aware tool in the Working Directory text box.
If this field is blank, the default directory is set to the Install_Home\bin directory.
7.

Type the name of the PCAP-aware tool in the Name text box.
This name is displayed in the Management application’s event log to identify a message
showing PCAP activity. If this field is blank, the default name “PcapAppl1” is used.

8. Enter the name of the file that will be used to log the output of the sFlow to PCAP conversion in
the Log File text box.
If this field is blank, the process output is logged to the default “PcapApp1.log file in the
working directory.
9. Click OK.

1214

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

Technical Support

39

In this chapter
• Server and client support save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
• Device technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Server and client support save
You can use Technical Support to collect SupportSave data for the Management server and clients.
Server Support save data includes:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Engineering logs
Events
Configuration files
Operating system-specific information
Environment information
Vital CPU, memory, network resources
Agent and driver logs
Install logs
Core files
Database (partial or full)
Web Tools data

Client Support save data includes:-

• Client Log Files
• Client data model log

Capturing Server and Client support save data
To capture both server and client support save files, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > SupportSave.
The SupportSave dialog box displays.
2. Select the Server SupportSave check box to run supportsave on the server.
3. Enter a file name for the server support save file in the File Name field.
The default file name is DCM-SS-Time_Stamp.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1215

39

Server and client support save

4. Select the Include Database check box to include the database in the support save and
choose one of the following options.

• Select the Partial (Excludes historical performance data and events) option to exclude
historical performance data and events from the database capture.

• Select the Full option to capture the entire database.
Clear the Include Database check box to exclude the database in the support save.
5. Select the Client SupportSave check box to run supportsave on the client.
6. Enter a file name for the client support save file in the File Name field.
The default file name is DCM-Client-SS-Time_Stamp.
7.

Click OK on the SupportSave dialog box.

8. Click OK on the message.
A progress message displays with a list of the steps to be performed:

-

Capturing client support save
Capturing logs and server data
Capturing partial/full database
Capturing data from the products

You cannot close the progress message and you cannot perform any other actions until the
SupportSave is complete.
The application generates separate master logs to show the status of the Server and Client
Support save collection.
You cannot change the destination directory for Server and Client support save. Here are the
default directories:

• Server Support save location: Install_Home/support
• Client Support save locations:
• (Local client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/localhost/support
• (Remote client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/Server IP/support
NOTE

Server support save initiated from the remote client is only available from a client installed on
the server. However, you can copy the server support save from the View Repository dialog box
(using the Save button) to the remote client location.

Capturing Server support save data
To capture server support save files, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > SupportSave.
The SupportSave dialog box displays.
2. Select the Server SupportSave check box to run supportsave on the server.
3. Make sure the Client SupportSave check box is clear.

1216

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Server and client support save

39

4. Enter a file name for the server support save file in the File Name field.
The default file name is DCM-SS-Time_Stamp.
5. Select the Include Database check box to include the database in the support save and
choose one of the following options.

• Select the Partial (Excludes historical performance data and events) option to exclude
historical performance data and events from the database capture.

• Select the Full option to capture the entire database.
NOTE

Selecting the Full option may increase the time needed for the SupportSave to complete.

Clear the Include Database check box to exclude the database in the support save.
6. Click OK on the SupportSave dialog box.
7.

Click OK on the message.
A progress message displays with a list of the steps to be performed:

-

Capturing logs and server data
Capturing partial/full database
Capturing data from the products

You cannot close the progress message and you cannot perform any other actions until the
SupportSave is complete.
The application generates separate master logs to show the status of the Server Support save
collection.

Capturing Client support save data
To capture client support save files, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > SupportSave.
The SupportSave dialog box displays.
2. Select the Client SupportSave check box to run supportsave on the client.
3. Make sure the Server SupportSave check box is clear.
4. Enter a file name for the client support save file in the File Name field.
The default file name is DCM-Client-SS-Time_Stamp.
5. Click OK on the SupportSave dialog box.
6. Click OK on the message.
A progress message displays with a the step to be performed: Capturing client support save.
You cannot close the progress message and you cannot perform any other actions until the
SupportSave is complete.
The application generates separate master logs to show the status of the Client Support save
collection.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1217

39

Server and client support save

Client support save using a command line interface
Use the following procedures to capture client support save files through the command line
interface (CLI).

Capturing client support save using the CLI (Windows)
To capture client support save files through the CLI, complete the following steps.
1. Go to the following location:

• (Local client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/localhost
• (Remote client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/Server IP
2. Run the clientsupportsave.bat file.
3. Define a capture location by typing clientsupportsave  in the CLI. If the path has
spaces, enclose it in double quotes.
By default, the capture location is one of the following:

• (Local client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/localhost
• (Remote client) User_Home/Management_Application_Name/Server IP
4. Use an archive tool to create a ZIP file of the support save.

Capture client support save using the CLI (Linux)
To capture client support save files through the CLI, complete the following steps.
1. Go to /root /Management_Application_Name_Folder/Server IP.
2. Run the clientsupportsave.sh file.
3. Define a capture location by typing sh clientsupportsave  in the CLI. If the path has
spaces, enclose it in double quotes.
By default, the capture location is /root /Management_Application_Name_Folder/Server
IP/support.
4. Use an archive tool to create a ZIP file of the support save.

1218

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

Device technical support
You can use Technical Support to collect SupportSave data (such as, RASLOG, TRACE and so on)
and switch events from Fabric OS, IronWare, and Network OS devices.
To gather technical support information for the Management application server, refer to “Capturing
technical support information” on page 392.

Scheduling technical support information collection
You can capture technical support and event information for up to 50 devices. Technical
SupportSave uses the built-in FTP, SCP, or SFTP server configured on the Management server to
save data. To make sure the built-in FTP, SCP, or SFTP server is configured correctly, refer
to“Configuring an external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server” on page 175.

NOTE
Network OS switches must be running Network OS 2.1.X or later to collect technical support data.

NOTE

The Host must be a managed Brocade HBA.

NOTE
Scheduling technical support data collection is not supported on ESXi Servers.

NOTE
You must have the SupportSave privilege to perform this task. For more information about
privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.
To capture technical support and event information, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > Product/Host SupportSave.
The Technical SupportSave dialog box displays.
2. Click the Schedule tab.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1219

39

Device technical support

FIGURE 507 Technical SupportSave dialog box, Schedule tab
3. Select the Enable scheduled Technical Support Data check box.
4. Select how often you want the scheduled collection to occur from the Frequency list.
5. Select the start date for the scheduled collection from the Start Date list.
This list is only available when you select Weekly or Monthly from the Frequency list.
6. Select the time you want the scheduled collection to begin from the Start Time Hour and
Minute lists.
7.

Click the IP Products tab, if necessary, and complete the following steps.
The Available IP Products table displays the following information:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1220

Group/Product — All discovered devices and ports as both text and icons.
Name — The name of the available product.
IP Address — The switch port’s IP address.
Product Type — The type of product.
Serial # — The serial number of the device.
Status — The operational status of the switch, for example, unknown or marginal.
Vendor — The hardware vendor’s name.
Model — The name and model number of the hardware.
Port Count — The total number of ports.
Firmware — The firmware version.
Build Label — The build version.
Location — The customer site location.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

• Contact — The primary contact at the customer site.
• Description — A description of the customer site.
• Role — A description of the customer site.
a.

Right-click in the Available IP Products table and select Expand All.

b.

Select the products you want to collect data for in the Available IP Products table and click
the right arrow to move them to the Selected Products and Hosts table.

NOTE

For a VCS fabric, SupportSave data is collected for the nodes in the fabric when you create
the schedule. Nodes removed from the fabric at a later date will still be included. Nodes
added to the fabric at a later date will be ignored.
Technical SupportSave data for IronWare and Fabric OS DCB products is saved to the
following directory: Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the IronWare device
support save files: IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address-Time_Stamp.
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the Fabric OS DCB device
support save files from the IP tab: IPProd-DCB-Time_Stamp.
If you select more than one IronWare device for collection, the IronWare device support
save files are saved as individual zip files. However, if you select more than one Fabric OS
DCB device for collection, the DCB device support save files are bundled together in a zip
file.
Technical SupportSave data for Network OS products in either standalone or VCS mode
are saved to the following directory:
Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts\NOS
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the VCS-enabled
Network OS device support save files:
IPProd-Fabric_Name-Seed_Switch_IP-Time_Stamp\IPProd-Fabric_Name-Product_NameProduct_IP-Time_Stamp
A consolidated fabric zip file is created only in the when the Management application is
configure with an internal FTP server.
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming conventions for the standalone
Network OS device support save files:
IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address-Time_Stamp.
If you select more than one standalone Network OS device for SupportSave collection, the
device support save files are saved as individual zip files.
If you select VCS-enabled or Standalone Network OS devices for support save collection
using External FTP or SCP servers, the directory structure is the same as above; however,
the files are not zipped in the External FTP or SCP location.

8. Click the Hosts tab and complete the following steps.
The Available Hosts table displays the following information:

• Name — The name of the available host.
• IP Address — The host port’s IP address.
• Network Address — The network address of the host.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1221

39

Device technical support

• Fabrics — The fabric of the host.
a.

Right-click in the Available Hosts table and select Expand All.

b.

Select the products you want to collect data for in the Available Hosts table and click the
right arrow to move them to the Selected Products and Hosts table.
The Selected Products and Hosts table displays the following information:







IP Address — The IP address of the selected product or host. For VCS-enabled
product’s, the IP address of the selected node.
Name — The name of the selected product or host. For VCS-enabled product’s, the
Principal_Switch_Name-Product_Name of the selected node.
WWN — The world wide name of the selected product or host. For VCS-enabled
product’s, the world wide name of the selected node.
Firmware Type — The type of firmware: IOS (IronWare)or NOS (Network OS).
Firmware version — The firmware version of the selected product or host. For
VCS-enabled product’s, the firmware version of the selected node.
Support Save Credentials — Whether the product or host has supportSave credentials
or not.

Technical SupportSave data for IP products is saved to the following directory:
FTP_Host\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts
9. Select how often you want to purge the support data from the Purge Support Data list.
10. Click OK on the Technical SupportSave dialog box.
11. Click OK on the confirmation message.
Data collection may take 20-30 minutes for each selected switch. This estimate may increase
depending on the number of switches selected. Check the Master Log for status information.

NOTE

Unreachable switches increase the time needed to collect supportSave data.

Starting immediate technical support information collection
Technical SupportSave uses the built-in FTP, SCP, or SFTP server configured on the Management
server to save data. To make sure the built-in FTP, SCP, or SFTP server is configured correctly, refer
to“Configuring an external FTP, SCP, or SFTP server” on page 175.

NOTE
Fabric OS switches must be running Fabric OS 5.2.X or later to collect technical support data.

NOTE

Network OS switches must be running Network OS 2.1.X or later to collect technical support data.

NOTE

The HBA must be a managed Brocade HBA.

NOTE

You must have the SupportSave privilege to perform this task. For more information about
privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

1222

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

To capture technical support and event information for specified devices, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > Product/Host SupportSave.
The Technical SupportSave dialog box displays.
2. Click the Generate Now tab, if necessary.

FIGURE 508 Technical SupportSave dialog box, Generate Now tab
3. Click the IP Products tab, if necessary, and complete the following steps.
a.

Right-click in the Available IP Products table and select Expand All.

b.

Select the products you want to collect data for in the Available IP Products table and click
the right arrow to move them to the Selected Products and Hosts table.
Technical SupportSave data for IronWare and Fabric OS DCB products is saved to the
following directory: Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the IronWare device
support save files: IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address-Time_Stamp.
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the Fabric OS DCB device
support save files from the IP tab: IPProd-DCB-Time_Stamp.
If you select more than one IronWare device for collection, the IronWare device support
save files are saved as individual zip files. However, if you select more than one Fabric OS
DCB device for collection, the DCB device support save files are bundled together in a zip
file.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1223

39

Device technical support

Technical SupportSave data for Network OS products in either standalone or VCS mode
are saved to the following directory:
Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts\NOS
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming convention for the VCS-enabled
Network OS device support save files:
IPProd-Fabric_Name-Seed_Switch_IP-Time_Stamp\IPProd-Fabric_Name-Product_NameProduct_IP-Time_Stamp
A consolidated fabric zip file is created only in the when the Management application is
configure with an internal FTP server.
Technical SupportSave uses the following naming conventions for the standalone
Network OS device support save files:
IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address-Time_Stamp.
If you select more than one standalone Network OS device for SupportSave collection, the
device support save files are saved as individual zip files.
If you select VCS-enabled or Standalone Network OS devices for support save collection
using External FTP or SCP servers, the directory structure is the same as above; however,
the files are not zipped in the External FTP or SCP location.
4. Click the Hosts tab, if necessary, and complete the following steps.
a.

Right-click in the Available Hosts table and select Expand All.

b.

Select the hosts you want to collect data for in the Available Hoststable and click the right
arrow to move them to the Selected Products and Hosts table.
Technical SupportSave data for IP products is saved to the following directory:
FTP_Host\ftproot\technicalsupport\ipproducts

5. Click OK on the Technical SupportSave dialog box.
Data collection may take 20-30 minutes for each selected switch. This estimate my increase
depending on the number of switches selected.
The Technical SupportSave Status dialog box displays with the following details.
Field

Description

Name

The name of the product.
For VCS-enabled product’s, the Principla_Switch_Name-Product_Name of the
selected node.

IP Address

The product’s IP address.
For VCS-enabled product’s, the IP address of the selected node.

Firmware Type

The type of product.

Progress

The status of the supportsave. On products running Fabric OS 7.0 or later, this field
shows the percentage complete and is updated every minute. For IronWareand Host
products, as well as Fabric OS products running 6.4 or earlier, this field cannot
display the percentatge (only displays whether it is ‘in Progress’ or’ Completed’).

Status

The status of the support save, for example, Ceases or Failure.

6. Click Close on the Technical SupportSave Status dialog box.

1224

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

Viewing the technical support repository
You can only view technical support save files that are captured in the default location. Table 99
details the default locations for the technical support save files.

TABLE 99

Technical support save defaults

Type

Default location

Default naming convention

Client SupportSave

User_Home/ServerIP/Managed Product
Name/support

DCM-Client-SS-Time_Stamp

Server SupportSave

Install_Home\support

DCM-SS-Time_Stamp

Host (discovered
from the IP tab)

Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\
host

IPProd-DCB-Time_Stamp

IronWare Product

Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\
ipproducts

IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address
-Time_Stamp

Auto Trace Dump

Install_Home\data\ftproot\tracedump\

Standalone
Network OS devices

Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\i
pproducts\NOS

IPProd-Device_Display_Name-IP_Address
-Time_Stamp

VCS-enabled
Network OS devices

Install_Home\data\ftproot\technicalsupport\i
pproducts\NOS

IPProd-Fabric_Name-Seed_Switch_IPTime_Stamp\IPProd-Fabric_NameProduct_Name-Product_IP-Time_Stamp

To view the technical support repository, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > View Repository.
The Technical Support Repository dialog box displays.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1225

39

Device technical support

2. Review the techncial support repository details:
Field/Component

Description

Available SupportSave
table

Select the support data file you want to view. Displays the following
information:
File Name — The name of the SupportSave file.
Size (MB) — The name of the SupportSave file.
Last Modified — The date the SupportSave file was generated.
Firmware Type — The type of file (Client, Server, FOS (Fabric OS), IOS
(IronWare), NOS (Network OS), ). Blank for Host support save files.

E-mail button

Click to e-mail the support data file. For the procedure, refer to
“E-mailing technical support information” on page 1227.

FTP button

Click to copy the support data file to an external FTP server. For the
procedure, refer to “Copying technical support information to an
external FTP server” on page 1227.

Save button

Click to save a copy of the support data. For the procedure, refer to
“Saving technical support information to another location” on
page 1226.

Delete button

Click to delete the support data file. For the procedure, refer to “Deleting
technical support files from the repository” on page 1228.

3. Click OK on the Technical Support Repository dialog box.

Saving technical support information to another location
To save technical support information to a location other than the default, complete the following
steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > View Repository.
The Technical Support Repository dialog box displays.
2. Select a device support save file and click Save.
The Save dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the support file.
4. Click Save on the Save dialog box.
5. Click OK on the message.
6. Click OK on the Technical Support Repository dialog box.

1226

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

E-mailing technical support information
NOTE
You cannot e-mail technical support information collected from the remote client.
To e-mail technical support information, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > View Repository.
The Technical Support Repository dialog box displays.
2. Select the file you want to e-mail in the table.
3. Click E-mail to e-mail the event and supportsave files (zip).

NOTE

The E-mail button is unavailable from the remote client.
You must configure the Management application e-mail server before you can define the
e-mail action. For more information, refer to .
The E-mail dialog box displays.
4. Enter the e-mail address of the person to receive the e-mail in the To field.
5. Enter your e-mail address in the From field.
6. Click OK.
The e-mail is sent and the Technical Support Repository dialog box closes automatically.

Copying technical support information to an
external FTP server
NOTE
You cannot copy technical support information to an external FTP server collected from the remote
client.
To copy the SupportSave data located in the built-in FTP server to an external FTP server, complete
the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > View Repository.
The Technical Support Repository dialog box displays.
2. Select the file you want to copy in the table.
3. Click FTP to send the switch event and supportsave files (zip) by FTP.

NOTE

The FTP button is unavailable from the remote client.
The FTP Credentials dialog box displays.
4. Enter the network address or domain name of the external FTP server in the Network Address
field.
5. Enter your user name and password.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1227

39

Device technical support

6. Enter the destination directory where you want to copy the data on the external FTP server in
the Destination Directory field.
The destination directory should be the sub directory of the external FTP server’s root directory.
For example, if you enter “repository” as the destination directory, then the support save file is
copied to the “/repository” directory of the external FTP server.
7.

Click OK.
The data is copied and the Technical Support Repository dialog box closes automatically.

Deleting technical support files from the repository
To delete a technical support file from the repository, complete the following steps.
1. Select Monitor > Technical Support > View Repository.
The Technical Support Repository dialog box displays.
2. Select the file you want to delete in the table.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the Technical Support Repository dialog box.

1228

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Device technical support

39

5.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1229

39

1230

Device technical support

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Chapter

40

Reports

In this chapter
• Reports overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Viewing IP reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exporting and saving IP reports to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP report contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Wired Products report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Module report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Port VLANs report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Layer 3 VLAN report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Subnet report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Address report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MAC Address report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Physical Ports - Realtime report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP Deployment reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Reports Template Manager overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1231
1231
1232
1232
1233
1233
1240
1241
1241
1242
1243
1243
1244
1246
1247

Reports overview
Reports are available from the Reports menu. You must have the Reports privilege to access the
reports. For more information about privileges, refer to ““User Privileges” on page 1283.

Browser requirements
IP reports display in a web browser. Reports are supported in the following browsers:

• Windows Internet Explorer 9 or 10 on Windows
• Firefox 19 on Windows or Linux
• Google Chrome

Viewing IP reports
Reports are available from the Reports menu. You must have the Reports privilege to access the
reports. For more information about privileges, refer to “User Privileges” on page 1283.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1231

40

Exporting and saving IP reports to a file

• Click the Reports button on the menu bar to display the report options.
• Click a report option to display the report that you want.
NOTE
ATM ports are not displayed in the reports. The ATM module may appear in the reports, but the
modules will be listed as having no ports.

Exporting and saving IP reports to a file
You can save a report to a CSV (comma seperated values) or HTML file. Each report has an Export
list at the top right corner of the page.
1. Select one of the following from the Export list:

• Select Export as HTML.
• Select Export as CSV.
2. Browse to the location where you want to save the file and click Save.

Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients
You can e-mail a report in a CSV or HTML file format. To export reports to an e-mail recipient, you
must configure e-mail event notification (refer to “Configuring e-mail notification” on page 1142).
If you want to export the report to an e-mail recipient, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following from the E-mail list:

• Select E-mail as HTML.
• Select E-mail as CSV.
The Report via E-mail dialog box displays (Figure 509).

FIGURE 509 Report via E-Mail dialog box
2. Click the ellipsis button next to the E-mail Recipients field.

1232

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP report contents

40

The Users dialog box displays.
3. Select the preconfigured e-mail user account from the list and click OK.
4. Enter additional e-mail addresses in the Other Recipients field.
5. Enter text in the Subject field to change the subject of the e-mail.
6. Enter text in the Body field to send a message with the report.
7.

Click Send to send the report.

NOTE

Mozilla Firefox Browser does not support the window close script.
Click the browser close button (X) to cancel.

IP report contents
Each report contains the following information:

• The name of the report displays at the top of the report.
• Data is presented in a tabular format.
• The Export and E-mail buttons in the top right corner of the report allows you to save the report
to a file or e-mail the report. You can use an application that supports comma-separated
values (CSV) or HTML to view the saved file.

IP Wired Products report
The Wired Products report displays general and detailed configuration information about wired
products that are under the management server.
The information on the report comes from the software image version that is in the management
application for that product. To ensure that the latest configuration information is in the
management application, run the discovery process or resynchronize the product.
To view the Wired Products List, select Reports > Wired Products from the main menu.
The Wired Products List displays (Figure 510).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1233

40

IP Wired Products report

FIGURE 510 Wired Product List
The Wired Products report contains the fields and components detailed in Table 100.

TABLE 100

Field/Component

Description

Wired Products Count

The number of wired products in the report.

Product Status

Whether the product is reachable (green icon), marginal (
(
), unhealthy (
), or not reachable (
).

Name

The name of the product. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed Product
Report.

VCS Name

The name of the VCS product. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed Cluster
Report.

RBridge ID

The RBridge ID of the VCS product.

IP Address

The IP address of the product. Click the IP address of a product to launch the Web
Element Manager. This is not supported on VDX devices.

Product Type

The type of product.

Serial Number

The serial number of the product.

Admin Status

1234

Wired Products report fields and components

), degraded link (

), down

The administrative status of the product. Possible status includes:
Normal — The product is in normal operating mode.
Troubleshooting — The product is in troubleshooting mode.

•
•

Model

The model of the product.

Firmware

The firmware level of the product.

Contact

The contact name for the product.

Location

The location of the product.

Last Scanned

The date and time, including time zone, the product was scanned last.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Wired Products report

TABLE 100

40

Wired Products report fields and components (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Export button

Click to export the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting and saving IP reports
to a file” on page 1232.

E-mail button

Click to e-mail the report. For more information, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail
recipients” on page 1232.

Detailed Product Report
To view the details of a Wired Products report, click the name of a wired product in the Wired
Products report. To launch the Detailed Product Report from the topology, right-click the product on
the Network Objects, L2 Topology, Ethernet Fabrics, IP Topology, or VLAN Topology view and select
Detailed Report.

NOTE
This report is not available for VCS clusters.
The Detailed Product Report displays (Table 101).

TABLE 101

Detailed Product Report fields and components

Field/Component
System Information

Stacking Units

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Description
System information includes the following:
Alias Name — An optional name that is entered using the Properties dialog box. It
provides an alternate name for the product if you want to override the Host Name
and System Name values.
• Host Name — The name that the Management application obtains from the product
during discovery. This may be the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the product,
but may come from other naming services, depending on the configuration of the
operating system on which the Management application is running.
• System Name — The name the Management application retrieves from the
"sysName" SNMP MIB variable during discovery. This name corresponds to the
value specified by the hostname command in the product configuration file.
The Management application displays the first name it finds for the product in the
following order: Alias Name, Host Name, System Name. The Alias Name takes
precedence over Host Name, which takes precedence over System Name, and so
on.
• Contact — A contact name for the product.
• Location — The location of the product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product. A serial number is not displayed
for products that support stacking. Serial numbers for these products are displayed
under the Stacking Units table.
• Description — A description of the product.

•

This section only displays if the product is configured as a stacked device. It includes the
following:
• Unit — The ID of the unit on the stack.
• Present — Whether the stacked device is physically present.
• Role — The role of the unit.
• Model — The model number of the stacked device.
• Firmware — The firmware level of the stacked device.
• Priority — The priority bit of the stacked device.
• Description — A description of the stacked device.

1235

40

IP Wired Products report

TABLE 101

Detailed Product Report fields and components (Continued)

Stacking Port Realtime
Admin Status

Modules

1236

The name of the stacked device with drill-down support. When you click on the name, the
“IP Stacking Ports - Realtime report” launches (refer to “IP Stacking Ports - Realtime
report” on page 1244).
Admin status information includes the following:
Status — Whether the product is in normal operating mode or troubleshooting
mode.
• Status Last Updated — When the last status update occurred.
• Memo — A memo for the product.
• Memo Last Updated — When the last memo update occurred.

•

Module information shows what modules are installed on the product.
Unit/Slot Number — For products that support stacking, you can view the unit
number and slot number.
Slot Number — For products that do not support stacking, you can view the slot
number.
• Type — For wireless products, the type shows the model name of the product. For
wired products, the type of module installed in the slot.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the module.
For wired products, the serial number cell may be blank.
• Ports — The number of ports on the product.
The number of ports for ATM modules displays as zero.
• Present — Whether the module is still installed on the product.

•

IP Addresses

The IP addresses of each interface, including the virtual routing interface on wired
products. For Layer 2 switches, the management IP address displays in the IP Addresses
table with "management" in the Interface column.
• Port — The port number.
• IP Address — The IP address.
• Subnet Mask — The subnet mask number.
• VRF — The virtual routing interface.

Ethernet Ports

Physical port information for each port on the product. The identifier, interface name,
type, speed, physical address (displays as 0000.0000.0000 for module interfaces),
name, VLAN tag mode (tagged, untagged, dual, or blank), and duplex mode of the
physical interfaces on the product.
• Identifier — The port identifier.
• Port Name — The port name.
• Type — The type of port.
• Speed (Mbps) — The speed of the port.
• MAC Address — The MAC address of the port.
• Name — The name of the port.
• Tag Mode — The tag mode of the port.
• Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the port.
• MCT Client Name — The client name of the MCT switch.
• Role — The role of the port, such as ICL or MCT.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Wired Products report

TABLE 101

40

Detailed Product Report fields and components (Continued)

Cluster (MCT switches
only)

Cluster Peer (MCT
switches only)

Cluster information for a Multi-Chassis Trunk (MCT) switch. Information includes:
Cluster ID — The MCT cluster ID.
Cluster Name — The MCT cluster name.
Cluster State — Whether the MCT cluster is deployed or undeployed.
Client Isolation Mode — Whether isolation mode is loose or strict.
Active Member VLAN Range — The active member VLAN for data.
Configured Member VLAN Range — The configured member VLAN for data.
Keep Alive VLAN — An alternate VLAN for Cluster Communication Protocol (CCP)
when the Inter-Chassis Link (ICL) is down.
• Session VLAN — The VLAN used by the cluster for control operations.
• ICL Name — The ICL name.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Cluster peer information for a Multi-Chassis Trunk (MCT) switch. Information includes:
Peer Product — The name and IP address of the MCT peer product.
Peer IP Address — The VE interface IP address of the MCT peer.
Peer RBridge ID — The RBridge ID of the MCT peer.
ICL Name — The name of the ICL used to reach the MCT peer.
Keep Alive Interval — The interval time for CCP over the keep-alive VLAN.
Hold Time — The hold-time before making the CCP down state when ICL goes down.
Fast Failover — Whether fast failover is enabled or disabled.
Active VLAN Range — The active member VLAN for data.
Peer State — Whether the peer state is CCP up or CCP down.
Peer State Up Time — How long the peer has been up.
Peer State Down Reason — The reason the peer is down.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Physical Ports Realtime

The name of the device with drill-down support. When you click on the name, the “IP
Physical Ports - Realtime report” launches (refer to “IP Physical Ports - Realtime report”
on page 1244).

GRE Tunnels

Information on any GRE tunnel on the product. Information includes the following:
• Identifier — The GRE tunnel identifier.
• Name — The name of the GRE tunnel.

Controller Cluster

Cluster information for a wireless controller. Information includes:
• Cluster Name — The cluster name.
• Cluster Mode — The cluster mode. Options include Active and Standby.
• Cluster members — The IP address of the controllers in cluster mode.

Virtual Interfaces

Information on any virtual interface on the product.

Loopback Interfaces

Information on any loopback interface on the product.

Chassis Inventory

Information for fans, power supplies, sensors, and other chassis components on
third-party products. Information is displayed for a third-party product if the product
supports the ENTITY MIB.
• Type — The chassis model.
• Name — The name of the chassis.
• Description — A description of the product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product.

Software Licenses

The name of the software licenses assigned to the product.
• Package Name — The name of the license.
• License Id — The license on the product.
• License Type — The type of license (trial or normal).
• Expiry Date — Whether the license is expired or unlimited.
• Precedence — The precedence of the license.
• Status — The status of the license (expired or active).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1237

40

IP Wired Products report

TABLE 101

Detailed Product Report fields and components (Continued)

AP List Count

Access Point information for wireless controllers. The table title includes the number of
access points attached to the selected device. Information includes:
• Product Status — Whether the AP is online (green icon), offline (red icon), or pending
adoption (gray icon).
• Name — The device name used to identify AP.
• Connected Switch — IP address of the controller or switch connected to the AP. Also
displays the port number if the AP is directly connected.
• Controller — IP address of the controller which manages the AP. Also displays the
port number if the AP is directly connected.
• Cluster Name — The controller cluster name. Click to view the controller cluster
details.
• Controller — Cluster information for a wireless controller. Information includes:
• Cluster Name — The cluster name.
• Cluster Mode — The cluster mode of the AP. Options include Active and
Standby.
• Cluster members — The IP address of the controllers in cluster mode.
• MAC Address — The AP device MAC address.
• Model — The model of the AP.
• Profile Name — The AP profile name.
• RF Domain Name — The RF domain name set for the AP.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the AP.
• Firmware — The firmware level of the AP.
• Client count — The number of wireless clients or stations connected or associated
to the AP.
• Last scanned — The last time the APs were scanned.

Detailed Cluster Report
NOTE

This report is only available for VCS clusters.
To launch the Detailed Cluster Report from the topology, right-click the VCS cluster on the Network
Objects, L2 Topology, Ethernet Fabrics, IP Topology, or VLAN Topology view and select Detailed
Report.
The Detailed Cluster Report displays (Table 102).

TABLE 102

Detailed Cluster Report fields and components

Field/Component

1238

Description

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Wired Products report

TABLE 102

40

Detailed Cluster Report fields and components (Continued)

System Information

Nodes

Admin Status

Modules

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

System information includes the following:
Alias Name — An optional name that is entered using the Properties dialog box. It
provides an alternate name for the product if you want to override the Host Name
and System Name values.
• Host Name — The name that the Management application obtains from the product
during discovery. This may be the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the product,
but may come from other naming services, depending on the configuration of the
operating system on which the Management application is running.
• System Name — The name the Management application retrieves from the
"sysName" SNMP MIB variable during discovery. This name corresponds to the
value specified by the hostname command in the product configuration file.
The Management application displays the first name it finds for the product in the
following order: Alias Name, Host Name, System Name. The Alias Name takes
precedence over Host Name, which takes precedence over System Name, and so
on.
• Config Mode — The configuration mode.
• Node Count — The number of nodes in the fabric.
• Status — The status of the product.
• Contact — A contact name for the product.
• Location — The location of the product.
• Description — A description of the product

•

Node information includes the following:
• Name — The name of the node. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed
Product Report.
• IP Address — The IP address of the product.
• Product Type — The type of product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product.
• RBridge ID — The RBridge ID number of the product.
• Status — The status of the product.
• Model — The model of the product.
• Firmware — The firmware level of the product.
• Fabric Ports — The number of fabric ports on the product.
• Edge Ports — The number of edge ports on the product.
Admin status information includes the following:
Name — The name of the product. Click the name of a product to launch the
Detailed Product Report.
• Status — Whether the product is in normal operating mode or troubleshooting
mode.
• Status Last Updated — When the last status update occurred.
• Memo — A memo for the product.
• Memo Last Updated — When the last memo update occurred.

•

Module information shows what modules are installed on the product.
Unit/Slot Number — For products that support stacking, you can view the unit
number and slot number.
Slot — For products that do not support stacking, you can view the slot number.
• Type — For wireless products, the type shows the model name of the product. For
wired products, the type of module installed in the slot.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the module.
For wired products, the serial number cell may be blank.
• Ports — The number of ports on the product.
The number of ports for ATM modules displays as zero.
• Present — Whether the module is still installed on the product.

•

1239

40

IP Module report

TABLE 102

Detailed Cluster Report fields and components (Continued)

IP Addresses

Ethernet Ports

FC Ports

The IP addresses of each interface, including the virtual routing interface on wired
products. For Layer 2 switches, the management IP address displays in the IP Addresses
table with "management" in the Interface column.
• Port — The port number.
• IP Address — The IP address.
• Subnet Mask — The subnet mask number.
• VRF — The virtual routing interface.
This table contains the following information for each Ethernet interface on the product:
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Name — The port name.
Name — The name of the port.
MAC Address — The MAC address of the port.
Type — The type of port.
Speed (Mbps) — The speed of the port.
Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the port.
Tag Mode — The tag mode of the port.
Role — The role (edge or fabric) of the port.
Profile Mode — Whether profile mode is enabled or disabled.
Active Profile — The active profile of the port.
Attached MAC — The MAC address of a device attached to the port.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This table contains the following information for each FC interface on the product:
Identifier — The port identifier.
Port Name — The port name.
Port WWN — The world wide name of the port.
Area ID/Port Index — The area identifier and port index of the port.
Type — The type of port.
Port Speed (Gb/s) — The speed of the port.
Trunked — Whether the port is trunked.
Trunk Index — The trunk index of the port.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Physical Ports Realtime

The name of the device with drill-down support. When you click on the name, the “IP
Physical Ports - Realtime report” launches (refer to “IP Physical Ports - Realtime report”
on page 1244).

Physical Media Realtime

The name of the device with drill-down support. When you click on the name, the “IP
Physical Media - Realtime report” launches (refer to “IP Physical Media - Realtime report”
on page 1245).

Software Licenses

The name of the software licenses assigned to the product.
• Name — The name of the node.
• Licensed Feature — The licensed feature on the node.
• License Key — The license key for the feature (displays as asterisks).

IP Module report
The Module List report presents the modules installed in discovered IronWare or third-party
products and in which products they are installed.
The Module List report has the parameters described in Table 103.

1240

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Port VLANs report

TABLE 103

40

Module List report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Description

The type of module installed.

Serial Number

The serial number of the module.

Product

The host name of the product where the module is installed. This name can be set
from the CLI. Click the name of the product to display the Detailed Product Report.

VCS Name

The name of the VCS fabric.

[Unit/]Slot No

The slot on the product where the module is installed. If the product supports
stacking, the slot is shown in the [unit#/]slot# format.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
serial number, click the Serial Number column header.

IP Port VLANs report
A list of port VLANs configured on IronWare or third-party products is available in the Port VLANs
report. Lists of protocol VLANs are available in the port VLAN structure. For IronWare and Network
OS products, these reports reflect the VLAN information available in VLAN Manager.
To access the Port VLANs report, select Reports > VLANs.
To display information about a VLAN, click its ID. The Port VLANs report has the parameters
described in Table 104.

TABLE 104

Port VLANs report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Port VLAN Information

This section contains the Layer 3 VLANs list, which displays links to protocol VLANs
associated with the port VLAN.

Ports in Port VLAN #:

This section shows the following information:
Product — The name of the products that have ports belonging to the VLAN.
For VCS fabric members, displays the VCS IP address with the name of the
products that have ports belonging to the VLAN.
• Interface — The port number or slot number that belongs to the VLAN.
• Interface Name — The name of the interface.
• Tag Mode — Whether the port is tagged, untagged, dual, or blank.
• PVLAN Type — The PVLAN type.

•

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
tag mode, click the Tag Mode column header.

IP Layer 3 VLAN report
The Layer 3 VLAN report contains links to lists of protocol VLANs associated with a port VLAN. To
view the list of protocol VLANs, click a link under the Layer 3 VLANs section of the Port VLANs
report. The Layer 3 VLAN report displays.
If the report is empty, then there are no protocol VLANs that have been configured for the port
VLAN. The Layer 3 VLAN report has the parameters described in Table 105.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1241

40

IP Subnet report

TABLE 105

Layer 3 VLAN report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Protocol VLANs in Port VLAN

This section lists the details of protocol VLANs configured under the port VLAN.

IP Subnet VLANs in Port
VLAN #

Several sections on the report display the subnet VLANs that have been configured
under the port VLAN.

If any protocol or subnet VLANs have been configured under the protocol VLAN, you can click the
Details link for that VLAN to find out more information for that VLAN.

IP Subnet report
The IP Subnet report displays the list of IP subnets discovered on the network. To appear on this
list, the subnet must contain at least one discovered product.
To view the IP Subnet report, select Reports > IP Subnet Reports. The IP Subnet report has the
parameters described in Table 106.

TABLE 106

IP Subnet report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

IP Address

The list of IP subnets discovered on the network. These address are listed in
numerical order.

Subnet Mask

The mask of the subnet.

Products

A link to a list of products in the subnet.

To determine which products belong to a subnet, click the Products link for that subnet. For
example, clicking products for the IP subnet 112.112.112.0 displays the Product List by IP Subnet
report. The Product List by IP Subnet report has the parameters described in Table 107.

TABLE 107

Product List by IP Subnet report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Name

The name of the products that belong to the subnet. Click to launch the Detailed
Product Report.

IP address

The IP address of the product. Click to launch the Web Element Manager.
Web Element Manager is not supported on VDX devices.

Image Version

The version of the software image running on the product.

Product Type

The product type.

Contact

The name of the person to call about the product.

Location

The location of the product.

Last Scanned

The date and time, including time zone, the product was last scanned for the latest
software image by discovery.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header.

NOTE

You cannot access EdgeIron products from this report.

1242

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Address report

40

IP Address report
The IP Address report displays all discovered IP addresses of wired products on the network.
To view the IP Address report, select Reports > IP Address Report. The IP Address report has the
parameters described in Table 108.

TABLE 108

IP Address report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

IP Address

The IP address of the product, access point, or interface. These addresses are in
numerical order. Click to launch the Web Element Manager.
Web Element Manager is not supported on VDX devices.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask associated with the IP address.

Product

The host name of the product on which the IP address is configured. The name of
the product has a hyperlink that displays detailed product information.

VCS Name

The name of the VCS fabric. Click to display the detailed fabric report.

Identifier

The port number or slot number and port number on which the IP address is
configured.

Port Name

The port name.

MAC Address

The MAC address of the product, access point, or interface.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
subnet mask, click the Subnet Mask column header.

MAC Address report
The MAC Address report shows the MAC addresses of wired products that have been discovered on
the network.
Display the report by selecting Reports > MAC Addresses. The MAC Address report has the
parameters described in Table 109.

TABLE 109

MAC Address report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

MAC Address

The MAC address of the interface.

Product

The name of the product to which the MAC address belongs. The name of the
product has a hyperlink that displays detailed product information.

VCS Name

The name of the VCS fabric. Click to display the detailed fabric report.

Port

The port number or slot number and port number to which the MAC address
belongs.

Attached Device (MAC)

(FCoE devices only) The device name and MAC address for connected devices.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
port number, click the Port column header.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1243

40

IP Physical Ports - Realtime report

IP Physical Ports - Realtime report
The Physical Ports - Realtime report shows the status of physical interfaces of products that have
been discovered on the network.
To display the report, choose one of the following options;

• Right-click the device in the IP Products dialog box and select Physical Ports Report.
• Right-click the device on the Network Objects, L2 Topology, Ethernet Fabrics, IP Topology, or
VLAN Topology view and select Physical Ports Report.

• From the Detailed Product Report, click the device name in the Physical Ports - Realtime table.
• From the Detailed Fabric Report, click the device name in the Physical Ports - Realtime table.
The Physical Ports - Realtime report has the parameters described in Table 110.

TABLE 110

Physical Ports - Realtime report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Identifier

A unique identifier for each port on the device. The identifier includes the module,
slot, and interface.

Administrative Status

The administrative status of the port.

Operational Status

The operational status of the port.

PoE Control

Displays the PoE status of the port.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
administrative status, click the Administrative Status column header.

IP Stacking Ports - Realtime report
The Stacking Ports - Realtime report shows the stacking port and neighbor port details.
To display the report, from the Detailed Product Report, click the device name in the Stacking Ports
- Realtime table.
The Stacking Ports - Realtime report has the parameters described in Table 111.

TABLE 111

1244

Stacking Ports - Realtime report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Stacking Port Connections

Identifies the connected ports to the neighbor port and the unused ports of the
stacked units.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP Physical Media - Realtime report

40

IP Physical Media - Realtime report
The Physical Media - Realtime report shows the port optics (SFP) details of Network OS devices.
To display the report, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click the device on the topology and select Detailed Report.
2. Click the device name in the Physical Media - Realtime table.
The Physical Media - Realtime report has the parameters described in Table 112.

TABLE 112

Physical Media - Realtime report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Identifier

A unique identifier for each port on the device. The identifier includes the module,
slot, and interface.

Tx Power

The transmit power.

Rx Power

The receive power.

Transceiver Temp(C)

The temperature of the transceiver

Voltage (mVolts)

The voltage of the SFP.

Transceiver Current
(mAmps)

The transceiver current.

Speed (MB/s)

The speed in megabits per second.

Distance

The distance of the SFP.

Vendor

The vendor of the SFP.

Vendor OUI

The vendor’s Organizationally Unique Identifier from a MAC address.

Vendor PN

The vendor’s part number.

Vendor REV

The vendor’s REV.

Serial #

The serial number of the SFP.

Date Code

The date code of the SFP.

Media Form Factor

The media form factor of the SFP.

Connector

The connector type.

Wave Length (nm)

The wave length of the SFP.

Encoding

The transceiver encoding method of the SFP.

You can sort the report by clicking on a column header. For example, if you want to sort the table by
the identifier, click the column header.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1245

40

IP Deployment reports

IP Deployment reports
Deployment reports provide information about deployments performed from the Management
application. These deployments include device configuration deployments, software image
backups, Realm Manager deployments, and configuration backups. The reports are available in
case administrators want to know whether a deployment succeeded or failed.
Deployment reports are not available for third-party devices.

Viewing a deployment report
1. Select Reports > Deployment.
The Configurations report displays in the web browser with the following details:

• User list — Select one of the following options:
All — Select to see deployments for all users.
 System User — Select to see deployments for the system user only.
 Current User — Select to see deployments for the current user only.
Show auto registration events check box — Select to show auto registration events.


•
• User — Name of the user that performed the deployment.
• Configuration Name — Name of the deployment.

2. Click the link in the Configuration Name column to display the details of the deployment.
The Configuration Deployment Report displays in the web browser with the following details:

•
•
•
•

Configuration Name — Name of the deployment.
Deployment Time — Time when the deployment occurred.
User — Name of the user that performed the deployment.
Status — Status of the deployment.

If you select a report where all devices in that deployment have been deleted, an “associated
devices removed” message displays.
3. Click the link in the Deployment Time column to display the details of the deployment.
The Detailed Configuration Deployment Report displays in the web browser with the following
details:

•
•
•
•

Configuration — Name of the deployment.
Product — Product on which the deployment occurred.
Status — Status of the deployment.
Error — Any error messages.

4. To export a report to a file, refer to “Exporting and saving IP reports to a file” on page 1232.
5. To e-mail a report, refer to “Exporting IP reports to e-mail recipients” on page 1232.
6. To configure how often to purge deployment reports, refer to “Configuring deployment report
preferences” on page 161

1246

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

40

Reports Template Manager overview
The Report Template Manager enables you to run, import, export, or delete preconfigured and
user-defined reports.

Preconfigured reports
The Management application provides four preconfigured reports:

• Products List — This report displays general and detailed configuration information about
products discovered by the Management application. For more information, refer to “IP Wired
Products report” on page 1233.

• Detailed Product Report — This report displays configuration information about a specific
product. For more information, refer to “Detailed Product Report” on page 1235.

• Detailed Cluster Report — This report displays configuration information about a VCS cluster.
For more information, refer to “Detailed Cluster Report” on page 1255.

• Ports Tx/Rx Ratio — This report displays the ratio between transmitted and received data on a
port or group of ports for the specified parameters. For more information, refer to “Ports Tx/Rx
Ratio report” on page 1257.

• Low Traffic Ports — This report displays the percentage of data transmitted and received on
ports for the specified parameters. For more information, refer to “Low Traffic Ports report” on
page 1259.

User-defined reports
You can create user-defined reports using BIRT (Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools) report
designer version 4.2.1 or later, a third-party open source reporting tool.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1247

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Accessing the Report Template Manager
1. Select Reports > Report Manager.
The Report Template Manager dialog box displays (Figure 511).

FIGURE 511 Report Template Manager dialog box
The Report Template Manager dialog box includes the following fields and components:

• Report Templates table — Lists all reports.
Title — The title of the report, which must be unique.
File — The file name of the report, which must be unique.
 Last Modified By — The user (for example, System or Administrator) who modified the
report last.
 Last Modified At — The date and time the report was modified last.
Import button — Click to import a report template (refer to “Importing a report template” on
page 1250).



•

• Export button — Click to export a report template (refer to “Exporting a report template” on
page 1250).

• Delete button — Click to delete a report (refer to “Deleting reports” on page 1250).
• Run button — Click to run a report (refer to “Viewing a report” on page 1249).
2. Click OK to close the Report Template Manager dialog box.

1248

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

40

Viewing a report
1. Select Reports > Report Manager.
The Report Template Manager dialog box displays.
2. Select the report you want to run in the Report Templates table.
3. Click Run.
If one or more parameters are required for the report, the Parameter dialog box displays
(Figure 512).

FIGURE 512 Parameter dialog box
4. Enter the parameters (such as IP address, source port name, or destination port name).

NOTE

The parameter fields cannot be empty.
The source and destination port names can use the SQL wildcard character “%”.
5. Click OK.
The report displays. For more information about report content and functions, refer to “Report
content and functions” on page 1251.
6. Click OK to close the Report Template Manager dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1249

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Importing a report template
You can use the BIRT report designer to create user-defined report templates that you can then
import into Report Template Manager.
1. Select Reports > Report Manager.
The Report Template Manager dialog box displays.
2. Click Import.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Browse to the location from which you want to import the report and click Open.
If a report with the same file name already exists, click Yes on the overwrite message to
overwrite the report.
If the title for the imported report already exists or the report does not have a title, an Edit
Report Title dialog box displays. Enter a new title for the report and click OK.
4. Click OK to close the Report Template Manager dialog box.

Exporting a report template
You can export a preconfigured or user-defined report template and use the BIRT report designer
to modify the report that you can then reimport into Report Template Manager.
1. Select Reports > Report Manager.
The Report Template Manager dialog box displays.
2. Click Export.
The Save dialog box displays. If you want to change the name of the report, change the name
of the file in the File Name field.
3. Browse to the location to which you want to export the report and click Save.
If a report with the same file name already exists, click Yes on the overwrite message to
overwrite the report.
When the export is complete, click OK on the successful export message.
4. Click OK to close the Report Template Manager dialog box.

Deleting reports
You can delete preconfigured and user-defined reports. If you delete a preconfigured report, and
then reimport it, the preconfigured report works as if it is a user-defined report.
1. Select Reports > Report Manager.
The Report Template Manager dialog box displays.
2. Select one or more reports and click Delete.
For preconfigured reports, click Yes on the continue message to delete the report.
For user-defined reports, click Yes on the confirmation message to delete the report.
3. Click OK to close the Report Template Manager dialog box.

1250

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

40

Report content and functions
Each report contains the following information:

• The name of the report displayed at the top of the report.
• The date and time the report was generated.
• The report data, presented in a tabular format.
Depending on the report type, you can perform the following functions:

• Sort a table by clicking a column head. Click a column head again to reverse the sort order.
• Launch a more detailed report by clicking a link within the report.
• Export report data to a CSV, PDF, or Word file by clicking the Export Data icon in the Report
toolbar (refer to “Exporting data from the report” on page 1260).

• Navigate through the report by using the following icons in the Report toolbar.
Icon

Description
First page — Click to return to the first page in the report. Unavailable
when you are on the first page of the report.
Previous page — Click to return to the previous page in the report.
Unavailable when you are on the first page of the report.
Next page — Click to move to the next page in the report. Unavailable
when you are on the last page of the report.
Last page — Click to move to the last page in the report. Unavailable when
you are on the last page of the report.
Go to page — Enter a page number and click the arrow button to display a
specific page in the report.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1251

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Products List report
The Products List report displays general and detailed configuration information about all
discovered products (Figure 510).
The information on the report comes from the software image version that is in the Management
application for that product. To ensure that the latest configuration information is in the
Management application, run the discovery process or resynchronize the product.

FIGURE 513

Products List report
Table 113 describes the fields and components of the Products List report.

TABLE 113

1252

Products List report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Product Count

The number of products in the report.

Product Status

Whether the product is reachable (green icon), marginal (
(
), unhealthy (
), or not reachable (
).

Name

The name of the product. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed Product
Report.

VCS Name

The name of the VCS product. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed Cluster
Report.

RBridge ID

The RBridge ID of the VCS product.

), degraded link (

), down

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

TABLE 113

40

Products List report fields and components (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

IP Address

The IP address of the product.

Product Type

The type of product.

Serial Number

The serial number of the product.

Admin Status

The administrative status of the product. Possible status includes:
Normal — The product is in normal operating mode.
Troubleshooting — The product is in troubleshooting mode.

•
•

Model

The model of the product.

Firmware

The firmware level of the product.

Contact

The contact name for the product.

Location

The location of the product.

Last Scanned

The date and time the product was last scanned.

Detailed Product Report
The Detailed Product Report displays general and detailed configuration information about
products (Figure 514).

NOTE

This report is not available for VCS clusters. VCS cluster data is available in the Detailed Cluster
Report (refer to “Detailed Cluster Report” on page 1255).

FIGURE 514

Detailed Product Report

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1253

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Table 114 describes the fields and components of the Detailed Product Report.

TABLE 114

Detailed Product Report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Product

The IP address of the product.

System Information

Admin Status

Modules

Ethernet Ports

1254

System information includes the following:
Alias Name — An optional name that is entered using the Properties dialog box. It
provides an alternate name for the product if you want to override the Host Name
and System Name values.
• Host Name — The name that the Management application obtains from the product
during discovery. This may be the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the product,
but may come from other naming services, depending on the configuration of the
operating system on which the Management application is running.
• System Name — The name the Management application retrieves from the
"sysName" SNMP MIB variable during discovery. This name corresponds to the
value specified by the hostname command in the product configuration file.
The Management application displays the first name it finds for the product in the
following order: Alias Name, Host Name, System Name. The Alias Name takes
precedence over Host Name, which takes precedence over System Name, and so
on.
• Contact — A contact name for the product.
• Location — The location of the product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product. The serial number is not
displayed for products that support stacking.
• Description — A description of the product.

•

Administrative status information includes the following:
• Status — Whether the product is in normal operating mode or troubleshooting
mode.
• System Last Updated — When the last system update occurred.
• Memo — A memo for the product.
• Memo Last Updated — When the last memo update occurred.
Module information shows what modules are installed on the product.
Unit/Slot Number — For products that support stacking, you can view the unit
number and slot number.
Slot Number — For products that do not support stacking, you can view the slot
number.
• Type — For wireless products, the model name of the product. For wired products,
the type of module installed in the slot.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the module. For wired products, the serial
number cell may be blank.
• Ports — The number of ports on the product. The number of ports for ATM modules
displays as zero.
• Present — Whether the module is installed on the product.

•

This table contains the following information for each Ethernet interface on the product:
• Identifier — The port identifier.
• Port Name — The port name.
• Type — The type of port.
• Speed (Mbps) — The speed of the port.
• MAC Address — The MAC address of the port.
• Name — The name of the port.
• Tag Mode — The tag mode of the port.
• Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the port.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

TABLE 114

40

Detailed Product Report fields and components (Continued)

Physical Ports

Physical port information for each port on the product.
Identifier — The port identifier of the physical interfaces on the product.
Port Name — The port name of the physical interfaces on the product.
Type — The type of port of the physical interfaces on the product.
Speed (Mbps) — The speed of the physical interfaces on the product.
MAC Address — The MAC address of the physical interfaces on the product. Displays
as 0000.0000.0000 for module interfaces.
• Name — The name of the port on the product.
• Tag Mode — The tag mode (tagged, untagged, dual, or blank) of the physical
interfaces on the product.
• Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the physical interfaces on the product.

•
•
•
•
•

Detailed Cluster Report
The Detailed Cluster Report report displays general and detailed configuration information about
fabrics (Figure 515).

FIGURE 515

Detailed Cluster Report

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1255

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Table 115 describes the fields and components of the Detailed Cluster Report.

TABLE 115

Detailed Cluster Report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Cluster

The name of the cluster.

System Information

Nodes

Admin Status

1256

System information includes the following:
Alias Name — An optional name that is entered using the Properties dialog box. It
provides an alternate name for the product if you want to override the Host Name
and System Name values.
• Host Name — The name that the Management application obtains from the product
during discovery. This may be the Domain Name System (DNS) name of the product,
but may come from other naming services, depending on the configuration of the
operating system on which the Management application is running.
• System Name — The name the Management application retrieves from the
"sysName" SNMP MIB variable during discovery. This name corresponds to the
value specified by the hostname command in the product configuration file.
The Management application displays the first name it finds for the product in the
following order: Alias Name, Host Name, System Name. The Alias Name takes
precedence over Host Name, which takes precedence over System Name.
• Config Mode — The configuration mode.
• Node Count — The number of nodes in the fabric.
• Status — The status of the fabric.
• Contact — A contact name for the product.
• Location — The location of the product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product. The serial number is not
displayed for products that support stacking.
• Description — A description of the product.

•

Node information includes the following:
• Name — The name of the node. Click the name of a product to launch the Detailed
Product Report.
• IP Address — The IP address of the product.
• Product Type — The type of product.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the product.
• RBridge ID — The RBridge ID number of the product.
• Status — The status of the product.
• Model — The model of the product.
• Firmware — The firmware level of the product.
• Fabric Ports — The number of fabric ports on the product.
• Edge Ports — The number of edge ports on the product.
Administrative status information includes the following:
Name — The name and IP address of the product.
Status — Whether the product is in normal operating mode or troubleshooting
mode.
• Status Last Updated — When the last status update occurred.
• Memo — A memo for the product.
• Memo Last Updated — When the last memo update occurred.

•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

TABLE 115

40

Detailed Cluster Report fields and components (Continued)

Modules

Ethernet Ports

Module information shows what modules are installed on the product.
Slot Number — For products that do not support stacking, you can view the slot
number.
• Type — The type of module installed in the slot.
• Serial Number — The serial number of the module. For wired products, the serial
number cell may be blank.
• Ports — The number of ports on the product. The number of ports for ATM modules
displays as zero.
• Present — Whether the module is installed on the product.

•

This table contains the following information for each Ethernet interface on the product:
• Identifier — The port identifier.
• Port Name — The port name.
• Type — The type of port.
• Speed (Mbps) — The speed of the port.
• MAC Address — The MAC address of the port.
• Name — The name of the port.
• Tag Mode — The tag mode of the port.
• Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the port.

Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report
The Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report (Figure 516) details the ratio between transmitted and received data
on a port or group of ports for the specified parameters.

FIGURE 516

Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1257

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Table 116 describes the fields and components of the Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report.

TABLE 116

Ports Tx/Rx Ratio report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Summary table
Location

The location of the device.

Device Name

The name of the device. Click the device name link to launch the
Detailed Product Report.

IP Address

The IP address of the device.

Total Received (MB)

The total data received (the sum of Rx in Rx Details table) in megabytes.

Total Transmitted (MB)

The total data transmitted (the sum of Tx in Tx Details table) in
megabytes.

Ratio (%)

The ratio of the total received to the total transmitted (100*(Total
Transmitted)/(Total Received)). Displays N/A if the total received is zero.

Collection Time

The time data was collected

Rx Details table
Location

The location of the device.

Device Name

The name of the device.

Name

The name of the received data.

Port Name

The name of the port.

Rx (MB)

The total data received in megabytes.

Tx Details table

1258

Location

The location of the device.

Device Name

The name of the device.

Name

The name of the transmitted data.

Port Name

The name of the port.

Tx (MB)

The total data transmitted in megabytes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Reports Template Manager overview

40

Low Traffic Ports report
The Low Traffic Ports report details the port utilization that is less than or equal to the percentage
and number of days you specify (Figure 517).

FIGURE 517

Low Traffic Ports report
Table 117 describes the fields and components of the Low Traffic Ports report.

TABLE 117

Low Traffic Ports report fields and components

Field/Component

Description

Location

The location of the device.

Device Name

The name of the device.

IP Address

The IP address of the device.

Name

The user-defined name of the port.

Port Name

The port type and identifier, such as ethernet2/19.

Max Tx Utilization (%)

The percentage of data transmitted.

Max Rx Utilization (%)

The percentage of data received.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1259

40

Reports Template Manager overview

Exporting data from the report
You can export data from a report to CSV, PDF, or Word.
1. Run a report (refer to “Viewing a report” on page 1249).
2. From the report, click the Export Report icon on the Report toolbar.
The Export Report dialog box displays.
3. Select an export format (PDF or Word) from the Export Format list.
4. Configure what content to export by selecting one of the following options:

• Select All pages to export the entire report.
• Select Current page to export the displayed page.
• Select Pages and enter the page numbers or range you want to export.
5. Size the report data by selecting one of the following options:

• Select Auto to display the report at the default size (Actual size).
• Select Actual size (PDF only) to display the report at its actual size.
• Select Fit to whole page (PDF only) to resize the report to display entirely in the view.
6. Click OK on the Export Report dialog box.
7.

View the report immediately by clicking Open on the File Download dialog box.

8. Save the report by clicking Save on the File Download dialog box.
9. Browse to the location where you want to save the report and click Save on the Save As dialog
box.

1260

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

A

Application menus

In this appendix
• Dashboard main menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261
• IP main menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262
• IP shortcut menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Dashboard main menus
The menu bar is located at the top of the main window. The following table outlines the many
functions available on each menu.
Menu

Command

Command Options

Server Menu
Users — Select to configure users and user groups.
User Profile — Select to configure user profiles.
Active Sessions — Select to display the active
Management application sessions.
Server Properties — Select to display the Server
properties.
Options — Select to configure the Management
application options.
Exit — Select to close the Management Client.
View Menu
Show Main Tab — Select to choose which tab to display.
Dashboard — Select to show the dashboard.
SAN — Select to show the SAN tab.
IP — Select to show the IP tab.
Show Panels — Select to choose which widgets to display.
All Panels — Select to show the Dashboard and Master
Log.
Dashboard — Select to only show the Dashboard.
Master Log — Select to only show the Master Log.
Help Menu
Contents — Select to open the Online Help.
Find — Select to search the Online Help.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1261

A

IP main menus

Menu

Command

Command Options

License — Select to view or change your License
information.
About Management_Application_Name — Select to view
the application information, such as the company
information and release number.

IP main menus
The menu bar is located at the top of the main window. The following table outlines the many
functions available on each menu.
Menu

Command

Command Options

Server Menu
Users. Select to configure users and user groups.
User Profile. Select to configure user profiles.
Active Sessions. Select to display the active Management
application sessions.
Server Properties. Select to display the Server properties.
Options. Select to configure the Management application
options.
Exit. Select to close the Management Client.
Edit Menu
Copy. Select to copy information and move it to another
location.
Select All. Select to select all objects in the Connectivity
Map and Product List.
Properties. Select to display the selected objects
properties.
View Menu
Show Main Tab. Select to choose which tab to display.
Dashboard. Select to show the dashboard.
SAN. Select to show the SAN tab.
IP. Select to show the IP tab.

1262

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP main menus

Menu

Command

A

Command Options

Show Panels. Select to choose which panels to display.
All Panels. Select to show all panels.
Topology Map. Select to only show the topology map.
Product List. Select to only show the Product List.
Master Log. Select to only show the Master Log.
Main Display. Select to choose which topology to display
Network Objects. Select to display Network Objects.
L2 Topology. Select to display the L2 topology map.
Ethernet Fabrics. Select to display the Ethernet Fabrics
topology map.
IP Topology. Select to display the IP topology map.
VLAN Topology. Select to display the VLAN topology map.
Host Topology. Select to display the Host topology map.
Enable Flyover Display. Select to enable flyover display.
Show Ports. — Select to show utilized ports on the
selected device.
Map Display Layout. Select to choose a map format.
Organic. Select to set the map format to organic.
Orthogonal. Select to set the map format to orthogonal.
Orthogonal (Merge Lines). Select to set the map format to
orthogonal with merged lines.
Hierarchical. Select to set the map format to hierarchical.
Circular. Select to set the map format to circular.
Free Form. Select to set the map format to free form.
Product Label. Select to configure which product labels
display.
Name + IP. Select to display the product name and IP
address as the product label.
Name. Select to display the product name as the product
label.
IP Address. Select to display the IP Address (IPv4 or IPv6
format) as the product label.
Discover Menu
IP Products. Select to set up IP product discovery.
Rediscover. Select to rediscover devices.
Host Adapters. Select to discover hosts.
VM Managers. Select to discover VM managers.
Add Product Group. Select to create a product
management group.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1263

A

IP main menus

Menu

Command

Command Options
Static. Select to create a product group based on device.
Dynamic. Select to create a product group based on
device attributes.

Add Port Group. Select to create a port management
group.
Edit Group. Select to edit a management group.
Duplicate Group. Select to duplicate a management
group.
Delete Group. Select to delete a management group.
Configure Menu
Element Manager. Select to configure a selected device.
Front Panel. (IronWare OS device) Select to display a
graphic of the front panel for the selected device.
Web. (IronWare OS device) Select to launch the web
management interface for the selected device.
Hardware. (Fabric OS devices) Select to launch the
Element Manager or Web Tools application for the
selected device.
Ports. (Fabric OS devices) Select to launch Web Tools Port Administration for the selected device.
Admin. (Fabric OS devices) Select to launch Web Tools Switch Administration for the selected device.
Configuration. Select to manage the selected device.
Save. Select to save device configurations to the
repository.
Save Running to Startup. (Fabric OS devices) Select to
save the DCB running configuration to the startup
configuration on selected switches. Requires at least one
discovered DCB switch.
Restore. Select to restore device configurations from the
repository.
Configuration Repository. (Trial and Licensed version
Only) Select to manage device configurations from the
repository.
Schedule Backup. (Trial and Licensed version Only)
Select to schedule configuration backup.
Replicate. (Trial and Licensed version Only) (Fabric OS
devices) Select to replicate the switch Configuration or
Security.
Configuration Wizard. Select to launch the Configuration
Wizard.
CLI Configuration. Select to launch the CLI Configuration
Wizard.
Deployment. Select to manage deployment.

1264

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP main menus

Menu

Command

A

Command Options

Application Delivery. Select to choose an application
delivery method.
VIP Servers. Select to monitor and configure real and
virtual servers.
GSLB. Select to create global server load balancing
(GSLB) policies.
SSL Certificates. Select to manage SSL certificates.
MPLS. Select to configure the multiprotocol label
switches service (MPLS).
VLL. Select to configure virtual leased line (VLL) services.
VPLS. Select to configure virtual private LAN services
(VPLS).
VCID Pool. Select to create a pool of virtual circuit
identifiers (VCID).
LSP. Select to configure label switched path (LSP).
Firmware Management. Select to launch the Image
Repository.
DCB. Select to manage a DCB switch, port, or link
aggregation group (LAG).
FCoE. Select to manage an FCoE port.
Host. Select to manage a selected host.
Adapter Software. Select to launch HCM.
Adapter Ports — Select to configure Host Adapter ports.
Packet Capture (Pcap). Select to configure packet
capture.
Policy Based Routing — Select to configure policy-based
routing.
Security. Select to manage security.
L2 ACL. Select to configure Layer 2 Access Control Lists
on products and ports.
L3 ACL. Select to configure Layer 3 Access Control Lists
on products and ports.
MAC Filter. Select to configure Media Access Control
filters on products and ports.
ACL Accounting. Select to enable or disable ACL
accounting and clear counters.
VLANs. Select to launch the VLAN Manager.
Zoning. Select to configure zones.
Fabric. Select to configure fabric zones.
LSAN Zoning (Device Sharing). (Trial and Licensed version
Only) Select to configure LSAN zones.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1265

A

IP main menus

Menu

Command

Command Options
Set Change Limits. Select to set zone limits for zone
activation.
List Zone Members. (Trial and Licensed version Only)
Select to display all members in a zone.

Monitor Menu
Performance. Select to monitor IP devices.
Dashboard — Select to launch the Performance
Dashboard.
Historical Data Collectors. Select to monitor historical
data.
Real-Time Graph/Tables. Select to monitor performance
through a graph or table, which displays real-time data for
transmit and receive data.
Historical Graph/Tables. Select to monitor a performance
through a graph or table, which displays historical data for
transmit and receive data.
Expressions. Select to create expressions using
management information base (MIB) objects.
Custom Reports. Select to create custom performance
reports.
Traffic Analysis. Select to monitor traffic.
Configure sFlow. Select to configure sFlow payloads.
Monitor sFlow. Select to monitor sFlow.
Traffic Accounting. Select to run a traffic report.
Custom Reports. Select to create custom traffic reports.
Policy Monitor — Select to manage best practice policies.
Power Center. Select to monitor power over Ethernet.
MPLS. Select to monitor MPLS.
VLL. Select to monitor virtual leased line (VLL) services.
VPLS. Select to monitor virtual private LAN services
(VPLS).
LSP Topology. Select to monitor label switched path
(LSP).
MRP Topology. Select to view an MRP topology.
Events. Select to display all events triggered on the
selected product.
Event Notification. Select to configure the Management
application to send event notifications at specified time
intervals.
E-mail. Select to configure the Management application
to send event notifications through e-mail.

1266

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP main menus

Menu

Command

A

Command Options
Call Home. Select to configure the Management Server to
automatically dial-in to or send an E-mail to a support
center to report system problems.

Event Processing. Select to configure event processing.
Pseudo Events. Select to configure pseudo events.
Event Actions. Select to configure events actions.
Logs. Select to display logs.
Audit. Select to display a history of user actions
performed through the application (except login/logout).
Product Event. Select to display errors related to SNMP
traps and Client-Server communications.
Product Status. Select to display operational status
changes of managed products.
Security. Select to display security information.
Syslog. Select to display Syslog events related to the
selected device or fabric.
SNMP Setup. Select to configure SNMP traps.
Trap Forwarding. Select to configure trap forwarding.
Product Trap Recipients. Select to register a host as a
trap recipient.
Event Reception. Select to configure the server to accept
or drop traps and specify SNMP credentials and
community strings, which are required to decode traps on
receiving them.
Informs — Select to configure informs.
Syslog Configuration. Select to configure Syslog for the
management server.
Syslog Forwarding. Select to configure Syslog forwarding.
Product Syslog Recipients. Select to register a host as a
syslog recipient.
Technical Support. Select to configure technical support
data.
SupportSave. Select to capture server and client support
data.
Product/Host SupportSave. Select to configure technical
support data collection.
View Repository. Select to view repository data.
Reports Menu
Event Custom Reports. Select to generate custom event
reports.
Wired Products. Select to run a wired product report.
AP Products — Select to run an AP product report.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1267

A

IP shortcut menus

Menu

Command

Command Options

Modules. Select to run a report on modules.
VLANs. Select to run a VLAN information report.
IP Subnets. Select to run a report of IP subnets on the
network.
IP Addresses. Select to run a report on IP addresses on
the network.
MAC Addresses. Select to run a report of MAC addresses
on the network.
Product CLI. Select to run a product CLI report.
Deployment. Select to run a deployment report.
Host Adapters — Select to run a Host product report.
Inventory Report — Select to run a Host inventory report.
Faulty SFP Report — Select to run a faulty SFP report.
Tools Menu
Address Finder. Select to search for IP or MAC addresses
on the network.
Setup. Select to set up the applications that display on
the Tools menu.
Product Menu. Select to access the tools available on a
device’s shortcut menu.
Tools List (determined by user settings). Select to open a
software application. You can configure the Tools menu
to display different software applications. Recommended
tools to include in this menu include an internet browser,
the command prompt application, and Notepad.
Help Menu
Contents. Select to open the Online Help.
Find. Select to search the Online Help.
License. Select to view or change your License
information.
About Management_Application_Name. Select to view
the application information, such as the company
information and release number.

IP shortcut menus
You can use the Management application interface main menu to configure, monitor, and
troubleshoot your IP components. The instructions for using these features are documented in the
associated chapters of this manual.
For each IP component, you can optionally right-click the component and a shortcut menu displays.
The following group components do not have shortcut menus:

1268

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP shortcut menus

A

• IP Subnet
• VLAN
• L2 Cloud
The table below details the command options available for each component.
Component

Menu/Submenu Commands

Comments

Element Manager >
Front Panel
Web

Displays the IronWare device’s front panel.
Launches the device’s Web Management Interface.

Configuration >
Save
Restore
Configuration Repository
Schedule Backup

Launches the Configuration dialog box with selected device highlighted.
Launches the Configuration dialog box with selected device highlighted.
Launches the Configuration dialog box with selected device highlighted.
Launches the Schedule Backup dialog box.

IronWare device

Security >
L2 ACL
L3 ACL
MAC Filter
Rate Limit Policy
Performance >
Real-Time Graph / Table
Historical Graph / Table

Launches the Real-Time Graphs / Tables dialog box.
Launches the Historical Graphs / Tables dialog box.

Power Center
Events

Displays an Event Log for the device.

CLI through Server

Launches the device’s CLI Element Manager.

User Defined Menu items
Setup Tools
Technical Support
Network Objects

Displays the Network Objects view with the selected device highlighted.

L2 Topology

Displays the L2 Topology view with the selected device highlighted.

Detailed Report

Generates and displays a Detailed Report for the selected device

Physical Ports Report

Generates and displays a Physical Ports Report for the selected device

L2 sFlow Report

Generates and displays a Layer 2 sFlow Report for the selected device

L3 sFlow Report

Generates and displays a Layer 2 sFlow Report for the selected device

STP Report

Generates an STP/RSTP report for the selected device. Only available on the
VLAN Topology view with STP enabled.

Properties

Displays the Properties dialog box for the selected device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1269

A

IP shortcut menus

Component

Menu/Submenu Commands

Comments

Table >
Copy “Cell_Value”
Copy Row
Copy Table
Export Row
Export Table
Print
Search
Select All
Size All Columns To Fit
Expand All
Collapse All
Customize

Only available from Product List.
Copies the information in the selected cell.
Copies all information in the selected row.
Copies all information in the table.
Copies all information in the selected row.
Copies all information in the table.
Launches the Print dialog box.
Moves cursor/focus to the Search field on the Product List toolbar.
Highlights all rows in the table.
Resizes all columns in the table to fit the contents.
Expands the Product List to display all rows.
Collapse all rows in the Product List.
Launches the Customize Columns dialog box.

Element Manager >
Hardware
Ports
Admin

Launches Web Tools.

DCB

Configuration >
Save
Save Running to Startup
Restore
Configuration Repository
Schedule Backup
Replicate >
Configuration
Security
Enable / Disable >
Enable
Disable
Firmware Management
Swap Blades

Only available from chassis.

DCB
FCoE
VLAN
Zoning
Allow / Prohibit Matrix
Security >
L2 ACL
Performance >
Real-Time Graph
Historical Graph

1270

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP shortcut menus

Component

Menu/Submenu Commands

A

Comments

Fabric Watch >
Configure
Port Fencing
Frame Monitor
Performance Thresholds
Technical Support >
Product / Host SupportSave
View Repository
Events
Port Connectivity
Port Optics (SFP)
Telnet
Telnet through Server
Network Objects

Displays the Network Objects view with the selected device highlighted.

L2 Topology

Displays the L2 Topology view with the selected device highlighted.

Table >
Copy 'Device_Name Group'
Copy Row
Copy Table
Export Row
Export Table
Search
Select All
Size All Columns To Fit
Expand All
Collapse All
Customize

Only available from Product List.

Properties
VCS/VDX
Configuration >
Save
Restore
Configuration Repository
Schedule Backup
DCB
FCoE
Security >
L2 ACL
VLANs
Zoning
Performance >
Real-Time Graph
Historical Graph

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1271

A

IP shortcut menus

Component

Menu/Submenu Commands

Comments

Fabric Watch >
Configure
Port Fencing
Frame Monitor
Performance Thresholds
Technical Support >
Product / Host SupportSave
View Repository
Events
CLI through Server
Setup Tools
Network Objects

Displays the Network Objects view with the selected device highlighted.

L2 Topology

Displays the L2 Topology view with the selected device highlighted.

Ethernet Fabric
Detailed Report

Generates and displays a Detailed Report for the selected device

Physical Ports Report

Generates and displays a Physical Ports Report for the selected device

L2 sFlow Report

Generates and displays a Layer 2 sFlow Report for the selected device

L3 sFlow Report

Generates and displays a Layer 2 sFlow Report for the selected device

Properties
Table >
Copy 'Device_Name Group'
Copy Row
Copy Table
Export Row
Export Table
Search
Select All
Size All Columns To Fit
Expand All
Collapse All
Customize

Only available from Product List.

Network Objects

Displays the Network Objects view with the selected device highlighted.

L2 Topology

Displays the L2 Topology view with the selected device highlighted.

Performance >
Real-Time Graph / Table
Historical Graph / Table

Launches the Real-Time Graphs / Tables dialog box.
Launches the Historical Graphs / Tables dialog box.

Events

Displays an Event Log for the device.

CLI through Server

Launches the device’s CLI Element Manager.

Third-party device

User Defined Menu items

1272

Setup Tools

Launches the Setup Tools dialog box.

Detailed Report

Generates and displays a Detailed Report for the selected device

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP shortcut menus

Component

Menu/Submenu Commands

Comments

Physical Ports Report

Generates and displays a Physical Ports Report for the selected device

Properties

Displays the Properties dialog box for the selected device.

Table >
Copy “Cell_Value”
Copy Row
Copy Table
Export Row
Export Table
Print
Search
Select All
Size All Columns To Fit
Expand All
Collapse All
Customize

Only available from Product List.
Copies the information in the selected cell.
Copies all information in the selected row.
Copies all information in the table.
Copies all information in the selected row.
Copies all information in the table.
Launches the Print dialog box.
Moves cursor/focus to the Search field on the Product List toolbar.
Highlights all rows in the table.
Resizes all columns in the table to fit the contents.
Expands the Product List to display all rows.
Collapse all rows in the Product List.
Launches the Customize Columns dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

A

1273

A

1274

IP shortcut menus

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

B

Call Home Event Tables

In this appendix
This appendix provides information about the specific events that display when using Call Home.
This information is shown in the following Event Table.

• IP Call Home Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
• Network OS Call Home Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275
TABLE 118

IP Call Home Event

Event reason code

FRU code/Event type

Description

Severity

N/A

Ethernet

Switch is not reachable.

3

N/A

SW-Missing

Switch is missing from the fabric.

3

199130

IP30

Power supply state changed (snTrapChasPwrSupplyFailed).

1

199131

IP31

Fan failed (snTrapChasFanFailed).

1

199136

IP36

Temperature alert (snTrapTemperatureWarning).

1

1991167

IP167

Stacking power supply failed (snTrapStackingChasPwrSupplyFailed).

1

1991169

IP169

Stacking fan failed (snTrapStackingChasFanFailed).

1

1991171

IP171

Stacking temperature warning (snTrapStackingTemperatureWarning).

1

1991177

IP177

High-speed fans needed for chassis (snTrapChasHighSpeedFansNeeded).

4

1991181

IP181

System memory out threshold (snTrapSysMemoryOutThreshold).

4

19911002

IP1002

IP CAM full (snTrapCAMOverflow).

1

19911004

IP1004

Optical monitoring alarm (snTrapOpticalMonitoringAlarm).

1

19911007

IP1007

POS monitoring alarm (snTrapPosMonitoringAlarm).

1

19911009

IP1009

Optical incompatibility error (snTrapXfpSfpIncompatibleOptic).

1

TABLE 119

Network OS Call Home Event

Event reason code

FRU code/Event type

Description

Severity

N/A

Ethernet

Switch is not reachable.

3

N/A

SW-Missing

Switch is missing from the fabric.

3

1426

FW-1426

Faulty or missing power supply.

3

1427

FW-1427

Faulty power supply.

3

1428

FW-1428

Missing power supply.

3

1430

FW-1430

Faulty temperature sensors.

3

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1275

B

Call Home Event Tables

TABLE 119

Network OS Call Home Event (Continued)

Event reason code

FRU code/Event type

Description

Severity

1431

FW-1431

Faulty fans.

3

1432

FW-1432

Faulty WWN cards.

3

1433

FW-1433

Faulty CPs.

3

1434

FW-1434

Faulty blades.

3

1435

FW-1435

Flash usage is out of range.

3

1276

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

C

Event Categories

In this appendix
This section provides information about the events that display in each of the following categories:

• Link incident events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Product status events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Product audit events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Security events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• User action events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Management server events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Product events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1277
1277
1278
1279
1280
1280
1281

Link incident events
The following link incident events indicate FICON link status changes:

•
•
•
•
•

Link RNID device registration
Link RNID device de-registration
Link listener added RLIR
Link listener removed
Link RLIR failure

Traps that begin with OID 1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1..1.50 are categorized as link incident events.

Product status events
Product status events indicate a change in the status of the product; for example, changes in the
state of the port, the field replaceable unit (FRU), the sensor, or the CP.
Traps that begin with any of the following OIDs are categorized as product status events.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1.3.6.1.3.94.0.1 [connUnitStatusChange]
1.3.6.1.3.94.0.5 [connUnitSensorStatusChange]
1.3.6.1.3.94.0.6 [connUnitPortStatusChange]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.0.3 [swFCPortScn]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.1.1.0.15 [swDeviceStatusTrap]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.2.2.0.1 [fruStatusChanged]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1588.2.1.2.2.0.2 [cpStatusChanged]

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1277

C

Product audit events

If the event is a RASLOG and if the RASLOG ID matches any of the RASLOGS listed below, then the
event is categorized as a product status event.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

FW-1424
FW-1425
FW-1426
FW-1427
FW-1428
FW-1429
FW-1430
FW-1431
FW-1432
FW-1433
FW-1434
FW-1435
FW-1436
FW-1437
FW-1438
FW-1439
FW-1440
FW-1441
FW-1442
FW-1443
FW-1444

Product audit events
Events that are used to track audit information are categorized as product audit events. Audit
Syslog messages from HBAs and the messages with the IDs listed below are categorized as
product audit events.

•
•
•
•
•
•

1278

TRCK-1001
TRCK-1002
TRCK-1003
TRCK-1004
TRCK-1005
TRCK-1006

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Security events

C

Security events
Security events are those that indicate authentication success or failure, a security violation, or
user login and logout.

Security events for FC devices
For FOS switches, if the event is a RASLOG event and the RASLOG ID contains 'SEC', then the event
is categorized as a security event.

Security events for IP devices
For IOS devices, if the event OID starts with any of the following OIDs, then the event is categorized
as a security event.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1.3.6.1.2.1.14.16.2.6 [ospfIfAuthFailure]
1.3.6.1.2.1.14.16.2.7 [ospfVirtIfAuthFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.9 [snOspfIfAuthFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.10 [snOspfVirtIfAuthFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.75 [snTrapUserLogin]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.76 [snTrapUserLogout]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.77 [snTrapPortSecurityViolation]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.78 [snTrapPortSecurityShutdown]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.85 [snTrapMacAuthEnable]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.86 [snTrapMacAuthDisable]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.87 [snTrapMacAuthMACAccepted]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.88 [snTrapMacAuthMACRejected]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.89 [snTrapMacAuthPortDisabled]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.110 [snTrapClientLoginReject]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.131 [snTrapDot1xSecurityViolation]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.143 [snTrapMacAuthRadiusTimeout]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.0.144 [snTrapDot1xRadiusTimeout]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.5.1.1.2.1.0.36 [swPortSecurityTrap]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.1.5.2.3 [sysRadiusServerChanged]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.1.6.2.3 [sysRadiusServerChanged]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.3 [dot11StationAuthentication]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.7 [dot1xMacAddrAuthSuccess]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.8 [dot1xMacAddrAuthFail]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.9 [dot1xAuthNotInitiated]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.10 [dot1xAuthSuccess]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.11 [dot1xAuthFail]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.12 [localMacAddrAuthSuccess]

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1279

C

User action events

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.13 [localMacAddrAuthFail]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.14 [pppLogonFail]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.6.1.7.4.2.18 [dot1xSupplicantAuthenticated]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.7.2.2.2.9 [apAuthFailureTooMany]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.8.2.1.4.0.2 [userLoginNotification]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.8.2.1.4.0.3 [userLogOffNotification]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.8.2.1.4.0.4 [userLoginFailNotification]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.32 [mwlAuthFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.33 [mwlRadiusServerSwitchover]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.34 [mwlRadiusServerSwitchoverFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.35 [mwlRadiusServerRestored]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.36 [mwlAcctRadiusServerSwitchover]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.11.1.1.2.2.2.37 [mwlAcctRadiusServerSwitchoverFailure]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.12.1.1.5.100.0.4 [portSecurityViolation]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.12.1.1.5.109.0.1 [portSECViolation]
1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.12.1.1.111.1.0.3 [unauthorizedAccessViaCLI]
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 [authenticationFailure]

User action events
User action events are generated for user actions that are performed through the Management
applications, such as:

•
•
•
•

User creation
User deletion
Event action enable
Event action disable

These events are usually generated to notify status of configuration or data collection operations
initiated by the user from the Management application.

Management server events
Management Server Events are those that are generated by the Management application server,
such as:

•
•
•
•

Service start and stop
Memory usage
Device discovery status
Asset collection status

These events are usually generated to notify the status of server tasks that are running regularly
and periodically.

1280

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Product events

C

Product events
All other events originating from the product are categorized as product events.

IP Performance monitoring events
IP performance monitoring events, listed in Table 120, occur when users select the option to
forward events to the vCenter during VM Manager discovery.

TABLE 120

Performance monitoring IP threshold events

Trap name

OID

Description

bnaRisingThresholdCrossed

1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.13.2.0.1

The value of monitored SNMP
variable or expression has exceeded
the value specified as the higher
threshold.

bnaFallingThresholdCrossed

1.3.6.1.4.1.1991.1.13.2.0.1

The value of the monitored SNMP
variable or expression has failed
below the value specified as the
lower threshold.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1281

C

1282

IP Performance monitoring events

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

User Privileges

D

In this appendix
• About user privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
• About Roles and Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

About user privileges
The Management application provides the User Administrator with a high level of control over what
functions individual users can see and use. This section describes the effect that each user
privilege has on the application when placed in one of the three available configurations: no
privilege, read-only, and read/write.
User privilege is the Management application’s method of providing role-based access control
(RBAC) to the software’s user administrator.
In the Management application privileges are assigned to roles and devices are assigned to areas
of responsibility (AOR). Privileges and devices are not directly assigned to users; users receive
privileges and obtain access to devices from the roles and AORs to which they are assigned. You
can assign multiple roles and AORs to a single user.
The following tables define all the privileges in the Management application and the behavior of the
application if the privilege is not given, read only, or read/write.

• Application privileges and behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284
• IP privileges and behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1283

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Active Session
Management

Allows you view active
client sessions and
disconnect an unwanted
user.

Disables the Active
Sessions command from
the Server menu.

Enables the Active
Sessions command from
the Server menu.
Disables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box except the
Close and Help.

Enables the Active
Sessions command from
the Server menu.
Enables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box.

Call Home

Allows you to configure
call home centers,
devices, and event filters.

Disables the Call Home
command on the Monitor
> Event Notification
menu.

Enables the Call Home
command on the Monitor
> Event Notification
menu. Enables the Add,
Edit, Remove, Edit
Centers, and Show/Hide
Centers buttons as well
as the Enabled check
boxes on the dialog box;
however, disables the OK
and Apply buttons on the
Call Home, Call Home
Event Filter, and
Configure Call Home
Center dialog box boxes.

Enables the Call Home
command on the Monitor
> Event Notification
menu. Enables all
functions in the dialog
box.

Certificate Management

Allows you to access the
Certificate Management
dialog box and manage
server truststores.

Disables Certificates on
the Options dialog box.

Enables Certificates on
the Options dialog box.
Only viewing of the
certificates is supported.

Enables Certificates on
the Options dialog box.
Enables all functions in
the dialog box.

Configuration
Management

Allows you to access the
Configuration
Management dialog box
and perform
configuration upload and
replication.

Disables Save, Restore,
Configuration Repository,
and Schedule Backup
under Configure > Switch
and the Configuration
command under
Configure > Switch >
Replicate.

Enables Configuration
Repository under
Configure > Switch.
Only viewing of saved
configuration is
supported.
Configuration upload and
replication are disabled.

Enables all commands
under Configure > Switch.
Allows you to perform
configuration upload,
download and restore.

DCB Management

Allows you to configure
DCB devices.

Disables the DCB
command from the
Configure menu.

Enables the DCB
command from the
Configure menu.
Disables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box except the
Close and Help.

Enables the DCB
command from the
Configure menu.
Enables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box.

Element Manager

Allows you to access the
device element manager.

Disables the Element
Manager command.

Enables the Element
Manager command.
Allows you to open the
Element Manager;
however, disables all
functions.

Enables the Element
Manager command.
Allows you to perform all
Element Manager
functions.

1284

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 121

D

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Element Manager Product Administration

An Element Manager
privilege that enables
most functionally.

Disables the functions
described in the
Element Manager User
Manual for which you do
not have rights. Displays
the message, “You do not
have rights to perform
this action.”

Same as No Privilege.

Enables the functions
described in the
Element Manager User
Manual.

E-mail Event Notification
Setup

Allows you to define the
e-mail server used to
send e-mail.

Disables Event
Notification E-mail
command on the Monitor
menu and the E-mail
Event Notification Setup
button in the Users dialog
box. Disables the E-mail
option in the Master Log
shortcut menu.
Currently asks, “Are you
sure you want to assign
Event Management
privileges to this group
that does not otherwise
have read/write for:
E-mail Event Notification
Setup?”.

Enables the Event
Notification E-mail
command on the Monitor
menu and the E-mail
Event Notification Setup
button in the Users dialog
box. Allows you to open
the E-Mail Event
Notification Setup dialog
box; however, disables
the OK button.

Enables Event
Notification E-mail
command on the Monitor
menu and the E-mail
Event Notification Setup
button in the Users dialog
box.
Enables all functions in
the E-Mail Event
Notification Setup dialog
box.

Event Management

Allows you to define rules
with event triggers and
actions.

Disables the Event
Policies menu item.

Enables access to the
Event Policies menu item
and allows existing rules
to be selected and
viewed.
Disables all action
buttons on the tab.

Enables access to the
Event Policies menu item
and enables all functions
on the tab.

Fabric Watch

Fabric Watch — Allows you
to launch Fabric Watch.
Port Fencing — Allows you
to configure the function
that logs ports out of
fabrics automatically if
they are misbehaving.
Frame Monitor — Allows
you to monitor frames.
Performance Thresholds
— Allows you to configure
performance thresholds.

Disables the Fabric Watch
command from the
Monitor menu.

Enables the Fabric Watch
commands from the
Monitor menu.
DIsables the functions on
the Port Fencing dialog
box.
DIsables the functions on
the Frame Monitor dialog
box.
DIsables the functions on
the Configure Thresholds
dialog box.

Enables the Fabric Watch
commands from the
Monitor menu.
Enables you to launch
Fabric Watch.
Enables all functions on
the Port Fencing dialog
box.
Enables all functions on
the Frame Monitor dialog
box.
Enables the functions on
the Configure Thresholds
dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1285

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Fault Management

Allows you to control
access to the SNMP Trap
Registration and
Forwarding dialog box,
the Event Storage option
of the Options dialog box,
the Syslog Registration
and Forwarding dialog
box, as well as the Export
and Clear functions in the
Event Log dialog box and
the Show and Hide
functions in the
Customize Columns
dialog box.

Disables the SNMP Trap
and Syslog configuration
commands from the
Monitor menu.
Disables the Event
Storage option on the
Options dialog box.
If you do not have other
read/write privileges to
Options dialog box
functions, disables the
Server > Options
command.
Enables the Logs >
 from the
Monitor menu.

Enables the SNMP Trap
and Syslog configuration,
commands from the
Monitor menu.
Enables the Event
Storage option on the
Options dialog box.
Enables the Server >
Options command.
Only enables the Cancel
function for the dialog box
boxes.
Enables the Logs >
 from the
Monitor menu.

Enables the SNMP Trap
and Syslog configuration,
commands from the
Monitor menu.
Enables the following
functions from the dialog
box boxes:
• configure
Management server
registration
• configure TRAP or
Syslog forwarding
• register other
servers as a
recipient
• apply changes
Enables the Server >
Options command.
Enables the Event
Storage option on the
Options dialog box.
Enables the following
functions from the dialog
box:
• configure max
events
• configure event
purging policy
• apply changes
Enables the following
functions from the Master
Log right-click menu:
• Clear events
• Show events
• Hide events
• Export events
Note that the Export
command on the Master
Log right-click menu also
requires the Export
privilege because it
launches the Export
dialog box.
Enables the Clear and
Export buttons on the
individual log dialog box
boxes.

FCoE Management

Allows you to configure
FCoE devices.

Disables the FCoE
command from the
Configure menu.

Enables the FCoE
command from the
Configure menu.
Disables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box except the
Close and Help.

Enables the FCoE
command from the
Configure menu.
Enables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box.

1286

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 121

D

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Firmware Management

Allows you to download
firmware to selected
switches and manage the
firmware repository.

Disables the Firmware
Management command
from the Configure menu
and right-click menu.

Enables the Firmware
Management command
from the Configure menu
and right-click menu.
Disables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box except the
Close and Help.

Enables the Firmware
Management command
from the Configure menu
and right-click menu.
Enables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box.

Host Adapter
Management

Allows you to configure a
host.

Disables the Element
Manager command on
the right-click menu and
the Element Manager >
HCM command on the
Configure menu.

Disables the Element
Manager command on
the right-click menu and
the Element Manager >
HCM command on the
Configure menu.

Enables the Element
Manager command on
the right-click menu and
the Element Manager >
HCM command on the
Configure menu.

L2 ACL

Allows you to configure a
layer 2 access control list.

Disables the Security >
L2 ACL command on the
Configure menu.

Enables the Security > L2
ACL command on the
Configure menu.
Disables all functions on
the dialog box.

Enables the Security > L2
ACL command on the
Configure menu.
Enables all functions on
the dialog box.

License Update

Allows you to update your
license.
Allows you to control
access to the License
dialog box from the Help
menu.

Disables the License
command on the Help
menu.

Enables the License
command on the Help
menu; however, disables
the Update and OK
buttons.

Enables the License
command on the Help
menu and enables you to
change the license key.

Performance

Allows you to configure
the performance
subsystem, the display of
performance graphs, and
threshold settings.

Disables entire
Performance submenu of
the Monitor menu as well
as the right-click
Performance Graph(s)
command on ports and
switch products.
Disables the Port Optics
command on the
right-click menu.
Disables the Performance
button in the DCB
Configuration dialog box.

Enables entire
Performance submenu
off the Monitor menu as
well as the right-click
Performance Graph(s)
command on ports and
switch products.
Allows you to open the
Performance Setup dialog
box; however, disables
the OK button. No
changes can be made.
Allows you to open the
Performance Graphs
dialog box and enables all
controls; however,
disables the check boxes
under the Set Thresholds
label on the individual
port dialog box
(double-click a graph).

Enables entire
Performance submenu of
the Monitor menu and the
right-click Performance
Graph(s) command on
ports and switch
products. Enables
changes to the
Performance Setup dialog
box.
Allows you to open the
Performance Graphs
dialog box and enables all
controls.
Enables all functions on
the individual port dialog
box (double-click a
graph).
Enables the Port Optics
command on the
right-click menu.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1287

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Policy Monitor

Allows you to configure
policy monitors.

Disables Policy Monitor
command on the Monitor
menu.

Enables Policy Monitor
command on the Monitor
menu.
Allows you to open the
Policy Monitor dialog box;
however, disables the
Add, Delete, and Run
buttons. No changes can
be made. Enables you to
use the Edit, Report, and
History buttons to view
content.

Enables Policy Monitor
command on the Monitor
menu.
Allows you to open the
Policy Monitor dialog box
and enables all controls.

Properties Edit

Allows you to edit many
director and switch
properties.

Enables the Properties
command on Edit menu
and right-click menus.
Disables edit function
(removes green triangles)
from editable property
fields.
Disables the Names
command on the
Configure menu.

Enables the Properties
command on Edit menu
and right-click menus.
Disables edit function
(removes green triangles)
from editable property
fields.
Enables the Names
command on the
Configure menu; however,
disables all edit functions
in the dialog box.

Enables Properties
command on Edit menu
and right-click menus.
Enables editable
properties (marked by a
green triangle) in the
Product List and the
Properties Sheets.
Enables the Names
command on the
Configure menu and
enables all functions in
the dialog box.

Reports

Allows you to generate
and view the following
reports:
• Fabric Ports
• Fabric Summary

Disables the View
command and the
Generate command on
the Reports menu.
If this privilege is removed
and the Event
Management privilege is
assigned then this
message appears:

Message>
Removing the
Report privilege does not
remove users' ability to
generate reports in Event
Management. You might
also want to consider
removing the Event
Management privilege as
well.
<>

Enables the View
command on the Reports
menu.
Disables the Generate
command on the Reports
menu.

Enables the View
command and the
Generate command on
the Reports menu.

1288

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 121

D

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Security

Allows you to enable and
configure SANtegrity
features.

Disables the Security
command from the
Configure > Switch >
Replicate menu.
Disables the Security Log
command on the Monitor
> Logs menu.
Disables the Security
Misc command from the
Server > Options menu.

Disables the Security
command from the
Configure > Switch >
Replicate menu.
Enables the Security Log
command on the Monitor
> Logs menu.
Enables the Security Misc
command from the
Server > Options menu;
however, disables the
functions.

Enables the Security
command from the
Configure > Switch >
Replicate menu.
Enables the Security Log
command on the Monitor
> Logs menu.
Enables the Security Misc
command from the
Server > Options menu.
Enables all functions in
the dialog box boxes.

Server Backup

Allows you to control the
function that copies
(backs up) the application
data files to another disk.

Disables the Backup Now
and Configure commands
on the Backup icon
right-click menu on the
application status bar.
Disables all controls for
Backup on the Options
dialog box.

Disables the Configure
command on the Backup
icon right-click menu on
the application status bar.
Disables all controls for
Backup on the Options
dialog box.

Enables the Backup Now
and Configure commands
on the Backup icon
right-click menu on the
application status bar.
Enables all functions for
Backup on the Options
dialog box.

Server Software
Configuration

Allows you to configure
some of the properties of
the client and server of
the management
application.

Disables the Software
Configuration Parameters
folder and subpages in
the Options dialog box.
The configuration cannot
be viewed.

Enables the Software
Configuration Parameters
folder and subpages in
the Options dialog box;
however, disables the OK
and Apply buttons when
any of the subpages are
selected.

Enables the Software
Configuration Parameters
folder and subpages in
the Options dialog box.
Enables all functions
when any of those
subpages are selected.

Setup Tools

Allows you to define and
place commands on
product icons and in the
Tools menu.

Disables the Setup Tools
command on the Tools
menu. Any existing Tools
and/or right-click
commands already
defined or defined by
others are available for
use; however, you cannot
configure new items.
If this privilege is removed
and the Event
Management privilege is
assigned then this
message appears:

Message>
Removing the
Log Management
privilege does not remove
users' ability for Setup
Tools in Event
Management. You might
also want to consider
removing the Event
Management privilege as
well.

Enables the Setup Tools
command on the Tools
menu; however, disables
the OK button.

Enables the Setup Tools
command on the Tools
menu.
Enables all functions in
the Setup Tools dialog
box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1289

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Technical Support Data
Collection

Allows you to capture
support data from Fabric
OS switches.

Disables the
SupportSave, Upload
Failure Data Capture, and
View Repository
commands from the
Monitor > Technical
Support menu and
right-click menu.

Enables the View
Repository command
from the Monitor >
Technical Support menu
and right-click menu.
Disables the SupportSave
and Upload Failure Data
Capture commands from
the Monitor > Technical
Support menu and
right-click menu.

Enables the SupportSave,
Upload Failure Data
Capture, and View
Repository commands
from the Monitor >
Technical Support menu
and right-click menu.
Enables all functions on
the dialog box boxes.

User Management

Allows you to create and
define users and groups,
as well as assign
privileges and views to
groups.

Disables the Users
command on the main
Server menu and the
Users button on the main
tool bar.

Enables the Users
command on the Server
menu and the Users
button on the main tool
bar; however, disables the
Add, Edit, and Remove
Users, Add and Remove
Groups, and OK buttons
on the Users dialog box.
Enables the Edit Groups
button to display the
Group dialog box (with OK
button disabled).

Enables the Users
command on the Server
menu and the Users
button on the main tool
bar.
Enables all functions on
the Users dialog box and
the secondary Group
dialog box.

Virtual Network
Management

Allows you to perform
VMM based host
discovery and
management.

Disables the VM Manager
command on the
Discover menu.

Enables the VM Manager
command on the
Discover menu.
Disables all functions on
the dialog box.

Enables the VM Manager
command on the
Discover menu.
Enables all functions on
the dialog box.

VLAN Manager

Allows you to manage
VLAN Management

Disables the VLAN
Manager command.

Enables the VLAN
Manager command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the VLAN
Manager command and
all functions on the dialog
box.

1290

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 121

D

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

Web Services

Allows you to use Web
Services API.

Zoning Activation (Fabric
and offline zone
database)

Allows you to activate a
zone configuration
selected in the Zoning
dialog box.

NOTE
You must also have the
Zoning Offline and Zoning
Online privileges to launch
the Zoning dialog box.

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Disables the Activate,
Deactivate, and Zoning
Policies buttons in the
Zoning dialog box.

Enables the Zoning
Policies button; however,
you cannot perform any
operations within the
Zoning dialog box.
Disables the Activate and
Deactivate buttons in the
Zoning dialog box.

Enables the Activate,
Deactivate, and Zoning
Policies buttons in the
Zoning dialog box.

NOTE
You must also have the
LSAN privilege to launch
the Activate LSAN Zones
dialog box from the Zone
Database (DB) tab of the
Zoning dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1291

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Zoning Online

Allows you to edit any of
the fabric zone databases
in the available fabrics
within the Zoning dialog
box from the client side
and then save to the
switch.

In Zoning dialog box, the
Zone DB list includes
online and offline zones;
however, if an online zone
is selected, the contents
are not loaded into the
Zoning dialog box. To
launch offline zones you
must have the Zoning
Offline privilege.
Disables all zone
database editing and
switch pushing functions.

In Zoning dialog box, the
Zone DB list includes
online and offline zones.
If you select an online
zone, the contents are
loaded into the Zoning
dialog box. To launch
offline zones you must
have the Zoning Offline
privilege.
Disables all online zone
database editing,
activation, and persisting
functions.
In Zoning dialog box,
enables the Cancel and
Help buttons and the
Compare and Export
functions in the Zone DB
Operation list.
On the Zone DB tab,
enables the find buttons.
On the Active Zone Config
tab, enables the Zone
Member Display list and
Report button.
In the Compare/Merge
dialog box, enables the
Cancel and Help buttons.
In the Potential Members
table, enables all
functions in the right-click
menu.
In the Zones table,
enables the Port Label,
Search, and Properties
(not editable) functions in
the right-click menu.
In the Zone Configs table,
enables the Properties
(not editable) function in
the right-click menu.

Enables all functions on
the Zoning dialog box.

NOTE
You must also have the
Zoning Activation privilege
to enable the Activate
button.

NOTE
You must also have the
Zoning g Offline privilege
to enable the Save As
function in the in the
Zoning and
Compare/Merge dialog
box boxes.

1292

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 121

D

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Zoning Offline

Allows you to edit the
zone database in offline
mode and save the zone
database to the
repository or to the
switch.

In Zoning dialog box, the
Zone DB list includes
offline zones; however, if
an offline zone is
selected, the contents are
not loaded into the
Zoning dialog box.
Only displays the Fabric
Zone DB (if you have the
Zoning Online privilege) in
the Zone DB list.
Disables the Save As
function from Zone DB
Operation list for Fabric
Zone DBs.
Disables the Save To
function on the Active
Zone Config tab.

In Zoning dialog box, the
Zone DB list includes
offline zones. If you select
an offline zone, the
contents are loaded into
the Zoning dialog box.
Disables all offline zone
DB editing, activating,
and persisting functions.
In Zoning dialog box,
enables the Cancel and
Help buttons and the
Compare and Export
functions in the Zone DB
Operation list.
On the Zone DB tab,
enables the find buttons.
On the Active Zone Config
tab, enables the Zone
Member Display list and
Report button.
In the Compare/Merge
dialog box, enables the
Cancel and Help buttons.
In the Potential Members
table, enables all
functions in the right-click
menu.
In the Zones table,
enables the Port Label,
Search, and Properties
(not editable) functions in
the right-click menu.
In the Zone Configs table,
enables the Properties
(not editable) function in
the right-click menu.

Enables all functions on
the Zoning dialog box.

NOTE
You must also have the
Zoning Activation privilege
to enable the Activate
button.

NOTE
You must also have the
Zoning g Online privilege
to enable the Save to
Switch, Activate,
Deactivate, and Rollback
functions in the Zoning
dialog box and the Save
function in the
Compare/Merge dialog
box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1293

D

About user privileges

TABLE 121

Application privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

Zoning - LSAN

Allows you to edit and
activate LSAN zones for
the LSAN fabrics that are
available within the
Zoning dialog box.
Prerequisite:
Both the backbone
fabrics as well as all
directly connected edge
fabrics must be added to
a resource group and a
user with LSAN Zoning
privilege must be
assigned to this specific
resource group.

Disables the Zoning >
LSAN Zoning (Device
Sharing) command on the
Configure menu.
In Zoning dialog box, the
Zoning Scope list does
not include
LSAN_ as
an entry.

Enables the Zoning >
LSAN Zoning (Device
Sharing) command on the
Configure menu.
In Zoning dialog box, the
Zoning Scope list includes
LSAN_ as
an entry, if discovered. If
LSAN_ is
selected, LSAN zone
contents are loaded into
the Zoning dialog box.
Disables LSAN zone
functions on all dialog box
boxes.
Disables all online zone
database editing,
activation, and persisting
functions.
In Zoning dialog box,
enables the Cancel and
Help buttons.
In the Potential Members
table, enables all
functions in the right-click
menu.
In the LSAN Zones table,
enables the Search
functions in the right-click
menu.

Enables all LSAN zone
functions on all dialog box
boxes.

Zoning - Set Edit Limits

Allows you to set the
number of zoning edit
operations that can be
performed on a fabric
zone database before
activating a zone
configuration.

Disables the Zoning > Set
Edit Limits command
from the Configure menu.

Enables the Zoning > Set
Edit Limits command
from the Configure menu.
Disables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box except the
Close and Help.

Enables the Zoning > Set
Edit Limits command
from the Configure menu.
Enables all commands
and functions on the
dialog box.

1294

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 122

D

IP privileges and behavior

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

IP - Address Finder

Allows you to use Address
Finder. Address Finder
finds MAC addresses that
are in the forwarding
tables at the moment
when the search is
performed.

Disables the Address
Finder command.

Enables the Address
Finder command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Address
Finder command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - CLI

Allows you to access the
device from Element
Manager. For
ReadOnly/ReadWrite
access to the device CLI.

Disables the Element
Manager command.

Enables the Element
Manager command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Element
Manager command and
all functions on the dialog
box.

IP - CLI - Port Config

Allows you to access the
device from Element
Manager. For read-write
access to a device CLI to
manage specific ports,
but not for global
configuration of a device.

Disables the Element
Manager command.

Enables the Element
Manager command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Element
Manager command and
all functions on the dialog
box.

IP - CLI Configuration

Allows you to create
device configuration and
reports for IP devices

Disables the CLI
Configuration command.

Enables the CLI
Configuration command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the CLI
Configuration command
and all functions on the
dialog box.

IP - CLI Configuration
Deploy

Allows you to deploy a CLI
configuration.

Disables the Deployment
command.

Enables the Deployment
command; however,
disables function on the
dialog box.

Enables the Deployment
command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - Deployment Reports

Allows you to access
information about
configurations created in
device configuration
deployments, VLAN
deployments, software
image backups, CLI
Configuration Manager
and Configuration Wizard,
and configuration
backups. These reports
are available in case
administrators want to
know whether a
deployment succeeded or
failed.

Disables the Report >
Deployment command.

Enables the Report >
Deployment command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Report >
Deployment command
and all functions on the
dialog box.

IP - Discover Setup

Allows you to discover the
IP devices.

Disables the Discover >
Setup command.

Enables the Discover >
Setup command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Discover >
Setup command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1295

D

About user privileges

TABLE 122

IP privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

IP - Element Manager Port Config

Allows you to access the
device from Element
Manager. For read-write
access to a device Web
Management Interface to
manage specific ports,
but not for global
configuration of a device.

Disables the Element
Manager - Port Config
command.

Enables the Element
Manager - Port Config
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the Element
Manager - Port Config
command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - GSLB Manager

Allows you to create GSLB
policies for Application
products.

Disables the GSLB
command.

Enables the GSLB
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the GSLB
command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - L3 ACL

Allows you to configure a
layer 3 access control list.

Disables the Security >
L3 ACL command on the
Configure menu.

Enables the Security > L3
ACL command on the
Configure menu.
Disables all functions on
the dialog box.

Enables the Security > L3
ACL command on the
Configure menu.
Enables all functions on
the dialog box.

IP - MAC Filter

Allows you to configure a
media access control
filter.

Disables the Security >
MAC Filter command on
the Configure menu.

Enables the Security >
MAC Filter command on
the Configure menu.
Disables all functions on
the dialog box.

Enables the Security >
MAC Filter command on
the Configure menu.
Enables all functions on
the dialog box.

IP - Main Display Ethernet Fabric

Allows you to display the
topology for the Ethernet
Fabric network view.

Disables the Ethernet
Fabric topology.

Enables the Ethernet
Fabric topology; however,
disables functions on the
topology.

Enables the Ethernet
Fabric topology and all
functions on the topology.

IP - Main Display - IP

Allows you to display the
topology for the IP
network view.

Disables the IP topology.

Enables the IP topology;
however, disables
functions on the topology.

Enables the IP topology
and all functions on the
topology.

IP - Main Display - L2

Allows you to display the
topology map for Layer 2.
The Layer 2 Topology map
displays connectivity for
all IOS devices on the
network.

Disables the L2 topology.

Enables the L2 topology;
however, disables
functions on the topology.

Enables the L2 topology
and all functions on the
topology

IP - Main Display - MRP

Allows you to display the
topology for MRP rings.

Disables the MRP
Topology command.

Enables the MRP
Topology command;
however, disables
functions on the topology.

Enables the MRP
Topology command and
all functions on the
topology.

IP - Main Display - VLAN

Allows you to display
topologies for VLANs.

Disables the VLAN
topology.

Enables the VLAN
topology; however,
disables functions on the
topology.

Enables the VLAN
topology and all functions
on the topology.

IP - MPLS - VCID Pool

Allows you to create a
pool of VCIDs which are
used when creating new
VLL and VPLS instances.

Disables the MPLS
command.

Enables the MPLS
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the MPLS
command and all VCID
Pool functions on the
dialog box.

1296

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About user privileges

TABLE 122

D

IP privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

IP - MPLS - VLL

Allows you to manage VLL
configurations.

Disables the MPLS
command.

Enables the MPLS
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the MPLS
command and all VLL
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - MPLS - VPLS

Allows you to manage
VPLS configurations

Disables the MPLS
command.

Enables the MPLS
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the MPLS
command and all VPLS
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - MPLS- LSP

Allows you to manage LSP
and LSP Topology

Disables the MPLS
command.

Enables the MPLS
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the MPLS
command and all LSP
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - Port Profile Edit

Allows you to configure
ports on VDX devices.

Disables the Add and
Delete commands on the
Port Profiles tab of the
Properties dialog box.

Disables the Add and
Delete commands on the
Port Profiles tab of the
Properties dialog box.

Enables the Add and
Delete commands on the
Port Profiles tab of the
Properties dialog box.

NOTE: Ethernet Fabrics
must be enabled
in the
Management
application to
view the Port
Profile tab.
IP - Power Management

Allows you monitor
PoE-capable products.

Disables the Power
Center command.

Enables the Power Center
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the Power Center
command and all
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - Reload Product

Allows you to save the
configuration to the
device flash memory and
reboot the device.

Disables the
Configuration Repository
command.

Enables the Configuration
Repository command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the Configuration
Repository command and
all functions on the dialog
box.

IP - SSL Certificate
Manager

Allows you to manage SSL
Certificate and Key for
L4-7 SSL capable product

Disables the SSL
Certificate command.

Enables the SSL
Certificate command;
however, disables
functions on the dialog
box.

Enables the SSL
Certificate command and
all functions on the dialog
box.

IP - VIP-Server Mgr (Real
Server Port View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server View using the
Real Server Port View

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Real
Server Port View
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - VIP-Server Mgr
(Virtual Server Port View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server View using the
Virtual Server Port View

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Virtual
Server Port View
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - VIP-Server Mgr (Real
Server View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server View using the
Real Server View

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Real
Server View functions on
the dialog box.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1297

D

About Roles and Access Levels

TABLE 122

IP privileges and behavior (Continued)

Privilege

Description

No Privilege

Read-Only

Read/Write

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf
Node (Real Server Port
View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server using the Real
Server Port View. When
assigned to user as
Read-Write privilege, only
leaf node can be
disabled/enable

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Real
Server Port View
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf
Node (Virtual Server Port
View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server using the Virtual
Server Port View. When
assigned to user as
Read-Write privilege, only
leaf node can be
disabled/enable

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Virtual
Server Port View
functions on the dialog
box.

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf
Node (Real Server View)

Allows you to manage VIP
Server using the Real
Server View. When
assigned to user as
Read-Write privilege, only
leaf node can be
disabled/enable.

Disables the VIP Server
command.

Enables the VIP Server
command; however,
disables functions on the
dialog box.

Enables the VIP Server
command and all Real
Server View functions on
the dialog box.

About Roles and Access Levels
The Management application provides preconfigured roles (IP Administrator, Report User Group,
and Network Administrator); however, the IP Administrator can also create roles manually (refer to
“Creating a new role” on page 191 for instructions.)

• Application Features and Role Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
• IP Features and Role Access Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300
TABLE 123

Application Features and Role Access Levels

Feature

Roles with Read/Write Access

Roles with Read-Only Access

Active Session Management

IP System Administrator, Security Officer

Operator

Call Home

IP System Administrator, Operator

Certificate Management

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator,
Host Administrator, Security Administrator

Operator

Configuration Management

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

Operator

DCB Management

SAN System Administrator, Network
Administrator

Security Administrator, Security Officer

E-mail Event Notification Setup

IP System Administrator, Operator

Element Manager

IP System Administrator,

1298

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

About Roles and Access Levels

TABLE 123

D

Application Features and Role Access Levels (Continued)

Feature

Roles with Read/Write Access

Element Manager - Product
Administration

IP System Administrator,

Event Management

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

Fabric Watch

IP System Administrator,

Fault Management

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

Operator

FCoE Management

SAN System Administrator, Network
Administrator

Security Administrator, Zone Administrator,
Security Officer, Operator

Firmware Management

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

Operator

Host Adapter Management

SAN System Administrator, Security Officer, Host
Administrator

Operator

L2 ACL

IP System Administrator, Security Administrator

License Update

IP System Administrator

Operator

Performance

IP System Administrator, Host Administrator,
Network Administrator

Operator

Properties Edit

IP System Administrator, Host Administrator

Operator

Reports

IP System Administrator, Report User Group,
Network Administrator

Operator

Security

IP System Administrator, Security Administrator,
Security Officer, Host Administrator

Operator

Server Backup

IP System Administrator, Product Administrator,
Operator

Server Software Configuration

IP System Administrator

Operator

Setup Tools

IP System Administrator

Operator

Technical Support Data Collection

IP System Administrator

Operator

User Management

IP System Administrator, Security Officer

Operator

Virtual Network Management

IP System Administrator

Operator

VLAN Manager

IP System Administrator

Operator

Web Services

IP System Administrator

Operator

Zoning - LSAN

IP System Administrator, Zone Administrator

Operator

Zoning Set Edit Limits

IP System Administrator

Zone Administrator, Operator

Zoning Activation

IP System Administrator, Zone Administrator

Operator

Zoning Offline

IP System Administrator, Zone Administrator

Operator

Zoning Online

IP System Administrator, Zone Administrator

Operator

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Roles with Read-Only Access

Operator

1299

D

About Roles and Access Levels

TABLE 124

IP Features and Role Access Levels

Feature

Roles with Read/Write Access

IP - Address Finder

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - CLI

IP System Administrator

IP - CLI Configuration

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - CLI - Port Config

IP System Administrator

IP - Deployment Reports

IP System Administrator, Report User Group,
Network Administrator

IP - Discover Setup

IP System Administrator

IP - Element Manager - Port Config

IP System Administrator

IP - GSLB Manager

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - L3 ACL

IP System Administrator, Security Administrator

IP - MAC Filter

IP System Administrator, Security Administrator

IP - Server Mgr (Real Server View)

IP System Administrator

IP - Main Display - IP

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - Main Display - L2

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - Main Display - MRP

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - Main Display - VLAN

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - MPLS - LSP

IP System Administrator

IP - MPLS - VCID Pool

IP System Administrator

IP - MPLS - VLL

IP System Administrator

IP - MPLS - VPLS

IP System Administrator

IP - Power Management

IP System Administrator

IP - Reload Product

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - SSL Certificate Manager

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - VIP-Server Mgr (Real Server Port
View)

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - VIP-Server Mgr (Virtual Server Port
View)

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf Node (Real
Server View)

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf Node (Real
Server Port View)

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

IP - VIP-Server Mgr Leaf Node (Virtual
Server Port View)

IP System Administrator, Network Administrator

1300

Roles with Read-Only Access

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

E

Device Properties

In this appendix
• Viewing SAN device properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IP device properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Host properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Properties customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1301
1314
1326
1329

Viewing SAN device properties
NOTE

Only available for Fabric OS products.
You can customize the device and fabric Properties dialog boxes to display only the data you need
by creating user-defined property labels. You can also edit property fields to change information.

Viewing Fabric properties
To view the properties for a fabric, complete the following step.
1. Right-click any fabric and select Properties.
The Fabric_Name Properties dialog box displays, with information related to the selected
fabric.
To add user-defined property labels, refer to “Adding a property field” on page 1329.
Fields containing a green triangle (

TABLE 125

) in the lower right corner are editable.

Fabric properties

Field/Component

Description

Name

The name specified through the switch Element Manager.

FID Fabric Name

Enter a name for the fabric (up to 128 characters).
Supported on seed switches running Fabric OS 7.0 or later.

Seed Switch

The IP address of the seed switch.

AD Enabled

Whether admin domain is enabled on the switch or not.

Status

The operational status.

Switch and AG Count

The number of switches and Access Gateway’s in the fabric.

Description

A description of the customer site.

Principal Switch

The IP address of the principal switch.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1301

E

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 125

Fabric properties

Field/Component

Description

Active Zone Configuration

Whether active zone configuration is activated on the fabric.

Last Discovery

The date and time of last discovery.

Tracked

Whether the fabric is tracked.

Location

The customer site location.

Contact

The primary contact at the customer site.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to “Adding a
property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to “Editing a
property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to “Deleting
a property field” on page 1330.

2. Click OK on the Fabric_Name Properties dialog box to close.

Viewing SAN device properties
To view the properties for a device, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click any product icon and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays, with information related to the selected device (such as,
switches, directors, HBAs, trunks, tunnels, and nodes).
To add user-defined property labels, refer to “Adding a property field” on page 1329.
Fields containing a green triangle (

) in the lower right corner are editable.

Depending on the device type, some of the properties listed in the following table may not be
available for all products.

TABLE 126

1302

Device properties

Field/Component

Description

Addressing Mode

The addressing mode of the switch.

Bandwidth

The bandwidth of the FCIP tunnel.

Capability

The node capability.

Compression

Whether compression is On or Off for the FCIP tunnel.

Connected Virtual FCoE Port

The fabric name, switch name, and virtual FCoE port number of the
connected virtual FCoE port.

Contact

The primary contact at the customer site.

Contributors

The device contributors.

Device Type

Whether the device is an initiator or target.

Description

A description of the customer site.

Destination IP Address

The IP address of the of the FCIP tunnel destination device.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 126

E

Device properties (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Discovery Status

The discovery status of the switch. Examples include ‘Discovered: Seed
Switch’ and ‘Discovered: Not Reachable’.

Domain ID

The device’s domain ID, which is the top-level addressing hierarchy of
the domain.

Fabric

The fabric name.

Fabric Name

The name specified through the device Element Manager.

Fabric Watch

Whether Fabric Watch is up or down.

Factory Serial Number

The factory serial number.

Fastwrite

Whether fastwrite is On or Off for the FCIP tunnel.

FC Port

The FC port of the FCIP tunnel.

FCoE Capable

Whether the device is Fibre Channel over Ethernet capable.

FCS Role

Whether FCS is supported.

Firmware

The firmware version.

GigE Port

The GigE port of the FCIP tunnel.

Host Name

The Host name.

IKE Policy #

IP Address
IPSec Policy #

The IKE policy number. Also includes the following information:
Authentication Algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
Diffie-Hellman
SA Life

•
•
•
•

The device’s IP address.
The IPSec policy number. Also includes the following information:
Authentication Algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
SA Life

•
•
•

L2 Capable

Whether the device is Layer 2 capable.

L3 Capable

Whether the device is Layer 3 capable.

L2 Mode

The Layer 2 mode. Options include Access, Converged, or Trunk.

LAG ID

The link aggregation group identifier.

Last Discovery

The date and time of the last discovery.

Location

The customer site location.

MAC address

In a network, the Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique
number that identifies a specific hardware interface. It is a 12-digit
hexadecimal number.

Managed By

The management program used to manage the fabric.

Master Port

The master port of the trunk.

Member Ports

The member ports of the trunk.

Model

The model number of the device.

Name

The user-defined name of the switch.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1303

E

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 126

1304

Device properties (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

Node Name

The name of the node.

Node WWN

The world wide name of the node.

Physical/Logical

Whether the device is a physical device or a logical device.

Port Count

The number of ports.

Port Type

The port type.

Preshared key configured

Whether the preshared key is configured for the FCIP tunnel.

Reason

The device status.

Remote Switch Name

The remote switch name of the trunk.

Remote Switch IP

The remote switch IP address of the trunk.

Remote Switch WWN

The remote switch world wide name of the trunk.

Remote Slot #

The remote slot number of the trunk.

Remote Master Port

The remote master port of the trunk.

Remote Member Ports

The remote member port of the trunk.

Sequence number

The sequence number of the switch.

Serial #

The hardware serial number.

Slot #

The slot number of the trunk.

Source IP Address

The IP address of the of the FCIP tunnel source device.

Speed (Gb/s)

The speed of the port in gigabytes per second.

State

The device’s state, for example, online or offline.

Status

The operational status.

Switch Name

The switch name.

Switch IP

The switch IP address.

Switch WWN

The switch world wide name.

Tape Pipelining

Whether tape pipelining is On or Off for the FCIP tunnel.

Tunnel ID

The tunnel identifier.

Type

The device type.

Unit Type

The unit type of the node.

Vendor

The product vendor.

# Virtual FCoE port count

The number of virtual FCoE ports on the device. There is a one-to-one
mapping of TE ports to virtual FCoE ports. Therefore, the number of
virtual session ports is one for directly connected devices.

VLAN #

The VLAN number of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN Class of Service for Control
Connection

The VLAN class of service for the control connection of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN Class of Service for Data
Connection

The VLAN class of service for the data connection of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN ID

The VLAN identification number.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 126

E

Device properties (Continued)

Field/Component

Description

WWN

The world wide name of the device.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

2. To view port properties, select one of the following tabs:
The following port types are available depending on the selected device:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

FC Ports
GigE Ports
IP Ports
iSCSI Ports
Virtual Sessions Ports
Virtual FCoE Ports
Virtual Machine Ports

3. If you selected the FC Ports tab, select the port type.

• FC
• ICL
• GigE
For a description of the port properties, refer to “Port properties” on page 1310.
4. Click OK on the Properties dialog box to close.

Viewing Storage properties
NOTE
Only available for Fabric OS products.
The Storage Properties dialog box displays information related to a selected storage device. To view
the properties for a storage device, complete the following steps.
1. Select a storage icon.
2. Select Edit > Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
3. Click the Storage tab.

NOTE

Some fields may not be available for all products.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1305

E

1306

Viewing SAN device properties

Field

Description

(Status)

Lists two kinds of data: the LUN’s health and the state of the LUN’s disks.
The colored icon in the lower-left corner indicates the LUN’s health. In
most cases, there is also a number that represents the RAID type. The
possible RAID types are 0, 1, 5, or 10, and the number does not display if
the RAID type is different from those.
The following are examples of generic LUN status icons:
Normal. All disks are operating normally and online.
Transitioning. One or more disks are in a transitioning state. For example,
rebuilding or binding. RAID type is 1 in this case.
Faulted/Offline. One or mores disks is offline or faulted. RAID type is 10 in
this case.
Unknown. Status is not available.

Array

A group of disks designated by the user to be managed by the RAID-5
technique.

Assigned LUNs (Count)

All LUNs assigned (masked) to host ports that currently exist on this
storage device.

Assigned LUNs (Size GB)

The total amount of storage space carved into LUNs and assigned
(masked) to host ports on the storage device.

Block Size (B)

The size of the individual blocks on the disk, in bytes.

Device Adapter

(IBM ESS products only) Displays one of eight ESS product adapters
deployed in pairs, one for each cluster that provides communication
between the cluster and storage products.

Disks

The number of disks across which this LUN is striped.

Free LUNs (Count)

All LUNs NOT assigned (masked) to any host ports (available) that
currently exist on this storage device.

Free LUNs (Size GB)

The total amount of storage space carved into LUNs but NOT assigned
(masked) to host ports on the storage device, in gigabytes.

Free Space (Count)

The number of contiguous free space instances not yet carved into LUNs
(available to be carved) on the storage device. Typically, there is one free
space for each disk group on a storage device.

Free Space (Size GB)

The total amount of storage space not carved into a LUN (available for
new LUNs) on the storage device, in gigabytes.

Hosts Assigned

The number of hosts to which this LUN has been assigned.

Host Spares

The number of disks assigned as host spares in addition to the disks that
make up the LUN.

Label

A user-specified label. The default value is the name of the label as
specified in the storage product.

Loop

(IBM ESS products only) The physical connection between a pair of
product adapters in the ESS product.

LSS ID

Specifies the logical subsystem of an IBM ESS product.

LUN Name

The name of the LUN.

LUN Status

The LUN status (online or offline).

Management Link

The management link status (Up/Down) of the product.

Model #

The model number of the product.

Name (in-band)

The name of the in-band product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

E

Field

Description

Operational Status

The operational status of the product.

OS Type

The operating system.

Protocol

The LUN protocol.

Size (GB)

The total size of this LUN’s storage, in gigabytes.

State

The state of the LUN.

Storage LUN ID

The storage product’s LUN ID number for this LUN.

Storage Ports

The total number of storage ports assigned to the server or the port, or
bound to the LUN.

Type

The level or type of RAID storage. Possible values are as follows:
0. Striped disk array without fault tolerance.
1. Mirroring and duplexing.
2. Hamming code ECC.
3. Parallel transfer with parity.
4. Independent data disks with shared parity disk.
5. Independent data disks with distributed parity blocks.
6. Independent data disks with two independent distributed parity
schemes.
• 7. Optimized asynchrony for high I/O rates as well as high data
transfer rates.
• 10. Very high reliability combined with high performance.
• 53. High I/O rates and data transfer performance.
• 0+1. High data transfer performance.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Total (Count)

All LUNs, whether assigned or not, that currently exist on this storage
device.

Total (Size GB)

The total amount of storage space on the storage device, in gigabytes.

Unique LUN ID

Identifies the unique LUN identifier.

Volume State

The volume state of the LUN.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

4. Click OK on the Properties dialog box to close.

Viewing iSCSI Properties dialog box
NOTE

Only available for Fabric OS products.
The iSCSI Properties dialog box displays information related to iSCSI. To view the properties for an
iSCSI device, complete the following steps.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1307

E

Viewing SAN device properties

1. Right-click a product icon and select Properties .
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the iSCSI tab.

NOTE

Some fields may not be available for all products.

1308

Field

Description

Agent

The Caffeine agent version number.

Applications

The applications.

Assigned LUNs

The number of unique LUNs (not LUN paths) masked to this host.

Assigned LUNs Size (GB)

The total size of the unique LUNs (not LUN paths) in gigabytes.

Command Descriptor Block Count

The number of command descriptor blocks on the product.

Comments

Comments regarding the product.

Contact

A contact for the product.

Department

The department.

Description

A description of the product.

Device Type

The product type.

Digest Error Count

The number of digest errors on the product.

Driver

The iSCSI driver.

Driver Version

The iSCSI driver version.

Firmware

The firmware for the product.

Group

The name of the portal group.

Initiator Type

The type of initiator (such as, HBA or Software).

Interface

The name of the interface.

IP Address

The product’s IP address.

iSCSI Alias

The name of the alias target.

iSCSI Node Name

The node name of the product.

iSCSI Node Type

The node type of the product.

iSCSI Service

The service status; for example, running or not running.

iSNS IP Address

The IP address of the server to which the product is pointed.

ISNS IP Address

A list of the iSNS IP addresses this product has been assigned by the user
to query.

iSNS Service

Whether the product is registered with an iSNS server.

Location

The location of the product.

Management Link

The management link status (Up/Down) of the product.

Name (Product)

The name of the product.

OS

The name of the operating system running on the product.

OS Build

The operating system build running on the product.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

E

Field

Description

OS Release

The operating system release running on the product.

Portal Addresses

The list of IP addresses.

Port

The port number.

Protocol Error Count

The number of protocol errors.

Tag

The group tag ID of the portal.

Sessions button

Select to display the Filer Sessions dialog box for the product.

Statistics button

Select to display the Filer iSCSI Statistics dialog box for the product.

Storage Arrays

The number of arrays containing LUNs masked to the server.

Storage Logins

The number of unique filers to which hosts on this server are logged in.

Target Portals table

Target portals of the product.

Total LUN Size (GB)

The size in gigabytes (GB) of all unique LUNs (not LUN paths) masked to
the product.

Vendor

The vendor of the product.

3. Click OK on the Properties dialog box to close.

Viewing port properties
NOTE
Only available for Fabric OS products.
The following port types are available depending on the device:

•
•
•
•

FC Ports
GigE Ports
IP Ports
iSCSI Ports

NOTE

iSCSI ports that have an FC Address of all zeros are inactive. All others are active.

• Virtual Sessions Ports
• Virtual FCoE Ports
To view a port’s properties, right-click on a port and select Properties, or double-click the port.
The port Properties dialog box displays (Figure 518).
To add user-defined property labels, refer to “Adding a property field” on page 1329.
Fields containing a green triangle (

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

) in the lower right corner are editable.

1309

E

Viewing SAN device properties

FIGURE 518 Port Properties dialog box
NOTE

Depending on the port type, some of the following properties may not be available for all products.

TABLE 127

1310

Port properties

Field

Description

Additional Port Info

Additional error information relating to the selected port.

Address

The address of the port.

Addressing Mode

The addressing mode of the switch.

Active FC4 Types

The active FC4 types.

Active Tunnels

The number of active tunnels.

Area ID (hex)/Port Index (hex)

The area identifier, in hexadecimal, of the switch-to-product connection.

Associated GE Port

The port number of the associated GE port.

Attached Port #

The port number of the attached product.

Back to Edge Routing Support

Whether back to edge routing is supported.

Bandwidth

The bandwidth of the FCIP tunnel.

Blocked

The configuration of the switch (blocked or unblocked).

Bottleneck Status

Whether the port is bottlenecked or not.

Buffers Desired

The number of buffers desired but not allocated.

Buffers Allocated

The number of buffers allocated.

Capability

The node capability.

Class

The class of the port.

Class of Service

The class of service.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 127

E

Port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

Compression

Whether compression is enabled or disabled.

Connected Devices

The number of connected devices. Click the icon in the right side of the
field to open the Virtual FCoE Port  Connected Devices dialog
box.

Connected Switch

The name of the connected switch.

Delete button

Click to delete.

Description

A description of the customer site.

Destination IP Address

The IP address of the of the FCIP tunnel destination device.

Device Type

Whether the device is an initiator or target.

Discovery Status

The discovery status of the switch. Examples include ‘Discovered: Seed
Switch’ and ‘Discovered: Not Reachable’.

Distance Actual (km)

The actual distance (in km) for -end port connectivity.

Distance Estimated (km)

The estimated distance (in km) for -end port connectivity.

Domain ID

The device’s domain ID, which is the top-level addressing hierarchy of the
domain.

Encryption

Whether encryption is enabled or disabled.

Fabric

The fabric’s IP address.

Fabric Name

The name of the fabric.

Fabric Watch

Whether Fabric Watch is up or down.

Fastwrite

Whether fastwrite is On or Off for the FCIP tunnel.

FC Port

The FC port of the FCIP tunnel.

FC Port Count

The number of FC ports on the device.

FCIP Capable

Whether the port is FCIP capable.

FCoE Capable

Whether the device is Fibre Channel over Ethernet capable.

FCS Role

Whether FCS is supported.

Flag (FICON related)

Whether a flag is on or off.

Firmware

The firmware version.

Forward Error Correction (FEC)

Whether FEC is enabled or disabled.

GigE Port

The GigE port of the FCIP tunnel.

GigE Port Count

The number of GigE ports on the device.

Host Name

The Host name.

IKE Policy #

The IKE policy number. Also includes the following information:
Authentication Algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
Diffie-Hellman
SA Life

•
•
•
•

Inband Management Status

The inband management status (online or offline).

Index

The index of the Virtual FCoE Port.

Interface Count

The interface count.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1311

E

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 127

Port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

IP Address

The device’s IP address.

IPSec Policy #

1312

The IPSec policy number. Also includes the following information:
Authentication Algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
SA Life

•
•
•

iSCSI button

Click to launch the Element Manager.

iSCSI Capable

Whether the port is iSCSI capable or not.

L2 Capable

Whether the device is Layer 2 capable.

L3 Capable

Whether the device is Layer 3 capable.

L2 Mode

The Layer 2 mode. Options include Access, Converged, or Trunk.

LAG ID

The link aggregation group identifier.

Last Discovery

The date and time of the last discovery.

Location

The customer site location.

Locked Port Type

The port type of the locked product.

Long Distance Setting

Whether the connection is considered to be normal or longer distance.

MAC Address

The Media Access Control address assigned to a network adapters or
network interface cards (NICs).

Managed By

The management program used to manage the fabric.

Manufacturer Plant

The name of the manufacturer plant.

Master Port

The master port of the trunk.

Member Ports

The member ports of the trunk.

Model

The model number of the device.

Modify button

Click to launch the Element Manager.

Name

The name of the port (up to 128 characters). This field is editable.

Node Name

The name of the node.

Node WWN

The world wide name of the node.

Performance list

Select to launch the dialog box of one of the following performance
options:
• Real Time Graph
• HIstorical Graph
• HIstorical Report

Physical/Logical

Whether the port is a physical port or a logical port.

Port #

The number of the port.

Port Address

The address of the port.

Port Count

The number of ports.

Port ID

The identifier of the port.

Port Module

The port’s module.

Port NPIV

Number of NPIV ports.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Viewing SAN device properties

TABLE 127

E

Port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

Port Speed (Gb/s)

The port speed, in Gbits per second.

Port State

The port state (online or offline).

Port Status

The port’s operational status (online or offline).

Port Type

The port type.

Port WWN

The port’s world wide name.

Preshared key configured

Whether the preshared key is configured for the FCIP tunnel.

Prohibited

Whether the port is prohibited.

Protocol

The network protocol, for example, Fibre Channel.

Reason

The device status.

Remote Switch Name

The remote switch name of the trunk.

Remote Switch IP

The remote switch IP address of the trunk.

Remote Switch WWN

The remote switch world wide name of the trunk.

Remote Slot #

The remote slot number of the trunk.

Remote Master Port

The remote master port of the trunk.

Remote Member Ports

The remote member port of the trunk.

Sequence number

The sequence number of the switch.

Serial #

The hardware serial number.

Slot #

The location (slot) of the port.

Source IP Address

The IP address of the of the FCIP tunnel source device.

Speed (Gb/s)

The port speed, in Gbits per second.

State

The port state (online or offline).

Status

The port’s operational status (online or offline).

Switch Name

The switch name.

Switch IP

The switch IP address.

Switch WWN

The switch world wide name.

Symbolic Name

The symbolic name of the port.

Tag

The tag number of the port.

Tape Pipelining

Whether tape pipelining is On or Off for the FCIP tunnel.

Troubleshooting list

Select to launch the dialog box of one of the following troubleshooting
options:
• IP Ping
• IP Traceroute
• IP Performance

Tunnel Count

The number of tunnels.

Tunnel ID

The tunnel identifier.

Type

The type of port, for example, U_port.

Unit Type

The unit type of the node.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1313

E

IP device properties

TABLE 127

Port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

User Port #

The number of the user port.

Vendor

The product vendor.

# Virtual FCoE port count

The number of virtual FCoE ports on the device. There is a one-to-one
mapping of TE ports to virtual FCoE ports. Therefore, the number of
virtual session ports is one for directly connected devices.

# Virtual Session Ports

The number of virtual session ports associated with the GE port.

VLAN #

The VLAN number of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN Class of Service for Control
Connection

The VLAN class of service for the control connection of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN Class of Service for Data
Connection

The VLAN class of service for the data connection of the FCIP tunnel.

VLAN ID

The VLAN identification number.

WWN

The world wide name of the device.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

IP device properties
You can view device and port properties from any view in the IP Topology.
You can customize the device and fabric Properties dialog boxes to display only the data you need
by creating user-defined property labels (refer to “Adding a property field” on page 1329).
You can also edit property fields to change information. Fields containing a green triangle (
the lower right corner are editable.

) in

Viewing IP device and port properties
To view properties for a device, complete the following steps.
1. Select one of the following view types from the view list on the Product List toolbar.

•
•
•
•
•

Network Object
IP Topology
L2 Topology
Ethernet Fabrics (refer to “Viewing VCS fabric properties” on page 1319)
VLAN Topology

2. Right-click the device in the Product List and select Properties.

1314

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

E

The Device_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Review the device and port properties.
To add user-defined property labels, refer to “Adding a property field” on page 1329.
Fields containing a green triangle (

) in the lower right corner are editable.

NOTE

Some fields are not available for all products.
Field/Component

Description

Properties tab

Select to display information about the device.

Detailed Report button

Click to launch the detailed product report.

Name

The name of the product.

Alias

The alias.

Host Name

The host name.

System Name

The system name.

IP Address

The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.

System OID

The system's object identifier.

Product Type

The type of device.

VCS Mode

Whether or not the device is in VCS mode.

VCS ID

The VCS ID number for the fabric.

Node Count

The number of nodes in the fabric.

Principal Switch

The identifier of the principal switch.

Config Mode

The configuration mode.

Device Type

The type of device.

Serial #

The serial number of the product.

Status

The status for the product and the port.

Admin Status

The admin status of the product. Options include:
Normal mode
Troubleshooting mode

Memo

Additional information about the product.

Vendor

The name of the product’s vendor.

Model

The model number of the product.

Port Count

The number of ports on the product.

Firmware

The firmware version of the product.

Build Label

The firmware build number.

FDMI Serial Number

The serial number of the FDMI.

FDMI Firmware

The FDMI firmware version and build number.

FDMI Driver version

The FDMI driver version.

FDMI Manufacturer

The manufacturer of the FDMI.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1315

E

IP device properties

Field/Component

1316

Description

Location

The physical location of the product.

Contact

The name of the person or group you should contact about the product.

Description

The description of the product.

Connected AP count

Number of APs connected to the controller or switch.

Managed AP count

Only applicable to the selected controller. Number of APs that the
selected controller manages.

Controller cluster mode

Only applicable to the selected controller. Cluster mode of the controller:
Active, Standby and None.

Controller cluster name

Only applicable to the selected controller. Cluster name.

Controller cluster members

Only applicable to the selected controller. IP addresses of the controller
cluster peers.

Cluster (MCT switches only)

The cluster details of the Multi-Chassis Trunk (MCT) switch. MCT cluster
details include:
• Cluster ID — The MCT cluster ID.
• Cluster Name — The MCT cluster name.
• Cluster RBridge ID — The RBridge ID of the MCT cluster.
• Cluster State — Whether the MCT cluster is deployed or undeployed.
• Isolation Mode — Whether isolation mode is loose or strict.
• Active Member VLAN Range — The active member VLAN for data.
• Configure Member VLAN Range — The configured member VLAN for
data.
• Keep Alive VLAN — An alternate VLAN for Cluster Communication
Protocol (CCP) when the Inter-Chassis Link (ICL) is down.
• Session VLAN — The VLAN used by the cluster for control
operations.
• ICL Name — The ICL name.

Cluster Peer (MCT switches only)

The cluster peer details of the MCT switch. MCT cluster peer details
include:
• Peer Product — The name and IP address of the MCT peer product.
• Peer IP Address — The VE interface IP address of the MCT peer.
• Peer RBridge ID — The RBridge ID of the MCT peer.
• ICL Name — The name of the ICL used to reach the MCT peer.
• Keep Alive Interval — The interval time for CCP over the keep-alive
VLAN.
• Hold Time — The hold-time before making the CCP down state when
the ICL goes down.
• Fast Failover — Whether fast failover is enabled or disabled.
• Active VLAN Range — The active member VLAN for data.
• Peer State — Whether the peer state is CCP up or CCP down.
• Peer State Up Time — How long the peer has been up.
• Peer State Down Reason — The reason the peer is down.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

E

Field/Component

Description

Nodes tab

Select to display information about nodes in the fabric. For detailed
information about this tab, refer to “Viewing VCS fabric properties” on
page 1319.

Port Profiles tab

Select to display information about port profiles for the fabric members.
For detailed information about this tab, refer to “Viewing VCS fabric
properties” on page 1319.

Ports tab

Select to display information about ports on the device.

Show list

Select the port type you want to display. Options include:
All
Trunked Ports
ICLs
MCT Ports

•
•
•
•

Port Count

The number of ports in the group.

Port Actions list

Select to enable or disable port actions.

Performance list

Select to launch the Performance dialog box.

Identifier

The identifier of the port.

Name

The name of the port.

MAC Address

The MAC address of the port.

Port Status

The status of the port.

Port State

The state of the port.

Type

The port type.

Speed

The speed of the port.

L2/Tag Mode

Whether the port is tagged or untagged.

Untagged VLAN ID

The untagged VLAN identifier of the port.

Duplex Mode

The duplex mode of the port.

Role

The role of the port. Possible values include the following roles:
Fabric
Edge
Stacking
Peri Port
For MCT switches, the port role is either ICL or MCT.

Profile Mode

Displays the profile mode status of the port; for example, Enabled or
Disabled.

Active Profiles

Displays the active profiles associated with the port.

LAG/Trunk ID

Displays the LAG name and the trunk port identifier.

Attached MAC

Displays the MAC address of the attached device. The value is empty
when the port is not connected. The value contains a comma-separated
list of MAC address when more than one MAC address is found.

Stacking Port

Whether or not the port stacked.

MCT Client Name

The MCT client name.

Access Points tab

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

•
•
•
•

Select to display information about access ports (APs) connected to the
device.

1317

E

IP device properties

Field/Component

Description

Connected AP count

Number of APs connected to the controller or switch.

Managed AP count

Only applicable to the selected controller. Number of APs that the
selected controller manages.

Name

The device name used to identify the AP.

Device MAC

The AP device MAC address.

Model

The model of the AP.

Serial Number

The serial number of the AP.

Firmware version

The firmware level of the AP.

Status

The status of the AP.

Controller \ Port

The IP address of the controller or switch connected to the AP. Also
displays the port number if the AP is directly connected.

Connected switch \ Port

The IP address of the switch connected to the AP. Also displays the port
number if the AP is directly connected.

Profile Name

AP profile name.

RF Domain Name

The RF domain name set for the AP.

Location

Location set for the AP.

Contact

Contact set for the AP.

Time Zone

The time zone set for the AP.

Country

The country set for the AP.

VLAN for Control Traffic

The VLAN for control traffic set for the AP.

Client count

The number of wireless clients or stations connected or associated to
the AP.

SFP/Port Optics tab

Select to display the details of all the SFP and port optics.
NOTE: To export the SFP details, click the link under the Physical Ports SFP Details section of Detailed Report.

TX Power

The power transmitted by the port in a device.

RX Power

The power received by the port in a device.

Transceiver Temperature

The temperature of the port, in Celsius.

TX Bias Current

The current supplied to the SFP transceiver.
NOTE: To export power supply details, click the link under the
Chassis-Power Supply section of Detailed Report.

Wavelength

The wavelength of the port.

Serial #

The number to identify the port.

Media

The type in which the port is present.

vNetwork Connectivity tab

Select to display information about vNetwork connectivity for the fabric
members. For detailed information about this tab, refer to “VM
Connectivity tab” on page 2744.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

1318

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

E

Viewing VCS fabric properties
To view properties for a VCS fabric, complete the following steps.
1. Select Ethernet Fabrics from the view list on the Product List toolbar.
2. Right-click the VCS fabric in the Product List and select Properties.
The Fabric_Name Properties dialog box displays.
3. Review the device and port properties.
Field/Component

Description

Properties tab

Select to display information about the fabric.

Detailed Report button

Click to launch the detailed cluster report.

Name

The name of the fabric.

Alias

The alias name. This is an editable field.

Host Name

The host name associated with the fabric.

System Name

The name of the product.

IP Address

The IP address (IPv4 or IPv6 format) of the product.

Product Type

The fabric’s product type, which is a Layer 2 switch.

VCS Mode

The VCS mode of the switch, which can be enabled or disabled.

VCS ID

The VCS ID configured in the fabric.

Config Mode

The configuration mode of the fabric.

Node Count

The number of fabric nodes in the fabric.

Principal Switch

The name and IP address of the principal switch.

Status

The health status of the cluster.

Admin Status

The administrative status of the switch, for example, Normal.

Memo

Additional comments regarding the switch.

Vendor

The switch vendor.

Model

The switch model type (VDX 6710, VDX 6720, or VDX 6730).

Port Count

The number of ports on the switch.

Firmware

The firmware version and build number.

Location

The physical location of the product. This is an editable field.

Contact

The name of the person or group you should contact about the product,
for example, Technical Support. This is an editable field.

Description

The description of the product.

Connected AP Count

The number of AP devices connected to the device.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1319

E

IP device properties

Field/Component

Description

Nodes tab

Select to display information about nodes on the fabric.

Name

The name of the VCS fabric member.

Alias

The fabric member alias name.

Host Name

The host name associated with the VCS fabric member.

System Name

The name of the switch.

IP Address

The IP address of the switch.

System OID

The system’s object identifier.

Product Type

The fabric’s product type, which is a Layer 2 switch.

Serial #

The VCS fabric member’s serial number.

VCS Mode

The VCS mode of the switch, which can be standalone or VCS fabric.

VCS ID

The VCS ID configured in the fabric.

Config Mode

The configuration mode of the fabric, which is Local Only or Distributed.

Licensed Features

The licensed features available on the device.

RBridge ID

The routing bridge identifier associated with the VCS fabric member.

Access Gateway Mode

Indicates whether the Access Gateway mode is enabled or disabled.

State

The device’s state (online or offline).

Fabric Status

The state of the fabric that is least operational, based on ISL status.
The possible states are: operational, unknown, degraded or failed.

Status

The health status of the switch.

Admin Status

The administrative status of the switch, for example, Normal.

Memo

Additional comments regarding the switch.

Vendor

The switch vendor.

Model

The switch model type (VDX 6710, VDX 6720, or VDX 6730).

Port Count

The number of ports on the switch.

Firmware

The firmware version and build number.

Location

The physical location of the product.

Contact

The name of the person or group you should contact about the product,
for example, Technical Support.

Description

The description of the product.

Connected AP Count

The number of AP devices connected to the device.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

Port Profiles tab
Name

1320

Select to display information about port profiles on the fabric.
The name of the port profile (not editable). There are multiple default
profiles in a fabric (one per member).

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

Field/Component

E

Description

Status

Port profile states can be one of the following, all of which are configured
using the command line interface:
• Created
• Activated
• Associated
• Applied

MAC Count

The number of MAC addresses associated with the port profile.

VLANs

The number of virtual LANs (VLANs) associated with the port profile,
along with the following VLAN information:
• All — Indicates that the port profile will allow all VLAN IDs.
• None — Indicates that the port profile will not allow any VLAN IDs.
• All Except  — Indicates that the port profile will allow any
packet except the VLAN IDs specified.
•  — Indicates that the port profile will allow any packet
with the VLAN IDs specified.

Domain Count

The number of domains associated with the port profile.

QoS

Indicates whether the QoS profile is associated with the port profile and,
if there is an associated QoS profile, whether it is in DCB or non-DCB
mode.

ACL

Displays the type of access control list (ACL) profile (Standard or
Extended), if an ACL is associated with the port profile.

Associated MACs list

Lists the following details of the Media Access Control (MAC) addresses
associated with the port profile:
• MAC — The MAC address associated with the port profile.
• Name — The name of the vNIC associated with the selected MAC
address.
• Switch Port — The switch port associated with the selected MAC
address.
• VM — The virtual machine associated with the selected MAC
address.
• vNIC — The virtual network interface card (vNIC) associated with the
selected MAC address.
• Port Group — The port group associated with the selected MAC
address.
• vCenter — The virtual center associated with the selected MAC
address.

Add button

Click to launch the Assign MACs dialog box, which you can use to select
discovered MAC addresses and add offline MAC addresses for the
selected port profile.

Delete button

Click to delete the selected MAC address from the port profile list.

Compare button

Click to launch the Profile Comparison Summary dialog box, where you
can compare selected products to profiles using filtered criteria.

VLANs tab
Port Mode

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

The switch port mode of the port profile (access or trunk).

1321

E

IP device properties

Field/Component
Configuration

Description
Displays one of the following VLAN configuration options:
• Access mode — Supports MAC address and MAC group
classification.
• Trunk mode
• Add — Adds VLAN IDs to the port profiles.
• Remove — Deletes VLAN IDs to the port profiles.
• All — Indicates that the port profile allows all VLAN IDs.
• None — Indicates that the port profile does not allow any VLAN
IDs.
• All Except  — Indicates that the port profile allows
any packet except the VLAN IDs specified.
•  — Indicates that the port profile allows any packet
with the VLAN IDs specified.
NOTE: GVLAN supported Trunk Mode supports the Trunk VLAN and the
Native Trunk classifications with the cTag information.

Native VLAN/VLAN

Associated Domain

Displays one of the following based on the VLAN configuration:
• Access Mode — Displays the associated MAC address or MAC group
or both to a VLAN ID.
• Trunk Mode — Displays the cTag for a VLAN ID or Native VLAN ID or
both.
Lists the domain names associated with the port profile.

QoS tab — DCB mode
Mode

The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the port (DCB).

DCB Map

The DCB map name.

Precedence

This number determines the map’s priority. Valid values are from 1
through 100.

Fabric Remap Priority

The fabric remap priority of the port. Valid values are CoS 0 through CoS
6, and the default is CoS 0.

Lossless Remap Priority

The FCoE lossless remap priority of the port. Valid values are CoS 0
through CoS 6, and the default is CoS 0.

QoS tab — Non-DCB mode (Ethernet PFC with Trust)
Mode

The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the port (non-DCB).

Trust

Indicates whether the Ethernet trust of the port is enabled or disabled.

Flow Control

The Ethernet priority flow control mode of the port. Possible modes are
as follows:
• Off (the default)
• 802.3x pause
• Tx On or Off
• Rx On or Off
• Priority Flow Control. For this mode, the Tx and Rx values for each
CoS display in the table.

Maps

Displays details about the following DCB maps:
• CoS to CoS — Displays the details of the CoS to CoS map assigned
to the port.
• Traffic Class — Displays the details of the Traffic Class map
assigned to the port.
NOTE: The CoS to CoS map is the default.

1322

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

Field/Component

E

Description

QoS tab — Non-DCB mode (Ethernet Pause and Ethernet PFC)
Mode

The mode of Quality of Service (QoS) assigned to the port (non-DCB).

Flow Control

The Ethernet priority flow control mode of the port. The default flow
control mode is Off. Possible modes are as follows:
• Off
• 802.3x pause
• Tx On or Off
• Rx On or Off
• Priority Flow Control. For this mode, the Tx and Rx values for each
CoS display in the table.

Maps

Displays details about the following DCB maps:
• CoS to CoS — Displays the details of the CoS to CoS map (the
default) assigned to the port.
• Traffic Class — Displays the details of the Traffic Class map
assigned to the port.

L2 ACLs tab
Name

The name of the Access Control List (ACL).

Type

The ACL type. Options include Extended and Standard.

L2 ACLs list

The list includes the following details:
• Sequence — The Layer 2 ACL entry sequence number.
• Action — Whether the ACL permits or denies traffic.
• Source — The source MAC address on which the ACL filters traffic.
• Count — Whether count is enabled or disabled.

Ports tab

Select to display information about ports on the fabric.

Show list

Select what ports you want to display. Options include:
• Fabric and Edge Ports
• Edge Ports
• Fabric Ports
• FC Ports

Port Count

The number of ports in the group.

Port Actions list

Performance list

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Select one of the following options:
Enable
Disable
Display Attached Port Properties

•
•
•

Select to launch the Performance dialog box.

1323

E

IP device properties

Field/Component
Fabric and Edge Ports properties

Description

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

1324

Identifier — The identifier of the port.
Name — The name of the port. This is an editable field. Enter a
name (up to 64 characters) for the port.
MAC Address — The MAC address of the port.
Port Status — The status of the port.
Port State — The state of the port.
Type — The port type.
Speed — The speed of the port.
L2/Tag Mode — Indicates whether L2 tag mode is enabled or
disabled.
Untagged VLAN ID — The untagged VLAN identifier of the port.
Duplex Mode — The duplex mode of the port.
Role — The role of the port. Possible values include the following
roles:
- Fabric
- Edge
- Stacking
Profile Mode — Displays the profile mode status of the port; for
example, Enabled or Disabled.
Active Profiles — Displays the active profiles associated with the
port.
Port Profile Domains — Displays the port profile domain name.
Attached Device [MACs] — Displays the MAC address of the
attached device.The value is empty when the port is not connected.
The value contains a comma-separated list of MAC addresses when
more than one MAC address is found.
LAG/Trunk ID — Displays the LAG or trunk ID.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP device properties

Field/Component
FC Ports properties

Description

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

E

Identifier — The identifier of the port.
Name — The name of the port. This is an editable field. Enter a
name (up to 64 characters) for the port.
WWN — The world wide name of the device.
FC Address — The Fibre Channel address. Each FC port has both an
address identifier and a world wide name.
Status — The operational status.
Additional Info — Additional information about the port.
Calculated Status — The calculated operational status. There are
four possible operation status values (Up, Down, Disabled , or
Backup Active).
State — The state for the port.
Blocked — The configuration of the switch (blocked or unblocked).
Type — The port type.
Locked Type — The port type of the locked product.
NOTE: Offline ports of a Network OS device in AG mode are
displayed as N_Port.
Speed (Gbps) — The speed of the port.
Buffers Desired — The number of buffers desired but not allocated.
Buffers Allocated — The number of buffers allocated.
Distance Actual (km) — The actual distance (in km) for -end port
connectivity.
Distance Estimated (km) — The estimated distance (in km) for -end
port connectivity.
Distance setting — Whether the connection is considered to be
normal or longer distance.
Attached Switch — The IP address of the attached device.
Attached Port # — The port number of the attached product.
Connected Devices — The WWN for each connected device.
NPIV Status — Whether NPIV is enabled or disabled on the port.

1325

E

Host properties

Field/Component

Description

SFP/Port Optics

Click to view the SFP/Port Optic information:
• TX Power — The power transmitted to the SFP in dBm and uWatts.
• RX Power — The power received from the port in dBm and uWatts.
• Transceiver Temp (C) — The temperature of the SFP transceiver.
• Voltage (mVolts) — The voltage across the port in mVolts.
• Transceiver Current (mAmps) — The laser bias current value in
mAmps.
• Powered on Years (Hours) — The powered on time in years and
hours for 16 Gbps capable ports. Empty for unsupported ports.
• Requires a 16 Gbps capable port running Fabric OS 7.0 or later.
• FC Speed (GB/s) (Fabric OS 7.0 or later) — The FC port speed; for
example, 4 Gbps.
• FC Speed (MB/s) (Fabric OS 6.4 or earlier) — The FC port speed; for
example, 400 Mbps.
• Distance — The length of the fiber optic cable.
• Vendor — The vendor of the SFP.
• Vendor OUI — The vendor’s organizational unique identifier (OUI).
• Vendor PN — The part number of the SFP.
• Vendor Rev — The revision number of the SFP.
• Serial # — The serial number of the SFP.
• Data Code — The data code.
• Media Form Factor — The type of media for the transceiver; for
example, single mode.
• Connector — The type of port connector.
• Wave Length — The wave length.
• Encoding — Displays how the fiber optic cable is encoded.

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

4. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Host properties
You can view device and port properties from the Product List or the map.
You can customize the Host Properties dialog boxes by creating user-defined property labels (refer
to “Adding a property field” on page 1329).

NOTE

You cannot create user-defined property labels at the adapter level.
You can also edit property fields to change information. Fields containing a green triangle (
the lower right corner are editable.

1326

) in

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Host properties

E

Viewing adapter port properties
To view adapter port properties, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click an HBA icon and select Show Ports.
2. Right-click the port and select Properties, or double-click the port.
Fields containing a green triangle (

) in the lower right corner are editable.

The HBA_Port Properties dialog box displays. Table 31 details the properties of the selected
port.

TABLE 31

Adapter port properties

Field

Description

Port Attributes
Port #

The port number: 0 or 1.

Name

The name that is manually assigned to the port.

Zone Alias

The alternate name of the zone.

Symbolic Name

The symbolic name (nickname) for the HBA port.

HCM Name

The version of the Host Connectivity Manager (HCM) application.

Associated VMs

Virtual machines associated with the HBA port.

Port WWN

The port’s world wide name.

Node WWN

The node’s (parent device) world wide name.

Factory Port WWN

The world wide name assigned at the factory for the HBA port.

Factory Node WWN

The world wide name assigned at the factory for the HBA.

Media

The type of media; for example, 8G-sw (8 Gbps software).

Product Type

The device port type; for example, N_Port.

Vendor

The port’s vendor.

Type

The port type; for example, N_Port.

FC Address

The port’s Fibre Channel address.

Attached Port #

The port number of the attached product.

Active FC4 Types

The active FC4 types; for example, SCSI or IP.

Class of Service

The class of the port; for example, Class-2 or Class-3.

Switch

The name of the switch.

Fabric

The name of the Fabric.

VM Port Name

The port name of the virtual machine associated with the host.

Preboot Created

Indicates whether preboot was created on the virtual port.

PCI Function Index

The PCI function number associated with the physical port.

Fabric Assigned Address

The state (enabled or disabled) of the fabric assigned address for
the adapter.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1327

E

Host properties

TABLE 31

Adapter port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

WWN Source

The source of the world wide name. Options include:
Fabric — The WWN is assigned from the fabric. The fabric assigned
address must be enabled.
Factory — The WWN is assigned at the factory.

Configuration
Configured State

Indicates whether the port is enabled or disabled.

Max Bandwidth

The maximum allowable bandwidth output for the selected port.

Operating State

Indicates whether the port is online or offline.

Configured Speed

The configured port speed.

Operating Speed

The speed at which the port is operating.

Max Speed Supported

The maximum speed that is supported on the port. For the FC port,
the maximum speed is 8 Gbps.

Configured Topology

The configured topology setting: auto, point-to-point, or loop.

Operating Topology

The operating topology setting: auto, point-to-point, or loop.

Boot over SAN

Indicates whether boot over SAN is enabled.

Receive BB Credits

The number of buffer credits received.

Transmit BB Credits

The number of buffer credits transmitted.

IOC ID

The IO Controller identifier.

Frame Field Size

The frame size, in bytes, of the port.

Hardware Path

The hardware path of the HBA.

Virtual Port Count

The number of virtual ports associated with the HBA.

Operating State

Displays details about the state of the following operating
parameters:
• Beacon State
• Link Beacon State
• MPIO Mode State
• Path Time Out
• Logging Level
• Target Rate Limit
• Default Rate Limit

FC-SP
Authentication

Indicates whether FC-SP authentication is enabled or disabled.

FCSP Status

Whether FC-SP authentication is being used.

Algorithm

The configured authentication algorithm.

Group

The DH group, which is DH-null (group 0), which is the only option.

Error Status

The health status of the Fibre Channel Security Protocol parameters.

QoS

1328

Configured QoS State

Indicates whether QoS is enabled or disabled.

Operating QoS State

Indicates whether QoS is on or off.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Properties customization

TABLE 31

E

Adapter port properties (Continued)

Field

Description

Total BB Credit

The total number of buffer credits.

Priority Levels

Lists the available priorities (High, Medium, Low).

Add button

Click to add a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Adding a property field” on page 1329.

Edit button

Click to edit a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Editing a property field” on page 1330.

Delete button

Click to delete a user-defined property. For more information, refer to
“Deleting a property field” on page 1330.

3. Click OK to close.

Properties customization
NOTE
Properties customization requires read and write permissions to the Properties - Add / Delete
Columns privilege.
You can customize the product Properties dialog boxes by creating user-defined product and port
properties. You can also edit or delete user-defined properties, as needed.
You can create up to three user-defined property labels from the Properties dialog box for each of
the following object types: product and port properties. Product property labels created from the
Properties dialog box display in the Product List and the Properties dialog box. You can only view
port property labels on the Ports tab of the Properties dialog box. User-defined properties must be
unique across all Properties dialog boxes and the Product List.
You cannot edit the user-defined property field contents from the Product List; however, you can
edit the field in the Properties dialog box.
Property fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. To edit a field
with a green triangle ( ), click in the field and make your changes.

Adding a property field
You can add up to three new user-defined properties to the Properties and Ports tabs of the device
Properties dialog box.
To add a user-defined property, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click any product icon and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the tab to which you want to add a property, if necessary.
3. Click Add.
The Add Property dialog box displays.
4. Enter a label and description for the property.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1329

E

Properties customization

The label must be unique and can be up to 30 characters.
The description can be up to 126 characters.
5. Select Port or Property from the Type list, if available.
6. Click OK.
The new property displays in the properties list as well as the Product List. To edit the
user-defined property field, click in the field and make your changes.

Editing a property field
NOTE
Properties customization requires read and write permissions to the Properties - Add / Delete
Columns privilege.
You can edit any property that you create on the Properties dialog box.
Fields containing a green triangle ( ) in the lower right corner are editable. To edit a field with a
green triangle ( ), click in the field and make your changes.
To edit a user-defined property, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click any product icon and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the tab on which you want to edit a property, if necessary.
3. Click Edit > Property_Label.
The Edit Property dialog box displays.
4. Change the label and description for the property, as needed.
The label must be unique and can be up to 30 characters.
The description can be up to 126 characters.
5. Select Port or Property from the Type list, if available.
6. Click OK.

Deleting a property field
NOTE

Properties customization requires read and write permissions to the Properties - Add / Delete
Columns privilege.
You can delete any user-defined property from the Properties dialog box. To delete a user-defined
property, complete the following steps.
1. Right-click any product icon and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the tab on which you want to delete a user-defined property, if necessary.
3. Click Delete > Property_Label (where Property_Label is the user-defined property you want to
delete).

1330

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Properties customization

E

4. Click Yes on the confirmation message.
The property you selected is deleted.

Editing a property field directly
You can edit fields containing a green triangle (
complete the following steps.

) in the lower right corner. To edit a field,

1. Right-click any product icon and select Properties.
The Properties dialog box displays.
2. Select the tab on which you want to edit a field.
Fields containing a green triangle (

) in the lower right corner are editable.

3. Click in an editable field and change the information.
4. Click OK.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1331

E

1332

Properties customization

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

F

Regular Expressions

In this appendix
This appendix presents a summary of Unicode regular expression constructs that you can use in
the Management application.

• Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Character classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Predefined character classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• POSIX character classes (US-ASCII only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• java.lang.Character classes (simple java character type). . . . . . . . . . . .
• Classes for Unicode blocks and categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Boundary matches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Greedy quantifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Reluctant quantifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Possessive quantifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Logical operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Back references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Special constructs (non-capturing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE 1

1333
1334
1334
1334
1335
1335
1335
1336
1336
1336
1336
1337
1337

Characters

Construct

Matches

x

The character x

\\

The backslash character

\0n

The character with octal value 0n (0 <= n <= 7)

\0nn

The character with octal value 0nn (0 <= n <= 7)

\0mnn

The character with octal value 0mnn (0 <= m <= 3, 0 <= n <= 7)

\xhh

The character with hexadecimal value 0xhh

\uhhhh

The character with hexadecimal value 0xhhhh

\t

The tab character ('\u0009')

\n

The newline (line feed) character ('\u000A')

\r

The carriage-return character ('\u000D')

\f

The form-feed character ('\u000C')

\a

The alert (bell) character ('\u0007')

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1333

F

Regular Expressions

TABLE 1

Matches

\e

The escape character ('\u001B')

\cx

The control character corresponding to x

TABLE 2

Character classes

Construct

Matches

[abc]

a, b, or c (simple class)

[^abc]

Any character except a, b, or c (negation)

[a-zA-Z]

a through z or A through Z, inclusive (range)

[a-d[m-p]]

a through d, or m through p: [a-dm-p] (union)

[a-z&&[def]]

d, e, or f (intersection)

[a-z&&[^bc]]

a through z, except for b and c: [ad-z] (subtraction)

[a-z&&[^m-p]]

a through z, and not m through p: [a-lq-z](subtraction)

TABLE 3

Predefined character classes

Construct

Matches

.

Any character (may or may not match line terminators)

\d

A digit: [0-9]

\D

A non-digit: [^0-9]

\s

A whitespace character: [ \t\n\x0B\f\r]

\S

A non-whitespace character: [^\s]

\w

A word character: [a-zA-Z_0-9]

\W

A non-word character: [^\w]

TABLE 4

1334

Characters

Construct

POSIX character classes (US-ASCII only)

Construct

Matches

\p{Lower}

A lower-case alphabetic character: [a-z]

\p{Upper}

An upper-case alphabetic character:[A-Z]

\p{ASCII}

All ASCII:[\x00-\x7F]

\p{Alpha}

An alphabetic character:[\p{Lower}\p{Upper}]

\p{Digit}

A decimal digit: [0-9]

\p{Alnum}

An alphanumeric character:[\p{Alpha}\p{Digit}]

\p{Punct}

Punctuation: One of !"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?@[\]^_`{|}~

\p{Graph}

A visible character: [\p{Alnum}\p{Punct}]

\p{Print}

A printable character: [\p{Graph}\x]

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Regular Expressions

TABLE 4

POSIX character classes (US-ASCII only)

Construct

Matches

\p{Blank}

A space or a tab: [ \t]

\p{Cntrl}

A control character: [\x00-\x1F\x7F]

\p{XDigit}

A hexadecimal digit: [0-9a-fA-F]

\p{Space}

A whitespace character: [ \t\n\x0B\f\r]

TABLE 5

java.lang.Character classes (simple java character type)

Construct

Matches

\p{javaLowerCase}

Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isLowerCase()

\p{javaUpperCase}

Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isUpperCase()

\p{javaWhitespace}

Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isWhitespace()

\p{javaMirrored}

Equivalent to java.lang.Character.isMirrored()

TABLE 6

Classes for Unicode blocks and categories

Construct

Matches

\p{InGreek}

A character in the Greek block (simple block)

\p{Lu}

An uppercase letter (simple category)

\p{Sc}

A currency symbol

\P{InGreek}

Any character except one in the Greek block (negation)

[\p{L}&&[^\p{Lu}]]

Any letter except an uppercase letter (subtraction)

TABLE 7

F

Boundary matches

Construct

Matches

^

The beginning of a line

$

The end of a line

\b

A word boundary

\B

A non-word boundary

\A

The beginning of the input

\G

The end of the previous match

\Z

The end of the input but for the final terminator, if any

\z

The end of the input

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1335

F

Regular Expressions

TABLE 8
Construct

Matches

X?

X, once or not at all

X*

X, zero or more times

X+

X, one or more times

X{n}

X, exactly n times

X{n,}

X, at least n times

X{n,m}

X, at least n but not more than m times

TABLE 9

Reluctant quantifiers

Construct

Matches

X??

X, once or not at all

X*?

X, zero or more times

X+?

X, one or more times

X{n}?

X, exactly n times

X{n,}?

X, at least n times

X{n,m}?

X, at least n but not more than m times

TABLE 10

Possessive quantifiers

Construct

Matches

X?+

X, once or not at all

X*+

X, zero or more times

X++

X, one or more times

X{n}+

X, exactly n times

X{n,}+

X, at least n times

X{n,m}+

X, at least n but not more than m times

TABLE 11

1336

Greedy quantifiers

Logical operators

Construct

Matches

XY

X followed by Y

X|Y

Either X or Y

(X)

X, as a capturing group

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Regular Expressions

TABLE 12

F

Back references

Construct

Matches

\n

Whatever the nth capturing group matched

Quotation
\

Nothing, but quotes the following character

\Q

Nothing, but quotes all characters until \E

\E

Nothing, but ends quoting started by \Q

TABLE 13

Special constructs (non-capturing)

Construct

Matches

(?:X)

X, as a non-capturing group

(?idmsux-idmsux)

Nothing, but turns match flags on–off

(?idmsux-idmsux:X)

X, as a non-capturing group with the given flags on–off

(?=X)

X, through zero-width positive lookahead

(?!X)

X, through zero-width negative lookahead

(?<=X)

X, through zero-width positive lookbehind

(?X)

X, as an independent, non-capturing group

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1337

F

1338

Regular Expressions

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

G

CLI Templates

In this appendix
The Management application provides preconfigured Configuration templates for IronWare and
Network OS devices. By default, all preconfigured templates are configure to prompt for additional
targets during manual deployment. The preconfigured templates include the following:

• HyperEdge – Stack Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Stack Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Stack Port Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Stack Port Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Stack Trunk Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Stack Trunk Deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Peri Port Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Peri Port Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Peri Trunk Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Peri Trunk Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• HyperEdge – Peri Port Connection Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS – Enable Web Element Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS – Configure L2-Access-List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS – Configure L3-Access-List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Cluster Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Cluster Deployment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Cluster Undeployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Cluster Deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Client Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MCT Client Deletion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS – Loopback Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS – Core Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• MPLS – Endpoint Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Associate MAC to Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure CRC Align Errors Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure Extended L2 Access List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure Inter Frame Gap Violation Fencing . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure Inter Frame Gap Violation Monitor . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure RX Missing Terminations Characters Monitor .

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1341
1341
1341
1341
1341
1342
1342
1342
1342
1342
1342
1342
1343
1342
1343
1343
1343
1344
1344
1344
1344
1344
1345
1345
1345
1346
1346
1346
1347

1339

G

CLI Templates

• Network OS – Configure RX Symbol Errors Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Configure Standard L2 Access List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create CoS Mutation Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create LLDP Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create Traffic Class Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create VLAN Classifier Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Create VLAN Classifier Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Delete Port Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Update ACL on Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Update QoS on Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Network OS – Update VLAN on Port Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Configure VLAN as a PVLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Delete PVLAN configuration from VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Associate Secondary VLAN with Primary VLAN . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Configure PVALN mode in L2 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Add native VLAN mode to PVLAN trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Remove native VLAN from PVLAN trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Configure normal VLAN on a PVLAN trunk . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Map primary and secondary VLAN to promiscuous port
• Private VLAN – Delete PVLAN mapping from promiscuous port . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Associate Primary and Secondary VLANs to host port . .
• Private VLAN – Delete PVLAN associations from host port . . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Associate Primary and Secondary VLANs to trunk port .
• Private VLAN – Delete PVALN associations from trunk port. . . . . . . . . . .
• Private VLAN – Display private VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VRF – VRF Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VRF – VRF Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VRF – Route Distinguisher Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• VRF – Maximum routes configuration for IPV4 Address Family . . . . . . .
• VRF – Route Targets Export and/or Import Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
• VRF – Delete Route Targets Export and/or Import Configuration . . . . .
• VRF – Display VRF Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – Remove interfaces from VLAN as untagged . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – VLAN Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – VLAN Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – Assign interfaces to VLAN as tagged . . . . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – Remove interfaces from VLAN as tagged . . . . . . .
• IronWare OS VLAN – Assign interfaces to VLAN as untagged . . . . . . . .

1340

1347
1347
1347
1348
1348
1348
1348
1349
1349
1349
1349
1349
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
1350
1351
1351
1351
1351
1351
1351
1352
1352
1352
1352
1352
1352
1352
1353
1353
1353
1353
1353
1353
1353

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

G

• IronWare OS VLAN – Configure virtual routing interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
• IronWare OS VLAN – Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on IOS VLAN . . . . 1353
• IronWare OS VLAN – Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on IOS VLAN. . . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – VLAN Interface Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – VLAN Interface Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – Layer2 Switch Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – Trunk Interface Configuration with allowed VLAN list 1354
• Network OS VLAN – Configure Layer2 Interface as an Interface Port . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – Native VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1354
• Network OS VLAN – Disable Native VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
• Network OS VLAN – Access Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1355
• Network OS VLAN – Disable Access Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . 1355
• Network OS VLAN – Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on NOS VLAN . . . . 1355
• Network OS VLAN – Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on Network OS VLAN 1355
TABLE 14
Feature

HyperEdge – Stack Enable
Description

HyperEdge To enable stacking mode.

TABLE 15
Feature

Feature

Description

Feature

Description

Feature

stack disable

CLI Commands
stack unit $
stack-port $
$

HyperEdge – Stack Port Deletion
Description

HyperEdge To delete stacking ports.

TABLE 18

CLI Commands

HyperEdge – Stack Port Creation

HyperEdge To create stacking ports.

TABLE 17

stack enable

HyperEdge – Stack Disable

HyperEdge To disable stacking mode.

TABLE 16

CLI Commands

CLI Commands
stack unit $
no stack-port $
$

HyperEdge – Stack Trunk Creation
Description

HyperEdge To create stacking trunks.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Commands
stack unit $
stack-trunk $ to
$

1341

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 19
Feature

HyperEdge – Stack Trunk Deletion
Description

HyperEdge To delete stacking trunks.

TABLE 20
Feature

Feature

Feature

Feature

Feature

Description

Feature

Description

1342

CLI Commands
stack unit $
peri-trunk $ to
$

CLI Commands
stack unit $
no peri-trunk$
to$

CLI Commands
stack unit $
connect $

IronWare OS – Enable Web Element Manager
Description

IronWare OS Enable Web Element Manager for
IronWare products

TABLE 26

stack unit $
no peri-port $

HyperEdge – Peri Port Connection Creation

HyperEdge To create peripheral port
connections.

TABLE 25

CLI Commands

HyperEdge – Peri Trunk Deletion

HyperEdge To delete peripheral trunks.

TABLE 24

stack unit $
peri-port $

HyperEdge – Peri Trunk Creation
Description

HyperEdge To create peripheral trunks.

TABLE 23

CLI Commands

HyperEdge – Peri Port Deletion
Description

HyperEdge To delete peripheral ports.

TABLE 22

stack unit $
no stack-trunk $ to
$

HyperEdge – Peri Port Creation
Description

HyperEdge To create peripheral ports.

TABLE 21

CLI Commands

CLI Commands
web-management http

IronWare OS – Configure L3-Access-List

Feature Description

CLI Commands

ACL

access-list $ deny
$

Configure L3 access list for IronWare
products

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 27

IronWare OS – Configure L2-Access-List

Feature Description

CLI Commands

ACL

access-list $ deny $
$ any
access-list $ deny any
$ $
access-list $ permit
$ $ any
access-list $ permit any any
no access-list $ permit any any
no access-list $ permit
$ $ any

TABLE 28

G

Configure L2 access list for IronWare
products.

MCT Cluster Creation

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Create a session VLAN.

vlan $ name Session-VLAN
tagged ethernet $
router-interface ve $
interface ve $
ip address $

MCT

Create a keep–alive VLAN.

vlan $ name MCT-keep-alive
tagged ethernet $

MCT

Create cluster configuration.

cluster $ $
rbridge-id $
session-vlan $
keep-alive-vlan $
icl $ ethernet $
peer $
rbridge-id $
icl $

MCT

Specify single VLAN ID or range
 [to ].

member-vlan $

TABLE 29

NOTE: ICL ports should also be added to MCT Member VLANs.

MCT Cluster Deployment

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Deploy cluster.

cluster $ $
deploy

TABLE 30

MCT Cluster Undeployment

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Undeploy cluster.

cluster $ $
undeploy

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1343

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 31
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Delete cluster.

no cluster $
$
no vlan $
no vlan $

TABLE 32

MCT Client Creation

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Create a cluster client.

cluster $ $
client $
rbridge-id $
client-interface ethernet $
deploy

TABLE 33

MCT Client Deletion

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MCT

Delete a cluster client.

cluster $ $
no client $

TABLE 34

MPLS – Loopback Interface Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MPLS

Loopback interface configuration
used for device reachability using
OSPF. It assigns an IP address and
advertises the interface through
OSPF.

! Required for LSP egress address in LSP Manager as well as a
soft interface for IP routing
interface loopback $
enable
ip ospf area $
ip address $

TABLE 35

1344

MCT Cluster Deletion

MPLS – Core Interface Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MPLS

MPLS core interface configuration
such as assigning an IP address and
advertising using OSPF

! Core facing interfaces need IP address for MPLS
! Repeat the following commands for all MPLS core interfaces in
the product
interface ethernet $
enable
ip ospf area $
ip address $
router mpls
mpls-interface ethernet $

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 36

G

MPLS – Endpoint Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

MPLS

Used to configure MPLS endpoints.
Disable FDP, CDP as they are not
supported in MPLS endpoints.

! FDP, CDP should not be enabled on MPLS endpoints
! Repeat the following commands for all the MPLS endpoints
interface ethernet $
enable
no fdp enable
no cdp enable

TABLE 37

Network OS – Associate MAC to Port Profile

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Associates the MAC to the existing
port profile

no port-profile $ activate
no port-profile $ static
$
no port-profile $ static
$
no port-profile $ static
$
port-profile $ activate
port-profile $ static
$
port-profile $ static
$
port-profile $ static
$

TABLE 38

Network OS – Configure CRC Align Errors Monitor

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

Network OS

This template is used to configure
threshold and alert values for CRC
Align Errors (due to FCS Error or
Alignment Error).
Possible values for timebase are
day, hour, minute and none.
Buffer value cannot be more than
average of high plus low threshold.
Supported Values for High and Low
Threshold Action Parameters are
email, raslog, all, and none.

threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
CRCAlignErrors threshold timebase $
high-threshold $
low-threshold $ buffer
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
CRCAlignErrors alert above highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
CRCAlignErrors alert below highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface apply custom-monitoring

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1345

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 39

Network OS – Configure Extended L2 Access List

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

ACL

This template is used to configure
an extended L2 ACL on Network OS
products running 3.0 or later.

mac access-list extended $
deny $ $ any
deny any $ $
deny $ $ $
$
permit $ $ $
$
permit any any

TABLE 40
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

Network
OS

This template is used to configure
high threshold value to fence an
interface when Inter Frame
Gap(IFG) minimum length (typical
value is 12) violation occurs.
Possible values for timebase are
day, hour, minute and none.

threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area IFG
threshold timebase $ high-threshold
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area IFG
alert above highthresh-action fence
threshold-monitor interface apply custom-monitoring

TABLE 41

1346

Network OS – Configure Inter Frame Gap Violation Fencing

Network OS – Configure Inter Frame Gap Violation Monitor

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

Network OS

This template is used to configure
threshold and alert values for Inter
Frame Gap(IFG) minimum length
(typical value is 12) Violation
monitoring.
Possible values for timebase are
day, hour, minute and none.
Buffer value cannot be more than
average of high plus low threshold.
Supported Values for High and
Low Threshold Action Parameters
are email, raslog, all, and none.

threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area IFG
threshold timebase $ high-threshold
$ low-threshold
$ buffer
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area IFG
alert above highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area IFG
alert below highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface apply custom-monitoring

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 42

G

Network OS – Configure RX Missing Terminations Characters Monitor

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

Network OS

This template is used to configure
threshold and alert values for RX
Missing Termination Characters
monitoring.
Possible values for timebase are
day, hour, minute and none.
Buffer value cannot be more than
average of high plus low threshold.
Supported Values for High and Low
Threshold Action Parameters are
email, raslog, all, and none.

threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
AbnormalFrameTerminations threshold timebase
$ high-threshold
$ low-threshold
$ buffer
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
AbnormalFrameTerminations alert above highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
AbnormalFrameTerminations alert below highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface apply custom-monitoring

TABLE 43

Network OS – Configure RX Symbol Errors Monitor

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

Network OS

This template is used to configure
threshold and alert values for RX
Symbol Errors Monitoring.
Possible values for timebase are
day, hour, minute and none.
Buffer value cannot be more than
average of high plus low threshold.
Supported Values for High and
Low Threshold Action Parameters
are email, raslog, all, and none.

threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
SymbolErrors threshold timebase $
high-threshold $
low-threshold $ buffer
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
SymbolErrors alert above highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface custom type Ethernet area
SymbolErrors alert below highthresh-action
$ lowthresh-action
$
threshold-monitor interface apply custom-monitoring

TABLE 44

Network OS – Configure Standard L2 Access List

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

ACL

This template is used to configure
standard L2 ACL on Network OS
products running 3.0 or later.

mac access-list standard $
deny $ $
permit $ $
permit any

TABLE 45

Network OS – Create CoS Mutation Map

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

QoS

This template is used to create the
CoS-to-CoS mutation QoS map
name

qos map cos-mutation $
$

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1347

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 46
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

QoS

This template is used to create LLDP
profile and configure LLDP profile
parameters

protocol lldp
profile $
description $
hello $
multiplier $
advertise dcbx-fcoe-logical-link-tlv
advertise dcbx-fcoe-app-tlv

TABLE 47

Network OS – Create Port Profile

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Creates the port profile and its sub
profile.

port-profile $
! create vlan profile in access mode
vlan-profile
switchport
switchport mode access
switchport access vlan $
exit
! create qos-profile
qos-profile
cee default
exit
!create security-profile
security-profile
mac access-group $ in
exit
exit
! activate port profile
port-profile $ activate
! associate mac statically
port-profile $ static
$
port-profile $ static
$
port-profile $ static
$

TABLE 48

Network OS – Create Traffic Class Map

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

QoS

This template is used to create the
CoS-Traffic-Class mapping by
specifying a name and the mapping

qos map cos-traffic-class $
$

TABLE 49

1348

Network OS – Create LLDP Profile

Network OS – Create VLAN Classifier Group

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

QoS

This template is used to create a
VLAN classifier group and add a
VLAN classifier

vlan classifier group $ add rule
$

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 50

G

Network OS – Create VLAN Classifier Rule

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

QoS

This template is used to create a
protocol-based or MAC
address-based VLAN classifier rule

vlan classifier rule $ $

TABLE 51

Network OS – Delete Port Profiles

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Removes the port profile.

no port-profile $ activate
no port-profile $

TABLE 52

Network OS – Update ACL on Port Profile

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Adds a security profile to a port
profile.

no port-profile $ activate
port-profile $
security-profile
mac access-group $ in
exit
port-profile $ activate

TABLE 53

Network OS – Update QoS on Port Profile

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Adds a QoS profile to a port profile.

no port-profile $ activate
port-profile $
qos-profile
qos cos-mutation $
exit
port-profile $ activate

TABLE 54

Network OS – Update VLAN on Port Profile

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

AMPP

Adds a VLAN profile to a port profile.

no port-profile $ activate
port-profile $
vlan-profile
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk allowed vlan all
switchport trunk allowed vlan remove
$
switchport trunk native-vlan $
exit
port-profile $ activate

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1349

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 55
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure PVLAN type (Isolated,
community or primary) to a VLAN.

interface vlan $
no private-vlan

TABLE 57

Private VLAN – Associate Secondary VLAN with Primary VLAN

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To associate secondary VLAN with
primary VLAN.

interface vlan $
private-vlan association add
$

TABLE 58

Private VLAN – Configure PVALN mode in L2 interface

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure Layer 2 Interface as a
PVLAN mode (host or promiscuous).

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
switchport mode private-vlan host

TABLE 59

Private VLAN – Add native VLAN mode to PVLAN trunk

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure native VLAN in PVLAN
trunk port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan $

TABLE 60

Private VLAN – Remove native VLAN from PVLAN trunk

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To remove native VLAN from PVLAN
trunk port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan

TABLE 61

1350

Private VLAN – Configure VLAN as a PVLAN

Private VLAN – Configure normal VLAN on a PVLAN trunk

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure normal VLANs on a
PVLAN trunk port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan all
switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan none
switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan add
$
switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan remove
$
switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan except
$

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 62

G

Private VLAN – Map primary and secondary VLAN to promiscuous port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To assign Primary Vlan to
Promiscuous port. This command
also maps a Promiscuous port to
selected secondary VLANs.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
switchport private-vlan mapping
$ add
$

TABLE 63

Private VLAN – Delete PVLAN mapping from promiscuous port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To remove VLAN mapping from
Promiscuous port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport private-vlan mapping

TABLE 64

Private VLAN – Associate Primary and Secondary VLANs to host port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To associate Primary and Secondary
VLANs to host port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport mode private-vlan host
switchport private-vlan host-association
$
$

TABLE 65

Private VLAN – Delete PVLAN associations from host port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To delete all associations from
Primary VLAN to a host port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport private-vlan host-association

TABLE 66

Private VLAN – Associate Primary and Secondary VLANs to trunk port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To associate Primary and Secondary
VLANs to trunk port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport private-vlan association trunk
$
$

TABLE 67

Private VLAN – Delete PVALN associations from trunk port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To delete all VLAN associations from
trunk port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport private-vlan association trunk
$
no switchport private-vlan association trunk
$
$
no switchport private-vlan association trunk

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1351

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 68
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To display the private vlan status.

show vlan private-vlan

TABLE 69

VRF – VRF Creation

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To create VRF in specific RBridge.

rbridge-id $
vrf $

TABLE 70

VRF – VRF Deletion

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To delete VRF from specific RBridge.

rbridge-id $
no vrf $

TABLE 71

VRF – Route Distinguisher Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To configure Route Distinguisher
global to VRF context.

rbridge-id $
vrf $
rd $

TABLE 72

VRF – Maximum routes configuration for IPV4 Address Family

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To configure maximum number of
routes per VRF for IPV4 family.

rbridge-id $
vrf $
rd $
address-family ipv4 max-route $

TABLE 73

VRF – Route Targets Export and/or Import Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To configure list of import and/or
export route target communities for
the specified VRF.

rbridge-id $
vrf $
address-family ipv4
route-target export $
route-target import $
route-target both $

TABLE 74

1352

Private VLAN – Display private VLAN Configuration

VRF – Delete Route Targets Export and/or Import Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VRF

To delete list of import and/or
export route target communities for
the specified VRF.

rbridge-id $
vrf $
address-family ipv4
no route-target export $
no route-target import $
no route-target both $

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 75

VRF – Display VRF Information

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To display the VRF details.

show vrf detail
show vrf rbridge-id $
show vrf $

TABLE 76

IronWare OS VLAN – Remove interfaces from VLAN as untagged

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To remove interfaces from the VLAN
as untagged.

vlan $
no untagged ethernet $

TABLE 77

IronWare OS VLAN – VLAN Creation

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To create a VLAN.

vlan $

TABLE 78

IronWare OS VLAN – VLAN Deletion

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To delete a VLAN.

no vlan $

TABLE 79

IronWare OS VLAN – Assign interfaces to VLAN as tagged

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To assign interfaces to the VLAN as
tagged.

vlan $
tagged ethernet $

TABLE 80

IronWare OS VLAN – Remove interfaces from VLAN as tagged

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To remove interfaces from the VLAN
as tagged.

vlan $
no tagged ethernet $

TABLE 81

IronWare OS VLAN – Assign interfaces to VLAN as untagged

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To assign interfaces to the VLAN as
untagged.

vlan $
untagged ethernet $

TABLE 82

IronWare OS VLAN – Configure virtual routing interface

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure a virtual routing
interface on a VLAN.

vlan $
router-interface ve $

TABLE 83

G

IronWare OS VLAN – Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on IOS VLAN

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To enable spanning tree protocol on
VLAN.

vlan $
spanning-tree

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1353

G

CLI Templates

TABLE 84
Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To disable spanning tree protocol on
VLAN.

vlan $
no spanning-tree

TABLE 85

Network OS VLAN – VLAN Interface Creation

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To create a VLAN Interface.

interface vlan $

TABLE 86

Network OS VLAN – VLAN Interface Deletion

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To delete a VLAN Interface.

no interface vlan $

TABLE 87

Network OS VLAN – Layer2 Switch Port Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To confiure an interface port as a
Layer 2 switch port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport

TABLE 88

Network OS VLAN – Trunk Interface Configuration with allowed VLAN list

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure the interface as a trunk
interface and Specify whether all,
one, or none of the VLAN interfaces
are allowed to transmit and receive
through the DCB interface.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk allowed vlan all
switchport trunk allowed vlan none
switchport trunk allowed vlan add $
switchport trunk allowed vlan remove $
switchport trunk allowed vlan except $

TABLE 89

Network OS VLAN – Configure Layer2 Interface as an Interface Port

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure Layer2 interface as an
interface port.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport

TABLE 90

1354

IronWare OS VLAN – Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on IOS VLAN

Network OS VLAN – Native VLAN Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To confiure the trunk interface as a
native VLAN.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk native-vlan $

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

CLI Templates

TABLE 91

G

Network OS VLAN – Disable Native VLAN Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To disable native VLAN from a trunk
interface.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport trunk native-vlan $

TABLE 92

Network OS VLAN – Access Interface Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To configure the interface as an
access interface.

interface tengigabitethernet $
switchport
switchport mode access
switchport access vlan $

TABLE 93

Network OS VLAN – Disable Access Interface Configuration

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To disable the access interface.

interface tengigabitethernet $
no switchport access vlan $

TABLE 94

Network OS VLAN – Enable Spanning Tree Protocol on NOS VLAN

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To enable spanning tree protocol on
VLAN for Network OS 4.0.

interface vlan $
no spanning-tree shutdown
! To enable spanning tree protocol on VLAN for NOS 3.0.
interface vlan $
no shutdown

TABLE 95

Network OS VLAN – Disable Spanning Tree Protocol on Network OS VLAN

Feature

Description

CLI Commands

VLAN

To disable spanning tree protocol on
VLAN for Network OS version 4.0
and later.

interface vlan $
spanning-tree shutdown

To disable spanning tree protocol on
VLAN for Network OS greater than or
equal to (>=) version 3.0 and less
than (<) version 4.0 .

interface vlan $
shutdown

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1355

G

1356

CLI Templates

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

H

Troubleshooting

In this chapter
• Application Configuration Wizard troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Browser troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Client browser troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Configuration backup and restore troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Element Manager troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Firmware download troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Launch Client troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Master Log and Switch Console troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Patch troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Professional edition login troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Server troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Server Management Console troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Supportsave troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Technical support data collection troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Wireless troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
• Zoning troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1358
1358
1359
1359
1359
1360
1362
1363
1364
1365
1365
1366
1367
1368
1368
1369

1357

H

Application Configuration Wizard troubleshooting

Application Configuration Wizard troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for Management
application Configuration Wizard errors.
Problem

Resolution

Unable to launch the
Management application
Configuration Wizard on
a Windows Vista,
Windows 7,or Windows
2008 R2 system

The Windows Vista, Windows 7,or Windows 2008 R2 system enables the User Access Control (UAC) option by
default. When the UAC option is enabled, the Configuration Wizard cannot launch. If the Configuration Wizard
does not launch, use one of the following options to disable the UAC option:
The following are the various ways we can disable UAC in vista:
Disable using msconfig by completing the following steps.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type msconfig on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Click the Tools tab on the System Configuration Utility.
4
Scroll down to and select the Disable UAC tool name.
5
Click Launch.
A command window displays and runs the disable UAC command. When the command is complete, close
the window.
6
Close the System Configuration Utility.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and selecting the Enable UAC tool name in step 4.
Disable using regedit by completing the following steps.
NOTE: Before making changes to the registry, make sure you have a valid backup. In cases where you're
supposed to delete or modify keys or values from the registry it is possible to first export that key or
value(s) to a .REG file before performing the changes.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type regedit on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Navigate to the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
4
Right-click the EnableLUA value and select Modify.
5
Change the Value data field to 0 on the Edit DWORD Value dialog box and click OK.
6
Close the Registry Editor.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and changing the Value data field to 1 in step 5.

Browser troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for browser errors.
Problem

Resolution

The Cancel button does not work on the Report
via E-mail dialog box when you use the Mozilla
Firefox browser.

Mozilla Firefox Browser does not support window close script.
Click the browser Close button to cancel.

1358

NOTE: The Cancel button still displays on all Report via E-mail dialog boxes.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Client browser troubleshooting

H

Client browser troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for client browser
errors.
Problem

Resolution

Downloading Client from a Internet Explorer
Browser over HTTPS

•

If the JNLP file does not launch automatically, use one of the following options:
Complete the following steps.
1
Save the JNLP file to the local host.
2
Launch the JNLP file manually.
• In Internet Explorer 7, complete the following steps.
1
Select Tools > Internet Options.
2
Click the Advanced tab.
3
Clear the Do not save encrypted pages to disk check box.
If the browser warns you about the security certificate, use the fully qualified hostname to
launch the web page.

Configuration backup and restore troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for configuration
backup and restore errors.
Problem

Resolution

Configuration backup and restore (Network OS
devices only) using SCP/SFTP does not work
because of one of the following issues:
• For internal SCP/SFTP server, the
application was uninstalled and
reinstalled without migration
• For external SCP/SFTP server, the SSH
handshake keypair is changed
- manually
- due to an external server reinstall
- due to the SCP/SFTP server
preference (Options dialog box)
being changed from built-in to
external (installed on same machine)
or vice versa

Clear the SSH (SCP/SFTP) server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of
the device.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 3.0 and later, use the following
command:
sw0# clear ssh-key SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 2.1.1b, use the following
command:
sw0# execute-script sshdeleteknownhost
IP Address/Hostname to be deleted: SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.

Configuration backup and restore (Network OS
devices only) using an external SCP server
does not work after reinstalling the application
or the external SCP server on the Host
machine.

Clear the SCP server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of the device
using the following command:
sw0# FID10:root> ssh-keygen –R Host_Name
where Host_Name is the IP address or host name of the external SCP server.

Element Manager troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for Element Manager
errors.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1359

H

Firmware download troubleshooting

Problem

Resolution

Unable to launch Element Manager from the
Management application.

To launch Element Manager from the Management application, your local system's
browser must run the Java Web Start application. To turn on Java content in the browser,
complete the following steps.
1
Launch Java Control Panel.
For Windows: Refer to http://java.com/en/download/help/win_controlpanel.xml.
For Linux: Follow the steps listed.
a
Open the Terminal window.
b
Go to the Java installation directory: cd /java/jre1.7.0_45/bin (change the
name of the directory to where you have installed Java).
c
Type ./ControlPanel to open the Java Control Panel.
2
In the Java Control Panel, click the Security tab.
3
Select the Enable Java content in the browser check box.
4
Click Apply.
When the Windows User Account Control (UAC) dialog box displays, allow permissions
to make the changes.
5
Click OK in the Java Plug-in confirmation window.
6
Launch Element Manager.

Firmware download troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for firmware download
errors.
Problem

Resolution

If you configured an internal FTP server and the
Management application server is running
IPv6, firmware download is not supported.

Choose from one of the following options:
• If the Management application is running IPv6 only, configure an external FTP server.
• If the Management application is running IPv4 and IPv6, configure IPv4 to be the
preferred address.

1360

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Firmware download troubleshooting

H

Problem

Resolution

Firmware download using SCP/SFTP does not
work because of one of the following issues:
• For internal SCP/SFTP server, the
application was uninstalled and
reinstalled without migration
• For external SCP/SFTP server, the SSH
handshake keypair is changed
- manually
- due to an external server reinstall
- due to the SCP/SFTP server
preference (Options dialog box)
being changed from built-in to
external (installed on same machine)
or vice versa

Clear the SSH (SCP/SFTP) server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of
the device.
• For Fabric OS devices, use the following command:
sw0:FID128:admin> sshutil delknownhost
IP Address/Hostname to be deleted: SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 3.0 and later, use the following
command:
sw0# clear ssh-key SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 2.1.1b, use the following
command:
sw0# execute-script sshdeleteknownhost
IP Address/Hostname to be deleted: SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.

Firmware download using an external SCP
server does not work after reinstalling the
application or the external SCP server on the
Host machine.

Clear the SCP server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of the device
using the following command:
sw0# FID10:root> ssh-keygen –R Host_Name
where Host_Name is the IP address or host name of the external SCP server.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1361

H

Launch Client troubleshooting

Launch Client troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution if you are unable to
launch the remote client.
Problem

Resolution

Remote client does not upgrade from versions
prior to 11.0.

The remote client does not automatically upgrade when you select the remote client
shortcut of client versions earlier than 11.0. To clear the old client and launch the new
remote client version, complete the following steps.
1
Clear the previous version from the Java cache,.
a
Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Java.
The Java Control Panel dialog box displays.
b
Click View on the General tab.
The Java Cache Viewer dialog box displays.
c
Right-click the application and select Delete.
d
Click Close on the Java Cache Viewer dialog box.
e
Click OK on the Java Control Panel dialog box.
2
Launch the remote client.
a
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Management application
server in the Address bar.
If the web server port number does not use the default (443 if is SSL Enabled;
otherwise, the default is 80), you must enter the web server port number in
addition to the IP address. For example, IP_Address:Port_Number.
The Management application web start screen displays.
b
Click the Management application web start link.
The Log In dialog box displays.
c
Enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.
NOTE: Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server
authentication.
d
e
f

1362

Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the
application to remember your password the next time you log in.
Click Login.
Click OK on the Login Banner dialog box.
The Management application displays.
NOTE:

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Master Log and Switch Console troubleshooting

H

Problem

Resolution

Unable to log into the Client (the application
does not launch when you use a valid user
name and password and exceptions are thrown
in the client side).

Use one the following procedures to configure the IP address in the host file.
Windows operating systems
1
Log in using the 'Administrator' privilege.
2
Select Start > Run.
3
Type drivers in the Open field and press Enter.
4
Go to the ‘etc’ folder and open the ‘hosts’ file using a text editor.
5
Add the IP address and host name of the client in the following format: IP_Address
Host_Name.
For example, 127.0.0.1
localhost
6
Save and exit the file.
Unix operating systems
1
Log in using the 'root' privilege.
2
Open the ‘/etc/hosts’ file using a text editor.
3
Add the IP address and host name of the client in the following format: IP_Address
Host_Name.
For example, 127.0.0.1
localhost
4
Save and exit the file.

Unable to launch the remote client (the SSL
setting, web server port number, or server
starting point number changed during the
server upgrade).

To remove the old link and launch the correct remote client version, complete the
following steps.
1
Clear the previous version from the Java cache,.
a
Select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Java.
The Java Control Panel dialog box displays.
b
Click View on the General tab.
The Java Cache Viewer dialog box displays.
c
Right-click the application and select Delete.
d
Click Close on the Java Cache Viewer dialog box.
e
Click OK on the Java Control Panel dialog box.
2
Log into the remote client from the browser.
a
Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Management application
server in the Address bar.
If the web server port number does not use the default (443 if is SSL Enabled;
otherwise, the default is 80), you must enter the web server port number in
addition to the IP address. For example, IP_Address:Web_Server_Port_Number.
The Management application web start screen displays.
b
Click the Management application web start link.
The Log In dialog box displays.
c
Enter your user name and password.
The defaults are Administrator and password, respectively.
NOTE: Do not enter Domain\User_Name in the User ID field for LDAP server
authentication.
d
e
f

Select or clear the Save password check box to choose whether you want the
application to remember your password the next time you log in.
Click Login.
Click OK on the Login Banner dialog box.
The Management application displays.
NOTE:

Master Log and Switch Console troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for switch console
errors.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1363

H

Patch troubleshooting

Problem

Resolution

Too many login and log messages received on
switch console and and Master Log due to lazy
polling.

NOTE: This setting cannot be disabled for DCB switches.
To disable lazy polling, complete the following steps.
1
Select Discover > IP Products.
The Discover Setup - IP dialog box displays.
2
Click the Global Settings tab.
3
Click the Preferences tab.
4
Clear the Enable lazy polling check box.
5
Click Apply to save your work.
6
Click Close to close the Discover Setup - IP dialog box.
7
Click Yes on the confirmation message.

Patch troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for patch errors.
Problem

Resolution

Unable to launch the
SMC on a Windows
Vista,Windows 7,or
Windows 2008 R2
system

The Windows Vista,Windows 7,or Windows 2008 R2 system enables the User Access Control (UAC) option by
default. When the UAC option is enabled, the SMC cannot launch. If the SMC does not launch, use one of the
following options to disable the UAC option:
The following are the various ways we can disable UAC in vista:
Disable using msconfig by completing the following steps.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type msconfig on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Click the Tools tab on the System Configuration Utility.
4
Scroll down to and select the Disable UAC tool name.
5
Click Launch.
A command window displays and runs the disable UAC command. When the command is complete, close
the window.
6
Close the System Configuration Utility.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and selecting the Enable UAC tool name in step 4.
Disable using regedit by completing the following steps.
NOTE: Before making changes to the registry, make sure you have a valid backup. In cases where you're
supposed to delete or modify keys or values from the registry it is possible to first export that key or
value(s) to a .REG file before performing the changes.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type regedit on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Navigate to the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
4
Right-click the EnableLUA value and select Modify.
5
Change the Value data field to 0 on the Edit DWORD Value dialog box and click OK.
6
Close the Registry Editor.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and changing the Value data field to 1 in step 5.

1364

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Professional edition login troubleshooting

H

Professional edition login troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for Professional
edition login errors.

TABLE 96

Professional edition login troubleshooting

Problem

Resolution

Login Failed. Only one client allowed. One
client session is active or has not yet timed out.

If you closed the client using Windows Task Manager (End Task or Process) or using Unix
process ID (kill command), successful relaunch of the application may take up to 2
minutes.

Server troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for server errors.
Problem

Resolution

Management server exits
unexpectedly on Red hat
Linux 6.1

A possible cause is low swap space configured on the system. As per the standard recommendation, swap
should equal 2 times physical RAM for up to 2 GB of physical RAM, and then an additional 1 times physical RAM
for any amount above 2 GB, but never less than 32 MB.
Therefore, if M = Amount of RAM in GB and S = Amount of swap in GB, then
If M < 2
S = M *2
Else
S=M+2

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1365

H

Server Management Console troubleshooting

Server Management Console troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for server
management console errors.
Problem

Resolution

Unable to launch the
SMC on a Windows
Vista,Windows 7 , or
Windows 2008 R2
system

The Windows Vista,Windows 7,or Windows 2008 R2 system enables the User Access Control (UAC) option by
default. When the UAC option is enabled, the SMC cannot launch. If the SMC does not launch, use one of the
following options to disable the UAC option:
The following are the various ways we can disable UAC in vista:
Disable using msconfig by completing the following steps.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type msconfig on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Click the Tools tab on the System Configuration Utility.
4
Scroll down to and select the Disable UAC tool name.
5
Click Launch.
A command window displays and runs the disable UAC command. When the command is complete, close
the window.
6
Close the System Configuration Utility.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and selecting the Enable UAC tool name in step 4.
Disable using regedit by completing the following steps.
NOTE: Before making changes to the registry, make sure you have a valid backup. In cases where you're
supposed to delete or modify keys or values from the registry it is possible to first export that key or
value(s) to a .REG file before performing the changes.
1
Select Start > Run.
2
Type regedit on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Navigate to the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Policies\System
4
Right-click the EnableLUA value and select Modify.
5
Change the Value data field to 0 on the Edit DWORD Value dialog box and click OK.
6
Close the Registry Editor.
7
Restart the computer to apply changes.
NOTE: You can re-enable UAC using the above procedure and changing the Value data field to 1 in step 5.

1366

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Supportsave troubleshooting

H

Problem

Resolution

Unable to launch the SMC on
a Windows Vista or Windows 7
system
continued

Disable using the Group Policy by completing the following steps.
You can perform this procedure on you local machine using Local Group Policy editor or for many
computers at the same time using the Active Directory-based Group Policy Object (GPO) editor.
To disable using the Local Group Policy editor, complete the following steps.
1
On your local Vista computer, select Start > Run.
2
Type gpedit.msc on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Browse to Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Security Settings > Local Policies > Security
Options in the Group Policy editor.
4
In the right pane scroll to the User Access Control policies (at the bottom of the pane).
5
Right-click the Behavior of the elevation prompt for Administrators in Admin Approval Mode policy and
select Properties.
6
Select the No Prompt option and click OK.
7
Right-click the Detect application installations and prompt for elevation policy and select Properties.
8
Select the Disabled option and click OK.
9
Right-click the Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode policy and select Properties.
10 Select the Disabled option and click OK.
11 Close the Group Policy editor.
12 Restart the computer to apply changes.
To disable using the Active Directory-based GPO editor, complete the following steps.
1
On a Vista computer that is a member of a domain, select Start > Run.
2
Type gpedit.msc on the Run dialog box and click OK.
3
Browse to the required GPO that is linked to the OU or domain where the Vista computers are located,
then edit it
4
Browse to Computer Configuration > Windows Settings > Security Settings > Local Policies > Security
Options in the Group Policy editor.
5
In the right pane scroll to the User Access Control policies (at the bottom of the pane).
6
Right-click the Behavior of the elevation prompt for Administrators in Admin Approval Mode policy and
select Properties.
7
Select the No Prompt option and click OK.
8
Right-click the Detect application installations and prompt for elevation policy and select Properties.
9
Select the Disabled option and click OK.
10 Right-click the Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode policy and select Properties.
11 Select the Disabled option and click OK.
12 Close the Group Policy editor.
13. Restart the computer to apply changes.

Supportsave troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for supportsave
errors.
Problem

Resolution

Cannot capture support save information.

Capture support show by running the batch file from the
Install_Home/bin/supportshow.bat from Windows and UNIX systems.
1
Open Install_Home\bin\supportsave.bat.
2
Edit file supportsave dbuser dbpasswd [tareget-dir]
[pause-option].
NOTE: Unreachable switches increase the time needed to collect supportSave data.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1367

H

Technical support data collection troubleshooting

Technical support data collection troubleshooting
The following section states a possible issue and the recommended solution for technical support
data collection errors.
Problem

Resolution

Technical support data collection using
SCP/SFTP does not work because of one of the
following issues:
• For internal SCP/SFTP server, the
application was uninstalled and
reinstalled without migration
• For external SCP/SFTP server, the SSH
handshake keypair is changed
- manually
- due to an external server reinstall
- due to the SCP/SFTP server
preference (Options dialog box)
being changed from built-in to
external (installed on same machine)
or vice versa

Clear the SSH (SCP/SFTP) server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of
the device.
• For Fabric OS devices, use the following command:
sw0:FID128:admin> sshutil delknownhost
IP Address/Hostname to be deleted: SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 3.0 and later, use the following
command:
sw0# clear ssh-key SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.
• For Network OS devices running firmware version 2.1.1b, use the following
command:
sw0# execute-script sshdeleteknownhost
IP Address/Hostname to be deleted: SSH_server_IP_address
where SSH_server_IP_address is the IP address of the SSH server you want to
delete.

Technical support data collection using an
external SCP server does not work after
reinstalling the application or the external SCP
server on the Host machine.

Clear the SCP server IP address or hostname from the known_hosts table of the device
using the following command:
sw0# FID10:root> ssh-keygen –R Host_Name
where Host_Name is the IP address or host name of the external SCP server.

Wireless troubleshooting
After discovery, the Management application inspects the trap listener and syslog recipient
configuration on wireless controllers. If there is a problem with the registration, the Management
application changes the “registration success” master log event to a warning event with additional
message text. The following section states the possible issues and the associated Master Log
message that displays:

TABLE 97

Wireless troubleshooting

Problem

Master log warning message

The Management application successfully registers itself as SNMP
trap recipient on the wireless controller; however, trap generation is
disabled on the device.

Server 
 is successfully registered as SNMP Trap recipient
to the switch ; but trap generation is disabled on
switch.

The Management application successfully registers itself as syslog
recipient on the wireless controller; however, logging is disabled on
the device.

Server 
 is successfully registered as Syslog recipient to
the switch ; but logging is disabled on switch.

1368

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Zoning troubleshooting

TABLE 97

H

Wireless troubleshooting

Problem

Master log warning message

The Management application successfully registers itself as syslog
recipient on the wireless controller as the secondary or ternary
recipient (primary slot is already occupied). The wireless controller
sends syslog messages to secondary or ternary recipients only if
primary recipient is not reachable. Therefore, even though the
Management application is registered as a syslog recipient it may
not receive any messages.

Server 
 is successfully registered as Syslog recipient to
the switch ; but 
 is not the primary
syslog recipient.

The Management application successfully registers itself as syslog
recipient on the wireless controller; however, it is non-primary
recipient and logging is disabled on device.

Server 
 is successfully registered as Syslog recipient to
the switch ; but logging is disabled on switch and

 is not the primary syslog recipient.

Zoning troubleshooting
The following section states some possible issues and recommended solutions for zoning errors.
Problem

Resolution

Cannot perform zoning on a new switch.

You must use telnet (or the Product Type and Access tab in the Add Properties dialog box)
to change the default password on the new switch before you can use the Management
application to perform zoning.

When configuring a large zone configuration a
switch displays offline during discovery.

If a large zone configuration is configured in a fabric, switches may temporarily display as
being offline during discovery.
Wait for the next discovery cycle and click the Refresh button on the toolbar.

When activating a large zone configuration on
a two-switch fabric on UNIX platforms, an error
message displays stating “Failed to perform
the requested zoning action: Failed to zone due
to exception.”

Although the error message states that the requested zoning action failed, the zone
configuration will be correctly activated. Wait for the next zoning polling to occur.
This issue only occurs on UNIX systems.

Zoning activation message displays for a long
time, but zone configuration is not activated.

Telnet zoning can take a long time. To improve speed, open the Discover Setup dialog box
(Discover > Setup) and add the IP address for the device to the Selected Individual
Addresses list.

Out of memory error caused by running a
zoning report for a large zone configuration
(1 MB) in a medium-sized SAN due to a third
party tool.

You must increase the client memory allocation by completing “Configuring memory
allocation settings” on page 166.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1369

H

1370

Zoning troubleshooting

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Appendix

I

Database Fields

In this appendix
• Database tables and fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371
• Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601

Database tables and fields
NOTE

The primary keys are marked by an asterisk (*)

TABLE 16

ACH_CALL_CENTER

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the Call Center.

varchar

256

TABLE 17

Size

ACH_CALL_CENTER_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

Size

KEY_ *

Key to identify the specific configuration of the Call
Center.

varchar

256

CALL_CENTER_ID *

ID of the Call Center.

int

VALUE

Value of specific configuration identified by Key of the
Call Center.

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

REASON_CODE

Reason code of the event.

varchar

256

FRU_CODE

FRU code of the event.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description of the event.

varchar

256

SEVERITY

Severity of the event.

int

TABLE 18

ACH_EVENT

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1371

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 18

Definition

Format

Size

TYPE

Type of the event.

varchar

256

CONTRIBUTOR_PATTERN

Indicates the Contributor pattern to be used for
searching the event contributor in event description. In
some cases, FOS uses same message id for different
events (e.g MAPS events). To increase the filtering
capability of Call Home events, this contributor pattern
string is used along with message id. If the event has
unique message id, then contributor pattern string will
be empty.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 19

ACH_EVENT_FILTER_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

FILTER_ID *

ID of the event filter.

int

EVENT_ID *

Event ID which needs to be associated with the filter.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the event filter.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description of the event filter.

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_WWN

WWN of the switch.

varchar

FILTER_ID

If an event filter is assigned to the switch - the filter ID
if no filter is assigned - null.

int

CALL_CENTER_ID

ID of the call center to which the switch is assigned.

int

SUPPORT_SAVE

1 = Support save is enabled for the switch.
0 = Support save is disabled for the switch.

smallint

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

Managed element Id for the device.
Default value is -1.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the active directory group.

varchar

256

EMAIL

Active Directory Group Email Address.

varchar

1024

SOURCE_SERVER_NETW
ORK_ADDRESS

The LDAP Server Network Address from which the
Active directory group is fetched

varchar

255

TABLE 20

TABLE 21

TABLE 22

1372

ACH_EVENT (Continued)

Field

ACH_FILTER
Size

ACH_INFO

23

AD_GROUP
Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 23

ADAPTER_DRIVER_FILE_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FILE_NAME

Name of the driver file

varchar

MAJOR_VERSION

Major version of the driver file

smallint

MINOR_VERSION

Minor version of the driver file

smallint

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance version of the driver file

smallint

PATCH

Patch details of the driver file

varchar

32

SUPPORTED_OS

Holds multiple flavors of the OS

varchar

1024

OS_ARCHITECTURE

Supported OS architecture

varchar

32

IMPORTED DATE

Imported date of the driver file

timestamp with time zone

RELEASE DATE

Release date of the driver file

timestamp with time zone

LOCATION

Location of the adapter driver file in the
repository

varchar

TABLE 24

Size

64

1024

ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

CONFIG_ID

Configuration ID

int

PROPERTY_ID

Adapter port property ID

int

VALUE

User configured adapter port property value

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 25

Size

ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_PROPERTY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Adapter port property ID

int

NAME

Holds the name of the adapter port property

varchar

64

VALUE_LIST

Holds possible values for each adapter port property

varchar

2048

DEFAULT_VALUE

Holds the default value of the port property

varchar

256

DATA_TYPE

int

GROUP_NAME

TABLE 26

Holds thegroup name of the port property.

varchar

256

Size

AOR_DEVICE_GROUP_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

ID of the AOR.

int

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

The Product Group which is in the AOR.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1373

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 27

AOR_DEVICE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

ID of AOR

int

DEVICE_ID

The DEVICE ID can be IP Product or ServerIron ID which
is in the AOR

int

TABLE 28

AOR_FABRIC_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

ID of AOR

int

FABRIC_ID

FABRIC ID which is in the AOR

int

TABLE 29

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

ID of AOR

int

HOST_ID

HOST ID which is in the AOR

int

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

ID of AOR

int

PORT_GROUP_ID

IP of port group

int

Definition

Format

AOR_ID

The column holds ID of an AOR. It is Foreign Key and
refers to ID column of AOR table

int

VIP_SERVER_ID

The column holds ID of VIP Server. It is Foreign Key
and refers to ID column of VIP_SERVER table

int

Size

AUTO_TRACE_DUMP

Field

Definition

Format

CORE_SWITCH_ID

1374

Size

AOR_VIP_SERVER_MAP

Field

TABLE 32

Size

AOR_INM_PORT_GROUP_MAP

Field

TABLE 31

Size

AOR_HOST_MAP

Field

TABLE 30

Size

Size

int

ENABLED

The enabled or disabled state of automatic trace dump
transfer on the switch

smallint

PROTOCOL

The protocol Unknown(0)/FTP(1)/SCP(2) to be used for
transfer

smallint

IP_ADDRESS

The IP address of the host

varchar

64

USER_NAME

User name

varchar

64

LOCATION

Location of the directory where trace dump files are to
be saved

varchar

1024

PASSWORD

User password

varchar

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 33

AVAILABLE_FLYOVER_PROPERTY

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the available property to be included in the
flyover display.

varchar

TYPE

Indicates the flyover property type. Product property
is 0, Connection property is 1, User Defined property
is 2, Cee Product property is 3, Cee Connection
property is 4, Host property is 5.

smallint

DEFAULT_SELECTION

Value 1 in the column indicates default selected
product/connection property and 0 indicates not
included in the default list.

smallint

TABLE 34

Size

40

BIRTREPORT_PARAMETER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

RUN_ID

References the ID column in the
BIRTREPORT_RUN_TEMPLATE table.

int

Control type of the parameter.
1 - Text Box
2 - List Box
3 - Radio Button

int

PARAMETER_NAME

Name of the parameter in the report template design.

varchar

128

PROMPT_TEXT

Text Label for the parameter. This value will be
displayed on the GUI.

varchar

256

Data type of the parameter. Possible values are:
1 - String
2 - Float
3 - Decimal
4 - Date and Time
5 - Boolean
6 - Integer
7 - Date
8 - Time

int

Value of the Parameter.

varchar

256

Size

PARAMETER-TYPE

DATA_TYPE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

PARAMETER_VALUE

TABLE 35

•
•
•

Size

BIRTREPORT_RUN_TEMPLATE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

SCHEDULE_ID

References the ID column in the
BIRTREPORT_SCHEDULE_CONFIG table.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1375

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 35

BIRTREPORT_RUN_TEMPLATE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

REPORT_TEMPLATE_TITLE

Report Template title. This name is the same as the
title name in the REPORT_TEMPLATE table. There is no
foreign key relation here as the user may delete and
add a template but the schedule should still hold good
if looked up by title. Also title is unique in the
REPORT_TEMPLATE table.

varchar

256

NAME

Name of the generated report file.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 36

BIRTREPORT_SCHEDULE_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

DEPLOYMENT_ID

References the ID column in the
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION table.

int

NAME

Name of the schedule.

varchar

128

REPORT_STORE_LOCATION

Path to the location where the generated report files
are stored.

varchar

256

OVERWRITE

0 and 1 are allowed values.1 indicates overwrite is
true. I.e., every run of the schedule will overwrite the
previous output.0 indicates archive. I.e., every run of
the schedule will create a new folder in the store
location with timestamp to ensure that output of all the
runs will be archived.

int

Possible values are 0, 1, and 2.
0 indicates output will be in HTML
1 indicates PDF
2 indicates CSV

int

FORMAT_TYPE

TABLE 37

BOOT_IMAGE_DRIVER_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

MAJOR_VERSION

Major Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

MINOR_VERSION

Minor Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

PATCH

Patch Version bit from Boot Image file

varchar

32

MD5_HASH

MD5 hash value for Boot Image file

varchar

64

SUPPORTED_DRIVERS

Compatible HCM Drivers delimited by comma

varchar

256

TABLE 38

Size

BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS_

Field

Definition

Format

ID

int

DRIVER_MAPPING_ID

int

BOOT_IMAGE_NAME

1376

•
•
•

Name of Boot Image file

varchar

Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 38

BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS_ (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

MAJOR_VERSION

Major Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

MINOR_VERSION

Minor Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Version bit from Boot Image file

smallint

PATCH

Patch Version bit from Boot Image file

varchar

IMPORTED_DATE

Imported date of Boot Image file

timestamp

RELEASE_DATE

Release date of Boot Image file

timestamp

Size

32

RELEASE_NOTES_LOCATI Release notes location in Management application
ON
Repository

varchar

1024

LOCATION

varchar

1024

Size

TABLE 39

Boot Image file location in Management application
Repository

BOOT_LUN_SEQUENCE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the Boot LUN Sequence

varchar

FABRIC_ID

PK of the owning fabric

INT

TABLE 40

BOOT_LUN_SEQUENCE_DETAIL

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

BOOT_LUN_SEQ_ID

PK of the owning Boot LUN Sequence

char

PORT_WWN

WWN of the port in the Boot LUN Sequenc

int

LUN_NUM

LUN number of the port in the Boot LUN Sequence

int

SEQUENCE_NUM

Sequence number of the port in the Boot LUN
Sequence

TABLE 41

64

Size

23

CAPABILITY_

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME *

Name of the capability.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Optional detailed description about the capability.

varchar

512

TABLE 42

CARD

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CORE_SWITCH_ID *

Core switch DB ID.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

The number of the physical slot in the chassis where
the blade is plugged in. For fixed blades, SlotNumber is
zero.

smallint

TYPE

ID of the blade to identify the type.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1377

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 42

CARD (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

EQUIPMENT_TYPE

The type of the blade. It is either SW BLADE or CP
BLADE.

varchar

32

STATE

State of the blade, such as ENABLED or DISABLED.

varchar

32

POWER_STATE

State of power supply to the blade.

varchar

16

varchar

32

ATTN_STATE
SERIAL_NUMBER

Factory serial number of the blade.

varchar

32

PART_NUMBER

The part number assigned by the organization
responsible for producing or manufacturing the blade.

varchar

32

TRUNKING_SUPPORTED

1 = trunking is supported on this blade.

smallint

FICON_DISABLED

1 = FICON is disabled on this blade.

smallint

IP_ADDRESS

IP address of first Ethernet management port for a
given slot with intelligent blade.

char

64

SUBNET_MASK

Mask of first Ethernet man.agement port for a given
slot with intelligent blade.

varchar

64

DEFAULT_GATEWAY

Gateway IP address Ethernet management for a given
slot with intelligent blade.

varchar

64

PRIMARY_FW_VERSION

Primary firmware version of applications on this blade.
Applicable only for AP_BLADE.

varchar

48

SECONDARY_FW_VERSION

Secondary firmware version applications on this blade.
Applicable only for AP_BLADE.

varchar

48

The blade is capable of creating FCIP Circuits.
1 = true.
0 = false.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FCIP Advanced Extension Licensing is available.
1 = available.
0 = not licensed.
-1 = not supported.
Default value is -1.

smallint

MAX_FCIP_TUNNELS

The maximum number of tunnels that can be created
in this slot.
• -1 = not supported.
• Default value is -1.

int

MAX_FCIP_CIRCUITS

Describes the maximum number of circuits that can be
created in this slot.
• -1 = not supported.
• Default value is -1.

int

CP_BLADE_INDEX

CP blade index.
Default value is -1.

smallint

CP_HA_STATE

CP’s HA state information like Active/Stand by.

varchar

128

ETHERNET_IPV6_ADDRESS

IPV6 address of Ethernet management port for the
blade.

varchar

64

FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE

FCIP_LICENSED

1378

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 42

CARD (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ETHERNET_IPV6_GATEWAY

IPV6 Gateway address of Ethernet management port
for the blade.

varchar

64

NUMBER_OF_PORTS

int

HEADER_VERSION

The OEM or vendor-assigned version number.

int

GIGE_MODE

Determines the port operating mode for GE ports.
0 - 1G
1 - 10G
2 - Dual mode
3 - Failover mode
Default value -1 means it is not applicable.

smallint

TABLE 43

•
•
•
•

CARD_CAPABILITY

Field

Definition

Format

CARD_ID *

DB ID of the card.

int

CAPABILITY_ *

Name of the capability detected on the card.

varchar

ENABLED

1 = the capability is enabled on the card.
Default value is 0.

int

TABLE 44

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the application. Application represents a
collection of active zones in a fabric.

varchar

FABRIC_ID

ID of the fabric for which the application is created.

int

Size

24

CED_APPLICATION_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

APPLICATION_ID*

Auto-generated DB CED_Application table ID.

int

ZONE_ID*

Auto-generated DB Zone table ID which joins as a
member of the application.

int

TABLE 46

256

CED_APPLICATION

Field

TABLE 45

Size

Size

CED_USER_PREFERENCE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

USER_NAME*

User Name carried from _USER table.

varchar

128

FABRIC_ID*

Fabric ID carried from Fabric table.

int

APPLICATION_ID

CED application ID representing the group of end
devices to be displayed in the fabric.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1379

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 47

CEE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

GIGE_PORT_ID

FK to GIGE_PORT

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

FK to owning VIRTUAL_SWITCH

int

IF_INDEX

Interface index

int

IF_NAME

Interface name

varchar

256

IF_MODE

Gige port mode (L2, L3, none)

varchar

8

L2_MODE

L2 mode (hybrid, trunk, access)

varchar

32

VLAN_ID

List of VLAN this port belongs to

text

LAG_ID

LAG ID this port belongs to

int

IP_ADDRESS

Port''s configured IP address

varchar

128

MAC_ADDRESS

Port''s MAC address

varchar

64

PORT_SPEED

Speed in Gb/sec. The default value is 0.

int

ENABLED

State. The default value is 0.

smallint

OCCUPIED

The default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_UPDATE

bigint

MAC_ACL_POLICY

stores the MAC ACL policy information of the port

varchar

64

NET_MASK

Netmask of the IPAddress of the port

varchar

128

PROTOCOL_DOWN_REAS
ON

Reason for the port''s operational state being down

varchar

512

QOS_TYPE

QoS Type (Cee-Map, TrafficClass Map, FCoE map)

varchar

32

QOS_NAME

Name of the QoS Map set on the port

varchar

64

DOT1X_ENABLED

Indicate if 802.1x authentication is enabled on this
port. The default value is 0.

smallint

PORT_ROLE

Thisfield is used to store the port role value. The value
will be populated by the NosSwitchAssetCollector. This
field valid values include ISL or Edge. Default value is
empty string.

varchar

32

Format

Size

TABLE 48

CFG_BACKUP_ARCHIVE

Field

Definition

CFG_BACKUP_ARCHIVE_ID

int

DEVICE_ID

IP Product DB ID from which the configuration has
been retrieved.

int

USER_ID

Unique DB ID of user who initiated this config
upoload.

int

PRODUCT_TYPE

Indicates the type of product from which the config is
retrieved for example NetIron XMR/MLX.

varchar

32

VERSION

Version of the configs downloaded for each product.

num

(8,0)

varchar

255

LOCATION

1380

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 48

CFG_BACKUP_ARCHIVE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DATE_TIME

The date and time at which the configuration has
been backedup. The date and time will be saved in
the following format "Mon May 10 17:59:13 PDT
2010".

varchar

64

varchar

64

FILE_NAME
IS_BASELINE

Indicates if the configuration file is selected by user
as baselined configuration or not.

num

(1,0)

DESCRIPTION

Brief comments and description about this
configuration.

varchar

1024

IMAGE_VERSION

The firmware version on the product while the config
is retrieved.

varchar

64

CLI_TEMPLATE_REPORT_EX DB ID of the cli template report execution.
ECUTION_ID

int

CLI_TEMPLATE_REPORT_EX Result of the cli template execution.
ECUTION

int

CONFIG_DATA

The actual configuration data of the IP or DCB
product.

txt

CONFIG_TYPE

Configuration Type DCB_RUNNING=1,
DCB_STARTUP=2, IP_STARTUP=3, IP_RUNNING=4

smallint

DRIFT_STATUS

Indicates whether this config backup is deviated or
not with respect to the active baseline at at the time
of adding this config backup to the repository or not.
If there is no baseline for the product, this column
will be set to NO_BASELINE(-1). The possible values
NO_DEVIATION=0, DEVIATED=1, NO_BASELINE=-1

int

TABLE 49

CHANGELOG

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

Size

APPLIED_AT

varchar

25

DESCRIPTION

varchar

255

TABLE 50

CLI_TEMPLATE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CLI_TEMPLATE_ID

int

USER_ID

int

NAME

varchar

256

num

(2,0)

TYPE

The template type. Product Monitoring: 2, Global
configuration: 1 in CLI Configuration.

CLI_CMD

varchar

DESCRIPTION

varchar

512

DEVICE_USERNAME

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1381

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 50

CLI_TEMPLATE (Continued)

Field

Format

Size

DEVICE_PASSWORD

varchar

256

DATE_TIME

varchar

64

DEVICE_ENABLE_USERNA
ME

varchar

256

DEVICE_ENABLE_PASSWOR
D

varchar

256

CLI_FILTER

varchar

HAS_PARAMETERS

num

(1,0)

PROMPT_ADDITIONAL_TAR
GET

The flag to indicate whether or not to prompt for
additional targets during deployment.
1 = Prompt for additional targets.
0 =Do not prompt for additional target.

smallint

PARAMETERS

Stores Parameter name and values in XML Format.

text

PARAMETER_MODE

The flag to indicate whether the same parameter has
to be applied for all targets or different values to be
applied for each target. 0 - Same value for all targets.
1 - Different values for each targets.

smallint

IS_EXAMPLE

The flag to indicate whether or not if the template is
example template. 0 - User Defined (not example)
template. 1 - Example Template.

smallint

VALIDATE_CLI_RESPONSE

The flag to indicate whether or not if the CLI
responses for each of the CLI commands are to be
validated for this template. 0 - Dont validate CLI
Responses. 1 - Validate CLI Responses.

smallint

PROMPT_ADDITIONAL_PAR
AMETERS

The flag to indicate whether or not to prompt
Parameter tab during manual deployment for
changes. 0 - Dont prompt Parameter tab. 1 - Prompt
Parameter tab.

smallint

SCHEDULE_ENABLED

The flag to indicate whether or not the CLI Template
is scheduled. 0 - Scheduled deployment is turned
OFF. 1 - Scheduled Deployment is turned ON.

smallint

MODULE

Stores the module or feature name of the CLI
commands. This is used for example CLI templates.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 51

1382

Definition

CLIENT_VIEW

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

USER_NAME

The Management application user name.

varchar

128

NAME

Client view name.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

Client View description.

varchar

255

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 52

CLIENT_VIEW_COLUMN

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the column. It is used as column header in
product list and property name in property sheet(SAN
and IP)

varchar

255

ENTITY_CATEGORY

Holds the type of the entity to whom the column name
belongs to like Port, Fabric, IPProduct, VCSInterface,
etc'

varchar

128

COLUMN_INDEX

Used to differentiate user defined columns and static
columns. For static it is 0 and for user defined columns
it is 1,2,3.

small int

DESCRIPTION

Holds description of the column.

varchar

ICON_ID

Holds Icon Id for the column. Currently it is unused.

int

VISIBLE

Indicates whether the columns are visible. 0 - Not
Visible, 1 - Visible

smallint

EDITABLE

Indicates whether the columns are editable. 0 - Not
Editable, 1 - Editable.

smallint

TABLE 53

255

CLIENT_VIEW_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

CLIENT_VIEW_ID *

Foreign key to CLIENT_VIEW table.

int

FABRIC_ID *

Foreign key to FABRIC table.

int

TABLE 54

Size

Size

CLIENT_VIEW_MEMBER_HOST

Field

Definition

Format

CLIENT_VIEW_ID

Primary key of CLIENT_VIEW table

int

HOST_ID

Primary key of DEVICE_ENCLOSURE table

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID *

Arbitrary integer to identify the cluster.

int

NAME

User-assigned name to identify the cluster. Names
should be unique to avoid user confusion,
but the database does not enforce uniqueness.

varchar

64

IP_ADDRESS

The primary hostname or IP address for managing the
cluster as a single entity.
The definition of primary depends on the clustering
technology.

varchar

64

TABLE 55

TABLE 56

Size

CLUSTER
Size

CLUSTER_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

CLUSTER_ID

Identifies the cluster containing a member.

int

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID

Identifies a member of the cluster.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

32

1383

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 57
Field

Definition

Format

ID

ID of the Eth port

int

ETH_DEV

Ethernet device

varchar

ETH_LOG_LEVEL

Log level for the Ethernet device. Possible values are
0 - Log Invalid
1 - Log Critical
2 - Log Error
3 - Log Warning
4 - Log Info

int

NAME

Name of the port

varchar

256

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC Address

varchar

64

IOC_ID

IO controller ID. The default value is 0.

varchar

64

HARDWARE_PATH

Hardware path of the port

varchar

256

STATUS

Status of the Eth port. The default value is -1.

varchar

64

CNA_PORT_ID

ID of the parent port

int

CREATION_TIME

CNA Eth port record creation time. This tells when the
port was first discovered.

timestamp

CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS

User definable Mac address which is by default same
as built in Mac address

varchar

64

MAX_BANDWIDTH

Maximum bandwidth

varchar

64

PCIF_INDEX

Pci function Iidex

varchar

64

MAX_PCIF

Maximum number of Pci functions.

smallint

MIN_BANDWIDTH

Minimum guaranteed bandwidth. Value will be in Gbps
(0 to 10).

int

MTU

Maximum transmission unit in bytes

int

TABLE 58

Size

64

CNA_PRODUCT_CONNECTIVITY

Field

Definition

Format

CNA_PORT_ID

CNA Port identifier.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Interface Identifier.

int

TABLE 59

1384

CNA_ETH_PORT

Size

CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique autogenerated db id.

int

CNA_PORT_ID

Foreign key, related cna eth port config with the CNA
port.

int

CNA_ETH_PORT_ID

Nullable foreign key, related cna eth port config with the
CNA eth port.

int

PCIF_INDEX

PCI Function Index eg 2/1/1(adapter number/physical
port number/port index).

varchar

64

CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS

Current MAC address of the port.

varchar

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 59

CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MAX_BANDWIDTH

Maximum guaranteed bandwidth. Value will be in Gbps
(1 to 10).

varchar

64

MIN_BANDWIDTH

Minimum guaranteed bandwidth. Value will be in Gbps
(0 to 10).

int

PORT_NUMBER

Physical port number of adapter.

int

PORT_TYPE

Type of this port. For example, ETH.

varchar

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of this DB record.

timestamp

CONFIGURATION_STATUS

Indicates current configuration status of the port.
Possible values are:
-1 is Invalid
0 is Added
1 is deleted

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key autogenerated ID

int

PORT_NUMBER

Port number of the CNA port

int

PORT_WWN

Port WWN of the port

char

23

NODE_WWN

Node WWN of the port

char

23

PHYSICAL_PORT_TYPE

Port type CNA/FC

varchar

32

NAME

Name of the port

varchar

256

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC address of the port.

varchar

64

MEDIA

Media of the port

varchar

64

CEE_STATE

State of the port.

varchar

64

HBA_ID

ID of the port.

int

CREATION_TIME

CNA port record creation time. This tells when this port
was first discovered.

timestamp

FACTORY_PORT_WWN

Factory configured Port WWN defined for the CNA port
in HCM

varchar

23

FACTORY_NODE_WWN

Factory configured Node WWN defined for the CNA port
in HC

varchar

23

PREBOOT_CREATED

Flag to identify vports created during preboot and will
accept string values True/false/empty

varchar

23

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME *

Name of the collector registered with the collection
framework.

varchar

256

CLASS_NAME

Java class name which serves as the collector.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Collector description, usually not used.

varchar

512

TABLE 60

TABLE 61

64

CNA_PORT
Size

COLLECTOR

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1385

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 62
Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_MIB_OBJECT_
ENTRY_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

int

MIB_OBJECT_ID

MIB_OBJECT table DB ID.

int

TABLE 63

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_SNMP_EXPRE
SSION_ENTRY_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

int

EXPRESSION_ID

Id of the SNMP_EXPRESSION.

int

Size

COLLECTOR_TARGET_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_TARGET_ENTR
Y_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the SNMP collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId, and for port level it will
use interfaceId.

int

PROP_STR

Property string of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

varchar

COLLECTOR_TARGET_ENTR
Y_TYPE

Target type of the SNMP collector data. for device
int
level collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

TABLE 65

Size

COLLECTOR_SNMP_EXPRESSION_ENTRY

Field

TABLE 64

1386

COLLECTOR_MIB_OBJECT_ENTRY

Size

8192

CONFIG_BLOCK

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

ID of the block.

int

NAME

Name of the block.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

Description of the block.

varchar

1024

USE_REGEX

Indicates whether the block start is built with regular
expression or not.
0 = Does not contain Regular expression
1 = Contains regular expression

smallint

BLOCK_START

Block start string to match one or more block starts
in the device config. Can be built with regular
expression to match more than one block.

varchar

1024

BLOCK_END

Block end string. Used the first match to form config
block from start to end.

varchar

1024

CATEGORY

Category of the Block.
0 = User defined
1 = Predefined.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 66

CONFIG_CONDITION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Condition ID.

int

NAME

Name of the condition.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

Description of the condition.

varchar

1024

REMEDIATION

Remediation details for failed conditions.

text

USE_REGEX

Indicates whether the condition lines are built with
regular expression or not.
0 = Does not contain Regular expression
1 = Contains regular expression

smallint

MATCH

The device config should Match or Not match with
condition.
0 = Not Match
1 = Match.

smallint

CONDITION_STR

The condition string to match the device config.
Unlimited length.
Each line in configuration will be matched in the
whole config or a block if the order_lines is 0. Else all
lines will be matched together.

text

ORDER_LINES

Indicates whether the condition_str lines order
should be matched in the config or block. 0 = Lines
order check is not required. 1 = Lines order should
be matched.

smallint

CATEGORY

Category of the Condition.
0 = User defined, 1 = Predefined.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Auto generated ID for this table.

int

IP_ADDRESS

IP Address of the switch that is represented by this
record. Could be either IPV4 or IPV6 address.

varchar

128

WWN

WWN of the core switch.

char

23

NAME

Switch name if available otherwise stores the wwn of
the switch.

varchar

64

TYPE

Stores the switch type, the sw_bd_type of the switch.

smallint

MODEL

Holds the switch model, whether its Brocade, Mcdata
or unknown . Value 2 is for Brocade and 3 is for
McData

smallint

FIRMWARE_VERSION

Firmware version of the switch.

varchar

128

VENDOR

Vendor information for the switch.

varchar

256

MAX_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES

Maximum number of virtual switches supported.

smallint

NUM_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES

Total number of virtual switch present.

smallint

REACHABLE

Determines whether the switch is reachable from the
Management application. 1 is reachable and 0 is
unreachable

smallint

TABLE 67

Size

CORE_SWITCH

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1387

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 67

1388

CORE_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

UNREACHABLE_TIME

Time when the switch becomes unreachable.

timestamp

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

Chassis operational status like FRU, Power Supply
etc..

varchar

CREATION_TIME

Core switch record creation time. This tells us when
the intial discovery has happened.

timestamp

LAST_SCAN_TIME

Last scan time tells the time when the last time the
switch was polled.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Last update time tells the time when the last update
to the database record happened.

timestamp

SYSLOG_REGISTERED

Determies whether the switch is registered for
sending syslog traps.
• 1 is registered
• 0 is not registered.

smallint

CALL_HOME_ENABLED

Determines whether the call home feature is
enabled..

smallint

SNMP_REGISTERED

Determines whether the switch is registered for
sending SNMP traps .
• 1 is registered
• 0 is not registered.

smallint

USER_IP_ADDRESS

Only for McData switches, this column is used to
store the IP address which user provides for those
M-model switches for which seed switch is unable to
return IP address.

varchar

NIC_PROFILE_ID

Nic Profile ID refers to the entry in the NIcProfile table
that has IP Address of the Management application
which is used as Syslog or SNMP reciepients.

int

MANAGING_SERVER_IP_
ADDRESS

IP address(v4/v6) of the Management application
server which is currently managing the M-model
switch. Used for M-EOS switch only. It does not apply
to Fabric OS switches.

varchar

VF_ENABLED

Determines whether Virtual Fabric is enabled on the
switch.
• 1 is enabled
• 0 is disabled

smallint

VF_SUPPORTED

Determines whether virtual fabric is supported on
the switch.
• 1 is supported
• 0 is unsupported

smallint

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

A unique managed element ID for this physical
switch. Also a foreign key reference to the
MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

Size

128

128

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 67

CORE_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAT_PRIVATE_IP_ADDRESS

NAT private IP Address. Feature available from NMS
DC Eureka release onwards. During a successful NAT
translation the Private IP that gets translated will be
stored in this field. The new translated IP Address will
be stored in the existing IP_ADDRESS field. All the
NAT look up will be done using the NAT Private IP
Address.

varchar

128

ALTERNATE_IP_ADDRESS

Alternate IP address of the switch. Feature available
from Eureka release onwards. During fabric discovery
the column will be populated based on the values in
the fabricinfo.html. If Management application server
is IPV6 capable, then we store the switchetherIP NVP
else we store the switchetherIPV6. So could be either
IPV4 or IPV6 address. If there exists any NAT
translation, translated IP will be used.

varchar

128

MAC_ADDRESS

Stores the VCS Mac Address. The value will be
populated by the FabricCollector. Default value is
empty string. The management interface Mac
Address will be stored here.

varchar

64

TABLE 68

CORE_SWITCH_CAPABILITY

Field

Definition

Format

CORE_SWITCH_ID *

DB ID.

int

CAPABILITY_ *

Name of the capability detected on the core switch.

varchar

ENABLED

1 = the capability is enabled on the core switch.
Default value is 0.

int

TABLE 69

Size

256

CORE_SWITCH_CHECKSUM

Field

Definition

Format

CORE_SWITCH_ID *

DB ID.

int

CHECKSUM_KEY *

Checksum type.

varchar

32

CHECKSUM

Checksum value.

varchar

16

Size

TABLE 70

CORE_SWITCH_COLLECTION

Field

Definition

Format

CORE_SWITCH_ID *

Core switch ID.

int

COLLECTION_NAME *

Collector name.

varchar

LAST_CORE_SW_
MODIFICATION

Last core switch modification time.

timestamp

TABLE 71

Size

256

CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

CORE_SWITCH_ID*

Primary key for the table.

int

ETHERNET_MASK

Ethernet mask of the core switch IP address.

char

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

1389

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 71

CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

FC_MASK

FC IP Address ethernet mask.

char

64

FC_IP

Fibre Channel IP address.

char

64

FC_CERTIFICATE

FC IP Address.

smallint

SW_LICENSE_ID

License ID of the chassis.

char

23

SUPPLIER_SERIAL_
NUMBER

Supplier serial number for the switch.

varchar

32

PART_NUMBER

Partnumber of the switch

varchar

32

CHECK_BEACON

Denotes if Switch Beacon is enabled or not on the
switch.
1 = beacon is turned on; otherwise, 0.

smallint

TIMEZONE

Timezone of the switch.

varchar

MAX_PORT

Number of maximum ports physically allowed on the
switch.

smallint

CHASSIS_SERVICE_TAG

Chassis service tag for the switch.

varchar

32

BAY_ID

Bay ID of the switch.

varchar

32

TYPE_NUMBER

Type number is more of details for the type, Ex:
SLKWRM.

varchar

32

MODEL_NUMBER

Model number is the same as the model number like
Brocade 8000, Brocade VDX 6710.

varchar

256

MANUFACTURER

Manufacturer for the switch.

varchar

32

PLANT_OF_MANUFACTURE
R

Plant of the manufacturer for the switch.

varchar

32

SWITCH_SERIAL_NUMBER

This is the factory serial number.

varchar

32

ACT_CP_PRI_FW_VERSION

Stores Active CP primary firmware version.

varchar

128

ACT_CP_SEC_FW_VERSION

Stores Active CP secondary firmware version.

varchar

128

STBY_CP_PRI_FW_VERSIO
N

Standby CP primary firmware version.

varchar

128

STBY_CP_SEC_FW_VERSIO
N

Standby CP secondary firmware version.

varchar

128

TYPE

Type of the switch, basically the sw bd type stored in
the core switch.

smallint

EGM license supported or not.
1 is supported
0 is not supported.

smallint

SUB_TYPE

Sub Type of the switch. DCX+ and DCX-4S+ has
values as 1, otherwise 0.

varchar

PARTITION

Partitions supported in the switch.

smallint

MAX_NUM_OF_BLADES

Required by SMIA to populate
Brocade_Chassis.MaxNumOfBlades property.
It indicates the max no of blades that can be present
in a chassis.

smallint

EGM_CAPABLE

1390

•
•

32

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 71

CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

VENDOR_VERSION

Required by integrated SMI agent to populate
Brocade_Product.Version property.

varchar

32

VENDOR_PART_NUMBER

Required by integrated SMI agent to populate
Brocade_Product.SKUNumber property.

varchar

32

SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED

Flag to denote whether SNMP informs option in the
switch is enabled or disabled. Default value is 0.

smallint

RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER

RNID sequence number for the switch.

varchar

32

CONTACT

Contact details of the switch. Syscontact from the
RFC 1213 Mib.

varchar

256

LOCATION

Location details for the switch. Syslocation from RFC
1213.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description about the switch. Sysdescr from RFC
1213

varchar

256

FIRMWARE_VERSION

Firmware version of the switch.

varchar

128

CHASSIS_PACKAGE_TYPE

A value indicating the type of chassis.

int

DOMAIN_NAME

Denotes the domain name configured in switch.

varchar

IP_ADDRESS_PREFIX

Required to populate the prefix of IPv6 address.
Applicable only for IPv6 address.

DOMAIN_NAME

Denotes the domain name configured in switch.

FRAME_LOG_SIZE

The number of entries in the framelog.

int

FRAME_LOG_ENABLED

Indicates if framelog is enabled on the switch. 0 =
disabled, 1 = enabled.

smallint

MAPS_ENABLED

Boolean flag to indicate if the switch is MAPS
enabled or not. Enabled: 1, Disabled: 0.

smallint

TABLE 72

64

CRYPTO_HOST

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINE
R_ID

Foreign key reference to the
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER that contains this
host.

int

VI_NODE_WWN

Node WWN of Virtual Initiator that represents this
host.

char

23

VI_PORT_WWN

Port WWN of Virtual Initiator that represents this
host.

char

23

HOST_PORT_WWN

Physical (real) host''s Port WWN

char

23

HOST_NODE_WWN

Physical (real) host''s Node WWN

char

23

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1391

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 73

CRYPTO_LUN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAI
NER_ID

Foreign key reference to the
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER that contains the host
for which these LUNs are configured.

int

SERIAL_NUMBER

The LUN serial number, used to identify the physical
LUN.

varchar

ENCRYPTION_STATE

Boolean.
• True (1) if LUN is being encrypted.
• False (0) if cleartext.
The default value is 0.

smallint

STATUS

Not currently used but left in for possible future use.
Replaced by LUN_STATE. The default value is 0.

smallint

REKEY_INTERVAL

The number of days that data encryption keys should
be used before automatically generated a new key. 0 =
infinite, i.e., no re-keying.

int

VOLUME_LABEL_PREFIX

A user-configured string used to construct the
Brocade-specific volume label on encrypted tapes.
Ignored for disk LUNs.

varchar

LAST_REKEY_DATE

The last time a data encryption key was generated for
this LUN. REKEY_INTERVAL days after this date, a new
key will be generated.

timestamp

LAST_REKEY_STATUS

The success or failure of the most recent re-keying
operation, if any. This field is not currently used, but is
left in the hope that FOS will support it in the future.
Only valid for disk LUNs. The default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_REKEY_PROGRESS

Indicates whether a re-key operation is in progress.
• 0 = no re-keying in progress.
• > 0 = percentage done of re-keying operation in
progress. Only valid for disk LUNs.
The default value is 0.

smallint

If a tape session is in progress, this is the volume label
for the currently mounted tape. Only valid for tape
LUNs.

varchar

PRIOR_ENCRYPTION_STAT
E

Not used. When configuring a new disk LUN, this field
indicates whether the LUN is already encrypted (1) or
cleartext (0). This information does not need to be
persisted. Only valid for disk LUNs.

smallint

ENCRYPTION_FORMAT

If ENCRYPTION_STATE is true, ENCRYPTION_FORMAT
indicates the type of encryption.
• 0 = cleartext
• 1 = DF-compatible
• 2 = native

smallint

ENCRYPT_EXISTING_DATA

Not used. When configuring a disk LUN that was
previously cleartext and is to be encrypted, this
property tells the switch whether or not to start a
re-keying operation to encrypt the existing LUN data.
This property does not need to be persisted.

smallint

CURRENT_VOLUME_LABE
L

1392

Size

256

256

2048

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 73

CRYPTO_LUN (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

DECRYPT_EXISTING_DATA

Not used. When configuring disk LUN that was
previously encrypted and is to become cleartext, this
property tells the switch whether or not to start a
re-keying operation to decrypt the existing LUN data.
This property does not need to be persisted. This
feature is no longer supported in FOS.

smallint

KEY_ID

Hex-encoded binary key vault ID for the current data
encryption key for this LUN.
This ID may be used to locate the data encryption key
in the key vault.

varchar

CRYPTO_HOST_ID

Foreign key reference to the CRYPTO_HOST that uses
this LUN.

int

LUN_NUMBER

The Logical Unit Number of the LUN, as seen by the
LUNs host. This may be an
integer (0 - 65565) or a WWN-format 8-byte hex
number.

varchar

BLOCK_SIZE

The LUN''s Logical Block Size, in bytes. Only valid for
disk LUNs.

int

TOTAL_BLOCKS

The total number of logical blocks in the LUN.
Multiplying BLOCK_SIZE by TOTAL_BLOCKS gives the
LUN size in bytes.

int

LUN_STATE

LUN operational status, such as OK or disabled for
various reasons. For possible values see the enum
definition in CryptoClientConstants. The default value
is 0.

int

LUN_FLAGS

Bitmap of LUN options. The only option currently used
is bit 0 (least significant) which indicates that the LUN
must be manually enabled because it has been
disabled due to inconsistent metadata detected. The
default value is 0.

bigint

ENCRYPTION_ALGORITHM

Stores the Encryption Algorithm used to
encrypt/decrypt data on the LUN

varchar

KEY_ID_STATE

State of the Key ID retrieval from Key Vault. The
default value is 0.

smallint

REKEY_SESSION_NUMBE
R

Unique Rekey session number. The default value is 0.

int

PERCENTAGE_COMPLETE

Percentage of rekey completion. The default value is 0. int

REKEY_ROLE

Rekey Role definition. The default value is 0.

smallint

CURRENT_LBA

Current Logical Block address for the rekey session in
progress. The default value is 0.

int

LUN_STATE_STRING

Lun state string.

varchar

NEW_LUN

This field specifies that when a LUN is added to its
container, indicate that it''s a new LUN to be used in
SRDF Configuration. Feature available only from 6.4
release onwards and for RSA key vaults. CryptoLun
collector and CryptoLunBean fills in this value. The
default value is -1.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

64

512

2048

1393

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 73

Definition

Format

Size

NEW_LUN_TYPE

This field indicates the role of the LUN configured in
the SRDF mode. The values could be R1, R2 or
UNKNOWN. Feature available only from 6.4 release
onwards and for RSA key vaults. CryptoLuncollector
fills in this value.

varchar

64

DISABLE_WRITE_EARLY_A
CK

This variable indicates whether write early
acknowledgement is enabled (if value is 0) or disabled
(if value is 1). The value of this variable is considered
only for tape LUNs. This value is applicable only for the
FOS 6.3.2 version and above.

smallint

DISABLE_READ_AHEAD

This variable indicates whether read ahead is enabled
(if value is 0) or disabled (if value is 1). The value of
this variable is considered only for tape LUNs. This
value is applicable only for the FOS 6.3.2 version and
above.

smallint

TIME_LEFT_FOR_AUTO_R
EKEY

The time left until next auto rekey, starts from the time
last key for LUN was generated. This field is not
updated every minute in DB. Its value is same as
last_rekey_date + re_key_interval. As per current CAL
implementation, will get only last_rekey_date when
rekey is in progress. Otherwise it will be 0. CAL is
providing "time left for auto rekey" attribute, and this
value is stored in DB.

bigint

THIN_PROVISION_LUN

Indicates whether the LUN is a Thin Provisioning LUN
or not. The different Thin Provisioning values are
0(Unknown), 1(No), 2(Yes).

int

TABLE 74

1394

CRYPTO_LUN (Continued)

Field

CRYPTO_SWITCH

Field

Definition

Format

SWITCH_ID*

Primary key. The value is the same as the primary key
of a record in the VIRTUAL_SWITCH table

int

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP table.
Identifies the Encryption Group that this switch
belongs to. Null indicates the switch is not part of an
Encryption Group.

int

GROUP_LEADER_POSITION

No longer used. Previously indicated whether this
switch is the group leader. Use GROUP_LEADER_ID in
the ENCRYPTION_GROUP table instead.

smallint

TAPE_ENCRYPTION

No longer used. Previously enabled or disabled tape
encryption at the switch level. This feature has been
removed from Fabric OS.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TAPE_KEY_POLICY

No longer used. Previously used to configure a
separate data encryption key per volume or per
group. This feature has been removed from Fabric
OS.
Default value is 0.

smallint

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 74

CRYPTO_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

PRIMARY_VAULT_LINK_
STATUS

The status of the link key for the primary key vault.
Link keys are used only for NetApp LKM key vaults.
For possible values, see the enum definition in the
DTO class.
Default value is 0.

smallint

BACKUP_VAULT_LINK_
STATUS

The status of the link key for the backup key vault.
Link keys are used only for NetApp LKM key vaults.
For possible values, see the enum definition in the
DTO class.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CP_CERTIFICATE

The public key certificate, in PEM format, of the
switch’s Control Processor module. This certificate is
exchanged with other switches to establish secure
communication between switches in an Encryption
Group.

varchar

4096

KAC_CERTIFICATE

The public key certificate, in PEM format, of the
switch''s Key Archive Client module. This certificate is
installed on key vaults to establish secure
communication between this switch and the key
vault. For firmware versions below 7.1.0 it will be in
PEM format (encoded) and for firmware versions
7.1.0 and above it will be in p12 format (encoded).

varchar

8192

PRIMARY_VAULT_
CONNECTIVITY_STATUS

The status of the network connection between this
switch and the primary key vault. For possible values,
see the enum definition in the DTO class.
Default value is 0.

smallint

BACKUP_VAULT_
CONNECTIVITY_STATUS

The status of the network connection between this
switch and the backup key vault. For possible values,
see the enum definition in the DTO class.
Default value is 0.

smallint

UN_ERASE_ENABLED

This variable indicates whether LUN Erase feature is
enabled or not on the switch. The value 1 means LUN
Erase is enabled on the switch.The Value 0 means
LUN Erase is not enabled on the switch.

smallint

TABLE 75

Size

CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_ENGINE
that owns this container.

int

NAME

A user-supplied name for the container.

varchar

64

VT_NODE_WWN

The Node WWN of the Virtual Target that represents
the real physical target device.

char

23

VT_PORT_WWN

The Port WWN of the Virtual Target that represents the
real physical target device.

char

23

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1395

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 75

Definition

Format

FAILOVER_STATUS

Indicates whether this container''s target is being
encrypted by the encryption
engine on which the container is configured (value 0)
or by another encryption
engine in the HA Cluster (value 1).
Default value is 0..

smallint

FAILOVER_STATUS_2

Failover status from the HA Cluster peer.

smallint

DEVICE_STATUS

The physical target storage device operational status
when the virtual initiator last
attempted to access the target. For possible values,
see the enum definition in the
DTO class.
Default value is 0.

smallint

DEVICE_TYPE

Indicates whether the target storage device is a disk
(0) or tape (1) device.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TARGET_PORT_WWN

The Port WWN of the physical target storage device
associated with this container.

char

23

TARGET_NODE_WWN

The Node WWN of the physical target storage device
associated with this container.

char

23

CONTAINER_FIELD_DATA

Container metadata information

varchar

256

CONFIGURATION_STATUS

Configuration status.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FRONT_END_N_PORT_NU
MBER

Indicates N_Port number where CISCO Fabric will be
connected when BES is in AG Mode.
Default value is -1.

smallint

TABLE 76

Size

CUSTOM_FAVORITES_OBJECT_LIST

Field

Definition

Format

FAVORITE_ID

Represents the ID in FAVORITES table

int

OBJECT_ID

Represents the member's ID of the custom
favorites. It can be port/tunnel/EE monitor ID.

int

TABLE 77

1396

CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER (Continued)

Field

Size

DASHBOARD

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Dashboard ID.

int

NAME

Name of the dashboard.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Description of the dashboard.

varchar

256

CREATED_BY

References the ID column of the USER_ table.
Foreign Key USER_(ID) who created the
dashboard. For out of dashboards the column
will be 2 to indicate system user.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 77

DASHBOARD (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

CREATION_TIME

Time when dashboard was created.

timestamp

LAST_OPENED_TIME

Time when dashboard was last opened.

timestamp

TABLE 78

Size

DASHBOARD_CANVAS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Dashboard Canvas ID.

int

NAME

Name of the Dashboard canvas.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Description of the dashboard canvas.

varchar

512

Size

TABLE 79

DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Dashboard preferences like user ID, Scope ID
etc are stored per dashboard.

int

USER_ID

FK USER_.ID. ID of the user who own the
dashboard.

int

SCOPE_ID

FK USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE.ID. This
value will be populated when user selects the
predefined scope.

int

SCOPE_TYPE

FK SCOPE_TYPE.ID. This value will be
populated when user select user defined
network scope.

int

DASHBOARD_ID

FK DASHBOARD.ID. The ID of the dashboard to
which the preference is applied.

int

DASHBOARD_CANVAS_I
D

FK DASHBOARD_CANVAS.ID. The ID of the
Canvas in which the dashboard is shown

int

VISIBLE

Visibility of the dashboard. 0 - Not Visible 1 Visible.

smallint

TIME_SCOPE

Time Scope of the Dashboard.

int

TABLE 80

Size

DASHBOARD_PROVIDER

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CLASS_NAME

The fully defined class name of the Provider
class. This is stored per widget Provider
class.

varchar

128

REFRESH_INTERVAL

Refresh Interval of the Widget in seconds.
Default is 5 seconds.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1397

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 80

Definition

PROVIDER_GROUP

The Group to which the Provider belong to.
varchar
Similar providers will have same group name.

PROVIDER_ORDER

The order of execution passed to the Job
Executor framework. Provider belong to same
group will have different order number.
Default: 0

TABLE 81

1398

DASHBOARD_PROVIDER

Field

Format

Size
128

int

DASHBOARD_WIDGET

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

ID of the dashboard widget. Auto
incremented.

int

TITLE

Name of the dashboard widget.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

Description of the dashboard widget.

varchar

512

EDITABLE

Indicates whether the widget attributes are
editable. 0 - Not Editable, 1 - Editable.

smalint

CATEGORY

Dashboard widget category. Used for
categorizing the widgets based on the type.
Possible values are 1 - General, 2 Performance, 3 - Starlifter (future).

int

PROVIDER_CLASS_NAME

Provides the mapping between widget and
the summary provider. Fully qualified class
name of the summary provider
implementation for the widget. The class
should implement SummaryProvider
interface.

varchar

128

UI_PANEL_CLASS_NAME

Provides the mapping between widget and UI
panel. Fully qualified class name of the
dashboard widget user interface class. The
class should extend from AbstractGadget.

varchar

128

SUMMARY_CLASS_NAME

Provides the mapping between widget and
the summary. Fully qualified class name of
the summary implementation for the widget.
The class should implement Summary
interface.

varchar

128

time_scope_supported

References the ID column of the
DASHBOARD_PROVIDER table. Provides the
mapping between widget and the summary
provider. Fully qualified class name of the
summary provider implementation for the
widget. The class should implement
SummaryProvider interface.

int

network_scope_supported

Indicates whether the widget supports Time
Scope. 0 - Not Supported 1 - Supported 2 Partial'

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 81

DASHBOARD_WIDGET (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

installation_type

Indicates the widgets is SAN Only (0) / IP Only
(1) / SAN_IP (2)'

int

shared_provider

Can the provider be shared? 0 - Not Shared 1
- Shared.

int

TABLE 82

Size

DASHBOARD_WIDGET_PREFERENCE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto incremented widget preference ID.

int

WIDGET_ID

Foreign Key to DASHBOARD_WIDGET(ID).

int

USER_ID

Foreign Key to USER_ (ID).

int

DASHBOARD_ID

Foreign Key to DASHBOARD(ID).

int

VISIBLE

Indicates whether the widget is visible for the user in
the dashboard. 0 - Not Visible, 1 - Visible.

smallint

STATE

State of the widget. Possible values are 0 - Normal, 1
- Maximized, 2 - Collapsed.

int

WIDTH

Width of the widget.

int

HEIGHT

Height of the widget.

int

ROW_INDEX

Row position of the widget. -1 for an out-of-box widget
defined but not shown.

int

COLUMN_INDEX

Column position of the widget. -1 for an out-of-box
widget defined but not shown.

int

CANVAS_ID

Foreign Key to DASHBOARD_CANVAS.ID

int

TABLE 83

Size

DEFAULT_FAVORITES

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Name of the favorite.

int

NAME

The topnumber of ports (5,10,15,20).

varchar

64

TOP_N

Types of ports (FC/FCIP/GE) and -End Monitors.

varchar

40

SELECTION_FILTER

The time interval in which the graph is shown.

varchar

40

FROM_TIME

Always null. The default favorite is not customized.

varchar

40

CUSTOM_LAST_VALUE

Always null. The default favorite is not customized.

int

CUSTOM_TIME_UNIT

Always null. The default favorite is not customized.

varchar

CUSTOM_FROM

Always null. The default favorite is not customized.

timestamp

CUSTOM_TO

The default five minutes granularity.

timestamp

GRANULARITY

Always null.

varchar

THRESHOLD

The measure Tx MBps or Rx MBps based on
DEFAULT_FAVORITES.NAME

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

40

40

1399

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 83

Definition

Format

Size

MAIN_MEASURE

The Additional measures based on the
FAVORITE.MAIN_MEASURE

varchar

40

ADDITIONAL_MEASURE

The Additional measures based on the
FAVORITE.MAIN_MEASURE

int

TABLE 84

DEFAULT_WIDGET_PREFERENCE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto incremented Dashboard Widget Preference ID.

int

dashboard_id

Foreign Key to DASHBOARD(ID).

int

widget_id

Foreign Key to DASHBOARD_WIDGET(ID).

int

installation_type

Indicates the widgets is SAN Only (0) / IP Only (1) /
SAN_IP (2).

int

visible

Indicates whether the widget is visible for the user in
the dashboard. 0 - Not Visible, 1 - Visible.

int

“state”

State of the widget. Possible values are 0 - Normal, 1
- Maximized, 2 - Collapsed.

int

width

Width of the widget.

int

height

Height of the widget.

int

row_index

Row position of the widget. -1 for an out-of-box widget
defined but not shown.

int

column_index

Column position of the widget. -1 for an out-of-box
widget defined but not shown.

int

TABLE 85

1400

DEFAULT_FAVORITES (Continued)

Field

Size

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NAME

Name of the configuration

varchar

CONFIGURATION_TYPE

Indentifies the save configuration type.
• 1 - Not applicable
• 1 - Running
• 2 - Startup
• 3 - Running & Startup

smallint

DEPLOY_OPTION

Identifies the deployment options.
• 1-Deploy Now
• 2-Save & Deploy
• 3-Save deployment only
• 4-Scheduled

smallint

DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID

Foreign Key references
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER (ID). Identifies
the handler to use for the configuration

int

SCHEDULE_ENABLED

1 indicates that the schedule is applied
to the configuration

smallint

Size

255

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 85

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

SNAPSHOT_ENABLED

1 indicates that snapshot is applied to
the configuration

smallint

CLI_TEMPLATE_ID

Identifies the CLI template details.
-1 if SNAPSHOT_ENABLED is False

int

Identifies the setting type
1-Presnapshot
2-Postsnapshot
3-Pre & Post snapshot
-1 if SNAPSHOT_ENABLED is False

smallint

POST_DEPLOYMENT_DELAY

Post deployment delay in seconds

int

CREATED_BY

User who created the configuration

varchar

255

LAST_MODIFIED_BY

User who last modified the configuration.
When the configuration is first created

varchar

255

MANAGEMENT_FLAG

True if deployment should be managed
by Deployment Manager Module and this
will be displayed in Deployment Manager
UI

smallint

DESCRIPTION

Used to describe the deployment
configuration

varchar

SNAPSHOT_SETTING

TABLE 86

•
•
•
•

Size

255

DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

MODULE

Identifies the unique deployment module

varchar

64

SUB_MODULE

Identifies sub-module

varchar

64

MODULE_DISPLAYNAME

Display text for module name.

varchar

128

HANDLER_CLASS

Fully qualifies name of handler class for the
module. This class has to implement
 interface

varchar

255

CLIENT_ACTION_HANDL
ER_CLASS

Fully qualifies module-specific client class
which implements

interface. Framework will delegate edit,
duplicate, delete actions to this class

varchar

255

PRIVILEGE_ID

Comma separated privilege IDs

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 87

Size

DEPLOYMENT_PRODUCT_STATUS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_I
D

Foreign Key references DEPLOYMENT_STATUS
(id). Identifies the execution cycle for the
deployment.

int

DEPLOYMENT_TIME

Time when this product deployment occurred.

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1401

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 87

Definition

Format

PRODUCT_ID

This record will be per product. Hence this will
have the id of the product.

int

PRODUCT_TYPE_ID

Foreign Key references TARGET_TYPE(id). This
identifies the PRODUCT_ID. (Whether it is
switch, device, etc).

int

STATUS

Indicated the product deployment status
1-Aborted
2-Succesful
3-Partial Failure
4-Failed

smallint

MESSAGE

Message to be displayed in the report.

txt

ERROR_CODE

Error code, can be used for i18n

int

TABLE 88

Size

DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE

Field

Definition

Format

DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID

Foreign Key references
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER(id).

int

HEADER

Stores header content of deployment report. This
could be plain text or HTML or XML

text

FOOTER

Stores the footer content of deployment report.
This could be plain text or HTML or XML.

text

TABLE 89

1402

DEPLOYMENT_PRODUCT_STATUS (Continued)

Field

Size

DEPLOYMENT_STATUS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGU
RATION_ID

Foreign Key References
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION(id).
Identifies the deployment configuration

int

DEPLOYMENT_TIME

Start Time of the deployment (UTC)

timestamp with time zone

STATUS

Overall status of the deployment.
1-In Progress
2-Success
3-Failure
4-Partially failed

smallint

DEPLOYED_BY

User who deployed the configuration

varchar

STATUS_MESSAGE

Overall Success/Failure status description

txt

TRIGGER_SOURCE

Maintains the source from which this
deployment was triggered such as Event Action
, Manual and Scheduled
etc.

varchar

Size

255

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 90

DEPLOYMENT_TARGET_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGU
RATION_ID

Foreign Key References
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION (id)
Identifies the deployment configuration this row
is applied

int

TARGET_ID

Identifies the target. It will NOT have mapping
to any product table like device, etc

varchar

TARGET_TYPE_ID

Foreign Key references TARGET_TYPE (id)
Identifies the target type

int

TARGET_PARENT_ID

Identifies the parent of the target. If, switch,
device, port group, device group it will be same
as target id. If it is port/interfaces the parent id
will be the switch id

int

TABLE 91

Size

255

DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

IP_ADDRESS

IP address of this device.

varchar

255

ALIAS_NAME

Device alias name.

varchar

512

HOST_NAME

Best matching host name obtained through the
device IP address.

varchar

512

SYS_NAME

An administratively-assigned name for this
device.

varchar

255

SYS_CONTACT

The textual identification of the contact person
for this device, together with information on how
to contact this person.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

A textual description of the device.

varchar

512

SYS_LOCATION

The physical location of this device.

varchar

255

COMMUNITY_STR_GET

SNMP GET community string to query the
device.

varchar

512

COMMUNITY_STR_SET

SNMP SET community string of this device.

varchar

512

SYS_OID

The vendor's authoritative identification of this
device ie., System Object Identifier.

varchar

255

SUPER_USER_PASSWORD

Super user password configured in the device.

varchar

512

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Device table subtype defined by INM BizObject
framework.

varchar

32

LOCAL_USER_NAME

Local user name configured in the device for CLI
access.

varchar

512

LOCAL_PASSWORD

Password to access the telnet interface.

varchar

512

TELNET_PASSWORD

Password to access the Telnet interface.

varchar

512

RADIUS_USER_NAME

User name for RADIUS access.

varchar

512

RADIUS_PASSWORD

Password for RADIUS access.

varchar

512

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1403

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TAC_USER_NAME

User name for TACACS access.

varchar

512

TAC_PASSWORD

Password for TACACS access.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_USER_NAME

User name for TACACS+ access.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_PASSWORD

Password for TACACS+ access.

varchar

512

IS_ROUTER

Flag to identify whether the device is router or
not.

num

(1,0)

IS_SLB

Flag to identify whether the device supports
server load balancing or not.

num

(1,0)

varchar

64

varchar

64

LAST_PROBE_TIME

varchar

64

LAST_PROBE_STATUS

varchar

64

FIRST_SEEN_TIME
LAST_SEEN_TIME

1404

Time when the device is getting discovered by
recent collection.

IS_SFLOW_CAPABLE

Flag to identify whether the device is SFlow
capable or not.

num

(1,0)

SNMPV3_RO_AUTH_TYPE

SNMP V3 read only authentication type.

varchar

1

SNMPV3_RO_AUTH_USERNAME

SNMP V3 read only authentication user name.

varchar

512

SNMPV3_RO_AUTH_PASSWORD

SNMP V3 read only authentication password.

varchar

512

SNMPV3_RO_PRIV_PROTOCOL

SNMP V3 read only privacy protocol.

varchar

1

SNMPV3_RO_PRIV_PASSWORD

SNMP V3 read only privacy password.

varchar

512

SNMPV3_RW_AUTH_TYPE

SNMP V3 read write authentication type.

varchar

1

SNMPV3_RW_AUTH_USERNAME

SNMP V3 read write authentication user name.

varchar

512

SNMPV3_RW_AUTH_PASSWORD

SNMP V3 read write authentication password.

varchar

512

SNMPV3_RW_PRIV_PROTOCOL

SNMP V3 read write privacy protocol.

varchar

1

SNMPV3_RW_PRIV_PASSWORD

SNMP V3 read write privacy password.

varchar

512

LOCAL_USERNAME_PORT_CFG

Agent user name configured in device used for
port configuration.

varchar

512

LOCAL_PASSWORD_PORT_CFG

Agent password configured in device used for
port configuration.

varchar

512

LOCAL_USERNAME_READ_ONLY

Local user name for read only access.

varchar

512

LOCAL_PASSWORD_READ_ONLY

Local password for read only access.

varchar

512

RADIUS_USERNAME_PORT_CFG

RADIUS user name configured in device used for
port configuration.

varchar

512

RADIUS_PASSWORD_PORT_CFG

RADIUS password configured in device used for
port configuration.

varchar

512

RADIUS_USERNAME_READ_ONLY

RADIUS user name configured in device used for
read only access.

varchar

512

RADIUS_PASSWORD_READ_ONLY

RADIUS password configured in device used for
read only access.

varchar

512

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TAC_USERNAME_PORT_CFG

TACACS username for port configuration.

varchar

512

TAC_PASSWORD_PORT_CFG

TACACS password for port configuration.

varchar

512

TAC_USERNAME_READ_ONLY

TACACS username for read only access.

varchar

512

TAC_PASSWORD_READ_ONLY

TACACS password for read only access.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_USERNAME_PORT_CFG

TACACS+ username for port configuration.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_PASSWORD_PORT_CFG

TACACS+ password for port configuration.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_USERNAME_READ_ONL
Y

TACACS+ username for read only access.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_PASSWORD_READ_ONL
Y

TACACS+ password for read only access.

varchar

512

ENABLE_PASSWORD_PORT_CFG

Enable password configured in device used for
port configuration.

varchar

512

ENABLE_PASSWORD_READ_ONLY

Enable password for read only access.

varchar

512

ADMIN_STATUS

Device admin status.

smallint

ADMIN_STATUS_DURATION

Time duration of the admin status without any
change.

int

ADMIN_STATUS_LAST_UPDATED

Time when the admin status updated last.

bigint

MEMO_LAST_UPDATED

Time when the memo got updated last.

bigint

MEMO

Memo updated by the user for this device.

varchar

4096

TACPLUS_ENABLE_USERNAME

TACACS+ enable user name.

varchar

512

TACPLUS_ENABLE_PASSWORD

TACACS+ enable password.

varchar

512

OPER_STATUS

Device operational status.

smallint

OPER_STATUS_LAST_UPDATED

Time when the device operational status got
updated recently.

bigint

LLDP_CHASSIS_ID_SUBTYPE

Chassis ID subtype returned by lldp MIB.

smallint

LLDP_CHASSIS_ID

Chassis ID returned by lldp MIB.

bytea

IS_FDP_ENABLED

Flag to identify whether Foundry Discovery
Protocol is enabled or not.

num

(1,0)

IS_CDP_ENABLED

Flag to identify whether Cisco Discovery Protocol
is enabled or not.

num

(1,0)

VENDOR

Vendor of this device.

varchar

64

IS_FOUNDRY

Flag to identify whether the device is Foundry
product or not.

num

(1,0)

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

A unique managed element ID for this IP switch.
Also a foreign key reference to the
MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

NODE_WWN

The managed element node WWN if one exists,
or null/empty otherwise.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

23

1405

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SYSLOG_REGISTERED

This flag is to indicate whether the device is
registered DCM as its syslog destination server.
• 0 indicates not registered.
• 1 indicates registered.

num

1

TRAP_REGISTERED

This flag is to indicate whether the device is
registered DCM as its SNMP trap destination
server.
• 0 indicates not registered.
• 1 indicates registered.

num

1

PORT_COUNT

Record the number of presented physical ports
on the device.

int

SERIAL_NUMBER

Record the serial number of the device. If there
is no serial number, an empty string will be
stored.

varchar

This flag is to classify the device category
0 is for unknown
1 is for fixed configuration device
2 is for chassis device
3 is for stack device (logical)

int

MPLS_MANAGE_STATE

This flag is to classify the device mpls managing
state
• 0 indicates unknown state for catching all
• 1 indicates not applicable; if the IP Product
is not XMR/MLX, it will be set to this value.
• 2 indicates MPLS unmanaged state; in PP
or PPE edition, XMR/MLX product will be
set to this value.
• 3 indicates MPLS managed state; only
XMR/MLX product in EE edition will be set
to this value.

int

LICENSE_PORT_COUNT

It records the number of the ports that
presented in the device.

int

SUB_CATEGORY

int
This column is used to classify device sub
category for DCB switches. Column helps to
identify whether the DCB switch is an
Elara/Frisco or DCX with Europa blade etc.
Value 0 indicates that this is a pure IP device
and hence that is the default value.
Value 1 indicates that this is an Elara DCB
device.
The values will be populated by the DCB
collector during the discovery of the DCB switch.

LICENSED_FEATURES

This column is used to persist the feature based
software licenses existing on the device. This
represents bitmask as an integer value, where
each bit represents a unique feature.

CATEGORY

1406

•
•
•
•

32

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

IS_DCB_SWITCH

This column is used to flag whether the device is num
a DCB Switch or not.
Value 0 indicates that this is not a DCB switch
device and hence that is the default value
and value 1 indicates that this is a DCB device.
The values will be populated by the DCB
collector during the discovery of the DCB switch.

PRODUCT_FAMILY

Record the product family as "BI", "EI",
"FGS/FLS/STK". Make it string field to
accommodate dynamic group database search.

varchar

NETCONF_TRANSPORT

The transport protocol used to connect to this
device through Netconf. Possible values are:
• 0=Netconf not supported by this device
• 1=SSH
• 2=HTTPS
• 3=HTTP
• 4=WING_HTTPS
• 5=WING_HTTP

smallint

POE_CAPABLE

The POE capability of device. Possible values
are:
• 0 = POE is not supported by this device
• 1 = POE is supported with IEEE 802.3af
standard by this device
• 2 = POE plus is supported with IEEE
802.3at standard by this device

smallint

CLUSTER_MODE

This column is used to determine whether VCS
Cluster is in Standalone mode or Cluster mode.
The values will be populated by the VCS collector
during the discovery of the VCS switch. The
default value of -1 means that its a non VCS
device. Following Enum will be defined as
NON_VCS(-1), STANDALONE(0), CLUSTER(1).

smallint

CLUSTER_TYPE

This column is used to determine whether VCS
is in Fabric Cluster or Logical Chassis. The
values are populated by the VCS collector during
the discovery of the VCS switch. The default
value -1 means that its a non-VCS device.
Following are the values and their types:
• 0 - Unknown
• 1 - Standalone
• 2 - Fabric Cluster
• 3 - Logical Chassis

smallint

IS_VCS_CAPABLE

This column is used to determine whether the
device is a VCS device. The default value 0
means that the device is not VCS capable and
value 1 means that the device is VCS capable.

smallint

TRACKING

This column helps to identify that whether the
device is left/joined the cluster membership.
The value will be a bit mask value where 2^1 will
be treated as left, 2^2 treated as joined. The
default value will be -1.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Format

Size
(1,0)

32

1407

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

1408

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

VCS_ID

This column is used to store the VCS ID of the
device. The value will be populated by the
NosSwitchAssetCollector during the discovery of
the VCS Cluster. The non zero value will be
stored as VCS ID. Default value is -1.

smallint

VCS_LICENSED

Indicates whether the cluster device has VCS
license or not. Possible values are 0 for not
applicable, 1 for licensed, 2 for not licensed. 0 is
default. Clusters with 2 or less nodes will have
value of 0 as all those clusters are automatically
licensed. Clusters with 3 or more nodes will have
values 1 or 2 depending on whether the license
was acquired or not.

RBRIDGE_ID

This column is used to store the Rbridge ID of
the device. The value will be populated by the
NosSwitchAssetCollector during the discovery of
the VCS member. The non zero value will be
stored as Rbridge ID. Default value is -1.

smallint

IS_PRINCIPAL_SWITCH

This column is used to determine whether VCS
member is a Principal switch or not. Value 1
indicates that this is a principal switch and 0
indicates that this not a Principal switch. The
values will be populated by the VCS collector
during the discovery of the VCS switch. The
default value of 0 means that its a principal
switch.

smallint

IS_NETCONF_REACHABLE

This column is used to determine whether the
device is netconf reachable. The value will be
populated by the NosSwitchAssetCollector. The
value of 0 means not reachable, 1 means
reachable port and -1 means unknown status.
Default value is -1

smallint

FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS

Switch status based on components.

smallint

FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS_REASON

Component reason for switch status.

varchar

1028

MAC_ADDRESS

The mac address to identify the wireless
controller or AP. This will be empty string for all
other devices.

varchar

64

MANAGED_AP_COUNT

Its the number of APs that the controller
managed.

int

CONTROLLER_CLUSTER_MODE

Cluster mode of the controller: Active, Standby
and None.
-1 : NA, 0 : None, 1 : Active, 2 : Standby.

int

CONTROLLER_CLUSTER_NAME

This is controller cluster name.

varchar

65

CONTROLLER_CLUSTER_PEER_IP

IP addresses of the controller cluster peer.

varchar

128

WIRELESS_TYPE

To filter the APs from the product.
0 : NonAP, 1 : managed Brocade branded AP, 2 :
standalone Brocade branded AP.

int

BRIEF_PRODUCT_FAMILY

Shorter name for the product family.

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 91

DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1

User defined value used for product.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2

User defined value used for product.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3

User defined value used for product.

varchar

256

CLUSTER_MEMBER_STATE

Indicates the state of the member in Fabric
Cluster and logical chassis. States can be
Online, Offline, Rejoining etc.. For all other
devices this column will be empty.

varchar

64

MODE

Denotes the mode of the device. 1 denotes it is
in non-AG mode and 2 denotes that the device is
in AG mode.-1 denotes not applicable and will
be set to all non NOS devices.

int

TABLE 92

DEVICE_CONNECTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key.

int

FABRIC_ID

ID of the fabric which the device port is connected to.
It refers the ID column of FABRIC table.

int

DEVICE_PORT_ID

ID of end device port. It refers ID field of
DEVICE_PORT table.

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

ID of switch port which end device port is connected.
In case device port is connected through AG, this port
refer the switch port which AG is connected. It refers
to the ID field of SWITCH_PORT table.

int

AG_PORT_ID

In case of AG, this would refer to F Port of the AG
which end device port is connected. If the device port
is directly connected to switch port or NPIV
connection then it would be -1. It refers to the ID field
of SWITCH_PORT table for the access gateway
switches.

int

CREATION_TIME

Time at which the device connection record is
created.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATED_TIME

Time at which connection properties are modified for
this record.

timestamp

MISSING

Indicates if the device connection is missing or not.

int

MISSING_TIME

Time from which the device connection has been
missing.

timestamp

TRUSTED

Indicates if the device connection is trusted or not.

int

TABLE 93

Size

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the Device enclosure.

varchar

256

TYPE

Type of Device enclosure - Storage Array/Server.

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1409

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 93

1410

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ICON

Type of Icon.

int

OS

Operating System.

varchar

256

APPLICATIONS

Application which created device enclosure.

varchar

256

DEPARTMENT

Department using this device enclosure.

varchar

256

CONTACT

Contact person details.

varchar

256

LOCATION

Location of physical setup.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description if any.

varchar

256

COMMENT_

Comments if any.

varchar

256

IP_ADDRESS

IP Address if assigned by user.

varchar

128

VENDOR

Vendor name.

varchar

256

MODEL

Device enclosure Model.

varchar

256

SERIAL_NUMBER

Serial Number given for the entity.

varchar

256

FIRMWARE

Firmware running on the device which is not
applicable for device enclosure logical entity.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE1

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE2

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE3

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

HCM_AGENT_VERSION

Version of the HCM agent running on the host

varchar

32

OS_VERSION

Operating system version for the enclosure

varchar

256

CREATED_BY

Module which created this enclosure: 0->Manual,
1->HBA 2->VM.
Default value is 0.

int

TRACK_CHANGES

Flag to enable/disable tracking.
Default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Last time at which the host information was updated.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_MODULE

Module which updated the host information.

smallint

TRUSTED

Flag to mark the enclosure trusted.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

Time when enclosure was created.
Default is ’now()’.

timestamp

MISSING

Flag to indicate missing enclosure.
Default value is 0.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Time when the enclosure is found to be missing.

timestamp

HOST_NAME

Host Name corresponding to the Device Enclsoure.

varchar

SYSLOG_REGISTERED

SysLog flag that indicates if syslog has been enabled
or not.

smallint

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 93

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE (Continued)

Field

Definition

VIRTUALIZATION

smallint
If this enclosure is a host, this column indicates
whether the host is running a virtualization hypervisor.
0 = unknown
1 = no supported hypervisor present
2 = VMware ESX
3 = Microsoft Hyper-V.
Default value is 0.

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

A unique managed element ID for a managed host.If
the device enclosure is manually created (does not
represent a managed host) then the field is null. Also
a foreign key reference to the MANAGED_ELEMENT
table.

int

MANAGED_BY

1 - Manual - (user created not managed condition) Default.
2 - Host Adapter
3 - VMM 4.Both Host Adapter and VMM';

smallint

QUEUE_DEPTH

Queue Depth can be used to control FCP exchange
resource allocation. Queue depth can range from 0 to
254 and default value is 32.

int

TABLE 94

Format

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ENCLOSURE_ID*

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE table ID.

int

DEVICE_PORT_WWN*

WWN Of Device Port.

char

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Device_Port table ID.

int

TABLE 95

Size

Size

23

DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_NODE_ID

Device node id for the FDMI device node. This
column refers to the device_node tables
primary key

int

SERIAL_NUMBER

Holds the serial number of the device available
via FDMI

varchar

128

FIRMWARE_VERSION

Holds the firmware version of the device
available via FDMI ex: 2.1.0.2

varchar

64

DRIVER_VERSION

Holds the driver version of the device available
via FDMI, ex: 2.1.0.2

varchar

64

MANUFACTURER

Holds the manufacturer of the device available
via FDMI, ex : Brocade

varchar

64

MODEL

Holds the model of the device available via
FDMI, ex : Brocade-825

varchar

64

HARDWARE_VERSION

Holds the hardware version of the device
available via FDMI, ex: Rev-C

varchar

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1411

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 95

DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MODEL_DESCRIPTION

Holds the model description of the device
available via FDMI, ex : Brocade-825

varchar

64

NODE_NAME

Holds the node name of the device available
via FDMI, ex : 20:00:00:05:1e:7c:64:94

varchar

64

TABLE 96

DEVICE_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

NAME

Name of this device group.

varchar

USER_ID

User ID corresponds to the user who created the
device.

int

DESCRIPTION

Device group description.

varchar

255

IS_PUBLIC

Flag to identify whether this group is shared across
users.

num

(1,0)

IS_INTERNAL

Flag to identify this group is internal.

num

(1,0)

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Table subtype defined by BizObject framework

varchar

32

IS_AP_GROUP

Flag to identify whether this group is access point
device group.

num

(1,0)

IS_SENSOR_GROUP

Flag to identify whether this group is sensor device
group.

num

(1,0)

VIEW_MASK

Flag to decide whether to show the device group in
topology or not.

num

(1,0)

This flag is to classify the device group type:
0 is the default and reserved for internal
temporary group
• 1 is for System Device Group
• 2 is for MPLS System Device Group
• 3 is for User Defined Device Group

int

GROUP_TYPE

TABLE 97

128

DEVICE_GROUP_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE_GROUP instance which
the device is member of.

int

DEVICE_GROUP_ENTRY_ID

Unique database auto generated identifier.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the member DEVICE.

int

TABLE 98

1412

•

Size

Size

DEVICE_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

NAME

Name of this device group.

varchar

USER_ID

User ID corresponds to the user who created the
device.

int

Size

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 98

DEVICE_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DESCRIPTION

Device group description.

varchar

255

IS_PUBLIC

Flag to identify whether this group is shared across
users.

num

(1,0)

IS_INTERNAL

Flag to identify this group is internal.

num

(1,0)

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Table subtype defined by BizObject framework

varchar

32

IS_AP_GROUP

Flag to identify whether this group is access point
device group.

num

(1,0)

IS_SENSOR_GROUP

Flag to identify whether this group is sensor device
group.

num

(1,0)

VIEW_MASK

Flag to decide whether to show the device group in
topology or not.

num

(1,0)

This flag is to classify the device group type:
0 is the default and reserved for internal
temporary group
• 1 is for System Device Group
• 2 is for MPLS System Device Group
• 3 is for User Defined Device Group

int

GROUP_TYPE

TABLE 99

•

DEVICE_MAC_GROUP_MAPPING

Field

Definition

Format

MAC_GROUP_DB_ID

Foreign Key Reference to the MAC_GROUP table. Part
of Primary key.

int

DEVICE_ID

Foreign Key reference to DEVICE table. Part of
Primary key;

int

TABLE 100

Size

DEVICE_NODE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FABRIC_ID

Fabric DB ID to which this device node belongs.

int

WWN

Device node WWN.

char

23

TYPE

Initiator or target or both or unknown. The possible
values are Initiator, Target, Initiator+Target,
Unknown(Initiator or Target)

varchar

32

DEVICE_TYPE

0 = physical
1 = virtual
2 = NPV
3 = iSCSI
4 = both physical & virtual

smallint

SYMBOLIC_NAME

Device node symbolic name.

varchar

256

FDMI_HOST_NAME

Device node FDMI host name.

varchar

128

VENDOR

Device node vendor.

varchar

64

varchar

16

CAPABILITY_

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1413

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 100

DEVICE_NODE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TRUSTED

1 = the node is trusted for "fabric tracking.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

Timestamp when the record is created by the
Management application server.

timestamp

MISSING

1 = the device node is missing from the fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Time when the device node missed.

timestamp

PROXY_DEVICE

One of the device ports of this device node has
translated domain. That device port is set as the Proxy
Device and this Device Node is treated as virtual by
assigning a value of 1 to this field.
Default value is 0.

smallint

AG

1 = the device node is actually an AG connected to a
switch in the fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

PREVIOUS_MISSING_STAT
E

Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 101

DEVICE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

NODE_ID

Reference to the ID of the Device Node of which this
device port is a part of.

int

DOMAIN_ID

Stores the Domain ID of the switch to which this
device port is connected to.

int

WWN

Stores the Device Port WWN

char

23

SWITCH_PORT_WWN

Stores the switch port wwn to which this device port
is physically connected to. However If the device is
connected to an AG, this will contain the switch port
WWN till the AG impact is applied by the application.
If AG impact fails to be applied this will continue to
have the switch port wwn instead of the AG port
wwn.

char

23

NUMBER

Stores the port number of this device port.

smallint

PORT_ID

Stores the FDMI host name.

varchar

6

TYPE

Stores the Vendor of this device.

varchar

32

SYMBOLIC NAME

Stores the Symbolic Name.

varchar

256

varchar

64

varchar

16

varchar

63
32

FC4_TYPE
COS

Stores the Class of Service.

IP_PORT

1414

Size

HARDWARE_ADDRESS

Stores the Hardware Address.

varchar

TRUSTED

Denotes if the device port is trusted or not.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

The creation time of this record.

timestamp

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 101

DEVICE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

MISSING

Denotes if this device port is missing or not.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Denotes the time from which the device port is
missing. Applicable only if the device is missing.

timestamp

NPV_PHYSICAL

Denotes if this is physical device port or a logical
NPIV port.

smallint

EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN

EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN will be the same as the
SWITCH_PORT_WWN except in the case of devices
behind the AG. This field will be updated by the
name server info collector, added for the feature
support of AG WWN N port mapping. This is a null
able field. It is used to determine which mapping is
used by the AG.

char

LOGGED_TO_AG

Indicates if the device is connected with an AG. Not
null field and default value is 0, device not
connected to AG

smallint

AG_NODE_WWN

If the device is connected with an AG, the AG switch
WWN will be populated. Not null field and default
value is empty

char

23

AG_N_PORT_WWN

If the device is connected with an AG, N-Port WWN
of AG which is connected to switch will be populated
from the N2F and N2WWN map

char

23

MISSING_REASON

The device missing reason.

varchar

1024

Size

TABLE 102

23

DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

The primary key of the DevicePort

int

GIGE_PORT_ID

The primary key of the GigEPort.

int

DIRECT_ATTACH

Indicates whether the device port is directly attached
to the CEE 10G TE port.

smallint

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_ID

The value of virtual_fcoe_port_id in the
Device_Port_Gige_Port_Link table is applicable only
for NOS devices. For FOS devices, the
virtual_fcoe_port_id value, will be null, as currently in
the Management application that mapping data is not
collected. Hence the default value is null.

int

LAG_ID

LAG interface ID which associates port channel with
end device. This will be null if device port is associated
with physical gige port.

int

TABLE 103

Size

DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

The primary key of the device port

int

MAC_ADDRESS

Mac address of the device

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

1415

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 104
Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key of the table. Autogenerated.

int

TIME_THRESHOLD_CROSSED

Holds the timestamp at which the disk space
was analyzed and found to have crossed the
threshold (both low to high and vice versa).

timestamp

MEMORY_UTILIZATION

Holds the disk usage as a percentage. Value
varies from 0 to 100.

double
precision

THRESHOLD_TYPE

Denotes whether disk space usage crosses
above or below threshold limit. 1 if it is goes
above threshold, 0 if it goes below threshold (in
previous instance it was above threshold).

smallint

FREE_SPACE

Holds the free disk space at the particular time
in bytes.

bigint

TOTAL_SPACE

Holds the total disk space at the particular time
in bytes.

bigint

TABLE 105

1416

DISK_USAGE
Size

ENCRYPTION_ENGINE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_ID

Foreign key reference to both the VIRTUAL_SWITCH
table and the CRYPTO_SWITCH table (both switch
tables use the same primary key values). Identifies the
switch that contains this encryption engine.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

For chassis switches, the slot or blade that contains
the encryption engine. Always 0 for pizza-box switches
with a single embedded encryption engine.

smallint

STATUS

Not used. Previously used to indicate the engine''s
operational status. Replaced by EE_STATE.
The default value is 0.

smallint

HA_CLUSTER_ID

Foreign key reference to an HA_CLUSTER record.
Identifies the HA Cluster that this engine belongs to.
Null if this engine does not belong to an HA Cluster.

int

SYSTEM_CARD_STATUS

Indicates whether a System Card is currently inserted
in the Encryption Engine,
and whether the card is valid or not. This feature is not
yet supported.
The default value is ‘disabled’.

varchar

WWN_POOLS_AVAILABLE

Not used. Previously used to indicate the number of
WWN pools remaining for allocation on this encryption
engine. This feature is no longer supported.

int

STATE

Administrative state for this engine. 0 = disabled, 1 =
enabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 105

ENCRYPTION_ENGINE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SP_CERTIFICATE

The public key certificate, in PEM format, for the
Security Processor within the Encryption Engine. Used
to create link keys for Decru LKM key vaults.

varchar

4096

EE_STATE

The operational status of this Encryption Engine. For
possible values, see the enum defintion in the DTO
class
The default value is 0.

int

HA_CLUSTER_STATUS

Stores the status of the HA Cluster to which the engine
is a pair participant
The default value is 0.

smallint

ROUTING_MODE

smallint

MEDIA_TYPE

char

50

LINK_IP_ADDRESS

Local EE - BP Link IP Address, If there are no links the
IP Address could be 0.0.0.0

varchar

64

LINK_NET_MASK

Local EE - BP Link IP new mask

varchar

64

LINK_GW_IP_ADDRESS

Local EE- BP Gateway Address

varchar

64

LINK_MAC_ADDRESS

Local EE Link MAC Address

varchar

64

INK_MTU

Local EE Link MTU.
The default value is -1.

int

LINK_STATE

Local EE State says whether link is down or up

varchar

REBALANCE_REQUIRED

This field indicates whether a rebalance operation is
required on the Encryption Engine. It can take two
values, One(1) indicating that rebalance is required on
the Encryption Engine and zero(0) indicating that no
rebalance is required on the Encryption Engine.
Encryption Engine is said to be unbalanced when the
disk and Tape containers are not evenly balanced on
the hosting engine.
The default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 106

256

ENCRYPTION_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

User-assigned name for this encryption group.

varchar

LEADER_SWITCH_ID

'Foreign key reference to both the VIRTUAL_SWITCH
table and the CRYPTO_SWITCH table (both switch
tables use the same primary key values). Identifies
the switch that currently provides central
configuration and reporting capabilities for the
encryption group. This column may be null if the
group leader is not in a discovered fabric.

int

LEADER_SWITCH_WWN

The Node WWN of the current group leader switch.
Each encryption group has
one group leader switch.

char

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

23

1417

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 106

ENCRYPTION_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

DEPLOYMENT_MODE

Indicates Transparent (0) or NonTransparent (1)
deployment mode. Only Transparent mode is
currently supported. All switches in the Encryption
Group share the same deployment mode.
Transparent mode uses re-direction zones to preserve
existing zoning of physical hosts and targets.
Non-transparent mode requires zoning changes
to zone physical hosts with Virtual Targets and to zone
Virtual Initiators with physical targets.
The default value is 0.

smallint

FAILBACK_MODE

Indicates Automatic (0) or Manual (1) failback.
Failback occurs when a previously unavailable
Encryption Engine comes back online. In Auto mode,
the restored Encryption Engine resumes encrypting all
traffic for target containers configured on the
Encryption Engine. In manual mode, encryption
continues running on the backup encryption engines
until manually changed.
The default value is 0.

smallint

Boolean value that indicates whether a System Card
(smart card) must be inserted in the Encryption
Engine to enable the engine after power-up. This
feature is not yet supported.
The default value is 0.

smallint

ACTIVE_MASTER_KEY_
STATUS

The operational status of the "master key" or "Key
Encryption Key (KEK)" used to encrypt Data
Encryption Keys in a key vault. Not used for Decru
LKM key vaults. 0 = not used, 1 = required but not
present, 2 = present but not backed up,
3 = okay.
The default value is 0.

smallint

ALT_MASTER_KEY_STATUS

The operational status of an alternate "master key"
used to access older data encryption keys. Not used
for Decru LKM key vaults.
0 = not used, 1 = not present, 3 = okay.
The default value is 0.

smallint

QUORUM_SIZE

The number of authentication cards required to
approve certain secure operations. This feature is not
yet supported.
The default value is 0.

smallint

RECOVERY_SET_SIZE

No longer used. Previously used to indicate the
number of smart cards used to back up a Master Key.
The number of cards is now specified when the
backup is created, and not persisted in the database.
The default value is 0.

smallint

KEY_VAULT_TYPE

Indicates the type of key vault used by switches in this
Encryption Group.
0 = Decru Lifetime Key Manager (LKM),
1 = RSA Key Manager (RKM),
2 = Brocade internal key storage (for demo use only).
The default value is 0.

smallint

SYSTEM_CARD_REQUIRED

1418

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 106

ENCRYPTION_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

PRIMARY_KEY_VAULT_ID

Foreign key reference to the KEY_VAULT record that
describes the primary key vault for
this Encryption Group. Null if no primary key vault is
configured.

int

BACKUP_KEY_VAULT_ID

Foreign key reference to the KEY_VAULT record that
describes the backup key vault for
this Encryption Group. Null if no backup key vault is
configured.

int

GROUP_LEADER_STATUS

Stores the status of the Group leader node

int

SRDF_MODE

This field denotes whether the SRDF support is
enabled or not. Feature available only from 6.4
release onwards and for RSA key vaults.
EncryptionGroup collector and EncryptionGroupBean
fills in this value.
The default value is -1.

smallint

TABLE 107

Size

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP
record that identifies the encryption group that this
member switch belongs to

int

MEMBER_IP_ADDRESS

The management IP address (IPv4, IPv6, or
hostname) of the member switch

varchar

128

MEMBER_WWN

the node WWN of the member switch

char

23

MEMBER_STATUS

The reachability status of the member switch as seen
by the group leader switch. For possible values see
the enum definition in the DTO class

smallint

TABLE 108

Size

ENCRYPTION_KMIP_PARAMETERS

Field

Definition

Format

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP
record that describes the group ID of this Encryption
Group.

int

HA_MODE

Indicates the configured High Availability mode for
the encryption group. Possible values are noHA,
opaque, transparent, and NA.

varchar

32

AUTHENTICATION_MODE

Indicates the configured User Authentication mode
for the encryption group. Possible values are None,
Username, UserPass, and NA.

varchar

32

CERTIFICATE_TYPE

Indicates the configured Certificate Type for the
encryption group. Possible values are self, CASign,
and NA.

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1419

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 109

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_ID

No longer used. Tape pools used to belong to
specific switches, but are now shared by
all switches in an encryption group

int

ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID

No longer used. Tape pools used to belong to
specific encryption engines, but are now
shared by all encryption engines in an encryption
group

int

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the
ENCRYPTION_GROUP record that describes
which encryption group this tape pool belongs to

int

TAPE_POOL_NAME

User-supplied name or number for the tape pool.
This is the same name or number specified in
the tape backup application. Numbers are stored
in hex

varchar

TAPE_POOL_OPERATION_MODE

Specifies which type of encryption should be
used by tape volumes in this tape pool. 0 =
Native, 1 = DF-compatible

smallint

TAPE_POOL_POLICY

Specifies whether tape volumes in this tape pool
should be encrypted. 0 = encrypted, 1 =
cleartext

smallint

KEY_EXPIRATION

Number of days each data encryption key for this
tape pool should be used. After the configured
number of days, a new data encryption key is
automatically generated for any further tape
volumes in this pool. 0 = no expiration

int

TAPE_POOL_LABEL_TYPE

Indicates whether the TAPE_POOL_NAME field is
a name or a number. 0 = name, 1 = number

smallint

TABLE 110

Size

64

ETHERNET_CLOUD

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_ID

The unique id of the switch this cloud is associated
to.

int

TABLE 111

1420

ENCRYPTION_TAPE_POOL

Field

Size

ETHERNET_ISL

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SOURCE_PORT_ID

The unique id of the source port.

int

DEST_PORT_ID

The unique id of the destination port.

int

MISSING

Flag to identify whether the ethernet isl link is missing
from the switch.

smallint,

MISSING_TIME

Time when the ethernet isl link is missing from the
switch.

timestamp

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 111

ETHERNET_ISL (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TRUSTED

Is this ethernet isl link is trusted.

smallint,

CREATION_TIME

Time when the ethernet isl link record is created.

timestamp

TABLE 112

Size

EVENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier for an event.

int

ME_ID

Unique managed element ID used to refer the product
that is associated with the event.

int

SEVERITY

Indicates the severity of the event. Possible values :
Emergency- 0, Alert- 1, Critical- 2, Error- 3,Warning4,Notice- 5, Info- 6,Debug- 7,Unknown- 8.

int

AREA

Indicates the Area from which the event has occurred.
Possible values : Unknown- 0, SAN- 1, IP- 2, Application
Events -3, SAN+IP- 4.

smallint

ACKNOWLEDGED

Indicates whether the user has acknowledged the
event or not. Possible values: Unacknowledged-0 ,
Acknowledged-1.

smallint

SOURCE_NAME

This field indicates the name of the source that
triggered the event. This could be the name of the
source switch or name of the Management application
server in the case of application events.

varchar

255

SOURCE_ADDR

'Indicates the IP Address of the source that triggered
the event. This could be the IP address of the source
switch or IP address of the Management application
server in the case of application events.

varchar

50

EVENT_ORIGIN_ID

Database ID of the event origin such as Trap, Syclog
etc referring to EVENT_ORIGIN metadata.

int

EVENT_CATEGORY_ID

Database ID of the event category referring to
EVENT_CATEGORY metadata.

int

EVENT_MODULE_ID

Database ID of the event module referring to
EVENT_MODULE metadata.

int

EVENT_DESCRIPTION_ID

Indicates the identifier of the event description in the
EVENT_DESCRIPTION table.

int

LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST
_TIME

Indicates the the Management application server
timestamp when this event occurred last.

timestamp

EVENT_COUNT

Indicates the number of occurrences of the event.
Count indicates the number of times the same event
occurred in a given ten minute window.

int

RESOLVED

This field indicates whether an event is resolved due to
another matching event or based on user action.
Possible values: Unresolved – 0, Resolved – 1.

smallint

ACKED_TIME

Indicates the timestamp when the event was
acknowledged.

Timestamp

FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST Indicates the the Management application server
_TIME
timestamp when the event occurred for the first time.

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

timestamp

Size

10

1421

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 112

EVENT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

EVENT_AUDIT

'Indicates whether this is an audit event or not.

varchar

255

EVENT_KEY

Unique key for the event. This is a string message key
represents message ID from events originated from
switch or the predefined message Id for application
events in the Management application.

varchar

EVENT_ACTION_ID

Reference to the ID in the EVENT_POLICY table.
Represents the event action policy that was
responsible for generating this event.

int

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

Reference to the DEVICE_GROUP_ID in the
DEVICE_GROUP table.

int

PORT_GROUP_ID

Reference to the ID in the PORT_GROUP table.

int

SPECIAL_EVENT

'Indicates whether the event is marked as special
event or not. Not a Special event-0, Special event-1.

smallint

TABLE 113

EVENT_CALL_HOME

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

EVENT_ID

Database ID of the EVENT instance.

int

EVENT_NUMBER

Indicates the Event Number for the event from the
Events.html of the associated product .

int

FRU_CODE

Indicates the Field Replaceable Unit code of the Call
Home event.

int

REASON_CODE

Indicates the reason code of the Call Home event.

int

FRU_POSITION

Indicates the FRU position of the Call Home event.

int

TABLE 114

EVENT_CATEGORY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

DESCRIPTION

Holds the event categories. Possible values :
Unknown- 0, Product Event- 1, Link Incident Event- 2 ,
Product Audit Event- 3, Product Status Event- 4,
Security Event- 5 , User Action Event- 6, Management
Server Event- 7.

varchar

50

Size

TABLE 115

1422

Size

Size

EVENT_DESCRIPTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

DESCRIPTION

Holds the description of the Event.

varchar

1024

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 116

EVENT_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

EVENT_ID

Database ID of the EVENT instance.

int

FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWI
TCH_TIME

Indicates the first occurrence switch timestamp of the
event.

timestamp

LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWIT
CH_TIME

Indicates the last occurrence switch timestamp of the
event.

timestamp

CONTRIBUTORS

Indicates the contributing factor for the event resulted
due to a status change of the switch.

varchar

512

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

Indicates the operational Status of the product
associated with the event.

varchar

255

NODE_WWN

Unique World Wide Number for the product.

varchar

23

PORT_WWN

Unique World Wide Number for the port for which the
event was generated.

varchar

23

OID

Indicates the Object ID of the Trap or Syslog.

varchar

50

VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID

Indicates the Virtual Fabric id of the switch which
triggered the event.

smallint

UNIT

Indicates the Unit number of the Chassis from which
the event was triggered.

smallint

SLOT

Indicates the blade or the slot number in which the
port is present.

int

PORT

indicates the switch port number for which the event
was generated.

int

PRODUCT_ADDRESS

Indicates the IP Address of the Product from which the
event is originated.

varchar

RAS_LOG_ID

Indicates the RASLOG Id of the RASLOG event.

varchar

INTERFACE_TYPE

Indicates the type of the interface – Possible Values:
Ethernet Port-0, FC Port-1.

smallint

USER_NAME

Captures the user information from audit Syslog
messages.

Varchar

512

PORT_NAME

Shows the PortName for the corresponding port.

Varchar

255

MAC_ADDRESS

'Indicates the MAC address of the Access Point from
which this event is received. If the event is received
from the wireless controller or any other products, this
will be empty.';

varchar

64

Format

Size

TABLE 117

Size

20

EVENT_FWD_FILTER

Field

Definition

ID
NAME

int
Filter Name

DESCRIPTION

varchar

32

varchar

256

TYPE

Filter Type (SNMP/ SYSLOG)

smallint

APPLICATION_ENABLED

If Application Events enabled

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1423

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 117

EVENT_FWD_FILTER (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

SNORT_ENABLED

If Snort Messages enabled

smallint

PSUDO_ENABLED

If Pseudo Events enabled

smallint

REGULAR_EXP

Common filtering message for Syslog Forwarding

varchar

SEVERITY

Emergency(0), Alert(1), Critical(2), Error(3),
Warning(4), Notice(5), Info(6), Debug (7).
Traps with selected severity and those with higher
severity will be forwarded.

smallint

TABLE 118

512

EVENT_INSTANCE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

EVENT_POLICY_ID

Foreign Key to Event_Policy Table

int

EVENT_KEY

A String Key string which identifies a specific instance
of an Event.

varchar

64

STRING_PATTERN

A Regular expression pattern string which can be used
to match an Event instance.

varchar

1024

CATEGORY

A small integer which identifies the Category of an
Event instance.
0 - Unknown 1 - Product Event 2- Link Incident Event 3
- Product Audit Event 4- Product Status Event 5 Security Event 6- User Action Event 7- Management
Server Event.
The default value is 0.

smallint

SEVERITY

The Severity of the Event that is logged per Event
Policy
0- Unknown 1- Emergency 2- Alert 3- Critical 4- Error
5- Warning 6- Notice 7- Info 8- Debug.
The default value is 0.

smallint

SEQUENCE_NUMBER

The sequence number of an event instance that''s
specific to the policy.
The default value is 0.

smallint

MSG_IDS

Stores the Message ID(s) configured for Custom Event
Type

varchar

512

Size

TABLE 119

Size

EVENT_MODULE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The default value is 0.

int

DESCRIPTION

1424

Size

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 120

EVENT_NOTIFICATION

Field

Definition

ID*

Format

Size

int

STATUS

Status of Event Notification. value will be 0 if disabled,
1 otherwise.
Default value is 0.

smallint

SERVER_NAME

E-mail (SMTP) server name.

varchar

256

REPLY_ADDRESS

Reply E-mail address.

varchar

50

SEND_ADDRESS

E-mail address for which a Test E-mail notification is to
be sent.

varchar

512

SMTP_PORT

SMTP Port number.
Default value is 25.

int

USER_NAME

User name for authentication.

varchar

256

PASSWORD

Password for authentication.

varchar

256

NOTIFICATION_INTERVAL

Time interval between successive event notifications.

int

NOTIFICATION_UNIT

Time interval Unit:
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
Default value is 0.

smallint

TEST_OPTION

Time interval Unit:
0 = Send test to configured e-mail address.
1 = Send test to all enabled users.
Default value is 0.

smallint

SSL_ENABLED

Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 121

EVENT_ORIGIN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

0 - Unknown
1 - Trap
2 - Syslog
3 - Snort
4 - Pseudoevent
5 - Application Events
6 - Others

int

DESCRIPTION

TABLE 122

Size

varchar

50

Format

Size

EVENT_POLICY

Field

Definition

ID

int

TYPE

Even Policy Type
0 - Pseudo Event 1 - Event Action

smallint

NAME

The Name of the Event Policy

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

The Description of the Event Policy

varchar

1024

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1425

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 122

EVENT_POLICY (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

STATUS

Administrative status of the Event Policy
0 - disabled 1- enabled

smallint

LAST_MODIFIED_TIME

The Severity of the Event that is logged per Event
Policy
0- Unknown 1- Emergency 2- Alert 3- Critical 4- Error
5- Warning 6- Notice 7- Info 8- Debug';

timestamp

SEVERITY

The Event Policy Sub Type
Escalation (0), Resolving (1), Flapping (2),Repeating
(3).
The default value is 0.

smallint

MESSAGE
SUB_TYPE

The Event Policy Sub Type
Escalation (0), Resolving (1), Flapping (2),Repeating
(3)

smallint

EVENT_ORIGIN

0- SNMP Trap 1- Application Event 2- Pseudo Event 3Snort 4- Pseudo Event 5- Custom Event

smallint

PROPERTIES

The property string which is used to define various
parameters that are associated with an Event Policy
such as flapping time and durations etc

varchar

TABLE 123

1426

varchar

Size

256

2048

EVENT_POLICY_SOURCE_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

EVENT_POLICY_ID

Foreign Key to Event_Policy Table

int

MANAGEMENT_ELEMENT_ID A soft reference key to the Management Element ID.
Do not maintain it as a foreign key constraints.
The default value is 0.

int

INTERFACE_ID

A soft reference key to the Interface ID. Do not
maintain it as a foreign key constraints.
The default value is 0.

int

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

A reference key to the Device Group
Do not maintain it as a foreign key constraints.
The default value is 0.

int

PORT_GROUP_ID

A reference key to the Port Group
Do not maintain it as a foreign key constraints.
The default value is 0.

int

SOURCE_SELECTION_TYPE

Option selected to give Source Information
• 0- IPAddress/Node wwn/Name provided
• 1- Source selected from available list of
sources.
The default value is 0.

smallint

IP_ADDRESS

IP address of source

varchar

Size

1024

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 123

EVENT_POLICY_SOURCE_ENTRY (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

WWN

Node WWN of source

varchar

1024

SOURCE_NAME

Source Name

varchar

1024

TABLE 124

EVENT_PROCESSOR_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

Size

PROCESSOR_CLASS_NA
ME

The fully qualified processor class name which will be
invoked for the corresponding event id in this table.
Column added as part of the Event Processing
Framework

varchar

1024

EVENT_ID

The Event Id is the Trap OID on which the corresponding
processor needs to act up on . Column added as part of
the Event Processing Framework

varchar

1024

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the Event Rule.

varchar

Event Rule Type:
0 = Port Offline
1 = PM Threshold crossed
2 = Security Violation
4 = Event

int

DESCRIPTION

Description about the Event Rule.

varchar

512

OPERATOR1

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

12

EVENT_TYPE_ID

The Selected Event type ID from the Event type combo
box.

int

OPERATOR2

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

12

MESSAGE_ID

Message ID provided by the user.

varchar

20

OPERATOR3

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

12

IP_ADDRESS

Source IP Address.

varchar

1024

OPERATOR4

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

12

WWN

Source WWN.

varchar

1024

OPERATOR5

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

12

COUNT

Count of the specified event.

int

OPERATOR6

AND operator used to append the rule.

varchar

DURATION

Duration of the specified event.

bigint

STATE

State of the rule:
• 0 = Disabled
• 1 = Enabled

smallint

SEVERITY_LEVEL

Event severity level.
Default value is 4.

int

TABLE 125

EVENT_RULE

TYPE

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

•
•
•
•

Size

255

12

1427

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 125

EVENT_RULE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SOURCE_NAME

Name of the source.

varchar

1024

DESCRIPTION_CONTAINS

Description pattern about the rule.

varchar

255

LAST_MODIFIED_TIME

Rules last edited time.

timestamp

SELECTED_TIME_UNIT

Timestamp unit of the selected rule:
• 0 = second
• 1 = Minutes
• 2 = Hours
Default value is 1.

smallint

TABLE 126

EVENT_RULE_ACTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

int

RULE_ID

The rule ID present in the Event_Rule Table.

int

NAME

Name of the Event Rule Action:
• Launch Script = for launch script
• Send E-mail = for send e-mail
• Raise Event = for broadcast message

varchar

255

TYPE

Name of the action:
• script = for Launch Script
• e-mail = for E-mail
• message = for Broadcast message

varchar

30

FIELD1

Data for the selected action.

varchar

512

FIELD2

Data for the selected action.

varchar

512

FIELD3

Data for the selected action.

varchar

512

FIELD4

Data for the selected action.

varchar

512

STATE

State of the Action:
• 0 = Action Disabled
• 1 = Action Enabled
Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 127

1428

Size

FABRIC

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SAN_ID

Foreign key to SAN table; usually 1 since there is only
one SAN.

int

SEED_SWITCH_WWN

WWN of the virtual switch used as seed switch to
discover the fabric.

char

23

NAME

User-assigned fabric name.

varchar

256

CONTACT

User-assigned "contact" for the fabric.

varchar

256

LOCATION

User-assigned "location" for the fabric.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

User-assigned fabric description.

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 127

FABRIC (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TYPE

Denotes the type of Fabric. 0 = legacy fabric, 1 = base
fabric, 2 = logical fabric, 3 = partial fabric, 4 =
ethernet fabric. Default value is 0.

smallint

SECURE

1 = it is a secured fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

AD_ENVIRONMENT

1 = there are user-defined ADs in this fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

MANAGED

1 = it is an actively "monitored" fabric; otherwise, it is
an "unmonitored" fabric.
Default value is 1.

smallint

MANAGEMENT_STATE

Bit map to indicate various management indications
for the fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TRACK_CHANGES

1 = changes (member switches, ISL and devices) in
the fabric are tracked.
Default value is 0.

smallint

STATS_COLLECTION

1 = statistics collection is enabled on the fabric.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

When the fabric record is inserted, i.e., created.
Default value is ’now()’.

timestamp

LAST_FABRIC_CHANGED

Time when fabric last changed.

timestamp

LAST_SCAN_TIME

Last Scan time for the fabric i.e. when the switch was
scanned for changes.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Time when fabric was last updated.
Default value is ’now()’.

timestamp

ACTIVE_ZONESET_NAME

Name of the zone configuration which is effective /
active in that fabric.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3

User-defined custom value.

varchar

256

PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN

WWN of the principal switch of the fabric

char

23

ZONE_TRANSACTION_TIM
EOUT

Number of seconds that a ZONE_TRANSACTION can
be idle
Default value is 180.

int

FABRIC_MODEL

Default value is 1.

smallint

LAST_FAILURE_TIMESTAM
P

Denotes the last failure timestamp.

timestamp

LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIME
STAMP

Dentoes the last successful timestamp.

timestamp

ENHANCED_TI_ZONE_SUP
PORT

Holds the value if the fabric has enhanced TI Zone
support or not. Default: 0 Values: 0|1.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1429

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 127

Definition

Format

Size

FABRIC

The fabric name persisted on switches running FOS
7.0 and later. Not to be confused with NAME, which is
store on Network Advisor only.

varchar

128

STATUS

Overall operational status of the fabric. 0 is unknown,
1 is healthy, 2 is marginal, 3 is down, 5 is Reachable, 6
is unreachable, 7 is Degraded link.

int

TRACKING_STATUS

This represents bitmask as an integer value which
represents missing or untrusted state of fabric
members, ISLs, SANConnections, device Nodes and
device ports. 1 is missing switch/ISL in fabric, 2 is
untrusted switch or ISL in fabric, 4 is missing initiator
or port in fabric, 8 is untrusted initiator or port in
fabric, 16 is missing target or port in fabric, 32 is
untrusted target or port in fabric.

int

BOTTLENECK_STATUS

Holds bottleneck status of fabric. Default is 0, Values
are 0 or 1.

int

VCS_LICENSED

Indicates whether the fabric has VCS license or not.
Possible values are 0 for not applicable, 1 for licensed,
2 for not licensed. 0 is default. Fabrics representing
clusters with 2 or less nodes will have value of 0 as all
those are automatically licensed. Fabrics representing
clusters with 3 or more nodes will have values 1 or 2
depending on whether the license was acquired or
not.

int

HAS_NOS_AG

Denotes whether fabric has NOS AG connected to it or
not. 0 denotes that the fabric has no NOS AG
connected to it and 1 denotes a NOS AG is connected
to the fabric. -1 denotes that it is not applicable and
will be set to NOS clusters.

int

TABLE 128

FABRIC_CHECKSUM

Field

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID *

Fabric ID, foreign key to the FABRIC table.

int

CHECKSUM_KEY *

Type of checksum, e.g. device data or zone data.

varchar

32

CHECKSUM

Actual checksum value.

varchar

16

Size

TABLE 129

1430

FABRIC (Continued)

Field

Size

FABRIC_COLLECTION

Field

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID *

Fabric ID, foreign key to the FABRIC table.

int

COLLECTOR_NAME *

Name of the collector, e.g., NameServerInfoCollector,
TopologyCollector, ZoneInfoCollector,
ActiveZoneInfoCollector.

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 129

FABRIC_COLLECTION (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SEED_SWITCH_IP

IP address of the switch which serves as the seed
switch. This is the switch from which above mentioned
fabric level collectors get their information.

varchar

128

LAST_SEED_SW_
MODIFICATION

Timestamp of the seed switch, when the particular
HTML page was changed last. Note that this is not
when the last time collection was done.

timestamp

TABLE 130

FABRIC_DISCOVERY_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID

The database ID of the fabric that the policy belongs
to.

int

DISCOVER_ALL_MEMBERS

This column indicates if all the members of the fabric
can be discovered. 1 means discover all members
and 0 means do not discover all members. In the
case of 0, the filtering rules comes from
FabricDiscoveryPolicyRule table.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 131

FABRIC_DISCOVERY_POLICY_RULE

Field

Definition

ID

Format

Size

serial

FABRIC_ID

The database ID of the fabric that the policy belongs
to.

int

FILTER

Filter to be applied for this fabric. This could be IP
Address or WWN or SwitchType. The Type of the filter
comes from the FilterType column. This can be either
in included list or excluded list depending on the
EXCLUDED column value.

varchar

FILTER_TYPE

This column indicates type of the filter. It could take
values like 0 for IP Address, 1 for WWN and 2 for
SwitchType. Default is IP address type.

smallint

EXCLUDED

This column indicates if the Filter in the record
should be included or excluded. 1 means exclude
and 0 means include. Default is to include.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 132

Size

128

FABRIC_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID*

Fabric ID, foreign key to FABRIC table.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID*

ID of the virtual switch which is a member of this fabric,
foreign key to VIRTUAL_SWITCH table.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1431

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 132

Definition

Format

TRUSTED

1 = the switch is a trusted member of the fabric. Either
found in the initial discovery or user subsequently
entrusted the switch by user action.
Default Value is 0.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

When the switch became a member.
Default Value is ’now()’.

timestamp

MISSING

1 = it is missing from the fabric.
Default Value is 0.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

When it is missed from the fabric; null if the member is
entrusted.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE

Last Updated time for the record.

bigint

TABLE 133

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID*

References the ID in FABRIC table

int

POLICY_ID*

References the ID in THRESHOLD_POLICY table

int

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID

Foreign key to ID in fabric table.

int

VCS_CLUSTER_ME_ID

Foreign key to ID in ManagedElement table. This is
the VCS cluster entry managed_element_id
reference.

int

Size

FABRIC_ZONING_EDIT_RESTRICTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FABRIC_ID

PK of the owning fabric

int

CHANGE_COUNT

Count of the maximum changes allowed in active zone
config in the fabric.The default value is 0.

int

TABLE 136

Size

FABRIC_VCS_CLUSTER_MAP

Field

TABLE 135

Size

FABRIC_THRESHOLD_SETTING

Field

TABLE 134

1432

FABRIC_MEMBER (Continued)

Field

Size

FAVORITES

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the favorite.

varchar

64

USER_

The application user credentials.

varchar

128

TOP_N

The top number of ports(5,10,15,20).

varchar

40

SELECTION_FILTER

Types of ports (FC/FCIP/GE) and -End Monitors.

varchar

40

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 136

FAVORITES (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

FROM_TIME

The time interval in which the graph is shown. Time
interval can be predefined or custom. If FROM_TIME
is Custom, the user can choose the number of
minutes/hours/days or specify the time interval.

varchar

40

CUSTOM_LAST_VALUE

The number of minutes/hours/days. It becomes null
in two cases.
1. When the value of FROM_TIME is not Custom.
2. When FROM_TIME is Custom, and user chooses
the time interval (CUSTOM_FROM and CUSTOM_TO)

int

CUSTOM_TIME_UNIT

The unit type (Minutes, Hours, Days) of the
CUSTOM_LAST_VALUE.

varchar

CUSTOM_FROM

The starting time.

timestamp

CUSTOM_TO

The ending time.

timestamp

GRANULARITY

The granularity.

varchar

THRESHOLD

The reference line.

int

MAIN_MEASURE

The measure of FC/FCIP/GE.

varchar

ADDITIONAL_MEASURE

The additional measures.

int

CUSTOM_SELECTION_OBJE
CT_TYPE

Represents the selected filter type.
• 0 - Default favorite
• 1 - FC Ports
• 2 - Device Ports
• 3 - ISL Ports
• 4 - 10GE Ports
• 5 - FCIP Tunnels
• 6 - EE Monitors
Selected member identifiers are stored in
CUSTOM_FAVORITES_OBJECT_LIST table if this
favorite is not default.

int

PLOT_EVENTS

Indicates whether the PM historical chart should
overlay the events on the graph. 0 - No, 1 - Yes.

smallint

TABLE 137

40

40

FCIP_CIRCUIT_PORT_MAP

Field

Definition

CIRCUIT_ID

Format

Size

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

TABLE 138

40

SWITCH_PORT_ID of one end of the circuit

int

FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

SWITCHPORT_ID*

Switch Port ID.

int

TUNNEL_ID*

FCIP Tunnel ID.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1433

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 139

1434

FCIP_TUNNEL

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TUNNEL_ID

Tunnel ID for that GigE Port.

smallint

VLAN_TAG

VLAN Tag on the tunnel (if present).
Default value is -1.

int

SOURCE_IP

Source IP on which the tunnel is created.

char

64

DEST_IP

Destination IP on the other end of tunnel.

char

64

LOCAL_WWN

Local port WWN for the tunnel.

char

23

REMOTE_WWN_RESTRICT

Remote Port WWN for the tunnel.

char

23

COMMUNICATION_RATE

Bandwidth specified for the tunnel.

double
precision

MIN_RETRANSMIT_TIME

FCIP Tunnel Parameter.

int

SELECTIVE_ACK_ENABLED

FCIP Tunnel Parameter.

smallint

KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT

FCIP Tunnel Parameter.

int

MAX_RETRANSMISSION

FCIP Tunnel Parameter.

int

WAN_TOV_ENABLED

Is WAN TOV enabled.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TUNNEL_STATUS

Tunnel Status (Active/Inactive).

int

DESCRIPTION

Description for the created tunnel.

varchar

FICON_TRB_ID_ENABLED

Whether Ficon_Tape_Read_Block is enabled on that
tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_TT_EMUL_ENABLED

Whether Ficon_Tin_Tir_Emulation is enabled on that
tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_DLA_EMUL_ENABLE
D

Whether Device_Level_Ack_Emulation is enabled on
that tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_
PIPE

The Value for FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_PIPE on the
tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_P
IPE

The Value for FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_PIPE on the
tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_
OPS

The Value for FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_OPS on the
tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_O
PS

The Value for FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_OPS on the
tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_TAPE_WRITE_TIMER

The Value for FICON_TAPE_WRITE_TIMER on the
tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 139

FCIP_TUNNEL (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

FICON_TAPE_MAX_WRITE_
CHAIN

The Value for FICON_TAPE_MAX_WRITE_CHAIN on
the tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_OXID_BASE

The Value for FICON_OXID_BASE on the tunnel.
Default value is -1.

int

FICON_XRC_EMULATION_E
NABLED

Whether Xrc_Emulation is enabled on that tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_TW_EMUL_ENABLE
D

Whether Ficon_Tape_Write_Emulation is enabled on
that tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_TR_EMUL_ENABLED Whether Ficon_Tape_Read_Emulation is enabled on
that tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FICON_DEBUG_FLAGS

FICON_DEBUG_FLAGS for that particular tunnel.
Default value is -1.

double
precision

REMOTE_WWN

Configured WWN of the Remote Node.

char

CDC

CDC Flag.
Default value is 0.

smallint

ADMIN_STATUS

Admin Status of the Tunnel.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CONTROL_L2_COS

Class of service as defined by IEEE 802.1p for tunnel. int
Default value is -1.

DSCP_CONTROL

DiffServe marking for control frame.
Default value is -1.

int

TRUNKING_ALGORITHM

Trunking Algorithm.
Default value is -1.

int

EXTENDED_TUNNEL

Indicates if the tunnel is an Extended Tunnel (i.e. new
Tunnel type on the switch).
Default value is 0.

smallint

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

Refers to the virtual switch to which the tunnel record
belongs to.

int

CIRCUIT_COUNT

The number of circuits configured on the tunnel.
Default value is 1.

smallint

MISMATCHED_CONFIG_DE
TAILS

Details of the reasons as to why the tunnel is down.

varchar

LAST_UPDATE

Last update time tells the time when the last update
to the database record happened.

bigint

SLOT_NUMBER

SLOT_NUMBER on which the VE Port of the tunnel
exists.
Default value is 0.

int

FICON_ENABLED

Is Ficon enabled. Default: 0, Values: 0|1.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TPERF_ENABLED

Is Tperf enabled. Default: 0, Values: 0|1.
Default value is 0.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

2048

1435

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 139

Definition

Format

Size

AUTH_KEY

This is the preshared-key to be used during IKE
authentication.

varchar

128

CONNECTED_COUNT

Active connections count.
Default value is 1.

smallint

TUNNEL_STATUS_STRING

Tunnel Status string value from switch for the tunnel.

varchar

COMPRESSION_MODE

Compression mode value (0,1,2,3).
Default value is 0.

smallint

TURBO_WRITE_ENABLED

Whether turbo write (fast write) is enabled or not
(0,1).
Default value is 0.

smallint

TAPE_ACCELERATION_ENA
BLED

Whether turbo write (fast write) is enabled or not
(0,1).
Default value is 0.

smallint

IPSEC_ENABLED

Default value is 0.

smallint

PRESHARED_KEY

The preshared key on tunnel.

char

QOS_HIGH

QoS high value.

smallint

QOS_MEDIUM

QoS medium value.

smallint

QOS_LOW

QoS low value.

smallint

BACKWARD_COMPATIBLE

Whether the 10G tunnel is backward compatible with
previous FOS versions.

smallint

FICON_TERADATA_READ_E
NABLED

Whether Ficon_Teradata_Read_Pipelining is enabled
on that tunnel.

smallint

FICON_TERADATA_WRITE_E
NABLED

Whether Ficon_Teradata_Write_Pipelining is enabled
on that tunnel.

smallint

TABLE 140

1436

FCIP_TUNNEL (Continued)

Field

256

32

FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database
identifier.

int

TUNNEL_ID

Tunnel ID to which the circuit
belongs to

int

CIRCUIT_NUMBER

Circuit Number of the Circuit
from the switch

smallint

COMPRESSION_
ENABLED

Whether Compression is
enabled on that circuit

smallint

TURBO_WRITE_
ENABLED

Whether TurboWrite is
enabled on that circuit'

smallint

TAPE_ACCELERATION_ENABLED

Whether TapeAccelaration is
enabled on that circuit

smallint

IKE_POLICY_NUM

The IKE Policy on the
int
circuit.The default value is -1.

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Database tables and fields

TABLE 140

I

FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

IPSEC_POLICY_NUM

The IPSEC Policy on the
circuit'. The default value is
-1

int

PRESHARED_KEY

The preshared Key on the
circuit

char(

32

SOURCE_IP

SOURCE_IP of the circuit

varchar

64

DEST_IP

DESTINATION_IP of the circuit varchar

64

VLAN_TAG

VLAN Tag of the circuit. The
default value is -1

int

SELECTIVE_ACK

Select acknowledgement
flag.The default value is 0.

smallint

QOS_MAPPING

QOS Mapping.
The default value is 0.

smallint

PATH_MTU_DISCOVERY

MTU Discovery Path.
The default value is 0.

smallint

MIN_COMM_RATE

Minimum communication
int
Speed. The default value is 0.

MAX_COMM_RATE

Maximum communication
int
Speed. The default value is 0.

MIN_RETRANSMIT_TIME

Minimum Retransmission
Time. The default value is -1

int

MAX_RETRANSMIT_TIME

Maximum retransmission
time. The default value is -1

int

KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT

Keep Alive timeout. The
default value is -1

int

ADMIN_STATUS

Is admin status enabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

METRIC

Circuit metric to set priority.
The default value is -1

int

DATA_L2_COS

Class of service as defined by
IEEE 802.1p for circuit. The
default value is -1.

int

DSCP_DATA

DiffServe marking for Data
int
Frame. The default value is -1

MAX_RETRANSMISSIONS

Max number of
Retransmission attempts on
the circuit.
The default value is 0.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

Slot number of the circuit.
The default value is 0.

smallint

VE_PORT_NUMBER

VE port number of the tunnel
to which the circuit belongs.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1437

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 140

1438

FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SECURITY_FLAG

Security Flag associated with
the circuit.
The default value is 0.

int

DSCP_CONTROL

Diffserve marking for control
frame.
The default value is 0.

int

CIRCUIT_STATUS

Status of the circuit.
The default value is 0.

smallint

ENABLED

Is circuit enabled. Default: 0,
Values: 0|1.
The default value is 0.

smallint

MISMATCHED_CONFIGURATIONS

If a tunnel is down due to
mismatched configurations
on local and remote end, this
property specifies the list of
such mismatched
configurations.

varchar

1024

CIRCUIT_STATUS_STRING

Circuit Status string value
from switch for the tunnel

varchar

256

L2COS_F_CLASS

The default value is 0.

smallint

L2_COS_HIGH

The default value is 0.

smallint

L2_COS_MEDIUM

The default value is 0.

smallint

L2_COS_LOW

The default value is 0.

smallint

DSCP_F_CLASS

The default value is 0.

smallint

DSCP_HIGH

The default value is 0.

smallint

DSCP_MEDIUM

The default value is 0.

smallint

DSCP_LOW

The default value is 0.

smallint

FAILOVER_CIRCUIT

Whether the circuit is
configured as failover or not.

smallint

FAILOVER_GROUP_ID

Represents the failover group
id for the circuit
0 - Default Failover Group.
1 - 9 Failover Group numbers
for the circuits.
-1 - Not supported. For the
switches running less than
FOS 7.2.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 141

FCIP_TUNNEL_PERFORMANCE

Field

Definition

Format

TUNNEL_ID

Primary key of the Switch Port

int

SWITCH_ID

The number of octets or bytes that have been
transmitted by this port. One second periodic polling
of the port. This value is saved and compared with the
next polled value to compute net throughput. Note, for
Fibre Channel, ordered sets are not included in the
count

int

TX

'The number of octets or bytes that have been
transmitted by this port. One second periodic polling
of the port. This value is saved and compared with the
next polled value to compute net throughput. Note, for
Fibre Channel, ordered sets are not included in the
count

double
precision

RX

The number of octets or bytes that have been
received by this port. One second periodic polling of
the port. This value is saved and compared with the
next polled value to compute net throughput. Note, for
Fibre Channel, ordered sets are not included in the
count.

double
precision

TX_UTILIZATION

The computed value of TX based on speed of port

double
precision

RX_UTILIZATION

The computed value of RX based on speed of port

double
precision

DROPPED_PACKETS

Number of TCP packets dropped

double
precision

COMPRESSION

Compression ratio

bigint

LATENCY

Round trip time (latency) in milliseconds

int

LINK_RETRANSMITS

Number of segments retransmitted

double
precision

RTT_BY_TIME_OUT

Counter of retransmit packets due to timeout

double
precision

RTT_BY_DUP_ACK

Counter of retransmit packets due to duplicate
acknowledgement'

double
precision

DUPLICATE_ACK

Counter of duplicate acknowledgement packets

double
precision

ROUND_TRIP_TIME

Round trip time in milliseconds

double
precision

TCP_OUT_OF_ORDER

Counter of TCP out-of-order.

double
precision

SLOW_START

Counter of slow starts

double
precision

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

'Time when this stats record was updated

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1439

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 142
Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_NODE_ID

The primary key of the DeviceNode.

int

DIRECT_ATTACH

Indicates whether the fcoe device is directly attached to
the switch''s TE port or to a cloud.

smallint

ATTACH_ID

The primary key of the port (if direct attached) or cloud
(if not direct attached).

int

MAC_ADDRESS

Mac address of device.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 143

Size

FCR_ROUTE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

BB_FABRIC_ID

Backbone fabric DB ID.

int

FCR_FABRIC_ID

FID assigned to edge fabric.

int

SWITCH_WWN

WWN of the router switch.

varchar

NR_PORT_ID

Route parameter.

int

FCRP_COST

Route parameter.

int

EX_PORT_WWN

Ex_port WWN.

varchar

128

Field

Definition

Format

Size

FEATURE_ID*

ID used to uniquely identify the feature.

int

6

NAME

Name of the feature.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description for the feature.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 144

TABLE 145

128

FEATURE

FEATURE_EDITION_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

FEATURE_ID*

ID used to uniquely identify the feature.

int

EDITION_MASK

Used to associate a feature to the edition (Reserved
for future).

int

TABLE 146

1440

FCOE_DEVICE

FEATURES_USAGE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CLIENT_IP

Identifies client IP.

varchar

128

USER_NAME

Identifies the feature used user name.

varchar

128

FEATURE_NAME

Identifies the unique feature(module) name.

varchar

128

SUB_FEATURE_NAME

Identifies the sub module name

varchar

128

OPERATION_NAME

Identifies the major operation or action happened in
that feature.

varchar

128

LAST_UPDATED_TIME

Identifies the last updated time stamp.

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 146

FEATURES_USAGE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

USAGE_COUNT

Count shows how many times the feature is
accessed.

int

FIRST_UPDATED_TIME

Identifies the first updated time stamp.

timestamp

TABLE 147

Size

FICON_DEVICE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID*

Value for the device port to which these FICON
properties are applied.

int

TYPE_NUMBER

Size

varchar

16

MODEL_NUMBER

Ficon device model number, such as S18.

varchar

64

MANUFACTURER

Manufacturer of the device, typically IBM.

varchar

64

MANUFACTURER_PLANT

Plant number where the device is manufactured.

varchar

64

SEQUENCE_NUMBER

Device sequence number.

varchar

32

TAG

FICON device property, e.g., 809a or 809b.

varchar

16

FLAG

FICON device property, e.g., 0x10 (hex).

varchar

8

PARAMS

FICON device property string, e.g., Valid channel port.

varchar

16

Size

TABLE 148

FIRMWARE_FILE_DETAIL

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FIRMWARE_NAME

Name of the firmware file.

varchar

MAJOR_VERSION

Major version bit from the firmware version.

smallint

MINOR_VERSION

Minor version bit from the firmware version.

smallint

MAINTENANCE

Maintenance bit from the firmware version.

smallint

PATCH

Patch bit from the firmware version.

varchar

64

PHASE

Phase bit from the firmware version.

varchar

64

RELEASE_DATE

Release date of the firmware file.

timestamp

IMPORTED_DATE

Imported date of the file to the Management
application.

timestamp

FIRMWARE_FILE_SIZE

Firmware file size.

int

FIRMWARE_LOCATION

Firmware file location in the Management application
repository.

varchar

1024

RELEASE_NOTES_
LOCATION

Release notes file location in theManagement
application repository.

varchar

1024

FIRMWARE_REPOSITORY_
TYPE

Repository type to identify the FTP server:
0 = internal FTP.
1 = external FTP.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

64

1441

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 149
Field

Definition

Format

FIRMWARE_ID*

ID for the firmware file.

int

SWITCH_TYPE*

Switch type that supports this firmware file.

smallint

REBOOT_REQUIRED

Reboot required flag for the switch type.

smallint

NUMFILES

Number of files in the firmware.

int

TABLE 150

Size

FOUNDRY_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE instance.

int

IMAGE_VERSION

Firmware image version currently running in the
device.

varchar

128

PRODUCT_TYPE

Product type of the device computed based on sysoid
and version of main board. To get the main board
version for devices, refer octet 28 of
snChasMainBrdId MIB in foundry.mib.

varchar

32

FEATURE_MASK

A bit string representing the software features
available in the switch/router. Each bit represent a
feature and if the feature available then bit value
would be 1 and 0 otherwise. Refer
snAgSoftwareFeature MIB in foundry.MIB for various
features supported and its corresponding details.

bytea

IS_PORT_VLAN_ENABLED

'Port VLANs enabled for the product or not.

num

(1,0)

ARCHITECTURE_TYPE

Chassis architecture type. Refer
snChasArchitectureType MIB in foundry.mib for
possible values.

num

(2,0)

BUILD_LABEL

The image label of the built software.

varchar

64

SSL_SLOT

Slot number of the SSL module.

num

(4,0)

TABLE 151

1442

FIRMWARE_SWITCH_DETAIL

Size

FOUNDRY_MODULE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MODULE_ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SERIAL_NUM

Serial number of this module.

varchar

32

DRAM_SIZE

Dynamic RAM size in Kilo bytes. Currently it is
not populated and used.

num

(4,0)

BOOT_FLASH_SIZE

Boot flash size in Kilo bytes. Currently it is not
populated and used.

num

(4,0)

MODULE_TYPE

Type of this module. Refer
snAgentBrdMainBrdId in foundry.mib for more
details and possible values.

num

(4,0)

CODE_FLASH_SIZE

Code flash size in Kilo bytes. Currently it is not
populated and used.

num

(4,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 151

FOUNDRY_MODULE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

EXPANSION_MODULE_TYPE

Expansion board type. Refer
snAgentBrdExpBrdId in foundry.mib for more
details and possible values.

num

(4,0)

EXPANSION_MODULE_DESCRIPTION

The expansion board description string.
Expansion board are those boards attaching on
the main board.

varchar

128

TABLE 152

FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID

Unique generated identifier.

int

SERIAL_NUMBER

The serial number of the chassis.

varchar

32

PRODUCT_TYPE

Product type based on sysoid or architecture type
and management module main board id.

varchar

32

Size

TABLE 153

FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

PHYSICAL_PORT_ID

Database ID of PHYSICAL_PORT instance.

int

CONNECTOR_TYPE

The type of connector that the port offers. Refer
snSwPortInfoConnectorType of foundry.mib for more
details and possible values.

smallint

MEDIA_TYPE

The media type for the port. Refer
snSwPortInfoMediaType of foundry.mib for more
details and possible values.

smallint

GIG_TYPE

TABLE 154

smallint

FPORT_TRUNK_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

Virtual switch ID where this F_Port Trunk Group is
defined.

int

MASTER_USER_PORT

User port number for the master port of this trunk.

smallint

WWN

WWN of the trunk group.

char

TRUNK_AREA

User-assigned area number used to group together
F_ports of the trunk.

smallint

TABLE 155

Size

Size

23

FPORT_TRUNK_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

GROUP_ID*

Foreign key to the PORT_TRUNK_GROUP table.

int

PORT_NUMBER*

Member user port number.

smallint

WWN

Member port WWN.

char

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

23

1443

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 156

FRU

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CORE_SWITCH_ID

int

TAG

provides the TAG number of FRU element, requested by
SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector. Field
probably contains information such as asset tag or
serial number data. This value varies depending on the
type of physical package

varchar

64

PART_NUMBER

provides the part number of the FRU element,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector. Field probably contains the part number
assigned by the organization responsible for producing
or manufacturing the physical element

varchar

64

SERIAL_NUMBER

provides the serial number of the FRU element,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector

varchar

64

VENDOR_PART_
NUMBER

provides the Vendor-assigned part number of this
package, requested by SMIA and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector

varchar

64

VENDOR_SERIAL_
NUMBER

provides the Vendor-assigned serial number of this
package, requested by SMIA and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector'

varchar

64

CAN_BE_FRUED

provides whether this element can be removed from the
switch, requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector. Maps to IsRemovable field in the html.
The default value is -1.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

provides the slot number of this FRU element ,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector.The default value is -1.

int

MANUFACTURER_DATE

provides the manufactured date of this FRU element,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector

timestamp

UPDATE_DATE

provides the updated date of this FRU element,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector

timestamp

VERSION

1444

Size

varchar

32

MANUFACTURER

provides the manufacturer of this FRU element
,requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector

varchar

64

VENDOR_EQUIPMENT_T
YPE

provides the vendor equipment type of the FRU
element, requested by SMIA and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector

varchar

32

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

provides the operational status of the FRU element,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset
Collector will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches
and above. The default value is -1.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 156

FRU (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TOTAL_OUTPUT_POWER

provides the total power output of the power supply FRU
element, requested by SMIA and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector will be available only from FOS
6.4 switches and above. this field is applicable only for
the power supply FRU element. The default value is -1.

bigint

SPEED

provides the speed of the FAN FRU element, requested
by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector
will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches and above.
this field is applicable only for the FAN FRU element.
The default value is -1.

int

CREATION_TIME

provides the record creation time, standard columns for
Management application and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

provides the record creation time, standard columns for
Management application and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector

timestamp

PREVIOUS_OP_STATUS

provides the previous operational status of FRU
element, requested by SMIA and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector. Helps identify the operational
status transitions. The default value is -1.

int

VENDOR

This holds the vendor name information for FRU

varchar

256

Format

Size

TABLE 157

Size

FTP_SERVER

Field

Definition

ID*

int

TYPE

Type indicates the what type of file. Internal FTP - 0,
External FTP - 1, External SCP - 2, Internal SCP/SFTP 3, External SFTP - 4 and Technical support FTP - 100.
Technical Support FTP server configuration is created
by user to transfer the technical support files from the
Management application repository to specified FTP
server. Other server configurations can be seen in
Options dialog.

smallint

IP

FTP server IP address.

varchar

64

USER_NAME

FTP server user name.

varchar

64

PASSWORD

FTP server user password.

varchar

512

ROOT_DIRECTORY

FTP server root directory location.

varchar

1024

PORT

Port on which FTP server is configured.

int

TABLE 158

GENERATED_REPORT

Field

Definition

ID*

Format
int

NAME

Report name.

varchar

TYPE_ID

Report type.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1445

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 158

Definition

Format

Size

EFCM_USER

Management application user who has generated
this report.

varchar

128

REPORT_OBJECT

Report object BLOB.

bytea

TIMESTAMP_

Timestamp when the report is generated.

timestamp

FABRIC_NAME

Fabric Name.

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

ID for the GigE Port in SWITCH_PORT.

int

PORT_NUMBER

GigE Port Number(0 for ge0 and 1 for ge1).

int

SLOT_NUMBER

Slot number on which the GigE Port is present.

int

ENABLED

Enabled or disabled.
Default value is 0.

smallint

SPEED

Port speed details.
Default value is 0.

bigint

MAX_SPEED

Port maximum speed supported.

bigint

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC Address of that port.

varchar

64

PORT_NAME

GigE Port Name.

varchar

64

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

LED status.

int

LED_STATE

LED status.

smallint

SPEED_LED_STATE

GigE Port type details.

smallint

PORT_TYPE

Port type for the GigE Port.

varchar

PERSISTENTLY_DISABLED

Whether the GigE Port is persistently disabled.

smallint

TABLE 159

GIGE_PORT

INTERFACE_TYPE

smallint

CHECKSUM

varchar

FCIP_CAPABLE

1 = FCIP capable; otherwise, 0.
Default value is 2.

smallint

ISCSI_CAPABLE

1 = ISCSI capable; otherwise, 0.
Default value is 2.

smallint

REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS

MAC address of attached port of the 10G GigE Port.

varchar

INBAND_MANAGEMENT_ST
ATUS

1 = Inband Management status is enabled;
otherwise, 0.
Default value is 0.

smallint

OCCUPIED

Default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_UPDATE

1446

GENERATED_REPORT (Continued)

Field

64

16

64

bigint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 160

GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CLOUD_ID

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

The unique id of the switch TE port that this member
connects to.

int

TRUSTED

smallint

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

MISSING

smallint

MISSING_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 161

GIGE_PORT_STATS

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_ID

References the ID in CORE_SWITCH table.

int

PORT_ID

References the ID in SWITCH_PORT table.

int

CREATION_TIME

The polling time.

timestamp

TX

Transmit (TX) value in bytes.

double precision

RX

Receive (RX) value in bytes.

double precision

TX_UTILIZATION

Transmit utilization (TX%) value in percentage.

double precision

RX_UTILIZATION

Receive utilization (RX%) value in percentage.

double precision

DROPPED_PACKETS

Number of dropped packets.

double precision

COMPRESSION

The compression value.

double precision

LATENCY

The latency value.

double precision

BANDWIDTH

The bandwidth value.

double precision

Field

Definition

Format

GLOBAL_VLAN_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

NAME

Name for Global VLAN.

varchar

CONTEXT_DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE instance which is
associated with global VLAN.

int

TABLE 162

TABLE 163

Size

Size

GLOBAL_VLAN
Size

255

GRE_TUNNEL_INTERFACE

Field

Definition

Format

INTERFACE_ID

This column is used to store the id of the interface.
The value will be populated by the discovery engine
where the corresponding GRE Tunnel Interface
details will be persisted in the INTERFACE table.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1447

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 164
Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NAME

User-supplied name for the HA Cluster.

varchar

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP
that contains this HA Cluster.

int

MEMBER_LIST

A comma-separated list of Encryption Engines in the
HA Cluster. Each engine is identified by a switch
node WWN, followed by "/", followed by the slot
number. The slot number is 0 if the switch does not
have removable blades.

varchar

TABLE 165

1448

HA_CLUSTER
Size

64

256

HBA

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

HOST_ID

ID of the Device Enclosure (Host) to
which this HBA belongs to.

int

NAME

User defined name of the HBA

varchar

128

POWER_MODE

Power mode of the HBA

varchar

256

MODEL

Model code of the HBA

varchar

256

MODEL_DESCRIPTION

Model description for the HBA

varchar

256

OPERATING_STATUS

Current operating status of the HBA:
1: Enabled/0: Disabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CHIP_REVISION

Revision level of the chip used in the
HBA

varchar

64

HARDWARE_PATH

Hardware path for the HBA.

varchar

256

SERIAL_NUMBER

Serial number of the HBA

varchar

64

TEMPERATURE

Temperatur of HBA. Both in
Celsius/Fahrenheit

varchar

16

USERNAME

User name to be used for logging into
the HBA.

varchar

256

PASSWORD

Password used for logging into the
HBA

varchar

256

MANAGEMENT_STATE

Management state bit mask,
Managed/Auth failed etc.
The default value is -1.

int

MANAGEMENT_INTERFACE

Management interface bit mask,
JSON/WMI/SMI etc . The default
value is -1.

int

DRIVER_VERSION

The version level of the host adapter
driver

varchar

256

DRIVER_NAME

The name of the HBA driver

varchar

256

FIRMWARE_VERSION

The version level of the firmware

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Database tables and fields

TABLE 165

I

HBA (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

BIOS_VERSION

The version level of the BIOS

varchar

256

PCI_REG_VENDOR_ID

The identifier of the PCI Register''s
vendor

varchar

32

PCI_REG_DEVICE_ID

The device ID of the PCI Register

varchar

32

PCI_REG_SUBSYSTEM_ID

The ID of the PCI subsystem

varchar

32

PCI_REG_SUBSYS_VENDOR_ID

The ID of the PCI subsystem vendor.

varchar

32

PCI_REG_LANE_COUNT

The number of PCI lanes, in Gbps,
each way between the PCI slot and
the adapter. The default value is 8.

int

PCI_REG_NEG_LANE_COUNT

The set number of PCI lanes that were
initially negotiated.
The default value is 8.

int

PCI_REG_GENERATION

PCI generation

varchar

TRUSTED

Denotes whether HBA is trusted by
user or not. When the host first time
discovered, all the HBAs will be
trusted by default. If any HBA added
later, then it will be in untrusted
stated. 0 denotes untrusted and 1 is
for trusted.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

HBA record creation time. This tells us
when this HBA was first discovered.

timestamp

MISSING

Denotes whether HBA is missing or
not. 0 denotes present and 1 states
that HBA is missing from host.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

States the missing time of the HBA.
timestamp
This will be null if the HBA is available.

CIM_NAMESPACE

Reflects the CIM namespace used to
discover the HBA

varchar

128

CARD_TYPE

FC for HBA, CNA for CNA.
The default value is ‘FC’.

varchar

32

WWN

WWN of the adapter

varchar

23

HCM_AGENT_VERSION

Version of HCM agent used to
managed the HBA

varchar

128

MAC_ADDRESS

Adapter mac address

varchar

64

MAX_SPEED_SUPPORTED

The maximum port speed that is
supported on the port, in Gb/s.
The default value is 0.

int

VPD_PRODUCT_DESCRIPTION

Description of the product

varchar

256

VPD_PART_NUMBER

Part Number of the device

varchar

32

VPD_EC_LEVEL

EC Level of the device

varchar

32

VPD_FRU_NUMBER

FRU number of the device

varchar

256

VPD_SERIAL_NUMBER

serial number of the device

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

256

1449

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 165

Definition

Format

Size

VPD_PW

PW details of the device

varchar

32

VPD_EDC

EDC details of the device

varchar

32

VPD_MDC

MDC details of the device

varchar

32

VPD_FABRIC_GEOGRAPHY

FABRIC_GEOGRAPHY of the device

varchar

256

VPD_LOCATION

LOCATION of the device

varchar

256

VPD_MANUFACTURER_ID

MANUFACTURER_ID of the device

varchar

256

VPD_PCI_GEOGRAPHY

PCI_GEOGRAPHY of the device

varchar

256

VPD_VENDOR_DATA

VENDOR_DATA of the device

varchar

256

VPD_EXT_CAPABILITY

EXT_CAPABILITY of the device

varchar

256

VPD_OEM

OEM details of the device

varchar

256

VPD_OEM_INFO

OEM related information of the device

varchar

256

MAX_PCIF

Maximum number of Pci functions.

smallint

CARD_MODE

The mode that the card is operating
on.

smallint

DRIVER_CARD_MODE

It is the same as card type but uses
new values applicable for 3.0 and
later driver versions. Deprecates the
card type field. Possible values are:
• HBA/CNA/AnyIO/Mezzanine
• HBA/Mezzanine CNA/Mezzanine
AnyIO

varchar

32

VENDOR

Adapter vendor name.

varchar

128

TABLE 166

HBA_NODE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_NODE_ID

Primary key from the Device Node table

int

HBA_ID

Primary key from the HBA table

int

TABLE 167

1450

HBA (Continued)

Field

Size

HBA_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Primary key on the owner Device port table

int

CONFIGURED_STATE

Indicates whether the port is enabled or disabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CONFIGURED_SPEED

The configured speed of the port. E.g. Auto-negotiate

varchar

CONFIGURED_TOPOLOGY

The topology setting.
The default value is 1.

int

MAX_SPEED_SUPPORTED

The maximum port speed that is supported on the
port, in Gb/s. The default value is 0.

int

OPERATING_STATE

Indicates whether the link is online or offline. The
default value is 0.

smallint

Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 167

HBA_PORT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

OPERATING_TOPOLOGY

The topology setting at which the port is operating.
The default value is 1.

int

SUPPORTED_FC4_TYPES

List of supported FC4 types for this port.

varchar

32

SUPPORTED_COS

Supported Class of Service (COS) for this port.

varchar

32

TRUSTED

Denotes whether port is trusted or not. 0 denotes
untrusted and 1 is for trusted.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

HBA port record creation time. This tells us when this
HBA port was first discovered.

timestamp

MISSING

Denotes whether port is missing or not. 0 denotes
present and 1 states that port is missing from fabric.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

States the missing time of the this port.

timestamp

OPERATING_SPEED

Operating speed of the hba port. The default value is
0.

varchar

CNA_PORT_ID

Nullable foreign key, related FC pot with the CNA port

int

PORT_NWWN

Node WWN for the HBA port

varchar

23

PHYSICAL_PORT_WWN

Physical Ports WWN in case of V port

varchar

128

SWITCH_IP

IP of the switch, HBA port is connected to

varchar

23

PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN

WWN of the principal switch of the fabric, HBA is
connected to

varchar

128

HBA_ID

HBA ID of the HBA this port belongs to

int

PORT_NUMBER

Port number of this HBA port.

smallint

NAME

Name defined for the HBA port in HCM

varchar

FACTORY_PORT_WWN

Factory configured Port WWN defined for the HBA
port in HCM

varchar

FACTORY_NODE_WWN

Factory configured Node WWN defined for the HBA
port in HCM

varchar

PREBOOT_CREATED

Flag to identify vports created during preboot

varchar

MAX_BANDWIDTH

Maximum bandwidth

varchar

64

PCIF_INDEX

Pci function index

varchar

64

MAX_PCIF

Maximum number of Pci functions.

smallint

Synthetic FC is applicable for Windows only:
0 - Unknow
1 - Yes
2 - No.

int

SYNTHETIC_FC

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

•
•
•

Size

64

1451

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 168

HBA_PORT_DETAIL

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Device port id acts as the primary key

int

PERSISTENT_BINDING

Persistent binding value of the port. With persistent
binding (on the host), one can bind a LUN to a
specific device file, thus making sure devices
reappear on the same device files after reboots.
0 – disable
1 – enabled

smallint

FABRIC_NAME

Principal switch WWN of the Fabric to which the port
is associated with.

varchar

BOOT_OVER_SAN

Flag to indicate whether boot over SAN is enabled or
not..
The default value is 0.

smallint

BOOT_OPTION

Boot option for the port. Possible values are 0 AUTO_DISCOVERED_FROM_FABRIC , 1 FIRST_VISIBLE_LUN, 2 - USER_CONFIGURED_LUN

smallint

BOOT_SPEED

Boot speed for the port in Gbps. Possible values are
0 - AUTO_NEGOTIATE and 2, 4, 8, 16 Gbps. The
default value is 0.

int

BOOT_TOPOLOGY

Boot topology for the port. Possible values are 0 Point to Point , 1 - Loop. The default value is 1.

int

BOOTUP_DELAY

On starting system how long system needs to wait for
user action. Configured value ranges 0,1,2,5 and 10
minutes. Default value is 0.

int

BB_CREDIT

The maximum number of receive buffer.
The default value is 8.

int

FRAME_DATA_FIELD_SIZE

The default value is 512.

int

HARDWARE_PATH

Indicates whether MPIO is enabled or disabled

V_PORT_COUNT

Number of logical ports.
The default value is 0.

int

QUEUE_DEPTH

The number of I/O operations that can be run in
parallel on a device.
The default value is 0.

int

Indicates whether interrupt control is on or off.
The default value is 0.

smallint

Sets the interrupt control latency value..
The default value is 0.

int

Sets the interrupt control delay value..
The default value is 0.

int

BEACON_STATE

Indicates whether beaconing is on or off..
The default value is 0.

smallint

LINK_BEACON_STATE

Indicates whether link beaconing is on or off..
The default value is 0.

smallint

INTERRUPT_CONTROL_COA
LESCE
INTERRUPT_CONTROL_LAT
ENCY
INTERRUPT_CONTROL_DEL
AY

1452

Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 168

HBA_PORT_DETAIL (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

MPIO_MODE_STATE

Indicates whether multipathing mode is on or off..
The default value is 0.

smallint

PATH_TIME_OUT

The value between 0 to 60 that specifies the time out
session. Note you can only enable or edit the path
time out when MPIO is disabled.

int

Size

The default value is 0.
LOGGING_LEVEL

The port logging level. Values include Log Critical, Log
Error, Log Warning, and Log Info. The default value is
0.

smallint

TARGET_RATE_LIMIT

Target rate limit of the port. Possible values are 0
-disabled, 1 - enabled. The default value is 0.

smallint

DEFAULT_RATE_LIMIT

Default target rate limit of the port speed (1 Gbps).
The default value is 0.

int

VF_MODE

True if the port is in VF (Virtual Fabric) mode.

smallint

RECIEVE_BUFFER_CREDIT

Receiving buffer-to-buffer credits (BB_credits) for the
port.

varchar

64

TRANSMIT_BUFFER_CREDI
T

Transmitting buffer-to-buffer credits (BB_credits) for
the port.

varchar

64

FCSP_AUTH_STATE

Indicates whether FC-SP authentication is on or off.
The default value is 0.

smallint

FCSP_STATUS

The status of FC-SP authentication.
The default value is 'Disabled'.

varchar

32

FCSP_ALGORITHM

The configured authentication algorithm.
The default value is 'MD5'.

varchar

64

FCSP_GROUP

The DH Group (DH Null, group 0 is the only option).
The default value is 0.

smallint

FCSP_ERROR_STATUS

The health status of the Fibre Channel Security
Protocol parameters

varchar

QOS_CONFIGURED_STATE

Indicates whether QoS is enabled or disabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

QOS_OPERATING_STATE

QOS Operating state. The default value is 'Disabled'.

varchar

256

QOS_TOTAL_BB_CREDIT

The number of receive buffers. The default value is 2.

varchar

16

QOS_PRIORITY_LEVEL

QoS priority levels. Values include High, Medium, and
Low

varchar

32

Percentage of bandwidth allocation for the High
priority level.

varchar

32

Percentage of bandwidth allocation for the Medium
priority level

varchar

32

Percentage of bandwidth allocation for the Low
priority level.

varchar

32

QOS_HIGH_BW_ALLOCATIO
N
QOS_MEDIUM_BW_ALLOCA
TION
QOS_LOW_BW_ALLOCATIO
N

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

256

1453

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 168

HBA_PORT_DETAIL (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MEDIA

media of port

varchar

64

IOC_ID

IO controller ID

int

PREBOOT_DISABLED

Boolean value indicating if port was disabled during
preboot.. The default value is 0.

smallint

ALARM_WARNING

A bit mask indicating degrading SFP if the bit mask
has any 1s in it. It bit mask is all 0s then SFP is in
good state.

varchar

IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_MAX

Maximum value is 2000. This feature is available for
driver 3.1 and later.

int

IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_OPER
ATIONAL

Operation value ranges from 0 - 2000.

int

IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_CONFI
GURED

Configured value ranges from 0 - 2000.

int

FEC_STATE

State of FEC. The FEC (Forward Error Correction) is an
error recovery mechanism that allows the receiver of
the corrupted frame to correct the error without
referring back to the port which transmitted the
frame. Supported on prowler card in FC mode.
Applicable values are Online, Offline and Not
Supported. Note : Not Supported on
(PORT_MEDIA_MEZZANINE_CARD).

varchar

128

BB_CREDIT_RECOVERY_ST
ATUS

Status of Buffer to Buffer Credit Recovery. Supported
on FC ports. Applicable values are Online, Offline, Not
Applicable, and Disable.

varchar

32

CONFIGURED_BB_SCN_CO
UNT

Configured value of Buffer to Buffer Credit Recovery
state change notification count. Range between 1 to
15.

int

NEGOTIATED_BB_SCN_COU
NT

Buffer to Buffer Credit Recovery state change
notification count value set by bcu. Range between 1
to 15.

int

TABLE 169

HBA_PORT_DEVICE_PORT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

ID from the device_port table.

int

HBA_PORT_ID

DEVICE_PORT_ID from the hba_port table.

int

TABLE 170

Size

HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

1454

32

Size

int

BANDWIDTH

The bandwidth percentage of the FCoE port eg. 10 gb
for CNA.

int

FIP_STATE

FIP (Fibre channel Initialization Protocol) state of the
port 0 – disable , 1- enabled.

varchar

64

DISCOVERY_PRIORITY

Discovery priority of the port. Currently not used.

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 170

HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

FCF_FCMAP

FC Map value of port. Currently not used.

varchar

256

FCF_FPMA_MAC

FPMA (fabric-provided MAC address) MAC address of
port. Currently not used.

varchar

64

FCF_MAC

FCF (FCoE Forwarder) MAC value of port.

varchar

64

FCF_MODE

FCF (FCoE Forwarder) Mode of the port. Currently not
used.

varchar

256

FCF_NAMEID

FCF (FCoE Forwarder) Name of the port currently Not
used.

varchar

256

FCPIM_MPIO_MODE

Indicates whether multipathing I/O (MPIO) mode is
turned on or off. 1- on, 0 - off

smallint

PORT_LOG_ENABLED

True if port log is enabled.

smallint

MAX_FRAME_SIZE

The frame size, in bytes, of the FCoE port.

int

MTU

Maximum transmission unit in bytes of the FCoE port.
Default - 2112, 0 - auto

int

PATH_TOV

The value between 0 and 60 that specifies the
time-out session.

int

NOTE: You can only enable or edit the path time out
when MPIO is disabled
SCSI_QUEUE_DEPTH

The LUN queue depth feature determines how many
concurrent IOs the adapter will accept and process
per LUN (not at the adapter port level, as with the IO
throttle value). Not setting the queue depth to the
optimal level can result in poor performance, where
outstanding IO queuing can cause bottlenecks. For
optimum performance, consider both the
configuration settings of the HBA and the physical
limits on the storage array. If you set the queue depth
too low on the HBA it could lead to under-utilization of
storage resources.

int

NOTE: The Queue Depth feature is supported for all
adapter classes configured in FC or FCoE
mode (Windows operating systems only)'
STATE

The state of the FCoE port (online or offline).

varchar

64

SUPPORTED_CLASS

The classes supported on the FCoE port.
For example, Class2 and Class3.

varchar

256

TRL_SPEED

TRL (Target Rate limit) speed. This will be less than
max speed supported by this port.

int

TRL_STATE

TRL (Target Rate limit) state of the port. Possible
values are 0 - disable , 1 - Enable

smallint

PG_ID

The priority group ID. Possible values are 0-7
(user-definable) and 15.0-15.7 (strict priority).

varchar

32

PRIORITIES

'Lists the available priorities (High, Medium, Low).

varchar

128

FCOE_MAC

FCOE MAC address of the port.

varchar

64

IOC_ID

The IO controller Identifier.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1455

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 171

1456

HBA_REMOTE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Autogenerate primary column.

int

SYMBOLIC_NAME

The symbolic name associated with the remote port.

varchar

256

PORT_WWN

The world wide name of the remote device''s port.

char

23

NODE_WWN

The world wide name of the remote device

char

23

NAME

The name associated with the device

varchar

256

FC_ADDRESS

FC Address for the port in hex

varchar

6

FRAME_DATA_SIZE

The frame size, in bytes, of the device.
The default value is 512.

int

SPEED

Operating speed of the remote port.

int

STATE

Indicates whether the device is online or offline.
The default value is ‘Offline’.

varchar

64

SUPPORTED_COS

The types of classes that are supported on the
remote port; for example, Class-3

varchar

32

DEVICE_TYPE

The type of the device; for example, Disk or Tape.

varchar

64

BIND_TYPE

The persistent bind type. The default value is 0.

smallint

TARGET_ID

The identifier of the target device. The default value
is 0.

int

ROLE

The role of the device (target or initiator)

varchar

64

VENDOR

The vendor of the device

varchar

256

PRODUCT_ID

The device''s identifier.

varchar

256

PRODUCT_VERSION

Field which stores information regarging target rate
limiting on the remote port

varchar

256

QOS_PRIORITY

QOS Priority on the target. The default value is
'Unknown'.

varchar

64

QOS_FLOW_ID

QOS Flow ID on the target. The default value is 0.

varchar

64

CURRENT_SPEED

Current speed of the remote port, as enforced by
TRL.
The default value is 0.

varchar

64

TRL_ENFORCED

True if TRL(Target Rate limit) is enforced.

varchar

16

BUS_NO

Channel number in the PCI Bus. The default value is
0.

varchar

32

FCP_IM_STATE

Indicates whether the Fibre Channel Protocol Input
Method (FCP-IM) is online or offline.

varchar

128

IO_LATENCY_MIN

Minimum IO Latency value (< 79) in milliseconds and
is calculated when HBA port starts SCSI (FCP)
exchanges

varchar

32

IO_LATENCY_MAX

IO Latency value in milliseconds and is calculated
when HBA port starts SCSI (FCP) exchanges

varchar

32

IO_LATENCY_AVERAGE

Average IO Latency value in milliseconds and is
calculated when HBA port starts SCSI (FCP)
exchanges

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 171

HBA_REMOTE_PORT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Field to indicate whether the remote port supports
data retransmission.0 would mean unsupported and
nonzero value implies supported. The default value is
0.

smallint

DATA_RETRANSMISSION_S
UPPORT

Field to indicate whether the remote port supports
the REC ELS command Channel number in the PCI
Bus.Zero would mean unsupported and nonzero
value implies supported. The default value is 0.

smallint

The number of PRLI responses from the target to the
initiator and begins when HBA Port starts FCP
exchanges.Zero would mean unsupported and
nonzero value implies supported. The default value is
0.

int

The number of confirmed completions on the remote
port and begins when HBA Port starts FCP
exchanges.Zero would mean unsupported and
nonzero value implies supported. The default value is
0.

int

REC_SUPPORT

TASK_RENTRY_IDENT_SUP
PORT

CONFIRMED_COMPLETION
S_SUPPORT

TABLE 172

Size

HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated primary key

int

HBA_REMOTE_PORT_ID

Primary key of owner row in Remote Port

int

FCP_LUN

The logical unit number of Fibre Channel Protocol
(FCP) device. The default value is 0.

varchar

CAPACITY

The capacity of the logical unit. The default value is
0.

int

BLOCK_SIZE

The block size of the logical unit, in bytes (for
example, 512 Bytes). The default value is 0.

int

VENDOR

The vendor of the device to which the logical unit is
assigned

varchar

256

PRODUCT_ID

The product identifier of the device to which the logical unit is assigned

varchar

256

PRODUCT_VERSION

The revision level of the device to which the logical
unit is assigned.

varchar

256

PRODUCT_SERIAL_NO

The serial number of the device to which the logical
unit is assigned

varchar

256

TARGET_WWN

The world wide name of the target devic

char

23

PHYSICAL_LUN

'If there is a lun connected to a remote port, then it
represents a value 1 indicating it is a physical lun
otherwise it is a dummy lun with value 0. The default
value is 1.

smallint

LUN_ID

IS lun id

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

size

16

32

1457

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 173

HBA_TARGET

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Primary key from the Device port table

int

HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN_
ID

Primary key from the HBA Remote port lun table

int

BOOT_LUN

Flag to indicate of the LUN is bootable.
The default value is -1.

smallint

TRUSTED

Denotes whether target is trusted or not. 0 denotes
untrusted and 1 is for trusted.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the entry

timestamp

MISSING

Flag to indicate if the remote LUN is missing.
The default value is 0.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Time at which the LUN is marked missing.

timestamp

TARGET_ID

The identifier of the target device as reported by
each HBA port.
The default value is 0.

int

TABLE 174

HEALTH_STATUS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Size

serial

DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_ID

Identifies the execution cycle for the deployment.

int

RULE_ID

Policy Monitor rule ID.

smallint

RULE_DESCRIPTION

Description of what the check is about.

varchar

255

Format

Size

TABLE 175

HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS

Field

Definition

ID

serial

HEALTH_STATUS_ID

Identifies the execution cycle for the deployment.

int

TARGET_ID

In case of fabric, this is fabric DB ID; for switch, this is
switch DB ID; for host, this is host db ID.

int

TARGET_TYPE

smallint

STATUS

0 - Failed
1 - Successful

smallint

MESSAGE

Check result message.

varchar

MESSAGE_TYPE
LEGACY_NAME

TABLE 176

1458

size

16384

text
Target legacy name.

varchar

256

Size

HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated primary key

int

DISCOVER_JSON

Flag to indicate JSON agent based discovery.
The default value is 1.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 176

HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

JSON_USERNAME

Username for the JSON agent

varchar

128

JSON_PASSWD

Password for the JSON agent

varchar

512

DISCOVER_CIM

Flag to indicate CIM based discovery. on/off.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CIM_IMPL

CIM implemenation used. 1: SMI, 2: WMI.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CIM_USERNAME

Username for the CIM based agent

varchar

128

CIM_PASSWORD

Password for the CIM based agent'

varchar

512

CIM_NAMESPACE

CIM Namespace.
The default value is 'root/brocade

varchar

128

CIM_PORT

Port number used for the CIM agent.
The default value is 5988.

int

DISCOVER_VM

Flag to indicate VM discovery for a host. On/Off'.
The default value is 0.

smallint

VM_USERNAME

Username to be used for VM discovery

varchar

128

VM_PASSWORD

Password to be used for VM discovery

varchar

512

JSON_PORT

Port Number used for the Json agent.
The default value is 34568.

int

VM_PORT

Port Number used for the VM agent.
The default value is 443.

int

Application_Name_USER_N
AME

Management application User Name of the user who
generated the last operation on the request

varchar

255

Application_Name_SERVER
_ADDRESS

Management application Server address which
generated the last operation on this request

varchar

50

TABLE 177

HOST_DISCOVERY_REQ_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated primary key

int

NAME

Unique name for the host request.
The default value is ‘ New Host Group'.

varchar(

Primary key from the host discovery options
table. Points to the associated discovery
options

int

Reflects the status of the request E.g. 0->
Completed, 1->Delete Pending.
The default value is 0.

int

DISCOVERY_OPTIONS_ID
MANAGEMENT_STATE

TABLE 178

Size

256

HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Autogenerated primary key

int

HOST_NAME

Hostname: IP address or host name

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1459

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 178

HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST (Continued)

Field

Definition

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID
REQUEST_GROUP_ID

int

This id is a foreign key to the id in the
host_discovery_option table.
The default value is -1.

int

HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTI
ON_ID

The status of VM Discovery indicating
success or failure. The default value
is 0.

int

VM_MANAGEMENT_STAT
E

The status of HBA discovery using
JSON agent, indicating success or
failure.
The default value is 0.

int

The status of HBA Discovery using
CIM, indicating success or failure.
The default value is 0.

int

MANAGEMENT_STATE

Reflects the status of the request E.g.
0-> Completed, 1->Add Pending
2->Delete Pending 3->Edit Pending
4->Delete Failed.
The default value is 1.

int

MANAGEMENT_STATE_D
ETAILS

This field holds the detailed
information on the management state
if available. For example, in case of
management state 3, this field will
have details on all the manually
created conflicting enclosures.

varchar

CIM_MANAGEMENT_STA
TE

TABLE 179

Size

int
Primary key from the request group
table. Null allowed

JSON_MANAGEMENT_ST
ATE

1460

Format

1024

HYPER_V_VIRTUAL_MACHINE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Primary Key

int

VM_NAME

Name of the Virtual Machine.

varchar

256

COMPUTER_NAME

Hyper V host name.

varchar

256

CONFIGURATION_LOCATION

Path where VM configuration data is located.

varchar

256

GUID

Globally Unique ID of the VM.

varchar

256

HARD_DRIVES_COUNT

Count of virtual hard drives in the VM.

int

MEMORY_ASSIGNED

Amount of memory assigned to the VM.

varchar

256

PATH

Path to the primary disk of the Virtual Machine.

varchar

256

PROCESSOR_COUNT

Number of virtual CPUs of the VM.

int

STATUS

Status of the VM.

varchar

64

STATE

Operational State of the VM.

varchar

64

NOTES

Notes describing the VM.

varchar

2048

UPTIME

The time since the VM was last powered up.

varchar

512

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 180

HYPER_V_VM_HBA_PORT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key

int

HYPER_V_VM_ID

ID of the HYPER_VIRTUAL_MACHINE instance.

int

HBA_PORT_ID

ID of the HBA_PORT instance which is a Hyper V
Virtual FC port.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Primary key for this table. Serial number which is
uniquely generated by DB.

int

EDGE_FABRIC_ID

Edge fabric ID of this IFL link.

int

EDGE_PORT_WWN

Edge switch port wwn of this IFL link.

varchar

BB_FABRIC_ID

Backbone fabric ID of this IFL link.

int

BB_PORT_WWN

Backbone fabric switch port wwn of this IFL link.

varchar

BB_RA_TOV

Backbone fabric resource allocation time out value
specified in milliseconds.

int

BB_ED_TOV

Backbone fabric Error detect time out value specified
in milliseconds.

int

BB_PID_FORMAT

Backbone fabric port identifier format.

smallint

Definition

Format

TABLE 181

TABLE 182

Size

IFL
Size

128

128

INTERFACE

Field

Size

INTERFACE_ID

int

SWITCH_SERVICE_ID

int

DEVICE_ID

int

NAME

varchar

255

IDENTIFIER

varchar

255

TABLE_SUBTYPE

varchar

255

TAG_MODE

smallint

VLAN_TAG_TYPE

int

UNTAGGED_VLAN_ID

The existing Data type short has been modified to
integer. Hence it supports 16 bit additionally.

int

IF_NAME

varchar

LLDP_PORT_ID_SUBTYPE

smallint

LLDP_PORT_ID

bytea

IS_FDP_ENABLED

num

(1,0)

IS_CDP_ENABLED

num

(1,0)

PORT_STATUS

smallint

PORT_STATE

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

64

1461

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 182

Definition

Format

IF_INDEX

This column is used to store the ifIndex of the
interface. The value will be populated by the DCB
collector during the discovery of the DCB switch.
Since this value is not populated by IP discovery
engine, making the field as nullable.

int

AMPP_PROFILE_MODE

Specifies whether the interface is set to AMPP profile
mode.

smallint

DOT1D_PORT_NUM

To store dot1d port number in DB to reduce SNMP
calls to switch from IfIndexUtility

int

EDGE_TYPE

The type of the device that is connected to the edge
switch port.
-1 : NA, 0 : connected to device with unknown type, 1
: connected to managed Brocade branded AP, 2 :
connected to standalone Brocade branded AP.

int

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1

User defined value used for IP Port.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2

User defined value used for IP Port.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3

User defined value used for IP Port.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 183

Size

INTERFACE_DEPLOYMENT_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

CLEAR_CONFIGURATION

1/0 corresponding to ''Clear Assignment'' / ''Assign
Configuration'' for interface level configuration.

smallint

WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for outbound traffic.

smallint

BINDING_DIRECTION

Represents the binding direction. 0/1 corresponds to
IN / OUT direction.

smallint

TABLE 184

1462

INTERFACE (Continued)

Field

IP_DEVICE_LICENSE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Primary Key field for the DEVICE_LICENSE

int

DEVICE_ID

This is the foreign key reference to the Device table

int

HASH

A unique hash for identifying a license entry in the
device. This helps to traverse through the entries
with same package name and LID.

varchar

24

PACKAGE_NAME

Name of the license package. Package defines the
features enabled by the license.
Example:SW-NI-CES-2024-L3U

varchar

64

LICENSE_ID

License ID of the chassis or the line module for
which, this entry displays license
information.Example: fJucJFgFHG

varchar

24

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 184

IP_DEVICE_LICENSE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

LICENSE_TYPE

The type of the license, which can be either normal or
trial. Values are: permanent(1), trial(2).The default
value is 1.

smallint

EXPIRY_DATE

Expiry Date of the trial license. For normal license,
the value is 0.

varchar

PRECEDENCE

Defines the priority of a particular trial license among
those having the same package and License ID. This
is primarily used for determining which license to
use, when there are many trial and normal licenses
with same package name and LID. The value range is
(0..65535)

int

LICENSE_STATE

This indicates the state of the license. Possible values:invalid(1),unused(2),active(3),expired(4)

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ETHERNET_PORT_ID

GigE Port ID.

int

IP_ADDRESS

IP address on the Ip_interface.

varchar

64

NET_MASK

Subnet mask for the interface.

varchar

64

MTU_SIZE

MTU Size for that interface.

int

CHECKSUM

Check Sum.

varchar

GIGE_PORT_TYPE

Whether the IP interface is created on a 10G cross
port or not. Non-zero value denotes a cross port.

smallint

TABLE 185

TABLE 186

Size

19

IP_INTERFACE
Size

64

IP_PORT_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

PORT_GROUP_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

NAME

Name for Port group.

varchar

USER_ID

Database ID of the USER_ instance refer a user who
created the group.

int

DESCRIPTION

Description for Port group.

varchar

255

IS_PUBLIC

Represents if the port group is public or not.
private-0, public-1.

num

(1,0)

IS_AP_GROUP

Represents if the group created using AP port(s) or
not. Non-AP Port group-0, AP Port group-1.

num

(1,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

1463

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 187
Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ETHERNET_PORT_ID

GigE Port ID.

int

PORT_NUMBER

Port Number related to the GigE Port.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

Slot Number related to the GigE Port.

int

NET_MASK

Subnet Mask for the Route.

varchar

64

GATEWAY

Gateway for the Route.

varchar

64

IP_ADDRESS

IP Address created after ''”&”'' operation of gateway.

varchar

64

METRIC

Metric.

int

FLAG

Flag.

int

CHECKSUM

Check Sum.

varchar

GIGE_PORT_TYPE

Whether the IP interface is created on a 10G cross
port or not. Non-zero value denotes a cross port.

GIGE_PORT_TY
PE

TABLE 188

Size

64

IP_SUBNET_VLAN

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the IP subnet.

int

IP_ADDRESS

IP address for subnet.

varchar

40

SUBNET_MASK

Subnet Mask of the IP subnet.

varchar

40

Size

TABLE 189

Size

IPX_NETWORK_VLAN

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the IPX network.

int

NETWORK_NUMBER

Number for IPX network.

varchar

32

FRAME_TYPE

Frame type for IPX. Possible values are 0-Not
Applicable, 1-802.2, 2-802.3, 3-Ethernet II and
4-SNAP.

num

(4,0)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Primary key for the table.

int

FABRIC_ID

Fabric ID of the associated fabric for this ISL.

int

SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID

Source domain ID of the ISL.

int

SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER

Source port number of the ISL.

smallint

DEST_DOMAIN_ID

Destination or remote domain ID of the ISL.

int

DEST_PORT_NUMBER

Destination or remote port number of the ISL.

smallint

COST

The cost of the ISl link.

int

TABLE 190

1464

IP_ROUTE

ISL

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 190

ISL (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TYPE

The type of link.

smallint

TRUSTED

Denotes whether ISL link is trusted or not.
• 0 denotes untrusted
• 1 denotes trusted.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the ISL record in the Management
application database.

timestamp

MISSING

Denotes whether ISL link is missing or not.
• 0 denotes present
• 1 states that ISL is missing

smallint

MISSING_TIME

States the missing time of the this ISL.

timestamp

missing_reason

The ISL disabled reason. For an ISL either one or
both ends might have been disabled. This field will
capture the port disable message from both side of
ISL. The data is formatted as follows:
":  ; :
".

varchar

TRUNKED

Determines whether the isl is part of a trunk or not.
The value of 0 means not trunked, 1 means this isl is
part of a trunk and -1 means not applicable status.
Default value is -1.

smallint

TABLE 191

Size

1024

ISL_CONNECTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

FABRIC_ID

This is the fabric ID

int

SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID

The Switch port ID of the Source Switch (local end of
the ISL). Maintained as a nullable foreign key to
account for ports being moved from one VF to other.

int

TARGET_SWITCH_PORT_ID

The Switch port ID of the Target Switch (remote end
of the ISL). Maintained as a nullable foreign key to
account for ports being moved from one VF to other.

int

COST

Cost of the ISL link.

int

TYPE

Type of the IS.

int

TRUSTED

Denotes whether ISL link is trusted or not. 0 denotes
untrusted and 1 is for trusted.

int

MISSING

Denotes whether ISL link is missing or not. 0 denotes
present and 1 states that ISL is missing.

int

MISSING_TIME

Missing timestamp.

timestamp

CREATION_TIME

Creation timestamp.

timestamp

TRUNKED

This column is used to determine whether the isl is
part of a trunk or not. The value of 0 means not
trunked, 1 means this isl is part of a trunk and -1
means not applicable status. Default value is -1.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1465

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 191

Definition

Format

MASTER_CONNECTION_ID

This will hold the id of the master ISL connection for
a ISL between trunk members.
The ISL Connection between masters will have its
own ID in this column.
Non trunk ISLs will have the default value of -1.

int

SOURCE_MASTER_PORT

This column will hold the trunk master port for the
source port, if the connection is trunked.
For the master connection it will have its source
por''s port number.
For non-trunk connections it will have the default
value -1.

int

TARGET_MASTER_PORT

This column will hold the trunk master port for the
target port, if the connection is trunked.
For the master connection it will have its target
port''s port number.
For non-trunk connections it will have the default
value -1.

int

TABLE 192

1466

ISL_CONNECTION

Field

Size

ISL_TRUNK_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Primary key for the table.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

Foreign key reference to Virtual Switch record
associated with the trunk group.

int

MASTER_USER_PORT

Stores the master user port for the ISL trunk..

smallint

TRUSTED

Denotes whether ISL trunk group is trusted or not. 0
denotes untrusted and 1 is for trusted.

smallint

MISSING

Denotes whether ISL trunk group is missing or not. 0
denotes present and 1 states that ISL trunk is
missing

smallint

MISSING_TIME

States the missing time of the this ISL trunk group. If
the trunk is not missing then it will be null

timestamp

MEMBER_TRACKING_STAT
US

Member added/removed status of this trunk. This is
represented as bitmap value. Each bit is set based
on membership state change. Currently only 2 bits
from LSB are used.
Bit 1 - Member added
Bit 2 - Member removed
For example if the trunk group has membership
change (some members are added and some
existing members are removed) then the value would
be 3.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 193

ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

GROUP_ID*

Foreign key reference to the trunk group table for this
member.

int

PORT_NUMBER*

Member port number for this trunk..

smallint

TRUSTED

Denotes whether ISL trunk member is trusted or not.
0 denotes untrusted and 1 is for trusted.

smallint

MISSING

Denotes whether ISL trunk member is missing or not.
0 denotes present and 1 states that ISL trunk
member is missing.

smallint

MISSING_TIME

We could change this as "States the missing time of
the this ISL trunk member. If the member is not
missing then it will be null.

timestamp

TABLE 194

Size

KEY_VAULT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

IP_ADDRESS

The IP Address (IPv4, IPv6, or hostname) of the key
vault

varchar(

PORT_NUMBER

The TCP port number for the key vault

int

PUBLIC_CERTIFICATE

The key vault''s public key certificate. Switches use
this to establish a secure connection to the key vault

varchar(

4096

CERTIFICATE_LABEL

A text name to identify the certificate

varchar(

256

POSITION_

Specifies whether this key vault is the primary key vault
or the backup key vault. 0 = primary, 1 = backup.

smallint

VENDOR_NAME

Indicates the name of the key vault vendor. For non
KMIP key vaults, this column will contain value as Not
Applicable.

varchar

TABLE 195

Size

512

256

L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_ENTRY

Field

Definition

ID
ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_ID

Format

Size

serial
L2 access control list ID, to which the ACL entry is
associated.

SEQUENCE_NUMBER

int
int

ACTION

Specifies the action:
0 = Permit
1 = Deny

smallint

SOURCE_MAC

Source MAC address.

varchar

24

SOURCE__MASK

Source MAC address mask.

varchar

24

DEST_MAC

Destination MAC address.

varchar

24

DEST_MASK

Destination MAC address mask.

varchar

24

VLAN_ID

Specifies the VLAN ID for the L2 ACL entry.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1467

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 195

L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_ENTRY (Continued)

Field

Definition

ETHERNET_TYPE

Size

varchar

24

LOG_ENABLE

Specifies whether logging is enabled or not:
1 = Enabled
0 = Not Enabled

smallint

SOURCE_TYPE

Indicates the source MAC type (any, host or mac) for
DCB Switch L2 ACL entry.

varchar

24

DEST_TYPE

Indicates the destination MAC type (any, host or mac)
for DCB Switch L2 ACL entry.

varchar

24

TABLE 196

L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST

Field

Definition

Format

ID
Specifies the ACL Type:
0 = Standard
1= Extended

smallint

ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_NUM

L2 ACL number.

int

ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_NAME

L2 ACL name.

varchar

•
•

STARTING_SEQUENCE_NUMBER

int

INCREMENTAL_VALUE

int

•
•

CLEAR_STATS

1 = Clear stats is enabled.
0 = Clear stats is disabled.

varchar

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

INT_BINDING_DIRECTION

Represents the interface binding direction. 0/1/2
corresponds to IN /OUT/BOTH direction.

smallint

10

L2_ACL_DEVICE_DEPLOY_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_ID

L2 Access control List ID for reference to the
L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST. Foreign Key for
L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST table.

int

TABLE 198

255

smallint

OPERATION_TYPE

TABLE 197

Size

serial

ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_TYPE

1468

Format

Size

L2_ACL_INTERFACE_DEPLOY_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 198

L2_ACL_INTERFACE_DEPLOY_MAP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

INBOUND_L2_ACL_ID

L2 Access control List ID of the L2 ACL selected for
inbound. Foreign Key for L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST
table.

int

INBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for inbound traffic.

smallint

OUTBOUND_L2_ACL_ID

L2 Access control List ID of the L2 ACL selected for
outbound. Foreign Key for
L2_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST table.

int

OUTBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for outbound traffic.

smallint

Definition

Format

TABLE 199

Size

L2_NEIGHBOR

Field

Size

L2_NEIGHBOR_ID

int

INTERFACE_ID

int

RMT_IP_ADDRESS

varchar

40

RMT_IF_NAME

varchar

256

LAST_SEEN_TIME

int

LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_SUBTYP
E

smallint

LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID

bytea

LLDP_REM_PORT_ID_SUBTYPE

smallint

LLDP_REM_PORT_ID

bytea

LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_VALUE

To store the MAC or Network address value in ascii
format

varchar

40

LLDP_REM_PORT_ID_VALUE

To store the MAC or Network address value in ascii
format

varchar

40

Size

TABLE 200

L3_ACL_DEVICE_DEPLOYMENT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID.

int

L3_ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST_ID

TABLE 201

int

L3_ACL_INT_DEPLOYMENT_MAP

Field

Definition

ID

Format
serial

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID.

int

INBOUND_L3_ACL_ID

L3 Access control List ID of the L3 ACL selected for
inbound.

int

INBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for inbound traffic.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1469

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 201

Definition

Format

OUTBOUND_L3_ACL_ID

L3 Access control List Id of the L3 ACL selected for
outbound. Foreign Key for ACCESS_CONTROL_LIST
table.

int

OUTBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for outbound traffic.

smallint

TABLE 202

Size

LAG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

DB ID of LAG(Port-Channel).

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

FK to owning VIRTUAL_SWITCH

int

LAG_ID

LAG ID

int

IF_INDEX

Interface index

int

IF_NAME

Interface name

varchar

ENABLED

LAG is enabled=1, disabled=0

smallint

LAG_MODE

Static or dynamic (1=dynamic, 2=static)

smallint

ACTIVE

LACP active or passive (1=active, 2=passive) valid if
mode=dynamic

smallint

TYPE

Trunking type (1=standard, 2=brocade, 3=hybrid)

smallint

IF_MODE

L2 or L3 mode

varchar

8

L2_MODE

Type of L2 mode (default=access

varchar

32

MAC_ACL_POLICY

stores the MAC ACL policy information of the LAG

varchar

64

VLAN_LIST

Comma separated vlan ID list.

text

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC address of LAG(Port-Channel).

varchar

64

IP_ADDRESS

Primary IPAddress of the LAG

varchar

128

NET_MASK

Netmask of the Primary IPAddress of the LAG

varchar

128

MINIMUM_LINKS

Least number of operationally UP links to declare the
port-channel UP. range 1..16.

int

MTU

Maximum transmission unit in bytes. range
1522..9208.

int

LOAD_BALANCE

Load balancing details.

varchar

VLAG

Specifies whether the lag is a vlag or not.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID

DB ID of LAG member(port).

int

LAG_ID

FK to owning LAG

int

NAME

Member name

varcha

TABLE 203

1470

L3_ACL_INT_DEPLOYMENT_MAP (Continued)

Field

Size

256

64

LAG_MEMBER
Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 203

LAG_MEMBER (Continued) (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TYPE

currently not used.
The default value is 0.

smallint

MEMBER_MODE

Dynamic Mode Active/passive.
The default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 204

LAST_CONFIG_UPDATE_TIME

Field

Definition

ID

Primary key.

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

The managed element id of the device. This is the
foreign key to MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

CONFIG_XPATH

The xpath string.

varchar

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Timestamp returned by the device for this particular
xpath.

bigint

TABLE 205

Size

Format

Size

1024

LAUNCH_IN_CONTEXT_MODULE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

Unique dialog name used as a module name when
launching in context.

varchar

64

DESCRIPTION

Description about the dialog features.

varchar

256

XML_FILE_NAME

The dialog XML XUL file name used to launch the
dialog.

varchar

64

PRIVILEGE_ID

This is the comma separated list of privilege IDs
required to launch this dialog. This is either the list of
values from PRIVILEGE.ID column or -1 if no privilege
is required to launch this dialog.

varchar

64

READ_WRITE_ACCESS

Specifies the read or write access privilege required
to launch this dialog.
0 = no access is required to launch this dialog.
1 = At least the read-only access is required for the
above privilege to launch this dialog.
2 = The read-write access is required for the above
privilege to launch the dialog.

int

EMPTY_DIALOG_ALLOWED

This field indicates whether the dialog can be
launched even when there are no fabrics discovered.
• 0 = Yes
• 1= No

int

INTERNAL_MODE_DIALOG

The DCFM main client is not visible when the dialog
is launched in internal mode. This mode is used
when launching from SMIA config tool.
• 0- No
• 1- Only internal mode
• 2- Internal and external

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1471

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 205

Definition

Format

LICENCE_PACKAGE_TYPE

Column to indicate whether the dialog is related to
SAN or IP license package type.
• 0 = SAN package
• 1 = IP Package

int

OPTIONAL_PARAMS

Comma separated names of all the optional
parameters such as WWN.

varchar

256

OPTIONAL_PARAMS_DESC

Comma separated descriptions for the above
optional parameters.

varchar

1024

TABLE 206

Size

LICENSE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique Number assigned for the license information.

int

LICENSE_KEY

License key string which has encoded value of number
of products, ports licensed and package which this
license isapplicable, etc.

varchar

1024

SERIAL_NO

Unique serial number string that helps to identify the
customer or organization which this license is issued
for.

varchar

255

CREATION_TIME

Time at which this license key is added

timestamp

TYPE

Type of license:
0 - Trial,
1 - Permanent.
The default value is 0.

smallint

SUB_TYPE

Sub Type of license:
• 0 - Base,
• 1 - Addon.
The default value is 0.

smallint

VALID

Is this license still considered:
0 - No,
1 - Yes.
The default value is 1.

smallint

TABLE 207

1472

LAUNCH_IN_CONTEXT_MODULE (Continued)

Field

•
•

•
•

Size

LICENSE_DOWNGRADE_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Primary key ID.

PREVIOUS_LICENSE_INFO

Previous License information during downgrade. The
details will have license type, license count like fabric,
device, port etc.

varchar

512

NEW_LICENSE_INFO

New License information during downgrade. The
details will have license type, license count like fabric,
device, port etc.

varchar

512

DOWNGRADE_TIME

Time when License is downgraded.

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 207

LICENSE_DOWNGRADE_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

DOWNGRADED_BY

User who performed license downgrade.

int

Takes the value 0 or 1.
1 - currently active downgrade
0 - inactive or older downgrade.

smallint

IS_ACTIVE

TABLE 208

•
•

LICENSE_FEATURE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

LICENSE_ID*

Foreign Key (SWITCH_LICENSE.ID) and is part of the
primary key.

int

FEATURE_ID*

Foreign Key (LICENSED_FEATURE.ID) and is part of
the primary.

int

TABLE 209

Size

LICENSE_RULE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the license rule

varchar

DESCRIPTION

Description of the rule

varchar

SCOPE

Scope of the rule - is it applicable to Fabric, switch or
ports

varchar

CATEGORY

Category of the rule - is it used by unknown - 0, asset
collection - 1, or 2 - the license manager service

smallint

ENABLE

Whether the rule needs to be considered or not. 1 consider, 0 - do not consider for calculation.
The default value is 1.

smallint

TABLE 210

Size

Size

LICENSED_FEATURE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

License feature name, a short text description.

varchar

64

DESCRIPTION

Optional detailed description about the license
feature.

varchar

256

TABLE 211

Size

LINK

Field

Definition

Format

LINK_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

TYPE

Type of the link. Currently it is always U.

varchar

1

NAME

Name of the link which is combination of device
display name and ifName of the interface which this
link associated.

varchar

255

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1473

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 212
Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

The name of this transaction synchronization lock. The
name should be upper case and should describe the
activity being synchronized, such as
MANAGED_ELEMENT_CREATION.

varchar

40

LAST_USED_BY

Identifies the transaction that last updated this lock
record, such as IP_DISCOVERY. This field is primarily
here just to have something to modify. The new value
does not need to be different than the previous value.

varchar

40

LAST_USED_TIME

Optional time when the lock was last modified. Might
be useful for debugging someday.

timestamp

TABLE 213

LSAN_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

BB_FABRIC_ID

Backbone fabric DB ID.

int

FCR_FABRIC_ID

FID assigned to edge fabric.

int

DEVICE_PORT_WWN

Device port WWN of physical device.

char

23

PHYSICAL_PID

PID of physical device.

char

6

Size

TABLE 214

Size

LSAN_TAG_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique id for FCR LSAN Tags configuration

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

Database identifier of virtual switch which represent
FC Router.

int

TAG_ENABLED

Indicates whether the LSAN tag is enabled or not.
Possible values are 0 -false, 1 - true.

smallint

ENFORCE_TAGS

List of enforcement tags configured in FC router.
Enforce tag reduces the resources used in an FC
router by limiting the number of LSAN zones that will
be enforced in that FC router. There can be maximum
of 8 enforce tags per FC router.

varchar

128

SPEED_TAGS

Speed tag configured in FC router. Speed tag allows
you to speed up the discovery process by importing
the devices into the remote edge fabrics when the
devices come online.

varchar

16

Size

TABLE 215

1474

LOCK

LSAN_PROXY_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

FCR_FABRIC_ID*

FID assigned to edge fabric

int

PROXY_PID*

Proxy device PID

char

6

STATE

State of the device

varchar

128

LSAN_DEVICE_ID*

LSAN_DEVICE record reference

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 216

LSAN_ZONE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

BB_FABRIC_ID

Backbone fabric DB ID.

int

EDGE_FABRIC_ID

FID assigned to edge fabric.

int

NAME

LSAN zone name.

varchar

BACKBONE

0= is not a backbone lsan zone,
1= is a backbone lsan zone.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 217

128

LSAN_ZONE_DB_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

BB_FABRIC_ID

Backbone fabric db ID.

int

EDGE_FABRIC_ID

FID assigned to edge fabric.

int

ZONE_CONTENT

LSAN zone string.

text

BACKBONE

0= is not a backbone lsan zone configuration.
1= is a backbone lsan zone configuration.

smallint

TABLE 218

Size

Size

LSAN_ZONE_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

LSAN_ZONE_ID*

LSAN_ZONE record reference.

int

MEMBER_PORT_WWN*

Zone member WWN.

char

23

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MCT_CLIENT_ID

MCT Client db ID.

int

RBRIDGE_ID

MCT Client rbridge ID.

int

CLIENT_NAME

MCT Client name.

varchar

PORT_ID

MCT Client port foreign key.

int

OPER_STATE

MCT Client operational state.

smallint

DEPLOY_STATE

MCT Client deployment state:
• Deployed(0)
• Undeployed(1)

smallint

VCN_MEMBER_ID

Virtual Cluster Node member Cluster id foreign key.

int

TABLE 219

TABLE 220

Size

MCT_CLIENT

(100)

MAC_FILTER

Field

Definition

ID

Format
serial

MAC_FILTER_NUMBER

MAC Filter number.

int

FILTER_ACTION

Defined Permit - 0 or Deny -1

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1475

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 220

MAC_FILTER (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DESCRIPTION

Description associated with each MAC Filter entry.

varchar

256

SOURCE_MAC_ADDRESS

Source MAC Address.

varchar

24

SOURCE_ADDRESS_MASK

Source MAC address mask.

varchar

24

DEST_MAC_ADDRESS

Destination MAC Address.

varchar

24

DEST_ADDRESS_MASK

Destination MAC address mask.

varchar

24

ETHERNET_TYPE

This column specifies the Ethernet Type. This field
can take 0(not used), 1(etype), 2(llc), 3(snap).

smallint

OPERARTOR

This column specifies the operator. This field can
take 0(=), 1(!=), 2(<), 3(>).

smallint

FRAME_NUMBER

This column specifies the Frame Number. Range is
from 0600-FFFF in hex presentation.

int

OPERATION_TYPE
DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

INT_BINDING_DIRECTION

Represents the interface binding direction. 0/1/2
corresponds to IN / OUT/BOTH direction.

smallint

TABLE 221

Definition

Format

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID.

int

MAC_FILTER_ID

MAC FILTER Id for reference to the MAC_FILTER.

int

Size

MAC_FILTER_INT_DEPLOYMENT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_ID

Deployment configuration ID. Foreign Key for
DEPLOYMENT table.

int

INBOUND_MAC_FILTER_ID

MAC FILTER Id of the MAC Filter selected for inbound.
Foreign Key for MAC_FILTER table.

int

INBOUND_WRITE_TO_DEVICE

1/0 corresponding to Write to device/not write to
device for inbound traffic.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Sequence number of the records

int

NAME

Name of the mac group, for internal representation
of the group.

varchar

TABLE 223

10

MAC_FILTER_DEV_DEPLOYMENT_MAP

Field

TABLE 222

1476

varchar

Size

MAC_GROUP
Size

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 223

MAC_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

MAC_GROUP_ID

The ID will represent any one of the following.
1
A cluster wide unique identifier defined in
Network OS switch to be used in mac-based
GVLAN classification at access port. Allowed
range is 0 through 500 both inclusive.
2
INTERNAL GROUP ID - A dummy group ID (-1),
used to represent one or more mac addresses
that can be associated with a GVLAN.
3
CUSTOM MAC GROUP ID: Reserved for future
usage if Network Advisor provides an option
through UI to create MAC GROUPs.

Int

TYPE

This indicates if the mac group is internal to BNA or
mapped to device. 0- internal mac group, 1- external
mac group defined in network OS switch, 2- User
defined mac groups.

int

TABLE 224

Size

MAC_GROUP_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key. Sequence number of the records.

int

MAC_GROUP_DB_ID

Foreign Key Reference to the MAC_GROUP table.

int

MAC_ADDRESS

Mac Address that belongs to the Mac group.

varchar

64

MASK

Mask applied on the mac address.

varchar

64

TABLE 225

MANAGED_ELEMENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

An ID that is unique across managed elements of all
types: SAN physical switches, SAN logical switches, IP
switches, and hosts. Also the primary key for the
MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

PLACEHOLDER

Not used. iBatis/Abator requires at least one non-serial
column to generate correct objects. The default value is
0.

int

TABLE 226

Size

Size

MAPS_EVENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

HOST_TIME

The time at which the server processed the event.

timestamp

CATEGORY

The violations category. i.e. Port Health, Fabric Health,
etc.

int

VIOLATION_TYPE

The type of the violation. i.e. CRC, ITW.

int

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

The managed element corresponding to this event.

int

ORIGIN_FABRIC_ID

The fabric from which the event originated. Retaining
this id as historical data.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1477

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 226

Definition

Format

SWITCH_PORT_ID

Nullable foreign key. The FC port for which the event
occurred. This will only be populated for port events.

int

FCIP_CIRCUIT_ID

Nullable foreign key. The FCIP tunnel circuit for which
the event occurred. This will only be populated for FCIP
tunnel events.

int

FRU_NAME

For switch policy status events, the object name is
provided in the event and indicates the name of the
FRU affected. i.e. PS 1, Fan 2. As this FRU object name
is only provided for one category of events, making the
column nullable.

varchar

VM_ID

Nullable foreign key. The VM for which the event
occurred. This will only be populated for vCenter
events.

int

FLOW_DEFINITION_ID

Nullable foreign key. The NP flow definition for which
the event occurred. This will only be populated for flow
events

int

INTERFACE_ID

Denotes interface_id for NOS interface related interface
violations. This will only be populated for NOS Ethernet
related port Events, for other FC ports of NOS
switch_port_id will be populated.

int

TABLE 227

Size

32

MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

MAPS_EVENT_ID

The corresponding maps_event.

int

SWITCH_TIME

The switch timestamp from the event.

timestamp

RULE_NAME

The name of the threshold rule.

varchar

32

RULE_CONDITION

The threshold condition in string format. i.e. CRC > 30

varchar

128

TIME_BASE

The time base for the threshold. 0 - None, 1 - Minute, 2
- Hour, 3 - Day

int

ACTIONS

A bit map for the actions configured for the rule. 0 None, 1 - RASLOG, 2 - SNMP, 4 - Email, 8 - Fence Port,
16 - SW_ST_DOWN, 32 - SW_ST_MARGINAL.

int

CURRENT_VALUE

The current value of the measure that triggered the
violation.

varchar

SWITCH_ENABLED_ACTI
ONS

MAPS actions enabled on the switch at the time the
violation occurred.

int

TABLE 228

1478

MAPS_EVENT (Continued)

Field

Size

32

MAPS_EVENT_CAUSE_ACTION

Field

Definition

Format

VIOLATION_TYPE

The type of the violation. i.e. CRC, ITW, as defined in
MapsConstants.

int

ACTION

Description of the recommended action for the MAPS
violation.

varchar

Size

4096

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 229

MAPS_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

The id of the virtual switch.

int

NAME

The name of the MAPS policy.

varchar

IS_ACTIVE

Indicates if the policy is the active policy on the switch.
0 - No, 1 - Yes.

int

IS_DEFAULT

Indicates if the policy is a default policy on the switch. 0
- No, 1 - Yes.

int

TABLE 230

32

MARCHING_ANTS

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

THRESHOLD1_VALUE

The marching ants low boundary threshold value
(T1).

int

THRESHOLD2_VALUE

The marching ants high boundary threshold value
(T2).

int

TABLE 231

Size

Size

MEASURE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key column.

int

MEASURE_TYPE

Measure type 0 - SNMP MIB, 1-- Expression 2-- EE
Monitor counter 3-- HBA counter,4 - Custom, 5 NetworkPatroller, 6 - NOS Ethernet Port optics etc.

smallint

INDEX_TYPE

Identifies the index type for a given SNMP MIB or
Expression measure. Various index type supported
are 0 - UNKNOWN, 1 - SCALAR, 2 - IF_INDEX,
3 - ETHER_STATS_INDEX, 4 - CONN_UNIT_INDEX, 5 FCIP_LINK_TABLE_INDEX, 6 - CUSTOM, 7 SW_TEMP_SENSOR_INDEX, 8 SW_FAN_SENSOR_INDEX, 9 SW_POWER_SENSOR_INDEX. For non-SNMP
measures like EE Monitors, Ping statistics etc. index
type is not applicable. In that case index type would
be updated as 0 - Unknown.

smallint

NAME

Name of the measure.

varchar

64

DETAIL

For SNMP MIB, stores the OID, for expression, stores
the expression formula.

varchar

1024

UNIT

Unit string thats used for displaying the chart.

varchar

64

DESCRIPTION

Description for the measure. Default: 1

varchar

512

IS_SYSTEM

Indicates whether this is a system built in measure,
for system expressions , user cannot delete it.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1479

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 232

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

DESCRIPTION

Description about recipient.

varchar

256

IP_ADDRESS

IP Address of the recipient.

varchar

128

PORT

Port number of the recipient.

int

RECIPIENT_TYPE_ID

Recipient Type (Syslog or SNMP).

int

ENABLED

If forwarding to destination is enabled.

smallint

SOURCE_ADDRESS_ADD
ED

If source address is added as another varbind in trap. -1
for Syslog i.e RECIPIENT_TYPE_ID: 2.
Default value is -1.

smallint

REPEATER_ENABLED

If filtering is disabled. -1 for Syslog i.e
RECIPIENT_TYPE_ID: 2.
Default value is -1.

smallint

VERSION

Snmp version(v1/v2/v3)

varchar

TABLE 233

Size

8

MIGRATION_HISTORY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

SOURCE_RELEASE

Source release name, version number and patch
number. Example Network Advisor 11.3.0a.

varchar

SOURCE_RELEASE_BUILD_NUM
BER

Source release build number.

int

TARGET_RELEASE

Target release name and version. Example Network
Advisor 12.1.0.

varchar

TARGET_RELEASE_BUILD_NUMB
ER

Target release build number.

int

MIGRATION_TIME

Date and Time at which this migration completed.

timestamp

Field

Definition

Format

MODULE_TYPE_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

MODULE_TYPE

Type of the module.

NAME

Name of the module configured in this device.

DESCRIPTION

Description of the module.

varchar

128

NUM_PORTS

Number of ports present in this module.

num

(4,0)

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Identifies the table name which more
properties/attributes about this module stored.
Possible value is FOUNDRY_MODULE.

varchar

32

IS_PRESENT

Identifies the module is present or not. Not
Present-0, Present-1.

num

(1,0)

IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE

Identifies the module is management module or not.
Other module-0, Management module-1.

num

(1,0)

TABLE 234

1480

MESSAGE_RECIPIENT

Field

Size

128

128

MODULE
Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 234

MODULE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

NUM_CPUS

The number of CPUs present in the module.

smallint

HW_REVISION

The vendor-specific hardware revision string. Refer
entPhysicalHardwareRev of
RFC4133-ENTITY-MIB.mib for more details.

varchar

64

FW_REVISION

The vendor-specific firmware revision string. Refer
entPhysicalFirmwareRev of
RFC4133-ENTITY-MIB.mib for more details.

varchar

64

SW_REVISION

The vendor-specific software revision string. Refer
entPhysicalSoftwareRev of RFC4133-ENTITY-MIB.mib
for more details.

varchar

64

MODULE_STATUS

Specifies the status of the module. Possible values
are 0, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11.
0 - moduleEmpty,
2 - moduleGoingDown,
3 - moduleRejected,
4 - moduleBad,
8 - moduleConfigured,
9 - moduleComingUp,
10 - moduleRunning,
11 - moduleBlocked.

int

REDUNDANT_STATUS

Specifies the redundant status of the module.
Possible values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
1 - other,
2 - active,
3 - standby,
4 - crashed,
5 - comingUp.
Non management modules always return value as
other. Management module returns the rest of the
states.

int

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

Specifies the operational status of the module.
Possible values for NI series products are as below:
• CARD_STATE_NOT_PRESENT,
• CARD_STATE_INIT,
• CARD_STATE_BOOT,
• CARD_STATE_LP_SYNC,
• CARD_STATE_INTERACTIVE,
• CARD_STATE_SW_LOADED,
• CARD_STATE_STRIPE_SYNC,
• CARD_STATE_UP,
• CARD_STATE_DOWN,
• CARD_STATE_POWERED_OFF,
• CARD_STATE_RECOVERY,
• CARD_STATE_REBOOT,
• CARD_STATE_SYNC_FID.
Empty string indicates, module has not been inserted
to the chassis or not applicable for this product.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

1481

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 235
Field

Definition

Format

MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MODULE_ID

Database ID of the MODULE instance.

int

SLOT_ID

Database ID of the SLOT instance.

int

TABLE 236

Definition

Format

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

NAME

The group name that this administrative group is
associated with.

varchar

ID

Identifies the administrative group.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE instance from which this
admin group is retrieved.

int

Size

255

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP_INTERFACE_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP_INTERFAC
E_RELATION_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP instance.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Database ID of the INTERFACE instance.

int

TABLE 238

Size

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP

Field

TABLE 237

1482

MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT

Size

MPLS_LSP

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Refers to the subtype of the LSP where additional
attributes/properties of different type of LSP stored. The
possible values are MPLS_RSVP_LSP, MPLS_LSP.

varchar

32

NAME

Name of the Label Switched Path.

varchar

255

DESTINATION_IP_ADDRESS

Destination IP Address of the egress LSR associated with
this tunnel instance.

varchar

255

OPER_STATUS

Actual operational status of this tunnel, which is typically but
not limited to, a function of the state of individual segments
of this tunnel. Up-1, Down-2, Testing-3, Unknown-4,
Dormant-5, Not present-6, Lower Layer Down-7.

smallint

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE Instance from which this LSP
retrieved.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Database tables and fields

TABLE 239

MPLS_PATH

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_PATH_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the MPLS Path as configured in the device. Refer
mplsTunnelHopPathOptionName of RFC3812 for more
details.

varchar

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE Instance from which this path
information retrieved.

int

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_PATH_HOP_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

HOP_INDEX

Index of the MPLS hop.

int

HOP_IP_ADDRESS

The Tunnel Hop Address for this tunnel hop.

varchar

HOP_TYPE

Denotes whether this tunnel hop is routed in a strict or loose
fashion. Possible Values are Strict-1 and Loose-2.

smallint

MPLS_PATH_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_PATH Instance which this hop is
part of.

int

TABLE 240

TABLE 241

I

Size

255

MPLS_PATH_HOP
Size

255

MPLS_RSVP_LSP

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

IS_ENABLED

Represents whether the LSP is enabled. Enabled-1,
Disabled-0.

num

(1,0)

IS_BYPASS

Represents if the LSP is a Bypass LSP or not. Not a
Bypass-0, Bypass LSP-1. Currently ByPass LSPs are not
supported. So the value will be always 0.

num

(1,0)

FROM_IP_ADDRESS

Represents the Source IP Address of the LSP.

varchar

255

METRIC

Represents the metric of the LSP used by the routing
protocols to determine the relative preference among
several LSPs towards a given destination. Accepts a range
of 1 - 65535.

int

PATH_SELECT_MODE

Specifies the path selection mode to use. Refer
mplsLspPathSelectMode MIB of foundry.mib for more
details and possible values.

smallint

PATH_SELECT_PATH

The user-selected pathname when the Path Selection mode
is either Manual or Unconditional. If the device returns null
or empty string, this value would be primary.

varchar

REVERT_TIMER

The number of seconds to wait after the primary or selected
path comes up before traffic reverts to that path. A value of
0 indicates that it will switch immediately after the current
working path goes down. The range of values supported are
0-65535.

int

TIE_BREAKING_MODE

Specifies the tie breaking mode for selecting the
Constrained Shortest Path First(CSPF) equal-cost paths.
Possible values are Random-1, LeastFill-2 and MostFill-3.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

255

1483

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 241

MPLS_RSVP_LSP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

IS_USE_LSP_FOR_OSPF_SHOR
TCUTS

Indicates that this LSP allows shortcut between nodes in an
AS. OSPF includes the LSP in its SPF calculation. Possible
values are Not Allowed-0 and Allowed-1.

num

(1,0)

IS_USE_LSP_FOR_ISIS_SHORT
CUTS

Flag to indicate if the LSP is to be used by ISIS destinations. num

(1,0)

LSP_FOR_ISIS_SHORTCUTS_LE
VEL

ISIS level to which the LSP is advertised into

int

LSP_FOR_ISIS_SHORTCUTS_RE
LATIVE_METRIC

Add or subtract relative metric.

int

IS_LSP_FOR_ISIS_SHORTCUTS_
ANNOUNCE

Flag that indicates if the LSP is to be announced into ISIS
domain.

num

LSP_FOR_ISIS_SHORTCUTS_AN
NOUNCE_METRIC

If announced into ISIS domain metric used by the LSP.

int

TABLE 242

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ACTUALLY_ROUTED_HOP

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ACTUALLY_RO
UTED_HOP_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

HOP_INDEX

Index of actually routed hop.

varchar

HOP_IP_ADDRESS

The Tunnel Hop Address for this tunnel hop.

int

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP instance which this
hop is part of.

int

TABLE 243

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP Unique database generated identifier.
_DB_ID

int

AFFINITY_TYPE

Represents the affinity type of the MPLS Admin Group.
Possible values are Unknown-0, Include Any-1, Include
All-2 and Exclude Any-3.

smallint

MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_ADMIN_GROUP Instance.

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP Database ID of the
_CONTAINER_DB_ID
MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP_CONTAINER
instance.

1484

Size

255

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP

Field

TABLE 244

(1,0)

Size

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP_CONTAINER

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_ADMIN_GROUP
_CONTAINER_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS_
DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS
instance.

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMET
ERS_DB_ID

Database ID of the
MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMETERS instance.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

TABLE 245

Database tables and fields

I

Size

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMETERS

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_FRR_PARAMETE
RS_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

BANDWIDTH

Specifies the bandwidth constraint for the MPLS Fast
Reroute Path. The value 0 means that the detour route
uses a best-effort value for bandwidth.

int

HOP_LIMIT

Represents the limit for the number of hops the LSP
can traverse. Accepted range is 0 - 255.

num

(3,0)

IS_FACILITY_BACKUP

Specifies whether the request for Facility backup is
enabled or not. If the FRR mode is facility then this
value will be 1. 0 otherwise.

num

(1,0)

SETUP_PRIORITY

The setup priority for MPLS Fast Reroute.Allowed range
between 0-7.

num

(1,0)

HOLD_PRIORITY

'The hold priority for MPLS Fast Reroute. Allowed range
between 0-7.

num

(1,0)

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP instance which
these reroute parameters associated with.

int

TABLE 246

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS_D
B_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

IS_ADAPTIVE

Indicates if the LSP supports adaptive mechanism or
not. Non Adaptive-0, Adaptive-1.

num

BFD_TRANSMIT

This object specifies the minimum interval, in
milliseconds, that the local system would like to use
when transmitting The Bidirectional Forwarding
Detection(BFD) Control packets. Accepts a range of
50-30000.

int

BFD_RECEIVE

This object specifies the minimum interval, in
milliseconds, between received Bidirectional
Forwarding Detection (BFD) Control packets the local
system is capable of supporting. Accepts a range of
50-30000.

int

BFD_MULTIPLIER

The Bidirectional Forwarding Detect time multiplier.
Accepts a range of 3-50.

int

COS

The Class of Service for this LSP. Allowed range is 0-7
and 255. 255 means COS is not explicitly configured.

smallint

HOP_LIMIT

Represents the limit for the number of hops the LSP
can traverse. Accepted range is 0-255.

num

(3,0)

IS_CSPF

Specifies whether the Constrained Shortest Path First
(CSPF) calculation is enabled. Possible values are
Disabled-0, Enabled-1.

num

(1,0)

MTU

Specifies the Maximum IP Packet Size of the packets
without being fragmented. Valid range is 0-65535.

num

(4,0)

SETUP_PRIORITY

The setup priority of the tunnel. Valid range is 0-7.

num

(1,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

(1,0)

1485

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 246

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

HOLD_PRIORITY

The holding priority of the tunnel. Valid range between
0-7.

num

(1,0)

IS_RECORD_ROUTES

Specifies whether the route is actually recorded route
or not. Not Recorded-0 and Recorded-1.

num

(1,0)

REOPTIMIZE_TIMER

The number of seconds from the beginning of one
reoptimization attempt to the beginning of the next
attempt. Valid range is 300-65535 seconds. 0 is also
accepted.

int

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP instance which
these parameters are associated with.

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PATH_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PATH instance
which these parameters are associated with.

int

TABLE 247

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PATH

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PATH_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

PATH_TYPE

The type of path that is active, i.e., a primary path, a
standby path, or a generic secondary path. Possible
values are Other-1, Primary-2, Standby-3 and
Secondary-4.

smallint

IS_STANDBY

Specifies whether the path is standby or not. Currently
it is unused and value is always 0 (Not standby)

num

MPLS_LSP_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP instance.

int

MPLS_PATH_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_PATH instance.

int

TABLE 248

1486

(1,0)

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_TUNNEL_RESOURCE

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_TUNNEL_ Unique database generated identifier.
RESOURCE_DB_ID

int

MAX_RATE

Specifies the maximum data rate (kilo bits/secs) of
the packet travelling over the LSP.

int

MEAN_RATE

Specifies the mean data rate (kilo bits/secs) of the
packet travelling over the LSP.

int

MAX_BURST

The maximum burst size in bytes that the LSP can
send at the maximum rate.

int

MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAME
TERS_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_RSVP_LSP_PARAMETERS
instance.

int

TABLE 249

Size

Size

MPLS_SERVICE

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

NAME

Specifies the name of the MPLS Service.

varchar

VCID

Virtual Circuit Identifier of the MPLS Service.

bigint

Size

255

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 249

MPLS_SERVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_TYPE

The type of the MPLS Service. Local VLL-1, Remote
VLL-2, VLL-3, VPLS-4, Admin Group-8, Path-9, RSVP
LSP-10.

smallint

VLL_MODE

Specifies the Virtual Local Loop (VLL) Mode. Possible
values are Unknown-0, Raw-1 and Taggged-2.

smallint

STATUS

Status of the MPLS Service. All Peers Up-1, All Peers
Down-2, Some Peers Down-3, Undefined-0.

smallint

CONFLICTS

The type of Conflict. Possible values are None-0,
Name Mismatch-1, VLL Mode Mismatch-2, Peer
Incomplete-4, No Endpoints-8, Peer Missing-16,
Duplicate VCID-32, Unknown-65535.

int

LAST_UPDATED_TIME

Time when this service record last updated in the
database.

num

(20,0)

Size

TABLE 250

Size

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_R
ELATION_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MPLS_SERVICE_DB_ID

Database ID of the MPLS_SERVICE instance.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE instance.

int

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Specifies the type of MPLS Service Relation with
Device. Possible values are VLL_DEVICE_RELATION
and VPLS_DEVICE_RELATION.

varchar

32

NAME

Name of the MPLS Service.

varchar

255

COS

This value indicates the Class Of Service for this
endpoint (VLL/VPLS). Allowed range is 0-7 and 255.
255 means COS is not explicitly configured.

smallint

MTU

Represents the maximum packet size configured on
the VLL/VPLS instance.

int

TABLE 251

MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT
_RELATION_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_R
ELATION_DB_ID

Database ID of the
MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATION instance.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Database ID of the INTERFACE instance associated
with this end point (VLL/VPLS).

int

TABLE_SUBTYPE

The Type of the MPLS Service endpoint relation.
Possible values are VLL_ENDPOINT_RELATION and
VPLS_ENDPOINT_RELATION.

varchar

TAG_MODE

This value indicates the vlan mode for this endpoint.
Possible values are Tagged-1, Untagged-2.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

255

32

1487

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 251

Definition

Format

VLAN_ID

Specifies the Outer VLAN ID value of this endpoint
(VLL/VPLS).

smallint

OPER_STATUS

Operational status of the endpoint. Possible values
are Up-1, Down-2.

num

TAG_TYPE

The type of tagging supported. Possible values are
Untagged-1, Dual-2 and Inner VLAN/ISID-3. ISID
applicable only when dual tagging enabled for VPLS.

smallint

INNER_VLAN_ID

This value indicates the inner tag for this endpoint. If
tagging type is dual, then it returns the inner vlan id
of the end point (VLL/VPLS). If tagging type is ISID
and Untagged this value will be 0.

smallint

TABLE 252

Size

(2,0)

MPLS_SERVICE_PEER_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_PEER_REL
ATION_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_R
ELATION_DB_ID

Database ID of the
MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATION instance.

int

PEER_DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the peer device.

int

PW_INDEX

The pseudo-wire service index Mask.

int

PEER_IP

The IP of the Peer Device of the PW/PE maintenance
protocol entity.

varchar

OPER_STATUS

Operational Status of the peer with the MPLS
Service. Refer PwOperStatus MIB of foundry.mib for
more details and possible values.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

MRP_RING_ID

Auto generated database ID for MRP ring.

int

RING_ID

User configured unique ring number for MRP ring,
Valid values are 1 – 255.

num

(8,0)

RING_NAME

Represents name of MRP ring.

varchar

255

STATUS

Computed Status of MRP ring. Status is computed
based on MRP_RING devices. Possible status values
are Normal-1, Warning-2 and Critical-3

smallint

LAST_UPDATED

Time when this ring record was last updated in the
database.

bigint

TABLE 253

TABLE 254

1488

MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT_RELATION (Continued)

Field

Size

255

MRP_RING
Size

MRP_RING_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

MRP_RING_DEVICE_DB_ID

Auto generated database ID for device in MRP Ring.

int

MRP_RING_ID

Database ID of MRP ring.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of member device.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 254

MRP_RING_DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

PORT_VLAN_DB_ID

The database ID of the port VLAN. The master VLAN
in the topology group used by this ring. If a topology
group is used by MRP, the master VLAN controls the
MRP settings for all VLANs in the topology group.

int

MRP_RING_NAME

User configured name for the ring.

varchar

TOPO_GRP_ID

Topology group ID.

int

STATE

Whether MRP is enabled or disabled on the device.
Disabled-1, Enabled -2.

smallint

ROLE

Represents role of device in MRP topology. Master-2,
Member-3.

smallint

HELLO_TIME

The interval, in milliseconds, at which the Forwarding
port on the ring’s master node sends Ring Health
Packets (RHPs).

int

PRE_FWD_TIME

The number of milliseconds a MRP interface that has
entered the Pre forwarding state will wait before
changing to the Forwarding state.

int

PRI_PORT_INTERFACE_ID

Interface database ID for the Primary port of the
device.

int

PRI_PORT_STATE

State of device’s primary port. Other-1,
Pre-Forwarding- 2, Forwarding-3, Blocking-4,
Disabled-5.

smallint

PRI_PORT_TYPE

Type of device’s primary port. Other-1, Regular
port-2, Tunnel port-3.

smallint

PRI_PORT_ACTIVE_INTERFA
CE_ID

Interface database ID of an primary active port,
which is sending RHPs.

int

SEC_PORT_INTERFACE_ID

Interface database ID for the Secondary port of the
device.

int

SEC_PORT_STATE

State of device’s secondary port. Other-1,
Pre-Forwarding- 2, Forwarding-3, Blocking-4,
Disabled-5.

smallint

SEC_PORT_TYPE

Type of device’s secondary port. Other-1, Regular
port-2, Tunnel port-3.

smallint

SEC_PORT_ACTIVE_INTERF
ACE_ID

Interface database ID of an secondary active port,
which is receiving RHPs.

int

RHP_TX

The number of RHPs sent on the active interface.

bigint

RHP_RC

The number of RHP packets received on the
interface.

bigint

STATE_CHANGED

The number of MRP interface state changes that
have occurred.

int

TC_BPDU_RC

The number of Topology Change RHPs received on
the interface. A Topology Change RHP indicates that
the ring topology has changed.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

255

1489

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 254

MRP_RING_DEVICE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

STATUS

Computed status of device in MRP Ring. Possible
status values are Normal-1, Warning-2 and Critical-3.

smallint

LAST_UPDATED

Time when this record was last updated in the
database.

bigint

TABLE 255

N2F_PORT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

Virtual switch ID of AG for N to F_port mapping,
foreign key to VIRTUAL_SWITCH table.

int

N_PORT

Port number of port type N_Port which is being
mapped, One N_Port can be mapped to multiple
F_ports.

smallint

F_PORT

Port number of port type F_Port which is being
mapped.

smallint

TABLE 256

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the Network.

int

Size

NETWORK_SCOPE_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

NAME

Name of the Scope.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Description of the Scope.

varchar

512

HANDLER_CLASS_NAME

Fully defined Handler Class for the predefined
SCOPE.

varchar

128

Definition

Format

Size

TABLE 258

Size

NIC_PROFILE

Field
ID*

int

NAME

The name of the network interface in the format
network interface name / host address.

varchar

255

IP_ADDRESS

The host address of the interface.

varchar

128

Size

TABLE 259

1490

Size

NETWORK_VLAN

Field

TABLE 257

Size

NPORT_WWN_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

AG switch reference on which the Nport wwn mapping
resides.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 259

NPORT_WWN_MAP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

N_PORT

N Port through which AG is connected to the edge
switch

smallint

DEVICE_PORT_WWN

Device Port which is mapped to the N port. This device
could be offline device as well.

char

23

Size

TABLE 260

Size

NP_FLOW_DEFINITION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

NAME

The name of the table.

varchar

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

The id for the virtual switch.

int

SRCDEV

Comma separated list of source device ports.

varchar

1024

DSTDEV

Comma separated list of destination device ports.

varchar

1024

SRCPORT

Comma separated list of source switch ports.

varchar

1024

DSTPORT

Comma separated list of destination switch ports.

varchar

1024

BIDIR

This specifies if traffic in both direction has to be
monitored, where, 0 - false, 1 - true.

smallint

SFID

Source fabric ID.

int

DFID

Destination fabric ID

int

SRCDOMAIN

Source domain ID

int

DSTDOMAIN

Destination domain ID

int

LUNID

Comma separate list of LUN IDs

varchar

1024

OXID

FC Originator Exchange ID for the frame.

varchar

1024

QOS

Quality of Service, can be comma separated values
of: 1 - low, 2 - medium, 3 - high.

varchar

1024

“OPTION”

A bitmask for options with following bit mapping:
Noactive (0th bit) = 2^0 = 1 Noconfig (1st bit) = 2^1
= 2 NoZoneCheck (2nd bit) = 2^2 = 4

int

SCSICMD

SCSI command frame types.

varchar

32

TYPE

Frame type value

varchar

32

RCTL

Routing control byte.

varchar

32

PROTOCOL_TYPE

Protocol types.

varchar

32

FRAME_OFFSET

Generic frame offset in format of byte offset, mask,
value.

varchar

1024

“SIZE”

Size of the frame payload. Range: 64 bytes to max
2112 bytes, 0 for random size.

int

PATTERN

String to specify the pattern of the payload.

varchar

LAST_UPDATED_TIME

Last updated time

timestamp

MONITOR_FEATURE

Flow Monitor feature state. 0 - not selected, 1 deactivated, 2 - selected and activated.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

20

32

1491

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 260

Definition

Format

GENERATOR_FEATURE

Flow generator feature state. 0 - not selected, 1 deactivated, 2 - selected and activated.

int

MIRROR_FEATURE

Flow mirror feature state. 0 - not selected, 1 deactivated, 2 - selected and activated.

int

IS_PREDEFINED

Flag which identifies if the flow definition is one of the
pre-defined flow definitions on the switch.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

FLOW_DEFINITION_ID

The id of the flow definition

int

FEATURE

Feature this sub flow is associated with. Feature can
be one of the following: Monitor - 0, Generator - 1,
Mirror - 2

int

SRCDEV

Source device port.

varchar

32

DSTDEV

Destination device port.

varchar

32

SRCPORT

Switch Source port.

varchar

32

DSTPORT

Switch Destination port.

smallint

BIDIR

This specifies if traffic in both direction has to be
monitored, where, 0 - false, 1 - true

SFID

Source fabric ID

int

DFID

Destination fabric ID

int

SRCDOMAIN

Source domain ID

int

DSTDOMAIN

Destination domain ID

int

LUNID

LUN ID.

varchar

LAST_UPDATED_TIME

Last updated time

timestamp

IS_MISSING

Is the sub flow no more available on the switch? 0 false, 1 - true.

smallint

OXID

FC Originator Exchange ID for the frame..

int

RXID

FC Responder Exchange ID for the frame.

int

CS_CTL

Frame header CS_CTL..

int

"SIZE"

Size of the frame payload. Range: 64 bytes to max
2112 bytes, 0 for random size.

int

PATTERN

String to specify the pattern of the payload.

varchar

32

TABLE 261

TABLE 262

1492

NP_FLOW_DEFINITION (Continued)

Field

Size

NP_SUB_FLOW
Size

32

OUI_GUESSED_DEVICE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

Size

OUI*

Vendor OUI.

char

6

TYPE

Guessed device type for this vendor.

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 263

OUI_VENDOR

Field

Definition

Format

Size

OUI*

Vendor OUI, 6-digit hexadecimal number which can
have leading digits as zero.

char

6

VENDOR

Vendor name.

varchar

64

VENDOR_CATEGORY

Default is ‘none’.

varchar

32

Format

Size

varchar

128

TABLE 264

PASSWORD_HISTORY

Field

Definition

USER_NAME
PASSWORD_UPDATED_
DATETIME

The date and time the user updated password recently.

timestamp

PREVIOUS_PASSWORD

User''s Previous password

varchar

512

Size

TABLE 265

PBR_INTERFACE_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key.

int

POLICY_ID

PBR policy ID.

int

INTERFACE_NAME

Name of the ingress interface.

varchar

IP_TYPE

Defines the ip type, v4 or v6, of the pbr policy the
interface is bound to.
Value 1 indicates IPv4 policy. Value 2 indicates IPv6
policy.

int

ALLOW_VLAN

Indicates if the packets arriving at the ingress ports
allow all VLANs or not.

smallint

TABLE 266

32

PERF_COLLECTOR

Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

NAME

Size

varchar

128

STATUS

Status of the collector. if the value is set to "E" means
the collector is enabled state and "D" means
disabled.

char

1

TYPE

Target type of the SNMP collector data. The target
type for,
• device level collector is 0
• port level collector is 1.

num

(2,0)

POLLING_INTERVAL

Time interval in seconds; indicates the frequency
with which the collector will poll the device to get the
data.

int

CREATED_TIME_SECONDS

Collector created time.

int

PROPS_STR

Serialized string for the threshold or rearm property.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

256

1493

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 267
Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key.

int

RULE_ID

PBR rule id.

int

NEXT_HOP_SEQUENCE

The sequence of the next hop entry that corresponds to
a rule within a route map. The sequence of 1 indicates
it is the first next hop to be tried for that rule. This is a
running integer.

int

HOP_TYPE

The Next hop type. 1 indicates INTERFACE, 2 indicates
IP_ADDRESS, 3 indicates FLOOD VLAN.

smallint

HOP_VALUE

Depending on the hop type the value can be an IP
Address, Vlan id or Interface name.

varchar

PRESERVE_VLAN

0 indicates do not preserve vlan,
1 indicates preserve vlan.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key.

int

POLICY_NAME

The name of the pbr policy.

varchar

IP_POLICY_TYPE

Defines the ip type of the policy, v4, v6 or both v4 and
v6. Type v4 will have a value 1, type v6 will have a value
2, both will have a value 3.

smallint

OPERATION_TYPE

Indicates the action to take on the policy. 1 means ADD,
2 means EDIT, 3 means DELETE.

smallint

DEPLOYMENT_ID

ID of the deployment_configuration table entry.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key.

int

POLICY_ID

PBR policy ID.

int

RULE_NAME

Name of the pbr rule.

varchar

ROUTE_MAP_SEQUENCE

The sequence of the route-map entry that corresponds
to a rule within a route-map. The sequence of 1
indicates it is the first rule within the route map. This
number will be incremented for every rule entry within a
route-map.

int

OPERATION_TYPE

Indicates the action to take on the rule. 1 is ADD, 2 is
EDIT, 3 is DELETE.

smallint

TABLE 268

TABLE 269

TABLE 270

1494

PBR_NEXT_HOP
Size

64

PBR_POLICY
Size

81

PBR_RULE
Size

127

PBR_RULE_ACL_LIST

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

RULE_ID

PBR_RULE id. This is a foreign key.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 270

PBR_RULE_ACL_LIST (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

ACL_MATCH_SEQUENCE

The sequence of the matching acl entry that
corresponds to a rule within a route map. The sequence
of 1 indicates it is the first matching acl for that rule.
This is a running integer.

int

ACL_NAME

Name of the ACL for the rule.

varchar

ACL_TYPE

Indicates the ACL type. Value of 4 denotes IPV4, Value
of 6 denotes IPV6.

smallint

TABLE 271

Size

81

PHANTOM_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

WWN

The Wwn of the phantom port.

char

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

The id of the phantom switch.

int

PORT_NUMBER

The port number of the phantom port.
The default value is -1.

smallint

PORT_ID

The portId of the phantom port.
The default value is 000000.

varchar

SPEED

The speed of the phantom port.
The default value is 0.

int

MAX_SPEED

The max speed of the phantom port.
The default value is 0.

int

TYPE

The portType of the phantom port.The default value is
'Unknown'.

varchar

16

REMOTE_NODE_WWN

The remote node wwn(for E-ports only). Attached port
device info must be retrieved from DevicePort table.

char

23

REMOTE_PORT_WWN

The remote port wwn(for E-ports only). Attached port
device info must be retrieved from DevicePort table.

char

23

PHANTOM_TYPE

The phantom type of the port, either front or xlate

int

BB_FABRIC_ID

Denotes the Backbone Fabric ID.

int

TABLE 272

Size

23

8

PHYSICAL_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database identifier of the DEVICE instance.

int

DESCRIPTION

System description of the device.

varchar

255

NUM_SLOTS

Number of slots present in the device.

num

(4,0)

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Table name where additional properties/attributes
about this physical device stored. Possible value is
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.

varchar

32

UNIT_NUMBER

Unit number in the stack if it is stackable device . For
non-stacking device it will be always 0.

num

(2,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1495

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 272

Definition

Format

Size

UNIT_NEIGHBOR1

Stacking neighbor's unit(left) number for the
stackable devices. If there is no neighbor unit/non
stackable devices, then set to 0.

num

(2,0)

UNIT_NEIGHBOR2

Stacking neighbor's unit(left) number for the
stackable devices . If there is no neighbor unit/non
stackable devices, then set to 0.

num

(2,0)

UNIT_PRESENT

Used to identify the stack unit is present in the
chassis or not. Present-1 and Not Present-2.

num

(1,0)

Size

TABLE 273

1496

PHYSICAL_DEVICE (Continued)

Field

PHYSICAL_INTERFACE

Field

Definition

Format

INTERFACE_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

PHYSICAL_PORT_ID

Foreign key which refers PHYSICAL_PORT table.

int

SPEED_IN_MB

Interface speed in Mega Bytes.

int

PHYSICAL_ADDRESS

MAC address of this interface.

varchar

LINK_ID

Foreign key which refers LINK table.

int

DUPLEX_MODE

Interface duplex mode. Full/Half/Auto.

smallint

IS_STACKING_INTERFACE

This flag is to indicate whether the interface is
stacking interface or peri port. 0 indicates
non-stacking, 1-indicates stacking interface,
2-indicates peri port.

num

IS_PORT_PRESENT

This flag is to indicate whether the port is presented
in the device.
0 = Unknown
1 = Present
2 = Not present

int

PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID

For DCB switch, this is the core switch id.
For IP products, this is the physical_device_id in
physical_device table.

int

UNIT_NUMBER

This is the unit number of which the interface is
located for IP stacking products.
If it is not applicable, the value is -1.

int

SLOT_NUMBER

This is the slot number of which the interface is
located for the devices and switches.
If it is not applicable, the value is -1.

int

PORT_NUMBER

This is the port number of the interface.

int

PORT_TYPE

This column is used to store the port type of the
interface. The value will be populated by the
NosSwitchAssetCollector during the discovery of the
VCS switch.The value of 0 means its edge port, and 1
means its trill port. Default value is 0.

smallint

UNIT_TYPE

Indicates unit type in the stack. This column stores
the model type of a stackable unit such as
"ICX6610-48P". For non-stacking device it will be
empty

varchar

64

(1,0)

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 273

PHYSICAL_INTERFACE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

IMAGE_VERSION

Image version of the unit in the stack. For
non-stacking device it will be always empty.

varchar

UNIT_ROLE

Indicates unit role in the stack. Possible values: 1 other, 2 - active, 3 - standby, 4 - member, 5 standalone. For non-stacking device it will be always
-1'

int

UNIT_PRIORITY

Indicates unit priority. Possible values 0 to 255. For
non-stacking device it will be always -1

int

UNIT_STATE

Used to identify unit state in the stack. Possible
values: 1 - local, 2 - remote, 3 - reserved, 4 - empty.
For non-stacking device it will be always -1

int

TABLE 274

Size

PHYSICAL_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

PHYSICAL_PORT_ID

Database unique generated identifier.

int

PORT_NUM

Port number from interface identifier.

smallint

MODULE_ID

Database ID of the module which this port is present. int

IS_PORT_PRESENT

This flag is to indicate whether the port is presented
in the device. Unknown-0, Present-1 and Not present
-2.

smallint

TABLE_SUBTYPE

PHYSICAL_PORT table sub type.

varchar

32

Size

TABLE 275

PM_COLLECTOR_MEASURE_SETTING

Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure.

int

TABLE 276

Size

PM_COLLECTOR_TARGET_SETTING

Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type associated to the collector. Possible
values are 12 - IP_DEVICE_GROUP and 14 VIRTUAL_GROUP. To identify the exact target type,
combination of TARGET_TYPE and TARGET_ID values
are used.

smallint

TARGET_ID

Target Id associated to the collector. Possible values
are 1 - ALL_IOS_PRODUCTS, 2 ALL_NOS_PRODUCTS, 3 - ALL_IP_TRUNK, 4 ALL_TRILL_TRUNK, 5 - ALL_PHYSICAL_PORT, 6 ALL_SAN_FC_PORT,
7 - ALL_SAN_TE_PORT, 8 - ALL_SAN_FCIP_TUNNEL, 9
- ALL_SAN_PRODUCT, 10 - ALL_SAN_EE_MONITOR.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1497

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 276

Definition

Format

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

INDEX_MAP

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

TABLE 277

Size

8192

PM_COLLECTOR_TIME_SERIES_MAPPING

Field

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

TARGET_NAME

Time series data master table name. It could be
either TIME_SERIES_DATA_1 or
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2.

varchar

63

Size

TABLE 278

1498

PM_COLLECTOR_TARGET_SETTING (Continued)

Field

Size

PM_DASHBOARD_WIDGET

Field

Definition

Format

DASHBOARD_WIDGET_ID

Primary key column.

int

TIME_SCOPE

Time in unit of seconds, for which the data has to be
fetched from DB going back from now applicable for
top N, distribution, and top Flow, time series.

int

REFRESHING_INTERVAL

The widget refreshing interval in seconds, in 11.3 we
will fix it at 600 (10 mins) and not expose it to user.

int

MONITOR_TYPE

The widget refreshing interval in seconds, in 11.3 we
will fix it at 600 (10 mins) and not expose it to user.

int

MEASURE_TYPE

TYPE of the user selection measure.

int

CREATE_USER_ID

ID of the user who created the widget definition.

int

CREATE_TIME

Widget definition created server time.

timestamp

MODIFY_USER_ID

ID of the user who last modifed the widget definition.

int

MODIFY_TIME

Widget definition last modified server time.

timestamp

TOP_OR_BOTTOM_N

The Top N setting for the Top N, Bottom N and Top
XXX monitor TYPE, for other monitor TYPE, this field
set to default value. Default is 0.

int

LEVEL1_ENABLED

Enable / disable the threshold check for first
percentage band. This value is applicable only for Top
N, Top Flow widgets. Default is 0.

smallint

LEVEL1_VALUE

Limit value for the first percentage band. Default is 0. double
precision

LEVEL1_COLOR

RGB color for the first percentage band.

int

LEVEL2_ENABLED

Enable / disable the second threshold check. This
value is applicable only for Top N, Top Flow widgets.
Default is 0.

smallint

LEVEL2_VALUE

Limit value for the second percentage band. Default
is 0.

double
precision

LEVEL2_COLOR

RGB color for the second percentage band.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 278

PM_DASHBOARD_WIDGET (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

LEVEL3_ENABLED

Enable / disable the third threshold check. This value
is applicable only for Top N, Top Flow widgets. Default
is 0.

smallint

LEVEL3_VALUE

Limit value for the third percentage band. Default is
0.

double
precision

LEVEL3_COLOR

Limit value for the third percentage band.

int

LEVEL4_ENABLED

Enable / disable the fourth threshold check. This
value is applicable only for Top N, Top Flow widgets.
Default is 0.

smallint

LEVEL4_VALUE

Limit value for the fourth percentage band. In case of
Top N, Top Flow widgets only three percentage bands
are available. This value is not applicable. Default is
0.

double
precision

LEVEL4_COLOR

RGB color for the fourth percentage band.In case of
Top N, Top Flow widgets we will use this column to
store the color value for other percentage band.

int

LEVEL5_ENABLED

Enable / disable the fifth threshold check. This value
is applicable only for Top N, Top Flow widgets. Default
is 0.

smallint

LEVEL5_VALUE

Limit value for the fifth percentage band. In case of
Top N, Top Flow widgets only three percentage band
s are available. This value is not applicable. Default is
0.

double
precision

LEVEL5_COLOR

RGB color for the fifth percentage band. In case of
Top N, Top Flow widgets only three percentage bands
are available. This value is not applicable.

int

CATEGORY

Category of the dashboard monitor. 0 - System
defined, 1 - User defined, 2 - Promoted from
Historical Graph, 3 - Promoted from Real time Graph.
Default is 0..

smallint

GRAPH_ENABLED

Enable or disable the time series graph for Top n or
Bottom n widgets. 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled.

smallint

FILTER_CRITERIA

Stores the filter criteria to be applied on the selected
measure for products or ports.

varchar

FILTER_VALUE

Stores the measure value to be used in the filter
criteria.

double
precision

USE_DASHBOARD_SCOPE

Use Dashboard scope or widget scope. 0 - Widget
scope, 1 - Dashboard scope.

smallint

PORT_TYPE

Types of ports to use for port measure widgets: 0 All Ports, 1 - ISL Ports, 2 - Host Ports, 3 - Storage
Ports.

smallint

TABLE 279

Size

256

PM_DATA_COLLECTOR

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key column.

int

NAME

The name of the collector definition.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

128

1499

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 279

Definition

Format

STATUS

Status of the collector. 0 - disabled and 1 - enabled.
Default - 0.

smallint

TYPE

Target type of the snmp collector data. for device
smallint
level collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

POLLING_INTERVAL

Time interval in seconds; indicates the frequency
with which the collector will poll the device to get the
data.

int

CREATED_TIME

Collector created time.

timestamp

CREATE_USER_ID

The user id who has created this collector.

int

ENABLE_THRESHOLD

Widget definition created server time.

smallint

THRESHOLD

Stores the threshold value.

double
precision

REARM

Stores the rearm value.

double
precision

THRESHOLD_OP

Stores the threshold operator value.

varchar

10

REARM_OP

Stores the rearm operator value.

varchar

10

IS_REARM_ABS

Whether or not the rearm. Default - 0.

smallint

THRESHOLD_SEVERITY

The severity for the threshold event.

smallint

REARM_SEVERITY

The severity for the rearm event.

smallint

IS_SYSTEM

Indicates whether this is a system built in collector,
user cannot delete it. Default - 1.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

DESCRIPTION

The description of the
.

varchar

64

NAME

Name of the measure.

varchar

32

Size

TABLE 280

TABLE 281

1500

PM_DATA_COLLECTOR (Continued)

Field

Size

PM_MEASURE
Size

PM_STATS_AGING_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated unique Identifier. Primary key for the
table.

int

RAW_SAMPLE_AGE

The maximum time in seconds for retaining records
in the PM stats raw sample tables
(TIME_SERIES_DATA_1 or TIME_SERIES_DATA_2) in
database.

int

THIRTY_MIN_SAMPLE_AGE

The maximum time in seconds for retaining records
in the PM stats 30min sample tables
(TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN and
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN) in database.

int

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 281

PM_STATS_AGING_POLICY (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TWO_HOUR_SAMPLE_AGE

The maximum time in seconds for retaining records
in the PM stats 2hour sample tables
(TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR and
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR) in database.

int

ONE_DAY_SAMPLE_AGE

The maximum time in seconds for retaining records
in the PM stats 1day sample tables
(TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY) in database.

int

POLICY_TYPE

Type of the aging policy. 100 is Default aging; 101 is
Raw samples to 1 day.

int

ACTIVE

State of the aging policy. 1 is Active, 0 is Inactive.

int

32

Size

TABLE 282

Size

PM_WIDGET_MEASURE_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

Type

Primary key column.

int

NAME

Storing the NAME of the measure.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 283

PM_WIDGET_MEASURE_TYPE_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

WIDGET_ID

The id of the widget definition.

int

MEASURE_TYPE

stores measure type id of the widget, a widget could
map to multiple measure types.

int

TABLE 284

PM_WIDGET_MONITOR_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

Type

Primary key column.

int

NAME

Storing the NAME of the monitor type.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 285

PM_WIDGET_TARGET_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

WIDGET_ID

The ID of the widget definition.

int

TARGET_TYPE

0 - Device
1 - Port

smallint

TARGET_ID

Stores device ID if taret_TYPE is Device, or interface
DB ID if target TYPE is port.

int

TABLE 286

Size

PM_WIDGET_TIME_SERIES_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

WIDGET_ID

The ID of the widget definition.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1501

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 286

Definition

Format

TARGET_TYPE

0 - Device
1 - Port

smallint

TARGET_ID

Stores device ID if taret_TYPE is Device, or interface
DB ID if target TYPE is port.

int

MEASURE_ID

Measure table DB ID.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Index value for a MIB variable. For scalar value it will
be empty.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 287

Definition

Format

WIDGET_ID

The ID of the widget definition.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the PERF_COLLECTOR.

int

MEASURE_ID

Measure table DB ID.

int

DIRECTION

The direction of the port measure.
0 - default (not used)
1 - receiving
2 -transmitting

smallint

PM_WIDGET_USER_ENTRY

Field

Definition

Format

WIDGET_ID

The ID of the widget definition.

int

USER_ID

ID of the user who is using the widget definition.

int

TABLE 289

Size

PM_WIDGET_TOP_N_COLLECTOR_ENTRY

Field

TABLE 288

1502

PM_WIDGET_TIME_SERIES_ENTRY (Continued)

Field

Size

POE_THRESHOLD

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

TYPE

This field indicates if the threshold is defined for
product and port level measure.
• 0 = product level
• 1 = port level

smallint

DEVICE_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the Device
Table.

int

INTERFACE_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the Interface
Table.

int

ENABLED

Flag to indicate of defined threshold is enabled or
not.
• 0 = disabled
• 1 = enabled

smallint

VALUE

Value of the measure at which threshold is defined.

double
precision

INTERVAL

Time interval at which threshold is triggered.

int

MEASURE

Product and port level poe measure definition.

smallint

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 289

POE_THRESHOLD (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

CONDITION

Condition like ><= to the defined threshold value at
which threshold is triggered
• 0 > (Greater Than)
• 1 >= (Greater Than or Equal)
• 2 < (Less Than)
• 3 < = (Less Than or Equal)
• 4 = (Equal to)
• 5 != (Not Equal To)

smallint

SEVERITY

Severity level of defined threshold on port and
product Poe measures.

int

TABLE 290

Size

POE_THRESHOLD_EVENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

TIME_STAMP

This field indicates the time at which a particular
threshold was triggered.

bigint

THRESHOLD_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the
POE_THRESHOLD Table.

int

EVENT_VALUE

Value of the measure at which threshold was
triggered.

double
precision

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key for the table.

int

NAME

Rule name.

varchar

255

DESCRIPTION

Rule description.

varchar

1024

TYPE

Policy Monitor rule type. For e.g. 1-zoning status
check, 2-orphaned zone check, 3-fan in ratio check,
4- event registration check... 10-Configuration Rule,
etc.

smallint

CATEGORY

Policy Monitor rule category. For example, 0 pre-defined, 1 - user-defined for configuration rule
check.

smallint

TABLE 291

TABLE 292

Size

POLICY_RULE
Size

POLICY_RULE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key for the table.

int

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURA
TION_ID

Foreign key reference to
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID.

int

POLICY_RULE_ID

Foreign key reference to POLICY_RULE.ID.

int

ATTRIBUTES

Attributes for pre-canned rules, this is name value
pair string, use & as delimiter. For example
minConn=2&maxConn=5.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

255

1503

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 293
Field

Definition

Format

SWITCH_PORT_ID

The database ID of the switch port that the
configuration belongs to.

int

BOTTLENECK_DETECT
_ENABLED

Flag indicates if bottleneck detection is enabled or not.
The default value is 0.

smallint

ALERTS_ENABLED

Flag indicates if bottleneck detection alerts is enabled
or not.The default value is -1.

smallint

CONGESTION_
THRESHOLD

Value of bottleneck detection congestion threshold in
percent. The default value is -1.

double
precision

LATENCY_THRESHOLD

Value of bottleneck detection latency threshold in
percent. The default value is -1.

double
precision

LATENCY_SEVERITY

The factor by which throughput must drop in a second in
order for that second to be considered affected by
latency bottlenecking. Range (1 to 1000).

int

LATENCY_TIME

The minimum fraction of a second that must be
affected by latency in order for that second to be
considered affected by latency bottlenecking. Range (0
to 1).

double
precision

WINDOW_

Value of bottleneck detection latency window in
millisecond. The default value is 0.

int

QUIET_TIME

Value of bottleneck detection quiet time in millisecond.
The default value is 0.

int

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the record.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Last update time of the record.

timestamp

TABLE 294

Size

PORT_BOTTLENECK_STATUS

Field

Definition

Format

SWITCH_PORT_ID

The database ID of the switch port that the status
belongs to.

int

STATUS

Flag indicates bottleneck status of the switch port.

smallint

TABLE 295

1504

PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG

Size

PORT_COMMISSION_CIMOM_SERVER

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Primary key for the table.

int

DESCRIPTION

User defined description of the CIMOM Server.

varchar

NETWORK_ADDRESS

IPv4 or IPv6 address or Host name of the CIMOM server. varchar

64

CIM_NAMESPACE

Name of the namespace where this CIM_FCPort CIM
Class is located.

varchar

256

PORT

Port number which CIMOM server is listening.

int

SSL_ENABLED

Protocol used for connecting CIMOM server. Default
protocol will be HTTPS. If HTTPS is not reachable fall
back to HTTP. Supported values 0 - HTTP, 1 - HTTPS

int

USER_ID

User Id to be used for authenticating CIMOM Server.

varchar

1024

128

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 295

PORT_COMMISSION_CIMOM_SERVER (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

PASSWORD

Password to be used for authenticating. Stored in
encrypted format.

varchar

512

STATUS

Status before and after contacting the CIMOM Server.
Possible values are
0 - OK, 1- Not Contacted Yet , 2 - Credentials Updated, 3
- Credentials Failed, 4 - Not Reachable.

int

LAST_CONTACTED_TIME

Last time CIMOM server contacted. This will be updated
when we test the reachablity of the CIMOM Server and
when we perform port decommission/recommission.

timestamp

ERROR_MESSAGE

Detailed error message. Applicable when
communication to CIMOM Server failed.

varchar

2048

Size

TABLE 296

PORT_FENCING_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the policy. The length of the field should be
62 because M-Model switch supports only maximum
62 characters.

varchar

TYPE

•
•
•

smallint

THRESHOLD_LIMIT

Threshold Limits for M-Model Switch.

int

THRESHOLD_DURATION

Duration In minutes for M-Model Switch.

int

DEFAULT_POLICY

•
•

1 = the default port fencing policies.
0 = the non-default policies.
The default port fencing policies are:
For ISL - Default Protocol Error Policy
For Link Violation type - Default Link Level Policy
For Security - Default Security Policy

smallint

B_THRESHOLD_LIMIT

Threshold Limits for B-Model Switch (Not Supported). int

B_THRESHOLD_DURATION

Duration in minutes for B-Model Switch (Not
Supported).

TABLE 297

0 = ISL Protocol
1 = Link
2 = Security

62

int

PORT_FENCING_POLICY_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

POLICY_ID

Foreign key to ID column of PORT_FENCING_POLICY
table.

int

LEVEL

•
•
•
•
•
•

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

0 = All Fabric
1 = Fabric
2 = Core Switch Group
3 = Switch
4 = Port Type
5 = Port List

Size

1505

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 297

PORT_FENCING_POLICY_MAP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

SUB_LEVEL

•
•
•

char

23

NODE

WWN of Node which policy assigned.

char

23

Directly assigned or inherited from root level.
0 = Directly assigned
1 = Indirectly assigned

smallint

INHERITANCE

TABLE 298

•
•
PORT_PROFILE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated id for the created profile

int

SWITCH_ME_ID

Incase of a VCS discovery in M/C mode this is the
cluster meid. Incase of VCS discovery in F/C mode,
this is a member ID. Incase of a VDX this is a member
ID

int

NAME

Name of the port profile

varchar

SWITCH_PORT_MODE

Mode for vlan configuration it can be 0=access 1=
trunk 2= converged

smallint

STATE

Profile state 0=created 1=activate

smallint

ACL_PROFILE

If port Profile has an acl profile or not. 0=NO 1=YES

smallint

QOS_PROFILE

If port Profile has an qos profile or not. 0=NO 1=YES

smallint

VLAN_PROFILE

If port Profile has an vlan profile or not.0=NO 1=YES

smallint

VLAN_DETAILS

This column lists the way vlan is configured 0=NONE
1=ALL 2=SELECTED 3=EXC EPT

smallint

DEFAULT_PROFILE

This flag determines if this profile is a default
profile.0=NO 1=YES

smallint

ACL_NAME

Name of the mapped ACL

varchar

ACTIVATED

Profile activated 0= false 1=true

smallint

FCOE_PROFILE

If port Profile has an fcoe profile or not.
• 0=NO
• 1=YES

smallint

FCOE_MAP_NAME

Name of the FCoE Map.

varchar

TABLE 299

1506

1 = E_Port
2 = F_Port
3 = FL_Port, Fabric WWN, Switch WWN

Size

255

255

255

PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Sequence number of the records.

int

ME_ID

Foreign Key Reference to ID field of
MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 299

PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

Name of the port profile domain.

varchar

255

DEFAULT_DOMAIN

This flag determines if this domain is a default
domain.
0 - NO
1 - YES

smallint

TABLE 300

PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

PROFILE_DOMAIN_ID

Foreign Key Reference to ID field of
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN table.

int

PROFILE_ID

Foreign Key Reference to ID field of PORT_PROFILE
table.

int

TABLE 301

PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated ID for the created profile

int

PROFILE_ID

DB id of the port profile

int

SWITCH_ME_ID

Managed element id of the cluster and its cluster
members and a stand alone calisto

int

INTERFACE_ID

ID of the interface table

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

Db id of the Switch port with matching interface

int

TABLE 302

Size

Size

PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated ID for the created profile

int

PROFILE_ID

DB id of the port profile

int

MAC

Mac address mapped to the port profile

varchar

32

NAME

User assigned name to the mac

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 303

Size

PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto-generated ID for the created profile

int

PROFILE_ID

DB ID of the port profile

int

DCB_MODE

If the mode is dcb or non dcb. 1 : DCB.0: NON-DCB

smallint

ETHERNET_MODE

This integer indicates if pause of priority flow control
is set.0: PAUSE 1: PFC

smallint

PAUSE_TX

Is PAUSE TX is enabled 0=NO 1=YES

smallint

PAUSE_RX

Is PAUSE RX is enabled 0=NO 1=YES

smallint

COS_COS

Name of the cos 2 cos map set in the NON DCB mode varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

256

1507

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 303

Definition

Format

Size

TRAFFIC_CLASS

Name of the traffic class map set in the NON DCB
mode

varchar

256

CEE_MAP

Name of the cee map set in the DCB mode

varchar

256

COS

Default COS value for QoS Profile can range from 0-7
if set

int

TRUST_COS

Is trust cos enabled 0=NO 1=YES

smallint

TABLE 304

PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Auto generated id for the created profile

int

PROFILE_ID

DB id of the port profile

int

COS0_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS0_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS1_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS1_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS2_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS3_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS3_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS4_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS4_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS5_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS5_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS2_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS6_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS6_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS7_TX

TX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

COS7_RX

RX setting for this cos field 0: NO 1: YES

smallint

TABLE 305

1508

PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP

Field

Size

PORT_PROFILE_VLAN_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

PROFILE_ID

DB id of the port profile.

int

VLANID

Configured vlan id on the switch.

int

VLAN_TYPE

Type of this vlan, 0 : access 1: trunk.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 305

PORT_PROFILE_VLAN_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

MAC_GROUP_DB_ID

Nullable Foreign Key Reference to ID field of
MAC_GROUP table. In case of VLAN_TYPE 3,
MAC_GROUP table entry created with empty
GROUP_ID with TYPE 3 and MAC_GROUP_MEMBER
have the mac address details. In case of VLAN_TYPE
4, MAC_GROUP table entry created with valid
GROUP_ID and TYPE(3).

int

CTAG_ID

This will be populated only if VLAN_TYPE is 6 and 7.
This as an Incoming customer tag (c-tag) associated
with a GVLAN and its applicable only for trunk mode.
If the TLS (Transparent LAN Service) is enabled in
the device, a pre-defined range of values are used for
C-Tag.

text

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the port.

int

STP

STP value for VLAN. Possible values are 0-Disabled,
1-STP, 2-RSTP, 3-MSTP, 4-PVST and 5-RPVST.

num

TVF

0 means Disabled, 1 means Enabled. When TVF is
enabled, packets are allowed to be forwarded
without any form of CPU intervention including MAC
learning and MAC destination lookups. When it is
disabled (VLAN CPU Protection), it allows traffic
intended for pure Layer2.

smallint

VLAN_ID

The existing Data type short has been modified to
integer. Hence it supports 16 bit additionally.

smallint

QOS

Quality of service for port VLAN.

smallint

GLOBAL_VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the GLOBAL_VLAN instance which is
associated with the port.

int

STP_INSTANCE_ID

Database ID of the STP_INSTANCE instance which is
associated with the port.

int

ADMIN_STATUS

•
•

smallint

FCOE_ENABLED

Signifies whether this VLAN is the default FCoE VLAN
on the DCB switch.

smallint

PVLAN_TYPE

pvlan_type value for vlan.0- Normal VLAN. The
following are PVLAN Types applicable for NOS4.0 and
above.1- Primary PVLAN, 2- RSPAN, 3 -TLS..

int

TABLE 306

Size

PORT_VLAN

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled

Size

(1,0)

1509

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 306

Definition

Format

PRIMARY_VLAN_ID

Private VLAN domain is built with one primary VLAN
and one or more secondary VLANs. This column
represents primary VLAN ID associated with this
secondary Isolated/Community VLAN (if PVLAN_TYPE
column value is 2 or 3) in private VLAN domain. For
primary VLAN (if PVLAN_TYPE column value is 1) in
private VLAN domain and normal VLAN (if
PVLAN_TYPE column value is 0) , then default value
(i.e 0) will be populated.

int

TLS_ID

It represents Transparent LAN Service id and its
supported range is 1-1000 in GVLAN. The TLS and
VLAN are one-one mapping.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Privilege Name.

varchar

AREA

Privilege Area.
0= Application
1= SAN
2= IP

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

MENU_TEXT

Name of the product menu.

varchar

256

PROP1_KEY

First condition name to be satisfied by a selected
product to launch a particular tool.

varchar

256

PROP1_VALUE

First condition value to be satisfied by a selected
product to launch a particular tool.

varchar

256

PROP2_KEY

Second condition name to be satisfied by a selected
product to launch a particular tool.

varchar

256

PROP2_VALUE

Second condition value to be satisfied by a selected
product to launch a particular tool.

varchar

256

TOOL_ID

The tool to be used for launching the application.

int

PARAMETERS

Link to that application.

varchar

IP_SELECTED

Selected IP Address option.

smallint

WWN_SELECTED

Selected WWN option.

smallint

TABLE 307

TABLE 308

1510

PORT_VLAN (Continued)

Field

Size

PRIVILEGE
Size

128

PRODUCT_APP
Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 309

PROTOCOL_VLAN

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the protocol.

int

PROTOCOL

Protocol for VLAN. Possible values are 1-IP, 2-IPX,
3-AppleTalk, 4-DECnet, 5-NetBIOS, 6-Other and
7-IPv6.

num

(4,0)

TABLE 310

Size

QRTZ_BLOB_TRIGGERS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TRIGGER_NAME*

Name of the trigger.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP*

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

BLOB_DATA

The Scheduler info.

bytea

TABLE 311

QRTZ_CALENDARS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CALENDAR_NAME*

Name of the Calendar.

varchar

80

CALENDAR

Calendar object.

bytea

TABLE 312

QRTZ_CRON_TRIGGERS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TRIGGER_NAME*

Name of the trigger.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP*

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

CRON_EXPRESSION

The CRON trigger Expression (ex:"0 0 12 * * ?" meaning:Fire at 12pm (noon) every day).

varchar

80

TIME_ZONE_ID

Given "cron" expression resolved with respect to the
TimeZone.

varchar

80

TABLE 313

QRTZ_FIRED_TRIGGERS

Field

Definition

Format

size

ENTRY_ID*

Fired instance ID.

varchar

95

TRIGGER_NAME

Name of the trigger.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

IS_VOLATILE

Whether the job should not be persisted in the
JobStore for re-use after the program restarts.

boolean

INSTANCE_NAME

Trigger instance name.

varchar

80

FIRED_TIME

The trigger fired time.

num

(13,0)

STATE

The fired trigger job state.

varchar

16

JOB_NAME

Name of the job.

varchar

80

JOB_GROUP

Name of the job group.

varchar

80

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1511

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 313

Definition

Format

IS_STATEFUL

Whether the job implements the interface
StatefulJob.

boolean

REQUESTS_RECOVERY

True or false.

boolean

TABLE 314

size

QRTZ_JOB_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

JOB_NAME*

Name of the job.

varchar

80

JOB_GROUP*

Name of the job group.

varchar

80

DESCRIPTION

Description of the job (optional).

varchar

120

JOB_CLASS_NAME

The instance of the job that will be executed.

varchar

128

IS_DURABLE

Whether the job should remain stored after it is
orphaned.

boolean

IS_VOLATILE

Whether the job should not be persisted in the
JobStore for re-use after program restarts.

boolean

IS_STATEFUL

Whether the job implements the interface
StatefulJob.

boolean

REQUESTS_RECOVERY

Instructs the scheduler whether or not the job should
be re-executed if a "recovery" or "fail-over" situation is
encountered.

boolean

JOB_DATA

To persist the job-related and application-related
informations.

bytea

TABLE 315

QRTZ_JOB_LISTENERS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

JOB_NAME*

Name of the job.

varchar

80

JOB_GROUP*

Name of the job group.

varchar

80

JOB_LISTENER*

Job listener action class instance.

varchar

80

Field

Definition

Format

Size

LOCK_NAME*

Resource identification name assigned by user.

varchar

40

TABLE 316

TABLE 317

QRTZ_LOCKS

QRTZ_PAUSED_TRIGGER_GRPS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TRIGGER_GROUP*

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

TABLE 318

1512

QRTZ_FIRED_TRIGGERS (Continued)

Field

QRTZ_SCHEDULER_STATE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

INSTANCE_NAME*

Instance of the scheduler.

varchar

80

LAST_CHECKIN_TIME

Last fired time in milliseconds.

num

(13,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 318

QRTZ_SCHEDULER_STATE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CHECKIN_INTERVAL

Repeat interval.

num

(13,0)

RECOVERER

Misfire instruction.

varchar

80

TABLE 319

QRTZ_SIMPLE_TRIGGERS

Field

Definition

Format

size

TRIGGER_NAME*

Name of the trigger

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP*

name of the trigger group

varchar

80

REPEAT_COUNT

number of times to repeat

num

(13,0)

REPEAT_INTERVAL

interval for first and second job

num

(13,0)

TIMES_TRIGGERED

Number of times the corresponding trigger fired

num

(13,0)

TABLE 320

QRTZ_JTRIGGER_LISTENERS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TRIGGER_NAME*

Name of the trigger.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP*

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_LISTENER*

The listener action.

varchar

80

TABLE 321

QRTZ_TRIGGERS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TRIGGER_NAME*

Name of the trigger.

varchar

80

TRIGGER_GROUP*

Name of the trigger group.

varchar

80

JOB_NAME

Name of the job.

varchar

80

JOB_GROUP

Name of the job group.

varchar

80

IS_VOLATILE

Whether the trigger should be persisted in the
JobStore for re-use after program restarts.

boolean

DESCRIPTION

A description for the trigger instance - may be useful
for remembering/displaying the purpose of the
trigger, though the description has no meaning to
Quartz.

varchar

120

NEXT_FIRE_TIME

The next fire time in milliseconds.

num

(13,0)

PREV_FIRE_TIME

The previous fired time in milliseconds.

num

(13,0)

TRIGGER_STATE

The state of the trigger (viz. Error, wait,etc.)

varchar

16

TRIGGER_TYPE

The type of the trigger (Simple,cron).

varchar

8

START_TIME

The job start time.

num

(13,0)

END_TIME

The job end time (-1 means infinite).

num

(13,0)

varchar

80

CALENDAR_NAME
MISFIRE_INSTR

Instructs the scheduler to execute the misfired job.

smallint

JOB_DATA

Persists the job-related info.

bytea

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1513

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 322

QUERY_BASED_DEVICE_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_GROUP_ID

int

QUERY_TEXT

varchar

4096

varchar

4096

Format

Size

GROUP_CRITERIA

TABLE 323

Holds the dynamic device group criteria XML value.

QUORUM_CARD_GROUP_MAPPING

Field

Definition

ID*

int

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP for
which an authorization card is registered.

int

SMART_CARD_ID

Foreign key reference to the SMART_CARD that is
registered as an authorization card for the encryption
group.

int

TABLE 324

RAS_LOG

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MSG_ID*

Message ID of the event.

varchar

15

MODULE_ID

Module ID of the event.

varchar

10

SEVERITY

Severity of the event.

varchar

10

CAUSE

Probable root cause for the event.

varchar

4096

ACTION

Recommended action for the event.

varchar

4096

OLD_MSG_ID

Old message ID.

varchar

45

TABLE 325

RECIPIENT_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TYPE

Type of the recipient (Syslog or SNMP).

varchar

20

Size

TABLE 326

1514

Size

Size

RECOVERY_CARD_GROUP_MAPPING

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_GROUP for
which a recovery card is registered.

int

SMART_CARD_ID

Foreign key reference to the SMART_CARD that is
registered as a recovery card for the encryption
group.

int

POSITION_

The position of the card within the recovery card set.
1 = first card, 2 = second card, etc.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 327

REPORT_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Meta Data for available reports.

int

NAME

Report name.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Report type description.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 328

Size

REPORT_TEMPLATE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

NAME

Name of the report and the report names must be
descriptive. For example, Wired Device Report.

varchar

256

TITLE

The title of the report that briefly describes the report
contents. This title will also be used for the report
header and menu item. Title should be unique. For
example, Wired Products List.

varchar

256

CREATED_TIME

Timestamp of when the report was created.

timestamp

CREATED_BY

Foreign key to the user table, to identify which user
created the report.

int

REPORT_TYPE

0 = Precanned template which will not be deleted or
edited, 1 = Editable report which can be deleted as
well, 2 = Not Editable report but can be deleted.

int

REPORT_DEFINITION

XML representation of the report.

text

TABLE 329

REPORT_DRILLDOWN_TEMPLATE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

The primary key of the table.

int

REPORT_TEMPLATE_ID

References the ID column in the REPORT_TEMPLATE
table.

int

NAME

Name of the report. Names should be descriptive so
users will know exactly what kind of report they will be
running or scheduling. E.g. Wired Device Report.

varchar

REPORT_DRILLDOWN_DEFI
NITION

XML representation of the report.

text

TABLE 330

256

RESOURCE_FABRIC_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

RESOURCE_GROUP_ID*

Resource group ID.

int

FABRIC_ID*

Fabric ID, which is in the resource group.

int

TABLE 331

Size

Size

RESOURCE_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1515

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 331

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

Resource group name.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Resource group description.

varchar

512

Size

TABLE 332

RESOURCE_HOST_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

RESOURCE_GROUP_ID

Resource Group ID

int

HOST_ID

HOST_ID,which is in the resource group

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Role name.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

Role description.

varchar

512

HIDDEN

Field to identify whether the role is Hidden from users
or not. Values:
• 0= Not Hidden
• 1= Hidden
Currently, only ''All Users'' Role is hidden and other
roles are visible to user.
Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 333

TABLE 334

ROLE

Definition

Format

ROLE_ID*

User role ID.

int

PRIVILEGE_ID*

Privilege ID.

int

PERMISSION

Privilege permission:
1 = RO
2 = RW
0 = No privilege
Default value is 0.

smallint

Size

RULE_BLOCK_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

POLICY_RULE_ID

Foreign key reference to POLICY_RULE.ID.

int

CONFIG_BLOCK_ID

Foreign key reference to CONFIG_BLOCK.ID.

int

TABLE 336

Size

ROLE_PRIVILEGE_MAP

Field

TABLE 335

1516

RESOURCE_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Size

RULE_CONDITION_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

POLICY_RULE_ID

Foreign key reference to POLICY_RULE.ID.

int

CONFIG_CONDITION_ID

Foreign key reference to CONFIG_CONDITION.ID.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 337

RULE_LOGICAL_EXPRESSION_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

POLICY_RULE_ID

Policy rule ID.

int

LOGICAL_EXPRESSION_XM
L

Configuration Rule Logical Expression XML.

text

TABLE 338

Size

SAN

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of this SAN.

varchar

256

CONTACT

Contact person for this SAN.

varchar

256

LOCATION

Location of this SAN.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description.

varchar

256

STATS_COLLECTION

1 = statistics collection is enabled; otherwise, 0.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

time at which this record was created.
Default value is ’now()’.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

time when this was last updated.
Default value is ’now()’.

timestamp

TABLE 339

Size

SAN_CONNECTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

SOURCE_SWITCH_ID

Foreign key to VIRTUAL_SWITCH table. This is the
virtual switch ID of AG

int

SOURCE_PORT_ID

Foreign key to SWITCH_PORT table. This is the switch
port id of N-port

int

SOURCE_PORT_WWN

WWN of the AG N port

varchar

32

SOURCE_PORT_TYPE

Type of source port

varchar

16

SOURCE_USER_PORT_NUM
BER

User port number of AG N port

smallint

DESTINATION_SWITCH_ID

Foreign key to VIRTUAL_SWITCH table. This is the
virtual switch ID of edge switch

int

DESTINATION_PORT_ID

Foreign key to SWITCH_PORT table. This is the switch
port id of F-port

int

DESTINATION_PORT_WWN

WWN of the F port

varchar

23

DESTINATION_PORT_TYPE

Type of destination port

varchar

16

DESTINATION_USER_PORT_ User port number of F-port
NUMBER

smallint

FABRIC_ID

Foreign key to FABRIC table

int

TRUSTED

Indicates if the connection is trusted

smallint

MISSING

Indicates if the connection is missing

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1517

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 339

Definition

Format

MISSING_TIME

Timestamp when the connection went missing

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Last update time for this record

timestamp

CREATION_TIME

Creation timestamp

timestamp

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

HOST

The FQDN or the ip address of the host

varchar

256

DOMAIN

The domain of the SCOM server host

varchar

256

USER_NAME

The domain user to login into the SCOM Server

varchar

64

PASSWORD

The password to login into the SCOM Server

varchar

64

VERSION

The version of SCOM. Default is 6.1.7221.0 which is
SCOM 2007 R2.
The default value is '6.1.7221.0' .

varchar

32

TOKEN_ID

Unique ID for each SCOM host

varchar

32

STATUS

Status of Plug-in registration to the SCOM server
where 0-registered, 1-unregistered, 2-authentication
failed, 3-not reachable

int

TABLE 340

TABLE 341

1518

SAN_CONNECTION (Continued)

Field

Size

SCOM_HOST
Size

SECURITY_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

Size

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID *

DB ID of virtual_switch.

int

POLICY_NUMBER*

IPSec Policy Number. The number can range from 1 to
32.

smallint

POLICY_TYPE*

Type of the Policy. The possible values are IKE or IPSec

smallint

ENCRYPTION_ALGORITHM

Encryption Algorithm for the policy.The following are
the possible Encryption:
NONE,DES,3DES,AES-128,AES-256,AES-CM-128 or
AES-CM-256.

varchar

32

AUTHENTICATION_ALGORI
THM

Authentication Algorithm for the policy:
NONE
SHA-1
MD5
AES-XCBC

varchar

32

PERFECT_FORWARD_
POLICY_ENABLED

Perfect Forward Secrecy for the policy. The possible
values are 0 or 1.

smallint

DIFFIE_HELLMAN_GROUP

Diffie-Hellman Group used in PFS negotiation.

smallint

SECURITY_ASSOC_LIFE

Association lifetime in seconds.

double
precision

SECURITY_ASSOC_LIFE_
IN_MB

Security association lifetime in megabytes.

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 342

SELECTED_FLYOVER_PROPERTY

Field

Definition

Format

PROPERTY_ID*

Refers to Flyover_Property ID from
AVAILABLE_FLYOVER_PROPERTY table.

int

USER_NAME*

The name of the user who selected the property to be
shown on flyover.

varchar

POSITION_

The user preferred position of the selected flyover
property.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TABLE 343

Size

128

SENSOR

CORE_SWITCH_ID

Size

int

SENSOR_ID

Identifies the sensor device , requested by SMIA and
values filled in by Switch Asset Collector. Maps to
Device Id in the html page.
The default value is -1.

int

CURRENT_READING

Identifies the current temperature reading sensor,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector, Maps to value field in the html page.
The default value is -1.

bigint

TYPE

The default value is -1.

int

SUB_TYPE

The default value is -1.

int

DESCRIPTION

Provides the description of the temperature sensor,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector

varchar

STATUS

provides the status of the sensor, requested by SMIA
and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector,Values
could be 0 or 1. 0 means faulty and 1 is ok.The
default value is -1.

int

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

provides the operational status of the sensor,
requested by SMIA and values filled in by Switch
Asset Collector will be available only from FOS 6.4
switches and above. The default value is -1.

int

PART_NUMBER

provides the part number of the sensor, requested by
SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector
will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches and
above

varchar

64

SERIAL_NUMBER

provides the serial number of the sensor, requested
by SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector
will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches and
above

varchar

64

VERSION

provides the version of the sensor, requested by
SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector
will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches and
above

varchar

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

128

1519

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 343

Definition

Format

CREATION_TIME

provides the record creation time, standard columns
for Management application and values filled in by
Switch Asset Collector

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

provides the record last updated time, standard
columns for Management application and values
filled in by Switch Asset Collector

timestamp

FRU_TYPE

provides the type of the sensor, requested by SMIA
and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector will be
available only from FOS 6.4 switches and above. The
values represents FAN,PS, SLOT etc. The default
value is -1.

int

UNIT_NUMBER

provides the unit number of the sensor, requested by
SMIA and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector
will be available only from FOS 6.4 switches and
above . This the gives the index of the unit. For SLOT
FRU, this will be slot number. For FAN fru, this will be
fan number. The default value is -1.

int

STATE

provides the state of the sensor, requested by SMIA
and values filled in by Switch Asset Collector will be
available only from FOS 6.4 switches and above.
This gives the value whether the FRU is On or Off .
The default value is -1.

int

TABLE 344

Size

SFLOW_CHECKPOINT

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TABLE_TO_DROP

Staging child tables previously checkpointed
(indicating that their aggregation was completed).

varchar

40

Size

TABLE 345

1520

SENSOR (Continued)

Field

SFLOW_HOUR_SUMMARY

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

IN_UNIT

Unit number of the incoming traffic interface. Default
value is 0.

smallint

IN_SLOT

Slot number of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

IN_PORT

Port number of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_UNIT

Unit number of the outgoing traffic interface. Default
value is 0.

smallint

OUT_SLOT

Slot number of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_PORT

Port number of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

IN_VLAN

Vlan ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_VLAN

Vlan ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 345

SFLOW_HOUR_SUMMARY

Field

Definition

Format

IN_PRIORITY

Priority ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_PRIORITY

Priority ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

SRC_MAC

MAC address of the source in the received sFlow
packet.

byte

DEST_MAC

MAC address of the destination in the received sFlow
packet.

byte

L3_SRC_ADDR

L3 address of the source in the received sFlow
packet.

byte

L3_DEST_ADDR

L3 address of the destination in the received sFlow
packet.

byte

L3_PROTOCOL

L3 protocol value in the received sFlow packet. For
example, ARP.

int

IP_TOS

Type of service id in the received sFlow packet.

smallint

L4_PROTOCOL

L4 protocol value in the received sFlow packet. For
example, IGP

smallint

L4_SRC_PORT

L4 source port number in the received sFlow packet.

int

L4_DEST_PORT

L4 destination port number in the received sFlow
packet.

int

SRC_SUBNET_BITS

Subnet value of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

DEST_SUBNET_BITS

Subnet value of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

LOCAL_AS

Second AS number of the received sFlow packet in
case of BGP traffic.

bigint

SRC_AS

Source AS number of the received sFlow packet in
case of BGP traffic.

bigint

SRC_PEER_AS

Peer AS number of the received sFlow packet in case
of BGP traffic.

bigint

SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID

route_info_id of the received sFlow packet in case of
BGP traffic.

int

IP_FLOW_LABEL

IP flow label value in the received sFlow packet.

int

SRC_USER

Name of the Source user in the received sFlow
packet.

int

DEST_USER

Name of the destination user in the received sFlow
packet.

int

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sFlow
sample collected.

bigint

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sFlow
sample collected.

bigint

TCP_FLAGS

TCP flag value of the received sFlow packet.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1521

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 345

Definition

IN_PORT_TYPE

This column is used to store the port type of the
smallint
incoming traffic interface. For VCS switch the value of
• 0 means its edge port.
• 1 means its trill port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

OUT_PORT_TYPE

smallint
This column is used to store the port type of the
outgoing traffic interface. For VCS switch the value of
• 0 means its edge port.
• 1 means its trill port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

TABLE 346

Format

Size

SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO

Field

Definition

Format

SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID

This column is the primary key for IP routing
information.

int

LOCAL_PREF

Local preference value of routing information in the
received sFlow packet.

int

LAST_USED_TIME

Last used time of the routing information.

int

DST_AS_PATH

Routing path information in the received sFlow
packet.

varchar

2048

COMMUNITIES

Communities value in the received sFlow packet.

varchar

1024

Size

TABLE 347

1522

SFLOW_HOUR_SUMMARY

Field

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

SRC_AS

Source AS number of the received sFlow packet in
case of BGP traffic.

bigint

SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID

route_info_id of the received sFlow packet in case of
BGP traffic.

int

IN_VLAN

Vlan ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_VLAN

Vlan ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 347

SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

IN_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the incoming traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port.
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

OUT_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the outgoing traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 348

SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP_SLNUM

Field

Definition

Format

MAX_SLNUM

Maximum row count.

bigint

TABLE 349

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_L3_SLNUM

Field

Definition

Format

MAX_SLNUM

Maximum row count.

bigint

TABLE 350

Size

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

IN_VLAN

Vlan ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_VLAN

Vlan ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

SRC_MAC

MAC address of the Source in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

DEST_MAC

MAC address of the destination in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

IN_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the incoming traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1523

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 350

Definition

Format

OUT_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the outgoing traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0

smallint

L3_SRC_ADDR

This column is used to store the L3 address of the
source in the received sFlow packet.

bytea

L3_DEST_ADDR

This column is used to store the L3 address of the
destination in the received sFlow packet.

bytea

TABLE 351

Definition

Format

MAX_SLNUM

Maximum row count.

bigint

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_SUMMARY

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

IN_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the incoming traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

OUT_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the outgoing traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0

smallint

TABLE 353

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC_SLNUM

Field

TABLE 352

1524

SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC (Continued)

Field

Size

SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sFlow
sample collected.

bigint

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 353

SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sFlow
sample collected.

bigint

IN_VLAN

Vlan ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_VLAN

Vlan ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

IN_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the incoming traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port.
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

OUT_PORT_TYPE

Port type of the outgoing traffic interface. For VCS
member the value of,
• 0 means its edge port.
• 1 means its fabric port.
For other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 354

SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN_SLNUM

Field

Definition

Format

MAX_SLNUM

Maximum row count.

bigint

TABLE 355

Definition

Format

SFLOW_REPORT_L3_SOURCE_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

REPORT_DEFINITION_ID

Report definition ID.

int

ADDRESS_GROUP_ID

ACL network group IDs mapped with a report
definition.

int

IP_SUBNET_DEFINITION_ID

Subnet IDs mapped with a Report definition.

int

Size

SFLOW_REPORT_L4_SOURCE

Field

Definition

Format

SFLOW_REPORT_L4_SOURCE_ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

REPORT_DEFINITION_ID

Report definition ID.

int

SERVICE_PORT_DEFINITION_ID

Service port Id mapped with a report definition.

int

SERVICE_GROUP_ID

Service group Id mapped with a report definition.

int

TABLE 357

Size

SFLOW_REPORT_L3_SOURCE

Field

TABLE 356

Size

Size

SFLOW_STAGING

Field

Definition

Format

SLNUM

This column is used to store a counter value to
identify the total row count.

bigserial

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Data collection time in seconds.

int

DEVICE_ID

ID of the product which sends the sflow traffic.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1525

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 357

1526

SFLOW_STAGING (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

IN_UNIT

Unit number of the incoming traffic interface. Default
value is 0.

smallint

IN_SLOT

Slot number of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

IN_PORT

Port number of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_UNIT

Unit number of the outgoing traffic interface. Default
value is 0.

smallint

OUT_SLOT

Slot number of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_PORT

Port number of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

IN_VLAN

Vlan ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_VLAN

Vlan ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

IN_PRIORITY

Priority ID of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

OUT_PRIORITY

Priority ID of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

SRC_MAC

MAC address of the source in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

DEST_MAC

MAC address of the destination in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

L3_SRC_ADDR

L3 address of the source in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

L3_DEST_ADDR

L3 address of the destination in the received sFlow
packet.

bytea

L3_PROTOCOL

L3 protocol value in the received sFlow packet. For
example, ARP.

int

IP_TOS

Type of service ID in the received sFlow packet.

smallint

L4_PROTOCOL

L4 protocol value in the received sFlow packet. For
example, IGP.

smallint

L4_SRC_PORT

L4 source port number in the received sFlow packet.

int

L4_DEST_PORT

L4 destination port number in the received sFlow
packet.

int

SRC_SUBNET_BITS

Subnet value of the incoming traffic interface.

smallint

DEST_SUBNET_BITS

Subnet value of the outgoing traffic interface.

smallint

LOCAL_AS

Second AS number of the received sFlow packet in
case of BGP traffic.

bigint

SRC_AS

Source AS number of the received sFlow packet in
case of BGP traffic.

bigint

SRC_PEER_AS

Peer AS number of the received sFlow packet in case
of BGP traffic.

bigint

SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID

route_info_id of the received sFlow packet in case of
BGP traffic.

int

IP_FLOW_LABEL

IP flow label value in the received sFlow packet.

int

SRC_USER

Name of the source user in the received sFlow
packet.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 357

SFLOW_STAGING (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

DEST_USER

Name of the destination user in the received sFlow
packet.

int

FRAMES

Number of frames transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

BYTES

Number of bytes transmitted through the sflow
sample collected.

bigint

TCP_FLAGS

Tcp flag value of the received sFlow packet.

smallint

IN_PORT_TYPE

This column is used to store the port type of the
incoming traffic interface. For VCS switch the value of
0 means its edge port, and 1 means its trill port. For
other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

OUT_PORT_TYPE

This column is used to store the port type of the
outgoing traffic interface. For VCS switch the value of
0 means its edge port, and 1 means its trill port. For
other devices Default value is 0.

smallint

TABLE 358

Size

SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM

Field

Definition

Format

MIN_SLNUM

Maximum row count.

bigint

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CARD_TYPE

Indicates how this smart card is configured: 0 =
authorization card.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CARD_INFO

Additional smart card details. For recovery set cards,
the details include the recovery set size and the
card''s position within the set; e.g., 2 of 5

varchar

64

CARDCN_ID

A unique name for the card, derived from the card''s
serial number and usage

varchar

64

FIRST_NAME

Optional first name of the person responsible for this
card.

varchar

64

LAST_NAME

Optional last name of the person responsible for this
card

varchar

64

NOTES

User-supplied notes about the card.

varchar

256

PUBLIC_CERTIFICATE

The public key certificate of the card, in PEM format.
Used to validate the card and set up a secure communications channel to the card.

varchar

4096

CERTIFICATE_LABEL

User-supplied name for the card''s public key
certificate

varchar

256

TABLE 359

Size

SMART_CARD

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1527

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 359

SMART_CARD (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

GROUP_NAME

The name of the Encryption Group used to initialize
the card. For recovery set cards, this identifies which
group''s master key is backed up on the card.

varchar

64

CREATION_TIME

The date and time that the card was initialized. For
recovery set cards, this is the date and time the master key was written to the card. The default value is
'now()'.

timestamp

TABLE 360

SMIA_SAN_NAME

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

'This will be the principal switch WWN of the fabric.';

varchar

24

ELEMENT_NAME

User friendly name to identify the SAN

varchar

32

IS_PRIMARY_FABRIC

This value will indicate whether principal switch WWN
has primary ownership or not. In case of simple FC
fabric, the value will be always 1. In case of Meta
SAN, Fabric with highest principal switch WWN will
have primary ownership (value 1) and other fabric
entries within the same SAN will have value as 0.

int

TABLE 361

SNAPSHOT_PRODUCT_STATUS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_ID

Foreign Key references DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_ID
int
(id). Identifies the execution cycle for the deployment.

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

Associates for which target the status applies to.

int

Indicates the type of snapshot:
1-Pre snapshot
2-Post snapshot

int

SNAPSHOT_TYPE

SNAPSHOT_TIME

Time when this pre/post snapshot occurred.

MESSAGE

Detailed message for snapshot report.

TABLE 362

1528

•
•

Size

text

SNMP_CREDENTIALS

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL SWITCH_ID

Virtual switch ID for which this instance of the SNMP
credentials apply.

int

RECIPIENT_ID

Recipient in the MESSAGE_RECIPIENT table.

int

POR)_NUMBER

Port number of the SNMP agent on the switch for get
and set requests.

smallint

RETRY_COUNT

Number of times to retry if get/set request to the
SNMP agent times out. Default value is 3.

smallint

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 362

SNMP_CREDENTIALS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TIMEOUT

Timeout value in seconds for a get/set request to the
SNMP agent. Default value is 5.

smallint

VERSION

SNMP agent version running on the switch, as in
SNMPv1 or SNMPv3.

varchar

6

READ_COMMUNITY_
STRING

The SNMP Read-Only Community String is like a
password. It is sent along with each SNMP
Get-Request and allows (or denies) access to a
device. The default value is "public". This is applicable
if the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv1.

varchar

64

WRITE_COMMUNITY_
STRING

The SNMP Write-Only Community String is like a
password. It is sent along with each SNMP
Set-Request and allows (or denies) access to a
device. The default value is "private". This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv1.

varchar

64

USER_NAME

A human readable string representing the name of
the user. This is applicable if the agent is configured
to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

64

CONTEXT_NAME

Text ID associated with the user, used by the SNMP
agent to provide different views. This is applicable if
the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

128

AUTH_PROTOCOL

An indication of whether messages sent or received
on behalf of this user can be authenticated and if so,
which authentication protocol to use. The supported
values for this field are: usmNoAuthProtocol,
usmHMACMD5AuthProtocol, and
usmHMACSHAAuthProtocol. This is applicable if the
agent is configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

16

AUTH_PASSWORD

The localized secret key used by the authentication
protocol for authenticating messages. This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv3.

varchar

64

PRIV_PROTOCOL

An indication of whether messages sent or received
on behalf of this user can be encrypted and if so,
which privacy protocol to use. The current values for
this field are: usmNoPrivProtocol and
usmDESPrivProtocol. This is applicable if the agent is
configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

16

PRIV_PASSWORD

The localized secret key used by the privacy protocol
for encrypting and decrypting messages. This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv3.

varchar

64

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Primary key column.

serial

MIB_OBJECT_ID

MIB Object ID.

int

TABLE 363

Size

SNMP_DATA

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1529

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 363

SNMP_DATA (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the SNMP collector data. The target
type for,
• device level collector is 0
• port level collector it is 1.

num

(2,0)

TARGET_ID

Target id of the SNMP collector data. for device level
collector it will use deviceId, and for port level it will
use interfaceId.

int

VALUE

Value of the OID retrieved from the corresponding
target.

double

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time, in seconds, at which the record was inserted.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

Correspoding collector table ID.

int

MIB_INDEX

Index value for a MIB varaible. For scalar value it will
be empty.

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 364

SNMP_DATA_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

MIB_OBJECT_ID

The DB ID of MIB_OBJECT.

int

TARGET_TYP

Target or source type can be,
• device - 0 or
• interface or ports - 1

num

TARGET_ID

DB ID of the target which can be device or interface.

int

VALUE

Aggregated value inserted during the aging process.

double
precision

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time, in seconds, at which the record was inserted.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the collector object used for collection.

int

MIB_INDEX

MIB index used for collection if applicable.

char

256

Size

TABLE 365

SNMP_DATA_2HOUR

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The DB ID of MIB_OBJECT.

int

MIB_OBJECT_ID

The DB ID of MIB_OBJECT.

int

Target or source type can be,
device - 0 or
interface or ports - 1

num

TARGET_ID

DB ID of the target which can be device or interface.

int

VALUE

Aggregated value inserted during the aging process.

double
precision

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time, in seconds, at which the record was inserted.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the collector object used for collection.

int

MIB_INDEX

MIB index used for collection if applicable.

char

TARGET_TYPE

1530

(2,0)

•
•

(2,0)

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 366

SNMP_DATA_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key autogenerated ID

int

MIB_OBJECT_ID

MIB OID used for collection

int

Target or source type can be,
device - 0 or
interface or ports - 1

num

TARGET_ID

DB Id of the target which can be device or interface

int

VALUE

Value collected by the engine

double
precision

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time at which collection occured in seconds

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB Id of the collector object used for collection

int

MIB_INDEX

MIB index used for collection if applicable

char

256

Size

TARGET_TYPE

TABLE 367

•
•

(2,0)

SNMP_EXPR_DATA

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key column.

serial

EXPRESSION_ID

MIB object ID.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the SNMP collector data. Th target type
for,
• device level collector is 0,
• for port level collector is 1.

smallint

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the SNMP collector data. for device level
collector it will use deviceId, for port level it will use
interfaceId.

int

VALUE

Value of the OID retrieved from the corresponding
target.

double

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the OID was retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

Correspoding collector table ID.

int

TABLE 368

Size

SNMP_EXPR_DATA_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key autogenerated ID.

int

EXPRESSION_ID

DB ID of the expression object used for collection.

int

Target or source type can be,
device - 0 or
interface or ports - 1

smallint

TARGET_ID

DB Id of the target which can be device or interface.

int

VALUE

Aggregated value inserted during the aging process.

double
precision

TARGET_TYPE

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

•
•

Size

1531

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 368

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time, in seconds, at which the record was inserted in
seconds.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the collector object used for collection.

int

TABLE 369

Size

SNMP_EXPR_DATA_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key autogenerated ID

int

EXPRESSION_ID

DB ID of the expression object used for collection

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target/Source type can be device:0 or
interface/ports:1'

smallint

TARGET_ID

DB Id of the target which can be device or interface

int

VALUE

Value collected by the engine'

double
precision

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time at which collection occured in seconds

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB Id of the collector object used for collection

int

TABLE 370

Size

SNMP_EXPRESSION

Field

Definition

Format

EXPRESSION_ID

Primary key column.

serial

NAME

Name of the expression.

varchar

64

DESCRIPTION

Description of the expression.

varchar

512

EQUATION

Equation of the expression.

varchar

1024

UNIT

Unit that is used for displaying the chart.

varchar

64

IS_TRANSIENT

Explicitly identified whether expressions is used for
Real time collector or not. A transient expression will
not be allowed for user editing.

numeric

(1,0)

TABLE 371

1532

SNMP_EXPR_DATA_1DAY (Continued)

Field

Size

SNMP_PROFILE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME*

A text string representing a set of SNMP agent
profile. When created, one or more virtual switches
could refer to this profile for its SNMP credentials
unless a unique set of SNMP credentials has been
defined in SNMP_CREDENTIAL.

varchar

256

PORT_NUMBER

Port number of the SNMP agent on the switch for
get and set requests

smallint

RETRY_COUNT

Number of times to retry if get/set request to the
SNMP agent times out. Default value is 3.

smallint

TIMEOUT

Timeout value in seconds before for a get/set
request to the SNMP agent. Default value is 5.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 371

SNMP_PROFILE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

VERSION

SNMP agent version running on the switch as in
SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

varchar

6

READ_COMMUNITY_STRING

The SNMP Read-Only Community String is like a
password. It is sent along with each SNMP
Get-Request and allows (or denies) access to
device. The default value is "public". This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv1.

varchar

64

WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING The SNMP Write-Only Community String is like a
password. It is sent along with each SNMP
Set-Request and allows (or denies) access to a
device.
The default value is "private". This is applicable if
the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv1

varchar

64

USER_NAME

A human-readable string representing the name of
the user. This is applicable if the agent is configured
to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

64

CONTEXT_NAME

A text ID associated with the user, used by SNMP
agent to provide different views. This is applicable if
the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

128

AUTH_PROTOCOL

An indication of whether or not messages sent or
received on behalf of this user can be authenticated
and if so, which authentication protocol to use. The
supported values for this field are:
usmNoAuthProtocol, usmHMACMD5AuthProtocol,
and usmHMACSHAAuthProtocol. This is applicable if
the agent is configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

16

AUTH_PASSWORD

The localized secret key used by the authentication
protocol for authenticating messages. This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv3.

varchar

64

PRIV_PROTOCOL

An indication of whether or not messages sent or
received on behalf of this user can be encrypted
and if so, which privacy protocol to use. The current
values for this field are: usmNoPrivProtocol and
usmDESPrivProtocol. This is applicable if the agent
is configured to operate in SNMPv3.

varchar

16

PRIV_PASSWORD

The localized secret key used by the privacy protocol
for encrypting and decrypting messages. This is
applicable if the agent is configured to operate in
SNMPv3.

varchar

64

SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED

To denote whether SNMP informs option is enabled
or disabled
Default value is 0.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1533

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 372

SNMP_TRAP_CREDENTIAL

Field

Definition

Format

ID

PK for the table to uniquely identify the record

int

VERSION

to identify the version of Credentials: v1v2c and v3
are the values

varchar

6

COMMUNITY_STRING

to decode the v1/v2c traps

varchar

64

USER_NAME

user access name for v3 trap

varchar

64

AUTH_PROTOCOL

authentication protocol used for v3 traps

varchar

16

AUTH_PASSWORD

authentication password for v3 traps

varchar

64

PRIV_PROTOCOL

privacy protocol used for v3 traps

varchar

16

varchar

64

PRIV_PASSWORD
POSITION_

TABLE 373

order of credentials to authenticate v1/v2c or v3
traps

int

SNMP_V3_FORWARDING_CREDENTIAL

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Size

int

USER_NAME

USM user name.

varchar

64

CONTEXT_NAME

USM context name.

VARCHAR

128

AUTH_PROTOCOL

Authorization protocol.

VARCHA

16

AUTH_PASSWORD

Authorization password.

VARCHAR

64

PRIV_PROTOCOL

Privilege protocol.

VARCHAR

16

PRIV_PASSWORD

Privilege password.

VARCHAR

64

Size

TABLE 374

SOURCE_OBJECT_TYPE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TYPE_NAME

Type of the object to which the event applies, such as
Fabric, Switch or Port.

char

64

DESCRIPTION

Description of the object

varchar

255

Format

Size

TABLE 375

SSL_CERTIFICATE

Field

1534

Size

Definition

SSL_CERTIFICATE_ID

int

NAME

varchar

255

LOCATION

varchar

255

FILE_NAME

varchar

255

KEY_ID

int

CERT_TYP

num

(2,0)

START_TIME

num

(20,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 375

SSL_CERTIFICATE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

EXPIRATION_TIME

num

(20,0)

FORMAT

num

(2,0)

DESCRIPTION

varchar

1024

NOTIFICATION_TIME

The time stamp (long format) of the last expiration
notification sent

num

(20,0)

NOTIFICATION_SENT

The status of last notification sent.
Possible values: Unknown -0, Good 1, Expiring 2,
Expired 3

num

(2,0)

NOTIFICATION_REPEAT

Indicates whether repeat expiration notification is
enabled for this certificate or not.
Possible values: Repeat Disabled - 0, Repeat Enabled 1

num

(2,0)

SYNC_DEVICE

Indicates whether this certificate is in sync with device
or not.
Possible values: Need Deploy 0, Imported 1, Deployed
2, Unknown 3.

num

(2,0)

CERTIFICATE

The content of the ssl certificate.

txt

USER_ID

This field will be populated when the Management
application user creates certificate or import
certificates from file. User can view this certificate not
bound to any vip in SSL certificate dialog

int

TABLE 376

SSL_CERTIFICATE_VIP_SERVER_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

SSL_CERTIFICATE_ID

Foreign key to SSL_CERTIFICATE_ID in ssl_certificate
table

int

VIP_SERVER_ID

The column holds ID of VIP Server. It is Foreign Key and
refers to ID column of VIP_SERVER table

int

Definition

Format

TABLE 377

Size

SSL_KEY

Field

Size

ssl_key_id

int

name

varchar

255

location

varchar

255

file_name

varchar

255

key_type

varchar

2

encryption_type

varchar

2

password

varchar

255

description

varchar

1024

strength

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

The strength of the private key in bits.

int

1535

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 377

Definition

Format

private_key

Content of the private key.

txt

USER_ID

This field will be populated when the Management
application user creates certificate or import
certificates from file. User can view this certificate not
bound to any vip in SSL certificate dialog.

int

TABLE 378

Size

SSL_KEY_PASSWORD

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

KEY_PASSWORD_ALIAS

Key Password Alias is the alias name used for the
encrypted key password. This alias name is used to
identify the password in client UI.

varchar

16

KEY_PASSWORD

SSL keys are protected by passwords, and these
passwords are used during key import operation from
device. The key password is stored encrypted in the
tables.

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FIVE_MIN_VALUE

Configured maximum samples value for the five
minute table.

int

THIRTY_MIN_VALUE

Configured maximum samples value for the thirty
minute table.

int

TWO_HR_VALUE

Configured maximum samples value for the two hour
table.

int

ONE_DAY_VALUE

Configured maximum samples value for the one day
table.

int

MAX_SAMPLES_VALUE

The maximum number of samples value, i.e., 3456.

int

INTERPOLATE

Whether interpolation is enabled or disabled.

smallint

POLICY_TYPE

The type of the aging ploicy.
• 100 - Default aging (1 day 5 mins samples, 3
days 30 mins samples,7 days 2 hrs sample and
2 years 1 day samples)
• 101 - 5 mins to 1 day aging(8 days 5 mins
samples and 90 days of 1 day samples)

smallint

ACTIVE

The active state of the policy.

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

STP_PORT_ID

Prmiary key Identifier.

int

STP_INSTANCE_ID

Foreign Key Reference to STP_INSTANCE table.

int

STP

If MSTP is enabled, the value will be 1 else 0.

numeric

TABLE 379

TABLE 380

1536

SSL_KEY (Continued)

Field

Size

STATS_AGING
Size

STP_PORT
Size

(1,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 380

STP_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

INTERFACE_ID

Foreign Key Reference to INTERFACE table

int

PATH_COST

Port Path Cost.

bigint

PRIORITY

Port Priority.

bigint

LINK_TYPE

Link Type.
1- Shared
2 - P2P.

numeric

(1,0)

PORT_FAST

Port Fast.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

BPDU_FILTER

BPDU Filter.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

BPDU_GUARD

BPDU guard.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

EDGE_PORT

Edge port.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

AUTO_EDGE

Auto edge.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

ROOT_GUARD

Root guard.
0 - Disabled
1 - Enabled

numeric

(1,0)

HELLO_TIME

Number of seconds between generation of config
BPDUs on CIST.

smallint

VLAN_ID

The PVST and RPVST values needs to mapped with
the VLAN.

int

Definition

Format

TABLE 381

Size

STP_INSTANCE

Field

Size

STP_INSTANCE_ID

int

INSTANCE_TYPE

num

(2,0)

INSTANCE_ID

num

(4,0)

DEVICE_ID

int

STP_MODE

num

(2,0)

FORWARD_DELAY

num

(2,0)

MAX_AGE

num

(2,0)

HELLO_TIME

num

(2,0)

PRIORITY

num

(6,0)

STP_VERSION

num

(2,0)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1537

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 381

STP_INSTANCE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

RE_ENABLE_PORT_INTERV
AL

FOS/NOS Field. Re enable port interval.

int

RE_ENABLE_PORT_STATE

FOS/NOS Field. Re enable port state.

smallint

PATH_COST

1538

bigint

STP

Possible values:
• 0 - Disabled
• 1 - Enabled

smallint

CISCO_INTER_OP

Cisco Interoperability Enabled/Disabled.

num

TX_HOLD_COUNT

Transmit HoldCount of the Bridge

smallint

MAX_HOPS

MST max hop count (1-40)

smallint

REGION

MST Region.

varchar

REVISION

Revision Number for Configuration information.

smallint

TABLE 382

Size

(1,0)

255

SWITCH_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

The database ID of the switch that the
configuration belongs to

int

BOTTLENECK_DETECT_ENABLED

Flag indicates if bottleneck detection is
enabled or not

smallint

ALERTS_ENABLED

Flag indicates if bottleneck detection alerts is
enabled or not

smallint

CONGESTION_THRESHOLD

Value of bottleneck detection congestion
threshold in percent

double
precision

LATENCY_THRESHOLD

Value of bottleneck detection latency threshold
in percent

double
precision

WINDOW_

Value of bottleneck detection latency window
in millisecond

int

QUIET_TIME

Value of bottleneck detection quiet time in
millisecond

int

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the record

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Last update time of the record

timestamp

LATENCY_SEVERITY

The factor by which throughput must drop in a
second in order for that second to be
considered affected by latency bottlenecking.
Range (1 to 1000).

int

LATENCY_TIME

The minimum fraction of a second that must
be affected by latency in order for that second
to be considered affected by latency
bottlenecking. Range (0 to 1).

double
precision

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 383

SWITCH_CONFIG

Field

Definition

ID*

Format

Size

int

NAME

Name of the switch configurations uploaded from the
switch either on demand or through scheduler

varchar

SWITCH_ID

ID of the switch from which the configuration has
been uploaded.

int

CORE_SWITCH_ID

64

int

BACKUP_DATE_TIME

The date/time stamp at which the configuration has
been uploaded.

timestamp

CONFIG_DATA

The actual switch configuration data.

text

CEE_CONFIG_DATA

Switch configuration data for CEE

text

KEEP_COPY

The column value (1) helps to preserve the
configuration even after the expiration of its age.

smallint

CREATED_BY

The column value helps to figure out who triggered the
configuration upload operation.

varchar

CONFIG_TYPE

Configuration Type
• FC=0
• CEE_RUNNING=1
• CEE_STARTUP=2
• INVALID=-1
Default value is 0.

smallint

COMMENTS

Brief comments about this configuration.

varchar

256

Format

Size

TABLE 384

64

SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL

Field

Definition

SWITCH_CONFIG_ID

int

IP_ADDRESS

IP Address of the switch for which the configuration
was uploaded either on demand or schedule.

varchar

128

WWN

WWN of the switch for which the configuration was
uploaded either on demand or schedule.

char

23

PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN

CORE WWN of the switch for which the configuration
was uploaded either on demand or schedule.

char

23

MODEL_NUMBER

Model Number of the switch for which the
configuration was uploaded either on demand or
schedule.

varchar

32

Size

TABLE 385

SWITCH_LICENSE

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CORE_SWITCH_ID

Refers to the entry in the CORE_SWITCH table.

int

LICENSE_KEY

Stores the license key obtained from the switch.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

256

1539

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 386
Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWBD_TYPE

Switch type number, universally used by all the
Management application module implementation.

smallint

SUBTYPE

Switch subtype. At present no subtypes for existing
model records are defined.
Default value is 0.

smallint

DESCRIPTION

Model description, such as FC link speed, port count
and whether multi-card (director) class switch or
other type of switch.
Default is ‘Not Available’.

varchar

256

MODEL

Switch model string.

varchar

32

REMARK

Remarks, such as an internal project name.

varchar

64

SYS_OID

This will represent the sys_oid for each product type.

varchar

255

PRODUCT_FAMILY

This represents the product family that each OID
belongs to.

varchar

128

BRIEF_PRODUCT_FAMILY

Shorter name for the product family.

varchar

32

SPEED

Switch max speed. Value 0 represents NotAvailable.

smallint

MULTI_CP_CAPABLE

Switch is multi cp cabable or not. 0 means single CP
and 1 means multi.

smallint

MIN_IMAGE_VERSION

Supported min firmware version.

varchar

64

MAX_IMAGE_VERSION

Supported max firmware version.

varchar

64

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

DB ID of virtual_switch to which this port belongs.

int

WWN

WWN of the port.

char

23

NAME

User friendly name of the port.

char

32

SLOT_NUMBER

Slot number.
Default value is 0.

int

PORT_NUMBER

The logical port number of the user port. There is no
assumption of any relation to the physical location of
a port within a chassis.

smallint

USER_PORT_NUMBER

User port number. Unique port number in a chassis.

smallint

PORT_ID

Port ID of this port.

varchar

PORT_INDEX

Number used for identifying port in zoning.

smallint

AREA_ID

Area number the port is assigned to.

smallint

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC address of this port.

varchar

64

PORT_MOD

Stores the port module type. Not applicable if port
doesn't have a GBIC installed.

varchar

64

TABLE 387

1540

SWITCH_MODEL
Size

SWITCH_PORT

8

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 387

SWITCH_PORT (Continued)

Field

Definition

TYPE

Port type. The specific mode currently enabled for the varchar
port. The port type could be U-Port, F-Port, E-Port etc.

16

FULL_TYPE

Refers to the full type of the port, U-Port, F-Port etc.

varchar

128

STATUS

Refers to the Status of the port. Eg. No Light, No
Module, Mod_inv, Online etc.

varchar

64

HEALTH

Refers to the Health of the port. Eg. Unmonitored,
Healthy, Offline , Error etc.

varchar

16

STATUS_MESSAGE

Any additional port level status similar to what is
seen in CLI, like Segmented, Speed Mismatch, Trunk
master etc are stored here.

varchar

255

PHYSICAL_PORT

Indicates if the port is physical port. It will be 0 for
virtual ports Eg. Ports created by LISLs.

smallint

LOCKED_PORT_TYPE

Indicates the locked port type of the port. Ports can
be locked down so that they can come up only in that
mode.

varchar

CATEGORY

Denotes the category of the switch. 1 denotes FC
port and 2 denotes gige port.

smallint

PROTOCOL

The protocol used by the port. FC, FCIP etc.

varchar

16

SPEED

Actual speed at which the port is currently operating.

varchar

64

SPEEDS_SUPPORTED

The supported port speed as a list of comma
separated values.

varchar

32

MAX_PORT_SPEED

The maximum speed the port is capable of
supporting, in bits per second.

int

DESIRED_CREDITS

How many BB credits are desired for the port.

int

BUFFER_ALLOCATED

How many BB credits are allocated for the port.

int

ESTIMATED_DISTANCE

The estimated physical distance of the connection
between ports.

int

ACTUAL_DISTANCE

The physical distance of the connection on the port in
relation to the other port.

int

LONG_DISTANCE_SETTING

Whether long distance enabled.

int

DEGRADED_PORT

Denotes if the port is in a degraded state. Has value
as N/A for ports that are not online.

varchar

16

REMOTE_NODE_WWN

Node WWN of the attached port.

varchar

255

REMOTE_PORT_WWN

WWN of the attached port.

varchar

255

LICENSED

1 = the port is licensed; otherwise, 0.

smallint

SWAPPED

1 = port is swapped; otherwise, 0.

smallint

TRUNKED

1 = port is trunked; otherwise, 0.

smallint

TRUNK_MASTER

1 = the port is trunk master; otherwise, 0.

smallint

PERSISTENT_DISABLE

1 = port is persistently disabled.

smallint

FICON_SUPPORTED

1 = FICON is supported; otherwise, 0.

smallint

BLOCKED

1 = port is blocked; otherwise, 0.

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Format

Size

16

1541

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 387

SWITCH_PORT (Continued)

Field

1542

Definition

Format

Size

PROHIBIT_PORT_NUMBERS Indicates the ports prohibited with the current port as
configured in the allow prohibit matric (PDCM).

varchar

1024

PROHIBIT_PORT_COUNT

The count of prohibited ports.

smallint

NPIV

Whether NPIV mode is enabled.

smallint

NPIV_CAPABLE

Instance NPIV mode capability:
1 = indicates port has NPIV capability
2 = NPIV license is enabled

smallint

NPIV_ENABLED

Whether NPIV mode is enabled.

smallint

FC_FAST_WRITE_ENABLED

1 = FC fast write is enabled.

smallint

ISL_RRDY_ENABLED

Denotes if ISL receiver ready is enabled.

smallint

RATE_LIMIT_CAPABLE

Denotes if the port is capable of Rate Limiting.

smallint

RATE_LIMITED

Denotes if the port has Rate Limiting Enabled.

smallint

QOS_CAPABLE

Indicates if the port is QOS capable.

smallint

QOS_ENABLED

Indicates if the port is QOS enabled.

smallint

TUNNEL_CONFIGURED

Denotes if the port has a fcip tunnel configured.

smallint

FCIP_TUNNEL_UP

Denotes if the fcip tunnel that is configured is up.

smallint

FCR_FABRIC_ID

Stores the FCR fabric ID. Applicable if the port is
configured as an EX port.

smallint

FCR_INTEROP_MODE

The interop mode of the FCR fabric. Applicable if the
port is an EX port.

smallint

CALCULATED_STATUS

The calculated status of the port. Eg. Healthy, Down,
Marginal etc.

varchar

64

USER_DEFINED_VALUE1

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE2

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE3

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

KIND

Stores the port kind from the NVP portKind.

varchar

32

STATE

The state of the port whether it is online or offline

varchar

64

PREVIOUS_STATUS

This table can hold the same values as STATUS
column. But this will be holding the previous status of
the PORT. These values to be populated by switch
asset collector.

varchar

64

AUTO_DISABLE_CONFIGUR
ED

To represent auto disable configuration state (set by
user).
Default value is 0.

smallint

AUTO_DISABLED

To represent auto disabled status (set by switch).
Default value is 0.

smallint

OCCUPIED

Default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_UPDATE

Last update time stored as long value. Elapsed time
from 1970 in milliseconds.

bigint

PORT_BIT_MASK

F-Port trunk bit mask value.
Default value is 0.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 387

SWITCH_PORT (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

LOGICAL_PORT_NUMBER

F-Port trunk logical port number.
Default value is -1.

smallint

DEFAULT_AREA_ID

Default Area id of F-Port trunk port.
Default value is -1.

smallint

LOGICAL_PORT_WWN

Logical port WWN of F-Port trunk group.

char

23

PREVIOUS_TYPE

This fields copies the old state of the port type. The
field could be used to track the state change
information for the switch port type.
SwitchAssetCollector sets this field during the
collection time. SMIA requested this information but
could be used by any module which needs to track
the type state change.

varchar

16

LATENCY_DETECT_SUPPOR
TED

Whether the port supports latency detection. 1
means true and 0 means false

smallint

PREVIOUS_STATE

Fields copies the old state of the port . The field could
be used to track the state change information for the
switch port . SwitchAssetCollector sets this field
during the collection time. SMIA requested this
information but could be used by any module which
needs to track the state change.

varchar

EPORT_DISABLED

Represents the eportDisabled field from switch.html.
Values populated by SwitchAssetcollector during the
collection time. Possible values includes 0 and 1.
Default value is -1.

smallint

SPEED_NEGOTIATED

This column indicates if the port speed is negotiated
or not. If port speed is negotiated then value is 1 else
it will be 0.
Default value is -1.

smallint

MAX_FRAME_MONITOR

Maximum frame monitor supported for switch port.

int

MAX_FRAME_MONITOR_OF
FSET

Maximum offset supported in fame monitor for
switch port.

int

Contains the features supported as a bit mask at
port level.

int

IDENTIFIER

Switch port identifier extracted from interface name

char

PORT_CAPABILITIES

'List of capabilities of this port specified as bit mask.
Each bit would represent capability like FEC,
Encryption and compression, NPIV etc.';

int

XISL_PORT_LIST

This field is applicable only for logical ports created
for LISLs. It denotes the list of XISL ports associated
with the current logical port. Will be blank for
non-logical ports.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

80

256

1543

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 387

Definition

Format

PORT_COMMISSION_STATE

Indicates whether port decommission/recommission
was in progress or completed, based on this status
we will show the decommission/recommission icon
on ports and Indicates the
Decommissioned/Recommissioned status of the
ports which was performed from the Management
application.
None - 0, Decommission In Progress - 1 ,
Decommissioned - 2,
Recommission In Progress - 3, Recommissioned - 4.
If the decommission is performed through CLI or
other Management application server then the state
would be None (0).

int

FEATURES_ENABLED

Holds as a bit mask the features that are enabled .
Refer FEATURES_ACTIVE for the active/inactive
status of a feature. Each bit would represent features
like Encryption, compression etc.' The bit mask and
their corresponding Features are defined as an enum
in the domain model class - SwitchPort.java.

int

FEATURES_ACTIVE

Holds as a bit mask the features that are active.
Please note that this is different from the enabled
value which is found in the FEATURES_ENABLED
column. Each bit would represent features like
Encryption, compression etc. The bit mask and their
corresponding Features are defined as an enum in
the domain model class - SwitchPort.java.

int

DISABLED_REASON

The Switch Port disabled reason.

varchar

FENCED

1 means port is fenced.

smallint

MASTER_PORT_NUMBER

This column will have the trunk master port number
for the trunk members.
For trunk master, it will have its own port number.
For non-trunk ports, it will have the default value -1.

int

SPEED_TYPE

Stores the speed type of the port. It contains one of
the following values:
• 1 - Indicates speed is in Mbps.
• 2 - Indicates speed is in Gbps.

int

TABLE 388

1544

SWITCH_PORT (Continued)

Field

Size

1024

SWITCH_PORT_PERFORMANCE

Field

Definition

Format

PORT_ID

Primary key of the Switch Port.

int

SWITCH_ID

Primary key of Virtual Switch which this port is
present

int

TX

The number of octets or bytes that have been
transmitted by this port. One second periodic polling
of the port. This value is saved and compared with
the next polled value to compute net throughput.
Note, for Fibre Channel, ordered sets are not
included in the count

double
precision

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 388

SWITCH_PORT_PERFORMANCE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

RX

The number of octets or bytes that have been
received by this port. One second periodic polling of
the port. This value is saved and compared with the
next polled value to compute net throughput. Note,
for Fibre Channel, ordered sets are not included in
the count

double
precision

TX_UTILIZATION

The computed value of TX based on speed of port

double
precision

RX_UTILIZATION

'The computed value of RX based on speed of port

double
precision

LINK_FAILURE

Count of link failures. This count is part of the Link
Error Status Block (LESB). (FC-PH 29.8). Note, this is
a Fibre Channel only stat

double
precision

TX_LINK_RESETS

Count of Link resets. This is the number of LRs
received. Note, this is a Fibre Channel only stat

double
precision

RX_LINK_RESETS

Count of Link resets. This is the number LRs
transmitted. Note, this is a Fibre Channel only stat

double
precision

SYNC_LOSSES

Count of instances of synchronization loss detected
at port. This count is part of the Link Error Status
Block (LESB). (FC-PH 29.8). Note, this is a Fibre
Channel only stat.

double
precision

SIGNAL_LOSSES

Count of instances of signal loss detected at port.
This count is part of the Link Error Status Block
(LESB). (FC-PH 29.8). Note, this is a Fibre Channel
only stat

double
precision

SEQUENCE_ERRORS

Count of primitive sequence protocol errors detected
at this port. This count is part of the Link Error Status
Block (LESB). (FC-PH 29.8). Note, this is a Fibre
Channel only stat

double
precision

INVALID_TRANSMISSIONS

Count of invalid transmission words received at this
port. This count is part of the Link Error Status Block
(LESB). FC-PH 29.8). Note, this is a Fibre Channel
only stat

double
precision

CRC_ERRORS

Count of frames received with invalid CRC. This count
is part of the Link Error Status Block (LESB). (FC-PH
29.8). Loop ports should not count CRC errors
passing through when monitoring. Note, this is a
Fibre Channel only stat.'

double
precision

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Time when this stats record was updated

timestamp

FAKE_PORT

Denotes whether the port is a fake port created by
the Management application for drawing connections
or a real one obtained during collection from the
switch. 1 denotes a fake port and 0 denotes a real
port.

smallint

SPEED_TYPE

Stores the speed type of the port. It will contain one
of the following values:
1 - indicates speed is in Mbps
2 - indicates speed is in Gbps

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1545

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 389
Field

Definition

Format

SWITCH_ID*

References the ID in CORE_SWITCH table.

int

POLICY_ID*

References the ID in THRESHOLD_POLICY table.

int

STATUS

The status of applied to the switch.

smallint

OVERRIDDEN

Policy is overridden or not overridden.

smallint

DESCRIPTION

Description about the status of policy applied to the
switch.

varchar

100

Size

TABLE 390

Size

SYSTEM_CARD_ENGINE_MAPPING

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID

Foreign key reference to the ENCRYPTION_ENGINE
for which a system card is registered

int

SMART_CARD_ID

Foreign key reference to the SMART_CARD that is
registered as a system card for the encryption
engine.

int

TABLE 391

SYSTEM_PROPERTY

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME*

The name of the property.

char

64

VALUE

The value for the property.

varchar

2048

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

TYPE

Type of the target device. Some possible values are
• Switch
• Device
• Port
• Host
• Port Group
• Product Group
• VLAN
• Fabric

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 392

TABLE 393

1546

SWITCH_THRESHOLD_SETTING

TARGET_TYPE

THIRD_PARTY_DEVICE

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_ID

Primary key for this table.

int

DEVICE_TYPE

Type of the third party device. As of now, we have two
types Wireless Location Manager and LANcope
device.

varchar

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 394

THRESHOLD_MEASURE

Field

Definition

Format

MEASURE_ID*

References the ID In PM_MEASURE table, where all
measures are defined.

int

HIGH_BOUNDARY

Configured high boundary threshold value for
measure ID.

int

LOW_BOUNDARY

Configured low boundary threshold value for
measure ID.

int

BUFFER_SIZE

Configured buffer size for measure ID.

int

POLICY_ID*

References the ID in THRESHOLD_POLICY table.

int

TABLE 395

Size

THRESHOLD_POLICY

Field

Definition

ID*

Format

Size

int

NAME

Name of the policy.

varchar

100

TYPE

Type of the policy.

varchar

20

DESCRIPTION

Description about the policy.

varchar

100

Size

TABLE 396

TIME_SERIES_DATA

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For device level
collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure.

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId, for port level it will use
interfaceId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

'Stores the index_map value in case of anexpression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

30 mins aggregated data.

double
precision

TABLE 397

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when the record is inserted.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For device level
collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure.

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId, for port level it will use
interfaceId.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1547

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 397

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

30 mins aggregated data.

double
precision

TABLE 398

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when the record is inserted.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For device level
collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure.

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId, for port level it will use
interfaceId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

30 mins aggregated data.

double
precision

TABLE 399

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2HOUR

Field

\

1548

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1DAY (Continued)

Field

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when the record is inserted.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For device level
collector the target type is 0, for port level it is 1.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure.

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId, for port level it will use
interfaceId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

ID of the data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

30 mins aggregated data.

double
precision

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 400

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables. Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 401

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores One day aggregated data.

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1549

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 401

Definition

Format

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

TABLE 402

Size

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 2 hours aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

TABLE 403

1550

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY (Continued)

Field

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 403

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 30 minutes aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

TABLE 404

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables. Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1551

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 405
Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores One day aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

TABLE 406

1552

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY
Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

Size

256

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 406

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

VALUE

Stores the 2 hours aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

TABLE 407

TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data. For
IP_DEVICE(0), IP_PORT(1), IP_TRUNK(2),
FOS_DEVICE(3), FC_PORT(4), GE_PORT(5),
TE_PORT(6), HBA_PORT(7), CNA_PORT(8),
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT(9), FCIP_TUNNEL(10),
EE_MONITOR(11), IP_DEVICE_GROUP(12),
IP_PORT_GROUP(13), VIRTUAL_GROUP(14),
TRILL_TRUNK(15), ALL_SAN_PRODUCTS(16).

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 30 minutes aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

TABLE 408

Size

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1553

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 408

Definition

Format

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the raw data received from the device.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 409

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores One day aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 410

1554

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3 (Continued)

Field

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3_2HOUR

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 410

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3_2HOUR (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 2 hours aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 411

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_3_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 30 minutes aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1555

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 412
Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the raw data received from the device.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 413

1556

TIME_SERIES_DATA_4
Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_4_1DAY

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores One day aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 2 hour table while aggregating 1
day data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 414

TIME_SERIES_DATA_4_2HOUR

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 2 hours aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in 30 min table while aggregating 2
hours of data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

TABLE 415

Size

256

TIME_SERIES_DATA_4_30MIN

Field

Definition

Format

TIME_IN_SECONDS

Time when value of the measure retrieved from the
corresponding target.

int

TARGET_TYPE

Target type of the PM collector data.

smallint

MEASURE_ID

ID of the measure (MIB/Expression).

int

TARGET_ID

Target ID of the PM collector data. For device level
collector it will use deviceId/virtualSwitchId, for port
level it will use interfaceId/switchPortId/
fcipTunnelId/devicePortId.

int

COLLECTOR_ID

DB ID of the pm_data_collector.

int

MEASURE_INDEX

Stores the index_map value in case of an expression. varchar

ME_ID

ME_ID of the target.

int

VALUE

Stores the 30 minutes aggregated data.

double
precision

MIN_VALUE

Minimum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1557

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 415

Definition

Format

MAX_VALUE

Maximum value in raw performance statistics table
while aggregating 30 minutes of data.

double
precision

SUM_VALUE

Named after SUM_VALUE to be consistent with
column names in aggregated data tables.Stores the
delta changes for counter values between two
samples, only used for counter values, 0 for all other
types of measures.

double
precision

Field

Definition

Format

Size

TOOL_MENU_TEXT*

Text to be displayed for the Tool Menu.

varchar

256

TOOL_ID

A Tool in the TOOL_PATH table where the tools are
defined.

int

PARAMETERS

Default path for launching the tool.

varchar

256

KEY_STROKE

Short cut key stroke to the application.

varchar

30

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TOOL_NAME

Name of the tool.

varchar

256

PATH

Path of the tool where installed or available.

varchar

1057

WORKING_FOLDER

Working folder for that application.

varchar

512

Size

TABLE 416

TABLE 417

TABLE 418

Size

TOOL_APP

TOOL_PATH

TOPO_MAP_IMAGE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Image name in the foo.png format

varchar

IMAGE_OBJECT

'Image Object BLOB

bytea

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

CLUSTER_ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the VCS Cluster in
the VirtualSwitch

int

SOURCE_ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the source
VirtualSwitch.

int

SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID

The source vcs member id

int

SOURCE_PORT

The source port number as retrieved from the switch. int

SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER

The source port represented as a tuple of
member/slot/port

TABLE 419

1558

TIME_SERIES_DATA_4_30MIN (Continued)

Field

256

TRILL

char

Size

30

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 419

TRILL

Field

Definition

Format

DEST_ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the destination
VirtualSwitch.

int

DEST_DOMAIN_ID

The destination vcs member id

int

DEST_PORT

The dest port number as retrieved from the switch.

int

DEST_PORT_NUMBER

The source port represented as a tuple of
member/slot/port

char

COST

Cost for the given trill link

int

TYPE

Type of the given trill link

smallint

TRUSTED

Is this trill link trusted

smallint

TRUNKED

Is this trill link part of a trunk

smallint

CREATION_TIME

Time when the TRILL link record is created between
source and destination.

timestamp

MISSING

Is this trill link was discovered and is now missing

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Time when the TRILL link is missing from the switch.

timestamp

SOURCE_PORT_NAME

Switch port name for the source

char

30

DEST_PORT_NAME

Switch port name for the destination

char

30

Size

TABLE 420

Size

30

TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key for this table. Serial number which is
uniquely generated by DB.

int

ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the VCS member in
the VirtualSwitch

int

MASTER_PORT_NUMBER

The master port represented as a tuple of
member/slot/port

varchar

30

Format

Size

TABLE 421

TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER

Field

Definition

GROUP_ID

int

PORT_NUMBER

TABLE 422

The source port represented as a tuple of
member/slot/port

varchar

30

TRUNK_GROUP_INTERFACE

Field

Definition

INTERFACE_ID
VLAG

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Format

Size

int
Specifies whether the lag is a vlag or not

smallint

1559

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 423

TRUNK_GROUP_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

TRUNK_GROUP_MEMBER_I
D

Primary key for this table.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Foreign key which refers INTERACE table.

int

TRUNK_INTERFACE_ID

Foreign key which refers TRUNK_GROUP_INTERACE
table.

int

LAG_NAME

Lag name of the trunk.

varchar

64

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID *

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

User name.

varchar

128

DESCRIPTION

User description.

varchar

512

PASSWORD

User password.

varchar

512

EMAIL

User e-mail ID.

varchar

1024

NOTIFICATION_ENABLED

Flag for e-mail notification.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FULL_NAME

User’'s Full Name.

varchar

512

PHONE_NUMBER

User’'s Phone number.

varchar

32

INVALID_LOGIN_COUNT

This is a counter filed to identify the number of invalid
login attempts.

smallint

TABLE 424

Size

USER_

NOTE: After successful login this filed will be set to
NULL.
Default value is 0.
LOCKED_OUT_DATETIME

The date time stamp when a user got locked out
because of exceeding max number of invalid login
attempts.

timestamp

STATUS

User’s account status:
• 0=Disabled
• 1=Enabled
Default value is 1.

smallint

To identify the source for creating the user account.
0= User created through Management
application Client
• 1= User created when authenticated through
external server.

smallint

SOURCE_OF_CREATION

•

NOTE: At present there is no direct use of this field
however this can be referred in future to build
certain reports.
Default value is 0.

1560

IP_PRODUCT_LOGIN_NAME

User CLI credential login user name.

varchar

256

IP_PRODUCT_LOGIN_PASS
WORD

User CLI credential login password.

varchar

768

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 424

USER_ (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

IP_PRODUCT_ENABLE_USE
R_NAME

User CLI credential enable user name.

varchar

256

IP_PRODUCT_ENABLE_PAS
SWORD

User CLI credential enable password.

varchar

768

Format

Size

varchar

128

TABLE 425

USER_AOR_MAP

Field

Definition

USER_NAME
AOR_ID

TABLE 426

AOR ID where user has membership.

smallint

USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL

Field

Definition

Format

Size

WWN

WWN of the device.

char

23

NAME

'Name of the device which is updated by the user.

varchar

256

TYPE

Type of the device (Initiator or Target.

varchar

32

IP_ADDRESS

IP address of the device which is updated by the
user.

varchar

63

CONTACT

Contact detail of the device which is updated by the
user.

varchar

256

LOCATION

Location of the device which is updated by the user.

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

Description of the device which is updated by user.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE1

Value of the user defined property 1.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE2

Value of the user defined property 2.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE3

Value of the user defined property 3.

varchar

256

TABLE 427

USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

NAME

Name of the Scope

varchar

USER_ID

Foreign Key USER_.ID. ID of the user who created the
Custom Dashboard.

int

TABLE 428

Size

128

USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE_MEMBERSHIP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SCOPE_ID

Foreign Key USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE.ID. The
ID of the user defined network scope to which this
membership belongs.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1561

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 428

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID

Foreign Key FABRIC.ID. The ID of the fabric in the
membership. This can be null if user does not include
Fabric in his custom membership.

int

PRODUCT_ME_ID

Foreign Key MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID. The ME ID of the
device in the membership. This can be null if user does
not include Switch in his custom membership.

int

SWITCH_PORT_ID

Foreign Key SWITCH_PORT.ID. The ID of the switch Port
in the membership. This can be null if user does not
include Switch Port in his custom membership.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Foreign Key INTERFACE. INTERFACE_ID. The ID of the
Interface in the membership. This can be null if user
does not include Interface in his custom membership.

int

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Foreign Key DEVICE_PORT.ID. The ID of the Device Port
in the membership. This can be null if user does not
include Device Port in his custom membership.

int

TABLE 429

Size

USER_PREFERENCE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

USER_NAME *

User name whose preferences are saved. It corresponds
to user_name in USER_table.

varchar

128

CATEGORY *

The name for a set of related preferences.

varchar

128

CONTENT

The set of preferences saved as name-value pairs.

text

TABLE 430

USER_REALTIME_MEASURE_MAPPING

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key.

int

USER_ID

Foreign key reference to the user_ Table.

int

EXPRESSION_ID

Foreign key reference to Measure Table.

int

MIB_OBJECT_ID

Foreign key reference to Measure Table.

int

MEASURE_TYPE

This identifies the collectible type. 0 for MIBs and 1
for Expressions.

int

TABLE 431

1562

USERDEFINED_NETWORK_SCOPE_MEMBERSHIP

Field

Size

USER_REALTIME_MEASURE_SETTING

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key field for the
user_realtime_measure_setting table

int

USER_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the user_
Table

int

EXPRESSION_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the
snmp_expression Table

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 431

USER_REALTIME_MEASURE_SETTING (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

MIB_OBJECT_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the
mib_object Table

int

TYPE

This identifies the collectible type. 0 for MIBs, 1 for
Expressions

int

TABLE 432

Size

USER_RESOURCE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

Size

USER_NAME*

User name.

varchar

128

RESOURCE_GROUP_ID*

Resource group name, which is mapped for the user.

int

TABLE 433

USER_ROLE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

Size

USER_NAME*

User name.

varchar

128

ROLE_ID*

Role ID, which is mapped for the user.

int

TABLE 434

USER_STATE_MAP

Field

Definition

USER_NAME
STATE

Current user state. The possible values are:
• 0 - Locked out by user manager
• 1 - Locked Out Threshold Reached
• 2 - Password Expired
• 3 - Password History Policy Violated
• 4 - Password Format Policy Violated

Format

Size

varchar

128

smallint

NOTE: This numeric state value will be mapped to
associated ENUM at DTO side

TABLE 435

V_PORT_DETAIL

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

Primary key from the owner device port table.

int

STATE

Flag to indicate whether port is online or offline

varchar

32

FCP_INITIATOR

The role of the virtual port; for example, FCP Initiator

varchar

256

SWITCH_IP

IP of the switch, the V port is connected to

varchar

128

VF_ID

VF ID for the V port

smallint

Field

Definition

Format

VCN_ICL_ID

Virtual Cluster Node ICL DB ID.

int

ICL_NAME

ICL name.

varchar

TABLE 436

Size

VCN_ICL

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

100

1563

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 436

VCN_ICL

Field

Definition

Format

ICL_PORT_ID

ICL port foreign key.

int

VCN_MEMBER_ID

Virtual Cluster Node member id foreign key.

int

Field

Definition

Format

VCN_MEMBER_ID

Virtual Cluster Node member db id.

int

CLUSTER_ID

Cluster id.

int

CLUSTER_NAME

Cluster name.

varchar

CLUSTER_RBRIDGE_ID

Cluster rbridge id.

int

SESSION_VLAN

Session VLAN id.

smallint

KEEP_ALIVE_VLAN

Keep alive VLAN id.

smallint

Cluster isolation state:
Loose(0)
Strict(1).

smallint

IS_CLIENTS_SHUTDOWN

Is MCT Client interfaces shutdown?

numeric

(1,0)

MEMBER_VLAN_RANGE

Configured member VLAN range.

varchar

256

ACTIVE_MEMBER_VLAN_RA Active member VLAN range.
NGE

varchar

256

CLUSTER_DEPLOY_STATE

Cluster deployment state:
Deployed(0)
Undeployed(1).

smallint

Device id foreign key.

int

Field

Definition

Format

VCN_PEER_ID

Virtual Cluster Node Peer db id.

int

IP_ADDRESS

Peer ip address.

varchar

RBRIDGE_ID

Peer rbridge id.

int

ICL_NAME

Cluster ICL name used for this peer.

varchar

Cluster Peer fast failover state:
Disabled(0)
Enabled(1).

smallint

KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL

Cluster Peer keep alive interval in seconds.

INET

HOLD_TIME

Cluster Peer hold time in seconds.

int

TABLE 437

VCN_MEMBER

CLIENT_ISOLATION_MODE

DEVICE_ID

TABLE 438

•
•

•
•

Size

100

VCN_PEER

FAST_FAILOVER_STATE

1564

Size

•
•

ACTIVE_MEMBER_VLAN_RA Cluster Peer Active member VLAN range.
NGE

varchar

PEER_OPER_STATE

Cluster Peer operational state.

smallint

PEER_DOWN_REASON

Cluster Peer down reason.

int

PEER_UP_TIME

Cluster Peer up time.

int

Size

100

100

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 438

VCN_PEER

Field

Definition

Format

VCN_MEMBER_ID

Virtual Cluster Node member id foreign key.

int

PEER_DEVICE_ID

Peer device id.

int

TABLE 439

Size

VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

CLUSTER_ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the VCS Cluster in
the VirtualSwitch.

int

MEMBER_ME_ID

The Management Element ID of the cluster member
in the VirtualSwitch.

int

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the record

timestamp

TRUSTED

Describes whether the member is trusted. Possible
values are 1 and 0. 1 means trusted and 0 means
untrusted.

smallint

MISSING

Describes whether the member is missing or not.
Possible values are 1 and 0. 1 means missing and 0
means not missing

smallint

MISSING_TIME

Time when the member gone missing.

timestamp

STATE

Indicates the state of the member with respect to
cluster. States can be Online, Offline, Rejoining etc.

varchar

64

FABRIC_STATUS

Stores the fabric level status of the node like
Unknown and Online.
Status is unknown when:
• A node is going through a reboot or ISLs have
not formed yet.
• A node is not part of a cluster yet.
Status is Online when:
• A node is waiting to rejoin a cluster.
• A node joins a cluster and all the ports are up
and ISLs are formed.

varchar

64

Definition

Format

Size

VERSION

Version of the VCEM server.

varchar

32

NETWORK_ADDRESS

The version number of the VCEM server.

varchar

128

PORT_NUMBER

The SOAP API port number on the VCEM server.

int

USERNAME

The username to be used to logon to the VCEM
server.

varchar

512

PASSWORD

The password to be used to logon to the VCEM
server. Will be store encrypted.

varchar

512

DISCOVERY_STATUS

The current discovery status of the VCEM server
(discovery pending, ,active, failed, deleted pending
etc.).

smallint

TABLE 440

Size

VCEM_PROFILE

Field
ID

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1565

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 440

VCEM_PROFILE (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

LAST_DISCOVERY_STATUS

The discovery status of the VCEM server in the
previous discovery cycle.

smallint

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

LAST_FAILURE_TIMESTAMP

The time of the last failed collection.

timestamp

LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIMES
TAMP

The time of the last successful collection.

timestamp

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key field for the VIP_SERVER

int

TYPE

Even Policy Type

smallint

TABLE 441

Size

VIP_SERVER

•
•

Size

0? Virtual Server
1 ? Real Server

DEVICE_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the Device
Table

int

IP_ADDRESS

The IP Address for the Virtual Server or Real Server

varchar

128

NAME

The Name of Virtual Server or Real Server

varchar

256

TABLE 442

VIP_SERVER_BINDING

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary Key field for the VIP_SERVER_BINDING

int

DEVICE_ID

This is the foreign key reference key to the Device
Table

int

The IP Address for the Virtual Server

varchar

The Port number of the Virtual Server

int

The IP Address for the Real Server

varchar

The Port Number for the Real Server

int

Size

128

VIRTUAL_SERVER_IP_ADDR
ESS
VIRUTAL_SERVER_PORT

128

REAL_SERVER_IP_ADDRES
S
REAL_SERVER_PORT

TABLE 443

VIRTUAL_CIRCUIT_INTERFACE

Field
INTERFACE_ID

1566

Definition

Format

Size

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 444

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID

The unique id of switch the virtual fcoe port belongs
to.

int

PORT_WWN

WWN of port

varchar

64

PORT_SPEED

Will be 10G.

varchar

32

PORT_TYPE

Will be Virtual-FCoE-Port

varchar

16

ENABLED

Enabled/disabled

smallint

STATUS

Status

varchar

TRUNK_INDEX

Trunk index

smallint

PORT_NUMBER

Port number

smallint

NAME

Name

varchar

SLOT_NUMBER

The Slot number in the switch to which this Virtual
FCoE Port belongs

int

VLAN_ID

Comma Separated values of the VLANs associated
with this Virtual FCoE Port

varchar

DEVICE_COUNT

The number of devices associated with this Virtual
FCoE Port.
The default value is 0.

smallint

PEER_MAC

The Peer FCF MAC if this Virtual FCoE Port is a FCoE
VE-port

varchar

TABLE 445

Size

64

64

64

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_MAC_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_ID

The unique id of virtual fcoe port the member
belongs to

int

MAC_ADDRESS

Mac address of member.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 446

Size

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_STAT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

SWITCH_ID

int

PORT_ID

int

TX

The number of valid frames sent from the port

double
precision

RX

The number of valid frames received at this port

double
precision

TX_UTILIZATION

The computed value of TX based on speed of port (for
MarchingAnts)

double
precision

RX_UTILIZATION

The computed value of RX based on speed of port
(for MarchingAnts)

double
precision

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1567

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 446

Definition

Format

CREATION_TIME

The time this stats record was created

timestamp

ACTIVE_STATE

Used for error scenario

smallint

LINK_FAILURES

Link failures

double
precision

TX_LINK_RESETS

TX Link resets

double
precision

RX_LINK_RESETS

RX link resets

double
precision

SYNC_LOSSES

Synchronization losses

double
precision

SIGNAL_LOSSES

Signal losses

double
precision

SEQUENCE_ERRORS

Sequence Errors

double
precision

INVALID_TX

Invalid transmissions

double
precision

CRC_ERRORS

Cyclic Redundancy check error

double
precision

TABLE 447

1568

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_STAT (Continued)

Field

Size

VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

SWITCH_ID

If the VPWWN is constructed based on AG Node WWN
and AG_Port_Index then this is id of connected
switch.

int

SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER

If the VPWWN is configured for AG , this value will
have the default value(-1).

smallint

AG_NODE_WWN

If the VPWWN is configured for Switch Port , this
value will have the default value.

char

AG_PORT_NUMBER

If the VPWWN is configured for Switch Port , this
value will have the default value.

smallint

TYPE

Active WWN
0-Auto is the switch created VPWWN and User is user
defined VPWWN';
1-User

smallint

STATUS

Enable or disable the VPWWN feature on switch port
or AG-port.
• 1-Enabled
• 0-disabled

smallint

USER_VPWWN

User created VPWWN.

char

23

AUTO_VPWWN

VPWWN created by Switch.

char

23

23

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 447

VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DEVICE_PORT_WWN

Physical port WWN of the device for which VPWWN is
assigned.

char

23

SLOT_NUMBER

Slot number of the switch, This will be -1 for AG.

smallint

TABLE 448

VIRTUAL_SWITCH

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Primary key for the table.

int

NAME

Stores the switch name.

varchar

64

WWN

WWN of the Switch.

char

23

VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID

Virtaul fabric ID of the switch. A positive value will be
stored if VF is enabled else -1.

smallint

DOMAIN_ID

Domain ID of the switch.

smallint

BASE_SWITCH

Indidates whether its a base switch. 1 is base switch
and 0 is not.

smallint

Stores the switch mode.
0 is switch mode
2 is ag mode.

smallint

ROLE

Stores the role of the switch like Primary,
Subordinate, Cluster etc.

varchar

32

FCS_ROLE

FCS role for the Switch . This is used only when FCS
policy is turned on.

varchar

16

Stores the switch capability for Admin domain.
1 is capable
0 is not capable.

smallint

FABRIC_IDID_MODE

Denotes if Insistent Domain ID mode is enabled.

smallint

OPERATIONAL_STATUS

Stores the operational status of the switch.

varchar

MAX_ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE

Denotes the maximum supported zone DB size in
bytes.

int

CREATION_TIME

Creation time of the record.

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Stores the timestamp of the last database update.

timestamp

USER_NAME

Stores the telnet user name used to login to switch.

varchar

128

PASSWORD

Password used to login to the switch.

varchar

128

MANAGEMENT_STATE

Management state of the switch. This is a bit mask
that indicates the switches manageability state, like
switch not reachable, credentials invalid, not ready
for manangement etc .
• 0 means management state is Ok
• non zero value will indicate manageability
issues.

bigint

STATE

Stores the switch state like Online, offline etc.

varchar

32

STATUS

Stores the status value here : UNKNOWN(0),
MARGINAL(2),DOWN(3),HEALTHY(1).

varchar

32

SWITCH_MODE

AD_CAPABLE

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

•
•

•
•

Size

128

1569

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 448

VIRTUAL_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

STATUS_REASON

Stores the status reason, which states the
contributors for the status.

varchar

2048

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3

User defined value used for annotation.

varchar

256

CORE_SWITCH_ID

Reference to Core Switch record.

int

INTEROP_MODE

Interop mode for the switch.
• 0 is native
• 2 is McData
• 3 is open fabric.

smallint

CRYPTO_CAPABLE

Stores the switch capability for crypto support .
• 1 is capable
• 0 is not capable.

smallint

Stores the switch capability for FCR support .
1 is capable
0 is not capable.

smallint

Stores the switch capability for FCIP support .
1 is capable
0 is not capable.

smallint

FCOE_CAPABLE

If the switch supports FCoE.
Default value is 0.

smallint

L2_CAPABLE

If the switch supports L2.

smallint

L3_CAPABLE

If the switch supports L3.

smallint

LF_ENABLED

Logical Fabric Enabled/Disabled for a Virtual Switch.
Default value is 0.

smallint

DEFAULT_LOGICAL_SWITCH

Check to see whether virtual switch is a default
logical switch or not. 1 is true and 0 is false.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FEATURES_SUPPORTED

Contains the features supported as a bit mask.
Default value is 0.

int

FMS_MODE

Stores FMS mode in FICON environment.

smallint

DYNAMIC_LOAD_SHARING

Stores the switch capability for dynamic load sharing, smallint
• 1 is capable
• 0 is not capable.

FCR_CAPABLE

FCIP_CAPABLE

PORT_BASED_ROUTING

IN_ORDER_DELIVERY

1570

•
•
•
•

Indicates whether the port based routing is present.
1 is present
0 is absent.

smallint

Indicates whether in order delivery is enabled or
disabled.
• 1 is enabled
• 0 is disabled.

smallint

•
•

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 448

VIRTUAL_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

INSISTENT_DID_MODE

Indicates whether persistent domain ID is enabled on
the switch.
• 1 is enabled
• 0 is disabled.

smallint

LAST_SCAN_TIME

Stores the timestamp of the last scan time, the time
which the switch was contacted for update.

timestamp

DOMAIN_MODE_239

Stores the domain mode offset. Its only used in the
mixed fabric (FOS+EOS).

smallint

DOMAIN_ID_OFFSET

Stores the domain id offset value. Its only used in the
mixed fabric (FOS+EOS).

smallint

PREVIOUS_OPERATIONAL_
STATUS

This table can hold the same values as
OEPRATION_STATUS column. But this will be holding
the previous OPERATIONAL_STATUS of the Virtual
switch. These values to be populated by FCS during
Fabric Refresh task

varchar

FCOE_LOGIN_ENABLED

The FCoE Login Management Status of the switch.
Default value is 0.

smallint

FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE

Whether the switch can create FCIP Circuits. 1 means
true and 0 means false.
Default value is 0.

smallint

DISCOVERED_PORT_COUN
T

Reflects the number of managed ports in the
discovered switch.
Default value is 0.

smallint

LAST_PORT_MEMBERSHIP
_CHANGE

Stores the timestamp of the last port member ship
update.

bigint

MAX_FCIP_TUNNELS

The maximun number of tunnels that can be created
in this switch,-1 means not supported.
Default value is -1.

int

MAX_FCIP_CIRCUITS

The maximun number of circuits that can be created
in this switch, -1 means not supported.
Default value is -1.

int

FCIP_LICENSED

FCIP Advanced Extension Licensing is available. 1
means licensed and 0 means not licensed, -1 means
not supported.
Default value is -1.

smallint

ADDRESSING_MODE

This column to represent the logical switch
addressing modes to assign Port Addresses, There
are three different addressing modes supported.
Fixed (0), Flat or 10 bit (1), Dynamic (2).
Default value is -1.

smallint

PREVIOUS_STATE

This fields copies the old state of the switch . The
field could be used to track the state change
information for the switch.These values to be
populated by FCS during Fabric Refresh task.SMIA
requested this information but could be used by any
module which needs to track the state change

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

128

32

1571

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 448

1572

VIRTUAL_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID

A unique managed element ID for this virtual switch.
Also a foreign key reference to the
MANAGED_ELEMENT table.

int

HIF_ENABLED

The HIF Enabled bit on the switch. Values are 1 for
enabled and 0 for not enabled. -1 the default, stands
for not supported and will be used for older
firmwares.
Default value is -1.

smallint

CLUSTER_MODE

This column is used to determine whether VCS
Cluster is in Standalone mode or Cluster mode. The
values will be populated by the VCS collector during
the discovery of the VCS switch. The default value of
-1 means that its a non VCS device. Following Enum
will be defined as NON_VCS(-1), STANDALONE(0),
CLUSTER(1).

smallint

VCS_ID

This column is used to store the VCS ID of the device.
The value will be populated by the
NosSwitchAssetCollector during the discovery of the
VCS Cluster. The non zero value will be stored as VCS
ID. Default value is -1.

smallint

CLUSTER_TYPE

This column is used to determine whether VCS is in
Fabric Cluster or Logical Chassis. The values are
populated by the VCS collector during the discovery
of the VCS switch. The default value -1 means that its
a non-VCS device.
Following are the values and their types:
• 0 - Unknown
• 1 - Standalone
• 2 - Fabric Cluster
• 3 - Logical Chassis

smallint

SWITCH_ID

Represents the Switch embedded port destination
identifier.

int

MONITORED

To identify whether the switch is monitored or
unmonitored. 0 is Unmonitored and 1 is Monitored.

int

FEATURES_ENABLED

Holds as a bit mask the features that are active /
enabled. Each bit would represent features like
Lossless etc.

int

MAPS_ENABLED_ACTIONS

Bitmask of Maps actions enabled on the switch.
0-None, 1-Raslog, 2-SNMP, 4-Email, 8-Fence Port,
16-SW Down, 32-SW Marginal

int

FABRIC_STATUS

Stores the fabric level status of the node like
Unknown and Online.
Status is Unknown when:
• A node is going through a reboot or ISLs have
not formed yet.
• A node is not part of a cluster yet.
Status is Online when:
• A node is waiting to rejoin a cluster.
• A node joins a cluster and all the ports are up
and ISLs are formed.

varchar

Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 449

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_CAPABILITY

Field

Definition

Format

VIRTUAL-SWITCH_ID *

DB ID of virtual switch.

int

CAPABILITY_ *

Name of capability detected on virtual switch.

varchar

ENABLED

1 = the capability is enabled on the virtual switch.

int

TABLE 450

Size

256

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_CHECKSUM

Field

Definition

Format

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID *

DB ID of virtual switch.

int

CHECKSUM_KEY *

Checksum key.

varchar

32

CHECKSUM

Checksum value.

varchar

16

Size

TABLE 451

Size

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_COLLECTION

Field

Definition

Format

VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID *

DB ID of virtual switch.

int

COLLECTOR_NAME *

Collector name.

varchar

LAST_VIRTUAL_SW_
MODIFICATION

Last modified time on switch.

timestamp

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_DB_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

DEVICE_ID

Database ID of the DEVICE instance which is
associated with the vlan.

int

NAME

Name for vlan.

varchar

128

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Table subtype possible value is VLAN.

varchar

32

Size

TABLE 452

TABLE 453

VLAN
Size

VLAN_DYNAMIC_INTERFACE_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Database ID of the VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION
instance which is associated with the dynamic
interface member.

int

TABLE 454

256

VLAN_EXCLUDED_INTERFACE

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Database ID of the VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION
instance which is associated with the excluded
interface member.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1573

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 455
Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Database ID of the VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION
instance which is associated with the interface
member.

int

TABLE 456

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Unique database generated identifier.

int

VLAN_DB_ID

Database ID of the VLAN instance which is
associated with the interface.

int

INTERFACE_ID

Database ID of the INTERFACE instance which is
associated with the vlan.

int

TABLE_SUBTYPE

Table subtype possible value is
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Foreign Key Reference to
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION table.

int

C_TAG_ID

This as an Incoming customer tag (c-tag)
associated with a GVLAN and its applicable only
for trunk mode. If the TLS (Transparent LAN
Service) is enabled in the device, a pre-defined
range of values are used for C-Tag.

text

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Foreign Key Reference to
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION table.

int

MAC_GROUP_DB_ID

Foreign key Reference to ID field of MAC_GROUP
table.

text

Size

VLAN_STATIC_INTERFACE_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID

Database ID of the VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION
instance which is associated with the static
interface member.

int

TABLE 460

Size

VLAN_INT_MAC_GROUP_RELATION

Field

TABLE 459

Size

VLAN_INT_C_TAG_RELATION

Field

TABLE 458

Size

VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION

Field

TABLE 457

1574

VLAN_INTERFACE_MEMBER

Size

VLL_DEVICE_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATI
ON_DB_ID

Database ID inherited from
MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATION.

int

VLL_DEVICE_RELATION.VLL_MO
DE

Represents the VLL mode. Possible values are
Unknown-0, Raw-1 and Taggged-2.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 461

VLL_ENDPOINT_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT_REL
ATION_DB_ID

Database ID inherited from
MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT_RELATION.

int

PW_ENET_PW_INSTANCE

Represents the Index of Ethernet tables
associated with this endpoint Instance.

int

COS

This value indicates the Class Of Service for this smallint
endpoint. For VLL, this value is used to select the
appropriate tunnel whose COS value is either
same, or almost approaching this value. For
VLL-local, this value is applied to the ingress
packet of an endpoint. Allowed range is 0-7 and
255. 255 means COS is not explicitly configured.

TABLE 462

Size

VMOTION_EVENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Uniquely identifies the vmotion event.

int

SOURCE_HOST_NAME

The name of the source host at the time of the
vmotion.

varchar

256

SOURCE_IP_ADDRESS

IP address of the source host at the time of the
vmotion.

varchar

128

SOURCE_HOST_UUID

The uuid assigned by the hypervisor to the
source host.

varchar

64

DEST_HOST_NAME

The name of the destination host at the time of
the vmotion.

varchar

256

DEST_IP_ADDRESS

IP address of the destination host at the time of
the vmotion.

varchar

128

DEST_HOST_UUID

The uuid assigned by the hypervisor to the
destination host. This can be null in case of a
failed vmotion.

varchar

64

SOURCE_DATACENTER_NAME

Source Datacenter name.

varchar

256

DEST_DATACENTER_NAME

Destination Dataccenter name. Can be null in
case of a failed vmotion.

varchar

256

VM_UUID

Unique identifier for the VM to identify that VM
across vmotions.

varchar

64

VM_NAME

User-assigned name for the VM.

varchar

80

VM_IP_ADDRESS

The primary IPv4 or IPv6 address used by the VM
on the management LAN, if any.

varchar

32

VCENTER_HOST

The FQDN or the ip address of the vcenter.

varchar

256

VNIC_MACS

Comma separated vnic mac addresses.

varchar

256

START_TIME

Start time of the vmotion event.

timestamp

END_TIME

End time of the vmotion event, could be null
cause of a failed vmotion.

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1575

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 462

Definition

Format

STATUS

VMotion event status. 0 = info, 1 = warning, 2 =
failed.

smallint

DRS_TRIGGERED

Identifies whether the events was due to DRS. 0
= No, 1 = Yes.

smallint

USER_NAME

Identifies that user who initiated the vmotion.

varchar

80

DESCRIPTION

Event message that is received.

varchar

256

TABLE 463

Size

VMOTION_PNIC_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Identifies an entry for the source or destination
pnic and the connected switch details.

int

VMOTION_EVENT_ID

Foreign key to the vmotion_event table.

int

PNIC_TYPE

Pnic type. 0 = source, 1 = destination,
identifies if the pNIC is from the source or the
destination host.

smallint

PNIC_MAC

Physical Nic mac addresse of the connected
Pnic on the host.

varchar

256

PORT_PROFILES

Comma separated PP Name-SwitchName for
all the port profiles associated with the vNics
that are being migrated as a result of the
vmotion.

varchar

256

SWITCH_NAME

Switch names entry for connected switch to the
pNic.

varchar

256

SWITCH_IP_ADDRESS

Switch ip addresses entries for connected
switch to the pNic.

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

NAME

Data center name.

varchar

256

VCENTER_ID

Id of the vCenter server managing this Data
center.

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

TABLE 464

TABLE 465

1576

VMOTION_EVENT (Continued)

Field

Size

VM_DATA_CENTER

VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Primary key.

int

DATACENTER_ID

Foreign to vm_data_center.

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 465

VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

Size

NAME

Name of the datastore.

varchar

256

ACCESSIBLE

The connectivity status of this datastore. If this
is set to false, meaning the datastore is not
accessible, this datastores capacity and
freespace properties cannot be validated. 0 =
no 1 = yes.

smallint

STATUS

Status of the datastore could be normal,
enteringMaintenance, inMaintenance.

varchar

20

FILE_SYSTEM_TYPE

Type of file system volume, such as VMFS or
NFS.

varchar

20

TOTAL_CAPACITY

Maximum capacity of this datastore, in bytes.
bigint
This value is updated periodically by the server.

FREE_SPACE

Available space of this datastore, in bytes. The
server periodically updates this value.

bigint

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

Time when the free-space and capacity values
in DatastoreInfo and DatastoreSummary were
updated.

timestamp

RDM_SUPPORTED

Flag Indicates whether or not raw disk
mappings can be created on this datastore. 0
= no 1 = yes.

smallint

PERFILE_THIN_PROVISIONING_S
UPPORTED

Flag indicating whether or not the per file thin
provisioning is supported or not. 0 = no 1 = yes.
When thin provisioning is used, backing
storage is lazily allocated.

smallint

STORAGE_IORM_SUPPORTED

Indicates whether the datastore supports
Storage I/O Resource Management. 0 = no 1
= yes.

smallint

DIRECTORY_HIERARCHY_SUPPO
RTED

Indicates whether or not directories can be
created on this datastore. 0 = no 1 = yes.

smallint

LOCATION

The unique locator for the datastore.

varchar

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

TABLE 466

256

VM_DV_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

VM_DV_SWITCH_ID

Foreign key to the VM_DVSWITCH table. The
dvSwitch on which this port group exists.

int

VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_I
D

Foreign Key to the VM_DV_PORTGROUP table.
The dvPortgroup in which this dvPort instance
may exist (in case it's not a standalone port)

int

NAME

The name of the port

varchar

256

DESCRIPTION

A description string of the port.

varchar

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1577

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 466

Definition

Format

CONFLICT

Whether the port is a conflict port. A port could
be marked as conflict if an entity is discovered
connecting to a port that is already occupied, or
if the port is created by the host without
conferring with Virtual Center Server. A conflict
port will not have its runtime state persisted
and the port can''t move away from the host, i.e
no vMotion if a Virtual Machine is using a
conflict port

smallint

CONNECTEE_TYPE

The type of the connectee. One of:
hostConsoleVnic
hostVmkVnic
pnic
vmVnic

smallint

Size

CONNECTEE_ADDRESS_ A hint on address info of the nic that connects
HINT
to this port

varchar

MTU

The MTU of the port. Currently, this property
can only be set at the switch level. Attempt to
change it at the portgroup or port level will raise
exception

int

MAC_ADDRESS

The mac address that is used at this port

varchar

64

RUNTIME_LINK_UP_STA
TE

Whether the port is in linkUp status

varchar

128

RUNTIME_LINK_PEER

The name of the connected entity

varchar

128

RUNTIME_BLOCKED

Whether the port is blocked by switch
implementation

smallint

TRUNKING_MODE

True if the port VLAN tagging/stripping is
disabled

smallint

VLAN_IDS

The VLAN id of the port

varchar

256

PROXY_HOST_NAME

The host that services this port

varchar

256

KEY

The key for the port

varchar

64

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor

int

TABLE 467

1578

VM_DV_PORT (Continued)

Field

256

VM_DV_PORT_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

VM_DV_SWITCH_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_dvswitch table. The
dvSwitch on which this port group exists

int

NAME

The name of the portgroup.

varchar

NUM_PORTS

Number of ports in the portgroup

int

TYPE

The type of portgroup. One of:
earlyBinding
ephemeral
lateBinding

smallint

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 467

VM_DV_PORT_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DESCRIPTION

A description string of the portgroup

varchar

256

UPLINK_PORT_GROUP

Whether this portgroup is an uplink portgroup

smallint

KEY

The key for the port group

varchar

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor

int

TABLE 468

64

VM_DV_SWITCH

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

UUID

The generated UUID of the switch. Unique
across VC inventory and instances

varchar

256

NAME

The name of the switch

varchar

256

MAX_PORTS

The maximum number of ports allowed in the
switch, not including conflict ports

int

DESCRIPTION

A description string of the switch

varchar

PORT_COUNT

Current number of ports, not including conflict
ports

int

STANDALONE_PORT_CO
UNT

The number of standalone ports in the switch.
Standalone ports are ports that don''t belong to
any portgroup

int

ADMIN_NAME

The name of the person that is responsible for
the switch

varchar

256

ADMIN_CONTACT

The contact information for the person

varchar

256

BUILD

Build string for the server on which this call is
made. For example, x.y.z-num. This string does
not apply to the API

varchar

256

PRODUCT_NAME

Short form of the product name

varchar

256

VENDOR_NAME

Name of the vendor of this product

varchar

256

VERSION

Dot-separated version string. For example,
"1.2"

varchar

256

FORWARDING_CLASS

Forwarding class of the distributed virtual
switch

varchar

256

DV_PORT_GROUP_OPER Whether this switch allow Virtual Center users
_SUPPORTED
to modify DVS configuration at portgroup level,
except for host memeber, policy and scope
operations

smallint

DV_PORT_OPER_SUPPO
RTED

smallint

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Whether this switch allow Virtual Center users
to modify DVS configuration at port level,
except for host memeber, policy and scope
operations

Size

1024

1579

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 468

Definition

Format

DVS_OPER_SUPPORTED

Whether this switch allow Virtual Center users
to modify DVS configuration at switch level,
except for host memeber, policy and scope
operations

smallint

CREATION_TIME

The create time of the switch

timestamp

UPLINK_PORT_NAME

The uniform name of uplink ports on each host

varchar

VM_DATA_CENTER_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_DATACENTER
table instance to which this host is associated
with

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor

int

IP_ADDRESS

The IP address currently assigned to the DV
switch.

varchar

IPFIX_ENABLED

Whether netflow is enabled on the dvswitch, 0
implies false and 1 implies that its enabled.

smallint

DISCOVERY_PROTOCOL

Neighbor discovery protocol 0 = CDP else 1
which is LLDP.

smallint

DISCOVERY_OPERATION

Discovery operation default is 0 = listen, 1=
advertise, 2 = both, 3 = none.

smallint

CDP_ENABLED

Whether CDP is enabled on the dvswitch, 0
implies false and 1 implies that its enabled.

smallint

VSPAN_ENABLED

Whether Port Mirroring is enabled on the
dvswitch, 0 implies false and 1 implies that its
enabled.

smallint

MAXIMUM_MTU

The maximum transmission unit (MTU)
associated with this distributed virtual switch in
bytes.

int

TABLE 469

Size

256

64

VM_DV_SWITCH_HOST_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VM_DV_SWITCH_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_DV_SWITCH (ID)

int

VM_HOST_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_HOST (ID)

int

TABLE 470

1580

VM_DV_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Size

VM_FC_HBA

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NODE_WWN

The world wide node name for the adapter

varchar

23

PORT_WWN

The world wide port name for the adapter

varchar

23

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 470

VM_FC_HBA (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

The type of the fiber channel port. One of :
Fabric
Loop
Point to point
Unknown

smallint

SPEED

The current operating speed of the adapter in
bits per second.

varchar

BUS

The host bus number

int

DEVICE_NAME

The device name of host bus adapter

varchar

256

DRIVER

The name of the driver

varchar

256

MODEL

The model name of the host bus adapter

varchar

256

PCI

The Peripheral Connect Interface (PCI) ID of the
device representing the host bus adapter

varchar

256

STATUS

The operational status of the adapter. Valid
values include :
online
offline
fault

smallint

VM_HOST_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_HOST table
instance to which this host is associated with

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor

int

PORT_TYPE

TABLE 471

•
•
•
•

64

VM_FC_HBA_DEVICE_PORT_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

DEVICE_PORT_ID

A foreign key referencing DEVICE_PORT table
instance to which this host is associated with

int

VM_FC_HBA_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_FC_HBA table
instance to which this host is associated with

int

TABLE 472

Size

Size

VM_HOST

Field

Definition

Format

DEVIE_ENCLOSURE_ID

Identifies a server running a supported hypervisor.
The ID value is the same as the ID of the corresponding DEVICE_ENCLOSURE record.

int

NODE_WWN

The Node WWN for this host.

char

23

HYPERVISOR_NAME

Hypervisor name and version, such as VMware ESX
Server v3.5.0

varchar

64

HYPERVISOR_TYPE

Numeric hypervisor type ID. 1 = VMware, 2 =
Hyper-V.
The default value is 0.

smallint

CPU_COUNT

Number of CPUs in the server.
The default value is 0.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1581

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 472

VM_HOST (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

CPU_TYPE

Text summary of CPU hardware, such as: Intel(R)
Xeon(TM) CPU 2.6 GHz

varchar

64

CPU_RESOURCES

Text summary of CPU resources, such as "20 GHz
total, 15 GHz reserved". May be a different format for
different VM vendors

varchar

64

MEM_RESOURCES

Text summary of memory resources, such as "7 GB
total, 5 GB reserved". May be a different format for
different VM vendors

varchar

64

LICENSE_SERVER

IP address or hostname of VM Hypervisor''s license
server.

varchar

128

BOOT_TIME

Date and time that the host was last started

timestamp

VM_DATACENTER_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_DATACENTER table
instance to which this host is associated with.

int

DVS_HOSTMEMBER_STATU
S

•

smallint

•
•
•
•
•

DVS_PRODUCT_NAME

Short form of the product name of proxy switch
module of a dvSwitch.

varchar

256

DVS_PRODUCT_VENDOR

Name of the vendor of this product.

varchar

256

DVS_PRODUCT_VERSION

Dot-separated version string. For example, "1.2".

varchar

256

CLUSTER_NAME

The name of the cluster of which this host is a
member of.

varchar

256

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number assigned by
the hypervisor.

int

UUID

UUID to uniquely identify the host.

varchar

TABLE 473

64

VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY

Field

Definition

Format

VM_PHYSICAL_NIC_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_PHYSICAL_NIC
(ID)

int

INTERFACE_ID

A foreign key referencing INTERFACE (ID)

int

TABLE 474

1582

1 - disconnected The host is in disconnected or
not responding state.
2 - down The host component is down.
3 - outOfSync The switch configuration in the
host component is not the same as the
configuration in VirtualCenter server.
4 - pending The host component is waiting to be
initialized.
5 - up The host component is up and running.
6 - warning The host requires attention.

Size

VM_HOST_PROXY_SWITCH

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VM_HOST_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_host table

int

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 474

VM_HOST_PROXY_SWITCH (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

DVS_NAME

The name of the DistributedVirtualSwitch that
the HostProxySwitch is part of

varchar

256

DVS_UUID

The uuid of the DistributedVirtualSwitch that
the HostProxySwitch is a part of

varchar

256

KEY_

The proxy switch key

varchar

256

NUM_PORTS

The number of ports that this switch currently
has

int

NUM_PORTS_AVAILABL
E

The number of ports that are available on this
virtual switch

int

UPLINK_PORT_NAMES

The list of ports that can be potentially used by
physical nics. This property contains the names
of such ports

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 475

VM_HOST_PROXY_SWITCH_PNIC_SPEC

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VM_HOST_PROXY_SWIT
CH_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_host_proxy_switch table

int

PNIC_DEVICE

The physical NIC to be added in the switch

varchar

256

UPLINK_PORT_GROUP_
KEY

The key of the portgroup to be connected to the
physical NIC

varchar

256

UPLINK_PORT_KEY

The key of the port to be connected to the
physical NICs

varchar

256

UPLINK_PORT_NAME

The name of the port to be connected to the
physical NICs

varchar

256

Size

TABLE 476

VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique Auto Generated DB ID.

serial

DEVICE_NAME

Device Name for the virtual NIC.

varchar

256

MAC

The media access control (MAC) address of the
virtual network adapter

varchar

64

DHCP_ENABLED

The flag to indicate whether or not DHCP
(dynamic host control protocol) is enabled. If
this property is set to true, the ipAddress and
the subnetMask strings cannot be set explicitly

smallint

IP_ADDRESS

The IP address currently used by the network
adapter. All IP addresses are specified using
IPv4 dot notation

varchar

128

SUBNET_MASK

Subnet mask for the virtual NIC.

varchar

64

VM_STD_VSWITCH_POR
T_GROUP_ID

Foreign Key to the
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP table. Port
group with which this vmknic is associated

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1583

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 476

Definition

Format

VM_DV_PORT_ID

Foreign key to the vm_dv_port table. DV Port
with which this vmknic is associated

int

MTU

The MTU of the port

int

VM_HOST_ID

FOREIGN KEY to the vm_host table

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor

int

PORT_GROUP_KEY

The key for the port group

varchar

BINARY_MAC

MAC address in binary format.

bytea

BINARY_IP

IP address in binary format.

bytea

TABLE 477

Size

256

VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VLAN_TYPE

One of:
Private VLAN
Trunk VLAN
Access VLAN

smallint

VLAN_IDS

Single or range of VLANs configured on the port varchar

BLOCKED

Whether this port is blocked, i.e. packet
forwarding is stopped

int

VM_STD_VSWITCH_POR
T_GROUP_ID

ID of standard vSwitch port group

int

VM_STANDARD_VIRTUA
L_SWITCH_ID

ID of standard vSwitch

int

VM_DV_SWITCH_ID

ID of distributed vSwitch

int

VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_I
D

ID of distributed vSwitch port group

int

VM_DV_PORT_ID

ID of distributed vSwitch port

int

TABLE 478

1584

VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC (Continued)

Field

Size

256

VM_NIC_TEAMING_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NOTIFY_SWITCHES

Flag to specify whether or not to notify the physical switch if a
link fails. If this property is true, ESX Server will respond to
the failure by sending a RARP packet from a different
physical adapter, causing the switch to update its cache.

smallint

POLICY

Network adapter teaming policy includes failover and load
balancing, It can be one of the following:
• loadbalance_ip: route based on ip hash.
• loadbalance_srcmac: route based on source MAC hash.
• loadbalance_srcid: route based on the source of the
port ID.
• failover_explicit: use explicit failover order.

smallint

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 478

VM_NIC_TEAMING_POLICY (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

REVERSE_POLICY

The flag to indicate whether or not the teaming policy is
applied to inbound frames as well. For example, if the policy
is explicit failover, a broadcast request goes through uplink1
and comes back through uplink2. Then if the reverse policy is
set, the frame is dropped when it is received from uplink2.
This reverse policy is useful to prevent the virtual machine
from getting reflections.

smallint

ROLLING_ORDER

The flag to indicate whether or not to use a rolling policy
when restoring links. For example, assume the explicit link
order is (vmnic9, vmnic0), therefore vmnic9 goes down,
vmnic0 comes up. However, when vmnic9 comes backup, if
rollingOrder is set to be true, vmnic0 continues to be used,
otherwise, vmnic9 is restored as specified in the explicitly
order.

smallint

ACTIVE_NICS_ORDER

Comma separated list of active network adapters used for
load balancing.

varchar

1056

STANDBY_NICS_ORDER

Standby network adapters used for failover.

varchar

1056

NIC_FAIL_CRITERIA_CH
K_BEACON

Failover detection policy for this network adapter team. The
bridge must be BondBridge for this property to be valid.
The flag to indicate whether or not to enable this property to
enable beacon probing as a method to validate the link
status of a physical network adapter.
checkBeacon can be enabled only if the VirtualSwitch has
been configured to use the beacon. Attempting to set
checkBeacon on a PortGroup or VirtualSwitch that does not
have beacon probing configured for the applicable
VirtualSwitch results in an error.

smallint

VM_NETWORK_SETTING ID of network settings table.
S_ID

int

UNUSED_NICS_ORDER

varchar

TABLE 479

Comma separated list of unused network adapters.

Size

1056

VM_PATH

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

HOST_ID

Identifies the host containing this path. This is a
foreign key reference to VM_HOST.ID

int

VM_ID

Identifies the VM using this path to a LUN. If the path
is used by the host hypervisor instead of a VM, VM_ID
is 0. When non-zero, this value matches
VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID

int

STORAGE_ID

Identifies the LUN that is assigned to the VM. Not a
foreign key, but the value matches VM_LUN.ID

int

NAME

The VM-assigned name for this path. For VMware,
this is the device name, such as vmhba0:0:1.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

128

1585

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 479

Definition

Format

FABRIC_ID

Identifies the fabric that contains this path. Not a foreign key reference. Copied here for convenience.
Determined by locating the HBA port WWN or target
port WWN in the DEVICE_PORT table. Zero if the fabric is not managed. The default value is 0.

int

HBA_PORT

The HBAs physical port WWN for this path

char

23

VM_PORT_WWN

The initiator port WWN used by the VM. If NPIV is
used, this is a virtual port WWN assigned by the VM
to this HBA port. If NPIV is not used, this WWN is the
same as the HBA Port WWN

char

23

TARGET_PORT

The port WWN of the destination target.

char

23

ENABLED

'0 = path disabled, 1 = path enabled.
The default value is 0.

smallint

ACTIVE

0 = path inactive, 1 = path active.
The default value is 0.

smallint

PREFERRED

0 = not preferred, 1 = preferred path. The preferred
path is used whenever available when the path policy is Fixed.The default value is 0.

smallint

USAGE

Identifies how a VMware VM uses this LUN. 0 = NA
(used for Hyper-V), 1 = VMFS (datastores), 2 = RDM
(Raw Device Mapping). The default value is 0.

smallint

HBA_NODE

The HBA physical node WWN for this path

char

23

VM_NODE_WWN

The initiator node WWN used by the VM. If NPIV is
used, this is a virtual node WWN assigned to the VM.
If NPIV is not used, this WWN is the same as the node
WWN of one of the HBAs in the host.

char

23

TARGET_NODE

The node WWN of the destination target

char

23

HBA_NAME

The hypervisor device name of the HBA used in this
path, such as vmhba1

varchar

64

FS_TYPE

This field will identify the filesystem type to be either:
VMFS, NFS or RDM.

varchar

32

TABLE 480

1586

VM_PATH (Continued)

Field

Size

VM_PHYSICAL_NIC

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DEVICE_NAME

The device name of the physical network
adapter.

varchar

256

DRIVER

The name of the driver

varchar

256

LINK_SPEED_MBPS

The bit rate on the link

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 480

VM_PHYSICAL_NIC (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

DUPLEX

The flag to indicate whether or not the link is
capable of full-duplex ("true") or only
half-duplex ("false").

smallint

MAC_ADDRESS

The media access control (MAC) address of the
physical network adapter.

varchar

17

PCI

Device hash of the PCI device corresponding to
this physical network adapter.

varchar

256

WAKE_ON_LAN_SUPPO
RTED

Flag indicating whether the NIC is wake-on-LAN
capable. 0 - false, 1 - true.

smallint

DHCP_ENABLED

The flag to indicate whether or not DHCP
(dynamic host control protocol) is enabled. If
this property is set to true, the ipAddress and
the subnetMask strings cannot be set explicitly.
0 - false, 1 - true.

smallint

IP_ADDRESS

The IP address currently used by the network
adapter. All IP addresses are specified using
IPv4 dot notation. For example, "192.168.0.1".
Subnet addresses and netmasks are specified
using the same notation.

varchar

64

SUBNET_MASK

Subnet mask for the Physical NIC.

varchar

64

VM_HOST_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_HOST(ID).

int

VM_STANDARD_VIRTUA
L_SWITCH_ID

A foreign key referencing
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH(ID).

int

VM_DV_PORT_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_DV_PORT(ID).

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

BINARY_MAC

MAC address in binary format.

bytea

TABLE 481

Size

VM_SECURITY_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

ALLOW_PROMISCUOUS

The flag to indicate whether or not all traffic is
seen on the port.
0 - false, 1 - true

smallint

FORGED_TRANSMITS

The flag to indicate whether or not the virtual
network adapter should be allowed to send
network traffic with a different MAC address
than that of the virtual network adapter.
0 - false, 1 - true

smallint

MAC_CHANGES

The flag to indicate whether or not the Media
Access Control (MAC) address can be changed.
0 - false, 1 - true

smallint

VM_NETWORK_SETTING ID of network settings table.
S_ID

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

int

1587

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 482
Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NAME

The name of the virtual switch.

varchar

PORTS_COUNT

The number of ports that this virtual switch
currently has.

int

PORTS_AVAILABLE

The number of ports that are available on this
virtual switch.

int

MTU

The maximum transmission unit (MTU)
associated with this virtual switch in bytes.

int

BRIDGE_TYPE

The bridge specification describes how physical
network adapters can be bridged to a virtual
switch. One of:
Auto Bridge - 0, Bond Bridge - 1, Simple Bridge 2.

smallint

VM_HOST_ID

References the ESX host in which this switch
exists.

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

TABLE 483

Size

32

VM_STANDARD_VSWITCH_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

MAC

The Media Access Control (MAC) address of
network service of the virtual machine
connected on this port.

varchar

TYPE

The type of component connected on this port.
One of:
• VMKernel
• Service Console
• Unknown
• VM

smallint

VM_STD_VSWITCH_POR
T_GROUP_ID

Foreign Key to the
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP table. Port
group in which this port exists.

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

TABLE 484

1588

VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH

Size

64

VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

NAME

The name of the port group.

varchar

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 484

VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

VM_STANDARD_VIRTUA
L__SWITCH_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_standard_virtual_switch
table. The standard virtual swtich on which this
port group exists.

int

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

TABLE 485

Size

VM_STORAGE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Uniquely identifies this LUN.

serial

HOST_ID

Identifies the server that accesses this LUN.

int

NAME

The VM-assigned device name for this LUN,
such as vmhba1:0:0. For VMware, this is the
canonical name.

varchar

512

TARGET_NODE

The Node WWN or iSCSI target name for the
storage device (target) that contains this LUN.

char

256

VENDOR

Vendor name, such as Seagate.

varchar

64

MODEL

Target model name, such as ST581.

varchar

64

SERIAL_NUMBER

The device''s serial number.

varchar

64

TYPE

0 = disk, 1 = tape.

smallint

CAPACITY

For disks, the disk capacity in GB.

double precision

STATUS

The status reported by the host. 0 = offline, 1 =
online.

smallint

PATH_POLICY

Determines how multiple paths to this LUN are
used. 0 = fixed, 1 = Most Recently Used, 2 =
Round Robin.

smallint

UUID

Universal unique ID

varchar

DATASTORE_URL

The unique locator for the datastore.

varchar

256

DATASTORE_NAME

Name of the datastore in case this LUN/NAS
volume is exposed as an extent of a VMFS/NFS
datastore.

varchar

256

ISCSI_TARGET_ADDRESS

IP address or host name of the iSCSI target.

varchar

256

ISCSI_TARGET_PORT

The TCP port of the storage device. If not
specified, the standard default of 3260 is used.

varchar

10

NAS_REMOTE_HOST

The host that runs the NFS/CIFS server.

varchar

64

NAS_REMOTE_PATH

The remote path of NFS/CIFS mount point.

varchar

256

NAS_REMOTE_USER

In case of CIFS, the user name used while
connecting to the server.

varchar

256

TARGET_PORT

Target Port WWN that the storage is connected
to or the iSCSI target address.

varchar

256)

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1589

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 486
Field

Definition

Format

VM_STORAGE_ID

A foreign key referencing VM_STORAGE (ID).

int

HBA_REMOTE_PORT_ID

A foreign key referencing HBA_REMOTE_PORT
(ID).

int

TABLE 487

Size

VM_TRAFFIC_SHAPING_POLICY

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

ENABLED

'The flag to indicate whether or not traffic
shaper is enabled on the port. 0 - false, 1 - true

smallint

AVERAGE_BANDWIDTH

The average bandwidth in bits per second if
shaping is enabled on the port.

bigint

BURST_SIZE

The maximum burst size allowed in bytes if
shaping is enabled on the port.

bigint

PEAK_BANDWIDTH

The peak bandwidth during bursts in bits per
bigint
second if traffic shaping is enabled on the port.

VM_NETWORK_SETTING ID of network settings table.
S_ID

int

TYPE

smallint

TABLE 488

1590

VM_STORAGE_HBA_REMOTE_PORT_MAP

Type of traffic shaping policy, whether ingress
or egress. 0 is ingress, 1 is egress traffic
shaping policy.

Size

VM_VCENTER

Field

Definition

Format

Size

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

HOST

The FQDN or the ip address of the host.

varchar

PORT

The port of the VCENTER server on the host.

int

USER_NAME

The username to login into the VCENTER.

varchar

64

PASSWORD

The password to login into the VCENTER.

varchar

512

VERSION

The version of VCENTER.

varchar

10

TOKEN_ID

The id to map the each VCENTER on the host.

varchar

64

PLUGIN_STATUS

Status of Plug-in registration to the vCenter
server.

varchar

32

PLUGIN_ENABLED

Whether plug-in enabled or disabled.

smallint

PLUGIN_FORWARD_EVE
NTS

Whether to forward events from Network
Advisor to the vCenter server or not

smallint

DISCOVERY_STATUS

vCenter server discovery status. Can be one of
the below values:
1. Active 2. Failed - Authentication Failure 3.
Failed - Not reachable

smallint

DELETED_DISCOVERY

The vCenter server discovery has been deleted.
Such a deleted vCenter server entry will not be
discovered.

smallint

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 488

VM_VCENTER (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

Size

MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID A foreign key referencing
MANAGED_ELEMENT(ID).

int

FAULT_MONITORING_ST
ATE

Flag to indicate whether fault monitoring is
registered or not for a VM Host. Possible values
are:
1.Not registered
2.Registered (Default)

smallint

NAME

The name of the VCenter.

varchar

64

UUID

Unique identifier for vCenter server instance.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 489

VM_VCENTER_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

HOST_NAME

Hostname of VM host.

varchar

256

IP_ADDRESS

IP address of VM host.

varchar

128

STATUS

Discovery status of VM host. This can be one of
the following: 1. Discovery Pending 2. Excluded
3. Conflict - Existing Host 4. Disconnected 5.Not
responding.

smallint

REASON

In case the status is 3 (Conflict - Existing host)
then this field will be used to persist the
hostname for conflicting user defined host.

varchar

VM_VCENTER_ID

Id of the vCenter server managing this host.

int

VM_HOST_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_host table.

int

TABLE 490

1024

VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

DISPLAY_LABEL

Display label for the virtual ethernet adapter.

varchar

256

DISPLAY_SUMMARY

Summary description.

varchar

256

KEY

This property is a unique key that distinguishes
this device from other devices in the same
virtual machine. Keys are immutable but may
be recycled; that is, a key does not change as
long as the device is associated with a
particular virtual machine. However, once a
device is removed, its key may be used when
another device is added.

int

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1591

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 490

1592

VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER (Continued)

Field

Definition

Format

ADDRESS_TYPE

MAC address type.
Valid values for address type are:
• Manual
• Statically assigned MAC address.
• Generated
• Automatically generated MAC address.
• Assigned
• MAC address assigned by VirtualCenter.

smallint

MAC_ADDRESS

MAC address assigned to the virtual network
adapter. Clients can set this property to any of
the allowed address types. The server might
override the specified value for "Generated" or
"Assigned" if it does not fall in the right ranges
or is determined to be a duplicate.

varchar

Size

64

WAKE_ON_LAN_ENABLE Indicates whether wake-on-LAN is enabled on
D
this virtual network adapter. Clients can set this
property to selectively enable or disable
wake-on-LAN.

smallint

VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID

Foreign Key to the vm_virtual_machine table.
References the VM to which this vnic is
attached.

int

ADAPTER_TYPE

One of:
• E1000
• Vmxnet
• Pcnet32

smallint

VM_STD_VSWITCH_POR
T_GROUP_ID

Foreign Key to the
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP table.
References the vSS port group to which the
vnic may be associated with.

int

VM_DV_PORT_ID

Foreign key to the vm_dv_port table.
References dvPort to which this vnic is
attached to.

int

DV_PORT_KEY

The key of the port.

varchar

64

DV_PORT_GROUP_KEY

The key of portgroup.

varchar

64

DV_SWITCH_UUID

The UUID of the switch.

varchar

64

PORT_GROUP_NAME

The port group name.

varchar

256

MOR_ID

The managed object reference number
assigned by the hypervisor.

int

BINARY_MAC

MAC address in binary format.

bytea

IP_ADDRESS

IPv4 address of VNIC.

varchar

BINARY_IP

IP address in binary format.

bytea

32

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 491

VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Uniquely identifies the virtual machine

serial

HOST_ID

Identifies the server that contains this VM

int

HYPERVISOR_VM_ID

The VM number assigned by the hypervisor.
Some hypervisors identify VMs by number as
well as by name

int

NAME

User-assigned name for the VM

varchar

80

DESCRIPTION

Optional user-entered notes describing the VM.
(Annotation in VMware terminology.)

varchar

256

OS

Operating system name and version.

varchar

64

STATUS

VM status. 0 = stopped, 1 = running, 2 =
suspended.

smallint

VCPU_COUNT

Number of virtual CPUs used by the VM.

int

CPU_RESOURCES

Summary of CPU resource configuration.
Format may depend on VM vendor.

varchar

64

MEM_RESOURCES

Summary of memory resource configuration.
Format may depend on VM vendor.

varchar

64

IP_ADDRESS

The primary IPv4 or IPv6 IP address used by the
VM on the management LAN, if any.
Primary is defined by the VM vendor.

varchar

32

HOSTNAME

The primary hostname assigned to this VM.

varchar

128

BOOT_TIME

The date and time the VM was last started.

timestamp

DATASTORE_NAME

The user-assigned name for the VMs datastore.
The datastore holds the VMs virtual disks,
swap file, and configuration data.

varchar

80

DATASTORE_LOCATION

The location of the VMs datastore May be a
SAN target disk or a locally-attached host disk
folder.
For VMware, this is a target LUN name.

varchar

64

NODE_WWN

The Node WWN for this VM. If NPIV is not being
used, this will be the same as the Node WWN
in the host''s DEVICE_ENCLOSURE record. If
NPIV is being used, each VM has a unique
Node WWN.

char

23

varchar

64

UUID
BINARY_IP
CONNECTION_STATE

COMMITTED_STORAGE

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

IP address in binary format.

bytea

The connectivity state of a virtual machine.
0 = not available
1 = connected
2 = disconnected
3 = inaccessible
4 = invalid
5 =orphaned

smallint

Used storage by a particular virtual machine.

varchar

•
•
•
•
•
•

Size

64

1593

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 491

Definition

Format

Size

UNCOMMITTED_STORA
GE

Additional Provisioned storage for a particular
virtual machine.

varchar

64

UNSHARED_STORAGE

Exclusive storage for a particular virtual
machine.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 492

VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE_DATASTORE_MAP

Field

Definition

Format

VM_DATASTORE_DETAIL
S_ID

A foreign key referencing
VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS(ID).

int

VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID

A foreign key referencing
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE(ID).

int

PROVISIONED_STORAGE

Additional storage space, in bytes, potentially
used by the virtual machine on this datastore.
Additional space may be needed for example
when lazily allocated disks grow, or storage for
swap is allocated when powering on the virtual
machine.

bigint

NOT_SHARED_STORAGE

Storage space, in bytes, occupied by the virtual
machine on this datastore that is not shared
with any other virtual machine.

bigint

USED_STORAGE

Storage space, in bytes, on this datastore that
is actually being used by the virtual machine.It
includes space actually occupied by disks, logs,
snapshots, configuration files etc. Files of the
virtual machine which are present on a
different datastore (e.g. a virtual disk on
another datastore) are not included here.

bigint

TABLE 493

VPLS_DEVICE_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE
_RELATION_DB_ID

Database ID inherited from
MPLS_SERVICE_DEVICE_RELATION.

int

VPLS_CONFIG_INDEX

Represents the unique config index of VPLS
endpoint.

int

MAC_LIMIT

The maximum number of MAC address entries
that can be learned for this VPLS Instance.

int

TABLE 494
Field

1594

VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE (Continued)

Field

Size

VPLS_ENDPOINT_RELATION
Definition

Format

MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOI Database ID inherited from
NT_RELATION_DB_ID
MPLS_SERVICE_ENDPOINT_RELATION.

int

ISID

int

The ISID value for that endpoint. Valid ISID
value is between 256 (0x100) and 16777214
(0xFFFFFE). Default is 0 which indicates the
endpoint is not configured with ISID.

Size

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Database tables and fields

TABLE 495

I

VR_CONN_DOMAIN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VCEM_PROFILE_ID

Foreign key references the ID of the VCEM
server that the domain belongs to.

int

VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP_I
D

Nullable foreign key references the ID of the
domain group that the domain may belong
to.

int

VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID

The ID assigned by the VCEM server.

bigint

Size

GUID

varchar

512

NAME

varchar

256

IP_ADDRESS

varchar

128

STATUS

varchar

256

FIRMWARE_VERSION

varchar

128

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 496

VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VCEM_PROFILE_ID

Foreign key references the ID of the VCEM
server that the domain group belongs to.

int

VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID

The ID assigned by the VCEM server.

bigint

Size

NAME

varchar

256

STATUS

varchar

256

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 497

VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE
_ID

Foreign key references the ID of the server
profile that the FC connection belongs to.

int

PORT_NUMBER

smallint

CONNECTION_BAY

smallint

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

1595

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 498

VR_CONN_MODULE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID

Foreign key references the domain ID that
the module belongs to.

int

VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID

The ID assigned by VCEM.

varchar

256

WWN

The WWN of the module.

char

23

PRODUCT_NAME

The product name of the module.

varchar

256

SERIAL_NUMBER

The serial number of the module.

varchar

32

STATUS

The current status of the module.

varchar

256

LAST_STATUS

The previous status of the module.

varchar

256

IO_BAY

The bay number of the module.

int

VENDOR

Subject to chnage. May not be able to
differentiate module maker.
Maker of the module.
0: unknown
1: Brocade
2: QLogic

int

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 499

VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VR_CONN_MODULE_ID

The ID of the module that the port belongs
to.

int

WWN

The WWN of the Virtual Connect port.

char

POSITION_

The port number of the port within the
module.

smallint

FABRIC_NAME

The fabric name of the VCEM.

varchar

256

SPEED

varchar

64

STATUS

varchar

64

LAST_STATUS

varchar

64

char

23

REMOTE_NODE_WWN

1596

Size

The WWN of the connected remote switch.

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

Size

23

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 500

VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

serial

VCEM_PROFILE_ID

Foreign key references the ID of the VCEM
server that the server profile belongs to.

int

VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP_I
D

Nullable foreign key references the ID of the
domain group that the server profile may
belong to.

int

VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID

The ID assigned by the VCEM server.

bigint

Size

NAME

varchar

256

BAY_NAME

varchar

256

BAY_NUMBER

smallint

VIRTUAL_SERIAL_NUMBER

varchar

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

BAY_ENCLOSURE_UUID

TABLE 501

The UUID extracted from the enclosure
object inside the bay object inside the
server profile. The value matches the
domain GUID.

32

varchar

512

VR_CONN_WWN

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION_ID

Foreign key references the ID of the FC
connection that the WWN belongs to

int

PORT_ADDRESS

Port WWN

char

23

NODE_ADDRESS

Node WWN

char

23

SAN_NAME

varchar

256

CREATION_TIME

timestamp

LAST_UPDATE_TIME

timestamp

TABLE 502

Size

WIRELESS_PRODUCT_DETAILS

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

DEVICE_ID

Each AP or Controller has an entry in the
table. No other device will have entries
here. The foreign key reference to device
table.

int

CONTROLLER_DEVICE_ID

The reference to the APs controller in
device table. If APs controller gets deleted,
the value sets to null. If the entry is
controller the value is null.

int

PROFILE_NAME

Profile name that the AP is using.

varchar

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

64

1597

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 502

Definition

Format

Size

RF_DOMAIN_NAME

RF domain name set for the AP.

varchar

64

TIME_ZONE

Time zone set for the AP.

varchar

80

COUNTRY

Country set for the AP.

varchar

32

VLAN_FOR_CONTROL_TRAFFI
C

VLAN for control traffic set for the AP.

varchar

512

CLIENT_COUNT

Number of wireless clients or stations that
connected or associated to the AP.

int

TABLE 503

WIRELESS_PRODUCT_RELATION

Field

Definition

Format

ID

The primary key of the table.

int

AP_DEVICE_ID

The foreign key reference to device table for
AP.

int

AP_INTERFACE_ID

The reference to the AP interface in
interface table. In case the AP interface is
not found or discovered, the value is null.

int

CONNECTED_SWITCH_INTER
FACE_ID

The reference to the switch interface in
interface table which connected to the AP.

int

TABLE 504

Size

WT_ARCHIVE

Field

Definition

Format

Size

FIRMWARE_VERSION

Firmware version for which jar files are downloaded

varchar

128

JAR_LIST

List of jar files as comma separated string

varchar

256

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ZONE_DB_ID

PK the owning ZONE_DB.

int

NAME

The zone name.

varchar

TYPE

The zone type.

int

SUB_TYPE

The zone subtype.

int

ACTIVATE

For TI zones only, zone is activated.
Default value is 0.

smallint

CONFIGURED_FAILOVER

Configured Failover state of the TI Zone.

smallint

CONFIGURED_ACTIVATE

Configured active state of the TI Zone.

smallint

ENABLED_FAILOVER

Enabled Failover state of the TI Zone.

smallint

ENABLED_ACTIVATE

Enabled Active state of the TI Zone.

smallint

TABLE 505

1598

WIRELESS_PRODUCT_DETAILS

Field

ZONE
Size

64

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 506

ZONE_ALIAS

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ZONE_DB_ID

PK of the owning ZONE_DB.

int

NAME

The zone alias name.

varchar

64

Size

TABLE 507

Size

ZONE_ALIAS_IN_ZONE

Field

Definition

Format

ZONE_ALIAS_ID*

PK of the zone alias.

int

ZONE_ID*

PK of the zone.

int

23

Size

TABLE 508

ZONE_ALIAS_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TYPE

Zone alias member type:
2 = WWN
4 = D,P

smallint

VALUE

Member value (D,P or WWN).

varchar

ZONE_ALIAS_ID

PK of the owning zone alias.

int

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

FABRIC_ID

PK of the owning fabric.

int

NAME

Zone DB name for offline Zone DBs.

varchar

OFFLINE

Offline Zone DB (1 = offline).

smallint

CREATED

Created timestamp.

timestamp

LAST_MODIFIED

Last modified timestamp.

timestamp

LAST_APPLIED

Last saved to switch timestamp.

timestamp

CREATED_BY

Created by user name.

varchar

128

LAST_MODIFIED_BY

Last modified by user name.

varchar

128

LAST_APPLIED_BY

Last saved to switch user name.

varchar

128

DEFAULT_ZONE_STATUS

All access or no access when no active zone
configuration.

smallint

ZONE_TXN_SUPPORTED

Zoning commands support transaction.

smallint

MCDATA_DEFAULT_ZONE

McData switch default zoning mode.

smallint

MCDATA_SAFE_ZONE

McData switch safe zoning mode.

smallint

ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE

Zone configuration string length.

int

ZONE_AVAILABLE_SIZE

Available zone DB size in the switch.
Default value is -1.

int

TABLE 509

256

ZONE_DB

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Size

256

1599

I

Database tables and fields

TABLE 510

ZONE_DB_CONFIG

Field

Definition

Format

ID

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ZONE_DB_ID

PK of the owning zone DB

int

DEFINED_CONTENT

Defined zone raw config string, wrapped with $ to
prevent special char trimming

text

ACTIVE_CONTENT

Active zone raw config string

text

TI_ZONE_CONTENT

TI zone raw config string

text

TABLE 511

ZONE_DB_CONTENT

Field

Definition

Format

ID*
PK of the owning offline zone DB.

int

CONTENT

Saved online content before offline was saved to
switch.

text

TI_CONTENT

TI_CONTENT saved online TI zone content before
offline was saved to switch.

text

DEFINED

text

ACTIVE

text

ZONE_DB_USERS

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ZONE_DB_ID

PK of the owning zone DB.

int

USER_NAME

List of users currently editing this zone DB.

varchar

128

Size

TABLE 513

Size

ZONE_IN-ZONE_SET

Field

Definition

Format

ZONE_SET_ID*

PK of the owning zone set.

INT

ZONE_ID*

PK of the owning zone.

INT

TABLE 514

1600

Size

int

ZONE_DB_ID

TABLE 512

Size

ZONE_MEMBER

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

TYPE

Member type:
2 = WWN
4 = D,P

smallint

VALUE

Member value (D,P or WWN).

varchar

ZONE_ID

PK of owning zone.

int

Size

256

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Views

TABLE 515

ZONE_SET

Field

Definition

Format

ID*

Unique generated database identifier.

int

ZONE_DB_ID

PK of owning zone DB.

int

NAME

Zone set name.

varchar

ACTIVE

1 = active zone set
0 = otherwise.

smallint

Size

64

Views
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_INFO
create or replace view ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_INFO as
select
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG.ID,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG.NAME as CONFIG_NAME,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG.TYPE as TYPE,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_PROPERTY.NAME as PROPERTY_NAME,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS.VALUE as PROPERTY_VALUE
from
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS,
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_PROPERTY
where
ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG.ID = ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS.CONFIG_ID
and ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_PROPERTY.ID= ADAPTER_PORT_CONFIG_DETAILS.PROPERTY_ID;

AG_CONNECTION_INFO
create or replace view AG_CONNECTION_INFO as
select
AG_N_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
AG_N_PORT.ID as SOURCE_PORT_ID,
AG_N_PORT.WWN as SOURCE_PORT_WWN,
AG_N_PORT.TYPE as SOURCE_PORT_TYPE,
AG_N_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as SOURCE_USER_PORT_NUMBER,
EDGE_F_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as DESTINATION_SWITCH_ID,
EDGE_F_PORT.ID as DESTINATION_PORT_ID,
EDGE_F_PORT.WWN as DESTINATION_PORT_WWN,
EDGE_F_PORT.TYPE as DESTINATION_PORT_TYPE,
EDGE_F_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as DESTINATION_USER_PORT_NUMBER
from
SWITCH_PORT AG_N_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT EDGE_F_PORT
where
((AG_N_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN = EDGE_F_PORT.WWN)
or (AG_N_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN = EDGE_F_PORT.LOGICAL_PORT_WWN
and EDGE_F_PORT.TRUNK_MASTER = 1))
and AG_N_PORT.TYPE = 'N-Port';

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1601

I

Views

BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS_INFO as
select
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.BOOT_IMAGE_NAME,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.MAJOR_VERSION,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.MINOR_VERSION,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.MAINTENANCE,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.PATCH,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.IMPORTED_DATE,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.RELEASE_DATE,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.RELEASE_NOTES_LOCATION,
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.LOCATION,
BOOT_IMAGE_DRIVER_MAP.SUPPORTED_DRIVERS
from
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS,
BOOT_IMAGE_DRIVER_MAP
where
BOOT_IMAGE_FILE_DETAILS.DRIVER_MAPPING_ID= BOOT_IMAGE_DRIVER_MAP.ID;

CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG_INFO
create or replace view CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG_INFO as
select
CNA_PORT.ID,
CNA_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
CNA_PORT.PORT_WWN,
CNA_PORT.NODE_WWN,
CNA_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_TYPE,
CNA_PORT.NAME,
CNA_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_PORT.MEDIA,
CNA_PORT.CEE_STATE,
CNA_PORT.HBA_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.CNA_ETH_PORT_ID as CNA_ETH_PORT_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.ID as CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.MAX_BANDWIDTH,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.PCIF_INDEX,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.MIN_BANDWIDTH,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.PORT_NUMBER as ETH_PORT_CONFIG_PORT_NUMBER,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.PORT_TYPE,
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.CONFIGURATION_STATUS
from
CNA_PORT
left outer join CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG on CNA_PORT.ID =
CNA_ETH_PORT_CONFIG.CNA_PORT_ID;

CNA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view CNA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO as
select
CNA_PORT.ID,
CNA_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
CNA_PORT.PORT_WWN,
CNA_PORT.NODE_WWN,
CNA_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_TYPE,

1602

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

CNA_PORT.NAME,
CNA_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_PORT.MEDIA,
CNA_PORT.CEE_STATE,
CNA_PORT.HBA_ID,
CNA_PORT.CREATION_TIME as CNA_PORT_CREATION_TIME,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ID as ETH_PORT_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ETH_DEV,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ETH_LOG_LEVEL,
CNA_ETH_PORT.NAME as ETH_PORT_NAME,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS as ETH_MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_ETH_PORT.IOC_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT.HARDWARE_PATH,
CNA_ETH_PORT.STATUS,
CNA_ETH_PORT.CREATION_TIME as ETH_PORT_CREATION_TIME,
CNA_ETH_PORT.CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS as CURRENT_MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MAX_BANDWIDTH,
CNA_ETH_PORT.PCIF_INDEX,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MAX_PCIF,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MIN_BANDWIDTH,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MTU,
CNA_PORT.ALARM_WARNING
from
CNA_PORT
left outer join CNA_ETH_PORT on CNA_PORT.ID = CNA_ETH_PORT.CNA_PORT_ID;

CNA_PORT_INFO
create or replace view CNA_PORT_INFO as
select
CNA_PORT.ID,
CNA_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
CNA_PORT.PORT_WWN,
CNA_PORT.NODE_WWN,
CNA_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_TYPE,
CNA_PORT.NAME,
CNA_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_PORT.MEDIA,
CNA_PORT.CEE_STATE,
CNA_PORT.HBA_ID,
CNA_PORT.CREATION_TIME as CNA_PORT_CREATION_TIME,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ID as ETH_PORT_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ETH_DEV,
CNA_ETH_PORT.ETH_LOG_LEVEL,
CNA_ETH_PORT.NAME as ETH_PORT_NAME,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS as ETH_MAC_ADDRESS,
CNA_ETH_PORT.IOC_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT.HARDWARE_PATH,
CNA_ETH_PORT.STATUS,
CNA_ETH_PORT.CREATION_TIME as ETH_PORT_CREATION_TIME,
HBA_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
CNA_ETH_PORT.MTU,
CNA_PORT.ALARM_WARNING
from
CNA_PORT
left outer join HBA_PORT on CNA_PORT.ID = HBA_PORT.CNA_PORT_ID
left outer join CNA_ETH_PORT on CNA_PORT.ID = CNA_ETH_PORT.CNA_PORT_ID;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1603

I

Views

CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS_INFO as
select
CORE_SWITCH.ID,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.VENDOR,
CORE_SWITCH.MAX_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.NUM_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.REACHABLE,
CORE_SWITCH.UNREACHABLE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
CORE_SWITCH.CREATION_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.LAST_SCAN_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.SYSLOG_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.CALL_HOME_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.SNMP_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.USER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NIC_PROFILE_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGING_SERVER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_SUPPORTED,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as CORE_MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ETHERNET_MASK,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_MASK,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_IP,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_CERTIFICATE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SW_LICENSE_ID,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SUPPLIER_SERIAL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PART_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CHECK_BEACON,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.TIMEZONE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAX_PORT,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CHASSIS_SERVICE_TAG,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.BAY_ID,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.TYPE_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MODEL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MANUFACTURER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PLANT_OF_MANUFACTURER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SWITCH_SERIAL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ACT_CP_PRI_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ACT_CP_SEC_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.STBY_CP_PRI_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.STBY_CP_SEC_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.EGM_CAPABLE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SUB_TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PARTITION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAX_NUM_OF_BLADES,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.VENDOR_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.VENDOR_PART_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CONTACT,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.LOCATION,

1604

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.DESCRIPTION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.IP_ADDRESS_PREFIX,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.DOMAIN_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FRAME_LOG_SIZE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FRAME_LOG_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAPS_ENABLED
from
CORE_SWITCH LEFT OUTER JOIN CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS
on CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID;

CRYPTO_HOST_LUN_INFO
create or replace view CRYPTO_HOST_LUN_INFO as
select
LUN.CRYPTO_HOST_ID,
LUN.ID CRYPTO_LUN_ID,
LUN.LUN_NUMBER,
LUN.CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER_ID,
LUN.SERIAL_NUMBER,
LUN.ENCRYPTION_STATE,
LUN.STATUS,
LUN.REKEY_INTERVAL,
LUN.VOLUME_LABEL_PREFIX,
LUN.LAST_REKEY_DATE,
LUN.LAST_REKEY_STATUS,
LUN.LAST_REKEY_PROGRESS,
LUN.CURRENT_VOLUME_LABEL,
LUN.PRIOR_ENCRYPTION_STATE,
LUN.ENCRYPTION_FORMAT,
LUN.ENCRYPT_EXISTING_DATA,
LUN.DECRYPT_EXISTING_DATA,
LUN.KEY_ID,
LUN.BLOCK_SIZE,
LUN.TOTAL_BLOCKS,
LUN.LUN_STATE,
LUN.LUN_FLAGS,
LUN.ENCRYPTION_ALGORITHM,
LUN.KEY_ID_STATE,
LUN.REKEY_SESSION_NUMBER,
LUN.PERCENTAGE_COMPLETE,
LUN.REKEY_ROLE,
LUN.CURRENT_LBA,
LUN.LUN_STATE_STRING,
LUN.NEW_LUN,
LUN.NEW_LUN_TYPE,
LUN.DISABLE_WRITE_EARLY_ACK,
LUN.DISABLE_READ_AHEAD,
LUN.TIME_LEFT_FOR_AUTO_REKEY,
CRYPTO_HOST.HOST_PORT_WWN,
CRYPTO_HOST.HOST_NODE_WWN
LUN.THIN_PROVISION_LUN
from
CRYPTO_LUN LUN,
CRYPTO_HOST
where
LUN.CRYPTO_HOST_ID = CRYPTO_HOST.ID;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1605

I

Views

CRYPTO_TARGET_ENGINE_INFO
create or replace view CRYPTO_TARGET_ENGINE_INFO as
select
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.ID TARGET_CONTAINER_ID,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.NAME,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.VT_NODE_WWN,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.VT_PORT_WWN,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.FAILOVER_STATUS,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.FAILOVER_STATUS_2,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.DEVICE_STATUS,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.DEVICE_TYPE,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.TARGET_PORT_WWN,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.TARGET_NODE_WWN,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.CONTAINER_FIELD_DATA,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.CONFIGURATION_STATUS,
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.FRONT_END_N_PORT_NUMBER,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.STATUS ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_STATUS,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.HA_CLUSTER_ID,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.SYSTEM_CARD_STATUS,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.WWN_POOLS_AVAILABLE,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.STATE ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_STATE,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.ID ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID,
CRYPTO_SWITCH.SWITCH_ID SWITCH_ID,
CRYPTO_SWITCH.ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID
from
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE,
CRYPTO_SWITCH
where
CRYPTO_TARGET_CONTAINER.ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID = ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.ID
and CRYPTO_SWITCH.SWITCH_ID = ENCRYPTION_ENGINE.SWITCH_ID;

DASHBOARD_PREFERENCES_INFO
CREATE VIEW dashboard_preferences_info AS
select
DASHBOARD.NAME as DASHBOARD_NAME,
DASHBOARD.DESCRIPTION as DASHBOARD_DESC,
DASHBOARD.CREATED_BY,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS.NAME as CANVAS_NAME,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS.DESCRIPTION as CANVAS_DESC,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.SCOPE_ID,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.SCOPE_TYPE,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.DASHBOARD_ID,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.DASHBOARD_CANVAS_ID,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.VISIBLE,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.TIME_SCOPE
from
DASHBOARD,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS,
DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE
where
DASHBOARD.ID = DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.DASHBOARD_ID
and DASHBOARD_CANVAS.ID = DASHBOARD_CANVAS_PREFERENCE.DASHBOARD_CANVAS_ID;

1606

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

DEPLOYMENT_INFO
create or replace view DEPLOYMENT_INFO as
select
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID as ID,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.NAME as NAME,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DESCRIPTION as DESCRIPTION,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.MODULE as MODULE,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.SUB_MODULE as SUB_MODULE,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_TIME as DEPLOYMENT_TIME,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DEPLOY_OPTION as DEPLOYMENT_OPTION,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.STATUS as STATUS,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYED_BY as DEPLOYED_BY,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.CREATED_BY as CREATOR,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.SCHEDULE_ENABLED as SCHEDULE_ENABLED,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.SNAPSHOT_ENABLED as SNAPSHOT_ENABLED,
SCHEDULE_ENTRY.TYPE as FREQUENCY,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.MANAGEMENT_FLAG,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.PRIVILEGE_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.HANDLER_CLASS,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.CLIENT_ACTION_HANDLER_CLASS,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.ID as STATUS_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.MODULE_DISPLAYNAME,
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.HEADER,
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.FOOTER
from
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION
join DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER on DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID
= DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.ID
left outer join DEPLOYMENT_STATUS on
(DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_TIME =
(select
max(DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_TIME)
from
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS
where
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION_ID =
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID))
left outer join SCHEDULE_ENTRY on
SCHEDULE_ENTRY.IDENTITY = cast(DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID as
varchar(16))
and SCHEDULE_ENTRY.TABLE_NAME = 'DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION'
left outer join DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE on
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID = DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.ID;

DEPLOYMENT_LOG
create or replace view DEPLOYMENT_LOG as
select
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.NAME,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DESCRIPTION,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.MODULE,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.SUB_MODULE,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_TIME,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DEPLOY_OPTION as DEPLOYMENT_OPTION,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.STATUS, DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYED_BY,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.CREATED_BY as CREATOR,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1607

I

Views

DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.SCHEDULE_ENABLED,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.SNAPSHOT_ENABLED,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.MANAGEMENT_FLAG,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.PRIVILEGE_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.HANDLER_CLASS,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.CLIENT_ACTION_HANDLER_CLASS,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.ID as STATUS_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.MODULE_DISPLAYNAME,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.TRIGGER_SOURCE as TRIGGER_SOURCE,
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.HEADER,
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.FOOTER
from
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION
inner join DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER
on DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID =
DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.ID
inner join DEPLOYMENT_STATUS
on DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID =
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION_ID
left outer join DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE on
DEPLOYMENT_REPORT_TEMPLATE.DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER_ID = DEPLOYMENT_HANDLER.ID;

DEVICE_CONNECTION_INFO
CREATE VIEW device_connection_info AS
select
DEVICE_CONNECTION.ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.FABRIC_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.AG_PORT_ID,
COALESCE(DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_MEMBER.ENCLOSURE_ID, HBA.HOST_ID) as
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.LAST_UPDATED_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.MISSING,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.MISSING_TIME,
SWPORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
DEVICE_CONNECTION.TRUSTED,
AGPORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as AG_SWITCH_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.WWN as DEVICE_PORT_WWN,
COALESCE(USERDEFINEDDETAILS.TYPE, DN.TYPE) as DEVICE_TYPE
from DEVICE_CONNECTION
left join DEVICE_PORT on DEVICE_CONNECTION.DEVICE_PORT_ID = DEVICE_PORT.ID
left join SWITCH_PORT SWPORT on DEVICE_CONNECTION.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWPORT.ID
left join SWITCH_PORT AGPORT on DEVICE_CONNECTION.AG_PORT_ID = AGPORT.ID
left join HBA_PORT_DEVICE_PORT_MAP on DEVICE_PORT.ID =
HBA_PORT_DEVICE_PORT_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_ID
left join HBA_PORT on HBA_PORT_DEVICE_PORT_MAP.HBA_PORT_ID =
HBA_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID
left join HBA on HBA_PORT.HBA_ID = HBA.ID
left join DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_MEMBER on DEVICE_PORT.ID =
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_MEMBER.DEVICE_PORT_ID
left join DEVICE_NODE DN on DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DN.ID
left join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL USERDEFINEDDETAILS on DN.WWN =
USERDEFINEDDETAILS.WWN;

1608

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

EE_MONITOR_STATS_5MIN_INFO
create or replace view EE_MONITOR_STATS_5MIN_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as EE_MONITOR_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 208 then value else 0 end) as TX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 209 then value else 0 end) as RX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 210 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 16
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

EE_MONITOR_STATS_30MIN_INFO
create or replace view EE_MONITOR_STATS_30MIN_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as EE_MONITOR_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 208 then value else 0 end) as TX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 209 then value else 0 end) as RX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 210 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 16
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

EE_MONITOR_STATS_2HOUR_INFO
create or replace view EE_MONITOR_STATS_2HOUR_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as EE_MONITOR_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 208 then value else 0 end) as TX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 209 then value else 0 end) as RX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 210 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 16
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

EE_MONITOR_STATS_1DAY_INFO
create or replace view EE_MONITOR_STATS_1DAY_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as EE_MONITOR_ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1609

I

Views

timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 208 then value else 0 end) as TX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 209 then value else 0 end) as RX_UTILIZATION,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 210 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 16
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

TE_PORT_STATS_5MIN_INFO
create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_5MIN_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as PORT_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 193 then value else 0 end) as
RECEIVE_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 194 then value else 0 end) as
TRANSMIT_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 196 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 195 then value else 0 end) as TRANSMIT_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 36 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_EOF,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 40 then value else 0 end) as UNDERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 41 then value else 0 end) as OVERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as ALIGNMENT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 42 then value else 0 end) as RUNT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as TOO_LONG_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 39 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 12
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

TE_PORT_STATS_30MIN_INFO
create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_30MIN_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as PORT_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 193 then value else 0 end) as
RECEIVE_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 194 then value else 0 end) as
TRANSMIT_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 196 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 195 then value else 0 end) as TRANSMIT_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 36 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_EOF,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 40 then value else 0 end) as UNDERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 41 then value else 0 end) as OVERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as ALIGNMENT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 42 then value else 0 end) as RUNT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as TOO_LONG_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 39 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS

1610

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 12
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

TE_PORT_STATS_2HOUR_INFO
create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_2HOUR_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as PORT_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 193 then value else 0 end) as
RECEIVE_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 194 then value else 0 end) as
TRANSMIT_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 196 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 195 then value else 0 end) as TRANSMIT_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 36 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_EOF,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 40 then value else 0 end) as UNDERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 41 then value else 0 end) as OVERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as ALIGNMENT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 42 then value else 0 end) as RUNT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as TOO_LONG_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 39 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 12
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

TE_PORT_STATS_1DAY_INFO
create or replace view TE_PORT_STATS_1DAY_INFO as
select VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ME_ID,
TARGET_ID as PORT_ID,
timestamp with time zone 'epoch' + TIME_IN_SECONDS * interval '1 second' as
CREATION_TIME,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 193 then value else 0 end) as
RECEIVE_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 194 then value else 0 end) as
TRANSMIT_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 196 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 195 then value else 0 end) as TRANSMIT_OK,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 36 then value else 0 end) as RECEIVE_EOF,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 40 then value else 0 end) as UNDERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 41 then value else 0 end) as OVERFLOW_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as ALIGNMENT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 42 then value else 0 end) as RUNT_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 43 then value else 0 end) as TOO_LONG_ERRORS,
sum(case when MEASURE_ID = 39 then value else 0 end) as CRC_ERRORS
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY, VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where ME_ID = MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and COLLECTOR_ID = 12
group by ME_ID, TARGET_TYPE, TARGET_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS,VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID order
by TIME_IN_SECONDS desc;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1611

I

Views

SWITCH_INFO
CREATE VIEW switch_info AS
select
CORE_SWITCH.ID as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS as PHYSICAL_OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH.MAX_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.NUM_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.VENDOR,
CORE_SWITCH.REACHABLE,
CORE_SWITCH.UNREACHABLE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH.SYSLOG_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.SNMP_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.CALL_HOME_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.USER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NIC_PROFILE_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGING_SERVER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_SUPPORTED,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as CORE_MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.NAT_PRIVATE_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.ALTERNATE_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.MAC_ADDRESS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.AD_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCS_ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CREATION_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PASSWORD,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS_REASON,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FABRIC_IDID_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LOGICAL_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INTEROP_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CRYPTO_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCR_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LF_ENABLED,

1612

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCOE_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.L2_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.L3_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DEFAULT_LOGICAL_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FEATURES_SUPPORTED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FMS_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DYNAMIC_LOAD_SHARING,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PORT_BASED_ROUTING,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.IN_ORDER_DELIVERY,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INSISTENT_DID_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PREVIOUS_OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_SCAN_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_MODE_239,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID_OFFSET,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DISCOVERED_PORT_COUNT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCOE_LOGIN_ENABLED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_PORT_MEMBERSHIP_CHANGE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_FCIP_TUNNELS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_FCIP_CIRCUITS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_LICENSED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ADDRESSING_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PREVIOUS_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.HIF_ENABLED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.AUTO_SNMP,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VCS_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CLUSTER_TYPE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CLUSTER_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.RNID_TAG,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FEATURES_ENABLED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAPS_ENABLED_ACTIONS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FABRIC_STATUS,
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID,
FABRIC_MEMBER.TRUSTED,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING_TIME,
FABRIC.MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN,
FABRIC.SEED_SWITCH_WWN,
FABRIC.TYPE as FABRIC_TYPE
from
CORE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
FABRIC_MEMBER,
FABRIC
where
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID;

DEVICE_INFO
create or replace view DEVICE_INFO as
select distinct
DEVICE_NODE.ID as DEVICE_NODE_ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1613

I

Views

DEVICE_NODE.WWN as DEVICE_NODE_WWN,
DEVICE_NODE.TYPE as DEVICE_NODE_TYPE,
DEVICE_NODE.SYMBOLIC_NAME as DEVICE_NODE_SYMBOLIC_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.DEVICE_TYPE,
DEVICE_NODE.FDMI_HOST_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.VENDOR,
DEVICE_NODE.CAPABILITY_,
DEVICE_NODE.AG,
DEVICE_NODE.SIMULATED,
DEVICE_PORT.ID as DEVICE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID as DEVICE_PORT_DOMAIN_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.WWN as DEVICE_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.NUMBER,
DEVICE_PORT.PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.TYPE as DEVICE_PORT_TYPE,
DEVICE_PORT.SYMBOLIC_NAME as DEVICE_PORT_SYMBOLIC_NAME,
DEVICE_PORT.FC4_TYPE,
DEVICE_PORT.IP_PORT,
DEVICE_PORT.HARDWARE_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_PORT.TRUSTED as DEVICE_PORT_TRUSTED,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING as DEVICE_PORT_MISSING,
DEVICE_PORT.COS,
DEVICE_PORT.NPV_PHYSICAL,
SWITCH_PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN as SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.NAME as SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_INDEX,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as SWITCH_PORT_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.FULL_TYPE as SWITCH_PORT_FULL_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.HEALTH as SWITCH_PORT_HEALTH,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED,
SWITCH_PORT.MAX_PORT_SPEED,
SWITCH_PORT.NPIV,
SWITCH_PORT.NPIV_CAPABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.CALCULATED_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.AREA_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY,
SWITCH_PORT.PERSISTENT_DISABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.BLOCKED,
SWITCH_PORT.FCR_INTEROP_MODE,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_TYPE,
SWITCH_INFO.IP_ADDRESS,
SWITCH_INFO.PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
SWITCH_INFO.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
SWITCH_INFO.REACHABLE,
SWITCH_INFO.SYSLOG_REGISTERED,
SWITCH_INFO.SNMP_REGISTERED,
SWITCH_INFO.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_INFO.NAME as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_NAME,
SWITCH_INFO.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
SWITCH_INFO.SWITCH_MODE,
SWITCH_INFO.WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN,
SWITCH_INFO.DOMAIN_ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_DOMAIN_ID,
SWITCH_INFO.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
SWITCH_INFO.BASE_SWITCH,
SWITCH_INFO.STATE as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_STATE,

1614

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SWITCH_INFO.STATUS as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_STATUS,
SWITCH_INFO.FABRIC_ID,
SWITCH_INFO.MONITORED,
SWITCH_INFO.CRYPTO_CAPABLE
from
DEVICE_NODE, DEVICE_PORT, SWITCH_PORT, SWITCH_INFO
where
DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID and
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN = SWITCH_PORT.WWN and
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SWITCH_INFO.ID and
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = SWITCH_INFO.FABRIC_ID;

N2F_PORT_MAP_INFO
create or replace view N2F_PORT_MAP_INFO as
select
N2F_PORT_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
N2F_PORT_MAP.N_PORT,
N2F_PORT_MAP.F_PORT,
AG_N_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN as EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
AG_N_PORT.WWN as AG_N_PORT_WWN,
AG_F_PORT.WWN as AG_F_PORT_WWN,
AG_F_PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN,
AG_F_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN as DEVICE_PORT_WWN
from
N2F_PORT_MAP,
SWITCH_PORT AG_N_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT AG_F_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH AG_SWITCH
where
N2F_PORT_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_N_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and N2F_PORT_MAP.N_PORT = AG_N_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER
and N2F_PORT_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_F_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and N2F_PORT_MAP.F_PORT = AG_F_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER
and AG_N_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_SWITCH.ID
and AG_SWITCH.MONITORED = 1;

DEVICE_NODE_INFO
create or replace view DEVICE_NODE_INFO as
select
DEVICE_NODE.ID,
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID,
DEVICE_NODE.WWN,
DEVICE_NODE.TYPE,
DEVICE_NODE.DEVICE_TYPE,
DEVICE_NODE.SYMBOLIC_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.FDMI_HOST_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.VENDOR,
DEVICE_NODE.CAPABILITY_,
DEVICE_NODE.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_NODE.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_NODE.MISSING,
DEVICE_NODE.MISSING_TIME,
DEVICE_NODE.PROXY_DEVICE,
DEVICE_NODE.AG,
DEVICE_NODE.PREVIOUS_MISSING_STATE,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.NAME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1615

I

Views

USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.TYPE as USER_DEFINED_TYPE,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.IP_ADDRESS,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.CONTACT,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.LOCATION,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.DESCRIPTION,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE1,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE2,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE3,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN as PRINCIPAL_WWN,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.SERIAL_NUMBER AS FDMI_SERIAL_NUMBER,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.FIRMWARE_VERSION AS FDMI_FIRMWARE_VERSION,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.DRIVER_VERSION AS FDMI_DRIVER_VERSION,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.MANUFACTURER AS FDMI_MANUFACTURER,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.MODEL AS FDMI_MODEL,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.HARDWARE_VERSION AS FDMI_HARDWARE_VERSION,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.MODEL_DESCRIPTION AS FDMI_MODEL_DESCRIPTION,
DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.NODE_NAME AS FDMI_NODE_NAME
from
DEVICE_NODE
left outer join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL
on DEVICE_NODE.WWN = USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.WWN
left outer join FABRIC
on DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID
left outer join DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS
on DEVICE_NODE.ID = DEVICE_FDMI_DETAILS.DEVICE_NODE_ID;

DEVICE_PORT_INFO
CREATE VIEW device_port_info AS
select
DEVICE_PORT.ID,
DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.NUMBER,
DEVICE_PORT.PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.TYPE,
DEVICE_PORT.SYMBOLIC_NAME,
DEVICE_PORT.FC4_TYPE,
DEVICE_PORT.COS,
DEVICE_PORT.IP_PORT,
DEVICE_PORT.HARDWARE_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_PORT.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_PORT.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT.NPV_PHYSICAL,
DEVICE_PORT.EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.LOGGED_TO_AG,
DEVICE_PORT.AG_NODE_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.AG_N_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING_REASON,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.TYPE_NUMBER,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.MODEL_NUMBER,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.MANUFACTURER,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.MANUFACTURER_PLANT,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.SEQUENCE_NUMBER,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.TAG,

1616

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

FICON_DEVICE_PORT.FLAG,
FICON_DEVICE_PORT.PARAMS,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.NAME,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.TYPE as USER_DEFINED_TYPE,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.IP_ADDRESS,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.CONTACT,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.LOCATION,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.DESCRIPTION,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE1,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE2,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.USER_DEFINED_VALUE3,
DEVICE_NODE.WWN as DEVICE_NODE_WWN,
DEVICE_NODE.FDMI_HOST_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.SYMBOLIC_NAME as DEVICE_SYMBOLIC_NAME,
DEVICE_NODE.AG as AG_PORT,
coalesce(SWITCH_PORT.NAME, VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.NAME) as SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
coalesce (SWITCH_PORT.TYPE, VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_TYPE) as SWITCH_PORT_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.LOGICAL_PORT_WWN,
coalesce(VS1.WWN, VS2.WWN) as SWITCH_WWN,
coalesce(VS1.MANAGEMENT_STATE, VS2.MANAGEMENT_STATE) as MANAGEMENT_STATE,
coalesce(VS1.MONITORED, VS2.MONITORED) as MONITORED,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN as PRINCIPAL_WWN,
FABRIC.ID as FABRIC_ID
from
DEVICE_PORT
left outer join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL
on DEVICE_PORT.WWN = USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.WWN
left outer join FICON_DEVICE_PORT
on DEVICE_PORT.ID = FICON_DEVICE_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID
left outer join DEVICE_NODE
on DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID
left outer join SWITCH_PORT
on DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN = SWITCH_PORT.WWN
left outer join VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT
on DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN = VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_WWN
left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH VS1
on SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VS1.ID
left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH VS2
on VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VS2.ID
left outer join FABRIC
on DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID;

DEV_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK_INFO
create or replace view DEV_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK_INFO as
select
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.GIGE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.DIRECT_ATTACH,
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_PORT.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.LAG_ID
from
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK,
DEVICE_PORT
where

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1617

I

Views

DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK.DEVICE_PORT_ID = DEVICE_PORT.ID;

DEV_PORT_MAC_ADDR_MAP_INFO
create or replace view DEV_PORT_MAC_ADDR_MAP_INFO as
select
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.MAC_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_NODE.ID as DEVICE_NODE_ID,
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_PORT.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING,
DEVICE_PORT.MISSING_TIME
from
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP,
DEVICE_PORT,
DEVICE_NODE
where
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_ID = DEVICE_PORT.ID
and DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID;

ISL_CONNECTION_INFO
create or replace view ISL_CONNECTION_INFO as
select
distinct ISL_CONNECTION.ID,
ISL_CONNECTION.FABRIC_ID,
ISL_CONNECTION.SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
ISL_CONNECTION.TARGET_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
ISL_CONNECTION.COST,
ISL_CONNECTION.TYPE,
ISL_CONNECTION.TRUSTED,
ISL_CONNECTION.MISSING,
ISL_CONNECTION.MISSING_TIME,
ISL_CONNECTION.CREATION_TIME,
ISL_CONNECTION.TRUNKED,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as DEST_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER
from
ISL_CONNECTION,
SWITCH_PORT SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT DEST_SWITCH_PORT
where
ISL_CONNECTION.SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID = SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.ID
and ISL_CONNECTION.TARGET_SWITCH_PORT_ID = DEST_SWITCH_PORT.ID;

ISL_INFO
create or replace view ISL_INFO as
select distinct

1618

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

ISL.ID,
ISL.FABRIC_ID,
ISL.COST,
ISL.TYPE,
ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
ISL.MISSING,
ISL.MISSING_TIME,
ISL.TRUSTED,
ISL.CREATION_TIME,
ISL.TRUNKED,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_NAME,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as SOURCE_SWITCH_WWN,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH as SOURCE_BASE_SWITCH,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MONITORED,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.WWN as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as PORT_TYPE,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as SOURCE_PHYSICAL_PORT,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED,
ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as DEST_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as DEST_SWITCH_NAME,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as DEST_SWITCH_WWN,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID as DEST_CORE_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH as DEST_BASE_SWITCH,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MONITORED,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.ID as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.WWN as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as DEST_PHYSICAL_PORT,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN as PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN
from
ISL,
FABRIC_MEMBER SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC_MEMBER DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
DEST_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC
where
SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY = 1 and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER and
DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1619

I

Views

DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY = 1 and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER and
FABRIC.ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID;

ETHERNET_ISL_INFO
create or replace view ETHERNET_ISL_INFO as
select
ETHERNET_ISL.ID as ETHERNET_ISL_ID,
ETHERNET_ISL.SOURCE_PORT_ID,
ETHERNET_ISL.DEST_PORT_ID,
ETHERNET_ISL.TRUSTED,
ETHERNET_ISL.CREATION_TIME,
ETHERNET_ISL.MISSING,
ETHERNET_ISL.MISSING_TIME,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as SOURCE_PORT_TYPE,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as SOURCE_VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as DEST_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as DEST_PORT_TYPE,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as DEST_VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID
from
ETHERNET_ISL,
GIGE_PORT
SOURCE_GIGE_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT,
GIGE_PORT
DEST_GIGE_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
DEST_SWITCH_PORT
where
SOURCE_GIGE_PORT.ID = ETHERNET_ISL.SOURCE_PORT_ID and
SOURCE_GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
DEST_GIGE_PORT.ID = ETHERNET_ISL.DEST_PORT_ID and
DEST_GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = DEST_SWITCH_PORT.ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID;

EVENT_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view EVENT_DETAILS_INFO (ID, ME_ID, SEVERITY, AREA,
ACKNOWLEDGED, SOURCE_NAME, SOURCE_ADDR, LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME,
FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME, EVENT_COUNT, EVENT_KEY, AUDIT, RESOLVED, ACKED_TIME,
EVENT_ACTION_ID, DEVICE_GROUP_ID, PORT_GROUP_ID, SPECIAL_EVENT, ORIGIN,
EVENT_CATEGORY, DESCRIPTION, MODULE, RAS_LOG_ID, PRODUCT_ADDRESS, CONTRIBUTORS,
NODE_WWN, PORT_WWN, OPERATIONAL_STATUS, FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME,
LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME, VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID, UNIT, SLOT, PORT, OID, USER_NAME,
EVENT_NUMBER, FRU_CODE, REASON_CODE, FRU_POSITION, INTERFACE_TYPE, PORT_NAME,
MAC_ADDRESS) as
select
EVENT.ID as ID,
EVENT.ME_ID as ME_ID,
EVENT.SEVERITY as SEVERITY,
EVENT.AREA as AREA,
EVENT.ACKNOWLEDGED as ACKNOWLEDGED,

1620

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

EVENT.SOURCE_NAME as SOURCE_NAME,
EVENT.SOURCE_ADDR as SOURCE_ADDR,
EVENT.LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME as LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME,
EVENT.FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME as FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME,
EVENT.EVENT_COUNT as EVENT_COUNT,
EVENT.EVENT_KEY as EVENT_KEY,
EVENT.EVENT_AUDIT as AUDIT,
EVENT.RESOLVED as RESOLVED,
EVENT.ACKED_TIME as ACKED_TIME,
EVENT.EVENT_ACTION_ID as EVENT_ACTION_ID,
EVENT.DEVICE_GROUP_ID as DEVICE_GROUP_ID,
EVENT.PORT_GROUP_ID as PORT_GROUP_ID,
EVENT.SPECIAL_EVENT,
EVENT_ORIGIN.ID as ORIGIN,
EVENT_CATEGORY.ID as EVENT_CATEGORY,
EVENT_DESCRIPTION.DESCRIPTION as DESCRIPTION,
EVENT_MODULE.ID as MODULE,
EVENT_DETAILS.RAS_LOG_ID as RAS_LOG_ID,
EVENT_DETAILS.PRODUCT_ADDRESS as PRODUCT_ADDRESS,
EVENT_DETAILS.CONTRIBUTORS as CONTRIBUTORS,
EVENT_DETAILS.NODE_WWN as NODE_WWN,
EVENT_DETAILS.PORT_WWN as PORT_WWN,
EVENT_DETAILS.OPERATIONAL_STATUS as OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
EVENT_DETAILS.FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME as FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME,
EVENT_DETAILS.LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME as LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME,
EVENT_DETAILS.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
EVENT_DETAILS.UNIT as UNIT,
EVENT_DETAILS.SLOT as SLOT,
EVENT_DETAILS.PORT as PORT,
EVENT_DETAILS.OID,
EVENT_DETAILS.USER_NAME as USER_NAME,
EVENT_CALL_HOME.EVENT_NUMBER as EVENT_NUMBER,
EVENT_CALL_HOME.FRU_CODE as FRU_CODE,
EVENT_CALL_HOME.REASON_CODE as REASON_CODE,
EVENT_CALL_HOME.FRU_POSITION as FRU_POSITION,
EVENT_DETAILS.INTERFACE_TYPE as INTERFACE_TYPE,
EVENT_DETAILS.PORT_NAME as PORT_NAME,
EVENT_DETAILS.MAC_ADDRESS
from
EVENT
left outer join
left outer join
EVENT_CATEGORY.ID
left outer join
left outer join
EVENT_DESCRIPTION.ID
left outer join
left outer join

EVENT_ORIGIN on EVENT.EVENT_ORIGIN_ID = EVENT_ORIGIN.ID
EVENT_CATEGORY on EVENT.EVENT_CATEGORY_ID =
EVENT_MODULE on EVENT.EVENT_MODULE_ID = EVENT_MODULE.ID
EVENT_DESCRIPTION on EVENT.EVENT_DESCRIPTION_ID =
EVENT_DETAILS on EVENT.ID = EVENT_DETAILS.EVENT_ID
EVENT_CALL_HOME on EVENT.ID = EVENT_CALL_HOME.EVENT_ID;

EVENT_INFO
create or replace view EVENT_INFO as
select
EVENT.ID as ID,
EVENT.ME_ID as ME_ID,
EVENT.SEVERITY as SEVERITY,
EVENT.AREA as AREA,
EVENT.ACKNOWLEDGED as ACKNOWLEDGED,
EVENT.SOURCE_NAME as SOURCE_NAME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1621

I

Views

EVENT.SOURCE_ADDR as SOURCE_ADDR,
EVENT.LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME as LAST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME,
EVENT.FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME as FIRST_OCCURRENCE_HOST_TIME,
EVENT.EVENT_COUNT as EVENT_COUNT,
EVENT.EVENT_AUDIT as AUDIT,
EVENT.EVENT_ACTION_ID,
EVENT.SPECIAL_EVENT,
EVENT_ORIGIN.ID as ORIGIN,
EVENT_CATEGORY.ID as EVENT_CATEGORY,
EVENT_DESCRIPTION.DESCRIPTION as DESCRIPTION,
EVENT_MODULE.ID as MODULE,
EVENT_DETAILS.RAS_LOG_ID as RAS_LOG_ID,
EVENT_DETAILS.PRODUCT_ADDRESS as PRODUCT_ADDRESS,
EVENT_DETAILS.CONTRIBUTORS as CONTRIBUTORS,
EVENT_DETAILS.NODE_WWN as NODE_WWN,
EVENT_DETAILS.OPERATIONAL_STATUS as OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
EVENT_DETAILS.FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME as FIRST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME,
EVENT_DETAILS.LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME as LAST_OCCURRENCE_SWITCH_TIME,
EVENT_DETAILS.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
EVENT_DETAILS.USER_NAME as USER_NAME,
EVENT_DETAILS.PORT_NAME as PORT_NAME,
EVENT_DETAILS.MAC_ADDRESS
from
EVENT
left join EVENT_DETAILS on EVENT.ID = EVENT_DETAILS.EVENT_ID,
EVENT_ORIGIN, EVENT_CATEGORY, EVENT_MODULE, EVENT_DESCRIPTION
where EVENT.EVENT_ORIGIN_ID = EVENT_ORIGIN.ID and EVENT.EVENT_CATEGORY_ID
= EVENT_CATEGORY.ID and EVENT.EVENT_MODULE_ID = EVENT_MODULE.ID
and
EVENT.EVENT_DESCRIPTION_ID = EVENT_DESCRIPTION.ID;

FABRIC_INFO
CREATE VIEW fabric_info AS
select
FABRIC.ID,
FABRIC.SAN_ID,
FABRIC.SEED_SWITCH_WWN,
FABRIC.NAME,
FABRIC.ACTIVE_ZONESET_NAME,
FABRIC.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
FABRIC.LAST_FABRIC_CHANGED,
FABRIC.SECURE,
FABRIC.AD_ENVIRONMENT,
FABRIC.MANAGED,
FABRIC.CONTACT,
FABRIC.LOCATION,
FABRIC.DESCRIPTION,
FABRIC.CREATION_TIME,
FABRIC.LAST_SCAN_TIME,
FABRIC.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
FABRIC.TRACK_CHANGES,
FABRIC.TYPE,
FABRIC.HAS_NOS_AG,
FABRIC.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
FABRIC.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
FABRIC.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN,
FABRIC.ZONE_TRANSACTION_TIMEOUT,
FABRIC.FABRIC_MODEL,

1622

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

FABRIC.ENHANCED_TI_ZONE_SUPPORT,
FABRIC.FABRIC_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as SEED_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INTEROP_MODE,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as SEED_SWITCH_IP_ADDRESS,
(select count(*) from FABRIC_MEMBER
where FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID) as SWITCH_COUNT
from
FABRIC, CORE_SWITCH, VIRTUAL_SWITCH, FABRIC_MEMBER
where
FABRIC.SEED_SWITCH_WWN = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN and
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID and
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID;

FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT_INFO
CREATE VIEW fcip_tunnel_circuit_info AS
select
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.TUNNEL_ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.CIRCUIT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.COMPRESSION_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.TURBO_WRITE_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.TAPE_ACCELERATION_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.IKE_POLICY_NUM,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.IPSEC_POLICY_NUM,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.PRESHARED_KEY,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.SOURCE_IP,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DEST_IP,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.VLAN_TAG,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.SELECTIVE_ACK,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.QOS_MAPPING,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.PATH_MTU_DISCOVERY,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MIN_COMM_RATE,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MAX_COMM_RATE,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MIN_RETRANSMIT_TIME,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MAX_RETRANSMIT_TIME,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.ADMIN_STATUS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.METRIC,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DATA_L2_COS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_DATA,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MAX_RETRANSMISSIONS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.SLOT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.VE_PORT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.SECURITY_FLAG,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_CONTROL,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.CIRCUIT_STATUS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.MISMATCHED_CONFIGURATIONS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.CIRCUIT_STATUS_STRING,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.L2COS_F_CLASS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.L2_COS_HIGH,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.L2_COS_MEDIUM,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.L2_COS_LOW,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_F_CLASS,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_HIGH,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_MEDIUM,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1623

I

Views

FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.DSCP_LOW,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.FAILOVER_CIRCUIT,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.FAILOVER_GROUP_ID,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_NUMBER GIGE_PORT_NUMBER,
GIGE_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER GIGE_PORT_SLOT_NUMBER,
FCIP_CIRCUIT_PORT_MAP.SWITCH_PORT_ID GIGE_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER
from
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT
left outer join FCIP_CIRCUIT_PORT_MAP on
FCIP_CIRCUIT_PORT_MAP.CIRCUIT_ID = FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.ID
left outer join GIGE_PORT
on FCIP_CIRCUIT_PORT_MAP.SWITCH_PORT_ID = GIGE_PORT.ID
left outer join SWITCH_PORT
on GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID;

FCIP_TUNNEL_INFO
create or replace view FCIP_TUNNEL_INFO as
select
FCIP_TUNNEL.ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TUNNEL_ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL.VLAN_TAG,
FCIP_TUNNEL.SOURCE_IP,
FCIP_TUNNEL.DEST_IP,
FCIP_TUNNEL.LOCAL_WWN,
FCIP_TUNNEL.REMOTE_WWN_RESTRICT,
FCIP_TUNNEL.COMMUNICATION_RATE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.MIN_RETRANSMIT_TIME,
FCIP_TUNNEL.SELECTIVE_ACK_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT,
FCIP_TUNNEL.MAX_RETRANSMISSION,
FCIP_TUNNEL.WAN_TOV_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TUNNEL_STATUS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.DESCRIPTION,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TRB_ID_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TT_EMUL_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_DLA_EMUL_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_PIPE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_PIPE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_WRITE_MAX_OPS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_READ_MAX_OPS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_WRITE_TIMER,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TAPE_MAX_WRITE_CHAIN,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_OXID_BASE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_XRC_EMULATION_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TW_EMUL_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TR_EMUL_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_DEBUG_FLAGS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.REMOTE_WWN,
FCIP_TUNNEL.CDC,
FCIP_TUNNEL.ADMIN_STATUS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.CONTROL_L2_COS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.DSCP_CONTROL,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TRUNKING_ALGORITHM,
FCIP_TUNNEL.EXTENDED_TUNNEL,
FCIP_TUNNEL.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL.CIRCUIT_COUNT,

1624

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

FCIP_TUNNEL.MISMATCHED_CONFIG_DETAILS,
FCIP_TUNNEL.SLOT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TPERF_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.AUTH_KEY,
FCIP_TUNNEL.CONNECTED_COUNT,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TUNNEL_STATUS_STRING,
FCIP_TUNNEL.COMPRESSION_MODE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TURBO_WRITE_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.TAPE_ACCELERATION_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.IPSEC_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.PRESHARED_KEY,
FCIP_TUNNEL.QOS_HIGH,
FCIP_TUNNEL.QOS_MEDIUM,
FCIP_TUNNEL.QOS_LOW,
FCIP_TUNNEL.BACKWARD_COMPATIBLE,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TERADATA_READ_ENABLED,
FCIP_TUNNEL.FICON_TERADATA_WRITE_ENABLED,
PORT.WWN as VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN,
PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN as REMOTE_PORT_WWN,
PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN as REMOTE_NODE_WWN,
PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
PORT.PORT_NUMBER as SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER,
PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as USER_PORT_NUMBER,
PORT.PORT_INDEX,
PORT.STATUS_MESSAGE
from
FCIP_TUNNEL
left outer join
FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP on
FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP.TUNNEL_ID = FCIP_TUNNEL.ID
left outer join SWITCH_PORT PORT
on FCIP_PORT_TUNNEL_MAP.SWITCHPORT_ID = PORT.ID;

FCOE_DEVICE_INFO
create or replace view FCOE_DEVICE_INFO as
select
FCOE_DEVICE.DEVICE_NODE_ID,
FCOE_DEVICE.DIRECT_ATTACH,
FCOE_DEVICE.ATTACH_ID,
FCOE_DEVICE.MAC_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_NODE.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_NODE.CREATION_TIME,
DEVICE_NODE.MISSING,
DEVICE_NODE.MISSING_TIME
from
FCOE_DEVICE,
DEVICE_NODE
where
FCOE_DEVICE.DEVICE_NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID;

FRU_INFO
create or replace view FRU_INFO as
select
FRU.ID,
FRU.CORE_SWITCH_ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1625

I

Views

FRU.TAG,
FRU.PART_NUMBER,
FRU.SERIAL_NUMBER,
FRU.VENDOR_PART_NUMBER,
FRU.VENDOR_SERIAL_NUMBER,
FRU.CAN_BE_FRUED,
FRU.SLOT_NUMBER,
FRU.MANUFACTURER_DATE,
FRU.UPDATE_DATE,
FRU.VERSION,
FRU.MANUFACTURER,
FRU.VENDOR_EQUIPMENT_TYPE,
FRU.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
FRU.TOTAL_OUTPUT_POWER,
FRU.SPEED,
FRU.CREATION_TIME,
FRU.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
FRU.PREVIOUS_OP_STATUS,
FRU.VENDOR,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_MODE as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED
from
FRU,
CORE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
FRU.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID and
FRU.CORE_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID;

GIGE_PORT_ECLOUD_LINK_INFO
create or replace view GIGE_PORT_ECLOUD_LINK_INFO as
select
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.ID,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.SWITCH_PORT_ID as GIGE_PORT_ID,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.CLOUD_ID,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.TRUSTED,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.CREATION_TIME,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.MISSING,
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.MISSING_TIME,
GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID
from
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK,
GIGE_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
GIGE_PORT_ETHERNET_CLOUD_LINK.SWITCH_PORT_ID = GIGE_PORT.ID and
GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID and
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID;

1626

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

GIGE_PORT_INFO
create or replace view GIGE_PORT_INFO as
select
GIGE_PORT.ID,
GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
GIGE_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
GIGE_PORT.ENABLED,
GIGE_PORT.SPEED,
GIGE_PORT.MAX_SPEED,
GIGE_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_NAME,
GIGE_PORT.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
GIGE_PORT.LED_STATE,
GIGE_PORT.SPEED_LED_STATE,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_TYPE,
GIGE_PORT.PERSISTENTLY_DISABLED,
GIGE_PORT.INTERFACE_TYPE,
GIGE_PORT.CHECKSUM,
GIGE_PORT.FCIP_CAPABLE,
coalesce(CARD.FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE, VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE) as
FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE,
GIGE_PORT.ISCSI_CAPABLE,
GIGE_PORT.REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS,
GIGE_PORT.INBAND_MANAGEMENT_STATUS,
GIGE_PORT.LAST_UPDATE,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_INDEX,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_TYPE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN
from
GIGE_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT,
CORE_SWITCH
left outer join CARD on CORE_SWITCH.ID = CARD.CORE_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID and
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID and
GIGE_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER in (0, CARD.SLOT_NUMBER);

HBA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view HBA_PORT_DETAILS_INFO as
select
HBA_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
HBA_PORT.CONFIGURED_STATE,
HBA_PORT.CONFIGURED_SPEED,
HBA_PORT.CONFIGURED_TOPOLOGY,
HBA_PORT.MAX_SPEED_SUPPORTED,
HBA_PORT.OPERATING_STATE,
HBA_PORT.OPERATING_TOPOLOGY,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1627

I

Views

HBA_PORT.SUPPORTED_FC4_TYPES,
HBA_PORT.SUPPORTED_COS,
HBA_PORT.TRUSTED as HBA_PORT_TRUSTED,
HBA_PORT.CREATION_TIME as HBA_PORT_CREATION_TIME,
HBA_PORT.MISSING as HBA_PORT_MISSING,
HBA_PORT.MISSING_TIME as HBA_PORT_MISSING_TIME,
HBA_PORT.OPERATING_SPEED,
HBA_PORT.CNA_PORT_ID,
HBA_PORT.PORT_NWWN,
HBA_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_WWN,
HBA_PORT.SWITCH_IP,
HBA_PORT.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN,
HBA_PORT.HBA_ID,
HBA_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
HBA_PORT.NAME,
HBA_PORT.FACTORY_PORT_WWN,
HBA_PORT.FACTORY_NODE_WWN,
HBA_PORT.PREBOOT_CREATED,
HBA_PORT.MAX_BANDWIDTH,
HBA_PORT.PCIF_INDEX,
HBA_PORT.MAX_PCIF,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.PERSISTENT_BINDING,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FABRIC_NAME,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BOOT_OVER_SAN,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BOOT_OPTION,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BOOT_SPEED,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BOOT_TOPOLOGY,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BB_CREDIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FRAME_DATA_FIELD_SIZE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.HARDWARE_PATH,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.V_PORT_COUNT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QUEUE_DEPTH,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.INTERRUPT_CONTROL_COALESCE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.INTERRUPT_CONTROL_LATENCY,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.INTERRUPT_CONTROL_DELAY,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BEACON_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.LINK_BEACON_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.MPIO_MODE_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.PATH_TIME_OUT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.LOGGING_LEVEL,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.TARGET_RATE_LIMIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.DEFAULT_RATE_LIMIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.VF_MODE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.RECIEVE_BUFFER_CREDIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.TRANSMIT_BUFFER_CREDIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FCSP_AUTH_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FCSP_STATUS,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FCSP_ALGORITHM,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FCSP_GROUP,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FCSP_ERROR_STATUS,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_CONFIGURED_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_OPERATING_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_TOTAL_BB_CREDIT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_PRIORITY_LEVEL,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_HIGH_BW_ALLOCATION,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_MEDIUM_BW_ALLOCATION,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.QOS_LOW_BW_ALLOCATION,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.MEDIA as MEDIA,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.IOC_ID as IOC_ID,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.PREBOOT_DISABLED,

1628

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Views

HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.BANDWIDTH as FCOE_BANDWIDTH,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FIP_STATE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.DISCOVERY_PRIORITY,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCF_FCMAP,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCF_FPMA_MAC,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCF_MAC,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCF_MODE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCF_NAMEID,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCPIM_MPIO_MODE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.PORT_LOG_ENABLED,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.MAX_FRAME_SIZE as FCOE_MAX_FRAME_SIZE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.MTU as FCOE_MTU,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.PATH_TOV as FCOE_PATH_TOV,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.SCSI_QUEUE_DEPTH as FCOE_SCSI_QUEUE_DEPTH,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.STATE as FCOE_STATE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.SUPPORTED_CLASS as FCOE_SUPPORTED_CLASS,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.TRL_SPEED as FCOE_TRL_SPEED,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.TRL_STATE as FCOE_TRL_STATE,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.PG_ID as FCOE_PG_ID,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.PRIORITIES as FCOE_PRIORITIES,
HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.FCOE_MAC,
HBA_PORT.SYNTHETIC_FC,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.ALARM_WARNING,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_MAX,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_OPERATIONAL,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.IO_EXEC_THROTTLE_CONFIGURED,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BOOTUP_DELAY,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.FEC_STATE,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.BB_CREDIT_RECOVERY_STATUS,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.CONFIGURED_BB_SCN_COUNT,
HBA_PORT_DETAIL.NEGOTIATED_BB_SCN_COUNT
from
HBA_PORT
left outer join HBA_PORT_DETAIL
on HBA_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID = HBA_PORT_DETAIL.DEVICE_PORT_ID
left outer join HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS
on HBA_PORT.DEVICE_PORT_ID = HBA_PORT_FCOE_DETAILS.DEVICE_PORT_ID;

HBA_TARGET_INFO
create or replace view HBA_TARGET_INFO as
select
HBA_TARGET.DEVICE_PORT_ID,
HBA_TARGET.HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN_ID,
HBA_TARGET.BOOT_LUN,
HBA_TARGET.TRUSTED,
HBA_TARGET.CREATION_TIME,
HBA_TARGET.MISSING,
HBA_TARGET.MISSING_TIME,
HBA_TARGET.TARGET_ID as HBA_PORT_TARGET_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.ID as HBA_REMOTE_PORT_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.SYMBOLIC_NAME,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.PORT_WWN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.NODE_WWN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.NAME,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.FC_ADDRESS,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.FRAME_DATA_SIZE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.SPEED,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.STATE,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1629

I

Views

HBA_REMOTE_PORT.SUPPORTED_COS,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.DEVICE_TYPE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.BIND_TYPE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.TARGET_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.ROLE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.VENDOR,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.PRODUCT_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.PRODUCT_VERSION,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.QOS_PRIORITY,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.QOS_FLOW_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.CURRENT_SPEED,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.TRL_ENFORCED,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.BUS_NO,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.FCP_LUN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.CAPACITY,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.BLOCK_SIZE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.VENDOR as LUN_VENDOR,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.PRODUCT_ID as LUN_PRODUCT_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.PRODUCT_VERSION as LUN_PRODUCT_VERSION,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.PRODUCT_SERIAL_NO,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.TARGET_WWN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.PHYSICAL_LUN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.LUN_ID,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.FCP_IM_STATE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.IO_LATENCY_MIN,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.IO_LATENCY_MAX,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.IO_LATENCY_AVERAGE,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.DATA_RETRANSMISSION_SUPPORT,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.REC_SUPPORT,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.TASK_RENTRY_IDENT_SUPPORT,
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.CONFIRMED_COMPLETIONS_SUPPORT
from
HBA_TARGET, HBA_REMOTE_PORT, HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN
where
HBA_TARGET.HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN_ID = HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.ID and
HBA_REMOTE_PORT.ID = HBA_REMOTE_PORT_LUN.HBA_REMOTE_PORT_ID;

HEALTH_STATUS_INFO
create or replace view HEALTH_STATUS_INFO as
select
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID as CONFIGURATION_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.NAME,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.ID as STATUS_ID,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_TIME,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYED_BY,
HEALTH_STATUS.RULE_ID,
HEALTH_STATUS.RULE_DESCRIPTION,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.TARGET_ID,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.TARGET_TYPE,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.STATUS,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.MESSAGE,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.LEGACY_NAME
from
DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION,
DEPLOYMENT_STATUS,
HEALTH_STATUS,
HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS
where

1630

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION_ID = DEPLOYMENT_CONFIGURATION.ID
and HEALTH_STATUS.DEPLOYMENT_STATUS_ID = DEPLOYMENT_STATUS.ID
and HEALTH_TARGET_STATUS.HEALTH_STATUS_ID = HEALTH_STATUS.ID;

HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST_INFO
create or replace view HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST_INFO as
select
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.ID,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.HOST_NAME AS REQUEST_HOST_NAME,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.REQUEST_GROUP_ID,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION_ID,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.VM_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.JSON_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.CIM_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.DISCOVER_JSON,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.JSON_USERNAME,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.JSON_PASSWD,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.DISCOVER_CIM,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.CIM_IMPL,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.CIM_USERNAME,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.CIM_PASSWORD,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.CIM_NAMESPACE,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.CIM_PORT,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.DISCOVER_VM,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.VM_USERNAME,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.VM_PASSWORD,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.JSON_PORT,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.VM_PORT,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.Application_Name_USER_NAME,
HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.Application_Name_SERVER_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.NAME,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.TYPE,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ICON,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.OS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.APPLICATIONS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.DEPARTMENT,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.CONTACT,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.LOCATION,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.DESCRIPTION,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.COMMENT_,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.VENDOR,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MODEL,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.FIRMWARE,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE1,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE2,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE3,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.HCM_AGENT_VERSION,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.OS_VERSION,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.CREATED_BY,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.TRACK_CHANGES,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.LAST_UPDATE_MODULE,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.TRUSTED,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.CREATION_TIME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1631

I

Views

DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MISSING,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MISSING_TIME,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.HOST_NAME,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.SYSLOG_REGISTERED,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.VIRTUALIZATION,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.MANAGEMENT_STATE_DETAILS
from
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST
join HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION on
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION_ID = HOST_DISCOVERY_OPTION.ID
left outer join DEVICE_ENCLOSURE on
HOST_DISCOVERY_REQUEST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID = DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID;

IFL_INFO
create or replace view IFL_INFO as
select
IFL.ID as IFL_ID,
IFL.EDGE_FABRIC_ID,
(select distinct FCR_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
from SWITCH_PORT FCR_PORT
where FCR_PORT.WWN = IFL.BB_PORT_WWN)
as FCR_SWITCH_ID,
IFL.EDGE_PORT_WWN,
IFL.BB_FABRIC_ID,
IFL.BB_PORT_WWN ,
IFL.BB_RA_TOV,
IFL.BB_ED_TOV,
IFL.BB_PID_FORMAT,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID as EDGE_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.ID as EDGE_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as EDGE_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as EDGE_PORT_TYPE
from IFL
left outer join SWITCH_PORT
on IFL.EDGE_PORT_WWN = SWITCH_PORT.WWN;

ISL_INFO
create or replace view ISL_INFO as
select distinct
ISL.ID,
ISL.FABRIC_ID,
ISL.COST,
ISL.TYPE,
ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
ISL.MISSING,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_NAME,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as SOURCE_SWITCH_WWN,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID as SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH_ID,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH as SOURCE_BASE_SWITCH,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MONITORED,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID,

1632

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.WWN as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as PORT_TYPE,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as SOURCE_PHYSICAL_PORT,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED,
ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as DEST_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as DEST_SWITCH_NAME,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as DEST_SWITCH_WWN,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID as DEST_CORE_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH as DEST_BASE_SWITCH,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MONITORED,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.ID as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.WWN as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as DEST_PHYSICAL_PORT,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED,
FABRIC.PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN as PRINCIPAL_SWITCH_WWN
from
ISL,
FABRIC_MEMBER SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC_MEMBER DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT
DEST_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC
where
SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY = 1 and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER and
DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY = 1 and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER and
FABRIC.ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID;

ISL_TRILL_INFO
create or replace view ISL_TRILL_INFO as
select distinct
VCS_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as VCS_DEVICE_ID,
SOURCE_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID,
ISL.ID,
ISL.FABRIC_ID,
ISL.COST,
ISL.MISSING,
ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
SOURCE_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as SOURCE_ME_ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1633

I

Views

SOURCE_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as SOURCE_DEVICE_ID,
SOURCE_DEVICE.SYS_NAME as SOURCE_DEVICE_NAME,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.IDENTIFIER as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_IDENTIFIER,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TYPE as PORT_TYPE,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as SOURCE_PHYSICAL_PORT,
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED,
ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID,
ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
DEST_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as DEST_DEVICE_ID,
DEST_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID AS DEST_ME_ID,
DEST_DEVICE.SYS_NAME as DEST_DEVICE_NAME,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.ID as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.NAME as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.IDENTIFIER as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_IDENTIFIER,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.KIND as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_KIND,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT as DEST_PHYSICAL_PORT,
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_TRUNKED
from
ISL,
DEVICE VCS_DEVICE,
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER SOURCE_CLUSTER_MEMBER,
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER DEST_CLUSTER_MEMBER,
DEVICE SOURCE_DEVICE,
SWITCH_PORT SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC_MEMBER SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
DEVICE DEST_DEVICE,
SWITCH_PORT DEST_SWITCH_PORT,
FABRIC_MEMBER DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
FABRIC
where
SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = SOURCE_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER and
DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = DEST_FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID = ISL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
DEST_SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER = ISL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER and
FABRIC.ID = ISL.FABRIC_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = SOURCE_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = DEST_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and
SOURCE_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID = SOURCE_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and
DEST_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID = DEST_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID and
VCS_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = SOURCE_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID;

ISL_TRUNK_GROUP_MEMBER_INFO
CREATE VIEW isl_trunk_group_member_info AS
select

1634

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.MASTER_USER_PORT,
ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.MISSING,
ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.TRUSTED,
ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.MISSING_TIME,
ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED,
SWITCH_PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_TYPE
from
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP,
ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER,
SWITCH_PORT
where
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.id = ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.GROUP_ID
and ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and ISL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER= SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER;

ISL_TRUNK_INFO
CREATE VIEW isl_trunk_info AS
select
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.TRUSTED,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.MISSING,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.MISSING_TIME,
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.MEMBER_TRACKING_STATUS,
ISL_INFO.COST,
ISL_INFO.TYPE,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_ID,
ISL_INFO.MISSING_REASON,
SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as SOURCE_SWITCH_IP_ADDRESS,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as SOURCE_SWITCH_WWN,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as SOURCE_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as SOURCE_SWITCH_MONITORED,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID as MASTER_PORT,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_NAME,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_ID,
ISL_INFO.DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
ISL_INFO.DEST_SWITCH_ID,
DEST_CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as DEST_SWITCH_IP_ADDRESS,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as DEST_SWITCH_WWN,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE as DEST_SWITCH_MANAGEMENT_STATE,
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED as DEST_SWITCH_MONITORED,
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
ISL_INFO.DEST_DOMAIN_ID as REMOTE_MASTER_PORT,
ISL_INFO.DEST_SWITCH_NAME,
ISL_INFO.DEST_SWITCH_PORT_ID
from
ISL_TRUNK_GROUP,
ISL_INFO,
CORE_SWITCH SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH,
CORE_SWITCH DEST_CORE_SWITCH,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1635

I

Views

VIRTUAL_SWITCH SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_ID = ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and ISL_INFO.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER = ISL_TRUNK_GROUP.MASTER_USER_PORT
and ISL_INFO.SOURCE_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = SOURCE_CORE_SWITCH.ID
and ISL_INFO.DEST_SWITCH_ID = DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = DEST_CORE_SWITCH.ID;

L2_NEIGHBOR_INFO
create or replace view L2_NEIGHBOR_INFO as
select
L2_NEIGHBOR.INTERFACE_ID,
L2_NEIGHBOR.RMT_IP_ADDRESS,
L2_NEIGHBOR.RMT_IF_NAME,
LLDP_DATA.DEVICE_ID as RMT_DEVICE_ID,
LLDP_DATA.INTERFACE_ID as RMT_INTERFACE_ID,
PHY_INTF.PHYSICAL_ADDRESS as RMT_INTERFACE_MAC,
RMT_DEVICE.IS_ROUTER
from
device RMT_DEVICE,
LLDP_DATA,
L2_NEIGHBOR,
physical_interface PHY_INTF
where
LLDP_DATA.CHASSIS_ID = L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID
and LLDP_DATA.CHASSIS_ID_SUBTYPE = L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_SUBTYPE
and LLDP_DATA.PORT_ID = L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_PORT_ID
and LLDP_DATA.PORT_ID_SUBTYPE = L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_PORT_ID_SUBTYPE
and LLDP_DATA.DEVICE_ID = RMT_DEVICE.device_id
and PHY_INTF.interface_id = LLDP_DATA.INTERFACE_ID;

MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS_INFO
CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS_INFO AS
SELECT MAPS_EVENT.ID,
MAPS_EVENT.HOST_TIME,
MAPS_EVENT.CATEGORY,
MAPS_EVENT.VIOLATION_TYPE,
MAPS_EVENT.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.ORIGIN_FABRIC_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.INTERFACE_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.FCIP_CIRCUIT_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.FRU_NAME,
MAPS_EVENT.VM_ID,
MAPS_EVENT.FLOW_DEFINITION_ID,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.SWITCH_TIME,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.RULE_NAME,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.RULE_CONDITION,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.TIME_BASE,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.ACTIONS,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.CURRENT_VALUE,
MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.SWITCH_ENABLED_ACTIONS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME AS SWITCH_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.NAME AS SWITCH_PORT_NAME,

1636

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

INTERFACE.NAME AS INTERFACE_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN AS SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER AS SWITCH_PORT_SLOT,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER AS SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID AS SWITCH_PORT_PORT_ID,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.CIRCUIT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.SLOT_NUMBER AS FCIP_SLOT_NUMBER,
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.VE_PORT_NUMBER AS FCIP_PORT_NUMBER,
NP_FLOW_DEFINITION.NAME AS FLOW_NAME,
MAPS_EVENT_CAUSE_ACTION.ACTION
FROM MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS
JOIN MAPS_EVENT ON MAPS_EVENT.ID = MAPS_EVENT_DETAILS.MAPS_EVENT_ID
LEFT JOIN MAPS_EVENT_CAUSE_ACTION ON MAPS_EVENT.VIOLATION_TYPE =
MAPS_EVENT_CAUSE_ACTION.VIOLATION_TYPE
LEFT JOIN VIRTUAL_SWITCH ON MAPS_EVENT.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID =
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
LEFT JOIN SWITCH_PORT ON MAPS_EVENT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID
LEFT JOIN INTERFACE ON MAPS_EVENT.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
LEFT JOIN FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT ON MAPS_EVENT.FCIP_CIRCUIT_ID =
FCIP_TUNNEL_CIRCUIT.ID
LEFT JOIN NP_FLOW_DEFINITION ON MAPS_EVENT.FLOW_DEFINITION_ID =
NP_FLOW_DEFINITION.ID;

MODULE_INFO
CREATE VIEW module_info AS
select distinct
TEMP_MODULE.MODULE_ID,
TEMP_MODULE.NUM_PORTS,
TEMP_MODULE.IS_PRESENT,
case
when TEMP_MODULE.IS_PRESENT = 1 then 'YES'
else 'NO'
end as IS_PRESENT_TXT,
TEMP_MODULE.IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE,
case
when TEMP_MODULE.IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE = 1 then 'YES'
else 'NO'
end as IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE_TXT,
TEMP_MODULE.NUM_CPUS,
TEMP_MODULE.HW_REVISION,
TEMP_MODULE.SW_REVISION,
TEMP_MODULE.SLOT_NUM,
TEMP_MODULE.DEVICE_ID,
TEMP_MODULE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
TEMP_MODULE.UNIT_NUMBER,
TEMP_MODULE.UNIT_PRESENT,
case
when TEMP_MODULE.UNIT_PRESENT = 1 then 'YES'
else 'NO'
end as UNIT_PRESENT_TXT,
TEMP_MODULE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
TEMP_MODULE.IP_ADDRESS,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.SERIAL_NUM,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.DRAM_SIZE,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.BOOT_FLASH_SIZE,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1637

I

Views

TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.CODE_FLASH_SIZE,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.MODULE_TYPE,
TEMP_MODULE.DESCRIPTION as MODULE_TYPE_TXT,
TEMP_MODULE.MODULE_STATUS,
TEMP_MODULE.REDUNDANT_STATUS
from
(
select distinct
MODULE.MODULE_ID,
MODULE.NUM_PORTS,
MODULE.IS_PRESENT,
MODULE.IS_MANAGEMENT_MODULE,
MODULE.NUM_CPUS,
MODULE.HW_REVISION,
MODULE.SW_REVISION,
SLOT.SLOT_NUM,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NUMBER,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_PRESENT,
DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS,
MODULE.DESCRIPTION,
MODULE.MODULE_STATUS,
MODULE.REDUNDANT_STATUS
from MODULE, SLOT, MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT, DEVICE, PHYSICAL_DEVICE
where
MODULE.MODULE_ID = MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT.MODULE_ID
and MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT.SLOT_ID = SLOT.SLOT_ID
and SLOT.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID = PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID
and DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
) TEMP_MODULE
left join
(
select
FOUNDRY_MODULE.MODULE_ID,
FOUNDRY_MODULE.SERIAL_NUM,
FOUNDRY_MODULE.DRAM_SIZE,
FOUNDRY_MODULE.BOOT_FLASH_SIZE,
FOUNDRY_MODULE.CODE_FLASH_SIZE,
FOUNDRY_MODULE.MODULE_TYPE
from FOUNDRY_MODULE
) TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE ON TEMP_MODULE.MODULE_ID =
TEMP_FOUNDRY_MODULE.MODULE_ID;

NPORT_WWN_MAP_INFO
This view provides a consolidation between Nport WWN map and AG''s N and F ports. It considers
only those N-Ports that are currently occupied that is having non-empty remote port wwn. This is
required because NPort-WWN mapping might exist for NPorts that are not yet online and if a device
is connected to AG through some F-Port that is mapped to some other N-Port that is online then
AG will use that mapping.
create or replace view NPORT_WWN_MAP_INFO as
select
NPORT_WWN_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
NPORT_WWN_MAP.N_PORT,
NPORT_WWN_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_WWN,

1638

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

AG_N_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN as EDGE_SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
AG_N_PORT.WWN as AG_N_PORT_WWN,
AG_F_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER as F_PORT,
AG_F_PORT.WWN as AG_F_PORT_WWN,
AG_F_PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN
from
NPORT_WWN_MAP,
SWITCH_PORT AG_N_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT AG_F_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH AG_SWITCH
where
NPORT_WWN_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_N_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and NPORT_WWN_MAP.N_PORT = AG_N_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER
and NPORT_WWN_MAP.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_F_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and NPORT_WWN_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_WWN = AG_F_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN
AND AG_N_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = AG_SWITCH.ID
and AG_SWITCH.MONITORED = 1;

PHANTOM_PORT_INFO
create or replace view PHANTOM_PORT_INFO as
select
PHANTOM_PORT.ID,
PHANTOM_PORT.WWN,
PHANTOM_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
PHANTOM_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
PHANTOM_PORT.PORT_ID,
PHANTOM_PORT.SPEED,
PHANTOM_PORT.MAX_SPEED,
PHANTOM_PORT.TYPE,
PHANTOM_PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN,
PHANTOM_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN,
PHANTOM_PORT.PHANTOM_TYPE,
PHANTOM_PORT.BB_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED
from
PHANTOM_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
PHANTOM_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID;

PRODUCT_INFO
CREATE VIEW product_info AS
select distinct
TEMP_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
TEMP_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
TEMP_DEVICE.ALIAS_NAME,
TEMP_DEVICE.HOST_NAME,
TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS = 1 then
(case
when TEMP_DEVICE.FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS = 2 then 'DEGRADED'
when TEMP_DEVICE.FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS = 3 then 'DOWN'
else 'REACHABLE'

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1639

I

Views

end)
when TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS = 2 then 'NOT REACHABLE'
when TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS = 3 then 'DEGRADED'
when TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS = 4 then 'MARGINAL'
when TEMP_DEVICE.OPER_STATUS = 5 then 'DOWN'
else 'UNKNOWN'
end as OPER_STATUS_TXT,
TEMP_DEVICE.FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS,
TEMP_DEVICE.FABRIC_WATCH_STATUS_REASON,
TEMP_DEVICE.ADMIN_STATUS,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.ADMIN_STATUS = 1 then 'TROUBLESHOOTING'
else 'NORMAL'
end as ADMIN_STATUS_TXT,
TEMP_DEVICE.ADMIN_STATUS_LAST_UPDATED,
TEMP_DEVICE.MEMO,
TEMP_DEVICE.MEMO_LAST_UPDATED,
TEMP_DEVICE.SYS_OID,
TEMP_DEVICE.RBRIDGE_ID,
TEMP_DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_DEVICE.PRODUCT_TYPE,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.IS_ROUTER = 1 then 'ROUTER'
else 'L2 SWITCH'
end as PRODUCT_TYPE_TXT,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.IS_FOUNDRY = 1 then 'IOS'
when TEMP_DEVICE.IS_DCB_SWITCH = 1 then 'FOS'
when TEMP_DEVICE.IS_VCS_CAPABLE = 1 then 'NOS'
else 'UNKNOWN'
end as SWITCH_OS,
TEMP_DEVICE.IS_ROUTER,
TEMP_DEVICE.IS_SLB,
TEMP_DEVICE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
TEMP_DEVICE.SYS_NAME,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY > 0 then (select distinct VCSD.SYS_NAME from
DEVICE as VCSD where VCSD.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
in (select distinct VM.CLUSTER_ME_ID from VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER as VM where
TEMP_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = VM.MEMBER_ME_ID))
else null
end as VCS_NAME,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY > 0 then (select distinct VCSD.IP_ADDRESS from
DEVICE as VCSD where VCSD.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
in (select distinct VM.CLUSTER_ME_ID from VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER as VM where
TEMP_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = VM.MEMBER_ME_ID))
else null
end as VCS_IP_ADDRESS,
TEMP_DEVICE.SYS_CONTACT,
TEMP_DEVICE.SYS_LOCATION,
TEMP_DEVICE.DESCRIPTION,
TEMP_DEVICE.LAST_SEEN_TIME,
TO_TIMESTAMP(TEMP_DEVICE.LAST_SEEN_TIME,'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS') as
LAST_SEEN_TIMESTAMP,
TEMP_DEVICE.VendOR,
TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY = 1 then 'FIXED CONFIGURATION'

1640

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

when TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY = 2 then 'CHASSIS'
when TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY = 3 then 'STACK'
when TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY = 4 then 'ACCESS POINT'
when TEMP_DEVICE.CATEGORY = 5 then 'WIRELESS CONTROLLER'
else 'UNKNOWN'
end as CATEGORY_TXT,
TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 1 then 'DCB 8000'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 2 then 'DCB 8470'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 3 then 'DCB M8428'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 4 then 'DCX'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 5 then 'DCX-4S'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 6 then 'VCS/VDX'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 7 then 'VDX 6720-24'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 8 then 'VDX 6720-60'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 9 then 'VDX 6710'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 10 then 'VDX 6730-24'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 11 then 'VDX 6730-60'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 12 then 'VDX 8770-4'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 13 then 'VDX 8770-8'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 14 then 'VDX 8770-16'
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 15 then 'VDX 2730'
else 'IP DEVICE'
end as SUB_CATEGORY_TXT,
TEMP_DEVICE.FIRST_SEEN_TIME,
TO_TIMESTAMP(TEMP_DEVICE.FIRST_SEEN_TIME,'YYYYMMDDHH24MISS') as
FIRST_SEEN_TIMESTAMP,
TEMP_DEVICE.PORT_COUNT,
TEMP_DEVICE.LICENSE_PORT_COUNT,
case
when TEMP_DEVICE.SUB_CATEGORY = 0 then (select distinct SWITCH_MODEL.MODEL
from SWITCH_MODEL where TEMP_DEVICE.SYS_OID = SWITCH_MODEL.SYS_OID)
else TEMP_DEVICE.BRIEF_PRODUCT_FAMILY
end as MODEL,
TEMP_FOUNDRY_DEVICE.IMAGE_VERSION as FIRMWARE,
TEMP_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
TEMP_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.NUM_SLOTS,
TEMP_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NUMBER,
TEMP_DEVICE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
TEMP_DEVICE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
TEMP_DEVICE.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3
from DEVICE as TEMP_DEVICE
left join
(
select
FOUNDRY_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
FOUNDRY_DEVICE.PRODUCT_TYPE,
FOUNDRY_DEVICE.IMAGE_VERSION
from FOUNDRY_DEVICE
) TEMP_FOUNDRY_DEVICE on TEMP_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = TEMP_FOUNDRY_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
left join
(
select
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.NUM_SLOTS,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NUMBER
from PHYSICAL_DEVICE
) TEMP_PHYSICAL_DEVICE on TEMP_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = TEMP_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1641

I

Views

PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONF_INFO
This view provides combine port bottleneck configuration and enough information from switch port
for the client to identify the port.
create or replace view PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONF_INFO as
select
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.BOTTLENECK_DETECT_ENABLED,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.ALERTS_ENABLED,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.CONGESTION_THRESHOLD,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.LATENCY_THRESHOLD,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.WINDOW_,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.QUIET_TIME,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.CREATION_TIME,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.LATENCY_SEVERITY,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.LATENCY_TIME,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN
from
PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG
left outer join SWITCH_PORT
on PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONFIG.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID;
comment on view PORT_BOTTLENECK_CONF_INFO is
Combine port bottleneck configuration and enough info from switch port for the
client to identify the port.;

PORT_BOTTLENECK_STAT_INFO
This view provides combine port bottleneck status and enough information from the switch port for
the client to identify the port.
create or replace view PORT_BOTTLENECK_STAT_INFO as
select
PORT_BOTTLENECK_STATUS.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
PORT_BOTTLENECK_STATUS.STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE
from
PORT_BOTTLENECK_STATUS
left outer join SWITCH_PORT
on PORT_BOTTLENECK_STATUS.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID;

PORT_GROUP_INFO
create or replace view PORT_GROUP_INFO as
select
SWITCH_PORT.ID as PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.NAME as SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.HEALTH,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS,

1642

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.FICON_SUPPORTED,
SWITCH_PORT.STATE,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as SWITCH_ID,
FABRIC.NAME as FABRIC_NAME,
FABRIC.MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED,
PORT_GROUP.ID as PORT_GROUP_ID,
PORT_GROUP_MEMBER.ID as PORT_GROUP_MEMBER_ID
from
SWITCH_PORT, VIRTUAL_SWITCH, FABRIC, FABRIC_MEMBER, PORT_GROUP_MEMBER,
PORT_GROUP
where
VIRTUAL_SWITCH .ID = SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID and
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID and
SWITCH_PORT.ID = PORT_GROUP_MEMBER.SWITCH_PORT_ID and
PORT_GROUP_MEMBER.PORT_GROUP_ID = PORT_GROUP.ID;

ROLE_PRIVILEGE_INFO
create or replace view ROLE_PRIVILEGE_INFO as
select
ROLE.ID,
ROLE.NAME as ROLE_NAME,
ROLE.DESCRIPTION as ROLE_DESCRIPTION,
ROLE.HIDDEN as ROLE_HIDDEN,
PRIVILEGE.ID as PRIVILEGE_ID,
PRIVILEGE.NAME as PRIVILEGE_NAME,
PRIVILEGE.AREA as PRIVILEGE_AREA,
ROLE_PRIVILEGE_MAP.PERMISSION
from
ROLE,
ROLE_PRIVILEGE_MAP,
PRIVILEGE
where
ROLE.ID = ROLE_PRIVILEGE_MAP.ROLE_ID and
PRIVILEGE.ID = ROLE_PRIVILEGE_MAP.PRIVILEGE_ID;

PORT_PROFILE_INFO
create or replace view PORT_PROFILE_INFO as
select
PORT_PROFILE.ID,
PORT_PROFILE.SWITCH_ME_ID,
PORT_PROFILE.NAME,
PORT_PROFILE.STATE,
PORT_PROFILE.SWITCH_PORT_MODE,
PORT_PROFILE.ACL_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.QOS_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.FCOE_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.VLAN_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.VLAN_DETAILS,
PORT_PROFILE.DEFAULT_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.ACL_NAME,
PORT_PROFILE.FCOE_MAP_NAME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1643

I

Views

PORT_PROFILE.ACTIVATED,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.DCB_MODE,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.ETHERNET_MODE,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.PAUSE_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.PAUSE_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.COS_COS,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.TRAFFIC_CLASS,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.COS,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.CEE_MAP,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS0_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS0_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS1_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS1_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS2_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS2_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS3_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS3_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS4_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS4_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS5_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS5_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS6_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS6_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS7_TX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.COS7_RX,
PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.TRUST_COS
from PORT_PROFILE
left join PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP
on PORT_PROFILE.ID = PORT_PROFILE_QOS_MAP.PROFILE_ID
left join PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP
on PORT_PROFILE.ID = PORT_PROFILE_QOS_PFC_MAP.PROFILE_ID;

PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_INFO
create or replace view PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_INFO as
select
PORT_PROFILE.ID,
PORT_PROFILE.SWITCH_ME_ID,
PORT_PROFILE.NAME,
PORT_PROFILE.ACL_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.QOS_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.FCOE_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.VLAN_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.VLAN_DETAILS,
PORT_PROFILE.DEFAULT_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE.ACL_NAME,
PORT_PROFILE.FCOE_MAP_NAME,
PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.INTERFACE_ID,
PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.SWITCH_PORT_ID
from
PORT_PROFILE,
PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP
where
PORT_PROFILE.ID= PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.PROFILE_ID;

PORT_PROFILE_MAC_INFO
create or replace view PORT_PROFILE_MAC_INFO as

1644

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

select
PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP.PROFILE_ID,
PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP.MAC,
PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP.NAME as MAC_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.PORT_GROUP_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.DISPLAY_LABEL,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME as HOST_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.NAME as VCENTER_NAME,
INTERFACE.IDENTIFIER
from
PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP
left outer join VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER on PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP.MAC =
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS
left outer join VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE on
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
left outer join VM_VCENTER_MEMBER on VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID =
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID
left outer join VM_VCENTER on VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID
left outer join L2_NEIGHBOR on PORT_PROFILE_MAC_MAP.MAC =
encode(L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_PORT_ID, 'base64')
left outer join INTERFACE on L2_NEIGHBOR.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID;

PORT_VLAN_INFO
create view PORT_VLAN_INFO as
select
PV.*,
DEVICE_ID,
NAME,
TABLE_SUBTYPE
from
VLAN V,
PORT_VLAN PV
where
V.VLAN_DB_ID = PV.VLAN_DB_ID;

PROTOCOL_VLAN_INFO
create or replace view PROTOCOL_VLAN_INFO as
select
V.*,
port_vlan_db_id,
is_dynamic,
protocol
from vlan V, sub_port_vlan SPV, protocol_vlan PV
where V.vlan_db_id = SPV.vlan_db_id AND SPV.vlan_db_id = PV.vlan_db_id;

SFLOW
create or replace view SFLOW as

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1645

I

Views

select DEVICE_ID, IN_SLOT, IN_PORT, OUT_SLOT, OUT_PORT, L4_PROTOCOL, IP_TOS,
SRC_SUBNET_BITS, DEST_SUBNET_BITS, IN_PRIORITY, OUT_PRIORITY, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN,
L3_PROTOCOL, L4_SRC_PORT, L4_DEST_PORT, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_MAC, DEST_MAC,
L3_SRC_ADDR, L3_DEST_ADDR, TCP_FLAGS, LOCAL_AS, SRC_AS, SRC_PEER_AS,
SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID, IP_FLOW_LABEL, SRC_USER, DEST_USER, FRAMES, BYTES,
IN_UNIT, OUT_UNIT
from SFLOW_HOUR_SUMMARY
where SLNUM <= (select MAX_SLNUM from SFLOW_HOUR_SUMMARY_SLNUM fetch first 1
rows only)
union all
select DEVICE_ID, IN_SLOT, IN_PORT, OUT_SLOT, OUT_PORT, L4_PROTOCOL, IP_TOS,
SRC_SUBNET_BITS, DEST_SUBNET_BITS, IN_PRIORITY, OUT_PRIORITY, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN,
L3_PROTOCOL, L4_SRC_PORT, L4_DEST_PORT, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_MAC, DEST_MAC,
L3_SRC_ADDR, L3_DEST_ADDR, TCP_FLAGS, LOCAL_AS, SRC_AS, SRC_PEER_AS,
SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID, IP_FLOW_LABEL, SRC_USER, DEST_USER, FRAMES, BYTES,
IN_UNIT, OUT_UNIT
from SFLOW_STAGING
where SLNUM >= (select MIN_SLNUM from SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only);

SFLOW_MINUTE_L3_VIEW
create or replace view SFLOW_MINUTE_L3_VIEW as
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, L3_SRC_ADDR, L3_DEST_ADDR, L3_PROTOCOL,
L4_PROTOCOL, TCP_FLAGS, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_MINUTE_L3
where SLNUM <= (select MAX_SLNUM from SFLOW_MINUTE_L3_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only)
union all
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, L3_SRC_ADDR, L3_DEST_ADDR, L3_PROTOCOL,
L4_PROTOCOL, TCP_FLAGS, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_STAGING
where SLNUM >= (select MIN_SLNUM from SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only);

SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC_VIEW
create or replace view SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC_VIEW as
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_MAC, DEST_MAC, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES,
BYTES
from SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC
where SLNUM <= (select MAX_SLNUM from SFLOW_MINUTE_MAC_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only)
union all
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_MAC, DEST_MAC, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES,
BYTES
from SFLOW_STAGING
where SLNUM >= (select MIN_SLNUM from SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only);

SCOM_EE_MONITOR_INFO
This view provides combined ee_monitor, ee_monitor_stats, device_port and device_node tables to
get the EE Monitor information for SCOM plug-in.
create or replace view SCOM_EE_MONITOR_INFO as

1646

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

select distinct
EE_MONITOR.NAME,
EE_MONITOR.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR.SOURCE_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR.DEST_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.TX,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.RX,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.CRCERRORS,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.CREATION_TIME,
SOURCE_PORT.PORT_ID as SID,
DEST_PORT.PORT_ID as DID,
SOURCE_NODE.WWN as SOURCE_DEVICE_WWN,
SOURCE_PORT.WWN as SOURCE_PORT_WWN,
DEST_NODE.WWN as DEST_DEVICE_WWN,
DEST_PORT.WWN as DEST_PORT_WWN,
SOURCE_NODE.FABRIC_ID as SOURCE_FABRIC_ID,
DEST_NODE.FABRIC_ID as DEST_FABRIC_ID,
SOURCE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_DOMAIN_ID,
DEST_PORT.DOMAIN_ID as DEST_SWITCH_DOMAIN_ID
from
DEVICE_PORT as SOURCE_PORT,
DEVICE_PORT as DEST_PORT,
DEVICE_NODE as DEST_NODE,
DEVICE_NODE as SOURCE_NODE,
EE_MONITOR,
EE_MONITOR_STATS
where
SOURCE_PORT.ID = EE_MONITOR.SOURCE_PORT_ID
and EE_MONITOR.ID = EE_MONITOR_STATS.EE_MONITOR_ID
and SOURCE_PORT.NODE_ID = SOURCE_NODE.ID
and DEST_PORT.ID = EE_MONITOR.DEST_PORT_ID
and DEST_PORT.NODE_ID = DEST_NODE.ID
and EE_MONITOR_STATS.CREATION_TIME in (
select MAX(CREATION_TIME)
from EE_MONITOR_STATS
group by EE_MONITOR_ID);

SENSOR_INFO
create or replace view SENSOR_INFO as
select
SENSOR.ID,
SENSOR.CORE_SWITCH_ID,
SENSOR.SENSOR_ID,
SENSOR.CURRENT_READING,
SENSOR.TYPE,
SENSOR.SUB_TYPE,
SENSOR.DESCRIPTION,
SENSOR.STATUS,
SENSOR.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
SENSOR.PART_NUMBER,
SENSOR.SERIAL_NUMBER,
SENSOR.VERSION,
SENSOR.CREATION_TIME,
SENSOR.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
SENSOR.FRU_TYPE,
SENSOR.UNIT_NUMBER,
SENSOR.STATE,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1647

I

Views

VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_MODE as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED
from
SENSOR,
CORE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
SENSOR.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID and
SENSOR.CORE_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID;

SMART_CARD_USAGE_INFO
create or replace view SMART_CARD_USAGE_INFO as
select
SC.ID SMART_CARD_ID,
SC.CARD_TYPE,
SC.CARD_INFO,
SC.CARDCN_ID,
SC.FIRST_NAME,
SC.LAST_NAME,
SC.NOTES,
SC.CREATION_TIME,
-1 ENGINE_ID,
EG.ID ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID,
EG.NAME GROUP_NAME,
-1 CARD_POSITION,
-1 CRYPTO_SWITCH_ID,
-1 SLOT_NUMBER
from
SMART_CARD SC,
ENCRYPTION_GROUP EG,
QUORUM_CARD_GROUP_MAPPING QCGM
where
QCGM.SMART_CARD_ID = SC.ID
and EG.ID = QCGM.ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID
and SC.CARD_TYPE = 0
union
select
SC.ID SMART_CARD_ID,
SC.CARD_TYPE,
SC.CARD_INFO,
SC.CARDCN_ID,
SC.FIRST_NAME,
SC.LAST_NAME,
SC.NOTES,
SC.CREATION_TIME,
-1 ENGINE_ID,
EG.ID ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID,
EG.NAME GROUP_NAME,
RCGM.POSITION_ CARD_POSITION,
-1 CRYPTO_SWITCH_ID,
-1 SLOT_NUMBER
from
SMART_CARD SC,
ENCRYPTION_GROUP EG,
RECOVERY_CARD_GROUP_MAPPING RCGM
where
SC.ID = RCGM.SMART_CARD_ID

1648

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

and EG.ID = RCGM.ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID
and SC.CARD_TYPE = 1
union
select
SC.ID SMART_CARD_ID,
SC.CARD_TYPE,
SC.CARD_INFO,
SC.CARDCN_ID,
SC.FIRST_NAME,
SC.LAST_NAME,
SC.NOTES,
SC.CREATION_TIME,
EE.ID ENGINE_ID,
-1 ENCRYPTION_GROUP_ID,
'' GROUP_NAME,
-1 CARD_POSITION,
EE.SWITCH_ID CRYPTO_SWITCH_ID,
EE.SLOT_NUMBER SLOT_NUMBER
from
SMART_CARD SC,
ENCRYPTION_ENGINE EE,
SYSTEM_CARD_ENGINE_MAPPING SCEM
where
SC.ID = SCEM.SMART_CARD_ID
and EE.ID = SCEM.ENCRYPTION_ENGINE_ID
and SC.CARD_TYPE = 2;

SWITCH_CONFIG_INFO
create or replace view SWITCH_CONFIG_INFO as
select
SWITCH_CONFIG.ID,
SWITCH_CONFIG.NAME,
SWITCH_CONFIG.SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_CONFIG.CORE_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_CONFIG.BACKUP_DATE_TIME,
SWITCH_CONFIG.CONFIG_DATA,
SWITCH_CONFIG.CEE_CONFIG_DATA,
SWITCH_CONFIG.KEEP_COPY,
SWITCH_CONFIG.CREATED_BY,
SWITCH_CONFIG.COMMENTS,
SWITCH_CONFIG.CONFIG_TYPE,
SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL.IP_ADDRESS,
SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL.WWN,
SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL.PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL.MODEL_NUMBER as SWITCH_MODEL_NUMBER
from
SWITCH_CONFIG,
SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL
where
SWITCH_CONFIG.ID= SWITCH_CONFIG_DETAIL.SWITCH_CONFIG_ID;

SWITCH_DETAILS_INFO
CREATE VIEW switch_details_info AS
select
CORE_SWITCH.ID as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_NAME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1649

I

Views

CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS as PHYSICAL_OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH.MAX_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.VENDOR,
CORE_SWITCH.REACHABLE,
CORE_SWITCH.UNREACHABLE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH.SYSLOG_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.SNMP_REGISTERED,
CORE_SWITCH.USER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGING_SERVER_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.CREATION_TIME as CS_CREATION_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.LAST_UPDATE_TIME as CS_LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.NUM_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.VF_SUPPORTED,
CORE_SWITCH.CALL_HOME_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as CORE_MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.NAT_PRIVATE_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.ALTERNATE_IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.MAC_ADDRESS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.AD_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCS_ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CREATION_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PASSWORD,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS_REASON,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FABRIC_IDID_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LOGICAL_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FMS_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DYNAMIC_LOAD_SHARING,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PORT_BASED_ROUTING,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.IN_ORDER_DELIVERY,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INSISTENT_DID_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCR_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_PORT_MEMBERSHIP_CHANGE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_CIRCUIT_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_FCIP_TUNNELS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_FCIP_CIRCUITS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_LICENSED,

1650

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER as VS_RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CLUSTER_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VCS_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CLUSTER_TYPE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.RNID_TAG,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAPS_ENABLED_ACTIONS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FEATURES_ENABLED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FABRIC_STATUS,
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID,
FABRIC_MEMBER.TRUSTED,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ETHERNET_MASK,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_MASK,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_IP,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FC_CERTIFICATE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SW_LICENSE_ID,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SUPPLIER_SERIAL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PART_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CHECK_BEACON,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.TIMEZONE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAX_PORT,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CHASSIS_SERVICE_TAG,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.BAY_ID,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.TYPE_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MODEL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MANUFACTURER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PLANT_OF_MANUFACTURER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SWITCH_SERIAL_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ACT_CP_PRI_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.ACT_CP_SEC_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.STBY_CP_PRI_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.STBY_CP_SEC_FW_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.TYPE as DETAILS_TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.EGM_CAPABLE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SUB_TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.PARTITION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAX_NUM_OF_BLADES,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.VENDOR_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.VENDOR_PART_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CONTACT,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.LOCATION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.DESCRIPTION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.RNID_SEQUENCE_NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FIRMWARE_VERSION as CSD_FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CHASSIS_PACKAGE_TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.IP_ADDRESS_PREFIX,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.DOMAIN_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FRAME_LOG_SIZE,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.FRAME_LOG_ENABLED,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MAPS_ENABLED
from
CORE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
FABRIC_MEMBER,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1651

I

Views

where
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID;

SWITCH_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO
create or replace view SWITCH_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO as
select
L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_VALUE,
L2_NEIGHBOR.INTERFACE_ID,
INTERFACE.NAME as INTERFACE_NAME,
DEVICE.SYS_NAME as DEVICE_NAME,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS, DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
from
L2_NEIGHBOR,
INTERFACE,
DEVICE
where
L2_NEIGHBOR.LLDP_REM_CHASSIS_ID_SUBTYPE = 4
and L2_NEIGHBOR.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
and INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = DEVICE.DEVICE_ID;

SWITCH_PORT_INFO
CREATE VIEW switch_port_info AS
select
SWITCH_PORT.ID,
SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_INDEX,
SWITCH_PORT.AREA_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_MOD,
SWITCH_PORT.TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.FULL_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.HEALTH,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS_MESSAGE,
SWITCH_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT.LOCKED_PORT_TYPE,
SWITCH_PORT.CATEGORY,
SWITCH_PORT.PROTOCOL,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEEDS_SUPPORTED,
SWITCH_PORT.MAX_PORT_SPEED,
SWITCH_PORT.DESIRED_CREDITS,
SWITCH_PORT.BUFFER_ALLOCATED,
SWITCH_PORT.ESTIMATED_DISTANCE,
SWITCH_PORT.ACTUAL_DISTANCE,
SWITCH_PORT.LONG_DISTANCE_SETTING,
SWITCH_PORT.DEGRADED_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN,

1652

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SWITCH_PORT.REMOTE_PORT_WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.LICENSED,
SWITCH_PORT.SWAPPED,
SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED,
SWITCH_PORT.TRUNK_MASTER,
SWITCH_PORT.PERSISTENT_DISABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.FICON_SUPPORTED,
SWITCH_PORT.BLOCKED,
SWITCH_PORT.PROHIBIT_PORT_NUMBERS,
SWITCH_PORT.PROHIBIT_PORT_COUNT,
SWITCH_PORT.NPIV,
SWITCH_PORT.NPIV_CAPABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.NPIV_ENABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.FC_FAST_WRITE_ENABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.ISL_RRDY_ENABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.RATE_LIMIT_CAPABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.RATE_LIMITED,
SWITCH_PORT.QOS_CAPABLE,
SWITCH_PORT.QOS_ENABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.TUNNEL_CONFIGURED,
SWITCH_PORT.FCIP_TUNNEL_UP,
SWITCH_PORT.FCR_FABRIC_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.FCR_INTEROP_MODE,
SWITCH_PORT.CALCULATED_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_DEFINED_VALUE1,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_DEFINED_VALUE2,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_DEFINED_VALUE3,
SWITCH_PORT.KIND,
SWITCH_PORT.STATE,
SWITCH_PORT.PREVIOUS_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.LAST_UPDATE,
SWITCH_PORT.OCCUPIED,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_BIT_MASK,
SWITCH_PORT.LOGICAL_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.DEFAULT_AREA_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.LOGICAL_PORT_WWN,
SWITCH_PORT.LATENCY_DETECT_SUPPORTED,
SWITCH_PORT.EPORT_DISABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_NEGOTIATED,
SWITCH_PORT.IDENTIFIER,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_CAPABILITIES,
SWITCH_PORT.FAKE_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT.XISL_PORT_LIST,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_COMMISSION_STATE,
SWITCH_PORT.FEATURES_ENABLED,
SWITCH_PORT.FEATURES_ACTIVE,
SWITCH_PORT.DISABLED_REASON_CODE,
SWITCH_PORT.DISABLED_REASON,
SWITCH_PORT.FENCED,
SWITCH_PORT.MASTER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_TYPE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ROLE as SWITCH_ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID as DOMAIN_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INTEROP_MODE as INTEROP_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE as SWITCH_TYPE,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1653

I

Views

CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION as FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL as SWITCH_MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MODEL_NUMBER as SWITCH_MODEL_NUMBER
FROM SWITCH_PORT, VIRTUAL_SWITCH, CORE_SWITCH
LEFT JOIN CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS
ON CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
where SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
AND VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID;

SWITCH_SNMP_INFO
create or replace view SWITCH_SNMP_INFO as
select
CORE_SWITCH.ID as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_ID,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS as PHYSICAL_OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH.MAX_VIRTUAL_SWITCHES,
CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.VENDOR,
CORE_SWITCH.REACHABLE,
CORE_SWITCH.UNREACHABLE_TIME,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CONTACT,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.LOCATION,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.DESCRIPTION,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.SWITCH_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.AD_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCIP_CAPABLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.FCS_ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.BASE_SWITCH,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MAX_ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CREATION_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.PASSWORD,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.STATUS_REASON,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID,
FABRIC_MEMBER.TRUSTED,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING,
FABRIC_MEMBER.MISSING_TIME,

1654

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.PORT_NUMBER, (select SNMP_PROFILE.PORT_NUMBER from
SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_PORT_NUMBER,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.RETRY_COUNT, (select SNMP_PROFILE.RETRY_COUNT from
SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_RETRY_COUNT,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.TIMEOUT, (select SNMP_PROFILE.TIMEOUT from
SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_TIMEOUT,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.VERSION, (select SNMP_PROFILE.VERSION from
SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_VERSION,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.READ_COMMUNITY_STRING, (select
SNMP_PROFILE.READ_COMMUNITY_STRING from SNMP_PROFILE where
SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_READ_COMMUNITY_STRING,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING, (select
SNMP_PROFILE.WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING from SNMP_PROFILE where
SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_WRITE_COMMUNITY_STRING,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.USER_NAME, (select SNMP_PROFILE.USER_NAME from
SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_USER_NAME,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.CONTEXT_NAME, (select SNMP_PROFILE.CONTEXT_NAME
from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_CONTEXT_NAME,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.AUTH_PROTOCOL, (select SNMP_PROFILE.AUTH_PROTOCOL
from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_AUTH_PROTOCOL,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.AUTH_PASSWORD, (select SNMP_PROFILE.AUTH_PASSWORD
from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_AUTH_PASSWORD,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.PRIV_PROTOCOL, (select SNMP_PROFILE.PRIV_PROTOCOL
from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_PRIV_PROTOCOL,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.PRIV_PASSWORD, (select SNMP_PROFILE.PRIV_PASSWORD
from SNMP_PROFILE where SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_PRIV_PASSWORD,
coalesce(SNMP_CREDENTIALS.SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED, (select
SNMP_PROFILE.SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED from SNMP_PROFILE where
SNMP_PROFILE.NAME='default')) as SNMP_INFORMS_ENABLED
from
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
left outer join CORE_SWITCH
on VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
left outer join CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS
on CORE_SWITCH.ID = CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CORE_SWITCH_ID
left outer join FABRIC_MEMBER
on FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
left outer join SNMP_CREDENTIALS
on VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = SNMP_CREDENTIALS.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID;

TIME_SERIES_DATA_INFO
CREATE VIEW time_series_data_info AS
( ( ( ( ( (
select * from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.TARGET_TYPE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_30MIN)
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.TARGET_TYPE,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1655

I

Views

TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_2HOUR)
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.TARGET_TYPE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_1_1DAY)
union all
select * from TIME_SERIES_DATA_2)
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.TARGET_TYPE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_30MIN)
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.TARGET_TYPE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_2HOUR)
union all
select TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.TIME_IN_SECONDS,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.TARGET_TYPE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.MEASURE_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.TARGET_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.COLLECTOR_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.MEASURE_INDEX,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.ME_ID,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.VALUE,
TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY.SUM_VALUE
from TIME_SERIES_DATA_2_1DAY

TIME_SERIES_DATA_VIEW
create or replace view TIME_SERIES_DATA_VIEW as

1656

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

(

SELECT de.device_id, cast (de.ip_address as varchar(255)) AS device_ip,
tsd.target_type, de.device_id AS target_id,
de.sys_name AS target_name,
measure.measure_type AS collectible_type,
tsd.measure_id AS collectible_id, tsd.collector_id,
pdc.name AS collector_name,
(measure.name::text || '.'::text) || tsd.measure_index::text
AS collectible_name,
measure.detail AS collectible_detail, tsd.value,
tsd.time_in_seconds, tsd.measure_index
FROM time_series_data_info tsd
JOIN device de ON tsd.target_id = de.device_id
JOIN pm_data_collector pdc ON pdc.id = tsd.collector_id
JOIN measure ON measure.id = tsd.measure_id
WHERE tsd.target_type = 0 OR tsd.target_type = 18
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, cast (de.ip_address as varchar(255)) AS
device_ip,
tsd.target_type, ifs.interface_id AS target_id,
ifs.if_name AS target_name,
measure.measure_type AS collectible_type,
tsd.measure_id AS collectible_id, tsd.collector_id,
pm_data_collector.name AS collector_name,
(measure.name::text || '.'::text) || tsd.measure_index::text
AS collectible_name,
measure.detail AS collectible_detail, tsd.value,
tsd.time_in_seconds, tsd.measure_index
FROM time_series_data_info tsd
JOIN interface ifs ON (tsd.target_type = 1 OR tsd.target_type = 2 OR
tsd.target_type =15) AND tsd.target_id = ifs.interface_id
JOIN device de ON ifs.device_id = de.device_id
JOIN pm_data_collector ON pm_data_collector.id = tsd.collector_id
JOIN measure ON measure.id = tsd.measure_id)
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, cast (de.ip_address as varchar(255)) AS device_ip,
tsd.target_type,
sp.id AS target_id, sp.name AS target_name,
measure.measure_type AS collectible_type,
tsd.measure_id AS collectible_id, tsd.collector_id,
pm_data_collector.name AS collector_name,
(measure.name::text || '.'::text) || tsd.measure_index::text AS
collectible_name,
measure.detail AS collectible_detail, tsd.value,
tsd.time_in_seconds, tsd.measure_index
FROM time_series_data_info tsd
JOIN switch_port sp ON tsd.target_type = 4 AND tsd.target_id = sp.id
JOIN virtual_switch vs ON sp.virtual_switch_id = vs.id
JOIN device de ON vs.managed_element_id = de.managed_element_id
JOIN pm_data_collector ON pm_data_collector.id = tsd.collector_id
JOIN measure ON measure.id = tsd.measure_id
UNION ALL
SELECT 0 as device_id, cast (vs.ip_address as varchar(255)) AS device_ip,
tsd.target_type,
sp.id AS target_id, sp.name AS target_name,
measure.measure_type AS collectible_type,
tsd.measure_id AS collectible_id, tsd.collector_id,
pm_data_collector.name AS collector_name,
(measure.name::text || '.'::text) || tsd.measure_index::text AS
collectible_name,
measure.detail AS collectible_detail, tsd.value,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1657

I

Views

tsd.time_in_seconds, tsd.measure_index
FROM time_series_data_info tsd
JOIN switch_port sp ON (tsd.target_type = 4 OR tsd.target_type = 5 OR
tsd.target_type = 6) AND tsd.target_id = sp.id
JOIN switch_info vs ON sp.virtual_switch_id = vs.id
JOIN pm_data_collector ON pm_data_collector.id = tsd.collector_id
JOIN measure ON measure.id = tsd.measure_id
UNION ALL
SELECT 0 as device_id, cast (de.ip_address as varchar(255)) AS device_ip,
tsd.target_type, de.id AS target_id,
cast (de.physical_switch_name as text) AS target_name,
measure.measure_type AS collectible_type,
tsd.measure_id AS collectible_id, tsd.collector_id,
pdc.name AS collector_name,
(measure.name::text || '.'::text) || tsd.measure_index::text
AS collectible_name,
measure.detail AS collectible_detail, tsd.value,
tsd.time_in_seconds, tsd.measure_index
FROM time_series_data_info tsd
JOIN switch_info de ON tsd.target_id = de.id
JOIN pm_data_collector pdc ON pdc.id = tsd.collector_id
JOIN measure ON measure.id = tsd.measure_id
WHERE tsd.target_type = 3;

TRILL_INFO
create or replace view TRILL_INFO as
select distinct
TRILL.ID,
VCS_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as VCS_DEVICE_ID,
TRILL.CLUSTER_ME_ID,
TRILL.COST,
TRILL.TYPE as LINK_TYPE,
TRILL.MISSING,
TRILL.TRUNKED,
TRILL.SOURCE_DOMAIN_ID,
TRILL.SOURCE_PORT_NUMBER,
TRILL.SOURCE_PORT_NAME as SOURCE_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
TRILL.SOURCE_ME_ID,
SOURCE_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID AS SOURCE_DEVICE_ID,
TRILL.DEST_DOMAIN_ID,
TRILL.DEST_PORT_NUMBER,
TRILL.DEST_PORT_NAME as DEST_SWITCH_PORT_NAME,
TRILL.DEST_ME_ID,
DEST_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID AS DEST_DEVICE_ID
from
TRILL,
device VCS_DEVICE,
device SOURCE_DEVICE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
device DEST_DEVICE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
SOURCE_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL.SOURCE_ME_ID and
DEST_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL.DEST_ME_ID and
VCS_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL.CLUSTER_ME_ID and
SOURCE_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL.SOURCE_ME_ID and
DEST_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL.DEST_ME_ID;

1658

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

TRILL_TRUNK_INFO
create or replace view TRILL_TRUNK_INFO as
select
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID,
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID,
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.MASTER_PORT_NUMBER,
TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER as MEMBER_PORT_NUMBER,
MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID,
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID,
CLUSTER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as CLUSTER_DEVICE_ID
from
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP
inner join
TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER on
TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.GROUP_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID
inner join
DEVICE as MEMBER_DEVICE on
MEMBER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID
left outer join
INTERFACE on
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID and
INTERFACE.IDENTIFIER = TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER
left outer join
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER on
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID
left outer join
DEVICE as CLUSTER_DEVICE on
CLUSTER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID;

USER_ROLE_RESOURCE_INFO
create or replace view USER_ROLE_RESOURCE_INFO as
select
RESOURCE_GROUP.ID RESOURCE_GROUP_ID,
RESOURCE_GROUP.NAME RESOURCE_GROUP_NAME,
ROLE.ID ROLE_ID,
ROLE.NAME ROLE_NAME,
USER_.NAME USER_NAME
from
USER_,
RESOURCE_GROUP,
ROLE,
USER_RESOURCE_MAP,
USER_ROLE_MAP
where
USER_ROLE_MAP.USER_NAME = USER_.NAME
and USER_ROLE_MAP.ROLE_ID = ROLE.ID
and USER_RESOURCE_MAP.RESOURCE_GROUP_ID = RESOURCE_GROUP.ID
and USER_RESOURCE_MAP.USER_NAME = USER_.NAME;

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_INFO
create or replace view VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT_INFO as
select
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1659

I

Views

VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_WWN,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_SPEED,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_TYPE,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.ENABLED,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.STATUS,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.TRUNK_INDEX,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.NAME,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.VLAN_ID,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.DEVICE_COUNT,
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.PEER_MAC,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ROLE as SWITCH_ROLE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID as VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.DOMAIN_ID as DOMAIN_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.INTEROP_MODE as INTEROP_MODE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
CORE_SWITCH.TYPE as SWITCH_TYPE,
CORE_SWITCH.FIRMWARE_VERSION as FIRMWARE_VERSION,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
CORE_SWITCH.MODEL as SWITCH_MODEL,
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.MODEL_NUMBER as SWITCH_MODEL_NUMBER
from
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT, CORE_SWITCH, VIRTUAL_SWITCH, CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS
where
VIRTUAL_FCOE_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID and
CORE_SWITCH_DETAILS.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID;

VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS_INFO as
select distinct
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SLOT_NUMBER,
coalesce(CS1.IP_ADDRESS, CS2.IP_ADDRESS, UDDD.IP_ADDRESS) as IP_ADDRESS,
coalesce(VS1.NAME, VS2.NAME, UDDD.NAME) as SWITCH_NAME,
coalesce(VS1.WWN, VS2.WWN) as SWITCH_WWN,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_NODE_WWN,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_PORT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.STATUS,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.TYPE,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.USER_VPWWN,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AUTO_VPWWN,
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.DEVICE_PORT_WWN,
coalesce(SP1.ID, SP2.ID) as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
coalesce(SP1.WWN, SP2.WWN) as PORT_WWN,
coalesce(SP1.TYPE, SP2.TYPE) AS PORT_TYPE,
coalesce(SP1.NAME, SP2.NAME) as PORT_NAME
from
VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS
left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH VS1
on (VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_PORT_NUMBER = -1
and VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SWITCH_ID = VS1.ID)

1660

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH VS2
on VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_NODE_WWN = VS2.WWN
left outer join CORE_SWITCH CS1
on VS1.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CS1.ID
left outer join CORE_SWITCH CS2
on VS2.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CS2.ID
left outer join SWITCH_PORT SP1
on (SP1.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID=VS1.ID
and VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SLOT_NUMBER = SP1.SLOT_NUMBER
and VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.SWITCH_PORT_NUMBER = SP1.PORT_NUMBER
and SP1.TYPE NOT IN ('GigE-Port','TE-Port'))
left outer join SWITCH_PORT SP2
on (SP2.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID=VS2.ID
and VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_PORT_NUMBER = SP2.PORT_NUMBER
and SP2.TYPE NOT IN ('GigE-Port','TE-Port'))
left outer join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL UDDD
on VIRTUAL_PORT_WWN_DETAILS.AG_NODE_WWN = UDDD.WWN;

VM_ADDRESS_INFO
create or replace view VM_ADDRESS_INFO AS
select
DECODE(VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS::TEXT, 'HEX'::TEXT) AS
MAC_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME AS VM_NAME,
DECODE(VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.IP_ADDRESS::TEXT, 'HEX'::TEXT) AS VM_ADDRESS,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME AS VM_HOST_NAME,
DECODE(VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.IP_ADDRESS::TEXT, 'HEX'::TEXT) AS VM_HOST_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID AS VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID AS VM_HOST_ID
FROM
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER
WHERE
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID
AND VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID;

VLAN_INT_CLASSIFIER_INFO
CREATE VIEW vlan_int_classifier_info AS
select VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID,
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.VLAN_DB_ID,
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.INTERFACE_ID,
VLAN_INT_C_TAG_RELATION.C_TAG_ID,
MAC_GROUP.NAME,
MAC_GROUP.MAC_GROUP_ID,
MAC_GROUP.TYPE,
MAC_GROUP_MEMBER.MAC_ADDRESS,
MAC_GROUP_MEMBER.MASK,
MAC_GROUP.ID AS MAC_GROUP_DB_ID,
DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
from INTERFACE ,DEVICE ,PORT_VLAN
left outer join VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION on
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.VLAN_DB_ID = PORT_VLAN.VLAN_DB_ID

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1661

I

Views

left outer join VLAN_INT_MAC_GROUP_RELATION TEMP_MAC_RELATION on
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID =
TEMP_MAC_RELATION.VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID
left outer join VLAN_INT_C_TAG_RELATION on
VLAN_INT_C_TAG_RELATION.VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID =
VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION_ID
left outer join MAC_GROUP on TEMP_MAC_RELATION.MAC_GROUP_DB_ID =
MAC_GROUP.ID
left outer join MAC_GROUP_MEMBER on MAC_GROUP_MEMBER.MAC_GROUP_DB_ID =
MAC_GROUP.ID
left outer join DEVICE_MAC_GROUP_MAPPING on
DEVICE_MAC_GROUP_MAPPING.MAC_GROUP_DB_ID = MAC_GROUP.ID
where VLAN_INTERFACE_RELATION.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID and
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = DEVICE.DEVICE_ID;

VM_CONNECTIVITY_INFO
This view combines fabric and VM information to derive end to end connectivity information for the
VM.
create or replace view VM_CONNECTIVITY_INFO as
select
VM_VCENTER.HOST AS VCENTER_HOST,
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID,
device_port.id as device_port_id,
DEVICE_PORT.NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME AS CORE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.ID AS VCENTER_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID AS HOST_DB_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS AS HYPERVISOR_HOST,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.IP_ADDRESS AS VM_IP_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOSTNAME AS VM_HOST_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.UUID AS VM_UUID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME AS VM_NAME,
VM_PATH.NAME AS PATH_NAME,
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT AS ADAPTER_PORT_WWN,
VM_PATH.TARGET_PORT AS TARGET_PORT_WWN,
VM_STORAGE.NAME AS LUN_CAN_NAME,
VM_PATH.FS_TYPE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID AS HOST_ME_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS AS HOST_IP_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.HOST_NAME AS HYPERVISOR_HOST_NAME,
FABRIC.NAME AS FABRIC_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME AS VIRTUAL_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS AS SWITCH_PORT_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.NAME AS ADAPTER_PORT_NAME,
VM_PATH.FABRIC_ID,
VM_PATH.VM_PORT_WWN,
VM_STORAGE.MODEL,
VM_STORAGE.VENDOR
from

1662

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

DEVICE_PORT
left join USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL
on DEVICE_PORT.WWN = USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.WWN,
CORE_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
DEVICE_NODE,
FABRIC,
VM_STORAGE,
VM_PATH,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_VCENTER,
VM_DATA_CENTER,
VM_HOST
where
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT = DEVICE_PORT.WWN
and VM_PATH.VM_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
and VM_PATH.STORAGE_ID = VM_STORAGE.ID
and VM_STORAGE.HOST_ID = DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID
and VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID = VM_DATA_CENTER.ID
and VM_DATA_CENTER.VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID
and DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN = SWITCH_PORT.WWN
and SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID
and DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID
union all
select
VM_VCENTER.HOST AS VCENTER_HOST,
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID,
device_port.id as device_port_id,
DEVICE_PORT.NUMBER,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as CORE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.ID as VCENTER_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID AS HOST_DB_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS as HYPERVISOR_HOST,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.IP_ADDRESS AS VM_IP_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOSTNAME AS VM_HOST_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.UUID as VM_UUID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
VM_PATH.NAME as PATH_NAME,
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT as ADAPTER_PORT_WWN,
VM_PATH.TARGET_PORT as TARGET_PORT_WWN,
VM_STORAGE.NAME as LUN_CAN_NAME,
VM_PATH.FS_TYPE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID AS HOST_ME_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS AS HOST_IP_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.HOST_NAME AS HYPERVISOR_HOST_NAME,
FABRIC.NAME as FABRIC_NAME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VIRTUAL_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1663

I

Views

SWITCH_PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.NAME as ADAPTER_PORT_NAME,
VM_PATH.FABRIC_ID,
VM_PATH.VM_PORT_WWN,
VM_STORAGE.MODEL,
VM_STORAGE.VENDOR
from
DEVICE_PORT
LEFT JOIN USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL
on DEVICE_PORT.WWN = USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.WWN,
CORE_SWITCH,
SWITCH_PORT,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
DEVICE_NODE,
FABRIC,
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP,
GIGE_PORT,
VM_STORAGE,
VM_PATH,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_VCENTER,
VM_DATA_CENTER,
VM_HOST
where
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT = DEVICE_PORT.WWN
and VM_PATH.VM_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
and VM_PATH.STORAGE_ID = VM_STORAGE.ID
and VM_STORAGE.HOST_ID = DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID
and VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID = VM_DATA_CENTER.ID
and VM_DATA_CENTER.VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID
and DEVICE_PORT.ID = DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_ID
and DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.MAC_ADDRESS::TEXT =
GIGE_PORT.REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS::TEXT
and GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID
and SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and DEVICE_PORT.NODE_ID = DEVICE_NODE.ID
and DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID;
comment on view VM_CONNECTIVITY_INFO is
'Combine fabric and VM info to derive end to end connectivity information for the
VM';

VM_NETWORK_CONNECTIVITY_INFO
CREATE VIEW vm_network_connectivity_info AS
select VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.ID as VNIC_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS,VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.IP_ADDRESS as
VM_IP_ADDRESS, VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.DISPLAY_LABEL,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.PORT_GROUP_NAME, VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME, VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID as
HOST_ID, VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME,

1664

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VM_HOST.CLUSTER_NAME, VM_DATA_CENTER.ID as DATA_CENTER_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID as STD_PORT_GROUP_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_DV_PORT_ID as DV_PORT_ID,
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.NAME as UPLINK_PORT_GROUP_NAME,
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VM_SWITCH_NAME, VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.MAC_ADDRESS as
PNIC_MAC,
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID, INTERFACE.NAME as INTERFACE_NAME,
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID as SWITCH_ID, DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS as SWITCH_IP, DEVICE.SYS_NAME
as SWITCH_NAME,
DEVICE.OPER_STATUS as SWITCH_STATUS, CLUSTER_DEVICE.VCS_LICENSED,
PORT_PROFILE.NAME as PORT_PROFILE_NAME, PROFILE_DOMAINS.DOMAIN_NAMES as
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_NAMES, PROFILE_VLAN_MAP.VLAN as PORT_PROFILE_VLAN,
VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS.VLAN_IDS as PORT_GROUP_VLAN
from VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE, VM_HOST, VM_DATA_CENTER, VM_VCENTER_MEMBER,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER
join VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP on
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID =
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.ID
left join VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH on VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID =
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL__SWITCH_ID
left join VM_PHYSICAL_NIC on VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID =
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID join VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY on
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.VM_PHYSICAL_NIC_ID = VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.ID
left join INTERFACE on INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID =
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID
left join DEVICE on DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID
left join VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER on VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID =
DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
left join DEVICE as CLUSTER_DEVICE on CLUSTER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID =
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID
left join PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP on PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.INTERFACE_ID =
INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
left join PORT_PROFILE on PORT_PROFILE.ID = PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.PROFILE_ID
left join (select PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_ID,
array_to_string(array_agg(PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN.NAME), ',') DOMAIN_NAMES from
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP join PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN on
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_DOMAIN_ID = PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN.ID group by
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_ID) PROFILE_DOMAINS on PROFILE_DOMAINS.PROFILE_ID
= PORT_PROFILE.ID
left join (select PROFILE_ID, array_agg(VLANID)::varchar as VLAN from
PORT_PROFILE_VLAN_MAP group by PROFILE_ID) PROFILE_VLAN_MAP on
PROFILE_VLAN_MAP.PROFILE_ID = PORT_PROFILE.ID
left join VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS on VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID
= VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID
where VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID and
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID and
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID and
VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID = VM_DATA_CENTER.ID
union
select VNIC_DV_PORT.VNIC_ID as VNIC_ID,
VNIC_DV_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_IP_ADDRESS,VNIC_DV_PORT.DISPLAY_LABEL,
VNIC_DV_PORT.PORT_GROUP_NAME, VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_ID,
VNIC_DV_PORT.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME, VNIC_DV_PORT.HOST_ID, VNIC_DV_PORT.HOST_NAME,
VNIC_DV_PORT.HOST_NAME, VNIC_DV_PORT.DATA_CENTER_ID,
VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID as STD_PORT_GROUP_ID,
VNIC_DV_PORT.DV_PORT_ID, PNIC_DV_PORT.PORT_GROUP_NAME as UPLINK_PORT_GROUP_NAME,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1665

I

Views

VNIC_DV_PORT.SWITCH_NAME as VM_SWITCH_NAME, PNIC_DV_PORT.PNIC_MAC,
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID, INTERFACE.NAME as INTERFACE_NAME,
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID as SWITCH_ID, DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS as SWITCH_IP, DEVICE.SYS_NAME
as SWITCH_NAME, DEVICE.OPER_STATUS as SWITCH_STATUS, CLUSTER_DEVICE.VCS_LICENSED,
PORT_PROFILE.NAME as PORT_PROFILE_NAME,
PROFILE_DOMAINS.DOMAIN_NAMES as PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_NAMES, PROFILE_VLAN_MAP.VLAN
as PORT_PROFILE_VLAN, VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS.VLAN_IDS as PORT_GROUP_VLAN
from
(select VNIC.ID as VNIC_ID, VNIC.MAC_ADDRESS,VNIC.IP_ADDRESS as VM_IP_ADDRESS,
VNIC.DISPLAY_LABEL, VNIC.PORT_GROUP_NAME, VNIC.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME, VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID as
HOST_ID, VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME, VM_HOST.CLUSTER_NAME, VM_DATA_CENTER.ID as
DATA_CENTER_ID,
DVPORT.ID as DV_PORT_ID, DVPORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID, VM_DV_SWITCH.NAME as
SWITCH_NAME
from VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE, VM_VCENTER_MEMBER, VM_HOST, VM_DATA_CENTER,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER VNIC, VM_DV_PORT DVPORT, VM_DV_SWITCH
where VNIC.VM_DV_PORT_ID = DVPORT.ID and VNIC.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID =
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID and
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID and
DVPORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID = VM_DV_SWITCH.ID and VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID =
VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID AND
VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID = VM_DATA_CENTER.ID) as VNIC_DV_PORT
left join VM_DV_PORT on VM_DV_PORT.ID = VNIC_DV_PORT.DV_PORT_ID
left join VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS on VM_NETWORK_SETTINGS.VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_ID =
VM_DV_PORT.VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_ID,
(select DVPORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID, DVPORTGROUP.ID as DV_PORT_GROUP_ID,
DVPORTGROUP.NAME as PORT_GROUP_NAME, PNIC.ID as PNIC_ID, PNIC.MAC_ADDRESS as
PNIC_MAC
from VM_PHYSICAL_NIC PNIC, VM_DV_PORT DVPORT, VM_DV_PORT_GROUP DVPORTGROUP
where PNIC.VM_DV_PORT_ID = DVPORT.ID and DVPORT.VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_ID =
DVPORTGROUP.ID) as PNIC_DV_PORT
join VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY on
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.VM_PHYSICAL_NIC_ID = PNIC_DV_PORT.PNIC_ID
left join INTERFACE on INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID =
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID
left join DEVICE on DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID
left join VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER on VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID =
DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
left join DEVICE as CLUSTER_DEVICE on CLUSTER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID =
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID
left join PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP on PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.INTERFACE_ID =
INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
left join PORT_PROFILE on PORT_PROFILE.ID = PORT_PROFILE_INTERFACE_MAP.PROFILE_ID
left join (select PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_ID,
array_to_string(array_agg(PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN.NAME), ',') DOMAIN_NAMES from
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP join PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN on
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_DOMAIN_ID = PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN.ID group by
PORT_PROFILE_DOMAIN_MAP.PROFILE_ID) PROFILE_DOMAINS on PROFILE_DOMAINS.PROFILE_ID
= PORT_PROFILE.ID
left join (select PROFILE_ID, array_agg(VLANID)::varchar as VLAN from
PORT_PROFILE_VLAN_MAP group by PROFILE_ID) PROFILE_VLAN_MAP on
PROFILE_VLAN_MAP.PROFILE_ID = PORT_PROFILE.ID
where VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID = PNIC_DV_PORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID;

1666

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS_INFO
create or replace view VM_DATASTORE_DETAILS_INFO as
select vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.virtual_machine_id,
vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.vm_datastore_details_id,
vm_datastore_details.datacenter_id,
vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.provisioned_storage,
vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.not_shared_storage,
vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.used_storage,
vm_datastore_details.name, vm_datastore_details.accessible,
vm_datastore_details.status, vm_datastore_details.file_system_type,
vm_datastore_details.total_capacity, vm_datastore_details.free_space,
vm_datastore_details.last_update_time, vm_datastore_details.rdm_supported,
vm_datastore_details.perfile_thin_provisioning_supported,
vm_datastore_details.storage_iorm_supported,
vm_datastore_details.directory_hierarchy_supported, vm_datastore_details.location
from vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map, vm_datastore_details
where vm_virtual_machine_datastore_map.vm_datastore_details_id =
vm_datastore_details.id;

VM_EE_MONITOR_INFO
This view provides combined ee_monitor, ee_monitor_stats, device_port and device_node tables to
get the EE Monitor information for vmplug-in.
create or replace view VM_EE_MONITOR_INFO as
select distinct
EE_MONITOR.NAME,
EE_MONITOR.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR.SOURCE_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR.DEST_PORT_ID,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.TX,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.RX,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.CRCERRORS,
EE_MONITOR_STATS.CREATION_TIME,
SOURCE_PORT.PORT_ID as SID,
DEST_PORT.PORT_ID as DID,
SOURCE_NODE.WWN as SOURCE_DEVICE_WWN,
SOURCE_PORT.WWN as SOURCE_PORT_WWN,
DEST_NODE.WWN as DEST_DEVICE_WWN,
DEST_PORT.WWN as DEST_PORT_WWN,
SOURCE_NODE.FABRIC_ID as SOURCE_FABRIC_ID,
DEST_NODE.FABRIC_ID as DEST_FABRIC_ID,
SOURCE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID as SOURCE_SWITCH_DOMAIN_ID,
DEST_PORT.DOMAIN_ID as DEST_SWITCH_DOMAIN_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME
from
VM_PATH,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
DEVICE_PORT as SOURCE_PORT,
DEVICE_PORT as DEST_PORT,
DEVICE_NODE as DEST_NODE,
DEVICE_NODE as SOURCE_NODE,
EE_MONITOR,
EE_MONITOR_STATS
where
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT::BPCHAR = SOURCE_PORT.WWN

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1667

I

Views

and VM_PATH.VM_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
and SOURCE_PORT.ID = EE_MONITOR.SOURCE_PORT_ID
and EE_MONITOR.ID = EE_MONITOR_STATS.EE_MONITOR_ID
and SOURCE_PORT.NODE_ID = SOURCE_NODE.ID
and DEST_PORT.ID = EE_MONITOR.DEST_PORT_ID
and DEST_PORT.NODE_ID = DEST_NODE.ID
and EE_MONITOR_STATS.CREATION_TIME in (select MAX(CREATION_TIME) from
EE_MONITOR_STATS group by EE_MONITOR_ID);
comment on view VM_EE_MONITOR_INFO is
'Combined ee_monitor, ee_monitor_stats, device_port and device_node tables to get
the EE Monitor info for vmplug-in';

VM_HOST_INFO
CREATE VIEW vm_host_info AS
select
VM_DATA_CENTER.VCENTER_ID as VCENTER_ID,
VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID as HOST_ID,
VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID as DATACENTER_ID,
VM_HOST.NODE_WWN
as HOST_NODE_WWN,
VM_HOST.HYPERVISOR_NAME,
VM_HOST.HYPERVISOR_TYPE,
VM_HOST.CPU_COUNT,
VM_HOST.CPU_TYPE,
VM_HOST.CPU_RESOURCES
as HOST_CPU_RESOURCES,
VM_HOST.MEM_RESOURCES
as HOST_MEM_RESOURCES,
VM_HOST.LICENSE_SERVER,
VM_HOST.BOOT_TIME
as HOST_BOOT_TIME,
VM_HOST.CLUSTER_NAME as CLUSTER_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME
as VM_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.DESCRIPTION
as VM_DESCRIPTION,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.OS
as VM_OS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.STATUS
as VM_STATUS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.VCPU_COUNT,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.CPU_RESOURCES
as VM_CPU_RESOURCES,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.MEM_RESOURCES
as VM_MEM_RESOURCES,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.IP_ADDRESS
as VM_IP_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOSTNAME
as VM_HOSTNAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.BOOT_TIME
as VM_BOOT_TIME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.DATASTORE_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.DATASTORE_LOCATION,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NODE_WWN
as VM_NODE_WWN
from
VM_DATA_CENTER,
VM_HOST
left join VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE
on VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID
where
VM_DATA_CENTER.ID = VM_HOST.VM_DATACENTER_ID;

VM_LUN_INFO
create or replace view VM_LUN_INFO as
select
VM_STORAGE.HOST_ID,

1668

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VM_STORAGE.ID
as LUN_ID,
VM_STORAGE.NAME
as LUN_NAME,
VM_STORAGE.TARGET_NODE,
VM_STORAGE.VENDOR,
VM_STORAGE.MODEL,
VM_STORAGE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
VM_STORAGE.TYPE,
VM_STORAGE.CAPACITY,
VM_STORAGE.STATUS
as LUN_STATUS,
VM_STORAGE.PATH_POLICY,
VM_STORAGE.ISCSI_TARGET_ADDRESS,
VM_STORAGE.ISCSI_TARGET_PORT,
VM_STORAGE.NAS_REMOTE_HOST,
VM_STORAGE.NAS_REMOTE_PATH,
VM_PATH.FS_TYPE,
VM_PATH.ID
as PATH_ID,
VM_PATH.VM_ID
as PATH_VM_ID,
VM_PATH.NAME
as PATH_NAME,
VM_PATH.FABRIC_ID,
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT,
VM_PATH.VM_PORT_WWN,
VM_PATH.TARGET_PORT,
VM_PATH.HBA_NODE,
VM_PATH.VM_NODE_WWN,
VM_PATH.TARGET_NODE
as PATH_TARGET_NODE,
VM_PATH.HBA_NAME,
VM_PATH.USAGE
as PATH_USAGE,
VM_PATH.ENABLED
as PATH_ENABLED,
VM_PATH.ACTIVE
as PATH_ACTIVE,
VM_PATH.PREFERRED
as PATH_PREFERRED
from
VM_STORAGE join VM_PATH on VM_STORAGE.ID = VM_PATH.STORAGE_ID;

VM_STATISTICS_INFO
This view gets the FC port statistics for the VM Connectivity data.
create or replace view VM_STATISTICS_INFO as
select distinct
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS as HYPERVISOR_HOST,
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT as ADAPTER_PORT_WWN,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as CORE_NAME,
FC_PORT_STATS.TX,
FC_PORT_STATS.RX,
FC_PORT_STATS.TX_UTILIZATION,
FC_PORT_STATS.RX_UTILIZATION,
FC_PORT_STATS.SYNCLOSSES,
FC_PORT_STATS.SIGNALLOSSES,
FC_PORT_STATS.SEQUENCEERRORS,
FC_PORT_STATS.INVALIDTRANSMISSIONS,
FC_PORT_STATS.CRCERRORS,
FC_PORT_STATS.CREATION_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VIRTUAL_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1669

I

Views

SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER
from
VM_STORAGE,
VM_HOST,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_PATH,
DEVICE_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT,
CORE_SWITCH,
FC_PORT_STATS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH
where
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT::BPCHAR = DEVICE_PORT.WWN
and VM_PATH.VM_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
and VM_PATH.STORAGE_ID = VM_STORAGE.ID
and VM_STORAGE.HOST_ID = DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID
and DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN = SWITCH_PORT.WWN
and SWITCH_PORT.ID = FC_PORT_STATS.PORT_ID
and SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and FC_PORT_STATS.CREATION_TIME in (select MAX(CREATION_TIME) from
FC_PORT_STATS group by PORT_ID)
union
select
DEVICE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_WWN,
DEVICE_PORT.DOMAIN_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS as HYPERVISOR_HOST,
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT as ADAPTER_PORT_WWN,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
CORE_SWITCH.NAME as CORE_NAME,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.TRANSMIT_OK,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.RECEIVE_OK,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.TRANSMIT_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.RECEIVE_OK_PERCENT_UTIL,
(-1) AS SYNCLOSSES,
(-1) AS SIGNALLOSSES,
(-1) AS SEQUENCEERRORS,
(-1) AS INVALIDTRANSMISSIONS,
(-1) AS CRCERRORS,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.CREATION_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VIRTUAL_NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER
from
VM_STORAGE,
VM_HOST,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_PATH,
DEVICE_PORT,
SWITCH_PORT,

1670

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Views

CORE_SWITCH,
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP,
DEVICE_PORT_GIGE_PORT_LINK,
GIGE_PORT
where
VM_PATH.HBA_PORT::BPCHAR = DEVICE_PORT.WWN
and VM_PATH.VM_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
and VM_PATH.STORAGE_ID = VM_STORAGE.ID
and VM_STORAGE.HOST_ID = DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID
and DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID
and DEVICE_PORT.ID = DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.DEVICE_PORT_ID
and DEVICE_PORT_MAC_ADDRESS_MAP.MAC_ADDRESS = GIGE_PORT.REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS
and GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.PORT_ID
and GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID
and SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID
and SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS.CREATION_TIME in (select max(CREATION_TIME) from
SWITCH_TE_PORT_STATS group by PORT_ID);

VR_CONN_MODULE_INFO
create or replace view VR_CONN_MODULE_INFO as
select distinct
VR_CONN_MODULE.ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN,
VR_CONN_MODULE.PRODUCT_NAME,
VR_CONN_MODULE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
VR_CONN_MODULE.STATUS,
VR_CONN_MODULE.IO_BAY,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VENDOR,
VR_CONN_MODULE.CREATION_TIME,
VR_CONN_MODULE.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.NAME as DOMAIN_NAME,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.GUID as DOMAIN_GUID,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP.NAME as DOMAIN_GROUP_NAME,
VCEM_PROFILE.ID as VCEM_PROFILE_ID,
VCEM_PROFILE.DISCOVERY_STATUS,
VCEM_PROFILE.LAST_FAILURE_TIMESTAMP as VCEM_LAST_FAILED_TIME,
VCEM_PROFILE.LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIMESTAMP as VCEM_LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ME_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID,
FABRIC.MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED
from
VR_CONN_MODULE
inner join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID = VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID
inner join
VCEM_PROFILE on
VCEM_PROFILE.ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.VCEM_PROFILE_ID

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1671

I

Views

left outer join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP.ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP_ID
left outer join
VIRTUAL_SWITCH on
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN
left outer join
CORE_SWITCH on
CORE_SWITCH.ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID
inner join
FABRIC_MEMBER on
FABRIC_MEMBER.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
inner join
FABRIC on
FABRIC_MEMBER.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID
union
select distinct
VR_CONN_MODULE.ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VCEM_ASSIGNED_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN,
VR_CONN_MODULE.PRODUCT_NAME,
VR_CONN_MODULE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
VR_CONN_MODULE.STATUS,
VR_CONN_MODULE.IO_BAY,
VR_CONN_MODULE.VENDOR,
VR_CONN_MODULE.CREATION_TIME,
VR_CONN_MODULE.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.NAME as DOMAIN_NAME,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.GUID as DOMAIN_GUID,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.FIRMWARE_VERSION,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP.NAME as DOMAIN_GROUP_NAME,
VCEM_PROFILE.ID as VCEM_PROFILE_ID,
VCEM_PROFILE.DISCOVERY_STATUS,
VCEM_PROFILE.LAST_FAILURE_TIMESTAMP as VCEM_LAST_FAILED_TIME,
VCEM_PROFILE.LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIMESTAMP as VCEM_LAST_SUCCESSFUL_TIME,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ME_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS,
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID,
FABRIC.MANAGED as FABRIC_MANAGED
from
VR_CONN_MODULE
inner join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID = VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID
inner join
VCEM_PROFILE on
VCEM_PROFILE.ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.VCEM_PROFILE_ID
left outer join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP.ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_GROUP_ID
left outer join
VIRTUAL_SWITCH on
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN
left outer join
CORE_SWITCH on
CORE_SWITCH.ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID
left outer join

1672

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

DEVICE_NODE on
DEVICE_NODE.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN
left outer join
FABRIC on
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID = FABRIC.ID;

VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT_INFO
create or replace view VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT_INFO as
select
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.VR_CONN_MODULE_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.WWN,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.POSITION_,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.FABRIC_NAME,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.SPEED,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.STATUS,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.LAST_STATUS,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.REMOTE_NODE_WWN,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.CREATION_TIME,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.LAST_UPDATE_TIME,
VR_CONN_MODULE.IO_BAY,
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID as VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID,
VCEM_PROFILE.ID as VCEM_PROFILE_ID,
SWITCH_PORT.ID as SWITCH_PORT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
from
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT
inner join
VR_CONN_MODULE on
VR_CONN_MODULE.ID = VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.VR_CONN_MODULE_ID
inner join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID = VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID
inner join
VCEM_PROFILE on
VCEM_PROFILE.ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.VCEM_PROFILE_ID
left outer join
SWITCH_PORT on
SWITCH_PORT.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.WWN
left outer join
VIRTUAL_SWITCH on
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN;

VR_CONN_NPIV_INFO
create or replace view VR_CONN_NPIV_INFO as
select
VR_CONN_WWN.ID,
VR_CONN_WWN.VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION_ID,
VR_CONN_WWN.PORT_ADDRESS as PORT_WWN,
VR_CONN_WWN.NODE_ADDRESS as NODE_WWN,
VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.NAME as SERVER_PROFILE_NAME,
VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.BAY_NAME,
coalesce(VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.BAY_NUMBER,
VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION.CONNECTION_BAY) as BAY_NUMBER,
VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.VIRTUAL_SERIAL_NUMBER,
VCEM_PROFILE.ID as VCEM_PROFILE_ID,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1673

I

Views

VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID as VIRTUAL_CONNECT_DOMAIN_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE.ID as VIRTUAL_CONNECT_MODULE_ID,
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.ID as VIRTUAL_CONNECT_MODULE_PORT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
coalesce(SWITCH_PORT.WWN, VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.WWN) as UPLINK_PORT_WWN,
coalesce(SWITCH_PORT.PORT_NUMBER, VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.POSITION_) as
UPLINK_PORT_NUMBER,
DEVICE_PORT.ID as DEVICE_PORT_ID,
DEVICE_PORT.NUMBER as DEVICE_PORT_NUMBER,
DEVICE_PORT.TYPE as DEVICE_PORT_TYPE,
DEVICE_NODE.ID as DEVICE_NODE_ID,
DEVICE_NODE.FABRIC_ID,
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.NAME
from
VR_CONN_WWN
inner join
VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION on
VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION.ID = VR_CONN_WWN.VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION_ID
inner join
VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE on
VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.ID =
VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION.VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE_ID
inner join
VR_CONN_DOMAIN on
VR_CONN_DOMAIN.GUID = VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.BAY_ENCLOSURE_UUID
inner join
VCEM_PROFILE on
VCEM_PROFILE.ID = VR_CONN_SERVER_PROFILE.VCEM_PROFILE_ID
inner join
VR_CONN_MODULE on
VR_CONN_MODULE.VR_CONN_DOMAIN_ID = VR_CONN_DOMAIN.ID and
VR_CONN_MODULE.IO_BAY = VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION.CONNECTION_BAY
inner join
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT on
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.VR_CONN_MODULE_ID = VR_CONN_MODULE.ID and
VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.POSITION_ = VR_CONN_FC_CONNECTION.PORT_NUMBER
left outer join
VIRTUAL_SWITCH on
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE.WWN
left outer join
SWITCH_PORT on
SWITCH_PORT.WWN = VR_CONN_MODULE_PORT.WWN
left outer join
DEVICE_PORT on
DEVICE_PORT.WWN = VR_CONN_WWN.PORT_ADDRESS
left outer join
DEVICE_NODE on
DEVICE_NODE.WWN = VR_CONN_WWN.NODE_ADDRESS
left outer join
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL on
USER_DEFINED_DEVICE_DETAIL.WWN = VR_CONN_WWN.PORT_ADDRESS;

VMM_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO
create or replace view VMM_DISCOVERED_MAC_INFO AS
select
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.DISPLAY_LABEL,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.PORT_GROUP_NAME,

1674

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME AS VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.NAME AS VCENTER_NAME
from
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER,
VM_VCENTER
where
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
AND VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID
AND VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID
union all
select
VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC.MAC AS MAC_ADDRESS,
VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC.DEVICE_NAME AS DISPLAY_LABEL,
VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC.PORT_GROUP_KEY AS PORT_GROUP_NAME,
NULL::UNKNOWN AS VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.NAME AS VCENTER_NAME
from
VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER,
VM_VCENTER
where
VM_HOST_VIRTUAL_NIC.VM_HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID AND
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID
union all
select
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.MAC_ADDRESS,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.DEVICE_NAME,
NULL::UNKNOWN AS PORT_GROUP_NAME,
NULL::UNKNOWN AS VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.NAME AS VCENTER_NAME
from
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER,
VM_VCENTER
where
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.VM_HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID AND
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID;

VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER_INFO
create or replace view VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER_INFO as
select
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.DISPLAY_LABEL,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.PORT_GROUP_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VIRTUAL_MACHINE_NAME,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.HOST_NAME,
VM_VCENTER.NAME as VCENTER_NAME
From
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1675

I

Views

VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE,
VM_VCENTER_MEMBER,
VM_VCENTER
Where
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID = VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID
And VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID = VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_HOST_ID
And VM_VCENTER_MEMBER.VM_VCENTER_ID = VM_VCENTER.ID;

ZONE_DB_INFO
create or replace view ZONE_DB_INFO as
select
ZONE_DB.ID,
ZONE_DB.FABRIC_ID,
ZONE_DB.OFFLINE,
ZONE_DB.NAME,
ZONE_DB.CREATED,
ZONE_DB.CREATED_BY,
ZONE_DB.LAST_MODIFIED,
ZONE_DB.LAST_MODIFIED_BY,
ZONE_DB.LAST_APPLIED,
ZONE_DB.LAST_APPLIED_BY,
ZONE_DB.DEFAULT_ZONE_STATUS,
ZONE_DB.MCDATA_DEFAULT_ZONE,
ZONE_DB.MCDATA_SAFE_ZONE,
ZONE_DB.ZONE_TXN_SUPPORTED,
ZONE_DB.ZONE_CONFIG_SIZE,
ZONE_DB.ZONE_AVAILABLE_SIZE,
ZONE_DB_CONFIG.ID AS CONFIG_ID,
ZONE_DB_CONFIG.DEFINED_CONTENT,
ZONE_DB_CONFIG.ACTIVE_CONTENT,
ZONE_DB_CONFIG.TI_ZONE_CONTENT
from
ZONE_DB, ZONE_DB_CONFIG
where
ZONE_DB.ID = ZONE_DB_CONFIG.ZONE_DB_ID;

AP_USAGE
CREATE VIEW ap_usage AS
SELECT ap_station.device_id, ap_station.time_stamp, count(*) AS num_clients
FROM ap_station WHERE (ap_station.radio > 0) GROUP BY ap_station.device_id,
ap_station.time_stamp;

EVENTS
CREATE VIEW events AS
SELECT emain.trap_log_id, emain.trap_sender, emain."timestamp",
emain.severity, emsgs.messages, emain.is_ack, emain.log_type, emain.slot,
emain.port, emain.device_id, emain.event_action_id, emain.device_group_id,
emain.port_group_id, emain.trap_device_ip, emain.log_sub_type, emain.unit FROM
(events_main emain LEFT JOIN events_messages emsgs ON ((emain.messages_id =
emsgs.messages_id)));

1676

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP_VIEW
create or replace view SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP_VIEW as
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_AS, SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID, IN_VLAN,
OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP
where SLNUM <= (select MAX_SLNUM from SFLOW_MINUTE_BGP_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only)
union all
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, SRC_AS, SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID, IN_VLAN,
OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_STAGING
where SLNUM >= (select MIN_SLNUM from SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only)
and SRC_AS != 0 OR SFLOW_IP_ROUTE_INFO_ID != 0;

SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN_VIEW
create or replace view SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN_VIEW as
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN
where SLNUM <= (select MAX_SLNUM from SFLOW_MINUTE_VLAN_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only)
union all
select DEVICE_ID, TIME_IN_SECONDS, IN_VLAN, OUT_VLAN, FRAMES, BYTES
from SFLOW_STAGING
where SLNUM >= (select MIN_SLNUM from SFLOW_STAGING_SLNUM fetch first 1 rows
only);

PHYSICAL_DEVICE_INFO
create or replace view PHYSICAL_DEVICE_INFO as
select
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID as PD_PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DESCRIPTION,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.NUM_SLOTS,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.TABLE_SUBTYPE,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NUMBER,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NEIGHBOR1,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NEIGHBOR2,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_PRESENT,
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID as FPD_PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.SERIAL_NUMBER,
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PRODUCT_TYPE,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS
from
PHYSICAL_DEVICE,
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE,
DEVICE
where
DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
and PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID =
FOUNDRY_PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1677

I

Views

SLOT_INFO
create or replace view SLOT_INFO as
select
SLOT.*,
PHYSICAL_DEVICE.UNIT_NUMBER,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS
from
PHYSICAL_DEVICE,
SLOT,
DEVICE
where
DEVICE.DEVICE_ID = PHYSICAL_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID
and SLOT.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID = PHYSICAL_DEVICE.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID;

MANAGED_ELEMENT_INFO
Common managed element data used by custom DTO methods to identify the managed element
type, and provide a link to the details table for the managed element. Some common managed
element fields are included in this view so Fault Management can use this view to identify the
managed element ID for an event source.
create or replace view MANAGED_ELEMENT_INFO as
select
MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID as MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as IP_DEVICE_ID,
coalesce(CS_ME.ID, CS_VS.ID) as CORE_SWITCH_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID as VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.ID as DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS as LAN_IP_ADDRESS,
coalesce (CS_VS.IP_ADDRESS, CS_ME.IP_ADDRESS, DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.IP_ADDRESS) as
SAN_IP_ADDRESS,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.VIRTUAL_FABRIC_ID,
coalesce (VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN, CS_ME.WWN, DEVICE.NODE_WWN) as NODE_WWN
from
MANAGED_ELEMENT
left outer join VIRTUAL_SWITCH on MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID =
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
left outer join CORE_SWITCH CS_ME on (MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID =
CS_ME.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID)
left outer join CORE_SWITCH CS_VS on (CS_VS.ID =
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID)
left outer join DEVICE on MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID = DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID
left outer join DEVICE_ENCLOSURE on MANAGED_ELEMENT.ID =
DEVICE_ENCLOSURE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID;

SNMP_DATA_INFO
create or replace view SNMP_DATA_INFO as
select * from SNMP_DATA
union all
select * from SNMP_DATA_30MIN
union all
select * from SNMP_DATA_2HOUR
union all
select * from SNMP_DATA_1DAY;

1678

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

SNMP_EXPR_DATA_INFO
create or replace view SNMP_EXPR_DATA_INFO as
select * from SNMP_EXPR_DATA
union all
select * from SNMP_EXPR_DATA_30MIN
union all
select * from SNMP_EXPR_DATA_2HOUR
union all
select * from SNMP_EXPR_DATA_1DAY;

SNMP_DATA_VIEW
create or replace view snmp_data_view as
(
(
(
(
SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS
device_ip, se.target_type, de.device_id AS target_id, de.sys_name AS target_name,
1 AS collectible_type, se.expression_id AS collectible_id, se.collector_id, (
SELECT perf_collector.name AS collector_name
FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id
= se.collector_id) AS collector_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.name AS
collectible_name
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id
= se.expression_id) AS collectible_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.equation AS
collectible_detail
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id
= se.expression_id) AS collectible_detail, se.value, se.time_in_seconds, '' AS
mib_index
FROM snmp_expr_data_info se
JOIN device de ON se.target_id = de.device_id
WHERE se.target_type = 0
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS
device_ip, sd.target_type, de.device_id AS target_id, de.sys_name AS target_name,
0 AS collectible_type, sd.mib_object_id AS collectible_id, sd.collector_id, (
SELECT perf_collector.name AS collector_name
FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id
= sd.collector_id) AS collector_name, ( SELECT (mib_object.name::text ||
'.'::text) || sd.mib_index::text AS collectible_name
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id =
sd.mib_object_id) AS collectible_name, ( SELECT mib_object.oid AS
collectible_detail
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id =
sd.mib_object_id) AS collectible_detail, sd.value, sd.time_in_seconds,
sd.mib_index
FROM snmp_data_info sd
JOIN device de ON sd.target_id = de.device_id
WHERE sd.target_type = 0::numeric)
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS device_ip,
sd.target_type, ifs.interface_id AS target_id, ifs.if_name AS target_name, 0 AS
collectible_type, sd.mib_object_id AS collectible_id, sd.collector_id, ( SELECT
perf_collector.name AS collector_name

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1679

I

Views

FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id =
sd.collector_id) AS collector_name, ( SELECT (mib_object.name::text || '.'::text)
|| sd.mib_index::text AS collectible_name
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id =
sd.mib_object_id) AS collectible_name, ( SELECT mib_object.oid AS
collectible_detail
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id =
sd.mib_object_id) AS collectible_detail, sd.value, sd.time_in_seconds,
sd.mib_index
FROM snmp_data_info sd
JOIN interface ifs ON sd.target_type = 1::numeric AND
sd.target_id = ifs.interface_id
JOIN device de ON ifs.device_id = de.device_id)
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS device_ip,
se.target_type, ifs.interface_id AS target_id, ifs.if_name AS target_name, 1 AS
collectible_type, se.expression_id AS collectible_id, se.collector_id, ( SELECT
perf_collector.name AS collector_name
FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id =
se.collector_id) AS collector_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.name AS
collectible_name
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id =
se.expression_id) AS collectible_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.equation AS
collectible_detail
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id =
se.expression_id) AS collectible_detail, se.value, se.time_in_seconds, '' AS
mib_index
FROM snmp_expr_data_info se
JOIN interface ifs ON se.target_type = 1 AND se.target_id =
ifs.interface_id
JOIN device de ON ifs.device_id = de.device_id)
UNION ALL
SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS device_ip, sd.target_type,
sp.id AS target_id, sp.name AS target_name, 0 AS collectible_type,
sd.mib_object_id AS collectible_id, sd.collector_id, ( SELECT perf_collector.name
AS collector_name
FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id = sd.collector_id) AS
collector_name, ( SELECT (mib_object.name::text || '.'::text) ||
sd.mib_index::text AS collectible_name
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id = sd.mib_object_id) AS
collectible_name, ( SELECT mib_object.oid AS collectible_detail
FROM mib_object
WHERE mib_object.mib_object_id = sd.mib_object_id) AS
collectible_detail, sd.value, sd.time_in_seconds, sd.mib_index
FROM snmp_data_info sd
JOIN switch_port sp ON sd.target_type = 4::numeric AND sd.target_id
= sp.id
JOIN device de ON (( SELECT sw.managed_element_id
FROM virtual_switch sw
WHERE sw.id = sp.virtual_switch_id)) = de.managed_element_id)
UNION ALL

1680

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

I

Views

SELECT de.device_id, de.ip_address AS device_ip, se.target_type, sp.id AS
target_id, sp.name AS target_name, 1 AS collectible_type, se.expression_id AS
collectible_id, se.collector_id, ( SELECT perf_collector.name AS collector_name
FROM perf_collector
WHERE perf_collector.collector_id = se.collector_id) AS
collector_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.name AS collectible_name
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id = se.expression_id) AS
collectible_name, ( SELECT snmp_expression.equation AS collectible_detail
FROM snmp_expression
WHERE snmp_expression.expression_id = se.expression_id) AS
collectible_detail, se.value, se.time_in_seconds, '' AS mib_index
FROM snmp_expr_data_info se
JOIN switch_port sp ON se.target_type = 4 AND se.target_id = sp.id
JOIN device de ON (( SELECT sw.managed_element_id
FROM virtual_switch sw
WHERE sw.id = sp.virtual_switch_id)) = de.managed_element_id;

VM_VNETWORK_INFO
This view provideds combine VM and device information to derive VM to the ingress switch port
information.
create or replace view VM_VNETWORK_INFO as
select
VM_HOST.HYPERVISOR_NAME as VHOST_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS as VNIC_MAC,
VM_DV_PORT_GROUP.NAME as PGRP_NAME,
VM_DV_SWITCH.NAME as VSWITCH_NAME,
VNIC_DV_PORT.NAME as DVPORT_NAME,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.DEVICE_NAME as PNIC_NAME,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.MAC_ADDRESS as PNIC_MAC,
DEVICE.SYS_NAME as SWITCH_NAME,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS as SWITCH_IP,
PHYSICAL_PORT.PORT_NUM as SWITCH_PORT,
INTERFACE.PORT_STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS
from
VM_HOST
left join VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE on VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID =
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER,
VM_DV_PORT VNIC_DV_PORT,
VM_DV_PORT PNIC_DV_PORT,
VM_DV_PORT_GROUP,
VM_DV_SWITCH,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC,
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY,
INTERFACE,
DEVICE,
PHYSICAL_INTERFACE,
PHYSICAL_PORT
where
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID and
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_DV_PORT_ID is not null and
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_DV_PORT_ID = VNIC_DV_PORT.ID and
VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_DV_PORT_GROUP_ID = VM_DV_PORT_GROUP.ID and
VNIC_DV_PORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID = VM_DV_SWITCH.ID and

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1681

I

Views

PNIC_DV_PORT.VM_DV_SWITCH_ID = VM_DV_SWITCH.ID and
PNIC_DV_PORT.ID = VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.VM_DV_PORT_ID and
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.ID = VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.VM_PHYSICAL_NIC_ID and
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID and
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = DEVICE.DEVICE_ID and
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID = PHYSICAL_INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
and
PHYSICAL_INTERFACE.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID = PHYSICAL_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID
union all
select
VM_HOST.HYPERVISOR_NAME as VHOST_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.NAME as VM_NAME,
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HYPERVISOR_VM_ID as VM_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.MAC_ADDRESS as VNIC_MAC,
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.NAME as PGRP_NAME,
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.NAME as VSWITCH_NAME,
null as DVPORT_NAME,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.DEVICE_NAME as PNIC_NAME,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.MAC_ADDRESS as PNIC_MAC,
DEVICE.SYS_NAME as SWITCH_NAME,
DEVICE.IP_ADDRESS as SWITCH_IP,
PHYSICAL_PORT.PORT_NUM as SWITCH_PORT,
INTERFACE.PORT_STATUS as SWITCH_PORT_STATUS
from
VM_HOST
left join VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE on VM_HOST.DEVICE_ENCLOSURE_ID =
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.HOST_ID,
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER,
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP,
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH,
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC,
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY,
INTERFACE,
DEVICE,
PHYSICAL_INTERFACE,
PHYSICAL_PORT
where
VM_VIRTUAL_MACHINE.ID = VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VIRTUAL_MACHINE_ID and
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID is not null and
VM_VIRTUAL_ETHERNET_ADAPTER.VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP_ID =
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.ID and
VM_STD_VSWITCH_PORT_GROUP.VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL__SWITCH_ID =
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID and
VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID = VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.VM_STANDARD_VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID
and
VM_PHYSICAL_NIC.ID = VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.VM_PHYSICAL_NIC_ID and
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID = INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID and
INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = DEVICE.DEVICE_ID and
VM_HOST_END_DEV_CONNECTIVITY.INTERFACE_ID = PHYSICAL_INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID
and
PHYSICAL_INTERFACE.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID = PHYSICAL_PORT.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID;

VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER_INFO
CREATE VIEW vcs_cluster_member_info AS
select
VCS_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as VCS_DEVICE_ID,

1682

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VCS_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as VCS_ME_ID,
MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as MEMBER_DEVICE_ID,
MEMBER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID as MEMBER_ME_ID,
VCS_MEMBER.CREATION_TIME,
VCS_MEMBER.TRUSTED,
VCS_MEMBER.MISSING,
VCS_MEMBER.MISSING_TIME,
VCS_MEMBER.STATE,
VCS_MEMBER.FABRIC_STATUS
from
device VCS_DEVICE,
device MEMBER_DEVICE,
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER VCS_MEMBER
where
VCS_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID = VCS_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID AND
VCS_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID = MEMBER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID;

RESET_VCS_LICENSED
CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION reset_vcs_licensed(no_of_licenses integer)
RETURNS void AS
$BODY$
begin
UPDATE fabric set vcs_licensed = 0;
UPDATE device set vcs_licensed = 0;
UPDATE fabric set vcs_licensed = 1 WHERE fabric.id in (SELECT id FROM fabric
ORDER BY creation_time LIMIT no_of_licenses);
UPDATE device set vcs_licensed = 1 WHERE device.managed_element_id in (SELECT
vcs_cluster_me_id FROM fabric_vcs_cluster_map WHERE fabric_id in (SELECT id FROM
fabric WHERE vcs_licensed=1));
end;
$BODY$
LANGUAGE plpgsql VOLATILE
COST 100;
ALTER FUNCTION reset_vcs_licensed(integer)
OWNER TO dcmadmin;

TRILL_TRUNK_INFO
create or replace view TRILL_TRUNK_INFO as
select
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID,
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID,
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.MASTER_PORT_NUMBER,
TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER as MEMBER_PORT_NUMBER,
MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID,
MASTER_INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID as MASTER_INTERFACE_ID,
MASTER_INTERFACE.IF_NAME as MASTER_IF_NAME,
MEMBER_INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID as MEMBER_INTERFACE_ID,
MEMBER_INTERFACE.IF_NAME as MEMBER_IF_NAME,
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID,
CLUSTER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID as CLUSTER_DEVICE_ID
from
TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP
inner join TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER on
TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.GROUP_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ID
inner join device MEMBER_DEVICE on

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1683

I

Views

MEMBER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID
left outer join INTERFACE MASTER_INTERFACE on
MASTER_INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID and
MASTER_INTERFACE.IDENTIFIER = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.MASTER_PORT_NUMBER
left outer join INTERFACE MEMBER_INTERFACE on
MEMBER_INTERFACE.DEVICE_ID = MEMBER_DEVICE.DEVICE_ID and
MEMBER_INTERFACE.IDENTIFIER = TRILL_TRUNK_MEMBER.PORT_NUMBER
left outer join VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER on
VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.MEMBER_ME_ID = TRILL_TRUNK_GROUP.ME_ID
left outer join DEVICE CLUSTER_DEVICE on
CLUSTER_DEVICE.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID = VCS_CLUSTER_MEMBER.CLUSTER_ME_ID;

WIRELESS_INTERFACE
create or replace view wireless_interface as
SELECT
l2.device_id,
l2.device_ip_address,
l2.physical_device_id,
l2.unit_number,
l2.slot_id,
l2.slot_num,
l2.module_id,
l2.physical_port_id,
l2.port_num,
l2.interface_id,
l2.name,
l2.if_name,
l2.identifier,
l2.speed_in_mb,
l2.physical_address,
l2.interface_id AS radioif_id,
wireless.radio_type,
wireless.is_enabled,
wireless.is_auto_channel,
wireless.tx_power,
wireless.channel_number,
wireless.max_data_rate,
wireless.beacon_rate,
wireless.dtim,
wireless.rts_threshold,
wireless.is_turbo_mode,
wireless.radio_g_mode,
wireless.max_associated_clients
FROM
((SELECT DISTINCT d.device_id, d.ip_address AS device_ip_address,
pd.physical_device_id, pd.unit_number, s.slot_id, s.slot_num, msp.module_id,
pp.physical_port_id, pp.port_num, i.interface_id, i.name, i.if_name,
i.identifier, pi.speed_in_mb, pi.physical_address
FROM device d, physical_device pd, slot s, module_slot_present msp,
physical_port pp, physical_interface pi, interface i
WHERE
(((((((d.device_id = pd.device_id)
AND (pd.physical_device_id = s.physical_device_id))
AND (s.slot_id = msp.slot_id))
AND (msp.module_id = pp.module_id))
AND (pp.physical_port_id = pi.physical_port_id))
AND (pi.interface_id = i.interface_id))

1684

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

AND ((i.table_subtype)::text = 'RADIO_INTERFACE'::text)))
l2 LEFT JOIN
(SELECT radio_interface.interface_id
AS radioif_id, radio_interface.radio_type, radio_interface.is_enabled,
radio_interface.is_auto_channel, radio_interface.tx_power,
radio_interface.channel_number, radio_interface.max_data_rate,
radio_interface.beacon_rate, radio_interface.dtim, radio_interface.rts_threshold,
radio_interface.is_turbo_mode, radio_interface.radio_g_mode,
radio_interface.max_associated_clients
FROM radio_interface)
wireless ON ((l2.interface_id = wireless.radioif_id)));

WIRED_INTERFACE
CREATE VIEW wired_interface AS
select
L2.DEVICE_ID,
L2.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
L2.DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS,
L2.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID,
L2.UNIT_NUMBER,
L2.SLOT_ID,
L2.SLOT_NUM,
L2.MODULE_ID,
L2.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID,
L2.PORT_NUM,
L2.INTERFACE_ID,
L2.NAME,
L2.IF_NAME,
L2.IDENTIFIER,
L2.TABLE_SUBTYPE,
case
when L2.TABLE_SUBTYPE like 'GBIT_ETHERNET_INTERFACE' then 'GIGABIT ETHERNET'
when L2.TABLE_SUBTYPE like 'POS_INTERFACE' then 'POS'
else L2.TABLE_SUBTYPE
end as TABLE_SUBTYPE_TXT,
L2.TAG_MODE,
case
when L2.TAG_MODE = 1 then 'TAGGED'
when L2.TAG_MODE = 2 then 'UNTAGGED'
when L2.TAG_MODE = 3 then 'DUAL'
else null
end as TAG_MODE_TXT,
L2.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1,
L2.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
L2.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
L2.SPEED_IN_MB,
L2.PHYSICAL_ADDRESS,
L2.DUPLEX_MODE,
case
when L2.DUPLEX_MODE = 1 then 'HALF-DUPLEX'
when L2.DUPLEX_MODE = 2 then 'FULL-DUPLEX'
when L2.DUPLEX_MODE = 3 then 'AUTO-SENSE'
else null
end as DUPLEX_MODE_TXT,
L3.IP_ID,
L3.IP_INTERFACE_ID,
L3.IP_ADDRESS,

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1685

I

Views

L3.SUBNET_MASK
from ( select distinct D.DEVICE_ID, D.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID, D.IP_ADDRESS as
DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS,
PD.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID, PD.UNIT_NUMBER, S.SLOT_ID, S.SLOT_NUM,
MSP.MODULE_ID, PP.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID, PP.PORT_NUM, I.INTERFACE_ID,
I.NAME, I.IF_NAME, I.IDENTIFIER, I.TABLE_SUBTYPE, I.TAG_MODE,
I.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_1, I.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_2,
I.USER_DEFINED_VALUE_3,
PI.SPEED_IN_MB, PI.PHYSICAL_ADDRESS, PI.DUPLEX_MODE
from DEVICE D, PHYSICAL_DEVICE PD, SLOT S, MODULE_SLOT_PRESENT MSP,
PHYSICAL_PORT PP, PHYSICAL_INTERFACE PI, INTERFACE I
where D.DEVICE_ID = PD.DEVICE_ID and PD.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID =
S.PHYSICAL_DEVICE_ID and S.SLOT_ID = MSP.SLOT_ID and MSP.MODULE_ID = PP.MODULE_ID
and PP.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID = PI.PHYSICAL_PORT_ID and PI.INTERFACE_ID =
I.INTERFACE_ID and I.TABLE_SUBTYPE::TEXT <> 'RADIO_INTERFACE'::TEXT) L2
left join ( select INM_IP_INTERFACE.INTERFACE_ID as IP_ID,
INM_IP_INTERFACE.IP_INTERFACE_ID, INM_IP_INTERFACE.IP_ADDRESS,
INM_IP_INTERFACE.SUBNET_MASK
from INM_IP_INTERFACE) L3 on L2.INTERFACE_ID = L3.IP_ID;

CEE_PORT_INFO
create or replace view CEE_PORT_INFO as
CREATE VIEW cee_port_info AS
select
GIGE_PORT.ID,
GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_NUMBER,
CEE_PORT.ID AS CEE_PORT_ID,
CEE_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID,
CEE_PORT.IF_INDEX,
CEE_PORT.IF_NAME,
CEE_PORT.IF_MODE,
CEE_PORT.L2_MODE,
CEE_PORT.VLAN_ID,
CEE_PORT.LAG_ID,
CEE_PORT.IP_ADDRESS,
CEE_PORT.MAC_ADDRESS,
CEE_PORT.PORT_SPEED,
CEE_PORT.ENABLED,
CEE_PORT.OCCUPIED,
CEE_PORT.LAST_UPDATE,
CEE_PORT.NET_MASK,
CEE_PORT.PROTOCOL_DOWN_REASON,
CEE_PORT.MAC_ACL_POLICY,
CEE_PORT.QOS_TYPE,
CEE_PORT.QOS_NAME,
CEE_PORT.DOT1X_ENABLED,
CEE_PORT.PORT_ROLE,
CEE_PORT.AMPP_PROFILE_MODE,
CORE_SWITCH.IP_ADDRESS as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_IP,
CORE_SWITCH.WWN as PHYSICAL_SWITCH_WWN,
GIGE_PORT.OPERATIONAL_STATUS,
GIGE_PORT.MAX_SPEED,
GIGE_PORT.PORT_TYPE,
GIGE_PORT.REMOTE_MAC_ADDRESS,
GIGE_PORT.SLOT_NUMBER,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.WWN,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGEMENT_STATE,

1686

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Views

I

VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MANAGED_ELEMENT_ID,
VIRTUAL_SWITCH.MONITORED,
SWITCH_PORT.USER_PORT_NUMBER,
SWITCH_PORT.STATE,
SWITCH_PORT.STATUS,
SWITCH_PORT.NAME,
SWITCH_PORT.LICENSED,
SWITCH_PORT.TRUNKED,
SWITCH_PORT.TRUNK_MASTER,
SWITCH_PORT.SPEED_TYPE
from
CEE_PORT, GIGE_PORT, SWITCH_PORT, VIRTUAL_SWITCH, CORE_SWITCH
where
CEE_PORT.GIGE_PORT_ID = GIGE_PORT.ID
and GIGE_PORT.SWITCH_PORT_ID = SWITCH_PORT.ID
and SWITCH_PORT.VIRTUAL_SWITCH_ID = VIRTUAL_SWITCH.ID
and VIRTUAL_SWITCH.CORE_SWITCH_ID = CORE_SWITCH.ID;

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1687

I

1688

Views

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Index

A
access levels
defined, 1298
features, 1298–1299, 1300–??
roles, 1298
accessing
FTP server folder, 173
activating
Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration, 708
zone configuration, 652
active session management, roles and access levels,
1298
active sessions, viewing, 8
adapter software
using to manage driver files, 459
adapters
HBA models, 452
types of, 452
types of converged network adapters, 453
types of fabric adapters, 453
types of HBAs, 452
Adding
C3 discard frames threshold, 677
state change threshold, 684, 690
adding
invalid CRCs thresholds, 679
invalid words thresholds, 680
ISL protocol thresholds, 683
link reset thresholds, 681
property labels, 297, 1329
thresholds, 677
zone members, 642
zones, 651
administrator access, defined, 1298
advanced filtering
setting up, 1145
alerts, zone configuration comparison, 663
allow/prohibit matrix
configuring, 702
Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration
activating, 708
copying, 706, 707

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

deleting, 708
Allow/Prohibit Matrix display
changing, 709
AMPP
port-profile states, 433
AnyIO technology, 454
asset polling, configuring, 168
assigned thresholds
finding, 691
assigning
event filter to a device, 361
event filters to call home centers, 361
thresholds, 685
Authentication type
PAP, CHAP, 380

B
background, importing an image, 324
backup
changing interval, 132
configuring to writable CD, 129
data, 128
disabling, 132
enabling, 131
immediate, 133
management server, 129
reviewing events, 133
roles and access levels, 1299
starting, 133
status, determining, 289
viewing status, 132
Backup Scheduler, 762, 811, 812
boot image repository
and host adapters, 461
backing up files, 464
deleting image, 464
downloading an image to a selected host, 463
importing, 462
boot images
deleting from the Management application, 810
deploying to devices, 810

1689

management of, 808

C
C3 Discard Frames threshold, 675
call home, 344
centers
assigning a device, 359
assigning event filters, 361
disabling, 357
editing, 349
Brocade International, 349
e-mail, 350
EMC, 354
HP LAN, 355
IBM, 349
enabling, 356
enabling support save, 356
hiding, 348
removing a device, 359
removing all devices and filters, 359
removing event filters, 362
test connection, 357
viewing, 348
configuring, 344
roles and access levels, 1298
status, determining, 290
system requirements, 345
viewing status, 358
call home event filters table
removing event filters, 363
cascaded FICON fabric
configuring, 710
cascaded FICON fabrics, 695
merging, 714
CEE management, roles and access levels, 1298
changing
Allow/Prohibit Matrix display, 709
database passwords, 17, 22
view options, 293
CHAP, 380
clearing fabric zone database, 664
client authentication audit trail, displaying, 391
client/server
firewall requirements, 2
CNA
product overview, 453
comparing
zone databases, 662
configuration

1690

Allow/Prohibit Matrix
activating, 708
deleting, 708
Allow/Prohibit Matrix , copying, 706, 707
FICON CUP, 695
configuration backup
scheduling, 762
configuration management
roles and access levels, 1298
configuration repository
saving status, 746
searching, 743
using to export the device configuration, 752
configuration snapshot
generating a report, 758
saving, 760
configuration snapshots
comparing two side by side, 756
viewing pre- and post, 759
configurations
comparing two side by side, 748
Configure menu, 1264
configure real-time performance graph, 989
configuring
allow/prohibit matrix, 702
asset polling, 168
call home, 344
cascaded FICON fabric, 710
e-mail notification, 1142
explicit server IP address, 157
external FTP server, 175
FTP server, 172
internal FTP server, 173
internal SCP server, 174
internal SFTP server, 174
LDAP server, 382
login banner, 151
login security, 150
memory allocation, 166
Radius server, 380
security authentication using the GUI, 475
server name, 150
server port, 177
software, 155
support mode settings, 178
Switch authentication, 389
UNIX authentication, 391
Windows authentication, 390
zoning, 640
configuring zoning, 640
connections

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

status, determining, 289
copying
Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration, 706, 707
log entries, 1206
log entry parts, 1205
master log, 1209
master log parts, 1209
zones, 645
creating
zone, 641
zone alias, 647
zone configuration, 650
zone databases, 655
zone members, 643
zone sets, 650
CUP, FICON, 695

D
data
real time performance, 976
data backup, 128
data backup and restore, 479
data restore, 134
database fields
Sybase and Derby, 1371
database, restoring, 392
DCB switches, L2 mode compatibility, 830
deactivating zone configuration, 653
default zone (fabrics)
disabling, 646
enabling, 646
defining, event filter, 360
deleting
Allow/Prohibit Matrix configuration, 708
fabrics, 101
hosts, 101, 107
offline zone database, 656
property labels, 298, 1330
technical support information, 1228
VM managers, 106
zone alias, 649
zone configuration, 654
zones, 645
deployment configuration
deleting, 965
deploying, 965
duplicating, 964
editing, 963
snapshot report, 966

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

deployment logs
viewing, 965
Deployment Manager, 963
deployment report, generating, 965
Derby database fields, 1371
device
adding names, 145
assigning event filters, 361
removing name, 147
device icons, 290, 291
device properties, 1302
device properties dialog boxes, customizing, 1302
device shortcut menu
adding options, 371
changing options, 372
removing options, 373
device tips
configuring, 140
device tips, turning on and off, 142
device tips, viewing, 142
diagnostics
types of tests, 455
dialog box
iSCSI properties, 1307
port properties, 1309
storage properties, 1305
directory structure overview, backing up, 129
disabling
call home centers, 357
default zone for fabrics, 646
login banner, 151
disabling backup, 132
Discover menu, 1263
discovery
description of, 455
troubleshooting, 102, 108
displaying
event details, 1207
master log event details, 1207
dual network cards, configuration, 158
duplicate names,fixing, 143
duplicating
zone alias, 650
zone configuration, 655
zones, 645

E
Edit menu, 1262

1691

editing
property fields, 1331
property labels, 298, 1330
thresholds, 687
zone alias, 647
editing system collectors, 996
Element Manager, launching
launching Element Manager, 366
e-mail event notification setup
roles and access levels, 1298
e-mail filter override, 478
e-mail notification
configuring, 1142
emailing
technical support information, 1227
enabling
call home centers, 356
default zone for fabrics, 646
support save for call home centers, 356
enabling backup, 131
ESXi
adding host adapter credentials, 458
CIM listener ports, 457
ESXi hosts
updating drivers, 459
ESXi systems
management application support for, 457
event action
handling special events, 1175
event action definition
creating, 1166
deleting, 1180
event action definitions
configuring e-mail settings, 1178
configuring varbind filters, 1169
creating a new definition, 1179
modifying an existing definition, 1179
event actions, handling special events, 1176
event custom reports
adding a report schedule, 1203
copying an existing definition, 1201
defining report settings, 1194
defining the report identity, 1195
deleting a report definition, 1202
editing a report definition, 1201
filtering a report definition, 1197
filtering events by date and time, 1199
event details
displaying, 1207
event filter
assigning, 361

1692

assigning to a device, 361
defining, 360
overwriting, 362
removing from device, 363
searching for, 363
event filtering, advanced, 1145
event filters table
removing event filters, 363
event logs, 1205
copying entries, 1206
copying parts, 1205
exporting entries, 1206
viewing, 1205
event management
overview, 1141
roles and access levels, 1299
event notification
configuring e-mail notification, 1142
event notification, description, 1142
event types, 477
events
event types, 477
filtering, 478, 1210
monitoring methods, 1141
storage, 139
explicit server IP address
configuring, 157
exporting
log entries, 1206
master log, 1209
real time performance data, 979
zone alias, 649
zone databases, 660
Extended Fabrics license, 714
external FTP server
configuring, 175

F
fabric assigned WWN
adding AG ports, 472
auto-assigning to a switch or AG port, 470
deleting from a switch or AG port, 471
disabling on switch or AG port, 469
manually assigning to a switch or AG port, 470
modifying on a switch or AG port, 470
moving across switches, 472
on attached AG ports, 471
fabric properties, 1301
fabric properties dialog boxes, customizing, 1301

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

Fabric Watch
notification types, 442
fabrics
deleting from discovery, 101
status, determining, 290
zone database, clearing, 664
fault management
roles and access levels, 1299
FC Address
for inactive iSCSI devices, 1309
FCoE management, roles and access levels, 1299
feature
active session management, 1298
backup, 1299
call home, 344, 1298
CEE management, 1298
configuration management, 1298
e-mail event notification setup, 1298
event management, 1299
fault management, 1299
FCoE management, 1299
firmware management, 1299
host management, 1299
license update, 1299
LSAN zoning, 1299
performance, 1299
properties edit, 1299
report, 1299
security, 1299
setup tools, 1299
software configuration properties, 1299
technical support data collection, 1299
user management, 1299
zoning activation, 1299
zoning offline, 1299
zoning online, 1299
zoning set edit limits, 1299
FICON
cascaded fabrics, 695
configurations, 695
configuring a switch, 696, 698
CUP, 695
planning switch configuration, 696
filtering
events for users, 478
master log events, 1210
real time performance data, 977
finding
assigned thresholds, 691
firmware
activate for NOS, 430, 818

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

update for NOS, 430, 818
firmware management
roles and access levels, 1299
flyovers
configuring, 140
turning on and off, 142
viewing, 142
FTP
overview, 172
server
accessing the folder, 173
configuring, 172
testing, 176

G
generating
performance graph, 976
global server load balancing (GSLB), 923
groups, icons, 292
GSLB
configuration requirements, 923
GSLB controller configuration
deploying, 940
GSLB management
scheduling a deployment, 941
GSLB manager
viewing, 924
GSLB policy
adding a prefix, 928
deleting a prefix entry, 929
importing IP addresses from a file, 929
managing, 925
metrics, 927
GSLB site management
adding and deleting Serverirons to the site, 932
GSLB zone management
deleting a zone configuration, 936

H
HCM
features, 455
software overview, 454
statistics monitoring, 455
HCM Agent, launching, 367
Help menu, 1261, 1268
high integrity fabric configuration setttings, 710

1693

high integrity fabrics (HIF), requirements, 695
host adapter
discovery, 456
host adapters
adding a port configuration, 465
and boot image repository, 461
and driver repository, 460
and fault management, 477
and performance management, 474
and role-based access control, 473
and security authentication, 475
and supportSave, 477
and syslog forwarding, 478
bulk port configuration, 464
configuring FAWWNs, 468
configuring ports, 464
deleting a driver file from the repository, 461
deleting a port configuration, 468
duplicating a port configuration, 468
editing a port configuration, 468
filtering event notifications, 478
port WWN virtualization, 468
host connectivity manager
about the application, 454
features, 455
host discovery
state, 102, 107
host management, description of, 451
host management, remote, 454
host management, roles and access levels, 1299
hosts
deleting permanently, 101, 107

I
icons
device, 290, 291
products, 290, 291
image imports, products supported, 808
image management
boot, 808
software, 811
unified, 814
Image Repository
using to obtain software files, 807
immediate technical support information collection, 1222
importing
zone databases, 661
importing a background image, 324
inactive iSCSI devices, identifying, 1309

1694

installation
Windows, ODBC driver, 20
installing a patch, 27
internal FTP server
configuring, 173
internal SCP server
configuring, 174
internal SFTP server
configuring, 174
Invalid CRCs threshold, 676
Invalid CRCs thresholds
editing, 687, 688
invalid CRCs thresholds
adding, 679
Invalid words threshold, 676
invalid words thresholds
adding, 680
editing, 688, 689
IP inventory reports
detailed product report, 1235, 1238
exporting and saving to a file, 1232
information contained within, 1233
IP address report, 1243
IP subnet report, 1242
layer 3 VLAN report, 1241
MAC address report, 1243
module report, 1240
port VLAN report, 1241
viewing, 1231
iSCSI devices, identifying inactive, 1309
iSCSI properties dialog box, 1307
ISL protocol threshold, 676
adding, 683

L
launch
remote client, 4
launching
Server Management Console, 375
SMIA Configuration Tool, 395
launching HCM Agent, 367
launching Telnet, 366
LDAP server
configuring, 382
license
MPLS devices, 846, 880, 884, 895, 896
license update
roles and access levels, 1299

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

link reset threshold, 676
link reset thresholds
adding, 681
listing
un-zoned members, 667
zone members, 667
log entries
copying, 1206
copying parts, 1205
exporting, 1206
logging in
remote client, 4
remote SMIA configuration tool, 397
server, 3
logical chassis cluster mode, 42, 43, 427, 428, 429
login banner
configuring, 151
disabling, 151
login security
configuring, 150
logon conflicts, 652
logs
event, 1205
LSAN zoning
roles and access levels, 1299

M
Main window
master log, 287
minimap, 288
Management application
server and client, 2
management application
main window, 2
user interface, 1
Management application services
monitoring and managing, 376
management information base (MIB), importing into the
Management application, 1156
managing
zone configuration comparison alerts, 663
master log, 287
copying, 1209
copying parts, 1209
displaying, 1207
exporting, 1209
filtering events, 1210
memory allocation

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

configuration, 166
configuring asset polling, 168
viewing status, 169
menu bar
Configure, 1264
Discover, 1263
Edit, 1262
Help, 1261, 1268
Monitor, 1266
Server, 1261, 1262
Tools, 1268
View, 1261, 1262
merging
cascaded FICON fabrics, 714
zone databases, 658
merging zones, 640
minimap, 288
anchoring, 288
attaching, 288
detaching, 288
floating, 288
resizing, 289
Monitor menu, 1266
Monitoring
requirements
sFlow, 1037
SNMP, 983
monitoring statistics, 455
MPLS Manager
licenses, 846, 880, 884, 895, 896
MSTP
adding an instance, 839
assigning an instance to a VLAN, 839
configuring on a product, 838

N
names
adding to existing device, 145
adding to new device, 146
editing, 147
exporting, 147
fixing duplicates, 143
importing, 148
removing from device, 147
searching by, 148
viewing, 144
names, overview, 142
naming conventions, 639
network size status, determining, 289

1695

new device, adding name, 146
NOS
firmware activate, 430, 818
firmware update, 430, 818
notification type
e-mail alert, 442

O
objects
removing thresholds, 692
offline zone database
deleting, 656
overwriting, event filter, 362

P
PAP, 380
passwords
database, changing, 17, 22
patch
install, 27
uninstall, 28
performance
roles and access levels, 1299
performance data
real time, 976
performance graph
generating, 976
performance monitoring
overview, 969
physical map
zooming in, 293
zooming out, 294
port fencing inheritance
avoiding, 686
port fencing, description, 671
port properties, 1309
port properties dialog box, 1309
port status, viewing, 10
port VLAN
deleting in product view, 833
deleting in VLAN view, 833
deploying an STP configuration, 837
priorities, threshold, 674
privileges
user, 1283
Product list

1696

columns, 284
product overview, 453
products
icons, 290, 291
status, determining, 289
properties dialog box
iSCSI tab, 1307
Port tab, 1309
Storage tab, 1305
properties edit
roles and access levels, 1299
property fields
editing, 1331
property labels
adding, 297, 1329
deleting, 298, 1330
editing, 298, 1330
pseudo event definitions, 1182
adding an escalation policy, 1187
adding on the flapping policy, 1191
copying an existing definition, 1186
creating, 1182
creating an event action on the flapping policy, 1191
creating an event action on the resolving policy, 1190
deleting, 1186
filtering traps, 1184
modifying an existing definition, 1186
setting policies, 1183

R
Radius server
configuring, 380
RBAC
user privileges, 1283
real time performance, 976
exporting data, 979
filtering data, 977
graph, 976
real-time performance graph
configure, 989
refreshing
zone databases, 657
registering SNMP traps, 1158
remote client
launch, 4
logging in, 4
remote host management, 454
remote SMIA configuration tool
logging in, 397

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

removing
members from zone, 643
objects from zone alias, 648
thresholds, 692
thresholds from individual objects, 692
thresholds from table, 693
zone from zone configuration, 651
zones from zone configuration, 651
removing event filters
call home centers, 362
call home event filters table, 363
devices, 363
renaming
zone alias, 649
zone configuration, 654
zones, 644
replacing
zone members, 668
report
roles and access levels, 1299
reports
exporting to e-mail recipients, 1232
restore data, 134
restoring
database, 392
reviewing
backup events, 133
role based access control. See RBAC.
roles, 1298
access levels, 1298
rolling back changes
zone databases, 661

S
saving
zone databases to switch, 660
scheduling
technical support information collection, 1219
search
names, 148
WWN, 149
searching
members in zones, 665
Potential Members list, 666
zones in zone configuration, 666
Zones list, 666
security
configuring, 149

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

roles and access levels, 1299
security authentication
configuring using the GUI, 475
server IP address, explicit, 157
Server Management Console
about, 375
launching, 375
Server menu, 1261, 1262
server name
configuring, 150
server name, determining, 290
server port
configuring, 177
server port numbers, changing, 379
server properties, viewing, 9
servers
determining name, 290
logging in, 3
setting up
advanced filtering, 1145
setup tools, 365
adding menu options, 369
adding to device shortcut menu, 371
changing menu options, 370
changing option on device shortcut menu, 372
changing server address, 368
removing menu options, 370
removing option from device shortcut menu, 373
roles and access levels, 1299
sFlow
802.1X user, 1052
, 1043
sFlow monitoring
802.1X user, 1038
BGP Paths, 1053
configuration, 1037
displaying reports, 1038
Top IPV4-ICMP talkers, 1048, 1049
Top IPV4-TCP Talkers, 1045
Top IPV4-UDP talkers, 1047
Top MAC Talkers, 1042, 1053
Top VLAN Talkers, 1043
VAlid TCP Flags, 1052
SMIA Configuration Tool
launching, 395
SNMP credentials
adding and editing SNMP v3, 1155
SNMP Monitor
export report, 1019
report, 1014
requirements, 982

1697

SNMP trap forwarding
adding a trap filter, 1151
SNMP trap recipients
adding to switches, 1148
removing from switches, 1149
SNMP traps
description of, 1147
importing a new MIB, 1156
modifying the definitions of registered traps, 1159
registering, 1158
reverting a trap to its default, 1160
unregistering, 1159
SNMP v3, adding and editing credentials, 1155
software configuration, 155
software configuration properties
roles and access levels, 1299
software files
obtaining through the image repository, 807
software image management, 811
software images
automatically retrieving from devices, 812
deleting from the Management application, 813
manually importing, 811
reverting to previously-archived, 813
viewing, 811
spanning tree protocol
configuration, 834
configuring on a port VLAN, 835
deploying a configuration on a port VLAN, 837
special events handling, 1175, 1176
state change threshold, 677
status
backup, 132
host discovery, 102, 107
memory allocation, 169
status bar, 289
storage events
configuring, 139
storage properties, 1305
support mode
configuring, 178
SVI
managing IP addresses, 840
Switch authentication
configuring, 389
Sybase database fields, 1371
syslog forwarding, 1163
adding a destination, 1163
adding a filter, 1164
description, 478

1698

syslogs
adding a recipient, 1161
removing a recipient, 1162
system collectors
ediing, 996
editing, 996
system data collectors, 1006
duplicating, 1006

T
tab
Authentication (SMC), 380, 383, 385, 389, 390, 391
Services (SMC), 392
tab Ports (SMC), 379
tab Technical Support Information (SMC), 392
tab, Services (SMC), 376
table
features, user groups access levels, 1298–1299,
1300–??
privileges and application behavior, ??–1298
tables
config database fields, ??–1539
GigE port stats database fields, 1447–??
Meta SAN database fields, ??–1560
UI database fields, ??–1510
zoning 1 database fields, 1510–??
technical support data collection
roles and access levels, 1299
technical support information
copying to an external FTP server, 1227
deleting, 1228
emailing, 1227
immediate, 1222
technical support information collection
scheduling, 1219
technical support information, capturing, 392
technical support information, viewing, 1226
Telnet
launching session, 366
testing
FTP server, 176
third-party tools
adding, 365
adding menu option, 369
adding to device shortcut menu, 371
changing menu options, 370
changing option on device shortcut menu, 372
changing server address, 368

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

removing menu options, 370
removing option from device shortcut menu, 373
starting, 365
threshold
adding, 677
adding C3 discard frames, 677
adding state change, 684, 690
C3 Discard Frames, 675
Invalid CRCs, 676
Invalid words, 676
ISL protocol, 676
link reset, 676
state change, 677
threshold prioities, 674
thresholds, 674
assigning, 685
editing, 687
finding specific, 691
removing, 692
viewing, 691
viewing on a specific device, 691
thresholds table
removing thresholds, 693
tips, turning on and off, 142
tips, viewing, 142
tool tips, turning on and off, 142
tool tips, viewing, 142
toolbox, 284
tools
adding, 365
adding menu options, 369
adding to device shortcut menu, 371
changing menu options, 370
changing option on device shortcut menu, 372
changing server address, 368
removing menu options, 370
removing option from device shortcut menu, 373
Tools menu, 1268
tooltips
configuring, 140
topology, See also physical map
total user count, 290
troubleshooting
discovery, 102, 108

U
unified image management, 814
unified images

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

deleting from the Management application, 817
deploying to devices, 817
importing into the Management application, 815
viewing, 814
uninstalling a patch, 28
UNIX authentication
configuring, 391
unregistering an SNMP trap, 1159
un-zoned members
listing, 667
user
privileges, 1283
User Administrator, 1283
user ID, determining, 290
user interface, description, 1
user management
roles and access levels, 1299
user privileges
defined, 1283
RBAC, 1283
users
access levels, 1298
disconnecting, 9
filtering events for, 478
privileges, 1283
users, total, 290

V
VDX 2740 embedded switch, 431
View menu, 1261, 1262
view options, changing, 293
View window, toolbox, 284
viewing
call home status, 358
event logs, 1205
iSCSI properties, 1307
port properties, 1309
storage properties, 1305
technical support information, 1226
thresholds, 691
thresholds on a specific device, 691
zooming in, 293
zooming out, 294
virtual routing interface, managing IP addresses, 840
VLAN
adding or modifying dual-mode port, 829
adding properties, 831
adding tagged or untagged ports, 827

1699

assigning DCB ports, 830
deleting port VLAN from devices, 833
deploying configurations, 834
displaying, 822
displaying by products, 825
displaying in the global view, 823
modifying port, 833
VLAN management
in a VCS environment, 822
VLAN Manager
configuration requirements, 821
default VLAN, 819
definition of, 819
super-aggregated VLAN, 820
using to display by products, 825
views, 822
VLAN routing, 840
managing IP addresses on an SVI, 840
VLL Manager, 846, 869, 884
copy, 880
delete, 880
edit, 880, 895
VLL Monitor, 896
VM Manager
deleting, 457
discovery, 456
editing, 457
VM managers
deleting from discovery, 106
VMware vSphere Update Manager, using to update drivers
on ESXi hosts, 459
VPLS Manager
add, 888
copy, 894
delete, 895
view, 846, 884
VPLS Monitor, 897

W
Windows authentication
configuring, 390
Windows installation
ODBC driver installation, 20
WWN
searching by, 149

Z
1700

zone
adding to comnfiguration, 651
alias, 647
creating, 641
database size, 640
merging, 640
removing, 651
zone alias
creating, 647
deleting, 649
editing, 647
exporting, 649
zone alias, duplicating, 650
zone alias, removing objects, 648
zone alias, renaming, 649
zone configuration
activating, 652
adding zones, 651
creating, 650
deactivating, 653
deleting, 654
duplicating, 655
finding member in Zones list, 666
removing a zone, 651
removing zones, 651
renaming, 654
zone configuration comparison alerts
managing, 663
zone configuration member
finding in Zones list, 666
zone database
automatic checkout, undoing, 665
zone databases
comparing, 662
creating, 655
exporting, 660
importing, 661
merging, 658
refreshing, 657
rolling back changes, 661
saving to switch, 660
zone members
adding to zone, 642
creating in zone, 643
finding in Potential Members list, 666
finding in zones, 665
listing, 667
removing from zone, 643
replacing, 668
zone set
creating, 650

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

naming conventions, 639
zone set. See zone configuration
zones
deleting, 645
duplicating, 645
finding in zone configuration, 666
removing from zone configuration, 651
renaming, 644
zoning
configuration overview, 640
configuring, 640
invalid names, 639
naming conventions, 639
offline, 639
online, 638
overview, 637
zoning activation
roles and access levels, 1299
zoning administration, 661
zoning configuration
overview, 640
zoning offline
roles and access levels, 1299
zoning online
roles and access levels, 1299
zoning set edit limits, roles and access levels, 1299
zooming in, 293
zooming out, 294

Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual
53-1003056-01

1701
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Brocade Technical Publications
Create Date                     : 2014:02:07 10:56:19Z
Modify Date                     : 2014:02:07 14:30:28-08:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2014:02:07 14:30:28-08:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Brocade Network Advisor IP User Manual, 12.2.0
Creator                         : Brocade Technical Publications
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.8 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:66af45ad-39e2-405c-829c-bf670c382baa
Instance ID                     : uuid:7f620dbb-1d97-4883-8e92-bece1518e4c2
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 1753
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu